03138nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001000167245003600177264004300213264009600256264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505172000529520020802249542004102457546001602498588004002514650002602554650002402580650002302604710003902627856007402666OTLid0000004MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135100  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG17300aAccounting in the Finance World 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Why Is Financial Accounting Important? -- Chapter 2: What Should Decision Makers Know So That Good Decisions Can Be Made about an Organization? -- Chapter 3: In What Form Is Financial Information Actually Delivered to Decision Makers Such as Investors and Creditors? -- Chapter 4: How Does an Organization Accumulate and Organize the Information Necessary to Prepare Financial Statements? -- Chapter 5: Why Must Financial Information Be Adjusted Prior to the Production of Financial Statements? -- Chapter 6: Why Should Decision Makers Trust Financial Statements? -- Chapter 7: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Receivables? -- Chapter 8: How Does a Company Gather Information about Its Inventory? -- Chapter 9: Why Does a Company Need a Cost Flow Assumption in Reporting Inventory? -- Chapter 10: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Property and Equipment? -- Chapter 11: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Intangible Assets? -- Chapter 12: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Equity Investments? -- Chapter 13: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Current and Contingent Liabilities? -- Chapter 14: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Noncurrent Liabilities Such as Bonds? -- Chapter 15: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Other Noncurrent Liabilities? -- Chapter 16: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed about Shareholders' Equity? -- Chapter 17: In a Set of Financial Statements, What Information Is Conveyed by the Statement of Cash Flows?0 aThis book is intended for an undergraduate or MBA level Financial Accounting course. It covers the standard topics in a standard sequence, utilizing the Socratic method of asking and answering questions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/4zAccess online version02970nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100003000180245005200210264004300262264003800305264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002500465490002700490505017800517520162100695542003702316546001602353588004002369650002302409650002702432710003902459856007402498OTLid0000005MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780984417551  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aBeezer, Robert A.eauthor02aA First Course in Linear AlgebracRobert Beezer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTacoma, WAbRobert Beezerc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSystems of Linear Equations -- Vectors -- Matrices -- Vector Spaces -- Determinants -- Eigenvalues -- Linear Transformations -- Representations -- Preliminaries -- Reference0 aA First Course in Linear Algebra is an introductory textbook aimed at college-level sophomores and juniors. Typically students will have taken calculus, but it is not a prerequisite. The book begins with systems of linear equations, then covers matrix algebra, before taking up finite-dimensional vector spaces in full generality. The final chapter covers matrix representations of linear transformations, through diagonalization, change of basis and Jordan canonical form. Determinants and eigenvalues are covered along the way. A unique feature of this book is that chapters, sections and theorems are labeled rather than numbered. For example, the chapter on vectors is labeled "Chapter V" and the theorem that elementary matrices are nonsingular is labeled "Theorem EMN." Another feature of this book is that it is designed to integrate SAGE, an open source alternative to mathematics software such as Matlab and Maple. The author includes a 45-minute video tutorial on SAGE and teaching linear algebra. This textbook has been used in classes at: Centre for Excellence in Basic Sciences, Westmont College, University of Ottawa, Plymouth State University, University of Puget Sound, University of Notre Dame, Carleton University, Amherst College, Felician College, Southern Connecticut State University, Michigan Technological University, Mount Saint Mary College, University of Western Australia, Moorpark College, Pacific University, Colorado State University, Smith College, Wilbur Wright College, Central Washington U (Lynwood Center), St. Cloud State University, Miramar College, Loyola Marymount University.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/5zAccess online version03973nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002900164245003500193250001800228264004300246264004200289264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002500453490002700478505046700505520239400972542002503366546001603391588004003407650002703447710003903474856007403513OTLid0000007MnU20260406020336.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780989472128  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aHammack, Richardeauthor00aBook of ProofcRichard Hammack  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRichmond, VAbRichard Hammackc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Part I: Fundamentals -- Sets -- Logics -- Counting -- Part II: How to Prove Conditional Statements -- Direct Proof -- Contrapositive Proof -- Proof by Contradiction -- Part III: More on Proof -- Proving Non-Conditional Statements -- Proofs Involving Sets -- Disproof -- Mathematical Induction -- Part IV: Relations, Functions, and Cardinality -- Relations -- Functions -- Proofs in Calculus -- Cardinality of Sets -- Solutions -- Index0 aThis is a book about how to prove theorems. Until this point in your education, you may have regarded mathematics primarily as a computational discipline. You have learned to solve equations, compute derivatives and integrals, multiply matrices and find determinants; and you have seen how these things can answer practical questions about the real world. In this setting, your primary goal in using mathematics has been to compute answers. But there is another approach to mathematics that is more theoretical than computational. In this approach, the primary goal is to understand mathematical structures, to prove mathematical statements, and even to invent or discover new mathematical theorems and theories. The mathematical techniques and procedures that you have learned and used up until now have their origins in this theoretical side of mathematics. For example, in computing the area under a curve, you use the fundamental theorem of calculus. It is because this theorem is true that your answer is correct. However, in your calculus class you were probably far more concerned with how that theorem could be applied than in understanding why it is true. But how do we know it is true? How can we convince ourselves or others of its validity? Questions of this nature belong to the theoretical realm of mathematics. This book is an introduction to that realm. This book will initiate you into an esoteric world. You will learn and apply the methods of thought that mathematicians use to verify theorems,explore mathematical truth and create new mathematical theories. This will prepare you for advanced mathematics courses, for you will be better able to understand proofs, write your own proofs and think critically and inquisitively about mathematics. This text has been used in classes at: Virginia Commonwealth University, Lebanon Valley College, University of California - San Diego, Colorado State University, Westminster College, South Dakota State University, PTEK College - Brunei, Christian Brothers High School, University of Texas Pan American, Schola Europaea, James Madison University, Heriot-Watt University, Prince of Songkla University, Queen Mary University of London, University of Nevada - Reno, University of Georgia - Athens, Saint Peter's University, California State University,Bogaziçi University, Pennsylvania State University, University of Notre Dame1 fAttribution-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/7zAccess online version07849nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001000166245003900176264004300215264009600258264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505087000531520574301401542004107144546001607185588004007201650002407241650004407265650002907309710003907338856007407377OTLid0000008MnU20260406020657.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135056  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aP94.7 4aP91.300aCommunication for Business Success 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Effective Business Communication -- Chapter 2: Delivering Your Message -- Chapter 3: Understanding Your Audience -- Chapter 4: Effective Business Writing -- Chapter 5: Writing Preparation -- Chapter 6: Writing -- Chapter 7: Revising and Presenting Your Writing -- Chapter 8: Feedback in the Writing Process -- Chapter 9: Business Writing in Action -- Chapter 10: Developing Business Presentations -- Chapter 11: Nonverbal Delivery -- Chapter 12: Organization and Outlines -- Chapter 13: Presentations to Inform -- Chapter 14: Presentations to Persuade -- Chapter 15: Business Presentations in Action -- Chapter 16: Intrapersonal and Interpersonal Business Communication -- Chapter 17: Negative News and Crisis Communication -- Chapter 18: Intercultural and International Business Communication -- Chapter 19: Group Communication, Teamwork, and Leadership0 aBusiness Communication for Success (BCS) provides a comprehensive, integrated approach to the study and application of written and oral business communication to serve both student and professor. This series features chapters with the following elements: Learning Objectives Introductory Exercises Clear expectations, relevant background, and important theories Practical, real-world examples Key Takeaways or quick internal summaries Key terms that are easily identified In-chapter assignments Postchapter assessments linked to objectives and skills acquisition Each chapter is self-contained, allowing for mix-and-match flexibility and custom or course-specific design. Each chapter focuses on clear objectives and skill demonstrations that can be easily linked to your syllabus and state or federal requirements. Supported by internal and external assessments, each chapter features time-saving and learning-enhancement support for instructors and students. BCS is designed to help students identify important information, reinforce for retention, and demonstrate mastery with a clear outcome product. The text has three content categories: Foundations Process and products Contexts The first three chapters form the core foundation for the study of oral and written business communication. The next sequence of chapters focus on the process of writing, then oral performance with an emphasis on results. The final sequence focuses on contexts where business communication occurs, from interpersonal to intercultural, from groups to leadership. In each of the process and product chapter sequences, the chapters follow a natural flow, from prewriting to revision, from preparation for a presentation to performance. Each sequence comes together in a concluding chapter that focuses on action—where we apply the skills and techniques of written or oral communication in business, from writing a letter to presenting a sales speech. These performances not only serve to reinforce real-world applications but also may serve as course assessments. This text has been used in classes at: Ohio University, Miami University – Oxford, Kent State University – Salem Campus, Cuyahoga Community College – West, University of Toledo, Cuyahoga Community College – District, Northern Arizona University, Gateway Community College, University of Arizona, Arizona Western College, Boise State University,Western Governors University, Doane College, Mcpherson College, University of Nebraska Med Center, Suny Fredonia, State University of New York Institute of Technology at Utica/Rome, Trinidad State Junior College, University of Delaware, Brenau University, Brewton-Parker College, Loras College, Kapiolani Community College, Muscatine Community College, Greenville College, University of Illinois – Chicago, Millikin University, Rockland Community College, Cornell University, National-Louis University – Lisle, St. Gregory's University, University of Southern Indiana, Missouri State University – W Plains, Bucks County Community College – Newton, Clarion University of Pennsylvania, Pulaski Technical College, Temple University, Dixie State College of Utah, Averett University, Virginia Polytech Institute, Fond Du Lac Tribal Community College, Lipscomb University, Edgewood College, University of Wisconsin – Stout, Wisconsin Lutheran College, Virginia State University, North Georgia Technical College – Blairsville, Paradise Valley Community College, Fordham University – Lincoln Center, New England College of Business/Finance, Eastern New Mexico University, University of Alabama, Albertus Magnus College, Pepperdine University, Fullerton College, Santa Ana College, Miracosta College – Oceanside, San Jose State University, De Anza College, University of The Southwest, Florida Institute of Technology, Forida State University, Dean College, California State University, University of Massachusetts, Suffolk University, Stevenson University, Worcester State College, University of Maryland, Clover Park Technical College, Minnesota State University – Moorhead, College of St. Scholastica, Ferris State University, Concordia University, Southern New Hampshire University, Lower Columbia College, University of North Carolina – Greensboro, Rockingham Community College, Stanly Community College, Wayland Baptist University, Bunker Hill Community College, Salve Regina University, University of The Incarnate Word, St. Mary's University, University of Rhode Island, Texarkana College, Renton Technical College, Tarleton State University, Wayland Baptist University – Plainview, University of Houston, Stephen F. Austin State University, Bates Technical College, Chabot College, Bakersfield College, Azusa Pacific University, University of Houston – Downtown, California Southern University, Miracosta College, American Public University, American Public University System, Huntington Junior College, Flat World Knowledge University, Jackson Senior High School, Holmes High School, Dlielc, Clintondale High School, American University in Kosovo in Conjunction with Rochester Institute of Technology, Southeast Lauderdale High School, Benedict Business Hotel Management School, University of the People, Kwame Nkrumah University of Science and Technology, New Brunswick College of Craft and Design, New England School of English, Comsats Institute of Information Technology, Wayland Baptist University – Anchorage, Volcano Vista High School, Wayland Baptist University – San Antonio, Morrill High School, North Island College – B Campus, Seneca College, APOU, University of North Carolina – Greensboro, Southern New Hampshire University, University of Maryland University College, Harrisburg High School1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aOrganizational CommunicationvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/8zAccess online version03182nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245002000158264004300178264009600221264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505054000494520155201034542004102586546001602627588004002643650003602683710003902719856007402758OTLid0000009MnU20260406020728.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135063  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.600aCollege Success 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: You and Your College Experience -- Chapter 2: Staying Motivated, Organized, and On Track -- Chapter 3: Thinking about Thought -- Chapter 4: Listening, Taking Notes, and Remembering -- Chapter 5: Reading to Learn -- Chapter 6: Preparing for and Taking Tests -- Chapter 7: Interacting with Instructors and Classes -- Chapter 8: Writing for Classes -- Chapter 9: The Social World of College -- Chapter 10: Taking Control of Your Health -- Chapter 11: Taking Control of Your Finances -- Chapter 12: Taking Control of Your Future0 aOur primary goal in writing College Success is to help you succeed in college. According to Department of Education data, 30 percent of college freshmen leave school in their first year and as many as 50 percent never graduate. College Success is designed to help change that. College Success has a student-friendly format arranged to help you develop the essential skills and provide the information you need to succeed in college. This is not a textbook full of theory and extensive detail that merely discusses student success; rather, this is a how-to manual for succeeding in college. The book provides realistic, practical guidance ranging from study skills to personal health, from test taking to managing time and money. Furthermore, College Success is accessible—information is presented concisely and as simply as possible. College Success has the following features to help you achieve your goals: Each chapter asks you to evaluate yourself because success starts with recognizing your strengths and weaknesses, your hopes and desires, and your own personal, individual realities. You'll develop your own goals based on these self-assessments, determining what success in college really means for you as an individual. Throughout the book, you will find numerous interactive activities created to help you improve your skills. To assist you with this, the material is presented in easily digestible “chunks” of information so you can begin applying it immediately in your own life—and get the most out of your college education.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/9zAccess online version02193nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001600142050001100158050000800169100002800177245002900205250001800234264004300252264005200295264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002500469490002700494505064900521520035001170542004101520546001601561588004101577650002401618650002701642710003901669856007501708OTLid0000010MnU20260406020212.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1991    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a0961408820  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStrang, Gilberteauthor00aCalculuscGilbert Strang  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWellesley, MAbWellesley-Cambridge Pressc2023. 4c©1991.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 0: Highlights of Calculus -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Calculus -- Chapter 2: Derivatives -- Chapter 3: Applications of the Derivative -- Chapter 4: Derivatives by the Chain Rule -- Chapter 5: Integrals -- Chapter 6: Exponentials and Logarithms -- Chapter 7: Techniques of Integration -- Chapter 8: Applications of the Integral -- Chapter 9: Polar Coordinates and Complex Numbers -- Chapter 10: Infinite Series -- Chapter 11: Vectors and Matrices -- Chapter 12: Motion along a Curve -- Chapter 13: Partial Derivatives -- Chapter 14: Multiple Integrals -- Chapter 15: Vector Calculus -- Chapter 16: Mathematics after Calculus0 aPublished in 1991 by Wellesley-Cambridge Press, the book is a useful resource for educators and self-learners alike. It is well organized, covers single variable and multivariable calculus in depth, and is rich with applications. Prof. Strang has also developed a related series of videos, Highlights of Calculus, on the basic ideas of calculus.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/10zAccess online version05322nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156050001400164100003000178245004700208264004300255264006400298264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505048400539520357901023542001604602546001604618588004004634650003504674650002704709650002604736700002404762710003904786856007504825OTLid0000011MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780978745073  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aIllowsky, Barbaraeauthor00aCollaborative StatisticscBarbara Illowsky 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Sampling and Data -- 2 Descriptive Statistics -- 3 Probability Topics -- 4 Discrete Random Variables -- 5 Continuous Random Variables -- 6 The Normal Distribution -- 7 The Central Limit Theorem -- 8 Confidence Intervals -- 9 Hypothesis Testing: Single Mean and Single Proportion -- 10 Hypothesis Testing: Two Means, Paired Data, Two Proportions -- 11 The Chi-Square Distribution -- 12 Linear Regression and Correlation -- 13 F Distribution and ANOVA -- 14 Appendix -- 15 Tables0 aCollaborative Statistics was written by Barbara Illowsky and Susan Dean, faculty members at De Anza Collegein Cupertino, California. The textbook was developed over several years and has been used in regularand honors-level classroom settings and in distance learning classes. Courses using this textbook have beenarticulated by the University of California for transfer of credit. The textbook contains full materials forcourse offerings, including expository text, examples, labs, homework, and projects. A Teacher's Guide iscurrently available in print form and on the Connexions site at and supplemental course materials including additional problem sets and video lectures are available. The on-line text for each of these collections collections willmeet the Section 508 standards for accessibility. An on-line course based on the textbook was also developed by Illowsky and Dean. It has won an awardas the best on-line California community college course. The on-line course will be available at a later dateas a collection in Connexions, and each lesson in the on-line course will be linked to the on-line textbookchapter. The on-line course will include, in addition to expository text and examples, videos of courselectures in captioned and non-captioned format. The original preface to the book as written by professors Illowsky and Dean, now follows: This book is intended for introductory statistics courses being taken by students at two– and four–yearcolleges who are majoring in fields other than math or engineering. Intermediate algebra is the only prerequisite.The book focuses on applications of statistical knowledge rather than the theory behind it. Thetext is named Collaborative Statistics because students learn best by doing. In fact, they learn best byworking in small groups. The old saying “two heads are better than one” truly applies here. Our emphasis in this text is on four main concepts: thinking statistically incorporating technology working collaboratively writing thoughtfully These concepts are integral to our course. Students learn the best by actively participating, not by justwatching and listening. Teaching should be highly interactive. Students need to be thoroughly engagedin the learning process in order to make sense of statistical concepts. Collaborative Statistics providestechniques for students to write across the curriculum, to collaborate with their peers, to think statistically,and to incorporate technology. This book takes students step by step. The text is interactive. Therefore, students can immediately applywhat they read. Once students have completed the process of problem solving, they can tackle interestingand challenging problems relevant to today's world. The problems require the students to apply theirnewly found skills. In addition, technology (TI-83 graphing calculators are highlighted) is incorporatedthroughout the text and the problems, as well as in the special group activities and projects. The book alsocontains labs that use real data and practices that lead students step by step through the problem solvingprocess. At De Anza, along with hundreds of other colleges across the country, the college audience involves alarge number of ESL students as well as students from many disciplines. The ESL students, as well asthe non-ESL students, have been especially appreciative of this text. They find it extremely readable andunderstandable. Collaborative Statistics has been used in classes that range from 20 to 120 students, and inregular, honor, and distance learning classes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aDean, Susaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/11zAccess online version02274nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002400162245003200186264004300218264008800261264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002500471490002700496505029300523520077400816542004101590546001601631588004001647650002301687650002701710700002501737710003901762856007501801OTLid0000012MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStitz, Carleauthor00aCollege AlgebracCarl Stitz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bStitz Zeager Open Source Mathematicsc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Relations and Functions -- 2 Linear and Quadratic Functions -- 3 Polynomial Functions -- 4 Rational Functions -- 5 Further Topics in Functions -- 6 Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- 7 Hooked on Conics -- 8 Systems of Equations and Matrices -- 9 Sequences and the Binomial Theorem0 aCollege Algebra is an introductory text for a college algebra survey course. The material is presented at a level intended to prepare students for Calculus while also giving them relevant mathematical skills that can be used in other classes. The authors describe their approach as "Functions First," believing introducing functions first will help students understand new concepts more completely. Each section includes homework exercises, and the answers to most computational questions are included in the text (discussion questions are open-ended). Graphing calculators are used sparingly and only as a tool to enhance the Mathematics, not to replace it. The authors also offer a Precalculus version of this text, which has two extra chapters covering Trigonometry.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aZeager, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/12zAccess online version04716nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002500180245003600205264004300241264006900284264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505046400530520306300994542004104057546001604098588004004114650002304154650002704177710003904204856007504243OTLid0000013MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453300923  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aRedden, Johneauthor00aElementary AlgebracJohn Redden 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Real Numbers and Their Operations -- Chapter 2: Linear Equations and Inequalities -- Chapter 3: Graphing Lines -- Chapter 4: Solving Linear Systems -- Chapter 5: Polynomials and Their Operations -- Chapter 6: Factoring and Solving by Factoring -- Chapter 7: Rational Expressions and Equations -- Chapter 8: Radical Expressions and Equations -- Chapter 9: Solving Quadratic Equations and Graphing Parabolas -- Chapter 10: Appendix: Geometric Figures0 aIt is essential to lay a solid foundation in mathematics if a student is to be competitive in today's global market. The importance of algebra, in particular, cannot be overstated, as it is the basis of all mathematical modeling used in applications found in all disciplines. Traditionally, the study of algebra is separated into a two parts, elementary algebra and intermediate algebra. This textbook, Elementary Algebra, is the first part, written in a clear and concise manner, making no assumption of prior algebra experience. It carefully guides students from the basics to the more advanced techniques required to be successful in the next course. This text is, by far, the best elementary algebra textbook offered under a Creative Commons license. It is written in such a way as to maintain maximum flexibility and usability. A modular format was carefully integrated into the design. For example, certain topics, like functions, can be covered or omitted without compromising the overall flow of the text. An introduction of square roots in Chapter 1 is another example that allows for instructors wishing to include the quadratic formula early to do so. Topics such as these are carefully included to enhance the flexibility throughout. This textbook will effectively enable traditional or nontraditional approaches to elementary algebra. This, in addition to robust and diverse exercise sets, provides the base for an excellent individualized textbook instructors can use free of needless edition changes and excessive costs! A few other differences are highlighted below: Equivalent mathematical notation using standard text found on a keyboard A variety of applications and word problems included in most exercise sets Clearly enumerated steps found in context within carefully chosen examples Alternative methods and notation, modularly integrated, where appropriate Video examples available, in context, within the online version of the textbook Robust and diverse exercise sets with discussion board questions Key words and key takeaways summarizing each section This text employs an early-and-often approach to real-world applications, laying the foundation for students to translate problems described in words into mathematical equations. It also clearly lays out the steps required to build the skills needed to solve these equations and interpret the results. With robust and diverse exercise sets, students have the opportunity to solve plenty of practice problems. In addition to embedded video examples and other online learning resources, the importance of practice with pencil and paper is stressed. This text respects the traditional approaches to algebra pedagogy while enhancing it with the technology available today. In addition, textual notation is introduced as a means to communicate solutions electronically throughout the text. While it is important to obtain the skills to solve problems correctly, it is just as important to communicate those solutions with others effectively in the modern era of instant communications.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/13zAccess online version01962nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245006800167250001600235264004300251264004900294264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505023900520520043400759542004101193546001601234588004101250650002401291650002501315700002901340700002801369700002901397710003901426856007501465OTLid0000014MnU20260406020408.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780639707808  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF541500aeMarketingbThe Essential Guide to Marketing in a Digital World  a7th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCape Town, South AfricabRed & Yellowc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFirst words -- Acknowledgements -- Contributors -- Reviews -- Part One: Planning -- Part Two: Claiming -- Part Three: Creating -- Part Four: Uniting -- Part Five: Advertising -- Part Six: Analysing -- Anticipating -- Index -- Glossary0 aSince our 10th Anniversary Edition of eMarketing: The Essential Guide to Marketing in a Digital World, we have witnessed a global wave of change that has had an undeniable impact on how we live, connect, and communicate worldwide. There is no doubt that the COVID-19 pandemic has, and will continue to have, a lasting effect on human reality. With this in mind, we are incredibly proud to present the 7th Edition of our textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aSolomons, Dionneeauthor1 aKliphuis, Taniaeauthor1 aWadley, Michelleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/14zAccess online version02847nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245002300167264004300190264009600233264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002800451490002700479505082400506520088201330542004102212546001602253588004002269650002402309650002602333710003902359856007502398OTLid0000015MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135094  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aExploring Business 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Foundations of Business -- Chapter 2: Business Ethics and Social Responsibility -- Chapter 3: Business in a Global Environment -- Chapter 4: Selecting a Form of Business Ownership -- Chapter 5: The Challenges of Starting a Business -- Chapter 6: Managing for Business Success -- Chapter 7: Recruiting, Motivating, and Keeping Quality Employees -- Chapter 8: Teamwork and Communications -- Chapter 9: Marketing: Providing Value to Customers -- Chapter 10: Product Design and Development -- Chapter 11: Operations Management in Manufacturing and Service Industries -- Chapter 12: The Role of Accounting in Business -- Chapter 13: Managing Financial Resources -- Chapter 14: Personal Finances -- Chapter 15: Managing Information and Technology -- Chapter 16: The Legal and Regulatory Environment of Business0 aThe author's goals in writing Exploring Business Version 2.0 was simple: introduce students to business in an exciting way. Exploring Business is adapted from a work produced by a publisher who has requested that they and the original author not receive attribution. This adapted edition is produced by the University of Minnesota Libraries Publishing through the eLearning Support Initiative. Though the publisher has requested that they and the original author not receive attribution, this adapted edition reproduces all original text and sections of the book, except for publisher and author name attribution. This textbook has been used in classes at: College of Alameda, Columbia Basin College, Flagler College, Johnson County Community College, Pasadena City College, Penn State University, Renton Technical College, San Diego Mesa College, Sierra College, Yuba College.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/15zAccess online version04194nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245006900154264004300223264009600266264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505103500539520202701574542004103601546001603642588004003658650003203698710003903730856007503769OTLid0000016MnU20260406020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135124  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aInformation Systems - A Manager's Guide to Harnessing Technology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Setting the Stage: Technology and the Modern Enterprise -- Chapter 2: Strategy and Technology: Concepts and Frameworks for Understanding What Separates Winners from Losers -- Chapter 3: Zara: Fast Fashion from Savvy Systems -- Chapter 4: Netflix: The Making of an E-commerce Giant and the Uncertain Future of Atoms to Bits -- Chapter 5: Moore's Law: Fast, Cheap Computing and What It Means for the Manager -- Chapter 6: Understanding Network Effects -- Chapter 7: Peer Production, Social Media, and Web 2.0 -- Chapter 8: Facebook: Building a Business from the Social Graph -- Chapter 9: Understanding Software: A Primer for Managers -- Chapter 10: Software in Flux: Partly Cloudy and Sometimes Free -- Chapter 11: The Data Asset: Databases, Business Intelligence, and Competitive Advantage -- Chapter 12: A Manager's Guide to the Internet and Telecommunications -- Chapter 13: Information Security: Barbarians at the Gateway (and Just About Everywhere Else) -- Chapter 14: Google: Search, Online Advertising, and Beyond0 aInformation Systems: A Manager's Guide to Harnessing Technology is intended for use in undergraduate and/or graduate courses in Management Information Systems and Information Technology. The teaching approach in Information Systems: A Manager's Guide to Harnessing Technology can change this. The text offers a proven approach that has garnered student praise, increased IS enrollment, and engaged students to think deeper and more practically about the space where business and technology meet. Every topic is related to specific business examples, so students gain an immediate appreciation of its importance. Rather than lead with technical topics, the book starts with strategic thinking, focusing on big-picture issues that have confounded experts but will engage students. And while chapters introduce concepts, cases on approachable, exciting firms across industries further challenge students to apply what they've learned, asking questions like: Why was Netflix able to repel Blockbuster and WalMart? How did Harrah's Casino's become twice as profitable as comparably-sized Caesar's, enabling the former to acquire the latter? How does Spain's fashion giant Zara, a firm that shuns the sort of offshore manufacturing used by every other popular clothing chain, offer cheap fashions that fly off the shelves, all while achieving growth rates and profit margins that put Gap to shame? Why do technology markets often evolve into winner-take-all or winner take-most scenarios? And how can managers compete when these dynamics are present? Why is Google more profitable than Disney? How much is Facebook really worth? The teaching approach in this text encourages students to think deeper and more practically about the space where business and technology meet. Every topic is related to specific business examples, so students gain an immediate appreciation of its importance. Rather than starting with technical topics, the book starts with strategic thinking, focusing on big-picture issues that interest students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/16zAccess online version03953nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002900166245006200195264004300257264006900300264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002800491490002700519505067800546520208401224542004103308546001603349588004103365650002403406650002303430710003903453856007503492OTLid0000018MnU20260406020214.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936126460  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG1731 aSuranovic, Steveeauthor00aInternational FinancebTheory and PolicycSteve Suranovic 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introductory Finance Issues: Current Patterns, Past History, and International Institutions -- Chapter 2: National Income and the Balance of Payments Accounts -- Chapter 3: The Whole Truth about Trade Imbalances -- Chapter 4: Foreign Exchange Markets and Rates of Return -- Chapter 5: Interest Rate Parity -- Chapter 6: Purchasing Power Parity -- Chapter 7: Interest Rate Determination -- Chapter 8: National Output Determination -- Chapter 9: The AA-DD Model -- Chapter 10: Policy Effects with Floating Exchange Rates -- Chapter 11: Fixed Exchange Rates -- Chapter 12: Policy Effects with Fixed Exchange Rates -- Chapter 13: Fixed versus Floating Exchange Rates0 aInternational Finance Theory and Policy is built on Steve Suranovic's belief that to understand the international economy, students need to learn how economic models are applied to real world problems. It is true what they say, that ”economists do it with models.“ That's because economic models provide insights about the world that are simply not obtainable solely by discussion of the issues. International Finance Theory and Policy develops a unified model of the international macroeconomy. The text provides detailed descriptions of major macroeconomic variables, covers the interest rate parity and purchasing power parity theories of exchange rate determination, takes an exhaustive look at the pros and cons of trade imbalances and presents the well-known AA-DD model to explore the effects of fiscal and monetary policy under both fixed and flexible exchange rates. The models are developed, not by employing advanced mathematics, but rather by walking students through a detailed description of how a model's assumptions influence its conclusions. But more importantly, each model and theory is connected to real world policy issues. The Finance Text has the following unique features: o Begins with an historical overview of the international macroeconomy to provide context for the theory. o Concludes with a detailed discussion of the pros and cons of fixed and floating exchange rate systems. o Provides an extensive look at the issue of trade imbalances. Readers learn techniques to evaluate whether a country's trade deficit (or surplus) is dangerous, beneficial, or benign. o Explains how purchasing power parity is used to make cross country income comparisons. o Offers clear detailed explanations of the AA-DD model. o Applies the AA-DD model to understand the effects of monetary and fiscal policy on GDP, the exchange rate, and the trade balance. International Finance Theory and Policy by Steve Suranovic is intended for a one-semester course in International Finance. After March 2010, you can check out the entire book online or request a desk copy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/18zAccess online version04277nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002900157245006000186264004300246264006900289264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505069900535520244401234542004103678546001603719588004103735650002503776710003903801856007503840OTLid0000019MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936126446  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aSuranovic, Steveeauthor00aInternational TradebTheory and PolicycSteve Suranovic 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introductory Trade Issues: History, Institutions, and Legal Framework -- Chapter 2: The Ricardian Theory of Comparative Advantage -- Chapter 3: The Pure Exchange Model of Trade -- Chapter 4: Factor Mobility and Income Redistribution -- Chapter 5: The Heckscher-Ohlin (Factor Proportions) Model -- Chapter 6: Economies of Scale and International Trade -- Chapter 7: Trade Policy Effects with Perfectly Competitive Markets -- Chapter 8: Domestic Policies and International Trade -- Chapter 9: Trade Policies with Market Imperfections and Distortions -- Chapter 10: Political Economy and International Trade -- Chapter 11: Evaluating the Controversy between Free Trade and Protectionism0 aInternational Trade: Theory and Policy is built on Steve Suranovic's belief that to understand the international economy, students need to learn how economic models are applied to real world problems. It is true what they say, that ”economists do it with models.“ That's because economic models provide insights about the world that are simply not obtainable solely by discussion of the issues. International Trade: Theory and Policy presents a variety of international trade models including the Ricardian model, the Heckscher-Ohlin model, and the monopolistic competition model. It includes trade policy analysis in both perfectly competitive and imperfectly competitive markets. The text also addresses current issues such as free trade area formation and administered protection policies. The models are developed, not by employing advanced mathematics, but rather by walking students through a detailed description of how a model's assumptions influence its conclusions. But more importantly, each model and theory is connected to real world policy issues. The main purpose of the text is to provide a thorough grounding in the arguments concerning the age-old debate about free trade versus protectionism. This text has the following unique features: The text begins with an historical overview of trade policy issues to provide context for the theory. The text concludes with a detailed economic argument supporting free trade.The welfare analysis in the Ricardian, Heckscher-Ohlin and specific factors models emphasize the redistributive effects of free trade by calculating changes in real incomes.The trade policy chapter provides a comprehensive look at many more trade policies than are found in a printed textbook. A chapter about domestic policies contains an evaluation of domestic taxes and subsidies that are often ignored in traditional trade textbooks but are increasingly important as large countries complain more about each other's domestic agriculture policies and labor and environmental policies. The text uses the theory of the second-best to explain why protection can improve national welfare. This well-known theoretical result is rarely presented as methodically and consistently as it is in this text. International Trade: Theory and Policy by Steve Suranovic is intended for a one-semester course in International Trade. After April 2010, you can check out the entire book online or request a desk copy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/19zAccess online version02221nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245005800166264004300224264001200267300002200279336002600301337002600327338003600353341002800389490002700417505052000444520067700964542004101641546001601682588004101698650003001739710003901769856007501808OTLid0000020MnU20260406020234.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aStewart, Robert H.eauthor00aIntroduction to Physical OceanographycRobert Stewart 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 A Voyage of Discovery -- 2 The Historical Setting -- 3 The Physical Setting -- 4 Atmospheric Influences -- 5 The Oceanic Heat Budget -- 6 Temperature, Salinity, and Density -- 7 The Equations of Motion -- 8 Equations of Motion With Viscosity -- 9 Response of the Upper Ocean to Winds -- 10 Geostrophic Currents -- 11 Wind Driven Ocean Circulation -- 12 Vorticity in the Ocean -- 13 Deep Circulation in the Ocean -- 14 Equatorial Processes -- 15 Numerical Models -- 16 Ocean Waves -- 17 Coastal Processes and Tides0 aThis textbook covers physical-oceanographic processes, theories, data, and measurements, targeted at upper-division undergraduates and graduate students in oceanography, meteorology, and ocean engineering. In addition to the classical topics, the author includes discussions of heat fluxes, the role of the ocean in climate, the deep circulation, equatorial processes including El Nino, data bases used by oceanographers, the role of satellites and data from space, ship-based measurements, and the importance of vorticity in understanding oceanic flows. Students should have studied differential equations and introductory college physics, although math is de-emphasized.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/20zAccess online version03826nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050000800148100003400156245005100190250001600241264004300257264008100300264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002500503490002700528505034200555520216700897542003703064546001603101588004003117650003503157650004203192650002703234700002903261710003903290856007503329OTLid0000021MnU20260406020653.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2006    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aTA145 4aQA11 aGrinstead, Charles M.eauthor00aIntroduction to ProbabilitycCharles Grinstead  a2nd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAmerican Mathematical Societyc[2006] 4c©2006.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Discrete Probability Distributions -- 2 Continuous Probability Densities -- 3 Combinatorics -- 4 Conditional Probability -- 5 Distributions and Densities -- 6 Expected Value and Variance -- 7 Sums of Random Variables -- 8 Law of Large Numbers -- 9 Central Limit Theorem -- 10 Generating Functions -- 11 Markov Chains -- 12 Random Walks0 aProbability theory began in seventeenth century France when the two great French mathematicians, Blaise Pascal and Pierre de Fermat, corresponded over two problems from games of chance. Problems like those Pascal and Fermat solved continuedto influence such early researchers as Huygens, Bernoulli, and DeMoivre in establishing a mathematical theory of probability. Today, probability theory is a wellestablished branch of mathematics that finds applications in every area of scholarlyactivity from music to physics, and in daily experience from weather prediction topredicting the risks of new medical treatments. This text is designed for an introductory probability course taken by sophomores,juniors, and seniors in mathematics, the physical and social sciences, engineering,and computer science. It presents a thorough treatment of probability ideas andtechniques necessary for a form understanding of the subject. The text can be usedin a variety of course lengths, levels, and areas of emphasis. For use in a standard one-term course, in which both discrete and continuousprobability is covered, students should have taken as a prerequisite two terms ofcalculus, including an introduction to multiple integrals. In order to cover Chapter 11, which contains material on Markov chains, some knowledge of matrix theoryis necessary. The text can also be used in a discrete probability course. The material has beenorganized in such a way that the discrete and continuous probability discussions arepresented in a separate, but parallel, manner. This organization dispels an overlyrigorous or formal view of probability and o?ers some strong pedagogical valuein that the discrete discussions can sometimes serve to motivate the more abstractcontinuous probability discussions. For use in a discrete probability course, studentsshould have taken one term of calculus as a prerequisite. Very little computing background is assumed or necessary in order to obtain fullbenefits from the use of the computing material and examples in the text. All ofthe programs that are used in the text have been written in each of the languagesTrueBASIC, Maple, and Mathematica.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aSnell, J. Laurieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/21zAccess online version04916nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002700166245003900193264004300232264006900275264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505059900518520315301117542004104270546001604311588004104327650002504368650002304393710003904416856007504455OTLid0000022MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453311073  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aBall, David W.eauthor00aIntroductory ChemistrycDavid Ball 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Chemistry? -- Chapter 2: Measurements -- Chapter 3: Atoms, Molecules, and Ions -- Chapter 4: Chemical Reactions and Equations -- Chapter 5: Stoichiometry and the Mole -- Chapter 6: Gases -- Chapter 7: Energy and Chemistry -- Chapter 8: Electronic Structure -- Chapter 9: Chemical Bonds -- Chapter 10: Solids and Liquids -- Chapter 11: Solutions -- Chapter 12: Acids and Bases -- Chapter 13: Chemical Equilibrium -- Chapter 14: Oxidation and Reduction -- Chapter 15: Nuclear Chemistry -- Chapter 16: Organic Chemistry -- Chapter 17: Appendix: Periodic Table of the Elements --0 aDavid W. Ball of Cleveland State University brings his new survey of general chemistry text, Introductory Chemistry, to the market with a fresh theme that will be sure to hold student interest: "Chemistry is Everywhere." Introductory Chemistry is intended for a one-semester introductory or preparatory chemistry course. Throughout the chapters, David presents two features that reinforce the theme of the textbook, that chemistry is everywhere. The first is the boxed feature titled, appropriately, ”Chemistry is Everywhere“. This feature takes a topic of the chapter and demonstrates how this topic shows up in everyday life. In the introductory chapter, ”Chemistry is Everywhere“ focuses on the personal hygiene products that students may use every morning: toothpaste, soap, shampoo among others. These products are chemicals, aren't they? This book explores some of the chemical reactions like the ones that give students clean and healthy teeth, and shiny hair. This feature makes it clear to students that chemistry is, indeed, everywhere, and it will promote student retention in what is sometimes considered an intimidating course. The second boxed feature focuses on chemistry that students likely indulge in every day: eating and drinking. In the ”Food and Drink App“, David discusses how the chemistry of the chapter applies to things that students eat and drink every day. Carbonated beverages depend on the behavior of gases, foods contain acids and bases, and everyone actually eats certain rocks. (Yikes!) Cooking, eating, drinking, metabolism — all chemical processes students are involved with all the time. These features allow students to see the things we interact with every day in a new light — as chemistry. Just like many of the one-semester chemistry books you may be used to, each section in David Ball's starts with one or more Learning Objectives, which list the main points of the section. Each section ends with Key Takeaways, which are reviews of the main points of the section. Each chapter is full of examples to illustrate the key points of the materials, and each example is followed with a similar ”Test Yourself“ exercise to see if the student understands the concept. Each section ends with its own set of paired exercises to practice the material from that section, and each chapter ends with a section of ”Additional Exercises“ that are more challenging or require multiple steps or skills to answer. David took the time to treat mathematical problems in Introductory Chemistry one of two ways, either as a conversion-factor problem or as a formula problem. David believes having two basic mathematical approaches (converting and formulas) allows the text to focus on the logic of the approach and not tricks or shortcuts; which speaks to the final point about Introductory Chemistry. You'll notice that David took no shortcuts with the material in this text, his inviting writing style, concise approach, consistent presentation, and interesting pedagogy have given it some of the best peer reviews we've seen at Flat World. So, order a desk copy or dive in now to see for yourself.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/22zAccess online version04514nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001100166100002900177245006800206264004300274264006900317264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002800508490002700536505113100563520204101694542004103735546001603776588004103792650002403833650002503857650002903882700003103911700002403942710003903966856007504005OTLid0000023MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780982043028  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aP91.3 4aHF54151 aSolomon, Michaeleauthor00aLaunch! Advertising and Promotion in Real TimecMichael Solomon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Meet SS+K: A Real Agency Pitches a Real Client -- Chapter 2: A User's Manual: Advertising, Promotion, and Marketing Essentials -- Chapter 3: Advertising and Society -- Chapter 4: Consumers and the Communications Process: SS+K Gets to Know Its Consumers -- Chapter 5: Know Your Audience: SS+K Learns All About msnbc.com, Inside and Out -- Chapter 6: Segment, Target, and Position Your Audience: SS+K Identifies the Most Valuable News Consumer -- Chapter 7: Decide What You Can Afford to Say: msnbc.com Sets the Budget -- Chapter 8: Create a Strategy: SS+K Puts Its Research to Use as the Agency Creates the Brief -- Chapter 9: Choose Your Communication Weapons: SS+K Decides Upon a Creative Strategy and Media Tactics -- Chapter 10: Plan and Buy Media: SS+K Chooses the Right Media for the Client's New Branding Message -- Chapter 11: Execute on All Platforms: SS+K Goes into Production Overdrive -- Chapter 12: Make the Message Sell: SS+K Ensures that All Components Tell the Brand Story -- Chapter 13: Launch! msnbc.com's First-Ever Branding Campaign -- Chapter 14: ROI: msnbc.com Decides if the Campaign Worked --0 aLaunch! Advertising and Promotion is written for advertising and promotion courses taught to students in the business school and journalism & mass communication students. This textbook is the first of its kind to teach advertising concepts by reverse engineering a real advertising campaign from beginning to end. In April 2007, SS+K, an innovative New York City communications agency, launched the first ever branding campaign for msnbc.com with the tag "A Fuller Spectrum of News." Launch! follows that campaign from initial agency pitch through roll-out of print and media assets to post-campaign analysis. Throughout, it exposes readers to the theory and concepts of advertising and promotion, and the personalities and decisions that drove this campaign. The book takes a rare look ”behind the curtain“ — even letting you see some of the paths not chosen by the agency and client. Students get a realistic sense of how theory plays out in practice, and get a flavor for the exciting field of advertising and promotion. And, they consistently learn the perspectives of both the advertising agency (where many journalism and communications students will work) and the client (where many marketing majors will work). This is a unique book, with a unique perspective, by a unique author team, and you won't find this kind of insight in any other text on the market. We think you're going to love it! This textbook has been used in classes at: Ball State University, Emerson College, Florida Institute of Technology, Grand Valley State University, Johnson County Community College, Manchester Business School, McLennan Community College, Michigan State University, North Hennepin Community College, Pierce College, Rochester Institute of Technology, Saint Louis University, Salem State College, South Dakota State University, Texas State University, Texas Tech University, University of New Hampshire, University of North Carolina, University of Notre Dame, University of South Florida, Virginia Tech, Western Kentucky University.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aCornell, Lisa Dukeeauthor1 aNizan, Amiteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/23zAccess online version02033nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002600180245003300206264004300239264004600282264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002500450490002700475505016900502520071700671542002701388546001601415588004001431650002301471650002701494710003901521856007501560OTLid0000024MnU20260406020751.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944325039  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aHefferon, Jimeauthor00aLinear AlgebracJim Hefferon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aColchester,  VermontbJim Hefferonc2020. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Solving Linear Systems -- Chapter Two: Vector Spaces -- Chapter Three: Maps Between Spaces -- Chapter Four: Determinants -- Chapter Five: Similarity --0 aThis text covers the standard material for a US undergraduate first course: linear systems and Gauss's Method, vector spaces, linear maps and matrices, determinants, and eigenvectors and eigenvalues, as well as additional topics such as introductions to various applications. It has extensive exercise sets with worked answers to all exercises, including proofs, beamer slides for classroom use, and a lab manual for computer work. The approach is developmental. Although everything is proved, it introduces the material with a great deal of motivation, many computational examples, and exercises that range from routine verifications to a few challenges. Ancillary materials are available at the publisher link.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/24zAccess online version05282nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002800157245006400185264004300249264006900292264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505064100538520346701179542004104646546001604687588004104703650002504744700002504769710003904794856007504833OTLid0000028MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453313282  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aCooper, Russelleauthor00aMicroeconomicsbTheory Through ApplicationscRussell Cooper 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a-- Chapter 1: What Is Economics? -- Chapter 2: Microeconomics in Action -- Chapter 3: Everyday Decisions -- Chapter 4: Life Decisions -- Chapter 5: eBay and craigslist -- Chapter 6: Where Do Prices Come From? -- Chapter 7: Why Do Prices Change? -- Chapter 8: Growing Jobs -- Chapter 9: Making and Losing Money on Wall Street -- Chapter 10: Raising the Wage Floor -- Chapter 11: Barriers to Trade and the Underground Economy -- Chapter 12: Superstars -- Chapter 13: Cleaning Up the Air and Using Up the Oil -- Chapter 14: Busting Up Monopolies -- Chapter 15: A Healthy Economy -- Chapter 16: Cars -- Chapter 17: Microeconomics Toolkit --0 aRussell Cooper and Andrew John have written an economics text aimed directly at students from its very inception. You're thinking, ”Yeah, sure. I've heard that before.“ This textbook, Microeconomics: Theory Through Applications, centers around student needs and expectations through two premises: … Students are motivated to study economics if they see that it relates to their own lives. … Students learn best from an inductive approach, in which they are first confronted with a problem, and then led through the process of solving that problem. Many books claim to present economics in a way that is digestible for students; Russell and Andrew have truly created one from scratch. This textbook will assist you in increasing students' economic literacy both by developing their aptitude for economic thinking and by presenting key insights about economics that every educated individual should know. How? Russell and Andrew have done three things in this text to accomplish that goal: 1. Applications Ahead of Theory: They present all the theory that is standard in Principles books. But by beginning with applications, students get to learn why this theory is needed. The authors take the kind of material that other authors put in ”applications boxes“ and place it at the heart of their book. Each chapter is built around a particular business or policy application, such as minimum wages, the stock exchange, and auctions. Why take this approach? Traditional courses focus too much on abstract theory relative to the interests and capabilities of the average undergraduate. Students are rarely engaged and the formal theory is never integrated into the way students think about economic issues. And traditional books are organized around theoretical constructs that mean nothing to students. The authors' applications-first approach ensures that students will not see chapters with titles like ”Cost Functions“ or ”Short-Run Fluctuations“. They introduce tools and ideas as and when they are needed. Each chapter is designed with two goals. First, the application upon which the chapter is built provides a ”hook“ that gets students' attention. Second, the application is a suitable vehicle a vehicle for teaching the principles of economics. 2. Learning through Repetition: Important tools appear over and over again, allowing students to learn from repetition and to see how one framework can be useful in many different contexts. Each piece of economic theory in this text is first introduced and explained in the context of a specific application. Most are re-used in other chapters, so students see them in action on multiple occasions. As students progress through the book, they accumulate a set of techniques and ideas. These are collected separately in a ”toolkit“ that provides students with an easy reference and also gives them a condensed summary of economic principles for examination preparation. 3. A Student's Table of Contents vs. An Instructor's Table of Contents: There is no further proof that Russell and Andrew have created a book aimed specifically at educating students about economics than their two tables of contents. The Student's Table of Contents speaks to students, piquing their interest to involve them in the economics, and a Instructor's Table of Contents with the economics to better help you organize your teaching—and frankly, you don't need to get excited by economics, you already are.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aJohn, Andreweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/28zAccess online version04761nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001000167050001200177100003000189245003700219264004300256264006900299264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505126000545520221201805542004104017546001604058588004104074650002404115650002604139650002304165650002504188710003904213856007504252OTLid0000029MnU20260406020351.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780982043080  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG173 4aHB171.51 aWright, Robert E.eauthor00aMoney and BankingcRobert Wright 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Money, Banking, and Your World -- Chapter 2: The Financial System -- Chapter 3: Money -- Chapter 4: Interest Rates -- Chapter 5: The Economics of Interest-Rate Fluctuations -- Chapter 6: The Economics of Interest-Rate Spreads and Yield Curves -- Chapter 7: Rational Expectations, Efficient Markets, and the Valuation of Corporate Equities -- Chapter 8: Financial Structure, Transaction Costs, and Asymmetric Information -- Chapter 9: Bank Management -- Chapter 10: Innovation and Structure in Banking and Finance -- Chapter 11: The Economics of Financial Regulation -- Chapter 12: Financial Derivatives -- Chapter 13: Financial Crises: Causes and Consequences -- Chapter 14: Central Bank Form and Function -- Chapter 15: The Money Supply Process and the Money Multipliers -- Chapter 16: Monetary Policy Tools -- Chapter 17: Monetary Policy Targets and Goals -- Chapter 18: Foreign Exchange -- Chapter 19: International Monetary Regimes -- Chapter 20: Money Demand -- Chapter 21: IS-LM -- Chapter 22: IS-LM in Action -- Chapter 23: Aggregate Supply and Demand and the Growth Diamond -- Chapter 24: Monetary Policy Transmission Mechanisms -- Chapter 25: Inflation and Money -- Chapter 26: Rational Expectations Redux: Monetary Policy Implications0 aThe financial crisis of 2007-8 has already revolutionized institutions, markets, and regulation. Wright's Money and Banking V 2.0 captures those revolutionary changes and packages them in a way that engages undergraduates enrolled in Money and Banking and Financial Institutions and Markets courses. Minimal mathematics, accessible language, and a student-oriented tone ease readers into complex subjects like money, interest rates, banking, asymmetric information, financial crises and regulation, monetary policy, monetary theory, and other standard topics. Numerous short cases, called "Stop and Think" boxes, promote internalization over memorization. Exercise drills ensure basic skills competency where appropriate. Short, snappy sections that begin with a framing question enhance readability and encourage assignment completion. The 2.0 version of this text boasts substantive revisions (additions, deletions, rearrangements) of almost every chapter based on the suggestions of many Money and Banking instructors. Some specific highlights are: Chapter 11 now contains enhanced descriptions of recent regulatory changes, including Dodd-Frank, Chapter 12 is an entirely new chapter on derivatives covering forwards, futures, options, and swaps that also including comprehensive treatment of the causes and consequences of financial crises, and Chapter 14 has updated discussions of the Federal Reserve's monetary policy tools, including paying interest on reserves, and the structure and leadership of the European Central Bank. Recent financial turmoil has increased student interest in the financial system but simultaneously threatens to create false impressions and negative attitudes. This up-to-date text by a dynamic, young author encourages students to critique the financial system without rejecting its many positive attributes. Peruse the book online now to see for yourself if this book fits the needs of your course and students. This textbook has been used in classes at:Augustana College, Central Michigan University, Florida State University, Lyndon State College, Princeton University, Rutgers University, University of Southern Maine, Western Oregon University., Westminster College.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/29zAccess online version03130nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245002800167264004300195264009600238264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505068000511520129401191542004102485546001602526588004002542650002402582650003602606710003902642856007502681OTLid0000030MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135155  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF554900aOrganizational Behavior 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Organizational Behavior -- Chapter 2: Managing Demographic and Cultural Diversity -- Chapter 3: Understanding People at Work: Individual Differences and Perception -- Chapter 4: Individual Attitudes and Behaviors -- Chapter 5: Theories of Motivation -- Chapter 6: Designing a Motivating Work Environment -- Chapter 7: Managing Stress and Emotions -- Chapter 8: Communication -- Chapter 9: Managing Groups and Teams -- Chapter 10: Conflict and Negotiations -- Chapter 11: Making Decisions -- Chapter 12: Leading People Within Organizations -- Chapter 13: Power and Politics -- Chapter 14: Organizational Structure and Change -- Chapter 15: Organizational Culture --0 aOrganizational Behavior bridges the gap between theory and practice with a distinct "experiential" approach. On average, a worker in the USA will change jobs 10 times in 20 years. In order to succeed in this type of career situation, individuals need to be armed with the tools necessary to be life-long learners. To that end, this book is not be about giving students all the answers to every situation they may encounter when they start their first job or as they continue up the career ladder. Instead, this book gives students the vocabulary, framework, and critical thinking skills necessary to diagnose situations, ask tough questions, evaluate the answers received, and to act in an effective and ethical manner regardless of situational characteristics. Often, students taking OB either do not understand how important knowledge of OB can be to their professional careers, or they DO understand and they want to put that knowledge into practice. Organizational Behavior takes a more experiential angle to the material to meet both of those needs. The experiential approach can be incorporated in the classroom primarily through the "OB Toolbox." This feature brings life to the concepts and allows students to not only see how the OB theories unfold, but to practice them, as well.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/30zAccess online version03074nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002700166245003600193264004300229264006900272264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505076100518520111301279542004102392546001602433588004102449650002402490650002302514700002502537710003902562856007502601OTLid0000031MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780982361863  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG1731 aSiegel, Racheleauthor00aPersonal FinancecRachel Siegel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Personal Financial Planning -- Chapter 2: Basic Ideas of Finance -- Chapter 3: Financial Statements -- Chapter 4: Evaluating Choices: Time, Risk, and Value -- Chapter 5: Financial Plans: Budgets -- Chapter 6: Taxes and Tax Planning -- Chapter 7: Financial Management -- Chapter 8: Consumer Strategies -- Chapter 9: Buying a Home -- Chapter 10: Personal Risk Management: Insurance -- Chapter 11: Personal Risk Management: Retirement and Estate Planning -- Chapter 12: Investing -- Chapter 13: Behavioral Finance and Market Behavior -- Chapter 14: The Practice of Investment -- Chapter 15: Owning Stocks -- Chapter 16: Owning Bonds -- Chapter 17: Investing in Mutual Funds, Commodities, Real Estate, and Collectibles -- Chapter 18: Career Planning0 aPersonal Finance by Rachel Siegel and Carol Yacht is a comprehensive Personal Finance text which includes a wide range of pedagogical aids to keep students engaged and instructors on track. This book is arranged by learning objectives. The headings, summaries, reviews, and problems all link together via the learning objectives. This helps instructors to teach what they want, and to assign the problems that correspond to the learning objectives covered in class. Personal Finance includes personal finance planning problems with links to solutions, and personal application exercises, with links to their associated worksheet(s) or spreadsheet(s). In addition, the text boasts a large number of links to videos, podcasts, experts' tips or blogs, and magazine articles to illustrate the practical applications for concepts covered in the text. Rachel would love to hear from you. If you have questions about teaching with her book, comments about teaching Personal Finance, or just feedback, feel free to email her at rachelsiegelcfa@hughes.net. This textbook has been used in classes at: Miami University.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aYacht, Caroleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/31zAccess online version03332nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245002800164264004300192264009600235264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505167000508520051302178542004102691546001602732588004002748650002502788650003102813710003902844856007502883OTLid0000032MnU20260406020731.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135162  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aPrinciples of Economics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Economics: The Study of Choice -- Chapter 2: Confronting Scarcity: Choices in Production -- Chapter 3: Demand and Supply -- Chapter 4: Applications of Demand and Supply -- Chapter 5: Elasticity: A Measure of Response -- Chapter 6: Markets, Maximizers, and Efficiency -- Chapter 7: The Analysis of Consumer Choice -- Chapter 8: Production and Cost -- Chapter 9: Competitive Markets for Goods and Services -- Chapter 10: Monopoly -- Chapter 11: The World of Imperfect Competition -- Chapter 12: Wages and Employment in Perfect Competition -- Chapter 13: Interest Rates and the Markets for Capital and Natural Resources -- Chapter 14: Imperfectly Competitive Markets for Factors of Production -- Chapter 15: Public Finance and Public Choice -- Chapter 16: Antitrust Policy and Business Regulation -- Chapter 17: International Trade -- Chapter 18: The Economics of the Environment -- Chapter 19: Inequality, Poverty, and Discrimination -- Chapter 20: Macroeconomics: The Big Picture -- Chapter 21: Measuring Total Output and Income -- Chapter 22: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply -- Chapter 23: Economic Growth -- Chapter 24: The Nature and Creation of Money -- Chapter 25: Financial Markets and the Economy -- Chapter 26: Monetary Policy and the Fed -- Chapter 27: Government and Fiscal Policy -- Chapter 28: Consumption and the Aggregate Expenditures Model -- Chapter 29: Investment and Economic Activity -- Chapter 30: Net Exports and International Finance -- Chapter 31: Inflation and Unemployment -- Chapter 32: A Brief History of Macroeconomic Thought and Policy -- Chapter 33: Economic Development -- Chapter 34: Socialist Economies in Transition0 aThis book is intended for a two-semester course in Economics taught out of the social sciences or business school. Principles of Economics aims to teach considerable range and depth of Economic concepts through an approachable style and methodology. The authors take a three-pronged approach to every chapter: The concept is covered with a “Heads Up” to ward off confusion, a real-world application for that concept, and a “You Try It” section to make sure students are staying on top of the concept.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/32zAccess online version05684nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245003300164264004300197264009600240264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505095700513520357301470542004105043546001605084588004005100650002505140650003105165710003905196856007505235OTLid0000033MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135179  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aPrinciples of Macroeconomics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Economics: The Study of Choice -- Chapter 2: Confronting Scarcity: Choices in Production -- Chapter 3: Demand and Supply -- Chapter 4: Applications of Demand and Supply -- Chapter 5: Macroeconomics: The Big Picture -- Chapter 6: Measuring Total Output and Income -- Chapter 7: Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply -- Chapter 8: Economic Growth -- Chapter 9: The Nature and Creation of Money -- Chapter 10: Financial Markets and the Economy -- Chapter 11: Monetary Policy and the Fed -- Chapter 12: Government and Fiscal Policy -- Chapter 13: Consumption and the Aggregate Expenditures Model -- Chapter 14: Investment and Economic Activity -- Chapter 15: Net Exports and International Finance -- Chapter 16: Inflation and Unemployment -- Chapter 17: A Brief History of Macroeconomic Thought and Policy -- Chapter 18: Inequality, Poverty, and Discrimination -- Chapter 19: Economic Development -- Chapter 20: Socialist Economies in Transition0 aRecognizing that a course in economics may seem daunting to some students, we have tried to make the writing clear and engaging. Clarity comes in part from the intuitive presentation style, but we have also integrated a number of pedagogical features that we believe make learning economic concepts and principles easier and more fun. These features are very student-focused. The chapters themselves are written using a “modular” format. In particular, chapters generally consist of three main content sections that break down a particular topic into manageable parts. Each content section contains not only an exposition of the material at hand but also learning objectives, summaries, examples, and problems. Each chapter is introduced with a story to motivate the material and each chapter ends with a wrap-up and additional problems. Our goal is to encourage active learning by including many examples and many problems of different types. A tour of the features available for each chapter may give a better sense of what we mean: Start Up—Chapter introductions set the stage for each chapter with an example that we hope will motivate readers to study the material that follows. These essays, on topics such as the value of a college degree in the labor market or how policy makers reacted to a particular economic recession, lend themselves to the type of analysis explained in the chapter. We often refer to these examples later in the text to demonstrate the link between theory and reality. Learning Objectives—These succinct statements are guides to the content of each section. Instructors can use them as a snapshot of the important points of the section. After completing the section, students can return to the learning objectives to check if they have mastered the material.Heads Up!—These notes throughout the text warn of common errors and explain how to avoid making them. After our combined teaching experience of more than fifty years, we have seen the same mistakes made by many students. This feature provides additional clarification and shows students how to navigate possibly treacherous waters. Key Takeaways—These statements review the main points covered in each content section. Key Terms—Defined within the text, students can review them in context, a process that enhances learning. Try It! questions—These problems, which appear at the end of each content section and which are answered completely in the text, give students the opportunity to be active learners. They are designed to give students a clear signal as to whether they understand the material before they go on to the next topic. Cases in Point—These essays included at the end of each content section illustrate the influence of economic forces on real issues and real people. Unlike other texts that use boxed features to present interesting new material or newspaper articles, we have written each case ourselves to integrate them more clearly with the rest of the text. Summary—In a few paragraphs, the information presented in the chapter is pulled together in a way that allows for a quick review of the material.End-of-chapter concept and numerical problems—These are bountiful and are intended to check understanding, to promote discussion of the issues raised in the chapter, and to engage students in critical thinking about the material. Included are not only general review questions to test basic understanding but also examples drawn from the news and from results of economics research. Some have students working with real-world data.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/33zAccess online version05768nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245002900167264004300196264009600239264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505177100512520285002283542004105133546001605174588004005190650002405230650002605254710003905280856007505319OTLid0000034MnU20260406020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135186  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aPrinciples of Management 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Principles of Management -- 1.1 Introduction to Principles of Management -- 1.2 Case in Point: Doing Good as a Core Business Strategy -- 1.3 Who Are Managers? -- 1.4 Leadership, Entrepreneurship, and Strategy -- 1.5 Planning, Organizing, Leading, and Controlling -- 1.6 Economic, Social, and Environmental Performance -- 1.7 Performance of Individuals and Groups -- 1.8 Your Principles of Management Survivor's Guide -- Chapter 2: Personality, Attitudes, and Work Behaviors -- 2.1 Chapter Introduction -- 2.2 Case in Point: SAS Institute Invests in Employees -- 2.3 Personality and Values -- 2.4 Perception -- 2.5 Work Attitudes -- 2.6 The Interactionist Perspective: The Role of Fit -- 2.7 Work Behaviors -- 2.8 Developing Your Positive Attitude Skills -- Chapter 3: History, Globalization, and Values-Based Leadership -- 3.1 History, Globalization, and Values-Based Leadership -- 3.2 Case in Point: Hanna Andersson Corporation Changes for Good -- 3.3 Ancient History: Management Through the 1990s -- 3.4 Contemporary Principles of Management -- 3.5 Global Trends -- 3.6 Globalization and Principles of Management -- 3.7 Developing Your Values-Based Leadership Skills -- Chapter 4: Developing Mission, Vision, and Values -- 4.1 Developing Mission, Vision, and Values -- 4.2 Case in Point: Xerox Motivates Employees for Success -- 4.3 The Roles of Mission, Vision, and Values -- 4.4 Mission and Vision in the P-O-L-C Framework -- 4.5 Creativity and Passion -- 4.6 Stakeholders -- 4.7 Crafting Mission and Vision Statements -- 4.8 Developing Your Personal Mission and Vision -- Chapter 5: Strategizing -- 5.1 Strategizing -- 5.2 Case in Point: Unnamed Publisher Transforms Textbook Industry -- 5.3 Strategic Management in the P-O-L-C Framew0 aPrinciples of Management teaches management principles to tomorrow's business leaders by weaving three threads through every chapter: strategy, entrepreneurship and active leadership. Strategic — All business school teachings have some orientation toward performance and strategy and are concerned with making choices that lead to high performance. Principles of Management will frame performance using the notion of the triple bottom-line — the idea that economic performance allows individuals and organizations to perform positively in social and environmental ways as well. The triple bottom line is financial, social, and environmental performance. It is important for all students to understand the interdependence of these three facets of organizational performance. The Entrepreneurial Manager — While the "General Management" course at Harvard Business School was historically one of its most popular and impactful courses (pioneered in the 1960s by Joe Bower), recent Harvard MBAs did not see themselves as "general managers." This course was relabeled "The Entrepreneurial Manager" in 2006, and has regained its title as one of the most popular courses. This reflects and underlying and growing trend that students, including the undergraduates this book targets, can see themselves as entrepreneurs and active change agents, but not just as managers. By starting fresh with an entrepreneurial/change management orientation, this text provides an exciting perspective on the art of management that students can relate to. At the same time, this perspective is as relevant to existing for-profit organizations (in the form intrapreneurship) as it is to not-for-profits and new entrepreneurial ventures. Active Leadership — Starting with the opening chapter, Principles of Management shows students how leaders and leadership are essential to personal and organizational effectiveness and effective organizational change. Students are increasingly active as leaders at an early age, and are sometimes painfully aware of the leadership failings they see in public and private organizations. It is the leader and leadership that combine the principles of management (the artist's palette, tools, and techniques) to create the art of management. This book's modular format easily maps to a POLC (Planning, Organizing, Leading, and Controlling) course organization, which was created by Henri Fayol (General and industrial management (1949). London: Pitman Publishing company), and suits the needs of both undergraduate and graduate course in Principles of Management. This textbook has been used in classes at: College of Alameda, Columbia Basin College, Flagler College, Johnson County Community College, Pasadena City College, Penn State University, Renton Technical College, San Diego Mesa College, Sierra College, Yuba College.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/34zAccess online version04367nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000900142100003500151245008100186250002700267264004300294264006700337264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002800526490002700554505059900581520257001180542004103750546001603791588004003807650003203847710003903879856007503918OTLid0000035MnU20260406020654.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2007    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a0073523399  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aKrishnamurthi, Shrirameauthor00aProgramming LanguagesbApplication and InterpretationcShriram Krishnamurthi  aVersion Second Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBrown Universityc2017. 4c©2007.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Everything (We Will Say) About Parsing -- 3 A First Look at Interpretation -- 4 A First Taste of Desugaring -- 5 Adding Functions to the Language -- 6 From Substitution to Environments -- 7 Functions Anywhere -- 8 Mutation Structures and Variables -- 9 Recursion and Cycles: Procedures and Data -- 10 Objects -- 11 Memory Management -- 12 Representation Decisions -- 13 Desugaring as a Language Feature -- 14 Control Operations -- 15 Checking Program Invariants Statically: Types -- 16 Checking Program Invariants Dynamically: Contracts -- 17 Alternate Application Semantics0 aUnlike some other textbooks, this one does not follow a top-down narrative. Rather it has the flow of a conversation, with backtracking. We will often build up programs incrementally, just as a pair of programmers would. We will include mistakes, not because I don't know the answer, but because this is the best way for you to learn. Including mistakes makes it impossible for you to read passively: you must instead engage with the material, because you can never be sure of the veracity of what you're reading. At the end, you'll always get to the right answer. However, this non-linear path is more frustrating in the short term (you will often be tempted to say, “Just tell me the answer, already!”), and it makes the book a poor reference guide (you can't open up to a random page and be sure what it says is correct). However, that feeling of frustration is the sensation of learning. I don't know of a way around it. At various points you will encounter this: ExerciseThis is an exercise. Do try it. This is a traditional textbook exercise. It's something you need to do on your own. If you're using this book as part of a course, this may very well have been assigned as homework. In contrast, you will also find exercise-like questions that look like this: Do Now!There's an activity here! Do you see it? When you get to one of these, stop. Read, think, and formulate an answer before you proceed. You must do this because this is actually an exercise, but the answer is already in the book—most often in the text immediately following (i.e., in the part you're reading right now)—or is something you can determine for yourself by running a program. If you just read on, you'll see the answer without having thought about it (or not see it at all, if the instructions are to run a program), so you will get to neither (a) test your knowledge, nor (b) improve your intuitions. In other words, these are additional, explicit attempts to encourage active learning. Ultimately, however, I can only encourage it; it's up to you to practice it. The main programming language used in this book is Racket. Like with all operating systems, however, Racket actually supports a host of programming languages, so you must tell Racket which language you're programming in. This textbook has been used in classes at: Brown University, Cal Poly, Columbus State University, Northeastern University, NYU, Reed College, UC-San Diego, UC-Santa Cruz, University of Rhode Island, University of Utah, Westmont College, Williams College, Worcester Polytechnic Institute.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/35zAccess online version02648nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245004600167264004300213264009600256264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505051400529520097001043542004102013546001602054588004002070650002402110650002602134710003902160856007502199OTLid0000036MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135216  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aProject Management from Simple to Complex 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Project Management -- Chapter 2: Project Profiling -- Chapter 3: Project Phases and Organization -- Chapter 4: Understanding and Meeting Client Expectations -- Chapter 5: Working with People on Projects -- Chapter 6: Communication Technologies -- Chapter 7: Starting a Project -- Chapter 8: Project Time Management -- Chapter 9: Estimating and Managing Costs -- Chapter 10: Managing Project Quality -- Chapter 11: Managing Project Risk -- Chapter 12: Project Procurement and Closure0 aIn a world that is becoming more virtual, more global, and more complex, the project manager's ability to function in this environment becomes critical to the success of the project. Project Management from Simple to Complex explores project management within this complex, virtual, and global environment. This is not a standard textbook that was adapted to the new publishing paradigm; it was designed from the beginning to utilize its capabilities. The book is written in collaboration by an expert in Project Management and an expert in writing instructional textbooks and using technology for communicating online to create a unique learning environment that prepares students to manage projects in a global, multicultural, and online environment. Project Management from Simple to Complex features a new model for managing projects, as well as, exploration into the personal dynamics of project management and the role those dynamics play in project outcomes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/36zAccess online version05473nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002700167245006700194264004300261264006900304264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505133000550520286001880542004104740546001604781588004104797650002404838650002604862700003404888700002704922710003904949856007504988OTLid0000037MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780982361801  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aBaranoff, Ettieauthor00aRisk Management for Enterprises and IndividualscEtti Baranoff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Nature of Risk: Losses and Opportunities -- Chapter 2: Risk Measurement and Metrics -- Chapter 3: Risk Attitudes: Expected Utility Theory and Demand for Hedging -- Chapter 4: Evolving Risk Management: Fundamental Tools -- Chapter 5: The Evolution of Risk Management: Enterprise Risk Management -- Chapter 6: The Insurance Solution and Institutions -- Chapter 7: Insurance Operations -- Chapter 8: Insurance Markets and Regulation -- Chapter 9: Fundamental Doctrines Affecting Insurance Contracts -- Chapter 10: Structure and Analysis of Insurance Contracts -- Chapter 11: Property Risk Management -- Chapter 12: The Liability Risk Management -- Chapter 13: Multirisk Management Contracts: Homeowners -- Chapter 14: Multirisk Management Contracts: Auto -- Chapter 15: Multirisk Management Contracts: Business -- Chapter 16: Risks Related to the Job: Workers' Compensation and Unemployment Compensation -- Chapter 17: Life Cycle Financial Risks -- Chapter 18: Social Security -- Chapter 19: Mortality Risk Management: Individual Life Insurance and Group Life Insurance -- Chapter 20: Employment-Based Risk Management (General) -- Chapter 21: Employment-Based and Individual Longevity Risk Management -- Chapter 22: Employment and Individual Health Risk Management -- Chapter 23: Cases in Holistic Risk Management0 aThis book is intended for the Risk Management and Insurance course where Risk Management is emphasized. When we think of large risks, we often think in terms of natural hazards such as hurricanes, earthquakes or tornados. Perhaps man-made disasters come to mind such as the terrorist attacks in the U.S. on September 11, 2001. Typically we have overlooked financial crises, such as the credit crisis of 2008. However, these types of man-made disasters have the potential to devastate the global marketplace. Losses in multiple trillions of dollars and in much human suffering and insecurity are already being totaled, and the global financial markets are collapsing as never before seen. We can attribute the 2008 collapse to financially risky behavior of a magnitude never before experienced. The 2008 U.S. credit markets were a financial house of cards. A basic lack of risk management (and regulators' inattention or inability to control these overt failures) lay at the heart of the global credit crisis. This crisis started with lack of improperly underwritten mortgages and excessive debt. Companies depend on loans and lines of credit to conduct their routine business. If such credit lines dry up, production slows down and brings the global economy to the brink of deep recession—or even depression. The snowballing effect of this failure to manage the risk associated with providing mortgage loans to unqualified home buyers have been profound, indeed. When the mortgages failed because of greater risk- taking on the Street, the entire house of cards collapsed. Probably no other risk-related event has had, and will continue to have, as profound an impact world wide as this risk management failure. How was risk in this situation so badly managed? What could firms and individuals have done to protect themselves? How can government measure such risks (beforehand) to regulate and control them? These and other questions come to mind when we contemplate the consequences of this risk management fiasco. Standard risk management practice would have identified sub-prime mortgages and their bundling into mortgage-backed-securities as high risk. People would have avoided these investments or would have put enough money into reserve to be able to withstand defaults. This did not happen. Accordingly, this book may represent one of the most critical topics of study that the student of the 21st century could ever undertake. Risk management will be a major focal point of business and societal decision—making in the 21st century. A separate focused field of study, it draws on core knowledge bases from law, engineering, finance, economics, medicine, psychology, accounting, mathematics, statistics and other fields to create a holistic decision-making framework that is sustainable and value- enhancing. This is the subject of this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aBrockett, Patrick Leeeauthor1 aKahane, Yehudaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/37zAccess online version02547nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245007500144264004300219264006200262264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505072900501520068801230542004101918546001601959588004001975650003102015650002502046710003902071856007502110OTLid0000038MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58600aIntroduction to SociologybUnderstanding and Changing the Social World 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Chapter 1: Sociology and the Sociological Perspective -- Chapter 2: Culture and Society -- Chapter 3: Socialization and Social Interactions -- Chapter 4: Groups and Organizations -- Chapter 5: Deviance, Crime, and Social Control -- Chapter 6: Social Stratification -- Chapter 7: Race and Ethnicity -- Chapter 8: Gender and Gender Inequality -- Chapter 9: Aging and the Elderly -- Chapter 10: Politics and the Economy -- Chapter 11: The Family -- Chapter 12: Education and Religion -- Chapter 13: Health and Medicine -- Chapter 14: Social Change - Population, Urbanization, and Social Movements -- Chapter 15: Conclusion - Understanding and Changing the Social World -- Index -- Glossary -- Detailed Licensing0 aIt is no accident that many sociology instructors and students are first drawn to sociology because they want to learn a body of knowledge that can help them make a difference in the world at large. This text is designed for this audience and aims to present not only a sociological understanding of society but also a sociological perspective on how to improve society. In this regard, the text responds to the enthusiasm that “public sociology” has generated after serving as the theme of the 2004 annual meeting of the American Sociological Association, and it demonstrates sociology’s relevance for today’s students who want to make a difference in the world beyond them.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/38zAccess online version02832nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002700167245006800194264004300262264006900305264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505033800551520129500889542004102184546001602225588004102241650002402282650002602306710003902332856007502371OTLid0000039MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453314128  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aLarson, Andreaeauthor00aSustainability, Innovation, and EntrepreneurshipcAndrea Larson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: History -- Chapter 2: Sustainability Innovation in Business -- Chapter 3: Framing Sustainability Innovation and Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 4: Entrepreneurship and Sustainability Innovation Analysis -- Chapter 5: Energy and Climate -- Chapter 6: Clean Products and Health -- Chapter 7: Buildings -- Chapter 8: Biomaterials0 aThis book is suited for the Entrepreneurship or Innovation course with an emphasis on Sustainability or for a course devoted entirely to Sustainability. What are the trends and forces underlying the changing character of the business-environment relationship? How they are creating significant entrepreneurial opportunities for individuals and companies? Around the world, the movement toward ”sustainable development“ has caused many firms to adopt policies and practices that reflect what is sometimes called a ”sustainable business“ or ”triple bottom line“ approach. ”Triple bottom line“ refers to the demonstration of strong performance across economic, social, and environmental indicators. Those measures serve as indicators of fiduciary responsibility to a growing set of concerned investors and therefore can help ensure access to capital. They also enable innovators to lower costs, create strategic differentiation, reduce risk, and position themselves for competitive advantage over rivals less attuned to trends. The deep roots of sustainability thinking are now evident in widespread and increasingly visible activities worldwide, and Sustainability, Innovation, and Entrepreneurship explores this evolution; its necessity, its implications and its progression.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/39zAccess online version03714nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002600166245007300192264004300265264006900308264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002500499490002700524505088900551520155101440542004102991546001603032588004103048650002503089650002303114700002503137700002803162710003903190856007503229OTLid0000040MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453311097  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aBall, David Weauthor04aThe Basics of General, Organic, and Biological ChemistrycDavid Ball 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Chemistry, Matter, and Measurement -- Chapter 2: Elements, Atoms, and the Periodic Table -- Chapter 3: Ionic Bonding and Simple Ionic Compounds -- Chapter 4: Covalent Bonding and Simple Molecular Compounds -- Chapter 5: Introduction to Chemical Reactions -- Chapter 6: Quantities in Chemical Reactions -- Chapter 7: Energy and Chemical Processes -- Chapter 8: Solids, Liquids, and Gases -- Chapter 9: Solutions -- Chapter 10: Acids and Bases -- Chapter 11: Nuclear Chemistry -- Chapter 12: Organic Chemistry: Alkanes and Halogenated Hydrocarbons -- Chapter 13: Unsaturated and Aromatic Hydrocarbons -- Chapter 14: Organic Compounds of Oxygen -- Chapter 15: Organic Acids and Bases and Some of Their Derivatives -- Chapter 16: Carbohydrates -- Chapter 17: Lipids -- Chapter 18: Amino Acids, Proteins, and Enzymes -- Chapter 19: Nucleic Acids -- Chapter 20: Energy Metabolism0 aThe Basics of General, Organic, and Biological Chemistry by David W. Ball, John W. Hill, and Rhonda J. Scott is for the one-semester General, Organic and Biological Chemistry course. The authors designed this textbook from the ground up to meet the needs of a one-semester course. It is 20 chapters in length and approximately 350-400 pages; just the right breadth and depth for instructors to teach and students to grasp. In addition, The Basics of General, Organic, and Biological Chemistry is written not by one chemist, but THREE chemistry professors with specific, complimentary research and teaching areas. David W. Ball's specialty is physical chemistry, John W. Hill's is organic chemistry, and finally, Rhonda J. Scott's background is in enzyme and peptide chemistry. These three authors have the expertise to identify and present only the most important material for students to learn in the GOB Chemistry course. These experienced authors have ensured their text has ample in-text examples, and ”Test Yourself“ questions following the examples so students can immediately check their comprehension. The end-of-chapter exercises will be paired, with one answered in the back of the text so homework can easily be assigned and self-checked. The Basics of General, Organic, and Biological Chemistry by David W. Ball, John W. Hill, and Rhonda J. Scott is the right text for you and your students if you are looking for a GOB textbook with just the right amount of coverage without overdoing the concepts and overwhelming your students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aHill, John Weauthor1 aScott, Rhonda Jeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/40zAccess online version06412nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100003100178245004400209264004300253264006900296264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002500487490002700512505098100539520419501520542004105715546001605756588004105772650002405813650002605837650002505863710003905888856007505927OTLid0000042MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936126002  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aHF54151 aRichmond, Kimberlyeauthor04aThe Power of SellingcKimberly Richmond 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Power to Get What You Want in Life -- Chapter 2: The Power to Choose Your Path: Careers in Sales -- Chapter 3: The Power of Building Relationships: Putting Adaptive Selling to Work -- Chapter 4: Business Ethics: The Power of Doing the Right Thing -- Chapter 5: The Power of Effective Communication -- Chapter 6: Why and How People Buy: The Power of Understanding the Customer -- Chapter 7: Prospecting and Qualifying: The Power to Identify Your Customers -- Chapter 8: The Preapproach: The Power of Preparation -- Chapter 9: The Approach: The Power of Connecting -- Chapter 10: The Presentation: The Power of Solving Problems -- Chapter 11: Handling Objections: The Power of Learning from Opportunities -- Chapter 12: Closing the Sale: The Power of Negotiating to Win -- Chapter 13: Follow-Up: The Power of Providing Service That Sells -- Chapter 14: The Power of Learning the Ropes -- Chapter 15: Entrepreneurial Selling: The Power of Running Your Own Business0 aThe Power of Selling is the perfect textbook to teach students about the proven process of selling. More important, it teaches students how to apply the tenets of selling to how to sell themselves and get the job they want, with the same process professional sales people learn (or brush up) on their own selling skills. What makes someone successful in sales? Are great sales people born or made? Is there one magic selling process, or does the process change based on the business‚ or the customer? How can the selling process really come alive for students in the classroom? How do students learn how to sell for life, not just for a course? The Power of Selling by Kim Richmond answers these questions and makes the principles of selling come alive. Kim looks at the topic of selling through a different lens, and provides inspiration and ideas. The Power of Selling provides an exciting and interactive experience for both professors and students through the use of 4 unique elements: 1. Content The content is based on the core selling tenets so instructors will find the familiar principles of selling. In addition, the impact of Sales 2.0 is addressed at every stage including how to use interactive tools such as Twitter, LinkedIn, Facebook, blogs, and wikis effectively. 2. Selling U: The last section of each chapter is called Selling U. It applies the concepts covered in the chapter to a student's job search. Selling U topics include how to think about yourself as a brand, how to create a powerful cover letter and resume, how to create your personal elevator pitch, how to use networking and informational interviews to get the word out about your brand, how to prepare and dress for an interview, and how to negotiate and accept the right job offer. What makes The Power of Selling different is that Selling U is integrated into every chapter, which makes this text the ultimate guide to selling yourself. 3. Video Resources:Videos are used throughout the book. Additional videos that are not included in the text are available for instructor use. Here are videos that are available: … Video Ride-alongs — One of the best ways to learn about sales is by going on ride-alongs. So every chapter starts with an exclusive feature called a Video Ride-along. These short videos feature seven different sales professionals — one that starts each chapter. Each one talks about how he or she applies one of the key concepts covered in the chapter in their job. These videos are designed to be ”virtual ride-alongs“ so the students can actually feel as though they are getting insights first hand from selling professionals. … Over 50 videos are included featuring the sales professionals who are highlighted in the Video Ride-alongs. About half of the videos are used in the textbook. The balance are available for instructor use. Several are included in Video Learning Segments (see below). These videos are excellent resources for use in the classroom, exercises, and assignments. … Video Learning Segments In addition to the traditional supplements of Instructor Manual, PowerPoints, and Test Bank, there are also Video Learning Segments. These are PowerPoint slides embedded with videos designed to supplement the course PowerPoints and focus on one concept, like an ethical dilemma, pre-call preparation, or effective presentations, how to use email effectively. Each segment includes slides, videos, discussion questions, or exercises. 4. The Power of Selling LinkedIn Group. This group was created on LinkedIn.com expressly as a resource for the faculty and students who use this textbook. The group includes sales professionals from across the country and from different industries. This is a great tool for faculty and students alike to network, participate in discussions, ask questions, and connect with ”real world“ selling professionals. Kim Richmond's The Power of Selling is a fresh, interactive, and applied textbook intended for all introductory and sales, selling and salesmanship courses. If you're ready to prepare your ”students of selling“ for all that lies ahead in their professional career—you're ready for this book. Check it out.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/42zAccess online version02318nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002900163245007100192250000700263264004300270264006700313264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002500502490002700527505049000554520060701044542003001651546001601681588004001697650003201737650003701769710003901806856007501845OTLid0000043MnU20260406020824.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781491939369  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aThink PythonbHow to Think Like a Computer ScientistcAllen Downey  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 The way of the program -- 2 Variables, expressions and statements -- 3 Functions -- 4 Case study: interface design -- 5 Conditionals and recursion -- 6 Fruitful functions -- 7 Iteration -- 8 Strings -- 9 Case study: word play -- 10 Lists -- 11 Dictionaries -- 12 Tuples -- 13 Case study: data structure selection -- 14 Files -- 15 Classes and objects -- 16 Classes and functions -- 17 Classes and methods -- 18 Inheritance -- 19 The Goodies -- A Debugging -- B Analysis of Algorithms0 aThink Python is a concise introduction to software design using the Python programming language. Intended for people with no programming experience, this book starts with the most basic concepts and gradually adds new material. Some of the ideas students find most challenging, like recursion and object-oriented programming, are divided into a sequence of smaller steps and introduced over the course of several chapters. This textbook has been used in classes at Bard College, Olin College of Engineering, University of California, Santa Barbara, University of Maine, University of Northern Colorado.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/43zAccess online version03497nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002600156245006100182264004300243264006900286264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505132100532520096801853542003902821546001602860588004102876650002602917650002402943700003002967710003902997856007503036OTLid0000045MnU20260406020242.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602351844  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aLowe, Charlieeauthor00aWriting SpacesbReadings on Writing Vol. IcCharlie Lowe 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Open Source Composition Texts Arrive for College Writers by Robert E. Cummings -- What is Academic Writing by L. Lennie Irvin -- So You've Got a Writing Assignment. Now What? by Corrine E. Hinton -- The Inspired Writer vs. the Real Writer by Sarah Allen -- Backpacks vs. Briefcases: Steps Toward Rhetorical Analysis by Laura Bolin Carroll -- From Topic to Presentation: Making Choices to Develop Your Writing by Beth L. Hewett -- Taking Flight: Connecting Inner and Outer Realities during Invention by Susan E. Antlitz -- Reinventing Invention: Discovery and Investment in Writing by Michelle D. Trim and Megan Lynn Isaac -- "Finding Your Way In": Invention as Inquiry Based Learning in First Year Writing by Steven Lessner and Collin Craig -- Why Visit Your Campus Writing Center? by Ben Rafoth -- Finding the Good Argument OR Why Bother With Logic? by Rebecca Jones -- I Need You to Say “I”: Why First Person is Important in College Writing by Kate McKinney Maddalena -- Reflective Writing and the Revision Process: What Were You Thinking? by Sandra Giles -- Wikipedia Is Good for You!? by James P. Purdy -- Composing the Anthology: An Exercise in Patchwriting by Christopher Leary -- Collaborating Online: Digital Strategies for Group Work by Anthony T. Atkins -- Navigating Genres by Kerry Dirk0 aVolumes in Writing Spaces: Readings on Writing offer multiple perspectives on a wide-range of topics about writing, much like the modelmade famous by Wendy Bishop's “The Subject Is . . .” series. In eachchapter, authors present their unique views, insights, and strategies forwriting by addressing the undergraduate reader directly. Drawing ontheir own experiences, these teachers-as-writers invite students to joinin the larger conversation about developing nearly every aspect of thecraft of writing. Consequently, each essay functions as a standalonetext that can easily complement other selected readings in writing orwriting-intensive courses across the disciplines at any level. Topics in Volume 1 of the series include academic writing, how to interpret writing assignments, motives for writing, rhetorical analysis, revision, invention, writing centers, argumentation, narrative, reflective writing, Wikipedia, patchwriting, collaboration, and genres.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aZemliansky, Paveleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/45zAccess online version05451nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002700163245007200190264004300262264006900305264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505117100551520294601722542004104668546001604709588004104725650003204766650003804798700002904836700002604865700002404891710003904915856007504954OTLid0000046MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453311578  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aFrost, Raymondeauthor00aBusiness Information SystemsbDesign an App for ThatcRaymond Frost 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Information Systems in Your Life: Types of Systems and Careers -- Chapter 2: Information Systems to Enhance Business: Business Process Redesign -- Chapter 3: Professionalism in Deliverables: Principles of Graphic Design -- Chapter 4: User Centered Design: Design an iPhone App -- Chapter 5: Planning Usable Websites: Design a Website to Market the App -- Chapter 6: Build, Buy, or Reuse Solutions: Develop a Website to Market the App -- Chapter 7: Knowledge with Information Systems: Forecast Revenues and Expenses for the App -- Chapter 8: Decision Support: Determine Feasibility of a Business Loan for the App -- Chapter 9: Industry Analysis: Smartphone Apps -- Chapter 10: Business Intelligence: Analysis of App Sales Data -- Chapter 11: Writing the Business Case: Design a Report for the App -- Chapter 12: Presenting the Business Case: Design a Presentation for the App -- Chapter 13: Establishing Credentials: Networking and Placement -- Chapter 14: Microsoft PowerPoint Techniques -- Chapter 15: Cloud Computing Techniques -- Chapter 16: Microsoft Excel Techniques -- Chapter 17: Microsoft Access Techniques -- Chapter 18: Microsoft Word Techniques0 aWe set out to design an introductory course governed by four themes: Give students a good idea of what a career in MIS looks like by doing MIS. Enhance the professionalism of deliverables by teaching design and usability concepts. Promote creativity by assigning projects that demand it. Teach students about cloud computing by having them do cloud computing. Students in an introductory Management Information Systems (MIS) course often ask what a career in MIS looks like. Lacking a clear vision, they make their own assumptions. Often they assume the career involves programming with little human interaction. That MIS is a technical field could not be further from the truth. MIS job descriptions typically require candidates to be able to collaborate, communicate, analyze needs and gather requirements. They also list the need for excellent written and communication skills. In other words, MIS workers are constantly interacting with other people both inside and outside the organization. They are coming up with creative solutions to business problems. This course is designed to help students get a feel for what a career in MIS would be like. Our students report that they learn more about information systems from their internships than from their IS courses. Consequently, we designed a course that looks very much like an internship—an introduction to the field followed by a substantial project. Chapter 1 begins by introducing the information systems landscape. Here we discuss all the usual suspects: the information systems triangle, the systems development life cycle, transaction systems (ERP, SCM, CRM), collaboration systems, and business intelligence systems. Other aspects of the landscape such as usability, outsourcing, database concepts and so forth are introduced throughout chapter in Chapter 2 where they fit in naturally with the flow of the project. Chapter 2 is the substantial project which runs over a number of chapters. Over the course of the semester, students plan, build, and develop a proposal for an iPhone application. They develop a very realistic mockup. They also build a website to help market and support the app. Students are engaged because the project is fun and feels real. However, they are simultaneously learning business concepts and MIS skills. Prior to the existence of this course, we were only able to give such an interesting project at the senior level. Now, even as freshmen, students have a real experience of MIS in operation. A by product of creating an engaging course is increased enrollment in the MIS major. Even students who have never heard of MIS become excited about the major and either switch majors or add it as a double major or minor. Many other books have students study tools and then do a case. By contrast, most of this book is a case. Much like the real world, we introduce tools when needed, and only to the extent needed, to get at each part of the case.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aPike, Jacquelineeauthor1 aKenyo, Laureneauthor1 aPels, Saraheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/46zAccess online version03498nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002800157245005400185264004300239264006900282264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505065900528520167301187542004102860546001602901588004102917650002502958700002702983710003903010856007503049OTLid0000047MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780982043097  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aMcAfee, Prestoneauthor00aIntroduction to Economic AnalysiscPreston McAfee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Economics? -- Chapter 2: Supply and Demand -- Chapter 3: Quantification -- Chapter 4: The U.S. Economy -- Chapter 5: Government Interventions -- Chapter 6: Trade -- Chapter 7: Externalities -- Chapter 8: Public Goods -- Chapter 9: Producer Theory: Costs -- Chapter 10: Producer Theory: Dynamics -- Chapter 11: Investment -- Chapter 12: Consumer Theory -- Chapter 13: Applied Consumer Theory -- Chapter 14: General Equilibrium -- Chapter 15: Monopoly -- Chapter 16: Games and Strategic Behavior -- Chapter 17: Imperfect Competition -- Chapter 18: Information -- Chapter 19: Agency Theory -- Chapter 20: Auctions -- Chapter 21: Antitrust0 aThis book presents standard intermediate microeconomics material and some material that, in the authors' view, ought to be standard but is not. Introductory economics material is integrated. Standard mathematical tools, including calculus, are used throughout. The book easily serves as an intermediate microeconomics text, and can be used for a relatively sophisticated undergraduate who has not taken a basic university course in economics. The focus of this book is on the conceptual tools and not on fluff. As such, it reflects the approach actually adopted by the majority of economists for understanding economic activity. There are lots of models and equations, and no pictures of economists ;-) Economic analysis is used in many situations. When British Petroleum sets the price for Alaskan crude oil, it uses an estimated demand model, both for gasoline consumers and also for the refineries to which BP sells. Economic analysis was used by experts in the antitrust suit brought by the U.S. Department of Justice both to understand Microsoft's incentive to foreclose (eliminate from the market) rival Netscape and consumer behavior in the face of alleged foreclosure. Stock market analysts use economic models to forecast the profits of companies to predict the price of their stocks. When the government forecasts the budget deficit or considers a change in environmental regulations, it uses economic models. This book presents the building blocks of the models in common use by an army of economists thousands of times per day. This book, plus econometrics, provides most of the economic analysis tools to take upper division economics courses of any type.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aLewis, Tracy Reauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/47zAccess online version04649nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245003100162264004300193264009600236264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505053900509520295901048542004104007546001604048588004004064650002604104650003104130710003904161856007504200OTLid0000048MnU20260406020731.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135131  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aIntroduction to Psychology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introducing Psychology -- Chapter 2: Psychological Science -- Chapter 3: Brains, Bodies, and Behavior -- Chapter 4: Sensing and Perceiving -- Chapter 5: States of Consciousness -- Chapter 6: Growing and Developing -- Chapter 7: Learning -- Chapter 8: Remembering and Judging -- Chapter 9: Intelligence and Language -- Chapter 10: Emotions and Motivations -- Chapter 11: Personality -- Chapter 12: Defining Psychological Disorders -- Chapter 13: Treating Psychological Disorders -- Chapter 14: Psychology in Our Social Lives0 aWhen you teach Introduction to Psychology, do you find it difficult — much harder than teaching classes in statistics or research methods? Do you easily give a lecture on the sympathetic nervous system, a lecture on Piaget, and a lecture on social cognition, but struggle with linking these topics together for the student? Do you feel like you are presenting a laundry list of research findings rather than an integrated set of principles and knowledge? Have you wondered how to ensure your course is relevant to your students? Introduction to Psychology utilizes the dual theme of behavior and empiricism to make psychology relevant to intro students. The author wrote this book to help students organize their thinking about psychology at a conceptual level. Five or ten years from now, he does not expect his students to remember the details of most of what he teaches them. However, he does hope that they will remember that psychology matters because it helps us understand behavior and that our knowledge of psychology is based on empirical study. This book is designed to facilitate these learning outcomes, and he has used three techniques to help focus students on behavior: Chapter Openers: Each chapter opens showcasing an interesting real world example of people who dealing with behavioral questions and who can use psychology to help them answer them. The opener is designed to draw the student into the chapter and create an interesting in learning about the topic. Psychology in Everyday Life: Each chapter contains one or two features designed to link the principles from the chapter to real-world applications in business, environment, health, law, learning, and other relevant domains. For instance, the application in Chapter 7 on Development, ”What makes good parents“ applies the concepts of parenting styles in a mini-handbook about parenting, and the application in Chapter 3 is about the difficulties that left-handed people face performing everyday tasks in a right-handed world. Research Foci: Introduction to Psychology emphasizes empiricism throughout, but without making it a distraction from the main story line. Each chapter presents two close-ups on research — well articulated and specific examples of research within the content area, each including a summary of the hypotheses, methods, results, and interpretations. This feature provides a continuous thread that reminds students of the importance of empirical research. The research foci also emphasize the fact that findings are not always predictable ahead of time (dispelling the myth of hindsight bias), and also help students understand how research really works. The author's focus on behavior and empiricism has produced, Introduction to Psychology, a text that is better organized, has fewer chapters, and is somewhat shorter than many of the leading books. Now, you don't have to believe us. Check the book out online or order your desk copy today.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/48zAccess online version04172nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245002800167264004300195264009600238264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505086700511520216001378542004103538546001603579588004003595650002403635650002503659710003903684856007503723OTLid0000050MnU20260406020731.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135193  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF541500aPrinciples of Marketing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What is Marketing? -- Chapter 2: Strategic Planning -- Chapter 3: Consumer Behavior: How People Make Buying Decisions -- Chapter 4: Business Buying Behavior -- Chapter 5: Market Segmenting, Targeting, and Positioning -- Chapter 6: Creating Offerings -- Chapter 7: Developing and Managing Offerings -- Chapter 8: Using Marketing Channels to Create Value for Customers -- Chapter 9: Using Supply Chains to Create Value for Customers -- Chapter 10: Gathering and Using Information: Marketing Research and Market Intelligence -- Chapter 11: Integrated Marketing Communications and the Changing Media Landscape -- Chapter 12: Public Relations, Social Media, and Sponsorships -- Chapter 13: Professional Selling -- Chapter 14: Customer Satisfaction, Loyalty, and Empowerment -- Chapter 15: Price, the Only Revenue Generator -- Chapter 16: The Marketing Plan0 aPrinciples of Marketing teaches the experience and process of actually doing marketing – not just the vocabulary. It carries five dominant themes throughout in order to expose students to marketing in today's environment: Service dominant logic — This textbook employs the term "offering" instead of the more traditional First "P" — product. That is because consumers don't sacrifice value when alternating between a product and a service. They are evaluating the entire experience, whether they interact with a product, a service, or a combination. So the fundamental focus is providing value throughout the value chain, whether that value chain encompasses a product, service, or both. Sustainability — Increasingly, companies are interested in the impact they are having on their local community as well as the overall environment. This is often referred to as the "triple bottom line" of financial, social, and environment performance. Ethics and social responsibility — Following on the sustainability notion is the broader importance of ethics and social responsibility in creating successful organizations. The authors make consistent references to ethical situations throughout chapter coverage, and end of chapter material in most chapters will encompass ethical situations. Global coverage — the authors deliberately entitled Chapter 1 "What is Marketing?" Whether it is today's price of gasoline, the current U.S. presidential race, or Midwestern U.S. farming, almost every industry and company needs strong global awareness. And today's marketing professionals must understand the world in which they and their companies operate. Metrics — Firms today have the potential to gather more information than ever before about their current and potential customers. That information gathering can be costly, but it can also be very revealing. With the potential to capture so much more detail about micro transactions, firms should now be more able to answer "well, what this marketing strategy really worth it?" And "what is the marketing ROI?" And finally, "what is this customer or set of customers worth to us over their lifetime?"1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/50zAccess online version04104nam a2200517 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000900156050001000165050001000175050001100185050001000196050001300206100002500219245006300244264004300307264006900350264001200419300002200431336002600453337002600479338003600505341002800541490002700569505044400596520210701040542004103147546001603188588004103204650002403245650002503269650003403294650002803328650002803356650003403384650002803418700002603446710003903472856007503511OTLid0000051MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936126583  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aLau, Terenceeauthor04aThe Legal and Ethical Environment of BusinesscTerence Lau 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law -- Chapter 2: The Court System -- Chapter 3: Litigation -- Chapter 4: Alternative Dispute Resolution -- Chapter 5: The Constitution -- Chapter 6: Contracts -- Chapter 7: Torts -- Chapter 8: The Property System -- Chapter 9: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 10: Criminal Law -- Chapter 11: Business Organizations -- Chapter 12: Employment Discrimination -- Chapter 13: Business in the Global Legal Environment0 aTerence Lau & Lisa Johnson's The Legal and Ethical Environment of Business is a book for today's student, who expects learning to be comprised not only of substance, but also of interactive exercises and multimedia. This book streamlines the presentation of material to ensure that every page is relevant, engaging, and interesting to undergraduate business students, without losing the depth of coverage that they need to be successful in their academic journeys and in their professional careers. This is not Legal Environment of Business (LEB) ”light.“ Rather, this is LEB without risk of students' eyes glazing over in boredom or from lack of comprehension. This is LEB presented in an exciting way, where every page is interesting to students and relevant to real life. The authors recognize that the sheer volume of information to be covered in a LEB course makes it one of the more challenging courses for the business undergraduate. Not only do typical LEB texts read like the first year curriculum at law school, but also the LEB course is grounded in the humanities, which can make the subject even more demanding for students who are also taking statistics, economics, finance, and accounting. Each chapter contains not only substantive law, but also illustrative videos, interactive exercises for hands-on learning, and discussion questions for critical thought. Additionally, each chapter presents ”A Question of Ethics“ section, which contains real world ethical dilemmas relevant to the topic under study. These videos, exercises, discussion questions, and ethics sections all provide opportunities for students to apply concepts that they are learning in the context of relevant LEB topics that shape or restrain actual decision-makers' actions. It's real world practice in the safety of the classroom environment. Lau & Johnson's The Legal and Ethical Environment of Business is a textbook that students will enjoy reading. This will encourage them to come to class prepared, and free you to teach the kind of course you want to teach. Request a desk copy and see for yourself.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aJohnson, Lisaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/51zAccess online version01875nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002800162245003700190264004300227264005200270264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505032000496520041100816542004101227546001601268588004001284650002401324650002701348710003901375856007501414OTLid0000052MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aGuichard, Davideauthor00aWhitman CalculuscDavid Guichard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWalla Walla, WashingtonbDavid Guichardc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Analytic Geometry -- 2 The Derivative -- 3 Rules for Finding Derivatives -- 4 Transcendental Functions -- 5 Curve Sketching -- 6 Applications of the Derivative -- 7 Integration -- 8 Techniques of Integration -- 9 Applications of Integration -- 10 Polar Coordinates, Parametric Equations -- 11 Sequences and Series0 aAn introductory level single variable calculus book, covering standard topics in differential and integral calculus, and infinite series. Late transcendentals and multivariable versions are also available. This textbook has been used in classes at: Boise State University, Claremont McKenna College, University of Minnesota, University of Puget Sound, Western Connecticut State University, Whitman College.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/52zAccess online version04522nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156245002400169264004300193264009600236264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505076300509520256701272542004103839546001603880588004003896650002603936650002403962650003603986710003904022856007504061OTLid0000053MnU20260406020731.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135285  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.600aWriting for Success 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Writing -- Chapter 2: Writing Basics: What Makes a Good Sentence? -- Chapter 3: Punctuation -- Chapter 4: Working with Words: Which Word Is Right? -- Chapter 5: Help for English Language Learners -- Chapter 6: Writing Paragraphs: Separating Ideas and Shaping Content -- Chapter 7: Refining Your Writing: How Do I Improve My Writing Technique? -- Chapter 8: The Writing Process: How Do I Begin? -- Chapter 9: Writing Essays: From Start to Finish -- Chapter 10: Rhetorical Modes -- Chapter 11: Writing from Research: What Will I Learn? -- Chapter 12: Writing a Research Paper -- Chapter 13: APA and MLA Documentation and Formatting -- Chapter 14: Creating Presentations: Sharing Your Ideas -- Chapter 15: Readings: Examples of Essays0 aWriting for Success is a text that provides instruction in steps, builds writing, reading, and critical thinking, and combines comprehensive grammar review with an introduction to paragraph writing and composition. Beginning with the sentence and its essential elements, this book addresses each concept with clear, concise and effective examples that are immediately reinforced with exercises and opportunities to demonstrate, and reinforce, learning. Each chapter allows your students to demonstrate mastery of the principles of quality writing. With its incremental approach, it can address a range of writing levels and abilities, helping each student in your course prepare for their next writing or university course. Constant reinforcement is provided through examples and exercises, and the text involves students in the learning process through reading, problem-solving, practicing, listening, and experiencing the writing process. Each chapter also has integrated examples that unify the discussion and form a common, easy-to-understand basis for discussion and exploration. This will put your students at ease, and allow for greater absorption of the material. Tips for effective writing are included in every chapter, as well. Thought-provoking scenarios provide challenges and opportunities for collaboration and interaction. These exercises are especially helpful if you incorporate group work in your course. Clear exercises teach sentence and paragraph writing skills that lead to common English composition and research essays. Features: Exercises are integrated in each segment. Each concept is immediately reinforced as soon as it is introduced to keep students on track. Exercises are designed to facilitate interaction and collaboration. This allows for peer-peer engagement, development of interpersonal skills, and promotion of critical thinking skills. Exercises that involve self-editing and collaborative writing are featured. This feature develops and promotes student interest in the areas and content. There are clear internal summaries and effective displays of information. This contributes to ease of access to information and increases the ability of your students to locate desired content. Rule explanations are simplified with clear, relevant, and theme-based examples. This feature provides context that will facilitate learning and increase knowledge retention. There is an obvious structure to the chapter and segment level. This allows for easy adaptation to your existing and changing course needs or assessment outcomes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/53zAccess online version02555nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245004900160264004300209264006100252264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505017100490520128300661542002701944546001601971588004001987650002602027650002602053710003902079856007502118OTLid0000054MnU20260406020654.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aMagnus, P.D.eauthor03aAn Introduction to Formal LogiccP.D. Magnus 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bFecundityc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What is logic? -- Chapter 2: Sentential logic -- Chapter 3: Truth tables -- Chapter 4: Quantified logic -- Chapter 5: Formal semantics -- Chapter 6: Proofs0 aforall x is an introduction to sentential logic and first-order predicate logic with identity, logical systems that significantly influenced twentieth-century analytic philosophy. After working through the material in this book, a student should be able to understand most quantified expressions that arise in their philosophical reading. This books treats symbolization, formal semantics, and proof theory for each language. The discussion of formal semantics is more direct than in many introductory texts. Although forall x does not contain proofs of soundness and completeness, it lays the groundwork for understanding why these are things that need to be proven. Throughout the book, I have tried to highlight the choices involved in developing sentential and predicate logic. Students should realize that these two are not the only possible formal languages. In translating to a formal language, we simplify and profit in clarity. The simplification comes at a cost, and different formal languages are suited to translating different parts of natural language. The book is designed to provide a semester's worth of material for an introductory college course. It would be possible to use the book only for sentential logic, by skipping chapters 4-5 and parts of chapter 6.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/54zAccess online version01340nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001100141050000800152100002400160245003700184264004300221264008800264264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002500474490002700499505007000526520004200596542004100638546001600679588004000695650004100735650002700776700002500803710003900828856007500867OTLid0000057MnU20260409180458.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStitz, Carleauthor00aCollege TrigonometrycCarl Stitz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bStitz Zeager Open Source Mathematicsc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a10 Foundations of Trigonometry -- 11 Applications of Trigonometry0 aCovers chapters 10-11 of Precalculus.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aZeager, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/57zAccess online version03290nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002400162245002800186264004300214264008800257264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002500467490002700492505036200519520172400881542004102605546001602646588004002662650002402702650002702726700002502753710003902778856007502817OTLid0000058MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStitz, Carleauthor00aPrecalculuscCarl Stitz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bStitz Zeager Open Source Mathematicsc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Relations and Functions -- 2 Linear and Quadratic Functions -- 3 Polynomial Functions -- 4 Rational Functions -- 5 Further Topics in Functions -- 6 Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- 7 Hooked on Conics -- 8 Systems of Equations and Matrices -- 9 Sequences and the Binomial Theorem -- 10 Foundations of Trigonometry -- 11 Applications of Trigonometry0 aA casual glance through the Table of Contents of most of the major publishers' College Algebra books reveals nearly isomorphic content in both order and depth. Our Table of Contents shows a different approach, one that might be labeled “Functions First.” To truly use The Rule of Four, that is, in order to discuss each new concept algebraically, graphically, numerically and verbally, it seems completely obvious to us that one would need to introduce functions first. (Take a moment and compare our ordering to the classic “equations first, then the Cartesian Plane and THEN functions” approach seen in most of the major players.) We then introduce a class of functions and discuss the equations, inequalities (with a heavy emphasis on sign diagrams) and applications which involve functions in that class. The material is presented at a level that definitely prepares a student for Calculus while giving them relevant Mathematics which can be used in other classes as well. Graphing calculators are used sparingly and only as a tool to enhance the Mathematics, not to replace it. The answers to nearly all of the computational homework exercises are given in thetext and we have gone to great lengths to write some very thought provoking discussion questions whose answers are not given. One will notice that our exercise sets are much shorter than the traditional sets of nearly 100 “drill and kill” questions which build skill devoid of understanding. Our experience has been that students can do about 15-20 homework exercises a night so we very carefully chose smaller sets of questions which cover all of the necessary skills and get the students thinking more deeply about the Mathematics involved.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aZeager, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/58zAccess online version02289nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003000148245003900178264004300217264005100260264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505096400488520022001452542002701672546001601699588004001715650002301755650002301778710003901801856007501840OTLid0000059MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aCrowell, Benjamineauthor00aLight and MattercBenjamin Crowell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aFullerton, CaliforniabBenjamin Crowellc2020. 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a0 Introduction and review -- 1 Scaling and estimation -- 2 Velocity and relative motion -- 3 Acceleration and free fall -- 4 Force and motion -- 5 Analysis of forces -- 6 Newton's laws in three dimensions -- 7 Vectors -- 8 Vectors and motion -- 9 Circular motion -- 10 Gravity -- 11 Conservation of energy -- 12 Simplifying the energy zoo -- 13 Work: the transfer of mechanical energy -- 14 Conservation of momentum -- 15 Conservation of angular momentum -- 16 Thermodynamics -- 17 Vibrations -- 18 Resonance -- 19 Free waves -- 20 Bounded waves -- 21 Electricity and circuits -- 22 The nonmechanical universe -- 23 Relativity and magnetism -- 24 Electromagnetism -- 25 Capacitance and inductance -- 26 The atom and E=mc$^2$ -- 27 General relativity -- 28 The ray model of light -- 29 Images by reflection -- 30 Images, quantitatively -- 31 Refraction -- 32 Wave optics -- 33 Rules of randomness -- 34 Light as a particle -- 35 Matter as a wave -- 36 The atom0 aThis is an introductory text intended for a one-year introductory course of the type typically taken by biology majors, or for AP Physics B. Algebra and trig are used, and there are optional calculus-based sections.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/59zAccess online version02275nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002700146245003700173250001900210264004300229264006000272264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002500454490002700479505030100506520073100807542002701538546001601565588004001581650003501621650002701656700003301683700003501716710003901751856007501790OTLid0000060MnU20260406020702.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aDiez, David M.eauthor00aOpenIntro StatisticscDavid Diez  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenIntroc2019. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to data. -- 2. Summarizing data. -- 3. Probability. -- 4. Distributions of random variables. -- 5. Foundations for inference. -- 6. Inference for categorical data. -- 7. Inference for numerical data. -- 8. Introduction to linear regression. -- 9. Multiple and logistic regression.0 aOpenIntro Statistics covers a first course in statistics, providing a rigorous introduction to appliedstatistics that is clear, concise, and accessible. This book was written with the undergraduate levelin mind, but it’s also popular in high schools and graduate courses.We hope readers will take away three ideas from this book in addition to forming a foundationof statistical thinking and methods. • Statistics is an applied field with a wide range of practical applications.• You don’t have to be a math guru to learn from real, interesting data.• Data are messy, and statistical tools are imperfect. But, when you understand the strengthsand weaknesses of these tools, you can use them to learn about the world.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aBarr, Christopher D.eauthor1 aCetinkaya-Rundel, Mineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/60zAccess online version03512nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100003000166245003200196250000700228264004300235264006000278264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505145700512520083801969542001602807546001602823588004002839650002302879650002302902700002802925700002302953710003902976856007503015OTLid0000061MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693602  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aUrone, Paul Petereauthor00aCollege PhysicscPaul Urone  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction: The Nature of Science and Physics -- 2. Kinematics -- 3. Two-Dimensional Kinematics -- 4. Dynamics: Force and Newton's Laws of Motion -- 5. Further Applications of Newton's Laws: Friction, Drag, and Elasticity -- 6. Uniform Circular Motion and Gravitation -- 7. Work, Energy, and Energy Resources -- 8. Linear Momentum and Collisions -- 9. Statics and Torque -- 10. Rotational Motion and Angular Momentum -- 11. Fluid Statics -- 12. Fluid Dynamics and Its Biological and Medical Applications -- 13. Temperature, Kinetic Theory, and the Gas Laws -- 14. Heat and Heat Transfer Methods -- 15. Thermodynamics -- 16. Oscillatory Motion and Waves -- 17. Physics of Hearing -- 18. Electric Charge and Electric Field -- 19. Electric Potential and Electric Field -- 20. Electric Current, Resistance, and Ohm's Law -- 21. Circuits and DC Instruments -- 22. Magnetism -- 23. Electromagnetic Induction, AC Circuits, and Electrical Technologies -- 24. Electromagnetic Waves -- 25. Geometric Optics -- 26. Vision and Optical Instruments -- 27. Wave Optics -- 28. Special Relativity -- 29. Quantum Physics -- 30. Atomic Physics -- 31. Radioactivity and Nuclear Physics -- 32. Medical Applications of Nuclear Physics -- 33. Particle Physics -- 34. Frontiers of Physics -- Appendix A. Atomic Masses -- Appendix B. Selected Radioactive Isotopes -- Appendix C. Useful Information -- Appendix D. Glossary of Key Symbols and Notation -- Answer Key -- Index0 aCollege Physics 2e introduces topics conceptually and progresses through clear explanations in the context of career-oriented, practical applications, and meets the scope and sequence of an algebra-based physics course. The narrative of physics and scientific discovery has been even further expanded to focus on including more diverse contributors to the field. Building on the success of the first edition the authors have increased focus on interdisciplinary connections, including enhancements to biological and medical applications. The problem solving approach has been revised to further unify conceptual, analytical, and calculation skills within the learning process, the authors have integrated a wide array of strategies and supports throughout the text for students. View the first edition of College Physics at OpenStax.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aHinrichs, Rogereauthor1 aDirks, Kimeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/61zAccess online version03677nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000700153050001000160245003000170250000700200264004300207264006000250264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002500432490002700457505063300484520176001117542001602877546001602893588004002909650002402949650003102973650002503004700003003029700002903059700002903088710003903117856007503156OTLid0000062MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781711493978  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBL1 4aH1 4aHM58600aIntroduction to Sociology  a3e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 An Introduction to Sociology -- 2 Sociological Research -- 3 Culture -- 4 Society and Social Interaction -- 5 Socialization -- 6 Groups and Organization -- 7 Deviance, Crime, and Social Control -- 8 Media and Technology -- 9 Social Stratification in the United States -- 10 Global Inequality -- 11 Race and Ethnicity -- 12 Gender, Sex, and Sexuality -- 13 Aging and the Elderly -- 14 Relationships, Marriage, and Family -- 15 Religion -- 16 Education -- 17 Government and Politics -- 18 Work and the Economy -- 19 Health and Medicine -- 20 Population, Urbanization, and the Environment -- 21 Social Movements and Social Change0 aIntroduction to Sociology 3e aligns to the topics and objectives of many introductory sociology courses. It is arranged in a manner that provides foundational sociological theories and contexts, then progresses through various aspects of human and societal interactions. The new edition is focused on driving meaningful and memorable learning experiences related to critical thinking about society and culture. The text includes comprehensive coverage of core concepts, discussions and data relevant to a diverse audience, and features that draw learners into the discipline in powerful and personal ways. Overall, Introduction to Sociology 3e aims to center the course and discipline as crucial elements for understanding relationships, society, and civic engagement; the authors seek to lay the foundation for students to apply what they learn throughout their lives and careers. The authors, reviewers, and the entire team worked to build understanding of the causes and impacts of discrimination and prejudice. Introduction to Sociology 3e contains dozens of examples of discrimination and its outcomes regarding social science, society, institutions, and individuals. The text seeks to strike a balance between confronting the damaging aspects of our culture and history and celebrating those who have driven change and overcome challenges. The core discussion of these topics are present in Chapter 11 on Race and Ethnicity, and Chapter 12 on Gender, Sex, and Sexuality, but their causes and effects are extensively discussed in the context of other topics, including education, law enforcement, government, healthcare, the economy, and so on. Together and when connected by an instructor, these elements have potential for deep and lasting effects.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aReligionvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aConerly, Tonja R.eauthor1 aHolmes, Kathleeneauthor1 aTamang, Asha Laleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/62zAccess online version03884nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245006000161264004300221264009600264264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505065700537520204101194542004103235546001603276588004003292650003303332650003103365710003903396856007503435OTLid0000064MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135049  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH100aAmerican Government and Politics in the Information Age 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Communication in the Information Age -- Chapter 2: The Constitution and the Structure of Government Power -- Chapter 3: Federalism -- Chapter 4: Civil Liberties -- Chapter 5: Civil Rights -- Chapter 6: Political Culture and Socialization -- Chapter 7: Public Opinion -- Chapter 8: Participation, Voting, and Social Movements -- Chapter 9: Interest Groups -- Chapter 10: Political Parties -- Chapter 11: Campaigns and Elections -- Chapter 12: Congress -- Chapter 13: The Presidency -- Chapter 14: The Bureaucracy -- Chapter 15: The Courts -- Chapter 16: Policymaking and Domestic Policies -- Chapter 17: Foreign and National Security Policies0 aThis text is a comprehensive introduction to the vital subject of American government and politics. Governments decide who gets what, when, how (See Harold D. Lasswell, Politics: Who Gets What, When, How, [New York: McGraw-Hill, 1936]); they make policies and pass laws that are binding on all a society's members; they decide about taxation and spending, benefits and costs, even life and death. Governments possess power—the ability to gain compliance and to get people under their jurisdiction to obey them—and they may exercise their power by using the police and military to enforce their decisions. However, power need not involve the exercise of force or compulsion; people often obey because they think it is in their interest to do so, they have no reason to disobey, or they fear punishment. Above all, people obey their government because it has authority; its power is seen by people as rightfully held, as legitimate. People can grant their government legitimacy because they have been socialized to do so; because there are processes, such as elections, that enable them to choose and change their rulers; and because they believe that their governing institutions operate justly. Politics is the process by which leaders are selected and policy decisions are made and executed. It involves people and groups, both inside and outside of government, engaged in deliberation and debate, disagreement and conflict, cooperation and consensus, and power struggles. In covering American government and politics, our text introduces the intricacies of the Constitution, the complexities of federalism, the meanings of civil liberties, and the conflicts over civil rights;explains how people are socialized to politics, acquire and express opinions, and participate in political life; describes interest groups, political parties, and elections—the intermediaries that link people to government and politics; details the branches of government and how they operate; and shows how policies are made and affect people's lives.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/64zAccess online version03964nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001300167100002600180245004700206264004300253264006900296264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505068700542520199101229542004103220546001603261588004103277650002403318650002603342650002403368650003603392710003903428856007503467OTLid0000065MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453320181  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aMcLean, Scotteauthor00aBusiness English for SuccesscScott McLean 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Writing Basics: What Makes a Good Sentence? -- Chapter 2: Punctuation -- Chapter 3: Working with Words: Which Word Is Right? -- Chapter 4: Help for English Language Learners -- Chapter 5: Writing Paragraphs: Separating Ideas and Shaping Content -- Chapter 6: Refining Your Writing: How Do I Improve My Writing Technique? -- Chapter 7: The Writing Process: How Do I Begin? -- Chapter 8: Writing Essays: From Start to Finish -- Chapter 9: Effective Business Writing -- Chapter 10: Writing Preparation -- Chapter 11: Writing -- Chapter 12: Revising and Presenting Your Writing -- Chapter 13: Business Writing in Action -- Chapter 14: APA and MLA Documentation and Formatting0 aBusiness English for Success is a creative solution to a common challenge across Business Communication courses: Business English or Business Presentations? Some classes place an equal emphasis on oral and written communication. If that's the case for you check out our text Business Communication for Success. If, however, your class places the emphasis squarely on written communication and writing proficiency, then Business English for Success is for you. Business English for Success provides instruction in steps, builds writing, reading, and critical thinking, and combines comprehensive grammar review with an introduction to paragraph writing and composition. This step-by-step approach provides a clear path to student-centered learning. A wide range of writing levels and abilities are addressed, helping each student prepare for the next writing or university course. The text opens with a discussion on the sentence and then breaks it down into its elemental components, before reconstructing them into effective sentences, paragraphs, and larger assignments. Then, starting in Chapter 9: Effective Business Writing, the discussion applies lessons learned from the previous foundational chapters into common business issues and applications. From paraphrasing and plagiarism to style to the research process, the expectations increase as several common business documents are presented, including text messages and e-mail, memorandums and letters, the business proposal, business report, resume, and the sales message. This textbook has been used in classes at:Arizona Western College, Hostos Community College, Virginia State University, Truckee Meadows Community College, San Jose State University, Concordia University - Irvine, University New Brunswick - Fredericton, Cerritos College, University of Houston - Downtown, Flat World Knowledge University, A-C Central High School, University of The People, Truckee Meadows Community College, Danville Community High School1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/65zAccess online version02994nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245003300158264004300191264009600234264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505060100507520129101108542004102399546001602440588004002456650003402496710003902530856007502569OTLid0000066MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135087  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A400aIntroduction to Criminal Law 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Criminal Law -- Chapter 2: The Legal System in the United States -- Chapter 3: Constitutional Protections -- Chapter 4: The Elements of a Crime -- Chapter 5: Criminal Defenses, Part 1 -- Chapter 6: Criminal Defenses, Part 2 -- Chapter 7: Parties to Crime -- Chapter 8: Inchoate Offenses -- Chapter 9: Criminal Homicide -- Chapter 10: Sex Offenses and Crimes Involving Force, Fear, and Physical Restraint -- Chapter 11: Crimes against Property -- Chapter 12: Crimes against the Public -- Chapter 13: Crimes against the Government -- Chapter 14: Appendix A: Case Listings0 aCriminal Law uses a two-step process to augment learning, called the applied approach. First, after building a strong foundation from scratch, Criminal Law introduces you to crimes and defenses that have been broken down into separate components. It is so much easier to memorize and comprehend the subject matter when it is simplified this way. However, becoming proficient in the law takes more than just memorization. You must be trained to take the laws you have studied and apply them to various fact patterns. Most students are expected to do this automatically, but application must be seen, experienced, and practiced before it comes naturally. Thus the second step of the applied approach is reviewing examples of the application of law to facts after dissecting and analyzing each legal concept. Some of the examples come from cases, and some are purely fictional. All the examples are memorable, even quirky, so they will stick in your mind and be available when you need them the most (like during an exam). After a few chapters, you will notice that you no longer obsess over an explanation that doesn't completely make sense the first time you read it—you will just skip to the example. The examples clarify the principles for you, lightening the workload significantly.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/66zAccess online version04138nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000800154050000900162050000900171100003100180245006800211264004300279264006900322264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505041900568520234200987542004103329546001603370588004103386650003203427650003003459650003803489650002503527700002603552710003903578856007503617OTLid0000067MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453321966  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQE1 4aQA76 4aG1281 aCampbell, Jonathaneauthor00aEssentials of Geographic Information SystemscJonathan Campbell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Map Anatomy -- Chapter 3: Data, Information, and Where to Find Them -- Chapter 4: Data Models for GIS -- Chapter 5: Geospatial Data Management -- Chapter 6: Data Characteristics and Visualization -- Chapter 7: Geospatial Analysis I: Vector Operations -- Chapter 8: Geospatial Analysis II: Raster Data -- Chapter 9: Cartographic Principles -- Chapter 10: GIS Project Management0 aEssentials of Geographic Information Systems integrates key concepts behind the technology with practical concerns and real-world applications. Recognizing that many potential GIS users are nonspecialists or may only need a few maps, this book is designed to be accessible, pragmatic, and concise. Essentials of Geographic Information Systems also illustrates how GIS is used to ask questions, inform choices, and guide policy. From the melting of the polar ice caps to privacy issues associated with mapping, this book provides a gentle, yet substantive, introduction to the use and application of digital maps, mapping, and GIS. In today's world, learning involves knowing how and where to search for information. In some respects, knowing where to look for answers and information is arguably just as important as the knowledge itself. Because Essentials of Geographic Information Systems is concise, focused, and directed, readers are encouraged to search for supplementary information and to follow up on specific topics of interest on their own when necessary. Essentials of Geographic Information Systems provides the foundations for learning GIS, but readers are encouraged to construct their own individual frameworks of GIS knowledge. The benefits of this approach are two-fold. First, it promotes active learning through research. Second, it facilitates flexible and selective learning—that is, what is learned is a function of individual needs and interest. Since GIS and related geospatial and navigation technology change so rapidly, a flexible and dynamic text is necessary in order to stay current and relevant. Though essential concepts in GIS tend to remain constant, the situations, applications, and examples of GIS are fluid and dynamic. Though this book is intended for use in introductory GIS courses, Essentials of Geographic Information Systems will also appeal to the large number of certificate, professional, extension, and online programs in GIS that are available today. In addition to providing readers with the tools necessary to carry out spatial analyses, Essentials of Geographic Information Systems outlines valuable cartographic guidelines for maximizing the visual impact of your maps. The book also describes effective GIS project management solutions that commonly arise in the modern workplace.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks1 aShin, MIchaeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/67zAccess online version03247nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001100152100002900163245007300192264004300265264006900308264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505030100554520170700855542004102562546001602603588004102619650002502660650002602685650002402711710003902735856007502774OTLid0000068MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453311455  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aPE14081 aFallows, Randalleauthor00aExploring PerspectivesbA Concise Guide to AnalysiscRandall Fallows 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Analysis for Multiple Perspectives -- Chapter 2: Setting the Stage for Writing -- Chapter 3: Developing Assertions: From a Close Reading of Examples -- Chapter 4: Explanations and Significance: Developing Your Analysis -- Chapter 5: The Analytical Essay: Expressing Your Points of View0 aThe reason why Randall Fallows wrote Exploring Perspectives: A Concise Guide to Analysis is simple: to help give students a better understanding of how to discover, develop, and revise an analytical essay. Here is how his 5 chapter book goes about doing just that: The first two chapters focus on the nature of an analysis and what's involved in writing an analytical essay. Randall shows that analysis consists of a balance of assertions (statements which present their viewpoints or launch an exploration of their concerns), examples (specific passages/scenes/events which inspire these views), explanations (statements that reveal how the examples support the assertions), and significance (statements which reveal the importance of their study to personal and/or cultural issues). After showing why each feature should be present throughout an essay, he reveals how to "set the stage" for producing one of their own. He first helps students to evaluate their own views on a subject and to examine how these views emerge from their own experiences, values and judgments. He, then, shows them how to research what others have said about the subject and provides suggestions for evaluating and incorporating this research into their own perspectives. Finally, Randall discusses the nature of writing, not as a linear procedure, but as a recursive process where the discovery and clarification of a concept occur simultaneously. The remaining three chapters reveal more specific advice on how to develop an analytical essay. Exploring Perspectives: A Concise Guide to Analysis by Randall Fallows is a great text to prepare any student to write analytical essays for the argument and persuasion courses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/68zAccess online version05236nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002700166245007700193264004300270264006900313264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505094900559520303901508542004104547546001604588588004104604650002504645650002304670700003104693710003904724856007504763OTLid0000069MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453322307  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aAverill, Bruceeauthor00aGeneral ChemistrybPrinciples, Patterns, and ApplicationscBruce Averill 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Chemistry -- Chapter 2: Molecules, Ions, and Chemical Formulas -- Chapter 3: Chemical Reactions -- Chapter 4: Reactions in Aqueous Solution -- Chapter 5: Energy Changes in Chemical Reactions -- Chapter 6: The Structure of Atoms -- Chapter 7: The Periodic Table and Periodic Trends -- Chapter 8: Ionic versus Covalent Bonding -- Chapter 9: Molecular Geometry and Covalent Bonding Models -- Chapter 10: Gases -- Chapter 11: Liquids -- Chapter 12: Solids -- Chapter 13: Solutions -- Chapter 14: Chemical Kinetics -- Chapter 15: Chemical Equilibrium -- Chapter 16: Aqueous Acid–Base Equilibriums -- Chapter 17: Solubility and Complexation Equilibriums -- Chapter 18: Chemical Thermodynamics -- Chapter 19: Electrochemistry -- Chapter 20: Nuclear Chemistry -- Chapter 21: Periodic Trends and the s-Block Elements -- Chapter 22: The p-Block Elements -- Chapter 23: The d-Block Elements -- Chapter 24: Organic Compounds --0 aThe overall goal of the authors with General Chemistry: Principles, Patterns, and Applications was to produce a text that introduces the students to the relevance and excitement of chemistry. Although much of first-year chemistry is taught as a service course, Bruce and Patricia feel there is no reason that the intrinsic excitement and potential of chemistry cannot be the focal point of the text and the course. So, they emphasize the positive aspects of chemistry and its relationship to students' lives, which requires bringing in applications early and often. In addition, the authors feel that many first year chemistry students have an enthusiasm for biologically and medically relevant topics, so they use an integrated approach in their text that includes explicit discussions of biological and environmental applications of chemistry. Topics relevant to materials science are also introduced to meet the more specific needs of engineering students. To facilitate integration of such material, simple organic structures, nomenclature, and reactions are introduced very early in the text, and both organic and inorganic examples are used wherever possible. This approach emphasizes the distinctions between ionic and covalent bonding, thus enhancing the students' chance of success in the organic chemistry course that traditionally follows general chemistry. Finally, the authors made a conscious effort to treat material that has traditionally been relegated to boxes, and thus perhaps perceived as peripheral by the students, by incorporating it into the text to serve as a learning tool. To begin the discussion of chemistry rapidly, the traditional first chapter introducing units, significant figures, conversion factors, dimensional analysis, and so on, has been reorganized. The material has been placed in the chapters where the relevant concepts are first introduced, thus providing three advantages: Eliminates the tedium of the traditional approach, which introduces mathematical operations at the outset, and thus avoids the perception that chemistry is a mathematics course; Avoids the early introduction of operations such as logarithms and exponents, which are typically not encountered again for several chapters and may easily be forgotten when they are needed; and Provides a review for those students who have already had relatively sophisticated high school chemistry and math courses, although the sections are designed primarily for students unfamiliar with the topic. Consider this text for your course if you are interested in In summary, a text that represents a step in the evolution of general chemistry texts toward one that reflects the increasing overlap between chemistry and other disciplines. Most importantly, if you want a text that discusses exciting and relevant aspects of biological, environmental, and materials science that are usually relegated to the last few chapters, in a format that allows the you to tailor the emphasis to the needs of the class. Request your desk copy today.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aEldredge, Patriciaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/69zAccess online version01963nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100002600159245003900185264004300224264008400267264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505024200528520043600770542004101206546001601247588004001263650002601303650002401329650002301353700002601376700002501402710003901427856007501466OTLid0000070MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aBrown, Noreeneauthor00aBeginning Excel 2019cNoreen Brown 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2019. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - Fundamental Skills -- Chapter 2 - Mathematical Computations -- Chapter 3 - Formulas, Functions, Logical and Lookup Functions -- Chapter 4 - Presenting Data with Charts -- Chapter 5 - Tables -- Chapter 6 - Multiple Sheet Files0 aThis textbook was written for a community college introductory course in spreadsheets utilizing Microsoft Excel. While the figures shown utilize Excel 2019, the textbook was written to be applicable to other versions of Excel as well. The book introduces new users to the basics of spreadsheets and is appropriate for students in any major who have not used Excel before. This textbook includes instructions for Excel for Mac also.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aLave, Barbaraeauthor1 aRomey, Julieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/70zAccess online version03826nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167245004400178264004300222264009600265264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505056400538520202901102542004103131546001603172588004003188650002403228650003603252650002603288710003903314856007503353OTLid0000071MnU20260406020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135117  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.400aBeginning Management of Human Resources 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Role of Human Resources -- Chapter 2: Developing and Implementing Strategic HRM Plans -- Chapter 3: Diversity and Multiculturalism -- Chapter 4: Recruitment -- Chapter 5: Selection -- Chapter 6: Compensation and Benefits -- Chapter 7: Retention and Motivation -- Chapter 8: Training and Development -- Chapter 9: Successful Employee Communication -- Chapter 10: Managing Employee Performance -- Chapter 11: Employee Assessment -- Chapter 12: Working with Labor Unions -- Chapter 13: Safety and Health at Work -- Chapter 14: International HRM --0 aHuman Resource Management teaches HRM strategies and theories that any manager—not just those in HR—needs to know about recruiting, selecting, training, and compensating people. Most students will be managing people at some point in their careers and not necessarily in a human resource management capacity. As businesses cut back, they may outsource HR duties to outside vendors. Or, in smaller businesses, the HR department is sometimes small or non-existent, and managers from other departments have to perform their own HRM. Therefore, teaching HRM from the perspective of a general manager, in addition to an HR manager, provides more relevance to students' careers and will give them a competitive advantage in the workplace. This text also provides practical applications of theory relevant to today's workplace. You won't find discussions about “posting vacancies on a job board” or “sending memos.” In the real world, HRM leverages technology in every aspect of the job—from online training modules to technology for better managing flex-time workers and telecommuters. Consider how most companies have gone “paperless” with pay stubs by using software. While such technology has made HRM easier, it has also created a new set of challenges. For example, how does a manager actually implement a new pay system? Therefore, it's important for students to understand what kinds of platforms exist in today's workplace to enhance their effectiveness as future managers. The conversational style of Human Resource Management engages students, while the academic rigor of its content provides them with the tools that any manager needs—whether they work in HR or a different department. PLUS it offers an array of supplements that gives them practice creating real HR documents and role-playing real HR scenarios. Add value to your students' education, enhance the relevance of your curriculum, and make your students more employable by adopting this book for your HRM class. Read it now online today!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/71zAccess online version04670nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100003100167245004400198264004300242264006900285264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505091000531520253901441542004103980546001604021588004104037650002404078650002604102700003004128710003904158856007504197OTLid0000072MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453312995  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aCarpenter, Mason Aeauthor00aInternational BusinesscMason Carpenter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: International Trade and Foreign Direct Investment -- Chapter 3: Culture and Business -- Chapter 4: World Economies -- Chapter 5: Global and Regional Economic Cooperation and Integration -- Chapter 6: International Monetary System -- Chapter 7: Foreign Exchange and the Global Capital Markets -- Chapter 8: International Expansion and Global Market Opportunity Assessment -- Chapter 9: Exporting, Importing, and Global Sourcing -- Chapter 10: Strategy and International Business -- Chapter 11: Global Entrepreneurship and Intrapreneurship -- Chapter 12: Winning through Effective, Global Talent Management -- Chapter 13: Harnessing the Engine of Global Innovation -- Chapter 14: Competing Effectively through Global Marketing, Distribution, and Supply-Chain Management -- Chapter 15: Understanding the Roles of Finance and Accounting in Global Competitive Advantage --0 aInternational Business is one of the most challenging and exciting courses to teach in the Business School. To teach a current, dynamic and complete course you need a textbook by authors as passionate and informed about International Business as you are. Carpenter and Dunung's International Business: The Opportunities and Challenges of a Flat World provides exploration into building, leading, and thriving in global organizations in an increasingly flat world. The authors define ”Flat world“ as one where service industries that dwarf manufacturing industries in terms of scale and scope, an Internet that pervades life and work, and networks define modern businesses, whether service or manufacturing. Carpenter and Dunung's text is designed to speak to technologically-savvy students who see national borders as bridges and not barriers. The authors use the lexicon of international business, and additionally, develop students' knowledge of international contexts with the aim that they may launch, run, and work in any organization that is global in scope (or is wrestling with global competition or other global threats). The textbook is organized in 5 Sections: Section 1 introduces the global business course and concludes with a chapter on seizing global opportunities. Section 2 develops student knowledge about key facets of the global business environment, while Section 3 develops knowledge about how a student or organization can exploit opportunities in that global environment. Section 4 is devoted to entrepreneurship in a flat world — this section will explore why the entrepreneurial context is changing, provide lenses for identifying and capitalizing on entrepreneurial opportunities, and Section 5 shows how key organizational activities can be managed for global effectiveness. Every chapter has five enumerated learning objectives, each of these five sections concludes with a short summary (”Key Takeaways“) and five review questions. In addition, each chapter concludes with a mini case on a unique global business that encompasses the topics shown in the chapter. The authors even provide a set of end-of-chapter questions that are mapped to AACSB learning standards, so that you will be able to measure how well students are grasping course content that aligns with the AACSB guidelines. Request a desk copy of Carpenter and Dunung's International Business: The Opportunities and Challenges of a Flat World to experience its current and progressive look at International Business for yourself.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aDunung, Sanjyot Peauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/72zAccess online version02509nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002900167245003900196264004300235264005200278264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505066800504520069001172542004101862546001601903588004001919650002401959650002601983710003902009856007502048OTLid0000073MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781949373950  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aReed, Kennedy B.eauthor00aStrategic ManagementcKennedy Reed 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Chapter 1: Mastering Strategy: Art and Science -- II. Chapter 2: Assessing Organizational Performance -- III. Chapter 3: Evaluating the External Environment -- IV. Chapter 4: Evaluating the Internal Environment -- V. Chapter 5: Synthesis of Strategic Issues and Analysis -- VI. Chapter 6: Selecting Business-Level Strategies -- VII. Chapter 7: Innovation Strategies -- VIII. Chapter 8: Selecting Corporate-Level Strategies -- IX. Chapter 9: Competing in International Markets -- X. Chapter 10: Executing Strategy through Organizational Design -- XI. Chapter 11: Leading an Ethical Organization: Corporate Governance, Corporate Ethics, and Social Responsibility0 aSTRATEGIC MANAGEMENT offers an introduction to the key topics and themes of strategic management. The authors draw on examples of familiar companies and personalities to illustrate the different strategies used by today’s firms—and how they go about implementing those strategies. Students will learn how to conduct a case analysis, measure organizational performance, and conduct external and internal analyses. In short, they will understand how organizations operate at the strategic level to be successful. An older version of Mastering Strategic Management (2015) by University of Minnesota Libraries Publishing can be found here: https://open.lib.umn.edu/strategicmanagement/1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/73zAccess online version05855nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245003600162264004300198264009600241264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505054800511520415401059542004105213546001605254588004005270650002605310650003105336710003905367856007505406OTLid0000074MnU20260406020731.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135209  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aPrinciples of Social Psychology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introducing Social Psychology -- Chapter 2: Social Learning and Social Cognition -- Chapter 3: Social Affect -- Chapter 4: The Self -- Chapter 5: Attitudes, Behavior, and Persuasion -- Chapter 6: Perceiving Others -- Chapter 7: Influencing and Conforming -- Chapter 8: Liking and Loving -- Chapter 9: Helping and Altruism -- Chapter 10: Aggression -- Chapter 11: Working Groups: Performance and Decision Making -- Chapter 12: Stereotypes, Prejudice, and Discrimination -- Chapter 13: Competition and Cooperation in Our Social Worlds0 aHave you ever had trouble teaching the various topics of social psychology and fitting them together to form a coherent field? Unnamed Author felt like he was presenting a laundry list of ideas, research studies, and phenomena, rather than an integrated set of principles and knowledge. He wondered how his students could be expected to remember and understand the many phenomena that social psychologists study? How could they tell what was most important? It was then that he realized a fresh approach to a Social Psychology textbook was needed to structure and integrate student learning; thus, Principles of Social Psychology was born. This textbook is based on a critical thinking approach, and its aim is to get students thinking actively and conceptually – with a greater focus on the forest than the trees. Yes, there are right and wrong answers, but the answers are not the only thing. What is perhaps even more important is how students get to the answers – the thinking process itself. To help students better grasp the big picture of social psychology, and to provide you with a theme that you can use to organize your lectures, Unnamed Author's text has a consistent pedagogy across the chapters. The presentation is organized around two underlying principles that are essential to social psychology: Person and Situation (the classic treatment)The ABCs of social psychology (Affect, Behavior, and Cognition) The author believes these dimensions are fundamental, that they are extremely heuristic, and that they are what he hopes your students (and his) will learn and remember. You may find that this organization represents a more explicit representation of what you're already doing in your lectures. Although the pedagogy is consistent, it is not constraining. You can and will use these dimensions more in some lectures than in others, and you will find them more useful for some topics than others. But they will always work for you when you are ready for them. Perhaps most important, a focus on these dimensions helps us bridge the gap between the textbook, the real-life experiences of our students, and our class presentations. It is almost impossible to can't cover every phenomenon in your lectures – you can naturally let the textbook fill in the details. The goal of Principles of Social Psychology is to allow you to rest assured that the text has provided your students with the foundations– the fundamental language of social psychology – from which you can build as you see fit. And when you turn to ask students to apply their learning to real life, you can know that they will be doing this as social psychologists do – using a basic underlying framework. A note about the organization of this text: it moves systematically from lower to higher levels of analysis – a method that makes sense to students. On the other hand, Unnamed Author insists, the chapter order should not constrain you – choose a different order if you wish. Chapter 1 presents an introduction to social psychology and the research methods in social psychology, Chapter 2 presents the fundamental principles of social cognition, and Chapter 3 focuses on social affect. The remainder of the text is organized around three levels of analysis, moving systematically from the individual level (Chapters 4-6), to the level of social interaction (Chapters 7-10) to the group and cultural level (Chapters 11-13). Rather than relying on “modules” or “appendices” of applied materials, this text integrates applied concepts into the text itself. This approach is consistent with the underlying theme that if students learn to think like social psychologists they will easily and naturally apply that knowledge to any and all applications. The following applications are woven throughout the text: Business and Consumer behavior Environment Health Law It is the "thinking like a social psychologist" theme, structured approach and new pedagogy (like research foci and Social Psychology in the Public Interest), that will make teaching and learning Social Psychology from this textbook an even more exciting and rewarding endeavor.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/74zAccess online version02622nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155100003200162245005200194250002500246264004300271264006200314264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002500498490002700523505049400550520083001044542004101874546001601915588004001931650002601971650003101997700002802028700003002056710003902086856007502125OTLid0000075MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781999198107  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aJhangiani, Rajiv S.eauthor00aResearch Methods in PsychologycRajiv Jhangiani  a4th American Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Science of Psychology -- Chapter 2: Overview of the Scientific Method -- Chapter 3: Research Ethics -- Chapter 4: Psychological Measurement -- Chapter 5: Experimental Research -- Chapter 6: Non-experimental Research -- Chapter 7: Survey Research -- Chapter 8: Quasi-Experimental Research -- Chapter 9: Factorial Designs -- Chapter 10: Single-Subject Research -- Chapter 11: Presenting Your Research -- Chapter 12: Descriptive Statistics -- Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics0 aThis fourth edition (published in 2019) was co-authored by Rajiv S. Jhangiani (Kwantlen Polytechnic University), Carrie Cuttler (Washington State University), and Dana C. Leighton (Texas A&M University—Texarkana) and is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License. Revisions throughout the current edition include changing the chapter and section numbering system to better accommodate adaptions that remove or reorder chapters; continued reversion from the Canadian edition; general grammatical edits; replacement of “he/she” to “they” and “his/her” to “their”; removal or update of dead links; embedded videos that were not embedded; moved key takeaways and exercises from the end of each chapter section to the end of each chapter; a new cover design.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCuttler, Carrieeauthor1 aLeighton, Dana C.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/75zAccess online version05055nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100003600158245006000194264004300254264006900297264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505076500543520308301308542004104391546001604432588004104448650003604489700004204525710003904567856007504606OTLid0000076MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453317259  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aCeniza-Levine, Carolineeauthor00aSix Steps To Job Search SuccesscCaroline Ceniza-Levine 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Your Life Dictates Your Job Search, Not the Reverse -- Chapter 2: Overview of the Six-Step Job Search Process -- Chapter 3: Step 1: Identify Your Job Search Targets -- Chapter 4: Step 2: Create a Compelling Marketing Campaign, Part I: Résumé -- Chapter 5: Step 2 (Continued): Create a Compelling Marketing Campaign, Part II: Cover Letter, Pitch, and Online Profile -- Chapter 6: Step 3: Conduct In-Depth Research -- Chapter 7: Step 4: Network Effectively -- Chapter 8: Step 4 (Continued): Master the Interview -- Chapter 9: Step 5: Stay Motivated and Organized and Troubleshoot Your Search -- Chapter 10: Step 6: Negotiate and Close Your Offer -- Chapter 11: Social Media and the Job Search -- Chapter 12: From Job Search Success to Career Success0 aThis book is a practical discussion of six actionable steps that students can take to land a job regardless of the market. Whether the estimate is 25% unemployment or single-digit unemployment, that number doesn't apply to any one student. For any individual, the unemployment rate is 0% or 100%. One either has a job or doesn't. When any one person is looking for a job and there is 10% unemployment, that person just wants to be one of the nine people that has a job. Students might think even that one job is beyond their grasp. They think they don't have the right degree. Their school is in a different location than where they'd like to work. Not enough jobs are listed or employers are visiting the campus. This type of thinking cedes control of a student's search to outside forces. It is not up to professors, schools, career services support, or recruiters to get students a job. This book is about the proactive things that students can do to get themselves a job. In the first chapter, Six Steps to Job Search Success covers the different types of job searches: full-time job after graduation, internship, return to workforce, career change, relocation. The rest of the book is about how, regardless of the type of job search or overall market, one can be proactive and successfully land a job. This textbook outlines a structured approach, actionable steps, and stresses the importance of a student's willingness to see this through. Six Steps to Job Search Success provides that structure with six steps anyone can take to: Identify the types of jobs they'd like (Step 1: Identify Your Target) Position themselves for these jobs (Step 2: Create A Powerful Marketing Campaign) Figure out what employers are looking for (Step 3: Research) Develop relationships with prospective employers (Step 4: Network and Interview) Stay connected throughout the decision-making process and fix any problems that might arise (Step 5: Stay Motivated; Organized and Troubleshoot Your Search) Complete their search (Step 6: Negotiate and Close the Offer). Connie and Caroline are both former recruiters with over 40 years of combined hiring experience between them. Connie led recruiting areas for three Fortune 500 companies, and Caroline led recruiting in-house for a Fortune 500 but also as an external recruiter for established firms and start-ups. They've hired thousands of people from interns to senior executives. They developed the process detailed in Six Steps to Job Search Success based on how hiring works. The authors explain that in reality, the ability to look for a job and land a job is a separate and distinct skill than any of the skills required for the job itself. The goal of their book is share their job search techniques with your students so that your students can take control of their job search, add an exceptional new job to their career and enjoy the life rewards a satisfying career can bring. If you are interested in a practical approach that can deliver results, this book is for you and your course. Order a desk copy today and see for yourself.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aThanasoulis-Cerrachio, Connieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/76zAccess online version02432nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156245006900166264004300235264009500278264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505079300550520041301343542004101756546001601797588004001813650002601853650002401879650002901903710003901932856007501971OTLid0000077MnU20260406020703.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135254  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aP91.300aStand up, Speak out - The Practice and Ethics of Public Speaking 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2023. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Why Public Speaking Matters Today -- Chapter 2: Ethics Matters: Understanding the Ethics of Public Speaking -- Chapter 3: Speaking Confidently -- Chapter 4: The Importance of Listening -- Chapter 5: Audience Analysis -- Chapter 6: Finding a Purpose and Selecting a Topic -- Chapter 7: Researching Your Speech -- Chapter 8: Supporting Ideas and Building Arguments -- Chapter 9: Introductions Matter: How to Begin a Speech Effectively -- Chapter 10: Creating the Body of a Speech -- Chapter 11: Concluding with Power -- Chapter 12: Outlining -- Chapter 13: The Importance of Language -- Chapter 14: Delivering the Speech -- Chapter 15: Presentation Aids: Design and Usage -- Chapter 16: Informative Speaking -- Chapter 17: Persuasive Speaking -- Chapter 18: Speaking to Entertain0 aStand up, Speak out: The Practice and Ethics of Public Speaking features two key themes. First it focuses on helping students become more seasoned and polished public speakers, and second is its emphasis on ethics in communication. It is this practical approach and integrated ethical coverage that setsStand up, Speak out: The Practice and Ethics of Public Speakingapart from the other texts in this market.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/77zAccess online version03782nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000900153050000900162245006400171264004300235264009600278264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505041200551520212200963542004103085546001603126588004003142650003003182650002503212650003303237710003903270856007503309OTLid0000078MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135278  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aG128 4aJA7100aWorld Regional Geography - People, Places and Globalization 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to the World -- Chapter 2: Europe -- Chapter 3: Russia -- Chapter 4: North America -- Chapter 5: Middle America -- Chapter 6: South America -- Chapter 7: Subsaharan Africa -- Chapter 8: North Africa and Southwest Asia -- Chapter 9: South Asia -- Chapter 10: East Asia -- Chapter 11: Southeast Asia -- Chapter 12: Australia and New Zealand -- Chapter 13: The Pacific and Antarctica --0 aWorld Regional Geography: People, Places and Globalization is designed for students to experience and study as much of the world as possible within a limited amount of time. It gives students the fundamental concepts and the latest data regarding world places in a concise, easy-to-read format. This World Regional Geography textbook focuses on the primary issues that have created our cultural and societal structures, and presents them within a framework for global understanding. A pattern of development is outlined from the imprint that European colonialism had on culture to the impact that giant retail corporations like Wal-Mart have on consumerism. Within this framework, the textbook takes a regional approach to globalization and world geography, as each chapter focuses on one subject or region. The first unit covers the basic concepts of location, the environment, and global economic dynamics. Then, these basic concepts, theories, and principles are presented for each region on a chapter-by-chapter basis. The basic concepts are covered using real world examples to provide purpose and relevance for the students. And each lesson begins with learning objectives and ends with key takeaways to stimulate critical thinking about each topic or region. Basic spatial concepts are also tracked throughout the text to connect ideas and apply concepts to every region of the world. Special sections on relevant topics are also distributed throughout the book. With each chapter focused on one region, the textbook provides professors with some course management and flexibility. The text is also brief enough to provide additional flexibility if professors want to include specialized information from outside sources. World Regional Geography: People, Places and Globalization provides students with a working knowledge of world geography in an easy-to-read format. Basic geographic concepts of world places are presented in concise chapters, and each chapter provides a foundational framework for understanding the development patterns of world regions. See for yourself and take a look at the book today!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/78zAccess online version02488nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100003200161245008300193250002200276264004300298264008500341264001200426300002200438336002600460337002600486338003600512341002800548490002700576505048500603520072701088542004101815546001601856588004001872650003301912650003101945710003901976856007502015OTLid0000079MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781475146127  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aBhattacherjee, Anoleauthor00aSocial Science ResearchbPrinciples, Methods and PracticescAnol Bhattacherjee  a(Revised edition) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- Part I. Main Body -- Science and scientific research -- Thinking like a researcher -- The research process -- Theories in scientific research -- Research design -- Measurement of constructs -- Scale reliability and validity -- Sampling -- Survey research -- Experimental research -- Case research -- Interpretive research -- Qualitative analysis -- Quantitative analysis: Descriptive statistics -- Quantitative analysis: Inferential statistics -- Research ethics0 aThis book is designed to introduce doctoral and postgraduate students to the process of conducting scientific research in the social sciences, business, education, public health, and related disciplines. It is a one-stop, comprehensive, and compact source for foundational concepts in behavioural research, and can serve as a standalone text or as a supplement to research readings in any doctoral seminar or research methods class. This book is currently being used as a research text at universities in 216 countries, across six continents and has been translated into seven different languages. To receive updates on this book, including the translated versions, please follow the author on Facebook or Twitter @Anol_B.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/79zAccess online version01893nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007900171264004300250264006700293264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505053900537520011301076542001601189546001601205588004001221650003201261650003701293700002501330700002601355710003901381856007501420OTLid0000080MnU20260406020653.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aDowney, Alleneauthor00aHow to Think Like a Computer ScientistbLearning with PythoncAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 The way of the program -- 2 Variables, expressions and statements -- 3 Functions -- 4 Conditionals and recursion -- 5 Fruitful functions -- 6 Iteration -- 7 Strings -- 8 Lists -- 9 Tuples -- 10 Dictionaries -- 11 Files and exceptions -- 12 Classes and objects -- 13 Classes and functions -- 14 Classes and methods -- 15 Sets of objects -- 16 Inheritance -- 17 Linked lists -- 18 Stacks -- 19 Queues -- 20 Trees -- Appendix A: Debugging -- Appendix B: Creating a new data type -- Appendix C: Recommendations for further reading Index0 aHow to Think Like a Computer Scientist: Learning with Python is an introduction to programming using Python.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aElkner, Jeffeauthor1 aMeyers, Chriseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/80zAccess online version02425nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002600136245004600162250001600208264004300224264006700267264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505030300511520101700814542003001831546001601861588004001877650003201917710003901949856007501988OTLid0000082MnU20260406020212.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Alleneauthor00aPhysical Modeling in MATLABcAllen Downey  aVersion 4.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Modeling and Simulation -- Scripts -- Loops -- Vectors -- Functions -- Conditionals -- Zero-Finding -- Functions of Vectors -- Ordinary Differential Equations -- Systems of ODEs -- Second-Order Systems -- Two Dimensions -- Optimization -- Springs and Things -- Under the Hood -- Glossary0 aModeling and simulation are powerful tools for explaining the world, making predictions, designing things that work, and making them work better. Learning to use these tools can be difficult; this book is my attempt to make the experience as enjoyable and productive as possible. By reading this book — and working on the exercises — you will learn some programming, some modeling, and some simulation: With basic programming skills, you can create models for a wide range of physical systems. My goal is to help you develop these skills in a way you can apply immediately to real-world problems. This book presents the entire modeling process, including model selection, analysis, simulation, and validation. I explain this process in Chapter 1, and there are examples throughout the book. Simulation is an approach to modeling that uses computer programs to implement models and generate predictions. This book shows how simulations are used to run experiments, answer questions, and guide decision-making.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/82zAccess online version02495nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245004800165264004300213264006700256264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002500445490002700470505034400497520106100841542004101902546001601943588004001959650003201999710003902031856007502070OTLid0000083MnU20260406020236.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor04aThe Little Book of SemaphorescAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Semaphores -- 3 Basic synchronization patterns -- 4 Classical synchronization problems -- 5 Less classical synchronization problems -- 6 Not-so-classical problems -- 7 Not remotely classical problems -- 8 Synchronization in Python -- 9 Synchronization in C -- A Cleaning up Python threads -- B Cleaning up POSIX threads0 aThe Little Book of Semaphores is a free (in both senses of the word) textbook that introduces the principles of synchronization for concurrent programming. In most computer science curricula, synchronization is a module in an Operating Systems class. OS textbooks present a standard set of problems with a standard set of solutions, but most students don't get a good understanding of the material or the ability to solve similar problems. The approach of this book is to identify patterns that are useful for a variety of synchronization problems and then show how they can be assembled into solutions. After each problem, the book offers a hint before showing a solution, giving students a better chance of discovering solutions on their own. The book covers the classical problems, including "Readers-writers," "Producer-consumer", and "Dining Philosophers." In addition, it collects a number of not-so-classical problems, some written by the author and some by other teachers and textbook writers. Readers are invited to create and submit new problems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/83zAccess online version05473nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155050001000168050001300178100002900191245004700220250001700267264004300284264006400327264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505049100568520361101059542003704670546001604707588004104723650003604764650003304800650004204833650003804875710003904913856007504952OTLid0000085MnU20260406020417.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781616100940  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTP155 4aTA1-2040 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aBar-Meir, Genickeauthor00aBasics of Fluid MechanicscGenick Bar-Meir  aver. 0.6.9.a 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPotto Projectc2021. 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Fluid Mechanics -- 2 Review of Thermodynamics -- 3 Review of Mechanics -- 4 Fluids Statics -- I Integral Analysis -- 5 Mass Conservation -- 6 Momentum Conservation -- 7 Energy Conservation -- II Differential Analysis -- 8 Differential Analysis -- 9 Dimensional Analysis -- 10 External Flow -- 11 Internal Flow -- 12 Potential Flow -- 13 Compressible Flow One Dimensional -- 14 Compressible Flow 2-Dimensional -- 15 Multi-Phase Flow -- A Mathematics For Fluid Mechanics0 aThe topic of fluid mechanics is common to several disciplines: mechanical engineering, aerospace engineering, chemical engineering, and civil engineering. In fact, it is also related to disciplines like industrial engineering, and electrical engineering. While the emphasis is somewhat different in this book, the common material is presented and hopefully can be used by all. One can only admire the wonderful advances done by the previous geniuses who work in this field. In this book it is hoped to insert, what and when a certain model is suitable than other models. One of the difference in this book is the insertion of the introduction to multiphase flow. Clearly, multiphase is an advance topic. However, some minimal familiarity can be helpful for many engineers who have to deal with non pure single phase fluid. This book is the third book in the series of POTTO project books. POTTO project books are open content textbooks so everyone are welcome to joint in. The topic of fluid mechanics was chosen just to fill the introduction chapter to compressible flow. During the writing it became apparent that it should be a book in its own right. In writing the chapter on fluid statics, there was a realization that it is the best chapter written on this topic. It is hoped that the other chapters will be as good this one. This book is written in the spirit of my adviser and mentor E.R.G. Eckert. Eckert, aside from his research activity, wrote the book that brought a revolution in the education of the heat transfer. Up to Egret's book, the study of heat transfer was without any dimensional analysis. He wrote his book because he realized that the dimensional analysis utilized by him and his adviser (for the post doc), Ernst Schmidt, and their colleagues, must be taught in engineering classes. His book met strong criticism in which some called to "burn" his book. Today, however, there is no known place in world that does not teach according to Eckert's doctrine. It is assumed that the same kind of individual(s) who criticized Eckert's work will criticize this work. Indeed, the previous book, on compressible flow, met its opposition. For example, anonymous Wikipedia user name EMBaero claimed that the material in the book is plagiarizing, he just doesn't know from where and what. Maybe that was the reason that he felt that is okay to plagiarize the book on Wikipedia. These criticisms will not change the future or the success of the ideas in this work. As a wise person says "don't tell me that it is wrong, show me what is wrong"; this is the only reply. With all the above, it must be emphasized that this book is not expected to revolutionize the field but change some of the way things are taught. The book is organized into several chapters which, as a traditional textbook, deals with a basic introduction to the fluid properties and concepts (under construction). The second chapter deals with Thermodynamics. The third book chapter is a review of mechanics. The next topic is statics. When the Static Chapter was written, this author did not realize that so many new ideas will be inserted into this topic. As traditional texts in this field, ideal flow will be presented with the issue of added mass and added forces (under construction). The classic issue of turbulence (and stability) will be presented. An introduction to multi-phase flow, not a traditional topic, will be presented next (again under construction). The next two chapters will deal with open channel flow and gas dynamics. At this stage, dimensional analysis will be present (again under construction).1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/85zAccess online version02277nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002900150245006500179264004300244264006400287264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505045600528520063100984542003701615546001601652588004101668650004201709650003801751710003901789856007501828OTLid0000086MnU20260406020619.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2004    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aBar-Meir, Genickeauthor00aFundamentals of Compressible Flow MechanicscGenick Bar-Meir 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPotto Projectc2021. 4c©2004.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Review of Thermodynamics -- 3 Basic of Fluid Mechanics -- 4 Speed of Sound -- 5 Isentropic Flow -- 6 Normal Shock -- 7 Normal Shock in Variable Duct Areas -- 8 Nozzle Flow With External Forces -- 9 Isothermal Flow -- 10 Fanno Flow -- 11 Rayleigh Flow -- 12 Evacuating SemiRigid Chambers -- 13 Evacuating under External Volume Control -- 14 Oblique Shock -- 15 Prandtl-Meyer Function -- A Computer Program -- B Oblique Shock History0 aThis book deals with an introduction to the flow of compressible substances (gases). The main difference between compressible flow and almost incompressible flow is not the fact that compressibility has to be considered. Rather, the difference is in two phenomena that do not exist in incompressible flow. The first phenomenon is the very sharp discontinuity (jump) in the flow in properties. The second phenomenon is the choking of the flow. Choking is when downstream variations don't effect the flow. Though choking occurs in certain pipe flows in astronomy, there also are situations of choking in general (external) flow.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/86zAccess online version02063nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002800162245003600190264004300226264004500269264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002500436490002700461505012800488520080300616542003701419546001601456588004001472650002401512650002701536710003901563856007501602OTLid0000091MnU20260406020753.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCorral, Michaeleauthor00aVector CalculuscMichael Corral 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLivonia, MichiganbMichael Corralc2021. 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Vectors in Euclidean Space -- 2 Functions of Several Variables -- 3 Multiple Integrals -- 4 Line and Surface Integrals --0 aThis is a text on elementary multivariable calculus, designed for students who have completed courses in single-variable calculus. The traditional topics are covered: basic vector algebra; lines, planes and surfaces; vector-valued functions; functions of 2 or 3 variables; partial derivatives; optimization; multiple integrals; line and surface integrals. The book also includes discussion of numerical methods: Newton's method for optimization, and the Monte Carlo method for evaluating multiple integrals. There is a section dealing with applications to probability. Appendices include a proof of the right-hand rule for the cross product, and a short tutorial on using Gnuplot for graphing functions of 2 variables There are 420 exercises in the book. Answers to selected exercises are included.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/91zAccess online version03425nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100003100180245008200211264004300293264007300336264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505054600586520159201132542003902724546001602763588004002779650002402819650002702843700003102870710003902901856007502940OTLid0000092MnU20260406020656.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781467976664  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCornette, James L.eauthor00aCalculus for the Life SciencesbA Modeling ApproachcJames CornettenVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Mathematical Models of Biological Processes -- 2 Functions -- 3 The Derivative -- 4 Continuity and the Power Chain Rule -- 5 Derivatives of the Exponential and Logarithm Functions -- 6 Derivatives of Products, Quotients, and Compositions -- 7 Derivatives of Trigonometric Functions -- 8 Applications of Derivatives -- 9 The Mean Value Theorem and Taylor's Polynomials -- 10 Partial Derivatives and the Diffusion Equation -- 11 The Integral -- 12 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus -- 13 Applications of the Fundamental Theorem of Calculus0 aOur writing is based on three premises. First, life sciences students are motivated by and respond well to actual data related to real life sciences problems. Second, the ultimate goal of calculus in the life sciences primarily involves modeling living systems with difference and differential equations. Understanding the concepts of derivative and integral are crucial, but the ability to compute a large array of derivatives and integrals is of secondary importance. Third, the depth of calculus for life sciences students should be comparable to that of the traditional physics and engineering calculus course; else life sciences students will be short changed and their faculty will advise them to take the 'best' (engineering) course. In our text, mathematical modeling and difference and differential equations lead, closely follow, and extend the elements of calculus. Chapter one introduces mathematical modeling in which students write descriptions of some observed processes and from these descriptions derive first order linear difference equations whose solutions can be compared with the observed data. In chapters in which the derivatives of algebraic, exponential, or trigonometric functions are defined, biologically motivated differential equations and their solutions are included. The chapter on partial derivatives includes a section on the diffusion partial differential equation. There are two chapters on non-linear difference equations and on systems of two difference equations and two chapters on differential equations and on systems of differential equation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAckerman, Ralph A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/92zAccess online version02005nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002400162245006200186264004300248264004400291264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505018000512520061800692542004101310546001601351588004001367650002401407650003501431650002701466710003901493856007501532OTLid0000095MnU20260406020824.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLebl, Jiríeauthor00aBasic AnalysisbIntroduction to Real AnalysiscJirí Lebl 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStillwater, OklahomabJirí Leblc2020. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1 Real Numbers -- 2 Sequences and Series -- 3 Continuous Functions -- 4 The Derivative -- 5 The Riemann Integral -- 6 Sequences of Functions -- 7 Metric Spaces0 aThis free online textbook (e-book in webspeak) is a one semester course in basic analysis. This book started its life as my lecture notes for Math 444 at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign (UIUC) in the fall semester of 2009, and was later enhanced to teach Math 521 at University of Wisconsin-Madison (UW-Madison). A prerequisite for the course is a basic proof course. It should be possible to use the book for both a basic course for students who do not necessarily wish to go to graduate school, but also as a first semester of a more advanced course that also covers topics such as metric spaces.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/95zAccess online version05254nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000900137050001000146050000700156245004700163264004300210264006400253264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505051700494520344101011542001604452546001604468588004104484650004204525650003304567650002304600650003104623700002304654700002904677710003904706856007504745OTLid0000096MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aJA71 4aQH301 4aH100aSustainabilitybA Comprehensive Foundation 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Foreword -- 2 Preface -- 3 Introduction to Sustainability: Humanity and the Environment -- 4 The Evolution of Environmental Policy in the United States -- 5 Climate and Global Change -- 6 Biosphere -- 7 Physical Resources: Water, Pollution, and Minerals -- 8 Environmental and Resource Economics -- 9 Modern Environmental Management -- 10 Sustainable Energy Systems -- 11 Problem-Solving, Metrics, and Tools for Sustainability -- 12 Sustainability: Ethics, Culture, and History -- 13 Sustainable Infrastructure0 aWith “Sustainability: A Comprehensive Foundation”, first and second-year college students are introduced to this expanding new field, comprehensively exploring the essential concepts from every branch of knowledge – including engineering and the applied arts, natural and social sciences, and the humanities. As sustainability is a multi-disciplinary area of study, the text is the product of multiple authors drawn from the diverse faculty of the University of Illinois: each chapter is written by a recognized expert in the field. This text is designed to introduce the reader to the essential concepts of sustainability. This subject is of vital importance seeking as it does to uncover the principles of the long-term welfare of all the peoples of the planet but is only peripherally served by existing college textbooks. The content is intended to be useful for both a broad-based introductory class on sustainability and as a useful supplement to specialist courses which wish to review the sustainability dimensions of their areas of study. By covering a wide range of topics with a uniformity of style, and by including glossaries, review questions, case studies, and links to further resources, the text has sufficient range to perform as the core resource for a semester course. Students who cover the material in the book will be conversant in the language and concepts of sustainability, and will be equipped for further study in sustainable planning, policy, economics, climate, ecology, infrastructure, and more. Furthermore, the modular design allows individual chapters and sections to be easily appropriated without the purchase of a whole new text. This allows educators to easily bring sustainability concepts, references, and case studies into their area of study. This appropriation works particularly well as the text is free downloadable to anyone who wishes to use it. Furthermore, readers are encouraged to work with the text. Provided there is attribution to the source, users can adapt, add to, revise and republish the text to meet their own needs. Because sustainability is a cross-disciplinary field of study, producing this text has required the bringing together over twenty experts from a variety of fields. This enables us to cover all of the foundational components of sustainability: understanding our motivations requires the humanities, measuring the challenges of sustainability requires knowledge of the sciences (both natural and social), and building solutions requires technical insight into systems (such as provided by engineering, planning, and management). Readers accustomed to textbooks that present material in a unitary voice might be surprised to find in this one statements that do not always agree. Here, for example, cautious claims about climate change stand beside sweeping pronouncements predicting future social upheaval engendered by a warming world. And a chapter that includes market-based solutions to environmental problems coexists with others that call for increased government control. Such diversity of thought characterizes many of the fields of inquiry represented in the book; by including it, we invite users to engage in the sort of critical thinking a serious study of sustainability requires. It is our sincerest hope that this work is shared freely and widely, as we all struggle to understand and solve the enormous environmental challenges of our time.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aTheis, Tomeeditor1 aTomkin, Jonathaneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/96zAccess online version03132nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002700162245006200189264004300251264007300294264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002500489490002700514505034100541520157300882542002702455546001602482588004002498650002402538650002702562700003102589710003902620856007502659OTLid0000097MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLippman, Davideauthor00aPrecalculusbAn Investigation of FunctionscDavid Lippman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLos Angeles, CaliforniabDavid Lippman and Melonie Rasmussenc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Functions -- Chapter 2: Linear Functions -- Chapter 3: Polynomial and Rational Functions -- Chapter 4: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- Chapter 5: Trigonometric Functions of Angles -- Chapter 6: Periodic Functions -- Chapter 7: Trigonometric Equations and Identities -- Chapter 8: Further Applications of Trigonometry0 aPrecalculus: An Investigation of Functions is a free, open textbook covering a two-quarter pre-calculus sequence including trigonometry. The first portion of the book is an investigation of functions, exploring the graphical behavior of, interpretation of, and solutions to problems involving linear, polynomial, rational, exponential, and logarithmic functions. An emphasis is placed on modeling and interpretation, as well as the important characteristics needed in calculus. The second portion of the book introduces trigonometry. Trig is introduced through an integrated circle/triangle approach. Identities are introduced in the first chapter, and revisited throughout. Likewise, solving is introduced in the second chapter and revisited more extensively in the third chapter. As with the first part of the book, an emphasis is placed on motivating the concepts and on modeling and interpretation. In addition to the paper homework sets, algorithmetically generated online homework is available as part of a complete course shell package, which also includes a sample syllabus, teacher notes with lecture examples, sample quizzes and exams, printable classwork sheets and handouts, and chapter review problems. If you teach in Washington State, you can find the course shell in the WAMAP.org template course list. For those located elsewhere, you can access the course shell at MyOpenMath.com. A self-study version of the online course exercises is also available on MyOpenMath.com for students wanting to learn the material on their own, or who need a refresher.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aRasmussen, Melonieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/97zAccess online version02006nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003500162250001600197264004300213264005100256264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002500429490002700454505027200481520066700753542002701420546001601447588004001463650002701503710003901530856007501569OTLid0000098MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aLippman, Davideauthor00aMath in SocietycDavid Lippman  aEdition 2.5 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLos Angeles, CaliforniabDavid Lippmanc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aProblem Solving -- Voting Theory -- Weighted Voting -- Apportionment -- Fair Division -- Graph Theory -- Scheduling -- Growth Models -- Finance -- Statistics -- Describing Data -- Probability -- Sets -- Historical Counting Systems -- Fractals -- Cryptography -- Logic0 aMath in Society is a free, open textbook. This book is a survey of contemporary mathematical topics, most non-algebraic, appropriate for a college-level topics course for liberal arts majors. The text is designed so that most chapters are independent, allowing the instructor to choose a selection of topics to be covered. Emphasis is placed on the applicability of the mathematics. Core material for each topic is covered in the main text, with additional depth available through exploration exercises appropriate for in-class, group, or individual investigation. This book is appropriate for Math 107 (Washington State Community Colleges common course number).1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/98zAccess online version03647nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002900140245005500169264004300224264007600267264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002500465490002700490505026200517520228700779542002703066546001603093588004003109650003403149710003903183856007503222OTLid0000099MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aMartin, Peter W.eauthor00aIntroduction to Basic Legal CitationcPeter Martin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1-000. Basic Legal Citation: What and Why? -- 2-000. How to Cite -- 3-000. Examples - Citations Of -- 4-000. Abbreviations and Omissions Used in Citations -- 5-000. Underlining and Italics -- 6-000. Placing Citations in Context -- 7-000. Reference Tables --0 aThis is not a comprehensive citation reference work. Its limited aim is to serve as a tutorial onhow to cite the most widely referenced types of U.S. legal material, taking account of localnorms and the changes in citation practice forced by the shift from print to electronic sources.It begins with an introductory unit. That is followed immediately by one on "how to cite" thecategories of authority that comprise a majority of the citations in briefs and legalmemoranda. Using the full table of contents one can proceed through this material insequence. The third unit, organized around illustrative examples, is intended to be used eitherfor review and reinforcement of the prior "how to" sections or as an alternative approach tothem. One can start with it since the illustrative examples for each document type are linkedback to the relevant "how to" principles. The sections on abbreviations and omissions, on typeface (italics and underlining), and onhow citations fit into the larger project of legal writing that follow all support the precedingunits. They are accessible independently and also, where appriopriate, via links from theearlier sections. Finally, there are a series of cross reference tables tying this introduction tothe two major legal citation reference works and to state-specific citation rules and practices. The work is also designed to be used by those confronting a specific citation issue. For suchpurposes the table of contents provides one path to the relevant material. Another, to whichthe bar at the top of each major section provides ready access, is a topical index. This index isalphabetically arrayed and more detailed than the table of contents. Finally, the searchfunction in your e-book reader software should allow an even narrower inquiry, such as oneseeking the abbreviation for a specific word (e.g.,institute) or illustrative citations for aparticular state, Ohio, say. If the device on which you are reading this e-book allows it, the pdf format will enable you toprint or to copy and paste portions, large or small, into other documents. However, since thev work is filled with linked cross references and both the table of contents and index rely onthem, most will find a print copy far less useful than the electronic original.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/99zAccess online version02367nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001300148100002700161245006600188264004300254264007600297264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002500495490002700520505028000547520084400827542004101671546001601712588004001728650002401768650002801792650003401820710003901854856007601893OTLid0000100MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aVerkerke, J.H.eauthor00aContract Doctrine, Theory & PracticecJ.H. VerkerkenVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIV. Defining the Obligation to Perform -- 1. Excuse -- 2. Mistake -- 3. Substantial Performance -- 4. Exclusive Dealing Contracts -- V. Regulating the Bargaining Process -- 1. Unconscionability -- 2. Modification -- 3. Rules Concerning Information -- 4. The Statute of Frauds0 aThis is Volume 2 in a three volume series written for Contracts Law. Its orginal title was "Collaborative Teaching Materials for Contracts." The first semester of law school is mostly about learning to speak a new legal language (but emphatically not “legalese”), to formulate and evaluate legal arguments, to become comfortable with the distinctive style of legal analysis. We could teach these skills using almost any legal topic. But we begin the first-year curriculum with subjects that pervade the entire field of law. Contract principles have a long history and they form a significant part of the way that lawyers think about many legal problems. As you will discover when you study insurance law, employment law, family law, and dozens of other practice areas, your knowledge of contract doctrine and theory will be invaluable.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/100zAccess online version02532nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001300148100002700161245006600188264004300254264007600297264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002500495490002700520505045700547520083201004542004101836546001601877588004001893650002401933650002801957650003401985710003902019856007602058OTLid0000101MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aVerkerke, J.H.eauthor00aContract Doctrine, Theory & PracticecJ.H. VerkerkenVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction to the Legal Significance of Promise Making -- 1. What is a Promise? -- 2. Which Promises Are Enforced? -- II. The Consideration Requirement and Alternatives -- 1. Consideration Doctrine -- 2. Bargain or Gift? -- 3. Adequacy Doctrine -- 4. Promissory Estoppel -- 5. The Material Benefit Rule -- III. Contract Formation -- 1. Offer -- 2. Acceptance -- 3. Revocation of Offers -- 4. UCC Section 2-207 -- 5. Frontiers of Contract Formation0 aThis is the first in a series of Contracts casebooks. It was originally titled "Collaborative Teaching Materials for Contracts." The first semester of law school is mostly about learning to speak a new legal language (but emphatically not “legalese”), to formulate and evaluate legal arguments, to become comfortable with the distinctive style of legal analysis. We could teach these skills using almost any legal topic. But we begin the first-year curriculum with subjects that pervade the entire field of law. Contract principles have a long history and they form a significant part of the way that lawyers think about many legal problems. As you will discover when you study insurance law, employment law, family law, and dozens of other practice areas, your knowledge of contract doctrine and theory will be invaluable.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/101zAccess online version01956nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139110004500152245007400197264004300271264007600314264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002500512490002700537505040300564520033900967542004101306546001601347588004001363650003001403650003401433710003901467856007601506OTLid0000102MnU20260406020705.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A42 aeLangdell PressbEditorial Staffeeditor00aFederal Rules of Appellate ProcedureceLangdell Press Editorial Staff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Applicability of Ruiles -- Chapter 2: Appeal From a Judgment or Order of a District Court -- Chapter 3: Review of a Decision of the United States Tax Court -- Chapter 4: Review or Enforcement of an Order of an Administrative Agency, Board, Commission, or Officer -- Chapter 5: Extraordinary Writs -- Chapter 6: Habeas Corpus; Proceedngs in Forma Pauperis -- Chapter 7: General Provisions0 aThe Federal Rules of Appellate Procedure appear in the Appendix to Title 28 of the United State Code. This publication was made with data provided by the United States government on the Office of Law Revision Counsel Bulk US Code. This title is current through July 31, 2014. All updates to this material will appear at the above URL.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/102zAccess online version02739nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137110004500150245006500195264004300260264007600303264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002500501490002700526505063800553520091401191542002702105546001602132588004002148650003402188650002802222710003902250856007602289OTLid0000103MnU20260406020218.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A42 aeLangdell PressbEditorial Staffeeditor00aUnited States Copyright LawceLangdell Press Editorial Staff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Subject Matter and Scope of Copyright -- Chapter 2. Copyright Ownership and Transfer -- Chapter 3. Duration of Copyright -- Chapter 4. Copyright Notice, Deposit, and Registration -- Chapter 5. Copyright Infringement and Remedies -- Chapter 6. Importation and Exportation -- Chapter 7. Copyright Office -- Chapter 8. Proceedings by Copyright Royalty Judges -- Chapter 9. Protection of Semiconductor Chip Products -- Chapter 10. Digital Audio Recording Devices and Media -- Chapter 11. Sound Recordings and Music Videos -- Chapter 12. Copyright Protection and Management Systems -- Chapter 13. Protection of Original Designs0 aThis Intellectual Property Supplement from eLangdell Press contains the text of federal laws and regulations in the area of copyright, trademarks and patents. The editors have endeavored to gather all relevant laws, rules and regulations. This collection is intended to be used primarily as a statutory supplement for law students and legal scholars in academic settings, although practitioners in this area of law will also find it useful. This volume, Volume 1: Copyright Statutory Law contains the text of Title 17 of the United States Code as it appears on the most current edition available on the U.S. Government website FDSYS. Updates to the U.S. Code not yet found in the FDSYS published editions can be found in the United States House of Representatives Office of Law Revision Counsel's Classification Tables. Some formatting modification has been performed to better accommodate electronic readers.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/103zAccess online version02392nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137110004500150245006200195264004300257264007600300264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002500498490002700523505029700550520091100847542002701758546001601785588004001801650003401841650002801875710003901903856007601942OTLid0000104MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A42 aeLangdell PressbEditorial Staffeeditor00aUnited States Patent LawceLangdell Press Editorial Staff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. United States Patent and Trademark Office -- Part II. Patentability of Inventions and Grant of Patents -- Part III. Patents and Protection of Patent Rights -- Part IV. Patent Cooperation Treaty -- Part V. The Hague Agreement Concerning International Registration of Industrial Designs0 aThis Intellectual Property Supplement from eLangdell Press contains the text of federal laws and regulations in the area of copyright, trademarks and patents. The editors have endeavored to gather all relevant laws, rules and regulations. This collection is intended to be used primarily as a statutory supplement for law students and legal scholars in academic settings, although practitioners in this area of law will also find it useful. This volume, Volume 2: Patent Statutory Law contains the text of Title 35 of the United States Code as it appears on the most current edition available on the U.S. Government website FDSYS. Updates to the U.S. Code not yet found in the FDSYS published editions can be found in the United States House of Representatives Office of Law Revision Counsel's Classification Tables. Some formatting modification has been performed to better accommodate electronic readers.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/104zAccess online version02296nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137110004500150245006500195264004300260264007600303264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002500501490002700526505019100553520091800744542002701662546001601689588004001705650003401745650002801779710003901807856007601846OTLid0000105MnU20260406020219.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A42 aeLangdell PressbEditorial Staffeeditor00aUnited States Trademark LawceLangdell Press Editorial Staff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 22: Trademarks -- Subchapter I - The Principal Register -- Subchapter II - The Supplemental Register -- Subchapter III - General Provisions -- Subchapter IV - The Madrid Protocol0 aThis Intellectual Property Supplement from eLangdell Press contains the text of federal laws and regulations in the area of copyright, trademarks and patents. The editors have endeavored to gather all relevant laws, rules and regulations. This collection is intended to be used primarily as a statutory supplement for law students and legal scholars in academic settings, although practitioners in this area of law will also find it useful. This volume, Volume III: Trademark Statutory Law contains Chapter 22 of Title 15 of the United States Code as it appears on the most current edition available on the U.S. Government website FDSYS. Updates to the U.S. Code not yet found in the FDSYS published editions can be found in the United States House of Representatives Office of Law Revision Counsel's Classification Tables. Some formatting modification has been performed to better accommodate electronic readers.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/105zAccess online version03125nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003000150245003100180264004300211264007600254264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505058400504520138901088542004102477546001602518588004002534650003402574650002802608710003902636856007602675OTLid0000106MnU20260406020838.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aTurner, Christianeauthor00aLand UsecChristian Turner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Preface2. The Zoning System -- 2.1. Introduction -- 2.2. Variances -- 2.3. Special Use Permits -- 2.4. Comprehensive Planning -- 3. Judicial Review -- 3.1. Substantive Due Process -- 3.2. Adjudication and Quasi-Adjudication -- 3.3. Procedure -- 3.4. Discriminatory Zoning -- 3.5. Anticompetitive Zoning -- 3.6. Spot Zoning -- 3.7. Contract Zoning -- 3.8. Nonconforming Uses -- 3.9. Vested Rights -- 3.10. Neighbor Consent Provisions -- 4. Regulatory Takings -- 4.1. Origins -- 4.2. Theory -- 4.3. Doctrine -- 4.4. Procedural Issues -- 4.5. Exactions -- 4.6. German Takings Law0 aThis text explores the laws governing the use of land. Sometimes narrowly focused, often intensely local, land use regulation may give the impression of a highly specialized field with small stakes. The text is divided into three parts: First, we will survey the ordinary, local administrative scheme of land use regulation. The cases in this section are intended to establish what that system is and what it's standards are. In the second part of the course, we will turn our attention to cases illustrating litigation attacks on the ordinary administrative scheme. The purpose here is not, as it was in the first part, to understand better the standards the administrators should apply, but to understand the constraints imposed on the contents of local laws, the procedures of enactment and permitting, and the composition of local lawmaking bodies. In the third part, we focus on the distributive concerns raised by land use regulation. The regulatory takings doctrine has gone from, literally, nothing, to wrestling to disentangle distributive concerns from substantive ones, to trying to craft either rules or standards to identify regulations that go “too far” and should be considered “takings” within the meaning of the Fifth Amendment. We will consider what the doctrine's purposes are, how it should be governed, and how it should be invoked as a procedural matter.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/106zAccess online version02047nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139100002600152245004700178264004300225264007600268264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505010000518520077900618542004101397546001601438588004001454650003001494650003401524710003901558856007601597OTLid0000107MnU20260406020344.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A41 aMiller, Colineauthor00aEvidencebBest Evidence RulecColin Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Historical Origins of the Best Evidence Rule -- II. Article X: The Modern Best Evidence Rule0 aThe Best Evidence Rule, contained in Article X of the Federal Rules of Evidence (Rules 1001-1008) and state counterparts, is a Rule that requires a party seeking to prove the contents of a writing, recording, or photograph to produce the original (or a duplicate) or account for its nonproduction. Through a series of cases and hypotheticals drawn from actual cases, this chapter gives readers a roadmap for how to address any Best Evidence Rule issue in practice. Faculty materials also available: In addition to the free, open learning materials for students listed above, this eLangdell chapter includes a teacher's manual. Faculty and staff at CALI member schools can access these materials by logging in to eLangdell with a cali.org username and password. Contact CALI.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/107zAccess online version02314nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139100002600152245004500178264004300223264007600266264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002500464490002700489505038400516520076400900542004101664546001601705588004001721650003001761650003401791710003901825856007601864OTLid0000108MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A41 aMiller, Colineauthor00aEvidencebJury ImpeachmentcColin Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aJury Impeachment Chapter -- I. The Rule -- II. Historical Origins -- III. The Drafting of Federal Rule of Evidence 606(b) -- IV. Public Policy Underlying Federal Rule of Evidence 606(b) -- V. Supreme Court Precedent -- VI. 606(b): The External/Internal Distinction -- VII. Situations Where Rule 606(b) Does Not Apply -- VIII. Splits in Authority -- IX. Jury Impeachment Pleadings0 aThe anti-jury impeachment rule, contained in Federal Rule of Evidence 606(b) and state counterparts, is a rule preventing the admission of jury testimony or statements in connection with an inquiry into the validity of the verdict, subject to certain exceptions. Through a series of cases and hypotheticals drawn from actual cases, this chapter gives readers a roadmap for how to address any jury impeachment issue in practice. Faculty materials also available: In addition to the free, open learning materials for students listed above, this eLangdell chapter includes a teacher's manual. Faculty and staff at CALI member schools can access these materials by logging in to eLangdell with a cali.org username and password. Contact CALI if you have questions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/108zAccess online version02182nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139100002600152245004500178264004300223264007600266264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002500464490002700489505025700516520075900773542004101532546001601573588004001589650003001629650003401659710003901693856007601732OTLid0000109MnU20260406020345.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A41 aMiller, Colineauthor00aEvidencebRape Shield RulecColin Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Historical Background -- II. Rule 412(a)(1): The General Proscription -- III. Rule 412(b)(1): Criminal Exceptions -- IV. Rule 412(b)(2): Civil Exception -- V. Rule 412(c): Procedure for Admissibility in Criminal Cases -- VI. Rape Shield Pleadings --0 aThe Rape Shield Rule, contained in Federal Rule of Evidence 412 and state counterparts is a Rule preventing the admission of evidence concerning the sexual predisposition and behavior of an alleged victim of sexual misconduct, subject to certain exceptions. Through a series of cases and hypotheticals drawn from actual cases, this chapter gives readers a roadmap for how to address any Rape Shield Rule issue in practice. Faculty materials also available: In addition to the free, open learning materials for students listed above, this eLangdell chapter includes a teacher's manual. Faculty and staff at CALI member schools can access these materials by logging in to eLangdell with a cali.org username and password. Contact CALI if you have questions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/109zAccess online version07985nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001200136050001300148100002700161245006000188250001600248264004300264264007600307264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002800505490002700533505053300560520613501093542004107228546001607269588004007285650002507325650003007350650003407380700003407414710003907448856007607487OTLid0000113MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A41 aPark, Roger C.eauthor00aComputer-Aided Exercises in Civil ProcedurecRoger Park  a7th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aExercise One - Holding and Dicta in the Context of a Diversity Case -- Exercise Two - Jurisdiction -- Exercise Three - Pleading a Complaint -- Exercise Four - Demurrers and Judgments on the Pleadings -- Exercise Five - Motions to Dismiss and Waiver under Federal Rule 12 -- Exercise Six - Joinder and Supplemental Jurisdiction -- Exercise Seven - Discovery -- Exercise Eight - Summary Judgment -- Exercise Nine - Judgment as a Matter of Law -- Exercise Ten - Evidence for Civil Procedure Students -- Exercise Eleven - Preclusion0 aThe sixth edition, first published as an ebook, and this seventh edition carry forward the philosophy and structure of the earlier editions. This book is not a comprehensive treatise on the subject of civil procedure, yet it provides a mixture of expository text, cases, and self-testing questions in nearly all of the major areas of the subject. In order to maximize accessibility, flexibility, and compatibility of the book, the authors have chosen CALI's eLangdell Press to publish and distribute the sixth edition (as chapters) and this revised seventh (as a complete book) electronically with a Creative Commons license. Publishing a law textbook electronically with far fewer restrictions than most commercial books and using a somewhat new, boutique outfit such as eLangdell Press is an unconventional choice, to say the least. But the authors share the eLangdell vision of more flexible teaching materials for professors and more cost-effective books for students. Professors may now edit and remix this work to match their teaching without worry of copyright infringement. Students may now adopt this book, read it using any number of software or devices, and even print it - all for free. The book's authors, like its publishers, believe that this new book model represents an important and long overdue step forward in the way law school books are published. All the exercises have been substantially revised for this edition. The individual exercises also are reorganized and expanded so that they follow a more standardized pattern: expository text on the topic area, work-book questions, and introduction to the related online CALI lessons. This book, and the accompanying interactive exercises known as CALI Lessons available online through the Center for Computer-Assisted Legal Instruction (CALI) at www.cali.org, are intended to provide a challenging educational experience. For each exercise, students should read the text in this book and answer the questions before accessing the rest of the exercise online. Professors choosing to assign only some of the exercises - or students looking for additional work only in certain areas of the subject - may especially want to consider these exercises and lessons: Exercise Two: Jurisdiction (Jurisdiction & Venue and Jurisdiction Over the Person); Exercise Three: Pleading a Complaint; Exercise Five: Motions to Dismiss and Waiver under Federal Rule 12; Exercise Six: Joinder and Supplemental Jurisdiction (An Exercise in Civil Procedure, Review of Joinder Concepts, Joinder of Claims and Parties, and An Interpleader Primer); Exercise Eight: Summary Judgment; and Exercise Eleven: Preclusion. Additionally, Exercise One: Holding and Dicta in the Context of a Diversity Case is an excellent introduction to legal method. The first two editions of this book, by Roger Park, included Exercise One: Holding and Dicta in the Context of a Diversity Case, Exercise Two: Jurisdiction, Exercise Three: Pleading a Complaint, Exercise Four: Demurrers and Judgments on the Pleadings, Exercise Five: Motions to Dismiss and Waiver Under Rule 12, Exercise Nine: Judgment as a Matter of Law, and Exercise Ten: Evidence for Civil Procedure Students. For the last five editions of this book, Douglas McFarland has edited the above exercises and added Exercise Six: Joinder and Supplemental Jurisdiction, Exercise Seven: Discovery, Exercise Eight: Summary Judgment, and Exercise Eleven: Preclusion. Accordingly, the book has become more comprehensive, expanding from seven to eleven exercises. Of course, each new edition incorporates changes and updates in procedural law. All of the information necessary to prepare for an interactive exercise is contained in this book. Reference to additional materials may be useful, but is not necessary. Each exercise can be assigned separately. No exercise is a prerequisite for another. In fact, students will find the expository material and work-book questions in each exercise independently valuable even without completing the CALI lesson for that chapter. The CALI lessons are valuable either to provide additional understanding and self-testing of subjects discussed in class or as primary substitutes for areas not covered in depth in class. In general, the interactive, online exercises follow a non-linear branching format. They seek to present challenges and questions instead of rote learning or leading students through an error-free educational experience. Although the exercises eventually evaluate student answers, they sometimes eschew immediate feedback in favor of the development of a line of questions. The ideal is the creation of a classroom-like Socratic dialogue. For a description of general goals and educational theory of the exercises, see Roger C. Park & Russell Burris, Computer-Aided Legal Instruction in Law: Theories, Techniques, and Trepidations, 1978 Am. B. Found. Res. J. 1. This book and accompanying exercises cannot reproduce the spontaneity and flexibility of the live classroom, but they can be a useful supplement. They require an active learning process in which students respond to questions dozens of times during each hour of instruction, and receive prompt evaluation of their answers. Another benefit of computer-aided instruction—and the phrase “computer-aided” is used loosely here and in the title of this book; the exercises are compatible with many non-computer devices such as tablets and smartphones—is its “individualized” nature. Law professors and students should not take this literally, however. Surveys administered at several law schools indicate that an overwhelming majority of students believe that the exercises are more valuable when done in pairs or threes instead of alone. Students who do the exercises with a partner are more likely to consider their responses carefully and to enjoy the experience. They also have lively discussions about what their response should be and why the computer responded as it did. As with previous editions, we continue to welcome and solicit comments from professors and students about the book and the accompanying exercises.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aMcFarland, Douglas D.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/113zAccess online version02968nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001200136050001300148100002900161245004400190264004300234264007600277264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505031600527520142600843542004102269546001602310588004002326650002502366650003002391650003402421710003902455856007602494OTLid0000114MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A41 aLevin, Hillel Y.eauthor00aCivil ProcedurebPleadingcHillel Levin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Preface -- 2. Rule 8. General Rules of Pleading -- 3. Rule 9. Pleading Special Matters -- 4. Conley v. Gibson -- 5. Swierkiewicz v. Sorema N.A -- 6. Rule 10. Form of Pleadings -- 7. Bell Atlantic Corp. v. Twombly -- 8. Ashcroft v. Iqbal -- 9. Kregler v. City of New York -- 10. Complaint 1 -- 11. Complaint 20 aThis chapter covers the Civil Procedure topic of Pleading: The Plaintiff‘s Complaint. The chapter takes approximately four class periods to cover in detail. The student is exposed to cases, presented with questions that are designed to both guide class discussion and to help the student focus his reading of the materials, pleadings from cases, and the applicable Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. Faculty materials available: This eLangdell chapter includes a teacher's manual. Faculty and staff at CALI member schools can access these faculty-only materials by logging in to eLangdell with their normal cali.org username and password. Contact CALI if you have questions. This chapter covers the Civil Procedure topic of Pleading: The Plaintiff's Complaint. The chapter takes approximately four class periods to cover in detail. The student is exposed to cases, presented with questions that are designed to both guide class discussion and to help the student focus his reading of the materials, pleadings from cases, and the applicable Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. There are two accompanying files available only to faculty who are registered at cali.org (registration is free for faculty at CALI member schools): a Teaching Manual and a Supplemental Material document. The Supplemental Material should be distributed to students at the appropriate point in the unit. Please see the Teaching Manual for details.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/114zAccess online version02130nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139245004200152264004300194264007600237264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505063700490520028101127542004101408546001601449588004001465650003001505650003401535700002901569700003101598710003901629856007601668OTLid0000115MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A400aFederal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I - Commencement Of Case; Proceedings Relating To Petition And Order For Relief -- Part II - Officers And Administration; Notices; Meetings; Examinations; Elections; Attorneys And Accountants -- Part III - Claims And Distribution To Creditors And Equity Interest Holders; Plans -- Part IV - The Debtor: Duties And Benefits -- Part V - Courts And Clerks -- Part VI - Collection And Liquidation Of The Estate -- Part VII - Adversary Proceedings -- Part VIII - Appeals To District Court Or Bankruptcy Appellate Panel -- Part IX - General Provisions -- [Part X - United States Trustees] (Abrogated Apr. 30, 1991, eff. Aug. 1, 1991)0 aThe Federal Rules of Bankruptcy Procedure appear in the Appendix to Title 11 of the United State Code. This publication was made with data provided by the United States government on the Office of Law Revision Counsel Bulk US Code. This title is current through July 31, 2014.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aCromar, Scott A.eeditor1 aLawless, Robert M.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/115zAccess online version02446nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139110004000152245006000192264004300252264007600295264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002500493490002700518505040800545520085700953542002701810546001601837588004001853650003001893650003401923710003901957856007601996OTLid0000116MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A42 aLegal Information Instituteeeditor00aFederal Rules of EvidencecLegal Information Institute  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aArticle 1. General Provisions -- Article 2. Judicial Notice -- Article 3. Presumptions in Civil Cases -- Article 4. Relevance and Its Limits -- Article 5. Privileges -- Article 6. Witnesses -- Article 7. Opinions and Expert Testimony -- Article 8. Hearsay -- Article 9. Authentication and Identification -- Article 10. Contents of Writings, Recordings, and Photographs -- Article 11. Miscellaneous Rules0 aRules of evidence are, as the name indicates, the rules by which a court determines what evidence is admissible at trial. In the U.S., federal courts follow the Federal Rules of Evidence. This series of Federal Rules books, consisting of the Federal Rules of Evidence, Criminal Procedure and Civil Procedure, are powered by the Legal Information Institute at Cornell Law School, and created in partnership with The Center for Computer-Assisted Legal Instruction (CALI). You may download the books for free, but remember that publishing these books is not free for our organizations. Our Federal Rules ebooks include: The complete rules as of December 1, 2014 (for the 2015 edition). All notes of the Advisory Committee following each rule. Internal links to rules referenced within the rules. External links to the LII website's version of the US Code.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/116zAccess online version02242nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001200138050001300150110004000163245007000203264004300273264007600316264001200392300002200404336002600426337002600452338003600478341002800514490002700542505034400569520064100913542002701554546001601581588004001597650002801637650003001665650003401695710003901729856007601768OTLid0000117MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A42 aLegal Information Instituteeeditor00aFederal Rules of Criminal ProcedurecLegal Information Institute  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle I. Applicability -- Title II. Preliminary Proceedings -- Title III. The Grand Jury, The Indictment, and The Information -- Title IV. Arraignment and Preparation For Trial -- Title V. Venue -- Title VI. Trial -- Title VII. Post-Conviction Procedures -- Title VIII. Supplementary and Special Proceedings -- Title IX. General Provisions0 aThis series of Federal Rules books, consisting of the Federal Rules of Evidence, Criminal Procedure and Civil Procedure, are powered by the Legal Information Institute at Cornell Law School, and created in partnership with The Center for Computer-Assisted Legal Instruction (CALI).These rules govern the conduct of all criminal proceedings brought in Federal courts. Our Federal Rules ebooks include: The complete rules as of December 1, 2012 (for the 2013 edition). All notes of the Advisory Committee following each rule. Internal links to rules referenced within the rules. External links to the LII website's version of the US Code.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/117zAccess online version02715nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001200136050001300148110004000161245006700201264004300268264007600311264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002500509490002700534505047700561520099201038542002702030546001602057588004002073650002502113650003002138650003402168710003902202856007602241OTLid0000118MnU20260406020400.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A42 aLegal Information Instituteeeditor00aFederal Rules of Civil ProcedurecLegal Information Institute  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle I. Scope of Rules; Form of Action -- Title II. Commencing an Action; Service of Process, Pleadings, Motions, and Orders -- Title III. Pleadings and Motions -- Title IV. Parties -- Title V. Disclosures and Discovery -- Title VI. Trials -- Title VII. Judgment -- Title VIII. Provisional and Final Remedies -- Title IX. Special Proceedings -- Title X. District Courts and Clerks: Conduction Business; Issuing Orders -- Title XII. General Provisions -- Appendix of Forms0 aCivil procedure consists of the rules by which courts conduct civil trials. In the U.S., civil procedure usually takes the form of a series of rules and judicial practices. The federal courts follow the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure. This series of Federal Rules books, consisting of the Federal Rules of Evidence, Criminal Procedure and Civil Procedure, are powered by the Legal Information Institute at Cornell Law School, and created in partnership with The Center for Computer-Assisted Legal Instruction (CALI). You may download the books for free, but remember that publishing these books is not free for our organizations. These rules govern the conduct of all criminal proceedings brought in Federal courts. Our Federal Rules ebooks include: The complete rules as of December 1, 2014 (for the 2015 edition). All notes of the Advisory Committee following each rule. Internal links to rules referenced within the rules. External links to the LII website's version of the US Code.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/118zAccess online version01906nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003000140245005000170250001800220264004300238264007600281264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505049200531520027501023542004101298546001601339588004001355650003401395710003901429856007601468OTLid0000119MnU20260406020424.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aHatfield, Michaeleauthor04aThe Ethics of Tax LawyeringcMichael Hatfield  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introducing Legal Ethics for Tax Lawyers -- 1.1 Ethics for Lawyers -- 1.2 The Duty to the Tax System -- 1.3 Sharing the Profession with Non-Lawyers -- 2. Regulating Tax Lawyering -- 2.1 Regulating Tax Lawyering through the IRC -- 2.2 Regulating Tax Lawyering through Circular 230 -- 2.3 Regulating Tax Lawyering through Malpractice Standards -- 3. Ethical Problems for Tax Lawyers -- 3.1 Tax Opinion and Tax Shelters -- 3.2 Mistakes -- 3.3 Working with IRS Lawyers and Other Employees0 aThis chapter’s objective is to raise interesting tax ethics issues in practical contexts. There are 42 notes and questions to prompt and guide discussions, and primary source materials to inform the discussions (e.g., cases, IRC provisions, and Circular 230 excerpts).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/119zAccess online version03127nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003100162245008200193264004300275264007300318264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505027700568520159200845542003902437546001602476588004002492650002402532650002702556700003102583710003902614856007602653OTLid0000120MnU20260406020222.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCornette, James L.eauthor00aCalculus for the Life SciencesbA Modeling ApproachcJames CornettenVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aD Dynamical Equations from Volume I -- 13 Partial Derivatives -- 14 Difference Equation Models of Populations -- 15 Discrete Dynamical Systems -- 16 Nonlinear Dynamical Systems; Equilibria -- 17 Differential Equations -- 18 Second order, systems of two first order ODE’s0 aOur writing is based on three premises. First, life sciences students are motivated by and respond well to actual data related to real life sciences problems. Second, the ultimate goal of calculus in the life sciences primarily involves modeling living systems with difference and differential equations. Understanding the concepts of derivative and integral are crucial, but the ability to compute a large array of derivatives and integrals is of secondary importance. Third, the depth of calculus for life sciences students should be comparable to that of the traditional physics and engineering calculus course; else life sciences students will be short changed and their faculty will advise them to take the 'best' (engineering) course. In our text, mathematical modeling and difference and differential equations lead, closely follow, and extend the elements of calculus. Chapter one introduces mathematical modeling in which students write descriptions of some observed processes and from these descriptions derive first order linear difference equations whose solutions can be compared with the observed data. In chapters in which the derivatives of algebraic, exponential, or trigonometric functions are defined, biologically motivated differential equations and their solutions are included. The chapter on partial derivatives includes a section on the diffusion partial differential equation. There are two chapters on non-linear difference equations and on systems of two difference equations and two chapters on differential equations and on systems of differential equation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAckerman, Ralph A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/120zAccess online version03918nam a2200517 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000900138050001000147050001100157050001000168050001300178100002300191245006300214264004300277264006900320264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002800511490002700539505129600566520102901862542004102891546001602932588004102948650002402989650002503013650003403038650002803072650003403100650002803134700002703162700003003189700003303219700003303252710003903285856007603324OTLid0000121MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK623 4aK3154 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aAdvanced Business Law and the Legal EnvironmentcDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Sales and Leases -- Chapter 9: Title and Risk of Loss -- Chapter 10: Performance and Remedies -- Chapter 11: Products Liability -- Chapter 12: Bailments and the Storage, Shipment, and Leasing of Goods -- Chapter 13: Nature and Form of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 14: Negotiation of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 15: Holder in Due Course and Defenses -- Chapter 16: Liability and Discharge -- Chapter 17: Legal Aspects of Banking -- Chapter 18: Consumer Credit Transactions -- Chapter 19: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 20: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 21: Bankruptcy -- Chapter 22: Introduction to Property: Personal Property and Fixtures -- Chapter 23: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 24: The Nature and Regulation of Real Estate and the Environment -- Chapter 25: The Transfer of Real Estate by Sale -- Chapter 26: Landlord and Tenant Law -- Chapter 27: Estate Planning: Wills, Estates, and Trusts -- Chapter 28: Insurance0 aMayer, Warner, Siedel and Lieberman's Advanced Business Law and the Legal Environment is an up-to-date textbook with coverage of legal and regulatory issues that are more technical than the topics in the authors' Foundations of Business Law and the Legal Environment. Appropriate for students who have already taken an introductory Legal Environment or Business Law course, the text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with which they are already familiar with their clear, concise and readable style. Advanced Business Law and the Legal Environment provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to the Uniform Commercial Code and various aspects of property law. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy necessary for business people to talk in an educated way to their customers, employees, suppliers, and other stakeholders — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor1 aMartina, Alyssa Roseeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/121zAccess online version02568nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002400167245005000191264004300241264006900284264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505046800530520092100998542004101919546001601960588004101976650002402017650002602041710003902067856007602106OTLid0000122MnU20260406020229.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453332917  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aWarren, Kimeauthor00aBuilding Strategy and PerformancecKim Warren 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Performance Through Time -- Chapter 2: Resources: Vital Drivers of Performance -- Chapter 3: Resources and Bathtub Behavior -- Chapter 4: Handling Interdependence Between Resources -- Chapter 5: Building and Managing the Strategic Architecture -- Chapter 6: You Need Quality Resources as Well as Quantity -- Chapter 7: Managing Rivalry for Customers and Other Resources -- Chapter 8: Intangible Resources and Capabilities -- Chapter 9: Going Forward --0 aThis book uses a balanced blend of frameworks and illustrations to teach you how to tackle the challenge of driving performance into the future. Kim Warren takes special care with this new textbook, Building Strategy and Performance, to ensure that it delivers instruction on how to deliver strategy powerfully over a sustained period of time. This book helps you to show your students where the levers are that they can control and how to choose what to do, when, and how much to achieve their specific goals. This book effectively outlines the dynamics of strategy, how one drives performance - past, today and into the future. It shows what causes performance to improve or deteriorate and what your students can do to change this trajectory for the better. But don't take our word for it, review the book now to see if it can help you to deliver the kind of tactical strategy course you desire for your students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/122zAccess online version03121nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001100149100003100160245006700191264004300258264006000301264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505028600538520151300824542001602337546001602353588004002369650002402409650002602433650002502459700002802484700002902512700003102541710003902572856007602611OTLid0000123MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aHF54151 aWatson, Richard T.eauthor00aElectronic CommercebThe Strategic PerspectivecRichard Watson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAn Introduction -- Electronic commerce technology -- Web strategy: Attracting and retaining visitors -- Promotion: Integrated Web communications -- Promotion and purchase: Measuring effectiveness -- Distribution -- Service -- Pricing -- Post-Modernism and the Web: Societal effects0 aThis book is written both for practitioners and business students. Managers wishing to understand how electronic commerce is revolutionizing business will find that our comprehensive coverage of essential business issues (e.g., pricing and distribution) answers many of their questions. Advanced business students (junior, seniors, and graduate students) will find that the blend of academic structure and practical examples provides an engaging formula for learning. The book's title reflects some key themes that we develop. First, we are primarily concerned with electronic commerce, which we define as using technology (e.g., the Internet) to communicate or transact with stakeholders (e.g., customers). Second, we discuss how organizations must change in order to take advantage of electronic commerce opportunities. In this sense, our book offers the strategic perspective (i.e., the best way to operate a successful business in the 21st century). Third, with the growing importance of the Internet and related technologies, organizations must take electronic commerce into account when they are creating strategic plans. Thus, electronic commerce is a strategic perspective that all firms must adopt, both in the present and in the future. In other words, an organization that does not explicitly consider electronic commerce as a strategic imperative is probably making a crucial error. Here, we focus primarily on the opportunities and tactics that can lead to success in the electronic marketplace.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aBerthon, Pierreeauthor1 aPitt, Leyland F.eauthor1 aZinkhan, George M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/123zAccess online version02820nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100003600178245004600214264004300260264006900303264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505062800549520093401177542004102111546001602152588004102168650002402209650003602233650002602269710003902295856007602334OTLid0000124MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343630  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 ade Kluyver, Cornelis A.eauthor00aCorporate GovernancecCornelis de Kluyver 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Corporate Governance: Linking Corporations and Society -- Chapter 2: Governance and Accountability -- Chapter 3: The Board of Directors: Role and Composition -- Chapter 4: Recent U.S. Governance Reforms -- Chapter 5: CEO Selection and Succession Planning -- Chapter 6: Oversight, Compliance, and Risk Management -- Chapter 7: The Board's Role in Strategy Development -- Chapter 8: CEO Performance Evaluation and Executive Compensation -- Chapter 9: Responding to External Pressures and Unforeseen Events -- Chapter 10: Creating a High-Performance Board -- Chapter 11: Epilogue: The Future of Corporate Governance0 aCorporate Governance by de Kluyver is a primer on corporate governance. It is designed to help students understand corporate governance by looking at the subject from both a macro- and micro-perspective. Historical data and examples including the recent scandals that have torn the fabric of capitalism pave a pathway to the principal challenges facing today's corporate boards, and how to successfully manage them. Topics Include: Clear coverage on why proper corporate governance has become a moral imperative and how to corporations achieve it. Discussions on recent governance reforms in the United States. Outlines of the roles that each individual in the corporate governance process must take on and how to effectively execute on those roles. Exploration on the future of corporate governance in the epilogue Take some time to review Corporate Governance by de Kluyver to see if it is a good fit for your strategy courses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/124zAccess online version03731nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001100166100003300177245006200210264004300272264006900315264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505081200561520164301373542004103016546001603057588004103073650002403114650004203138650002603180710003903206856007603245OTLid0000125MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343609  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aTA145 4aHD30.41 aSanders, G. Lawrenceeauthor00aDeveloping New Products and ServicescG. Lawrence Sanders 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Concepts in the Context of Monopolistic Competition -- Chapter 2: Fundamentals of Product and Price Differentiation -- Chapter 3: Differentiation in Action -- Chapter 4: Dynamic Tension in Versioning and PD Curves -- Chapter 5: Examples of Product Differentiation & Versioning Curves -- Chapter 6: Facilitating Creativity and Innovation -- Chapter 7: Conceptualizing Products/Services Using FAD -- Chapter 8: Strategic Planning and Ten–Ten Planning -- Chapter 9: The Ten–Ten Planning Process: Crafting a Business Story -- Chapter 10: Lock-In and Revenue Growth -- Chapter 11: Valuing the Business -- Chapter 12: Developing a Business Plan -- Chapter 13: Project Management for New Products and Services -- Chapter 14: Re-priming the Business Using Real Options Concepts -- Chapter 15: Wrap-Up0 aDeveloping New Products and Services by Sanders is an outstanding contribution to market research. The book focuses on the upfront activities and ideas for new product and service development. A central theme of Developing New Products and Services is that there is, or should be, a constant struggle going on in every organization, business, and system between delivering feature-rich versions of products and services using extravagant engineering and delivering low-cost versions of products and services using frugal engineering. Students will come away with this notion and how to manifest it as a contributing employee at any company. A number of powerful concepts and tools are presented so your students can better understand how to facilitate new product development. For example, three templates are featured that facilitate new product and service development. The FAD (features, attributes, and design) template is used to identify the features and attributes that can be used for product and service differentiation. The Ten–Ten planning process contains two templates: an Organizational and Industry Analysis template and the Business Plan Overview template. These two templates coupled with the FAD template can be used to develop a full-blown business plan. In addition, Developing New Products and Services includes the following topics: entrepreneurship, technology and product life cycles, product and service versioning, product line optimization, creativity, lock-in real options, business valuation, and project management. Evaluate Developing New Products and Services by Sanders for your marketing courses today.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/125zAccess online version03854nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002800157245005900185264004300244264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002800409490002700437505117100464520159401635542004103229546001603270588004103286650002503327700002503352710003903377856007603416OTLid0000126MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453328361  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aCooper, Russelleauthor00aEconomicsbTheory Through ApplicationscRussell Cooper 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Economics? -- Chapter 2: Microeconomics in Action -- Chapter 3: Macroeconomics in Action -- Chapter 4: Everyday Decisions -- Chapter 5: Life Decisions -- Chapter 6: eBay and craigslist -- Chapter 7: Where Do Prices Come From? -- Chapter 8: Why Do Prices Change? -- Chapter 9: Growing Jobs -- Chapter 10: Making and Losing Money on Wall Street -- Chapter 11: Raising the Wage Floor -- Chapter 12: Barriers to Trade and the Underground Economy -- Chapter 13: Superstars -- Chapter 14: Cleaning Up the Air and Using Up the Oil -- Chapter 15: Busting Up Monopolies -- Chapter 16: A Healthy Economy -- Chapter 17: Cars -- Chapter 18: The State of the Economy -- Chapter 19: The Interconnected Economy -- Chapter 20: Globalization and Competitiveness -- Chapter 21: Global Prosperity and Global Poverty -- Chapter 22: The Great Depression -- Chapter 23: Jobs in the Macroeconomy -- Chapter 24: Money: A User's Guide -- Chapter 25: Understanding the Fed -- Chapter 26: Inflations Big and Small -- Chapter 27: Income Taxes -- Chapter 28: Social Security -- Chapter 29: Balancing the Budget -- Chapter 30: The Global Financial Crisis -- Chapter 31: Toolkit0 aRussell Cooper and Andrew John have written an economics text aimed directly at students from its very inception. You're thinking, ”Yeah, sure. I've heard that before.“ This textbook, Economics: Theory Through Applications, centers around student needs and expectations through two premises: … Students are motivated to study economics if they see that it relates to their own lives. … Students learn best from an inductive approach, in which they are first confronted with a problem, and then led through the process of solving that problem. Many books claim to present economics in a way that is digestible for students; Russell and Andrew have truly created one from scratch. This textbook will assist you in increasing students' economic literacy both by developing their aptitude for economic thinking and by presenting key insights about economics that every educated individual should know. How? Russell and Andrew have done three things in this text to accomplish that goal: Applications Ahead of Theory: They present all the theory that is standard in Principles books. But by beginning with applications, students get to learn why this theory is needed. Learning through Repetition: Important tools appear over and over again, allowing students to learn from repetition and to see how one framework can be useful in many different contexts. A Student's Table of Contents vs. An Instructor's Table of Contents: There is no further proof that Russell and Andrew have created a book aimed specifically at educating students about economics than their two tables of contents.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aJohn, Andreweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/126zAccess online version05279nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002800157245006400185264004300249264006900292264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505061500538520348901153542004104642546001604683588004104699650002504740700002504765710003904790856007604829OTLid0000127MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453328422  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aCooper, Russelleauthor00aMacroeconomicsbTheory through ApplicationscRussell Cooper 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Economics? -- Chapter 2: Macroeconomics in Action -- Chapter 3: The State of the Economy -- Chapter 4: The Interconnected Economy -- Chapter 5: Globalization and Competitiveness -- Chapter 6: Global Prosperity and Global Poverty -- Chapter 7: The Great Depression -- Chapter 8: Jobs in the Macroeconomy -- Chapter 9: Money: A User's Guide -- Chapter 10: Understanding the Fed -- Chapter 11: Inflations Big and Small -- Chapter 12: Income Taxes -- Chapter 13: Social Security -- Chapter 14: Balancing the Budget -- Chapter 15: The Global Financial Crisis -- Chapter 16: Macroeconomics Toolkit0 aRussell Cooper and Andrew John have written an economics text aimed directly at students from its very inception. You're thinking, ”Yeah, sure. I've heard that before.“ This textbook, Macroeconomics: Theory Through Applications, centers around student needs and expectations through two premises: … Students are motivated to study economics if they see that it relates to their own lives. … Students learn best from an inductive approach, in which they are first confronted with a problem, and then led through the process of solving that problem. Many books claim to present economics in a way that is digestible for students; Russell and Andrew have truly created one from scratch. This textbook will assist you in increasing students' economic literacy both by developing their aptitude for economic thinking and by presenting key insights about economics that every educated individual should know. How? Russell and Andrew have done three things in this text to accomplish that goal: 1. Applications Ahead of Theory: They present all the theory that is standard in Principles books. But by beginning with applications, students get to learn why this theory is needed. The authors take the kind of material that other authors put in ”applications boxes“ and place it at the heart of their book. Each chapter is built around a particular business or policy application, such as social security, globalization, and the wealth and poverty of nations. Why take this approach? Traditional courses focus too much on abstract theory relative to the interests and capabilities of the average undergraduate. Students are rarely engaged and the formal theory is never integrated into the way students think about economic issues. And traditional books are organized around theoretical constructs that mean nothing to students. The authors' applications-first approach ensures that students will not see chapters with titles like ”Cost Functions“ or ”Short-Run Fluctuations“. They introduce tools and ideas as and when they are needed. Each chapter is designed with two goals. First, the application upon which the chapter is built provides a ”hook“ that gets students' attention. Second, the application is a suitable vehicle a vehicle for teaching the principles of economics. 2. Learning through Repetition: Important tools appear over and over again, allowing students to learn from repetition and to see how one framework can be useful in many different contexts. Each piece of economic theory in this text is first introduced and explained in the context of a specific application. Most are re-used in other chapters, so students see them in action on multiple occasions. As students progress through the book, they accumulate a set of techniques and ideas. These are collected separately in a ”toolkit“ that provides students with an easy reference and also gives them a condensed summary of economic principles for examination preparation. 3. A Student's Table of Contents vs. An Instructor's Table of Contents: There is no further proof that Russell and Andrew have created a book aimed specifically at educating students about economics than their two tables of contents. The Student's Table of Contents speaks to students, piquing their interest to involve them in the economics, and a Instructor's Table of Contents with the economics to better help you organize your teaching—and frankly, you don't need to get excited by economics, you already are.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aJohn, Andreweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/127zAccess online version02906nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100003000178245005300208264004300261264006900304264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505054900550520109801099542004102197546001602238588004102254650002402295650003602319650002602355710003902381856007602420OTLid0000128MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453332887  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 aJudge, William Q.eauthor00aFocusing on Organizational ChangecWilliam Judge 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Strategic Leader's New Mandate -- Chapter 2: What Is Organizational Capacity for Change? -- Chapter 3: OCC Dimension 1: Trustworthy Leadership -- Chapter 4: OCC Dimension 2: Trusting Followers -- Chapter 5: OCC Dimension 3: Capable Champions -- Chapter 6: OCC Dimension 4: Involved Midmanagement -- Chapter 7: OCC Dimension 5: Systems Thinking -- Chapter 8: OCC Dimension 6: Communication Systems -- Chapter 9: OCC Dimension 7: Accountable Culture -- Chapter 10: OCC Dimension 8: Innovative Culture -- Chapter 11: The Big Picture0 aNever before have strategic leaders been confronted with so much overwhelming change. The traditional approach is to teach the leader or leaders how to direct or control the organizations' reaction on a monthly, weekly, or even daily basis. This approach is stressful and overwhelming for executive leaders, makes middle managers feel torn between honoring their senior leaders and listening to the demands of front line employees, and is alienating for front line employees. Focusing on Organizational Change offers an alternative to the traditional approach by focusing on building the change capacity of the entire organization in anticipation of future pressures to change. Based on systematic research of more than 5,000 respondents working within more than 200 organization or organizational units conducted during the previous decade, this book offers a clear and proven method for diagnosing your organizational change capacity. While building organizational change capacity is not fast or easy, it is essential for effective leadership and organizational survival in the 21st century.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/128zAccess online version03850nam a2200505 i 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.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343722  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aFoundations of Business Law and Legal EnvironmentcDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter 9: The Agreement -- Chapter 10: Real Assent -- Chapter 11: Consideration -- Chapter 12: Legality -- Chapter 13: Form and Meaning -- Chapter 14: Third-Party Rights -- Chapter 15: Discharge of Obligations -- Chapter 16: Remedies -- Chapter 17: Products Liability -- Chapter 18: Relationships between Principal and Agent -- Chapter 19: Liability of Principal and Agent; Termination of Agency -- Chapter 20: Partnerships: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 21: Partnership Operation and Termination -- Chapter 22: Hybrid Business Forms -- Chapter 23: Corporation: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 24: Legal Aspects of Corporate Finance -- Chapter 25: Corporate Powers and Management -- Chapter 26: Securities Regulation -- Chapter 27: Corporate Expansion, State and Federal Regulation of Foreign Corporations, and Corporate Dissolution -- Chapter 28: Antitrust Law -- Chapter 29: Unfair Trade Practices and the Federal Trade Commission -- Chapter 30: Employment Law -- Chapter 31: Labor-Management Relations -- Chapter 32: International Law0 aMayer, Warner, Siedel and Lieberman's Foundations of Business Law and the Legal Environment is an up-to-date textbook with comprehensive coverage of legal and regulatory issues for your introductory Legal Environment or Business Law course. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with which they are already familiar with their clear, concise and readable style. Business Law and the Legal Environment provides students with context and essential concepts across a broad range of legal issues with which managers and business executives must grapple. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy necessary for business people to talk in an educated way to their customers, employees, suppliers, government officials — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/129zAccess online version02978nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001200167100003600179245005700215264004300272264006900315264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505049300561520122601054542004102280546001602321588004102337650002402378650002602402650002502428710003902453856007602492OTLid0000130MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453332870  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aHB171.51 ade Kluyver, Cornelis A.eauthor00aFundamentals of Global StrategycCornelis de Kluyver 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Competing in a Global World -- Chapter 2: The Globalization of Companies and Industries -- Chapter 3: Generic Strategies for Global Value Creation -- Chapter 4: Global Strategy as Business Model Change -- Chapter 5: Target Markets and Modes of Entry -- Chapter 6: Globalizing the Value Proposition -- Chapter 7: Global Branding -- Chapter 8: Globalizing the Value Chain Infrastructure -- Chapter 9: Global Supply-Chain Management -- Chapter 10: Globalizing the Management Model0 aThe globalization of the competitive landscape has forced companies to fundamentally rethink their strategies. Whereas once only a few industries such as oil could be labeled truly global, today many—from pharmaceuticals to aircraft to computers—have become global in scale and scope. As a consequence, creating a global competitive advantage has become a key strategic issue for many companies, and students need to possess an understanding of the impact of global strategies on a business. Crafting a global strategy requires making decisions about which strategy elements can and should be globalized and to what extent, and de Kluyver's Fundamentals of Global Strategy can help you illuminate these facts to your students. Fundamentals of Global Strategy poses the following questions for your students to analyze: What markets and/or regions should a company compete in and why? To what degree can and should products and services be standardized? Is it advantageous to adopt a more or less uniform market positioning worldwide? What value-added activities should it keep in-house, outsource, or relocate for competitive advantage? How can competitive responses be most effectively coordinated on a global basis?1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/130zAccess online version03730nam a2200589 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001100195050001000206050001300216050000900229100002300238245007500261264004300336264006900379264001200448300002200460336002600482337002600508338003600534341002800570490002700598505085800625520108901483542004102572546001602613588004102629650003402670650002402704650002502728650003402753650002802787650002802815650003402843650002802877650003302905700002702938700002702965700003302992710003903025856007603064OTLid0000131MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343272  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A4 4aJA711 aMayer, Doneauthor00aGovernment Regulation and the Legal Environment of BusinesscDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Contracts -- Chapter 9: Consumer Credit Transactions -- Chapter 10: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 11: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 12: Bankruptcy -- Chapter 13: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 14: The Nature and Regulation of Real Estate and the Environment -- Chapter 15: Securities Regulation -- Chapter 16: Antitrust Law -- Chapter 17: Unfair Trade Practices and the Federal Trade Commission -- Chapter 18: Employment Law -- Chapter 19: Labor-Management Relations -- Chapter 20: International Law0 aMayer, Warner, Siedel and Lieberman's Government Regulation and the Legal Environment of Business is an up-to-date textbook that covers legal issues that students must understand in today's highly regulated business environment. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with their clear, concise and readable style. After introductory chapters covering the legal environment of business, Government Regulation and the Legal Environment of Business provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to contracts, consumer credit transactions, bankruptcy, intellectual property, securities regulation, regulation of real estate, antitrust, unfair trade practices, employment law and labor relations. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy they will need to talk in an educated way to customers, suppliers, employees, creditors, shareholders, government regulators and other stakeholders — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, Georgeeauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/131zAccess online version03112nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100003400167245003200201264004300233264006200276264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505048500515520145301000542004102453546001602494588004102510650002402551650003602575710003902611856007602650OTLid0000132MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453349755  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF55491 aDias, Laura Portoleseeauthor00aHuman RelationscLaura Dias 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Human Relations? -- Chapter 2: Achieve Personal Success -- Chapter 3: Manage Your Stress -- Chapter 4: Communicate Effectively -- Chapter 5: Be Ethical at Work -- Chapter 6: Understand Your Motivations -- Chapter 7: Work Effectively in Groups -- Chapter 8: Make Good Decisions -- Chapter 9: Handle Conflict and Negotiation -- Chapter 10: Manage Diversity at Work -- Chapter 11: Work with Labor Unions -- Chapter 12: Be a Leader -- Chapter 13: Manage Your Career0 aHuman Relations by Laura Portolese-Dias addresses all of the critical topics to obtain career success as they relate to professional relationships. Knowing how to get along with others, resolve workplace conflict, manage relationships, communicate well, and make good decisions are all critical skills all students need to succeed in career and in life. Human Relations is not an organizational behavior; rather, it provides a good baseline of issues students will deal with in their careers on a day-to-day basis. It is also not a professional communications, business English, or professionalism textbook, as its focus is much broader — on general career success and how to effectively maneuver in the workplace. From communication challenges to focusing on one's own emotional intelligence, the examples throughout Human Relations will help students understand the importance of the human side in their career. This book's easy-to-understand language and tone is written to convey practical information in an engaging way. Every chapter opens with a realistic example which introduces a concept to be explained in detail later. Each chapter contains relevant examples, YouTube videos, figures, learning objectives, key takeaways, exercises, and a chapter-ending case that offer different ways to promote learning. Many of the end-of-section exercises offer self-assessment quizzes, so students may engage in self-understanding and development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/132zAccess online version03485nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002500180245003800205264004300243264006900286264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505040500532520188700937542004102824546001602865588004102881650002302922650002702945710003902972856007603011OTLid0000134MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453347485  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aRedden, Johneauthor00aIntermediate AlgebracJohn Redden 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Algebra Fundamentals -- Chapter 2: Graphing Functions and Inequalities -- Chapter 3: Solving Linear Systems -- Chapter 4: Polynomial and Rational Functions -- Chapter 5: Radical Functions and Equations -- Chapter 6: Solving Equations and Inequalities -- Chapter 7: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- Chapter 8: Conic Sections -- Chapter 9: Sequences, Series, and the Binomial Theorem0 aIt is essential to lay a solid foundation in mathematics if a student is to be competitive in today's global market. The importance of algebra, in particular, cannot be overstated, as it is the basis of all mathematical modeling used in applications found in all disciplines. Traditionally, the study of algebra is separated into a two parts, Elementary and Intermediate Algebra. This textbook by John Redden, Intermediate Algebra, is the second part. Written in a clear and concise manner, it carefully builds on the basics learned in Elementary Algebra and introduces the more advanced topics required for further study in applications found in most disciplines. Used as a standalone textbook, Intermediate Algebra offers plenty of review as well as something new to engage the student in each chapter. Written as a blend of the traditional and graphical approaches to the subject, this textbook introduces functions early and stresses the geometry behind the algebra. While CAS independent, a standard scientific calculator will be required and further research using technology is encouraged. Intermediate Algebra is written from the ground up in an open and modular format, allowing the instructor to modify it and leverage their individual expertise as a means to maximize the student experience and success. A more modernized element, embedded video examples, are present, but the importance of practice with pencil and paper is consistently stressed. Therefore, this text respects the traditional approaches to algebra pedagogy while enhancing it with the technology available today. The importance of Algebra cannot be overstated; it is the basis for all mathematical modeling used in all disciplines. After completing a course sequence based on Elementary and Intermediate Algebra, students will be on firm footing for success in higher-level studies at the college level.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/134zAccess online version03673nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156050001400164100003100178245004400209264004300253264006900296264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505040600542520197700948542004102925546001602966588004102982650003503023650002703058650002603085700002503111710003903136856007603175OTLid0000135MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453344873  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aShafer, Douglas S.eauthor00aIntroductory StatisticscDouglas Shafer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Descriptive Statistics -- Chapter 3: Basic Concepts of Probability -- Chapter 4: Discrete Random Variables -- Chapter 5: Continuous Random Variables -- Chapter 6: Sampling Distributions -- Chapter 7: Estimation -- Chapter 8: Testing Hypotheses -- Chapter 9: Two-Sample Problems -- Chapter 10: Correlation and Regression -- Chapter 11: Chi-Square Tests and F-Tests0 aIn many introductory level courses today, teachers are challenged with the task of fitting in all of the core concepts of the course in a limited period of time. The Introductory Statistics teacher is no stranger to this challenge. To add to the difficulty, many textbooks contain an overabundance of material, which not only results in the need for further streamlining, but also in intimidated students. Shafer and Zhang wrote Introductory Statistics by using their vast teaching experience to present a complete look at introductory statistics topics while keeping in mind a realistic expectation with respect to course duration and students' maturity level. Over time the core content of this course has developed into a well-defined body of material that is substantial for a one-semester course. Shafer and Zhang believe that the students in this course are best served by a focus on that core material and not by an exposure to a plethora of peripheral topics. Therefore in writing Introduction to Statistics they have sought to present only the core concepts and use a wide-ranging set of exercises for each concept to drive comprehension. As a result Introduction to Statistics is a smaller and less intimidating textbook that trades some extended and unnecessary topics for a better-focused presentation of the central material. You will not only appreciate the depth and breadth of exercises in Introduction to Statistics, but you will also like the close attention to detail that Shafer and Zhang have paid to the student and instructor solutions manuals. This is one of few books on the market where the textbook authors have written the solutions manuals to maintain the integrity of the material. In addition, in order to facilitate the use of technology with the book the authors included “large data set exercises,” where appropriate, that refer to large data sets that are available on the web, and for which use of statistical software is necessary.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aZhang, Zhiyieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/135zAccess online version03370nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001100166050001100177100002200188245004900210264004300259264006900302264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505034800548520169800896542004102594546001602635588004102651650002402692650003602716650004302752650002602795710003902821856007602860OTLid0000136MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453332894  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHM621 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 aMoua, Maieauthor00aLeading with Cultural IntelligencecMai Moua 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Culturally Intelligent Leadership Matters -- Chapter 2: Understanding Culture -- Chapter 3: Cultural Intelligence Defined -- Chapter 4: Thinking About Thinking -- Chapter 5: I Think I Can and I Will -- Chapter 6: Adapting and Performing -- Chapter 7: Cultural Intelligence in Action -- Chapter 8: The Future of Cultural Intelligence0 aOrganizations in the 21st century are in need of culturally intelligent managers and leaders. The pressure to build authentic global networks and to cultivate an appreciation and respect for cultural differences and similarities has driven cultural intelligence to the forefront of diversity and inclusion work. Preparing today's students to be effective leaders in their professional lives requires that they hone their cultural intelligence as it is vital to working inter- and intra-culturally in today's global economy. This unique ability to identify, recognize, and acknowledge the differences and similarities that exist between and among cultural groups and systems will set their leadership skills apart from the masses. And when applied, cultural intelligence can bridge the gap in cultural misunderstanding by creating awareness, knowledge, and patience of cultural norms and behaviors. The purpose of Leading With Cultural Intelligence by Mia Moua is to outline the important ideas of cultural intelligence and the steps that must be considered and then practiced to become a culturally intelligent leader. The most important aspect covered within this book is that cultural intelligence is both a strategy and a tool towards cultural competency and proficiency. This book outlines the importance of understanding culture and its impact on organizations, the strategic value of cultural intelligence, and the significance of integrating and practicing cultural intelligence in everyday business life. When all these aspects are properly integrated and applied in the leadership and management process, organizations are more innovative and adaptable to respond to cultural changes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/136zAccess online version05128nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100002800178245004200206264004300248264006800291264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505092200536520293601458542004104394546001604435588004104451650002604492650002404518650002604542700002304568710003904591856007604630OTLid0000137MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453345290  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHD30.41 aHeisinger, Kurteauthor00aManagerial AccountingcKurt Heisinger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc2023. 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Managerial Accounting? -- Chapter 2: How Is Job Costing Used to Track Production Costs? -- Chapter 3: How Does an Organization Use Activity-Based Costing to Allocate Overhead Costs? -- Chapter 4: How Is Process Costing Used to Track Production Costs? -- Chapter 5: How Do Organizations Identify Cost Behavior Patterns? -- Chapter 6: How Is Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis Used for Decision Making? -- Chapter 7: How Are Relevant Revenues and Costs Used to Make Decisions? -- Chapter 8: How Is Capital Budgeting Used to Make Decisions? -- Chapter 9: How Are Operating Budgets Created? -- Chapter 10: How Do Managers Evaluate Performance Using Cost Variance Analysis? -- Chapter 11: How Do Managers Evaluate Performance in Decentralized Organizations? -- Chapter 12: How Is the Statement of Cash Flows Prepared and Used? -- Chapter 13: How Do Managers Use Financial and Nonfinancial Performance Measures?0 aKurt Heisinger and Joe Ben Hoyle believe that students want to learn accounting in the most efficient way possible, balancing coursework with personal schedules. They tend to focus on their studies in short intense segments between jobs, classes, and family commitments. Meanwhile, the accounting industry has endured dramatic shifts since the collapse of Enron and WorldCom, causing a renewed focus on ethical behavior in accounting. This dynamic author team designed Managerial Accounting to work within the confines of today's students' lives while delivering a modern look at managerial accounting. Managerial Accounting was written around three major themes: Ready, Reinforcement and Relevance. This book is aimed squarely at the new learning styles evident with today's students and addresses accounting industry changes as well. Ready. Your students want to be as efficient as possible in their learning. This book adopts a concise, jargon-free, and easy-to-understand approach that is ready with concise sections and concepts when the student is ready to study in a format the student wants. Key concepts are provided in short segments with bullet points and step-by-step instructions to simplify concepts. This thoughtful, step-wise approach will help your students avoid distractions and focuses attention on the big picture. Reinforcement. Managerial Accounting boasts “Review Problems” at the end of each major section or learning objective which offer practical opportunities for students to apply what they have learned. These “Review Problems” allow students to immediately reinforce what they have learned and are provided within the body of the chapter along with the solutions. Relevance. Why is managerial accounting important? Since all students perform better when they can answer the “why” question, meaningful references to companies throughout the chapters help students tie the concepts presented in each chapter to real organizations. In addition, realistic managerial scenarios present an issue that must be addressed by the management accountant. These will pique your students' interest and were designed to show how issues can be resolved using the concepts presented in the chapter. Finally, “Business in Action” features in Managerial Accounting link managerial decision-making to real business decisions to help your students complete the learning cycle from concept, to accounting decision, to real-world application. Managerial Accounting by Heisinger and Hoyle also contains a handful of other pedagogical aids to compliment your lectures and help your students come to class prepared. From a focus on decision-making, to end of chapter materials that can only be characterized as very deep and very wide, to ethics coverage, group projects and spreadsheet applications—these features allow you to teach the course you want to teach and assign the materials you like to assign.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aHoyle, Joeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/137zAccess online version04260nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100003200166245008000198264004300278264006700321264001200388300002200400336002600422337002600448338003600474341002800510490002700538505070600565520234701271542003903618546001603657588004003673650002303713650002303736710003903759856007603798OTLid0000138MnU20260406020209.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1990    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781447545545  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchiller, Christopheauthor04aThe Adventure of Physics - Vol. IbFall, Flow, and HeatcChristoph Schiller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMotion Mountainc[1990] 4c©1990.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Why should we care about motion? -- 2 From motion measurement to continuity -- 3 How to describe motion - kinematics -- 4 From objects and images to conservation -- 5 From the rotation of the Earth to the relativity of motion -- 6 Motion due to gravitation -- 7 Classical mechanics and the predictability of motion -- 8 Measuring change with action -- 9 Motion and symmetry -- 10 Simple motions of extended bodies – oscillations and waves -- 11 Do extended bodies exist? – Limits of continuity -- 12 Fluids and their motion -- 13 On heat and motion reversal invariance -- 14 Self-organization and chaos - the simplicity of complexity -- 15 From the limitations of physics to the limits of motion0 aThis book is written for anybody who is curious about nature and motion. Curiosity about how people, animals, things, images and space move leads to many adventures. This volume presents the best of them in the domain of everyday life. Carefully observing everyday motion allows us to deduce six essential statements: everyday motion is continuous, conserved, relative, reversible, mirror-invariant – and lazy. Yes, nature is indeed lazy: in every motion, it minimizes change. This text explores how these six results are deduced and how they fit with all those observations that seem to contradict them. In the structure of modern physics, shown in Figure 1, the results on everyday motion form the major part of the starting point at the bottom. The present volume is the first of a six-volume overview of physics. It resulted from a threefold aim I have pursued since 1990: to present motion in a way that is simple, up to date and captivating. In order to be simple, the text focuses on concepts, while keeping mathematics to the necessary minimum. Understanding the concepts of physics is given precedence over using formulae in calculations. The whole text is within the reach of an undergraduate. In order to be up to date, the text is enriched by the many gems – both theoretical and empirical – that are scattered throughout the scientific literature. In order to be captivating, the text tries to startle the reader as much as possible. Read- ing a book on general physics should be like going to a magic show. We watch, we are astonished, we do not believe our eyes, we think, and finally we understand the trick. When we look at nature, we often have the same experience. Indeed, every page presents at least one surprise or provocation for the reader to think about. Numerous interesting challenges are proposed. The motto of the text, die Menschen stärken, die Sachen klären, a famous statement by Hartmut von Hentig on pedagogy, translates as: ‘To fortify people, to clarify things.' Clarifying things – and adhering only to the truth – requires courage, as changing the habits of thought produces fear, often hidden by anger. But by overcoming our fears we grow in strength. And we experience intense and beautiful emotions. All great adventures in life allow this, and exploring motion is one of them. Enjoy it!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/138zAccess online version04608nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002800162245009300190264004300283264006900326264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002800517490002700545505069700572520268401269542004103953546001603994588004104010650003104051650002504082710003904107856007604146OTLid0000139MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453328897  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM5861 aBlackstone, Amyeauthor00aPrinciples of Sociological InquirybQualitative and Quantitative MethodscAmy Blackstone 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Linking Methods With Theory -- Chapter 3: Research Ethics -- Chapter 4: Beginning a Research Project -- Chapter 5: Research Design -- Chapter 6: Defining and Measuring Concepts -- Chapter 7: Sampling -- Chapter 8: Survey Research: A Quantitative Technique -- Chapter 9: Interviews: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches -- Chapter 10: Field Research: A Qualitative Technique -- Chapter 11: Unobtrusive Research: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches -- Chapter 12: Other Methods of Data Collection and Analysis -- Chapter 13: Sharing Your Work -- Chapter 14: Reading and Understanding Social Research -- Chapter 15: Research Methods in the Real World0 aThe author of Principles of Sociological Inquiry: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods, Amy Blackstone, started envisioning this textbook while sitting in her own undergraduate sociology research methods class. She enjoyed the material but wondered about its relevance to her everyday life and future plans (the idea that one day she would be teaching such a class hadn't yet occurred to her). Now that she teaches the research methods course, she realizes that students today wonder the very same thing. While the importance of understanding research methods is usually clear to those students who intend to pursue an advanced degree, Amy wanted to write a text that would assist research methods teachers in demonstrating to all types of students the relevance of this course. In addition, Amy Blackstone's experience as an active researcher who uses both qualitative and quantitative methods made her acutely aware of the need for a balanced approach in teaching methods of sociological inquiry. Together, Amy Blackstone's experiences as a student, researcher, and teacher shape the three overriding objectives of Principles of Sociological Inquiry: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods: Relevance, Balance, and Accessibility. Principles of Sociological Inquiry: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods emphasizes the relevance of research methods for the everyday lives of its readers, undergraduate students.Each chapter describes how research methodology is useful for students in the multiple roles they fill: As consumers of popular and public information As citizens As current and future employees. Connections to these roles are made throughout and directly within the main text of the book Principles of Sociological Inquiry: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods also provides balanced coverage of qualitative and quantitative approaches by integrating a variety of examples from recent and classic sociological research. The text challenges students to debate and discuss the strengths and weaknesses of both approaches. Finally, one of the most important goals Amy had for Principles of Sociological Inquiry: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods was to introduce students to the core principles of social research in a way that is straightforward and engaging. As such, the text reflects public sociology's emphasis on making sociology accessible and readable. No one can validate that claim more than a teacher or student. So, take a look for yourself today and review Principles of Sociological Inquiry: Qualitative and Quantitative Methods by Amy Blackstone to see if its approach toward relevance, balance, and accessibility are right for your course and students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/139zAccess online version03935nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100002600178245006400204264004300268264006900311264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505066200557520196501219542004103184546001603225588004103241650002403282650003603306650002603342700003003368710003903398856007603437OTLid0000140MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453345566  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 aCadden, Davideauthor00aSmall Business Management in the 21st CenturycDavid Cadden 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Foundations for Small Business -- Chapter 2: Your Business Idea: The Quest for Value -- Chapter 3: Family Businesses -- Chapter 4: E-Business and E-Commerce -- Chapter 5: The Business Plan -- Chapter 6: Marketing Basics -- Chapter 7: Marketing Strategy -- Chapter 8: The Marketing Plan -- Chapter 9: Accounting and Cash Flow -- Chapter 10: Financial Management -- Chapter 11: Supply Chain Management: You Better Get It Right -- Chapter 12: People and Organization -- Chapter 13: The Search for Efficiency and Effectiveness -- Chapter 14: Icebergs and Escapes -- Chapter 15: Going Global: Yes or No? -- Chapter 16: Appendix: A Sample Business Plan0 aSmall Business Management in the 21st Century offers a unique perspective and set of capabilities for instructors. The authors designed this book with a “less can be more” approach, and by treating small business management as a practical human activity rather than as an abstract theoretical concept. The text has a format and structure that will be familiar to you if you use other books on small business management. Yet it brings a fresh perspective by incorporating three distinctive and unique themes and an important new feature (Disaster Watch) which is embedded throughout the entire text. These themes assure that students see the material in an integrated context rather than a stream of separate and distinct topics. First, the authors incorporate the use of technology and e-business as a way to gain competitive advantage over larger rivals. Technology is omnipresent in today's business world. Small business must use it to its advantage. We provide practical discussions and examples of how a small business can use these technologies without having extensive expertise or expenditures. Second, they explicitly acknowledge the constant need to examine how decisions affect cash flow by incorporating cash flow impact content in several chapters. As the life blood of all organizations, cash flow implications must be a factor in all business decision-making. Third, they recognize the need to clearly identify sources of customer value and bring that understanding to every decision. Decisions that do not add to customer value should be seriously reconsidered. Small Business Management in 21st Century boasts a new feature called Disaster Watch scenarios. Few texts cover, in any detail, some of the major hazards that small business managers face. Disaster Watch scenarios, included in most chapters, cover topics that include financing, bankers, creditors, employees, customers who don't pay, economic downturns, and marketing mistakes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aLueder, Sandra L.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/140zAccess online version06144nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154050001000161245004400171264004300215264006900258264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002500449490002700474505059500501520434801096542004105444546001605485588004105501650003305542650003105575650002505606710003905631856007605670OTLid0000141MnU20260406020731.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135230  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH1 4aHM58600aSocial Problems - Continuity and Change 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Understanding Social Problems -- Chapter 2: Poverty -- Chapter 3: Racial and Ethnic Inequality -- Chapter 4: Gender Inequality -- Chapter 5: Sexual Orientation and Inequality -- Chapter 6: Aging and Ageism -- Chapter 7: Alcohol and Other Drugs -- Chapter 8: Crime and Criminal Justice -- Chapter 9: Sexual Behavior -- Chapter 10: The Changing Family -- Chapter 11: Schools and Education -- Chapter 12: Work and the Economy -- Chapter 13: Health and Health Care -- Chapter 14: Urban and Rural Problems -- Chapter 15: Population and the Environment -- Chapter 16: War and Terrorism0 aSocial Problems: Continuity and Change is a realistic but motivating look at the many issues that are facing our society today. As this book's subtitle, Continuity and Change, implies, social problems are persistent, but they have also improved in the past and can be improved in the present and future, provided that our nation has the wisdom and will to address them. It is easy for students to read a social problems textbook and come away feeling frustrated by the enormity of the many social problems facing us today. Social Problems: Continuity and Change certainly does not minimize the persistence of social problems, but neither does it overlook the possibilities for change offered by social research and by the activities of everyday citizens working to make a difference. Readers the book will find many examples of how social problems have been improved and of strategies that hold great potential for solving them today and in the future. You will find several pedagogical features help to convey the “continuity and change” theme of this text and the service sociology vision in which it is grounded: Each chapter begins with a “Social Problems in the News” story related to the social problem discussed in that chapter. These stories provide an interesting starting point for the chapter's discussion and show its relevance for real-life issues. Three types of boxes in each chapter provide examples of how social problems have been changed and can be changed. In no particular order, A first box, “Applying Social Research,” discusses how the findings from sociological and other social science research have either contributed to public policy related to the chapter's social problem or have the potential of doing so. A second box, “Lessons from Other Nations,” discusses how another nation or nations have successfully addressed the social problem of that chapter. A third box, “People Making a Difference,” discusses efforts by individuals, non-profit organizations or social change groups, or social movements relating to the chapter's social problem. Students will see many examples in this box of how ordinary people can indeed make a difference. A fourth box in each chapter, “Children and Our Future,” examines how the social problem discussed in that chapter particularly affects children, and it outlines the problem's repercussions for their lives as adolescents and adults. This box reinforces for students the impact of social problems on children and the importance of addressing these problems for their well-being as well as for the nation's well-being.Each chapter ends with a “Using What You Know” feature that presents students with a scenario involving the social problem from the chapter and that puts them in a decision-making role. This feature helps connect the chapter's theoretical discussion with potential real-life situations. Each chapter also ends with a “What You Can Do” feature that suggests several activities, strategies, or other efforts that students might undertake to learn more about and/or to address the social problem examined in the chapter. Like other aspects of the book, this feature helps counter “doom and gloom” feelings that little can be done about social problems. Other pedagogical features in each chapter include Learning Objectives at the beginning of a major section that highlight key topics to be learned; Key Takeaways at the end of a major section that highlight important points that were discussed in the section; For Your Review questions, also at the end of a major section, that have students think critically about that section's discussion; and a Summary that reviews the major points made in the chapter. The founders of American sociology a century or more ago in cities like Atlanta and Chicago wanted to reduce social inequality, to improve the lives of people of color, and more generally to find solutions to the most vexing social problems of their times. A former president of the Society for the Study of Social Problems, A. Javier Treviño, has used the term service sociology to characterize their vision of their new discipline. Social Problems: Continuity and Change is grounded in this vision by offering a sociological understanding of today's social problems and of possible solutions to these problems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/141zAccess online version05662nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001000167100002600177245005300203264004300256264006900299264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505103000545520331001575542004104885546001604926588004104942650002404983650002605007650002305033700002805056700002905084710003905113856007605152OTLid0000142MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453346778  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aQH3011 aGittell, Rosseauthor04aThe Sustainable Business Case BookcRoss Gittell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Sustainable Business and Sustainable Business Core Concepts and Frameworks -- Chapter 2: The Science of Sustainability -- Chapter 3: Government, Public Policy, and Sustainable Business -- Chapter 4: Accountability for Sustainability -- Chapter 5: Entrepreneurship, Innovation, and Sustainable Business -- Chapter 6: Sustainable Business Marketing -- Chapter 7: Case: Sustainable Business Entrepreneurship: Simply Green Biofuels -- Chapter 8: Case: Marketing Sustainability: Seventh Generation Creating a Green Household Consumer Product -- Chapter 9: Case: Brewing a Better World: Sustainable Supply Chain Management at Green Mountain Coffee Roasters, Inc. -- Chapter 10: Case: Oakhurst Dairy: Operations Management and Sustainability -- Chapter 11: Case: Accounting for Sustainability: How Does Timberland Do It and Why? -- Chapter 12: Case: Sustainable Investing: Pax World Helping Investors Change the World -- Chapter 13: Case: Strategic Mission–Driven Sustainable Business: Stonyfield Yogurt0 aThe issue of sustainability and specifically sustainable business is of increasing interest and importance to students of business and also students in the sciences, government, public policy, planning and other fields. There can be significant benefits from students learning about sustainable business from the rich experiences of business practice. The Sustainable Business Case Book by Gittell, Magnusson and Merenda is one of the first of its kind. It combines the the theory of sustainability with key concepts, analytical information and contextual information with a collection of cases which provide insights, perspective and practical guidance on how sustainable businesses operate from different business functional area perspectives. The Sustainable Business Case Book can be used as a stand-alone text or as a supplemental textbook for undergraduate courses that have an interest in sustainable business. While the book's primary focus is on the relationship between business and sustainability, the book can also be used in courses offered in fields other than business, including environmental and earth systems sciences, environmental studies, urban planning, economics and public policy. The first part of The Sustainable Business Case Book, Chapter 1 through Chapter 3, introduces students to the meaning of sustainability, and the practice of sustainable business. The introductory chapters also describe key concepts, analytical frameworks, and contextual information relevant for the understanding of business sustainability. Chapter 1, defines sustainability and describes how and why businesses choose to engage in sustainable practices and how sustainable business practices relate to corporate profitability and social responsibility. Chapters 2 and 3 provide important background and contextual information affecting sustainable business practice. Chapter 2, The Science of Sustainability, reviews scientific evidence about climate change and the human and business influences on climate change. Chapter 3, Sustainability, Public Policy and Business, describes the significant role of government and public policy in sustainability, including setting the rules, regulations and laws that define the market and market opportunities for sustainable business practice. After presenting a framework for understanding business engagement in sustainability and helping your students develop a core background of information on sustainable business seven case studies across the business disciplines illustrating business sustainability practices are presented. At the beginning of each case study chapter Learning Objectives are listed with major sustainable business points and principles that the case will illustrate and illuminate. Each case chapter includes listing of Key Takeaways, Key Terms and Exercises for students. In each case chapter, there are four main areas of focus: Context and motivating interest in sustainability for company; Description of the sustainable business practice and how it was implemented; Results in terms of changes in sales/revenues, costs, profits and competitive positioning from the sustainable business practice; Challenges and opportunities, and future considerations as a result of the company implementing the sustainable business practice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMagnusson, Matteauthor1 aMerenda, Michaeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/142zAccess online version04165nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001000161245008300171264004300254264009600297264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002500515490002700540505051000567520243701077542004103514546001603555588004003571650003603611650002903647710003903676856007603715OTLid0000143MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135261  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.300aMass Communication, Media, and Culture - An Introduction to Mass Communication 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Media and Culture -- Chapter 2: Media Effects -- Chapter 3: Books -- Chapter 4: Newspapers -- Chapter 5: Magazines -- Chapter 6: Music -- Chapter 7: Radio -- Chapter 8: Movies -- Chapter 9: Television -- Chapter 10: Electronic Games and Entertainment -- Chapter 11: The Internet and Social Media -- Chapter 12: Advertising and Public Relations -- Chapter 13: Economics of Mass Media -- Chapter 14: Ethics of Mass Media -- Chapter 15: Media and Government -- Chapter 16: The Future of Mass Media0 aAccording to the author, the world did not need another introductory text in mass communication. But the world did need another kind of introductory text in mass communication, and that is how Understanding Media and Culture: An Introduction to Mass Communication was birthed. The only question was: What would be the purpose of another introductory mass communication text? Understanding Media and Culture: An Introduction to Mass Communication was written to squarely emphasize media technology. The author believes that an introduction to mass communication text should be a compelling, historical narrative sketching the *ongoing evolution* of media technology and how that technology shapes and is shaped by culture — and that is what he set out to deliver with his new textbook. Today's students are immersed in media technology. They live in a world of cell phones, smart phones, video games, iPods, laptops, Facebook, Twitter, FourSquare, and more. They fully expect that new technology will be developed tomorrow. Yet students often lack an historical perspective on media technology. They lack knowledge of the social, political and economic forces that shape media technology. This is not knowledge for knowledge's sake. It is knowledge that can help them understand, comprehend, appreciate, anticipate, shape and control media technology. With this focus, Understanding Media and Culture becomes an appropriate title. Indeed, the title has particular significance. Marshall McLuhan's Understanding Media is a key text in media studies. Written in the 1960s, Understanding Media was the subject of intense debates that continue to this day. Its central message was that the technology of media — not their content — was their most important feature. In a typically pithy phrase, McLuhan said, "The medium is the message." The title, Understanding Media and Culture: An Introduction to Mass Communication, situates the introductory text in a large, engrossing theoretical conversation. The goal is to adopt a textbook that will support and complement your teaching of this course. Understanding Media and Culture: An Introduction to Mass Communication will support an engaging and interesting course experience for students that will not only show them the powerful social, political and economic forces will affect the future of media technology, but will challenge students to do their part in shaping that future.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/143zAccess online version03240nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100003400145245008700179264004300266264006400309264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505074400550520131501294542001602609546001602625588004102641650003202682650003702714710003902751856007602790OTLid0000144MnU20260406020703.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aBusbee, Kenneth Leroyeauthor00aProgramming Fundamentals - A Modular Structured Approach using C++cKenneth Busbee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Programming -- 2. Program Planning & Design -- 3. Data & Operators -- 4. Often Used Data Types -- 5. Integrated Development Environment -- 6. Program Control Functions -- 7. Specific Task Functions -- 8. Standard Libraries -- 9. Character Data, Sizeof, Typedef, Sequence -- 10. Introduction to Structured Programming -- 11. Two Way Selection -- 12. Multiway Selection -- 13. Test After Loops -- 14. Test Before Loops -- 15. Counting Loops -- 16. String Class, Unary Positive and Negative -- 17. Conditional Operator and Recursion -- 18. Introduction to Arrays -- 19. File I/O and Array Functions -- 20. More Array Functions -- 21. More on Typedef -- 22. Pointers -- 23. More Arrays & Compiler Directives -- 24. OOP & HPC0 aProgramming Fundamentals - A Modular Structured Approach using C++ is written by Kenneth Leroy Busbee, a faculty member at Houston Community College in Houston, Texas. The materials used in this textbook/collection were developed by the author and others as independent modules for publication within the Connexions environment. Programming fundamentals are often divided into three college courses: Modular/Structured, Object Oriented and Data Structures. This textbook/collection covers the first of those three courses. The learning modules of this textbook/collection were written as standalone modules. Students using a collection of modules as a textbook will usually view it contents by reading the modules sequentially as presented by the author of the collection. The learning modules of this textbook/collection were, for the most part, written without consideration of a speci??c programming language. In many cases the C++ language is discussed as part of the explanation of the concept. Often the examples used for C++ are exactly the same for the Java programming language. However, some modules were written speci??cally for the C++ programming language. This could not beavoided as the C++ language is used in conjunction with this textbook/collection by the author in teaching college courses.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/144zAccess online version02638nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001100136050000800147100002900155245009500184264004300279264007100322264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505128900570520010601859542001601965546001601981588004101997650003202038650002702070700002802097710003902125856007602164OTLid0000150MnU20260406020351.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aNievergelt, Jurgeauthor00aAlgorithms and Data Structures With Applications to Graphics and GeometrycJurg Nievergelt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGlobal Text Projectc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Programming environments for motion, graphics, and geometry -- 1. Reducing a task to given primitives: programming motion -- 2. Graphics primitives and environments -- 3. Algorithm animation -- Part II: Programming concepts: beyond notation -- 4. Algorithms and programs as literature: substance and form -- 5. Divide-and-conquer and recursion. -- 6. Syntax -- 7. Syntax analysis -- Part III: Objects, algorithms, programs. -- 8. Truth values, the data type 'set', and bit acrobatics -- 9. Ordered sets -- 10. Strings -- 11. Matrices and graphs: transitive closure -- 12. Integers -- 13. Reals -- 14. Straight lines and circles -- Part IV: Complexity of problems and algorithms -- 15. Computability and complexity -- 16. The mathematics of algorithm analysis -- 17. Sorting and its complexity -- Part V: Data structures -- 18. What is a data structure? -- 19. Abstract data types -- 20. Implicit data structures -- 21. List structures -- 22. Address computation -- 23. Metric data structures -- Part VI: Interaction between algorithms and data structures: case studies in geometric computation -- 24. Sample problems and algorithms -- 25. Plane-sweep: a general-purpose algorithm for two-dimensional problems illustrated using line segment intersection -- 26. The closest pair0 aAn introductory coverage of algorithms and data structures with application to graphics and geometry.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aHinrichs, Klauseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/150zAccess online version05278nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134050000700144100002800151245004300179250001900222264004300241264005500284264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002500461490002700486505045400513520359000967542001604557546001604573588004104589650002504630650002604655650003104681700002904712710003904741856007604780OTLid0000153MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aBF121 4aH11 aSeifert, Kelvineauthor00aEducational PsychologycKelvin Seifert  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWinnipeg, ManitobabUniversity of Manitobac[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The changing teaching profession and you -- 2. The learning process -- 3. Student development -- 4. Student diversity -- 5. Students with special educational needs -- 6. Student motivation -- 7. Classroom management and the learning environment -- 8. The nature of classroom communication -- 9. Facilitating complex thinking -- 10. Planning instruction -- 11. Teacher-made assessment strategies -- 12. Standardized and other formal assessments --0 aChapters in the text can be assigned either from beginning to end, as with a conventional printed book, or they can be selected in some other sequence to meet the needs of particular students or classes. In general the first half of the book focuses on broader questions and principles taken from psychology per se, and the second half focuses on somewhat more practical issues of teaching. But the division between “theory” and “practice” is only approximate; all parts of the book draw on research, theory, and practical wisdom wherever appropriate. Chapter 2 is about learning theory, and Chapter 3 is about development; but as we point out, these topics overlap with each other as well as with the concerns of daily teaching. Chapter 4 is about several forms of student diversity (what might be called individual differences in another context), and Chapter 5 is about one form of diversity that has become prominent in schools recently—students with disabilities. Chapter 6 is about motivation, a topic that is heavily studied by psychological researchers, but that also poses perennial challenges to classroom teachers. Following these somewhat more basic psychological chapters, we turn to several lasting challenges of classroom life—challenges that seem to be an intrinsic part of the job. Chapter 7 offers ideas about classroom management; Chapter 8, ideas about communicating with students; Chapter 9, about ways to assist students' complex forms of thinking; and Chapter 10, about planning instruction systematically. The book closes with two chapters about assessment of learning: Chapter 11 focuses on teachers' own efforts to assess students, and Chapter 12 focuses on standardized measures of assessment. We have organized material and features in ways that we hope will allow for a variety of students, instructors, and institutions to use the book. For instructors and courses that seek a strong focus on research and the research process, for example, we have included an extra “chapter” on research methods—Appendix C, “The Reflective Practitioner”—that discusses the nature of research and the research process. We have also included a set of research-related case studies in Appendix B, “Deciding for yourself about the research”, that describe a number of particular educational research programs or topics in detail and that invite students to reflect on the quality and implications of the research. Whether or not a strong focus on research is a priority in your particular course, there are additional features of the book that are intended to help students in learning about educational psychology. In particular, each chapter ends with a “Chapter summary”, a list of “Key terms”, and links to Internet sites (called “Further resources”) relevant to the themes of the chapter. One of the sites that is cited frequently and that may be particularly helpful to instructors is the teachingedpsych wiki (http://teachingedpsych.wikispaces.com/), an archive of hundreds of teaching and learning materials that supports the teaching of introductory educational psychology. Teachingedpsych is a project of the Special Interest Group on the Teaching of Educational Psychology (TEP SIG), affiliated with the American Educational Research Association. All in all, we hope that you find Educational Psychology a useful and accessible part of your education. If you are preparing to be a teacher, good luck with your studies and your future! If you are an instructor, good luck with helping your students learn about this subject!1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSutton, Rosemaryeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/153zAccess online version03132nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002900146245004900175264004300224264006400267264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505047800508520153300986542001602519546001602535588004102551650002702592700002402619710003902643856007602682OTLid0000154MnU20260406020703.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aBurzynski, Dennyeauthor00aFundamentals of MathematicscDenny Burzynski 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Addition and Subtraction of Whole Numbers -- 2 Multiplication and Division of Whole Numbers -- 3 Exponents, Roots, and Factorization of Whole Numbers -- 4 Introduction to Fractions and Multiplication and Division of Fractions -- 5 Addition and Subtraction of Fractions, Comparing Fractions, and Complex Fractions -- 6 Decimals -- 7 Ratios and Rates -- 8 Techniques of Estimation -- 9 Measurement and Geometry -- 10 Signed Numbers -- 11 Algebraic Expressions and Equations0 aFundamentals of Mathematics is a work text that covers the traditional study in a modern prealgebra course, as well as the topics of estimation, elementary analytic geometry, and introductory algebra. It is intended for students who: have had previous courses in prealgebra wish to meet the prerequisites of higher level courses such as elementary algebra need to review fundamental mathematical concenpts and techniques This text will help the student devlop the insight and intuition necessary to master arithmetic techniques and manipulative skills. It was written with the following main objectives: to provide the student with an understandable and usable source of information to provide the student with the maximum oppurtinity to see that arithmetic concepts and techniques are logically based to instill in the student the understanding and intuitive skills necessary to know how and when to use particular arithmetic concepts in subsequent material cources and nonclassroom situations to give the students the ability to correctly interpret arithmetically obtained results We have tried to meet these objects by presenting material dynamically much the way an instructure might present the material visually in a classroom. (See the development of the concept of addition and subtraction of fractions in section 5.3 for examples) Intuition and understanding are some of the keys to creative thinking, we belive that the material presented in this text will help students realize that mathematics is a creative subject.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aEllis, Wadeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/154zAccess online version04032nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003200148245007100180264004300251264006700294264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505053800538520232601076542003903402546001603441588004003457650002303497650002303520710003903543856007603582OTLid0000155MnU20260406020210.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1990    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchiller, Christopheauthor04aThe Adventure of Physics - Vol. IIbRelativitycChristoph Schiller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMotion Mountainc[1990] 4c©1990.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Maximum Speed, Observers At Rest And Motion Of Light -- 2 Relativistic Mechanics -- 3 Special Relativity In Four Sentences -- 4 Simple General Relativity: Gravitation, Maximum Speed And Maximum Force -- 5 How Maximum Speed Changes Space, Time And Gravity -- 6 Open Orbits, Bent Light And Wobbling Vacuum -- 7 From Curvature To Motion -- 8 Why Can We See The Stars? – Motion In The Universe -- 9 Black Holes – Falling Forever -- 10 Does Space Differ From Time? -- 11 General Relativity In A Nutshell – A Summary For The Layman0 aThis book is written for anybody who is curious about nature and motion. Curiosity about how people, animals, things, images and empty space move leads to many adven- tures. This volume presents the best of them in the domains of relativity and cosmology. In the study of motion – physics – special and general relativity form two important building blocks. Special relativity is the exploration of the energy speed limit c. General relativity is the exploration of the force limit c4/4G. The text shows that in both domains, all equations follow from these two limit values. This simple, intuitive and unusual way of learning relativity should reward the curiosity of every reader – whether student or professional. The present volume is the second of a six-volume overview of physics that arose from a threefold aim that I have pursued since 1990: to present motion in a way that is simple, up to date and captivating. In order to be simple, the text focuses on concepts, while keeping mathematics to the necessary minimum. Understanding the concepts of physics is given precedence over using formulae in calculations. The whole text is within the reach of an undergraduate. In order to be up to date, the text is enriched by the many gems – both theoretical and empirical – that are scattered throughout the scientific literature. In order to be captivating, the text tries to startle the reader as much as possible. Read- ing a book on general physics should be like going to a magic show. We watch, we are astonished, we do not believe our eyes, we think, and finally we understand the trick. When we look at nature, we often have the same experience. Indeed, every page presents at least one surprise or provocation for the reader to think about. Numerous interesting challenges are proposed. The motto of the text, die Menschen stärken, die Sachen klären, a famous statement by Hartmut von Hentig on pedagogy, translates as: ‘To fortify people, to clarify things.' Clar- ifying things – and adhering only to the truth – requires courage, as changing the habits of thought produces fear, often hidden by anger. But by overcoming our fears we grow in strength. And we experience intense and beautiful emotions. All great adventures in life allow this, and exploring motion is one of them. Enjoy it!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/155zAccess online version03850nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003200148245008800180264004300268264006700311264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505039300555520227200948542003903220546001603259588004003275650002303315650002303338710003903361856007603400OTLid0000156MnU20260406020210.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1990    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchiller, Christopheauthor04aThe Adventure of Physics - Vol. IIIbLight, Charges, and BrainscChristoph Schiller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMotion Mountainc[1990] 4c©1990.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Liquid Electricity, Invisible Fields And Maximum Speed -- 2 The Description Of Electromagnetic Field Evolution -- 3 What Is Light -- 4 Images And The Eye – Optics -- 5 Electromagnetic Effects -- 6 Summary And Limits Of Classical Electrodynamics -- 7 The Story Of The Brain -- 8 Language And Concepts -- 9 Observations, Lies And Patterns Of Nature -- 10 Classical Physics In A Nutshell0 aThis book is written for anybody who is curious about nature and motion. Curiosity about how people, animals, things, images and space move leads to many adventures. This volume presents the adventures one encounters when exploring everything electric. The story ranges from the weighing of electric current to the use of magnetic fields to heal bone fractures and up to the understanding of the human brain. In the structure of physics, shown in Figure 1, motion due to electricity is the most fascinating aspect of the starting point at the bottom. Indeed, almost everything around us is due to electric processes. The present introduction to electricity, magnetism, light and the brain is the third of a six-volume overview of physics that arose from a threefold aim that I have pursued since 1990: to present motion in a way that is simple, up to date and captivating. In order to be simple, the text focuses on concepts, while keeping mathematics to the necessary minimum. Understanding the concepts of physics is given precedence over using formulae in calculations. The whole text is within the reach of an undergraduate. In order to be up to date, the text is enriched by the many gems – both theoretical and empirical – that are scattered throughout the scientific literature. In order to be captivating, the text tries to startle the reader as much as possible. Read- ing a book on general physics should be like going to a magic show. We watch, we are astonished, we do not believe our eyes, we think, and finally we understand the trick. When we look at nature, we often have the same experience. Indeed, every page presents at least one surprise or provocation for the reader to think about. Numerous interesting challenges are proposed. The motto of the text, die Menschen stärken, die Sachen klären, a famous statement by Hartmut von Hentig on pedagogy, translates as: ‘To fortify people, to clarify things.' Clar- ifying things – and adhering only to the truth – requires courage, as changing the habits of thought produces fear, often hidden by anger. But by overcoming our fears we grow in strength. And we experience intense and beautiful emotions. All great adventures in life allow this, and exploring motion is one of them. Enjoy it!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/156zAccess online version03843nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100003200166245008200198264004300280264006700323264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505050200567520213201069542003903201546001603240588004003256650002303296650002303319710003903342856007603381OTLid0000157MnU20260406020210.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1990    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781447560371  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchiller, Christopheauthor04aThe Adventure of Physics - Vol. IVbThe Quantum of ChangecChristoph Schiller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMotion Mountainc[1990] 4c©1990.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Minimum Action – Quantum Theory For Poets -- 2 Light – The Strange Consequences Of The Quantum Of Action -- 3 Motion Of Matter – Beyond Classical Physics -- 4 The Quantum Description Of Matter And Its Motion -- 5 Permutation Of Particles – Are Particles Like Gloves? -- 6 Rotations And Statistics – Visualizing Spin -- 7 Superpositions And Probabilities – Quantum Theory Without Ideology -- 8 Colours And Other Interactions Between Light And Matter -- 9 Quantum Physics In A Nutshell0 aThis book is written for anybody who is curious about nature and motion. Have you ever asked: Why do people, animals, things, images and space move? The answer leads to many adventures; this volume presents those due to the discovery that there is a smallest change value in nature. This smallest change value, the quantum of action, leads to what is called quantum physics. In the structure of modern physics, quantum physics covers three points; this volume covers the introduction to the point in the lower right: the foundations of quantum theory. The present introduction to quantum physics arose from a threefold aim I have pursued since 1990: to present the basics of motion in a way that is simple, up to date and captivating. In order to be simple, the text focuses on concepts, while keeping mathematics to the necessary minimum. Understanding the concepts of physics is given precedence over using formulae in calculations. The whole text is within the reach of an undergraduate. In order to be up to date, the text is enriched by the many gems – both theoretical and empirical – that are scattered throughout the scientific literature. In order to be captivating, the text tries to startle the reader as much as possible. Read- ing a book on general physics should be like going to a magic show. We watch, we are astonished, we do not believe our eyes, we think, and finally we understand the trick. When we look at nature, we often have the same experience. Indeed, every page presents at least one surprise or provocation for the reader to think about. Numerous interesting challenges are proposed. The motto of the text, die Menschen stärken, die Sachen klären, a famous statement by Hartmut von Hentig on pedagogy, translates as: ‘To fortify people, to clarify things.' Clarifying things – and adhering only to the truth – requires courage, as changing the habits of thought produces fear, often hidden by anger. But by overcoming our fears we grow in strength. And we experience intense and beautiful emotions. All great adventures in life allow this, and exploring motion is one of them. Enjoy it!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/157zAccess online version04169nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003200148245011400180264004300294264006700337264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002800526490002700554505059800581520236001179542003903539546001603578588004003594650002303634650002303657710003903680856007603719OTLid0000158MnU20260406020210.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1990    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchiller, Christopheauthor04aThe Adventure of Physics - Vol. VbMotion Inside Matter - Pleasure, Technology, and StarscChristoph Schiller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMotion Mountainc[1990] 4c©1990.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Motion For Enjoying Life -- 2 Changing The World With Quantum Effects -- 3 Quantum Electrodynamics – The Origin Of Virtual Reality -- 4 Quantum Mechanics With Gravitation – First Steps -- 5 The Structure Of The Nucleus – The Densest Clouds -- 6 The Sun, The Stars And The Birth Of Matter -- 7 The Strong Interaction – Inside Nuclei And Nucleons -- 8 The Weak Nuclear Interaction And The Handedness Of Nature -- 9 The Standard Model Of Particle Physics – As Seen On Television -- 10 Dreams Of Unification -- 11 Bacteria, Flies And Knots -- 12 Quantum Physics In A Nutshell – Again0 aThis book is written for anybody who is curious about nature and motion. Curiosity about how bodies, images and empty space move leads to many adventures. This volume presents the best adventures about the motion inside people, inside animals, and inside any other type of matter – from the largest stars to the smallest nuclei. Motion inside bodies – dead or alive – is described by quantum theory. Quantum theory describes all motion with the quantum of action h, the smallest change observed in nature. Building on this basic idea, the text first shows how to describe life, death and pleasure. Then, the text explains the observations of chemistry, materials science, astrophysics and particle physics. In the structure of physics, these topics correspond to the three ‘quantum' points in Figure 1. The story of motion inside living and non-living matter, from the coldest gases to the hottest stars, is told here in a way that is simple, up to date and captivating. In order to be simple, the text focuses on concepts, while keeping mathematics to the necessary minimum. Understanding the concepts of physics is given precedence over using formulae in calculations. The whole text is within the reach of an undergraduate. In order to be up to date, the text is enriched by the many gems – both theoretical and empirical – that are scattered throughout the scientific literature. In order to be captivating, the text tries to startle the reader as much as possible. Read- ing a book on physics should be like going to a magic show. We watch, we are astonished, we do not believe our eyes, we think, and finally we understand the trick. When we look at nature, we often have the same experience. Indeed, every page presents at least one sur- prise that makes the reader think. Also numerous interesting challenges are proposed. The motto of the text, die Menschen stärken, die Sachen klären, a famous statement by Hartmut von Hentig on pedagogy, translates as: ‘To fortify people, to clarify things.' Clar- ifying things – and adhering only to the truth – requires courage, as changing the habits of thought produces fear, often hidden by anger. But by overcoming our fears we grow in strength. And we experience intense and beautiful emotions. All great adventures in life allow this, and exploring motion is one of them. Enjoy it!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/158zAccess online version04594nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003200148245010800180264004300288264006700331264001200398300002200410336002600432337002600458338003600484341002800520490002700548505062900575520276001204542003903964546001604003588004004019650002304059650002304082710003904105856007604144OTLid0000159MnU20260406020211.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchiller, Christopheauthor04aThe Adventure of Physics - Vol. VIbThe Strand Model - A Speculation on UnificationcChristoph Schiller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMotion Mountainc[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 From Millennium Physics To Unification -- 2 Physics In Limit Statements -- 3 General Relativity Versus Quantum Theory -- 4 Does Matter Differ From Vacuum? -- 5 What Is The Difference Between The Universe And Nothing? -- 6 The Shape Of Points – Extension In Nature -- 7 The Basis Of The Strand Model -- 8 Quantum Theory Of Matter Deduced From Strands -- 9 Gauge Interactions Deduced From Strands -- 10 General Relativity Deduced From Strands -- 11 The Particle Spectrum Deduced From Strands -- 12 Particle Properties Deduced From Strands -- 13 Experimental Predictions Of The Strand Model -- 14 The Top Of Motion Mountain0 aThis book is written for anybody who is intensely curious about nature and motion. Have you ever asked: Why do people, animals, things, images and empty space move? The answer leads to many adventures, and this book presents one of the best of them: the search for a precise, unified and final description of all motion. The wish to describe all motion is a large endeavour. Fortunately, this large endeavour can be structured in the simple diagram shown in Figure 1. The final and unified descrip- tion of motion, the topic of this book, corresponds to the highest point in the diagram. Searching for this final and unified description is an old quest. In the following, I briefly summarize its history and then present an intriguing, though speculative solution to the riddle. The search for the final, unified description of motion is a story of many surprises. For example, twentieth-century research has shown that there is a smallest distance in nature. Research has also shown that matter cannot be distinguished from empty space at those small distances. A last surprise dates from this century: particles and space are best described as made of strands, instead of little spheres or points. The present text explains how to reach these unexpected conclusions. In particular, quantum field theory, the standard model of particle physics, general relativity and cosmology are shown to follow from strands. The three gauge interactions, the three particle generations and the three dimensions of space turn out to be due to strands. In fact, all the open questions of twentieth-century physics about the foundations of motion, all the millennium issues, can be solved with the help of strands. The strand model, as presented in this text, is an unexpected result from a threefold aim that I have pursued since 1990, in the five previous volumes of this series: to present the basics of motion in a way that is up to date, captivating and simple. In retrospect, the aim for maximum simplicity has been central in deducing this speculation. While the previous volumes introduced, in an entertaining way, the established parts of physics, this volume presents, in the same entertaining and playful way, a speculation about uni- fication. Nothing in this volume is established knowledge – yet. The text is the original presentation of the topic. The search for a final theory is one of the great adventures of life: it leads to the limits of thought. The search overthrows our thinking habits about nature. A change in think- ing habits can produce fear, often hidden by anger. But by overcoming our fears we gain strength and serenity. Changing thinking habits thus requires courage, but it also pro- duces intense and beautiful emotions. Enjoy them!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/159zAccess online version03366nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002400164245004400188264004300232264006500275264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505038900517520175700906542004102663546001602704588004002720650003502760650002702795700003102822710003902853856007602892OTLid0000160MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781105559297  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aDoerr, Alaneauthor00aApplied Discrete StructurescAlan Doerr 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLowell, MassachusettsbAlan Doerr & Kenneth Levasseurc2021. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Set Theory -- 2 Combinatorics -- 3 Logic -- 4 More on Sets -- 5 Introduction to Matrix Algebra -- 6 Relations and Graphs -- 7 Functions -- 8 Recursion and Recurrence Relations -- 9 Graph Theory -- 10 Trees -- 11 Algebraic Systems -- 12 More Matrix Algebra -- 13 Boolean Algebra -- 14 Monoids and Automata -- 15 Group Theory and Applications -- 16 An Introduction to Rings and Fields0 aIn writing this book, care was taken to use language and examples that gradually wean students from a simpleminded mechanical approach andmove them toward mathematical maturity. We also recognize that many students who hesitate to ask for help from an instructor need a readable text, and we have tried to anticipate the questions that go unasked. The wide range of examples in the text are meant to augment the "favorite examples" that most instructors have for teaching the topcs in discrete mathematics. To provide diagnostic help and encouragement, we have included solutions and/or hints to the odd-numbered exercises. These solutions include detailed answers whenever warranted and complete proofs, not just terse outlines of proofs. Our use of standard terminology and notation makes Applied Discrete Structures a valuable reference book for future courses. Although many advanced books have a short review of elementary topics, they cannot be complete. The text is divided into lecture-length sections, facilitating the organization of an instructor's presentation.Topics are presented in such a way that students' understanding can be monitored through thought-provoking exercises. The exercises require an understanding of the topics and how they are interrelated, not just a familiarity with the key words. An Instructor's Guide is available to any instructor who uses the text. It includes: Chapter-by-chapter comments on subtopics that emphasize the pitfalls to avoid; Suggested coverage times; Detailed solutions to most even-numbered exercises; Sample quizzes, exams, and final exams. This textbook has been used in classes atCasper College (WY), Grinnell College (IA), Luzurne Community College (PA), University of the Puget Sound (WA).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aLevasseur, Kennetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/160zAccess online version06351nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245008700163264004300250264004700293264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505026800514520498900782542002705771546001605798588004005814650003205854710003905886856007605925OTLid0000161MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aHailperin, Maxeauthor00aOperating Systems and MiddlewarebSupporting Controlled InteractioncMax Hailperin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Peter, MinnesotabMax Hailperinc2019. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Threads -- 3 Scheduling -- 4 Synchronization and Deadlocks -- 5 Atomic Transactions -- 6 Virtual Memory -- 7 Processes and Protection -- 8 Files and Other Persistent Storage -- 9 Networking -- 10 Messaging, RPC, and Web Services -- 11 Security0 aIn this book, you will learn about all three kinds of interaction. In all three cases, interesting software techniques are needed in order to bring the computations into contact, yet keep them suffciently at arm's length that they don't compromise each other's reliability. The exciting challenge, then, is supporting controlled interaction. This includes support for computations that share a single computer and interact with one another, as your email and word processing programs do. It also includes support for data storage and network communication. This book describes how all these kinds of support are provided both by operating systems and by additional software layered on top of operating systems, which is known as middleware. Chapter 1 provides an overview of the text as a whole, explaining what an operating system is, what middleware is, and what sorts of support these systems provide for controlled interaction. The next nine chapters work through the varieties of controlled interac- tion that are exemplified by the scenario at the beginning of the preface: in- teraction between concurrent computations on the same system (as between your email program and your word processor), interaction across time (as between your word processor before your trip and your word processor after your trip), and interaction across space (as between your email program and your service provider's email server). The first of these three topics is controlled interaction between computa- tions operating at one time on a particular computer. Before such interaction can make sense, you need to understand how it is that a single computer can be running more than one program, such as an email program in one window and a word processing program in another. Therefore, Chapter 2 explains the fundamental mechanism for dividing a computer's attention between concurrent computations, known as threads. Chapter 3 continues with the related topic of scheduling. That is, if the computer is dividing its time between computations, it needs to decide which ones to work on at any moment. With concurrent computations explained, Chapter 4 introduces con- trolled interactions between them by explaining synchronization, which is control over the threads' relative timing. For example, this chapter explains how, when your email program sends a document to your word processor, the word processor can be constrained to read the document only after the email program writes it. One particularly important form of synchroniza- tion, atomic transactions, is the topic of Chapter 5. Atomic transactions are groups of operations that take place as an indivisible unit; they are most commonly supported by middleware, though they are also playing an increasing role in operating systems. Other than synchronization, the main way that operating systems con- trol the interaction between computations is by controlling their access to memory. Chapter 6 explains how this is achieved using the technique known as virtual memory. That chapter also explains the many other objectives this same technique can serve. Virtual memory serves as the foundation for Chapter 7's topic, which is processes. A process is the fundamental unit of computation for protected access, just as a thread is the fundamental unit of computation for concurrency. A process is a group of threads that share a protection environment; in particular, they share the same access to virtual memory. The next three chapters move outside the limitations of a single com- puter operating in a single session. First, consider the document stored before a trip and available again after it. Chapter 8 explains persistent storage mechanisms, focusing particularly on the file storage that operat- ing systems provide. Second, consider the interaction between your email program and your service provider's email server. Chapter 9 provides an overview of networking, including the services that operating systems make available to programs such as the email client and server. Chapter 10 ex- tends this discussion into the more sophisticated forms of support provided by communication middleware, such as messaging systems, RMI, and web services. Finally, Chapter 11 focuses on security. Because security is a pervasive issue, the preceding ten chapters all provide some information on it as well. Specifically, the final section of each chapter points out ways in which se- curity relates to that chapter's particular topic. However, even with that coverage distributed throughout the book, a chapter specifically on security is needed, primarily to elevate it out of technical particulars and talk about general principles and the human and organizational context surrounding the computer technology. The best way to use these chapters is in consecutive order. However, Chapter 5 can be omitted with only minor harm to Chapters 8 and 10, and Chapter 9 can be omitted if students are already suffciently familiar with networking.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/161zAccess online version03346nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002600156245006200182264004300244264006400287264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505124400528520089701772542003902669546001602708588004102724650002602765650002402791700003002815710003902845856007602884OTLid0000165MnU20260406020220.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602351967  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aLowe, Charlieeauthor00aWriting SpacesbReadings on Writing Vol. IIcCharlie Lowe 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bParlor Pressc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTen Ways To Think About Writing: Metaphoric Musings for College Writing Students -- Composition as a Write of Passage -- Critical Thinking in College Writing: From the Personal to the Academic -- Looking for Trouble: Finding Your Way into a Writing Assignment -- How to Read Like a Writer -- Murder! (Rhetorically Speaking) -- The Complexity of Simplicity: Invention Potentials for Writing Students -- Writing “Eyeball To Eyeball”: Building A Successful Collaboration -- On the Other Hand: The Role of Antithetical Writing in First Year Composition Courses -- Introduction to Primary Research: Observations, Surveys, and Interviews -- Putting Ethnographic Writing in Context -- Walk, Talk, Cook, Eat: A Guide to Using Sources -- Reading Games: Strategies for Reading Scholarly Sources -- Googlepedia: Turning Information Behaviors into Research Skills -- Annoying Ways People Use Sources -- Everything Changes, or Why MLA Isn't (Always) Right -- Storytelling, Narration, and the “Who I Am” Story -- The Sixth Paragraph: A Re-Vision of the Essay -- Why Blog? Searching for Writing on the Web -- A Student's Guide to Collaborative Writing Technologies -- Beyond Black on White: Document Design and Formatting in the Writing Classroom0 aVolumes in Writing Spaces: Readings on Writing offer multiple perspectives on a wide-range of topics about writing. In each chapter, authors present their unique views, insights, and strategies for writing by addressing the undergraduate reader directly. Drawing on their own experiences, these teachers-as-writers invite students to join in the larger conversation about the craft of writing. Consequently, each essay functions as a standalone text that can easily complement other selected readings in writing or writing-intensive courses across the disciplines at any level. Volume 2 continues the tradition of the previous volume with topics, such as the rhetorical situation, collaboration, documentation styles, weblogs, invention, writing assignment interpretation, reading critically, information literacy, ethnography, interviewing, argument, document design, and source integration.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aZemliansky, Paveleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/165zAccess online version01848nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245004800165264004300213264005900256264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002800437490002700465505014600492520058100638542004101219546001601260588004001276650003201316700002301348710003901371856007601410OTLid0000166MnU20260406113014.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCritchlow, Caroleauthor00aFoundations of ComputationcCarol Critchlow 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneva, New YorkbCarol Crichlow and David Eckc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Logic and Proof -- 2 Sets, Functions, and Relations -- 3 Regular Expressions and FSA's -- 4 Grammars -- 5 Turing Machines and Computability0 aFoundations of Computation is a free textbook for a one-semester course in theoretical computer science. It has been used for several years in a course at Hobart and William Smith Colleges. The course has no prerequisites other than introductory computer programming. The first half of the course covers material on logic, sets, and functions that would often be taught in a course in discrete mathematics. The second part covers material on automata, formal languages, and grammar that would ordinarily be encountered in an upper level course in theoretical computer science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aEck, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/166zAccess online version02343nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002800167245002400195250000700219264004300226264006000269264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505030200503520083100805542001601636546001601652588004001668650002301708650002301731700002301754700002901777710003901806856007601845OTLid0000167MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172517  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aClark, Mary Anneauthor00aBiologycMary Clark  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1. The Chemistry of Life -- 2. The Cell -- 3. Genetics -- 4. Evolutionary Processes -- 5. Biological Diversity -- 6. Plant Structure and Function -- 7. Animal Structure and Function -- 8. Ecology -- The Periodic Table of Elements -- Geological Time -- Measurements and the Metric System0 aBiology 2e is designed to cover the scope and sequence requirements of a typical two-semester biology course for science majors. The text provides comprehensive coverage of foundational research and core biology concepts through an evolutionary lens. Biology includes rich features that engage students in scientific inquiry, highlight careers in the biological sciences, and offer everyday applications. The book also includes various types of practice and homework questions that help students understand—and apply—key concepts. The 2nd edition has been revised to incorporate clearer, more current, and more dynamic explanations, while maintaining the same organization as the first edition. Art and illustrations have been substantially improved, and the textbook features additional assessments and related resources.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aChoi, Jungeauthor1 aDouglas, Mattheweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/167zAccess online version02579nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002900167245004100196264004300237264005900280264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002500461490002700486505099700513520037501510542001601885546001601901588004001917650002301957650002301980700002702003700002402030710003902054856007602093OTLid0000168MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172036  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aFowler, Samanthaeauthor00aConcepts of BiologycSamantha Fowler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Biology -- Chapter 2: Chemistry of Life -- Chapter 3: Cell Structure and Function -- Chapter 4: How Cells Obtain Energy -- Chapter 5: Photosynthesis -- Chapter 6: Reproduction at the Cellular Level -- Chapter 7: The Cellular Basis of Inheritance -- Chapter 8: Patterns of Inheritance -- Chapter 9: Molecular Biology -- Chapter 10: Biotechnology -- Chapter 11: Evolution and Its Processes -- Chapter 12: Diversity of Life -- Chapter 13: Diversity of Microbes, Fungi, and Protists -- Chapter 14: Diversity of Plants -- Chapter 15: Diversity of Animals -- Chapter 16: The Body’s Systems -- Chapter 17: The Immune System and Disease -- Chapter 18: Animal Reproduction and Development -- Chapter 19: Population and Community Ecology -- Chapter 20: Ecosystems and the Biosphere -- Chapter 21: Conservation and Biodiversity -- Appendix A: The Periodic Table of Elements -- Appendix B: Geological Time -- Appendix C: Measurements and the Metric System -- Index0 aConcepts of Biology is designed for the typical introductory biology course for nonmajors, covering standard scope and sequence requirements. The text includes interesting applications and conveys the major themes of biology, with content that is meaningful and easy to understand. The book is designed to demonstrate biology concepts and to promote scientific literacy.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aRoush, Rebeccaeauthor1 aWise, Jameseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/168zAccess online version09869nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002900167245004400196250000700240264004300247264006000290264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505806200524520057408586542001609160546001609176588004009192650002309232650002309255700002809278700002609306710003909332856007609371OTLid0000169MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168130  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aBetts, J. Gordoneauthor00aAnatomy and PhysiologycJ. Gordon Betts  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1. Levels of Organization -- Chapter 1. An Introduction to the Human Body -- 1.1 Overview of Anatomy and Physiology -- 1.2 Structural Organization of the Human Body -- 1.3 Functions of Human Life -- 1.4 Requirements for Human Life -- 1.5 Homeostasis -- 1.6 Anatomical Terminology -- 1.7 Medical Imaging -- Chapter 2. The Chemical Level of Organization -- 2.1 Elements and Atoms: The Building Blocks of Matter -- 2.2 Chemical Bonds -- 2.3 Chemical Reactions -- 2.4 Inorganic Compounds Essential to Human Functioning -- 2.5 Organic Compounds Essential to Human Functioning -- Chapter 3. The Cellular Level of Organization -- 3.1 The Cell Membrane -- 3.2 The Cytoplasm and Cellular Organelles -- 3.3 The Nucleus and DNA Replication -- 3.4 Protein Synthesis -- 3.5 Cell Growth and Division -- 3.6 Cellular Differentiation -- Chapter 4. The Tissue Level of Organization -- 4.1 Types of Tissues -- 4.2 Epithelial Tissue -- 4.3 Connective Tissue Supports and Protects -- 4.4 Muscle Tissue and Motion -- 4.5 Nervous Tissue Mediates Perception and Response -- 4.6 Tissue Injury and AgingUnit 2. Support and Movement -- Chapter 5. Integumentary System -- 5.1 Layers of the Skin -- 5.2 Accessory Structures of the Skin -- 5.3 Functions of the Integumentary System -- 5.4 Diseases, Disorders, and Injuries of the Integumentary System -- Chapter 6. Bone Tissue and the Skeletal System -- 6.1 The Functions of the Skeletal System -- 6.2 Bone Classification -- 6.3 Bone Structure -- 6.4 Bone Formation and Development -- 6.5 Fractures: Bone Repair -- 6.6 Exercise, Nutrition, Hormones, and Bone Tissue -- 6.7 Calcium Homeostasis: Interactions of the Skeletal System and Other Organ Systems -- Chapter 7. Axial Skeleton -- 7.1 Divisions of the Skeletal System -- 7.2 The Skull -- 7.3 The Vertebral Column -- 7.4 The Thoracic Cage -- 7.5 Embryonic Development of the Axial Skeleton -- Chapter 8. The Appendicular Skeleton -- 8.1 The Pectoral Girdle -- 8.2 Bones of the Upper Limb -- 8.3 The Pelvic Girdle and Pelvis -- 8.4 Bones of the Lower Limb -- 8.5 Development of the Appendicular Skeleton -- Chapter 9. Joints -- 9.1 Classification of Joints -- 9.2 Fibrous Joints -- 9.3 Cartilaginous Joints -- 9.4 Synovial Joints -- 9.5 Types of Body Movements -- 9.6 Anatomy of Selected Synovial Joints -- 9.7 Development of Joints -- Chapter 10. Muscle Tissue -- 10.1 Overview of Muscle Tissues -- 10.2 Skeletal Muscle -- 10.3 Muscle Fiber Contraction and Relaxation -- 10.4 Nervous System Control of Muscle Tension -- 10.5 Types of Muscle Fibers -- 10.6 Exercise and Muscle Performance -- 10.7 Cardiac Muscle Tissue -- 10.8 Smooth Muscle -- 10.9 Development and Regeneration of Muscle Tissue -- Chapter 11. The Muscular System -- 11.1 Interactions of Skeletal Muscles, Their Fascicle Arrangement, and Their Lever Systems -- 11.2 Naming Skeletal Muscles -- 11.3 Axial Muscles of the Head, Neck, and Back -- 11.4 Axial Muscles of the Abdominal Wall, and Thorax -- 11.5 Muscles of the Pectoral Girdle and Upper Limbs -- 11.6 Appendicular Muscles of the Pelvic Girdle and Lower Limbs -- Unit 3. Regulation, Integration, and Control -- Chapter 12. The Nervous System and Nervous Tissue -- 12.1 Basic Structure and Function of the Nervous System -- 12.2 Nervous Tissue -- 12.3 The Function of Nervous Tissue -- 12.4 The Action Potential -- 12.5 Communication Between NeuronsChapter 13. Anatomy of the Nervous System -- Chapter 13. Anatomy of the Nervous System -- 13.1 The Embryologic Perspective -- 13.2 The Central Nervous System -- 13.3 Circulation and the Central Nervous System -- 13.4 The Peripheral Nervous System -- Chapter 14. The Somatic Nervous System -- 14.1 Sensory Perception -- 14.2 Central Processing -- 14.3 Motor Responses -- Chapter 15. The Autonomic Nervous System -- 15.1 Divisions of the Autonomic Nervous System -- 15.2 Autonomic Reflexes and Homeostasis -- 15.3 Central Control -- 15.4 Drugs that Affect the Autonomic System -- Chapter 16. The Neurological Exam -- 16.1 Overview of the Neurological Exam -- 16.2 The Mental Status Exam -- 16.3 The Cranial Nerve Exam -- 16.4 The Sensory and Motor Exams -- 16.5 The Coordination and Gait Exams -- Chapter 17. The Endocrine System -- 17.1 An Overview of the Endocrine System -- 17.2 Hormones -- 17.3 The Pituitary Gland and Hypothalamus -- 17.4 The Thyroid Gland -- 17.5 The Parathyroid Glands -- 17.6 The Adrenal Glands -- 17.7 The Pineal Gland -- 17.8 Gonadal and Placental Hormones -- 17.9 The Endocrine Pancreas -- 17.10 Organs with Secondary Endocrine Functions -- 17.11 Development and Aging of the Endocrine System -- Unit 4. Fluids and Transport -- Chapter 18. The Cardiovascular System: Blood -- 18.1 An Overview of Blood -- 18.2 Production of the Formed Elements -- 18.3 Erythrocytes -- 18.4 Leukocytes and Platelets -- 18.5 Hemostasis -- 18.6 Blood Typing -- Chapter 19. The Cardiovascular System: The Heart -- 19.1 Heart Anatomy -- 19.2 Cardiac Muscle and Electrical Activity -- 19.3 Cardiac Cycle -- 19.4 Cardiac Physiology -- 19.5 Development of the Heart -- Chapter 20. The Cardiovascular System: Blood Vessels and Circulation -- 20.1 Structure and Function of Blood Vessels -- 20.2 Blood Flow, Blood Pressure, and Resistance -- 20.3 Capillary Exchange -- 20.4 Homeostatic Regulation of the Vascular System -- 20.5 Circulatory Pathways -- 20.6 Development of Blood Vessels and Fetal Circulation -- Chapter 21. The Lymphatic and Immune System -- 21.1 Anatomy of the Lymphatic and Immune Systems -- 21.2 Barrier Defenses and the Innate Immune Response -- 21.3 The Adaptive Immune Response: T lymphocytes and Their Functional Types -- 21.4 The Adaptive Immune Response: B-lymphocytes and Antibodies -- 21.5 The Immune Response against Pathogens -- 21.6 Diseases Associated with Depressed or Overactive Immune Responses -- 21.7 Transplantation and Cancer Immunology -- Unit 5. Energy, Maintenance, and Environmental Exchange -- Chapter 22. The Respiratory System -- 22.1 Organs and Structures of the Respiratory System -- 22.2 The Lungs -- 22.3 The Process of Breathing -- 22.4 Gas Exchange -- 22.5 Transport of Gases -- 22.6 Modifications in Respiratory Functions -- 22.7 Embryonic Development of the Respiratory System -- Chapter 23. The Digestive System -- 23.1 Overview of the Digestive System -- 23.2 Digestive System Processes and Regulation -- 23.3 The Mouth, Pharynx, and Esophagus -- 23.4 The Stomach -- 23.5 The Small and Large Intestines -- 23.6 Accessory Organs in Digestion: The Liver, Pancreas, and Gallbladder -- 23.7 Chemical Digestion and Absorption: A Closer Look -- Chapter 24. Metabolism and Nutrition -- 24.1 Overview of Metabolic Reactions -- 24.2 Carbohydrate Metabolism -- 24.3 Lipid Metabolism -- 24.4 Protein Metabolism -- 24.5 Metabolic States of the Body -- 24.6 Energy and Heat Balance -- 24.7 Nutrition and Diet -- Chapter 25. The Urinary System -- 25.1 Physical Characteristics of Urine -- 25.2 Gross Anatomy of Urine Transport -- 25.3 Gross Anatomy of the Kidney -- 25.4 Microscopic Anatomy of the Kidney -- 25.5 Physiology of Urine Formation -- 25.6 Tubular Reabsorption -- 25.7 Regulation of Renal Blood Flow -- 25.8 Endocrine Regulation of Kidney Function -- 25.9 Regulation of Fluid Volume and Composition -- 25.10 The Urinary System and Homeostasis -- Chapter 26. Fluid, Electrolyte, and Acid-Base Balance -- 26.1 Body Fluids and Fluid Compartments -- 26.2 Water Balance -- 26.3 Electrolyte Balance -- 26.4 Acid-Base Balance -- 26.5 Disorders of Acid-Base Balance -- Unit 6. Human Development and Continuity of Life -- Chapter 27. The Reproductive System -- 27.1 Anatomy and Physiology of the Testicular Reproductive System -- 27.2 Anatomy and Physiology of the Ovarian Reproductive System -- 27.3 Development of the Male and Female Reproductive Systems -- Chapter 28. Development and Inheritance -- 28.1 Fertilization -- 28.2 Embryonic Development -- 28.3 Fetal Development -- 28.4 Changes During Pregnancy, Labor, and Birth -- 28.5 Adjustments of the Infant at Birth and Postnatal Stages -- 28.6 Lactation -- 28.7 Patterns of Inheritance -- References -- Index0 aAnatomy and Physiology 2e is developed to meet the scope and sequence for a two-semester human anatomy and physiology course for life science and allied health majors. The book is organized by body systems. The revision focuses on inclusive and equitable instruction and includes new student support. Illustrations have been extensively revised to be clearer and more inclusive. The web-based version of Anatomy and Physiology 2e also features links to surgical videos, histology, and interactive diagrams. Please learn more about the changes by previewing the preface.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aYoung, Kelly A.eauthor1 aWise, James Aeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/169zAccess online version03304nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155050000700165100003400172245007200206264004300278264007800321264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505043500576520159301011542003902604546001602643588004002659650002302699650002602722650003102748710003902779856007602818OTLid0000170MnU20260406020708.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781927356173  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH301 4aBF121 4aH11 aDawson, Michael R. W.eauthor00aMind, Body, WorldbFoundations of Cognitive SciencecMichael Dawson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAthabasca University Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. The Cognitive Sciences: One or Many? -- Chapter 2. Multiple Levels of Investigation -- Chapter 3. Elements of Classical Cognitive Science -- Chapter 4. Elements of Connectionist Cognitive Science -- Chapter 5. Elements of Embodied Cognitive Science -- Chapter 6. Classical Music and Cognitive Science -- Chapter 7. Marks of the Classical? -- Chapter 8. Seeing and Visualizing -- Chapter 9. Towards a Cognitive Dialectic0 aCognitive science arose in the 1950s when it became apparent that a number of disciplines, including psychology, computer science, linguistics, and philosophy, were fragmenting. Perhaps owing to the field's immediate origins in cybernetics, as well as to the foundational assumption that cognition is information processing, cognitive science initially seemed more unified than psychology. However, as a result of differing interpretations of the foundational assumption and dramatically divergent views of the meaning of the term information processing, three separate schools emerged: classical cognitive science, connectionist cognitive science, and embodied cognitive science. Examples, cases, and research findings taken from the wide range of phenomena studied by cognitive scientists effectively explain and explore the relationship among the three perspectives. Intended to introduce both graduate and senior undergraduate students to the foundations of cognitive science, Mind, Body, World addresses a number of questions currently being asked by those practicing in the field: What are the core assumptions of the three different schools? What are the relationships between these different sets of core assumptions? Is there only one cognitive science, or are there many different cognitive sciences? Giving the schools equal treatment and displaying a broad and deep understanding of the field, Dawson highlights the fundamental tensions and lines of fragmentation that exist among the schools and provides a refreshing and unifying framework for students of cognitive science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/170zAccess online version02653nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002300154245005300177264004300230264007800273264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505030100528520121900829542003902048546001602087588004102103650003202144710003902176856007602215OTLid0000171MnU20260406020359.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781927356388  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aMorin, Pateauthor00aOpen Data StructuresbAn IntroductioncPat Morin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAthabasca University Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Array-Based Lists -- 3 Linked Lists -- 4 Skiplists -- 5 Hash Tables -- 6 Binary Trees -- 7 Random Binary Search Trees -- 8 Scapegoat Trees -- 9 Red-Black Trees -- 10 Heaps -- 11 Sorting Algorithms -- 12 Graphs -- 13 Data Structures for Integers -- 14 External Memory Searching0 aOffered as an introduction to the field of data structures and algorithms, Open Data Structures covers the implementation and analysis of data structures for sequences (lists), queues, priority queues, unordered dictionaries, ordered dictionaries, and graphs. Focusing on a mathematically rigorous approach that is fast, practical, and efficient, Morin clearly and briskly presents instruction along with source code. Analyzed and implemented in Java, the data structures presented in the book include stacks, queues, deques, and lists implemented as arrays and linked-lists; space-efficient implementations of lists; skip lists; hash tables and hash codes; binary search trees including treaps, scapegoat trees, and red-black trees; integer searching structures including binary tries, x-fast tries, and y-fast tries; heaps, including implicit binary heaps and randomized meldable heaps; graphs, including adjacency matrix and adjacency list representations; and B-trees. A modern treatment of an essential computer science topic, Open Data Structures is a measured balance between classical topics and state-of-the art structures that will serve the needs of all undergraduate students or self-directed learners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/171zAccess online version02345nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002700150245006600177264004300243264007600286264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002500484490002700509505033300536520084200869542002701711546001601738588004001754650002801794650003401822710003901856856007601895OTLid0000172MnU20260406020218.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aVerkerke, J.H.eauthor00aContract Doctrine, Theory & PracticecJ.H. VerkerkenVolume 3 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aVI. Identifying and Interpreting the Terms of an Agreement -- 1 The Common Law Parol Evidence Rule -- 2. The UCC Parol Evidence Rule -- 3 Interpretation -- VII. Remedies for Breach -- 1 Monetary Damages -- 2 Specific Performance -- 3 Limitations on Damages -- 4 Cost of Completion vs. Difference in Value -- 5 Liquidated Damages0 aThis is Volume 3 in a three volume series written for Contracts Law. Its former title is "Collaborative Teaching Materials for Contracts." The first semester of law school is mostly about learning to speak a new legal language (but emphatically not “legalese”), to formulate and evaluate legal arguments, to become comfortable with the distinctive style of legal analysis. We could teach these skills using almost any legal topic. But we begin the first-year curriculum with subjects that pervade the entire field of law. Contract principles have a long history and they form a significant part of the way that lawyers think about many legal problems. As you will discover when you study insurance law, employment law, family law, and dozens of other practice areas, your knowledge of contract doctrine and theory will be invaluable.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/172zAccess online version03842nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143050001100153050000800164100003100172245008300203264004300286264007300329264001200402300002200414336002600436337002600462338003600488341002800524490002700552505065100579520189701230542004103127546001603168588004003184650004203224650002403266650002703290710003903317856007603356OTLid0000173MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aTA145 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aTrench, William F.eauthor00aElementary Differential Equations with Boundary Value ProblemscWilliam Trench 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: First Order Equations -- Chapter 3: Numerical Methods -- Chapter 4: Applications of First Order Equations -- Chapter 5: Linear Second Order Equations -- Chapter 6: Applications of Linear Second Order Equations -- Chapter 7: Series Solutions of Linear Second Order Equations -- Chapter 8: Laplace Transforms -- Chapter 9: Linear Higher Order Equations -- Chapter 10: Linear Systems of Differential Equations -- Chapter 11: Boundary Value Problems and Fourier Expansions -- Chapter 12: Fourier Solutions of Partial Differential Equations -- Chapter 13: Boundary Value Problems for Second Order Linear Equations0 aElementary Differential Equations with Boundary Value Problems is written for students in science, engineering, and mathematics who have completed calculus through partial differentiation. An elementary text should be written so the student can read it with comprehension without too much pain. I have tried to put myself in the student's place, and have chosen to err on the side of too much detail rather than not enough. An elementary text can't be better than its exercises. This text includes 1695 numbered exercises, many with several parts. They range in difficulty from routine to very challenging. An elementary text should be written in an informal but mathematically accurate way, illustrated by appropriate graphics. I have tried to formulate mathematical concepts succinctly in language that students can understand. I have minimized the number of explicitly stated theorems and definitions, preferring to deal with concepts in a more conversational way, copiously illustrated by 250 completely worked out examples. Where appropriate, concepts and results are depicted in 144 figures. Although I believe that the computer is an immensely valuable tool for learning, doing, and writing mathematics, the selection and treatment of topics in this text reflects my pedagogical orientation along traditional lines. However, I have incorporated what I believe to be the best use of modern technology, so you can select the level of technology that you want to include in your course. The text includes 336 exercises – identified by the symbols C and C/G – that call for graphics or computation and graphics. There are also 73 laboratory exercises – identified by L – that require extensive use of technology. In addition, several sections include informal advice on the use of technology. If you prefer not to emphasize technology, simply ignore these exercises and the advice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/173zAccess online version02703nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001600142050001100158050000800169100003100177245005000208264004300258264007300301264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002500496490002700521505037700548520107000925542004101995546001602036588004002052650002402092650003502116650002702151710003902178856007602217OTLid0000174MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a0130457868  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aTrench, William F.eauthor00aIntroduction to Real AnalysiscWilliam Trench 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Real Numbers -- Chapter 2: Differential Calculus of Functions of One Variable -- Chapter 3: Integral Calculus of Functions of One Variable -- Chapter 4: Infinite Sequences and Series -- Chapter 5: Structure of Rn -- Chapter 6: Vector-Valued Functions of Several Variables -- Chapter 7: Integrals of Functions of Several Variables -- Chapter 8: Metric Spaces0 aThis is a text for a two-term course in introductory real analysis for junior or senior mathematics majors and science students with a serious interest in mathematics. Prospective educators or mathematically gifted high school students can also benefit from the mathematical maturity that can be gained from an introductory real analysis course. The book is designed to fill the gaps left in the development of calculus as it is usually presented in an elementary course, and to provide the background required for insight into more advanced courses in pure and applied mathematics. The standard elementary calculus sequence is the only specific prerequisite for Chapters 1–5, which deal with real-valued functions. (However, other analysis oriented courses, such as elementary differential equation, also provide useful preparatory experience.) Chapters 6 and 7 require a working knowledge of determinants, matrices and linear transformations, typically available from a first course in linear algebra. Chapter 8 is accessible after completion of Chapters 1–5.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/174zAccess online version03283nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143100003400154245003500188264004300223264007300266264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505046700516520158200983542003702565546001602602588004102618650002402659650002702683700002902710700003102739710003902770856007602809OTLid0000176MnU20260406020334.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.31 aCollingwood, David H.eauthor00aPrecalculuscDavid Collingwood 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWarming Up -- Imposing Coordinates -- Three Simple Curves -- Linear Modeling -- Functions and Graphs -- Graphical Analysis -- Quadratic Modeling -- Composition -- Inverse Functions -- Exponential Functions -- Exponential Modeling -- Logarithmic Functions -- Three Construction Tools -- Rational Functions -- Measuring an Angle -- Measuring Circular Motion -- The Circular Functions -- Trigonometric Functions -- Sinusoidal Functions -- Inverse Circular Functions0 aPrior to 1990, the performance of a student in precalculus at the University of Washington was not a predictor of success in calculus. For this reason, the mathematics department set out to create a new course with a specific set of goals in mind: A review of the essential mathematics needed to succeed in calculus. An emphasis on problem solving, the idea being to gain both experience and confidence in working with a particular set of mathematical tools. This text was created to achieve these goals and the 2004-05 academic year marks the eleventh year in which it has been used. Several thousand students have successfully passed through the course. This book is full of worked out examples. We use the the notation “Soluion.” to indicate where the reasoning for a problem begins; the symbol ?? is used to indicate the end of the solution to a problem. There is a Table of Contents that is useful in helping you find a topic treated earlier in the course. It is also a good rough outline when it comes time to study for the final examination. The book also includes an index at the end. Finally, there is an appendix at the end of the text with ”answers” to most of the problems in the text. It should be emphasized these are ”answers” as opposed to ”solutions”. Any homework problems you may be asked to turn in will require you include all your work; in other words, a detailed solution. Simply writing down the answer from the back of the text would never be sufficient; the answers are intended to be a guide to help insure you are on the right track.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aPrince, K. Davideauthor1 aConroy, Matthew M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/176zAccess online version02058nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100003000146245006700176264004300243264008900286264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002500497490002700522505033000549520058200879542003701461546001601498588004001514650002701554710003901581856007601620OTLid0000177MnU20260406020751.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aFields, Joseph E.eauthor02aA Gentle Introduction to the Art of MathematicscJoseph Fields 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSouthern Connecticut State Universityc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction and notation -- Chapter 2: Logic and quantifiers -- Chapter 3: Proof techniques I -- Chapter 4: Sets -- Chapter 5: Proof techniques II -Induction -- Chapter 6: Relations and functions -- Chapter 7: Proof techniques III -Combinatorics -- Chapter 8: Cardinality -- Chapter 9: Proof techniques IV - Magic0 aThis book is designed for the transition course between calculus and differential equations and the upper division mathematics courses with an emphasis on proof and abstraction. The book has been used by the author and several other faculty at Southern Connecticut State University. There are nine chapters and more than enough material for a semester course. Student reviews are favorable. It is written in an informal, conversational style with a large number of interesting examples and exercises, so that a student learns to write proofs while working on engaging problems.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/177zAccess online version02677nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002700180245003900207264004300246264008100289264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505025000547520113900797542004101936546001601977588004101993650002402034650002702058700002602085700002902111710003902140856007602179OTLid0000178MnU20260406020708.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781974206841  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aBoelkins, Matteauthor00aActive Calculus 2.0cMatt Boelkins 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Understanding the Derivative -- 2 Computing Derivatives -- 3 Using Derivatives -- 4 The Definite Integral -- 5 Finding Antiderivatives and Evaluating Integrals -- 6 Using Definite Integrals -- 7 Differential Equations -- 8 Sequences and Series0 aActive Calculus is different from most existing calculus texts in at least the following ways: the text is freely readable online in HTML format and is also available for in PDF; in the electronic format, graphics are in full color and there are live links to java applets; version 2.0 now contains WeBWorK exercises in each chapter, which are fully interactive in the HTML format and included in print in the PDF; the text is open source, and interested users can gain access to the original source files on GitHub; the style of the text requires students to be active learners — there are very few worked examples in the text, with there instead being 3-4 activities per section that engage students in connecting ideas, solving problems, and developing understanding of key calculus concepts; each section begins with motivating questions, a brief introduction, and a preview activity, all of which are designed to be read and completed prior to class; following the WeBWorK exercises in each section, there are several challenging problems that require students to connect key ideas and write to communicate their understanding.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAustin, Davideauthor1 aSchlicker, Steveeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/178zAccess online version03405nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100003100146245005900177264004300236264005400279264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505023400510520201700744542003702761546001602798588004002814650003502854650002702889710003902916856007602955OTLid0000182MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2004    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aBogart, Kenneth P.eauthor00aCombinatorics Through Guided DiscoverycKenneth Bogart 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHanover, New HampshirebKenneth P. Bogartc[2004] 4c©2004.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 What is Combinatorics? -- 2 Applications of Induction and Recursion in Combinatorics and Graph Theory -- 3 Distribution Problems -- 4 Generating Functions -- 5 The Principle of Inclusion and Exclusion -- 6 Groups Acting on Sets0 aThis book is an introduction to combinatorial mathematics, also known as combinatorics. The book focuses especially but not exclusively on the part of combinatorics that mathematicians refer to as “counting.” The book consists almost entirely of problems. Some of the problems are designed to lead you to think about a concept, others are designed to help you figure out a concept and state a theorem about it, while still others ask you to prove the theorem. Other problems give you a chance to use a theorem you have proved. From time to time there is a discussion that pulls together some of the things you have learned or introduces a new idea for you to work with. Many of the problems are designed to build up your intuition for how combinatorial mathematics works. There are problems that some people will solve quickly, and there are problems that will take days of thought for everyone. Probably the best way to use this book is to work on a problem until you feel you are not making progress and then go on to the next one. Think about the problem you couldn't get as you do other things. The next chance you get, discuss the problem you are stymied on with other members of the class. Often you will all feel you've hit dead ends, but when you begin comparing notes and listening carefully to each other, you will see more than one approach to the problem and be able to make some progress. In fact, after comparing notes you may realize that there is more than one way to interpret the problem. In this case your first step should be to think together about what the problem is actually asking you to do. You may have learned in school that for every problem you are given, there is a method that has already been taught to you, and you are supposed to figure out which method applies and apply it. That is not the case here. Based on some simplified examples, you will discover the method for yourself. Later on, you may recognize a pattern that suggests you should try to use this method again.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/182zAccess online version04995nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050001100154050000800165100002600173245007600199264004300275264006600318264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505073200561520299601293542003904289546001604328588004104344650002304385650003504408650002704443710003904470856007604509OTLid0000187MnU20260406020417.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aShoup, Victoreauthor02aA Computational Introduction to Number Theory and AlgebracVictor Shoup 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCambridge, United KingdombCambridge University Pressc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Basic properties of the integers -- 2 Congruences -- 3 Computing with large integers -- 4 Euclid's algorithm -- 5 The distribution of primes -- 6 Abelian groups -- 7 Rings -- 8 Finite and discrete probability distributions -- 9 Probabilistic algorithms -- 10 Probabilistic primality testing -- 11 Finding generators and discrete logarithms in Z∗p -- 12 Quadratic reciprocity and computing modular square roots -- 13 Modules and vector spaces -- 14 Matrices -- 15 Subexponential-time discrete logarithms and factoring -- 16 More rings -- 17 Polynomial arithmetic and applications -- 18 Finite Fields -- 19 Linearly generated sequences and applications -- 20 Algorithms for finite fields -- 21 Deterministic primality testing0 aAll of the mathematics required beyond basic calculus is developed “from scratch.” Moreover, the book generally alternates between “theory” and “applications”: one or two chapters on a particular set of purely mathematical concepts are followed by one or two chapters on algorithms and applications; the mathematics provides the theoretical underpinnings for the applications, while the applications both motivate and illustrate the mathematics. Of course, this dichotomy between theory and applications is not perfectly maintained: the chapters that focus mainly on applications include the development of some of the mathematics that is specific to a particular application, and very occasionally, some of the chapters that focus mainly on mathematics include a discussion of related algorithmic ideas as well. The mathematical material covered includes the basics of number theory (including unique factorization, congruences, the distribution of primes, and quadratic reciprocity) and of abstract algebra (including groups, rings, fields, and vector spaces). It also includes an introduction to discrete probability theory—this material is needed to properly treat the topics of probabilistic algorithms and cryptographic applications. The treatment of all these topics is more or less standard, except that the text only deals with commutative structures (i.e., abelian groups and commutative rings with unity) — this is all that is really needed for the purposes of this text, and the theory of these structures is much simpler and more transparent than that of more general, non-commutative structures. There are a few sections that are marked with a “(∗),” indicating that the material covered in that section is a bit technical, and is not needed else- where. There are many examples in the text, which form an integral part of the book, and should not be skipped. There are a number of exercises in the text that serve to reinforce, as well as to develop important applications and generalizations of, the material presented in the text. Some exercises are underlined. These develop important (but usually simple) facts, and should be viewed as an integral part of the book. It is highly recommended that the reader work these exercises, or at the very least, read and understand their statements. In solving exercises, the reader is free to use any previously stated results in the text, including those in previous exercises. However, except where otherwise noted, any result in a section marked with a “(∗),” or in §5.5, need not and should not be used outside the section in which it appears. There is a very brief “Preliminaries” chapter, which fixes a bit of notation and recalls a few standard facts. This should be skimmed over by the reader. There is an appendix that contains a few useful facts; where such a fact is used in the text, there is a reference such as “see §An,” which refers to the item labeled “An” in the appendix.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/187zAccess online version04220nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002700162245003400189264004300223264006300266264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505049500503520249600998542004103494546001603535588004003551650002303591650002703614700002403641700003003665710003903695856007603734OTLid0000188MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCherney, Davideauthor00aLinear AlgebracDavid Cherney 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDavis, CaliforniabUniversity of California, Davisc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 What is Linear Algebra? -- 2 Systems of Linear Equations -- 3 The Simplex Method -- 4 Vectors in Space, n-Vectors -- 5 Vector Spaces -- 6 Linear Transformations -- 7 Matrices -- 8 Determinants -- 9 Subspaces and Spanning Sets -- 10 Linear Independence -- 11 Basis and Dimension -- 12 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors -- 13 Diagonalization -- 14 Orthonormal Bases and Complements -- 15 Diagonalizing Symmetric Matrices -- 16 Kernel, Range, Nullity, Rank -- 17 Least squares and Singular Values0 aWe believe the entire book can be taught in twenty five 50-minute lectures to a sophomore audience that has been exposed to a one year calculus course. Vector calculus is useful, but not necessary preparation for this book, which attempts to be self-contained. Key concepts are presented multiple times, throughout the book, often first in a more intuitive setting, and then again in a definition, theorem, proof style later on. We do not aim for students to become agile mathematical proof writers, but we do expect them to be able to show and explain why key results hold. We also often use the review exercises to let students discover key results for themselves; before they are presented again in detail later in the book. The book has been written such that instructors can reorder the chapters (using the La- TeX source) in any (reasonable) order and still have a consistent text. We hammer the notions of abstract vectors and linear transformations hard and early, while at the same time giving students the basic matrix skills necessary to perform computations. Gaussian elimination is followed directly by an “exploration chapter” on the simplex algorithm to open students minds to problems beyond standard linear systems ones. Vectors in Rn and general vector spaces are presented back to back so that students are not stranded with the idea that vectors are just ordered lists of numbers. To this end, we also labor the notion of all functions from a set to the real numbers. In the same vein linear transformations and matrices are presented hand in hand. Once students see that a linear map is specified by its action on a limited set of inputs, they can already understand what a basis is. All the while students are studying linear systems and their solution sets, so after matrices determinants are introduced. This material can proceed rapidly since elementary matrices were already introduced with Gaussian elimination. Only then is a careful discussion of spans, linear independence and dimension given to ready students for a thorough treatment of eigenvectors and diagonalization. The dimension formula therefore appears quite late, since we prefer not to elevate rote computations of column and row spaces to a pedestal. The book ends with applications–least squares and singular values. These are a fun way to end any lecture course. It would also be quite easy to spend any extra time on systems of differential equations and simple Fourier transform problems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aDenton, Tomeauthor1 aWaldon, Andrew K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/188zAccess online version02874nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100003200145245006500177264004300242264006800285264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505064300527520094001170542003002110546001602140588004002156650003202196650003802228700002802266700002702294700002802321710003902349856007602388OTLid0000189MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aBourgeois, David T.eauthor00aInformation Systems for Business and BeyondcDavid Bourgeois 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc2019. 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: What Is an Information System? -- Chapter 1: What Is an Information System? -- Chapter 2: Hardware -- Chapter 3: Software -- Chapter 4: Data and Databases -- Chapter 5: Networking and Communication -- Chapter 6: Information Systems Security -- Part 2: Information Systems for Strategic Advantage -- Chapter 7: Does IT Matter? -- Chapter 8: Business Processes -- Chapter 9: The People in Information Systems -- Chapter 10: Information Systems Development -- Chapter 11: Globalization and the Digital Divide -- Chapter 12: The Ethical and Legal Implications of Information Systems -- Chapter 13: Future Trends in Information Systems0 aThis book is written as an introductory text, meant for those with little or no experience with computers or information systems. While sometimes the descriptions can get a little bit technical, every effort has been made to convey the information essential to understanding a topic while not getting bogged down in detailed terminology or esoteric discussions. Information Systems for Business and Beyond was written by Dr. David Bourgeois and originally published in 2014 as part of the Open Textbook Challenge at the Saylor Foundation. Since then, it has been accessed thousands of time and used in many courses worldwide. This 2019 update to the textbook brings it up to date and adds many new topics. True to its open textbook roots, many of the updates have come from the community of instructors and practitioners who are passionate about information systems. Please note that the XML and MS Word links go to an earlier version.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aSmith, James L.eauthor1 aWang, Shouhongeauthor1 aMortati, Josepheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/189zAccess online version03343nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100003000162245008600192264004300278264006100321264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505046300559520139901022542004102421546001602462588004002478650002502518650003302543700002502576700002602601700002602627700002602653700002802679700002802707700002302735710003902758856007602797OTLid0000190MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780989722629  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aBernnard, Deboraheauthor04aThe Information Literacy User's GuidebAn Open, Online TextbookcDeborah Bernnard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Identify: Understanding Your Information Need -- 2 Scope: Knowing What Is Available -- 3 Plan: Developing Research Strategies -- 4 Gather: Finding What You Need -- 5 Evaluate: Assessing Your Research Process and Findings -- 6 Manage: Organizing Information Effectively and Ethically -- 7 Present: Sharing What You've Learned -- 8 Visual Literacy: Applying Information Literacy to Visual Materials -- 9 Science Literacy: Information Literacy in the Sciences0 aGood researchers have a host of tools at their disposal that make navigating today's complex information ecosystem much more manageable. Gaining the knowledge, abilities, and self-reflection necessary to be a good researcher helps not only in academic settings, but is invaluable in any career, and throughout one's life. The Information Literacy User's Guide will start you on this route to success. The Information Literacy User's Guide is based on two current models in information literacy: The 2011 version of The Seven Pillars Model, developed by the Society of College, National and University Libraries in the United Kingdom and the conception of information literacy as a metaliteracy, a model developed by one of this book's authors in conjunction with Thomas Mackey, Dean of the Center for Distance Learning at SUNY Empire State Col- lege.2 These core foundations ensure that the material will be relevant to today's students. The Information Literacy User's Guide introduces students to critical concepts of information literacy as defined for the information-infused and technology-rich environment in which they find themselves. This book helps students examine their roles as information creators and sharers and enables them to more effectively deploy related skills. This textbook includes relatable case studies and scenarios, many hands-on exercises, and interactive quizzes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aBobish, Gregeauthor1 aBullis, Daryleauthor1 aHecker, Jennaeauthor1 aHolden, Irinaeauthor1 aHosier, Allisoneauthor1 aJacobson, Trudieauthor1 aLoney, Toreauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/190zAccess online version03809nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157100003200164245004500196250000700241264004300248264005900291264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505149300524520106702017542001603084546001603100588004003116650002503156650003103181700003003212700003003242710003903272856007603311OTLid0000191MnU20260406020416.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168239  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aGreenlaw, Steven A.eauthor00aPrinciples of EconomicscSteven Greenlaw  a3e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Welcome to Economics! -- Chapter 2: Choice in a World of Scarcity -- Chapter 3: Demand and Supply -- Chapter 4: Labor and Financial Markets -- Chapter 5: Elasticity -- Chapter 6: Consumer Choices -- Chapter 7: Cost and Industry Structure -- Chapter 8: Perfect Competition -- Chapter 9: Monopoly -- Chapter 10: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly -- Chapter 11: Monopoly and Antitrust Policy -- Chapter 12: Environmental Protection and Negative Externalities -- Chapter 13: Positive Externalities and Public Goods -- Chapter 14: Poverty and Economic Inequality -- Chapter 15: Issues in Labor Markets: Unions, Discrimination, Immigration -- Chapter 16: Information, Risk, and Insurance -- Chapter 17: Financial Markets -- Chapter 18: Public Economy -- Chapter 19: The Macroeconomic Perspective -- Chapter 20: Economic Growth -- Chapter 21: Unemployment -- Chapter 22: Inflation -- Chapter 23: The International Trade and Capital Flows -- Chapter 24: The Aggregate Supply-Aggregate Demand Model -- Chapter 25: The Keynesian Perspective -- Chapter 26: The Neoclassical Perspective -- Chapter 27: Money and Banking -- Chapter 28: Monetary Policy and Bank Regulation -- Chapter 29: Exchange Rates and International Capital Flows -- Chapter 30: Government Budgets and Fiscal Policy -- Chapter 31: The Macroeconomic Impacts of Government Borrowing -- Chapter 32: Macroeconomic Policy Around the World -- Chapter 33: International Trade -- Chapter 34: Globalization and Protectionism0 aPrinciples of Economics 3e covers the scope and sequence of most introductory economics courses. The third edition takes a balanced approach to the theory and application of economics concepts. The text uses conversational language and ample illustrations to explore economic theories, and provides a wide array of examples using both fictional and real-world scenarios. The third edition has been carefully and thoroughly updated to reflect current data and understanding, as well as to provide a deeper background in diverse contributors and their impacts on economic thought and analysis. For example, the third edition highlights the research and views of a broader group of economists. Brief references and deeply explored socio-political examples have been updated to showcase the critical – and sometimes unnoticed – ties between economic developments and topics relevant to students. A fuller list of changes made in Principles of Economics 3e are described in the preface and the transition guide to help instructors transition to the third edition.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aShapiro, David A.eauthor1 aMacDonald, Danieleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/191zAccess online version03242nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001200142050000700154100003200161245005000193250000700243264004300250264006000293264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505089000527520110501417542001602522546001602538588004002554650002502594650003102619700002702650700002802677710003902705856007602744OTLid0000192MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1947172387  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aGreenlaw, Steven A.eauthor00aPrinciples of MacroeconomicscSteven Greenlaw  a3e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Welcome to Economics! -- Chapter 2: Choice in a World of Scarcity -- Chapter 3: Demand and Supply -- Chapter 4: Labor and Financial Markets -- Chapter 5: Elasticity -- Chapter 6: The Macroeconomic Perspective -- Chapter 7: Economic Growth -- Chapter 8: Unemployment -- Chapter 9: Inflation -- Chapter 10: The International Trade and Capital Flows -- Chapter 11: The Aggregate Demand/Aggregate Supply Model -- Chapter 12: The Keynesian Perspective -- Chapter 13: The Neoclassical Perspective -- Chapter 14: Money and Banking -- Chapter 15: Monetary Policy and Bank Regulation -- Chapter 16: Exchange Rates and International Capital Flows -- Chapter 17: Government Budgets and Fiscal Policy -- Chapter 18: The Impacts of Government Borrowing -- Chapter 19: Macroeconomic Policy Around the World -- Chapter 20: International Trade -- Chapter 21: Globalization and Protectionism0 aPrinciples of Macroeconomics 3e covers the scope and sequence of most one semester introductory macroeconomics courses. The third edition takes a balanced approach to the theory and application of macroeconomics concepts. The text uses conversational language and ample illustrations to explore economic theories, and provides a wide array of examples using both fictional and real-world scenarios. The third edition has been carefully and thoroughly updated to reflect current data and understanding, as well as to provide a deeper background in diverse contributors and their impacts on economic thought and analysis. For example, the third edition highlights the research and views of a broader group of economists. Brief references and deeply explored socio-political examples have also been updated to showcase the critical – and sometimes unnoticed – ties between economic developments and topics relevant to students. A fuller list of changes made in Principles of Macroeconomics 3e are described in the preface and the transition guide to help instructors transition to the third edition.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aShapiro, Davideauthor1 aTaylor, Timothyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/192zAccess online version02711nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001200142100002800154245004900182264004300231264006000274264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505084700508520070201355542001602057546001602073588004002089650002502129700003202154700002402186710003902210856007602249OTLid0000193MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1938168240  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aTaylor, Timothyeauthor00aPrinciples of MicroeconomicscTimothy Taylor 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Welcome to Economics! -- Chapter 2: Choice in a World of Scarcity -- Chapter 3: Demand and Supply -- Chapter 4: Labor and Financial Markets -- Chapter 5: Elasticity -- Chapter 6: Consumer Choices -- Chapter 7: Cost and Industry Structure -- Chapter 8: Perfect Competition -- Chapter 9: Monopoly -- Chapter 10: Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly -- Chapter 11: Monopoly and Antitrust Policy -- Chapter 12: Environmental Protection and Negative Externalities -- Chapter 13: Positive Externalities and Public Goods -- Chapter 14: Poverty and Economic Inequality -- Chapter 15: Issues in Labor Markets: Unions, Discrimination, Immigration -- Chapter 16: Information, Risk, and Insurance -- Chapter 17: Financial Markets -- Chapter 18: Public Economy -- Chapter 19: International Trade -- Chapter 20: Globalization and Protectionism0 aPrinciples of Economics 2e covers the scope and sequence of most introductory economics courses. The text includes many current examples, which are handled in a politically equitable way. The outcome is a balanced approach to the theory and application of economics concepts. The second edition has been thoroughly revised to increase clarity, update data and current event impacts, and incorporate the feedback from many reviewers and adopters. Changes made in Principles of Economics 2e are described in the preface and the transition guide to help instructors transition to the second edition. The first edition of Principles of Economics by OpenStax is available in web view in the ancillaries1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aGreenlaw, Steven A.eauthor1 aDodge, Ericeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/193zAccess online version03986nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002900135245003000164264004300194264005500237264001200292300002200304336002600326337002600352338003600378341002800414490002700442505032700469520255100796542004103347546001603388588004103404650003803445650002603483710003903509856007603548OTLid0000194MnU20260406020244.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2003    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAngelo, Gretcheneauthor00aLibertécGretchen Angelo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLos Angeles, CaliforniabGretchen V. Angeloc2017. 4c©2003.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Bonjour! C a va? -- 2 Ma famille et mes objets personnels -- 3 Le travail et les loisirs -- 4 Sorties et voyages -- 5 Tant de choses a` faire ! -- 6 Les voyages de ma famille -- 7 Mon corps -- 8 A table! -- 9 Le monde hier, aujourd’hui, etdemain -- 10 Racontons des histoires -- 11 Au magasin -- 12 Changeons le monde!0 aThis French book is aimed at a first-year college student. Its features include: Each chapter is built around communicative strategies. Clearly defined objectives in communi- cation, culture, and grammar are given at the start of each chapter, and summary exercises at the end allow students to measure their mastery of these objectives. The exercises in the in-class (A) sections are composed mainly of guided practice and extension activities, along with occasional comprehension checks and comprehensible input. Some further activities are indicated in the instructor's marginal notes. The teacher can provide teacher- directed “setting-the-stage” activities, comprehension checks, and further comprehensible input before beginning each section. Many models are provided to the students to give them a secure context in which to practice their vocabulary before they are asked to produce independent language. The grammar included is explained in a more narrative form and in more detail than is typical for first-year textbooks. The grammar (B) sections should be read by the students outside of class before the communicative activities requiring those grammar points are done in class. By providing more explicit grammatical detail than is usual in a first-year book, the author hopes to stimulate students to reflect on the grammar of their own language as well as of French, helping students to become aware that their study of French is not just about mastery of a new language and culture, but about a more critical view of their own. The amount of grammar is less than is typically contained in a first-year text. The grammar included has been chosen to meet the needs of the communicative goals of each chapter, and these have been selected based on what a student ranking intermediate-low to -mid on the ACTFL oral proficiency scale should be able to accomplish. The grammatical concepts included in this book focus on those that will be needed for the sentences and questions that a typical low-intermediate speaker can form, and those are emphasized repeatedly. The book implicitly and explicitly recycles material from previous chapters on a regular basis, so that students can see their learning as a continual progression rather than as a rush from one grammar point to the next. The book is ideally used in a classroom with internet and projection capabilities; the PDF version of the book contains hyperlinks to video and audio-based activities as well as navigational links to referenced exercises within the text itself.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/194zAccess online version03009nam a2200529 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156050001400164100003000178245004600208250000700254264004300261264005900304264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002500485490002700510505064800537520078201185542001601967546001601983588004001999650003502039650002702074650002602101700002402127700002902151700002602180700002402206700002902230700002902259700002802288700002502316700002302341710003902364856007602403OTLid0000196MnU20260406020655.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961584327  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aIllowsky, Barbaraeauthor00aIntroductory StatisticscBarbara Illowsky  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Sampling and Data -- Descriptive Statistics -- Probability Topics -- Discrete Random Variables -- Continuous Random Variables -- The Normal Distribution -- The Central Limit Theorem -- Confidence Intervals -- Hypothesis Testing with One Sample -- Hypothesis Testing with Two Samples -- The Chi-Square Distribution -- Linear Regression and Correlation -- F Distribution and One-Way ANOVA -- Review Exercises (Ch 3-13) -- Practice Tests (1-4) and Final Exams -- Data Sets -- Group and Partner Projects -- Solution Sheets -- Mathematical Phrases, Symbols, and Formulas -- NOTEs for the TI-83, 83+ 84, 84+ Calculators -- Tables -- Index0 aIntroductory Statistics 2e provides an engaging, practical, and thorough overview of the core concepts and skills taught in most one-semester statistics courses. The text focuses on diverse applications from a variety of fields and societal contexts, including business, healthcare, sciences, sociology, political science, computing, and several others. The material supports students with conceptual narratives, detailed step-by-step examples, and a wealth of illustrations, as well as collaborative exercises, technology integration problems, and statistics labs. The text assumes some knowledge of intermediate algebra, and includes thousands of problems and exercises that offer instructors and students ample opportunity to explore and reinforce useful statistical skills.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aDean, Susaneauthor1 aBirmajer, Danieleauthor1 aBlount, Bryaneauthor1 aBoyd, Sherieauthor1 aEinsohn, Mattheweauthor1 aHelmreich, Jameseauthor1 aKenyon, Lynetteeauthor1 aLee, Sheldoneauthor1 aTaub, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/196zAccess online version02716nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001600142050001100158050000800169100002600177245003000203264004300233264006000276264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002500458490002700483505040500510520108400915542001601999546001602015588004002031650002402071650002702095700002902122700002802151710003902179856007602218OTLid0000197MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1947172069  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aAbramson, Jayeauthor00aPrecalculuscJay Abramson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Functions -- 2 Linear Functions -- 3 Polynomial and Rational Functions -- 4 Exponential and Logarithmic Function -- 5 Trigonometric Functions -- 6 Periodic Functions -- 7 Trigonometric Identities and Equations -- 8 Further Applications of Trigonometry -- 9 Systems of Equations and Inequalities -- 10 Analytic Geometry -- 11 Sequences, Probability and Counting Theory -- 12 Introduction to Calculus0 aPrecalculus is intended for college-level precalculus students. Since precalculus courses vary from one institution to the next, we have attempted to meet the needs of as broad an audience as possible, including all of the content that might be covered in any particular course. The result is a comprehensive book that covers more ground than an instructor could likely cover in a typical one- or two-semester course; but instructors should find, almost without fail, that the topics they wish to include in their syllabus are covered in the text. Many chapters of Openstax College Precalculus are suitable for other freshman and sophomore math courses such as College Algebra and Trigonometry; however, instructors of those courses might need to supplement or adjust the material. Openstax will also be releasing College Algebra and Algebra and Trigonometry titles tailored to the particular scope, sequence, and pedagogy of those courses. OpenStax College has compiled many resources for faculty and students, from faculty-only content to interactive homework and study guides.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aFalduto, Valereeeauthor1 aGrosss, Rachaeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/197zAccess online version02593nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002900180245003500209264004300244264006500287264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505050400529520074401033542003001777546001601807588004001823650002401863650002701887700002701914700002601941700003701967700002802004710003902032856007602071OTLid0000198MnU20260406020215.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781514225158  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aHartman, Gregoryeauthor00aAPEX CalculuscGregory Hartman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAPEX Calculusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Limits -- Chapter 2: Derivatives -- Chapter 3: The Graphical Behavior of Functions -- Chapter 4: Applications of the Derivative -- Chapter 5: Integration -- Chapter 6: Techniques of Antidifferentiation -- Chapter 7: Applications of Integration -- Chapter 8: Sequences and Series -- Chapter 9: Curves in the Plane -- Chapter 10: Vectors -- Chapter 11: Vector Valued Functions -- Chapter 12: Functions of Several Variables -- Chapter 13: Multiple Integrations -- Chapter 14: Vector Analysis0 aThis text comprises a three–text series on Calculus. The first part covers material taught in many “Calc 1” courses: limits, derivatives, and the basics of integration, found in Chapters 1 through 6.1. The second text covers material often taught in “Calc 2:” integration and its applications, along with an introduction to sequences, series and Taylor Polynomials, found in Chapters 5 through 8. The third text covers topics common in “Calc 3” or “multivariable calc:” parametric equations, polar coordinates, vector–valued functions, and functions of more than one variable, found in Chapters 9 through 14. More information, including free downloads of .pdf versions of the text, is available at www.apexcalculus.com.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aHeinold, Brianeauthor1 aSiemers, Troyeauthor1 aChalishajar, Dimplekumareauthor1 aBowen, Jennifereeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/198zAccess online version02277nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001000154050000700164100002800171245005200199264004300251264006100294264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505026600532520075500798542004101553546001601594588004001610650002801650650004301678650003101721710003901752856007601791OTLid0000199MnU20260406020656.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341024  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aHM621 4aH11 aStebbins, Susaneauthor00aNative Peoples of North AmericacSusan Stebbins 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: In 1491… -- Chapter 2: All Our Relations -- Chapter 3: Resources and their Distribution -- Chapter 4: Status, Rank, and Power -- Chapter 5: Religion and Spiritual Beliefs -- Chapter 6: Is There a Word for Art? -- Conclusions -- References -- Videos0 aNative Peoples of North America is intended to be an introductory text about the Native peoples of North America (primarily the United States and Canada) presented from an anthropological perspective. As such, the text is organized around anthropological concepts such as language, kinship, marriage and family life, political and economic organization, food getting, spiritual and religious practices, and the arts. Prehistoric, historic and contemporary information is presented. Each chapter begins with an example from the oral tradition that reflects the theme of the chapter. The text includes suggested readings, videos, and classroom activities. This text was updated September 2019; the changes are detailed in an errata section in the text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/199zAccess online version03226nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002700153245007500180264004300255264006100298264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505037700536520167400913542004102587546001602628588004002644650002702684700002602711710003902737856007602776OTLid0000200MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781312348691  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aRogers, Roberteauthor00aHow We Got from There to HerebA Story of Real AnalysiscRobert Rogers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Numbers, Real (R) and Rational (Q) -- 2 Calculus in the 17th and 18th Centuries -- 3 Questions Concerning Power Series -- 4 Convergence of Sequences and Series -- 5 Convergence of the Taylor Series: A “Tayl” of Three Remainders -- 6 Continuity: What It Isn't and What It Is -- 7 Intermediate and Extreme Values -- 8 Back to Power Series -- 9 Back to the Real Numbers0 aThe typical introductory real analysis text starts with an analysis of the real number system and uses this to develop the definition of a limit, which is then used as a foundation for the definitions encountered thereafter. While this is certainly a reasonable approach from a logical point of view, it is not how the subject evolved, nor is it necessarily the best way to introduce students to the rigorous but highly non-intuitive definitions and proofs found in analysis. This book proposes that an effective way to motivate these definitions is to tell one of the stories (there are many) of the historical development of the subject, from its intuitive beginnings to modern rigor. The definitions and techniques are motivated by the actual difficulties encountered by the intuitive approach and are presented in their historical context. However, this is not a history of analysis book. It is an introductory analysis textbook, presented through the lens of history. As such, it does not simply insert historical snippets to supplement the material. The history is an integral part of the topic, and students are asked to solve problems that occur as they arise in their historical context. This book covers the major topics typically addressed in an introductory undergraduate course in real analysis in their historical order. Written with the student in mind, the book provides guidance for transforming an intuitive understanding into rigorous mathematical arguments. For example, in addition to more traditional problems, major theorems are often stated and a proof is outlined. The student is then asked to fill in the missing details as a homework problem.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aBoman, Eugeneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/200zAccess online version03451nam a2200493 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001100152050001000163050001000173050000700183050001000190100003100200245006000231264004300291264006100334264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002800517490002700545505045800572520150901030542004102539546001602580588004002596650002502636650003702661650003602698650002602734650003102760650002502791700002602816710003902842856007602881OTLid0000201MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780989722674  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aLC980 4aBF121 4aH1 4aHM5861 aDesrochers, Marcieeauthor00aInstruction in Functional AssessmentcMarcie Desrochers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Challenging Behaviors of Individuals with Developmental Disabilities -- Chapter 2: The Methodology of Functional Assessment: Process and Products -- Chapter 3: Treatment Implications Based on the Functional Assessment -- Chapter 4: Teaching Functional Assessment Content -- Chapter 5: Teaching Functional Analysis -- Chapter 6: Functional Analysis Case Training/FACT -- Chapter 7: Resources for Team Members of Interdisciplinary Professionals0 aInstruction in Functional Assessment introduces learners to functional assessment (FA), which includes a variety of assessment approaches (indirect, observational, and experimental) for identifying the cause of an individual's challenging behavior for the purpose of designing effective treatments. FA is mandated by federal law and is a recognized empirically based approach to treatment of individuals with challenging behaviors (e.g., disruptive, self-injurious, and aggressive behaviors). Instruction in FA is essential for students who will one day enter professions as educators, psychologists, social workers, counselors, or mental health professionals. The purpose of this textbook is to provide instruction in FA skills for pre-professionals in the fields of education and psychology. This supplemental resource provides the context, background, and knowledge to facilitate students' acquisition of the methods, decision-making, and skills involved in conducting FA. Each chapter begins with focus questions designed to promote reflective thinking and ends with discussion questions. To promote application of FA in diverse situations and teach important lessons, case studies of individuals with challenging behaviors, interactive activities, and opportunities for practice are embedded in the chapters. Moreover, the text includes the ingredients to facilitate students' role play and rehearsal of appropriate FA skills while working in cooperative groups and using performance-based training.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aFallon, Moiraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/201zAccess online version04613nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100002900178245011400207264004300321264006100364264001200425300002200437336002600459337002600485338003600511341002800547490002700575505048700602520278001089542004103869546001603910588004003926650002403966650003603990650002604026700002404052710003904076856007604115OTLid0000202MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341000  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 aHarrison, Yvonneeauthor00aGuidelines for Improving the Effectiveness of Boards of Directors of Nonprofit OrganizationscYvonne Harrison 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1:Introduction -- Chapter 2:The Board's Role and Responsibilities -- Chapter 3:The Board's Role in Planning -- Chapter 4:The Board's Role in Performance Assessment -- Chapter 5:The Board's Role in Fundraising -- Chapter 6:The Board's Structure and Operating Procedures -- Chapter 7:Effective Board Meetings -- Chapter 8:The Composition and Development of the Board -- Chapter 9:The Informal Culture of the Board -- Chapter 10:Leadership on the Board -- Chapter 11:Conclusion0 aThe purpose of this book is to help boards of directors of nonprofit organizations improve their performance after completing the online board self-assessment tool found at www.boardcheckup.com. However, it can also be used as a stand-alone resource for any board seeking to enhance its effectiveness in that it also contains the diagnostic questions on which the online tool is based. The approach taken here is similar to that which lies behind health checkups for individuals. Doctors usually begin by asking us to review a lengthy list of many possible health issues and we check those about which we have concerns. The doctor and patient then focus their discussions on these issues. The typical process proceeds through the following three stages: Understanding the symptoms. The doctor and patient begin by trying to define the issues more clearly. Diagnosis. Effort is made to understand the causes of the problems through tests and further examination. Treatment. Once the problem has been properly diagnosed, a treatment program to remedy it is begun. While the Board Check-Up survey on which this book is based does not pretend to be as scientifically rigorous as a medical examination, it is based on the same logic. It begins by having those who belong to, or relate to, boards provide their perceptions of how well the board is working by guiding them through a list of potential "health issues”, i.e. statements of possible problems, issues or challenges that boards might encounter in their work. These statements have been derived from comments made by those who serve on boards or interact with them as well as from the work of researchers and consultants who have studied boards over the past 30 years. Once issues (symptoms) have been identified, they become the focal point for discussions that explore how serious they are, what might be causing them (diagnosis) and what can be done to resolve them (treatment). As noted above, this book is intended to help boards assess performance and make decisions to improve the effectiveness of the governance process. Each chapter deals with one of the nine dimensions of governance effectiveness. It starts with the items dealing with that dimension on the Board Performance Self-Assessment Questionnaire. These items represent the symptoms that indicate possible issues, problems or challenges faced by the board. This is followed by a discussion of possible reasons that such symptoms might exist (diagnosis) The third part of each chapter looks at what might be done to alleviate the symptoms once a diagnosis is made (treatment). Included in this final part of the chapter are references to websites, books and articles that provide additional advice and assistance on how to deal with the issues raised.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aMurray, Viceauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/202zAccess online version03861nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002800154245008900182264004300271264006100314264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505138700552520131601939542004103255546001603296588004003312650003203352710003903384856007603423OTLid0000203MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781502447968  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aMendez, Michaeleauthor04aThe Missing LinkbAn Introduction to Web Development and ProgrammingcMichael Mendez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Brief History of the Internet -- Chapter 2: Current Trends -- Chapter 3: Web Servers -- Chapter 4: Network Basics -- Chapter 5: Website Design -- Chapter 6: Development -- Chapter 7: Markup Languages -- Chapter 8: Creating HTML Files -- Chapter 9: Page Layout -- Chapter 10: Text Layout -- Chapter 11: Navigation -- Chapter 12: Graphics -- Chapter 13: Tables -- Chapter 14: Forms -- Chapter 15: Canvas -- Chapter 16: Media Support -- Chapter 17: Mobile Device Support -- Chapter 18: Tags to Avoid -- Chapter 19: Rule Structure -- Chapter 20: Layout Formatting -- Chapter 21: Font and Text Decoration -- Chapter 22: Responsive Styling -- Chapter 23: Server-Side and Client-Side Scripting -- Chapter 24: Creating PHP Files -- Chapter 25: PHP Errors -- Chapter 26: PHP Output -- Chapter 27: Data Storage -- Chapter 28: Data Manipulation -- Chapter 29: Email -- Chapter 30: File Interaction -- Chapter 31: Structures -- Chapter 32: Functions -- Chapter 33: Objects and Classes -- Chapter 34: JavaScript Syntax -- Chapter 35: JavaScript Examples -- Chapter 36: jQuery -- Chapter 37: Database Types -- Chapter 38: Data Relationships -- Chapter 39: MySQL Data Types -- Chapter 40: Normalization -- Chapter 41: MySQL CRUD Actions -- Chapter 42: Advanced Queries -- Chapter 43: Security -- Chapter 44: Integration Examples -- Chapter 45: Finishing Touches -- Chapter 46: Now What?0 aWeb development is an evolving amalgamation of languages that work in concert to receive, modify, and deliver information between parties using the Internet as a mechanism of delivery. While it is easy to describe conceptually, implementation is accompanied by an overwhelming variety of languages, platforms, templates, frameworks, guidelines, and standards. Navigating a project from concept to completion often requires more than mastery of one or two complementing languages, meaning today's developers need both breadth, and depth, of knowledge to be effective. This text provides the developer with an understanding of the various elements of web development by focusing on the concepts and fundamentals through the examples within, providing a foundation that allows easier transition to other languages and a better understanding of how to approach their work. The reader will be introduced to topics in a manner that follows most project development methods, from initial conceptualization and design through front end development, back end development, and introducing additional concepts like accessibility and security, while focusing on responsive design techniques. Each section of the text includes opportunities to practice the material and assess increased knowledge after examining the topics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/203zAccess online version02890nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003500156245006500191264004300256264006100299264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505039700537520132000934542004102254546001602295588004002311650002602351650002402377710003902401856007602440OTLid0000204MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341031  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aSteinberg, Theodore L.eauthor00aLiterature, the Humanities, and HumanitycTheodore Steinberg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Homer, The Iliad -- Chapter 3: Homer, The Odyssey and Virgil, The Aeneid -- Chapter 4: Sir Philip Sidney, Astrophel and Stella -- Chapter 5: Shakespeare -- Chapter 6: Pope, “The Rape of the Lock” -- Chapter 7: Henry Fielding, Joseph Andrews -- Chapter 8: Jane Austen -- Chapter 9: Charles Dickens, Bleak House -- Chapter 10: George Eliot, Middlemarch0 aLiterature, the Humanities, and Humanity attempts to make the study of literature more than simply another school subject that students have to take. At a time when all subjects seem to be valued only for their testability, this book tries to show the value of reading and studying literature, even earlier literature. It shows students, some of whom will themselves become teachers, that literature actually has something to say to them. Furthermore, it shows that literature is meant to be enjoyed, that, as the Roman poet Horace (and his Renaissance disciple Sir Philip Sidney) said, the functions of literature are to teach and to delight. The book will also be useful to teachers who want to convey their passion for literature to their students. After an introductory chapter that offers advice on how to read (and teach) literature, the book consists of a series of chapters that examine individual literary works ranging from The Iliad to Charles Dickens' Bleak House. These chapters can not substitute for reading the actual works. Rather they are intended to help students read those works. They are attempts to demystify the act of reading and to show that these works, whether they are nearly three thousand or less than two hundred years old, still have important things to say to contemporary readers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/204zAccess online version02395nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002700155245004800182264004300230264006100273264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505055400511520073301065542004101798546001601839588004001855650002301895710003901918856007601957OTLid0000205MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341178  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aKiernan, Dianeeauthor00aNatural Resources BiometricscDiane Kiernan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Descriptive Statistics and the Normal Distribution -- Chapter 2: Sampling Distributions and Confidence Intervals -- Chapter 3: Hypothesis Testing -- Chapter 4: Inferences about the Differences of Two Populations -- Chapter 5: One-way Analysis of Variance -- Chapter 6: Two-way Analysis of Variance -- Chapter 7: Correlation and Simple Linear Regression -- Chapter 8: Multiple Linear Regression -- Chapter 9: Modeling Growth, Yield, and Site Index -- Chapter 10: Quantitative Measures of Diversity, Site Similarity, and Habitat Suitability0 aNatural Resources Biometrics begins with a review of descriptive statistics, estimation, and hypothesis testing. The following chapters cover one- and two-way analysis of variance (ANOVA), including multiple comparison methods and interaction assessment, with a strong emphasis on application and interpretation. Simple and multiple linear regressions in a natural resource setting are covered in the next chapters, focusing on correlation, model fitting, residual analysis, and confidence and prediction intervals. The final chapters cover growth and yield models, volume and biomass equations, site index curves, competition indices, importance values, and measures of species diversity, association, and community similarity.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/205zAccess online version03632nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000800142100003000150245003500180264004300215264006000258264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002500440490002700465505160900492520084302101542001602944546001602960588004002976650002303016650002603039700002803065700002603093710003903119856007603158OTLid0000206MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1938168364  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aCorbett, P. Scotteauthor00aU.S. HistorycP. Scott Corbett 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Americas, Europe, and Africa Before 1492 -- Early Globalization: The Atlantic World, 1492–1650 -- Creating New Social Orders: Colonial Societies, 1500–1700 -- Rule Britannia! The English Empire, 1660–1763 -- Imperial Reforms and Colonial Protests, 1763-1774 -- America's War for Independence, 1775-1783 -- Creating Republican Governments, 1776–1790 -- Growing Pains: The New Republic, 1790–1820 -- The Industrial, Market, and Transportation Revolutions, 1800–1850 -- Jacksonian Democracy, 1820–1840 -- A Nation on the Move: Westward Expansion, 1800–1860 -- Cotton is King: The Antebellum South, 1800–1860 -- Antebellum Idealism and Reform Impulses, 1820–1860 -- Troubled Times: the Tumultuous 1850s -- The Civil War, 1860–1865 -- The Era of Reconstruction, 1865–1877 -- Go West Young Man! Westward Expansion, 1840-1900 -- Industrialization and the Rise of Big Business, 1870-1900 -- The Growing Pains of Urbanization, 1870-1900 -- Politics in the Gilded Age, 1870-1900 -- Leading the Way: The Progressive Movement, 1890-1920 -- Age of Empire: American Foreign Policy, 1890-1914 -- Americans and the Great War, 1914-1919 -- The Jazz Age: Redefining the Nation, 1919-1929 -- Brother, Can You Spare a Dime? The Great Depression, 1929-1932 -- Franklin Roosevelt and the New Deal, 1932-1941 -- Fighting the Good Fight in World War II, 1941-1945 -- Post-War Prosperity and Cold War Fears, 1945-1960 -- Contesting Futures: America in the 1960s -- Political Storms at Home and Abroad, 1968-1980 -- From Cold War to Culture Wars, 1980-2000 -- The Challenges of the Twenty-First Century0 aU.S. Historycovers the breadth of the chronological history of the United States and also provides the necessary depth to ensure the course is manageable for instructors and students alike. U.S. History is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of most courses. The authors introduce key forces and major developments that together form the American experience, with particular attention paid to considering issues of race, class, and gender. The text provides a balanced approach to U.S. history, considering the people, events, and ideas that have shaped the United States from both the top down (politics, economics, diplomacy) and bottom up (eyewitness accounts, lived experience). OpenStax College has compiled many resources for faculty and students, from faculty-only content to interactive homework and study guides.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aJanssen, Volkereauthor1 aLund, John M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/206zAccess online version02706nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001000142050000700152100002700159245003000186250000700216264004300223264005900266264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002500447490002700472505039100499520105000890542001601940546001601956588004001972650002602012650003102038700002802069700002902097700003102126710003902157856007602196OTLid0000207MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1938168356  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aSpielman, Roseeauthor00aPsychologycRose Spielman  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2021. 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Psychology -- Psychological Research -- Biopsychology -- States of Consciousness -- Sensation and Perception -- Learning -- Thinking and Intelligence -- Memory -- Lifespan Development -- Emotion and Motivation -- Personality -- Social Psychology -- Industrial-Organizational Psychology -- Stress, Lifestyle, and Health -- Psychological Disorders -- Therapy and Treatment0 aPsychology 2e is designed to meet scope and sequence requirements for the single-semester introduction to psychology course. The book offers a comprehensive treatment of core concepts, grounded in both classic studies and current and emerging research. The text also includes coverage of the DSM-5 in examinations of psychological disorders. Psychology incorporates discussions that reflect the diversity within the discipline, as well as the diversity of cultures and communities across the globe. The second edition contains detailed updates to address comments and suggestions from users. Significant improvements and additions were made in the areas of research currency, diversity and representation, and the relevance and recency of the examples. Many concepts were expanded or clarified, particularly through the judicious addition of detail and further explanation where necessary. Finally, the authors addressed the replication issues in the psychology discipline, both in the research chapter and where appropriate throughout the book.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aDumper, Kathryneauthor1 aJenkins, Williameauthor1 aLovett, Marilyn D.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/207zAccess online version02269nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137110004500150245006600195264004300261264007600304264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002500502490002700527505079700554520028401351542002701635546001601662588004001678650002801718650003401746710003901780856007601819OTLid0000208MnU20260323020216.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A42 aeLangdell PressbEditorial Staffeeditor00aUnited States Securities LawceLangdell Press Editorial Staff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDue to the volume of the material, it has been divided up into eight volumes. -- Volume 1 -The Securities Act of 1933 and The Securities and Exchange Act of 1934 -- Volume 2 -The Investment Company Act of 1940 and The Investment Advisors Act of 1940 -- Volume 3 -Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform Act and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 and Jumpstart our Business Startups Act of 2012 -- Volume 4 -Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 200, 201, 202 and 203 -- Volume 5 -Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 210 and 229 -- Volume 6 -Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 230 -- Volume 7 -Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 240 and 250 -- Volume 8 -Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations, Part 260, 270 and 2750 aThe United States Securities Code and Regulations appear in Title 15 of the United States Code and Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations. This publication was made with data provided by the United States government on the Office of Law Revision Counsel as well as the eCFR.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/208zAccess online version02456nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002900162245006100191264004300252264006900295264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505030600541520097500847542002701822546001601849588004001865650002301905650002701928710003901955856007601994OTLid0000210MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aKuttler, Kennetheauthor00aLinear Algebra, Theory And ApplicationscKenneth Kuttler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreliminaries -- Linear Transformations -- Determinants -- Row Operations -- Some Factorizations -- Spectral Theory -- Vector Spaces And Fields -- Linear Transformations -- Canonical Forms -- Markov Processes -- Inner Product Spaces -- Self Adjoint Operators -- Norms -- Numerical Methods, Eigenvalues0 aThis is a book on linear algebra and matrix theory. While it is self contained, it will work best for those who have already had some exposure to linear algebra. It is also assumed that the reader has had calculus. Some optional topics require more analysis than this, however. This book features an ugly, elementary, and complete treatment of determinants early in the book. Thus it might be considered as Linear algebra done wrong. I have done this because of the usefulness of determinants. However, all major topics are also presented in an alternative manner which is independent of determinants. The book has an introduction to various numerical methods used in linear algebra. This is done because of the interesting nature of these methods. The presentation here emphasizes the reasons why they work. It does not discuss many important numerical considerations necessary to use the methods effectively. These considerations are found in numerical analysis texts.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/210zAccess online version02429nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050000800166100002400174245007200198264004300270264004400313264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505024600531520097300777542004101750546001601791588004001807650004201847650002701889710003901916856007601955OTLid0000211MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781505698190  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLebl, Jiríeauthor00aNotes on Diffy QsbDifferential Equations for EngineerscJirí Lebl 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStillwater, OklahomabJirí Leblc2020. 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. First order equations -- 2. Higher order linear ODEs -- 3. Systems of ODEs -- 4. Fourier series and PDEs -- 5. More on eigenvalue problems -- 6. The Laplace transform -- 7. Power series methods -- 8. Nonlinear systems -- A. Linear algebra0 aA one semester first course on differential equations, aimed at engineering students. Prerequisite for the course is the basic calculus sequence. This free online book (e-book in webspeak) should be usable as a stand-alone textbook or as a companion to a course using another book such as Edwards and Penney, Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems: Computing and Modeling or Boyce and DiPrima, Elementary Differential Equations and Boundary Value Problems (section correspondence to these two is given). I developed and used these notes to teach Math 286/285 at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign Sample Dirichlet problem solution (one is a 4-day-a-week, the other a 3-day-a-week semester-long course). I have also taught Math 20D at University of California, San Diego with these notes (a 3-day-a-week quarter-long course). There is enough material to run a 2-quarter course, and even perhaps a two semester course depending on lecturer speed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/211zAccess online version04180nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002500162245005000187250002600237264004300263264005600306264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505188600539520112002425542001603545546001603561588004003577650002303617650002703640710003903667856007603706OTLid0000213MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aKuttler, Keneauthor02aA First Course in Linear AlgebracKen Kuttler  a10th Edition-2023-B-D 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2017. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Systems of Equations -- 1.1 Systems of Equations, Geometry -- 1.2 Systems Of Equations, Algebraic Procedures -- 2 Matrices -- 2.1 Matrix Arithmetic -- 2.2 LU Factorization -- 3 Determinants -- 3.1 Basic Techniques and Properties -- 3.2 Applications of the Determinant -- 4 R^n -- 4.1 Vectors in R^n -- 4.2 Algebra in R^n -- 4.3 Geometric Meaning of Vector Addition -- 4.4 Length of a Vector -- 4.5 Geometric Meaning of Scalar Multiplication -- 4.6 Parametric Lines -- 4.7 The Dot Product -- 4.8 Planes in R^n -- 4.9 The Cross Product -- 4.10 Spanning, Linear Independence and Basis in R^n -- 4.11 Orthogonality and the Gram Schmidt Process -- 4.12 Applications -- 5 Linear Transformations -- 5.1 Linear Transformations -- 5.2 The Matrix of a Linear Transformation I -- 5.3 Properties of Linear Transformations -- 5.4 Special Linear Transformations in R^2 -- 5.5 One to One and Onto Transformations -- 5.6 Isomorphisms -- 5.7 The Kernel And Image Of A Linear Map -- 5.8 The Matrix of a Linear Transformation II -- 5.9 The General Solution of a Linear System -- 6 Complex Numbers -- 6.1 Complex Numbers -- 6.2 Polar Form -- 6.3 Roots of Complex Numbers -- 6.4 The Quadratic Formula -- 7 Spectral Theory -- 7.1 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a Matrix -- 7.2 Diagonalization -- 7.3 Applications of Spectral Theory -- 7.4 Orthogonality -- 8 Some Curvilinear Coordinate Systems -- 8.1 Polar Coordinates and Polar Graphs -- 8.2 Spherical and Cylindrical Coordinates -- 9 Vector Spaces -- 9.1 Algebraic Considerations -- 9.2 Spanning Sets -- 9.3 Linear Independence -- 9.4 Subspaces and Basis -- 9.5 Sums and Intersections -- 9.6 Linear Transformations -- 9.7 Isomorphisms -- 9.8 The Kernel And Image Of A Linear Map -- 9.9 The Matrix of a Linear Transformation -- A Some Prerequisite Topics -- A.1 Sets and Set Notation -- A.2 Well Ordering and Induction -- B Selected Exercise Answers0 aThis text, originally by K. Kuttler, has been redesigned by the Lyryx editorial team as a first course in linear algebra for science and engineering students who have an understanding of basic algebra. All major topics of linear algebra are available in detail, as well as proofs of important theorems. In addition, connections to topics covered in advanced courses are introduced. The text is designed in a modular fashion to maximize flexibility and facilitate adaptation to a given course outline and student profile. Each chapter begins with a list of student learning outcomes, and examples and diagrams are given throughout the text to reinforce ideas and provide guidance on how to approach various problems. Suggested exercises are included at the end of each section, with selected answers at the end of the text. Lyryx develops and supports open texts, with editorial services to adapt the text for each particular course. In addition, Lyryx provides content-specific formative online assessment, a wide variety of supplements, and in-house support available 7 days/week for both students and instructors.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/213zAccess online version02805nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100002600159245005500185250001300240264004300253264005600296264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505045600529520104700985542004102032546001602073588004002089650002602129650002402155650002302179700002802202700002602230710003902256856007602295OTLid0000215MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aAnnand, Davideauthor00aIntroduction to Financial AccountingcDavid Annand  a2024-A-D 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2021. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Financial Accounting -- The Accounting Process -- Financial Accounting and Adjusting Entries -- The Classified Balance Sheet and Related Disclosures -- Accounting for the Sale of Goods -- Assigning Costs to Merchandise -- Cash and Receivables -- Long-lived Assets -- Debt Financing: Current and Long-term Liabilities -- Equity Financing -- The Statement of Cash Flows -- Financial Statement Analysis -- Proprietorships and Partnerships0 aIntroduction to Financial Accounting, originally by D. Annand and H. Dauderis, is intended for a first course in introductory financial accounting. It has been extensively edited by Athabasca University and reflects current International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). A corporate approach is utilized, versus beginning with a sole proprietorship emphasis and then converting to a corporate approach. The textbook focuses on core introductory financial accounting topics that match pre-requisite requirements for students advancing to intermediate financial accounting. The textbook covers all essential topics, including: the accounting cycle; merchandising; assigning costs to inventory; cash and receivables; property, plant and equipment; debt financing; equity financing; statement of cash flows; financial statement analysis; and proprietorships and partnerships. The original Annand/Dauderis version of the textbook including .docx files and ancillary material remains available upon request to D. Annand (davida@athabascau.ca).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aDauderis, Henryeauthor1 aJensen, Tillyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/215zAccess online version04057nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100003000180245006100210264004300271264007700314264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505048000568520235301048542003703401546001603438588004003454650002303494650002703517710003903544856007603583OTLid0000217MnU20260406020705.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944325022  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aJudson, Thomas W.eauthor00aAbstract AlgebrabTheory and ApplicationscThomas Judson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Puget Soundc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreliminaries -- The Integers -- Groups -- Cyclic Groups -- Permutation Groups -- Cosets and Lagrange's Theorem -- Introduction to Cryptography -- Algebraic Coding Theory -- Isomorphisms -- Normal Subgroups and Factor Groups -- Homomorphisms -- Matrix Groups and Symmetry -- The Structure of Groups -- Group Actions -- The Sylow Theorems -- Rings -- Polynomials -- Integral Domains -- Lattices and Boolean Algebras -- Vector Spaces -- Fields -- Finite Fields -- Galois Theory0 aThis text is intended for a one- or two-semester undergraduate course in abstract algebra. Traditionally, these courses have covered the theoretical aspects of groups, rings, and fields. However, with the development of computing in the last several decades, applications that involve abstract algebra and discrete mathematics have become increasingly important, and many science, engineering, and computer science students are now electing to minor in mathematics. Though theory still occupies a central role in the subject of abstract algebra and no student should go through such a course without a good notion of what a proof is, the importance of applications such as coding theory and cryptography has grown significantly. Until recently most abstract algebra texts included few if any applications. However, one of the major problems in teaching an abstract algebra course is that for many students it is their first encounter with an environment that requires them to do rigorous proofs. Such students often find it hard to see the use of learning to prove theorems and propositions; applied examples help the instructor provide motivation. This text contains more material than can possibly be covered in a single semester. Certainly there is adequate material for a two-semester course, and perhaps more; however, for a one-semester course it would be quite easy to omit selected chapters and still have a useful text. The order of presentation of topics is standard: groups, then rings, and finally fields. Emphasis can be placed either on theory or on applications. A typical one-semester course might cover groups and rings while briefly touching on field theory, using Chapters 1 through 6, 9, 10, 11, 13 (the first part), 16, 17, 18 (the first part), 20, and 21. Parts of these chapters could be deleted and applications substituted according to the interests of the students and the instructor. A two-semester course emphasizing theory might cover Chapters 1 through 6, 9, 10, 11, 13 through 18, 20, 21, 22 (the first part), and 23. On the other hand, if applications are to be emphasized, the course might cover Chapters 1 through 14, and 16 through 22. In an applied course, some of the more theoretical results could be assumed or omitted. A chapter dependency chart appears below. (A broken line indicates a partial dependency.)1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/217zAccess online version02877nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002700145245006900172264004300241264006200284264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002500468490002700493505061000520520108001130542001602210546001602226588004002242650003202282650003702314700002502351710003902376856007602415OTLid0000218MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aMorelli, Ralpheauthor00aJava, Java, JavabObject-Oriented Problem SolvingcRalph Morelli 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHartford, ConnecticutbRalph Morelli, Ralph Waldec[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a0 Computers, Objects, and Java -- 1 Java Program Design and Development -- 2 Objects: Defining, Creating, and Using -- 3 Methods: Communicating with Objects -- 4 Input/Output: Designing the User Interface -- 5 Java Data and Operators -- 6 Control Structures -- 7 Strings and String Processing -- 8 Inheritance and Polymorphism -- 9 Arrays and Array Processing -- 10 Exceptions: When Things Go Wrong -- 11 Files and Streams -- 12 Recursive Problem Solving -- 13 Graphical User Interfaces -- 14 Threads and Concurrent Programming -- 15 Sockets and Networking -- 16 Data Structures: Lists, Stacks, and Queues0 aWe have designed this third edition of Java, Java, Java to be suitable for a typical Introduction to Computer Science (CS1) course or for a slightly more advanced Java as a Second Language course. This edition retains the “objects first” approach to programming and problem solving that was characteristic of the first two editions. Throughout the text we emphasize careful coverage of Java language features, introductory programming concepts, and object-oriented design principles. The third edition retains many of the features of the first two editions, including: Early Introduction of Objects Emphasis on Object Oriented Design (OOD) Unified Modeling Language (UML) Diagrams Self-study Exercises with Answers Programming, Debugging, and Design Tips. From the Java Library Sections Object-Oriented Design Sections End-of-Chapter Exercises Companion Web Site, with Power Points and other Resources The In the Laboratory sections from the first two editions have been moved onto the book's Companion Web Site. Table 1 shows the Table of Contents for the third edition.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aWalde, Ralpheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/218zAccess online version03228nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001100142050001000153100002600163245002800189250000700217264004300224264006000267264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002500449490002700474505126400501520074901765542001602514546001602530588004002546650002502586650002302611700002802634700002902662710003902691856007602730OTLid0000219MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1947172611  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aFlowers, Pauleauthor00aChemistrycPaul Flowers  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Essential Ideas -- 2. Atoms, Molecules, and Ions -- 3. Compositions of Substances and Solutions -- 4. Stoichiometry of Chemical Reactions -- 5. Thermochemistry -- 6. Electronic Structure and Periodic Properties of Elements -- 7. Chemical Bonding and Molecular Geometry -- 8. Advanced Theories of Covalent Bonding -- 9. Gases -- 10. Liquids and Solids -- 11. Solutions and Colloids -- 12. Kinetics -- 13. Fundamental Equilibrium Concepts -- 14. Acid-Base Equilibria -- 15. Equilibria of Other Reaction Classes -- 16. Thermodynamics -- 17. Electrochemistry -- 18. Representative Metals, Metalloids, and Nonmetals -- 19. Transition Metals and Coordination Chemistry -- 20. Organic Chemistry -- 21. Nuclear Chemistry -- The Periodic Table of Elements -- Essential Mathematics -- Unit and Conversion Factors -- Fundamental Physical Constants -- Water Properties -- Composition of Commercial Acids and Bases -- Standard Enthalpies of Formation, Standard Free Energies of Formation, and Absolute Standard Entropies -- Ionization Constants of Weak Acids -- Ionization Constants of Weak Bases -- Solubility Products -- Formation Constants for Complex Ions -- Standard Electrode (Half-Cell) Potentials -- Half-Lives for Several Radioactive Isotopes -- 22. Answer Key0 aChemistry 2e is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of the two-semester general chemistry course. The textbook provides an important opportunity for students to learn the core concepts of chemistry and understand how those concepts apply to their lives and the world around them. The book also includes a number of innovative features, including interactive exercises and real-world applications, designed to enhance student learning. The second edition has been revised to incorporate clearer, more current, and more dynamic explanations, while maintaining the same organization as the first edition. Substantial improvements have been made in the figures, illustrations, and example exercises that support the text narrative.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aTheopold, Klauseauthor1 aLangley, Richardeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/219zAccess online version02190nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003000162245003500192264004300227264003700270264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505046000484520051800944542004101462546001601503588004101519650002401560650002701584700002601611700002801637710003901665856007601704OTLid0000220MnU20260406020219.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aHolowinsky, Romaneauthor00aCalculus OnecRoman Holowinsky 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aColumbus, OhiobMooculusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a0 Functions -- 1 Limits -- 2 Infinity and Continuity -- 3 Basics of Derivatives -- 4 Curve Sketching -- 5 The Product Rule and Quotient Rule -- 6 The Chain Rule -- 7 The Derivatives of Trigonometric Functions and their Inverses -- 8 Applications of Differentiation -- 9 Optimization -- 10 Linear Approximation -- 11 Antiderivatives -- 12 Integrals -- 13 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus -- 14 Techniques of Integration -- 15 Applications of Integration0 aCalculus is about the very large, the very small, and how things change—the surprise is that something seemingly so abstract ends up explaining the real world. This course is a first and friendly introduction to calculus, suitable for someone who has never seen the subject before, or for someone who has seen some calculus but wants to review the concepts and practice applying those concepts to solve problems. One learns calculus by doing calculus, and so this course is based around doing practice problems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aThiel, Johanneauthor1 aLindberg, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/220zAccess online version04241nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050000700148100003100155245009700186250001600283264004300299264005900342264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505067600578520228301254542003003537546001603567588004103583650003303624650003403657650002503691710003903716856007603755OTLid0000221MnU20260406020702.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aL71 aBates, A.W. (Tony)eauthor00aTeaching in a Digital AgebGuidelines for designing teaching and learningcA.W. (Tony) Bates  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2019. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Fundamental Change in Education -- Chapter 2: The nature of knowledge and the implications for teaching -- Chapter 3: Methods of teaching: campus-focused -- Chapter 4: Methods of teaching with an online focus -- Chapter 5: MOOCs -- Chapter 6: Building an effective learning environment -- Chapter 7: Understanding technology in education -- Chapter 8: Pedagogical differences between media -- Chapter 9: Choosing and using media in education: the SECTIONS model -- Chapter 10: Modes of delivery -- Chapter 11: Trends in open education -- Chapter 12: Ensuring quality teaching in a digital age -- Chapter 13: Supporting teachers and instructors in a digital age0 aTeachers, instructors and faculty are facing unprecedented change, with often larger classes, more diverse students, demands from government and employers who want more accountability and the development of graduates who are workforce ready, and above all, we are all having to cope with ever changing technology. To handle change of this nature, teachers and instructors need a base of theory and knowledge that will provide a solid foundation for their teaching, no matter what changes or pressures they face. Although the book contains many practical examples, it is more than a cookbook on how to teach. It addresses the following questions: is the nature of knowledge changing, and how do different views on the nature of knowledge result in different approaches to teaching? what is the science and research that can best help me in my teaching? how do I decide whether my courses should be face-to-face, blended or fully online? what strategies work best when teaching in a technology-rich environment? what methods of teaching are most effective for blended and online classes? how do I make choices among all the available media, whether text, audio, video, computer, or social media, in order to benefit my students and my subject? how do I maintain high quality in my teaching in a rapidly changing learning environment while managing my workload? what are the real possibilities for teaching and learning using MOOCs, OERS, open textbooks? In summary, the book examines the underlying principles that guide effective teaching in an age when everyone, and in particular the students we are teaching, are using technology. A framework and a set of guidelines are suggested for making decisions about your teaching, while understanding that every subject is different, and every teacher and instructor has something unique and special to bring to their teaching. In the end, though, the book isn't really about teachers and instructors, although you are the target group. It's about you helping your students to develop the knowledge and skills they will need in a digital age: not so much digital skills, but the thinking and knowledge that will bring them success. For that to happen, though, your students need you to be on top of your game. This book is your coach.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/221zAccess online version02712nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100003500149245006000184250001900244264004300263264008100306264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002800509490002700537505055600564520094301120542004102063546001602104588004102120650002402161650002602185710003902211856007602250OTLid0000223MnU20260406020220.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aStandridge, Charles R.eauthor00aBeyond LeanbSimulation in PracticecCharles Standridge  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBeyond Lean: Process and Principles -- Simulation Modeling -- Modeling Random Quantities -- Conducting Simulation Experiments -- The Simulation Engine -- A Single Workstation -- Serial Systems -- Job Shops -- Inventory Organization and Control -- Inventory Control Using Kanbans -- Cellular Manufacturing Operations -- Flexible Manufacturing Systems -- Automated Inventory Management -- Transportation and Delivery -- Integrated Supply Chains -- Distribution Centers and Conveyors -- Automated Guided Vehicle Systems -- Automated Storage and Retrieval0 aLean thinking, as well as associated processes and tools, have involved into a ubiquitous perspective for improving systems particularly in the manufacturing arena. With application experience has come an understanding of the boundaries of lean capabilities and the benefits of getting beyond these boundaries to further improve performance. Discrete event simulation is recognized as one beyond-the-boundaries of lean technique. Thus, the fundamental goal of this text is to show how discrete event simulation can be used in addition to lean thinking to achieve greater benefits in system improvement than with lean alone. Realizing this goal requires learning the problems that simulation solves as well as the methods required to solve them. The problems that simulation solves are captured in a collection of case studies. These studies serve as metaphors for industrial problems that are commonly addressed using lean and simulation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/223zAccess online version02108nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050000700149100002600156245005000182264004300232264008100275264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505014800533520059700681542003001278546001601308588004101324650002301365650002301388650003101411700002701442700002601469700002701495700002501522710003901547856007601586OTLid0000224MnU20260406020411.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH301 4aH11 aHall, Robertaeauthor00aIntroduction to Human OsteologycRoberta Hall 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Crania -- Chapter 2: Limbs -- Chapter 3: Hands and Feet -- Chapter 4: Vertebral Column and Thorax -- Chapter 5: Pelvis and Dentition0 aThis text was designed for use in the human osteology laboratory classroom. Bones are described to aid in identification of skeletonized remains in either an archaeological or forensic anthropology setting. Basic techniques for siding, aging, sexing, and stature estimation are described. Both images of bone and drawings are included which may be used for study purposes outside of the classroom. The text represents work that has been developed over more than 30 years by its various authors and is meant to present students with the basic analytical tools for the study of human osteology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBeals, Kennetheauthor1 aNeumann, Holmeauthor1 aNeumann, Georgeauthor1 aMadden, Gwyneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/224zAccess online version02714nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002700164245007400191264004300265264008100308264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002800511490002700539505043300566520110200999542004102101546001602142588004002158650002702198710003902225856007602264OTLid0000225MnU20260406020401.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781492103851  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSundstrom, Tedeauthor00aMathematical ReasoningbWriting and Proof, Version 2.1cTed Sundstrom 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Writing Proofs in Mathematics -- 2 Logical Reasoning -- 3 Constructing and Writing Proofs in Mathematics -- 4 Mathematical Induction -- 5 Set Theory -- 6 Functions -- 7 Equivalence Relations -- 8 Topics in Number Theory -- 9 Finite and Infinite Sets -- A Guidelines for Writing Mathematical Proofs -- B Answers for the Progress Checks -- C Answers and Hints for Selected Exercises -- D List of Symbols -- Index0 aMathematical Reasoning: Writing and Proofis designed to be a text for the ?rst course in the college mathematics curriculum that introduces students to the processes of constructing and writing proofs and focuses on the formal development of mathematics. The primary goals of the text are to help students: Develop logical thinking skills and to develop the ability to think more abstractly in a proof oriented setting. Develop the ability to construct and write mathematical proofs using standard methods of mathematical proof including direct proofs, proof by contradiction, mathematical induction, case analysis, and counterexamples. Develop the ability to read and understand written mathematical proofs. Develop talents for creative thinking and problem solving. Improve their quality of communication in mathematics. This includes improving writing techniques, reading comprehension, and oral communication in mathematics. Better understand the nature of mathematics and its language. This text also provides students with material that will be needed for their further study of mathematics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/225zAccess online version01935nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245004300138264004300181264008100224264001200305300002200317336002600339337002600365338003600391341002800427490002700455505008300482520064300565542004101208546001601249588004001265650002601305650002401331700002501355700002801380700002601408710003901434856007601473OTLid0000226MnU20260406020415.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aWriting Spaces Web Writing Style Guide 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Writing in the Genres of the Web -- The Rhetorics of Web Pages0 aThe Writing Spaces Web Writing Style Guide was created as a crowdsourcing project of Collaborvention 2011: A Computers and Writing Unconference. College writing teachers from around the web joined together to create this guide (see our Contributors list). The advice within it is based on contemporary theories and best practices. While the text was originally written for students in undergraduate writing classes, it can also be a suitable resource for other writers interested in learning more about writing for the web. This document is available as a web text for reading online, a printer-friendly PDF, and an EPUB ereader versions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aBarton, Matteeditor1 aKalmbach, Jameseeditor1 aLowe, Charleseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/226zAccess online version02124nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245005500144264004300199264005600242264001200298300002200310336002600332337002600358338003600384341002800420490002700448505035800475520057800833542004101411546001601452588004101468650002601509650003101535700003401566700002301600710003901623856007601662OTLid0000227MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aDiscover Psychology 2.0bA Brief Introductory Text 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNobac[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntro to Psychology as a Science -- Research in Psychology -- Biology as the Basis of Behavior -- Developmental Psychology -- Sensation and Perception -- Consciousness -- Learning -- Memory -- Cognition, Language & Intelligence -- Emotion and Motivation -- Personality -- Psychological Disorders -- Therapies -- Social Psychology -- Psychological Health0 aThis textbook presents core concepts common to introductory courses. The 15 units cover the traditional areas of intro-to-psychology; ranging from biological aspects of psychology to psychological disorders to social psychology. This book can be modified: feel free to add or remove modules to better suit your specific needs. Each module in this book is accompanied by instructor's manual, PowerPoint presentation, test items, adaptive student quiz, and reading anticipation guide. Please note that the publisher requires you to login to access and download the textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBiswas-Diener, Roberteeditor1 aDiener, Edeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/227zAccess online version01798nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245005700144264004300201264005600244264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002800422490002700450505024300477520036500720542004101085546001601126588004101142650002601183650003101209700003401240700002301274710003901297856007601336OTLid0000228MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aIntroduction to PsychologybThe Full Noba Collection 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNobac[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPsychology As Science -- Biological Basis of Behavior -- Sensation and Perception -- Development -- Cognition and Language -- Learning and Memory -- Social -- Personality -- Emotions and Motivation -- Psychological Disorders -- Well-Being0 aThis textbook represents the entire catalog of Noba topics. It contains 90 learning modules covering every area of psychology commonly taught in introductory courses. This book can be modified: feel free to rearrange or remove modules to better suit your specific needs.Please note that the publisher requires you to login to access and download the textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBiswas-Diener, Roberteeditor1 aDiener, Edeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/228zAccess online version01948nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050001000149050000700159245003900166264004300205264005600248264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505024300481520041700724542004101141546001601182588004101198650002301239650002301262650002601285650003101311700003401342700002301376710003901399856007601438OTLid0000229MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH301 4aBF121 4aH100aPsychology as a Biological Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNobac[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPsychology as Science -- Biological Basis of Behavior -- Sensation and Perception -- Learning and Memory -- Cognition and Language -- Development -- Social -- Personality -- Emotions and Motivation -- Psychological Disorders -- Well-Being0 aThis textbook provides standard introduction to psychology course content with a specific emphasis on biological aspects of psychology. This includes more content related to neuroscience methods, the brain and the nervous system. This book can be modified: feel free to add or remove modules to better suit your specific needs. Please note that the publisher requires you to login to access and download the PDF.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBiswas-Diener, Roberteeditor1 aDiener, Edeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/229zAccess online version01761nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245003500137264004300172264005600215264001200271300002200283336002600305337002600331338003600357341002800393490002700421505023100448520042700679542004101106546001601147588004101163650002301204700003401227700002301261710003901284856007601323OTLid0000230MnU20260330020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH30100aPsychology as a Social Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNobac[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPsychology as Science -- Biological Basis of Behavior -- Sensation and Perception -- Cognition and Language -- Development -- Social Psychology -- Personality -- Emotions and Motivation -- Psychological Disorders -- Well-Being0 aThis textbook provides standard introduction to psychology course content with a specific emphasis on social aspects of psychology. This includes expanded content related to social cognition, aggression, attraction and similar topics. This book can be modified: feel free to add or remove modules to better suit your specific needs.Please note that the publisher requires you to login to access and download the textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBissau-Diener, Roberteeditor1 aDiener, Edeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/230zAccess online version03229nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245011700165264004300282264007000325264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002500517490002700542505036200569520172800931542001602659546001602675588004102691650003202732710003902764856007602803OTLid0000231MnU20260406020219.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aKann, Charles W.eauthor00aDigital Circuit ProjectsbAn Overview of Digital Circuits Through Implementing Integrated CircuitscCharles Kann 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGettysburg Collegec[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Before you start -- Chapter 2 Overview of a Central Processing -- Chapter 3 Getting started -- Chapter 4 Gates -- Chapter 5 Associative Boolean operators -- Chapter 6 Adders -- Chapter 7 Decoders -- Chapter 8 Multiplexers -- Chapter 9 Memory basics - flip-flops and latches -- Chapter 10 Sequential circuits -- Chapter 11 Use of these ICs in a CPU0 aDigital circuits, often called Integrated Circuits or ICs, are the central building blocks of a Central Processing Unit (CPU). To understand how a computer works, it is essential to understand the digital circuits which make up the CPU. This text introduces the most important of these digital circuits; adders, decoders, multiplexers, D flip-flops, and simple state machines. What makes this textbook unique is that it puts the ability to understand these circuits into the hands of anyone, from hobbyists to students studying Computer Science. This text is designed to teach digital circuits using simple projects the reader can implement. But unlike most lab manuals used in classes in Digital Circuits or Computer Organization classes, this textbook is designed to remove the barrier of a laboratory infrastructure needed in a face-to-face environment at a college or university. This textbook is designed to be used by the reader to create the circuits in their own homes. The textbook is free. The cost of the kits needed to do the labs is reasonable. And the projects are well documented and can be implemented by even novices to electronic projects. This text allows professors to add laboratory projects in digital circuits to students in online classes in Computer Organization. This enhances these classes with interesting and fun exercises that reinforce the classroom topics. This text can also be used by a hobbyist who wants to learn more about digital circuits and how computers work. The material is presented at a level that someone with no experience in digital circuits and electronics can successfully complete the projects, and gain an understanding of the circuits which go into making up a computer.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/231zAccess online version03640nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100003200158245007000190264004300260264006100303264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505076000541520172901301542004103030546001603071588004003087650003603127710003903163856007603202OTLid0000232MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341109  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aPriester, Thomas C.eauthor00aFoundations of Academic SuccessbWords of WisdomcThomas Priester 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Student Experience by Kristen Mruk -- Practice, Practice, Practice by Dr. Kristine Duffy -- Why So Many Questions? by Fatima Rodriguez Johnson -- These Are the Best Years of Your Life by Sara Vacin -- With a Little Help from My Friends by Paulo Fernandes -- Can You Listen to Yourself? by Yuki Sasao -- Failure Is Not an Option by Nathan Wallace -- Thinking Critically and Creatively by Dr. Andrew Robert Baker -- Time Is on Your Side by Christopher L. Hockey -- What Do You Enjoy Studying? by Dr. Patricia Munsch -- Fighting for My Future Now by Amie Bernstein -- Something Was Different by Jacqueline Tiermini -- Transferrable by Vicki L. Brown -- It's Like Online Dating by Jackie Vetrano -- Learn What You Don't Want by Jamie Edwards -- Conclusion0 aFoundations of Academic Success: Words of Wisdom (FAS: WoW) introduces you to the various aspects of student and academic life on campus and prepares you to thrive as a successful college student (since there is a difference between a college student and a successful college student). Each section of FAS: WoW is framed by self-authored, true-to-life short stories from actual State University of New York (SUNY) students, employees, and alumni. The advice they share includes a variety of techniques to help you cope with the demands of college. The lessons learned are meant to enlarge your awareness of self with respect to your academic and personal goals and assist you to gain the necessary skills to succeed in college. Foundations of Academic Success is an engaging, informational, and succinct read that connects the reader to personal essays about succeeding in college. The text allows the reader to see different perspectives of the shared experience of navigating higher education. As an adjunct lecturer teaching a course entitled “Learning to Learn,” I see the advice and life lessons discussed as both helpful and informative to many types of students. I believe that this book has a universal appeal for any classroom that is discussing the college life cycle, and would advocate using this text with students who seek out campus services, such as Career Services, Study Abroad, and Academic Advising. I also see this text applicable in the education of student leaders, peer mentors, and peer advocates at the undergraduate and graduate levels. This text goes beyond traditional Student Affairs and Student Development theories to connect the reader with real, honest, and understandable life lessons.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/232zAccess online version03078nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002700154245008000181264004300261264006100304264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002500487490002700512505063300539520130001172542004102472546001602513588004002529650003202569710003902601856007602640OTLid0000233MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341093  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSayama, Hirokieauthor00aIntroduction to the Modeling and Analysis of Complex SystemscHiroki Sayama 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Fundamentals of Modeling -- Basics of Dynamical Systems -- Discrete-Time Models I: Modeling -- Discrete-Time Models II: Analysis -- Continuous-Time Models I: Modeling -- Continuous-Time Models II: Analysis -- Bifurcations -- Chaos -- Interactive Simulation of Complex Systems -- Cellular Automata I: Modeling -- Cellular Automata II: Analysis -- Continuous Field Models I: Modeling -- Continuous Field Models II: Analysis -- Basics of Networks -- Dynamical Networks I: Modeling -- Dynamical Networks II: Analysis of Network Topologies -- Dynamical Networks III: Analysis of Network Dynamics -- Agent-Based Models0 aIntroduction to the Modeling and Analysis of Complex Systems introduces students to mathematical/computational modeling and analysis developed in the emerging interdisciplinary field of Complex Systems Science. Complex systems are systems made of a large number of microscopic components interacting with each other in nontrivial ways. Many real-world systems can be understood as complex systems, where critically important information resides in the relationships between the parts and not necessarily within the parts themselves. This textbook offers an accessible yet technically-oriented introduction to the modeling and analysis of complex systems. The topics covered include: fundamentals of modeling, basics of dynamical systems, discrete-time models, continuous-time models, bifurcations, chaos, cellular automata, continuous field models, static networks, dynamic networks, and agent-based models. Most of these topics are discussed in two chapters, one focusing on computational modeling and the other on mathematical analysis. This unique approach provides a comprehensive view of related concepts and techniques, and allows readers and instructors to flexibly choose relevant materials based on their objectives and needs. Python sample codes are provided for each modeling example.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/233zAccess online version02939nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002500154245007900179264004300258264008500301264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002800508490002700536505044600563520124601009542003002255546001602285588004102301650003202342700002702374700003702401710003902438856007602477OTLid0000234MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781312778986  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aFang, Yipingeauthor00aSpatial Thinking in Planning PracticebAn Introduction to GIScYiping Fang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Defining a Geographic Information System -- Chapter 2: Coordinate Systems and Projecting GIS Data -- Chapter 3: Topology and Creating Data -- Chapter 4: Mapping People with Census Data -- Chapter 5: Lying with Maps -- Chapter 6: To Standardize or Not to Standardize? -- Chapter 7: Geographic Considerations in Planning Practice. -- Chapter 8: Manipulating GIS Data -- Chapter 9: Raster Data Models -- Chapter 10: The Future of GIS0 aThe goals of this textbook are to help students acquire the technical skills of using software and managing a database, and develop research skills of collecting data, analyzing information and presenting results. We emphasize that the need to investigate the potential and practicality of GIS technologies in a typical planning setting and evaluate its possible applications. GIS may not be necessary (or useful) for every planning application, and we anticipate these readings to provide the necessary foundation for discerning its appropriate use. Therefore, this textbook attempts to facilitate spatial thinking focusing more on open-ended planning questions, which require judgment and exploration, while developing the analytical capacity for understanding a variety of local and regional planning challenges. While this textbook provides the background for understanding the concepts in GIS as applicable to urban and regional planning, it is best when accompanied by a hands-on tutorial, which will enable readers to develop an in-depth understanding of the specific planning applications of GIS. In the end of each chapter, we also provided several discussion questions, together with contextual applications through some web links.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aShandas, Vivekeauthor1 aCordero, Eugenio Arriagaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/234zAccess online version02388nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001100162050001000173100002800183245018400211264004300395264008500438264001200523300002200535336002600557337002600583338003600609341002800645490002700673505048700700520039501187542003001582546001601612588004101628650003301669650002501702650003701727650003601764700002701800710003901827856007601866OTLid0000235MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781312886872  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aLC9801 aSennott, Samueleauthor00aComprehensive Individualized Curriculum and Instructional DesignbCurriculum and Instruction for Students with Developmental Disabilities/Autism Spectrum DisorderscSamuel Sennott 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Guiding Principles for Developing Comprehensive and Meaningful Instruction for Individuals with Complex Needs -- Chapter 2: Naturalistic AAC Communication Intervention -- Chapter 3: Principles of Applied Behavior Analysis to Teach -- Chapter 4: Developing Function-based Interventions -- Chapter 5: iOS 8 Accessibility -- Chapter 6: Using Content Acquisition Podcasts (CAPs) to Improve Vocabulary Instruction and Learning for Students with Disabilities and Their Teachers0 aThis open textbook addresses the population of individuals with disabilities that experience complex lifelong needs across multiple areas in their lives. Drs. Sennott and Loman drafted this book (along with the help from some friends) with the hope of providing pertinent, practical, and current resources to future special educators who plan to serve individuals with complex disabilities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks1 aLoman, Sheldoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/235zAccess online version02648nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245003900179264004300218264008500261264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505091000523520057501433542003002008546001602038588004102054650003802095650002602133710003902159856007602198OTLid0000236MnU20260406020655.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781312554504  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKonomi, Emikoeauthor00aPreadvanced JapanesecEmiko Konomi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBefore We StartChapter 1Chapter 2Chapter 3Chapter 4 -- Audio: Chapter 1 -- Drills -- Example 4 - Self Introduction -- Example 5 -- Kanji Drill -- Listening Comprehension Check -- Listening Practice -- Main Text -- Opinions -- Audio: Chapter 2 -- Drill A -- Drill B -- Dill C -- Drill D -- Drill E -- Drill F -- Ex D -- Kanji Drill -- Listening Practice -- Main Text -- Moc Exam D -- Opinions -- Reading Comprehension Check -- Reference Advanced Level -- Audio: Chapter 3 -- Comprehension Check -- Drill A -- Drill B -- Drill C -- Drill D -- Drill E -- Drill F -- Ex C -- Kanji Drill -- Listening Practice -- Main Text -- Opinions -- Reference Graphs -- Audio: Chapter 4 -- Drill A -- Drill B -- Drill C -- Drill D -- Drill E -- Drill F -- Ex C -- Kanji Drill -- Listening Practice -- Main Text -- Opinion A -- Opinion B -- Opinion C -- Opinion D -- Opinion E -- Reading Comprehension Check -- Reference --0 aPreadvanced Japanese is designed for students who have intermediate competency in Japanese, roughly at Level 2 on the ILR (The Interagency Language Roundtable) proficiency scale, and are working on reaching Level 3.This textbook can be used for self-study, as part of online course, and in a traditional classroom setting. It is comprised of four chapters, intended to be covered in one term of a quarter system. Each chapter has Drills on expressions and grammar, Kanji Drills, and Listening Exercises. These activities are to be performed using the accompanying audio.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/236zAccess online version02875nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002600164245005900190264004300249264006100292264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505013900530520159300669542004102262546001602303588004002319650002702359710003902386856007602425OTLid0000237MnU20260406020228.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341161  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aKwong, Harriseauthor00aSpiral Workbook for Discrete MathematicscHarris Kwong 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 An Introduction -- 2 Logic -- 3 Proof Techniques -- 4 Sets -- 5 Basic Number Theory -- 6 Functions -- 7 Relations -- 8 Combinatorics0 aThis is a text that covers the standard topics in a sophomore-level course in discrete mathematics: logic, sets, proof techniques, basic number theory, functions, relations, and elementary combinatorics, with an emphasis on motivation. It explains and clarifies the unwritten conventions in mathematics, and guides the students through a detailed discussion on how a proof is revised from its draft to a final polished form. Hands-on exercises help students understand a concept soon after learning it. The text adopts a spiral approach: many topics are revisited multiple times, sometimes from a different perspective or at a higher level of complexity. The goal is to slowly develop students' problem-solving and writing skills.Open SUNY Textbooks is an open access textbook publishing initiative established by State University of New York libraries and supported by SUNY Innovative Instruction Technology Grants. This initiative publishes high-quality, cost-effective course resources by engaging faculty as authors and peer-reviewers, and libraries as publishing service and infrastructure. The pilot launched in 2012, providing an editorial framework and service to authors, students and faculty, and establishing a community of practice among libraries. Participating libraries in the 2012- 2013 pilot include SUNY Geneseo, College at Brockport, College of Environmental Science and Forestry, SUNY Fredonia, Upstate Medical University, and University at Buffalo, with support from other SUNY libraries and SUNY Press. More information can be found at http://textbooks.opensuny.org.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/237zAccess online version02768nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003200137245006200169264004300231264009600274264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505092100547520069901468542001602167546001602183588004002199650002902239700002302268710003902291856007602330OTLid0000238MnU20260406020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aHansen, Kathleen A.eauthor00aInformation Strategies for CommunicatorscKathleen Hansen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLesson 1. Personal / Professional Skills of Successful Communicators -- Lesson 2. Information Strategy Process and the Needs of Communicators -- Lesson 3. Question Analysis: From Assignment to Message -- Lesson 4. Question Analysis: Who's the Audience? -- Lesson 5. Question Analysis: What's the Topic? -- Lesson 6. Question Analysis: Who Contributes Information? -- Lesson 7. Question Analysis: What are the Ethical and Legal Considerations? -- Lesson 8. Research Skill: Searching -- Lesson 9. Research Skill: Interviewing -- Lesson 10. Research Skill: Evaluating Information -- Lesson 11. Research Skill: Managing and Synthesizing Information -- Lesson 12. Information Resources: Publications -- Lesson 13. Information Resources: Public Records -- Lesson 14. Information Resources: Data and Statistics -- Lesson 15. Information Resources: Polls and Surveys -- Lesson 16. Message Tasks: Applying What You've Learned0 aWritten by two nationally recognized experts in information strategy, Information Strategies for Communicators leads students step-by-step through the information search and evaluation process for news and strategic communication message production. The book includes a conceptual model of the information strategy process, case studies to illustrate the process in action, and links to current examples throughout. The definitive text for the information search and evaluation process as practiced by news and strategic communication message producers. Currently used at the University of Minnesota School of Journalism and Mass Communication; JOUR 3004W/V, Information for Mass Communication.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aPaul, Noraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/238zAccess online version07023nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001600142050001400158050001100172050000800183100002600191245004600217264004300263264006000306264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002500488490002700513505452900540520125405069542001606323546001606339588004006355650002306395650004106418650002706459710003906486856007606525OTLid0000239MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1938168372  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aAbramson, Jayeauthor00aAlgebra and Trigonometry 2ecJay Abramson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1. Prerequisites -- 1.1. Real Numbers: Algebra Essentials -- 1.2. Exponents and Scientific Notation -- 1.3. Radicals and Rational Exponents -- 1.4. Polynomials -- 1.5. Factoring Polynomials -- 1.6. Rational Expressions -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 2. Equations and Inequalities -- 2.1. The Rectangular Coordinate Systems and Graphs -- 2.2. Linear Equations in One Variable -- 2.3. Models and Applications -- 2.4. Complex Numbers -- 2.5. Quadratic Equations -- 2.6. Other Types of Equations -- 2.7. Linear Inequalities and Absolute Value Inequalities -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 3. Functions -- Introduction to Functions -- 3.1. Functions and Function Notation -- 3.2. Domain and Range -- 3.3. Rates of Change and Behavior of Graphs -- 3.4. Composition of Functions -- 3.5. Transformation of Functions -- 3.6. Absolute Value Functions -- 3.7. Inverse Functions -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 4. Linear Functions -- Introduction to Linear Functions -- 4.1. Linear Functions -- 4.2. Modeling with Linear Functionos -- 4.3. Fitting Linear Models to Data -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 5. Polynomial and Rational Functions -- Introduction to Polynomial and Rational Functions -- 5.1. Quadratic Functions -- 5.2. Power Functions and Polynomial Functions -- 5.3. Graphs of Polynomial Functions -- 5.4. Dividing Polynomials -- 5.5. Zeros of Polynomial Functions -- 5.6. Rational Functions -- 5.7. Inverses and Radical Functions -- 5.8. Modeling Using Variation -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 6. Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- Introduction to Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- 6.1. Exponential Functions -- 6.2. Graphs of Exponential Functions -- 6.3. Logarithmic Functions -- 6.4. Graphs of Logarithmic Functions -- 6.5. Logarithmic Properties -- 6.6. Exponential and Logarithmic Equations -- 6.7. Exponential and Logarithmic Models -- 6.8. Fitting Exponential Models to Data -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 7. The Unit Circle: Sine and Cosine Functions -- Introduction to The Unit Circle: Sine and Cosine Functions -- 7.1. Angles -- 7.2. Right Triangle Trigonometry -- 7.3. Unit Circle -- 7.4. The Other Trigonometric Functions -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 8. Periodic Functions -- Introduction to Periodic Functions -- 8.1 Graphs of the Sine and Cosine Functions -- 8.2 Graphs of the Other Trigonometric Functions -- 8.3 Inverse Trigonometric Functions -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 9. Trigonometric Identities and Equations -- Introduction to Trigonometric Identities and Equations -- 9.1 Verifying Trigonometric Identities and Using Trigonometric Identities to Simplify Trigonometric Expressions -- 9.2 Sum and Difference Identities -- 9.3 Double-Angle, Half-Angle, and Reduction Formulas -- 9.4 Sum-to-Product and Product-to-Sum Formulas -- 9.5 Solving Trigonometric Equations -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 10. Further Applications of Trigonometry -- Introduction to Further Applications of Trigonometry -- 10.1 Non-right Triangles: Law of Sines -- 10.2 Non-right Triangles: Law of Cosines -- 10.3 Polar Coordinates -- 10.4 Polar Coordinates: Graphs -- 10.5 Polar Form of Complex Numbers -- 10.6 Parametric Equations -- 10.7 Parametric Equations: Graphs -- 10.8 Vectors -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 11. Systems of Equations and Inequalities -- Introduction to Systems of Equations and Inequalities -- 11.1 Systems of Linear Equations: Two Variables -- 11.2 Systems of Linear Equations: Three Variables -- 11.3 Systems of Nonlinear Equations and Inequalities: Two Variables -- 11.4 Partial Fractions -- 11.5 Matrices and Matrix Operations -- 11.6 Solving Systems with Gaussian Elimination -- 11.7 Solving Systems with Inverses -- 11.8 Solving Systems with Cramer's Rule -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 12. Analytic Geometry -- Introduction to Analytic Geometry -- 12.1 The Ellipse -- 12.2 The Hyperbola -- 12.3 The Parabola -- 12.4 Rotation of Axes -- 12.5 Conic Sections in Polar Coordinates -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 13. Sequences, Probability, and Counting Theory -- Introduction to Sequences, Probability, and Counting Theory -- 13.1 Sequences and Their Notations -- 13.2 Arithmetic Sequences -- 13.3 Geometric Sequences -- 13.4 Series and Their Notations -- 13.5 Counting Principles -- 13.6 Binomial Theorem -- 13.7 Probability -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Appendix A. Proofs, Identities, and Toolkit Functions -- Answer Key -- Index --0 aAlgebra and Trigonometry 2e provides a comprehensive exploration of mathematical principles and meets scope and sequence requirements for a typical introductory algebra and trigonometry course. The modular approach and the richness of content ensure that the book addresses the needs of a variety of courses. Algebra and Trigonometry 2e offers a wealth of examples with detailed, conceptual explanations, building a strong foundation in the material before asking students to apply what they’ve learned. The Algebra and Trigonometry 2e revision focused on improving relevance and representation as well as mathematical clarity and accuracy. Introductory narratives, examples, and problems were reviewed and revised using a diversity, equity, and inclusion framework. Many contexts, scenarios, and images have been changed to become even more relevant to students’ lives and interests. To maintain our commitment to accuracy and precision, examples, exercises, and solutions were reviewed by multiple faculty experts. All improvement suggestions and errata updates from the first edition were considered and unified across the different formats of the text. The first edition of Algebra and Trigonometry by OpenStax is available in web view here.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/239zAccess online version05496nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002600180245003400206250000700240264004300247264006000290264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505313000524520119403654542001604848546001604864588004104880650002304921650002704944710003904971856007605010OTLid0000240MnU20260406020655.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693411  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aAbramson, Jayeauthor00aCollege AlgebracJay Abramson  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1. Prerequisites -- Introduction to Prerequisites -- 1.1 Real Numbers: Algebra Essentials -- 1.2 Exponents and Scientific Notation -- 1.3 Radicals and Rational Exponents -- 1.4 Polynomials -- 1.5 Factoring Polynomials -- 1.6 Rational -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 2. Equations and Inequalities -- Introduction to Equations and Inequalities -- 2.1 The Rectangular Coordinate Systems and Graphs -- 2.2 Linear Equations in One Variable -- 2.3 Models and Applications -- 2.4 Complex Numbers -- 2.5 Quadratic Equations -- 2.6 Other Types of Equations -- 2.7 Linear Inequalities and Absolute Value Inequalities -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 3. Functions -- Introduction to Functions -- 3.1 Functions and Function Notation -- 3.2 Domain and Range -- 3.3 Rates of Change and Behavior of Graphs -- 3.4 Composition of Functions -- 3.5 Transformation of Functions -- 3.6 Absolute Value Functions -- 3.7 Inverse Functions -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 4. Linear Functions -- Introduction to Linear Functions -- 4.1 Linear Functions -- 4.2 Modeling with Linear Functions -- 4.3 Fitting Linear Models to Data -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 5. Polynomial and Rational Functions -- Introduction to Polynomial and Rational Functions -- 5.1 Quadratic Functions -- 5.2 Power Functions and Polynomial Functions -- 5.3 Graphs of Polynomial Functions -- 5.4 Dividing Polynomials -- 5.5 Zeros of Polynomial Functions -- 5.6 Rational Functions -- 5.7 Inverses and Radical Functions -- 5.8 Modeling Using Variation -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 6. Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- Introduction to Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- 6.1 Exponential Functions -- 6.2 Graphs of Exponential Functions -- 6.3 Logarithmic Functions -- 6.4 Graphs of Logarithmic Functions -- 6.5 Logarithmic Properties -- 6.6 Exponential and Logarithmic Equations -- 6.7 Exponential and Logarithmic Models -- 6.8 Fitting Exponential Models to Data -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 7. Systems of Equations and Inequalities -- Introduction to Systems of Equations and Inequalities -- 7.1 Systems of Linear Equations: Two Variables -- 7.2 Systems of Linear Equations: Three Variables -- 7.3 Systems of Nonlinear Equations and Inequalities: Two Variables -- 7.4 Partial Fractions -- 7.5 Matrices and Matrix Operations -- 7.6 Solving Systems with Gaussian Elimination -- 7.7 Solving Systems with Inverses -- 7.8 Solving Systems with Cramer's Rule -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 8. Analytic Geometry -- Introduction to Analytic Geometry -- 8.1 The Ellipse -- 8.2 The Hyperbola -- 8.3 The Parabola -- 8.4 Rotation of Axes -- 8.5 Conic Sections in Polar Coordinates -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Chapter 9. Sequences, Probability, and Counting Theory -- Introduction to Sequences, Probability, and Counting Theory -- 9.1 Sequences and Their Notations -- 9.2 Arithmetic Sequences -- 9.3 Geometric Sequences -- 9.4 Series and Their Notations -- 9.5 Counting Principles -- 9.6 Binomial Theorem -- 9.7 Probability -- Chapter Review -- Exercises -- Answer Key -- Index --0 aCollege Algebra 2e provides a comprehensive exploration of algebraic principles and meets scope and sequence requirements for a typical introductory algebra course. The modular approach and richness of content ensure that the book addresses the needs of a variety of courses. College Algebra 2e offers a wealth of examples with detailed, conceptual explanations, building a strong foundation in the material before asking students to apply what they’ve learned. The College Algebra 2e revision focused on improving relevance and representation as well as mathematical clarity and accuracy. Introductory narratives, examples, and problems were reviewed and revised using a diversity, equity, and inclusion framework. Many contexts, scenarios, and images have been changed to become even more relevant to students’ lives and interests. To maintain our commitment to accuracy and precision, examples, exercises, and solutions were reviewed by multiple faculty experts. All improvement suggestions and errata updates from the first edition were considered and unified across the different formats of the text. The first edition of College Algebra by OpenStax is available in web view here.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/240zAccess online version02416nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001600142050001100158050000800169100002600177245002900203250000700232264004300239264005900282264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505023300515520097200748542001601720546001601736588004101752650002301793650002701816700003601843710003901879856007601918OTLid0000241MnU20260406020655.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1938168992  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aMarecek, Lynneauthor00aPrealgebracLynn Marecek  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2020. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Whole Numbers -- 2 The Language of Algebra -- 3 Integers -- 4 Fractions -- 5 Decimals -- 6 Percents -- 7 The Properties of Real Numbers -- 8 Solving Linear Equations -- 9 Math Models and Geometry -- 10 Polynomials -- 11 Graphs0 aPrealgebra 2e is designed to meet scope and sequence requirements for a one-semester prealgebra or basic math course. The book’s organization makes it easy to adapt to a variety of course syllabi. The text introduces the fundamental concepts of algebra while addressing the needs of students with diverse backgrounds and learning styles. Each topic builds upon previously developed material to demonstrate the cohesiveness and structure of mathematics. The second edition contains detailed updates and accuracy revisions to address comments and suggestions from users. Dozens of faculty experts worked through the text, exercises and problems, graphics, and and solutions to identify areas needing improvement. Though the authors made significant changes and enhancements, exercise and problem numbers remain nearly the same in order to ensure a smooth transition for faculty. The first edition of Prealgebra by OpenStax is available in web view in the ancillaries.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAnthony-Smith, MaryAnneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/241zAccess online version02052nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003000153245004000183264004300223264007900266264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505051100522520038801033542003901421546001601460588004101476650002001517650002601537710003901563856007601602OTLid0000242MnU20260406020349.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781616101664  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aMitchell, Charleseeditor00aTheatrical WorldscCharles Mitchell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity Press of Floridac[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Creating a World -- 1 Mapping Reality: An Introduction to Theatre -Charlie Mitchell and Michelle Hayford -- Part Two: Theatrical Production -- 2 Acting - Charlie Mitchell -- 3 Directing - Kevin Browne -- 4 Set Design - Mark E. Mallett -- 5 Costume Design - Stacey Galloway -- 6 Lighting Design - Kasendra Djuren -- Part Three: Special Topics -- 7 Genre - Jim Davis -- 8 The World of Shakespeare - Jeremy Fiebig -- 9 The American Musical - Margaret R. Butler -- 10 World Theatre - Michelle Hayford0 aFrom the University of Florida College of Fine Arts, Charlie Mitchell and distinguished colleagues from across America present an introductory text for theatre and theoretical production. This book seeks to give insight into the people and processes that create theater. It does not strip away the feeling of magic but to add wonder for the artistry that make a production work well.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/242zAccess online version03236nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100003300180245006500213250001900278264004300297264008500340264001200425300002200437336002600459337002600485338003600511341002500547490002700572505013600599520170600735542003002441546001602471588004102487650002402528650003502552650002702587700003302614700002802647710003902675856007602714OTLid0000243MnU20260406020707.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781365605529  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLafferriere, Beatrizeauthor00aIntroduction to Mathematical Analysis IcBeatriz Lafferriere  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Tools for Analysis -- 2 Sequences -- 3 Limits and Continuity -- 4 Differentiation -- 5 Solutions and Hints for Selected Exercises0 aOur goal with this textbook is to provide students with a strong foundation in mathematical analysis. Such a foundation is crucial for future study of deeper topics of analysis. Students should be familiar with most of the concepts presented here after completing the calculus sequence. However, these concepts will be reinforced through rigorous proofs. The lecture notes contain topics of real analysis usually covered in a 10-week course: the completeness axiom, sequences and convergence, continuity, and differentiation. The lecture notes also contain many well-selected exercises of various levels. Although these topics are written in a more abstract way compared with those available in some textbooks, teachers can choose to simplify them depending on the background of the students. For instance, rather than introducing the topology of the real line to students, related topological concepts can be replaced by more familiar concepts such as open and closed intervals. Some other topics such as lower and upper semicontinuity, differentiation of convex functions, and generalized differentiation of non-differentiable convex functions can be used as optional mathematical projects. In this way, the lecture notes are suitable for teaching students of different backgrounds. The second edition includes a number of improvements based on recommendations from students and colleagues and on our own experience teaching the course over the last several years. In this edition we streamlined the narrative in several sections, added more proofs, many examples worked out in detail, and numerous new exercises. In all we added over 50 examples in the main text and 100 exercises (counting parts).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aLafferriere, Gerardoeauthor1 aNguyen, Mau Nameauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/243zAccess online version04157nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002900167245008100196250000700277264004300284264006100327264001200388300002200400336002600422337002600448338003600474341002500510490002700535505114500562520181801707542001603525546001603541588004103557650002303598650002303621710003903644856007603683OTLid0000244MnU20260406020702.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780996150279  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aBergtrom, Geraldeauthor00aCell and Molecular BiologybWhat We Know & How We Found OutcGerald Bergtrom  a5e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMilwaukee, WIbUniversity of Wisconsin, Milwaukeec2023. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Cell Tour, Life’s Properties and Evolution, Studying Cells -- Chapter 2: Basic Chemistry, Organic Chemistry and Biochemistry -- Chapter 3: Details of Protein Structure -- Chapter 4: Bioenergetics -- Chapter 5: Enzyme Catalysis and Kinetics -- Chapter 6: Glycolysis, the Krebs Cycle and the Atkins Diet -- Chapter 7: Electron Transport, Oxidative Phosphorylation and Photosynthesis -- Chapter 8: DNA Structure, Chromosomes and Chromatin -- Chapter 9: Details of DNA Replication & DNA Repair -- Chapter 10: Transcription and RNA Processing -- Chapter 11: The Genetic Code and Translation -- Chapter 12: Regulation of Transcription and Epigenetic Inheritance -- Chapter 13: Posttranscriptional Regulation of Gene Expression -- Chapter 14: Repetitive DNA, A Eukaryotic Genomic Phenomenon -- Chapter 15: DNA Technologies -- Chapter 16: Membrane Structure -- Chapter 17: Membrane Function -- Chapter 18: The Cytoskeleton and Cell Motility -- Chapter 19: Cell Division and the Cell Cycle -- Chapter 20: The Origins of Life -- Epilouge -- Appendix I: List of Figures & Sources -- Appendix II: Context-Embedded Youtube Videos0 aCMB5e is the latest edition of an interactive Open Educational Resource (OER) electronic textbook (iText), available under a Creative Commons CC-BY license. Like earlier editions, CMB5e opens with a short history of the discipline and a discussion of scientific method. The book remains focused on the understanding of evolution that informs all of the life sciences and continues to provide experimental support for what we know about cell and molecular biology. Having a sense of how science is practiced and how investigators think about experimental results is essential to understanding the relationship of cell structure and function, not to mention the natural world around us. CMB5e is available in three versions (plus a sample chapter): In each chapter of the Basic CMB5e iText, an introduction includes learning objectives and context-embedded links to short explanatory voice-over PowerPoint recordings (VOPs) and other web-links of interest. QR codes allow the reader just-in-time access to the VOPs on smart phones or any camera-enabled portable device. The Annotated CMB5e adds pre-written, interactive context-embedded Challenge boxes to the Basic version of the book. These contain open-ended questions that expand on text readings. Any or all of them can be the basis of informal class and online discussion or as graded assignments. The Instructor’s CMB5e iText adds a series of 25 Words or Less essay questions that the author used as short (i.e., easy to grade!) writing assignments to strengthen student’s critical thinking and writing skills. A CMB5e Sample Chapter. The Art and Illustration Resource for Cell and Molecular Biology contains high resolution JPGs of figures in all CMB5 digital and print versions. JPGs are all public domain or CC-BY licensed (a source list is included).1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/244zAccess online version04518nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002800162245003200190264004300222264007100265264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505098800513520232901501542004103830546001603871588004103887650002403928650002703952700002603979710003904005856007604044OTLid0000245MnU20250801152837.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aTradler, Thomaseauthor00aPrecalculuscThomas Tradler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Functions and graphs -- 1 The absolute value -- 2 Lines and functions -- 3 Functions by formulas and graphs -- 4 Introduction to the TI-84 -- 5 Basic functions and transformations -- 6 Operations on functions -- 7 The inverse of a function -- II Polynomials and rational functions -- 8 Dividing polynomials -- 9 Graphing polynomials -- 10 Roots of polynomials -- 11 Rational functions -- 12 Polynomial and rational inequalities -- III Exponential and logarithmic functions -- 13 Exponential and logarithmic functions -- 14 Properties of exp and log -- 15 Applications of exp and log -- 16 Half-life and compound interest -- IV Trigonometric functions -- 17 Trigonometric functions -- 18 Addition of angles and multiple angles -- 19 Inverse trigonometric functions -- 20 Trigonometric equations -- V Complex numbers, sequences, and the binomial theorem -- 21 Complex numbers -- 22 Vectors in the plane -- 23 Sequences and series -- 24 The geometric series -- 25 The binomial theorem0 aThese are notes for a course in precalculus, as it is taught at New York City College of Technology - CUNY (where it is offered under the course number MAT 1375). Our approach is calculator based. For this, we will use the currently standard TI-84 calculator, and in particular, many of the examples will be explained and solved with it. However, we want to point out that there are also many other calculators that are suitable for the purpose of this course and many of these alternatives have similar functionalities as the calculator that we have chosen to use. An introduction to the TI-84 calculator together with the most common applications needed for this course is provided in appendix A. In the future we may expand on this by providing introductions to other calculators or computer algebra systems. This course in precalculus has the overarching theme of “functions.” This means that many of the often more algebraic topics studied in the previous courses are revisited under this new function theoretic point of view. However, in order to keep this text as self contained as possible we always recall all results that are necessary to follow the core of the course even if we assume that the student has familiarity with the formula or topic at hand. After a first introduction to the abstract notion of a function, we study polynomials, rational functions, exponential functions, logarithmic functions, and trigonometric functions with the function viewpoint. Throughout, we will always place particular importance to the corresponding graph of the discussed function which will be analyzed with the help of the TI-84 calculator as mentioned above. These are in fact the topics of the first four (of the five) parts of this precalculus course. In the fifth and last part of the book, we deviate from the above theme and collect more algebraically oriented topics that will be needed in calculus or other advanced mathematics courses or even other science courses. This part includes a discussion of the algebra of complex numbers (in particular complex numbers in polar form), the 2-dimensional real vector space R 2 sequences and series with focus on the arithmetic and geometric series (which are again examples of functions, though this is not emphasized), and finally the generalized binomial theorem.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aCarley, Hollyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/245zAccess online version03466nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002800167245008300195264004300278264006100321264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505065100559520161101210542004102821546001602862588004002878650002302918650002402941710003902965856007603004OTLid0000246MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341192  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aLowey, Susan E.eauthor00aNursing Care at the End of LifebWhat Every Clinician Should KnowcSusan Lowey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Anticipation -- 1. A Historical Overview of End-of-Life Care -- 2. Types and Variability within Illness Trajectories -- 3. Conceptual Frameworks Guiding Death & Dying -- 4. Models of Organized End-of-Life Care: Palliative Care vs. Hospice -- 5. Initiating Conversations about Goals of Care -- Part II. In the Moment -- 6. Management of Pain and Physical Symptoms -- 7. Management of Emotional and Spiritual Distress -- 8. Ethical Concerns in End-of-Life Care -- 9. Care at the Time of Death -- 10. Nurse–Patient–Family Communication -- Part III. Afterwards -- 11. Diversity in Dying: Death across Cultures -- 12. Grief and Bereavement0 aNursing Care at the End of Life: What Every Clinician Should Know should be an essential component of basic educational preparation for the professional registered nurse student. Recent studies show that only one in four nurses feel confident in caring for dying patients and their families and less than 2% of overall content in nursing textbooks is related to end-of-life care, despite the tremendous growth in palliative and end-of-life care programs across the country. The purpose of this textbook is to provide an indepth look at death and dying in this country, including the vital role of the nurse in assisting patients and families along the journey towards the end of life. There is an emphasis throughout the book on the simple, yet understated value of effective interpersonal communication between the patient and clinician. The text provides a basic foundation of understanding death and dying, including a brief historical examination of some main conceptual models associated with how patients cope with impending loss. An overview of illness trajectories and models of care, such as hospice and palliative care are discussed. Lastly, the latest evidence-based approaches for pain and symptom management, ethical concerns, cultural considerations, care at the time of death, and grief/bereavement are examined. The goal of this text is to foster the necessary skills for nurses to provide compassionate care to individuals who are nearing the end of life and their families. Every chapter contains a “What You Should Know” section which highlights and reinforces foundational concepts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/246zAccess online version03197nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156100002500169245006700194264004300261264006100304264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505045900542520150001001542004102501546001602542588004002558650002602598650002402624650003602648710003902684856007602723OTLid0000247MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341215  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aGuptill, Amyeauthor00aWriting In CollegebFrom Competence to ExcellencecAmy Guptill 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Really? Writing? Again? -- Chapter 2: What Does the Professor Want? Understanding the Assignment -- Chapter 3: Constructing the Thesis and Argument—From the Ground Up -- Chapter 4: Secondary Sources in Their Natural Habitats -- Chapter 5: Listening to Sources, Talking to Sources -- Chapter 6: Back to Basics: The Perfect Paragraph -- Chapter 7: Intros and Outros -- Chapter 8: Clarity and Concision -- Chapter 9: Getting the Mechanics Right0 aWriting in College is designed for students who have largely mastered high-school level conventions of formal academic writing and are now moving beyond the five-paragraph essay to more advanced engagement with text. It is well suited to composition courses or first-year seminars and valuable as a supplemental or recommended text in other writing-intensive classes. It provides a friendly, down-to-earth introduction to professors' goals and expectations, demystifying the norms of the academy and how they shape college writing assignments. Each of the nine chapters can be read separately, and each includes suggested exercises to bring the main messages to life. Students will find in Writing in College a warm invitation to join the academic community as novice scholars and to approach writing as a meaningful medium of thought and communication. With concise discussions, clear multidisciplinary examples, and empathy for the challenges of student life, Guptill conveys a welcoming tone. In addition, each chapter includes Student Voices: peer-to-peer wisdom from real SUNY Brockport students about their strategies for and experiences with college writing. While there are many affordable writing guides available, most focus only on sentence-level issues or, conversely, a broad introduction to making the transition. Writing In College, in contrast, provides both a coherent frame for approaching writing assignments and indispensable advice for effective organization and expression.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/247zAccess online version02463nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245003900179264004300218264005800261264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002500441490002700466505046600493520080100959542001601760546001601776588004001792650003801832650002601870700003001896700002401926710003901950856007601989OTLid0000248MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781937963040  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKelton, Kareneauthor00aFrançais interactifcKaren Kelton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aGlossary of Symbols : How to Use Français interactif -- Chapter 0 Bienvenue! -- Chapter 1 Bonjour! -- Chapter 2 Me voici! -- Chapter 3 Les vacances en France -- Chapter 4 Les gens -- Chapter 5 Bon appétit! -- Chapter 6 La ville -- Chapter 7 Les fêtes -- Chapter 8 La maison -- Chapter 9 Médias et communications -- Chapter 10 Mode, forme et santé -- Chapter 11 Les études -- Chapter 12 La vie professionnelle -- Chapter 13 L'amour et l'argent -- Glossaire0 aThis textbook of classroom activities and homework accompanies Français interactif. Français interactif, the web-based French program developed and in use at the University of Texas since 2004, and its companion site, Tex's French Grammar (2000)are open access sites, free and open multimedia resources, which require neither password nor fees. Français interactif, used increasingly by students, teachers, and institutions throughout the world, includes 320 videos (American students in France, native French interviews, vocabulary and culture presentation videos) recorded vocabulary lists, phonetic lessons, online grammar lessons (600 pages) with self-correcting exercises and audio dialogues, online grammar tools (verb conjugation reference, verb practice), and diagnostic grammar tests.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGuilloteau, Nancyeauthor1 aBlyth, Carleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/248zAccess online version02356nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003000153245003900183250001600222264004300238264005800281264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002500461490002700486505042300513520078300936542001601719546001601735588004001751650003801791650002601829710003901855856007601894OTLid0000249MnU20260406020248.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781937963019  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAbrams, Zsuzsannaeauthor00aDeutsch im BlickcZsuzsanna Abrams  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 0 Introduction -- Chapter 1 Ankunft In Würzburg -- Chapter 2 An Der Uni -- Chapter 3 Der Alltag Und Das Studentenleben -- Chapter 4 Freizeit Und Ausgehen -- Chapter 5 Familie, Feste Und Feiertage -- Chapter 6 Durch Deutschland Und Die Welt Reisen -- Chapter 7 Gesundheit Und Fitness -- Chapter 8 Das Traumleben: Beziehungen, Wohnen Und Die Karriere -- Chapter 9 Was Ist Deutsch? -- Chapter 10 Auf Nach Berlin!0 aThis textbook includes all 10 chapters of Deutsch im Blick. It accompanies http://coerll.utexas.edu/dib/, the web-based first-year German program developed and in use at the University of Texas since 2008, and its companion site, Grimm Grammar. Deutsch im Blick is an open access site with free and open multimedia resources, which requires neither password nor fees. Deutsch im Blick has been funded and created by Liberal Arts Instructional Technology Services at the University of Texas, and is currently supported by COERLL, the Center for Open Educational Resources and Language Learning UT-Austin, and the U.S. Department of Education Fund for the Improvement of Post-Secondary Education (FIPSE Grant P116B070251 & P116Y090057) as an example of the open access initiative.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/249zAccess online version02335nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003200153245004000185264004300225264005800268264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505058000503520060401083542003901687546001601726588004001742650003801782650002601820710003901846856007601885OTLid0000250MnU20260406020226.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781937963026  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMosadomi, Fehintolaeauthor00aYorùbá Yé MicFehintola Mosadomi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - Orí Kìíní -- Greetings -- Chapter 2 - Orí Kejì -- My Classroom -- Chapter 3 - Orí Kẹta -- Mark The Date -- Chapter 4 - Orí Kẹrin -- What Time Do We Meet? -- Chapter 5 - Orí Karùnún -- My Family Tree -- Chapter 6 - Orí Kẹfà -- Shop With -- Chapter 7 - Orí Keje -- Let's Find Something To Eat! -- Chapter 8 - Orí Kẹjọ -- Are You Feeling Good Today -- Chapter 9 - Orí Kẹsànán -- My Work Place -- Chapter 10 - Orí Kẹwàá -- Home Sweet Home! -- Chapter 11 - Orí Kọkànlá -- Nice Style! -- Chapter 12 - Orí Kejìlá -- Campus Life0 aThe Yorùbá Yé Mi textbook, combined with an open access, multi-media website at http://www.coerll.utexas.edu/yemi, is an interactive, communicative, introductory Yorùbá program. It provides college/university students with basic listening, speaking, reading, and writing skills of language learning in Yorùbá. It exposes the learner not only to Yorùbá language in meaningful situations but also to the culture of the Yorùbá-speaking people of South-western Nigeria. It contains effective techniques for teaching and learning Yorùbá including tones, and is user friendly in its approach.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/250zAccess online version03490nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245003800182264004300220264005800263264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002500443490002700468505177300495520059702268542001602865546001602881588004002897650003802937650002602975710003903001856007603040OTLid0000251MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781937963057  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKelm, Orlando R.eauthor00aConversa BrasileiracOrlando Kelm 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Animals 1: Dog Lovers 1 -- 2. Animals 2: Dog Lovers 2 -- 3. Travel 1: Hanging Out At Breakfast 1 -- 4. Travel 2: Hanging Out At Breakfast 2 -- 5. Hobbies I : Anne’s Almost 4 Months Old -- 6. Hobbies 2: Collecting Brazilian Musical Instruments -- 7. Relationships 1: It’s The Same Thing All Over Again -- 8. Relationships 2: Eloísa’s The Black Sheep Of The Family -- 9. Food 1: Kill Me Now, Or Feed Me Something Brazilian -- 10. Food 2: Brazilian “Churrasco” With A Capital Bbq! -- 11. Working Out 1: I'm Just Not Feeling It -- 12. Working Out 2: I Love Going To The Gym -- 13. Wedding 1: A Coisa Tava Chique! -- 14. Wedding: Mixing It Up. When Brazilians Marry Americans -- 15. Grandparents 1: Hopscotch And Marbles Or Polly Pocket? -- 16. Grandparents 2: Well Grandma, There Isan Easier Way To Do It -- 17. Moms In The Park 1: Don’t Cry. You’reok! -- 18. Moms In The Park 2: They Are Getting Along Really Well -- 19. School 1: I Have My Very Own Locker! -- 20. School 2: What Are You Doing About The Whole Lunch Thing? -- 21. Shopping 1: They’ll Love This With A Passion! -- 22. Shopping 2: It Looks Like Spun Gold, Doesn’t It? -- 23. Shopping 3: Capricha Lá! -- 24. Directions 1: Tô Perdido – I’m Lost -- 25. Directions 2: Moço, Dá Licença – I’m Lost -- 26. Traffic 1: Don’t Be Blaming Me On This! -- 27. Traffic 2: I Hate This Traffic! -- 28. Gossip 1: Ói, Que Safado! -- 29. Gossip 2: Vai Ser Uma Dupla Interessante -- 30. Soccer 1: Você Foi Muito Fominha Hoje! -- 31. Soccer 2: Ninguém Tira O Título Da Gente -- 32. Jam Session 1: Acabou Batendo Aqui Na Cabeça -- 33. Jam Session 2:Tem Que Agradar Todomundo, Né? -- 34. Studio 1: Behind The Scenes, Ói, Que Safado! -- 35. Studio 2: Behind The Scenes – Eu Também Acho0 aConversa Brasileira is an online open access site that contains a series of 35 video scenarios in which Brazilians talk about their daily activities, everything from hobbies to shopping, and from traffic jams to soccer games. These materials are designed to help intermediate- and advanced-level learners of Portuguese to analyze the way that Brazilians really talk and improve in their own proficiency and fluency. This textbook provides a hardcopy of all of the online materials, including the dialog transcriptions, English translations, and lesson notes that link to the original website.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/251zAccess online version02053nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002800180245003900208264004300247264006000290264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505019400524520063500718542004101353546001601394588004101410650002401451650002701475700002601502710003901528856007601567OTLid0000252MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168024  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStrang, Gilberteauthor00aCalculuscGilbert StrangnVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Functions and Graphs -- Chapter 2: Limits -- Chapter 3: Derivatives -- Chapter 4: Applications of Derivatives -- Chapter 5: Integration -- Chapter 6: Applications of Integrations0 aCalculus is designed for the typical two- or three-semester general calculus course, incorporating innovative features to enhance student learning. The book guides students through the core concepts of calculus and helps them understand how those concepts apply to their lives and the world around them. Due to the comprehensive nature of the material, we are offering the book in three volumes for flexibility and efficiency. Volume 1 covers functions, limits, derivatives, and integration. OpenStax College has compiled many resources for faculty and students, from faculty-only content to interactive homework and study guides.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aHerman, Edwineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/252zAccess online version02119nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245006300179264004300242264008500285264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505015400547520077900701542003001480546001601510588004001526650003801566650002601604710003901630856007601669OTLid0000254MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781329996779  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKonomi, Emikoeauthor00aBeginning Japanese for ProfessionalsbBook 1cEmiko Konomi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLesson 0 Greetings and Common Expressions -- Lesson 1 New to the Office -- Lesson 2 Meeting People -- Lesson 3 Settling down -- Lesson 4 Project Team0 aThis textbook is designed for beginning learners who want to learn basic Japanese for the purpose of living and working in Japan. Unlike textbooks written primarily for students, whose content largely centers on student life, this book focuses more on social and professional life beyond school. As a beginning level textbook, this book includes many elementary grammar patterns (Japanese Language Proficiency Test Levels 5 and 4), but the vocabulary and situations are selected specifically for working adults. Explanations are kept concise so as to only cover key points. The main focus is on oral communication and the accompanying audio is to be used extensively. This textbook can be used for self-study, as part of an online course, or as a traditional college course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/254zAccess online version02343nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245008900177264004300266264008500309264001200394300002200406336002600428337002600454338003600480341002500516490002700541505070000568520043501268542003001703546001601733588004101749650003801790650002601828710003901854856007601893OTLid0000255MnU20260406020227.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781329996694  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aGomaa, Linaeauthor00aFROM MSA to CAbA Beginner's Guide to Transitioning to Colloquial ArabiccLina Gomaa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 -- A: Transitioning to CA:Final voweling and greeting terms in MSA and CA -- B: Greetings and ending conversations -- C: Cultural insight: Ending a conversation in a culturally acceptable manner -- Chapter 2 -- A: Transitioning to CA: WH Question words in MSA and CA -- B: Requests -- C: Cultural insights: Giving directions -- Chapter 3 -- A: Transitioning to CA: Verb tenses -- B: Dialogues -- C: Cultural insights: Phone conversations and communicating among different age groups in the Arab world -- Chapter 4 -- A: Transitioning to CA: Negation in MSA vs CA -- B: Accepting and rejecting invitations -- C: Cultural insights: Tips on dealing with culturally sensitive situations --0 aThis book is for students who have studied Modern Standard Arabic (MSA) for one year or more and would like to learn colloquial Arabic basics using their knowledge of MSA. It aims at transitioning learners from Novice Mid level to Intermediate Low through presenting situations useful for living in an Arab country. The book has several features including hyperlinks, practice dialogues with open answers, cultural tips, and more.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/255zAccess online version03590nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002700146245003900173264004300212264006400255264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505059100496520188001087542001602967546001602983588004002999650003503039650002703074710003903101856007603140OTLid0000256MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aPfeiffer, Pauleauthor00aApplied ProbabilitycPaul Pfeiffer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface -- 2 Probability Systems -- 3 Minterm Analysis -- 4 Conditional Probability -- 5 Independence of Events -- 6 Conditional Independence -- 7 Random Variables and Probabilities -- 8 Distribution and Density Functions -- 9 Random Vectors and joint Distributions -- 10 Independent Classes of Random Variables -- 11 Functions of Random Variables -- 12 Mathematical Expectation -- 13 Variance, Covariance, Linear Regression -- 14 Transform Methods -- 15 Conditional Expectation, Regression -- 16 Random Selection -- 17 Conditional Independence, Given a Random Vector -- 18 Appendices0 aThis is a "first course" in the sense that it presumes no previous course in probability. The mathematical prerequisites are ordinary calculus and the elements of matrix algebra. A few standard series and integrals are used, and double integrals are evaluated as iterated integrals. The reader who can evaluate simple integrals can learn quickly from the examples how to deal with the iterated integrals used in the theory of expectation and conditional expectation. Appendix B provides a convenient compendium of mathematical facts used frequently in this work. And the symbolic toolbox, implementing MAPLE, may be used to evaluate integrals, if desired. In addition to an introduction to the essential features of basic probability in terms of a precise mathematical model, the work describes and employs user defined MATLAB procedures and functions (which we refer to as m-programs, or simply programs) to solve many important problems in basic probability. This should make the work useful as a stand-alone exposition as well as a supplement to any of several current textbooks. Most of the programs developed here were written in earlier versions of MATLAB, but have been revised slightly to make them quite compatible with MATLAB 7. In a few cases, alternate implementations are available in the Statistics Toolbox, but are implemented here directly from the basic MATLAB program, so that students need only that program (and the symbolic mathematics toolbox, if they desire its aid in evaluating integrals). Since machine methods require precise formulation of problems in appropriate mathematical form, it is necessary to provide some supplementary analytical material, principally the so-called minterm analysis. This material is not only important for computational purposes, but is also useful in displaying some of the structure of the relationships among events.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/256zAccess online version02972nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003700135245006200172264004300234264006400277264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505098200518520087701500542001602377546001602393588004002409650002002449650002602469710003902495856007602534OTLid0000257MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aSchmidt-Jones, Catherineeauthor00aUnderstanding Basic Music TheorycCatherine Schmidt-Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Notation -- 1.1 Pitch -- 1.2 Time -- 1.3 Style -- 2 Definitions -- 2.1 Rhythm -- 2.2 Timbre -- 2.3 Melody -- 2.4 Texture -- 2.5 Harmony -- 2.6 Counterpoint -- 2.7 Range -- 2.8 Classifying Music -- 3 The Physical Basis -- 3.1 Acoustics for Music Theory -- 3.2 Standing Waves and Musical Instruments -- 3.3 Harmonic Series I: Timbre and Octaves Solutions -- 4 Notes and Scales -- 4.1 Octaves and the Major-Minor Tonal System -- 4.2 Half Steps and Whole Steps -- 4.3 Major Keys and Scales -- 4.4 Minor Keys and Scales -- 4.5 Interval -- 4.6 Harmonic Series II: Harmonics, Intervals, and Instruments -- 4.7 The Circle of Fifths -- 4.8 Scales that aren't Major or Minor -- 5 Harmony and Form -- 5.1 Triads -- 5.2 Naming Triads -- 5.3 Consonance and Dissonance -- 5.4 Beyond Triads: Naming Other Chords -- 5.5 Beginning Harmonic Analysis -- 5.6 Cadence -- 5.7 Form -- 6 Challenges -- 6.1 Ear Training -- 6.2 Tuning Systems -- 6.3 Modes and Ragas -- 6.4 Transposition: Changing Keys0 aAlthough it is significantly expanded from "Introduction to Music Theory", this book still covers only the bare essentials of music theory. Music is a very large subject, and the advanced theory that students will want to pursue after mastering the basics will vary greatly. A trumpet player interested in jazz, a vocalist interested in early music, a pianist interested in classical composition, and a guitarist interested in world music, will all want to delve into very different facets of music theory; although, interestingly, if they all become very well-versed in their chosen fields, they will still end up very capable of understanding each other and cooperating in musical endeavors. The final section does include a few challenges that are generally not considered "beginner level" musicianship, but are very useful in just about every field and genre of music.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/257zAccess online version02189nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002400162245003500186264004300221264006400264264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505043900505520058100944542001601525546001601541588004001557650002301597650002701620700002901647710003901676856007601715OTLid0000260MnU20260406020742.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aEllis, Wadeeauthor00aElementary AlgebracWade Ellis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Arithmetic Review -- 2 Basic Properties of Real Numbers -- 3 Basic Operations with Real Numbers -- 4 Algebraic Expressions and Equations -- 5 Solving Linear Equations and Inequalities -- 6 Factoring Polynomials -- 7 Graphing Linear Equations and Inequalities in One and Two Variables -- 8 Rational Expressions -- 9 Roots, Radicals, and Square Root Equations -- 10 Quadratic Equations -- 11 Systems of Linear Equations -- 12 Appendix0 aElementary Algebra is a work text that covers the traditional topics studied in a modern elementary algebra course. Use of this book will help the student develop the insight and intuition necessary to master algebraic techniques and manipulative skills.Elementary Algebra is a work text that covers the traditional topics studied in a modern elementary algebra course. It is intended for students who (1) have no exposure to elementary algebra, (2) have previously had an unpleasant experience with elementary algebra, or (3) need to review algebraic concepts and techniques.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aBurzynski, Dennyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/260zAccess online version02561nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003000136245004600166264004300212264006400255264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505080300496520069301299542001601992546001602008588004002024650003202064710003902096856007602135OTLid0000261MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBurrus, C. Sidneyeauthor00aFast Fourier TransformscC. Sidney Burrus 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface: Fast Fourier Transforms -- 2 Introduction: Fast Fourier Transforms -- 3 Multidimensional Index Mapping -- 4 Polynomial Description of Signals -- 5 The DFT as Convolution or Filtering -- 6 Factoring the Signal Processing Operators -- 7 Winograd's Short DFT Algorithms -- 8 DFT and FFT: An Algebraic View -- 9 The Cooley-Tukey Fast Fourier Transform Algorithm -- 10 The Prime Factor and Winograd Fourier Transform Algorithms -- 11 Implementing FFTs in Practice -- 12 Algorithms for Data with Restrictions -- 13 Convolution Algorithms -- 14 Comments: Fast Fourier Transforms -- 15 Conclusions: Fast Fourier Transforms -- 16 Appendix 1: FFT Flowgraphs -- 17 Appendix 2: Operation Counts for General Length FFT -- 18 Appendix 3: FFT Computer Programs -- 19 Appendix 4: Programs for Short FFTs0 aThis book focuses on the discrete Fourier transform (DFT), discrete convolution, and, particularly, the fast algorithms to calculate them. These topics have been at the center of digital signal processing since its beginning, and new results in hardware, theory and applications continue to keep them important and exciting. This book uses an index map, a polynomial decomposition, an operator factorization, and a conversion to a filter to develop a very general and efficient description of fast algorithms to calculate the discrete Fourier transform (DFT). The work of Winograd is outlined, chapters by Selesnick, Pueschel, and Johnson are included, and computer programs are provided.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/261zAccess online version02156nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245005000182264004300232264005800275264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002500455490002700480505036200507520066200869542001601531546001601547588004001563650003801603650002601641710003901667856007601706OTLid0000262MnU20260406020821.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781937963064  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLuks, Joanna Gayeauthor03aLe Littéraire dans le quotidiencJoanna Luks 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1a. What's in a name? -- 1b. Comment?! -- 2. Un portrait chinois -- 3. Envie de voyager -- 4. Respect et verité -- 5. Un peu de hareng fume -- 6. La Ville et le graffiti -- 7. Fêtes et souvenirs -- 8. Sur le chemin du retour -- 9. La Technologie... -- 10. Il était une fois -- 11. Mais je digresse -- 12. Le Monde du travail -- 13. L'Amour (et la guerre)0 aLe Littéraire dans le quotidien is an open textbook for use in French courses. The Literary in the Everyday represents a new pedagogical approach to reading and writing at the lower levels and is applicable to all languages. Teachers of foreign languages besides French can read about the approach in the Teacher's Guide. Go to Google Drive for individual chapters. Additionally, the Foreign Languages & The Literary in the Everyday (FLLITE) Project, a joint initiative of COERLL and CERCLL, two national foreign language resource centers, offers open resources for professional development in the publication of CC licensed FLLITE lessons in any language.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/262zAccess online version03427nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001100152100002800163245008000191264004300271264006100314264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505056300552520162701115542004102742546001602783588004002799650002502839650002602864650002402890710003902914856007602953OTLid0000263MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341284  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aPE14081 aTombro, Melissaeauthor00aTeaching AutoethnographybPersonal Writing in the ClassroomcMelissa Tombro 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Understanding our Students' Relationship to “I” -- 2. Getting Started in the Classroom -- 3. Writing Essays for Class: The First Steps -- 4. Workshop and Peer Review Process -- 5. Memory/Character Essays -- 6. Writing about Spaces and Events -- 7. The Autoethnography Project -- 8. Choosing Topics for the Autoethnography -- 9. The Interview Process -- 10. Conducting Observations -- 11. Putting It All Together -- 12. Challenges of Personal Writing -- 13. Concluding Thoughts -- 14. Sample Class Schedule -- 15. Additional Readings on Autoethnography0 aTeaching Autoethnography: Personal Writing in the Classroom is dedicated to the practice of immersive ethnographic and autoethnographic writing that encourages authors to participate in the communities about which they write. This book draws not only on critical qualitative inquiry methods such as interview and observation, but also on theories and sensibilities from creative writing and performance studies, which encourage self-reflection and narrative composition. Concepts from qualitative inquiry studies, which examine everyday life, are combined with approaches to the creation of character and scene to help writers develop engaging narratives that examine chosen subcultures and the author's position in relation to her research subjects. The book brings together a brief history of first-person qualitative research and writing from the past forty years, examining the evolution of nonfiction and qualitative approaches in relation to the personal essay. A selection of recent student writing in the genre as well as reflective student essays on the experience of conducting research in the classroom is presented in the context of exercises for coursework and beyond. Also explored in detail are guidelines for interviewing and identifying subjects and techniques for creating informed sketches and images that engage the reader. This book provides approaches anyone can use to explore their communities and write about them first-hand. The methods presented can be used for a single assignment in a larger course or to guide an entire semester through many levels and varieties of informed personal writing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/263zAccess online version02650nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001200156050000900168100003400177245011200211264004300323264006100366264001200427300002200439336002600461337002600487338003600513341002800549490002700577505054600604520075501150542004101905546001601946588004001962650002402002650002502026650003302051700002902084710003902113856007602152OTLid0000264MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341253  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHB171.5 4aJA711 aJimenez, Guillermo C.eauthor00aGood Corporation, Bad CorporationbCorporate Social Responsibility in the Global EconomycGuillermo Jimenez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Corporations and their Social Responsibility -- Chapter 2 Debating CSR: Methods and Strategies -- Chapter 3 Global Warming -- Chapter 4 Genetically Modified Organisms -- Chapter 5 Social Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 6 Marketing Ethics: Selling Controversial Products -- Chapter 7 Organic Food: Healthy Alternative or Marketing Ploy? -- Chapter 8 Fair Trade -- Chapter 9 CSR and Sweatshops -- Chapter 10 Corruption in International Business -- Chapter 11 Corporations and Politics: Citizens United -- Chapter 12 Animal Rights and CSR0 aThis textbook provides an innovative, internationally oriented approach to the teaching of corporate social responsibility (CSR) and business ethics. Drawing on case studies involving companies and countries around the world, the textbook explores the social, ethical, and business dynamics underlying CSR in such areas as global warming, genetically modified organisms (GMO) in food production, free trade and fair trade, anti-sweatshop and living-wage movements, organic foods and textiles, ethical marketing practices and codes, corporate speech and lobbying, and social enterprise. The book is designed to encourage students and instructors to challenge their own assumptions and prejudices by stimulating a class debate based on each case study.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aPulos, Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/264zAccess online version03625nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001100152050001100163050001000174100003100184245009700215264004300312264006100355264001200416300002200428336002600450337002600476338003600502341002800538490002700566505104400593520118201637542004102819546001602860588004002876650002502916650003702941650002602978650002403004650003603028710003903064856007603103OTLid0000265MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341222  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aPE1408 4aLC9801 aMunger, Kristen A.eeditor00aSteps to SuccessbCrossing the Bridge Between Literacy Research and PracticecKristen Munger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. A Brief Introduction to Literacy -- 2. Key Ideas for Evaluating Scientifically-Based Approaches to Literacy Instruction -- 3. Word Recognition Skills: One of Two Essential Components of Reading Comprehension -- 4. Language Comprehension Ability: One of Two Essential Components of Reading Comprehension -- 5. Types of Literacy Assessment: Principles, Procedures, and Applications -- 6. Approaches to Writing Instruction in Elementary Classrooms -- 7. Influence of the Digital Age on Children's Literature and Its Use in the Classroom -- 8. Helping English Language Learners Develop Literacy Skills and Succeed Academically -- 9. Literacy Instruction for Students with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities -- 10. Twenty-First Century Perspectives on Adolescent Literacy and Instruction -- 11. Teaching as a Writer—Assigning as a Reader -- 12. Culturally Responsive Disciplinary Literacy Strategies Instruction -- 13. World Language and Literacy Learning -- 14. Teacher Discourses and Identities: Understanding Your Teaching Self0 aSteps to Success: Crossing the Bridge Between Literacy Research and Practice introduces instructional strategies linked to the most current research-supported practices in the field of literacy. The book includes chapters related to scientifically-based literacy research, early literacy development, literacy assessment, digital age influences on children's literature, literacy development in underserved student groups, secondary literacy instructional strategies, literacy and modern language, and critical discourse analysis. Chapters are written by authors with expertise in both college teaching and the delivery of research-supported literacy practices in schools. The book features detailed explanations of a wide variety of literacy strategies that can be implemented by both beginning and expert practitioners. Readers will gain knowledge about topics frequently covered in college literacy courses, along with guided practice for applying this knowledge in their future or current classrooms. The book's success-oriented framework helps guide educators toward improving their own practices and is designed to foster the literacy development of students of all ages.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/265zAccess online version05201nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002900135245008000164264004300244264007300287264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505324900537520081303786542001604599546001604615588004104631650002604672650002604698710003904724856007604763OTLid0000266MnU20260406020228.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aDrabkin, Douglaseauthor04aThe Intelligent Troglodyte’s Guide to Plato’s RepubliccDouglas Drabkin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBook I -- 1 A Religious Festival in the Piraeus -- 2 Being Old -- 3 Treasure for Heaven -- 4 Giving What is Owed -- 5 The Craft of Justice -- 6 Benefiting Friends and Harming Enemies -- 7 The Advantage of the Stronger -- 8 The Good Shepherd -- 9 The Blushing Argument -- 10 Function, Virtue, and the Soul -- Book II -- 11 The Division of Goods -- 12 The Social Contract Theory of Justice -- 13 The Magic Ring -- 14 The Challenge -- 15 The Teaching of Justice -- 16 Glaucon's Lover -- 17 From Souls to Cities -- 18 Making the Most of Differences -- 19 Luxuries in the Just City -- 20 The Good Soldier -- 21 Censoring Homer -- 22 Gods Causing Bad Things -- 23 Gods in Disguise or Speaking Falsely -- Book III -- 24 Fear and Grief -- 25 Laughter and Lying -- 26 Lust, Wrath, and Greed -- 27 Narrative Style and Personal Integrity -- 28 The Emotional Power of Tune and Rhythm -- 29 Love of the Fine and Beautiful -- 30 Physical Training -- 31 Doctors and Judges -- 32 Harmony in the Soul -- 33 Rulers -- 34 The Myth of the Metals -- 35 Private Property and Private Interests -- Book IV -- 36 The City as a Whole -- 37 Lawfulness Internalized, Legislation Minimized -- 38 Wisdom in the City -- 39 Courage in the City -- 40 Temperance in the City -- 41 Justice in the City -- 42 Parts of the Soul ¬¬ Appetitive and Rational -- 43 The Spirited Part of the Soul -- 44 The Virtues of the Soul -- 45 Injustice is Sick -- Book V -- 46 A Desire to Listen -- 47 The Natures of Men and Women -- 48 Good Breeding -- 49 Families and the Saying of “Mine” and “Not Mine” -- 50 The Waging of War -- 51 Philosophers and Knowledge of the Forms -- Book VI -- 52 The Virtues of the Philosopher -- 53 Philosophical Perspective and the Fear of Death -- 54 The Uselessness of Philosophers -- 55 Gifted Students and the Sophists -- 56 Putting Knowledge of the Forms to Use -- 57 The Form of the Good -- 58 Every Soul Pursues the Good -- 59 The Sun -- 60 Degrees of Clarity (The Line) -- Book VII -- 61 The Cave -- 62 Two Kinds of Confusion -- 63 The Craft of Education -- 64 Compulsory Service for Philosophers -- 65 Numbers as Summoners -- 66 Further Mathematical Studies -- 67 Dialectic -- 68 Selecting Students for Philosophy -- 69 Abuses of Refutation -- 70 Completing the Education of the Rulers -- 71 Establishing Justice -- Book VIII -- 72 The Fall of the Aristocratic City -- 73 The Timocratic City -- 74 The Timocratic Soul -- 75 The Oligarchic City -- 76 The Oligarchic Soul -- 77 The Democratic City -- 78 The Democratic Soul -- 79 The Tyrannical City -- Book IX -- 80 Lawless Desires -- 81 The Right Way to Fall Asleep -- 82 The Tyrannical Soul -- 83 The First Proof: Analogy of City and Soul -- 84 The Second Proof: Who's to Say? -- 85 The Third Proof: True Pleasures -- 86 How Much More Unpleasant is the Tyrannical Life? -- 87 An Emblem of the Soul -- 88 Will the Just Person Take Part in Politics? -- Book X -- 89 Return to Poetry -- 90 First Accusation: Imitation in Ignorance -- 91 Second Accusation: Injustice Promoted in the Soul -- 92 A Call to Poetry's Defenders -- 93 An Argument for the Soul's Immortality -- 94 The Soul Without Barnacles -- 95 Rewards from Gods and Human Beings -- 96 Suffering, Philosophy, and the Choice of a Lifetime0 aThe Republic of Plato is one of the classic gateway texts into the study and practice of philosophy, and it is just the sort of book that has been able to arrest and redirect lives. How it has been able to do this, and whether or not it will be able to do this in your own case, is something you can only discover for yourself. The present guidebook aims to help a person get fairly deep, fairly quickly, into the project. It divides the dialogue into 96 sections and provides commentary on each section as well as questions for reflection and exploration. It is organized with a table of contents and is stitched together with a system of navigating bookmarks. Links to external sites such as the Perseus Classical Library are used throughout. This book is suitable for college courses or independent study.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/266zAccess online version01756nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001100134100002800145245010900173264004300282264009600325264001200421300002200433336002600455337002600481338003600507341002800543490002700571505026000598520025000858542001601108546001601124588004001140650002501180650002601205650002401231710003901255856007601294OTLid0000267MnU20260406020658.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aPE14081 aButurian, Lindaeauthor04aThe Changing Storybdigital stories that participate in transforming teaching & learningcLinda Buturian 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: What is Digital Storytelling? -- Chapter 2: Types of Digital Stories -- Chapter 3: Scaffolding Exercises -- Chapter 4: Assessment and Evaluation -- Chapter 5: “We are the Battery Human” -- Chapter 6: Learning Through Stories0 aThe Changing Story gives you assignments, resources, and examples to use in your teaching and learning. It will also help you think of ways digital stories can be used in your teaching, and help students harness the power of visual storytelling.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/267zAccess online version03551nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002900163245006700192264004300259264005500302264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505083500534520153101369542004102900546001602941588004002957650003002997650002303027710003903050856007603089OTLid0000268MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2004    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780870710247  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aYeats, Robert S.eauthor00aLiving with Earthquakes in the Pacific NorthwestcRobert Yeats 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2004] 4c©2004.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Part I: Introduction -- II. Part II: Tectonic Plates, Geologic Time, and Earthquakes -- 1. A Concept of Time -- 2. Plate Tectonics -- 3. Earthquake Basics -- 4. Cascadia Subduction Zone -- 5. Earthquakes in the Juan de Fuca Plate -- 6. Earthquakes in the Crust: Closer to Home -- 7. Memories of the Future: The Uncertain Art of Earthquake Forecasting -- III. Part III: Shaky Ground and Big Waves -- 8. Solid Rock and Bowls of Jello -- 9. Tsunami! -- IV. Part IV: Prevention and Countermeasures -- 10. Earthquake Insurance: Betting Against Earthquakes -- 11. Is Your Home Ready for an Earthquake? -- 12. Earthquake Design of Large Structures -- 13. The Federal Government and Earthquakes -- 14. The Role of State and Local Government -- 15. Preparing for the Next Earthquake -- 16. An Uncertain Appointment with a Restless Earth0 aIn this expanded new edition of Living with Earthquakes, Robert Yeats, a leading authority on earthquakes in California and the Pacific Northwest, describes the threat posed by the Cascadia Subduction Zone, a great earthquake fault which runs for hundreds of miles offshore from British Columbia to northern California. New research reveals subtle movements on the deepest part of this fault every 14-15 months — building up strain toward the next major earthquake. Combining cutting-edge research with practical safety information, Living with Earthquakes: • introduces new information about the danger from faults beneath major Northwest cities: the Seattle Fault, Tacoma Fault, and Portland Hills Fault• explores such topics as earthquake forecasting, catastrophe insurance, tsunamis, soil liquefaction, and seismic waves in Northwest lakes caused by Alaskan earthquakes• reviews earthquake preparedness and disaster response in the aftermath of the 2001 Nisqually earthquake, the worst natural disaster in Washington's history• suggests actions that citizens can take to protect their families and homesAn essential guide for anyone interested in understanding earthquake science or in preparing for the next earthquake, this book is also a call to action. Vivid descriptions of recent disasters — including the great tsunami that swept down the Northwest coast in 1964, the 1993 Oregon earthquakes, and the 2001 Nisqually earthquake — underscore the urgent need for better earthquake planning and awareness.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/268zAccess online version02368nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245003500161264004300196264006000239264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002800421490002700449505074900476520057601225542001601801546001601817588004001833650003001873710003901903856007601942OTLid0000269MnU20260406020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aEarle, Steveneauthor00aPhysical GeologycSteven Earle 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Introduction to Geology -- Chapter 2 Minerals -- Chapter 3 Intrusive Igneous Rocks -- Chapter 4 Volcanism -- Chapter 5 Weathering and Soil -- Chapter 6 Sediments and Sedimentary Rocks -- Chapter 7 Metamorphism and Metamorphic Rocks -- Chapter 8 Measuring Geological Time -- Chapter 9 Earth's Interior -- Chapter 10 Plate Tectonics -- Chapter 11 Earthquakes -- Chapter 12 Geological structures -- Chapter 13 Streams and Floods -- Chapter 14 Groundwater -- Chapter 15 Mass Wasting -- Chapter 16 Glaciation -- Chapter 17 Shorelines -- Chapter 18 Geology of the Oceans -- Chapter 19 Climate Change -- Chapter 20 Geological Resources -- Chapter 21 Geological History of Western Canada -- Chapter 22 The Origin of Earth and the Solar System0 aPhysical Geology is a comprehensive introductory text on the physical aspects of geology, including rocks and minerals, plate tectonics, earthquakes, volcanoes, glaciation, groundwater, streams, coasts, mass wasting, climate change, planetary geology and much more. It has a strong emphasis on examples from western Canada, especially British Columbia, and also includes a chapter devoted to the geological history of western Canada. The book is a collaboration of faculty from Earth Science departments at Universities and Colleges across British Columbia and elsewhere.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/269zAccess online version03662nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000900139050000700148100003000155245004200185264004300227264005300270264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505060800500520181501108542003902923546001602962588004002978650002503018650003303043650003103076700003003107710003903137856007603176OTLid0000270MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aJA71 4aH11 aAnderies, John M.eauthor00aSustaining the CommonscJohn Anderies 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTempe, ArizonabArizona State Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI THEORETICAL BACKGROUND -- 1 Why Study the Commons? -- 2 Defining Institutions -- 3 Action Arenas and Action Situations -- 4 Social Dilemmas -- II CASE STUDIES -- 5 Water Governance -- 6 Harvesting From the Commons -- 7 Design Principles to Sustain the Commons -- III HUMAN BEHAVIOR -- 8 Social Dilemmas in the Laboratory -- 9 Self-governance in the Laboratory -- IV RULES OF THE GAMES -- 10 Classifying Rules -- 11 Rules, Norms and Shared Strategies -- V A SYSTEMS PERSPECTIVE -- 12 Feedbacks and Stability -- 13 Coupled Infrastructure Systems -- 14 Think Globally, Act Locally? -- 15 Challenges Ahead0 aThis textbook discusses the main framework, concepts and applications of the work of Elinor Ostrom and her colleagues for an undergraduate audience. We began teaching a course on collective and the commons in 2007 at Arizona State University. Initially we made use of Ostrom's classic book “Governing the Commons”, but this book was not written for an undergraduate audience. Moreover, many new insights have been developed since the 1990 publication of “Governing the Commons”. Therefore we decided to write our own textbook, which we have been using since the Spring of 2012. In this book you will learn about institutions–the rules and norms that guide the interactions among us. Those rules and norms can be found from traffic rules, rules in sports, regulations on when and where alcohol can be consumed, to constitutional rules that define who can become president of the United States of America. Rules and norms guide us to cooperative outcomes of so-called collective action problems. If we rely on voluntary contributions only to get anything done, this may not lead to the best results. But research also shows that coercion of people to comply to strict rules do not necessary lead to good outcomes. What combination of sticks and carrots is needed to be successful to solve collective action problems such as sustaining the commons? The book is based on the work of Elinor Ostrom and her colleagues. Ostrom is best known as the 2009 co-recipient of the Nobel Prize in Economics “for her analysis of economic governance, especially the commons”. Elinor Ostrom was a professor at Indiana University since the mid 1960s, and a part-time research professor at Arizona State University since 2006. She was active in research and teaching until her death at the age of 78 on June 12, 2012.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aJanssen, Marco A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/270zAccess online version01836nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001100148245003700159264004300196264006100239264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002800422490002700450505044400477520024400921542004101165546001601206588004001222650002401262650002301286650002601309710003901335856007601374OTLid0000271MnU20260406020234.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG173 4aHD30.402aA Primer on Sustainable Business 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2020. 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aA Background in Sustainability -- Licensing -- Chapter 1: Operations Management -- Chapter 2: Human Resources -- Chapter 3: Finance -- Chapter 4: Research and Development -- Chapter 5: Marketing -- Chapter 6: IT and MIS -- Chapter 7: Accounting -- Chapter 8: Next Steps: Sustainability Strategy -- Chapter 9: Sustainable Business: Case Examples -- Appendix: Resources for the Sustainable Business -- Index -- Glossary -- Detailed Licensing0 aGoing green, green business, and sustainable business are topics on everyone’s mind. But what does all this mean exactly? A Primer on Sustainable Business answers that question and provides an introduction to the basics you need to know.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/271zAccess online version02873nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002800138245004900166264004300215264006900258264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505118300504520059901687542004102286546001602327588004102343650002402384710003902408856007602447OTLid0000272MnU20260406020411.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aBrusseau, Jameseauthor04aThe Business Ethics WorkshopcJames Brusseau 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What Is Business Ethics? -- Chapter 2: Theories of Duties and Rights: Traditional Tools for Making Decisions in Business When the Means Justify the Ends -- Chapter 3: Theories of Consequence Ethics: Traditional Tools for Making Decisions in Business when the Ends Justify the Means -- Chapter 4: Theories Responding to the Challenge of Cultural Relativism -- Chapter 5: Employee's Ethics: What's the Right Job for Me? -- Chapter 6: Employee's Ethics: Getting a Job, Getting a Promotion, Leaving -- Chapter 7: Employee's Ethics: Making the Best of the Job You Have as You Get from 9 to 5 -- Chapter 8: Manager's Ethics: Getting, Promoting, and Firing Workers -- Chapter 9: Manager's Ethics: Deciding on a Corporate Culture and Making It Work -- Chapter 10: The Tense Office: Discrimination, Victimization, and Affirmative Action -- Chapter 11: The Aroused Office: Sex and Drugs at Work -- Chapter 12: The Selling Office: Advertising and Consumer Protection -- Chapter 13: The Responsible Office: Corporations and Social Responsibility -- Chapter 14: The Green Office: Economics and the Environment -- Chapter 15: The Domination Office: The Star System and Labor Unions0 aEthics is about determining value; it's deciding what's worth doing and what doesn't matter so much.Business ethics is the way we decide what kind of career to pursue, what choices we make on the job,which companies we want to work with, and what kind of economic world we want to live in and thenleave behind for those coming after. There are no perfect answers to these questions, but there's adifference between thinking them through and winging it. The Business Ethics Workshop provides aframework for identifying, analyzing, and resolving ethical dilemmas encountered through working life.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/272zAccess online version04862nam a2200517 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000900138050001000147050001000157050001100167050001000178050001300188100002300201245005400224264004300278264006900321264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505237700567520092602944542004103870546001603911588004103927650002403968650002503992650003404017650002804051650002804079650003404107650002804141700003004169700003004199710003904229856007604268OTLid0000273MnU20260406020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aBusiness Law and the Legal EnvironmentcDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter 9: The Agreement -- Chapter 10: Real Assent -- Chapter 11: Consideration -- Chapter 12: Legality -- Chapter 13: Form and Meaning -- Chapter 14: Third-Party Rights -- Chapter 15: Discharge of Obligations -- Chapter 16: Remedies -- Chapter 17: Introduction to Sales and Leases -- Chapter 18: Title and Risk of Loss -- Chapter 19: Performance and Remedies -- Chapter 20: Products Liability -- Chapter 21: Bailments and the Storage, Shipment, and Leasing of Goods -- Chapter 22: Nature and Form of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 23: Negotiation of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 24: Holder in Due Course and Defenses -- Chapter 25: Liability and Discharge -- Chapter 26: Legal Aspects of Banking -- Chapter 27: Consumer Credit Transactions -- Chapter 28: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 29: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 30: Bankruptcy -- Chapter 31: Introduction to Property: Personal Property and Fixtures -- Chapter 32: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 33: The Nature and Regulation of Real Estate and the Environment -- Chapter 34: The Transfer of Real Estate by Sale -- Chapter 35: Landlord and Tenant Law -- Chapter 36: Estate Planning: Wills, Estates, and Trusts -- Chapter 37: Insurance -- Chapter 38: Relationships between Principal and Agent -- Chapter 39: Liability of Principal and Agent; Termination of Agency -- Chapter 40: Partnerships: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 41: Partnership Operation and Termination -- Chapter 42: Hybrid Business Forms -- Chapter 43: Corporation: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 44: Legal Aspects of Corporate Finance -- Chapter 45: Corporate Powers and Management -- Chapter 46: Securities Regulation -- Chapter 47: Corporate Expansion, State and Federal Regulation of Foreign Corporations, and Corporate Dissolution -- Chapter 48: Antitrust Law -- Chapter 49: Unfair Trade Practices and the Federal Trade Commission -- Chapter 50: Employment Law -- Chapter 51: Labor-Management Relations -- Chapter 52: International Law -- Chapter 53: Contracts0 aOur goal is to provide students with a textbook that is up to date and comprehensive in its coverage of legal and regulatory issues—and organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. This book engages students by relating law to everyday events with which they are already familiar (or with which they are familiarizing themselves in other business courses) and by its clear, concise, and readable style. (An earlier business law text by authors Lieberman and Siedel was hailed “the best written text in a very crowded field.”) This textbook provides context and essential concepts across the entire range of legal issues with which managers and business executives must grapple. The text provides the vocabulary and legal acumen necessary for businesspeople to talk in an educated way to their customers, employees, suppliers, government officials—and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aWarner, Daniel M.eauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/273zAccess online version02593nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245007900155264004300234264009600277264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505070000550520075201250542004102002546001602043588004002059650002902099710003902128856007602167OTLid0000274MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135070  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.300aCommunication in the Real World - An Introduction to Communication Studies 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Communication Studies -- Chapter 2: Communication and Perception -- Chapter 3: Verbal Communication -- Chapter 4: Nonverbal Communication -- Chapter 5: Listening -- Chapter 6: Interpersonal Communication Processes -- Chapter 7: Communication in Relationships -- Chapter 8: Culture and Communication -- Chapter 9: Preparing a Speech -- Chapter 10: Delivering a Speech -- Chapter 11: Informative and Persuasive Speaking -- Chapter 12: Public Speaking in Various Contexts -- Chapter 13: Small Group Communication -- Chapter 14: Leadership, Roles, and Problem Solving in Groups -- Chapter 15: Media, Technology, and Communication -- Chapter 16: New Media and Communication0 aCommunication in the Real World: An Introduction to Communication Studies overviews the time-tested conceptual foundations of the field, while incorporating the latest research and cutting-edge applications of these basics. Each chapter will include timely, concrete, and real-life examples of communication concepts in action. A key feature of this book is the integration of content regarding diversity and organizational communication in each chapter through examples and/or discrete sub-sections. Discussions of diversity are not relegated to feature boxes. Also integrated into the content are examples that are inclusive in terms of race, gender, sexuality, ability, age, marital status, religion, and other diverse identity characteristics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/274zAccess online version02757nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100002700178245006100205264004300266264006900309264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505038700555520107700942542004102019546001602060588004102076650002402117650002602141650002502167700002802192710003902220856007602259OTLid0000275MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343623  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aHF54151 aUrbany, Joe E.eauthor00aGrowth and Competitive Strategy in 3 CirclescJoe Urbany 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Challenges of Growth -- Chapter 2: Introduction to 3-Circle Analysis -- Chapter 3: Defining the Context -- Chapter 4: The Meaning of Value -- Chapter 5: Sorting Value -- Chapter 6: Growth Strategy -- Chapter 7: Implementation: An Inside View of the Organization -- Chapter 8: Dynamic Aspects of Markets -- Chapter 9: Summary: Growth Strategy in 10 Steps -- References0 aThe 3-Circle model was developed over the past several years, initially in strategic planning for a university graduate program and in an executive MBA course designed to integrate the concepts of marketing and competitive strategy. Over the course of time, the 3-Circle model has been successfully used by hundreds of organizations throughout the world in establishing and growing their market positions. Many of the case examples in this book demonstrating applications of the 3-Circle model applications are from executives who have attended executive education training at the University of Notre Dame. The development of competitive strategy is difficult because there are a lot of moving parts, as well as hundreds of frameworks, that might potentially guide the effort. Executives appreciate how the 3-Circle model simplifies the integration of customer, firm, and competitor analysis to generate growth strategies. It also provides a common language and process for understanding and explaining competitive advantage and for identifying profitable growth strategy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aDavis, James H.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/275zAccess online version03974nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000900139100002900148245006400177264004300241264006900284264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505139600530520140301926542004103329546001603370588004103386650002503427650003303452710003903485856007603524OTLid0000276MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aJA711 aSuranovic, Steveeauthor00aInternational EconomicsbTheory and PolicycSteve Suranovic 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Introductory Trade Issues: History, Institutions, and Legal Framework -- Chapter 2: The Ricardian Theory of Comparative Advantage -- Chapter 3: The Pure Exchange Model of Trade -- Chapter 4: Factor Mobility and Income Redistribution -- Chapter 5: The Heckscher-Ohlin (Factor Proportions) Model -- Chapter 6: Economies of Scale and International Trade -- Chapter 7: Trade Policy Effects with Perfectly Competitive Markets -- Chapter 8: Domestic Policies and International Trade -- Chapter 9: Trade Policies with Market Imperfections and Distortions -- Chapter 10: Political Economy and International Trade -- Chapter 11: Evaluating the Controversy between Free Trade and Protectionism -- Chapter 12: Introductory Finance Issues: Current Patterns, Past History, and International Institutions -- Chapter 13: National Income and the Balance of Payments Accounts -- Chapter 14: The Whole Truth about Trade Imbalances -- Chapter 15: Foreign Exchange Markets and Rates of Return -- Chapter 16: Interest Rate Parity -- Chapter 17: Purchasing Power Parity -- Chapter 18: Interest Rate Determination -- Chapter 19: National Output Determination -- Chapter 20: The AA-DD Model -- Chapter 21: Policy Effects with Floating Exchange Rates -- Chapter 22: Fixed Exchange Rates -- Chapter 23: Policy Effects with Fixed Exchange Rates -- Chapter 24: Fixed versus Floating Exchange Rates0 aThis text strives to reach a median between these two approaches. First, I believe that students need to learn the theory and models to understand how economists understand the world. I also think these ideas are accessible to most students if they are explained thoroughly. This text presents numerous models in some detail, not by employing advanced mathematics, but rather by walking students through a detailed description of how a model's assumptions influence its conclusions. Second, and perhaps more important, students must learn how the models connect with the real world. I believe that theory is done primarily to guide policy. We do positive economics to help answer the normative questions; for example, what should a country do about its trade policy or its exchange rate policy? The results from models give us insights that help us answer these questions. Thus this text strives to explain why each model is interesting by connecting its results to some aspect of a current policy issue. A prime example is found in Chapter 11 "Evaluating the Controversy between Free Trade and Protectionism" of this book, which addresses the age-old question of whether countries should choose free trade or some type of selected protection. The chapter demonstrates how the results of the various models presented throughout the text contribute to our understanding of this long-standing debate.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/276zAccess online version03549nam a2200541 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001100195050001300206100002300219245007000242264004300312264006900355264001200424300002200436336002600458337002600484338003600510341002800546490002700574505087500601520102101476542004102497546001602538588004102554650002402595650003402619650002502653650003402678650002802712650002802740650003402768700002702802700003002829700003302859710003902892856007602931OTLid0000277MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343265  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aIntroduction to Contracts, Sales and Product LiabilitycDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter 9: The Agreement -- Chapter 10: Real Assent -- Chapter 11: Consideration -- Chapter 12: Legality -- Chapter 13: Form and Meaning -- Chapter 14: Third-Party Rights -- Chapter 15: Discharge of Obligations -- Chapter 16: Remedies -- Chapter 17: Introduction to Sales and Leases -- Chapter 18: Title and Risk of Loss -- Chapter 19: Performance and Remedies -- Chapter 20: Products Liability -- Chapter 21: Bailments and the Storage, Shipment, and Leasing of Goods -- Chapter 22: Secured Transactions and Suretyship0 aThis textbook provides context and essential concepts across the entire range of legal issues with whichmanagers and business executives must grapple. The text provides the vocabulary and legal acumennecessary for businesspeople to talk in an educated way to their customers, employees, suppliers,government officials—and to their own lawyers. Traditional publishers often create confusion among customers in the text selection process by offering ahuge array of publications. Once a text is selected, customers might still have to customize the text to meettheir needs. For example, publishers usually offer books that include either case summaries or excerptedcases, but some instructors prefer to combine case summaries with a few excerpted cases so that studentscan experience reading original material. Likewise, the manner in which most conventional textsincorporate video is cumbersome because the videos are contained in a separate library, which makesaccess more complicating for instructors and students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/277zAccess online version03551nam a2200565 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001100195050001000206050001300216100002300229245008200252264004300334264006900377264001200446300002200458336002600480337002600506338003600532341002800568490002700596505086500623520095901488542004102447546001602488588004102504650002402545650003402569650002502603650003402628650002802662650002802690650003402718650002802752700002702780700003002807700003302837710003902870856007602909OTLid0000278MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453344163  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aIntroduction to the Law of Property, Estate Planning and InsurancecDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Contracts -- Chapter 9: Introduction to Property: Personal Property and Fixtures -- Chapter 10: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 11: The Nature and Regulation of Real Estate and the Environment -- Chapter 12: The Transfer of Real Estate by Sale -- Chapter 13: Landlord and Tenant Law -- Chapter 14: Estate Planning: Wills, Estates, and Trusts -- Chapter 15: Insurance -- Chapter 16: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 17: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 18: Bailments and the Storage, Shipment, and Leasing of Goods0 aIntroduction to the Law of Property, Estate Planning and Insurance is an up-to-date textbook that covers legal issues that students must understand relating to real estate (an especially important business asset), as well as estate planning and insurance. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with their clear, concise and readable style. After introductory chapters covering the legal environment of business, Introduction to the Law of Property, Estate Planning and Insurance provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to property rights and duties, estate planning, insurance, secured transactions, mortgages, and related topics. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy they will need when working with these concepts, which are critical to business planning and success.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/278zAccess online version04210nam a2200565 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001100195050001000206050001300216100002300229245003700252264004300289264006900332264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505160200578520092602180542004103106546001603147588004103163650002403204650003403228650002503262650003403287650002803321650002803349650003403377650002803411700002703439700003003466700003303496710003903529856007603568OTLid0000279MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453344170  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aLaw for EntrepreneurscDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter 9: The Agreement -- Chapter 10: Real Assent -- Chapter 11: Consideration -- Chapter 12: Legality -- Chapter 13: Form and Meaning -- Chapter 14: Third-Party Rights -- Chapter 15: Discharge of Obligations -- Chapter 16: Remedies -- Chapter 17: Products Liability -- Chapter 18: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 19: Insurance -- Chapter 20: Relationships between Principal and Agent -- Chapter 21: Liability of Principal and Agent; Termination of Agency -- Chapter 22: Partnerships: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 23: Partnership Operation and Termination -- Chapter 24: Hybrid Business Forms -- Chapter 25: Corporation: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 26: Legal Aspects of Corporate Finance -- Chapter 27: Corporate Powers and Management -- Chapter 28: Securities Regulation -- Chapter 29: Corporate Expansion, State and Federal Regulation of Foreign Corporations, and Corporate Dissolution -- Chapter 30: Employment Law -- Chapter 31: Labor-Management Relations -- Chapter 32: Consumer Credit Transactions -- Chapter 33: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 34: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 35: Bankruptcy -- Chapter 36: Introduction to Property: Personal Property and Fixtures0 aLaw for Entrepreneurs is an up-to-date textbook that covers the broad spectrum of legal issues that entrepreneurs must understand when starting and running a business. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with their clear, concise and readable style. After introductory chapters covering the legal environment of business, Law for Entrepreneurs provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to contracts, product liability, intellectual property, insurance, agency law, partnerships, corporations, and employment law. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy that entrepreneurs need to talk in an educated way to customers, suppliers, employees, creditors, shareholders, government regulators and other stakeholders — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/279zAccess online version03708nam a2200541 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001100195050001300206100002300219245004600242264004300288264006900331264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002800522490002700550505122000577520085901797542004102656546001602697588004102713650002402754650003402778650002502812650003402837650002802871650002802899650003402927700002702961700003002988700003303018710003903051856007603090OTLid0000280MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343302  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aLaw of Commercial TransactionscDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter 9: The Agreement -- Chapter 10: Real Assent -- Chapter 11: Consideration -- Chapter 12: Legality -- Chapter 13: Form and Meaning -- Chapter 14: Third-Party Rights -- Chapter 15: Discharge of Obligations -- Chapter 16: Remedies -- Chapter 17: Introduction to Sales and Leases -- Chapter 18: Title and Risk of Loss -- Chapter 19: Performance and Remedies -- Chapter 20: Products Liability -- Chapter 21: Bailments and the Storage, Shipment, and Leasing of Goods -- Chapter 22: Nature and Form of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 23: Negotiation of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 24: Holder in Due Course and Defenses -- Chapter 25: Liability and Discharge -- Chapter 26: Legal Aspects of Banking -- Chapter 27: Consumer Credit Transactions -- Chapter 28: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 29: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 30: Bankruptcy0 aLaw of Commercial Transactions is an up-to-date textbook that covers legal issues that students who engage in commercial transactions must understand. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with their clear, concise and readable style. After introductory chapters covering the legal environment of business, Law of Commercial Transactions provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to key commercial transactions topics: contracts, sales, commercial paper, debtors and creditors. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy students will need to talk in an educated way to customers, suppliers, creditors, government regulators and other stakeholders — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/280zAccess online version03997nam a2200589 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001000195050001100205050001000216050001300226100002300239245006500262264004300327264006900370264001200439300002200451336002600473337002600499338003600525341002800561490002700589505133000616520090001946542004102846546001602887588004102903650002402944650003402968650002503002650002303027650003403050650002803084650002803112650003403140650002803174700002703202700003003229700003303259710003903292856007603331OTLid0000281MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343258  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aHG173 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aLegal Aspects of Corporate Management and FinancecDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Contracts -- Chapter 9: Relationships between Principal and Agent -- Chapter 10: Liability of Principal and Agent; Termination of Agency -- Chapter 11: Partnerships: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 12: Partnership Operation and Termination -- Chapter 13: Hybrid Business Forms -- Chapter 14: Corporation: General Characteristics and Formation -- Chapter 15: Legal Aspects of Corporate Finance -- Chapter 16: Corporate Powers and Management -- Chapter 17: Securities Regulation -- Chapter 18: Corporate Expansion, State and Federal Regulation of Foreign Corporations, and Corporate Dissolution -- Chapter 19: Nature and Form of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 20: Negotiation of Commercial Paper -- Chapter 21: Holder in Due Course and Defenses -- Chapter 22: Liability and Discharge -- Chapter 23: Legal Aspects of Banking -- Chapter 24: Consumer Credit Transactions -- Chapter 25: Secured Transactions and Suretyship -- Chapter 26: Mortgages and Nonconsensual Liens -- Chapter 27: Bankruptcy0 aLegal Aspects of Corporate Management and Finance is an up-to-date textbook that covers key legal issues relating to corporate management and finance. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with their clear, concise and readable style. After introductory chapters covering the legal environment of business, Legal Aspects of Corporate Management and Finance provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to contracts, agency law, partnerships, corporations, commercial paper, debtors and creditors. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy students will need to talk in an educated way to customers, suppliers, employees, creditors, shareholders, government regulators and other stakeholders — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/281zAccess online version03592nam a2200589 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050000900166050001000175050001000185050001100195050001100206050001000217050001300227100002300240245005200263264004300315264006900358264001200427300002200439336002600461337002600487338003600513341002800549490002700577505096100604520087401565542004102439546001602480588004102496650002402537650003402561650002502595650003402620650002802654650002802682650002502710650003402735650002802769700002702797700003002824700003302854710003902887856007602926OTLid0000282MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781453343289  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aHF5415 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aMayer, Doneauthor00aLegal Aspects of Marketing and SalescDon Mayer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- Chapter 2: Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- Chapter 3: Courts and the Legal Process -- Chapter 4: Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- Chapter 5: Administrative Law -- Chapter 6: Criminal Law -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Tort Law -- Chapter 8: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter 9: The Agreement -- Chapter 10: Real Assent -- Chapter 11: Consideration -- Chapter 12: Legality -- Chapter 13: Form and Meaning -- Chapter 14: Third-Party Rights -- Chapter 15: Discharge of Obligations -- Chapter 16: Remedies -- Chapter 17: Introduction to Sales and Leases -- Chapter 18: Title and Risk of Loss -- Chapter 19: Performance and Remedies -- Chapter 20: Products Liability -- Chapter 21: Bailments and the Storage, Shipment, and Leasing of Goods -- Chapter 22: Intellectual Property -- Chapter 23: Antitrust Law -- Chapter 24: Unfair Trade Practices and the Federal Trade Commission0 aLegal Aspects of Marketing and Sales is an up-to-date textbook that covers legal issues that students who will work in marketing or with marketing managers must understand. The text is organized to permit instructors to tailor the materials to their particular approach. The authors take special care to engage students by relating law to everyday events with their clear, concise and readable style. After introductory chapters covering the legal environment of business, Legal Aspects of Marketing and Sales provides students with context and essential legal concepts relating to contracts, sales, intellectual property, antitrust law and unfair trade practices. The text provides the vocabulary and legal savvy they will need to talk in an educated way to customers, suppliers, shareholders, government regulators and other stakeholders — and to their own lawyers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aWarner, Danieleauthor1 aSiedel, George J.eauthor1 aLieberman, Jethro K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/282zAccess online version03146nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001200153100003000165245004200195264004300237264006100280264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505061600518520133501134542004102469546001602510588004002526650002002566650002602586650002102612710003902633856007602672OTLid0000283MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341208  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aSarrazin, Natalieeauthor00aMusic and the ChildcNatalie Sarrazin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Perspectives and Approaches -- Chapter 2: Music: Fundamentals and Educational Roots in the U.S. -- Chapter 3: Assessment and Learning Goals -- Chapter 4: Approaches to Music Education -- Chapter 5: Children Singing and Children's Songs -- Chapter 6: Creative Activity and Lesson Planning -- Chapter 7: Music and the Brain -- Chapter 8: Music in Early Childhood Development -- Chapter 9: Music and the Older Child -- Chapter 10: Children's Musical Play: Musicality and Creativity -- Chapter 11: Music and Inclusion -- Chapter 12: Music Integration -- Chapter 13: Musical Multiculturalism and Diversity0 aChildren are inherently musical. They respond to music and learn through music. Music expresses children's identity and heritage, teaches them to belong to a culture, and develops their cognitive well-being and inner self worth. As professional instructors, childcare workers, or students looking forward to a career working with children, we should continuously search for ways to tap into children's natural reservoir of enthusiasm for singing, moving and experimenting with instruments. But how, you might ask? What music is appropriate for the children I'm working with? How can music help inspire a well-rounded child? How do I reach and teach children musically? Most importantly perhaps, how can I incorporate music into a curriculum that marginalizes the arts? This book explores a holistic, artistic, and integrated approach to understanding the developmental connections between music and children. This book guides professionals to work through music, harnessing the processes that underlie music learning, and outlining developmentally appropriate methods to understand the role of music in children's lives through play, games, creativity, and movement. Additionally, the book explores ways of applying music-making to benefit the whole child, i.e., socially, emotionally, physically, cognitively, and linguistically.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/283zAccess online version02666nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100003000151245005100181264004300232264005000275264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505067100502520080801173542004101981546001602022588004102038650002602079650002402105650003602129710003902165856007602204OTLid0000284MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2007    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aKrause, Steven D.eauthor04aThe Process of Research WritingcSteven Krause 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aYpsilanti, MichiganbSteven D. Krausec[2007] 4c©2007.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter One: Thinking Critically About Research -- Chapter Two: Understanding and Using the Library and the Internet for Research -- Chapter Three: Quoting, Paraphrasing, and Avoiding Plagiarism -- Chapter Four: How to Collaborate and Write With Others -- Chapter Five: The Working Thesis Exercise -- Chapter Six: The Annotated Bibliography Exercise -- Chapter Seven: The Critique Exercise -- Chapter Eight: The Antithesis Exercise -- Chapter Nine: The Categorization and Evaluation Exercise -- Chapter Ten: The Research Essay -- Chapter Eleven: Alternative Ways to Present Your Research -- Chapter Twelve: Citing Your Research Using MLA or APA Style0 aThe title of this book is The Process of Research Writing, and in the nutshell, that is what the book is about. A lot of times, instructors and students tend to separate “thinking,” “researching,” and “writing” into different categories that aren't necessarily very well connected. First you think, then you research, and then you write.The reality is though that the possibilities and process of research writing are more complicated and much richer than that. We think about what it is we want to research and write about, but at the same time, we learn what to think based on our research and our writing. The goal of this book is to guide you through this process of research writing by emphasizing a series of exercises that touch on different and related parts of the research process.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/284zAccess online version02554nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002800163245007100191250000700262264004300269264006600312264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002500500490002700525505047600552520080901028542004101837546001601878588004001894650003201934650003701966700002602003710003902029856007602068OTLid0000285MnU20260406020824.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781491929568  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aMayfield, Chriseauthor00aThink JavabHow To Think Like a Computer ScientistcChris Mayfield  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Computer Programming -- 2 Variables and Operators -- 3 Input and output -- 4 Methods and Testing -- 5 Conditionals and logic -- 6 Loops and Strings -- 7 Arrays and References -- 8 Recursive Methods -- 9 Immutable Objects -- 10 Mutable Objects -- 11 Designing Classes -- 12 Arrays of Objects -- 13 Objects of Arrays -- 14 Extending Classes -- 15 Arrays of Arrays -- 16 Reusing Classes -- 17 Advanced Topics -- A Tools -- B Javadoc -- C Graphics -- D Debugging0 aThink Java is a hands-on introduction to computer science and programming used by many universities and high schools around the world. Its conciseness, emphasis on vocabulary, and informal tone make it particularly appealing for readers with little or no experience. The book starts with the most basic programming concepts and gradually works its way to advanced object-oriented techniques. In this fully updated and expanded edition, authors Allen Downey and Chris Mayfield introduce programming as a means for solving interesting problems. Each chapter presents material for one week of a college course and includes exercises to help you practice what you’ve learned. Along the way, you’ll see nearly every topic required for the AP Computer Science A exam and Java SE Programmer I certification.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aDowney, Alleneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/285zAccess online version02184nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002900154245007400183250000700257264004300264264006700307264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002500496490002700521505039100548520063800939542003001577546001601607588004001623650003201663710003901695856007601734OTLid0000287MnU20260406020701.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781491907337  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aThink StatsbProbability and Statistics for ProgrammerscAllen Downey  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Exploratory data analysis -- 2 Distributions -- 3 Probability mass functions -- 4 Cumulative distribution functions -- 5 Modeling distributions -- 6 Probability density functions -- 7 Relationships between variables -- 8 Estimation -- 9 Hypothesis testing -- 10 Linear least squares -- 11 Regression -- 12 Time series analysis -- 13 Survival analysis -- 14 Analytic methods0 aThink Stats is an introduction to Probability and Statistics for Python programmers. Think Stats emphasizes simple techniques you can use to explore real data sets and answer interesting questions. The book presents a case study using data from the National Institutes of Health. Readers are encouraged to work on a project with real datasets. If you have basic skills in Python, you can use them to learn concepts in probability and statistics. Think Stats is based on a Python library for probability distributions (PMFs and CDFs). Many of the exercises use short programs to run experiments and help readers develop understanding.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/287zAccess online version02473nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002900154245006300183264004300246264006700289264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002500478490002700503505035300530520099500883542003001878546001601908588004001924650003201964710003901996856007602035OTLid0000288MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781449370787  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aThink BayesbBayesian Statistics Made SimplecAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Bayes's Theorem -- 2 Computational Statistics -- 3 Estimation -- 4 More Estimation -- 5 Odds and Addends -- 6 Decision Analysis -- 7 Prediction -- 8 Observer Bias -- 9 Two Dimensions -- 10 Approximate Bayesian Computation -- 11 Hypothesis Testing -- 12 Evidence -- 13 Simulation -- 14 A Hierarchical Model -- 15 Dealing with Dimensions0 aThink Bayes is an introduction to Bayesian statistics using computational methods. The premise of this book, and the other books in the Think X series, is that if you know how to program, you can use that skill to learn other topics. Most books on Bayesian statistics use mathematical notation and present ideas in terms of mathematical concepts like calculus. This book uses Python code instead of math, and discrete approximations instead of continuous mathematics. As a result, what would be an integral in a math book becomes a summation, and most operations on probability distributions are simple loops. I think this presentation is easier to understand, at least for people with programming skills. It is also more general, because when we make modeling decisions, we can choose the most appropriate model without worrying too much about whether the model lends itself to conventional analysis. Also, it provides a smooth development path from simple examples to real-world problems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/288zAccess online version02719nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002900154245007700183250000700260264004300267264006700310264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002500499490002700524505030100551520124900852542004102101546001602142588004002158650003202198710003902230856007602269OTLid0000289MnU20260406020702.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781492040200  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aThink ComplexitybExploring Complexity Science with PythoncAllen Downey  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Complexity Science -- Graphs -- Small World Graphs -- Scale-free networks -- Cellular Automatons -- Game of Life -- Physical modeling -- Self-organized criticality -- Agent-based models -- Herds, Flocks and Traffic Jams -- Evolution -- Evolution of cooperation -- Reading List -- Index0 aComplexity science uses computation to explore the physical and social sciences. In Think Complexity, you'll use graphs, cellular automata, and agent-based models to study topics in physics, biology, and economics. Whether you're an intermediate-level Python programmer or a student of computational modeling, you'll delve into examples of complex systems through a series of worked examples, exercises, case studies, and easy-to-understand explanations. In this updated second edition, you will: Work with NumPy arrays and SciPy methods, including basic signal processing and Fast Fourier Transform Study abstract models of complex physical systems, including power laws, fractals and pink noise, and Turing machines Get Jupyter notebooks filled with starter code and solutions to help you re-implement and extend original experiments in complexity; and models of computation like Turmites, Turing machines, and cellular automata Explore the philosophy of science, including the nature of scientific laws, theory choice, and realism and instrumentalism Ideal as a text for a course on computational modeling in Python, Think Complexity also helps self-learners gain valuable experience with topics and ideas they might not encounter otherwise.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/289zAccess online version01886nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002900154245006500183264004300248264006700291264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002500480490002700505505028800532520047100820542003001291546001601321588004001337650003201377710003901409856007601448OTLid0000290MnU20260406020700.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781491938454  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aThink DSPbDigital Signal Processing in PythoncAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Sounds and signals -- 2 Harmonics -- 3 Non-periodic signals -- 4 Noise -- 5 Autocorrelation -- 6 Discrete Cosine Transform -- 7 Discrete Fourier Transform -- 8 Filtering and Convolution -- 9 Differentiation and Integration -- 10 LTI systems -- 11 Modulation and sampling0 aThink DSP is an introduction to Digital Signal Processing in Python. The premise of this book (and the other books in the Think X series) is that if you know how to program, you can use that skill to learn other things. The author is writing this book because he thinks the conventional approach to digital signal processing is backward: most books (and the classes that use them) present the material bottom-up, starting with mathematical abstractions like phasors.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/290zAccess online version02967nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050000800146100002600154245003700180264004300217264004600260264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505035800483520123300841542001602074546001602090588004002106650002602146650002602172650002702198700002602225700002702251700002502278700002902303700002602332700002402358710003902382856007602421OTLid0000291MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aB72 4aQA11 aZach, Richardeauthor00aOpen Logic ProjectcRichard Zach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCalgary, AlbertabOpen Logic Textc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Naıve Set Theory -- II Propositional Logic -- III First-order Logic -- IV Model Theory -- V Computability -- VI Turing Machines -- VII Incompleteness -- VIII Second-order Logic -- IX The Lambda Calculus -- X Many-valued Logic -- XI Normal Modal Logics -- XII Intuitionistic Logic -- XIII Counterfactuals -- XIV Set Theory -- XV Methods -- XVI History0 aThe Open Logic Text is an open-source, collaborative textbook of formal meta-logic and formal methods, starting at an intermediate level (i.e., after an introductory formal logic course). Though aimed at a non-mathematical audience (in particular, students of philosophy and computer science), it is rigorous. The Open Logic Text is a collaborative project and is under active development. Coverage of some topics currently included may not yet be complete, and many sections still require substantial revision. We plan to expand the text to cover more topics in the future. We also plan to add features to the text, such as a glossary, a list of further reading, historical notes, pictures, better explanations, sections explaining the relevance of results to philosophy, computer science, and mathematics, and more problems and examples. If you find an error, or have a suggestion, please let the project team know. The project operates in the spirit of open source. Not only is the text freely available, we provide the LaTeX source under the Creative Commons Attribution license, which gives anyone the right to download, use, modify, re-arrange, convert, and re-distribute our work, as long as they give appropriate credit.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aArana, Andreweauthor1 aAvigad, Jeremyeauthor1 aDean, Waltereauthor1 aRussell, Gillianeauthor1 aWyatt, Nicoleeauthor1 aYap, Audreyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/291zAccess online version02809nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127100002800145245007900173264004300252264006900295264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505052300541520115901064542003902223546001602262588004002278650002602318710003902344856007602383OTLid0000292MnU20260406020728.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602356603  aMnUbengcMnU1 aWenger, Christyeauthor00aYoga Minds, Writing BodiesbContemplative Writing PedagogycChristy Wenger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: From the Sticky Mat to the Classroom: Toward Contemplative Writing Pedagogy -- Chapter One: The Writing Yogi: Lessons for Embodied Change -- Interchapter One: Using "Body Blogs" to Embody the Writer's Imagination -- Chapter Two: Personal Presence, Embodied Empiricism and Resonance in Contemplative Writing -- Interchapter Two: Habits of Yoga Minds and Writing Bodies -- Chapter Three: Situating Feelings in Contemplative Writing Pedagogy -- Interchapter Three: The Writer's Breath -- Conclusion: Namaste0 aIn Yoga Minds, Writing Bodies, Christy Wenger argues for the inclusion of Eastern-influenced contemplative education within writing studies. She observes that, although we have "embodied" writing education in general by discussing the rhetorics of racialized, gendered, and disabled bodies, we have done substantially less to address the particular bodies that occupy our classrooms. She proposes that we turn to contemplative education practices that engages student bodies through fusing a traditional curriculum with contemplative practices including yoga, meditation, and the martial arts. Drawing strength from the recent "quiet revolution" (Zajonc) of contemplative pedagogy within postsecondary education and a legacy of field interest attributable to James Moffett, this project draws on case studies of first-year college writers to present contemplative pedagogy as a means of teaching students mindfulness of their writing and learning in ways that promote the academic, rhetorical work accomplished in first-year composition classes while at the same time remaining committed to a larger scope of a writer's physical and emotional well-being.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/292zAccess online version02686nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001100162100002700173245011500200264004300315264006900358264001200427300002200439336002600461337002600487338003600513341002800549490002700577505054100604520080101145542003901946546001601985588004002001650002502041650002602066650002402092650003302116710003902149856007602188OTLid0000293MnU20260406020413.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602357747  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aInoue, Asao B.eauthor00aAntiracist Writing Assessment EcologiesbTeaching and Assessing Writing for a Socially Just FuturecAsao Inoue 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction: Writing Assessment Ecologies as Antiracist Projects -- Chapter 1: The Function of Race in Writing Assessments -- Chapter 2: Antiracist Writing Assessment Ecologies -- Chapter 3: The Elements of an Antiracist Writing Assessment Ecology -- Chapter 4: Approaching Antiracist Work in an Assessment Ecology -- Chapter 5: Designing Antiracist Writing Assessment Ecologies -- Notes -- References -- Appendix A: English 160W's Grading Contract -- Appendix B: Example Problem Posing Labor Process0 aIn Antiracist Writing Assessment Ecologies, Asao B. Inoue theorizes classroom writing assessment as a complex system that is "more than" its interconnected elements. To explain how and why antiracist work in the writing classroom is vital to literacy learning, Inoue incorporates ideas about the white racial habitus that informs dominant discourses in the academy and other contexts. Inoue helps teachers understand the unintended racism that often occurs when teachers do not have explicit antiracist agendas in their assessments. Drawing on his own teaching and classroom inquiry, Inoue offers a heuristic for developing and critiquing writing assessment ecologies that explores seven elements of any writing assessment ecology: power, parts, purposes, people, processes, products, and places.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/293zAccess online version02153nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002500156245007100181264004300252264006900295264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505031500541520066300856542003901519546001601558588004001574650002601614650002401640710003901664856007601703OTLid0000294MnU20260330020659.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602356474  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aAllen, Saraheauthor00aBeyond ArgumentbEssaying as a Practice of (Ex)ChangecSarah Allen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Chapter One: Meeting the Real Self in the Essay -- Chapter Two: Meeting the Constructed Self in the Essay -- Chapter Three: Cultivating a Self in the Essay -- Chapter Four: Imitation as Meditation -- Chapter Five: Self Writing in the Classroom -- Works Cited0 aBeyond Argument offers an in-depth examination of how current ways of thinking about the writer-page relation in personal essays can be reconceived according to practices in the care of the self — an ethic by which writers such as Seneca, Montaigne, and Nietzsche lived. This approach promises to reinvigorate the form and address many of the concerns expressed by essay scholars and writers regarding the lack of rigorous exploration we see in our students' personal essays — and sometimes, even, in our own. In pursuing this approach, Sarah Allen presents a version of subjectivity that enables productive debate in the essay, among essays, and beyond.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/294zAccess online version03367nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001100162100003100173245009000204264004300294264006900337264001200406300002200418336002600440337002600466338003600492341002800528490002700556505083200583520121201415542003902627546001602666588004002682650002502722650002602747650002402773650003302797710003902830856007602869OTLid0000295MnU20260323020319.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602356320  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aCorbett, Steven J.eauthor00aBeyond DichotomybSynergizing Writing Center and Classroom PedagogiescSteven Corbett 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction: Sharing Pedagogical Authority: Practice Complicates Theory When Synergizing Classroom, Small-Group, and One-to-One Writing Instruction -- Chapter One: Tutoring Style, Tutoring Strategy: Course-Based Tutoring and the History, Rhetoric, and Reality of the Directive/Nondirective Instructional Continuum -- Chapter Two: Methods and Methodology: Locating Places, People, and Analytical Frames -- Chapter Three: Macro- and Micro-Analyses of One-to-One Tutorials: Case Studies at the University of Washington -- Chapter Four: Conflict and Care while Tutoring in the Classroom: Case Studies at the University of Washington and Southern Connecticut State University -- Chapter Five: Conclusion: Toward Teacher/Student, Classroom/Center Hybrid Choices -- Works Cited -- Appendix -- Index0 aHow closely can or should writing centers and writing classrooms collaborate? Beyond Dichotomy explores how research on peer tutoring one-to-one and in small groups can inform our work with students in writing centers and other tutoring programs, as well as in writing courses and classrooms. These multi-method (including rhetorical and discourse analyses and ethnographic and case-study) investigations center on several course-based tutoring (CBT) partnerships at two universities. Rather than practice separately in the center or in the classroom, rather than seeing teacher here and tutor there and student over there, CBT asks all participants in the dynamic drama of teaching and learning to consider the many possible means of connecting synergistically. This book offers the "more-is-more" value of designing more peer-to-peer learning situations for developmental and multicultural writers, and a more elaborate view of what happens in these peer-centered learning environments. It offers important implications—especially of directive and nondirective tutoring strategies and methods—for peer-to-peer learning and one-to-one tutoring and conferencing for all teachers and learners of writing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/295zAccess online version03985nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001100162100002500173245004100198264004300239264006900282264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505197500528520070102503542003903204546001603243588004003259650002503299650002603324650002403350650003303374700002903407710003903436856007603475OTLid0000296MnU20260406020414.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602354227  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aDuncan, Mikeeauthor04aThe Centrality of StylecMike Duncan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Conceptualizing Style -- Introduction to Part One: Conceptualizing Style, Mike Duncan & Star Medzerian Vanguri -- An Ethics of Attentions: Three Continuums of Classical and Contemporary Stylistic Manipulation for the 21st Century Composition Classroom, William C. Kurlinkus -- Stylistic Sandcastles: Rhetorical Figures as Composition's Bucket and Spade, William FitzGerald -- Using Stylistic Imitation in Freshman Writing Classes: The Rhetorical and Meta-Rhetorical Potential of Transitions in Geoffrey of Vinsauf's Medieval Treatises, Denise Stodola -- Architectonics and Style, Russell Greer -- Making Style Practically Cool and Theoretically Hip, Keith Rhodes -- Jim Corder's Generative Ethos as Alternative to Traditional Argument, or Style's Revivification of the Writer-Reader Relationship, Rosanne Carlo -- Teaching Style as Cultural Performance, Chris Holcomb and M. Jimmie Killingsworth -- Inventio and Elocutio: Language Instruction at St. Paul's Grammar School and Today's Stylistic Classroom, Tom Pace -- The Research Paper As Stylistic Exercise, Mike Duncan -- Part Two: Applying Style -- Introduction to Part Two: Applying Style, Mike Duncan & Star Medzerian Vanguri -- Style in Academic Writing, Nora Bacon -- Tracking Interpersonal Style: The Use of Functional Language Analysis in College Writing Instruction, Zak Lancaster -- Multimodal Style and the Evolution of Digital Writing Pedagogy, Moe Folk -- Voice, Transformed: The Potentialities of Style Pedagogy in the Teaching of Creative Nonfiction, Crystal Fodrey -- Fighting Styles: The Pedagogical Implications of Applying Contemporary Rhetorical Theory to the Persuasive Prose of Mary Wollstonecraft and Mary Hays, Luke Redington -- Style and the Professional Writing Curriculum: Teaching Stylistic Fluency through Science Writing, Jonathan Buehl -- Toward a Pedagogy of Psychic Distance, Erik Ellis -- What Scoring Rubrics Teach Students (and Teachers) about Style, Star Medzerian Vanguri0 aInThe Centrality of Style, editors Mike Duncan and Star Medzerian Vanguri argue that style is a central concern of composition studies even as they demonstrate that some of the most compelling work in the area has emerged from the margins of the field. Calling attention to this paradox in his foreword to the collection, Paul Butler observes, "Many of the chapters work within the liminal space in which style serves as both a centralizing and decentralizing force in rhetoric and composition. Clearly, the authors and editors have made an invaluable contribution in their collection by exposing the paradoxical nature of a canon that continues to play a vital role in our disciplinary history."1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aM. Vanguri, Stareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/296zAccess online version02922nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000700153050001100160100003000171245009000201264004300291264006900334264001200403300002200415336002600437337002600463338003600489341002800525490002700553505063600580520092401216542003902140546001602179588004002195650002502235650003802260650002602298650002402324700002502348710003902373856007602412OTLid0000297MnU20260406020710.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602353022  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aL7 4aPE14081 aKirkpatrick, Andyeauthor00aChinese Rhetoric and WritingbAn Introduction for Language TeacherscAndy Kirkpatrick 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction -- 1 Rhetoric in Ancient China -- 2 The Literary Background And Rhetorical Styles -- 3 The Rules of Writing in Medieval China and Europe -- 4 The Ba Gu Wen -- 5 Shuyuan and Chinese Writing Training and Practice -- 6 Principles of Sequencing and Rhetorical Organisation: Words, Sentences and Complex Clauses -- 7 Principles of Sequencing and Rhetorical Organisation: Discourse and Text -- 8 The End of Empire and External Influences -- 9 Party Politics, the Cultural Revolution and Charter 08 -- 10 A Review of Contemporary Chinese University Writing (Course) Books -- Conclusion -- Works Cited -- Notes0 aThe authors of Chinese Rhetoric and Writing offer a response to the argument that Chinese students' academic writing in English is influenced by "culturally nuanced rhetorical baggage that is uniquely Chinese and hard to eradicate." Noting that this argument draws from "an essentially monolingual and Anglo-centric view of writing," they point out that the rapid growth in the use of English worldwide calls for "a radical reassessment of what English is in today's world." The result is a book that provides teachers of writing, and in particular those involved in the teaching of English academic writing to Chinese students, an introduction to key stages in the development of Chinese rhetoric, a wide-ranging field with a history of several thousand years. Understanding this important rhetorical tradition provides a strong foundation for assessing and responding to the writing of this growing group of students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aXu, Zhichangeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/297zAccess online version03951nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001100162100002500173245008900198264004300287264006900330264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505199000576520060502566542003903171546001603210588004003226650002503266650002603291650002403317650003303341700002803374710003903402856007603441OTLid0000298MnU20260330020339.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602356511  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aRoeder, Taraeauthor00aCritical ExpressivismbTheory and Practice in the Composition ClassroomcTara Roeder 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Preface: Yes, I Know That Expressivism Is out of Vogue, But ..., Lizbeth Bryant -- Re-Imagining Expressivism: An Introduction, Tara Roeder and Roseanne Gatto -- Section One: Critical Self-Construction -- "Personal Writing" and "Expressivism" as Problematic Terms, Peter Elbow -- Selfhood and the Personal Essay: A Pragmatic Defense, Thomas Newkirk -- Critical Memoir and Identity Formation: Being, Belonging, Becoming, Nancy Mack -- Critical Expressivism's Alchemical Challenge, Derek Owens -- Past-Writing: Negotiating the Complexity of Experience and Memory, Jean Bessette -- Essai—A Metaphor: Writing to Show Thinking, Lea Povozhaev -- Section Two: Personal Writing and Social Change -- Communication as Social Action: Critical Expressivist Pedagogies in the Writing Classroom, Patricia Webb Boyd -- From the Personal to the Social, Daniel F. Collins -- "Is it Possible to Teach Writing So That People Stop Killing Each Other?" Nonviolence, Composition, and Critical Expressivism, Scott Wagar -- The (Un)Knowable Self and Others: Critical Empathy and Expressivism, Eric Leake -- Section Three: Histories -- John Watson Is to Introspectionism as James Berlin Is to Expressivism (And Other Analogies You Won't Find on the SAT), Maja Wilson -- Expressive Pedagogies in the University of Pittsburgh's Alternative Curriculum Program, 1973-1979, Chris Warnick -- Rereading Romanticism, Rereading Expressivism: Revising "Voice" through Wordsworth's Prefaces, Hannah J. Rule -- Emerson's Pragmatic Call for Critical Conscience: Double Consciousness, Cognition, and Human Nature, Anthony Petruzzi -- Section Four: Pedagogies -- Place-Based Genre Writing as Critical Expressivist Practice, David Seitz -- Multicultural Critical Pedagogy in the Community-Based Classroom: A Motivation for Foregrounding the Personal, Kim M. Davis -- The Economy of Expressivism and Its Legacy of Low/No-Stakes Writing, Sheri Rysdam -- Revisiting Radical Revision, Jeff Sommers -- Contributors0 aCritical Expressivism is an ambitious attempt to re-appropriate intellectual territory that has more often been charted by its detractors than by its proponents. Indeed, as Peter Elbow observes in his contribution to this volume, "As far as I can tell, the term 'expressivist' was coined and used only by people who wanted a word for people they disapproved of and wanted to discredit." The editors and contributors to this collection invite readers to join them in a new conversation, one informed by "a belief that the term expressivism continues to have a vitally important function in our field."1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aGatto, Roseanneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/298zAccess online version04013nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001100152100003400163245007800197264004300275264006900318264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002800509490002700537505210400564520057302668542003903241546001603280588004003296650002503336650002603361650002403387700002803411700003703439710003903476856007603515OTLid0000299MnU20260330020339.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602352643  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aPE14081 aRife, Martine Couranteeditor00aCopy(write)bIntellectual Property in the Writing ClassroomcMartine Rife 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: The Law, the Landscape -- The Fair Use Battle for Scholarly Works, Jeffrey Galin -- Plagiarism and Promiscuity, Authors and Plagiarisms, Russel Wiebe -- Authoring Academic Agency: Charting the Tensions between Work-for-hire University Copyright Policies,Timothy R. Amidon -- Soul Remedy: Turnitin and the Visual Design of End User License Agreements, Barclay Barrios -- Images, the Commonplace Book, and Digital Self-Fashioning, Bob Whipple -- Intellectual Properties in Multimodal 21st-Century Composition Classrooms, Tharon W. Howard -- Is Digital the New Digital?: Pedagogical Frames of Reference and Their Implications in Theory and Practice, Robert Dornsife -- Response to Part I—"An Act for the Encouragement of Learning" vs. Copyright, John Logie -- Part II: The Tools -- What We Talk About When We Talk About Fair Use: Conversations on Writing Pedagogy, New Media, and Copyright Law, Steve Westbrook -- Parody, Penalty, and Pedagogy, E. Ashley Hall, Kathie Gossett, and Elizabeth Vincelette -- Copy-rights and Copy-wrong: Intellectual Property in the Classroom Revisited, Janice R. Walker -- Rhetorical Velocity and Copyright: A Case Study on Strategies of Rhetorical Delivery, Jim Ridolfo and Martine Courant Rife -- Following the Framers: Choosing Pedagogy to Further Fair Use and Free Speech, TyAnna Herrington -- Response to Part II—Being Rhetorical When We Teach Intellectual Property and Fair Use, James E. Porter -- Part III: The Pedagogy -- Toward a Pedagogy of Fair Use for Multimedia Composition, Renee Hobbs and Katie Donnelly -- Intellectual Property Teaching Practices in Introductory Writing Courses, Nicole Nguyen -- Moving Beyond Plagiarized / Not Plagiarized in a Point, Click, and Copy World, Leslie Johnson-Farris -- Couture et Écriture: What the Fashion Industry Can Teach the World of Writing, Brian Ballentine -- The Role of Authorship in the Practice and Teaching of Technical Communication, Jessica Reyman -- Response to Part III—Fair Use: Teaching Three Key IP Concepts, Rebecca Moore Howard -- Afterword, Clancy Ratliff -- Biographical Notes -- Index0 aThe editors of Copy(write): Intellectual Property in the Writing Classroom bring together stories, theories, and research that can further inform the ways in which we situate and address intellectual property issues in our writing classrooms. The essays in the collection identify and describe a wide range of pedagogical strategies, consider theories, present research, explore approaches, and offer both cautionary tales and local and contextual successes that can further inform the ways in which we situate and address intellectual property issues in our teaching.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aSlattery, Shauneeditor1 aDeVoss, Dànielle Nicoleeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/299zAccess online version03937nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001100162100002600173245010600199264004300305264006900348264001200417300002200429336002600451337002600477338003600503341002800539490002700567505187900594520064702473542003903120546001603159588004003175650002503215650002603240650002403266650003303290700002303323700003003346710003903376856007603415OTLid0000300MnU20260330020340.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602351677  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aFranke, Davideauthor00aDesign DiscoursebComposing and Revising Programs in Professional and Technical WritingcDavid Franke 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aComposing -- The Great Instauration: Restoring Professional and Technical Writing to the Humanities, Anthony Di Renzo -- Starts, False Starts, and Getting Started: (Mis)understanding the Naming of a Professional Writing Minor, Michael Knieval, Kelly Belanger, Colin Keeney, Julianne Couch, and Christine Stebbins -- Composing a Proposal for a Professional / Technical Writing Program, W. Gary Griswold -- Disciplinary Identities: Professional Writing, Rhetorical Studies, and Rethinking "English", Brent Henze, Wendy Sharer, and Janice Tovey -- Revising -- Smart Growth of Professional Writing Programs: Controlling Sprawl in Departmental Landscapes, Diana Ashe and Colleen A. Reilly -- Curriculum, Genre and Resistance: Revising Identity in a Professional Writing Community, David Franke -- Composing and Revising the Professional Writing Program at Ohio Northern University: A Case Study, Jonathan Pitts -- Minors, Certificates, Engineering -- Certificate Programs in Technical Writing: Through Sophistic Eyes, Jim Nugent -- Shippensburg University's Technical / Professional Communications Minor: A Multidisciplinary Approach, Carla Kungl and S. Dev Hathaway -- Reinventing Audience through Distance, Jude Edminster and Andrew Mara -- Introducing a Technical Writing Communication Course into a Canadian School of Engineering, Anne Parker -- English and Engineering, Pedagogy and Politics, Brian D. Ballentine -- Futures -- The Third Way: PTW and the Liberal Arts in the New Knowledge Society, Anthony Di Renzo -- The Write Brain: Professional Writing in the Post-Knowledge Economy, Alex Reid -- Post-Scripts by Veteran Program Designers -- A Techné for Citizens: Service-Learning, Conversation, and Community, James Dubinsky -- Models of Professional Writing / Technical Writing Administration: Reflections of a Serial Administrator at Syracuse University, Carol Lipson0 aDesign Discourse: Composing and Revising Programs in Professional and Technical Writing, edited byDavid Franke, Alex Reid, andAnthony Di Renzo,addresses the complexities of developing professional and technical writing programs. The essays in the collection offer reflections on efforts to bridge two cultures — what the editors characterize as the "art and science of writing" — often by addressing explicitly the tensions between them. Design Discourse offers insights into the high-stakes decisions made by program designers as they seek to "function at the intersection of the practical and the abstract, the human and the technical."1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aReid, Alexeauthor1 aDi Renzo, Anthonyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/300zAccess online version08424nam a2200493 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001000162050001100172100002600183245009000209264004300299264006900342264001200411300002200423336002600445337002600471338003600497341002800533490002700561505542400588520145106012542003907463546001607502588004007518650003307558650002507591650002607616650002407642650003307666700002607699700002707725700003707752700002607789710003907815856007607854OTLid0000301MnU20260330020650.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602353435  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aThaiss, Chriseauthor00aWriting Programs WorldwidebProfiles of Academic Writing in Many PlacescChris Thaiss 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Origins, Aims, and Uses of Writing Programs Worldwide: Profiles of Academic Writing in Many Places, Chris Thaiss -- Chapter 2. Teaching Academic Literacy Across the University Curriculum as Institutional Policy: The Case of the Universidad Nacional de General Sarmiento (Argentina), Estela Inés Moyano and Lucia Natale -- Chapter 3. Writing to Learn Biology in the Framework of a Didactic-Curricular Change in the First Year Program at an Argentine University, Ana De Micheli and Patricia Iglesia -- Chapter 4. Developing Students' Writing at Queensland University of Technology , Karyn Gonano and Peter Nelson -- Chapter 5. Teaching Academic Writing at the University of Wollongong, Emily Purser -- Chapter 6. The SchreibCenter at the Alpen-Adria-Universität, Klagenfurt, Austria, Ursula Doleschal -- Chapter 7. The Academic Writing Research Group at the University of Vienna , Helmut Gruber -- Chapter 8. From Remediation to the Development of Writing Competences in Disciplinary Contexts: Thirty Years of Practice and Questions , Marie-Christine Pollet -- Chapter 9. Academic Literacies in the South: Writing Practices in a Brazilian University, Désirée Motta-Roth -- Chapter 10. Writing Programs Worldwide: One Canadian Perspective, Roger Graves and Heather Graves -- Chapter 11. Department of Rhetoric, Writing, and Communications at the University of Winnipeg, Brian Turner and Judith Kearns -- Chapter 12. Xi'an International Studies University (XISU), Wu Dan -- Chapter 13. Training Experiences in Reading and Writing in a Colombian University: The Perspective of a Professor, Elizabeth Narváez Cardona -- Chapter 14. The Progression and Transformations of the Program of Academic Reading and Writing (PLEA) in Colombia's Universidad Sergio Arboleda, Blanca Yaneth González Pinzón -- Chapter 15. From Working with Students to Working through Faculty: A Genre-centered Focus to Writing Development, Lotte Rienecker and Peter Stray Jørgensen -- Chapter 16. The Department of Rhetoric and Composition at the American University in Cairo: Achievements and Challenges, Emily Golson and Lammert Holdijk -- Chapter 17. Providing a Hub for Writing Development: A Profile of the Centre for Academic Writing (CAW), Coventry University, England, Mary Deane and Lisa Ganobcsik-Williams -- Chapter 18. Thinking Writing at Queen Mary, University of London, Teresa McConlogue, Sally Mitchell, and Kelly Peake -- Chapter 19. The Teaching of Writing Skills in French Universities: The Case of the Université Stendhal, Grenoble III, Francoise Boch and Catherine Frier -- Chapter 20. Literacy Development Projects Initiating Institutional Change, Gerd Bräuer and Katrin Girgensohn -- Chapter 21. Writing at RWTH Aachen (Germany): Lessons from "Technik im Klartext", Vera Niederau and Eva-Maria Jakobs -- Chapter 22. Student Writing in the University of Madras: Traditions, Courses, Ambitions, Susaimanickam Armstrong -- Chapter 23. The Regional Writing Centre at the University of Limerick, Íde O'Sullivan and Lawrence Cleary -- Chapter 24. New Writing in an Old Land, Trudy Zuckermann, Bella Rubin, and Hadara Perpignan -- Chapter 25. The Development of an Academic Writing Centre in the Netherlands , Ingrid Stassen and Carel Jansen -- Chapter 26. Teaching Writing at AUT University: A Model of a Seminar Series for Postgraduate Students Writing Their First Thesis or Dissertation, John Bitchener -- Chapter 27. Developing a "Kiwi" Writing Centre at Massey University, New Zealand, Lisa Emerson -- Chapter 28. The Writing Centre at St. Mary's University College, Belfast, Northern Ireland, Jonathan Worley -- Chapter 29. The Ups and Downs of the Interdisciplinary Writing Center of the InterAmerican University of Puerto Rico, Metropolitan Campus, Matilde García-Arroyo and Hilda E. Quintana -- Chapter 30. Academic Writing at the University of Dundee: A Perspective from Scotland, Kathleen McMillan -- Chapter 31. Changing Academic Landscapes: Principles and Practices of Teaching Writing At the University of Cape Town, Arlene Archer -- Chapter 32. Academic Communication Strategies at Postgraduate Level, Isabel Solé, Ana Teberosky, and Montserrat Castelló -- Chapter 33. Multi-Disciplinary, Multi-Lingual Engineering Education Writing Development: A Writing Programme Perspective, Magnus Gustafsson and Tobias Boström -- Chapter 34. Shaping the Multimedia Mindset: Collaborative Writing in Journalism Education, Daniel Perrin -- Chapter 35. The Place of Writing in Translation: From Linguistic Craftsmanship to Multilingual Text Production, Otto Kruse -- Chapter 36. A Writing Center Journey at Sabanci University, Istanbul, Dilek Tokay -- Chapter 37. Writing Programs Worldwide: Profile of the American University of Sharjah (AUS), Lynne Ronesi -- Chapter 38. The City University of New York: The Implementation and Impact of WAC/WID in a Multi-Campus US Urban University, Linda Hirsch and Dennis Paoli -- Chapter 39. Writing at UC Davis: Writing in Disciplines and Professions from the Undergraduate First Year through Graduate School, Chris Thaiss and Gary Goodman -- Chapter 40. Section Essay: Academic Literacy Development, Gerd Bräuer -- Chapter 41. Section Essay: Who Takes Care of Writing in Latin American and Spanish Universities?, Paula Carlino -- Chapter 42. Section Essay: Reflecting on What Can Be Gained from Comparing Models of Academic Writing Provision, Lisa Ganobcsik-Williams0 aEmerging from the International WAC/WID Mapping Project, this collection of essays is meant to inform decision-making by teachers, program managers, and college/university administrators considering how writing can most appropriately be defined, managed, funded, and taught in the places where they work. Writing Programs Worldwide offers an important global perspective to the growing research literature in the shaping of writing programs. The authors of its program profiles show how innovators at a diverse range of universities on six continents have dealt creatively over many years with day-to-day and long-range issues affecting how students across disciplines and languages grow as communicators and learners. In these profiles, we see teachers and researchers relying on colleagues and on transnational scholarship to build initiatives that are both well suited to their specific environments and can serve as regional and often global models. Their struggles and achievements offer insights to colleagues in similar locales and across borders who seek to establish, enhance, and assess their own work as designers of writing programs. An introduction and three section essays by the editors illuminate themes that inform this collection. Growing networks of initiators and scholars and survey results from the International WAC/WID Mapping Project exemplify the argument of this collection for transnational exchange and collaboration.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aBräuer, Gerdeauthor1 aCarlino, Paulaeauthor1 aGanobcsik-Williams, Lisaeauthor1 aSinha, Aparnaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/301zAccess online version05047nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003700156245006000193264004300253264006900296264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505285600542520085203398542003904250546001604289588004004305650002604345650002404371700002704395700003004422700002604452700003204478710003904510856007604549OTLid0000302MnU20260330020341.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602352681  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aStarke-Meyerring, Doreeneauthor00aWriting in Knowledge SocietiescDoreen Starke-Meyerring 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWriting in Knowledge Societies -- The Roles of Writing In Knowledge Societies: Questions, Exigencies, and Implications for the Study and Teaching of Writing, Doreen Starke-Meyerring and Anthony Paré -- Conceptual, Methodological, and Historical Perspectives on Studying Writing as an Epistemic Practice -- Investigating Texts in their Social Contexts: The Promise and Peril of Rhetorical Genre Studies, Catherine F. Schryer -- "Curious Gentlemen": The Hudson's Bay Company and the Royal Society, Business and Science in the Eighteenth Century, Janet Giltrow -- Electrons Are Cheap; Society Is Dear, Charles Bazerman -- Writing as Knowledge Work in Public and Professional Settings -- Risk Knowledge and Risk Communication: The Rhetorical Challenge of Public Dialogue, Philippa Spoel and Chantal Barriault -- The Evolution of an Environmentalist Group Toward Public Participation: Civic Knowledge Construction and Transgressive Identities, Diana Wegner -- Making Legal Knowledge in Global Digital Environments: The Judicial Opinion as Remix, Martine Courant Rife -- Understanding and Supporting Knowledge Work in Schools, Workplaces, and Public Life, William Hart-Davidson and Jeffrey T. Grabill -- The Role of Writing in the Production of Knowledge in Research Environments -- Rhetoric, Knowledge, and "The Brute Facts of Nature" in Science Research, Heather Graves -- Disciplines and Discourses: Social Interactions in the Construction of Knowledge, Ken Hyland -- Knowledge and Identity Work in the Supervision of Doctoral Student Writing: Shaping Rhetorical Subjects, Anthony Paré, Doreen Starke-Meyerring, and Lynn McAlpine -- Writing into the Knowledge Society: A Case Study of Vulnerability in Inkshedding, Miriam Horne -- The Teaching of Writing as an Epistemic Practice in Higher Education -- Writing and Knowledge Making: Insights from an Historical Perspective, Paul M. Rogers and Olivia Walling -- Reinventing WAC (again): The First-Year Seminar and Academic Literacy, Doug Brent -- A Code of Ethics as a Collaborative Learning Tool: Comparing a Face-to-Face Engineering Team and Multidisciplinary Online Teams, Anne Parker and Amanda Goldrick-Jones -- "An Engrained Part of My Career": The Formation of a Knowledge Worker in the Dual Space of Engineering Knowledge and Rhetorical Process, Natasha Artemeva -- International Students and Identity: Resisting Dominant Ways of Writing and Knowing in Academe, Heekyeong Lee and Mary H. Maguire -- Articulating and Implementing Rhetoric and Writing as a Knowledge-Making Practice in Higher Education -- Representing Writing: A Rhetoric for Change, Roger Graves -- Building Academic Community through a Town Hall Forum: Rhetorical Theories in Action, Tania Smith -- Talking the Talk and Walking the Walk: Establishing the Academic Role of Writing Centres, Margaret Procter -- Author Affiliations0 aThe editors of Writing in Knowledge Societies provide a thoughtful, carefully constructed collection that addresses the vital roles rhetoric and writing play as knowledge-making practices in diverse knowledge-intensive settings. The essays in this book examine the multiple, subtle, yet consequential ways in which writing is epistemic, articulating the central role of writing in creating, shaping, sharing, and contesting knowledge in a range of human activities in workplaces, civic settings, and higher education. Writing in Knowledge Societies helps us conceptualize the ways in which rhetoric and writing work to organize, (re-)produce, undermine, dominate, marginalize, or contest knowledge-making practices in diverse settings, showing the many ways in which rhetoric and writing operate in knowledge-intensive organizations and societies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aParé, Anthonyeauthor1 aArtemeva, Natashaeauthor1 aHorne, Miriameauthor1 aYousoubova, Larissaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/302zAccess online version03769nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245009500152264004300247264006900290264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505195000536520058102486542003903067546001603106588004003122650002503162650002603187700003203213700002303245710003903268856007603307OTLid0000303MnU20260406020709.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602354432  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aePortfolio Performance Support SystemsbConstructing, Presenting, and Assessing Portfolios 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction, Katherine V. Wills and Rich Rice -- Section 1: Systematic Performance Support Systems -- Chapter 1. Postmodernism, Palimpsest, and Portfolios: Theoretical Issues in the Representation of Student Work, Kathleen Blake Yancey -- Chapter 2. The Hypermediated Teaching Philosophy ePortfolio Performance Support System, Rich Rice -- Chapter 3. The Social ePortfolio: Integrating Social Media and Models of Learning in Academic ePortfolios, Lauren F. Klein -- Section 2: Constructing the Bridge -- Chapter 4. ePorts: Making the Passage from Academics to Workplace, Barbara J. D'Angelo and Barry M. Maid -- Chapter 5. What Are You Going to Do With That Major? An ePortfolio as Bridge from University to the World, Karen Ramsay Johnson and Susan Kahn -- Chapter 6. Career ePortfolios: Recognizing and Promoting Employable Skills, Karen Bonsignore -- Section 3: Presenting Interactive Designs -- Chapter 7. Showcase Hybridity: A Role for Blogfolios, Geoffrey Middlebrook and Jerry Chih-Yuan Sun -- Chapter 8. Accessible ePortfolios for Visually-Impaired Users: Interfaces, Designs, and Infrastructures, Sushil K. Oswal -- Chapter 9. From Metaphor to Analogy: How the National Museum of the American Indian can inform the Augusta Community Portfolio, Darren Cambridge -- Section 4: Authentic Assessment Tools and Knowledge Transfer -- Chapter 10. Mapping, Re-Mediating, and Reflecting on Writing Process Realities: Transitioning from Print to Electronic Portfolios in First-Year Composition, Steven Corbett, Michelle LaFrance, Cara Giacomini, and Janice Fournier -- Chapter 11. ePortfolios as Tools for Facilitating and Assessing Knowledge Transfer from Lower Division, General Education Courses to Upper Division, Discipline-specific Courses, Carl Whithaus -- Chapter 12. Balancing Learning and Assessment: A Study of Virginia Tech's Use of ePortfolios, Marc Zaldivar, Teggin Summers, and C. Edward Watson0 aePortfolio Performance Support Systems: Constructing, Presenting, and Assessing Portfolios addresses theories and practices advanced by some of the most innovative and active proponents of ePortfolios. Editors Katherine V. Wills and Rich Rice interweave twelve essays that address the ways in which ePortfolios can facilitate sustainable and measureable writing-related student development, assessment and accountability, learning and knowledge transfer, and principles related to universal design for learning, just-in-time support, interaction design, and usability testing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aWills, Katherine V.eeditor1 aRice, Richeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/303zAccess online version04697nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050000700166050001100173245005700184264004300241264006900284264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505154400530520167502074542003903749546001603788588004003804650003303844650003403877650002503911650002603936650002403962700002803986700003004014700002404044700003204068710003904100856007604139OTLid0000304MnU20260406020414.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602356672  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aL7 4aPE140800aFoundational Practices of Online Writing Instruction 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction. A Research History of the CCCC OWI Committee, Beth L. Hewett and Kevin Eric DePew -- Part 1. An OWI Primer -- Chapter 1. Grounding Principles of OWI, Beth L. Hewett -- Chapter 2. Hybrid and Fully Online OWI, Jason Snart -- Chapter 3. Asynchronous and Synchronous Modalities, Connie Snyder Mick and Geoffrey Middlebrook -- Part 2. OWI Pedagogy and Administrative Decisions -- Chapter 4. Teaching the OWI Course, Scott Warnock -- Chapter 5. Online Writing Labs, Diane Martinez and Leslie Olsen -- Chapter 6. Administrative Decisions for OWI, Deborah Minter -- Chapter 7. Contingent Faculty and OWI, Mahli Mechenbier -- Part 3. Practicing Inclusivity in OWI -- Chapter 8. Physical and Learning Disabilities in OWI, Sushil K. Oswal -- Chapter 9. Multilingual Writers and OWI, Susan K. Miller-Cochran -- Chapter 10. Nontraditional Student Access to OWI, Michael W. Gos -- Part 4. Faculty and Student Preparation for OWI -- Chapter 11. Faculty Preparation for OWI, Lee-Ann Kastman Breuch -- Chapter 12. Faculty Professionalization for OWI, Rich Rice -- Chapter 13. Preparing Students for OWI, Lisa Meloncon and Heidi Harris -- Chapter 14. Preparing for the Rhetoricity of OWI, Kevin Eric DePew -- Part 5. New Directions in OWI -- Chapter 15. Teaching Multimodal Assignments in OWI Contexts, Kristine L. Blair -- Chapter 16. OWI on the Go, Rochelle Rodrigo -- Chapter 17. OWI Research Considerations, Christa Ehmann and Beth L. Hewett -- Chapter 18. The Future of OWI, Beth L. Hewett and Scott Warnock -- Author Biographies -- Index0 aFoundational Practices of Online Writing Instruction, edited by Beth L. Hewett and Kevin Eric DePew, with associate editors Elif Guler and Robbin Zeff Warner, addresses the questions and decisions that administrators and instructors most need to consider when developing online writing programs and courses. Written by experts in the field (members of the Conference on College Composition and Communication Committee for Effective Practices in OWI and other experts and stakeholders), the contributors to this collection explain the foundations of the recently published (2013) A Position Statement of Principles and Examples Effective Practices for OWI and provide illustrative practical applications. To that end, in every chapter, the authors address issues of inclusive and accessible writing instruction (based upon physical and mental disability, linguistic ability, and socioeconomic challenges) in technology enhanced settings. The five parts of this book attempt to cover the most important issues relevant to principle-centered OWI: (1) An OWI Primer, (2) OWI Pedagogy and Administrative Decisions, (3) Practicing Inclusivity in OWI, (4) Faculty and Student Preparation for OWI, and (5) New Directions in OWI. Working from the belief that most writing courses eventually will be mediated online to various degrees, the editors offer principles and practices that will allow this collection to inform future composition theory and praxis. To this end, the editors hope that the guidance provided in this collection will encourage readers to join a conversation about designing OWI practices, contributing to the scholarship about OWI, and reshaping OWI theory.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aHewett, Beth L.eeditor1 aDePew, Kevin Ericeeditor1 aGuler, Elifeeditor1 aZeff Warner, Robbineeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/304zAccess online version05533nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127245003000145264004300175264006900218264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002800409490002700437505288000464520149103344542003904835546001604874588004004890650002604930700003004956700002604986700003205012710003905044856007605083OTLid0000305MnU20260406020710.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602351271  aMnUbengcMnU00aGenre in a Changing World 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction, Charles Bazerman, Adair Bonini, and Débora Figueiredo -- Part 1: Advances in Genre Theories -- Worlds of Genre - Metaphors of Genre, John M. Swales -- From Speech Genres to Mediated Multimodal Genre Systems: Bakhtin, Voloshinov, and the Question of Writing, Paul Prior -- To Describe Genres: Problems and Strategies, Maria Antónia Coutinho and Florencia Miranda -- Relevance and Genre: Theoretical and Conceptual Interfaces, Fábio José Rauen -- Part 2: Genre and the Professions -- Accusation and Defense: The Ideational Metafunction of Language in the Genre Closing Argument, Cristiane Fuzer and Nina Célia Barros -- The Sociohistorical Constitution of the Genre Legal Booklet: A Critical Approach, Leonardo Mozdzenski -- Uptake and the Biomedical Subject, Kimberly K. Emmons -- Stories of Becoming: A Study of Novice Engineers Learning Genres of Their Profession, Natasha Artemeva -- The Dissertation as Multi-Genre: Many Readers, Many Readings, Anthony Paré, Doreen Starke-Meyerring, and Lynn McAlpine -- Part 3: Genre and Media -- The Distinction Between News and Reportage in the Brazilian Journalistic Context: A Matter of Degree, Adair Bonini -- The Organization and Functions of the Press Dossier: The Case of Media Discourse on the Environment in Portugal, Rui Ramos -- Multi-semiotic Communication in an Australian Broadsheet: A New News Story Genre, Helen Caple -- Narrative and Identity Formation: An Analysis of Media Personal Accounts from Patients of Cosmetic Plastic Surgery, Débora de Carvalho Figueiredo -- Part 4: Genre in Teaching and Learning -- Genre and Cognitive Development: Beyond Writing to Learn, Charles Bazerman -- Bakhtin Circle's Speech Genres Theory: Tools for a Transdisciplinary Analysis of Utterances in Didactic Practices, Roxane Helena Rodrigues Rojo -- The Role of Context in Academic Text Production and Writing Pedagogy, Désirée Motta-Roth -- Teaching Critical Genre Awareness, Amy Devitt -- Curricular Proposal of Santa Catarina State: Assessing the Route, Opening Paths, Maria Marta Furlanetto -- Intertextual Analysis of Finnish EFL Textbooks: Genre Embedding as Recontextualization, Salla Lähdesmäki -- Part 5: Genre in Writing Across the Curriculum -- Exploring Notions of Genre in "Academic Literacies" and "Writing Across the Curriculum": Approaches Across Countries and Contexts , David R. Russell, Mary Lea Jan Parker, Brian Street, and Tiane Donahue -- Genre and Disciplinary Work in French Didactics Research, Tiane Donahue -- Negotiating Genre: Lecturer's Awareness in Genre Across the Curriculum Project at the University Level, Estela Inés Moyano -- The Development of a Genre-Based Writing Course for Graduate Students in Two Fields, Solange Aranha -- Written Genres in University Studies: Evidence from an Academic Corpus of Spanish in Four Disciplines, Giovanni Parodi -- Author Affiliations0 aGenre studies and genre approaches to literacy instruction continue to develop in many regions and from a widening variety of approaches. Genre has provided a key to understanding the varying literacy cultures of regions, disciplines, professions and educational settings. Genre in a Changing World,edited by Charles Bazerman, Adair Bonini, and Débora Figueiredo,provides a wide-ranging sampler of the remarkable variety of current work. The twenty-four chapters in this volume, reflecting the work of scholars in Europe, Australasia, North and South America, were selected from more than 400 presentations at SIGET IV (the Fourth International Symposium on Genre Studies), held on the campus of UNISUL in Tubarão, Santa Catarina, Brazil in August 2007—the largest gathering on genre to that date. The chapters also represent a wide variety of approaches including rhetoric, Systemic Functional Linguistics, media and critical cultural studies, sociology, phenomenology, enunciation theory, the Geneva school of educational sequences, cognitive psychology, relevance theory, sociocultural psychology, activity theory, Gestalt psychology, and schema theory. Sections are devoted to theoretical issues, studies of genres in the professions, studies of genre and media, teaching and learning genre, and writing across the curriculum. The broad selection of material in this volume displays the full range of contemporary genre studies and sets the ground for a next generation of work.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBazerman, Charleseeditor1 aBonini, Adaireeditor1 aFigueiredo, Déboraeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/305zAccess online version07051nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245009300186264004300279264006900322264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505450500568520110805073542003906181546001606220588004006236650002606276650002406302700002406326700003406350700002806384700002406412700002506436700002906461710003906490856007606529OTLid0000306MnU20260406020711.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602353541  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aBazerman, Charleseauthor00aInternational Advances in Writing ResearchbCultures, Places, MeasurescCharles Bazerman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction, Charles Bazerman, Karen Lunsford, and Paul Rogers -- Section 1. Pedagogical Approaches, Paul Rogers -- Chapter 1. Academic Writing Instruction in Australian Tertiary Education: The Early Years, Kate Chanock -- Chapter 2. Teacher's Perceptions of English Language Writing Instruction in China, Danling Fu and Marylou Matoush -- Chapter 3. Access and Teachers' Perceptions of Professional Development in Writing, Sarah J. McCarthey, Rebecca L. Woodard, and Grace Kang -- Chapter 4. Multimodality in Subtitling for the Deaf and the Hard-of-Hearing Education in Brazil, Vera Lúcia Santiago Araújo -- Section 2. Assessment, Charles Bazerman -- Chapter 5. Rethinking K-12 Writing Assessment to Support Best Instructional Practices, Paul Deane, John Sabatini, and Mary Fowles -- Chapter 6. Automated Essay Scoring and The Search for Valid Writing Assessment, Andrew Klobucar, Paul Deane, Norbert Elliot, Chaitanya Ramineni, Perry Deess, and Alex Rudniy -- Chapter 7. Construct Validity, Length, Score, and Time in Holistically Graded Writing Assessments: The Case against Automated Essay Scoring (AES), Les Perelman -- Chapter 8. The Politics of Research and Assessment in Writing, Peggy O'Neill, Sandy Murphy, and Linda Adler-Kassner -- Chapter 9. Prominent Feature Analysis: Linking Assessment and Instruction, Sherry S. Swain, Richard L. Graves, David T. Morse, and Kimberly J. Patterson -- Chapter 10. "A Matter of Personal Taste": Teachers' Constructs of Writing Quality in the Secondary School English Classroom, Helen Lines -- Section 3. Writing at the Borders of School and the World, Paul Rogers -- Chapter 11. The Reality of Fiction-writing in Situations of Political Violence, Colette Daiute -- Chapter 12. Naming in Pupil Writings (9 to 14 Years Old), Christina Romain and Marie-Noëlle Roubaud -- Chapter 13. Does the Internet Connect Writing in and out of Educational Settings? Views of Norwegian students on the Threshold of Higher Education, Hávard Skaar -- Chapter 14. Sponsoring "Green" Subjects: The World Bank's 2009 Youth Essay Contest, Anne E. Porter -- Chapter 15. Metaphors of Writing and Intersections with Jamaican Male Identity, Carmeneta Jones and Vivette Milson-Whyte -- Section 4. Writing the borders of school and professional practice, Karen Lunsford -- Chapter 16. Transcending the Border between Classroom and Newsroom: An Inquiry into the Efficacy of Newspaper Editing Practices, Yvonne Stephens -- Chapter 17. Teachers as Editors, Editors as Teachers, Angela M. Kohnen -- Chapter 18. Academic Genres in University Contexts: An Investigation of Students' Book Reviews Writing as Classroom Assignments, Antonia Dilamar Araújo -- Chapter 19. Learning Careers and Enculturation: Production of Scientific Papers by PhD Students in a Mexican Physiology Laboratory: An Exploratory Case Study, Alma Carrasco, Rollin Kent, and Nancy Keranen -- Section 5. Scientific and Academic Practice, Charles Bazerman -- Chapter 20. The Life Cycle of the Scientific Writer: An Investigation of the Senior Academic Scientist as Writer in Australasian Universities, Lisa Emerson -- Chapter 21. Publication Practices and Multilingual Professionals in US Universities: Towards Critical Perspectives on Administration and Pedagogy, Missy Watson -- Chapter 22. Immersed in the Game of Science: Beliefs, Emotions, and Strategies of NNES Scientists who Regularly Publish in English, Nancy Keranen, Fatima Encinas, and Charles Bazerman -- Chapter 23. Critical Acts in Published and Unpublished Research Article Introductions in English: A Look into the Writing for Publication Process, Pilar Mur-Dueñas -- Chapter 24. Towards an Integrative Unit of Analysis: Regulation Episodes in Expert Research Article Writing, Anna Iñesta and Montserrat Castelló -- Chapter 25. Producing Scholarly Texts: Writing in English in a Politically Stigmatized Country, Mehdi Riazi -- Chapter 26. The Evaluation of Conference Paper Proposals in Linguistics, Françoise Boch, Fanny Rinck, and Aurélie Nardy -- Section 6. Cultures of Writing in the Workplace, Karen Lunsford -- Chapter 27. Genre and Generic Labor, Clay Spinuzzi -- Chapter 28. Construction of Caring Identities in the New Work Order, Zoe Nikolaidou and Anna-Malin Karlsson -- Chapter 29. Online Book Reviews and Emerging Generic Conventions: A Situated Study of Authorship, Publishing, and Peer Review, Tim Laquintano -- Chapter 30. Coming to Grips with Complexity: Dynamic Systems Theory in the Research of Newswriting, Daniel Perrin0 aThe thirty chapters in this edited collection were selected from the more than 500 presentations at the Writing Research Across Borders II Conference in 2011. With representatives from more than forty countries, this conference gave rise to the International Society for the Advancement of Writing Research. The chapters selected for this collection represent cutting edge research on writing from all regions, organized around three themes—cultures, places, and measures. The authors report research that considers writing in all levels of schooling, in science, in the public sphere, and in the workplace, as well as at the relationship among these various places of writing. The authors also consider the cultures of writing—among them national cultures, gender cultures, schooling cultures, scientific cultures, and cultures of the workplace. Finally, the chapters examine various ways of measuring writing and how these measures interact with practices of teaching and learning.Edited by Charles Bazerman, Chris Dean, Jessica Early, Karen Lunsford, Suzie Null, Paul Rogers, and Amanda Stansell.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aDean, Chriseauthor1 aEarly, Jessica Singereauthor1 aLunsford, Kareneauthor1 aNull, Suzieeauthor1 aRogers, Pauleauthor1 aStansell, Amandaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/306zAccess online version02599nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245007900186264004300265264006900308264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505065000554520076101204542003901965546001602004588004002020650002602060650002402086710003902110856007602149OTLid0000307MnU20260406020413.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602354753  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aBazerman, Charleseauthor02aA Rhetoric of Literate ActionbLiterate ActioncCharles BazermannVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction -- Chapter 1. Rhetorics of Speaking and Writing -- Chapter 2. Knowing Where You Are: Genre -- Chapter 3. When You Are -- Chapter 4. The World of Texts: Intertextuality -- Chapter 5. Changing the Landscape: Kairos, Social Facts, and Speech Acts -- Chapter 6. Emergent Motives, Situations, Forms -- Chapter 7. Text Strategics -- Chapter 8. Emergent Form and the Processes of Forming Meaning -- Chapter 9. Meanings and Representations -- Chapter 10.Spaces and Journeys for Readers: Organization and Movement -- Chapter 11. Style and Revision -- Chapter 12. Managing Writing Processes and the Emergent Text -- References0 aThe first in a two-volume set, A Rhetoric of Literate Action is written for "the experienced writer with a substantial repertoire of skills, [who] now would find it useful to think in more fundamental strategic terms about what they want their texts to accomplish, what form the texts might take, how to develop specific contents, and how to arrange the work of writing." The reader is offered a framework for identifying and understanding the situations writing comes out of and is directed toward; a consideration of how a text works to transform a situation and achieve the writer's motives; and advice on how to bring the text to completion and "how to manage the work and one's own emotions and energies so as to accomplish the work most effectively."1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/307zAccess online version02557nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245007700186264004300263264006900306264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505078900552520058201341542003901923546001601962588004001978650002602018650002402044710003902068856007602107OTLid0000308MnU20260406020413.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602354791  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aBazerman, Charleseauthor02aA Theory of Literate ActionbLiterate ActioncCharles BazermannVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction -- Chapter 1. The Symbolic Animal and the Cultural Transformation of Nature -- Chapter 2. Symbolic Selves in Society: Vygotsky on Language and Formation of the Social Mind -- Chapter 3. Active Social Symbolic Selves: Vygotskian Traditions -- Chapter 4. Active Social Symbolic Selves: The Phenomenological Sociology Tradition -- Chapter 5. Active Social Symbolic Selves: The Pragmatic Tradition within American Social Science -- Chapter 6. Social Order: Structural and Structurational Sociology -- Chapter 7. From the Interaction Order to Shared Meanings -- Chapter 8. Linguistic Orders -- Chapter 9. Utterances and Their Meanings -- Chapter 10. The World in the Text: Indexed and Created -- Chapter 11. The Writer on the Spot and on the Line -- References0 aThe second in a two-volume set, A Theory of Literate Action draws on work from the social sciences—and in particular sociocultural psychology, phenomenological sociology, and the pragmatic tradition of social science—to "reconceive rhetoric fundamentally around the problems of written communication rather than around rhetoric's founding concerns of high stakes, agonistic, oral public persuasion" (p. 3). An expression of more than a quarter-century of reflection and scholarly inquiry, this volume represents a significant contribution to contemporary rhetorical theory.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/308zAccess online version02936nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001100153100002800164245009600192264004300288264006900331264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002800522490002700550505050300577520117501080542003902255546001602294588004002310650002302350650002602373650002402399710003902423856007602462OTLid0000309MnU20260406020414.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602358010  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aPE14081 aShepley, Nathaneauthor00aPlacing the History of College WritingbStories from the Incomplete ArchivecNathan Shepley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Acknowledgments -- Chapter One: Placing History, Historicizing Place -- Chapter Two: Customizing Composition: Students Broadening Behavioral Codes -- Chapter Three: Tracking Lines of Communication: Student Writing as a Response to Civic Issues -- Chapter Four: Composition on Display: Students Performing College Competence -- Chapter Five: Rethinking Links Between Histories of Composition -- Chapter Six: Composition as Literacy, Discourse, and Rhetoric -- Works Cited -- Glossary0 aIn Placing the History of College Writing, Nathan Shepley argues that pre-1950s composition history, if analyzed with the right conceptual tools, can pluralize and clarify our understanding of the relationship between the writing of college students and the writing's physical, social, and discursive surroundings. Even if the immediate outcome of student writing is to generate academic credit, Shepley shows, the writing does more complex rhetorical work. It gives students chances to uphold or adjust institutional codes for student behavior, allows students and their literacy sponsors to respond to sociopolitical issues in a city or state, enables faculty and administrators to create strategic representations of institutional or program identities, and connects people across disciplines, occupations, and geographic locations. Shepley argues that even if many of today's composition scholars and instructors work at institutions that lack extensive historical records of the kind usually preferred by composition historians, those scholars and teachers can mine their institutional collections for signs of the various contexts with which student writing dealt.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/309zAccess online version05360nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050000900162050001100171245011700182264004300299264006900342264001200411300002200423336002600445337002600471338003600497341002800533490002700561505312500588520078503713542003904498546001604537588004004553650003304593650002504626650002704651650002604678650002404704700003304728700002604761710003904787856007604826OTLid0000310MnU20260409120451.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602355057  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aP123 4aPE140800aWAC and Second-Language WritersbResearch Towards Linguistically and Culturally Inclusive Programs and Practices 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- A Note to Readers, Michelle Cox and Terry Myers Zawacki -- Foreword: Multilinguality Across the Curriculum, Jonathan Hall -- Introduction, Michelle Cox and Terry Myers Zawacki -- Section I. Learning from/with L2 Students: Student Strengths, Coping Strategies, and Experiences as They Write Across the Curriculum -- Chapter 1. Adaptive Transfer, Writing Across the Curriculum, and Second Language Writing: Implications for Research and Teaching, Michael-John DePalma and Jeffrey M. Ringer -- Chapter 2. Developing Resources for Success: A Case Study of a Multilingual Graduate Writer, Talinn Phillips -- Chapter 3. "Hey, Did You Get That?": L2 Student Reading Across the Curriculum, Carole Center and Michelle Niestepski -- Chapter 4. Bridging the Gap between ESL Composition Programs and Disciplinary Writing: The Teaching and Learning of Summarization Skill, Qian Du -- Chapter 5. On Class, Race, and Dynamics of Privilege: Supporting Generation 1.5 Writers Across the Curriculum, Kathryn Nielsen -- Chapter 6. Writing Intensively: An Examination of the Performance of L2 Writers Across the Curriculum at an Urban Community College, Linda Hirsch -- Section II. Faculty Concerns and Expectations for L2 Writers -- Chapter 7. Negotiating "Errors" in L2 Writing: Faculty Dispositions and Language Difference, Terry Myers Zawacki and Anna Sophia Habib -- Chapter 8. "I don't know if that was the right thing to do": Cross-Disciplinary/Cross-Institutional Faculty Response to L2 Writing, Lindsey Ives, Elizabeth Leahy, Anni Leming, Tom Pierce, and Michael Schwartz -- Chapter 9. Let's See Where Your Chinese Students Come From: A Qualitative Descriptive Study of Writing in the Disciplines in China, Wu Dan -- Chapter 10. English is Not a Spectator Sport: Privileged Second Language Learners and the For-Profit ESOL Classroom, Marino Fernandes -- Chapter 11. Making Stance Explicit for Second Language Writers in the Disciplines: What Faculty Need to Know about the Language of Stancetaking, Zak Lancaster -- Chapter 12. In Response to Today's "Felt Need": WAC, Faculty Development, and Second Language Writers, Michelle Cox -- Section III. WAC Practices and Pedagogies Transformed -- Chapter 13. Developing Writing-Intensive Courses for a Globalized Curriculum through WAC-TESOL Collaborations, Megan Siczek and Shawna Shapiro -- Chapter 14. Graduate Writing Workshops: Crossing Languages and Disciplines, Elaine Fredericksen and Kate Mangelsdorf -- Chapter 15. Teaching Writing in a Globally Networked Learning Environment (GNLE): Diverse Students at a Distance, Jennifer Lynn Craig -- Chapter 16. Campus Internationalization: A Center-based Model for ESLready Programs, Karyn E. Mallett and Ghania Zgheib -- Chapter 17. Reconstructing Teacher Roles through a Transnational Lens: Learning with/in the American University of Beirut, Amy Zenger, Joan Mullin, and Carol Peterson Haviland -- Chapter 18. Writing Histories: Lingua Franca English in a Swedish Graduate Program, Thomas Lavelle and Alan Shima -- Afterword: Writing Globally, Right Here, Right Now, Chris Thaiss -- Notes on Editors and Contributors0 aIn WAC and Second-Language Writers, the editors and contributors pursue the ambitious goal of including within WAC theory, research, and practice the differing perspectives, educational experiences, and voices of second-language writers. The chapters within this collection not only report new research but also share a wealth of pedagogical, curricular, and programmatic practices relevant to second-language writers. Representing a range of institutional perspectives—including those of students and faculty at public universities, community colleges, liberal arts colleges, and English-language schools—and a diverse set of geographical and cultural contexts, the editors and contributors report on work taking place in the United States, Asia, Europe, and the Middle East.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aZawacki, Terry Myerseeditor1 aCox, Michelleeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/310zAccess online version03778nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001000162245007000172264004300242264006900285264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505160800531520085702139542003902996546001603035588004003051650002503091650003303116650003603149700002703185700002903212710003903241856007603280OTLid0000311MnU20260316020404.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602358096  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aLC98000aWAC Partnerships Between Secondary and Postsecondary Institutions 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Foreword -- Acknowledgments -- Serenade in a Kansas Wind, Malcolm Childers -- Chapter 1: Introduction to WAC and Partnerships That Cross Academic Levels and Disciplines, Jacob S. Blumner and Pamela B. Childers -- Chapter 2: Talking about Writing Across the Secondary and College Community, Michelle Cox and Phyllis Gimbel -- Chapter 3: Newton's Third Law Revisited: Action Reaction Pairs in Collaboration, Michael J. Lowry -- Chapter 4: Shaping Disciplinary Discourses in High School: A Two-Way Collaborative Writing Program, Federico Navarro and Andrea Revel Chion -- Chapter 5: Collaborating on Writing-to-Learn in Ninth-Grade Science: What Is Collaboration—and How Can We Sustain It?, Danielle Myelle-Watson, Deb Spears, David Wellen, Michael McClellan, and Brad Peters -- Chapter 6: In Our Own Backyard: What Makes a Community College-Secondary School Connection Work?, Mary McMullen-Light -- Chapter 7: Negotiating Expectations: Overcoming Obstacles Introducing WAC through Collaboration between a German University Writing Center and German High Schools, Luise Beaumont, Mandy Pydde, and Simone Tschirpke -- Chapter 8: "So Much More Than Just an 'A'": A Transformative High School and University Writing Center Partnership, Marie Hansen, Debra Hartley, Kirsten Jamsen, Katie Levin, and Kristen Nichols-Besel -- Chapter 9: "Oh, I Get By with a Little Help from My Friends": Short-Term Writing Center/Community Collaborations, Trixie G. Smith -- Chapter 10: What We Have Learned about WAC Partnerships and Their Futures, Jacob S. Blumner and Pamela B. Childers -- Contributors0 aWorking with educators at all academic levels involved in WAC partnerships, the authors and editors of this collection demonstrate successful models of collaboration between schools and institutions so others can emulate and promote this type of collaboration. The chapters in this collection describe and reflect on collaborative partnerships among middle schools, high schools, colleges, and universities that are designed to prepare students for the kinds of work and civic engagement required to succeed in and contribute to society. The WAC partnerships celebrated in this collection include frameworks to build connectivity between institutions while addressing Common Core State Standards, academic and non-academic collaborations around science education, WAC partnerships in Argentina and Germany, and both long- and short-term collaborations.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks1 aBlumner, Jacobeeditor1 aChilders, Pamelaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/311zAccess online version07451nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001100162100002800173245009900201264004300300264006900343264001200412300002200424336002600446337002600472338003600498341002800534490002700562505510200589520090405691542003906595546001606634588004006650650002506690650002606715650003306741650002406774700003006798700002206828700002806850710003906878856007606917OTLid0000312MnU20260406020710.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781602357617  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aLillis, Theresaeauthor00aWorking With Academic LiteraciesbCase Studies Towards Transformative PracticecTheresa Lillis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction, Theresa Lillis, Kathy Harrington, Mary R. Lea and Sally Mitchell -- Section 1. Transforming Pedagogies of Academic Writing and Reading -- Introduction to Section 1 -- A Framework for Usable Pedagogy: Case Studies Towards Accessibility, Criticality and Visibility, Julio Gimenez and Peter Thomas -- Working With Power: A Dialogue about Writing Support Using Insights from Psychotherapy, Lisa Clughen and Matt Connell -- An Action Research Intervention Towards Overcoming "Theory Resistance" in Photojournalism Students, Jennifer Good -- Student-Writing Tutors: Making Sense of "Academic Literacies", Joelle Adams -- "Hidden Features" and "Overt Instruction" in Academic Literacy Practices: A Case Study in Engineering, Adriana Fischer -- Making Sense of my Thesis: Master's Level Thesis Writing as Constellation of Joint Activities, Kathrin Kaufhold -- Thinking Creatively About Research Writing, Cecile Badenhorst, Cecilia Moloney, Jennifer Dyer, Janna Rosales and Morgan Murray -- Disciplined Voices, Disciplined Feelings: Exploring Constraints and Choices in a Thesis Writing Circle, Kate Chanock, Sylvia Whitmore and Makiko Nishitani -- How Can the Text Be Everything? Reflecting on Academic Life and Literacies, Sally Mitchell talking with Mary Scott -- Section 2. Transforming the Work of Teaching -- Introduction to Section 2 -- Opening up The Curriculum: Moving from The Normative to The Transformative in Teachers' Understandings of Disciplinary Literacy Practices, Cecilia Jacobs -- Writing Development, Co-Teaching and Academic Literacies: Exploring the Connections, Julian Ingle and Nadya Yakovchuk -- Transformative and Normative? Implications for Academic Literacies Research in Quantitative Disciplines, Moragh Paxton and Vera Frith -- Learning from Lecturers: What Disciplinary Practice Can Teach Us About "Good" Student Writing, Maria Leedham -- Thinking Critically and Negotiating Practices in the Disciplines, David Russell in conversation with Sally Mitchell -- Academic Writing in an ELF Environment: Standardization, Accommodation—or Transformation?, Laura McCambridge -- "Doing Something that's Really Important": Meaningful Engagement as a Resource for Teachers' Transformative Work with Student Writers in the Disciplines, Jackie Tuck -- The Transformative Potential of Laminating Trajectories: Three Teachers' Developing Pedagogical Practices and Identities, Kevin Roozen, Paul Prior, Rebecca Woodard and Sonia Kline -- Marking the Boundaries: Knowledge and Identity in Professional Doctorates, Jane Creaton -- What's at Stake in Different Traditions? Les Littéracies Universitaires and Academic Literacies, Isabelle Delcambre in conversation with Christiane Donahue -- Section 3. Transforming Resources, Genres and Semiotic Practices -- Introduction to Section 3 -- Genre as a Pedagogical Resource at University, Fiona English -- How Drawing Is Used to Conceptualize and Communicate Design Ideas in Graphic Design: Exploring Scamping Through a Literacy Practice Lens, Lynn Coleman -- "There is a Cage Inside My Head and I Cannot Let Things Out", Fay Stevens -- Blogging to Create Multimodal Reading and Writing Experiences in Postmodern Human Geographies, Claire Penketh and Tasleem Shakur -- Working with Grammar as a Tool for Making Meaning, Gillian Lazar and Beverley Barnaby -- Digital Posters—Talking Cycles for Academic Literacy, Diane Rushton, Cathy Malone and Andrew Middleton -- Telling Stories: Investigating the Challenges to International Students' Writing Through Personal Narrative, Helen Bowstead -- Digital Writing as Transformative: Instantiating Academic Literacies in Theory and Practice, Colleen McKenna -- Looking at Academic Literacies from a Composition Frame: From Spatial to Spatio-temporal Framing of Difference, Bruce Horner in conversation with Theresa Lillis -- Section 4. Transforming Institutional Framings of Academic Writing -- Introduction to Section 4 -- Transforming Dialogic Spaces in an "Elite" Institution: Academic Literacies, the Tutorial and High-Achieving Students, Corinne Boz -- The Political Act of Developing Provision for Writing in the Irish Higher Education Context, Lawrence Cleary and Íde O'Sullivan -- Building Research Capacity through an AcLits-Inspired Pedagogical Framework, Lia Blaj-Ward -- Academic Literacies at the Institutional Interface: A Prickly Conversation Around Thorny Issues, Joan Turner -- Revisiting the Question of Transformation in Academic Literacies: The Ethnographic Imperative, Brian Street in conversation with Mary R. Lea and Theresa Lillis -- Resisting the Normative? Negotiating Multilingual Identities in a Course for First Year Humanities Students in Catalonia, Spain, Angels Oliva-Girbau and Marta Milian Gubern -- Academic Literacies and the Employability Curriculum: Resisting Neoliberal Education?, Catalina Neculai -- A Cautionary Tale about a Writing Course for Schools, Kelly Peake and Sally Mitchell -- "With writing, you are not expected to come from your home": Dilemmas of Belonging, Lucia Thesen -- AC Lits Say -- List of contributors0 aThe editors and contributors to this collection explore what it means to adopt an "academic literacies" approach in policy and pedagogy. Transformative practice is illustrated through case studies and critical commentaries from teacher-researchers working in a range of higher education contexts—from undergraduate to postgraduate levels, across disciplines, and spanning geopolitical regions including Australia, Brazil, Canada, Cataluña, Finland, France, Ireland, Portugal, South Africa, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Key questions addressed include: How can a wider range of semiotic resources and technologies fruitfully serve academic meaning and knowledge making? What kinds of writing spaces do we need and how can these be facilitated? How can theory and practice from "Academic Literacies" be used to open up debate about writing pedagogy at institutional and policy levels?1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aHarrington, Kathyeauthor1 aLea, Maryeauthor1 aMitchell, Sallyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/312zAccess online version02643nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002900154245003600183264004300219264005000262264001200312300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341002800434490002700462505036500489520107300854542002701927546001601954588004001970650003202010700003102042700003002073700002702103710003902130856007602169OTLid0000313MnU20260406020243.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783952334102  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBlack, Andrew P.eauthor00aSqueak by ExamplecAndrew Black 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBern, SwitzerlandbUniversity of Bernc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Getting Started -- 1 A quick tour of Squeak -- 2 A first application -- 3 Syntax in a nutshell -- 4 Understanding message syntax -- II Developing in Squeak -- 5 The Smalltalk object model -- 6 The Squeak programming environment -- 7 SUnit -- 8 Basic Classes -- 9 Collections -- 10 Streams -- 11 Morphic -- III Advanced Squeak -- 12 Classes and metaclasses --0 aSqueak is a modern open-source development environment for the classic Smalltalk-80 programming language. Despite being the first purely object-oriented language and environment, Smalltalk is in many ways still far ahead of its successors in promoting a vision of an environment where everything is an object, and anything can change at run-time. Squeak by Example, intended for both students and developers, will guide you gently through the Squeak language and environment by means of a series of examples and exercises. The book helps you get started with A Quick Tour of Squeak and guides you through A First Application. The Smalltalk language is introduced in three chapters on Syntax in a Nutshell, Understanding Message Syntax and The Smalltalk Object Model. Development with Squeak is covered in The Squeak Programming Environment and SUnit. Several of the key classes are presented in chapters on Basic Classes, Collections, Streams and Morphic. The first edition of the book concludes with chapters on Classes and Metaclasses and Frequently Asked Questions.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aDucasse, Stéphaneeauthor1 aNierstrasz, Oscareauthor1 aPollet, Damieneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/313zAccess online version02659nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003100154245004400185264004300229264004500272264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505042800494520102200922542002701944546001601971588004001987650003202027700003002059700002602089700003102115710003902146856007602185OTLid0000314MnU20260323020312.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781365654596  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDucasse, Stéphaneeauthor00aPharo by Example 5.0cStéphane Ducasse 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLille, FrancebStéphane Ducassec[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface -- 2 A quick tour of Pharo -- 3 A first application -- 4 Syntax in a nutshell -- 5 Understanding message syntax -- 6 The Pharo object model -- 7 Some of the key tools of the Pharo environment -- 8 Sharing code and source control -- 9 S Unit -- 10 Basic classes -- 11 Collections -- 12 Streams -- 13 Morphic -- 14 Seaside by example -- 15 Classes and metaclasses -- 16 Reflection -- 17 Regular expressions in Pharo0 aPharo is an open-source, elegant and pure object-oriented language that supports truly immersive and life programming experience. Pharo offers excellent tools such as hot-debuggers and on the fly code update that change the programming experience. More at http://www.pharo.org.Pharo is a powerful language and IDE that companies use to deliver complex business-effective applications. More at: http://www.pharo.org/success In Pharo everything is an object, and anything can change at run-time under your fingers. Pharo is written in itself you can explore a complete world. You can feel and talk to objects. But Pharo does not stop there, with Pharo you can improve your object-oriented skills by rediscovering the essence of object-oriented programming. Pharo by Example 50, intended for both students and developers, will guide you gently through the Pharo language and environment by means of a series of examples and exercises. This book is available under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 license.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aZagidulin, Dmitrieauthor1 aHess, Nicolaieauthor1 aChloupis, Dimitriseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/314zAccess online version02423nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003000154245003800184264004300222264007700265264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505066900519520052301188542002701711546001601738588004001754650003201794700002701826700003101853700002601884710003901910856007601949OTLid0000315MnU20260406020409.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783952334164  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBergel, Alexandreeauthor00aDeep into PharocAlexandre Bergel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSquare Bracket Associatesc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface -- I Libraries -- 2 Zero Configuration Scripts and Command-Line Handlers -- 3 Files with FileSystem -- 4 Sockets -- 5 The Settings Framework -- 6 Regular Expressions in Pharo -- II Source Management -- 7 Versioning Your Code with Monticello -- 8 Gofer: Scripting Package Loading -- 9 Managing Projects with Metacello -- III Frameworks -- 10 Glamour -- 11 Agile Visualization with Roassal -- 12 Scripting Visualizations with Mondrian -- IV Language -- 13 Handling Exceptions 263 -- 14 Blocks: a Detailed Analysis -- 15 Exploring Little Numbers -- 16 Fun with Floats -- V Tools -- 17 Profiling Applications -- 18 PetitParser: Building Modular Parsers -- --0 aPharo is a clean, innovative, open-source, live-programming environment. Deep into Pharois the second volume of a series of books covering Pharo. Whereas the first volume is intended for newcomers, this second volume covers deeper topics.You will learn about Pharo frameworks and libraries such as Glamour, PetitParser, Roassal, FileSystem, Regex, and Socket. You will explore the language with chapters on exceptions, blocks, small integers, and floats. You will discover tools such as profilers, Metacello and Gofer.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aCassou, Damieneauthor1 aDucasse, Stéphaneeauthor1 aLaval, Jannikeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/315zAccess online version02046nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003000154245005600184264004300240264004700283264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505028900507520065400796542003001450546001601480588004101496650003201537710003901569856007601608OTLid0000316MnU20260406020336.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780692700877  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCorrell, Nikolauseauthor00aIntroduction to Autonomous RobotscNikolaus Correll 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoulder, ColoradobNikolaus Correllc2020. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Locomotion and Manipulation -- 3 Forward and Inverse Kinematics -- 4 Path Planning -- 5 Sensors -- 6 Vision -- 7 Feature extraction -- 8 Uncertainty and Error Propagation -- 9 Localization -- 10 Grasping -- 11 Simultaneous Localization and Mapping -- 12 RGB-D SLAM0 aThis book introduces concepts in mobile, autonomous robotics to 3rd-4th year students in Computer Science or a related discipline. The book covers principles of robot motion, forward and inverse kinematics of robotic arms and simple wheeled platforms, perception, error propagation, localization and simultaneous localization and mapping. The cover picture shows a wind-up toy that is smart enough to not fall off a table just using intelligent mechanism design and illustrate the importance of the mechanism in designing intelligent, autonomous systems. This book is open source, open to contributions, and released under a creative common license.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/316zAccess online version02346nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002800137245007300165264004300238264007800281264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505043700536520071200973542004101685546001601726588004001742650002401782700002701806700002401833710003901857856007601896OTLid0000317MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aMelrose, Sherrieauthor00aCreative Clinical Teaching In The Health ProfessionscSherri Melrose 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAthabasca University Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Theoretical Foundations of Teaching and Learning -- Chapter Two: Where Do I Fit In? Articulating a Personal Philosophy -- Chapter Three: The Clinical Learning Environment -- Chapter Four: Professional Socialization of Health Care Professionals -- Chapter Five: Technology Enhanced Clinical Education -- Chapter Six: Evaluation of Learning -- Chapter Seven: Preceptors: Essential to Learner Success -- Author Information0 aThis peer reviewed e-book is a must-read for nurses and other health professionals who strive to teach with creativity and excellence in clinical settings. Each chapter presents current evidence informed educational practice knowledge. Each topic is also presented with text boxes describing ‘Creative Strategies' that clinical teachers from across Canada have successfully implemented. For those who are interested in background knowledge, the authors provided a comprehensive literature base. And, for those interested mainly in 'what to do,' the text box summaries offer step-by-step directions for creative, challenging activities that both new and experienced instructors can begin using immediately.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPark, Carolineeauthor1 aPerry, Betheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/317zAccess online version03273nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100002400161245003600185250000700221264004300228264006400271264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002500457490002700482505083200509520121501341542004102556546001602597588004002613650003302653650003102686700003102717710003902748856007602787OTLid0000318MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961584792  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aKrutz, Gleneauthor00aAmerican GovernmentcGlen Krutz  a4e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Unit 1: Students and the System -- Chapter 1: American Government and Civic Engagement -- Chapter 2: The Constitution and Its Origins -- Chapter 3: American Federalism -- Unit 2: Individual Agency and Action -- Chapter 4: Civil Liberties -- Chapter 5: Civil Rights -- Chapter 6: The Politics of Public Opinion -- Chapter 7: Voting and Elections -- Unit 3: Toward Collective Action: Mediating Institutions -- Chapter 8: The Media -- Chapter 9: Political Parties -- Chapter 10: Interest Groups and Lobbying -- Unit 4: Delivering Collective Action: Formal Institutions -- Chapter 11: Congress -- Chapter 12: The Presidency -- Chapter 13: The Courts -- Chapter 14: State and Local Government -- Unit 5: The Outputs of Government -- Chapter 15: The Bureaucracy -- Chapter 16: Domestic Policy -- Chapter 17: Foreign Policy0 aAmerican Government 4e aligns with the topics and objectives of many government courses. The authors have worked to develop meaningful and memorable explanations, narratives, and examples regarding the actions, workings, and outputs of government. The offering focuses on the real-world impact of government, and presents the importance and benefits of civic engagement by students. This book follows a logical progression from the fundamental principles of institutional design at the founding, to avenues of political participation, to thorough coverage of political structures. American Government 4e is designed to continually build upon what students have already learned and emphasizes connections between topics as well as between theory and applications. The goal of each section is to enable students not just to recognize concepts, but to work with them in ways that will be useful in later courses, future careers, and as engaged citizens. In order to help students understand the ways that government, society, and individuals interconnect, the revision includes updated information on the 2024 election results, recent court decisions and legal actions, and new opportunities for civic engagement.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aWaskiewicz, Sylvieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/318zAccess online version03303nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100003200167245004600199250001600245264004300261264007400304264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505077500555520127901330542004102609546001602650588004002666650002402706650002602730700002202756710003902778856007602817OTLid0000319MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780997920178  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aSkripak, Stephen J.eauthor00aFundamentals of BusinesscStephen Skripak  a4th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Teamwork in Business -- Chapter 2 The Foundations of Business -- Chapter 3 Economics and Business -- Chapter 4 Ethics and Social Responsibility -- Chapter 5 Business in a Global Environment -- Chapter 6 Forms of Business Ownership -- Chapter 7 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Development -- Chapter 8 Management and Leadership -- Chapter 9 Structuring Organizations -- Chapter 10 Operations Management -- Chapter 11 Motivating Employees -- Chapter 12 Managing Human Resources -- Chapter 13 Union/Management Issues -- Chapter 14 Marketing: Providing Value to Customers -- Chapter 15 Pricing Strategy -- Chapter 16 Hospitality and Tourism -- Chapter 17 Accounting and Financial Information -- Chapter 18 Personal Finances -- Chapter 19 Technology in Business0 aFundamentals of Business, 4th Edition is an open education resource intended to serve as a no-cost, faculty-customizable primary text for one-semester undergraduate introductory business courses. It covers the following topics in business: Teamwork; economics; ethics; entrepreneurship; business ownership, management, and leadership; organizational structures and operations management; human resources and motivating employees; managing in labor union contexts; marketing and pricing strategy; hospitality and tourism, accounting and finance, personal finances, and technology in business. The textbook was designed for use in Virginia Tech’s Pamplin College of Business introductory level business course, MGT1104 Foundations of Business and is shared under a Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial ShareAlike 4.0 license. If you are an instructor reviewing, adopting, or adapting this textbook, please help us understand your use by filling out this form http://bit.ly/business-interest. A testbank is now available by request for this book: http://hdl.handle.net/10919/93404. The testbank covers chapters 1-18 and (currently) aligns to previous editions of the textbook. It is available to any instructor who has adopted Fundamentals of Business in their course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aPoff, Roneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/319zAccess online version02671nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002900140245004900169250001800218264004300236264007600279264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505050600529520102801035542004102063546001602104588004002120650003402160710003902194856007602233OTLid0000320MnU20260406020818.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aGermain, Gregoryeauthor00aBankruptcy Law and PracticecGregory Germain  aFifth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: A World without Bankruptcy -- Chapter 2: Secured Claims -- Chapter 3: The Bankruptcy System -- Chapter 4: The Bankruptcy Estate -- Chapter 5: Exemptions -- Chapter 6: The Automatic Stay -- Chapter 7: Operating the Estate -- Chapter 8: Enhancing the Estate -- Chapter 9: Secured Claims in Bankruptcy -- Chapter 10: Unsecured Claims in Bankruptcy -- Chapter 11: The Discharge -- Chapter 12: Wage Earner Reorganizations under Chapter 13 -- Chapter 13: Business Reorganizations under Chapter 110 aThis is the Fifth Edition of Bankruptcy Law and Practice, a Casebook Designed to Train Lawyers for the Practice of Bankruptcy Law. It is designed for a one-semester course in debtor/creditor law and bankruptcy. The book deals with both creditor remedies and debtor protections, starting with state law collection remedies, exemptions, and the important special protections for secured creditors under both Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code and state real property recording acts. After a thorough review of state law debt collection practice, the book covers the basics of straight bankruptcy law with a focus on Chapter 7 of the Bankruptcy Code, both for individuals and businesses. Although the book has a practice focus, it covers the major Supreme Court cases (including those decided in June 2024), and important appellate cases with an emphasis on areas of uncertainty. The book also emphasizes the Bankruptcy Code itself, using problem sets to get students to work through the language of the Bankruptcy Code.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/320zAccess online version03522nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002700140245007800167250001600245264004300261264007500304264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002500501490002700526505026300553520205800816542004102874546001602915588004002931650003402971700002803005710003903033856007603072OTLid0000321MnU20260406020840.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aSteenken, Beaueauthor00aSources of American LawbAn Introduction to Legal ResearchcBeau Steenken  a8th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- The United States Legal System -- Introduction to Electronic Research -- Constitutions & Statutes -- Judicial Opinions & Common Law -- Updating Sources of Law -- Advanced Electronic Research -- Secondary Sources -- The Research Process -- Glossary0 aAt its most basic definition the practice of law comprises conducting research to find relevant rules of law and then applying those rules to the specific set of circumstances faced by a client. However, in American law, the legal rules to be applied derive from myriad sources, complicating the process and making legal research different from other sorts of research. This text introduces first-year law students to the new kind of research required to study and to practice law. It seeks to demystify the art of legal research by following a “Source and Process” approach. First, the text introduces students to the major sources of American law and describes the forms the various authorities traditionally took in print. After establishing this base, the text proceeds to instruct students on the methods they will most likely use in practice, namely electronic research techniques and the consultation of secondary sources. Sources of Law incorporates screencasts currently hosted on YouTube that actively demonstrate the processes described in the static text. Finally, the text illustrates how the different pieces come together in the legal research process. Sources of Law focuses on realistic goals for 1Ls to learn in a relatively small amount of instruction time, and so focuses mainly on the basics. It does introduce some advanced material so that 1Ls can recognize pieces of information they may encounter in research, but it does not fully cover researching materials outside the scope of the traditional 1L course. As such, it is best-suited for introductory legal research courses for 1Ls. What's New in the Eighth Edition: The Eighth Edition primarily expands Chapter 9’s discussion of the research process to compare currently available legal generative AI tools to previously existing research tools such as secondary sources and electronic citators. That expansion also addresses some of the AI tools’ limitations and further discusses how thoughtful evaluation of available research tools can affect the research process.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aBrooks, Tina M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/321zAccess online version04940nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002900150245003100179264004300210264007600253264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505098200503520280701485542004104292546001604333588004004349650003404389650002804423710003904451856007604490OTLid0000322MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aLewis, Browne C.eauthor00aLaw of WillscBrowne Lewis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I – The Intestacy System -- Chapter One: Ethically Representing the Elderly Client -- Chapter Two: Intestacy System (Basic Overview) -- Chapter Three: Intestacy System (Surviving Spouse) -- Chapter Four: The Intestacy System (Marital and Adopted Children) -- Chapter Five: Intestacy (Non-Marital Children, Stepchildren and Foster Children) -- Chapter Six: Intestacy (Children of Assisted Reproductive Technology) -- Part II —The Testacy System -- Chapter Seven: Testamentary Freedom -- Chapter Eight: Disinheritance -- Chapter Nine: Testamentary Capacity (Mental Competency and Insane Delusion) -- Chapter Ten: Testamentary Capacity (Undue Influence, Duress and Fraud) -- Chapter Eleven: Attested Wills -- Chapter Twelve: Non-Attested Wills -- Chapter Thirteen: Additional Doctrines Impacting Wills -- Chapter Fourteen: Mistakes and Curative Doctrines -- Chapter Fifteen: The Stale Will Problem -- Part III — Nonprobate Transfers -- Chapter Sixteen: Will Substitutes0 aThe purpose of this casebook is to train law students to think and act like probate attorneys. This book is meant to be used in conjunction with the author's book on the law of trusts. This book's focus is problem-solving and legal application; the book includes numerous problems, so law students can learn to apply the law they learn from reading the cases. It also contains collaborative learning exercises to encourage students to engage in group problem-solving. The book is divided into three parts to reflect the main types of issues that students will encounter if they practice probate law. The book's organization mirrors the manner in which probate law is practiced in the real world. The book starts with an examination of the intestacy system because the majority of people die without executing a will. Therefore, most of the legal issues a probate lawyer faces center around the intestacy system. Unlike the typical wills casebook, this book provides a detailed discussion of the intestacy system. A chapter on ethics is included because probate attorneys encounter ethical issues that are different from attorneys practicing in other areas of law. The second part of the book includes an exploration of the testacy system. It is arranged so professors can lead students from the client interview to the will execution. The first three chapters of this section deal with issues that directly impact the existence of the inheritance system. It analyzes a person's ability to control the disposition of his or her property after death. This serves as the students' first introduction to the power of the “dead hand”. These chapters are included to start a public policy discussion about the rights of the dead, the right of heirs, and the necessity of an inheritance system. I tell my students that, when executing a will, they must think of the ways that it can be contested. In addition, I tell them that a will can be contested on two fronts-an attack on the testator and an attack on the will. Two chapters in this part highlight the ways that the testator's ability to execute a valid will may questioned. The final chapters in this unit show the issues that can be raised to dispute the validity of the will. They also explain the different types of wills that are available. The final part of the book deals with non-probate transfers. These chapters are included to show students the other devises that people can use to distribute their property. That knowledge is important because the majority of people use these procedures to transfer their property. At the end of the semester, my students have to draft a will based upon a fact pattern that I give them. I intentionally include non-probate property in order to see if they will attempt to distribute that using the will.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/322zAccess online version02200nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100003200158245003800190250002200228264004300250264007600293264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002500491490002700516505065700543520038001200542004101580546001601621588004001637650003401677710003901711856007601750OTLid0000323MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781365302886  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aKratzke, William P.eauthor00aBasic Income TaxcWilliam Kratzke  a2023-2024 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Government Raises Money: Introduction to Some Basic Concepts of Taxes and Taxing Income -- Chapter 2: What Is Gross Income: Section 61 and the Sixteenth Amendment -- Chapter 3: Exclusions from Gross Income -- Chapter 4: Loans and Cancellation of Indebtedness -- Chapter 5: Progressivity and Assignment of Income -- Chapter 6: Deductions: Business Expenses -- Chapter 7: Personal Deductions and the Standard Deduction -- Chapter 8: Tax Consequences of Divorce and Intra-Family Transactions -- Chapter 9: Timing of Income and Deductions: Annual Accounting and Accounting Principles -- Chapter 10: Character of Income and Computation of Tax0 aThis book is the 8th edition of a basic income tax text. This edition incorporates the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act of 2017. It is intended to be a readable text, suitable for a three-hour course for a class comprised of law students with widely different backgrounds. The text integrates several of the CALI drills that Professor James Edward Maule (Villanova University) prepared.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/323zAccess online version01804nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003100140245005000171264004300221264007600264264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505023500514520036900749542004101118546001601159588004101175650003401216700003601250700002901286710003901315856007601354OTLid0000324MnU20260406020244.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aDyszlewski, Nicoleeauthor00aWhat Color is Your C.F.R.?cNicole Dyszlewski 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThis coloring book is going to take a non-traditional approach to legal research. We are going to feature short legal research exercises and coloring. We hope you can start to see that legal research, like coloring, can be fun! --0 aWhat Color is Your C.F.R.? is a problem-based law workbook with a colorful twist. Conceived and written by law librarians, it uses easy to understand plain language and is a light-hearted but helpful supplement to instruction on basic legal research. The book takes a non-traditional approach to legal research and uses short legal research exercises and coloring.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aGotauco, Elizabetheillustrator1 aM. Ortiz, Raqueleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/324zAccess online version03235nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001300136100003000149245005800179250001600237264004300253264007600296264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505041300546520161900959542004102578546001602619588004002635650002502675650003402700710003902734856007602773OTLid0000325MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKF385.A41 aWitt, John Fabianeauthor00aTortsbCases, Principles, and InstitutionscJohn Witt  a6th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. An Introduction To American Tort Law -- Chapter 2. Intentionally Inflicted Physical Harms -- Chapter 3. Strict Liability And Negligence: History And Introduction -- Chapter 4. The Negligence Standard -- Chapter 5. Plaintiffs' Conduct -- Chapter 6. Causation -- Chapter 7. Proximate (“Legal”) Cause -- Chapter 8. The Duty Problem -- Chapter 9. Modern Non-Fault Liability? -- Chapter 10. Damages0 aThis is the Fifth Edition of Torts: Cases, Principles, and Institutions, a casebook for a one-semester torts course that carves out a distinctive niche in the field by focusing on the institutions and sociology of American tort law. The book retains many of the familiar features of the traditional casebook, including many of the classic cases. Like the best casebooks, it seeks to survey the theoretical principles underlying those cases. But it aims to supplement the cases and principles with editorial notes that focus students’ attention on the institutional features of our tort system, including features such as the pervasiveness of settlements, the significance of the market, the role of the plaintiff's bar, the importance of private insurance, the contingency fee, and the jury. These institutional arrangements are what make American tort law distinctive. They are how the substantive doctrines of tort law are translated into the practice of torts lawyers. And they are sociologically fascinating in their own right. TCPI integrates the institutional materials into the cases and notes rather than segregate them into separate sections of their own. It does so because its aim is not to teach the details of any one institution, such as the mechanics of the law of subrogation or workers’ compensation. Few one-semester torts classes can take up so much material. Instead, the book integrates the institutional material into the main text to draw general lessons about the massive, sprawling systems of private administration that American law has created under the umbrella of our torts system.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/325zAccess online version03919nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153100003100161245005100192264004300243264005000286264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505056500513520215401078542003003232546001603262588004003278650003803318650002603356650002403382710003903406856007603445OTLid0000326MnU20240325081923.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781621711513  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aBL11 aDongell, Joseph R.eauthor00aElementary New Testament GreekcJoseph Dongell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWilmore, KentuckybFirst Fruits Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Reading Greek Aloud -- Chapter 2: Introduction to Verbs in the Present Active Indicative -- Chapter 3: Nouns and Their Cases -- Chapter 4: The (Definite) Article -- Chapter 5: Adjectives, The Verb “to Be” and Nouns of the 1st Declension -- Chapter 6: Prepositions -- Chapter 7: Pronouns -- Chapter 8: Conjunctions -- Chapter 9: Active, Middle, Passive Voices -- Chapter 10: Imperfect Tense -- Chapter 11: The Future Tense -- Chapter 12: Aorist Tense -- Master Vocabulary List by Part of Speech -- Master Vocabulary List Alphabetical -- Paradigms0 aThe need for this particular grammar arises from the peculiar shape of the MDiv curriculum at Asbury Theological Seminary. Several years ago the faculty adopted a curriculum that required one semester of Greek and one semester of Hebrew, each as preparatory for a basic exegesis course in each discipline. It became clear after several years of trial and error that a “lexical” or “tools” approach to learning Greek and Hebrew was inadequate, no matter how skilled the instructors or how motivated the students. In today's general vacuum of grammatical training in public education across the United States, students typically enter seminary training with no knowledge of how languages work. Any training we might give them in accessing grammatical information through the use of Bible software programs will, we learned, come to naught in the absence of an understanding of just what such information actually means. We agreed that we actually needed to “teach the language itself,” at least in some rudimentary fashion, if we hoped students would make sense of grammatical and linguistic issues involved biblical interpretation. The first 12 chapters of this grammar are designed to correspond to the first semester's instructional agenda. In these chapters we introduce all the parts of speech, explain and drill the basic elements of grammar, set forth the larger verb system (excluding the perfect system), teach the tenses of the Indicative Mood only (again, excluding the perfect system), and help students build a vocabulary of all NT words occurring 100 times or more. We also lead students into the NT itself with carefully chosen examples, while at the same time guiding them in each lesson to learn the use of the standard NT lexicon [BDAG] and an exegetical grammar [Wallace's Greek Grammar Beyond the Basics]. We are well aware of the limitations of this approach, but genuinely believe that some instruction along these lines is better than none, and that such an approach provide a foundation for students interested in moving beyond the first semester (into chapters 13-24) into a firmer grasp of the language of the NT.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/326zAccess online version03902nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003000150245006200180250001900242264004300261264007600304264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002500502490002700527505103400554520161501588542004103203546001603244588004003260650002803300650003403328700002703362710003903389856007603428OTLid0000327MnU20260406020244.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aBurnham, Scott J.eauthor00aSales and LeasesbA Problem-based ApproachcScott Burnham  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Introduction to the Uniform Commercial Code and Article 1 -- Chapter 2. Introduction to UCC Article 2 -- Chapter 3. Formation of a Contract under the UCC -- Chapter 4. Battle of the Forms -- Chapter 5. Statute of Frauds -- Chapter 6. Warranties Implied by Law -- Chapter 7. Express Warranties and Warranties Given by Remote Sellers -- Chapter 8. Disclaimer of Warranties; Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act; Third Party Beneficiaries under § 2-318 -- Chapter 9. Parol Evidence Rule; Contract Modification -- Chapter 10. Delivery Terms and Title Issues -- Chapter 11. Impracticability (Excuse by Failure of Presupposed Conditions) -- Chapter 12. UCC Perfect Tender Rule; Seller's Right to Cure -- Chapter 13. Acceptance; Revocation of Acceptance -- Chapter 14. Anticipatory Repudiation -- Chapter 15. Common Law Remedy Principles and Seller's Remedies under the UCC -- Chapter 16. Buyer Remedies under the UCC -- Chapter 17. Limitation of Remedies -- Chapter 18. Statute of Limitations -- Chapter 19. Assignment and Delegation0 aSales and Leases is a coursebook for a 3-credit course in personal property sales and leases – the subject matter of UCC Articles 2 and 2A. Adjustments could be made for other credit allocations and chapters can be used on a stand-alone basis. The course is designed so that students both review the rules and principles they studied in their first-year course in Contracts and learn the rules that apply to the subset of contracts for the sale and lease of goods. Students taking this course should be well-prepared to solve legal problems in contracts and sales, and should be well-prepared for those parts of the bar exam as well. While the course in Contracts focuses on the rules of common-law contracts, the focus of this course is the rules found in legislation. Therefore, instead of emphasizing case analysis, the book contains a good deal of narrative that assists students in working through the complexity of the statutes. Students will need to supplement the book with a complete copy of the UCC that includes the Official Comments. Discussion of other statutes, such as UETA and Magnuson-Moss, is incorporated where appropriate. The approach is problem-based, which we believe is more appropriate for an upper-division course based primarily on statutes. The narrative is interspersed with problems for class discussion that require students to apply the principles and rules to particular fact situations. Many times there is an issue of interpretation or policy in the Code, however, and therefore each chapter also contains at least one case that explores an issue arising under the statute.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aJuras, Kristeneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/327zAccess online version02278nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003100136245007700167264004300244264006000287264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002500469490002700494505030900521520078300830542002701613546001601640588004101656650003201697700003201729700002801761710003901789856007601828OTLid0000328MnU20260406020244.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aStiber, Michael D.eauthor00aSignal ComputingbDigital Signals in the Software DomaincMichael Stiber 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBothell, WashingtonbMichael Stiber, Eric Larsonc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Signals in the Physical World -- Signals in the Computer -- Filtering and Feedforward Filters -- The Z-Transform and Convolution -- Feedback Filters -- Spectral Analysis -- Compression -- Audio & Video Compression and Coding -- Review and Conclusions -- Answers to Self-Test Exercises -- Index0 aIn this book, you will learn how digital signals are captured, represented, processed, communicated, and stored in computers. The specific topics we will cover include: physical properties of the source information (such as sound or images), devices for information capture (microphones, cameras), digitization, compression, digital signal representation (JPEG, MPEG), digital signal processing (DSP), signal analysis and feature extraction via re-representation as functions of frequency, and network communication. By the end of this book, you should understand the problems and solutions facing signal computing systems development in the areas of data structures and algorithms, data analytics, feature extraction, information retrieval, user interfaces, and communications.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aStiber, Bilin Zhangeauthor1 aLarson, Eric C.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/328zAccess online version03639nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002300150245005200173250001900225264004300244264007500287264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002500484490002700509505046300536520198000999542004102979546001603020588004003036650002803076650003403104710003903138856007603177OTLid0000330MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aRicks, Valeauthor04aThe Story of Contract LawbFormationcVal Ricks  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2019. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1. Consideration: Contract & Bargain -- Chapter 2. Assent-Based Niches Of Promise Enforcement: Modification And Waiver -- Chapter 3. Alternate Theories Of Recovery: Promissory Estoppel & Unjust Enrichment -- Chapter 4. Limits On Bargains: Defenses -- Chapter 5. The Push Toward Assent -- Chapter 6. Offers -- Chapter 7. Acceptances -- Chapter 8. Definiteness -- Chapter 9. Limits On The Reach Of Contract Law -- Chapter 10. Warranties0 aThis book, revised as the Third Edition July 2019, is designed to teach contract doctrine beginning with the most fundamental concepts and building on these until the structure of contract doctrine as coherent and cohesive regulation appears. The order of presentation is, in fact, the order in which contract doctrine developed historically, but it is also, in general, the order in which arguments are introduced in litigation. The book begins with the most basic, core concept of contract law—exchange. The book teaches exchange using simple cases drawn from the actual development of the exchange concept’s most obvious manifestation—the doctrine of consideration. These cases have basic but engaging facts. They do not take long to read, but they must be read carefully. They make an excellent introduction to law study. Logically, every doctrine of contract formation is centered on whether and when a fair exchange occurred. In litigation, the plaintiff alleges a promise and consideration—an exchange (a plausible one, and therefore fair enough at that point). Defenses to formation are a response to the allegation that a fair exchange occurred. Allegations of both promise and consideration show that the defendant assented. As between assent and exchange, exchange is the more fundamental concept, but because the law talks so often about assent, assent is covered at length afterward so that the function of the assent doctrines is apparent. Other doctrines, such as remedies (just an introduction in this first volume), waiver, seals, the Statute of Frauds, definiteness, and general public policy limitations are placed where students can best grasp their import in the context of the other doctrines. Along the way, most of the doctrines in the book are repeated in the cases, questions, or in class discussion. This repetition cements understanding, builds trust, and also allows students to see how the doctrines mesh together to regulate coherently.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/330zAccess online version03386nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001300136100002900149245005400178264004300232264007600275264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505049400525520173601019542002702755546001602782588004002798650002502838650003402863710003902897856007602936OTLid0000331MnU20260406020245.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKF385.A41 aJohnson, Eric E.eauthor00aTortsbCases and ContextscEric JohnsonnVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Preliminaries -- 1. Basic Concepts -- 2. An Overview of Tort Law -- Part II: Negligence -- 3. Introduction to Negligence -- 4. An Example of a Negligence Case -- 5. When and to Whom is a Duty of Care Owed -- 6. Breach of the Duty of Care -- 7. Actual Causation -- 8. Proximate Causation -- 9. Existence of an Injury -- 10. Affirmative Defenses to Negligence -- Part III: Liability Relating to Healthcare -- 11. Common Law Liability in the Healthcare Context -- 12. ERISA Preemption0 aPlain-spoken and convivial, this casebook makes a deliberate effort to explain the law, rather than to provide a mere compilation of readings and questions. Simple concepts are presented simply. Complex concepts are broken down and accompanied by examples and problems. By being clear and straightforward, the casebook aims to quickly get students to the point where they can navigate regions of gray and build nuanced arguments. The book is written from the conviction that when students stop to puzzle over something, it should be because the law itself puzzles, not because the book obfuscates. Students describe the book as easy to read. A key aim is context, with explanations of how pieces of doctrine fit into the bigger picture. There is also a continual effort to plug doctrine into the real world of practice, getting students to think about litigation strategy and tactics. Another key feature is a high-degree of organization. Doctrine is explained upfront, independent of and before the cases. After the cases, there is no notes-and-questions mishmash. Historical notes, check-your-understanding questions, questions to ponder, and problems are all separately labeled as such. The readings are rich with variety. The classic cases are here, of course. But there are also atypical readings that allow students to see tort law from different perspectives, including an opening statement, a closing argument, administrative-enforcement letters, an excerpt from a novel, and an opinion on tribal law from a Navajo court. Many selections are also startlingly modern, with facts involving texting-and-driving, alcoholic energy drinks, Facebook libel, suddenly accelerating Toyotas, and the misery of a six-hour tarmac delay.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/331zAccess online version05020nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002900140245006800169264004300237264007500280264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505171500529520218002244542004104424546001604465588004004481650003404521710003904555856007604594OTLid0000332MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aGeier, Deborah Aeauthor00aU.S. Federal Income Taxation of Individuals 2023cDeborah Geier 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2020. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit I: The Core Structures of Income and Consumption Taxation and Tax Policy -- Chapter 1: The Essential Structure of the Income Tax -- Chapter 2: Consumption Taxation and Our Hybrid Income/Consumption -- Chapter 3: Ethical Debates, Economic Theories, and Real-World -- Chapter 4: The Contours of “Capital Expenditure” v. Expense” (or Current Depreciation) -- Unit II: Two Types of Gross Income: Compensation and Residual Gross Income -- Chapter 5: § 61(a)(1) Compensation -- Chapter 6: § 61 Residual Gross Income -- Unit III: The Possibilities for Income Shifting -- Chapter 7: Gifts and Bequests -- Chapter 8: Income Shifting in the Happy and Fractured Family -- Unit IV: Everything You Ever Wanted To Know About Debt but Were Afraid To Ask -- Chapter 9: Borrowing and Lending -- Chapter 10: The Bad-Debt Deduction (for Lenders) and Debt-Discharge Income (for Borrowers) -- Chapter 11: Debt and Property -- Unit V: The Ownership and Disposition of Property -- Chapter 12: Properly Accounting for, and the Nonrecognition of, §110011 Realized Gain or Loss -- Chapter 13: Depreciation in a Realization-Based Income Tax and the Business Interest Deduction -- Chapter 14: Capital Gains and Losses -- Chapter 15: Tax Shelters -- Unit VI: Distinguishing Between Income-Producing Activities and Personal Consumption and the Personal Consumption Tax Expenditures -- Chapter 16: On Human Capital -- Chapter 17: Homes, Health, Charity, and More -- Chapter 18: Gambling and Hobby Losses -- Chapter 19: Allocating Costs Between Income Production and Personal Consumption -- Unit VII: The Taxable Year and Methods of Accounting -- Chapter 20: The Taxable Year -- Chapter 21: Methods of Accounting0 aThis is the tenth edition of this textbook, updated through December 15, 2022 for use beginning January 2023. In addition to incorporating new law and all inflation adjustments, this edition builds on updates made for the ninth edition and incorporates new charts pertaining to economic and tax data, including December 2019 CBO charts showing that income inequality between 2015 and 2020 (with the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act enacted in 2017) worsened after taxes and transfers than before taxes and transfers are taken into account. This textbook is not intended to be an exhaustive treatise; rather, it is intended to be far more useful than that for beginning tax law students by equipping the novice not merely with unmoored detail but rather with a rich blueprint that illuminates the deeper structural framework on which that detail hangs (sometimes crookedly). Chapter 1 outlines the conceptual meaning of the term income for uniquely tax purposes and examines the Internal Revenue Code provisions that translate this construct into positive law. Chapter 2 explores various forms of consumption taxation because the modern Internal Revenue Code is best perceived as a hybrid income-consumption tax that also contains many provisions that are inconsistent with both forms of taxation. Chapter 3 then provides students with the story of how we got to where we are today, important context about the distribution of the tax burden, the budget, and economic trends, as well as material on ethical debates, economic theories, and politics as they affect taxation. Armed with this larger blueprint, students are in a much better position to evaluate the myriad pieces that follow throughout the remaining 18 chapters. For example, they are in a better position to appreciate how applying the income tax rules for debt to a debt-financed investment afforded more favorable consumption tax treatment creates tax shelter problems. Stated another way, they can better appreciate how the tax system can sometimes be used to generate (or combat) unfair and economically inefficient rent-seeking behavior. eBook versions (mobi and epub) will be available for free in early January 2023.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/332zAccess online version02783nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134100002600147245007300173264004300246264008300289264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505032800549520128400877542001602161546001602177588004002193650002502233650003602258710003902294856007602333OTLid0000333MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1062.61 aLowry, Cheryleeditor00aChoosing & Using SourcesbA Guide to Academic ResearchcCheryl Lowry 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOhio State University Librariesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Research Questions -- 2. Types of Sources -- 3. Sources and Information Needs -- 4. Precision Searching -- 5. Search Tools -- 6. Evaluating Sources -- 7. Ethical Use of Sources -- 8. How to Cite Sources -- 9. Making an Argument -- 10. Writing Tips -- 11. Copyright Basics -- 12. Fair Use -- 13. Roles of Research Sources0 aChoosing & Using Sources presents a process for academic research and writing, from formulating your research question to selecting good information and using it effectively in your research assignments. Additional chapters cover understanding types of sources, searching for information, and avoiding plagiarism. Each chapter includes self-quizzes and activities to reinforce core concepts and help you apply them. There are also appendices for quick reference on search tools, copyright basics, and fair use. What experts are saying about Choosing & Using Sources: A Guide to Academic Research: “…a really fantastic contribution that offers a much needed broadened perspective on the process of research, and is packed to the brim with all kinds of resources and advice on how to effectively use them. The chapter on plagiarism is really excellent, and the chapter on searching for sources is utterly brilliant.” – Chris Manion, PhDCoordinator of Writing Across the Curriculum at Ohio State University “… an excellent resource for students, with engaging content, graphics, and examples—very compelling. The coverage of copyright is outstanding.” – J. Craig GibsonCo-chair of ACRL's Task Force on Information Literacy Competency Standards for Higher Education1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/333zAccess online version04013nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002600166245004100192250000700233264004300240264006000283264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002500465490002700490505137400517520140301891542001603294546001603310588004103326650002503367650002303392700002803415700003303443710003903476856007603515OTLid0000334MnU20260406020701.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172630  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aFlowers, Pauleauthor00aChemistrybAtoms FirstcPaul Flowers  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Essential Ideas -- Chapter 2: Atoms, Molecules, and Ions -- Chapter 3: Electronic Structure and Periodic Properties of Elements -- Chapter 4: Chemical Bonding and Molecular Geometry -- Chapter 5: Advanced Theories of Bonding -- Chapter 6: Composition of Substances and Solutions -- Chapter 7: Stoichiometry of Chemical Reactions -- Chapter 8: Gases -- Chapter 9: Thermochemistry -- Chapter 10: Liquids and Solids -- Chapter 11: Solutions and Colloids -- Chapter 12: Thermodynamics -- Chapter 13: Fundamental Equilibrium Concepts -- Chapter 14: Acid-Base Equilibria -- Chapter 15: Equilibria of Other Reaction Classes -- Chapter 16: Electrochemistry -- Chapter 17: Kinetics -- Chapter 18: Representative Metals, Metalloids, and Nonmetals -- Chapter 19: Transition Metals and Coordination Chemistry -- Chapter 20: Nuclear Chemistry -- Chapter 21: Organic Chemistry -- The Periodic Table -- Essential Mathematics -- Units and Conversion Factors -- Fundamental Physical Constants -- Water Properties -- Composition of Commercial Acids and Bases -- Standard Thermodynamic Properties for Selected Substances -- Ionization Constants of Weak Acids -- Ionization Constants of Weak Bases -- Solubility Products -- Formation Constants for Complex Ions -- Standard Electrode (Half-Cell) Potentials -- Half-Lives for Several Radioactive Isotopes -- Chapter 22: Answer Key0 aChemistry: Atoms First 2e is a peer-reviewed, openly licensed introductory textbook produced through a collaborative publishing partnership between OpenStax and the University of Connecticut and UConn Undergraduate Student Government Association. This text is an atoms-first adaptation of OpenStax Chemistry 2e. The intention of “atoms-first” involves a few basic principles: first, it introduces atomic and molecular structure much earlier than the traditional approach, and it threads these themes through subsequent chapters. This approach may be chosen as a way to delay the introduction of material such as stoichiometry that students traditionally find abstract and difficult, thereby allowing students time to acclimate their study skills to chemistry. Additionally, it gives students a basis for understanding the application of quantitative principles to the chemistry that underlies the entire course. It also aims to center the study of chemistry on the atomic foundation that many will expand upon in a later course covering organic chemistry, easing that transition when the time arrives. The second edition has been revised to incorporate clearer, more current, and more dynamic explanations, while maintaining the same organization as the first edition. Substantial improvements have been made in the figures, illustrations, and example exercises that support the text narrative.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aNeth, Edward J.eauthor1 aRobinson, William R.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/334zAccess online version03934nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000800142050001000150050000900160050000900169100003100178245004800209264004300257264005600300264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505022200533520240200755542004103157546001603198588004003214650003003254650004303284650002503327650003303352710003903385856007603424OTLid0000335MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1077115032  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aHM621 4aG128 4aJA711 aFinlayson, Caitlineauthor00aWorld Regional GeographycCaitlin Finlayson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aFredericksburg, VirginiabCaitlin Finlaysonc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Europe -- 3. Russia -- 4. North America -- 5. Middle and South America -- 6. Sub-Saharan Africa -- 7. North Africa and Southwest Asia -- 8. South Asia -- 9. East and Southeast Asia -- 10. Oceania0 aRather than present students with a broad, novice-level introduction to geography, emphasizing places and vocabulary terms, this text approaches geography as experts understand the discipline, focusing on connections and an in-depth understanding of core themes. This thematic approach, informed by pedagogical research, provides students with an introduction to thinking geographically. Instead of repeating the same several themes each chapter, this text emphasizes depth over breadth by arranging each chapter around a central theme and then exploring that theme in detail as it applies to the particular region. In addition, while chapters are designed to stand alone and be rearranged or eliminated at the instructor's discretion, the theme of globalization and inequality unites all of the regions discussed. This core focus enables students to draw connections between regions and to better understand the interconnectedness of our world. Furthermore, the focus on both globalization and inequality helps demonstrate the real-world application of the concepts discussed. Colonialism, for instance, rather than a historical relict, becomes a force that has shaped geography and informs social justice. This thematic approach is also intended to facilitate active learning and would be suitable for a flipped or team-based learning-style course since it more easily integrates case studies and higher-order thinking than the traditional model. Each chapter begins with a list of learning objectives. This text was written with the backward course design model in mind and the content of each chapter was structured around these learning objectives. Because of this backward design focus, the length of each chapter is considerably shorter than most traditional textbooks. The intention is for the instructor to supplement the text with problems, case studies, and news articles and to use the text as a springboard for discussing deeper issues. The chapters are written in an accessible style, often addressing the student directly, and the author's voice has intentionally tried to remain present in the text. Following the Washington Post's gender-inclusive style guide, the singular they is intentionally used throughout the text. Rhetorical questions are also used to help students reflect on concepts and to encourage them to dig deeper and consider concepts from different perspectives.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/335zAccess online version03679nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100003100163245007500194264004300269264005100312264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505041700540520205500957542004103012546001603053588004003069650003203109650003703141710003903178856007603217OTLid0000336MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781530051120  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aSeverance, Charleseauthor00aPython for EverybodybExploring Data Using Python 3cCharles Severance 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAnn Arbor, MichiganbCharles Severancec[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Why should you learn to write programs? -- 2 Variables, expressions, and statements -- 3 Conditional execution -- 4 Functions -- 5 Iteration -- 6 Strings -- 7 Files -- 8 Lists -- 9 Dictionaries -- 10 Tuples -- 11 Regular expressions -- 12 Networked programs -- 13 Using Web Services -- 14 Object-Oriented Programming -- 15 Using databases and SQL -- 16 Visualizing data -- A Contributions -- B Copyright Detail0 aI never seemed to find the perfect data-oriented Python book for my course, so I set out to write just such a book. Luckily at a faculty meeting three weeks before I was about to start my new book from scratch over the holiday break, Dr. Atul Prakash showed me the Think Python book which he had used to teach his Python course that semester. It is a well-written Computer Science text with a focus on short, direct explanations and ease of learning.The overall book structure has been changed to get to doing data analysis problems as quickly as possible and have a series of running examples and exercises about data analysis from the very beginning. Chapters 2–10 are similar to the Think Python book, but there have been major changes. Number-oriented examples and exercises have been replaced with data- oriented exercises. Topics are presented in the order needed to build increasingly sophisticated data analysis solutions. Some topics like try and except are pulled forward and presented as part of the chapter on conditionals. Functions are given very light treatment until they are needed to handle program complexity rather than introduced as an early lesson in abstraction. Nearly all user-defined functions have been removed from the example code and exercises outside of Chapter 4. The word “recursion”1 does not appear in the book at all. In chapters 1 and 11–16, all of the material is brand new, focusing on real-world uses and simple examples of Python for data analysis including regular expressions for searching and parsing, automating tasks on your computer, retrieving data across the network, scraping web pages for data, object-oriented programming, using web services, parsing XML and JSON data, creating and using databases using Structured Query Language, and visualizing data. The ultimate goal of all of these changes is a shift from a Computer Science to an Informatics focus is to only include topics into a first technology class that can be useful even if one chooses not to become a professional programmer.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/336zAccess online version01653nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002500163245005800188264004300246264006400289264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505017900530520029100709542001601000546001601016588004001032650003801072650004201110710003901152856007601191OTLid0000337MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781300160137  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aJohnson, Doneauthor00aFundamentals of Electrical Engineering IcDon Johnson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Signals and Systems -- 3. Analog Signal Processing -- 4. Frequency Domain -- 5. Digital Signal Processing -- 6. Information Communication -- 7. Appendix0 aThe course focuses on the creation, manipulation, transmission, and reception of information by electronic means. Elementary signal theory; time- and frequency-domain analysis; Sampling Theorem. Digital information theory; digital transmission of analog signals; error-correcting codes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/337zAccess online version08054nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000800136050001000144100002600154245007200180264004300252264006400295264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505024100536520658000777542001607357546001607373588004007389650003207429650003807461650004207499710003907541856007607580OTLid0000338MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aScharf, Louiseauthor02aA First Course in Electrical and Computer EngineeringcLouis Scharf 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Complex Numbers -- 2. The Functions e^x and e^jθ -- 3. Phasors -- 4. Linear Algebra -- 5. Vector Graphics -- 6. Filtering -- 7. Binary Codes -- 8. An Introduction to MATLAB -- 9. The Edix Editor -- 10. Useful Mathematical Identities0 aThis book was written for an experimental freshman course at the University of Colorado. The course is now an elective that the majority of our electrical and computer engineering students take in the second semester of their freshman year, just before their first circuits course. Our department decided to offer this course for several reasons: we wanted to pique student' interest in engineering by acquainting them with engineering teachers early in their university careers and by providing with exposure to the types of problems that electrical and computer engineers are asked to solve; we wanted students entering the electrical and computer engineering programs to be prepared in complex analysis, phasors, and linear algebra, topics that are of fundamental importance in our discipline; we wanted students to have an introduction to a software application tool, such as MATLAB, to complete their preparation for practical and efficient computing in their subsequent courses and in their professional careers; we wanted students to make early contact with advanced topics like vector graphics, filtering, and binary coding so that they would gain a more rounded picture of modern electrical and computer engineering. In order to introduce this course, we had to sacrifice a second semester of Pascal programming. We concluded that the sacrifice was worth making because we found that most of our students were prepared for high-level language computing after just one semester of programming. We believe engineering educators elsewhere are reaching similar conclusions about their own students and curriculums. We hope this book helps create a much needed dialogue about curriculum revision and that it leads to the development of similar introductory courses that encourage students to enter and practice our craft.Students electing to take this course have completed one semester of calculus, computer programming, chemistry, and humanities. Concurrently with this course, students take physics and a second semester of calculus, as well as a second semester in the humanities. By omitting the advanced topics marked by asterisks, we are able to cover Complex Numbers through Linear Algebra, plus two of the three remaining chapters. The book is organized so that the instructor can select any two of the three. If every chapter of this book is covered, including the advanced topics, then enough material exists for a two-semester course. The first three chapters of this book provide a fairly complete coverage of complex numbers, the functions e^x and e^jand phasors. Our department philosophy is that these topics must be understood if a student is to succeed in electrical and computer engineering. These three chapters may also be used as a supplement to a circuits course. A measured pace of presentation, taking between sixteen and eighteen lectures, is sufficient to cover all but the advanced sections in Complex Numbers through Phasors. The chapter on "linear algebra" is prerequisite for all subsequent chapters. We use eight to ten lectures to cover it. We devote twelve to sixteen lectures to cover topics from Vector Graphics through Binary Codes. (We assume a semester consisting of 42 lectures and three exams.) The chapter on vector graphics applies the linear algebra learned in the previous chapter to the problem of translating, scaling, and rotating images. "Filtering" introduces the student to basic ideas in averaging and filtering. The chapter on "Binary Codes" covers the rudiments of binary coding, including Huffman codes and Hamming codes. If the users of this book find "Vector Graphics" through "Binary Codes" too confining, we encourage them to supplement the essential material in "Complex Numbers" through "Linear Algebra" with their own course notes on additional topics. Within electrical and computer engineering there are endless possibilities. Practically any set of topics that can be taught with conviction and enthusiasm will whet the student's appetite. We encourage you to write to us or to our editor, Tom Robbins, about your ideas for additional topics. We would like to think that our book and its subsequent editions will have an open architecture that enables us to accommodate a wide range of student and faculty interests. Throughout this book we have used MATLAB programs to illustrate key ideas. MATLAB is an interactive, matrix-oriented language that is ideally suited to circuit analysis, linear systems, control theory, communications, linear algebra, and numerical analysis. MATLAB is rapidly becoming a standard software tool in universities and engineering companies. (For more information about MATLAB, return the attached card in the back of this book to The MathWorks, Inc.) MATLAB programs are designed to develop the student's ability to solve meaningful problems, compute, and plot in a high-level applications language. Our students get started in MATLAB by working through “An Introduction to MATLAB,” while seated at an IBM PC (or look-alike) or an Apple Macintosh. We also have them run through the demonstration programs in "Complex Numbers". Each week we give three classroom lectures and conduct a one-hour computer lab session. Students use this lab session to hone MATLAB skills, to write programs, or to conduct the numerical experiments that are given at the end of each chapter. We require that these experiments be carried out and then reported in a short lab report that contains (i) introduction, (ii) analytical computations, (iii) computer code, (iv) experimental results, and (v) conclusions. The quality of the numerical results and the computer graphics astonishes students. Solutions to the chapter problems are available from the publisher for instructors who adopt this text for classroom use. We wish to acknowledge our late colleague Richard Roberts, who encouraged us to publish this book, and Michael Lightner and Ruth Ravenel, who taught "Linear Algebra" and "Vector Graphics" and offered helpful suggestions on the manuscript. We thank C. T. Mullis for allowing us to use his notes on binary codes to guide our writing of "Binary Codes". We thank Cédric Demeure and Peter Massey for their contributions to the writing of "An Introduction to MATLAB" and "The Edix Editor". We thank Tom Robbins, our editor at Addison-Wesley, for his encouragement, patience, and many suggestions. We are especially grateful to Julie Fredlund, who composed this text through many drafts and improved it in many ways. We thank her for preparing an excellent manuscript for production.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/338zAccess online version03511nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100003100164245004200195264004300237264006800280264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505057300525520172301098542002702821546001602848588004002864650003502904650002702939700003202966710003902998856007603037OTLid0000339MnU20260406020707.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781973702719  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aKeller, Mitchel T.eauthor00aApplied CombinatoricscMitchel Keller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSioux City, IowabMitchel T. Keller, William T. Trotterc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. An Introduction to Combinatorics -- 2. Strings, Sets and Binomial Coefficients -- 3. Induction -- 4. Combinatorial Basics -- 5. Graph Theory -- 6. Partially Ordered Sets -- 7. Inclusion-Exclusion -- 8. Generating Functions -- 9. Recurrence Equations -- 10. Probability -- 11. Applying Probability to Combinatorics -- 12. Graph Algorithms -- 13. Network Flows -- 14. Combinatorial Applications of Network Flows -- 15. Polya's Enumeration Theorem -- 16. The Many Faces of Combinatorics -- A. Epilogue -- B. Background Material for Combinatorics -- C. List of Notation0 aApplied Combinatorics is an open-source textbook for a course covering the fundamental enumeration techniques (permutations, combinations, subsets, pigeon hole principle), recursion and mathematical induction, more advanced enumeration techniques (inclusion-exclusion, generating functions, recurrence relations, Polyá theory), discrete structures (graphs, digraphs, posets, interval orders), and discrete optimization (minimum weight spanning trees, shortest paths, network flows). There are also chapters introducing discrete probability, Ramsey theory, combinatorial applications of network flows, and a few other nuggets of discrete mathematics. Applied Combinatorics began its life as a set of course notes we developed when Mitch was a TA for a larger than usual section of Tom's MATH 3012: Applied Combinatorics course at Georgia Tech in Spring Semester 2006. Since then, the material has been greatly expanded and exercises have been added. The text has been in use for most MATH 3012 sections at Georgia Tech for several years now. Since the text has been available online for free, it has also been adopted at a number of other institutions for a wide variety of courses. In August 2016, we made the first release of Applied Combinatorics in HTML format, thanks to a conversion of the book's source from LaTeX to MathBook XML. An inexpensive print-on-demand version is also available for purchase. Find out all about ways to get the book. Since Fall 2016, Applied Combinatorics has been on the list of approved open textbooks from the American Institute of Mathematics. Applied Combinatorics is open source and licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License (CC-BY-SA).1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aTrotter, William T.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/339zAccess online version03365nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001300147050000800160050000900168100002800177245007200205250001900277264004300296264007500339264001200414300002200426336002600448337002600474338003600500341002500536490002700561505077500588520117301363542004102536546001602577588004002593650003402633650003402667650003402701650002402735650003302759710003902792856007602831OTLid0000340MnU20260406020245.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3400 4aK3154 4aKF385.A4 4aBL1 4aJA711 aRobson, Ruthanneauthor00aFirst AmendmentbCases, Controversies, and ContextscRuthann Robson  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2019. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Introduction To The First Amendment -- Part I: The Speech Clauses -- Chapter Two: Protections For Political Speech -- Chapter Three: Of Conduct, Content, And Categories -- Chapter Four: The Special (Or Not) Status Of The Press -- Chapter Five: Government As Employer And Educator -- Chapter Six: Unconstitutional Conditions And Compelled Speech -- Chapter Seven: Forums And Time, Place, Manner Restrictions -- Chapter Eight: The Political Process -- Chapter Nine: Commercial Speech -- Chapter Ten: Sexual Speech -- Part II: The Religion Clauses -- Chapter Eleven: Defining Religion -- Chapter Twelve: The Establishment Clause And Education -- Chapter Thirteen: The Establishment Clause In The Public Square -- Chapter Fourteen: Freedom Of Religious Exercise0 aThis Casebook (Second Edition, December 2019) is intended to be used in an upper-division course covering the First Amendment to the United States Constitution. Its 14 chapters are substantially the same length, with the exception of Chapter One, the introduction, and Chapters Eleven and Twelve which in combination are the usual length. It is intended for 13 or 14 week semester that meets once or twice per week. Each Chapter contains a “Chapter Outline” at the beginning for ease of reference. The Casebook is organized with the Speech Clauses as Part One and the Religion Clauses as Part Two. Unlike many other courses, there is no accepted organizational scheme within these broad areas. As the Introduction notes, First Amendment doctrine, especially within freedom of speech, presents a varied and haphazard landscape. The Casebook follows a scheme that has proven effective in Professor Robson’s years of teaching the course to hundreds of students. The selection of cases tends toward the most recent and these tend to be less heavily edited. These recent cases often contain extended discussions of earlier cases that are not included in the Casebook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aReligionvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/340zAccess online version02607nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003000150245004100180264004300221264007600264264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505042700514520103200941542002701973546001602000588004002016650003402056650002802090710003902118856007602157OTLid0000341MnU20260406020701.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aTurner, Christianeauthor00aPropertycChristian TurnernVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 1.1. Finders vs. Landowners -- 1.2 Trespass -- 1.3 Nuisance -- 2. Acquisition by Possession -- 2.1 Possession Generally -- 2.2 Common Pool Resources -- 2.3. Review -- 3. Acquisition by Creation -- 3.1. Unfair Competition -- 3.2. Trademarks and Domain Names -- 3.3. Patents -- 3.4 Copyright -- 3.5. Publicity Rights -- 4. Transfers -- 4.1. Gifts -- 4.2 Real Estate Transactions -- 4.3. Adverse Possession0 aThis is Volume 1 of a two volume set written for Property Law. From the Preface: Property, as a vaguely defined collection of contract, tort, and criminal cases, does not take on the natural structure of a substantive area of the law through the systematic study of duty, breach, causation, defenses, and damages. Instead this textbook and most Property courses survey various topics in law with two goals in mind. First, we will study a number of traditional property topics, those where the issue of "ownership" and what that entails have long been thought to be a central issue. Second, but most importantly, our interdisciplinary study will introduce some of the major analytical techniques in law, from reasoning using precedent to law and economics to distributive justice. As we roam among topics, our goal is always, relentlessly to ask, "Why?" "Why should the law protect this party's interest?" These major techniques that we will pick up along the way will help us provide better and better answers to this question.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/341zAccess online version03169nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003000150245004100180264004300221264007600264264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505097700514520104401491542002702535546001602562588004002578650003402618650002802652710003902680856007602719OTLid0000342MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aTurner, Christianeauthor00aPropertycChristian TurnernVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. More on Adverse Possession -- 1.1. Personal Property -- 1.2. Encroachments -- 1.3. Improving Trespassers -- 1.4. Problem -- 2. Temporal Sharing of Land -- 2.1. Estates in Land -- 2.2. Rule Against Perpetuities -- 2.3. Restraints on Marriage -- 2.4. Waste -- 3. Leaseholds -- 3.1. Eviction -- 3.2. Tenant Duties -- 3.3. Landlord Duties -- 3.4. Problems -- 4. Shared Ownership -- 4.1. Tenancies in Common -- 4.2. Joint Tenancies -- 4.3. Tenancies by the Entirety -- 4.4. Relationships and Property -- 5. Easements -- AN INTRODUCTION TO SERVITUDES -- 5.1. Easements by Estoppel -- 5.2. Easements by Implication -- 5.3. Easements by Necessity -- 5.4. Scope and Overburdening -- 5.5. Easements in Gross -- 6. Covenants -- AN INTRODUCTION TO SERVITUDES, Part II -- 6.1. Formation -- 6.2. Changed Conditions -- 6.3. Regulation -- 6.4. Review Problems -- 7. Sovereigns and Individuals -- 7.1. Sovereignty -- 7.2. Private Government -- 7.3. Public Accommodations -- 7.4. Takings0 aThis is Volume 2 of a two volume set written for Property Law. From the Preface to Volume 1: Property, as a vaguely defined collection of contract, tort, and criminal cases, does not take on the natural structure of a substantive area of the law through the systematic study of duty, breach, causation, defenses, and damages. Instead this textbook and most Property courses survey various topics in law with two goals in mind. First, we will study a number of traditional property topics, those where the issue of "ownership" and what that entails have long been thought to be a central issue. Second, but most importantly, our interdisciplinary study will introduce some of the major analytical techniques in law, from reasoning using precedent to law and economics to distributive justice. As we roam among topics, our goal is always, relentlessly to ask, "Why?" "Why should the law protect this party's interest?" These major techniques that we will pick up along the way will help us provide better and better answers to this question.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/342zAccess online version03235nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002900150245003600179264004300215264007600258264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505153100508520056202039542002702601546001602628588004002644650002802684650003402712710003902746856007602785OTLid0000343MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aLewis, Browne C.eauthor04aThe Law of TrustscBrowne Lewis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - The Capacity to Create a Testamentary Trust -- 1.1. Parties Involved in a Trust Arrangement -- 1.2. Testamentary Capacity -- Chapter 2 - Creation of a Private Trust -- 1.2 Intent to Create a Trust -- 2.2 Requirement of Trust Property -- Edwards v. Edwards -- 2.3 Necessity of Trust Beneficiaries -- Chapter 3 - Categories of Private Trusts -- 3.1. Private Expressed Trusts -- 3.2. Trusts Created By Operation of Law -- Chapter 4 - Discretionary and Support and the Rights of the Beneficiary'sCreditors -- 4.1 Discretionary Trusts -- 4.2. Support Trust -- Chapter 5 - Spendthrift Trusts and Creditors -- 5.1 Expressed Spendthrift Trust -- 5.2 Implied Spendthrift Trust -- 5.3 Creditors -- Chapter 6 - Modification and Termination of Trusts -- 6.1 Termination -- 6.2 Claflin and Material Purpose -- 6.3 Deviation and Changed Circumstances -- 6.4 Removal of the Trustee -- Chapter 7 - Creation and Modification of Charitable Trusts -- 7.1 Creation of the Charitable Trust -- 7.2 Modification/Cy Pres -- Chapter 8 - Supervision/Enforcement of Charitable Trusts -- 8.1 Donor Standing -- 8.2 Beneficiary Standing -- Chapter 9 - Treatment of Trust Property -- 9.1 The Duty to Collect and Protect Trust Property -- 9.2 The Duty to Earmark Trust Property and to Not Comingle Trust Funds -- 9.3 The Duty Not to Delegate -- 9.4 Duty of Prudence -- Chapter 10 - Duty of Loyalty -- Chapter 11 - Duty of Impartiality -- Chapter 12 - Duty to Account and Inform -- 12.1 To Account -- 12.2 To Inform -- 12.3 The Trustee's Liability0 aThe use of testamentary trusts is becoming an important part of estate planning. As a result, students who want to make a living as probate attorneys will need to know how trusts fit into estate planning. In addition, bar examiners realize that it is important for students to have a basic knowledge of trust law. That realization will result in bar examination questions that test that knowledge. This book is designed for use as a supplementary text for a course on wills and trusts and the primary text in a seminar or course exploring the law of trusts.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/343zAccess online version02431nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000900135050001000144100002700154245006800181264004300249264006000292264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505027100529520073200800542001601532546001601548588004001564650002001604650003201624650002601656650002901682700002301711700002501734700002501759700003001784700003201814710003901846856007601885OTLid0000344MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aQA76 4aP91.31 aCollins, Wayneeauthor00aGraphic Design and Print Production FundamentalscWayne Collins 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Design History -- Chapter 2: Design Process -- Chapter 3: Design Elements, Design Principles, and Compostitional Organization -- Chapter 4: Colour Management in the Graphic Technologies -- Chapter 5: Pre-Press -- Chapter 6: Imaging -- Chapter 7: Web2Print0 aThis textbook -- written by a group of select experts with a focus on different aspects of the design process, from creation to production -- addresses the many steps of creating and then producing physical, printed, or other imaged products that people interact with on a daily basis. It covers the concept that, while most modern graphic design is created on computers using design software, the ideas and concepts don't stay on the computer. The ideas need to be completed in the computer software, then progress to an imaging (traditionally referred to as printing) process. Keywords are highlighted throughout and summarized in a Glossary at the end of the book, and each chapter includes exercises and suggested readings.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aHaas, Alexeauthor1 aJeffery, Keneauthor1 aMartin, Alaneauthor1 aMedeiros, Robertoeauthor1 aTomljanovic, Steveneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/344zAccess online version04171nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245008200186264004300268264006600311264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505196900554520103602523542001603559546001603575588004103591650002603632650002403658710003903682856007603721OTLid0000346MnU20260406020327.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781909188242  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aPiquette, Kathryneeditor00aWriting as Material PracticebSubstance, surface and mediumcKathryn Piquette 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUbiquity Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Introduction: Developing an approach to writing as material practice (Kathryn E. Piquette and Ruth D. Whitehouse) -- Chapter 2. The Twisting Paths of Recall: Khipu (Andean cord notation) as artifact (Frank Salomon) -- Chapter 3. Writing as Material Technology: Orientation within landscapes of the Classic Maya world (Sarah E. Jackson) -- Chapter 4. Writing (and Reading) as Material Practice: The world of cuneiform culture as an arena for investigation (Roger Matthews) -- Chapter 5. Re-writing the Script: Decoding the textual experience in the Bronze Age Levant (c.2000–1150 bc) (Rachael Thyrza Sparks) -- Chapter 6. The Function and Meaning of Writing in the Prehistoric Aegean: Some reflections on the social and symbolic significance of writing from a material perspective (Helène Whittaker) -- Chapter 7. Form Follows Function: Writing and its supports in the Aegean Bronze Age (Sarah Finlayson) -- Chapter 8. Materiality of Minoan Writing: Modes of display and perception (Georgia Flouda) -- Chapter 9. Saving on Clay: The Linear B practice of cutting tablets (Helena Tomas) -- Chapter 10. Straight, Crooked and Joined-up Writing: An early Mediterranean view (Alan Johnston) -- Chapter 11. “It Is Written”?: Making, remaking and unmaking early ‘writing' in the lower Nile Valley (Kathryn E. Piquette) -- Chapter 12. Written Greek but Drawn Egyptian: Script changes in a bilingual dream papyrus (Stephen Kidd) -- Chapter 13. The Other Writing: Iconic literacy and Situla Art in pre-Roman Veneto (Italy) (Elisa Perego) -- Chapter 14. ‘Tombstones' in the North Italian Iron Age: Careless writers or athletic readers? (Ruth D. Whitehouse) -- Chapter 15. Different Times, Different Materials and Different Purposes: Writing on objects at the Grand Arcade site in Cambridge (Craig Cessford) -- Chapter 16. Writing Conservation: The impact of text on conservation decisions and practice (Elizabeth Pye) -- Chapter 17. Epilogue (John Bennet)0 aWriting as Material Practice grapples with the issue of writing as a form of material culture in its ancient and more recent manifestations, and in the contexts of production and consumption. Fifteen case studies explore the artefactual nature of writing — the ways in which materials, techniques, colour, scale, orientation and visibility inform the creation of inscribed objects and spaces, as well as structure subsequent engagement, perception and meaning making. Covering a temporal span of some 5000 years, from c.3200 BCE to the present day, and ranging in spatial context from the Americas to the Near East, the chapters in this volume bring a variety of perspectives which contribute to both specific and broader questions of writing materialities. The authors also aim to place past graphical systems in their social contexts so they can be understood in relation to the people who created and attributed meaning to writing and associated symbolic modes through a diverse array of individual and wider social practices.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/346zAccess online version01985nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002500149245005100174264004300225264004100268264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505048400486520038200970542004101352546001601393588004101409650002301450650002301473710003901496856007601535OTLid0000348MnU20260406020246.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aLawson, Rutheauthor00aAnatomy and Physiology of AnimalscRuth Lawson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSan Francisco, CAbWikiBooksc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Chemicals -- Chapter 2: Classification -- Chapter 3: The Cell -- Chapter 4: Body Organisation -- Chapter 5: The Skin -- Chapter 6: The Skeleton -- Chapter 7: Muscles -- Chapter 8: Cardiovascular System -- Chapter 9: Respiratory System -- Chapter 10: Lymphatic System -- Chapter 11: The Gut and Digestion -- Chapter 12: Urinary system -- Chapter 13: Reproductive System -- Chapter 14: Nervous System -- Chapter 15: The Senses -- Chapter 16: Endocrine System -- Glossary0 aVeterinary nurses need to have a firm grasp of the normal structure of an animal's body and how it functions before they can understand the effect diseases and injuries have and the best ways to treat them. This book describes the structure of the animal body and the way in which it works. Animals encountered in normal veterinary practice are used as examples where possible.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/348zAccess online version02292nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002600149245003400175264004300209264004100252264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002800415490002700443505093700470520021401407542004101621546001601662588004101678650002301719650002301742700002601765710003901791856007601830OTLid0000349MnU20260406020246.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aDoerder, Pauleauthor00aGeneral BiologycPaul Doerder 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSan Francisco, CAbWikiBooksc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Getting Started -- 2 Biology - The Life Science -- 3 The Nature of Molecules -- 4 Chemical Building Blocks of Life -- 5 Life: History and Origin -- 6 Cells -- 7 Cell structure -- 8 Structure of Eukaryotic cells -- 9 Membranes -- 10 Cell-cell interactions -- 11 Energy and Metabolism -- 12 Respiration: harvesting of energy -- 13 Photosynthesis -- 14 Sexual reproduction -- 15 Genetics -- 16 Gregor Mendel and biological inheritance -- 17 DNA: The Genetic Material -- 18 Gene expression -- 19 Gene regulation -- 20 Mutation -- 21 Recombinant DNA technology -- 22 Classification of Living Things -- 23 Multicellular Photosynthetic Autotrophs -- 24 Chordates -- 25 Tissues and Systems -- 26 Epithelial tissue -- 27 Connective tissue -- 28 Muscle tissue -- 29 Vertebrate digestive system -- 30 Circulatory system -- 31 Respiratory system -- 32 Sensory systems -- 33 Additional material -- 34 Glossary -- 35 Contributors -- 36 Licenses0 aThe word biology means, "the science of life", from the Greek bios, life, and logos, wordor knowledge. Therefore, Biology is the science of Living Things. That is why Biology issometimes known as Life Science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aGibson, Ralpheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/349zAccess online version02294nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003500149245004400184264004300228264006600271264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505053600514520056801050542004101618546001601659588004101675650002301716650002301739700003101762710003901793856007601832OTLid0000350MnU20240401080422.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aKlymkowsky, Michael W.eauthor00aBiofundamentals 2.0cMichael Klymkowsky 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoulder, ColoradobMichael Klymkowsky, Melanie Cooperc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Understanding science & thinking scientifically -- Chapter 2: Life's diversity and origins -- Chapter 3: Evolutionary mechanisms and the diversity of life -- Chapter 4: Social evolution and sexual selection -- Chapter 5: Molecular interactions, thermodynamics & reaction coupling -- Chapter 6: Membrane boundaries and capturing energy -- Chapter 7: The molecular nature of heredity -- Chapter 8: Peptide bonds, polypeptides and proteins -- Chapter 9: Genomes, genes, and regulatory networks -- Chapter 10: Social systems0 aOur goal is to present the key observations andunifying concepts upon which modern biology isbased; it is not a survey of all biology! Onceunderstood, these foundational observations andconcepts should enable you to approach any biologicalprocess, from disease to kindness, from a scientificperspective. To understand biological systems we need toconsider them from two complementary perspectives;how they came to be (the historic, that is, evolutionary) and how their structures, traits, and behaviors areproduced (the mechanistic, that is, the physicochemical).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aCooper, Melanie M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/350zAccess online version02483nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003200138245006200170264004300232264006400275264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505073300516520067201249542001601921546001601937588004001953650002501993710003902018856007602057OTLid0000351MnU20260406020420.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.31 aHutchinson, John S.eauthor00aConcept Development Studies in ChemistrycJohn Hutchinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface to Concept Development Studies in Chemistry -- 2 The Atomic Molecular Theory -- 3 Relative Atomic Masses and Empirical Formulae -- 4 The Structure of an Atom -- 5 Quantum Energy Levels In Atoms -- 6 Covalent Bonding and Electron Pair Sharing -- 7 Molecular Geometry and Electron Domain Theory -- 8 Molecular Structure and Physical Properties -- 9 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Energy Levels -- 10 Energetics of Chemical Reactions -- 11 The Ideal Gas Law -- 12 The Kinetic Molecular Theory -- 13 Phase Equilibrium and Intermolecular Interactions -- 14 Reaction Equilibrium in the Gas Phase -- 15 Acid-Base Equilibrium -- 16 Reaction Rates -- 17 Equilibrium and the Second Law of Thermodynamics -- Index -- Attributions0 aThis collection of Concept Development Studies in Chemistry is presented to redirect the focus of learning. In each concept development study, a major chemical concept is developed and refined by analysis of experimental observations and careful reasoning. Each study begins with the definition of an initial Foundation of assumed knowledge, followed by a statement of questions which arise from the Foundation. Analysis of these questions is presented as a series of observations and logical deductions, followed by further questions. This detailed process is followed until the conceptual development of a model provides a reasonable answer to the stated questions.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/351zAccess online version02164nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003300136245008100169264004300250264006900293264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505081200539520024301351542001601594546001601610588004101626650003201667710003901699856007601738OTLid0000352MnU20260406020247.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBonaventure, Oliviereauthor00aComputer NetworkingbPrinciples, Protocols and PracticecOlivier Bonaventure 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface -- 2 Introduction -- 2.1 Services and protocols -- 2.2 The reference models -- 2.3 Organisation of the book -- 3 The application Layer -- 3.1 Principles -- 3.2 Application-level protocols -- 3.3 Writing simple networked applications -- 3.4 Summary -- 3.5 Exercises -- 4 The transport layer -- 4.1 Principles of a reliable transport protocol -- 4.2 The User Datagram Protocol -- 4.3 The Transmission Control Protocol -- 4.4 Summary -- 4.5 Exercises -- 5 The network layer -- 5.1 Principles -- 5.2 Internet Protocol -- 5.3 Routing in IP networks -- 5.4 Summary -- 5.5 Exercises -- 6 The datalink layer and the Local Area Networks -- 6.1 Principles -- 6.2 Medium Access Control -- 6.3 Datalink layer technologies -- 6.4 Summary -- 6.5 Exercises -- 7 Glossary -- 8 Bibliography -- 9 Indices and tables0 aThis open textbook aims to fill the gap between the open-source implementations and the open-source network specifications by providing a detailed but pedagogical description of the key principles that guide the operation of the Internet.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/352zAccess online version02290nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003100136245005500167250001900222264004300241264004500284264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505058900503520059401092542003901686546001601725588004001741650003201781710003901813856007601852OTLid0000353MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDordal, Peter Larseauthor03aAn Introduction to Computer NetworkscPeter Dordal  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aChicago, IllinoisbPeter L Dordalc2020. 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a0 Preface -- 1 An Overview of Networks -- 2 Ethernet -- 3 Other LANs -- 4 Links -- 5 Packets -- 6 Abstract Sliding Windows -- 7 IP version 4 -- 8 IP version 6 -- 9 Routing-Update Algorithms -- 10 Large-Scale IP Routing -- 11 UDP Transport -- 12 TCP Transport -- 13 TCP Reno and Congestion Management -- 14 Dynamics of TCP Reno -- 15 Newer TCP Implementations -- 16 Network Simulations: ns-2 -- 17 The ns-3 Network Simulator -- 18 Mininet -- 19 Queuing and Scheduling -- 20 Quality of Service -- 21 Network Management and SNMP -- 22 Security -- 23 Bibliography -- 24 Selected Solutions0 aAn Introduction to Computer Networksis a free and open general-purpose computer-networking textbook, complete with diagrams and exercises.It covers the LAN, internetworking and transport layers, focusing primarily on TCP/IP. Particular attention is paid to congestion; other special topics include queuing, real-time traffic, network management, security and the ns simulator. The book is suitable as the primary text for an undergraduate or introductory graduate course in computer networking, as a supplemental text for a wide variety of network-related courses, and as a reference work.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/353zAccess online version02448nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245003500163250001600198264004300214264006000257264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505064900494520068701143542001601830546001601846588004001862650003201902650002501934710003901959856007601998OTLid0000354MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aWatt, Adrienneeauthor00aDatabase DesigncAdrienne Watt  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Before the Advent of Database Systems -- Chapter 2 Fundamental Concepts -- Chapter 3 Characteristics and Benefits of a Database -- Chapter 4 Types of Data Models -- Chapter 5 Data Modelling -- Chapter 6 Classification of Database Management Systems -- Chapter 7 The Relational Data Model -- Chapter 8 The Entity Relationship Data Model -- Chapter 9 Integrity Rules and Constraints -- Chapter 10 ER Modelling -- Chapter 11 Functional Dependencies -- Chapter 12 Normalization -- Chapter 13 Database Development Process -- Chapter 14 Database Users -- Chapter 15 SQL Structured Query Language -- Chapter 16 SQL Data Manipulation Language0 aThis second edition of Database Design book covers the concepts used in database systems and the database design process. Topics include: The history of databases Characteristics and benefits of databases Data models Data modelling Classification of database management systems Integrity rules and constraints Functional dependencies Normalization Database development process New to this edition are more examples, highlighted and defined key terms, both throughout and at the end of each chapter, and end-of-chapter review exercises. Two new chapters have been added on SQL, along with appendices that include a data model example, sample ERD exercises and SQL lab with solutions.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/354zAccess online version03198nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050000700166100002200173245005700195264004300252264007800295264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505047200550520142301022542003902445546001602484588004102500650003302541650003402574650002502608700002802633710003902661856007602700OTLid0000355MnU20260406020249.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781927356814  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aL71 aDron, Joneauthor00aTeaching CrowdsbLearning and Social MediacJon Dron 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAthabasca University Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: On the Nature and Value of Social Software for Learning -- Chapter 2: Social Learning Theories -- Chapter 3: A Typology of Social Forms for Learning -- Chapter 4: Learning in Groups -- Chapter 5: Learning in Networks -- Chapter 6: Learning in Sets -- Chapter 7: Learning with Collectives -- Chapter 8: Stories From the Field -- Chapter 9: Issues and Challenges in Educational Uses of Social Software -- Chapter 10: The Shape of Things and of Things to Come0 aWithin the rapidly expanding field of educational technology, learners and educators must confront a seemingly overwhelming selection of tools designed to deliver and facilitate both online and blended learning. Many of these tools assume that learning is configured and delivered in closed contexts, through learning management systems (LMS). However, while traditional "classroom" learning is by no means obsolete, networked learning is in the ascendant. A foundational method in online and blended education, as well as the most common means of informal and self-directed learning, networked learning is rapidly becoming the dominant mode of teaching as well as learning. In Teaching Crowds, Dron and Anderson introduce a new model for understanding and exploiting the pedagogical potential of Web-based technologies, one that rests on connections — on networks and collectives — rather than on separations. Recognizing that online learning both demands and affords new models of teaching and learning, the authors show how learners can engage with social media platforms to create an unbounded field of emergent connections. These connections empower learners, allowing them to draw from one another's expertise to formulate and fulfill their own educational goals. In an increasingly networked world, developing such skills will, they argue, better prepare students to become self-directed, lifelong learners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aAnderson, Terryeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/355zAccess online version04136nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050000700166100002500173245010800198264004300306264006000349264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505186600586520094202452542002703394546001603421588004103437650003303478650003403511650002503545700002903570710003903599856007603638OTLid0000356MnU20260406020250.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781894975292  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aL71 aHirtz, Sandyeauthor00aEducation for a Digital WorldbAdvice, Guidelines and Effective Practice from Around GlobecSandy Hirtz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter AbstractsIntroductionPart 1: The Impact of Instructional Technologies -- 1 Emerging Technologies in E-learning -- 2 Virtual Design Studios: Solving Learning Problems in Developing Countries -- 3 Challenges Confronted and Lessons (Un)Learned: Linking Students from the University of Ghana and Kwantlen University College -- 4 Addressing Diversity in Design of Online Courses -- 5 Mobile Learning in Developing Countries: Present Realities and Future Possibilities -- 6 The Impact of Technology on Education -- Part 2: Preparing Online Courses -- 7 Learning Management Systems -- 8 Exploring Open Source for Educators: We're Not in Kansas Anymore – Entering OS -- 9 Quality Assurance by Design -- 10 General Principles of Instructional Design -- 11 Accessibility and Universal Design -- 12 Articulation and Transfer of Online Courses -- 13 Planning Your Online Course -- 14 Assessment and Evaluation -- Part 3: Implementing Technology -- 15 Understanding Copyright: Knowing Your Rights and Knowing When You're Right -- 16 ‘Open Licences' of Copyright for Authors, Educators, and Librarians -- 17 E-learning Standards -- 18 Leadership and E-learning: Change Processes for Implementing Educational Technologies -- 19 Building Communities of Practice -- Part 4: E-learning in Action -- 20 Instructional Strategies -- 21 Media Selection -- 22 Computer-Based Resources for Learning -- 23 Computer-Based Games for Learning -- 24 Evaluating and Improving Your Online Teaching Effectiveness -- Part 5: Engagement and Communication -- 25 Tools for Online Engagement and Communication -- 26 Techno Expression -- 27 Social Media for Adult Online Learners and Educators -- 28 Online Collaboration: An Overview -- 29 Identity in Online Education -- 30 Supporting E-learning through Communities of Practice -- 31 Looking Forward: Stories of Practice -- Contributors0 aEducation for a Digital World contains a comprehensive collection of proven strategies and tools for effective online teaching, based on the principles of learning as a social process. It offers practical, contemporary guidance to support e-learning decision-making, instructional choices, as well as program and course planning, and development.Practical advice, real-life examples, case studies, and useful resources supply in-depth perspectives about structuring and fostering socially engaging learning in an online environment. A plethora of e-learning topics provide insights, ideas, and usable tools. Tips and evidence-based theory guide administrators, program and course developers, project teams, and teachers through the development of online learning opportunities.Education for a Digital World is an indispensable guide, resource, textbook and manual for policymakers and practitioners in developing and developed countries.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aHarper, David G.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/356zAccess online version03151nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050000900152100002500161245010500186264004300291264006600334264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002800522490002700550505062800577520128201205542001602487546001602503588004102519650002502560650002702585650002602612710003902638856007602677OTLid0000357MnU20260406020331.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781909188211  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aP1231 aQuist, Gerdieauthor00aReading With My Eyes OpenbEmbracing the critical and the personal in language pedagogycGerdi Quist 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUbiquity Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroductionChapter 1 Tensions Between the Old and the New: The Influence of Educational Ideologies on Language TeachingChapter 2 Culture Pedagogy: Some Theoretical Considerations -- Teaching Culture -- Language in Relation to Culture -- Social and Cultural Views of Language -- Chapter 3 Being Intercultural Through Texts: The Student as Text Ethnographer -- Intercultural Communication in Language Teaching -- Texts -- Chapter 4 Context of Teaching and ResearchChapter 5 Tensions in the Classroom -- Lesson 1: Text as ‘Text' -- Lesson 2: Cultuurtekst -- Chapter 6 Conclusion: Embracing Tensions -- The Research Findings0 aUntangling the various approaches to language teaching and their history, Gerdi Quist maps recent thinking in language studies at university. Using an interdisciplinary theoretical framework, drawn from educational philosophy, cultural studies, intercultural studies and language pedagogy, the author discusses the many tensions and currents in contemporary language teaching. The author puts forward an alternative pedagogy, that of a cultuurtekst-perspective, which engages learners at complex linguistic and cultural levels. In discussing the case study in which this approach is tested, the author develops her argument for embracing various critical perspectives through the personal engagement of students. From the start the author acknowledges her own engaged position as a language teacher in a liberal humanistic educational environment. She adopts a self-critical perspective through which her engagement with adverse student reaction leads to deepening insights both for the author and her students as part of the non-linear process of learning. Gerdi Quist teaches Dutch language and lectures on multiculturalism and intercultural communication. Recent publications included a book chapter and journal articles on language pedagogy and intercultural communication.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/357zAccess online version02580nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050000900134050001100143100002700154245011100181264004300292264008500335264001200420300002200432336002600454337002600480338003600506341002800542490002700570505094300597520032701540542003001867546001601897588004001913650002501953650002701978650002602005650002402031710003902055856007602094OTLid0000358MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aP123 4aPE14081 aRamsey, Chaunaeauthor00aConventions 101bA Functional Approach to Teaching (And Assessing!) Grammar and PunctuationcChauna Ramsey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFirst Things First: Conventions Pre-Test -- Unit 1: A Lot; There, They're, Their; To, Two, Too -- Unit 2: Your, You're; Its, It's; Woman,Women -- Unit 3: Where, Were; Could Have, Could "Of"; Lose, Loose -- Unit 4: Whose, Who's; Fewer, Less; Choose, Chose -- Unit 5: Accept, Except; Who vs That; Lose, Loose -- Unit 6: All Ready, Already; I vs Me; Affect, Effect -- Unit 7: Everyday, Every Day; Defiant, Definite -- Unit 8: Capitalizing Pronouns; All Right vs "Alright" -- Unit 9: Commas in a Series; Commas After Introductory Phrases -- Unit 10: Commas with "So," "Or," "But," "And"; Commas with Interrupting Elements -- Unit 11: Comma Review -- Unit 12: Fragments and Run-Ons -- Unit 13: Semicolons -- Unit 14: Punctuation and End Quotation Marks; Punctuating Titles -- Unit 15: Colons -- Unit 16: Apostrophe Pre-Assessment -- Unit 17: Apostrophes -- Unit 18: Subject-Verb Agreement -- Unit 19: Final Exam; "Rejected" Notice; Cheat Sheet0 aThis is a collection of cumulative units of study for conventional errors common in student writing. It's flexible, functional, and zeroes in problems typically seen in writing of all types, from the eternal “there/they're/their” struggle to correct colon use. Units are organized from most simple to most challenging.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/358zAccess online version02273nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002700151245004200178264004300220264008500263264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505018100525520090800706542001601614546001601630588004001646650002601686650002401712650003601736710003901772856007601811OTLid0000359MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aJeffrey, Robineauthor00aAbout WritingbA GuidecRobin Jeffrey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- Composing -- Academic writing -- Researching -- MLA/APA/CMS -- Basic Grammar -- Grammatical Sentences -- Multilingual Writers and ESL Challenges -- Revising0 aThis writer's reference condenses and covers everything a beginning writing student should need to successfully compose college-level work. The book covers the basics of composition and revising, including how to build a strong thesis, how to peer review a fellow student's work, and a handy checklist for revision, before moving on to a broad overview of academic writing. Included for those students who need writing help at the most basic level are comprehensive sections on sentence style and grammar, verbs, nouns and other tenets of basic grammar. Finally, the sections on research and citation should help any student find solid evidence for their school work and cite it correctly, as well as encouraging an understanding of why citation is so important in the first place. This is a guide that is useful to writing students of all levels, either as a direct teaching tool or a simple reference.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/359zAccess online version02553nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050001000148100002900158245006800187264004300255264008300298264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505048000558520078001038542003001818546001601848588004101864650004401905650002601949650002401975650002901999710003902028856007602067OTLid0000360MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aPE1408 4aP91.31 aRoberts, Jasmineeauthor00aWriting for Strategic Communication IndustriescJasmine Roberts 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOhio State University Librariesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Defining Strategic Communication -- Chapter 2: Media Writing--Conventions, Culture, and Style -- Chapter 3: Strategic Communication Ethics -- Chapter 4: News Value -- Chapter 5: News Writing Basics -- Chapter 6: Feature Writing -- Chapter 7: Public Relations Industry -- Chapter 8: Media Relations -- Chapter 9: Public Relations Writing -- Chapter 10: Social Media--Uses and Messaging -- Chapter 11: Advertising Industry -- Chapter 12: Creating a Writing Portfolio0 aGood writing skills are important in today's competitive work environment. This is especially the case for communication-related professions such as public relations, brand communication, journalism, and marketing. Writing for Strategic Communication Industries emphasizes practical application of academic inquiry to help readers improve their writing skills. This book gives readers: Straightforward chapters that use real-world examples to illustrate key points. Discussion of different writing styles and techniques. Examples of communication materials such as press releases, creative briefs, feature articles, and more. Embedded videos of insights from communication professionals. Tips on pitching to the media. A collection of popular sources for further explanation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aOrganizational CommunicationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/360zAccess online version03295nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002400156245008400180264004300264264004300307264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505076000527520133701287542003002624546001602654588004102670650002602711650002402737700003302761710003902794856007602833OTLid0000362MnU20260406020348.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789038221021  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aHeirman, Joeauthor04aThe Ideologies of Lived Space in Literary Texts, Ancient and ModerncJo Heirman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGhent, BelgiumbAcademia Pressc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part 1 Lived Space And Society -- Cave And Cosmos -- Space And Myth -- Part 2 Heterotopical Spaces And Chronotopes -- Grave Stories -- The Theatre As Heterotopia -- Symbolic ‘Lived Spaces' In Ancient Greek Lyric And The Heterotopia Of The Symposium -- The Symposium -- Producing Utopian Space -- Part 3 Ecocriticism And Space -- Imagined Space/Lived Space, Alienation/Destruction, -- Singularity/Specificity -- Nature's Helping Hand -- Part 4 Space And Power -- ‘No Bounds In Space Or Time' -- Argo Was Here -- The Epitaphios, Civic Ideology And The Cityscape Of Classical Athens -- Inventing A National Narrative -- Part 5 Spaces And The Deconstruction Of Power -- Small Places -- Writing Space, Living Space -- About The AuthorsIndex0 aIn a brief essay called Des espaces autres (1984) Michel Foucault announced that after the nineteenth century, which was dominated by a historical outlook, the current century might rather be the century of space. His prophecy has been fulfilled: the end of the twentieth century witnessed a ‘spatial turn' in humanities which was perhaps partly due to the globalisation of our modern world. Inspired by the spatial turn in the humanities, this volume presents a number of essays on the ideological role of space in literary texts. The individual articles analyse ancient and modern literary texts from the angle of the most recent theoretical conceptualisations of space. The focus throughout is on how the experience of space is determined by dominant political, philosophical or religious ideologies and how, in turn, the description of spaces in literature is employed to express, broadcast or deconstruct this experience. By bringing together ancient and modern, mostly postcolonial texts, this volume hopes to stimulate discussion among disciplines and across continents. Among the authors discussed are: Homer, Nonnus, Alcaeus of Lesbos, Apollonius of Rhodes, Vergil, Herodotus, Panagiotis Soutsos, Assia Djebar, Tahar Djaout, Olive Senior, Jamaica Kincaid, Stefan Heym, Benoit Dutuertre, Henrik Stangerup and David Malouf.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aKlooster, Jacquelineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/362zAccess online version03286nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127100002900145245009100174264004300265264006600308264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505040800551520174900959542003002708546001602738588004102754650002602795710003902821856007602860OTLid0000363MnU20260406020333.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780748690800  aMnUbengcMnU1 aKilleen, Jarlatheauthor04aThe Emergence of Irish Gothic Fiction - Histories, Origins, Theories?cJarlath Killeen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEdinburgh, United KingdombEdinburgh University Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Zombieland: From Gothic Ireland to Irish Gothic -- 1. Braindead: Locating the Gothic -- 2. The Creeping Unknown: Re-Making Meaning in the Gothic Novel -- 3. Mad Love: The Adventures of Miss Sophia Berkley and the Politics of Consent -- 4. The Monster Club: Monstrosity, Catholicism and Revising the (1641) Rising -- 5. Undead: Unmaking Monsters in Longsword -- Conclusion: Land of the Dead0 aProvides a new account of the emergence of Irish gothic fiction in mid-eighteenth century. This book provides a robustly theorised and thoroughly historicised account of the ‘beginnings' of Irish gothic fiction, maps the theoretical terrain covered by other critics, and puts forward a new history of the emergence of the genre in Ireland. The main argument the book makes is that the Irish gothic should be read in the context of the split in Irish Anglican public opinion that opened in the 1750s, and seen as a fictional instrument of liberal Anglican opinion in a changing political landscape. By providing a fully historicized account of the beginnings of the genre in Ireland, the book also addresses the theoretical controversies that have bedevilled discussion of the Irish gothic in the 1980s, 1990s and 2000s. The book gives ample space to the critical debate, and rigorously defends a reading of the Irish gothic as an Anglican, Patriot tradition. This reading demonstrates the connections between little-known Irish gothic fictions of the mid-eighteenth century (The Adventures of Miss Sophia Berkley and Longsword), and the Irish gothic tradition more generally, and also the gothic as a genre of global significance. Key Features * Examines gothic texts including Mary Shelley's Frankenstein, Horace Walpole's The Castle of Otranto, Bram Stoker's Dracula, Charles Robert Maturin's Melmoth the Wanderer, (Anon), The Adventures of Miss Sophia Berkley and Thomas Leland's Longsword * Provides a rigorous and robust theory of the Irish Gothic * Reads early Irish gothic fully into the political context of mid-eighteenth century Ireland This title was made Open Access by libraries from around the world through Knowledge Unlatched.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/363zAccess online version02204nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003100149245006100180264004300241264006000284264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505040000521520063300921542001601554546001601570588004001586650002301626650002401649700003001673710003901703856007601742OTLid0000367MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aDoyle, Glynda Reeseauthor00aClinical Procedures for Safer Patient CarecGlynda Doyle 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Infection Control -- Chapter 2. Patient Assessment -- Chapter 3. Safe Patient Handling, Positioning, and Transfers -- Chapter 4. Wound Care -- Chapter 5. Oxygen Therapy -- Chapter 6. Non-Parenteral Medication Administration -- Chapter 7. Parenteral Medication Administration -- Chapter 8. Intravenous Therapy -- Chapter 9. Blood Glucose Monitoring -- Chapter 10. Tubes and Attachments0 aThe checklist approach, used in this textbook, aims to provide standardized processes for clinical skills and to help nursing schools and clinical practice partners keep procedural practice current. Each skill/procedure is covered in a chapter that has learning objectives, a brief overview of the relevant theory, checklists of steps for procedures with the rationale behind each step of the process, and a summary of key takeaways. Key terms are set in bold throughout the book and laid out again in a Glossary in the appendix. All 88 checklists are also summarized, and hyperlinked to the original checklist, in the appendix.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aMcCutcheon, Jodieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/367zAccess online version03243nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245010800182250000600290264004300296264007000339264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505089200586520100501478542002702483546001602510588004102526650002302567650002602590700002902616700003502645700002602680710003902706856007602745OTLid0000368MnU20260406020328.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780988223738  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aLocks, Catherineeauthor00aHistory in the MakingbA History of the People of the United States of America to 1877cCatherine Locks  a1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDahlonega, GeorgiabThe University Press of North Georgiac[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: United States History Before Columbus -- Chapter Two: The Global Context: Asia, Europe, and Africa in the Early Modern Era -- Chapter Three: Initial Contact and Conquest -- Chapter Four: The Establishment of English Colonies Before 1642 and Their Development Through the Late Seventeenth Century -- Chapter Five: English Colonization After 1660 -- Chapter Six: Growing Pains in the Colonies -- Chapter Seven: The Road to Revolution, 1754-1775 -- Chapter Eight: the American Revolution -- Chapter Nine: Articles of Confederation and the Constitution -- Chapter Ten: The Federalist Era -- Chapter Eleven: The Early Republic -- Chapter Twelve: Jacksonian America (1815-1840) -- Chapter Thirteen: Antebellum Revival and Reform -- Chapter Fourteen: Westward Expansion -- Chapter Fifteen: The Impending Crisis -- Chapter Sixteen: The Civil War -- Chapter Seventeen: Reconstruction0 aThis textbook examines U.S. History from before European Contact through Reconstruction, while focusing on the people and their history.Prior to its publication, History in the Making underwent a rigorous double blind peer review, a process that involved over thirty scholars who reviewed the materially carefully, objectively, and candidly in order to ensure not only its scholarly integrity but also its high standard of quality.This book provides a strong emphasis on critical thinking about US History by providing several key features in each chapter. Learning Objectives at the beginning of each chapter help students to understand what they will learn in each chapter. Before You Move On sections at the end of each main section are designed to encourage students to reflect on important concepts and test their knowledge as they read. In addition, each chapter includes Critical Thinking Exercises that ask the student to deeply explore chapter content, Key Terms, and a Chronology of events.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aMergel, Sarah K.eauthor1 aRoseman, Pamela Thomaseauthor1 aSpike, Tamaraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/368zAccess online version02018nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002600148245005800174264004300232264004700275264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505021800499520066800717542003901385546001601424588004101440650002501481650002301506710003901529856007601568OTLid0000369MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aNichols, Lisaeauthor00aOrganic Chemistry Laboratory TechniquescLisa Nichols 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOroville, CaliforniabLisa Nicholsc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: General Techniques -- Chapter 2: Chromatography -- Chapter 3: Crystallization -- Chapter 4: Extraction -- Chapter 5: Distillation -- Chapter 6: Miscellaneous Techniques -- Chapter 7: Technique Summaries0 aThis resource was created by Lisa Nichols (chemistry faculty at Butte Community College in Northern California) as a result of an academic sabbatical leave in the Fall-2015 to Spring 2016 term. The target audience are undergraduate students in organic chemistry. In this resource you will find theory and procedures on the main organic lab techniques (chromatography, crystallization, extraction, distillation) as well as general concepts on how to set up and heat apparatuses (see the Table of Contents tab for a more complete listing of topics). All procedures are accompanied by step-by-step pictures, and graphics are heavily utilized throughout the resource.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/369zAccess online version03530nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002800180245003900208264004300247264006000290264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505179000524520055402314542004102868546001602909588004102925650002402966650002702990710003903017856007603056OTLid0000370MnU20260406020703.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168062  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStrang, Gilberteauthor00aCalculuscGilbert StrangnVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Integration -- 1.1 Approximating Areas -- 1.2 The Definite Integral -- 1.3 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus -- 1.4 Integration Formulas and the Net Change Theorem -- 1.5 Substitution -- 1.6 Integrals Involving Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- 1.7 Integrals Resulting in Inverse Trigonometric Functions -- Chapter 2: Applications of Integration -- 2.1 Areas between Curves -- 2.2 Determining Volumes by Slicing -- 2.3 Volumes of Revolution: Cylindrical Shells -- 2.4 Arc Length of a Curve and Surface Area -- 2.5 Physical Applications -- 2.6 Moments and Centers of Mass -- 2.7 Integrals, Exponential Functions, and Logarithms -- 2.8 Exponential Growth and Decay -- 2.9 Calculus of the Hyperbolic Functions -- Chapter 3: Techniques of Integration -- 3.1 Integration by Parts -- 3.2 Trigonometric Integrals -- 3.3 Trigonometric Substitution -- 3.4 Partial Fractions -- 3.5 Other Strategies for Integration -- 3.6 Numerical Integration -- 3.7 Improper Integrals -- Chapter 4: Introduction to Differential Equations -- 4.1 Basics of Differential Equations -- 4.2 Direction Fields and Numerical Methods -- 4.3 Separable Equations -- 4.4 The Logistic Equation -- 4.5 First-order Linear Equations -- Chapter 5: Sequences and Series -- 5.1 Sequences -- 5.2 Infinite Series -- 5.3 The Divergence and Integral Tests -- 5.4 Comparison Tests -- 5.5 Alternating Series -- 5.6 Ratio and Root Tests -- Chapter 6: Power Series -- 6.1 Power Series and Functions -- 6.2 Properties of Power Series -- 6.3 Taylor and Maclaurin Series -- 6.4 Working with Taylor Series -- Chapter 7: Parametric Equations and Polar Coordinates -- 7.1 Parametric Equations -- 7.2 Calculus of Parametric Curves -- 7.3 Polar Coordinates -- 7.4 Area and Arc Length in Polar Coordinates -- 7.5 Conic Sections0 aCalculus is designed for the typical two- or three-semester general calculus course, incorporating innovative features to enhance student learning. The book guides students through the core concepts of calculus and helps them understand how those concepts apply to their lives and the world around them. Due to the comprehensive nature of the material, we are offering the book in three volumes for flexibility and efficiency. Volume 2 covers integration, differential equations, sequences and series, and parametric equations and polar coordinates.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/370zAccess online version03773nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002800180245003900208264004300247264006000290264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505199200524520059502516542004103111546001603152588004103168650002403209650002703233710003903260856007603299OTLid0000371MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168079  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aStrang, Gilberteauthor00aCalculuscGilbert StrangnVolume 3 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Parametric Equations and Polar Coordinates -- 1.1. Introduction -- 1.2. Parametric Equations -- 1.3. Calculus of Parametric Curves -- 1.4. Polar Coordinates -- 1.5. Area and Arc Length in Polar Coordinates -- 1.6. Conic Sections -- 2. Vectors in Space -- 2.1. Introduction -- 2.2. Vectors in the Plane -- 2.3. Vectors in Three Dimensions -- 2.4. The Dot Product -- 2.5. The Cross Product -- 2.6. Equations of Lines and Planes in Space -- 2.7. Quadric Surfaces -- 2.8. Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates -- 3. Vector-Valued Functions -- 3.1. Introduction -- 3.2. Vector-Valued Functions and Space Curves -- 3.3. Calculus of Vector-Valued Functions -- 3.4. Arc Length and Curvature -- 3.5. Motion in Space -- 4. Differentiation of Functions of Several Variables -- 4.1. Introduction -- 4.2. Functions of Several Variables -- 4.3. Limits and Continuity -- 4.4. Partial Derivatives -- 4.5. Tangent Planes and Linear Approximations -- 4.6. The Chain Rule -- 4.7. Directional Derivatives and the Gradient -- 4.8. Maxima/Minima Problems -- 4.9. Lagrange Multipliers -- 5. Multiple Integration -- 5.1. Introduction -- 5.2. Double Integrals over Rectangular Regions -- 5.3. Double Integrals over General Regions -- 5.4. Double Integrals in Polar Coordinates -- 5.5. Triple Integrals -- 5.6. Triple Integrals in Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates -- 5.7. Calculating Centers of Mass and Moments of Inertia -- 5.8. Change of Variables in Multiple Integrals -- 6. Vector Calculus -- 6.1. Introduction -- 6.2. Vector Fields -- 6.3. Line Integrals -- 6.4. Conservative Vector Fields -- 6.5. Green's Theorem -- 6.6. Divergence and Curl -- 6.7. Surface Integrals -- 6.8. Stokes' Theorem -- 6.9. The Divergence Theorem -- 7. Second-Order Differential Equations -- 7.1. Introduction -- 7.2. Second-Order Linear Equations -- 7.3. Nonhomogeneous Linear Equations -- 7.4. Applications -- 7.5. Series Solutions of Differential Equations -- Table of IntegralsTable of DerivativesReview of Pre-Calculus0 aCalculus is designed for the typical two- or three-semester general calculus course, incorporating innovative features to enhance student learning. The book guides students through the core concepts of calculus and helps them understand how those concepts apply to their lives and the world around them. Due to the comprehensive nature of the material, we are offering the book in three volumes for flexibility and efficiency. Volume 3 covers parametric equations and polar coordinates, vectors, functions of several variables, multiple integration, and second-order differential equations.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/371zAccess online version02564nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007000163264004300233264008500276264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002500483490002700508505040600535520093700941542002701878546001601905588004001921650002001961650002601981700002502007700003102032710003902063856007602102OTLid0000374MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aSachant, Pamelaeauthor00aIntroduction to ArtbDesign, Context, and MeaningcPamela Sachant 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: What is Art? -- Chapter Two: The Structure of Art -- Chapter Three: Significance of Materials Used in Art -- Chapter Four: Describing Art -- Chapter Five: Meaning in Art -- Chapter Six: Connecting Art to Our Lives -- Chapter Seven: Form in Architecture -- Chapter Eight: Art and Identity -- Chapter Nine: Art and Power -- Chapter Ten: Art and Ritual Life -- Chapter Eleven: Art and Ethics0 aIntroduction to Art: Design, Context, and Meaning offers a comprehensive introduction to the world of Art. Authored by four USG faculty members with advance degrees in the arts, this textbooks offers up-to-date original scholarship. It includes over 400 high-quality images illustrating the history of art, its technical applications, and its many uses.Combining the best elements of both a traditional textbook and a reader, it introduces such issues in art as its meaning and purpose; its meaning and purpose; its structure, material, and form; and its diverse effects on our lives. Its digital nature allows students to follow links to applicable sources and videos, expanding the students' educational experiences beyond the textbook. Introduction to Art: Design, Context, and Meaning provides a new and free alternative to traditional textbooks, making it an invaluable resource in our modern age of technology and advancement.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBlood, Peggyeauthor1 aLeMieux, Jeffery Aeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/374zAccess online version02825nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002700153245007400180264004300254264008500297264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002500504490002700529505061900556520094401175542002702119546001602146588004002162650002302202650002602225700003002251700003102281710003902312856007602351OTLid0000375MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771106  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBerger, Eugeneeauthor00aWorld HistorybCultures, States, and Societies to 1500cEugene Berger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Prehistory -- Chapter Two: Early Middle Eastern and Northeast African Civilizations -- Chapter Three: Ancient and Early Medieval India -- Chapter Four: China and East Asia to the Ming Dynasty -- Chapter Five: The Greek World from the Bronze Age to the Roman Conquest -- Chapter Six: The Roman World from 753 BCE to 500 CE -- Chapter Seven: Western Europe and Byzantium circa 5 0 0 - 10 0 0 CE -- Chapter Eight: Islam to the Mamluks -- Chapter Nine: African History to 1500 -- Chapter Ten: The Americas -- Chapter Eleven: Central Asia -- Chapter Twelve: Western Europe and Byzantium circa1000 - 1500 CE0 aWorld History: Cultures, States, and Societies to 1500 offers a comprehensive introduction to the history of humankind from prehistory to 1500. Authored by six USG faculty members with advance degrees in History, this textbook offers up-to-date original scholarship. It covers such cultures, states, and societies as Ancient Mesopotamia, Ancient Israel, Dynastic Egypt, India's Classical Age, the Dynasties of China, Archaic Greece, the Roman Empire, Islam, Medieval Africa, the Americas, and the Khanates of Central Asia.It includes 350 high-quality images and maps, chronologies, and learning questions to help guide student learning. Its digital nature allows students to follow links to applicable sources and videos, expanding their educational experience beyond the textbook. It provides a new and free alternative to traditional textbooks, making World History an invaluable resource in our modern age of technology and advancement.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aIsrael, George L.eauthor1 aMiller, Charoletteeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/375zAccess online version01711nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100003000164245003700194264004300231264006300274264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505042600514520015700940542004101097546001601138588004101154650002701195710003901222856007601261OTLid0000376MnU20260406020328.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781607826590  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aGloag, Anne Marieeauthor00aIntroductory AlgebracAnne Gloag 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIndependentc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Arithmetic Review -- 2 Introduction to Variables -- 3 Polynomials and Exponents, Part 1 -- 4 Polynomials and Exponents, Part 2 -- 5 Solving Equations -- 6 Linear Equations: Real World Applications -- 7 Literal Equations and Inequalities -- 8 Graphs and Graphing Linear Equations -- 9 Introduction to Functions -- 10 Linear Functions -- 11 More on Linear Functions -- 12 Systems of Linear Equations -- 13 Problem Solving0 aIntroductory Algebra provides a comprehensive introduction of variables, functionsand linear equations and gives students a solid foundation in algebra.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/376zAccess online version02609nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002400166245004500190264004300235264006000278264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505087900512520056201391542001601953546001601969588004001985650002302025650002302048700002502071710003902096856007602135OTLid0000378MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168277  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSanny, Jeffeauthor00aUniversity PhysicscJeff SannynVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefaceUnit 1. Mechanics -- Chapter 1: Units and Measurement -- Chapter 2: Vectors -- Chapter 3: Motion Along a Straight Line -- Chapter 4: Motion in Two and Three Dimensions -- Chapter 5: Newton's Laws of Motion -- Chapter 6: Applications of Newton's Laws -- Chapter 7: Work and Kinetic Energy -- Chapter 8: Potential Energy and Conservation of Energy -- Chapter 9: Linear Momentum and Collisions -- Chapter 10: Fixed-Axis Rotation -- Chapter 11: Angular Momentum -- Chapter 12: Static Equilibrium and Elasticity -- Chapter 13: Gravitation -- Chapter 14: Fluid Mechanics -- Unit 2. Waves and Acoustics -- Chapter 15: Oscillations -- Chapter 16: Waves -- Chapter 17: Sound -- Appendix A: UnitsAppendix B: Conversion FactorsAppendix C: Fundamental ConstantsAppendix D: Astronomical DataAppendix E: Mathematical FormulasAppendix F: ChemistryAppendix G: The Greek AlphabetIndex0 aUniversity Physics is a three-volume collection that meets the scope and sequence requirements for two- and three-semester calculus-based physics courses. Volume 1 covers mechanics, sound, oscillations, and waves. This textbook emphasizes connections between between theory and application, making physics concepts interesting and accessible to students while maintaining the mathematical rigor inherent in the subject. Frequent, strong examples focus on how to approach a problem, how to work with the equations, and how to check and generalize the result.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aLing, Samueleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/378zAccess online version02505nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002400166245004500190264004300235264006000278264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505066900512520066801181542001601849546001601865588004001881650002301921650002301944700002501967710003901992856007602031OTLid0000379MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168161  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSanny, Jeffeauthor00aUniversity PhysicscJeff SannynVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Thermodynamics -- Chapter 1: Temperature and Heat -- Chapter 2: The Kinetic Theory of Gases -- Chapter 3: The First Law of Thermodynamics -- Chapter 4: The Second Law of Thermodynamics -- Unit 2: Electricity and Magnetism -- Chapter 5: Electric Charges and Fields -- Chapter 6: Gauss's Law -- Chapter 7: Electric Potential -- Chapter 8: Capacitance -- Chapter 9: Current and Resistance -- Chapter 10: Direct-Current Circuits -- Chapter 11: Magnetic Forces and Fields -- Chapter 12: Sources of Magnetic Fields -- Chapter 13: Electromagnetic Induction -- Chapter 14: Inductance -- Chapter 15: Alternating-Current Circuits -- Chapter 16: Electromagnetic Waves0 aUniversity Physics is a three-volume collection that meets the scope and sequence requirements for two- and three-semester calculus-based physics courses. Volume 1 covers mechanics, sound, oscillations, and waves. Volume 2 covers thermodynamics, electricity and magnetism, and Volume 3 covers optics and modern physics. This textbook emphasizes connections between between theory and application, making physics concepts interesting and accessible to students while maintaining the mathematical rigor inherent in the subject. Frequent, strong examples focus on how to approach a problem, how to work with the equations, and how to check and generalize the result.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aLing, Samueleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/379zAccess online version02262nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002400166245004500190264004300235264006000278264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505042600512520066800938542001601606546001601622588004001638650002301678650002301701700002501724710003901749856007601788OTLid0000380MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168185  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSanny, Jeffeauthor00aUniversity PhysicscJeff SannynVolume 3 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Optics -- Chapter 1: The Nature of Light -- Chapter 2: Geometric Optics and Image Formation -- Chapter 3: Interference -- Chapter 4: Diffraction -- Unit 2: Modern Physics -- Chapter 5: Relativity -- Chapter 6: Photons and Matter Waves -- Chapter 7: Quantum Mechanics -- Chapter 8: Atomic Structure -- Chapter 9: Condensed Matter Physics -- Chapter 10: Nuclear Physics -- Chapter 11: Particle Physics and Cosmology0 aUniversity Physics is a three-volume collection that meets the scope and sequence requirements for two- and three-semester calculus-based physics courses. Volume 1 covers mechanics, sound, oscillations, and waves. Volume 2 covers thermodynamics, electricity and magnetism, and Volume 3 covers optics and modern physics. This textbook emphasizes connections between between theory and application, making physics concepts interesting and accessible to students while maintaining the mathematical rigor inherent in the subject. Frequent, strong examples focus on how to approach a problem, how to work with the equations, and how to check and generalize the result.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aLing, Samueleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/380zAccess online version03138nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245005200155264004300207264006000250264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505096200487520099101449542003002440546001602470588004102486650002402527700002802551700003102579700002702610710003902637856007602676OTLid0000381MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780198732860  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA44000aField Trials of Health InterventionsbA Toolbox 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOxford, United KingdombOxford University Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Introduction to field trials of health interventions -- Chapter 2 Types of intervention and their development -- Chapter 3 Reviewing the literature -- Chapter 4 Trial design -- Chapter 5 Trial size -- Chapter 6 Ethical considerations -- Chapter 7 Trial governance -- Chapter 8 Preparing grant applications -- Chapter 9 Community engagement -- Chapter 10 Censuses and mapping -- Chapter 11 Randomization, blinding, and coding -- Chapter 12 Outcome measures and case definition -- Chapter 13 Preliminary studies and pilot testing -- Chapter 14 Questionnaires -- Chapter 15 Social and behavioural research -- Chapter 16 Field organization and ensuring data of high quality -- Chapter 17 Field laboratory methods -- Chapter 18 Budgeting and accounting -- Chapter 19 Intervention costing and economic analysis -- Chapter 20 Data management -- Chapter 21 Methods of analysis -- Chapter 22 Phase IV studies -- Chapter 23 Reporting and using trial results0 aBefore new interventions can be used in disease control programmes, it is essential that they are carefully evaluated in “field trials”, which may be complex and expensive undertakings. Descriptions of the detailed procedures and methods used in trials that have been conducted in the past have generally not been published. As a consequence, those planning such trials have few guidelines available and little access to previously accumulated knowledge. In this book the practical issues of trial design and conduct are discussed fully and in sufficient detail for the text to be used as a “toolbox” by field investigators. The toolbox has now been extensively tested through use of the first two editions and this third edition is a comprehensive revision, incorporating the many developments that have taken place with respect to trials since 1996 and involving more than 30 contributors. Most of the chapters have been extensively revised and 7 new chapters have been added.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aSmith, Peter G.eeditor1 aMorrow, Richard H.eeditor1 aRoss, David A.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/381zAccess online version02260nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002900165245006600194264004300260264007500303264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505060400555520036501159542003901524546001601563588004101579650003501620650002401655700002601679700003001705710003901735856007601774OTLid0000382MnU20260406020331.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1987    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780813818566  aMnUbengcMnU 4aSF811 4aRA4401 aMartin, Wayne S.eauthor00aVeterinary EpidemiologybPrinciples and MethodscWayne Martin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc[1987] 4c©1987.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI / Basic principles -- 1. Epidemiologic concepts -- 2. Sampling methods -- 3. Measurement of disease frequency and production -- II / Studying disease in animal populations -- 4. Descriptive epidemiology -- 5. Disease causation -- 6. Surveys and analytic observational studies -- 7. Design of field trials -- 8. Theoretical epidemiology: systems analysis and modeling. -- III / Animal health economics -- 9. Animal health economics -- IV / Applied epidemiology -- 10. Rationale, strategies, and concepts of animal disease control -- 11. Monitoring disease and production -- 12. Field investigations0 aThe purpose of this textbook is to provide an introductory, yet comprehensive, source of information on epidemiology for veterinary students, researchers, and practitioners. There has not been a textbook that presents analytic epidemiology as a science, basic to veterinary medicine's efforts in health management (herd health) as well as in clinical medicine.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aMeek, Alan H.eauthor1 aWillebtrg, Prebeneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/382zAccess online version02929nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100003200159245006700191264004300258264006000301264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002500483490002700508505114600535520050501681542001602186546001602202588004102218650002602259650002402285650002302309700003002332700003002362710003902392856007602431OTLid0000383MnU20260406020333.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aHermanson, Roger H.eauthor00aAccounting PrinciplesbA Business PerspectivecRoger Hermanson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Accounting and its use in business decisions -- 2. Recording business transactions -- 3. Adjustments for financial reporting -- 4. Completing the accounting cycle -- 5. Accounting theory -- 6. Merchandising transactions -- 7. Measuring and reporting inventories -- 8. Control of cash -- 9. Receivables and payables -- 10. Property, plant, and equipment -- 11. Plant asset disposals, natural resources, and intangible assets -- 12. Stockholders' equity: Classes of capital stock -- 13. Corporations: Paid-in capital, retained earnings, dividends, and treasury stock -- 14. Stock investments -- 15. Long-term financing: Bonds -- 16. Analysis using the statement of cash flows -- 17. Analysis and interpretation of financial statements -- 18. Managerial accounting concepts/job costing -- 19. Process: Cost systems -- 20. Using accounting for quality and cost management -- 21. Cost-volume-profit analysis -- 22. Short-term decision making: Differential analysis -- 23. Budgeting for planning and control -- 24. Control through standard costs -- 25. Responsibility accounting: Segmental analysis -- 26. Capital budgeting: Long-range planning0 aAccounting Principles: A Business Perspective uses annual reports of real companies to illustrate many of the accounting concepts in use in business today. Gaining an understanding of accounting terminology and concepts, however, is not enough to ensure your success. You also need to be able to find information on the Internet, analyze various business situations, work effectively as a member of a team, and communicate your ideas clearly. This text was developed to help you develop these skills.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aEdwards, James D.eauthor1 aMaher, Michael W.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/383zAccess online version04081nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245005000159264004300209264006400252264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505246000493520056402953542001603517546001603533588004003549650002703589710003903616856007603655OTLid0000384MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aNica, Mihaieeditor00aPrinciples of Business StatisticscMihai Nica 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Sampling and Data -- 1.1 Sampling and Data: Introduction -- 1.2 Sampling and Data: Statistics -- 1.3 Sampling and Data: Key Terms -- 1.4 Sampling and Data: Data -- 1.5 Sampling and Data: Variation and Critical Evaluation -- 1.6 Sampling and Data: Frequency, Relative Frequency, and Cumulative Frequency -- 2 Descriptive Statistics -- 2.1 Descriptive Statistics: Introduction -- 2.2 Descriptive Statistics: Displaying Data -- 2.3 Descriptive Statistics: Histogram -- 2.4 Descriptive Statistics: Measuring the Center of the Data -- 2.5 Descriptive Statistics: Skewness and the Mean, Median, and Mode -- 2.6 Descriptive Statistics: Measuring the Spread of the Data -- 3 The Normal Distribution -- 3.1 Normal Distribution: Introduction -- 3.2 Normal Distribution: Standard Normal Distribution -- 3.3 Normal Distribution: Z-scores -- 3.4 Normal Distribution: Areas to the Left and Right of x -- 3.5 Normal Distribution: Calculations of Probabilities -- 3.6 Central Limit Theorem: Central Limit Theorem for Sample Means -- 3.7 Central Limit Theorem: Using the Central Limit Theorem -- 4 Confidence Interval -- 4.1 Confidence Intervals: Introduction -- 4.2 Confidence Intervals: Confidence Interval, Single Population Mean, Population Standard Deviation Known, Normal -- 4.3 Confidence Intervals: Confidence Interval, Single Population Mean, Standard Deviation Unknown, Student's-t -- 4.4 Confidence Intervals: Confidence Interval for a Population Proportion -- 5 Hypothesis Testing -- 5.1 Hypothesis Testing of Single Mean and Single Proportion: Introduction -- 5.2 Hypothesis Testing of Single Mean and Single Proportion: Null and Alternate Hypotheses -- 5.3 Hypothesis Testing of Single Mean and Single Proportion: Using the Sample to Test the Null Hypothesis -- 5.4 Hypothesis Testing of Single Mean and Single Proportion: Decision and Conclusion -- 6 Linear Regression and Correlation -- 6.1 Linear Regression and Correlation: Introduction -- 6.2 Linear Regression and Correlation: Linear Equations -- 6.3 Linear Regression and Correlation: Slope and Y-Intercept of a Linear Equation -- 6.4 Linear Regression and Correlation: Scatter Plots -- 6.5 Linear Regression and Correlation: The Regression Equation -- 6.6 Linear Regression and Correlation: Correlation Coefficient and Coefficient of Determination -- 6.7 Linear Regression and Correlation: Testing the Significance of the Correlation Coefficient -- 6.8 Linear Regression and Correlation: Prediction0 aYou are probably asking yourself the question, "When and where will I use statistics?". If you read any newspaper or watch television, or use the Internet, you will see statistical information. There are statistics about crime, sports, education, politics, and real estate. Typically, when you read a newspaper article or watch a news program on television, you are given sample information. With this information, you may make a decision about the correctness of a statement, claim, or "fact." Statistical methods can help you make the "best educated guess."1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/384zAccess online version02608nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100003100160245005300191264004300244264006000287264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505080300524520060701327542001601934546001601950588004101966650003502007650002702042650002602069710003902095856007602134OTLid0000385MnU20250811080520.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aTiemann, Thomas K.eauthor00aIntroductory Business StatisticscThomas Tiemann 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Descriptive statistics and frequency distributions -- Descriptive statistics -- 2. The normal and t-distributions -- Normal things -- The t-distribution -- 3. Making estimates -- Estimating the population mean -- Estimating the population proportion -- Estimating population variance -- 4. Hypothesis testing -- The strategy of hypothesis testing -- 5. The t-test -- The t-distribution -- 6. F-test and one-way anova -- Analysis of variance (ANOVA) -- 7. Some non-parametric tests -- Do these populations have the same location? The Mann-Whitney U testTesting with matched pairs: the Wilcoxon signed ranks test. -- Are these two variables related? Spearman's rank correlation -- 8. Regression basics -- What is regression? -- Correlation and covariance -- Covariance, correlation, and regression0 aThe book "Introductory Business Statistics" by Thomas K. Tiemann explores the basic ideas behind statistics, such as populations, samples, the difference between data and information, and most importantly sampling distributions. The author covers topics including descriptive statistics and frequency distributions, normal and t-distributions, hypothesis testing, t-tests, f-tests, analysis of variance, non-parametric tests, and regression basics. Using real-world examples throughout the text, the author hopes to help students understand how statistics works, not just how to "get the right number."1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/385zAccess online version01950nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002600149245004000175264004300215264006000258264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505039500495520044900890542001601339546001601355588004101371650002401412650002501436710003901461856007601500OTLid0000388MnU20250811080521.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aBurnett, Johneauthor00aIntroducing MarketingcJohn Burnett 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introducing marketing -- 2. Understanding and approaching the market -- 3. Marketing research: an aid to decision making -- 4. Understanding buyer behavior -- 5. External considerations in marketing -- 6. Marketing in global markets -- 7. Introducing and managing the product -- 8. Communicating to mass markets -- 9. Pricing the product -- 10. Channel concepts: distributing the product0 aThrough good economic times and bad, marketing remains the pivotal function in any business. Determining and satisfying the needs of customers through products that have value and accessibility and whose features are clearly communicated is the general purpose of any business. It is also a fundamental definition of marketing. This text introduces students to the marketing strategies and tools that practitioners use to market their products.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/388zAccess online version03349nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143100002700153245003700180264004300217264006000260264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505156100497520066502058542001602723546001602739588004002755650003602795650002902831710003902860856007602899OTLid0000389MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aPearson, Erikaeauthor00aMedia Studies 101cErika Pearson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAboutIntroduction, and How To Use This TextPart One: Reading Media Texts -- Analysing Texts: Media and Theory -- Communication & Culture -- Intercultural Communication -- Semiotics -- Signs and Signifiers -- Sign Systems -- Semiotics and Communication Processes -- Codes -- Two-step flow of communication -- Gender and politics -- Limitations of minimal effects model -- Part Two: Culture and Contexts -- Ideology -- Discourse, Institutions, and Power -- Institutions -- Discourse and Institutions -- Media and Democracy -- Habermas' Public Sphere -- Who is 'the Public'? -- Media Effects - introduction -- The Hypodermic Needle -- Minimal effects models - the post WWII years -- Agenda Setting -- Uses and gratifications model -- Post-Cold War: strong effects model -- Framing -- Part Three: Production and Structures -- Political Economies -- Political Economies of Mass Culture -- The Audience Commodity -- The Propaganda Model -- Political Economies of Digital media -- Commons and P2P Production -- Political Ecologies of Media -- Technologies -- Technology and Agency -- Technology and the Body -- Technology, Time, and Space -- Technology and Politics -- Globalisation and Convergence -- Convergence -- Part Four: Audiences & Identity -- Audiences and Audience Research -- Researching Audiences -- Consumer Cultures -- Consumerism and Subjectivity -- Identity and Fan Cultures -- Impressions Management -- Looking-Glass Self -- Dramaturgy -- Fandom -- Postcolonialism Race and Ethnicity -- Gender -- A History of Modern Political Economy -- Glossary0 aMedia Studies 101 is the open educational resource for media studies studies in New Zealand, Australia, and Pacifica. We have constructed this text so it can be read in a number of ways. You may wish to follow the structured order of 'chapters' like you would in a traditional printed textbook. Each section builds on and refers back to previous sections to build up your knowledge and skills. Alternatively, you may want to go straight to the section you are interested in -- links will help guide you back to definitions and key ideas if you need to refresh your knowledge or understand a new concept.This text is open under a Creative Commons NZ BY license.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/389zAccess online version08834nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002800155245003000183250000700213264004300220264006400263264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002500449490002700474505698900501520067907490542001608169546001608185588004008201650002308241700002808264700002908292710003908321856007608360OTLid0000390MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693503  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aFraknoi, Andreweauthor00aAstronomycAndrew Fraknoi  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 Science and the Universe: A Brief Tour -- 1.1 The Nature of Astronomy -- 1.2 The Nature of Science -- 1.3 The Laws of Nature -- 1.4 Numbers in Astronomy -- 1.5 Consequences of Light Travel Time -- 1.6 A Tour of the Universe -- 1.7 The Universe on the Large Scale -- 1.8 The Universe of the Very Small -- 1.9 A Conclusion and a Beginning -- For Further Exploration -- Chapter 2 Observing the Sky: The Birth of Astronomy -- 2.1 The Sky Above -- 2.2 Ancient Astronomy -- 2.3 Astrology and Astronomy -- 2.4 The Birth of Modern Astronomy -- Chapter 3. Orbits and Gravity -- 3.1 The Laws of Planetary Motion -- 3.2 Newton’s Great Synthesis -- 3.3 Newton’s Universal Law of Gravitation -- 3.4 Orbits in the Solar System -- 3.5 Motions of Satellites and Spacecraft -- 3.6 Gravity with More Than Two Bodies -- Chapter 4. Earth, Moon, and Sky -- 4.1 Earth and Sky -- 4.2 The Seasons -- 4.3 Keeping Time -- 4.4 The Calendar -- 4.5 Phases and Motions of the Moon -- 4.6 Ocean Tides and the Moon -- 4.7 Eclipses of the Sun and Moon -- Chapter 5. Radiation and Spectra -- 5.1 The Behavior of Light -- 5.2 The Electromagnetic Spectrum -- 5.3 Spectroscopy in Astronomy -- 5.4 The Structure of the Atom -- 5.5 Formation of Spectral Lines -- 5.6 The Doppler Effect -- Chapter 6. Astronomical Instruments -- 6.1 Telescopes -- 6.2 Telescopes Today -- 6.3 Visible-Light Detectors and Instruments -- 6.4 Radio Telescopes -- 6.5 Observations outside Earth’s Atmosphere -- 6.6 The Future of Large Telescopes -- Chapter 7. Other Worlds: An Introduction to the Solar System -- 7.1 Overview of Our Planetary System -- 7.2 Composition and Structure of Planets -- 7.3 Dating Planetary Surfaces -- 7.4 Origin of the Solar System -- Chapter 8. Earth as a Planet -- 8.1 The Global Perspective -- 8.2 Earth’s Crust -- 8.3 Earth’s Atmosphere -- 8.4 Life, Chemical Evolution, and Climate Change -- 8.5 Cosmic Influences on the Evolution of Earth -- Chapter 9. Cratered Worlds -- 9.1 General Properties of the Moon -- 9.2 The Lunar Surface -- 9.3 Impact Craters -- 9.4 The Origin of the Moon -- 9.5 Mercury -- Chapter 10. Earthlike Planets: Venus and Marks -- 10.1 The Nearest Planets: An Overview -- 10.2 The Geology of Venus -- 10.3 The Massive Atmosphere of Venus -- 10.4 The Geology of Mars -- 10.5 Water and Life on Mars -- 10.6 Divergent Planetary Evolution -- Chapter 11. The Giant Planets -- 11.1 Exploring the Outer Planets -- 11.2 The Giant Planets -- 11.3 Atmospheres of the Giant Planets -- Chapter 12. Rings, Moons, and Pluto -- 12.1 Ring and Moon Systems Introduced -- 12.2 The Galilean Moons of Jupiter -- 12.3 Titan and Triton -- 12.4 Pluto and Charon -- 12.5 Planetary Rings (and Enceladus) -- Chapter 13. Comets and Asteroids: Debris of the Solar System -- 13.1 Asteroids -- 13.2 Asteroids and Planetary Defense -- 13.3 The “Long-Haired” Comets -- 13.4 The Origin and Fate of Comets and Related Objects -- Chapter 14. Cosmic Samples and the Origin of the Solar System -- 14.1 Meteors -- 14.2 Meteorites: Stones from Heaven -- 14.3 Formation of the Solar System -- 14.4 Comparison with Other Planetary Systems -- 14.5 Planetary Evolution -- Chapter 15. The Sun: A Garden-Variety Star -- 15.1 The Structure and Composition of the Sun -- 15.2 The Solar Cycle -- 15.3 Solar Activity above the Photosphere -- 15.4 Space Weather -- Chapter 16. The Sun: A Nuclear Powerhouse -- 16.1 Sources of Sunshine: Thermal and Gravitational Energy -- 16.2 Mass, Energy, and the Theory of Relativity -- 16.3 The Solar Interior: Theory -- 16.4 The Solar Interior: Observations -- Chapter 17 Analyzing Starlight -- 17.1 The Brightness of Stars -- 17.2 Colors of Stars -- 17.3 The Spectra of Stars (and Brown Dwarfs) -- 17.4 Using Spectra to Measure Stellar Radius, Composition, and Motion -- Chapter 18 The Stars: A Celestial Census -- 18.1 A Stellar Census -- 18.2 Measuring Stellar Masses -- 18.3 Diameters of Stars -- 18.4 The H–R Diagram -- Chapter 19 Celestial Distances -- 19.1 Fundamental Units of Distance -- 19.2 Surveying the Stars -- 19.3 Variable Stars: One Key to Cosmic Distances -- 19.4 The H–R Diagram and Cosmic Distances -- Chapter 20 Between the Stars: Gas and Dust in Space -- 20.1 The Interstellar Medium -- 20.2 Interstellar Gas -- 20.3 Cosmic Dust -- 20.4 Cosmic Rays -- 20.5 The Life Cycle of Cosmic Material -- 20.6 Interstellar Matter around the Sun -- Chapter 21 The Birth of Stars and the Discovery of Planets outside the Solar System -- 21.1 Star Formation -- 21.2 The H–R Diagram and the Study of Stellar Evolution -- 21.3 Evidence That Planets Form around Other Stars -- 21.4 Planets beyond the Solar System: Search and Discovery -- 21.5 Exoplanets Everywhere: What We Are Learning -- 21.6 New Perspectives on Planet Formation -- Chapter 22 Stars from Adolescence to Old Age -- 22.1 Evolution from the Main Sequence to Red Giants -- 22.2 Star Clusters -- 22.3 Checking Out the Theory -- 22.4 Further Evolution of Stars -- 22.5 The Evolution of More Massive Stars -- Chapter 23 The Death of Stars -- 23.1 The Death of Low-Mass Stars -- 23.2 Evolution of Massive Stars: An Explosive Finish -- 23.3 Supernova Observations -- 23.4 Pulsars and the Discovery of Neutron Stars -- 23.5 The Evolution of Binary Star Systems -- 23.6 The Mystery of the Gamma-Ray Bursts -- Chapter 24 Black Holes and Curved Spacetime -- 24.1 Introducing General Relativity -- 24.2 Spacetime and Gravity -- 24.3 Tests of General Relativity -- 24.4 Time in General Relativity -- 24.5 Black Holes -- 24.6 Evidence for Black Holes -- 24.7 Gravitational Wave Astronomy -- Chapter 25 The Milky Way Galaxy -- 25.1 The Architecture of the Galaxy -- 25.2 Spiral Structure -- 25.3 The Mass of the Galaxy -- 25.4 The Center of the Galaxy -- 25.5 Stellar Populations in the Galaxy -- 25.6 The Formation of the Galaxy -- Chapter 26 Galaxies -- 26.1 The Discovery of Galaxies -- 26.2 Types of Galaxies -- 26.3 Properties of Galaxies -- 26.4 The Extragalactic Distance Scale -- 26.5 The Expanding Universe -- Chapter 27 Active Galaxies, Quasars, and Supermassive Black Holes -- 27.1 Quasars -- 27.2 Supermassive Black Holes: What Quasars Really Are -- 27.3 Quasars as Probes of Evolution in the Universe -- Chapter 28 The Evolution and Distribution of Galaxies -- 28.1 Observations of Distant Galaxies -- 28.2 Galaxy Mergers and Active Galactic Nuclei -- 28.3 The Distribution of Galaxies in Space -- 28.4 The Challenge of Dark Matter -- 28.5 The Formation and Evolution of Galaxies and Structure in the Universe -- Chapter 29 The Big Bang -- 29.1 The Age of the Universe -- 29.2 A Model of the Universe -- 29.3 The Beginning of the Universe -- 29.4 The Cosmic Microwave Background -- 29.5 What Is the Universe Really Made Of? -- 29.6 The Inflationary Universe -- 29.7 The Anthropic Principle -- Chapter 30 Life in the Universe -- 30.1 The Cosmic Context for Life -- 30.2 Astrobiology -- 30.3 Searching for Life beyond Earth -- 30.4 The Search for Extraterrestrial Intelligence -- Appendices --0 aDesigned to meet the scope and sequence of your course, Astronomy 2e is written in clear non-technical language, with the occasional touch of humor and a wide range of clarifying illustrations. It has many analogies drawn from everyday life to help non-science majors appreciate, on their own terms, what our modern exploration of the universe is revealing. The book can be used for either a one-semester or two-semester introductory course. The second edition has been updated according to new exploration and discoveries. The second edition also includes a significant amount of new art and images. The first edition of Astronomy by OpenStax is available in web view here.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMorrison, Davideauthor1 aWolff, Sidney C.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/390zAccess online version05650nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002400162245008400186264004300270264006900313264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505337200559520097903931542003904910546001604949588004004965650002505005650003305030700003305063700002905096710003905125856007605164OTLid0000391MnU20260406020711.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781642150834  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aMaid, Barryeauthor00aInformation LiteracybResearch and Collaboration across DisciplinescBarry Maid 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWAC Clearinghousec[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction, Barbara J. D'Angelo, Sandra Jamieson, Barry Maid, and Janice R. Walker -- Part I. Situating Information Literacy -- Chapter 1. Writing Information Literacy: A Retrospective and a Look Ahead, Rolf Norgaard and Caroline Sinkinson -- Chapter 2. Threshold Concepts: Integrating and Applying Information Literacy and Writing Instruction, Barry Maid and Barbara D'Angelo -- Chapter 3. Employer Expectations of Information Literacy: Identifying the Skills Gap, Dale Cyphert and Stanley P. Lyle -- Chapter 4. Creating and Exploring New Worlds: Web 2.0, Information Literacy, and the Ways We Know, Kathleen Blake Yancey -- Chapter 5. Information Literacy in Digital Environments: Construct Mediation, Construct Modeling, and Validation Processes, Irvin R. Katz and Norbert Elliot -- Part II. Researching Information Literacy -- Chapter 6. What the Citation Project Tells Us about Information Literacy in College Composition, Sandra Jamieson -- Chapter 7. Preliminary Paths to Information Literacy: Introducing Research in Core Courses, Katt Blackwell-Starnes -- Chapter 8. Approximating the University: The Information Literacy Practices of Novice Researchers, Karen Gocsik, Laura R. Braunstein, and Cynthia E. Tobery -- Chapter 9. Understanding and Using Sources: Student Practices and Perceptions, Patti Wojahn, Theresa Westbrock, Rachel Milloy, Seth Myers, Matthew Moberly, and Lisa Ramirez -- Chapter 10. Writing Information Literacy in First-Year Composition: A Collaboration among Faculty and Librarians, Donna Scheidt, William Carpenter, Robert Fitzgerald, Cara Kozma, Holly Middleton, and Kathy Shields -- Part III. Incorporating and Evaluating Information Literacy in Specific Courses -- Chapter 11. Up the Mountain without a Trail: Helping Students Use Source Networks to Find Their Way, Miriam Laskin and Cynthia R. Haller -- Chapter 12. Ethics, Distribution, and Credibility: Using an Emerging Genre to Teach Information Literacy Concepts, Christopher Toth and Hazel McClure -- Chapter 13. Information Literacy Preparation of Pre-Service and Graduate Educators, Susan Brown and Janice R. Walker -- Chapter 14. Not Just for Citations: Assessing Zotero While Reassessing Research, Rachel Rains Winslow, Sarah L. Skripsky, and Savannah L. Kelly -- Chapter 15. Quantitative Reasoning and Information Literacy in Economics, Diego Méndez-Carbajo -- Part IV. Collaborating to Advance Programmatic Information Literacy -- Chapter 16. Moving Ahead by Looking Back: Crafting a Framework for Sustainable, Institutional Information Literacy, Lori Baker and Pam Gladis -- Chapter 17. Supporting Academics to Embed Information Literacy to Enhance Students' Research and Writing Process, Angela Feekery, Lisa Emerson, and Gillian Skyrme -- Chapter 18. Building Critical Researchers and Writers Incrementally: Vital Partnerships Between Faculty and Librarians, Alison S. Gregory and Betty L. McCall -- Chapter 19. Impacting Information Literacy through Alignment, Resources, and Assessment, Beth Bensen, Denise Woetzel, Hong Wu, and Ghazala Hashmi -- Chapter 20. Bridging the Gaps: Collaboration in a Faculty and Librarian Community of Practice on Information Literacy, Francia Kissel, Melvin R. Wininger, Scott R. Weeden, Patricia A. Wittberg, Randall S. Halverson, Meagan Lacy, and Rhonda K. Huisman -- Afterword, Trudi E. Jacobson -- Contributors0 aThis collection brings together scholarship and pedagogy from multiple perspectives and disciplines, offering nuanced and complex perspectives on Information Literacy in the second decade of the 21st century. Taking as a starting point the concerns that prompted the Association of Research Libraries (ACRL) to review the Information Literacy Standards for Higher Education and develop the Framework for Information Literacy for Higher Education (2015), the chapters in this collection consider six frameworks that place students in the role of both consumer and producer of information within today's collaborative information environments. Contributors respond directly or indirectly to the work of the ACRL, providing a bridge between past/current knowledge and the future and advancing the notion that faculty, librarians, administrators, and external stakeholders share responsibility and accountability for the teaching, learning, and research of Information Literacy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-NoDerivs  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aD'Angelo, Barbara J.eeditor1 aJamieson, Sandraeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/391zAccess online version02491nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000900155050000700164050001000171245003500181250001200216264004300228264009600271264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002800489490002700517505054600544520047001090542003001560546001601590588004001606650004301646650003301689650003101722650002501753700002701778700003101805700003101836700002701867710003901894856007601933OTLid0000392MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135018  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aJA71 4aH1 4aHM58600aImmigrant and Refugee Families  a2nd Ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Immigration and Immigrant Policy: Barriers and Opportunities for Families -- Chapter 2: From There to Here: The Journey of Refugee Families to the United States -- Chapter 3: Human Rights -- Chapter 4: Economic Well-Being, Supports and Barriers -- Chapter 5: Mental Health -- Chapter 6: Intimate Partner Violence among Immigrants and Refugees -- Chapter 7: Substance Abuse -- Chapter 8: Resilience in Immigrant and Refugee Families -- Chapter 9: Embracing a New Home: Resettlement Research and the Family -- Chapter 10: Conclusion0 aImmigrant and Refugee Families: Global Perspectives on Displacement and Resettlement Experiences offers an interdisciplinary perspective on immigrant and refugee families' challenges and resilience across multiple domains, including economic, political, health, and human rights. This new edition has been revised and updated from the original 2016 edition. Co-edited with equal contribution by Jaime Ballard, Elizabeth Wieling, Catherine Solheim, and Lekie Dwanyen1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aBallard, Jaimeeeditor1 aWieling, Elizabetheeditor1 aSolheim, Catherineeeditor1 aDwanyen, Lekieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/392zAccess online version03511nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245004700144264004300191264005600234264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341002800412490002700440505175200467520057902219542004102798546001602839588004102855650002602896650003102922700003402953700002302987710003903010856007603049OTLid0000393MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aTogetherbThe Science of Social Psychology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNobac[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout Noba & Acknowledgements -- Social Psychology as a Science -- 1 An Introduction to the Science of Social PsychologyRobert Biswas-Diener -- 2 Research Methods in Social PsychologyRajiv Jhangiani -- 3 Statistical ThinkingBeth Chance & Allan Rossman -- 4 Conducting Psychology Research in the Real WorldMatthias R. Mehl -- 5 Social NeuroscienceTiffany A. Ito & Jennifer T. Kubota -- Understanding the Self and Others -- 6 Self and IdentityDan P. McAdams -- 7 Social Cognition and AttitudesYanine D. Hess & Cynthia L. Pickett -- 8 Theory of MindBertram Malle -- 9 Evolutionary Theories in PsychologyDavid M. Buss -- Groups and Group Processes -- 10 The Psychology of GroupsDonelson R. Forsyth -- 11 The FamilyJoel A. Muraco -- 12 CultureNeil Thin & Robert Biswas-Diener -- 13 Social ComparisonStephen Garcia & Arnor Halldorsson -- Emotions -- 14 Functions of EmotionsHyisung Hwang & David Matsumoto -- 15 Culture and EmotionJeanne Tsai -- Social Influence16 Conformity and ObedienceJerry M. Burger -- 17 Persuasion: So Easily FooledRobert V. Levine -- Conflict18 Prejudice, Discrimination, and StereotypingSusan T. Fiske -- 19 Aggression and ViolenceBrad J. Bushman -- Positive Relationships -- 20 Helping and Prosocial BehaviorDennis L. Poepsel & David A. Schroeder -- 21 CooperationJake P. Moskowitz & Paul K. Piff -- 22 Attraction and BeautyRobert G. Franklin & Leslie Zebrowitz -- 23 Positive RelationshipsNathaniel M. Lambert -- 24 Love, Friendship, and Social SupportDebi Brannan & Cynthia D. Mohr -- 25 Attachment Through the Life CourseR. Chris Fraley -- 26 Relationships and Well-beingKenneth Tan & Louis Tay -- Industrial/Organizational Psychology -- 27 Industrial/Organizational (I/O) PsychologyBerrin Erdogan & Talya N. Bauer -- Index0 aThis textbook presents core concepts common to introductory social psychology courses. The 8 units include 27 modules covering key social psych topics such as research methods, group processes, social influence, and relationships. This book can be modified: feel free to add or remove modules to better suit your specific needs. Each module in this book is accompanied by instructor's manual, PowerPoint presentation, test items, adaptive student quiz, and reading anticipation guide.Please note that the publisher requires you to login to access and download the textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBiswas-Diener, Roberteeditor1 aDiener, Edeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/393zAccess online version03299nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001100142050000800153100002500161245006000186250001600246264004300262264003700305264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002500464490002700489505089200516520126601408542004102674546001602715588004002731650002702771710003902798856007602837OTLid0000394MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1534970746  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLevin, Oscareauthor00aDiscrete MathematicsbAn Open IntroductioncOscar Levin  a4th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGreeley, CObOscar Levinc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a0 Introduction and Preliminaries 1 -- 0.1 What is Discrete Mathematics? -- 0.2 Mathematical Statements -- 0.3 Sets -- 1 Counting -- 1.1 Additive and Multiplicative Principles -- 1.2 Binomial Coefficients -- 1.3 Combinations and Permutations -- 1.4 Combinatorial Proofs -- 1.5 Stars and Bars -- 1.6 Advanced Counting Using PIE -- 1.7 Chapter Summary -- 2 Sequences -- 2.1 Definitions -- 2.2 Arithmetic and Geometric Sequences -- 2.3 Polynomial Fitting -- 2.4 Solving Recurrence Relations -- 2.5 Induction -- 2.6 Chapter Summary -- 3 Symbolic Logic and Proofs -- 3.1 Propositional Logic -- 3.2 Proofs -- 3.3 Chapter Summary -- 4 Graph Theory -- 4.1 Definitions -- 4.2 Trees -- 4.3 Planar Graphs -- 4.4 Coloring -- 4.5 Euler Paths and Circuits -- 4.6 Matching in Bipartite Graphs -- 4.7 Chapter Summary -- 5 Additional Topics -- 5.1 Generating Functions -- 5.2 Introduction to Number Theory0 aDiscrete Mathematics: An Open Introduction is a free, open source textbook appropriate for a first or second year undergraduate course for math and computer science majors. The book is especially well-suited for courses that incorporate inquiry-based learning. Since Spring 2013, the book has been used as the primary textbook or a supplemental resource at more than 200 colleges and universities around the world (see the partial adoptions list). After many years of development, I am pleased to announce that the 4th edition of Discrete Mathematics: an Open Introduction is now available, here and on Runestone Academy. The new edition brings many improvements and a new organization of content. In particular, the book now starts with logic and proofs, then practices those proofs with graph theory. The second half of the book contains material on counting (with a new "application to probability" section) and sequences. Over the last few years, I have found that students have more success with this arrangement. There is also a stronger emphasis on discrete structures, which should make the book more useful for students in computer science, while still focusing on understanding mathematical concepts essential for math majors and future math teachers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/394zAccess online version02085nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100003100146245007900177264004300256264006300299264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505042800539520048100967542004101448546001601489588004001505650002701545700002401572710003901596856007601635OTLid0000395MnU20260406020736.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aMorris, Dave Witteeauthor00aProofs and ConceptsbThe Fundamentals of Abstract MathematicscDave Morris 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLethbridge, AlbertabDave Witte Morris, Joy Morrisc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Introduction to Logic and Proofs -- 1. What is Logic? -- 2. Propositional Logic -- 3. Two-Column Proofs -- Part II. Sets and First-Order Logic -- 4. Sets, Subsets, and Predicates -- 5. Operations on Sets -- 6. First-Order Logic -- 7. Quantifier Proofs -- 8. Divisibility and Congruence -- Part III. Other Fundamental Concepts -- 9. Functions -- 10. Cardinality -- 11. Proof by Induction -- 12. Equivalence Relations0 aThis free undergraduate textbook provides an introduction to proofs, logic, sets, functions, and other fundamental topics of abstract mathematics. It is designed to be the textbook for a bridge course that introduces undergraduates to abstract mathematics, but it is also suitable for independent study by undergraduates (or mathematically mature high-school students), or for use as a very inexpensive supplement to undergraduate courses in any field of abstract mathematics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aMorris, Joyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/395zAccess online version01961nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002900146245004800175264004300223264006400266264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505063600507520019501143542001601338546001601354588004001370650003501410650002701445710003901472856007601511OTLid0000396MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSekhon, Rupindereeditor00aApplied Finite MathematicscRupinder Sekhon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Linear Equations -- 2 Linear Equations: Homework -- 3 Matrices -- 4 Matrices: Homework -- 5 Linear Programming: A Geometric Approach -- 6 Linear Programming: A Geometrical Approach: Homework -- 7 Linear Programing: The Simplex Method -- 8 Linear Programing: The Simplex Method: Homework -- 9 Mathematics of Finance -- 10 Mathematics of Finance: Homework -- 11 Sets and Counting -- 12 Sets and Counting: Homework -- 13 Probability -- 14 Probability: Homework -- 15 More Probability -- 16 More Probability: Homework -- 17 Markov Chains -- 18 Markov Chains: Homework -- 19 Game Theory -- 20 Game Theory: Homework -- 21 Practice Exam0 aApplied Finite Mathematics covers topics including linear equations, matrices, linear programming, the mathematics of finance, sets and counting, probability, Markov chains, and game theory.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/396zAccess online version02278nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245003400159264004300193264006000236264001200296300002200308336002600330337002600356338003600382341002800418490002700446505037200473520080700845542004101652546001601693588004001709650002601749650002601775710003901801856007601840OTLid0000397MnU20260406020705.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aOtt, Waltereauthor00aModern PhilosophycWalter Ott 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Preface -- 2. Minilogic and Glossary -- 3. Background to Modern Philosophy -- 4. René Descartes (1596–1650) -- 5. Baruch Spinoza (1632–1677) -- 6. John Locke's (1632–1704) Essay Concerning Human Understanding (1689) -- 7. George Berkeley (1685–1753) -- 8. David Hume's (1711–1776) Enquiry Concerning Human Understanding -- 9. Immanuel Kant (1724–1804)0 aThis is a textbook in modern philosophy. It combines readings from primary sources with two pedagogical tools. Paragraphs in italics introduce figures and texts. Numbered study questions (also in italics) ask students to reconstruct an argument or position from the text, or draw connections among the readings. And I have added an introductory chapter (Chapter 0 – Minilogic and Glossary), designed to present the basic tools of philosophy and sketch some principles and positions. The immediate goal is to encourage students to grapple with the ideas rather than passing their eyes over the texts. This makes for a better classroom experience and permits higher-level discussions. Another goal is to encourage collaboration among instructors, as they revise and post their own versions of the book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/397zAccess online version02585nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002800164245007700192264004300269264009600312264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505093800585520045901523542003001982546001602012588004102028650002702069710003902096856007602135OTLid0000399MnU20260406020334.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135001  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLilja, David J.eauthor00aLinear Regression Using RbAn Introduction to Data ModelingcDavid Lilja 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 1.1 What is a Linear Regression Model? -- 1.2 What is R? -- 1.3 What's Next? -- 2 Understand Your Data -- 2.1 Missing Values -- 2.2 Sanity Checking and Data Cleaning -- 2.3 The Example Data -- 2.4 Data Frames -- 2.5 Accessing a Data Frame -- 3 One-Factor Regression -- 3.1 Visualize the Data -- 3.2 The Linear Model Function -- 3.3 Evaluating the Quality of the Model -- 3.4 Residual Analysis -- 4 Multi-factor Regression -- 4.1 Visualizing the Relationships in the Data -- 4.2 Identifying Potential Predictors -- 4.3 The Backward Elimination Process -- 4.4 An Example of the Backward Elimination Process -- 4.5 Residual Analysis -- 4.6 When Things Go Wrong -- 5 Predicting Responses -- 5.1 Data Splitting for Training and Testing -- 5.2 Training and Testing -- 5.3 Predicting Across Data Sets -- 6 Reading Data into the R Environment -- 6.1 Reading CSV files -- 7 Summary8 A Few Things to Try NextBibliographyIndex0 aLinear Regression Using R: An Introduction to Data Modeling presents one of the fundamental data modeling techniques in an informal tutorial style. Learn how to predict system outputs from measured data using a detailed step-by-step process to develop, train, and test reliable regression models. Key modeling and programming concepts are intuitively described using the R programming language. All of the necessary resources are freely available online.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/399zAccess online version03203nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050001000154100002900164245004600193264004300239264005800282264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505184200514520018102356542002702537546001602564588004002580650002302620650002402643650002302667710003902690856007602729OTLid0000402MnU20260406020737.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchnick, Jeffreyeauthor00aCalculus-Based Physics IcJeffrey Schnick 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aManchester, New HampshirebJeffrey W. Schnickc[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Mathematical Prelude -- 2 Conservation of Mechanical Energy I: Kinetic Energy & Gravitational Potential Energy -- 3 Conservation of Mechanical Energy II: Springs, Rotational Kinetic Energy -- 4 Conservation of Momentum -- 5 Conservation of Angular Momentum -- 6 One-Dimensional Motion (Motion Along a Line): Definitions and Mathematics -- 7 One-Dimensional Motion: The Constant Acceleration Equations -- 8 One-Dimensional Motion: Collision Type II -- 9 One-Dimensional Motion Graphs -- 10 Constant Acceleration Problems in Two Dimensions -- 11 Relative Velocity -- 12 Gravitational Force Near the Surface of the Earth, First Brush with Newton's 2nd Law -- 13 Freefall, a.k.a. Projectile Motion -- 14 Newton's Laws #1: Using Free Body Diagrams -- 15 Newton's Laws #2: Kinds of Forces, Creating Free Body Diagrams -- 16 Newton's Laws #3: Components, Friction, Ramps, Pulleys, and Strings -- 17 The Universal Law of Gravitation -- 18 Circular Motion: Centripetal Acceleration -- 19 Rotational Motion Variables, Tangential Acceleration, Constant Angular Acceleration -- 20 Torque & Circular Motion -- 21 Vectors: The Cross Product & Torque -- 22 Center of Mass, Moment of Inertia -- 23 Statics -- 24 Work and Energy -- 25 Potential Energy, Conservation of Energy, Power -- 26 Impulse and Momentum -- 27 Oscillations: Introduction, Mass on a Spring -- 28 Oscillations: The Simple Pendulum, Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion -- 29 Waves: Characteristics, Types, Energy -- 30 Wave Function, Interference, Standing Waves -- 31 Strings, Air Columns -- 32 Beats, The Doppler Effect -- 33 Fluids: Pressure, Density, Archimedes' Principle -- 34 Pascal's Principle, the Continuity Equation, and Bernoulli's Principle -- 35 Temperature, Internal Energy, Heat, and Specific Heat Capacity -- 36 Heat: Phase Changes -- 37 The First Law of Thermodynamics0 aCalculus-Based Physics is an introductory physics textbook designed for use in the two-semester introductory physics course typically taken by science and engineering students.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/402zAccess online version02937nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050001000154100002900164245004700193264004300240264005800283264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505157500515520018102090542002702271546001602298588004002314650002302354650002402377650002302401710003902424856007602463OTLid0000403MnU20260406020404.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSchnick, Jeffreyeauthor00aCalculus-Based Physics IIcJeffrey Schnick 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aManchester, New HampshirebJeffrey W. Schnickc[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Charge & Coulomb's Law -- 2 The Electric Field: Description and Effect -- 3 The Electric Field Due to one or more Point Charges -- 4 Conductors and the Electric Field -- 5 Work Done by the Electric Field, and, the Electric Potential -- 6 The Electric Potential Due to One or More Point Charges -- 7 Equipotential Surfaces, Conductors, and Voltage -- 8 Capacitors, Dielectrics, and Energy in Capacitors -- 9 Electric Current, EMF, Ohm's Law -- 10 Resistors in Series and Parallel; Measuring I & V -- 11 Resistivity, Power -- 12 Kirchhoff's Rules, Terminal Voltage -- 13 RC Circuits -- 14 Capacitors in Series & Parallel -- 15 Magnetic Field Intro: Effects -- 16 Magnetic Field: More Effects -- 17 Magnetic Field: Causes -- 18 Faraday's Law, Lenz's Law -- 19 Induction, Transformers, and Generators -- 20 Faraday's Law and Maxwell's Extension to Ampere's Law -- 21 The Nature of Electromagnetic Waves -- 22 Huygens's Principle and 2-Slit Interference -- 23 Single-Slit Diffraction -- 24 Thin Film Interference -- 25 Polarization -- 26 Geometric Optics, Reflection -- 27 Refraction, Dispersion, Internal Reflection -- 28 Thin Lenses: Ray Tracing -- 29 Thin Lenses: Lens Equation, Optical Power -- 30 The Electric Field Due to a Continuous Distribution of Charge on a Line -- 31 The Electric Potential due to a Continuous Charge Distribution -- 32 Calculating the Electric Field from the Electric Potential -- 33 Gauss's Law -- 34 Gauss's Law Example -- 35 Gauss's Law for the Magnetic Field, and, Ampere's Law Revisited -- 36 The Biot-Savart Law -- 37 Maxwell's Equations0 aCalculus-Based Physics is an introductory physics textbook designed for use in the two-semester introductory physics course typically taken by science and engineering students.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/403zAccess online version02707nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002500167245003000192264004300222264006400265264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505103100503520055301534542001602087546001602103588004102119650002302160650002302183710003902206856007602245OTLid0000404MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781938168147  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aParker, Ninaeauthor00aMicrobiologycNina Parker 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 An Invisible World -- 2 How We See the Invisible World -- 3 The Cell -- 4 Prokaryotic Diversity -- 5 The Eukaryotes of Microbiology -- 6 Acellular Pathogens -- 7 Microbial Biochemistry -- 8 Microbial Metabolism -- 9 Microbial Growth -- 10 Biochemistry of the Genome -- 11 Mechanisms of Microbial Genetics -- 12 Modern Applications of Microbial Genetics -- 13 Control of Microbial Growth -- 14 Antimicrobial Drugs -- 15 Microbial Mechanisms of Pathogenicity -- 16 Disease and Epidemiology -- 17 Innate Nonspecific Host Defenses -- 18 Adaptive Specific Host Defenses -- 19 Diseases of the Immune System -- 20 Laboratory Analysis of the Immune Response -- 21 Skin and Eye Infections -- 22 Respiratory System Infections -- 23 Urogenital System Infections -- 24 Digestive System Infections -- 25 Circulatory and Lymphatic System Infections -- 26 Nervous System Infections -- Fundamentals of Physics and Chemistry Important to MicrobiologyMathematical BasicsMetabolic PathwaysTaxonomy of Clinically Relevant MicroorganismsGlossary0 aMicrobiology covers the scope and sequence requirements for a single-semester microbiology course for non-majors. The book presents the core concepts of microbiology with a focus on applications for careers in allied health. The pedagogical features of the text make the material interesting and accessible while maintaining the career-application focus and scientific rigor inherent in the subject matter. Microbiology's art program enhances students' understanding of concepts through clear and effective illustrations, diagrams, and photographs.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/404zAccess online version02079nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245008000179264004300259264004800302264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505029500527520063300822542002701455546001601482588004001498650002601538650002601564710003901590856007601629OTLid0000405MnU20260406020820.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780692471289  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aNobis, Nathaneauthor00aAnimals & Ethics 101bThinking Critically About Animal RightscNathan Nobis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUnited StatesbOpen Philosophy Pressc2018. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introductions to Ethics, Logic and Animals & Ethics -- Chapter 2: Animal Minds -- Chapter 3: Defending Animals -- Chapter 4: Defending Animal Use -- Chapter 5: Wearing & Eating Animals -- Chapter 6: Animal Experimentation -- Chapter 7: Pets, Zoos & Hunting -- Chapter 8: Activism0 aThis book provides an overview of the current debates about the nature and extent of our moral obligations to animals. Which, if any, uses of animals are morally wrong, which are morally permissible (i.e., not wrong) and why? What, if any, moral obligations do we, individually and as a society (and a global community), have towards animals and why? How should animals be treated? Why? We will explore the most influential and most developed answers to these questions – given by philosophers, scientists, and animal advocates and their critics – to try to determine which positions are supported by the best moral reasons.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/405zAccess online version01876nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245005400177264004300231264008500274264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002500481490002700506505028500533520031800818542002701136546001601163588004001179650002001219650002601239700002701265700002901292700003001321710003901351856007601390OTLid0000407MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771335  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aClark, Alaneauthor00aUnderstanding MusicbPast and PresentcAlan Clark 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMusic Fundamentals -- Music of the Middle Ages -- Music of the Renaissance -- Music of the Baroque Period -- Music of the Classical Period -- Nineteenth-Century Music and Romanticism -- The Twentieth Century and Beyond -- Popular Music in the United States -- Appendix -- Glossary0 aUnderstanding Music: Past and Present is an open Music Appreciation textbook co-authored by music faculty across Georgia. The text covers the fundamentals of music and the physics of sound, an exploration of music from the Middle Ages to the present day, and a final chapter on popular music in the United States.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aHeflin, Thomaseauthor1 aKluball, Jefferyeauthor1 aKramer, Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/407zAccess online version01845nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002300156245009700179264004300276264008500319264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002500526490002700551505030100578520026800879542002701147546001601174588004001190650002601230650002401256700002601280700002601306710003901332856007601371OTLid0000408MnU20260406020613.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771342  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aBerke, Amyeauthor00aWriting the NationbA Concise Introduction to American Literature 1865 to PresentcAmy Berke 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Late Romanticism (1855-1870) -- Chapter 2: Realism (1865-1890) -- Chapter 3: Naturalism (1890-1914) -- Chapter 4: Turn of the Twentieth Century and the Growth of Modernism (1893 - 1914) -- Chapter 5: Modernism (1914 - 1945) -- Chapter 6: American Literature Since 1945 (1945 - Present)0 aWriting the Nation: A Concise Guide to American Literature 1865 to Present is a text that surveys key literary movements and the American authors associated with the movement. Topics include late romanticism, realism, naturalism, modernism, and modern literature.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aBleil, Roberteauthor1 aCofer, Jordaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/408zAccess online version01962nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002500164245005600189264004300245264008500288264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505042600550520027500976542002701251546001601278588004101294650002601335650002401361650002401385700002801409710003901437856007601476OTLid0000409MnU20260406020407.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771328  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aBL11 aGetty, Lauraeauthor00aWorld Literature IbBeginnings to 1650cLaura Getty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMiddle East, Near East, Greece -- Hebrew Bible, “Genesis” and “Exodus” -- The Epic of Gilgamesh -- The Iliad and The Odyssey -- Medea -- Oedipus the king -- The Apology of Socrates -- China -- The Analects -- The Art of War -- The Book of Songs -- The Mother of Mencius -- The Zhuangzi -- India -- The Bhagavad Gita -- The Mahabharata -- The Ramayana -- Rome -- The Aeneid -- Metamorphoses -- BibliographyAppendix0 aThis peer-reviewedWorld Literature Ianthology includes introductory text and images before each series of readings. Sections of the text are divided bytimeperiod in three parts: the Ancient World, Middle Ages, and Renaissance, and then divided into chapters by location.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks1 aKwon, Kyounghyeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/409zAccess online version03835nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002500164245005500189264004300244264008500287264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505044500549520213100994542002703125546001603152588004003168650002603208650002403234650002403258700002803282710003903310856007603349OTLid0000410MnU20260406020408.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771229  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aBL11 aGetty, Lauraeauthor00aCompact Anthology of World LiteraturecLaura Getty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Middle East, Near East, Greece -- Hebrew Bible, “Genesis” and “Exodus” -- The Epic of Gilgamesh -- The Iliad and The Odyssey -- Medea -- Oedipus the King -- Chapter 2: China -- The Analects -- The Art of War -- The Book of Songs -- The Mother of Mencius -- The Zhuangzi -- Chapter 3: India -- The Bhagavad Gita -- The Mahabharata -- The Râmâyana -- Chapter 4: Rome -- The Aeneid -- Metamorphoses -- BibliographyAppendix0 aA world literature class may be the first place that some students have encountered European works, let alone non-Western texts. The emphasis in this anthology, therefore, is on non-Western and European works, with only the British authors who were the most influential to European and non-Western authors (such as Shakespeare, whose works have influenced authors around the world to the present day). In a world literature class, there is no way that a student can be equally familiar with all of the societies, contexts, time periods, cultures, religions, and languages that they will encounter; even though the works presented here are translated, students will face issues such as unfamiliar names and parts of the story (such as puns) that may not translate well or at all. Since these stories are rooted in their cultures and time periods, it is necessary to know the basic context of each work to understand the expectations of the original audience. The introductions in this anthology are meant to be just that: a basic overview of what students need to know before they begin reading, with topics that students can research further. An open access literature textbook cannot be a history book at the same time, but history is the great companion of literature: The more history students know, the easier it is for them to interpret literature. These works can help students understand the present, as well. In an electronic age, with this text available to anyone with computer access around the world, it has never been more necessary to recognize and understand differences among nationalities and cultures. The literature in this anthology is foundational, in the sense that these works influenced the authors who followed them. A word to the instructor: The texts have been chosen with the idea that they can be compared and contrasted, using common themes. Rather than numerous (and therefore often random) choices of texts from various periods, these selected works are meant to make both teaching and learning easier. While cultural expectations are not universal, many of the themes found in these works are.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks1 aKwon, Kyounghyeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/410zAccess online version03737nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002500148245004300173250001600216264004300232264007900275264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505094900528520152801477542004103005546001603046588004003062650002603102650002403128650002903152700003103181710003903212856007603251OTLid0000411MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aP91.31 aBarton, Kriseauthor00aExploring Public SpeakingcKris Barton  a4th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac2019. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Basics of Public Speaking -- Chapter 2: Audience Analysis and Listening -- Chapter 3: Ethics in Public Speaking -- Chapter 4: Developing Topics for Your Speech -- Chapter 5: Researching Your Speeches -- Chapter 6: Organizing and Outlining Your Speech -- Chapter 7: Supporting Your Speech Ideas -- Chapter 8: Introductions and Conclusions -- Chapter 9: Presentation Aids in Speaking -- Chapter 10: Language -- Chapter 11: Delivery -- Chapter 12: Informative Speaking -- Chapter 13: Persuasive Speaking -- Chapter 14: Logical Reasoning -- Chapter 15: Special Occasion Speaking -- Appendix A: Cultural Diversity and Public Speaking -- Appendix B: Succeeding as a College Student -- Appendix C: Public Speaking Online -- Appendix D: Funny Talk: The Art and Craft of Using Humor in Public Address -- Appendix E: APA Citation -- Appendix F: Research with Dalton State Library Resources -- Appendix G: Glossary -- Appendix H: References0 aIn Exploring Public Speaking, especially in its second through fourth editions, we have attempted to create a usable, zero-cost textbook for basic public speaking courses or courses that include basic public speaking skills as one of their primary learning outcomes. The free, open nature of the text means that instructors are able to use all or part of it, and add their own materials. We believe this text addresses all the subjects that traditional publishers’ books would address in an appropriate writing style and with appropriate college-level learning theory in mind. The appendices address some additional topics that might be excluded from most texts, but that we believe add to the experience: learning theory, plagiarism, speaking online, speaking to diverse audiences, and humor in public speaking. In the third and fourth editions we have added “case study” examples and some different outline samples. We think this book is especially useful in coverage of PowerPoint, audience analysis and responsiveness, ethics in public speaking, persuasion, special occasion speeches, and structure of speeches. Because it was written by communication professors with decades of experience in the classroom, we are aware of the needs of basic public speaking students. Three ancillaries are currently available: electronic “flash cards” for study, PowerPoint slide decks on the 15 main chapters, and test banks for the 15 main chapters. As the website is developed, it will include videos of student speeches.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aTucker, Barbara G.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/411zAccess online version02276nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245004000186264004300226264008500269264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505044000531520063200971542004101603546001601644588004001660650002601700650002401726700002501750710003901775856007601814OTLid0000412MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350653  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aHamlin, Annemarieeauthor00aTechnical WritingcAnnemarie Hamlin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Professional Communications -- 2. Audience Analysis -- 3. Proposals -- 4. Information Literacy -- 5. Citations and Plagiarism -- 6. Progress Reports -- 7. Outlines -- 8. Creating and Integrating Graphics -- 9. Ethics in Technical Writing -- 10. Technical Reports: Components and Design -- 11. Basic Design and Readability in Publications -- 12. Employment Materials -- 13. Communicating across Cultures -- 14. Thinking about Writing0 aThis open textbook offers students of technical writing an introduction to the processes and products involved in professional, workplace, and technical writing. The text is broken up into sections reflecting key components of researching, developing, and producing a technical report. Readers will also learn about other professional communication, designing documents, and creating and integrating graphics. Written especially for an academic setting, this book provides readers with guidance on information literacy and documenting sources. This book was collected, adapted, and edited from multiple openly licensed sources.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aRubio, Chriseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/412zAccess online version03699nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134100002900147245004500176264004300221264008500264264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505204400526520050702570542001603077546001603093588004003109650002503149650003603174710003903210856007603249OTLid0000413MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1062.61 aNissila, Phylliseauthor00aHow to Learn Like A ProcPhyllis Nissila 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1 Overview--Learning Styles and Preferences; Unit Terms -- Lesson 1.1: The Three Learning Styles -- Lesson 1.2: Visual Learning -- Lesson 1.3: Auditory Learning -- Lesson 1.4: Kinesthetic Learning -- Lesson 1.5: The Brain Dominance Theory -- Lesson 1.6: Howard Gardner's Multiple Intelligences Theory -- To the Instructor: Optional Assignments/Activities/Extra Credit Opportunities for Unit 1 -- Unit 2 Overview--Management of Time, Tools, and Study Environment; Unit Terms -- Lesson 2.1: World View and Self Efficacy -- Lesson 2.2: Procrastination -- Lesson 2.3: Schedules and Scheduling -- Lesson 2.4: Graphic Organizers and Study Cards -- Lesson 2.5: Study Areas and Study Groups -- To the Instructor: Optional Assignments/Activities/Extra Credit Opportunities for Unit 2 -- Unit 3 Overview--College Level Critical Thinking and Reading; Unit Terms -- Lesson 3.1: Comprehending College Level Reading by Using the Reading Apprenticeship Approach -- Lesson 3.2: Getting the Most Out of Your Textbooks -- Lesson 3.3: Patterns and Context Clues -- Lesson 3.4: Close Reading for LiteratureTo the Instructor: Optional Assignments/Activities/Extra Credit Opportunities for Unit 5 -- Lesson 3.5: Math and Science--Tips for Better Comprehension and for Studying -- To the Instructor: Optional Assignments/Activities/Extra Credit Opportunities for Unit 3 -- Unit 4 Overview--Listening and Note-Taking; Unit Terms -- Lesson 4.1: Note-Taking Part 1, Listening -- Lesson 4.2: Note-Taking Part 2, Key Information and Formats -- To the Instructor: Optional Assignments/Activities/Extra Credit Opportunities for Unit 4 -- Unit 5 Overview--Memory Principles and Techniques; Unit Terms -- Lesson 5.1: Memory Model and Techniques -- Lesson 5.2: Memory as We Age -- To the Instructor: Optional Assignments/Activities/Extra Credit Opportunities for Unit 5 -- Unit 6 Overview--Test-Taking: Pre, Mid, and Post; Unit Terms -- Lesson 6.1: Pre- Mid- and Post-Test-Taking Strategies -- Lesson 6.2: Handling Test Anxiety -- Lesson 6.3: Understanding Test Items0 aHow to Learn Like a Pro! features the “big six” effective learning/study skills topics: learning styles and preferences, time and materials management, critical thinking and reading, note-taking, memory principles, and test-taking techniques. Each of the six units featuring a total of twenty-three lessons and accompanying exercises (with a dash of humor here and there) were developed with the diverse student body of the community college in mind as well as learners in other educational venues.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/413zAccess online version03592nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002800144245009100172264004300263264006000306264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505187600543520055702419542001602976546001602992588004003008650002403048650003103072710003903103856007603142OTLid0000414MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA440 4aH11 aMelrose, Sherrieauthor00aSupporting Individuals with Intellectual Disabilities & Mental IllnesscSherri Melrose 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCHAPTER 1: SUPPORT WORK: THE FUNDAMENTALS -- Introduction -- Guiding Principles for Support Work -- Historical Struggles -- Competencies Expected of Support Workers -- Conclusion -- References -- CHAPTER 2: WHAT'S IN A NAME? -- Introduction -- The Purpose of Naming -- Historical Perspective -- Guidelines for Choosing the Right Name -- Intellectual Disability -- What Is Intellectual Disability? -- The Impact of Names Beyond the Hurt Feelings: Implications for Service and Support -- Conclusion -- References -- CHAPTER 3: AN OVERVIEW OF MENTAL ILLNESS -- Introduction -- Background of Mental Health Care -- Indicators Associated with Disorders of Thinking -- Indicators Associated with Disorders of Mood -- Indicators Associated with Disorders of Behaviour -- Conclusion -- References -- CHAPTER 4: COMMON PHYSICAL CONCERNS -- Introduction -- Health Status -- Factors Affecting Health Status -- Common Health Challenges -- Impact of Support Providers on Health Status -- Health Promotion -- Conclusion -- References -- CHAPTER 5: WHEN THE PROBLEM IS PAIN -- Introduction -- Ethical Principles for Addressing Physical Health Conditions and Assessing Pain -- The Hierarchy of Pain Assessment Techniques -- Guiding Principles Pain Assessment -- Behavioural Pain Assessment Tools -- Picture Resources for Identifying Emotions of Physical Distress -- Pain and Health Care for Dually Diagnosed Persons -- Conclusion -- References -- CHAPTER 6: BEHAVIOUR THAT HURTS -- Introduction -- Overview of Applied Behavioural Analysis -- Strategies to Help Decrease Self-Injurious and Aggressive Behaviour -- Conclusion -- References -- CHAPTER 7: SEXUALITY -- Introduction -- Discussion Topics for Sexual Education Support -- Understanding Boundaries -- Providing Resources -- Differentiating between Challenging Behaviours and Sex Offending Behaviours -- Conclusion -- References --0 aThis multidisciplinary resource develops topics of interest to all those who care about and for individuals with co-occurring intellectual disabilities and mental illness. Each chapter presents current evidence informed practice knowledge. Each topic is also presented with audio enabled text boxes emphasizing ‘Key Points for Caregivers.' For those who are interested in background knowledge, we provided the comprehensive literature base. And, for those interested mainly in ‘what to do,' we provided text box summaries for reading and listening.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/414zAccess online version02793nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002800162245005200190250001100242264004300253264005600296264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505045500529520114800984542004102132546001602173588004002189650002402229650002702253710003902280856007602319OTLid0000415MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aGuichard, Davideauthor00aCalculusbEarly TranscendentalscDavid Guichard  a2021-A 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2021. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1 Review -- 2 Functions -- 3 Limits -- 4 Derivatives -- 5 Applications of Derivatives -- 6 Integration -- 7 Techniques of Integration -- 8 Applications of Integration -- 9 Sequences and Series -- 10 Differential Equations -- 11 Polar Coordinates, Parametric Equations 405 -- 12 Three Dimensions -- 13 Partial Differentiation -- 14 Multiple Integration -- 15 Vector Functions -- 16 Vector Calculus -- Selected Exercise Answers -- Index0 aCalculus: Early Transcendentals, originally by D. Guichard, has been redesigned by the Lyryx editorial team. Substantial portions of the content, examples, and diagrams have been redeveloped, with additional contributions provided by experienced and practicing instructors. This approachable text provides a comprehensive understanding of the necessary techniques and concepts of the typical Calculus course sequence, and is suitable for the standard Calculus I, II and III courses. To practice and develop an understanding of topics, this text offers a range of problems, from routine to challenging, with selected solutions. As this is an open text, instructors and students are encouraged to interact with the textbook through annotating, revising, and reusing to your advantage. Suggestions for contributions to this growing textbook are welcome. Lyryx develops and supports open texts, with editorial services to adapt the text for each particular course. In addition, Lyryx provides content-specific formative online assessment, a wide variety of supplements, and in-house support available 7 days/week for both students and instructors.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/415zAccess online version02881nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100002600159245006200185250001100247264004300258264005700301264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505042100535520121700956542001602173546001602189588004002205650002602245650002402271650002302295700002602318710003902344856007602383OTLid0000417MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aArnold, Glenneauthor00aIntermediate Financial AccountingcGlenn ArnoldnVolume 1  a2021-A 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReview of Intro Financial Accounting -- Why Accounting? -- Financial Reporting -- Financial Reports – Statement of Financial Position and Statement of Cash Flows -- Revenue -- Cash and Receivables -- Inventory -- Intercorporate Investments -- Property, Plant, and Equipment -- Depreciation, Impairment, and Derecognition of Property, Plant, and Equipment -- Intangible Assets and Goodwill -- Solutions To Exercises0 aThis text is intended for a first course in Intermediate Financial Accounting. It presumes that students have already completed one or two Introductory Financial Accounting courses. The book reflects current International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), such as IFRS 15 - Revenue from Contracts With Customers. It focuses on more difficult intermediate accounting topics that match prerequisite requirements for students advancing to a second level Intermediate Financial Accounting course. Advanced topics that are covered in Advanced Financial Accounting courses, such as consolidations and foreign exchange, are not included here. The text is written with an approachable style that focuses on key concepts that will be relevant to students' future careers as accountants. The book provides a review of Introductory Accounting concepts and covers all topics essential to a first level Intermediate Accounting course: the conceptual framework and current landscape of financial reporting; statements of financial position, comprehensive income, cash flows and shareholders' equity; cash and receivables; revenue; inventory; property plant and equipment; intangible assets; and intercorporate investments.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aKyle, Suzanneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/417zAccess online version02641nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000700135050001000142100002700152245021200179264004300391264008500434264001200519300002200531336002600553337002600579338003600605341002800641490002700669505040200696520077801098542003001876546001601906588004101922650002401963650003101987650002502018700003102043700003002074710003902104856007602143OTLid0000418MnU20260406020336.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBL1 4aH1 4aHM5861 aSkinner, Elleneauthor00aApplied Developmental Systems SciencebEverything You Always Wanted to Know About Theories, Meta-Theories, Methods, and Interventions but Didn't Realize You Needed to Ask. An Advanced TextbookcEllen Skinner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection I: Goals of Developmental Science, Theories, and Target Phenomena -- Section II: Metaphors and Meta-theories in Applied Developmental Science -- Section III: Systems Meta-theories -- Section IV: Relational Developmental Systems Meta-theories -- Section V: Study of Development: Description -- Section VI: Study of Development: Explanation -- Section VII: Study of Development: Optimization0 aThis textbook provides a toolbox, a guidebook, and an instruction manual for researchers and interventionists who want to conceptualize and study applied problems from a developmental systems perspective, and for those who want to teach their graduate (or advanced undergraduate) students how to do this. It is designed to be useful to practitioners who focus on applied developmental problems, such as improving the important developmental contexts where people live, learn, and work, including the applied professions in education, social work, counseling, health care, community development, and business, all of which at their core are concerned with optimizing the development of their students, clients, patients, workers, citizens, and others whose lives they touch.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aReligionvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aKindermann, Thomaseauthor1 aRoeser, Robert W.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/418zAccess online version02496nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245005400171250001900225264004300244264004300287264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505065700504520066801161542004101829546001601870588004001886650003201926650003701958710003901995856007602034OTLid0000419MnU20260406020821.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aEck, David J.eauthor00aIntroduction to Programming Using JavacDavid Eck  aEighth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneva, New YorkbDavid J. Eckc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Overview: The Mental Landscape -- Chapter 2: Programming in the Small I: Names and Things -- Chapter 3: Programming in the Small II: Control -- Chapter 4: Programming in the Large I: Subroutines -- Chapter 5: Programming in the Large II: Objects and Classes -- Chapter 6: Introduction to GUI Programming -- Chapter 7: Arrays and ArrayLists -- Chapter 8: Correctness, Robustness, Efficiency -- Chapter 9: Linked Data Structures and Recursion -- Chapter 10: Generic Programming and Collection Classes -- Chapter 11: Input/Output Streams, Files, and Networking -- Chapter 12: Threads and Multiprocessing -- Chapter 13: GUI Programming Continued0 aWelcome to the Eighth Edition of Introduction to Programming Using Java, a free, on-line textbook on introductory programming, which uses Java as the language of instruction. This book is directed mainly towards beginning programmers, although it might also be useful for experienced programmers who want to learn something about Java. It is not meant to provide complete coverage of the Java language. The eighth edition requires Java 8 or later, and it uses JavaFX for GUI programming. Version 8.1 is a small update of Version 8.0. This version briefly covers some of the new features in Java 11 and makes it clearer how to use this book with Java 11 and later.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/419zAccess online version01899nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002600136245004900162264004300211264004300254264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002500419490002700444505050700471520032700978542004101305546001601346588004001362650003201402710003901434856007601473OTLid0000420MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aEck, David J.eauthor00aIntroduction to Computer GraphicscDavid Eck 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneva, New YorkbDavid J. Eckc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Two-Dimensional Graphics -- Chapter 3: OpenGL 1.1: Geometry -- Chapter 4: OpenGL 1.1: Light and Material -- Chapter 5: Three.js: A 3D Scene Graph API -- Chapter 6: Introduction to WebGL -- Chapter 7: 3D Graphics with WebGL -- Chapter 8: Beyond Realtime Graphics -- Appendix A: Programming Languages -- Appendix B: Blender: A 3D Modeling Program -- Appendix C: Gimp and Inkscape for 2D Graphics -- Appendix D: Source Code for Sample Programs -- Appendix E: Glossary0 aIntroduction to Computer Graphics is a free, on-line textbook covering the fundamentals of computer graphics and computer graphics programming. This book is meant for use as a textbook in a one-semester course that would typically be taken by undergraduate computer science majors in their third or fourth year of college.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/420zAccess online version02191nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002900144245006800173264004300241264003700284264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505050900498520046101007542004101468546001601509588004001525650003301565650002501598700002701623700002801650710003901678856007601717OTLid0000421MnU20260406020703.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aSandberg, Bobbieeauthor00aProject Management for Instructional DesignerscBobbie Sandberg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbDavid Wileyc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Project Management -- Chapter 2: Project Profiling -- Chapter 3: Project Phases and Organization -- Chapter 4: Understanding and Meeting Client Expectations -- Chapter 5: Working with People on Projects -- Chapter 6: Communication Technologies -- Chapter 7: Starting a Project -- Chapter 8: Project Time Management -- Chapter 9: Costs and Procurement -- Chapter 10: Managing Project Quality -- Chapter 11: Managing Project Risk -- Chapter 12: Project Closure0 aProject Management for Instructional Designers (PM4ID) is a textbook about project management tailored specifically for instructional designers, intended for use in graduate programs in educational technology. This book is based on a pre-existing openly licensed textbook which was donated to the commons by a benefactor that desires to remain anonymous, and has been collaboratively revised and remixed by faculty and students at Brigham Young University.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aKimmons, Royceeauthor1 aZundel, Rebeccaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/421zAccess online version03769nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245004300179264004300222264008500265264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505084300527520176001370542003003130546001603160588004003176650003803216650002603254710003903280856007603319OTLid0000422MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781329999091  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aYoon, KyungAheauthor00aKorean Through FolktalescKyungAh Yoon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Heungbu And Nolbu 흥부와 놀부 -- A. Key Themes & Topics -- B. Introduction -- C. Warm-up Activities -- D. The Story with Key Vocabulary -- E. Key Patterns & Forms -- F. Post-viewing Activities -- Chapter 2 KongJwi And PatJwi 콩쥐와 팥쥐 -- A. Key Themes & Topics -- B. Introduction -- C. Warm-up Activities -- D. The Story with Key Vocabulary -- E. Key Patterns & Forms -- F. Post-viewing Activities -- Chapter 3 The Story of ShimCheong 심청전 -- A. Key Themes & Topics -- B. Introduction -- C. Warm-up Activities -- D. The Story with Key Vocabulary -- E. Key Patterns & Forms -- F. Post-viewing Activities -- Chapter 4 The Myth of DanGoon 단군신화 -- A. Key Themes & Topics -- B. Introduction -- C. Warm-up Activities -- D. The Story with Key Vocabulary -- E. Key Patterns & Forms -- F. Post-viewing Activities0 aKorean Through Folktales consists of four chapters and each centers on a famous Korean folktale. The lessons and values that famous folktales teach are embedded and permeated in various aspects of the Koran culture. Using folktales in the curriculum will provide an engaging way to expose students to a slice of the target culture that native Koreans are naturally exposed to at an early age. Through the selected folktales and various activities offered in the book, students can gain cultural knowledge and insights into traditional and cultural values while they are given linguistic lessons to reinforce their acquired skills and to apply the learned materials in an integrated approach. Korean Through Folktales is designed to accompany 1st-year, 2nd-year, and 3rd-year Korean courses offered at Portland State University. However, any Korean teacher can adopt this book to supplement his/her course materials at elementary, intermediate, and advanced levels. There are four chapters in the book. Each chapter will note main themes of a widely known folktale introduced in the chapter, followed by the links to several videos to watch and get a gist or a background of the story. The ensuing section will introduce important elements and symbolism embedded in the story so as to provide insights and to enhance the depth of appreciation. After that, three versions of the folktale are presented for different levels, followed by grammar lessons, exercises, and tasks. Traces of folktales and allusions to them are evident in cultural products that many students enjoy, such as dramas, movies, and music. Therefore, knowledge in folktales will help students make cultural connections as well as enrich their experience of learning the Korean language.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/422zAccess online version02874nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245007200177264004300249264008200292264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505116500551520051801716542003002234546001602264588004102280650003802321650002602359710003902385856007602424OTLid0000423MnU20260406020342.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936153107  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAhmad, Razieauthor00aTajik PersianbReadings in History, Culture and SocietycRazi Ahmad 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Librariesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Samanid State Structure -- Сохти давлатӣ ва ташкили дастгоҳи идораи Сомониён -- Chapter 2: Statues of Buddha? -- муҷассамаҳои буддоӣ -- Chapter 3: Abu Abdullah Rudaki -- Абӯабдулло Рӯдакӣ -- Chapter 4: Russian Occupation of Central Asia? -- Забти Oсиёи Миёна аз тарафи Русия -- Chapter 5: Mirzo Tursunzoda -- Мирзо Турсунзода -- Chapter 6: Tajik Civil War -- Ҷанги Шаҳрвандии Тоҷикистон -- Chapter 7: Military College -- Донишкадаи ҳарбӣ -- Chapter 8: Religious Education in Today's Tajikistan -- Маорифи динӣ дар Тоҷикистони имрӯза -- Chapter 9: Entrepreneurship: The Driving Force of Market Economy -- Coҳибкорӣ фишанги иқтисоди бозорист -- Chapter 10: Blood Pressure and Health -- Фишори Хун Ва Тандурустӣ -- Chapter 11: Can an Old Maid Be Lucky? -- Пирдухтар хушбахт мешавад? -- Chapter 12: Navruz Festival -- Давоми Ниёгон -- Key to exercises -- Tajik-English glossary0 aTajik Persian: Readings in History, Culture and Society seeks to help students develop reading proficiency in Tajik at advanced level through authentic texts written for native speakers and provides them glimpses into the history, culture and society of Tajikistan without losing its focus on cultural aspects of the country—an aspect that constitutes a core component in the second language acquisition. The book can be adopted by instructors as a supplementary or the main textbook for advanced-level courses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/423zAccess online version03823nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001300136100002900149245005400178264004300232264007600275264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505082600525520182701351542004103178546001603219588004003235650002503275650003403300710003903334856007603373OTLid0000424MnU20260406020341.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKF385.A41 aJohnson, Eric E.eauthor00aTortsbCases and ContextscEric JohnsonnVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart IV: Dealing with Accidents: Beyond Negligence -- 13. Strict Liability -- 14. Products Liability -- 15. Safety and Health Regulation -- Part V: Intentional Torts -- 16. Introduction to Intentional Torts -- 17. Battery and Assault -- 18. False Imprisonment -- 19. Intentional Infliction of Emotional Distress -- 20. Trespass to Land -- 21. Trespass to Chattels and Conversion -- 22. Defenses to Intentional Torts -- Part VI: Remedies -- 23. General Issues in Remedies -- 24. Compensatory Damages -- 25. Punitive Damages -- 26. Multiple Tortfeasors -- Part VII: Special Issues with Parties and Actions -- 27. Immunities and Tort Liability of the Government -- 28. Constitutional Torts -- 29. Thresholds of Life -- Part VIII: Oblique Torts -- 30. Transactional Torts -- 31. Defamation -- 32. Privacy Torts -- Aftermatter0 aPlain-spoken and convivial, this casebook makes a deliberate effort to explain the law, rather than to provide a mere compilation of readings and questions. Simple concepts are presented simply. Complex concepts are broken down and accompanied by examples and problems. By being clear and straightforward, the casebook aims to quickly get students to the point where they can navigate regions of gray and build nuanced arguments. The book is written from the conviction that when students stop to puzzle over something, it should be because the law itself puzzles, not because the book obfuscates. Students describe the book as easy to read. A key aim is context, with explanations of how pieces of doctrine fit into the bigger picture. There is also a continual effort to plug doctrine into the real world of practice, getting students to think about litigation strategy and tactics. Another key feature is a high-degree of organization. Doctrine is explained upfront, independent of and before the cases. After the cases, there is no notes-and-questions mishmash. Historical notes, check-your-understanding questions, questions to ponder, and problems are all separately labeled as such. The readings are rich with variety. The classic cases are here, of course. But there are also atypical readings that allow students to see tort law from different perspectives, including an opening statement, a closing argument, administrative-enforcement letters, an excerpt from a novel, and an opinion on tribal law from a Navajo court. Many selections are also startlingly modern, with facts involving texting-and-driving, alcoholic energy drinks, Facebook libel, suddenly accelerating Toyotas, and the misery of a six-hour tarmac delay. Please note that the publisher requires you to login to access and download the textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/424zAccess online version04647nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003200150245005100182250001600233264004300249264007500292264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002500489490002700514505047200541520296801013542004103981546001604022588004004038650003404078650003404112710003904146856007604185OTLid0000425MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3400 4aKF385.A41 aJohnson, Stephen M.eauthor00aWetlands LawbA Course SourcecStephen Johnson  a5th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2018. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 The Science -- Chapter 2 The History of Regulation -- Chapter 3 Administrative Law -- Chapter 4 Regulation of Wetlands and Waters of the United States -- Chapter 5 Additions and Discharges -- Chapter 6 Section 404 Permits -- Chapter 7 Mitigation -- Chapter 8 EPA's Role in Permitting and EPA's Veto Authority -- Chapter 9 States' Roles and State Programs -- Chapter 10 Administrative Appeals, Judicial Review and Enforcement -- Chapter 11 Regulatory Takings0 aThis is the revised, fifth edition of The Wetlands Law Course Source. It can be used as the primary text for a two credit seminar or as a supplemental text to cover wetlands material in an environmental law, natural resources law, or water law course. In addition, the administrative law chapter can be used as a supplement in a range of administrative law-related courses, such as environmental law, health law, labor law, immigration law, and others, to introduce basic administrative law concepts. Unlike traditional casebooks or coursebooks, a “course source” includes resources to train students in all three apprenticeships identified by the Carnegie Foundation in its influential report on legal education, Educating Lawyers: Preparation for the Profession of Law. To address the knowledge apprenticeship, the Wetlands Law Course Source includes all of the traditional elements of a casebook or coursebook (cases, commentary, notes and questions) and includes several hypotheticals and problem exercises that focus on reinforcing wetlands law. In addition, as one of the many forms of summative and formative assessment included in the book, every chapter includes one or more CALI exercise as a “quiz” to reinforce the material covered in the chapter. To address the skills apprenticeship, the Wetlands Law Course Source includes sixteen separate legal research exercises, several drafting exercises, a negotiation exercise, and an interviewing and counseling exercise. To address the values apprenticeship, the Course Source includes several professionalism scenarios, with questions related to the scenarios. The Course Source also incorporates a wealth of audio/video materials and external links to bring the cases, disputes and materials in the book to life, including the audio for the oral arguments in most of the principal cases excerpted in the book, a Google map identifying the location of the properties involved in all of the principal cases excerpted in the book, decision documents, administrative orders, property maps, pictures, local media coverage and other background materials for the principal cases. While the principal cases have been edited, the book includes links to the full unedited versions of almost all of the cases in the book. Throughout each chapter, there are several “Resource” sections that identify reports, databases, audio or video materials, government documents, and other materials that are relevant to the topics covered in the chapter. In addition, the book contains links to interviews that the author conducted regarding wetlands issues with attorneys who work with local communities and with the Department of Justice, the National Wildlife Federation, and the Environmental Council of the States. The links in the book have also been re-purposed as a web-based library of wetlands teaching resources, which is accessible at: https://www.envirolawteachers.com/wetlands-law-a-course-source.html1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/425zAccess online version01743nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003700135245005600172264004300228264007300271264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505014600521520043800667542004101105546001601146588004001162650003801202650002601240710003901266856007601305OTLid0000426MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAlbuquerque, Severino J.eauthor00aPortuguês para principiantescSeverino Albuquerque 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Preface -- First Preliminary Lesson -- Second Preliminary Lesson -- Third Preliminary Lesson -- Fourth Preliminary Lesson0 aPortuguês para principiantes is a time-tested text which can be used in conjunction with a variety of approaches to the teaching of beginning Portuguese. This media-rich text is designed to provide learners with a solid grammatical basis for using Brazilian Portuguese as well as regular opportunities to practice and improve their ability to read, speak, and understand the Portuguese language as it is used in contemporary Brazil.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/426zAccess online version02322nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100003000144245004900174250002500223264004300248264006000291264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505063200528520050701160542004101667546001601708588004001724650002601764650003101790710003901821856007601860OTLid0000427MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aWalinga, Jennifereauthor00aIntroduction to PsychologycJennifer Walinga  a1st Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Introducing Psychology -- Chapter 2. Introduction to Major Perspectives -- Chapter 3. Psychological Science -- Chapter 4. Brains, Bodies, and Behaviour -- Chapter 5. Sensing and Perceiving -- Chapter 6. States of Consciousness -- Chapter 7. Growing and Developing -- Chapter 8. Learning -- Chapter 9. Remembering and Judging -- Chapter 10. Intelligence and Language -- Chapter 11. Emotions and Motivations -- Chapter 12. Personality -- Chapter 13. Defining Psychological Disorders -- Chapter 14. Treating Psychological Disorders -- Chapter 15. Psychology in Our Social Lives -- Chapter 16. Stress, Health, and Coping0 aThis book is designed to help students organize their thinking about psychology at a conceptual level. The focus on behaviour and empiricism has produced a text that is better organized, has fewer chapters, and is somewhat shorter than many of the leading books. The beginning of each section includes learning objectives; throughout the body of each section are key terms in bold followed by their definitions in italics; key takeaways, and exercises and critical thinking activities end each section.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/427zAccess online version01721nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002700145245006000172264004300232264006000275264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505039100512520016200903542004101065546001601106588004001122650003201162650003801194710003901232856007601271OTLid0000428MnU20260406020704.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aDiBiase, Davideauthor00aNature of Geographic Information SystemscDavid DiBiase 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Data and Information -- Chapter 2: Scales and Transformations -- Chapter 3: Census Data and Thematic Maps -- Chapter 4: TIGER,Topology and Geocoding -- Chapter 5: Land Surveying and GPS -- Chapter 6: National Spatial Data Infrastructure I -- Chapter 7: National Spatial Data Infrastructure II -- Chapter 8: Remotely Sensed Image Data -- Chapter 9: Integrating Geographic Data0 aThe purpose of this text is to promote understanding of the Geographic Information Science and Technology enterprise (GIS&T, also known as “geospatial”).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/428zAccess online version02989nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003400153245005400187264004300241264006000284264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505068700521520117101208542001602379546001602395588004002411650002302451650002602474710003902500856007602539OTLid0000429MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781775352419  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBelshaw, John Douglaseauthor00aCanadian HistorybPre-ConfederationcJohn Belshaw 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. When Was Canada? -- Chapter 2. Aboriginal Canada before Contact -- Chapter 3. The Transatlantic Age -- Chapter 4. New France -- Chapter 5. Aboriginal Canada in the Era of Contact -- Chapter 6. Intercolonial Rivalries, Imperial Ambitions, and the Conquest -- Chapter 7. British North America at Peace and at War (1763-1818) -- Chapter 8. Rupert's Land and the Northern Plains, 1690-1870 -- Chapter 9. Economic Transformation and Continuity, 1818-1860s -- Chapter 10. Societies of British North America to 1860 -- Chapter 11. Politics to 1860 -- Chapter 12. Children and Childhood -- Chapter 13. The Farthest West -- Chapter 14. The 1860s: Confederation and Its Discontents0 aCanadian History: Pre-Confederation is a survey text that introduces undergraduate students to important themes in North American history to 1867. It provides room for Aboriginal and European agendas and narratives, explores the connections between the territory that coalesces into the shape of modern Canada and the larger continent and world in which it operates, and engages with emergent issues in the field. The material is pursued in a largely chronological manner to the early 19th century, at which point social, economic, and political change are dissected. Canadian History: Pre-Confederation provides, as well, a reconnaissance of historical methodology and debates in the field, exercises for students, Key Terms and a Glossary, and section-by-section Key Points. Although this text can be modified, expanded, reduced, and reorganized to suit the needs of the instructor, it is organized so as to support learning, to broaden (and sometimes provoke) debate, and to engage students in thinking like historians. Written and reviewed by subject experts drawn from colleges and universities, this is the first open textbook on the topic of Canadian history.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/429zAccess online version04918nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002800167245005100195250002500246264004300271264006000314264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505237900551520125202930542004104182546001604223588004004239650002404279650002604303700002604329700002604355710003904381856007604420OTLid0000430MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781774200094  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aEdwards, Janiceeauthor00aMastering Strategic ManagementcJanice Edwards  a1st Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 -- Mastering Strategy: Art and Science -- Defining Strategic Management and Strategy -- Intended, Emergent, and Realized Strategies -- The History of Strategic Management -- Understanding the Strategic Management Process -- Conclusion -- Chapter 2 -- Leading Strategically -- Vision, Mission, and Goals -- Assessing Organizational Performance -- The CEO as Celebrity -- Entrepreneurial Orientation -- Conclusion -- Chapter 3 -- Evaluating the External Environment -- The Relationship between an Organization and Its Environment -- Evaluating the General Environment -- Evaluating the Industry -- Mapping Strategic Groups -- Conclusion -- Chapter 4 -- Managing Firm Resources -- Resource-Based Theory -- Intellectual Property -- Value Chain -- Beyond Resource-Based Theory: Other Views on Firm Performance -- SWOT Analysis -- Conclusion -- Chapter 5 -- Selecting Business-Level Strategies -- Understanding Business-Level Strategy through “Generic Strategies” -- Cost Leadership -- Differentiation -- Focused Cost Leadership and Focused Differentiation -- Best-Cost Strategy -- Stuck in the Middle -- Conclusion -- Chapter 6 -- Supporting the Business-Level Strategy: Competitive and Cooperative Moves -- Making Competitive Moves -- Responding to Competitors' Moves -- Making Cooperative Moves -- Conclusion -- Chapter 7 -- Competing in International Markets -- Advantages and Disadvantages of Competing in International Markets -- Drivers of Success and Failure When -- Competing in International Markets -- Types of International Strategies -- Options for Competing in International Markets -- Conclusion -- Chapter 8 -- Selecting Corporate-Level Strategies -- Concentration Strategies -- Vertical Integration Strategies -- Diversification Strategies -- Strategies for Getting Smaller -- Portfolio Planning and Corporate-Level Strategy -- Conclusion -- Chapter 9 -- Executing Strategy through Organizational Design -- The Basic Building Blocks of Organizational Structure -- Creating an Organizational Structure -- Creating Organizational Control Systems -- Legal Forms of Business -- Conclusion -- Chapter 10 -- Leading an Ethical Organization: Corporate Governance, Corporate Ethics, and Social Responsibility -- Boards of Directors -- Corporate Ethics and Social Responsibility -- Understanding Thought Patterns: A Key to Corporate Leadership? -- Conclusion0 aMastering Strategic Management is designed to enhance student engagement in three innovative ways. The first is through visual adaptations of the key content in the book. It is well documented that many of today's students are visual learners. To meet students' wants and needs (and thereby create a much better teaching experience for professors), Mastering Strategic Management contains multiple graphic concept pages in ever section of every chapter of the book. Think of graphic concept pages as almost like info-graphics for key concepts in each section. This feature sets Mastering Strategic Management apart from any strategic management book on the market today. The second way the authors capture student interest through their textbook is by using a real-world company as the running example in each chapter. For example, Chapter 1 in Mastering Strategic Management utilizes Blackberry to harness the conceptual coverage of the chapter in a running, corporate, application to which students will relate. The third inventive way Mastering Strategic Management holds the attention of strategic management students is through the “strategy at the movies” feature in each chapter that links course concepts with a popular motion picture.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aKetchen, Daveeauthor1 aShort, Jeremyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/430zAccess online version06052nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100003200144245005200176250002500228264004300253264006000296264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505202700533520279402560542004105354546001605395588004005411650002605451650003105477700003105508710003905539856007605578OTLid0000431MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aJhangiani, Rajiv S.eauthor00aResearch Methods in PsychologycRajiv Jhangiani  a2nd Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Science of Psychology -- Understanding Science -- Scientific Research in Psychology -- Science and Common Sense -- Science and Clinical Practice -- Chapter 2: Getting Started in Research -- Basic Concepts -- Generating Good Research Questions -- Reviewing the Research Literature -- Chapter 3: Research Ethics -- Moral Foundations of Ethical Research -- From Moral Principles to Ethics Codes -- Putting Ethics Into Practice -- Chapter 4: Theory in Psychology -- Phenomena and Theories -- The Variety of Theories in Psychology -- Using Theories in Psychological Research -- Chapter 5: Psychological Measurement -- Understanding Psychological Measurement -- Reliability and Validity of Measurement -- Practical Strategies for Psychological Measurement -- Chapter 6: Experimental Research -- Experiment Basics -- Experimental Design -- Conducting Experiments -- Chapter 7: Nonexperimental Research -- Overview of Nonexperimental Research -- Correlational Research -- Quasi-Experimental Research -- Qualitative Research -- Chapter 8: Complex Research Designs -- Multiple Dependent Variables -- Multiple Independent Variables -- Complex Correlational Designs -- Chapter 9: Survey Research -- Overview of Survey Research -- Constructing Survey Questionnaires -- Conducting Surveys -- Chapter 10: Single-Subject Research -- Overview of Single-Subject Research -- Single-Subject Research Designs -- The Single-Subject Versus Group “Debate” -- Chapter 11: Presenting Your Research -- American Psychological Association (APA) Style -- Writing a Research Report in American Psychological Association (APA) Style -- Other Presentation Formats -- Chapter 12: Descriptive Statistics -- Describing Single Variables -- Describing Statistical Relationships -- Expressing Your Results -- Conducting Your Analyses -- Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics -- Understanding Null Hypothesis Testing -- Some Basic Null Hypothesis Tests -- Additional Considerations -- From the “Replicability Crisis” to Open Science Practices0 aThe present adaptation constitutes the second Canadian edition and was co-authored by Rajiv S. Jhangiani (Kwantlen Polytechnic University) and I-Chant A. Chiang (Quest University Canada) and is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License. Revisions include the following: Chapter 1: Added a description of the “Many Labs Replication Project,” added a reference to the Neurobonkers website, and embedded videos about open access publishing, driver distraction, two types of empirical studies, and the use of evidence to evaluate the world around us.Chapter 2: Updated the exemplar study in the chapter overview, added relevant examples and descriptions of contemporary studies, provided a link to an interactive visualization for correlations, added a description of double-blind peer review, added a figure to illustrate a spurious correlation, and embedded videos about how to develop a good research topic, searching the PsycINFO database, using Google Scholar, and how to read an academic paper.Chapter 3: Added in LaCour ethical violation. Revised chapter headings and order to reflect TCPS-2 moral principles.Chapter 4: Added in difference between laws and effects and theoretical framework.Chapter 5: Added fuller descriptions of the levels of measurement, added a table to summarize the levels of measurement, added a fuller description of the MMPI, removed the discussion of the IAT, and added descriptions of concurrent, predictive, and convergent validity.Chapter 6: Added in construct validity, statistical validity, mundane realism, psychological realism, Latin Square Design. Updated references.Chapter 7: Added in mixed-design studies and fuller discussion of qualitative-quantitative debate.Chapter 8: Added an exercise to sketch the 8 possible results of a 2 x 2 factorial experiment.Chapter 9: Added information about Canadian Election Studies, more references, specific guidelines about order and open-ended questions, and rating scale. Updated online survey creation sites.Chapter 11: Updated examples and links to online resources.Chapter 13: Added discussion of p-curve and BASP announcement about banning p-values. Added a section that introduces the “replicability crisis” in psychology, along with discussions of questionable research practices, best practices in research design and data management, and the emergence of open science practices and Transparency and Openness Promotion guidelines. Glossary of key terms: Added. In addition, throughout the textbook, we revised the language to be more precise and to improve flow, added links to other chapters, added images, updated hyperlinks, corrected spelling and formatting errors, and changed references to reflect the contemporary Canadian context.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aChiang, I-Chant A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/431zAccess online version03156nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050000800149050001400157100003000171245008500201250002500286264004300311264006000354264001200414300002200426336002600448337002600474338003600500341002800536490002700564505031100591520147800902542001602380546001602396588004002412650002402452650003502476650002702511650002602538700003102564710003902595856007602634OTLid0000432MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aMahbobi, Mohammadeauthor00aIntroductory Business Statistics with Interactive SpreadsheetscMohammad Mahbobi  a1st Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Descriptive Statistics and Frequency Distributions -- Chapter 2. The Normal and t-Distributions -- Chapter 3. Making Estimates -- Chapter 4. Hypothesis Testing -- Chapter 5. The t-Test -- Chapter 6. F-Test and One-Way ANOVA -- Chapter 7. Some Non-Parametric Tests -- Chapter 8. Regression Basics0 aIntroductory Business Statistics with Interactive Spreadsheets – 1st Canadian Edition is an adaptation of Thomas K. Tiemann's book, Introductory Business Statistics. This new edition still contains the basic ideas behind statistics, such as populations, samples, the difference between data and information, and sampling distributions as well as information on descriptive statistics and frequency distributions, normal and t-distributions, hypothesis testing, t-tests, f-tests, analysis of variance, non-parametric tests, and regression basics. New topics include the chi-square test and categorical variables, null and alternative hypotheses for the test of independence, simple linear regression model, least squares method, coefficient of determination, confidence interval for the average of the dependent variable, and prediction interval for a specific value of the dependent variable. This new edition also allows readers to learn the basic and most commonly applied statistical techniques in business in an interactive way — when using the web version — through interactive Excel spreadsheets. For each topic, a customized interactive template has been created within which selected values can be repeatedly changed to observe how the entire process, as well as the outcomes, are automatically adjusted. Also, in this adapted edition, the real-world examples throughout the text, and the information in general, have been revised to reflect Canadian content.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aTiemann, Thomas K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/432zAccess online version03613nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002900140245004700169264004300216264006000259264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505175400496520075502250542001603005546001603021588004003037650003403077700002503111710003903136856007603175OTLid0000433MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aMcCartney, Steveeauthor00aEthics in Law EnforcementcSteve McCartney 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Ethical Behaviour -- 1.1 The Importance of Ethical Behaviour -- 1.2 Ethics and the Pursuit of a Law Enforcement Career -- 1.3 As Employees in Law Enforcement Agencies -- Chapter 2: Ethical Systems -- 2.1 Major Ethical Systems -- 2.2 Utilitarian Ethics -- 2.3 Deontology -- 2.4 Virtue Ethics -- 2.5 Ethics of Care -- 2.6 Egoism -- 2.7 Religion or Divine Command Theory -- 2.8 Natural Law -- 2.9 Social Contract Theory -- 2.10 Rawls' Theory of Justice -- 2.11 Moral Relativism -- Chapter 3: Ethical Dilemmas and the Process of Effective Resolution -- 3.1 Ethical Dilemmas -- 3.2 Values -- 3.3 Solving Ethical Dilemmas -- Chapter 4: Key Ethical Issues within Law Enforcement -- 4.1 Ethical Issues -- 4.2 The Ethics of Power and Authority -- 4.3 The Milgram Experiment -- 4.4 Person, Gender, and Cultural Differences in Conformity -- 4.5 Ethical Issues during an Investigation -- 4.6 Gratuities -- Chapter 5: Accountability and Investigation -- 5.1 Autonomy and Accountability -- 5.2 British Columbia's Police Act -- 5.3 The Royal Canadian Mounted Police Act -- 5.4 Investigation Models -- 5.5 Independent Investigations Office -- Chapter 6: Policing -- 6.1 Noble Cause Corruption -- 6.2 Policing Public Demonstrations and Crowd Control -- 6.3 Sex Offender Notification Laws -- 6.4 Ethics of Private Policing -- Chapter 7: Discretion, Supervision, and Leadership -- 7.1 The Ethics Surrounding Discretion -- 7.2 Discretion and Supervision -- 7.3 Selective Enforcement -- 7.4 Loyalty -- 7.5 Ethical Leadership -- 7.6 Transactional and Transformational Leadership -- Chapter 8: The Culture of Law Enforcement -- 8.1 Police Subculture -- 8.2 Socialization of Police -- 8.3 Skepticism and Cynicism -- 8.4 Moral Culpability versus Legal Culpability0 aIn this book, you will examine the moral and ethical issues that exist within law enforcement. This book will also familiarize you with the basic history, principles, and theories of ethics. These concepts will then be applied to the major components of the criminal justice system: policing, the courts, and corrections. Discussion will focus on personal values, individual responsibility, decision making, discretion, and the structure of accountability. Specific topics covered will include core values, codes of conduct, ethical dilemmas, organizational consequences, liability, and the importance of critical thinking. By the end of this book, you will be able to distinguish and critically debate contemporary ethical issues in law enforcement.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aParent, Rickeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/433zAccess online version02511nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001400145050001100159050000800170100002800178245005400206264004300260264005500303264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505059900535520071301134542002701847546001601874588004001890650004101930650002701971710003901998856007602037OTLid0000434MnU20260406020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781974214167  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aPetrunin, Antoneauthor00aEuclidean plane and its relativescAnton Petrunin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCentre County, PennsylvaniabAnton Petruninc2021. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1 Preliminaries -- Euclidean geometry -- 2 The Axioms -- 3 Half-planes -- 4 Congruent triangles -- 5 Perpendicular lines -- 6 Similar triangles -- 7 Parallel lines -- 8 Triangle geometry -- Inversive geometry -- 9 Inscribed angles -- 10 Inversion -- Non-Euclidean geometry -- 11 Neutral Geometry -- 12 Hyperbolic plane -- 13 Geometry of h-plane -- Additional topics -- 14 Affine geometry -- 15 Projective geometry -- 16 Spherical geometry -- 17 Projective model -- 18 Complex coordinates -- 19 Geometric constructions -- 20 Area -- References -- Hints -- Index -- Used resources0 aThis book is meant to be rigorous, conservative, elementary and minimalist. At the same time it includes about the maximum what students can absorb in one semester. Approximately one-third of the material used to be covered in high school, but not any more.The present book is based on the courses given by the author at the Pennsylvania State University as an introduction to the foundations of geometry. The lectures were oriented to sophomore and senior university students. These students already had a calculus course. In particular,they are familiar with the real numbers and continuity. It makes it possible to cover the material faster and in a more rigorous way than it could be done in high school.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/434zAccess online version02110nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003500138245013000173264004300303264008500346264001200431300002200443336002600465337002600491338003600517341002800553490002700581505029600608520059200904542003001496546001601526588004101542650002601583650002401609710003901633856007601672OTLid0000435MnU20260406020344.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aCalderón, Amber Blisseauthor00aPDX JourneysbStudying and Living in the US, Low-Intermediate Novel and Textbook for University ESL StudentscAmber Calderón 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Academic Expectations -- Chapter 1: Stephanie's Story -- Chapter 2: IELP Expectations of Students -- Chapter 3: The Pros and Cons of Studying Abroad -- Unit 2: Problem Solving -- Chapter 4: Luna and Violeta's Story -- Chapter 5: Solve That Problem -- Chapter 6: Easier Said than Done0 aEach unit begins with a chapter of fiction about a teacher and students in one ESL class. Reading comprehension and reading skills exercises follow. Prefix and suffix vocabulary-focus exercises are included. Academic Word List vocabulary exercises help students build a strong foundation in both receptive and productive knowledge. The following chapters in each unit expand on unit themes through non-fiction articles focusing on academic preparation, international experiences, and cultural adjustment. Vocabulary is repeated and comprehension and reading skills are further practiced.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/435zAccess online version04390nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000700153050001000160100002800170245004600198250002500244264004300269264006000312264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505084600549520226801395542001603663546001603679588004003695650002403735650003103759650002503790700002603815710003903841856007603880OTLid0000436MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781774200216  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBL1 4aH1 4aHM5861 aLittle, Williameauthor00aIntroduction to SociologycWilliam Little  a2nd Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. An Introduction to Sociology -- Chapter 2. Sociological Research -- Chapter 3. Culture -- Chapter 4. Society and Modern Life -- Chapter 5. Socialization -- Chapter 6. Groups and Organizations -- Chapter 7. Deviance, Crime, and Social Control -- Chapter 8. Media and Technology -- Chapter 9. Social Inequality in Canada -- Chapter 10. Global Inequality -- Chapter 11. Race and Ethnicity -- Chapter 12. Gender, Sex, and Sexuality -- Chapter 13. Aging and the Elderly -- Chapter 14. Marriage and Family -- Chapter 15. Religion -- Chapter 16. Education -- Chapter 17. Government and Politics -- Chapter 18. Work and the Economy -- Chapter 19. The Sociology of the Body: Health and Medicine -- Chapter 20. Population, Urbanization, and the Environment -- Chapter 21. Social Movements and Social Change -- Chapter 22: Social Interaction0 aIntroduction to Sociology adheres to the scope and sequence of a typical introductory sociology course. In addition to comprehensive coverage of core concepts, foundational scholars, and emerging theories, we have incorporated section reviews with engaging questions, discussions that help students apply the sociological imagination, and features that draw learners into the discipline in meaningful ways. Although this text can be modified and reorganized to suit your needs, the standard version is organized so that topics are introduced conceptually, with relevant, everyday experiences.For the student, this book is based on the teaching and research experience of numerous sociologists. In today's global socially networked world, the topic of Sociology is more relevant than ever before. We hope that through this book, students will learn how simple, everyday human actions and interactions can change the world. In this book, you will find applications of Sociology concepts that are relevant, current, and balanced. For instructors, this text is intended for a one-semester introductory course and includes these features: Sociological Research: Highlights specific current and relevant research studies. Sociology in the Real World: Ties chapter content to student life and discusses sociology in terms of the everyday. Big Picture: Features present sociological concepts at a national or international level. Case Study: Describes real-life people whose experiences relate to chapter content. Social Policy and Debate: Discusses political issues that relate to chapter content. Section Summaries distill the information in each section for both students and instructors down to key, concise points addressed in the section. Key Terms are bold and are followed by a definition in context. Definitions of key terms are also listed in the Key Terms, which appears at the end of each chapter. Section Quizzes provide opportunities to apply and test the information students learn throughout each section. Both multiple-choice and short-response questions feature a variety of question types and range of difficulty. Further Research: This feature helps students further explore the section topic and offers related research topics that could be explored.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aReligionvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aMcGivern, Roneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/436zAccess online version03339nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245004100143264004300184264006000227264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002800409490002700437505051000464520176000974542001602734546001602750588004002766650002502806650003102831710003902862856007602901OTLid0000437MnU20260406020705.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH100aBritish Columbia in a Global Context 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the BookIntroduction -- 1. Urban Settlement in British Columbia -- 2. Socio-Economics in British Columbia -- 3. Aboriginal Issues in British Columbia -- 4. Resources in British Columbia -- 5. Food Systems in British Columbia -- 6. Forestry in British Columbia -- 7. Health Geography in British Columbia -- 8. Physical Geography of British Columbia -- Qualitative Research Methods in Human GeographyPhysical Geography Research MethodsHow to Find Research LiteratureAbout the AuthorsAdditional Credits0 aThis first year Geography textbook takes a holistic approach to Geography by incorporating elements of physical, human and regional geography, as well as bringing in methods and perspectives from spatial information science.. This textbook applies a fundamental geographical approach to understanding our globally changing world by looking at local processes which are linked to larger global processes and events. The textbook includes numerous case studies specific to British Columbia as well as a number of suggested service learning activities. Over the course of four days in June, 2014, 5 faculty members from across British Columbia supported by a facilitator, librarian, researcher, illustrator, programmer and instructional designer, created this book. This involved drawing on our own research, teaching and experience and working with the team to put it all together into an online format; one which would be accessible to students and educators alike. Beyond the unique way in which this book was created in a Book Sprint process, there are other elements of this book that make it unique. First, it takes a holistic approach to first year Geography, incorporating elements of Physical, Human, and Regional Geography, as well as bringing in methods and perspectives from Spatial Information Science. Pedagogically, this book incorporates elements of service learning and suggested service learning activities recognizing that the study of Geography is deeply connected to the communities we live in. Many of the suggestions for service learning are illustrated through the use of case studies from across BC. The book is aimed at a a first year or introductory Geography student, and would be suitable for a first year Geography course on BC.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/437zAccess online version02881nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002900134245006700163264004300230264005900273264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505051500509520121101024542001602235546001602251588004002267650003102307700002702338700002702365710003902392856007602431OTLid0000438MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aWestcott, Morganeauthor00aIntroduction to Tourism and Hospitality in BCcMorgan Westcott 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2020. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. History and Overview -- Chapter 2. Transportation -- Chapter 3. Accommodation -- Chapter 4. Food and Beverage Services -- Chapter 5. Recreation -- Chapter 6. Entertainment -- Chapter 7. Travel Services -- Chapter 8. Services Marketing -- Chapter 9. Customer Service -- Chapter 10. Environmental Stewardship -- Chapter 11. Risk Management and Legal Liability -- Chapter 12. Aboriginal Tourism -- Chapter 13. Careers and Work Experience -- Chapter 14. Back to the Big Picture: Globalization and Trends0 aThis textbook is an introduction to the tourism and hospitality industry in British Columbia, and is written with a first year college and university audience in mind. It is a collaborative work with input from educators, industry leaders, employers, and past graduates of BC's tourism and hospitality management programs. All chapters have been reviewed by experts in the field. Each chapter is organized thematically moving from a global, then national and finally provincial context. Some chapters are quite global in focus while others concentrate primarily on British Columbia. Chapter content is based on available data and research, and input from collaborators. Each chapter features “Spotlight On” text boxes that highlight an organization, business, or other key component of the chapter's theme. “Take a Closer Look” features encourage students to do further reading on particular subjects. At the end of each chapter, key terms are presented in alphabetical order to help students gain confidence with terminology. These are followed by chapter exercises and a case study for in-depth exploration of the subject matter. Key terms are summarized in a Glossary at the end of the textbook.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBird, Geoffreyeauthor1 aBriscoe, Petereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/438zAccess online version02549nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002600167245005900193264004300252264007800295264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505041500550520088600965542004101851546001601892588004101908650002401949650003601973700002702009710003902036856007602075OTLid0000439MnU20260406020347.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781771991841  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF55491 aFoster, Jasoneauthor00aHealth and Safety in Canadian WorkplacescJason Foster 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAthabasca University Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWorkplace Injury in Theory and Practice -- Legislative Framework of Injury Prevention and Compensation -- Hazard Recognition, Assessment and Control -- Physical Hazards -- Chemical and Biological Hazards -- Psycho-social Hazards -- Health Effects of Employment -- Training and Injury Prevention Programs -- Incident Investigation -- Disability Management and Return to Work -- The Practice of Health and Safety0 aWorkplace injuries happen every day and can profoundly affect workers, their families, and the communities they live in. This textbook provides workers with an introduction to effective injury prevention. The book pays particular attention to how issues of precarious employment, gender, and ill health can be better handled in Canadian occupational health and safety (OHS).This introduction to OHS differs from others because it contends that the practice of occupational health and safety can only be properly understood if we acknowledge that workers and employers have conflicting interests. Specifically, we investigate which workplace hazards are recognized and controlled,the manner in which these hazards are controlled, and who makes these decisions. These are all factors that reflect the broader political economy of employment and suggest that OHS is contested terrain.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks1 aBarnetson, Bobeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/439zAccess online version01631nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245003400171264004300205264004500248264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002500415490002700440505017000467520033800637542004100975546001601016588004101032650003201073650003701105710003901142856007601181OTLid0000440MnU20260406020347.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aMcFadyen, Roneauthor00aJava with BlueJcRon McFadyen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWinnipeg, ManitobabRon McFadyenc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2 Basics -- 3 Control Structures -- 4 Introduction to Methods -- 5 Classes in the Java Class Libraries -- 6 ArrayLists -- 7 Designing Java Classes0 aThis book is Part I of a two-part set that introduces the Java programming language. The text assumes the student will be using the BlueJ development environment and provides some introductory BlueJ material. Our experience has been that BlueJ is easy to learn and provides a good programming environment for the beginner programmer.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/440zAccess online version01702nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245004100171264004300212264004500255264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002500422490002700447505023300474520033900707542004101046546001601087588004101103650003201144650003701176710003901213856007601252OTLid0000441MnU20260330020318.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aMcFadyen, Roneauthor00aJava with BlueJ Part 2cRon McFadyen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWinnipeg, ManitobabRon McFadyenc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 One-Dimensional Arrays -- 2 Arrays of Arrays -- 3 Validation and Text Manipulation -- 4 Enumeration Classes (Enums) -- 5 Hierarchies -- 6 Interfaces -- 7 Files -- 8 Exception Handling -- 9 Recursion -- 10 Sorting and Searching0 aThis book is Part II of a two-part set that introduces the Java programming language. The text assumes the student will be using the BlueJ development environment and provides some introductory BlueJ material. Our experience has been that BlueJ is easy to learn and provides a good programming environment for the beginner programmer.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/441zAccess online version01864nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002600136245006400162250001600226264004300242264004500285264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505039100504520032600895542004101221546001601262588004001278650003201318650002501350710003901375856007601414OTLid0000442MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aMcFadyen, Roneauthor00aRelational Databases and Microsoft Access 365cRon McFadyen  aVersion 4.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWinnipeg, ManitobabRon McFadyenc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of ContentsPreface -- 1 Relational Databases and MS Access -- 2. Creating Tables -- 3. Creating Forms -- 4 Microsoft Access Queries -- 5 Relationships and the Relationships Tool -- 6 Microsoft Access Queries – Advanced -- 7 Entity Relationship Modelling -- 8 Mapping an ERD to a Relational Database -- 9 Data Definition Language (DDL) -- 10 Normalization -- Appendix AAppendix B0 aThis text is a free introductory text that introduces MS Access and relational database design. The motivation is to support an introductory database system course which, to the student, is either a service course providing an introduction to database concepts, or, as a prerequisite for more advanced study in the field.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/442zAccess online version01913nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002600180245003700206264004300243264006000286264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002500468490002700493505025100520520045900771542001601230546001601246588004001262650002301302650002701325700003601352710003901388856007601427OTLid0000443MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780998625713  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aMarecek, Lynneauthor00aElementary AlgebracLynn Marecek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFoundations -- Solving Linear Equations and Inequalities -- Math Models -- Graphs -- Systems of Linear Equations -- Polynomials -- Factoring -- Rational Expressions and Equations -- Roots and Radicals -- Quadratic Equations -- Answer Key -- Index0 aElementary Algebra is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of a one-semester elementary algebra course. The book's organization makes it easy to adapt to a variety of course syllabi. The text expands on the fundamental concepts of algebra while addressing the needs of students with diverse backgrounds and learning styles. Each topic builds upon previously developed material to demonstrate the cohesiveness and structure of mathematics.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAnthony-Smith, MaryAnneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/443zAccess online version03813nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003000162245007700192250001700269264004300286264007100329264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002800522490002700550505211600577520038602693542004103079546001603120588004103136650002303177650002703200700002503227700002403252710003903276856007603315OTLid0000444MnU20260406020348.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCornick, Jonathaneauthor00aMy Math GPSbElementary Algebra Guided Problem SolvingcJonathan Cornick  a2016 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLinear Equations And Inequalities -- GPS 1: Understanding Linear Equations -- GPS 2: Solving Linear Equations With Whole Numbers -- GPS 3: Adding Signed Numbers -- GPS 4: Subtracting Signed Numbers -- GPS 5: Multiplying And Dividing Signed Numbers -- GPS 6: Solving Linear Equations With Signed Numbers -- GPS 7: Translating Words Into Expressions And Equations -- GPS 8: Solving Linear Inequalities, Part 1 -- GPS 9: Solving Linear Inequalities, Part 2 -- GPS 10: Solving Linear Equations With Fractions -- GPS 11: More Linear Equations With Fractions -- GPS 12: Solving Literal Linear Equations -- The Coordinate Plane And Lines -- GPS 13: Introduction To The Coordinate Plane -- GPS 14: Intercepts Of A Line -- GPS 15: Slope And Equations Of A Line -- GPS 16: The Slope-Intercept Equation Of A Line -- GPS 17: Slope-Intercept Equation And Graphing -- GPS 18: Graphing Lines In Slope-Intercept Form -- GPS 19: Finding An Equation Of A Line From Its Graph -- GPS 20: Horizontal And Vertical Lines -- Systems Of Linear Equations -- GPS 21: Introduction To Systems Of Linear Equations And Solving Graphically -- GPS 22: More On Solving Systems Graphically -- GPS 23: Solving Systems Of Linear Equations Algebraically -- GPS 24: More On Solving Systems Algebraically -- Exponents -- GPS 25: Rules Of Exponents, Part 1 -- GPS 26: Rules Of Exponents, Part 2 -- Polynomials And Operations -- GPS 27: Introduction To Polynomials And Operations -- GPS 28: Multiplying Polynomials -- GPS 29: Removing The Greatest Common Factor -- GPS 30: Factoring By Grouping -- GPS 31: Factoring Trinomials By Grouping – Part 1 -- GPS 32: Factoring Trinomials By Grouping – Part 2 -- GPS 33: Factoring Trinomials By Grouping – Part 3 -- GPS 34: Factoring Trinomials By Grouping – Part 4 -- GPS 35: Factoring A Difference Of Squares -- GPS 36: Multistep Factoring -- GPS 37: Solving Quadratic Equations By Factoring -- Algebraic Expressions -- GPS 38: Evaluating Algebraic Expressions -- Square Roots And Operations -- GPS 39: Introduction To Square Roots -- GPS 40: Operations With Square Roots -- GPS 41: Pythagorean Theorem0 aMy Math GPS: Elementary Algebra Guided Problem Solving is a textbook that aligns to the CUNY Elementary Algebra Learning Objectives that are tested on the CUNY Elementary Algebra Final Exam (CEAFE). This book contextualizes arithmetic skills into Elementary Algebra content using a problem-solving pedagogy. Classroom assessments and online homework are available from the authors.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aGuy, Michaeleauthor1 aPuri, Karaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/444zAccess online version03268nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003300149245007300182264004300255264007000298264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002500490490002700515505097400542520111901516542004102635546001602676588004102692650002302733650002302756710003902779856007602818OTLid0000445MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aLiachovitzky, Carloseauthor00aHuman Anatomy and Physiology Preparatory CoursecCarlos Liachovitzky 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc2015. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1 - Introduction To Anatomy And Physiology -- Module 1: Levels Of Organization Of The Human Organism -- Module 2: What Is Human Anatomy, What Is Human Physiology -- Module 3: Homeostasis And Control Systems -- Unit 2 – Introduction To Anatomy And Physiology Chemicalbuilding Blocks -- Module 4: Atoms -- Module 5: Chemical Bonds -- Module 6: Water -- Module 7: Acids And Bases -- Unit 3 – Molecular Level: Biomolecules, The Organic Compounds Associated With Living Organisms -- Module 8: Organic Compounds -- Module 9: Chemical Reactions -- Module 10: Biomolecules Carbohydrates -- Module 11: Biomolecules Lipids -- Module 12: Biomolecules Proteins -- Module 13: Biomolecules Nucleic Acids -- Unit 4 Smallest Level Of Complexity Alive: Cells, Their Structures And Functions -- Module 14: Cell Structure And Function -- Module 15: Protein Synthesis -- Unit 5 Higher Levels Of Complexity: Organs And Systems -- Module 16: Organs And Systems Of The Human Organism0 aThe goal of this preparatory textbook is to give students a chance to become familiar with some terms and some basic concepts they will find later on in the Anatomy and Physiology course, especially during the first few weeks of the course. Organization and functioning of the human organism are generally presented starting from the simplest building blocks, and then moving into levels of increasing complexity. This textbook follows the same presentation. It begins introducing the concept of homeostasis, then covers the chemical level, and later on a basic introduction to cellular level, organ level, and organ system level. This second edition incorporates a module on protein synthesis, and a complementary base pairing learning objective as requested by many students. This edition incorporates links to audios for all learning objectives, and many learning objectives have online videos associated to them. The textbook is organized in five Units, divided into sixteen Modules covering a total of fifty-three Learning Objectives. Each learning objective includes a short self-assessment at the end of it.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/445zAccess online version03181nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001200153100002700165245006100192264004300253264007100296264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002800489490002700517505041600544520154300960542004102503546001602544588004102560650002002601650002602621650002102647710003902668856007602707OTLid0000446MnU20240325080536.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780991388707  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aCohen, Douglaseauthor00aMusicbIts Language, History, and CulturecDouglas Cohen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Elements of Sound and Music -- Chapter 2: Musical Instruments and Ensembles -- Chapter 3: Composer, Performer, Audience -- Chapter 4: European Art Music: Middle Ages through Romantic -- Chapter 5: European and American Art Music since 1900 -- Chapter 6: American Vernacular Music -- Chapter 7: Jazz -- Chapter 8: World Music -- Appendix 1: Musician Biographies -- Appendix 2: Glossary0 aWelcome to Music 1300, Music: Its Language History, and Culture. The course has a numberof interrelated objectives:1. To introduce you to works representative of a variety of music traditions.These include the repertoires of Western Europe from the Middle Agesthrough the present; of the United States, including art music, jazz, folk, rock, musical theater; and from at least two non-Western world areas (Africa, Asia, Latin America, the Caribbean, the Middle East, Indian subcontinent).2. To enable you to speak and write about the features of the music you study,employing vocabulary and concepts of melody, rhythm, harmony, texture, timbre,and form used by musicians.3. To explore with you the historic, social, and cultural contexts and the role of class, ethnicity, and gender in the creation and performance of music,including practices of improvisation and the implications of oral andnotated transmission.4. To acquaint you with the sources of musical sounds—instruments and voices fromdifferent cultures, found sounds, electronically generated sounds; basic principlesthat determine pitch and timbre.5. To examine the influence of technology, mass media, globalization, and transnationalcurrents on the music of today.The chapters in this reader contain definitions and explanations of musical terms and concepts,short essays on subjects related to music as a creative performing art, biographical sketchesof major figures in music, and historical and cultural background information on music fromdifferent periods and places.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/446zAccess online version02220nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100002500160245005200185264004300237264005000280264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505060200507520042601109542002701535546001601562588004101578650003501619650002701654650002601681710003901707856007601746OTLid0000447MnU20260406020705.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aBlais, Brianeauthor00aStatistical Inference For EveryonecBrian Blais 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSmithfield, Rhode IslandbBrian Blaisc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Probability -- 2 Applications of Probability -- 3 Random Sequences and Visualization -- 4 Introduction to Model Comparison -- 5 Applications of Model Comparison -- 6 Introduction to Parameter Estimation -- 7 Priors, Likelihoods, and Posteriors -- 8 Common Statistical Significance Tests -- 9 Applications of Parameter Estimation and Inference -- 10 Multi-parameter Models -- 11 Introduction to MCMC -- 12 Concluding Thoughts -- BibliographyAppendix A: Computational AnalysisAppendix B: Notation and StandardsAppendix C: Common Distributions and Their PropertiesAppendix D: Tables0 aThis is a new approach to an introductory statistical inference textbook, motivated by probability theory as logic. It is targeted to the typical Statistics 101 college student, and covers the topics typically covered in the first semester of such a course. It is freely available under the Creative Commons License, and includes a software library in Python for making some of the calculations and visualizations easier.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/447zAccess online version03108nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000800154050000900162050000700171100003200178245004800210264004300258264005600301264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505064800534520117701182542003002359546001602389588004102405650002502446650002402471650003302495650003102528710003902559856007602598OTLid0000448MnU20260406020349.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781910814185  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aBL1 4aJA71 4aH11 aMcGlinchey, Stepheneauthor00aInternational RelationscStephen McGlinchey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBristol, EnglandbE-International Relationsc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One - The Basics -- 1. The Making Of The Modern World -- 2. Diplomacy -- 3. One World, Many Actors -- 4. International Relations Theory -- 5. International Law -- 6. International Organisations -- 7. Global Civil Society -- 8. Global Political Economy -- 9. Religion And Culture -- Part Two - Global Issues -- 10. Global Poverty And Wealth -- 11. Protecting People -- 12. Connectivity, Communications And Technology -- 13. Voices Of The People -- 14. Transnational Terrorism -- 15. The Environment -- 16. Feeding The World -- 17. Managing Global Security Beyond ‘Pax Americana' -- 18. Crossings And Candles -- ReferencesNote On Indexing0 aThis book is designed to be a ‘Day 0' introduction to International Relations. As a beginner's guide, it has been structured to condense the most important information into the smallest space and present that information in the most accessible way. The chapters offer a broad sweep of the basic components of International Relations and the key contemporary issues that concern the discipline. The narrative arc forms a complete circle, taking readers from no knowledge to competency. The journey starts by examining how the international system was formed and ends by reflecting that International Relations is always adapting to events and is therefore a never-ending journey of discovery. Unlike typical textbooks, there are no boxes, charts, pictures or exercises. The philosophy underpinning this book is that these things can be a distraction. This book, like others in the E-IR Foundations series, is designed to capture attention with an engaging narrative. The chapters are short, with simple paragraphs and clear sentences placing the reader inside crucial issues and debates so they can understand how things work, and where they fit in the world around them.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/448zAccess online version03850nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136050001300146100002500159245009200184264004300276264006500319264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002500506490002700531505137300558520118001931542004103111546001603152588004003168650002503208650003403233650002803267700003003295710003903325856007603364OTLid0000449MnU20260406020349.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aBoyle, Jameseauthor00aIntellectual PropertybLaw & the Information Society—Cases and MaterialscJames Boyle 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDurham, North CarolinabJames Boyle, Jennifer Jenkinsc2018. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: The Theories Behind Intellectual Property -- Chapter Two: Intellectual Property & the Constitution -- Chapter Three: Intellectual Property & the First Amendment -- Chapter Four: Trademark: Introduction -- Chapter Five: Subject Matter: Requirements for Trademark Protection -- Chapter Six: Grounds for Refusing Registration -- Chapter Seven: Trademark Infringement -- Chapter Eight: Defense to Trademark Infringement: Fair & Nominative Use -- Chapter Nine: False Advertising, Dilution & 'Cyberpiracy' -- Chapter Ten: Introduction to Copyright: Theory & History -- Chapter Eleven: Copyrightable Subject Matter -- Chapter Twelve: Copyright's "Reach": Infringement -- Chapter Thirteen: Limitations on Exclusive Rights: Fair Use -- Chapter Fourteen: Secondary Liability for Copyright Infringement & Safe Harbors in the Digital Age -- Chapter Fifteen: Anti-Circumvention: A New Statutory Scheme -- Chapter Sixteen: Copyright & State Misappropriation Law: Preemption -- Chapter Seventeen: Patents: Hopes, Fears, History & Doctrine -- Chapter Eighteen: Patentable Subject Matter -- Chapter Nineteen: Requirements for Patent Protection: Utility -- Chapter Twenty: Requirements for Patent Protection: Novelty -- Chapter Twenty-One: Non-Obviousness -- Chapter Twenty-Two: Trade Secrecy & Preemption -- Chapter Twenty-Three: A Creative Commons? Summary and Conclusion0 aThis book is an introduction to intellectual property law, the set of private legal rights that allows individuals and corporations to control intangible creations and marks—from logos to novels to drug formulae—and the exceptions and limitations that define those rights. It focuses on the three graphmain forms of US federal intellectual property—trademark, copyright and patent—but many of the ideas discussed here apply far beyond those legal areas and far beyond the law of the United States. The book is intended to be a textbook for the basic Intellectual Property class, but because it is an open coursebook, which can be freely edited and customized, it is also suitable for an undergraduate class, or for a business, library studies, communications or other graduate school class. Each chapter contains cases and secondary readings and a set of problems or role-playing exercises involving the material. The problems range from a video of the Napster oral argument to counseling clients about search engines and trademarks, applying the First Amendment to digital rights management and copyright or commenting on the Supreme Court's rulings on gene patents.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aJenkins, Jennifereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/449zAccess online version03503nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002900140245010100169264004300270264008500313264001200398300002200410336002600432337002600458338003600484341002800520490002700548505058100575520177401156542001602930546001602946588004002962650003603002710003903038856007603077OTLid0000450MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aLamoreaux, Aliseeauthor02aA Different Road To CollegebA Guide For Transitioning Non-Traditional StudentscAlise Lamoreaux 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: What's College For? -- Chapter 2: Choosing A College To Attend Supplemental Fun -- Chapter 3: Evolution To College: Becoming A College Student -- Chapter 4: Speaking The Language of College -- Chapter 5: Planning A College Schedule -- Chapter 6: Navigating The College Website -- Chapter 7: Placement Testing -- Chapter 8: Beyond Tuition: Understanding College Expenses -- Chapter 9: Hidden Money: ScholarshipsRandom Autobiographies -- Chapter 10: College Resources -- Chapter 11: Pulling It All Together -- Notes for Instructors -- About The Author0 aA Different Road To College: A Guide For Transitioning Non-Traditional Students is designed to introduce students to the contextual issues of college. Non-traditional students have an ever-growing presence on college campuses, especially community colleges. This open educational resource is designed to engage students in seeing themselves as college students and understanding the complexity of what that means to their lives. Non-traditional students face critical issues surrounding participation and success in college. These critical issues include, but are not limited to, the following Strategies for managing competing needs on their time Difficulty navigating institutional environments Understanding the culture of college Transitional services not in place to the same degree as for “traditional” students Knowledgeable support systems Personal barriers Unpredictable influences on their schedules Work first, study second priorities Paying for college Underprepared foundation skills (Reading, Writing, Math, Computer Literacy, Human Relations, Oral Communication).Most textbooks available on the topic of college transition/success today focus on the traditional 18-year old student and the needs of someone living away from home for the first time.The goal of the book is to help students understand how to select the right college for them and then become acquainted with the inner workings and language of college. The book is designed to be a practical guide for first-generation college students as they navigate potentially unfamiliar topics such as understanding the costs of college beyond tuition, navigating college websites, and defining critical language needed to understand communication regarding the context and culture of the college.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/450zAccess online version02496nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002600144245003200170264004300202264004400245264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002800411490002700439505014900466520116800615542002701783546001601810588004101826650002501867650003301892700003401925700002401959710003901983856007602022OTLid0000451MnU20260406020350.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aPitt, Rebeccaeauthor00aOpen ResearchcRebecca Pitt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMilton Keynes, EnglandbOER Hubc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. Open Research -- 2. Ethics in the Open -- 3. Open Dissemination -- 4. Reflecting in the Open -- 5. Final Thoughts -- Appendix0 aIf you have an interest in openness, open education, research skills or want to find out more about the impact of Open EducationalResources (OER), then this resource is for you. You could be: Using an OER with students and interested in assessing its impact Facilitating sessions on open practice with students or colleagues and looking for inspiration Working on a research project and wanting to find out more about incorporating open research techniques into your own practice Curious about the benefits and challenges of open research Looking to use open tools in your research Wanting increased impact for your research Interested in open research on OER This resource will help you explore what open research is, how you can ethically and openly share your findings so others can reuse or develop your work, and the role of reflection and open dissemination. Whilst many challenges and issues apply to all aspects of research (for example: choosing an appropriate methodology), open research brings a range of different opportunities and challenges; it's these that we are specifically interested in exploring. What can openness add to the research process?1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 ade los Arcos, Beatrizeauthor1 aFarrow, Robeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/451zAccess online version02630nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245005200181264004300233264006100276264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505066000514520081801174542004101992546001602033588004002049650002602089650002602115710003902141856007602180OTLid0000452MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341420  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aDeLancey, Craigeauthor02aA Concise Introduction to LogiccCraig DeLancey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Propositional Logic -- 1. Developing a Precise Language -- 2. “If…then….” and “It is not the case that….” -- 3. Good Arguments -- 4. Proofs -- 5. “And” -- 6. Conditional Derivations -- 7. “Or” -- 8. Reductio ad Absurdum -- 9. “… if and only if …”, Using Theorems -- 10. Summary of Propositional Logic -- Part II: First Order Logic -- 11. Names and predicates -- 12. “All” and “some” -- 13. Reasoning with quantifiers -- 14. Universal derivation -- 15. Relations, functions, identity, and multiple quantifiers -- 16. Summary of first order logic -- Part III: A Look Forward -- 17. Some advanced topics in logic0 aA Concise Introduction to Logic is an introduction to formal logic suitable for undergraduates taking a general education course in logic or critical thinking, and is accessible and useful to any interested in gaining a basic understanding of logic. This text takes the unique approach of teaching logic through intellectual history; the author uses examples from important and celebrated arguments in philosophy to illustrate logical principles. The text also includes a basic introduction to findings of advanced logic. As indicators of where the student could go next with logic, the book closes with an overview of advanced topics, such as the axiomatic method, set theory, Peano arithmetic, and modal logic. Throughout, the text uses brief, concise chapters that readers will find easy to read and to review.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/452zAccess online version02652nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100003000163245008000193264004300273264004700316264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002500485490002700510505066100537520079801198542003001996546001602026588004002042650003202082650003702114710003902151856007602190OTLid0000453MnU20260406020753.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781593275846  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aHaverbeke, Marijneauthor00aEloquent JavaScriptbA Modern Introduction to ProgrammingcMarijn Haverbeke 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSan Francisco, CAbNo Starch Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part 1: Language -- 1 Values, Types, and Operators -- 2 Program Structure -- 3 Functions -- 4 Data Structures: Object and Arrays -- 5 Higher-Order Functions -- 6 The Secret Life of Objects -- 7 Project: A Robot -- 8 Bugs and Errors -- 9 Regular Expressions -- 10 Modules -- 11 Asynchronous Programming -- 12 Project: A Programming Language -- Part 2: Browser -- 13 JavaScript and the Browser -- 14 The Document Object Model -- 15 Handling Events -- 16 Project: A Platform Game -- 17 Drawing on Canvas -- 18 HTTP and Forms -- 19 Project: A Pixel Art Editor -- Part 3: Node -- 20 Node.js -- 21 Project: Skill-Sharing Website -- Exercise Hints0 aJavaScript lies at the heart of almost every modern web application, from social apps like Twitter to browser-based game frameworks like Phaser and Babylon. Though simple for beginners to pick up and play with, JavaScript is a flexible, complex language that you can use to build full-scale applications. This much anticipated and thoroughly revised third edition of Eloquent JavaScript dives deep into the JavaScript language to show you how to write beautiful, effective code. It has been updated to reflect the current state of Java¬Script and web browsers and includes brand-new material on features like class notation, arrow functions, iterators, async functions, template strings, and block scope. A host of new exercises have also been added to test your skills and keep you on track.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/453zAccess online version03688nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002800140245005900168264004300227264005000270264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505191300497520070502410542001603115546001603131588004003147650003603187710003903223856007603262OTLid0000454MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aCaulfield, Mikeeauthor00aWeb Literacy for Student Fact-CheckerscMike Caulfield 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVancouver, WashingtonbMike Caulfieldc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Four Strategies and a Habit -- 1. Why This Book? -- 2. Four Strategies -- 3. Building a Fact-Checking Habit by Checking Your Emotions -- Part II. Look for Previous Work -- 4. How to Use Previous Work -- 5. Fact-checking Sites -- 6. Wikipedia -- Part III. Go Upstream -- 7. Go Upstream to Find the Source -- 8. Identifying Sponsored Content -- 9. Activity: Spot Sponsored Content -- 10. Understanding Syndication -- 11. Tracking the Source of Viral Content -- 12. Tracking the Source of Viral Photos -- 13. Using Google Reverse Image Search -- 14. Filtering by Time and Place to Find the Original -- 15. Activity: Trace Viral Photos Upstream -- Part IV. Read Laterally -- 16. What "Reading Laterally" Means -- 17. Evaluating a Website or Publication's Authority -- 18. Basic Techniques: Domain Searches, WHOIS -- 19. Activity: Evaluate a Site -- 20. Stupid Journal Tricks -- 21. Finding a Journal's Impact Factor -- 22. Using Google Scholar to Check Author Expertise -- 23. How to Think About Research -- 24. Finding High Quality Secondary Sources -- 25. Choosing Your Experts First -- 26. Evaluating News Sources -- 27. National Newspapers of Record -- 28. Activity: Expert or Crank? -- 29. Activity: Find Top Authorities for a Subject -- Part V. Field Guide -- 30. Verifying Twitter Identity -- 31. Activity: Verify a Twitter Account -- 32. Using the Wayback Machine to Check for Page Changes -- 33. Finding Out When a Page Was Published Using Google -- 34. Using Google Books to Track Down Quotes -- 35. Searching TV Transcripts with the Internet Archive -- 36. Using Buzzsumo To Find Highly Viral Stories -- Part VI. Field Guide (Unfinished Articles) -- 37. Unfinished Articles -- 38. Finding Out Who Owns a Server -- 39. Finding Out When a Site Was Launched -- 40. Avoiding Confirmation Bias In Searches -- 41. Finding the Best Possible Opposition -- 42. Advanced Wikipedia -- 43. Promoted Tweets0 aThe web gives us many such strategies and tactics and tools, which, properly used, can get students closer to the truth of a statement or image within seconds. For some reason we have decided not to teach students these specific techniques. As many people have noted, the web is both the largest propaganda machine ever created and the most amazing fact-checking tool ever invented. But if we haven't taught our students those capabilities is it any surprise that propaganda is winning? This is an unabashedly practical guide for the student fact-checker. It supplements generic information literacy with the specific web-based techniques that can get you closer to the truth on the web more quickly.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/454zAccess online version02381nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001800127050001000145100002300155245007800178264004300256264008300299264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505046300559520068501022542003001707546001601737588004001753650002901793650003301822700002501855710003901880856007601919OTLid0000455MnU20260406020707.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.31 aHall, Lynneauthor02aA Guide to Technical CommunicationsbStrategies & ApplicationscLynn Hall 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOhio State University Librariesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- What is Technical Communications? -- Rhetorical Foundations -- What is Rhetoric? -- Applications in Technical Communications -- Job Search Communications -- Preparing Job Application Materials -- Interview Strategies -- Employment Access, Equity & Opportunity -- Engaging With Research -- Common Types of Research Reports & Documents -- Strategies for Conducting Research -- Writing about Research -- Using and Documenting Sources -- Appendix0 aWelcome to the textbook for Engineering Technical Communications courses at The Ohio State University. Our aim in writing this textbook was to create a resource specifically focused on and applicable to the kinds of communication skills most beneficial to the students who take our courses. Therefore, this textbook focuses on developing both technical and professional communication skills and will help readers practice strategies for critically analyzing audiences and contexts, real-world applications of rhetorical principles, and skills for producing documents (reports, proposals, instructions), presentations, videos, and wide variety of other professional communications.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks1 aWahlin, Leaheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/455zAccess online version02037nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002700167245003800194264004300232264006000275264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505073800512520016401250542001601414546001601430588004001446650002401486650002601510710003901536856007601575OTLid0000456MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781774200131  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aWatt, Adrienneeauthor00aProject ManagementcAdrienne Watt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Project Management: Past and Present -- 2. Project Management Overview -- 3. The Project Life Cycle (Phases) -- 4. Framework for Project Management -- 5. Stakeholder Management -- 6. Culture and Project Management -- 7. Project Initiation -- 8. Overview of Project Planning -- 9. Scope Planning -- 10. Project Schedule Planning -- 11. Resource Planning -- 12. Budget Planning -- 13. Procurement Management -- 14. Quality Planning -- 15. Communication Planning -- 16. Risk Management Planning -- 17. Project Implementation Overview -- 18. Project Completion -- 19. Celebrate! -- Appendix 1: Project Management PowerPoints -- Appendix 2: Chapter Questions -- Appendix 3: Chapter Audio Files -- About the Author -- Versioning History0 aThis book covers the basics of project management. This includes the process of initiation, planning, execution, control and close out that all projects share.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/456zAccess online version03845nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245006800167264004300235264005300278264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505230600508520042902814542001603243546001603259588004103275650002603316650002603342710003903368856007603407OTLid0000457MnU20260406020352.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aVan Cleave, Mattheweauthor00aIntroduction to Logic and Critical ThinkingcMatthew Van Cleave 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLansing, MichiganbMatthew J. Van Cleavec[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Reconstructing and analyzing arguments -- 1.1 What is an argument? -- 1.2 Identifying arguments -- 1.3 Arguments vs. explanations -- 1.4 More complex argument structures -- 1.5 Using your own paraphrases of premises and conclusions to reconstruct arguments in standard form -- 1.6 Validity -- 1.7 Soundness -- 1.8 Deductive vs. inductive arguments -- 1.9 Arguments with missing premises -- 1.10 Assuring, guarding, and discounting -- 1.11 Evaluative language -- 1.12 Evaluating a real-life argument -- Chapter 2: Formal methods of evaluating arguments -- 2.1 What is a formal method of evaluation and why do we need them? -- 2.2 Propositional logic and the four basic truth functional connectives -- 2.3 Negation and disjunction -- 2.4 Using parentheses to translate complex sentences -- 2.5 “Not both” and “neither nor” -- 2.6 The truth table test of validity -- 2.7 Conditionals -- 2.8 “Unless” -- 2.9 Material equivalence -- 2.10 Tautologies, contradictions, and contingent statements -- 2.11 Proofs and the 8 valid forms of inference -- 2.12 How to construct proofs -- 2.13 Short review of propositional logic -- 2.14 Categorical logic -- 2.15 The Venn test of validity for immediate categorical inferences -- 2.16 Universal statements and existential commitment -- 2.17 Venn validity for categorical syllogisms -- Chapter 3: Evaluating inductive arguments and probabilistic and statistical fallacies -- 3.1 Inductive arguments and statistical generalizations -- 3.2 Inference to the best explanation and the seven explanatory virtues -- 3.3 Analogical arguments -- 3.4 Causal arguments -- 3.5 Probability -- 3.6 The conjunction fallacy -- 3.7 The base rate fallacy -- 3.8 The small numbers fallacy -- 3.9 Regression to the mean fallacy -- 3.10 Gambler's fallacy -- Chapter 4: Informal fallacies -- 4.1 Formal vs. informal fallacies -- 4.1.1 Composition fallacy -- 4.1.2 Division fallacy -- 4.1.3 Begging the question fallacy -- 4.1.4 False dichotomy -- 4.1.5 Equivocation -- 4.2 Slippery slope fallacies -- 4.2.1 Conceptual slippery slope -- 4.2.2 Causal slippery slope -- 4.3 Fallacies of relevance -- 4.3.1 Ad hominem -- 4.3.2 Straw man -- 4.3.3 Tu quoque -- 4.3.4 Genetic -- 4.3.5 Appeal to consequences -- 4.3.6 Appeal to authority -- Answers to exercisesGlossary/Index0 aThis is an introductory textbook in logic and critical thinking. The goal of the textbook is to provide the reader with a set of tools and skills that will enable them to identify and evaluate arguments. The book is intended for an introductory course that covers both formal and informal logic. As such, it is not a formal logic textbook, but is closer to what one would find marketed as a “critical thinking textbook.”1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/457zAccess online version04579nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002800157245006700185250001600252264004300268264006900311264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505029300557520312900850542003003979546001604009588004004025650002504065710003904090856007604129OTLid0000458MnU20260406020705.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548223  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.51 aBarkley, Andreweauthor04aThe Economics of Food and Agricultural MarketscAndrew Barkley  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Introduction to Economics -- Chapter 2. Welfare Analysis of Government Policies -- Chapter 3. Monopoly and Market Power -- Chapter 4. Pricing with Market Power -- Chapter 5. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly -- Chapter 6. Game Theory -- Chapter 6. Game Theory Applications0 aThe Second Edition of Economics of Food and Agricultural Markets (2019) is written for applied intermediate microeconomics courses. The book showcases the power of economic principles to explain and predict issues and current events in the food, agricultural, agribusiness, international trade, labor markets, and natural resource sectors. The field of agricultural economics is relevant, important and interesting. The study of market structures, also called industrial organization, provides powerful, timely, and useful tools for any individual or group making personal choices, business decisions, or public policies in food and agricultural industries. Readers will benefit from a large number of real-world examples and applications of the economic concepts under discussion. The book introduces economic principles in a succinct and reader-friendly format, providing students and instructors with a clear, up-to-date, and straightforward approach to learning how a market-based economy functions, and how to use simple economic principles for improved decision making. The principles are applied to timely, interesting, and important real-world issues through words, graphs, and simple algebra and calculus. This book is intended for students who study agricultural economics, microeconomics, rural development and/or environmental policy. The goal of the book is to encourage students to learn to “think like an economist” through application of benefits and costs to every decision, idea, and strategic decision. This objective is accomplished by including extended examples that cover a broad range of topics including the analysis of consumer decisions, supply and demand, and market efficiency; the design of pricing strategies; advertising and marketing decisions; and public policy analysis. Contents The book begins with a review and introduction of economic principles, including markets, scarcity, and the scientific method. Supply and demand are examined carefully and completely, with numerous real-world examples. The power of the market model is employed to explain and predict economic phenomena and current events. Elasticities are defined, explained, and put to use in decision making for all individuals, businesses, and policy makers. Next, the motivation for and consequences of globalization, immigration, and international trade are explored. Government policies are surveyed, including taxes, subsidies, trade policies, and immigration policies. Monopoly and monopsony are presented, using numerous real-world examples and anecdotes. Pricing strategies are comprehensively discussed, including price discrimination, peak-load pricing, two-part pricing, bundling, and advertising. Monopolistic competition and oligopoly are defined, explained, and used to understand real-world markets. Game theory, or strategic decision making, is introduced and used to demonstrate how to make better decisions in numerous situations when other individuals and groups are affected by a choice or strategy. Repeated games, sequential games, and first-mover advantage are carefully presented and considered.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/458zAccess online version02136nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100002400160245004300184264004300227264003900270264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002500431490002700456505049100483520048200974542002301456546001601479588004001495650003501535650002701570650002601597710003901623856007601662OTLid0000459MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2003    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aLane, Davideauthor00aIntroduction to StatisticscDavid Lane 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHouston, TexasbDavid Lanec[2003] 4c©2003.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Graphing Distributions -- 3. Summarizing Distributions -- 4. Describing Bivariate Data -- 5. Probability -- 6. Research Design -- 7. Normal Distributions -- 8. Advanced Graphs -- 9. Sampling Distributions -- 10. Estimation -- 11. Logic of Hypothesis Testing -- 12. Testing Means -- 13. Power -- 14. Regression -- 15. Analysis of Variance -- 16. Transformations -- 17. Chi Square -- 18. Distribution-Free Tests -- 19. Effect Size -- 20. Case Studies -- 21. Glossary0 aIntroduction to Statistics is a resource for learning and teaching introductory statistics. This work is in the public domain. Therefore, it can be copied and reproduced without limitation. However, we would appreciate a citation where possible. Please cite as: Online Statistics Education: A Multimedia Course of Study (http://onlinestatbook.com/). Project Leader: David M. Lane, Rice University. Instructor's manual, PowerPoint Slides, and additional questions are available.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/459zAccess online version03271nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002600137245005900163264004300222264008500265264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505168300527520050102210542001602711546001602727588004002743650002302783710003902806856007602845OTLid0000460MnU20260330020323.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aDeYoung, Joaneauthor00aForest MeasurementsbAn Applied ApproachcJoan DeYoung 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroductionChapter 1: Slope -- 1.1 Assessing Slope of the Land -- 1.2 Field Technique Tips for Measuring %Slope -- 1.3 Tips for Measuring %Slope on Contour Maps -- 1.4 Summary Problems -- Chapter 2: Tree Height -- 2.1 Why Tree Height? -- 2.2 Determining Tree Height -- 2.3 Using Percent Slope to Determine Tree Height -- 2.4 Using Topographic Slope to Determine Tree Height -- 2.5 Measuring Height on Irregular Trees -- 2.6 Instruments Used for Measuring Tree Height -- 2.7 Field Technique Tips for Measuring Tree Height -- 2.8 Summary Questions -- Chapter 3: Tree Diameter -- 3.1 Why Tree Diameter? -- 3.2 Determining Tree Diameter -- 3.3 Instruments for Measuring Tree Diameter -- 3.4 Field Technique Tips for Measuring Tree Diameter -- 3.5 Summary Questions -- Chapter 4: Tree Age -- 4.1 Determining Tree Age -- 4.2 Young trees -- 4.3 Field Technique Tips for Counting Whorls: -- 4.4 Forest Setting -- 4.5 Increment Boring -- 4.6 Field Techniques for Increment Boring -- 4.7 Summary Questions -- Chapter 5: Stand Characteristics -- 5.1 Stand Structure -- 5.2 Crown Classes -- 5.3 Live Crown Ratio -- 5.4 Field Technique Tips for Determining Crown Class and LCR -- 5.5 Stand Growth and Development Over Time -- 5.6 Application of LCR and Crown Class in Forest Management -- 5.7 Summary Questions -- Chapter 6: Site Quality -- 6.1 Forest Site Productivity -- 6.2 Overview of Site Index -- 6.3 How to Use Site Index Curves -- 6.4 Characteristics of Suitable Site Index Trees -- 6.5 Field Technique Tips for Determining Site Index -- 6.6. Determining Site Index from Field Measurements -- 6.7 Summary Questions -- 6.8 King's 50-year Site Index Tables -- References CitedGlossary0 aThis is a forest measurements textbook written for field technicians. Silvicultural applications and illustrations are provided to demonstrate the relevance of the measurements. Special “technique tips” for each skill are intended to help increase data collection accuracy and confidence. These include how to avoid common pitfalls, effective short cuts and essentials for recording field data correctly. The emphasis is on elementary skills; it is not intended to be a timber cruising guide.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/460zAccess online version03376nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001100157050000700168100002600175245006700201264004300268264005000311264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505149900538520052102037542001602558546001602574588004002590650002502630650004402655650003102699700002902730700002602759700003002785710003902815856007602854OTLid0000461MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781945764028  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aHQ1101 4aH11 aKang, Milianneauthor00aIntroduction to Women, Gender, Sexuality StudiescMiliann Kang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmherst, MassachusettsbUMass Amherstc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit I: An Introduction to Women, Gender, Sexuality Studies: Grounding Theoretical Frameworks and Concepts -- Critical Introduction to the Field -- Theorizing Lived Experiences -- Identity Terms -- Conceptualizing Structures of Power -- Social Constructionism -- Intersectionality -- References: Unit I -- Unit II: Challenging Binary Systems and Constructions of Difference -- Introduction: Binary Systems -- The Sex/Gender/Sexuality System -- Gender and Sex - Transgender and Intersex -- Sexualities -- Masculinities -- Race -- Class -- Alternatives to Binary Systems -- References: Unit II -- Unit III: Institutions, Culture, and Structures -- Introduction: Institutions, Cultures, and Structures -- The Family -- Media -- Medicine, Health, and Reproductive Justice -- The State, Law, and the Prison System -- Intersecting Institutions Case Study: The Struggle to End Gendered Violence and Violence Against Women -- References: Unit III -- Unit IV: Gender and Work in the Global Economy -- Introduction: Gender and Work in the Global Economy -- Gender and Work in the US -- Gender and the US Welfare State -- Transnational Production and Globalization -- Racialized, Gendered, and Sexualized Labor in the Global Economy -- References: Unit IV -- Unit V: Historical and Contemporary Feminist Social Movements -- Introduction: Feminist Movements -- 19th Century Feminist Movements -- Early to Late 20th Century Feminist Movements -- Third Wave and Queer Feminist Movements -- References: Unit V0 aThis textbook introduces key feminist concepts and analytical frameworks used in the interdisciplinary Women, Gender, Sexualities field. It unpacks the social construction of knowledge and categories of difference, processes and structures of power and inequality, with a focus on gendered labor in the global economy, and the historical development of feminist social movements. The book emphasizes feminist sociological approaches to analyzing structures of power, drawing heavily from empirical feminist research.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aLessard, Donovaneauthor1 aHeston, Lauraeauthor1 aNordmarken, Sonnyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/461zAccess online version02682nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002700162245004500189264004300234264005400277264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505072900508520079501237542004102032546001602073588004102089650002402130650002702154710003902181856007602220OTLid0000462MnU20260406020355.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2007    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSloughter, Daneauthor00aYet Another Calculus TextcDan Sloughter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGreenville, South CarolinabDan Sloughterc[2007] 4c©2007.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Derivatives -- 1.1 The arrow paradox -- 1.2 Rates of change -- 1.3 The hyperreals -- 1.4 Continuous functions -- 1.5 Properties of continuous functions -- 1.6 The derivative -- 1.7 Properties of derivatives -- 1.8 A geometric interpretation of the derivative -- 1.9 Increasing, decreasing, and local extrema -- 1.10 Optimization -- 1.11 Implicit differentiation and rates of change -- 1.12 Higher-order derivatives -- 2 Integrals -- 2.1 Integrals -- 2.2 Definite integrals -- 2.3 Properties of definite integrals -- 2.4 The fundamental theorem of integrals -- 2.5 Applications of definite integrals -- 2.6 Some techniques for evaluating integrals -- 2.7 The exponential and logarithm functions -- Answers to ExercisesIndex0 aI intend this book to be, firstly, a introduction to calculus based on the hyperrealnumber system. In other words, I will use infinitesimal and infinite numbers freely. Just as most beginning calculus books provide no logical justification for the real number system, I will provide none for the hyperreals. The reader interested in questions of foundations should consult books such asAbraham Robinson's Non-standard Analysis or Robert Goldblatt's Lectures onthe Hyperreals. Secondly, I have aimed the text primarily at readers who already have somefamiliarity with calculus. Although the book does not explicitly assume any prerequisites beyond basic algebra and trigonometry, in practice the pace istoo fast for most of those without some acquaintance with the basic notions of calculus.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/462zAccess online version02796nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002700162245004500189264004300234264005400277264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505112500508520046601633542004102099546001602140588004102156650002402197650003502221650002702256710003902283856007602322OTLid0000463MnU20260406020353.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSloughter, Daneauthor02aA Primer of Real AnalysiscDan Sloughter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGreenville, South CarolinabDan Sloughterc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Fundamentals -- 1.1 Sets and relations -- 1.2 Functions -- 1.3 Rational numbers -- 1.4 Real Numbers -- 2 Sequences and Series -- 2.1 Sequences -- 2.2 Infinite series -- 3 Cardinality -- 3.1 Binary representations -- 3.2 Countable and uncountable sets -- 3.3 Power sets -- 4 Topology of the Real Line -- 4.1 Intervals -- 4.2 Open sets -- 4.3 Closed sets -- 4.4 Compact Sets -- 5 Limits and Continuity -- 5.1 Limits -- 5.2 Monotonic functions -- 5.3 Limits to infinity and infinite limits -- 5.4 Continuous Functions -- 6 Derivatives -- 6.1 Best linear approximations -- 6.2 Derivatives -- 6.3 Mean Value Theorem -- 6.4 Discontinuities of derivatives -- 6.5 l'Hˆopital's rule -- 6.6 Taylor's Theorem -- 7 Integrals -- 7.1 Upper and lower integrals -- 7.2 Integrals -- 7.3 Integrability conditions -- 7.4 Properties of integrals -- 7.5 The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus -- 7.6 Taylor's theorem revisited -- 7.7 An improper integral -- 8 More Functions -- 8.1 The arctangent function -- 8.2 The tangent function -- 8.3 The sine and cosine Functions -- 8.4 The logarithm function -- 8.5 The exponential function -- Index0 aThis is a short introduction to the fundamentals of real analysis. Although the prerequisites are few, I have written the text assuming the reader has the level of mathematical maturity of one who has completed the standard sequence of calculus courses, has had some exposure to the ideas of mathematical proof (including induction), and has an acquaintance with such basic ideas as equivalence relations and the elementary algebraic properties of the integers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/463zAccess online version03976nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136050001100146050000800157050000700165100002400172245007400196250001900270264004300289264008700332264001200419300002200431336002600453337002600479338003600505341002800541490002700569505064200596520181401238542003003052546001603082588004003098650002803138650004303166650004403209650002403253650003103277700003103308700004003339710003903379856007603418OTLid0000464MnU20260406020830.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aHM621 4aHQ1101 4aBL1 4aH11 aBrown, Ninaeauthor00aPerspectivesbAn Open Invitation to Cultural AnthropologycNina Brown  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAmerican Anthropological Associationc2023. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction to Anthropology -- The Culture Concept -- Doing Fieldwork: Methods in Cultural Anthropology -- Language -- Subsistence -- Economics -- Political Anthropology: A Cross-Cultural Comparison -- Family and Marriage -- Race and Ethnicity -- Gender and Sexuality -- Religion -- Globalization -- The History of Anthropological Ideas -- Culture and Sustainability: Environmental Anthropology in the Anthropocene -- Performance -- Media Anthropology: Meaning, Embodiment, Infrastructure, and Activism -- Health and Medicine -- Seeing Likme an Anthropologist: Anthropology in Practice -- Public Anthropology -- Image Credits0 aWe are delighted to bring to you this novel textbook, a collection of chapters on the essential topics in cultural anthropology. Different from other introductory textbooks, this book is an edited volume with each chapter written by a different author. Each author has written from their experiences working as an anthropologist and that personal touch makes for an accessible introduction to cultural anthropology. Our approach to cultural anthropology is holistic. We see the interconnectedness of cultural practices and, in all of the chapters, we emphasize the comparison of cultures and the ways of life of different peoples. We start with Laura Nader’s observation that cultural differences need not be seen as a problem. In our complicated world of increasing migration, nationalism, and climate challenges, cultural diversity might actually be the source of conflict resolution and new approaches to ensuring a healthier world. Indeed, as Katie Nelson reminds us, anthropology exposes the familiarity in the ideas and practices of others that seem bizarre. Robert Borofsky advocates for anthropology’s ability to empower people and facilitate good. Borofsky calls on anthropologists to engage with a wider public to bring our incredible stories and important insights to helping resolve the most critical issues we face in the world today. This book brings Nader, Nelson, Borofsky, and many others together to demonstrate that our anthropological understandings can help all of us to improve the lives of people the world over. We need you, as students, to see the possibilities. As instructors, we want to help you easily share anthropological knowledge and understanding. We want all readers to be inspired by the intensely personal writings of the anthropologists who contribute to this volume.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMcllwraith, Thomaseauthor1 aTubelle de González, Lauraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/464zAccess online version03719nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000900156050000700165100002600172245008400198264004300282264006000325264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505061200562520180101174542001602975546001602991588004003007650004403047650003303091650003103124700002703155710003903182856007603221OTLid0000465MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781622399253  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aJA71 4aH11 aAragon, Jannieauthor00aGlobal Women's IssuesbWomen in the World Today, extended versioncJanni Aragon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aOverview: Interview with Ambassador Melanne Vereer -- Chapter 1: Women and Poverty -- Chapter 2: Women and Education -- Chapter 3: Women and Health -- Chapter 4: Violence Against Women -- Chapter 5: Women, Girls and Armed Conflict -- Chapter 6: Women in the Economy -- Chapter 7: Women in Power and Decisionmaking -- Chapter 8: Institutional Mechanisms for the Advancement of Women -- Chapter 9: Human Rights of Women -- Chapter 10: Women and the Media -- Chapter 11: Women and the Environment -- Chapter 12: Rights of the Girl Child -- Conclusion -- Bibliography: Additional Resources -- Versioning History0 aWe cannot solve global challenges unless women participate fully in efforts to find solutions. Female participation in the private sector is a crucial economic driver for societies worldwide. Economic security benefits every facet of a woman's life, with positive effects on the health, education and vitality of families. Learn about women who are changing their societies for the better. This book is based on the twelve critical areas of concern identified in the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action at the Fourth World Conference on Women in Beijing in 1995: The burden of poverty on women, unequal access to education and training, inequalities and inadequacies in and unequal access to health care and related services, violence against women, the effects of armed or other kinds of conflict on women, including those living under foreign occupation, inequality in economic structures and policies, inequality between men and women in the sharing of power and decision-making at all levels, insufficient mechanisms at all levels to promote the advancement of women, lack of respect for and inadequate promotion and protection of the human rights of women, stereotyping of women and inequality in women's access to and participation in all communication systems, especially in the media, gender inequalities in the management of natural resources and in the safeguarding of the environment, and persistent discrimination against and violation of the rights of the girl child. This extended version of Global Women's Issues: Women in the World Today includes, for each chapter, a summary, key words, multiple choice questions, discussion questions, essay questions, and a list of additional resources. Copies of the original book are also available in Arabic, Portuguese, and Spanish.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMiller, Marieleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/465zAccess online version03818nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245005500160264004300215264006000258264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505081100495520189901306542001603205546001603221588004003237650003803277650002603315710003903341856007603380OTLid0000466MnU20260406020729.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aSmith, Petereauthor00aGreek and Latin RootsbPart I - LatincPeter Smith 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: The Latin Noun (Declensions 1 & 2) -- Chapter 3: The Latin Noun (Declensions 3, 4, 5) -- Chapter 4: Simple Latin Adjectives -- Chapter 5: Turning Latin Nouns into Adjectives -- Chapter 6: Turning Latin Adjectives into Latin Nouns -- Chapter 7: Latin Diminutives -- Chapter 8: Latin Prefixes -- Chapter 9: The Latin Verb System -- Chapter 10: Turning Latin Verbs into Latin Nouns -- Chapter 11: Turning Latin Nouns into Latin Verbs -- Chapter 12: Latin Present Participles and Gerundives -- Chapter 13: Turning Latin Verbs into Latin Adjectives -- Chapter 14: Compound Words in Latin -- Appendices -- I. Key to Exercises (Latin) -- Appendix I -- Key to Exercises (Latin) -- II. Summary of Vocabulary Tables (Latin) -- Appendix II -- Summary of Vocabulary Tables (Latin)0 aGreek and Latin Roots: Part I - Latin is part one of a two part series. This series examines the systematic principles by which a large portion of English vocabulary has evolved from Latin and (to a lesser degree) from Greek. This book focuses on Latin roots. A link to the second part focusing on the Greek roots can be found below. Part I will try to impart some skill in the recognition and proper use of words derived from Latin. There is a stress on principles: although students will be continually looking at interesting individual words, their constant aim will be to discover predictable general patterns of historical development, so that they may be able to cope with new and unfamiliar words of any type that they have studied. They will be shown how to approach the problem by a procedure known as “word analysis,” which is roughly comparable to the dissection of an interesting specimen in the biology laboratory. The text assumes no previous knowledge of Latin, and does not involve the grammatical study of this language—except for a few basic features of noun and verb formation that will help students to understand the Latin legacy in English. Although there will be some attention paid to the historical interaction of Latin with English, this text is definitely not a systematic history of the English language. It focuses on only those elements within English that have been directly or indirectly affected by this classical language. In order to provide the broadest possible service to students, the text emphasizes standard English vocabulary in current use. The more exotic technical vocabulary of science and medicine can be extremely interesting, but is explored in only summary fashion. Nevertheless, this text should be of considerable value, say, to a would-be botanist or medical doctor, if only by providing the foundation for further specialized enquiry.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/466zAccess online version03455nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000800154050000700162100002800169245005500197264004300252264006100295264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505119000533520099001723542004102713546001602754588004002770650002802810650002302838650002602861650003102887710003902918856007602957OTLid0000467MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341406  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aD20 4aH11 aWelker, Barbaraeauthor04aThe History of Our TribebHomininicBarbara Welker 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: An Introduction to Paleoanthropology -- 1. Paleoanthropology -- 2. Primate Classification -- 3. Primate Evolution -- 4. Primate Social Organization -- 5. What is a Hominim -- Part II: Miocene Epoch -- 6. Sahelanthropus tchadensis -- 7. Orrorin tugenensis -- 8. Ardipithecus ramidus, Ardipithecus kadabba -- Part III: Pliocene Epoch -- 9. Gracile Australopiths -- 10. Australopithecus anamensis -- 11. Australopithecus afarensis -- 12. Australopithecus bahrelghazali -- 13. Kenyanthropus platyops -- 14. Australopithecus prometheus or africanus -- 15. Australopithecus africanus -- Part IV: Pleistocene Epoch -- 16. Paranthropines -- 17. Australopithecus/Paranthropus aethiopicus -- 18. Paranthropus boisei -- 19. Paranthropus robustus -- 20. Australopithecus garhi -- 21. Australopithecus sediba -- 22. Genus Homo -- 23. Homo habilis -- 24. Homo rudolfensis -- 25. Homo species indeterminate -- 26. Homo naledi -- 27. The "erectus Grade" -- 28. Homo ergaster -- 29. Homo erectus -- 30. Homo georgicus -- 31. Homo antecessor -- 32. Homo floresiensis -- 33. Homo heidelbergensis -- 34. The Denisovans -- 35. Homo neanderthalensis -- 36. Homo sapiens -- Postscript -- Bibliography0 aWhere did we come from? What were our ancestors like? Why do we differ from other animals? How do scientists trace and construct our evolutionary history? The History of Our Tribe: Hominini provides answers to these questions and more. The book explores the field of paleoanthropology past and present. Beginning over 65 million years ago, Welker traces the evolution of our species, the environments and selective forces that shaped our ancestors, their physical and cultural adaptations, and the people and places involved with their discovery and study. It is designed as a textbook for a course on Human Evolution but can also serve as an introductory text for relevant sections of courses in Biological or General Anthropology or general interest. It is both a comprehensive technical reference for relevant terms, theories, methods, and species and an overview of the people, places, and discoveries that have imbued paleoanthropology with such fascination, romance, and mystery.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/467zAccess online version02412nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245009400177264004300271264006100314264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505052400552520070401076542004101780546001601821588004001837650002001877650002601897710003901923856007601962OTLid0000468MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341468  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aReich, Johneauthor00aExploring Movie Construction & ProductionbWhat’s so exciting about movies?cJohn Reich 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Introduction -- Part I: Construction -- 1. What Is the Theme? Why Do We Need It? -- 2. What Is Genre and How Is It Determined? -- 3. What Are the Mechanics of Story and Plot? -- 4. How Are the Characters Portrayed? -- Part II: Production Prologue -- 5. What Is Directing? -- 6. What Is Cinematography? -- 7. What Is Editing? -- 8. What Is Sound? -- Conclusion: What's So Exciting about Movies? – Novice Answers -- Production Assignment -- Cinematography Assignment -- Future Viewing -- Bibliography0 aExploring Movie Construction & Production contains eight chapters of the major areas of film construction and production. The discussion covers theme, genre, narrative structure, character portrayal, story, plot, directing style, cinematography, and editing. Important terminology is defined and types of analysis are discussed and demonstrated. An extended example of how a movie description reflects the setting, narrative structure, or directing style is used throughout the book to illustrate building blocks of each theme. This approach to film instruction and analysis has proved beneficial to increasing students' learning, while enhancing the creativity and critical thinking of the student.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/468zAccess online version03131nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002900137245005000166264004300216264005500259264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505091500491520115101406542003002557546001602587588004002603650002302643710003902666856007602705OTLid0000469MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aMillison, Andreweauthor00aIntroduction to PermaculturecAndrew Millison 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Section 1 - What is Permaculture? -- 1. What is Permaculture? -- 2. The People of Permaculture -- 3. State and Challenges of the World -- 4. David Holmgren's Future Scenarios -- 5. Permaculture Ethics Investments & Directives -- 6. Scales of System -- II. Section 2 - Where Am I? -- 7. Climate Change & Site Analysis -- 8. Permaculture Site Analysis: From Macro to Micro -- 9. Watershed Patterns -- 10. Deforested Watershed -- 11. Watershed Restoration -- 12. Sectors -- 13. Solar Aspect -- 14. Microclimates -- III. Section 3 - Permaculture Design -- 15. Design as a Response to Zones and Sectors: Cause Studies -- 16. Scales of Permanence -- 17. Design Methods Resources -- 18. Permaculture Principles -- 19. Zones -- IV. Section 4 - Climates -- 20. Soil -- 21. Trees -- 22. Shelter -- 23. Food -- 24. Water -- 25. Energy -- 26. Community -- 27. Where to From Here? -- 28. World Permaculture Organizations0 aPermaculture Design is a method of land planning that can be applied at scales from the home garden to city block to village to farm. It is an ethically based whole-systems design approach that uses concepts, principles, and methods derived from ecosystems, indigenous technologies, and other time-tested practices to create sustainable human settlements and institutions. Although rooted in horticulture and agriculture, Permaculture design is interdisciplinary, touching on a wide range of subjects including regional planning, ecology, animal husbandry, appropriate technology, architecture, social justice, and international development. This open text book is derived from the content of the Massive Open Online Course “Intro to Permaculture”. The original course also included interactive mapping and design tools that accompanied this content. The course and book provide a general overview of the Permaculture design system. The book can be downloaded as a print version. However, there are many accompanying videos and content pages that are linked to throughout the text, so it is best viewed online where the links can be accessed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/469zAccess online version02153nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245003300177264004300210264005500253264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505087700485520015901362542004101521546001601562588004001578650002301618650002301641710003901664856007601703OTLid0000470MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aBruslind, Lindaeauthor00aMicrobiologycLinda Bruslind 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: An Invisible World -- Chapter 2: The Cell -- Chapter 3: Prokaryotic Diversity -- Chapter 4: The Eukaryotes of Microbiology -- Chapter 5: Acellular Pathogens -- Chapter 6: Microbial Biochemistry -- Chapter 7: Microbial Growth -- Chapter 8: Modern Applications of Microbial Genetics -- Chapter 9: Control of Microbial Growth -- Chapter 10: Antimicrobial Drugs -- Chapter 11: Microbial Mechanisms of Pathogenicity -- Chapter 12: Disease and Epidemiology -- Chapter 13: Innate Nonspecific Host Defenses -- Chapter 14: Adaptive Specific Host Defenses -- Chapter 15: Diseases of the Immune System -- Chapter 16: Skin and Eye Infections -- Chapter 17: Respiratory System Infections -- Chapter 18: Urogenital System Infections -- Chapter 19: Digestive System Infections -- Chapter 20: Circulatory and Lymphatic System Infections -- Chapter 21: Nervous System Infections0 aIn this textbook the focus will be on the bacteria and archaea (traditionally known as the “prokaryotes,”) and the viruses and other acellular agents.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/470zAccess online version04244nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002700151245005900178264004300237264008500280264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505248400542520038703026542003003413546001603443588004003459650002603499650002403525650003603549700002703585700003003612700002903642700002403671710003903695856007603734OTLid0000471MnU20260406020832.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aBabin, Moniqueeauthor04aThe Word on College Reading and WritingcMonique Babin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroductionPart 1: Working with Texts -- What is a Text? -- Building Strong Reading Skills -- Read Effectively -- Create an Optimal Setting for Reading -- Use Pre-reading Strategies -- Read Efficiently -- Annotate and Take Notes -- Do Quick Research -- Discover What a Text is Trying to Say -- Explore the Ways the Text Affects You -- Reflect -- Troubleshoot Your Reading -- Writing about Texts -- Reading Critically -- Exploring the Structure of a Text -- Dialectic Note-taking -- Analyzing Content and Rhetoric -- Sentence-Level Analysis -- Point of View -- Word Choice -- Paragraph Analysis -- Summarizing a Text -- Critiquing a Text -- Drawing Conclusions, Synthesizing, and Reflecting -- What is Information Literacy? -- Why is Information Literacy Important? -- Finding Quality Texts -- Learning About Plagiarism and Guidelines for Using Information -- Part 2: Writing -- About This Section -- Why Write? -- Self-Exploration and Self-Enrichment -- Creativity -- Comprehension and Academic Performance -- Professional Opportunities -- Effective Communication and Persuasion -- Determining Your Audience and Purpose -- Audience -- Purpose -- Appealing to Your Audience -- Exercises -- Tone, Voice, and Point of View -- Prewriting—Generating Ideas -- Selecting and Narrowing a Topic -- Strategies for Getting Started -- Imagining Your Audience's Needs -- Drafting -- Organizing Your Ideas and Looking for Connections -- Finding the Thesis -- Writing a First Draft -- Writing Paragraphs -- The Paragraph Body: Supporting Your Ideas -- Developing Relationships between Ideas -- Patterns of Organization and Methods of Development -- Writing Introductions -- Writing Conclusions -- Writing Summaries -- Paraphrasing -- Quoting -- Using Sources Correctly -- Crediting and Citing Your Sources -- Citing: Identifying In-Text Sources -- Citing or Identifying Images in Your Writing -- Handling Titles -- Proofreading Your Work with Sources -- Using Citation Generators -- Dealing with Obstacles and Developing Good Habits -- Overcoming Writing Anxiety and Writer's Block -- Good Writing Habits -- Procrastination -- Revising -- Higher vs. Lower Order Concerns -- Reverse Outlining -- Editing -- Document Format, Documentation Style, and Proofreading -- Giving and Receiving Feedback -- What's Next? -- AppendicesGrammar and StyleResources for Working with MLACreating a Works Cited PageResults for the "Check Your Understanding" ActivitiesGlossary of TermsWorks Cited in This Text0 aWritten by five college reading and writing instructors, this interactive, multimedia text draws from decades of experience teaching students who are entering the college reading and writing environment for the very first time. It includes examples, exercises, and definitions for just about every reading- and writing-related topic students will encounter in their college courses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aBurnell, Caroleauthor1 aPesznecker, Susaneauthor1 aRosevear, Nicoleeauthor1 aWood, Jaimeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/471zAccess online version05386nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002700148245007400175264004300249264006200292264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505295200528520127103480542004104751546001604792588004104808650002504849650002304874710003904897856007604936OTLid0000472MnU20260406020356.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aSoderberg, Timeauthor00aOrganic Chemistry with a Biological EmphasiscTim SoderbergnVolume I 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMorris, MinnesotabUniversity of Minnesota Morrisc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to organic structure and bonding, part I -- Section 1: Drawing organic structures -- Section 2: Functional groups and organic nomenclature -- Section 3: Structures of some important classes of biological molecules -- Chapter 2: Introduction to organic structure and bonding, part II -- Section 1: Covalent bonding in organic molecules -- Section 2: Molecular orbital theory -- Section 3: Resonance -- Section 4: Non-covalent interactions -- Section 5: Physical properties of organic compounds -- Chapter 3: Conformation and Stereochemistry -- Section 1: Conformations of open-chain organic molecules -- Section 2: Conformations of cyclic organic molecules -- Section 3: Chirality and stereoisomers -- Section 4: Labeling chiral centers -- Section 5: Optical activity -- Section 6: Compounds with multiple chiral centers -- Section 7: Meso compounds -- Section 8: Fischer and Haworth projections -- Section 9: Stereochemistry of alkenes -- Section 10: Stereochemistry in biology and medicine -- Section 11: Prochirality -- Chapter 4: Structure determination part I - Infrared spectroscopy, UV-visible spectroscopy, and mass spectrometry -- Section 1: Mass Spectrometry -- Section 2: Introduction to molecular spectroscopy -- Section 3: Infrared spectroscopy -- Section 4: Ultraviolet and visible spectroscopy -- Chapter 5: Structure determination part II - Nuclear magnetic resonancespectroscopy -- Section 1: The origin of the NMR signal -- Section 2: Chemical equivalence -- Section 3: The 1H-NMR experiment -- Section 4: The basis for differences in chemical shift -- Section 5: Spin-spin coupling -- Section 6: 13C-NMR spectroscopy -- Section 7: Solving unknown structures -- Section 8: Complex coupling in 1H-NMR spectra -- Section 9: Other applications of NMR -- Chapter 6: Overview of organic reactivity -- Section 1: A first look at some organic reaction mechanisms -- Section 2: A quick review of thermodynamics and kinetics -- Section 3: Catalysis -- Section 4: Comparing biological reactions to laboratory reactions -- Chapter 7: Acid-base reactions -- Section 1: Acid-base reactions -- Section 2: Comparing the acidity and basicity of organic functional groups– the acidityconstant -- Section 3: Structural effects on acidity and basicity -- Section 4: Acid-base properties of phenols -- Section 5: Acid-base properties of nitrogen-containing functional groups -- Section 6: Carbon acids -- Section 7: Polyprotic acids -- Section 8: Effects of enzyme microenvironment on acidity and basicity -- Chapter 8: Nucleophilic substitution reactions -- Section 1: Two mechanistic models for nucleophilic substitution -- Section 2: Nucleophiles -- Section 3: Electrophiles -- Section 4: Leaving groups -- Section 5: SN1 reactions with allylic electrophiles -- Section 6: SN1 or SN2? Predicting the mechanism -- Section 7: Biological nucleophilic substitution reactions -- Section 8: Nucleophilic substitution in the lab0 aThe traditional approach to teaching Organic Chemistry, taken by most of the textbooks that are currently available, is to focus primarily on the reactions of laboratory synthesis, with much less discussion - in the central chapters, at least - of biological molecules and reactions. This is despite the fact that, in many classrooms, a majority of students are majoring in Biology or Health Sciences rather than in Chemistry, and are presumably taking the course in order to learn about the chemistry that takes place in living things.In an effort to address this disconnect, I have developed a textbook for a two-semester, sophomore-level course in Organic Chemistry in which biological chemistry takes center stage. For the most part, the text covers the core concepts of organic structure, structure determination, and reactivity in the standard order. What is different is the context: biological chemistry is fully integrated into the explanation of central principles, and as much as possible the in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems are taken from the biochemical literature. Many laboratory synthesis reactions are also covered, generally in parallel with their biochemical counterparts - but it is intentionally the biological chemistry that comes first.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/472zAccess online version06038nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002700148245007500175264004300250264006200293264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505360200529520127204131542004105403546001605444588004105460650002505501650002305526710003905549856007605588OTLid0000473MnU20260406020357.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aSoderberg, Timeauthor00aOrganic Chemistry with a Biological EmphasiscTim SoderbergnVolume II 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMorris, MinnesotabUniversity of Minnesota Morrisc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 9: Phosphate transfer reactions -- Section 1: Overview of phosphate groups -- Section 2: Phosphate transfer reactions - an overview -- Section 3: ATP, the principal phosphate group donor -- Section 4: Phosphorylation of alcohols -- Section 5: Phosphorylation of carboxylates -- Section 6: Hydrolysis of organic phosphates -- Section 7: Phosphate diesters in DNA and RNA -- Section 8: The organic chemistry of genetic engineering -- Chapter 10: Nucleophilic carbonyl addition reactions -- Section 1: Nucleophilic additions to aldehydes and ketones: an overview -- Section 2: Hemiacetals, hemiketals, and hydrates -- Section 3: Acetals and ketals -- Section 4: N-glycosidic bonds -- Section 5: Imines -- Section 5: A look ahead: addition of carbon and hydride nucleophiles to carbonyls -- Chapter 11: Nucleophilic acyl substitution reactions -- Section 1: Carboxylic acid derivatives -- Section 2: The nucleophilic acyl substitution mechanism -- Section 3: The relative reactivity of carboxylic acid derivatives -- Section 4: Acyl phosphates -- Section 5: Formation of thioesters, esters, and amides -- Section 6: Hydrolysis of thioesters, esters, and amides -- Section 7: Protein synthesis on the ribosome -- Section 8: Nucleophilic substitution at activated amides and carbamides -- Section 9: Nucleophilic acyl substitution reactions in the laboratory -- Section 10: A look ahead: acyl substitution reactions with a carbanion or hydride ion nucleophile -- Chapter 12: Reactions at the α-carbon, part I -- Section 1: Review of acidity at the α-carbon -- Section 2: Isomerization at the α-carbon -- Section 3: Aldol addition -- Section 4: α-carbon reactions in the synthesis lab - kinetic vs. thermodynamic alkylation products -- Interchapter: Predicting multistep pathways - the retrosynthesis approachChapter 13: Reactions at the α-carbon, part II -- Section 1: Decarboxylation -- Section 2: An overview of fatty acid metabolism -- Section 3: Claisen condensation -- Section 4: Conjugate addition and elimination -- Section 5: Carboxylation -- Chapter 14: Electrophilic reactions -- Section 1: Electrophilic addition to alkenes -- Section 2: Elimination by the E1 mechanism -- Section 3: Electrophilic isomerization -- Section 4: Electrophilic substitution -- Section 5: Carbocation rearrangements -- Chapter 15: Oxidation and reduction reactions -- Section 1: Oxidation and reduction of organic compounds - an overview -- Section 2: Oxidation and reduction in the context of metabolism -- Section 3: Hydrogenation of carbonyl and imine groups -- Section 4: Hydrogenation of alkenes and dehydrogenation of alkanes -- Section 5: Monitoring hydrogenation and dehydrogenation reactions by UV spectroscopy -- Section 6: Redox reactions of thiols and disulfides -- Section 7: Flavin-dependent monooxygenase reactions: hydroxylation, epoxidation, and theBaeyer-Villiger oxidation -- Section 8: Hydrogen peroxide is a harmful 'Reactive Oxygen Species' -- Chapter 16: Radical reactions -- Section 1: Overview of single-electron reactions and free radicals -- Section 2: Radical chain reactions -- Section 3: Useful polymers formed by radical chain reactions -- Section 4: Destruction of the ozone layer by a radical chain reaction -- Section 5: Oxidative damage to cells, vitamin C, and scurvy -- Section 6: Flavin as a one-electron carrier -- Chapter 17: The organic chemistry of vitamins -- Section 1: Pyridoxal phosphate (Vitamin B6) -- Section 2: Thiamine diphosphate (Vitamin B1) -- Section 3: Thiamine diphosphate, lipoamide and the pyruvate dehydrogenase reaction -- Section 4: Folate0 aThe traditional approach to teaching Organic Chemistry, taken by most of the textbooks that are currently available, is to focus primarily on the reactions of laboratory synthesis, with much less discussion - in the central chapters, at least - of biological molecules and reactions. This is despite the fact that, in many classrooms, a majority of students are majoring in Biology or Health Sciences rather than in Chemistry, and are presumably taking the course in order to learn about the chemistry that takes place in living things. In an effort to address this disconnect, I have developed a textbook for a two-semester, sophomore-level course in Organic Chemistry in which biological chemistry takes center stage. For the most part, the text covers the core concepts of organic structure, structure determination, and reactivity in the standard order. What is different is the context: biological chemistry is fully integrated into the explanation of central principles, and as much as possible the in-chapter and end-of-chapter problems are taken from the biochemical literature. Many laboratory synthesis reactions are also covered, generally in parallel with their biochemical counterparts - but it is intentionally the biological chemistry that comes first.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/473zAccess online version02496nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100002600159245006200185250001100247264004300258264005600301264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505037600534520087800910542001601788546001601804588004001820650002401860650002601884650002301910700002601933710003901959856007601998OTLid0000474MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aArnold, Glenneauthor00aIntermediate Financial AccountingcGlenn ArnoldnVolume 2  a2021-A 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2021. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a12 Current Liabilities -- 13 Long-Term Financial Liabilities -- 14 Complex Financial Instruments -- 15 Income Taxes -- 16 Pensions and Other Employment Benefits -- 17 Leases -- 18 Shareholders' Equity -- 19 Earnings per Share -- 20 Statement of Cash Flows -- 21 Changes and Errors -- 22 Putting It All Together: Disclosures and Analysis Overview -- Solutions To Exercises0 aThis new text by G. Arnold and S. Kyle, developed in collaboration by Athabasca University and Lyryx, is intended for the second of two in Intermediate Financial Accounting courses. It presumes that students have already completed the Introductory Financial Accounting, and the first Intermediate Financing Accounting course. The text reflects both current International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and ASPE. This text covers all topics essential to a second level Intermediate Accounting course: current, long-term and complex liabilities, income taxes, pensions, leases, shareholders' equity, earnings per share, statement of cash flows including the direct approach, effects of changes and errors, and disclosures and analysis. Topics that are covered in Advanced Financial Accounting courses, such as consolidations and foreign exchange, are not included here.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aKyle, Suzanneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/474zAccess online version03174nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153100002600161245003700187264004300224264007200267264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505053300516520142501049542001602474546001602490588004002506650002602546650002602572650002402598700002702622710003902649856007602688OTLid0000475MnU20260406020753.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783743902  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB72 4aBL11 aDimmock, Markeauthor00aEthics for A-LevelcMark Dimmock 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Part I Normative Ethics -- Chapter 1 Utilitarianism -- Chapter 2 Kantian ethics -- Chapter 3 Aristotelian virtue ethics -- Chapter 4 Aquinas's natural law theory -- Chapter 5 Fletcher's situation ethics -- Part II Metaethics -- Chapter 6 Metaethical theories -- Part III Applied Ethics -- Chapter 7 Euthanasia -- Chapter 8 Business ethics -- Chapter 9 Conscience -- Chapter 10 Sexual ethics -- Chapter 11 Stealing -- Chapter 12 Simulated killing -- Chapter 13 Telling lies -- Chapter 14 Eating animals0 aWhat does pleasure have to do with morality? What role, if any, should intuition have in the formation of moral theory? If something is ‘simulated', can it be immoral? This accessible and wide-ranging textbook explores these questions and many more. Key ideas in the fields of normative ethics, metaethics and applied ethics are explained rigorously and systematically, with a vivid writing style that enlivens the topics with energy and wit. Individual theories are discussed in detail in the first part of the book, before these positions are applied to a wide range of contemporary situations including business ethics, sexual ethics, and the acceptability of eating animals. A wealth of real-life examples, set out with depth and care, illuminate the complexities of different ethical approaches while conveying their modern-day relevance. This concise and highly engaging resource is tailored to the Ethics components of AQA Philosophy and OCR Religious Studies, with a clear and practical layout that includes end-of-chapter summaries, key terms, and common mistakes to avoid. It should also be of practical use for those teaching Philosophy as part of the International Baccalaureate. Ethics for A-Level is of particular value to students and teachers, but Fisher and Dimmock's precise and scholarly approach will appeal to anyone seeking a rigorous and lively introduction to the challenging subject of ethics.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks1 aFisher, Andreweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/475zAccess online version02197nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002800164245007900192264004300271264007200314264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002800508490002700536505005200563520099400615542001601609546001601625588004001641650002701681710003901708856007601747OTLid0000476MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783741441  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSiklos, Stepheneauthor00aAdvanced Problems in MathematicsbPreparing for UniversitycStephen Siklos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSTEP -- Worked Problems -- Problems -- Syllabus0 aThis new and expanded edition is intended to help candidates prepare for entrance examinations in mathematics and scientific subjects, including STEP (Sixth Term Examination Paper). STEP is an examination used by Cambridge Colleges for conditional offers in mathematics. They are also used by some other UK universities and many mathematics departments recommend that their applicants practice on the past papers even if they do not take the examination. Advanced Problems in Mathematics bridges the gap between school and university mathematics, and prepares students for an undergraduate mathematics course. The questions analysed in this book are all based on past STEP questions and each question is followed by a comment and a full solution. The comments direct the reader’s attention to key points and put the question in its true mathematical context. The solutions point students to the methodology required to address advanced mathematical problems critically and independently.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/476zAccess online version03650nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002900156245008000185264004300265264007200308264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505079700557520164501354542001602999546001603015588004103031650002603072650002403098700002703122710003903149856007603188OTLid0000477MnU20251208020343.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783740840  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aGildenhard, Ingoeauthor00aOvid, Metamorphoses, 3.511-733. Latin Text with CommentarycIngo Gildenhard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. Ovid and His Times -- 2. Ovid's Literary Progression: Elegy to Epic -- 3. The Metamorphoses: A Literary Monstrum -- 3a. Genre Matters -- 3b. A Collection of Metamorphic Tales -- 3c. A Universal History -- 3d. Anthropological Epic -- 3e. A Reader's Digest of Greek and Latin Literature -- 4. Ovid's Theban Narrative -- 5. The Set Text: Pentheus and Bacchus -- 5a. Sources and Intertexts -- 5b. The Personnel of the Set Text -- 6. The Bacchanalia and Roman Culture -- Text -- Commentary -- 511–26: Tiresias' Warning to Pentheus -- 527–71: Pentheus' Rejection of Bacchus -- 531–63: Pentheus' Speech -- 572–691: The Captive Acoetes and his Tale -- 692–733: Pentheus' Gruesome Demise -- Appendices -- 1. Versification -- 2. Glossary of Rhetorical and Syntactic Figures0 aThis extract from Ovid's 'Theban History' recounts the confrontation of Pentheus, king of Thebes, with his divine cousin, Bacchus, the god of wine. Notwithstanding the warnings of the seer Tiresias and the cautionary tale of a character Acoetes (perhaps Bacchus in disguise), who tells of how the god once transformed a group of blasphemous sailors into dolphins, Pentheus refuses to acknowledge the divinity of Bacchus or allow his worship at Thebes. Enraged, yet curious to witness the orgiastic rites of the nascent cult, Pentheus conceals himself in a grove on Mt. Cithaeron near the locus of the ceremonies. But in the course of the rites he is spotted by the female participants who rush upon him in a delusional frenzy, his mother and sisters in the vanguard, and tear him limb from limb. The episode abounds in themes of abiding interest, not least the clash between the authoritarian personality of Pentheus, who embodies 'law and order', masculine prowess, and the martial ethos of his city, and Bacchus, a somewhat effeminate god of orgiastic excess, who revels in the delusional and the deceptive, the transgression of boundaries, and the blurring of gender distinctions. This course book offers a wide-ranging introduction, the original Latin text, study aids with vocabulary, and an extensive commentary. Designed to stretch and stimulate readers, Gildenhard and Zissos's incisive commentary will be of particular interest to students of Latin at AS and undergraduate level. It extends beyond detailed linguistic analysis to encourage critical engagement with Ovid's poetry and discussion of the most recent scholarly thought.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aZissos, Andreweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/477zAccess online version03966nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002800156245004200184264004300226264007200269264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505099500515520184501510542001603355546001603371588004003387650002603427650002403453710003903477856007603516OTLid0000478MnU20260406020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783741649  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aTurpin, Williameauthor00aOvid, Amores (Book 1)cWilliam Turpin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Life of Ovid -- Chapter 2: The Amores -- Chapter 3: The Manuscript Tradition of Ovid's Amores by Bart Huelsenbeck, with the assistance of Dan Plekhov -- Chapter 4: Select Bibliography -- Chapter 5: Scansion -- Chapter 6: Epigram: preface from the author -- Chapter 7: Amores 1.1: Ovid finds his muse -- Chapter 8: Amores 1.2: Conquered by Cupid -- Chapter 9: Amores 1.3: Just give me a chance -- Chapter 10: Amores 1.4: Secret signs -- Chapter 11: Amores 1.5: The siesta -- Chapter 12: Amores 1.6: On the doorstep -- Chapter 13: Amores 1.7: Violence and love -- Chapter 14: Amores 1.8: The bad influence -- Chapter 15: Amores 1.9: Love and war -- Chapter 16: Amores 1.10: Love for sale -- Chapter 17: Amores 1.11: Sending a message -- Chapter 18: Amores 1.12: Shooting messengers -- Chapter 19: Amores 1.13: Oh how I hate to get up in the morning -- Chapter 20: Amores 1.14: Bad hair -- Chapter 21: Amores 1.15: Poetic immortality -- Full vocabulary for Ovid's Amores, Book 10 aFrom Catullus to Horace, the tradition of Latin erotic poetry produced works of literature which are still read throughout the world. Ovid's Amores, written in the first century BC, is arguably the best-known and most popular collection in this tradition. Born in 43 BC, Ovid was educated in Rome in preparation for a career in public services before finding his calling as a poet. He may have begun writing his Amores as early as 25 BC. Although influenced by poets such as Catullus, Ovid demonstrates a much greater awareness of the funny side of love than any of his predecessors. The Amores is a collection of romantic poems centered on the poet's own complicated love life: he is involved with a woman, Corinna, who is sometimes unobtainable, sometimes compliant, and often difficult and domineering. Whether as a literary trope, or perhaps merely as a human response to the problems of love in the real world, the principal focus of these poems is the poet himself, and his failures, foolishness, and delusions. By the time he was in his forties, Ovid was Rome's most important living poet; his Metamorphoses, a kaleidoscopic epic poem about love and hatred among the gods and mortals, is one of the most admired and influential books of all time. In AD 8, Ovid was exiled by Augustus to Romania, for reasons that remain obscure. He died there in AD 17. The Amores were originally published in five books, but reissued around 1 AD in their current three-book form. This edition of the first book of the collection contains the complete Latin text of Book 1, along with commentary, notes and full vocabulary. Both entertaining and thought-provoking, this book will provide an invaluable aid to students of Latin and general readers alike. This book contains embedded audio files of the original text read aloud by Aleksandra Szypowska.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/478zAccess online version03273nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002700156245011000183264004300293264007200336264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505029500585520178200880542001602662546001602678588004002694650002602734650002402760710003902784856007602823OTLid0000479MnU20260406020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783741342  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aMulligan, Breteauthor00aCornelius Nepos, 'Life of Hannibal'bLatin Text, Notes, Maps, Illustrations and VocabularycBret Mulligan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Life of Nepos -- Chapter 2: Reading Nepos -- Chapter 3: Historical Context and Hannibal -- Bibliography -- Chronology of Hannibal's Life -- Text of Nepos' Life of Hannibal -- Notes -- Full Vocabulary for Nepos' Life of Hannibal and Prologus to the Lives of Outstanding Commanders0 aTrebia. Trasimene. Cannae. With three stunning victories, Hannibal humbled Rome and nearly shattered its empire. Even today Hannibal's brilliant, if ultimately unsuccessful, campaign against Rome during the Second Punic War (218-202 BC) make him one of history's most celebrated military leaders. This biography by Cornelius Nepos (c. 100-27 BC) sketches Hannibal's life from the time he began traveling with his father's army as a young boy, through his sixteen-year invasion of Italy and his tumultuous political career in Carthage, to his perilous exile and eventual suicide in the East.As Rome completed its bloody transition from dysfunctional republic to stable monarchy, Nepos labored to complete an innovative and influential collection of concise biographies. Putting aside the detailed, chronological accounts of military campaigns and political machinations that characterized most writing about history, Nepos surveyed Roman and Greek history for distinguished men who excelled in a range of prestigious occupations. In the exploits and achievements of these illustrious men, Nepos hoped that his readers would find models for the honorable conduct of their own lives. Although most of Nepos' works have been lost, we are fortunate to have his biography of Hannibal. Nepos offers a surprisingly balanced portrayal of a man that most Roman authors vilified as the most monstrous foe that Rome had ever faced.Nepos' straightforward style and his preference for common vocabulary make Life of Hannibal accessible for those who are just beginning to read continuous Latin prose, while the historical interest of the subject make it compelling for readers of every ability. This book contains embedded audio files of the original text read aloud by Christopher Francese.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/479zAccess online version04405nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002900156245014000185264004300325264007200368264001200440300002200452336002600474337002600500338003600526341002800562490002700590505167800617520145902295542001603754546001603770588004003786650002603826650002403852700002803876710003903904856007603943OTLid0000480MnU20260406020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783740796  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aGildenhard, Ingoeauthor00aCicero, On Pompey’s Command (De Imperio), 27-49. Latin Text, Study Aids with Vocabulary, Commentary, and TranslationcIngo Gildenhard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Preface and acknowledgements -- 2. Introduction: why does the set text matter? -- 3. Latin text with study questions and vocabulary aid -- The Only Way is Pompey (§27) -- The Perfect General, Pompey the Kid, and Mr. Experience (§28) -- His Excellence (and Excellences) (§29) -- Witnesses to the Truth! (§30) -- Pacifying the Pond, or: Pompey and the Pirates (§31) -- The Pirates of the Mediterranean (§32) -- Pirates ante portas! (§33) -- Pompey's Cruise Control (I): ‘I Have a Fleet – and Need for Speed' (§34) -- Pompey's Cruise Control (II): ‘I Have a Fleet – and Need for Speed' (§35) -- ‘Thou Art More Lovely and More Temperate': Pompey's Soft Sides (§36) -- SPQR Confidential (§37) -- Of Locusts and Leeches (§38) -- Pompey the Peaceful, or: Imperialism with Gloves (§39) -- No Sight-Seeing or Souvenirs for the Perfect General (§40) -- Saint Pompey (§41) -- Peace for our Time (§42) -- Rumour and Renown: Pompey's auctoritas (§43) -- Case Study I: The Socio-Economics of Pompey's auctoritas (§44) -- Case Study II: Pompey's auctoritas and psychological warfare (§45) -- Auctoritas Supreme (§46) -- Felicitas, or how not to ‘Sull(a)y' Pompey (§47) -- The Darling of the Gods (§48) -- Summing Up (§49) -- 4. Com mentary -- 5. Further resources -- Chronological table: the parallel lives of Pompey and Cicero -- The speech in summary, or: what a Roman citizen may have heard in the forum -- Translation of §§ 27-49 -- The protagonists: Cicero – Pompey – Manilius -- The historical context (the contio, imperial expansion, civil wars, the shadow of Sulla, extraordinary commands) -- List of rhetorical terms -- 6. Bibliography0 aIn republican times, one of Rome's deadliest enemies was King Mithridates of Pontus. In 66 BCE, after decades of inconclusive struggle, the tribune Manilius proposed a bill that would give supreme command in the war against Mithridates to Pompey the Great, who had just swept the Mediterranean clean of another menace: the pirates. While powerful aristocrats objected to the proposal, which would endow Pompey with unprecedented powers, the bill proved hugely popular among the people, and one of the praetors, Marcus Tullius Cicero, also hastened to lend it his support. In his first ever political speech, variously entitled pro lege Manilia or de imperio Gnaei Pompei, Cicero argues that the war against Mithridates requires the appointment of a perfect general and that the only man to live up to such lofty standards is Pompey. In the section under consideration here, Cicero defines the most important hallmarks of the ideal military commander and tries to demonstrate that Pompey is his living embodiment. This course book offers a portion of the original Latin text, study aids with vocabulary, and a commentary. Designed to stretch and stimulate readers, the incisive commentary will be of particular interest to students of Latin at both AS and undergraduate level. It extends beyond detailed linguistic analysis and historical background to encourage critical engagement with Cicero's prose and discussion of the most recent scholarly thought.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aHodgson, Louiseeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/480zAccess online version04580nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002500156245011000181264004300291264007200334264001200406300002200418336002600440337002600466338003600492341002800528490002700556505152800583520181702111542001603928546001603944588004003960650002604000650002404026700002904050710003904079856007604118OTLid0000481MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783740024  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aOwen, Matheweauthor00aTacitus, Annals, 15.20­-23, 33­-45. Latin Text, Study Aids with Vocabulary, and CommentarycMathew Owen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Preface and acknowledgements -- 2. Introduction -- 2.1 Tacitus: life and career -- 2.2 Tacitus' times: the political system of the principate -- 2.3 Tacitus' oeuvre: opera minora and maiora -- 2.4 Tacitus' style (as an instrument of thought) -- 2.5 Tacitus' Nero-narrative: Rocky-Horror-Picture Show and Broadway on the Tiber -- 2.6 Thrasea Paetus and the so-called ‘Stoic opposition' -- 3. Latin text with study questions and vocabulary aid -- 4. Commentary -- Section 1: Annals 15.20–23 -- (i) 20.1–22.1: The Meeting of the Senate -- (ii) 22.2: Review of striking prodigies that occurred in AD 62 -- (iii) 23.1–4: Start of Tacitus' account of AD 63: the birth and death of Nero's daughter by Sabina Poppaea, Claudia Augusta -- Section 2: Annals 15.33–45 (AD 64) -- (i) 33.1–34.1: Nero's coming-out party as stage performer -- (ii) 34.2–35.3: A look at the kind of creatures that populate Nero's court – and the killing of an alleged rival -- (iii) 36: Nero considers, but then reconsiders, going on tour to Egypt -- (iv) 37: To show his love for Rome, Nero celebrates a huge public orgy that segues into a mock-wedding with his freedman Pythagoras -- (v) 38–41: The fire of Rome -- (vi) 42–43: Reconstructing the Capital: Nero's New Palace -- (vii) 44: Appeasing the Gods, and Christians as Scapegoats -- (viii) 45: Raising of Funds for Buildings -- 5. Bibliography -- 6. Visual aids -- 6.1 Map of Italy -- 6.2 Map of Rome -- 6.3 Family Tree of Nero and Junius Silanus -- 6.4 Inside the Domus Aurea0 aThe emperor Nero is etched into the Western imagination as one of ancient Rome's most infamous villains, and Tacitus' Annals have played a central role in shaping the mainstream historiographical understanding of this flamboyant autocrat. This section of the text plunges us straight into the moral cesspool that Rome had apparently become in the later years of Nero's reign, chronicling the emperor's fledgling stage career including his plans for a grand tour of Greece; his participation in a city-wide orgy climaxing in his publicly consummated ‘marriage' to his toy boy Pythagoras; the great fire of AD 64, during which large parts of central Rome went up in flames; and the rising of Nero's ‘grotesque' new palace, the so-called ‘Golden House', from the ashes of the city. This building project stoked the rumours that the emperor himself was behind the conflagration, and Tacitus goes on to present us with Nero's gruesome efforts to quell these mutterings by scapegoating and executing members of an unpopular new cult then starting to spread through the Roman empire: Christianity. All this contrasts starkly with four chapters focusing on one of Nero's most principled opponents, the Stoic senator Thrasea Paetus, an audacious figure of moral fibre, who courageously refuses to bend to the forces of imperial corruption and hypocrisy. This course book offers a portion of the original Latin text, study aids with vocabulary, and a commentary. Designed to stretch and stimulate readers, Owen's and Gildenhard's incisive commentary will be of particular interest to students of Latin at both A2 and undergraduate level. It extends beyond detailed linguistic analysis and historical background to encourage critical engagement with Tacitus' prose and discussion of the most recent scholarly thought.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aGildenhard, Ingoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/481zAccess online version02672nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002900156245011200185264004300297264007200340264001200412300002200424336002600446337002600472338003600498341002800534490002700562505022800589520124400817542001602061546001602077588004002093650002602133650002402159710003902183856007602222OTLid0000482MnU20260406020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781909254176  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aGildenhard, Ingoeauthor00aVirgil, Aeneid, 4.1-299. Latin Text, Study Questions, Commentary and Interpretative EssayscIngo Gildenhard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- 1. Preface -- 2. Latin Text -- 3. Study Questions -- 4. Commentary -- 5. Interpretative Essays -- 5.1. Content and Form -- 5.2. Historiographical Dido -- 5.3. Allusion -- 5.4. Religion -- 6. Bibliography0 aLove and tragedy dominate book four of Virgil's most powerful work, building on the violent emotions invoked by the storms, battles, warring gods, and monster-plagued wanderings of the epic's opening. Destined to be the founder of Roman culture, Aeneas, nudged by the gods, decides to leave his beloved Dido, causing her suicide in pursuit of his historical destiny. A dark plot, in which erotic passion culminates in sex, and sex leads to tragedy and death in the human realm, unfolds within the larger horizon of a supernatural sphere, dominated by power-conscious divinities. Dido is Aeneas' most significant other, and in their encounter Virgil explores timeless themes of love and loyalty, fate and fortune, the justice of the gods, imperial ambition and its victims, and ethnic differences. This course book offers a portion of the original Latin text, study questions, a commentary, and interpretative essays. Designed to stretch and stimulate readers, Ingo Gildenhard's incisive commentary will be of particular interest to students of Latin at both A2 and undergraduate level. It extends beyond detailed linguistic analysis to encourage critical engagement with Virgil's poetry and discussion of the most recent scholarly thought.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/482zAccess online version02605nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002900156245013800185264004300323264007200366264001200438300002200450336002600472337002600498338003600524341002800560490002700588505021400615520116500829542001601994546001602010588004002026650002602066650002402092710003902116856007602155OTLid0000483MnU20260406020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781906924553  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aGildenhard, Ingoeauthor00aCicero, Against Verres, 2.1.53-86. Latin Text with Introduction, Study Questions, Commentary and English TranslationcIngo Gildenhard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Preface -- Introduction -- Latin text and study questions -- Commentary -- List of abbreviations -- List of rhetorical terms -- Translation -- Appendix: issues for further discussion -- Map0 aLooting, despoiling temples, attempted rape and judicial murder: these are just some of the themes of this classic piece of writing by one of the world's greatest orators. This particular passage is from the second book of Cicero's Speeches against Verres, who was a former Roman magistrate on trial for serious misconduct. Cicero presents the lurid details of Verres' alleged crimes in exquisite and sophisticated prose. This volume provides a portion of the original text of Cicero's speech in Latin, a detailed commentary, study aids, and a translation. As a literary artefact, the speech gives us insight into how the supreme master of Latin eloquence developed what we would now call rhetorical "spin". As an historical document, it provides a window into the dark underbelly of Rome's imperial expansion and exploitation of the Near East. Ingo Gildenhard's illuminating commentary on this A-Level set text will be of particular interest to students of Latin at both high school and undergraduate level. It will also be a valuable resource to Latin teachers and to anyone interested in Cicero, language and rhetoric, and the legal culture of Ancient Rome.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/483zAccess online version03370nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002800156245006800184250002100252264004300273264008500316264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505069500578520143701273542004102710546002702751588004102778650002602819650002402845710003902869856007602908OTLid0000484MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9781365628658  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aSanders, Roberteauthor00aLeyendas y arquetipos del Romanticismo españolcRobert Sanders  aSegunda edición 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefacePrólogoJosé Cadalso -- Noches lúgubres (1789-90) -- Ángel de Saavedra -- Una antigualla de Sevilla (1841) -- Fernán Caballero -- La Hija del Sol (1849) -- José de Espronceda -- El verdugo (1835) -- La canción del pirata (1835) -- El reo de muerte (1837) -- Libertad. Igualdad. Fraternidad. (1836) -- El estudiante de Salamanca (1837-1840) -- José Zorrilla -- Don Juan Tenorio (1844) -- Gustavo Adolfo Bécquer -- La Cruz del Diablo (1860) -- El Monte de las ánimas (1861) -- Los ojos verdes (1861) -- El miserere (1862) -- Josefa Ugarte Barrientos -- El sacristán de Albaicín (1874) -- Julia de Asensi -- El Encubierto (1883) -- Ramón del Valle-Inclán -- Rosarito (1894)0 aLeyendas y arquetipos del Romanticismo español is an introduction to nineteenth-century Spanish literature with a thematic focus on legends and archetypes. It presents Romanticism in the context of nineteenth-century literary and social movements. It is designed as a first anthology for intermediate Spanish students at American universities. Although brief, it includes poetry, drama in verse and short story. The works have been selected for their literary interest and the social importance of their themes. They are all by canonical authors. New for the Second Edition: over 4000 vocabulary, historical and cultural annotations to facilitate reading and comprehension. The Prologue and chapter introductions use circumlocution to facilitate comprehension, and include concrete examples of the concepts presented. The author biographies are brief and should not be used as study materials, but rather as starting points for students' own exploration. Many students prefer following their own interests when researching author biographies, and the internet makes accessible a plethora of bibliographic resources, such as the Biblioteca Virtual Miguel de Cervantes, the Centro Virtual Cervantes of the Cervantes Institute, or the Biblioteca Digital Hispánica of the Spanish National Library. Student participation in the selection of topics and sources emphasizes the investigative process and leads to richer class discussions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/484zAccess online version04423nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100004200148245005500190264004300245264005900288264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505250700524520075703031542004103788546001603829588004103845650002503886650002303911710003903934856007603973OTLid0000485MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aRodriguez-Velazquez, Sorangeleauthor00aChemistry of CookingcSorangel Rodriguez-Velazquez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWashington, D.C.bSorangel Rodriguez-Velazquezc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroductionEssential Ideas -- Essential Ideas Introduction -- Phases and Classification of Matter -- Physical and Chemical Properties -- Measurements -- Measurement Uncertainty, Accuracy, and Precision -- Mathematical Treatment of Measurement Results -- Energy Basics -- Calorimetry -- Atoms, Molecules, and Ions -- The Periodic Table -- Atoms, Molecules, and Ions -- Atomic Structure and Symbolism -- Chemical Formulas -- Molecular and Ionic Compounds -- Cooking Techniques: Thickening and Concentrating Flavors -- Viscosity -- Thickening Agents -- Types of Thickening Agents -- Coagulation -- Gelatinization -- Crystallization -- Non-traditional thickeners -- Sauces -- Low-temperature and sous-vide -- Understanding Ingredients: Flour -- Introduction -- Understanding Ingredients -- The History of Wheat Flour -- Milling of Wheat -- Flour Streams and Types of Wheat Flour -- Flour Terms and Treatments -- Flour Additives -- Whole Grain and Artisan Milling -- Flour in Baking -- Rye Flour -- Other Grains and Flours -- Understanding Ingredients: Fat -- Understanding Fats and Oils -- Sources of Bakery Fats and Oils -- Major Fats and Oils Used in Bakeries -- Functions of Fat in Baking -- Understanding Ingredients: Sugar -- Sugar Chemistry (ADD US) -- Sugar Refining -- The Application of Sugar -- Agave -- Glucose/Dextrose -- Honey -- Malt -- Maple Syrup (ADD US) -- Sugar Substitutes (ADD US) -- Understanding Ingredients: Leavening Agents -- Catalysis -- Introduction to Leavening Agents -- Yeast -- The Functions of Yeast -- Using Yeast in Baking -- Introduction to Acid- bases -- Brønsted-Lowry Acids and Bases -- pH and pOH -- Baking Powder -- Sodium Bicarbonate -- Ammonium Bicarbonate -- Water Hardness and pH -- Understanding Ingredients: Dairy Products -- Introduction to Dairy Products -- Milk -- Milk Products ADD US -- Milk in bread baking -- Yogurt -- Lactose -- Cheese -- Understanding Ingredients: Eggs -- Eggs Grade (ADD US) -- Composition and Nutrition -- Egg Products -- The Function of Eggs -- Storing Eggs -- Chocolate -- From the Cocoa Bean to the Finished Chocolate -- Chocolate Produced for the Baking Industry -- Couverture -- Definitions and Regulations (ADD US) -- Understanding Ingredients: Spices -- Elements of Taste -- Introduction to Salt -- Types of Salt -- Functions of Salt in Baking -- Using Salt in Fermented Doughs -- Storing Salt -- Introduction to Spices and Other Flavorings -- Seasoning and Flavoring -- Herbs -- Spices -- Flavorings in Baking -- Appendix0 aPeople around the world are fascinated about the preparation of food for eating. There are countless cooking books, TV shows, celebrity chefs and kitchen gadgets that make cooking an enjoyable activity for everyone. The chemistry of cooking course seeks to understand the science behind our most popular meals by studying the behavior of atoms and molecules present in food. This book is intended to give students a basic understanding of the chemistry involved in cooking such as caramelization, Maillard reaction, acid-base reactions, catalysis, and fermentation. Students will be able to use chemistry language to describe the process of cooking, apply chemistry knowledge to solve questions related to food, and ultimately create their own recipes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/485zAccess online version03387nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002600148245004300174264004300217264005000260264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002500432490002700457505068500484520158301169542004102752546001602793588004102809650002502850650002302875710003902898856007602937OTLid0000486MnU20251124020356.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aHarvey, Davideauthor00aAnalytical Chemistry 2.1cDavid Harvey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGreencastle, IndianabDavid T. Harveyc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Analytical Chemistry -- Chapter 2: Basic Tools of Analytical Chemistry -- Chapter 3: The Vocabulary of Analytical Chemistry -- Chapter 4: Evaluating Analytical Data -- Chapter 5: Standardizing Analytical Methods -- Chapter 6: Equilibrium Chemistry -- Chapter 7: Obtaining and Preparing Samples for Analysis -- Chapter 8: Gravimetric Methods -- Chapter 9: Titrimetric Methods -- Chapter 10: Spectroscopic Methods -- Chapter 11: Electrochemical Methods -- Chapter 12: Chromatographic & Electrophoretic Methods -- Chapter 13: Kinetic Methods -- Chapter 14: Developing a Standard Method -- Chapter 15: Quality Assurance -- Additional Resources -- Appendices0 aAs currently taught in the United States, introductory courses in analytical chemistry emphasize quantitative (and sometimes qualitative) methods of analysis along with a heavy dose of equilibrium chemistry. Analytical chemistry, however, is much more than a collection of analytical methods and an understanding of equilibrium chemistry; it is an approach to solving chemical problems. Although equilibrium chemistry and analytical methods are important, their coverage should not come at the expense of other equally important topics. The introductory course in analytical chemistry is the ideal place in the undergraduate chemistry curriculum for exploring topics such as experimental design, sampling, calibration strategies, standardization, optimization, statistics, and the validation of experimental results. Analytical methods come and go, but best practices for designing and validating analytical methods are universal. Because chemistry is an experimental science it is essential that all chemistry students understand the importance of making good measurements. My goal in preparing this textbook is to find a more appropriate balance between theory and practice, between “classical” and “modern” analytical methods, between analyzing samples and collecting samples and preparing them for analysis, and between analytical methods and data analysis. There is more material here than anyone can cover in one semester; it is my hope that the diversity of topics will meet the needs of different instructors, while, perhaps, suggesting some new topics to cover.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/486zAccess online version03398nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161050000800172100002900180245005100209264004300260264008000303264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002800505490002700533505109900560520099801659542004102657546001602698588004002714650002402754650002702778700002602805700003002831710003902861856007602900OTLid0000487MnU20260406140550.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781548655525  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSchlicker, Steveeauthor00aActive Calculus MultivariablecSteve Schlicker 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc2018. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface9 Multivariable and Vector Functions -- 9.1 Functions of Several Variables and Three Dimensional Space -- 9.2 Vectors -- 9.3 The Dot Product -- 9.4 The Cross Product -- 9.5 Lines and Planes in Space -- 9.6 Vector-Valued Functions -- 9.7 Derivatives and Integrals of Vector-Valued Functions9.8 Arc Length and Curvature -- 10 Derivatives of Multivariable Functions -- 10.1 Limits -- 10.2 First-Order Partial Derivatives -- 10.3 Second-Order Partial Derivatives -- 10.4 Linearization: Tangent Planes and Differentials -- 10.5 The Chain Rule -- 10.6 Directional Derivatives and the Gradient -- 10.7 Optimization -- 10.8 Constrained Optimization:Lagrange Multipliers -- 11 Multiple Integrals -- 11.1 Double Riemann Sums and Double Integrals over Rectangles -- 11.2 Iterated Integrals -- 11.3 Double Integrals over General Regions -- 11.4 Applications of Double Integrals -- 11.5 Double Integrals in Polar Coordinates -- 11.6 Surfaces Defined Parametrically and Surface Area -- 11.7 Triple Integrals -- 11.8 Triple Integrals in Cylindrical and Spherical Coordinates -- 11.9 Change of Variables0 aActive Calculus Multivariable is the continuation of Active Calculus to multivariable functions. The Active Calculus texts are different from most existing calculus texts in at least the following ways: the texts are free for download by students and instructors in .pdf format; in the electronic format, graphics are in full color and there are live html links to java applets; the texts are open source, and interested instructors can gain access to the original source files upon request; the style of the texts requires students to be active learners — there are very few worked examples in the texts, with there instead being 3-4 activities per section that engage students in connecting ideas, solving problems, and developing understanding of key calculus concepts; each section begins with motivating questions, a brief introduction, and a preview activity, all of which are designed to be read and completed prior to class; the exercises are few in number and challenging in nature.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAustin, Davideauthor1 aBoelkins, Mattheweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/487zAccess online version02837nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001100141050000800152100002700160245003200187264004300219264008100262264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505039500520520121300915542004102128546001602169588004102185650004102226650002702267700003002294710003902324856007602363OTLid0000488MnU20260406020401.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSundstrom, Tedeauthor00aTrigonometrycTed Sundstrom 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrand Valley State Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNote to Students -- Preface -- The Trigonometric Functions -- Graphs of the Trigonometric Functions -- Triangles and Vectors -- Trigonometric Identities and Equations -- Complex Numbers and Polar Coordinates -- Appendix A: Answers for the Progress Checks -- Appendix B: Answers and Hints for Selected Exercises -- Appendix C: Some Geometric Facts about Triangles and Parallelograms -- Index0 aThis trigonometry textbook is different than other trigonometry books in that it is free to download, and the reader is expected to do more than read the book and is expected to study the material in the book by working out examples rather than just reading about them. So this book is not just about mathematical content but is also about the process of learning and doing mathematics. That is, this book is designed not to be just casually read but rather to be engaged. Since this can be a difficult task, there are several features of the book designed to assist students in this endeavor. In particular, most sections of the book start with a beginning activity that review prior mathematical work that is necessary for the new section or introduce new concepts and definitions that will be used later in that section. Each section also contains several progress checks that are short exercises or activities designed to help readers determine if they are understanding the material. In addition, the text contains links to several interactive Geogebra applets or worksheets. These applets are usually part of a beginning activity or a progress check and are intended to be used as part of the textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aSchlicker, Steveneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/488zAccess online version07256nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100003000145245010600175264004300281264007300324264001200397300002200409336002600431337002600457338003600483341002800519490002700547505177500574520425102349542003006600546001606630588004106646650003806687650004206725710003906767856007606806OTLid0000489MnU20260406020402.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aHallauer, Williameauthor00aIntroduction to Linear, Time-Invariant, Dynamic Systems for Students of EngineeringcWilliam Hallauer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Introduction; examples of 1st and 2nd order systems; example analysis and MATLAB graphing -- Chapter 2 Complex numbers and arithmetic; Laplace transforms; partial-fraction expansion -- Chapter 3 Mechanical units; low-order mechanical systems; simple transient responses of 1st order systems -- Chapter 4 Frequency response of 1st order systems; transfer function; general method for derivation of frequency response -- Chapter 5 Basic electrical components and circuits -- Chapter 6 General time response of 1st order systems by application of the convolution integral -- Chapter 7 Undamped 2nd order systems: general time response; undamped vibration -- Chapter 8 Pulse inputs; Dirac delta function; impulse response; initialvalue theorem; convolution sum -- Chapter 9 Damped 2nd order systems: general time response -- Chapter 10 2nd order systems: frequency response; beating response to suddenly applied sinusoidal (SAS) excitation -- Chapter 11 Mechanical systems with rigid-body plane translation and rotation -- Chapter 12 Vibration modes of undamped mechanical systems with two degrees of freedom -- Chapter 13 Laplace block diagrams, and additional background material for the study of feedback-control systems -- Chapter 14 Introduction to feedback control: output operations for control of rotational position -- Chapter 15 Input-error operations: proportional, integral, and derivative types of control -- Chapter 16 Introduction to system stability: time-response criteria -- Chapter 17 Introduction to system stability: frequency-response criteria -- Appendix A: Table and derivations of Laplace transform pairs -- Appendix B: Notes on work, energy, and power in mechanical systems and electrical circuits -- Index for all Chapters and Appendices0 aThis is a complete college textbook, including a detailed Table of Contents, seventeen Chapters (each with a set of relevant homework problems), a list of References, two Appendices, and a detailed Index. The book is intended to enable students to: Solve first-, second-, and higher-order, linear, time-invariant (LTI) or­dinary differential equations (ODEs) with initial conditions and excitation, using both time-domain and Laplace-transform methods; Solve for the frequency response of an LTI system to periodic sinusoi­dal excitation and plot this response in standard form; Explain the role of the time constant in the response of a first-order LTI system, and the roles of natural frequency, damping ratio, and resonance in the response of a second-order LTI system; Derive and analyze mathematical models (ODEs) of low-order me­chanical systems, both translational and rotational, that are com­posed of inertial elements, spring elements, and damping devices; Derive and analyze mathematical models (ODEs) of low-order electri­cal circuits composed of resistors, capacitors, inductors, and op­erational amplifiers; Derive (from ODEs) and manipulate Laplace transfer functions and block diagrams representing output-to-input relationships of discrete ele­ments and of systems; Define and evaluate stability for an LTI system; Explain proportional, integral, and derivative types of feedback control for single-input, single-output (SISO), LTI systems; Sketch the locus of characteristic values, as a control parameter varies, for a feedback-controlled SISO, LTI system; Use MATLAB as a tool to study the time and frequency responses of LTI systems. The book's gen­eral organization is: Chapters 1-10 deal primarily with the ODEs and behaviors of first-order and second-order dynamic systems; Chapters 11 and 12 discuss the ODEs and behaviors of mechanical systems having two degrees of freedom, i.e., fourth-order systems; Chapters 13 and 14 introduce classical feedback control; Chapter 15 presents the basic features of proportional, in­tegral, and derivative types of classical control; Chapters 16 and 17 discuss methods for analyzing the stability of classical control systems. The general minimum prerequisite for understanding this book is the intellectual matur­ity of a junior-level (third-year) college student in an accredited four-year engineering curriculum. A mathematical second-order system is represented in this book primarily by a single second-order ODE, not in the state-space form by a pair of coupled first-order ODEs. Similarly, a two-degrees-of-freedom (fourth-order) system is represented by two coupled second-order ODEs, not in the state-space form by four coupled first-order ODEs. The book does not use bond graph modeling, the general and powerful, but complicated, modern tool for analysis of complex, multidisciplinary dynamic systems. The homework problems at the ends of chapters are very important to the learning objectives, so the author attempted to compose problems of practical interest and to make the problem statements as clear, correct, and unambiguous as possible. A major focus of the book is computer calculation of system characteristics and responses and graphical display of results, with use of basic (not advanced) MATLAB commands and programs. The book includes many examples and homework problems relevant to aerospace engineering, among which are rolling dynamics of flight vehicles, spacecraft actuators, aerospace motion sensors, and aeroelasticity. There are also several examples and homework problems illustrating and validating theory by using measured data to identify first- and second-order system dynamic characteristics based on mathematical models (e.g., time constants and natural frequencies), and system basic properties (e.g., mass, stiffness, and damping). Applications of real and simulated experimental data appear in many homework problems. The book contains somewhat more material than can be covered during a single standard college semester, so an instructor who wishes to use this as a one-semester course textbook should not attempt to cover the entire book, but instead should cover only those parts that are most relevant to the course objectives.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/489zAccess online version03279nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002700166245006500193250002700258264004300285264008300328264001200411300002200423336002600445337002600471338003600497341002800533490002700561505064200588520139301230542004102623546001602664588004002680650002302720650002302743710003902766856007602805OTLid0000490MnU20260406020401.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780998837260  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aCline, Douglaseauthor00aVariational Principles in Classical MechanicscDouglas Cline  aRevised Second Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMonroe County, New YorkbUniversity of Rochester River Campus Librariesc2019. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 A brief history of classical mechanics -- 2 Review of Newtonian mechanics -- 3 Linear oscillators -- 4 Nonlinear systems and chaos -- 5 Calculus of variations -- 6 Lagrangian dynamics -- 7 Symmetries, Invariance and the Hamiltonian -- 8 Hamiltonian mechanics -- 9 Hamilton’s Action Principle -- 10 Nonconservative systems -- 11 Conservative two-body central forces -- 12 Non-inertial reference frames -- 13 Rigid-body rotation -- 14 Coupled linear oscillators -- 15 Advanced Hamiltonian mechanics -- 16 Analytical formulations for continuous systems -- 17 Relativistic mechanics -- 18 The transition to quantum physics -- 19 Epilogue0 aTwo dramatically different philosophical approaches to classical mechanics were proposed during the 17th – 18th centuries. Newton developed his vectorial formulation that uses time-dependent differential equations of motion to relate vector observables like force and rate of change of momentum. Euler, Lagrange, Hamilton, and Jacobi, developed powerful alternative variational formulations based on the assumption that nature follows the principle of least action. These variational formulations now play a pivotal role in science and engineering. This book introduces variational principles and their application to classical mechanics. The relative merits of the intuitive Newtonian vectorial formulation, and the more powerful variational formulations are compared. Applications to a wide variety of topics illustrate the intellectual beauty, remarkable power, and broad scope provided by use of variational principles in physics. This second edition adds discussion of the use of variational principles applied to the following topics: Systems subject to initial boundary conditions The hierarchy of the related formulations based on action, Lagrangian, Hamiltonian, and equations of motion, to systems that involve symmetries Non-conservative systems. Variable-mass systems. The General Theory of Relativity. The first edition of this book can be downloaded at the publisher link.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/490zAccess online version03364nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245005000182264004300232264007300275264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505137700525520084901902542001602751546001602767588004002783650002602823650002602849710003902875856007602914OTLid0000491MnU20260406020708.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780996150224  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aKnachel, Mattheweauthor00aFundamental Methods of LogiccMatthew Knachel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - The Basics of Logical Analysis -- I. What is Logic? -- II. Basic Notions: Propositions and Arguments -- III. Recognizing and Explicating Arguments -- IV. Deductive and Inductive Arguments -- V. Diagramming Arguments -- Chapter 2 - Informal Logical Fallacies -- I. Logical Fallacies: Formal and Informal -- II. Fallacies of Distraction -- III. Fallacies of Weak Induction -- IV. Fallacies of Illicit Presumption -- V. Fallacies of Linguistic Emphasis -- Chapter 3 – Deductive Logic I: Aristotelian Logic -- I. Deductive Logics -- II. Classes and Categorical Propositions -- III. The Square of Opposition -- IV. Operations on Categorical Sentences -- V. Problems with the Square of Opposition -- VI. Categorical Syllogisms -- Chapter 4 – Deductive Logic II: Sentential Logic -- I. Why Another Deductive Logic? -- II. Syntax of SL -- III. Semantics of SL -- IV. Translating from English into SL -- V. Testing for Validity in SL -- Chapter 5 – Inductive Logic I: Analogical and Causal Arguments -- I. Inductive Logics -- II. Arguments from Analogy -- III. Causal Reasoning -- Chapter 6 – Inductive Logic II: Probability and Statistics -- I. The Probability Calculus -- II. Probability and Decision-Making: Value and Utility -- III. Probability and Belief: Bayesian Reasoning -- IV. Basic Statistical Concepts and Techniques -- V. How to Lie with Statistics0 aFundamental Methods of Logic is suitable for a one-semester introduction to logic/critical reasoning course. It covers a variety of topics at an introductory level. Chapter One introduces basic notions, such as arguments and explanations, validity and soundness, deductive and inductive reasoning; it also covers basic analytical techniques, such as distinguishing premises from conclusions and diagramming arguments. Chapter Two discusses informal logical fallacies. Chapters Three and Four concern deductive logic, introducing the basics of Aristotelian and Sentential Logic, respectively. Chapter Five deals with analogical and causal reasoning, including a discussion of Mill's Methods. Chapter Six covers basic probability calculations, Bayesian inference, fundamental statistical concepts and techniques, and common statistical fallacies.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/491zAccess online version03769nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245005600160264004300216264006000259264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002500441490002700466505051200493520215101005542001603156546001603172588004003188650003803228650002603266710003903292856007603331OTLid0000492MnU20260406020707.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aSmith, Petereauthor00aGreek and Latin RootsbPart II - GreekcPeter Smith 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface to 5th Edition -- Foreword -- Chapter 15: The Greek Language -- Chapter 16: The Greek Noun (Declensions 1 and 2) -- Chapter 17: Compound Words in Greek -- Chapter 18: The Greek Noun (Declension 3) -- Chapter 19: Greek Adjectives and Adverbs -- Chapter 20: Numerals in Greek and Latin -- Chapter 21: Greek Prefixes -- Chapter 22: Greek Verbs and their Derivatives -- Chapter 23: Some Medical Terminology -- Appendix III - Key to Exercises (Greek) -- Appendix IV - Summary of Vocabulary Tables (Greek)0 aGreek and Latin Roots: Part II - Greek is part two of a two part series. This series examines the systematic principles by which a large portion of English vocabulary has evolved from Latin and (to a lesser degree) from Greek. This book focuses on Greek roots. A link to the first part focusing on the Latin roots can be found below. Part II will try to impart some skill in the recognition and proper use of words derived from Greek. There is a stress on principles: although students will be continually looking at interesting individual words, their constant aim will be to discover predictable general patterns of historical development, so that they may be able to cope with new and unfamiliar words of any type that they have studied. They will be shown how to approach the problem by a procedure known as “word analysis,” which is roughly comparable to the dissection of an interesting specimen in the biology laboratory. The text assumes no previous knowledge of Greek, and does not involve the grammatical study of this language—except for a few basic features of noun and verb formation that will help students to understand the Greek legacy in English. All students will be asked to learn the Greek alphabet. This skill is not absolutely essential for a general knowledge of Greek roots in English. However, it will help students understand a number of otherwise puzzling features of spelling and usage. Although there will be some attention paid to the historical interaction of Greek with English, this text is definitely not a systematic history of the English language. It focuses on only those elements within English that have been directly or indirectly affected by this classical language. In order to provide the broadest possible service to students, the text emphasizes standard English vocabulary in current use. The more exotic technical vocabulary of science and medicine can be extremely interesting, but is explored in only summary fashion. Nevertheless, this text should be of considerable value, say, to a would-be botanist or medical doctor, if only by providing the foundation for further specialized enquiry.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/492zAccess online version01874nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002500149245005700174264004300231264007000274264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505059700521520013401118542002701252546001601279588004001295650002401335650002601359710003901385856007601424OTLid0000493MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aSwanson, Leeeauthor00aEntrepreneurship and Innovation ToolkitcLee Swanson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOPENPRESS.USASK.CAc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aEntrepreneurship and Innovation ToolkitAcknowledgementsIntroduction -- Chapter 1 – Introduction to Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 2 – Opportunity Recognition and Design Thinking -- Chapter 3 – Evaluating Entrepreneurial Opportunities -- Chapter 4 – Business Models -- Chapter 5 – Business Planning -- Chapter 6 – Financing Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 7 – Business Set-Up, Start-Up, and Growth -- Chapter 8 – Strategic Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 9 – Innovation and Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 10 – The Entrepreneurial Environment -- ReferencesThe Language of Entrepreneurship0 aThis book is designed for upper year undergraduate students and graduate students studying fundamental entrepreneurship concepts.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/493zAccess online version02156nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002400136245003000160250001600190264004300206264004400249264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002800415490002700443505097400470520010501444542004101549546001601590588004101606650003201647710003901679856007601718OTLid0000494MnU20260406020403.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aMorris, Joyeauthor00aCombinatoricscJoy Morris  aVersion 2.1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLethbridge, AlbertabJoy Morrisc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Enumeration -- Chapter 1. What is Combinatorics? -- Chapter 2. Basic Counting Techniques -- Chapter 3. Permutations, Combinations, and the Binomial Theorem -- Chapter 4. Bijections and Combinatorial Proofs -- Chapter 5. Counting with Repetitions -- Chapter 6. Induction and Recursion -- Chapter 7. Generating Functions -- Chapter 8. Generating Functions and Recursion -- Chapter 9. Some Important Recursively-Defined Sequences -- Chapter 10. Other Basic Counting Techniques -- Part II. Graph Theory -- Chapter 11. Basics of Graph Theory -- Chapter 12. Moving through graphs -- Chapter 13. Euler and Hamilton -- Chapter 14. Graph Colouring -- Chapter 15. Planar graphs -- Part III. Design Theory -- Chapter 16. Latin squares -- Chapter 17. Designs -- Chapter 18. More designs -- Chapter 19. Designs and Codes -- Appendix A. Complex Numbers -- Appendix B. Biographical Briefs -- Appendix C. Solutions to Selected Exercises -- Appendix D. List of Notation -- Index0 aCombinatorics is an upper-level introductory course in enumeration, graph theory, and design theory.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/494zAccess online version01969nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002500149245004900174264004300223264007000266264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505057200513520026201085542002701347546001601374588004001390650002401430650002601454710003901480856007601519OTLid0000495MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aSwanson, Leeeauthor00aBusiness Plan Development GuidecLee Swanson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOPENPRESS.USASK.CAc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1 – Developing a Business Plan -- Chapter 2 – Essential Initial Research -- Chapter 3 – Business Models -- Chapter 4 – Initial Business Plan Draft -- Chapter 5 – Making the Business Plan Realistic -- Chapter 6 – Making the Plan Appeal to Stakeholders and Desirable to the Entrepreneur -- Chapter 7 – Finishing the Business Plan -- Chapter 8 – Business Plan Pitches -- ReferencesAppendix A – Business Plan Development Checklist and Project PlannerAppendix B – Fashion Importers Inc. Business PlanBusiness Plan Excel Template0 aThis textbook and its accompanying spreadsheet templates were designed with and for students wanting a practical and easy-to-follow guide for developing a business plan. It follows a unique format that both explains what to do and demonstrates how to do it.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/495zAccess online version02778nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149050001100159100002600170245005700196264004300253264006700296264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505024500540520124500785542001602030546001602046588004002062650002402102650002602126650002302152650002602175700002802201710003902229856007602268OTLid0000496MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG173 4aHD30.41 aKioko, Sharoneauthor00aFinancial Strategy for Public ManagerscSharon Kioko 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Introduction -- How We Pay for the Public Sector -- The Basic Financial Statements -- Financial Statement Analysis -- Transaction Analysis -- Cost Analysis -- Budget Strategy -- Suggested Reading -- Glossary -- About the Authors0 aFinancial Strategy for Public Managers is a new generation textbook for financial management in the public sector. It offers a thorough, applied, and concise introduction to the essential financial concepts and analytical tools that today's effective public servants need to know. It starts “at the beginning” and assumes no prior knowledge or experience in financial management. Throughout the text, Kioko and Marlowe emphasize how financial information can and should inform every aspect of public sector strategy, from routine procurement decisions to budget preparation to program design to major new policy initiatives. They draw upon dozens of real-world examples, cases, and applied problems to bring that relationship between information and strategy to life. Unlike other public financial management texts, the authors also integrate foundational principles across the government, non-profit, and “hybrid/for-benefit” sectors. Coverage includes basic principles of accounting and financial reporting, preparing and analyzing financial statements, cost analysis, and the process and politics of budget preparation. The text also includes several large case studies appropriate for class discussion and/or graded assignments.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aMarlowe, Justineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/496zAccess online version02976nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245006900171264004300240264005800283264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505037800515520145200893542001602345546001602361588004102377650003202418650003702450710003902487856007602526OTLid0000497MnU20260406020403.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aKann, Charleseauthor00aIntroduction to MIPS Assembly Language ProgrammingcCharles Kann 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGettysburg, PennsylvaniabCharles W. Kann IIIc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Introduction -- Chapter 2 First Programs in MIPS assembly -- Chapter 3 MIPS arithmetic and Logical Operators -- Chapter 4 Translating Assembly Language into Machine Code -- Chapter 5 Simple MIPS subprograms -- Chapter 6 MIPS memory - the data segment -- Chapter 7 Assembly language program control structures -- Chapter 8 Reentrant Subprograms -- Chapter 9 Arrays0 aThis book was written to introduce students to assembly language programming in MIPS. As with all assemblylanguage programming texts, it covers basic operators and instructions, subprogram calling, loading andstoring memory, program control, and the conversion of the assembly language program into machine code. However this book was not written simply as a book on assembly language programming. The larger purposeof this text is to show how concepts in Higher Level Languages (HLL), such as Java or C/C++, arerepresented in assembly. By showing how program constructs from these HLL map into assembly, theconcepts will be easier to understand and use when the programmer implements programs in languages likeJava or C/C++. Concepts such as references and variables, registers, binary and Boolean operations, subprogram execution, memory types (heap, stack, and static), and array processing are covered to clarify thedecisions made when implementing HLL. Program control is presented using a mapping from structuredprograms in pseudo code to help students understand structured programming, and why it exists. Memoryaccess in assembly is presented to high light the difference between references (pointers) and values, and howthese impact HLL. This book has numerous code examples, and many problems at the end of each chapter, and it is appropriate for a class in Assembly Language, or as a extra resource for a class in Computer Organization.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/497zAccess online version09061nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001200138050001300150100002200163245008800185264004300273264006000316264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505044500553520733300998542003008331546001608361588004008377650002808417650003008445650003408475700002708509710003908536856007608575OTLid0000498MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A41 aGehl, Rodeauthor00aIntroduction to Criminal InvestigationbProcesses, Practices and ThinkingcRod Gehl 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Some Important Basic Concepts -- Chapter 3: What You Need To Know About Evidence -- Chapter 4: The Process of Investigation -- Chapter 5: Strategic Investigative Response -- Chapter 6: Applying the Investigative Tools -- Chapter 7: Witness Management -- Chapter 8: Crime Scene Management -- Chapter 9: Interviewing, Questioning, and Interrogation -- Chapter 10: Forensic Sciences -- Chapter 11: Summary0 aIntroduction to Criminal Investigation, Processes, Practices, and Thinking is a teaching text designed to assist the student in developing their own structured mental map of processes, practices, and thinking to conduct criminal investigations. Delineating criminal investigation into operational descriptors of tactical-response and strategic response while using illustrations of task-skills and thinking-skills, the reader is guided into structured thinking practices. Using the graphic tools of a “Response Transition Matrix”, an “Investigative Funnel”, and the “STAIR Tool”, the reader is shown how to form their own mental map of investigative thinking that can later be articulated in support of forming their reasonable grounds to believe. Chapter 1 introduces criminal investigation as both a task process and a thinking process. This chapter outlines these concepts, rules, and processes with the goal of providing practical tools to ensure successful investigative processes and practices. Most importantly, this book informs the reader how to approach the investigative process using “investigative thinking.” Chapter 2 illustrates investigation by establishing an understanding of the operational forum in which it occurs. That forum is the criminal justice system and in particular, the court system. The investigative process exists within the statutory rules of law, including the Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms, and case law rulings adjudicated by the courts. Considering the existence of these conditions, obligations, and case law rules, there are many terms and concepts that an investigator needs to understand to function appropriately and effectively within the criminal justice system. The purpose of this chapter is to introduce some of the basic legal parameters and concepts of criminal justice within which the criminal investigation process takes place. Chapter 3 describes the functions and terms of “evidence”, as they relate to investigation. This speaks to a wide range of information sources that might eventually inform the court to prove or disprove points at issue before the trier of fact. Sources of evidence can include anything from the observations of witnesses to the examination and analysis of physical objects. It can even include the spatial relationships between people, places, and objects within the timeline of events. From the various forms of evidence, the court can draw inferences and reach conclusions to determine if a charge has been proven beyond a reasonable doubt. Considering the critical nature of evidence within the court system, there are a wide variety of definitions and protocols that have evolved to direct the way evidence is defined for consideration by the court. In this chapter, we look at some of the key definitions and protocols that an investigator should understand to carry out the investigative process. Chapter 4 breaks investigation down into logical steps, establishing a progression that can be followed and repeated to reach the desired results. The process of investigation can be effectively explained and learned in this manner. In this chapter the reader is introduced to various issues in the progression that relate to the process of investigation. Chapter 5 examines the operational processes of investigation. In this chapter we introduce the three big investigative errors along with graphic illustrations of “The Investigative Funnel” and the “S T A I R Tool” to illustrate how each of these concepts in the investigative progression. Chapter 6 provides the reader the opportunity to work through some investigative scenarios using the S T A I R Tool. These scenarios demonstrate the investigative awareness required to transition from the tactical investigative response to the strategic investigative response. Once in the strategic response mode the reader is challenged to practice applying theory development to conduct analysis of the evidence and information to create an investigative plan. This chapter presents two investigative scenarios each designed to illustrate different steps of the S T A I R tool allowing the student to recognize both the tactical and the strategic investigative responses and the implications of transitioning from the tactical to the strategic response. Chapter 7 illustrates the investigative practices of witness management. Witness statements will assist the investigator in forming reasonable grounds to lay a charge, and will assist the court in reaching a decision that the charge against an accused person has been proved beyond a reasonable doubt. It is important for an investigator to understand these practices as they allow an investigator to evaluate witnesses and collect witness evidence that will be acceptable to the courts. Chapter 8 describes crime scene management skills. These skills are an extremely significant task component of investigation because evidence that originates at the crime scene will provide a picture of events for the court to consider in its deliberations. That picture will be composed of witness testimony, crime scene photographs, physical exhibits, and the analysis of those exhibits, along with the analysis of the crime scene itself. From this chapter, the reader will learn the task processes and protocols for several important issues in crime scene management. Chapter 9 examines the interviewing, questioning, and interrogation techniques police use to aid them in investigations. The courts expect police to exercise high standards using practices that focus on the rights of the accused person, and minimize any physical or mental anguish that might cause a false confession. In meeting these expectations, the challenges of suspect questioning and interrogation can be complex, and many police agencies have trained interrogators and polygraph operators who undertake the interrogation of suspects for major criminal cases. But not every investigation qualifies as a major case, and frontline police investigators are challenged to undertake the tasks of interviewing, questioning, and interrogating possible suspects daily. The challenge for police is that the questioning of a suspect and the subsequent confession can be compromised by flawed interviewing, questioning, or interrogation practices. Understanding the correct processes and the legal parameters can make the difference between having a suspect's confession accepted as evidence by the court or not. Chapter 10 examines various forensic sciences and the application of forensic sciences as practical tools to assist police in conducting investigations. As we noted in Chapter 1, it is not necessary for an investigator to be an expert in any of the forensic sciences; however, it is important to have a sound understanding of forensic tools to call upon appropriate experts to deploy the correct tools when required. Chapter 11 summarizes the learning objectives of this text and suggests investigative learning topics for the reader going forward. Many topics relative to investigative practices have not been covered here as part of the core knowledge requirements for a new investigator. These topics include: Major Case ManagementInformant and confidential source managementUndercover investigationsSpecialized team investigations1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aPlecas, Darryleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/498zAccess online version02634nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003000149245012000179264004300299264007100342264001200413300002200425336002600447337002600473338003600499341002800535490002700563505090200590520047001492542004101962546001602003588004102019650002302060650002302083700002702106710003902133856007602172OTLid0000499MnU20240325080655.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aMcLaughlin, Susaneauthor00aLaboratory Exercises in MicrobiologybDiscovering the Unseen World Through Hands-On InvestigationcSusan McLaughlin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLab 1. Introduction to Microscopy and Diversity of Cell Types -- Lab 2. Introduction to Aseptic Techniques and Growth Media -- Lab 3. Preparation of Bacterial Smears and Introduction to Staining -- Lab 4. Acid fast and Endospore Staining -- Lab 5. Metabolic Activities of Bacteria -- Lab 6. Dichotomous Keys -- Lab 7. The Effect of Physical Factors on Microbial Growth -- Lab 8. Chemical Control of Microbial Growth—Disinfectants and Antibiotics -- Lab 9. The Microbiology of Milk and Food -- Lab 10. The Eukaryotes -- Lab 11. Clinical Microbiology I; Anaerobic pathogens; Vectors of Infectious Disease -- Lab 12. Clinical Microbiology II—Immunology and the Biolog System -- Lab 13. Putting it all Together: Case Studies in Microbiology -- Appendix I. Information About Lab Practical Exams -- Appendix II. Scientific Notation and Serial Dilution -- Appendix III. Introduction to Micropipetting0 aThe exercises in this laboratory manual are designed to engage students in hand-on activities that reinforce their understanding of the microbial world. Topics covered include: staining and microscopy, metabolic testing, physical and chemical control of microorganisms, and immunology. The target audience is primarily students preparing for a career in the health sciences, however many of the topics would be appropriate for a general microbiology course as well.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aPetersen, Joaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/499zAccess online version02465nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001100153050001100164100003100175245012100206264004300327264008500370264001200455300002200467336002600489337002600515338003600541341002500577490002700602505018800629520085000817542003001667546001501697588004101712650003801753650002601791650002401817650004401841700003101885710003901916856007601955OTLid0000500MnU20260406020404.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 fre d  a9781387180639  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aPE1408 4aHQ11011 aDolidon, Annabelleeauthor00aHistoires d'AvenirsbScience-fiction pour le cours de français niveaux intermédiaire et avancécAnnabelle Dolidon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLes Bulles -- Impress Genetic, Inc. -- Carte Blanche -- Les Miens -- Ceux Qui Marchent -- L'Anniversaire de Caroline -- Craqueur -- Ce qui n'est pas nommé -- Les Années Métalliques0 aHistoires d'Avenirs est un manuel basé sur neuf nouvelles de science fiction française qui s'adresse à un public d'apprenants étrangers (de niveaux intermédiaire et avancé) mais aussi à un public natif voulant approfondir ses connaissances de la science-fiction moderne - après un chapitre préliminaire qui rappelle les bases historiques du genre. Le manuel propose une approche holistique (stylistique, linguistique, et interculturelle) et sollicite une pensée critique au travers d'activités de lecture, interprétation, conversation, recherche et présentations, dans un double objectif : développer les compétences en français sur des sujets contemporains au travers de la fiction; et faire découvrir la science-fiction française et francophone aux apprenants étrangers. Additional short stories are available at PDXScholar.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn French.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks1 aRoulon, Stéphanieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/500zAccess online version04088nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002600156245006300182264004300245264008500288264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505213400550520077902684542003003463546001603493588004003509650002603549650002403575710003903599856007603638OTLid0000501MnU20260406020404.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781387254149  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aKonomi, Emikoeauthor00aBeginning Japanese for ProfessionalsbBook 2cEmiko Konomi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBefore We BeginLesson 5: In the Town -- Dialogue 1 -- 5-1-1 Particle De indicating the Location of Activity -- 5-1-2 Particle Ni indicating the Location of Existence -- 5-1-3 Irasshaimasu: Honorific Verbs -- 5-1-4 Ko-so-a-do series #3 -- Dialogue 2 -- 5-2-1 Location Nouns -- Dialogue 3 -- 5-3-1 Deshou ‘Probably' -- 5-3-2 Mou and Motto ‘More' -- 5-3-3 More classifiers: ?kai? ?do /?kai -- Dialogue 4 -- 5-4-1 More classifiers : ?ko, ?mai, ?satsu -- 5-4-2 Colors Nouns and Adjectives -- Review -- Drill Tape Scripts -- Lesson 6: Let's Take a Train -- Dialogue 1 -- 6-1-1 Location Particles ni and e -- 6-1-2 ?fun/pun: Naming and Counting Minutes -- 6-1-3 Time Particle ni -- Dialogue 2 -- 6-2-1 Counting Hours -- 6-2-2 Approximation: ?gurai??hodo?yaku? -- 6-2-3 Particle de “by means of” -- 6-2-4 The Starting Point ~kara, The Ending Point ~made -- Dialogue 3 -- 6-3-1 Nan-ji goro: Approximation of Naming Time -- 6-3-2 sugi/ mae: More about telling time -- 6-3-3 Learning Verbs with Particles -- Dialogue 4 -- 6-4-1Onomatopoeia -- Review -- Drill Tape Scripts -- Lesson 7: Calendar -- Dialogue 1 -- 7-1-1 Calendar time: Counting and Naming Dates -- 7-1-2 Counting Weeks -- Dialogue 2 -- 7-2-1 Naming and Counting Months and Years -- 7-2-2 Counting age: ~sai for people and animals, ~nen for others -- 7-2-3 Japanese Calendar -- 7-2-4 Informal Style: Noun Sentence and Adjective Sentence -- Dialogue 3 -- 7-3-1 Verb ~te Form -- 7-3-2 Verb ~te form + motion verbs -- 7-3-3 Particle To indicating accompaniment ‘with' -- Dialogue 4 -- 7-4-1 ~te itadakemasen ka: More on Requests -- 7-4-2 Relative Time Words -- 7-4-3 Raigetsu kara no sukejuuru: Noun + Particle as a Noun Phrase -- ReviewDrill Tape ScriptsLesson 8: Pastime -- Dialogue 1 -- 8-1-1 Verb Plain Form, Non-Past, Affirmative -- Dialogue 2 -- 8-2-1 Plain Form + n desu -- 8-2-2 [Purpose X] ni iku ‘go to do X' -- 8-2-3 Plain Form + deshou / darou -- Dialogue 3 -- 8-3-1 Comparing Two or More Items -- 8-3-2 Sentence + shi -- Dialogue 4 -- 8-4-1 Non-Past Plain Negative Forms of Verbs -- 8-4-2 ~te form of desu; X de ii ‘X will do' -- ReviewDrill Tape Scripts0 aThis textbook is designed for beginning learners who want to learn basic Japanese for the purpose of living and working in Japan. Unlike textbooks written primarily for students, whose content largely centers on student life, this book focuses more on social and professional life beyond school. As a beginning level textbook, this book includes many elementary grammar patterns (Japanese Language Proficiency Test Levels 5 and 4), but the vocabulary and situations are selected specifically for working adults. Explanations are kept concise so as to only cover key points. The main focus is on oral communication and the accompanying audio is to be used extensively. This textbook can be used for self-study, as part of an online course, or as a traditional college course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/501zAccess online version02676nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003300153245012000186264004300306264008500349264001200434300002200446336002600468337002600494338003600520341002800556490002700584505074500611520068101356542003002037546001602067588004002083650003802123650002602161710003902187856007602226OTLid0000502MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781387268634  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAbrahams, Della Jeaneauthor00aCommunication BeginningsbAn Introductory Listening and Speaking Text for English Language LearnerscDella Abrahams 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1- Learning how to speak and listen in English: -- Tips and strategies for increasing and retaining learning -- Advice on learning English in a university setting -- Chapter 2- Introductions -- Describing yourself and other people -- Chapter 3- Talking about travel and experiences: Page 25-36 -- Intonation in English -- Chapter 4- Discussing food and eating: Page 37-50 -- Understanding Conversational English with reduced speech -- Chapter 5- Describing places around town: Page 51-64 -- Addresses and place descriptions -- Chapter 6- Communicating about hobbies and routines: Page 65-73 -- Agreeing and Disagreeing in English -- Chapter 7- Discussing jobs and university majors: Page 74-85 -- Word and syllable stress in English0 aThis textbook is designed for beginning-intermediate English language learners. It is composed of 7 chapters, each of which covers specific speaking and listening learning objectives and includes dialogues, interviews, discussions and conversation activities. Each chapter includes listening and speaking components such as dialogues, interviews, discussions and conversation activities. Each chapter also focuses on 10 target words from the New General Service List of English vocabulary. The textbook includes an audio component that consists of recorded conversations of native and non-native English speakers, as well as links to additional listening resources on the web.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/502zAccess online version02275nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245006500135264004300200264004800243264001200291300002200303336002600325337002600351338003600377341002500413490002700438505035100465520084600816542002701662546001601689588004101705650003801746650002601784710003901810856007601849OTLid0000503MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aIn the CommunitybAn Intermediate Integrated Skills Textbook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEdmonton, AlbertabNorQuest Collegec[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCopyright -- Acknowledgement -- Note to the Learner -- Book Tour -- Chapter 1: Reception, Respect, and Relationships -- Chapter 2: Requests and Responses -- Chapter 3: Permission, Prohibitions, and Obligations -- Chapter 4: Apologies and Excuses -- Chapter 5: Opinions, Clarifying, and Filtering -- Appendix 1: Answer Keys -- Appendix 2: Glossary0 aWith funding from Alberta Open Educational Resources, Bow Valley College and NorQuest College collaborated to create Open Educational Resources (OER) in the form of e-textbooks for English language learners. NorQuest College created In the Community: An Intermediate Integrated Skills Textbook. The textbook: helps learners notice, learn, and practice English that will be helpful in your community gives learners practice in the four main language skills–listening, speaking, reading, and writing helps learners learn about intercultural skills helps learners develop some important essential skills can be used as an online textbook with interactive activities or downloaded, printed and used as a regular textbook The textbook is aimed at Canadian Language Benchmarks levels 5/6 and has been designed to be facilitated by an instructor.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/503zAccess online version03514nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245003700162264004300199264006000242264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505141300479520097401892542002702866546001602893588004002909650002402949700002402973700002802997710003903025856007603064OTLid0000505MnU20260406020838.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aRees, Glyndaeauthor00aHealth Case StudiescGlynda Rees 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologue -- Introduction -- Case Study #1: Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (COPD) -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Erin Johns -- At Home -- Emergency Room -- Case Study #2: Pneumonia -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Erin Johns -- At Home -- Day 0: Emergency Room -- Day 1: Emergency Room -- Day 1: Medical Ward -- Day 2: Medical Ward -- Day 3: Medical Ward -- Day 4: Medical Ward -- Discharge -- Case Study #3: Unstable Angina (UA) -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Harj Singh -- At Home -- Emergency Room -- Case Study #4: Heart Failure (HF) -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Meryl Smith -- In the Supermarket -- Emergency Room -- Day 0: Medical Ward -- Day 1: Medical Ward -- Day 2: Medical Ward -- Day 3: Medical Ward -- Case Study #5: Motor Vehicle Collision (MVC) -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Aaron Knoll -- Crash Scene -- Emergency Room -- Operating Room -- Post Anaesthesia Care Unit (PACU) -- Surgical Ward -- Case Study #6: Sepsis -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: George Thomas -- Sleepy Hollow Care Facility -- Emergency Room -- Day 1: Medical Ward -- Day 2: Medical Ward -- Case Study #7: Colon Cancer -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Fred Johnson -- Two Months Ago -- Pre-Surgery Admission -- Operating Room -- Surgical Ward -- Case Study #8: Deep Vein Thrombosis (DVT) -- Learning Objectives -- Patient: Jamie Douglas -- Surgical Ward -- Appendix: OverviewAbout the Authors0 aHealth Case Studies is composed of eight separate health case studies. Each case study includes the patient narrative or story that models the best practice (at the time of publishing) in healthcare settings. Associated with each case is a set of specific learning objectives to support learning and facilitate educational strategies and evaluation. The case studies can be used online in a learning management system, in a classroom discussion, in a printed course pack or as part of a textbook created by the instructor. This flexibility is intentional and allows the educator to choose how best to convey the concepts presented in each case to the learner. Because these case studies were primarily developed for an electronic healthcare system, they are based predominantly in an acute healthcare setting. Educators can augment each case study to include primary healthcare settings, outpatient clinics, assisted living environments, and other contexts as relevant.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aKruger, Robeauthor1 aMorrison, Janeteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/505zAccess online version01982nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245006300181264004300244264008500287264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505044200546520032800988542002701316546001601343588004001359650003001399700002601429700002601455710003901481856007601520OTLid0000506MnU20260406020406.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771366  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aDeline, Bradleyeauthor00aLaboratory Manual for Introductory GeologycBradley Deline 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Physical Geology -- Chapter 2: Earth's Interior -- Chapter 3: Topographic Maps -- Chapter 4: Plate Tectonics -- Chapter 5: Water -- Chapter 6: Climate Change -- Chapter 7: Matter and Minerals -- Chapter 8: Igneous Rocks -- Chapter 9: Volcanoes -- Chapter 10: Sedimentary Rocks -- Chapter 11: Metamorphic Rocks -- Chapter 12: Crustal DeformatIon -- Chapter 13: Earthquakes -- Chapter 14: PhysIographic Provinces0 aThis textbook is a comprehensive lab manual for the core curriculum Introductory Geosciences classes with both informational content and laboratory exercises. Topics include basic laws and theories in Geology, the Earth's interior and plate tectonics, water and climate change, igneous rocks and volcanoes, and earthquakes.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aHarris, Randaeauthor1 aTefend, Kareneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/506zAccess online version03848nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001000161245004200171264004300213264006700256264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002500445490002700470505216300497520048002660542001603140546001603156588004003172650003603212650002903248700003003277700002803307710003903335856007603374OTLid0000507MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014011  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.300aMedia Innovation and Entrepreneurship 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForewordPreface from the EditorsDeveloping the Entrepreneurial Mindset -- Developing the Entrepreneurial Mindset -- Taking Risks and Building Resilience on the Path to Innovation -- From the Field: Q&A With a Young Innovator -- What's an Intrapreneur? And How Do I Become One? -- Looking Ahead -- Ideation -- Ideation -- Looking Ahead -- Customer Discovery -- Customer Discovery for Content and Tech Startups -- Looking Ahead -- Business Models for Content & Technology Ventures -- Business Models for Content and Technology Plays -- From the Field: Refining Our Business Plan Was the Key to Attracting Our First Investor -- From the Field: Writing a Business Plan & Budget -- Nonprofit Model Development -- Nonprofit Model Development -- From the Field: The Knoxville Experiment -- Exercise: Being a Media Nonprofit -- Freelancing as Entrepreneurship and Consulting as Business Models -- Freelancing as Entrepreneurship and Consulting as Business Models -- From the Field: How to Get and Keep Gigs as a Freelance Journalist -- From the Field: How I Ditched the 9 to 5 and Built a Business I Could Live With -- Looking Ahead -- Startup Funding -- Startup Funding: Introduction -- Startup Funding: Why Funding -- Startup Funding: Traditional Venture Funding -- Startup Funding: Nontraditional Funding Sources -- Startup Funding: Crowdfunding -- From the Field: Friends, Family and Fools Funding -- From the Field: The Journey from Listening to Leader -- From the Field: Your Kickstarter Campaign is a Story -- Looking Ahead -- Pitching Ideas -- Pitching Ideas -- From the Field: The Perfect Pitch -- Looking Ahead -- Marketing Your Venture to Audiences -- Marketing Your Venture to Audiences -- Marketing Your Venture: Engagement and Analytics -- Looking Ahead -- Entrepreneurship Abroad: Cultural and International Perspectives and Challenges -- Entrepreneurship Abroad: Cultural and International Perspectives and Challenges -- From the Field: A Short History of Silicon Valley -- Planned AdditionsInstructor ResourcesGlossaryAcknowledgementsAbout the AuthorsCover CreditsLicense & Remixing InformationHelp to Expand This Book!For Beta TestersSuggestion Box0 aThis is the first edition of a modular open textbook designed for entrepreneurial journalism, media innovation, and related courses. This book has been undergoing student and faculty testing and open review in fall 2017. Feedback has been implemented in Version 1.0 and will continue to be implemented in Version 2.0 (ETA spring 2018). An accompanying handbook will include additional activities, ancillary materials and faculty resources on media innovation for instructors.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aFerrier, Michelleeeditor1 aMays, Elizabetheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/507zAccess online version03218nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050000800141100002600149245004600175250001300221264004300234264007100277264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505040600525520162000931542004102551546001602592588004102608650004102649650002702690710003902717856007602756OTLid0000508MnU20250914134627.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA11 aAfrick, Henryeauthor00aElementary College GeometrycHenry Africk  a2021 ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter I Lines Angles And Triangles -- Chapter II Congruent Triangles -- Chapter III Quadrilaterals -- Chapter IV Similar Triangles -- Chapter V Trigonometry Of The Right Triangle -- Chapter VI Area And Perimeter -- Chapter VII Regular Polygons And Circles -- Appendix -- Values Of The Trigonometric Functions -- Answers To Odd Numbered Problems -- Bibliography -- List Of Symbols -- Index0 aThis text is intended for a brief introductory course in plane geometry. It covers the topics from elementary geometry that are most likely to be required for more advanced mathematics courses. The only prerequisite is a semester of algebra. The emphasis is on applying basic geometric principles to the numerical solution of problems. For this purpose the number of theorems and definitions is kept small. Proofs are short and intuitive, mostly in the style of those found in a typical trigonometry or precalculus text. There is little attempt to teach theorem-proving or formal methods of reasoning. However the topics are ordered so that they may be taught deductively. The problems are arranged in pairs so that just the odd-numbered or just the even-numbered can be assigned. For assistance, the student may refer to a large number of completely worked-out examples. Most problems are presented in diagram form so that the difficulty of translating words into pictures is avoided. Many problems require the solution of algebraic equations in a geometric context. These are included to reinforce the student's algebraic and numerical skills, A few of the exercises involve the application of geometry to simple practical problems. These serve primarily to convince the student that what he or she is studying is useful. Historical notes are added where appropriate to give the student a greater appreciation of the subject. This book is suitable for a course of about 45 semester hours. A shorter course may be devised by skipping proofs, avoiding the more complicated problems and omitting less crucial topics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/508zAccess online version02930nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050000800167050001400175100002400189245004900213250000700262264004300269264006000312264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505050400546520105701050542001602107546001602123588004002139650002402179650003502203650002702238650002602265700003002291700002402321710003902345856007602384OTLid0000509MnU20260406020714.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961584334  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aHolmes, Lexeauthor00aIntroductory Business StatisticscLex Holmes  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Sampling and Data -- Descriptive Statistics -- Probability Topics -- Discrete Random Variables -- Continuous Random Variables -- The Normal Distribution -- The Central Limit Theorem -- Confidence Intervals -- Hypothesis Testing with One Sample -- Hypothesis Testing with Two Samples -- The Chi-Square Distribution -- F Distribution and One-Way ANOVA -- Linear Regression and Correlation -- Appendix A: Statistical Tables -- Appendix B: Mathematical Phrases, Symbols, and Formulas -- Index0 aIntroductory Business Statistics 2e aligns with the topics and objectives of the typical one-semester statistics course for business, economics, and related majors. The text provides detailed and supportive explanations and extensive step-by-step walkthroughs. The author places a significant emphasis on the development and practical application of formulas so that students have a deeper understanding of their interpretation and application of data. Problems and exercises are largely centered on business topics, though other applications are provided in order to increase relevance and showcase the critical role of statistics in a number of fields and real-world contexts. The second edition retains the organization of the original text. Based on extensive feedback from adopters and students, the revision focused on improving currency and relevance, particularly in examples and problems. A detailed transition guide is available for instructors. The first edition of Introductory Business Statistics by OpenStax is available in web view here.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aIllowsky, Barbaraeauthor1 aDean, Susaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/509zAccess online version02871nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003100154245006800185264004300253264006500296264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505062700538520106001165542002702225546002702252588004102279650003202320700003002352710003902382856007602421OTLid0000511MnU20260330020357.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942142962  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aValdivieso, Carloseauthor00aMicroprocesadores Fundamentos y AplicacionescCarlos Valdivieso 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice De Figuras -- Índice De Cuadros -- 1. Introducción A Microprocesadores -- 2. Modo De Direccionamiento De Datos -- 3. Conjunto De Instrucciones -- 4. Lenguaje Ensamblador: Fundamentos Básicos -- 5. Interrupciones En La Pc -- 6. Funciones Del Bios Y Del Msdos -- 7. Microcontrolador 8051/8052 Y Sus Derivados -- 8. Organización De Memoria -- 9. Repertorio De Instrucciones -- 10. Programación De E/S Y Recursos Especiales -- 11. Temporizadores -- 12. Interrupciones -- 13. Comunicación Serial -- 14. Conversiones Dac Y Adc -- 15. Stepper Motor -- 16. Prácticas De Microprocesadores -- 17. Libros De Referencia0 aEste trabajo ha sido desarrollado gracias a la interacción como docente universitario en la enseñanza teórica y práctica de la materia de microprocesadores con diversos grupos de estudiantes por alrededor de 15 años. Es con sus exigencias, cuestionamientos y colaboraciones con sus proyectos prácticos implementados en los cursos dictados, que se ha podido construir una guía comprensiva, que trate de responder de una forma adecuada las múltiples dudas de los estudiantes en su proceso de aprendizaje. La disponibilidad de tiempo en el aula de clase muchas veces no es suficiente para responder las inquietudes de los estudiantes; así que, se espera que con este trabajo se contribuya a proporcionar al lector un cúmulo de información que le ayuden de una manera práctica y escalonada a comprender la base teórica de los microprocesadores de Intel y sus derivados (capítulos 1 al 15), con implementaciones prácticas básicas (capítulo 16). Al final se citan libros de referencia que pueden consultarse para profundizar los temas tratados.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aSolís, Ronald M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/511zAccess online version02573nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154245013600163264004300299264006500342264001200407300002200419336002600441337002600467338003600493341002500529490002700554505051100581520069001092542004101782546002701823588004101850650003201891650003701923700002601960700003201986700003002018710003902048856007602087OTLid0000512MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789801286943  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA7600aAprendiendo a Programar en Python con mi ComputadorbPrimeros pasos rumbo a cómputos de gran escala en las Ciencias e Ingenierías 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefacioÍndice generalAgradecimientosDedicatoria -- 1 Obteniendo, instalando y probando la infraestructura computacional necesaria -- para programar en Python -- 2 Primeros pasos en Python -- 3 Variables en Python -- 4 Ejecución condicional en Python con la instrucción if -- 5 Funciones y ejecución repetitiva en Python con las instrucciones for y while -- 6 Entrada y salida de datos en Python -- 7 Visualización y gráfica de datos en Python -- 8 Epílogo y bosquejo de un caso de estudio -- Libros0 aEste libro está dirigido, principalmente, a Estudiantes y Docentes que quieren aprender a programarcomo forma de fortalecer sus capacidades cognoscitivas y así obtener un beneficio adicional de su computador para lograr un mejor provecho de sus estudios. Dada la orientación del libro respecto a programar para resolver problemas asociados a las Ciencias e Ingenierías, el requisito mínimo de matemáticas que hemos elegido para presentar el contenido del mismo se cubre, normalmente, en el tercer año del bachillerato. No obstante, el requisito no es obligatorio para leer el libro en su totalidad y adquirir los conocimientos de programación obviando el contenido matemático.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aRojas, Sergioeeditor1 aFernández, Héctoreeditor1 aRuiz, Juan Carloseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/512zAccess online version02675nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000900138050000700147100003500154245008700189264004300276264006500319264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505107500561520023401636542002701870546002701897588004101924650004401965650003302009650003102042700002602073700003902099710003902138856007602177OTLid0000513MnU20260330020357.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aJA71 4aH11 aLevín, Silvia Analíaeauthor00aPolíticas públicas, Género y Derechos Humanos en América LatinacSilvia Levín 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPresentación. Silvia LevínI Políticas públicas y desigualdades de género: fortalezas, debilidades, desafíos -- 1 Las políticas públicas y el género en Argentina: entre el trato y el destrato a las desigualdades. Silvia Levín -- 2 Desafíos de la implementación de políticas públicas en clave de género y de derechos. María Angélica Pignatta -- II Los Derechos Humanos como marco político para la formulación yla acción pública -- 3 Género, Derecho y Constitución. Una mirada al interior de las constituciones provinciales argentinas. Oscar Blando -- 4 Enfoque de género y ciudadanía: logros y desafíos a la luz de la acción pública de las organizaciones sociales. Valeria Venticinque -- III La agenda de género en las agendas institucionales del Estado -- 5 Violencia de género y capacidades institucionales del Estado, una propuesta de análisis. María Alejandra Ingaramo -- 6 Políticas Públicas y asimetrías de género en el trabajo productivo y reproductivo en América Latina. Ruth Sosa -- 7 Actividad Práctica Integradora del libro0 aEl enfoque de género ha producido verdaderas transformaciones tanto a nivel del conocimiento en las ciencias sociales, incorporando nuevos temas y problemas a partir de la teoría feminista, como a nivel de las acciones de polí1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBlando, Oscareauthor1 aIngaramo, María Alejandraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/513zAccess online version02251nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003400136245007100170264004300241264006500284264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505041500526520062100941542002701562546002701589588004101616650003201657700003801689700003501727710003901762856007601801OTLid0000514MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aArteaga, Jaime Muñozeauthor00aTemas de Diseño en Interacción Humano-ComputadoracJaime Arteaga 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 FUNDAMENTOS DE INTERACCIÓN HUMANO COMPUTADORA (IHC) -- 2 DISEÑO DE LA INTERACCIÓN HUMANO-COMPUTADORA -- 3 DISEÑO CENTRADO EN EL USUARIO Y PROTOTIPADO -- 4 EVALUACIÓN EN INTERACCIÓN HUMANO COMPUTADOR -- 5 INTERFACES PARA DISPOSITIVOS MÓVILES -- 6 DISEÑO DE INTERFACES DE USUARIO PARA AMBIENTES DE APRENDIZAJE EN LÍNEA -- 7 EMOCIONES EN LA INTERACCIÓN HUMANO COMPUTADORA -- 8 INTERFACES DE USUARIO 3D0 aEl nivel académico que pretende abordar el libro es en las diferentes licenciaturas e ingenierías que consideren tópicos en el área de interacción humano computadora, así como los posgrados relacionados con la temática. El libro describe diferentes tipos de interacción que pueden ofrecer las aplicaciones interactivas donde a través de la interfaz gráfica es posible guiar y hacer fácil la tarea del usuario. Así pues, el lector puede encontrar diferentes trabajos que especifican desde los requerimientos del usuario hasta el diseño, programación y evaluación de distintas aplicaciones interactivas.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aHernández, Yosly Caridadeauthor1 aAmador, Viviana Bustoseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/514zAccess online version02424nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002500136245004100161264004300202264006500245264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505033300487520086900820542002701689546002701716588004101743650003901784650003201823700003201855700003601887710003901923856007601962OTLid0000515MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aPonce, Julioeauthor00aInteligencia ArtificialcJulio Ponce 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introducción y Antecedentes de la Inteligencia Artificial -- 2 Planteamiento del Problema -- 3 Representación del Conocimiento -- 4 Agentes Inteligentes -- 5 Introduccion al Aprendizaje -- 6 Optimizacion y Heurísticas -- 7 Algoritmos Evolutivos -- 8 Algoritmos Bioinspirados -- 9 Algoritmos en Paralelo mediante Uso de GPUs0 aEste libro es una introducción al area de la Inteligencia Artificial y presenta algunas de las aplicaciones que puede tener en la vida real en diversos campos de aplicación, El libro esta compuesto de ocho capítulos los cuales abarcan los antededentes, algunos conceptos importantes para la resolución de problemas como es la representación de conocimiento, el planteamiento de los problemas. Asimismo se menciona la teoría de agentes por un lado y por otro lo que es el aprendizaje computacional. Otra area que se aborta es la computación evolutivo y los algoritmos bioinspirados para la resolución de problemas, dandole enfasis a los problemas de optimizacion. Por ultimo se menciona una nueva tendencia en el area de las ciencias computacionales como es el uso de las GPUs para trabajar de una manera mas rapida al realizar el procesamiento en paralelo.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aSoto, Aurora Torreseauthor1 aQuezada, Fátima Sayurieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/515zAccess online version01649nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245009500165264004300260264006500303264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505043800545520007400983542002701057546002701084588004101111650003201152710003901184856007601223OTLid0000516MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCardona, Héctoreauthor00aDiseno e Implementación de Bases de Datos desde una Perspectiva PráticacHéctor Cardona 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introducción A Los Modelos De Datos -- 2 Modelo Conceptual: Entidad Interrelación -- 3 Modelo Lógico: Relacional -- 4 Capitulo IV - Modelo Físico -- 5 Apéndice A. Ejemplo De Diseño E Implementación De Una Base De Datos Relacinal En Posgresql -- 6 Apéndice B. Ejemplo De Diseño E Implementación De Una Base De Datos Relacional En Oracle -- 7 Apendice C. Ejemplo De Diseño E Implementación De Una Base De Datos Relacional0 aModelado Conceptual y Lógico de Bases de Datos a través de ejemplos1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/516zAccess online version01518nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245005600145264004300201264006500244264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505024900486520013100735542002700866546002700893588004100920650003800961650004200999710003901041856007601080OTLid0000517MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA14500aAplicaciones y Teoría de Ingeniería de Microondas 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introducción -- 2 Lineas de Transmisión y Guias de Onda -- 3 Concepto General de Circuito de Microondas -- 4 Transformación y Adaptación de Impedancias -- 5 Resonadores Microondas -- 6 Filtros Microondas -- 7 Dispositivos Activos Lineales0 aTeoria, analisis y sintesis de tecnicas de diseño para sistemas de teleomunicaciones que operan en el rango de 1GHz a 100 GHZ1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/517zAccess online version01738nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100003500146245005100181264004300232264006500275264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505029200517520020300809542002701012546002701039588004101066650003501107650002701142700002601169700003001195710003901225856007601264OTLid0000518MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aBonacina, Marta Susanaeauthor00aCalculo diferencial e integralcMarta Bonacina 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Funciones -- 2 Límite y continuidad -- Apéndice A: números reales, conjuntos -- Apéndice B: el plano coordenado -- Apéndice C: funciones trigonométricas -- 3 Derivada -- 4 Aplicaciones de la Derivada -- 5 La Integral -- 6 Aplicaciones de la Integral -- 7 Ecuaciones Diferenciales0 aEsta comunidad tiene como fin construir un texto base, que pretende ser la puerta de entrada al mundo de las matemáticas superiores y sus aplicaciones en el campo de las Ciencias de la Ingeniería.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aTeti, Claudiaeauthor1 aHaidar, Alejandraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/518zAccess online version01636nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245006900165264004300234264006500277264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505026500519520019100784542002700975546001601002588004101018650003201059700002601091700003001117710003901147856007601186OTLid0000519MnU20260302020323.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCollazos, Césareauthor00aAprendizaje Colaborativo Apoyado por ComputadorcCésar Collazos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLATIn Projectc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Trabajo Colaborativo -- 2 Aprendizaje Colaborativo -- 3 Trabajo Cooperativo Asistido por Computador -- 4 Aplicaciones Colaborativas o Groupware -- 5 Estrategias para el Trabajo Colaborativo -- 6 Evaluación y Monitoreo del proceso de aprendizaje Colaborativo0 aComunidad creada para compartir experiencias en torno al uso de Tecnologías de la Información como apoyo a procesos de enseñanza-aprendizaje usando modelos de aprendizaje colaborativo1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aMuñoz, Jaimeeauthor1 aHernández, Yoslyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/519zAccess online version01842nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245005700162264004300219264006600262264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505047600505520018900981542004101170546001601211588004101227650003801268650002601306700002101332710003901353856007601392OTLid0000520MnU20260406020409.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMartin, Howardeauthor02aA Foundation Course in Reading GermancHoward Martin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WisconsinbUniversity of Wisconsin - Madisonc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1: Basics -- 2: Cases, present tense -- 3: Articles, simple past -- 4: Verbs with prefixes; adjective endings -- 5: Prepositions, reflexives -- 6: Conjunctions, comparatives -- 7: Perfect tenses and participles -- 8: Werden, relative clauses -- 9: Passive voice -- 10: Modal verbs -- 11: Infinitive usages -- 12: Da- compounds -- 13: Extended adjective constructions -- 14: Subjunctive I -- 15: Subjunctive II -- 16: Finishing touches -- ReferencePractice0 aThis textbook guides a learner who has no previous German experience to gain the ability to accurately understand formal written German prose, aided only by a comprehensive dictionary.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aNg, Alaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/520zAccess online version02425nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003100149245008600180264004300266264006700309264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505030700553520091800860542001601778546001601794588004001810650002301850650002401873700002701897710003901924856007601963OTLid0000521MnU20260406020741.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aFrederiksen, Lindaeauthor00aLiterature Reviews for Education and Nursing Graduate StudentscLinda Frederiksen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: What is a Literature Review? -- Chapter 3: How to Get Started -- Chapter 4: Where to Find the Literature -- Chapter 5: Evaluating Sources -- Chapter 6: Documenting Sources -- Chapter 7: Synthesizing Sources -- Chapter 8: Writing the Literature Review -- Conclusion0 aLiterature Reviews for Education and Nursing Graduate Students is an open textbook designed for students in graduate-level nursing and education programs. Its intent is to recognize the significant role the literature review plays in the research process and to prepare students for the work that goes into writing one. Developed for new graduate students and novice researchers just entering into the work of a chosen discipline, each of the eight chapters covers a component of the literature review process. Students will learn how to form a research question, search existing literature, synthesize results and write the review. The book contains examples, checklists, supplementary materials, and additional resources. Literature Reviews for Education and Nursing Graduate Students is written by two librarians with expertise guiding students through research and writing assignments, and is openly licensed.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPhelps, Sue F.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/521zAccess online version03211nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002500154245003900179264004300218264007700261264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505158500515520047702100542002702577546001602604588004002620650003202660700003002692710003902722856007602761OTLid0000523MnU20260406020409.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781326927462  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aFabry, Johaneauthor04aThe Spec UI frameworkcJohan Fabry 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSquare Bracket Associatesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIllustrations1 Introduction2 First Contact With Examples -- 2.1 A customer satisfaction UI -- 2.2 Fun with Lists -- 2.3 Conclusion -- 3 Reusing and composing elements -- 3.1 First requirements -- 3.2 Creating a basic UI to be reused as a widget -- 3.3 Combining two basic widgets into a reusable UI -- 3.4 Managing three widgets and their interactions -- 3.5 Changing the layout of a reused widget -- 3.6 Considerations about a public configuration API -- 3.7 Conclusion -- 4 The fundamentals of Spec -- 4.1 User interface building: a composition -- 4.2 The initializeWidgets method -- 4.3 Defining UI Layouts -- 4.4 The initializePresenter method -- 4.5 Conclusion -- 5 Layout Construction -- 5.1 About layouts -- 5.2 Row and column layouts -- 5.3 Combining rows and columns -- 5.4 Setting row and column size -- 5.5 Layouts without rows or columns -- 5.6 Conclusion -- 6 Managing windows -- 6.1 Opening a window or a dialog box -- 6.2 Modal windows and the closing of windows -- 6.3 Window size and decoration -- 6.4 The final details: title, icon and about text -- 6.5 Conclusion -- 7 Advanced Widgets -- 7.1 TextModel -- 7.2 RadioButtonModel -- 7.3 TabModel -- 7.4 Toolbars and Pop-up Menus -- 7.5 Conclusion -- 8 Dynamic Spec -- 8.1 Dynamically changing an already opened UI -- 8.2 Dynamically populating a UI with widgets -- 8.3 Hacking together a UI in the Playground -- 8.4 Conclusion -- 9 Tips and Tricks -- 9.1 Integrating the different UI frameworks -- 9.2 Lists, trees and tables -- 9.3 Using the underlying widget library -- 9.4 Testing the functionality of a Spec UI0 aSpec is the default UI framework for Pharo. To build UI's in Spec existing widgets or even complete UI's are reused and configured to form a new UI. This book first shows the basics of Spec and how it enables reuse of UIs. It then treats UI layout in detail before moving on to explaining the management of windows. Some of the more advanced widgets are also discussed as well as the dynamic features of Spec. Lastly, the book also contains a chapter with tips and tricks.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aDucasse, Stephaneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/523zAccess online version03367nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245003900154264004300193264007700236264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505065100490520164501141542002702786546001602813588004102829650003202870710003902902856007602941OTLid0000524MnU20260316020358.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781326650971  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aEnterprise Pharo a Web Perspective 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSquare Bracket Associatesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Simple Web applications -- 1 Teapot -- 2 Building and Deploying a Small Web application -- II HTTP -- 3 Character Encoding and Resource Meta Description -- 4 Zinc HTTP: The Client Side -- 5 Zinc HTTP: The Server Side -- 6 WebSockets -- III Data -- 7 NeoCSV -- 8 NeoJSON -- 9 STON: a Smalltalk Object Notation -- 10 Serializing Complex Objects with Fuel -- 11 Persisting Objects with Voyage -- IV Presentation -- 12 Mustache Templates for Pharo -- 13 Cascading Style Sheets with RenoirSt -- 14 Documenting and Presenting with Pillar -- 15 Generate PDF Documents with Artefact -- V Deployment -- 16 Deploying a Pharo Web Application in Production0 aEnterprise Pharo is the third volume of the series, following Pharo by Example and Deep into Pharo. It covers enterprise libraries and frameworks, and in particular those useful for doing web development. The book is structured in five parts. The first part talks about simple web applications, starting with a minimal web application in chapter 1 on Teapot and then a tutorial on building a more complete web application in chapter 2. Part two deals with HTTP support in Pharo, talking about character encoding in chapter 3, about using Pharo as an HTTP Client (chapter 4) and server (chapter 5), and about using WebSockets (chapter 6).In the third part we discuss the handling of data for the application. Firstly we treat data that is in the form of comma-separated values (CSV) in chapter 7. Secondly and thirdly, we treat JSON (chapter 8) and its Smalltalk counterpart STON (chapter 9). Fourthly, serialization and deserialization of object graphs with Fuel is treated in chapter 10. Lastly, we discuss the Voyage persistence framework and persisting to MongoDB databases in chapter 11. Part four deals with the presentation layer. Chapter 12 shows how to use Mustache templates in Pharo, and chapter 13 talks about programmatic generationof CSS files. The documentation of applications could be written in Pillar, which is presented in chapter 14. How to generate PDF files from the application with Artefact is shown in chapter 15. The fifth part deals with deploying the web application. This is explained in chapter 16 that talks not only about how to build and run the application, but also other important topics like monitoring.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/524zAccess online version03052nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002900162245005300191264004300244264004600287264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505075600510520116101266542001602427546001602443588004102459650002402500650002702524710003902551856007602590OTLid0000525MnU20260406020410.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aWiggins, Stepheneauthor00aOrdinary Differential EquationscStephen Wiggins 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBristol, EnglandbStephen Wigginsc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Getting Started: The Language of ODEs -- 2 Special Structure and Solutions of ODEs -- 3 Behavior Near Trajectories and Invariant Sets: Stability -- 4 Behavior Near Trajectories: Linearization -- 5 Behavior Near Equilbria: Linearization -- 6 Stable and Unstable Manifolds of Equilibria -- 7 Lyapunov's Method and the LaSalle Invariance Principle -- 8 Bifurcation of Equilibria, I -- 9 Bifurcation of Equilibria, II -- 10 Center Manifold Theory -- A Jacobians, Inverses of Matrices, and Eigenvalues -- B Integration of Some Basic Linear ODEs -- C Finding Lyapunov Functions -- D Center Manifolds Depending on Parameters -- E Dynamics of Hamilton's Equations -- F A Brief Introduction to the Characteristics of Chaos -- Bibliography -- Index0 aThis book consists of ten weeks of material given as a course on ordinary differential equations (ODEs) for second year mathematics majors at the University of Bristol. It is the first course devoted solely to differential equations that these students will take. This book consists of 10 chapters, and the course is 12 weeks long. Each chapter is covered in a week, and in the remaining two weeks I summarize the entire course, answer lots of questions, and prepare the students for the exam. I do not cover the material in the appendices in the lectures. Some of it is basic material that the students have already seen that I include for completeness and other topics are "tasters" for more advanced material that students will encounter in later courses or in their project work. Students are very curious about the notion of chaos, and I have included some material in an appendix on that concept. The focus in that appendix is only to connect it with ideas that have been developed in this course related to ODEs and to prepare them for more advanced courses in dynamical systems and ergodic theory that are available in their third and fourth years.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/525zAccess online version03316nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003000134245004200164250001900206264004300225264010000268264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505183400545520035702379542001602736546001602752588004002768650003102808710003902839856007602878OTLid0000526MnU20260330020724.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aGarlikov, Richardeauthor04aThe Meaning of LovecRichard Garlikov  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAlabama Open Publishing House at Troy Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication and AcknowledgementsDisclaimerA Note Concerning GrammarIntroduction -- Chapter 1 Personal Versus Professional Relationships -- Chapter 2 Love, Some Popular Views -- Chapter 3 The Three Important Aspects of Relationships -- Chapter 4 The Emotional Aspect— Feelings -- Chapter 5 The Satisfaction Aspect -- Chapter 6 The Goodness and Badness (Ethical) Aspect -- Chapter 7 Independence of the Three Aspects of Relationships -- Chapter 8 The Meaning of Love -- Chapter 9 Infatuation, Friendship, and Love -- Chapter 10 Love at First Sight -- Chapter 11 Importance of Various (Kinds of) Satisfactions -- Chapter 12 Sex and Love -- Chapter 13 A Kiss Is Just a Kiss — The Impossibility of Sexual Communication -- Chapter 14 Being Loved For Yourself -- Chapter 15 Loving More Than One Person At the Same Time -- Chapter 16 Commitment and Loving More Than One Person -- Chapter 17 Rejection and Acceptance -- Chapter 18 Care and Concern -- Chapter 19 Love and Marriage -- Chapter 20 The Future of a Relationship -- Chapter 21 Love and Change and Rational Prediction -- Chapter 22 Jealousy -- Chapter 23 Independence and Sharing -- Chapter 24 “Meaningful” Relationships -- Chapter 25 Introduction to Ethics -- Chapter 26 Ethics — Seeking to Discover What the Highest Principles of Behavior and the Things of Greatest Value Are -- Chapter 27 Modification of the Analysis of Love -- Chapter 28 Good “For” and Good “To” -- Chapter 29 Ethical Principles and Spontaneity -- Chapter 30 Ethics and Sex -- Chapter 31 Sex and Intimacy -- Chapter 32 Relationships After Sex -- Chapter 33 Problems of the Inexperienced -- Chapter 34 On Being Used -- Chapter 35 The Causes of Feelings -- Chapter 36 Some Other Writers on Love -- Chapter 37 Some Personal Comments and Notions of a More Intuitive Nature -- GlossaryReferences0 aThis book explores the philosophical views on the meaning of love. The text explores a variety of topics used to define love, including attraction, relationship satisfaction, emotional, and ethical considerations. The author takes a rational, logical, analytic, and scrutinizing look at experiences and other forms of literature on the subject of love.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/526zAccess online version03106nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245002900179264004300208264005800251264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002500431490002700456505138100483520060701864542001602471546002702487588004002514650003802554700002502592710003902617856007602656OTLid0000527MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9781937963101  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aArnold, Betsyeauthor00aRecorridoscBetsy Arnold 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReading and Writing StrategiesUna obra inolvidableEl ingenioso hidalgo don Quijote de la Mancha, introducción y análisis -- Capítulo I -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? B -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? C -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? D -- Conecta con la lectura 1/Comprensión escrito u oral 1 -- Capítulo II -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? B -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? C -- Conecta con la lectura/Comprensión escrito u oral 2 -- Capítulo 3 -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? B -- Conecta con la lectura/Comprensión escrito u oral 3 -- Capítulo 4 -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? B -- Conecta con la lectura/Comprensión escrito u oral 4 -- Capítulo 5 -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A -- Conecta con la lectura/Comprensión escrito u oral 5 -- Capítulo 6—7 Resumen -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? -- Capítulo 8 -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? B/Comprensión escrito u oral 8 -- Conecta con la lectura -- Exploremos Sanchificación y Quijotización: Capítulo 10 -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A/Comprensión escrito u oral 10 -- Capítulo 17 -- ¿Comprendiste lo que leíste? A/Comprensión escrito u oral 17 -- Conecta con la lectura 10 & 17 -- Capítulo 70 aThe language of the Siglo de Oro can be an insurmountable barrier for many readers. This textbook provides historical information, narrative techniques, lists of characters, themes and key words before they begin to read each chapter of Don Quixote. While reading, vocabulary glossed in comprehensible Spanish appears in the margin opposite challenging words. Cultural references and proverbs from the work facilitate a deeper understanding. Each chapter contains checks for understanding and ends with activities to build vocabulary. It includes required chapters 1-8, 10, 17 and 74 for AP classrooms.1 fAttribution  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aPotter, Roseeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/527zAccess online version04385nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138050001000151050001100161100002800172245006200200264004300262264007400305264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002800501490002700529505079900556520224101355542002703596546001603623588004103639650002403680650003303704650004203737650002603779700003103805710003903836856007603875OTLid0000528MnU20260406020410.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aTA1-2040 4aTA145 4aHD30.41 aCoffelt, Donaldeauthor00aFundamentals of Infrastructure ManagementcDonald Coffelt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPittsburgh, PennsylvaniabDonald Coffelt and Chris Hendricksonc2019. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Infrastructure -- Chapter 2: Asset Management Process -- Chapter 3: Inventory, Inspection and Condition Assessment -- Chapter 4: Deterioration Modeling -- Chapter 5: Optimization and Decision Making -- Chapter 6: Performance, Usage, Budget and Cost Functions -- Chapter 7: Interdependence, Resiliency and Security -- Chapter 8: Contract and Workflow Management -- Chapter 9: Commissioning New Facilities -- Chapter 10: Benchmarking and Best Practices -- Chapter 11: Roadway Infrastructure -- Chapter 12: Building Infrastructure -- Chapter 13: Water Infrastructure -- Chapter 14: Telecommunications Infrastructure -- Chapter 15: Electricity Power Generation, Transmission and Distribution Infrastructure -- Chapter 16: Bases, Campuses, Parks and Port Infrastructure --0 aThe authors believe this free of charge book, Fundamentals of Infrastructure Management, will expand the impact of the material and help improve the practice of infrastructure management. By ‘free of charge,' we mean that the material can be freely obtained, but readers should devote time and effort to mastering the material. We have provided problem assignments for various chapters, and we strongly urge readers to undertake the problems as a learning experience. This book grew out of a decade of co-teaching a course entitled ‘Infrastructure Management' at Carnegie Mellon University. Our teaching philosophy was to prepare students for work in the field of infrastructure management. We believe that infrastructure management is a professional endeavor and an attractive professional career. The book is co-authored by two accomplished engineers - each representing professional practice, academic research and theoretical evaluation. Their collective strengths are presented throughout the text and serve to support both the practice of infrastructure management and a role for infrastructure management inquiry and search. Importantly, both co-authors have academic research interests (and a number of research publications) on various topics of infrastructure management. That said, the primary audience for this book is expected to be professionals intending to practice infrastructure management, and only secondarily individuals who intend to pursue a career of research in the area. The text draws examples and discusses a wide variety of infrastructure systems, including roadways, telecommunications, power generation, buildings and systems of infrastructure. We have found that some common fundamentals of asset management, analysis tools and informed decision-making are useful for a variety of such systems. Certainly, many infrastructure managers encounter a variety of infrastructure types during their professional careers. Moreover, due to the functional inter-dependencies of different infrastructure systems, it is certainly advantageous for managers of one infrastructure type to understand other types of infrastructure. For example, roadway managers rely upon the power grid for traffic signal operation.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aHendrickson, Chriseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/528zAccess online version02471nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002600162245003900188250000700227264004300234264006000277264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505036900511520090600880542001601786546001601802588004101818650002301859650002701882700003701909710003901946856007601985OTLid0000529MnU20260406020714.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aMarecek, Lynneauthor00aIntermediate AlgebracLynn Marecek  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Foundations -- 2 Solving Linear Equations -- 3 Graphs and Functions -- 4 Systems of Linear Equations -- 5 Polynomials and Polynomial Functions -- 6 Factoring -- 7 Rational Expressions and Functions -- 8 Roots and Radicals -- 9 Quadratic Equations and Functions -- 10 Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- 11 Conics -- 12 Sequences, Series and Binomial Theorem0 aIntermediate Algebra 2e is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of a one-semester intermediate algebra course. The book’s organization makes it easy to adapt to a variety of course syllabi. The text expands on the fundamental concepts of algebra while addressing the needs of students with diverse backgrounds and learning styles. The material is presented as a sequence of clear steps, building on concepts presented in prealgebra and elementary algebra courses. The second edition contains detailed updates and accuracy revisions to address comments and suggestions from users. Dozens of faculty experts worked through the text, exercises and problems, graphics, and solutions to identify areas needing improvement. Though the authors made significant changes and enhancements, exercise and problem numbers remain nearly the same in order to ensure a smooth transition for faculty.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aMathis, Andrea Honeycutteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/529zAccess online version04187nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155245006200165264004300227264004000270264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505055100487520239801038542003003436546001603466588004003482650002903522650002403551700002903575700002603604700003203630710003903662856007603701OTLid0000530MnU20260406020709.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783319238470  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA44000aPublic Health EthicsbGlobal Cases, Practice, and Context 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection I Introduction to Public Health Ethics -- 1 Public Health Ethics: Global Cases, Practice, and Context -- 2 Essential Cases in the Development of Public Health Ethics -- Section II Topics in Public Health Ethics -- 3 Resource Allocation and Priority Setting -- 4 Disease Prevention and Control -- 5 Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion -- 6 Environmental and Occupational Public Health -- 7 Vulnerability and Marginalized Populations -- 8 International Collaboration for Global Public Health -- 9 Public Health Research -- Index0 aIntroducing public health ethics poses two special challenges. First, it is a relatively new field that combines public health and practical ethics. Its unfamiliarity requires considerable explanation, yet its scope and emergent qualities make delineation difficult. Moreover, while the early development of public health ethics occurred in a western context, its reach, like public health itself, has become global. A second challenge, then, is to articulate an approach specific enough to provide clear guidance yet sufficiently flexible and encompassing to adapt to global contexts. Broadly speaking, public health ethics helps guide practical decisions affecting population or community health based on scientific evidence and in accordance with accepted values and standards of right and wrong. In these ways, public health ethics builds on its parent disciplines of public health and ethics. This dual inheritance plays out in the definition the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) offers of public health ethics: “A systematic process to clarify, prioritize, and justify possible courses of public health action based on ethical principles, values and beliefs of stakeholders, and scientific and other information” (CDC 2011). Public health ethics shares with other fields of practical and professional ethics both the general theories of ethics and a common store of ethical principles, values, and beliefs. It differs from these other fields largely in the nature of challenges that public health officials typically encounter and in the ethical frameworks it employs to address these challenges. Frameworks provide methodical approaches or procedures that tailor general ethical theories, principles, values, and beliefs to the specific ethical challenges that arise in a particular field. Although no framework is definitive, many are useful, and some are especially effective in particular contexts. This chapter will conclude by setting forth a straightforward, stepwise ethics framework that provides a tool for analyzing the cases in this volume and, more importantly, one that public health practitioners have found useful in a range of contexts. For a public health practitioner, knowing how to employ an ethics framework to address a range of ethical challenges in public health—a know-how that depends on practice—is the ultimate take-home message.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aBarrett, Drue H.eeditor1 aDawson, Anguseeditor1 aOrtmann, Leonard W.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/530zAccess online version02736nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245008100186264004300267264008100310264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505090300568520062901471542004102100546001602141588004002157650002602197650002402223710003902247856007602286OTLid0000531MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780999829202  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aHarrop, Jennie A.eauthor04aThe Simple Math of Writing WellbWriting for the 21st CenturycJennie Harrop 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGeorge Fox University Libraryc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Myths And Rule Changes 1 -- Part I. The Sentence Equation -- 1. Main Verbs -- 2. Main Subjects -- 3. Terminal Punctuation Marks -- 4. Mid-Sentence Punctuation Marks -- 5. Eight Parts Of Speech -- 6. Consistency -- Part II. The Paragraph Equation -- 7. Topic Sentences -- 8. Evidence -- 9. Summary Sentences -- Part III. The Essay Equation -- 10. Thesis Statements -- 11. Introductions -- 12. Body Paragraphs -- 13. Conclusions -- Part IV. The Process Of Writing Well -- 14. Purpose -- 15. Audience -- 16. Voice -- 17. Context -- 18. Claims And Appeals -- 19. Clarity And Cohesion -- 20. Revision And Creativity -- Part V. Research -- 21. Finding Credible Evidence -- 22. Including Outside Evidence -- Part VI. Academic Formatting -- 23. Apa -- 24. Mla -- 25. Turabian -- Part VII. Beyond Academia -- 26. Emails -- 27. Letters -- 28. Reports And Proposals -- ConclusionAbout The Author0 aWriting guides abound, but The Simple Math of Writing Well is one of a kind. Readers will find its practical approach affirming, encouraging, and informative, and its focus on the basics of linguistic structure releases 21st-century writers to embrace the variety of mediums that define our internet-connected world. As Harrop reminds us in the opening chapters of her book, we write more today than ever before in history: texts, emails, letters, blogs, reports, social media posts, proposals, etc. The Simple Math of Writing Well is the first guide that directly addresses the importance of writing well in the Google age.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/531zAccess online version02401nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153050001100163100003300174245004600207264004300253264007500296264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002500493490002700518505045900545520068601004542002701690546001601717588004001733650003801773650004201811650002301853710003901876856007601915OTLid0000532MnU20260406020714.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780997920192  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA145 4aQC21.31 aEllingson, Steven W.eauthor00aElectromagneticscSteven EllingsonnVol 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Preliminary Concepts -- Chapter 2: Electric and Magnetic Fields -- Chapter 3: Transmission Lines -- Chapter 4: Vector Analysis -- Chapter 5: Electrostatics -- Chapter 6: Steady Current and Conductivity -- Chapter 7: Magnetostatics -- Chapter 8: Time-Varying Fields -- Chapter 9: Plane Waves in Lossless Media -- Appendix A: Constitutive Parameters of Some Common Materials -- Appendix B: Mathematical Formulas -- Appendix C: Physical Constants0 aElectromagnetics Volume 1 by Steven W. Ellingson is a 238-page, peer-reviewed open educational resource intended for electrical engineering students in the third year of a bachelor of science degree program. It is intended as a primary textbook for a one-semester first course in undergraduate engineering electromagnetics. The book employs the “transmission lines first” approach in which transmission lines are introduced using a lumped-element equivalent circuit model for a differential length of transmission line, leading to one-dimensional wage equations for voltage and current. Additional ResourcesProblem sets and the corresponding solution manual are also available.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/532zAccess online version02341nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003200162245005700194250001300251264004300264264005600307264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505036000540520073400900542004101634546001601675588004001691650002301731650003501754650002701789710003901816856007601855OTLid0000533MnU20260406020723.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aNicholson, W. Keitheauthor00aLinear Algebra with ApplicationscW. Keith Nicholson  a2023-A-D 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2021. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Systems of Linear Equations -- 2 Matrix Algebra -- 3 Determinants and Diagonalization -- 4 Vector Geometry -- 5 Vector Space R -- 6 Vector Spaces -- 7 Linear Transformations -- 8 Orthogonality -- 9 Change of Basis -- 10 Inner Product Spaces -- 11 Canonical Forms -- A Complex NumbersB ProofsC Mathematical InductionD PolynomialsSelected Exercise Answers0 aThe aim of this textbook is to achieve a balance among computational skills, theory, and applications of linear algebra. It is a relatively advanced introduction to the ideas and techniques of linear algebra targeted for science and engineering students who need to understand not only how to use these methods but also gain insight into why they work. The content has enough flexibility to present a traditional introduction to the subject, or to allow for a more applied course. Chapters 1–4 contain a one-semester course for beginners, whereas Chapters 5–9 contain a second semester course. The textbook is primarily about real linear algebra with complex numbers being mentioned when appropriate (reviewed in Appendix A).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/533zAccess online version03953nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002400145245002800169264004300197264008400240264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505199500501520079102496542004103287546001603328588004003344650003803384650004203422710003903464856007603503OTLid0000534MnU20260406020411.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aDavis, Chadeauthor00aDC CircuitscChad Davis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Oklahoma Librariesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefaceModule 1 – The Basics of DC Circuits with Resistors -- Section 1.1 – Introduction and Basic Definitions -- Section 1.1.1 - Charge vs Current -- Section 1.1.2 - Resistance Calculations – (Resistance explained in more detail in section 1.1.3) -- Section 1.1.3 - Ohm's Law: Voltage, Current, Resistance, and Conductance -- Section 1.1.4 – Power and Energy -- Section 1.2 – Combining Resistors in Parallel or Series -- Section 1.3 – Kirchhoff's Voltage Law (KVL) and Voltage Divider Rule (VDR) -- Section 1.4 – Kirchhoff's Current Law (KCL) and Current Divider Rule (CDR) -- Module 1 – Equation List -- Module 2 – Advanced Topics for DC Circuits with Resistors -- Section 2.1 – Source Transformations: Thevenin and Norton Form -- Section 2.2 – Approximate Source Transformations: Adding a virtual resistor -- Section 2.2.1 - Voltage Source Approximate Transformation -- Section 2.2.2 - Current Source Approximate Transformation -- Section 2.3 – Mesh Matrix Analysis and traditional loop analysis methods -- Section 2.4 – Nodal Matrix Analysis and traditional Nodal Analysis -- Section 2.5 – Superposition: Solving a circuit by including only one source at a time -- Section 2.6 – Thevenin and Norton Equivalent Circuits -- Module 3 – DC Circuits with Resistors, Capacitors, and Inductors -- Section 3.1 – Background for Capacitors -- Section 3.2 – Background for Inductors -- Section 3.3 – Combining Inductors in Parallel and/or Series -- Section 3.4 – Combining Capacitors in Parallel and/or Series -- Section 3.5 – DC Transient Analysis with RC and RL Circuits -- Section 3.5.1 – Single Loop RL and RC Charging (Store) Circuits -- Section 3.5.2 – Single Loop RL and RC Discharging (Release) Circuits -- Section 3.6 – DC Steady State Analysis with RC, RL, and RLC Circuits -- Section 3.7 – Introduction to Passive Filters -- Module 3 – Equation List -- References and LinksAppendix – Dependent Sources and Laplace Transform Examples0 aThis book covers Direct Current (DC) circuit theory and is broken up into three modules. Module 1 covers the basics for circuits that include DC sources (voltage or current) and resistors. Even though Module 1 is not very difficult, it forms the foundation for more complicated topics in modules 2 and 3 so it is important to have a firm grasp of all Module 1 topics before moving on. Module 2 covers more difficult problem solving techniques for circuits that include only DC sources and resistors. Module 3 introduces capacitors and inductors. These non-linear reactive components are analyzed in the transient and steady state regions in circuits with DC sources in Module 3. Also annexed is a two-page cheat sheet that ENGR 2431 students at University of Oklahoma can use for exams.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/534zAccess online version02249nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002400145245002800169264004300197264008400240264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505032300501520075900824542004101583546001601624588004001640650003801680650004201718710003901760856007601799OTLid0000535MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aDavis, Chadeauthor00aAC CircuitscChad Davis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Oklahoma Librariesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Module 1 – AC Signal Overview -- Module 2 – AC Circuits Math Background -- Module 3 – RLC Circuit Analysis with AC Sources -- Module 4 – Passive Filters -- Module 5 – Transformers -- Module 6 – Diodes and AC to DC Conversion -- Module 7 –Operational Amplifiers (OpAmps) -- References and Links0 aThis eBook was written as the sequel to the eBook titled DC Circuits, which was written in 2016 by Chad Davis. This eBook covers Alternating Current (AC) circuit theory as well as a brief introduction of electronics. It is broken up into seven modules. Module 1 covers the basic theory of AC signals. Since only DC sources are used in the first eBook, details of AC signals such as sinusoidal waveforms (or sine waves), square waves, and triangle waves are provided. Module 2, titled AC Circuits Math Background, covers the mathematics background needed for solving AC circuit problems. The background material in Modules 1 and 2 are combined in Module 3 to solve circuits with AC sources that include resistors, inductors, and capacitors (RLC circuits).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/535zAccess online version03501nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100003200143245014200175250001600317264004300333264008400376264001200460300002200472336002600494337002600520338003600546341002800582490002700610505073900637520144501376542001602821546001602837588004102853650003302894650003102927700003002958710003902988856007603027OTLid0000536MnU20260406020412.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aJenkins-Smith, Hankeauthor00aQuantitative Research Methods for Political Science, Public Policy and Public Administration (With Applications in R)cHank Jenkins-Smith  a3rd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Oklahoma Librariesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Theory and Empirical Social Science -- 1 Theories and Social Science -- 2 Research Design -- 3 Exploring and Visualizing Data -- 4 Probability -- 5 Inference -- 6 Association of Variables -- II Simple Regression -- 7 The Logic of Ordinary Least Squares Estimation -- 8 Linear Estimation and Minimizing Error -- 9 Bi-Variate Hypothesis Testing and Model Fit -- 10 OLS Assumptions and Simple Regression Diagnostics -- III Multiple Regression -- 11 Introduction to Multiple Regression -- 12 The Logic of Multiple Regression -- 13 Multiple Regression and Model Building -- 14 Topics in Multiple Regression -- 15 The Art of Regression Diagnostic -- IV Generalized Linear Model -- 16 Logit Regression -- V Appendices -- 17 Appendix: Basic0 aThe focus of this book is on using quantitative research methods to test hypotheses and build theory in political science, public policy and public administration. It is designed for advanced undergraduate courses, or introductory and intermediate graduate-level courses. The first part of the book introduces the scientific method, then covers research design, measurement, descriptive statistics, probability, inference, and basic measures of association. The second part of the book covers bivariate and multiple linear regression using the ordinary least squares, the calculus and matrix algebra that are necessary for understanding bivariate and multiple linear regression, the assumptions that underlie these methods, and then provides a short introduction to generalized linear models.The book fully embraces the open access and open source philosophies. The book is freely available in the SHAREOK repository; it is written in R Markdown files that are available in a public GitHub repository; it uses and teaches R and RStudio for data analysis, visualization and data management; and it uses publically available survey data (from the Meso-Scale Integrated Socio-geographic Network) to illustrate important concepts and methods. We encourage students to download the data, replicate the examples, and explore further! We also encourage instructors to download the R Markdown files and modify the text for use in different courses.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aRipberger, Josepheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/536zAccess online version02527nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002800138245005700166264004300223264006700266264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505094200510520046501452542001601917546002701933588004001960650002602000650002402026710003902050856007602089OTLid0000537MnU20260406020820.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aWard, Julie Anneauthor00aAntología Abierta De Literatura HispanacJulie Ward 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefacio -- Reconocimientos -- Parte I. Rubén Darío -- Introducción -- A Roosevelt -- Bibliografía -- Parte II. Horacio Quiroga -- 1. Introducción -- 2. El hijo -- 3. Bibliografía -- Parte III. Emilia Pardo Bazán -- 4. Introducción -- 5. Las medias rojas -- 6. Bibliografía -- Parte IV. Gertrudis Gómez De Avellaneda -- 7. Introducción -- 8. Al partir -- 9. Bibliografía -- Parte V. Don Juan Manuel -- 10. Introducción -- 11. Lo que sucedió a un mancebo el día que se casó -- 12. Bibliografía -- Parte VI. Cristóbalcolón -- 13. Introducción -- 14. Carta a Luis de Santángel -- 15. Bibliografía -- Parte VII. Alfonsinastorni -- 16. Introducción -- 17. Peso Ancestral -- 18. Bibliografía -- Parte VIII. Juana Mansode Noronha -- 19. Introducción -- 20. Emancipación moral de la mujer -- 21. Bibliografía -- Parte IX. La Condesa De Merlin -- 22. Introducción -- 23. Viaje a la Habana: Carta 1 -- 24. Bibliografía0 aUna antología crítica de textos literarios del mundo hispanohablante. Se enfoca en autores canónicos y también se intenta incluir voces marginadas. Cada texto tiene una introducción y anotaciones creadas por estudiantes. A critical anthology of literary texts from the Spanish-speaking world. A focus on canonical authors and an attempt to include voices that have been marginalized. Each text includes an introduction and annotations created by students.1 fAttribution  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/537zAccess online version01740nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002600148245005000174264004300224264007300267264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505024200517520037100759542001601130546001601146588004101162650002501203650002301228710003901251856007601290OTLid0000538MnU20260406020416.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aLucia, Lucianeauthor00aKey Elements of Green ChemistrycLucian Lucia 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Principles Of Green Chemistry -- Chapter 2: Life-Cycle Analysis -- Chapter 3: Hazards -- Chapter 4: Alternative Solvents -- Chapter 5: Alternative Reagents -- Chapter 6: Reaction Types, Design, And Efficiency -- Index Of Terms0 aGreen chemistry, in addition to being a science, it is also a philosophy and nearly a religion. Attendance at American Chemical Society Green Chemistry & Engineering Conferences will instill such an ideal into any attendant because of the nearly universal appeal and possibilities in this novel approach to radicalizing the business of doing science and engineering.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/538zAccess online version02237nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001200167100002800179245006500207264004300272264009600315264001200411300002200423336002600445337002600471338003600497341002800533490002700561505053000588520043201118542003001550546001601580588004101596650002401637650002501661650002601686710003901712856007601751OTLid0000539MnU20260406020411.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135384  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aHB171.51 aBoland, Michaeleauthor03aAn Introduction to Cooperation and MutualismcMichael Boland 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefaceIntroductionChapter One: Cooperatives and Mutuals are Firms -- The success of a firm lies in its ability to have clear property rights. -- Who owns a firm? -- Corporate governance -- Cooperatives are an example of a closely-held firm -- References -- Chapter Two: Cooperatives and mutuals are participatory organizations -- Cooperative principles and policies -- Participation in benefits -- Participation in ownership -- Participation in control. -- Principles of cooperation -- Formation of cooperatives -- Reference0 aThis textbook introduces readers to the idea of cooperation and mutualism. Cooperatives and mutuals are participatory organizations in which members participate in control and governance, receive economic benefits through patronage refunds or net income, and become owners through equity. These mutual-benefit organizations exist alongside non-profit organizations and investor-benefit organizations through the global economy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/539zAccess online version02100nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002600144245006800170250001900238264004300257264007100300264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002500493490002700518505038200545520046800927542004101395546001601436588004001452650002601492650003101518700003801549710003901587856007601626OTLid0000540MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aLally, Marthaeauthor00aLifespan DevelopmentbA Psychological PerspectivecMartha Lally  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGrayslake, IllinoisbMartha Lally, Suzanne Valentine-Frenchc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Lifespan Development -- Chapter 2: Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth -- Chapter 3: Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 4: Early Childhood -- Chapter 5: Middle and Late Childhood -- Chapter 6: Adolescence -- Chapter 7: Emerging and Established Adulthood -- Chapter 8: Middle Adulthood -- Chapter 9: Late Adulthood -- Chapter 10: Death and Dying0 aDevelopmental Psychology, also known as Human Development or Lifespan Development, is the scientific study of ways in which people change, as well as stay the same, from conception to death. You will no doubt discover in the course of studying that the field examines change across a broad range of topics. These include physical and other psychophysiological processes, cognition, language, and psychosocial development, including the impact of family and peers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aValentine-French, Suzanneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/540zAccess online version02934nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003600156245008500192264004300277264006100320264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505057000558520117001128542004102298546001602339588004002355650002602395650002402421710003902445856007602484OTLid0000541MnU20260406020740.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341499  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aEvory, Michelle Bonczekeauthor00aNaming the UnnameablebAn Approach to Poetry for New GenerationscMichelle Evory 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReviewer's Notes -- Reviewer's Notes -- Preface for Instructors -- Introduction: Our Natural Right to Play -- Chapter One: Getting Started: The Nine Muses -- Chapter Two: Welcome, Reader: Reading Poetry -- Chapter Three: Images -- Chapter Four: Voice -- Chapter Five: Architecture -- Chapter Six: Acoustics -- Chapter Seven: Experimenting with Forms -- Chapter Eight: Revision -- Chapter Nine: Publication -- Chapter Ten: Reading Your Poems to an Audience -- Key Terms -- Concrete Word List -- Abstract Word List -- Recommended Accompanying Resources -- Works Cited0 aInformed by a writing philosophy that values both spontaneity and discipline, Michelle Bonczek Evory's Naming the Unnameable: An Approach to Poetry for New Generations offers practical advice and strategies for developing a writing process that is centered on play and supported by an understanding of America's rich literary traditions. With consideration to the psychology of invention, Bonczek Evory provides students with exercises aimed to make writing in its early stages a form of play that gives way to more enriching insights through revision, embracing the writing of poetry as both a love of language and a tool that enables us to explore ourselves and better understand the world. The volume includes resources for students seeking to publish and build a writing-centered lifestyle or career. Poets featured range in age, subject, and style, and many are connected to colleges in the State University of New York system. Naming the Unnameable promotes an understanding of poetry as a living art of which students are a part, and provides ways for students to involve themselves in the growing contemporary poetry community that thrives in America today.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/541zAccess online version02745nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000800142050000800150100002500158245004500183264004300228264005400271264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505102000502520054701522542003002069546001602099588004102115650002602156650002602182650002402208710003902232856007602271OTLid0000542MnU20240617081048.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1996    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a0534253326  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB72 4aBL11 aCannon, Daleeauthor00aSix Ways of Being ReligiouscDale Cannon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBelmont, CAbWadsworth Publishing Companyc[1996] 4c©1996.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I Generic Ways Of Being Religious -- Chapter 1 General Introduction -- Chapter 2 Thinking Generically About Religion -- Chapter 3 Different Ways Of Being Religious -- Chapter 4 The Ways Of Being Religious Exemplified -- Chapter 5 Variations In Quality Of Practice Of The Ways -- Chapter 6 Using The Framework -- Part II Applying The Framework To A Comparison Of Whole Traditions -- Chapter 7 Applying The Framework To The Whole Of Buddhism -- Chapter 8 Applying The Framework To The Whole Of Christianity -- Part III Applying The Framework To A Comparison Of Parallel Ways In Different Traditions -- Chapter 9 The Way Of Mystical Quest -- Chapter 10 The Way Of Reasoned Inquiry -- Chapter 11 The Way Of Right Action -- Chapter 12 The Way Of Devotion -- Chapter 13 The Way Of Shamanic Mediation -- Chapter 14 The Way Of Sacred Rite -- Chapter 15 Concluding Reflections: Comparing Buddhism And Christianity By Means Of The Framework -- Glossary Of TermsIndex Of Subjects And NamesIndex Of Religious Traditions --0 aThe book proposes the hypothesis that six generic ways of being religious may be found in any large-scale religious tradition such as Christianity or Buddhism or Islam or Hinduism: sacred rite, right action, devotion, shamanic mediation, mystical quest, and reasoned inquiry. These are recurrent ways in which, socially and individually, devout members of these traditions take up and appropriate their stories and symbols in order to draw near to, and come into right relationship with, what the traditions attest to be the ultimate reality.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/542zAccess online version01833nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002700144245008100171264004300252264005300295264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505037000525520029400895542004101189546001601230588004001246650003301286650002501319710003901344856007601383OTLid0000543MnU20260330020725.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aAckerman, Garyeauthor00aEfficacious Technology ManagementbA Guide for School LeaderscGary Ackerman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGreenfield, MassachusettsbGary Ackermanc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Information Technology, Society, and Schools -- Chapter 2: Technology-Rich Teaching & Learning -- Chapter 3: Access to Sufficient Computing Devices -- Chapter 4: IT Networks -- Chapter 5: Web Services -- Chapter 6: Technology Support Systems -- Chapter 7: Discourse, Design, Data -- Chapter 8: Understanding Change -- ConclusionReferences0 aDr. Gary Ackerman, an educational technology specialist with decades of experience in K-12, community college, and faculty development has released Efficacious Technology Management: A Guide for School Leaders. This is his second book, and it is available under a Creative Commons license.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/543zAccess online version03050nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154050000700163245003500170264004300205264005600248264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505110400481520064601585542003002231546001602261588004102277650002502318650003302343650003102376700003202407700002702439700003502466710003902501856007602540OTLid0000544MnU20260406020415.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781910814208  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aJA71 4aH100aInternational Relations Theory 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBristol, EnglandbE-International Relationsc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Getting Started With International Relations Theory (Stephen Mcglinchey, Rosie Walters & Dana Gold) -- Part One – Established Theories -- Realism (Sandrina Antunes & Isabel Camisão) -- Liberalism (Jeffrey W. Meiser) -- The English School (Yannis A. Stivachtis) -- Constructivism (Sarina Theys) -- Marxism (Maïa Pal) -- Critical Theory (Marcos Farias Ferreira) -- Poststructuralism (Aishling Mc Morrow) -- Feminism (Sarah Smith) -- Postcolonialism (Sheila Nair) -- Towards A Global Ir? (Amitav Acharya) -- Part Two – Expansion Pack -- Green Theory (Hugh C. Dyer) -- Global Justice (Alix Dietzel) -- Queer Theory (Markus Thiel) -- Securitisation Theory (Clara Eroukhmanoff) -- Critical Geography (Irena Leisbet Ceridwen Connon & Archie W. Simpson) -- Asian Perspectives (Pichamon Yeophantong) -- Global South Perspectives (Lina Benabdallah, Victor Adetula & Carlos Murillo-Zamora) -- Indigenous Perspectives (Jeff Corntassel & Marc Woons) -- A Contemporary Perspective On Realism (Felix Rösch & Richard Ned Lebow -- The ‘Isms' Are Evil. All Hail The ‘Isms'! (Alex Prichard) --0 aThis book is designed as a foundational entry point to International Relations theory – structured to condense the most important information into the smallest space and present that information in an accessible manner. The first half of the book covers the theories that are most commonly taught in undergraduate programmes. The book then expands to present emerging approaches and offer wider perspectives. Each chapter sets out the basics of a theory whilst also applying it to a real-world event or issue, creating a lively, readable and relevant guide that will help students to see not only what theories are – but why they matter.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMcGlinchey, Stepheneeditor1 aWalters, Rosieeeditor1 aScheinpflug, Christianeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/544zAccess online version02693nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109100002800127245009400155264004300249264008500292264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505080000554520073501354542003002089546001602119588004002135650002602175700002702201710003902228856007602267OTLid0000545MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU1 aMiller, Micheleeauthor00aTransition with PurposebPathways from English Language to Academic StudycMichele Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Program and University policies and Procedures -- Overview of Pathways Program -- Academic Standing -- Calculating Grade Point Average (GPA) -- University Structure -- Admission Type and Class Standing -- Degree Requirements -- Academic Advising -- Choosing Your First Academic Classes -- Code of Student Conduct and Responsibility -- Getting Involved -- Preparing for Your Next Term of Study -- Managing Your Time with Google Calendar -- Tuition Differential: IELP and PSU classes -- PSU New Student Orientation -- Degree Audit Reporting System (DARS) -- Part Two: Transition with Purpose to the University -- Section 1: Preparation of Goals -- Section 2: Getting Involved in the University -- Section 3: Collaborative Learning Support Activities -- Section 4: Writing Your ePortfolio0 aThis Open Access Textbook will guide students through their English language to academic degree studies. Part one of this textbook is a guide for moving from ESL study to academic study at Portland State University. It includes the resources students will use to understand policies and processes governing their degree study and their transition to academic coursework. Part two focuses on how academic skills are used across various disciplines and is comprised of activities and assignments designed to practice these skills. Key elements include culture and expectations in an American university, transferring academic skills from ESL to content-specific academic courses, and helpful exercises to be academically successful.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGreenhoe, Anneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/545zAccess online version02510nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245002400139264004300163264004500206264001200251300002200263336002600285337002600311338003600337341002500373490002700398505102200425520050201447542002701949546001601976588004001992650002502032710003902057856007602096OTLid0000546MnU20260406020711.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.500aBoundless Economics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbLumen Learningc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrinciples of Economics -- The Market System -- Introducing Supply and Demand -- Economic Surplus -- Consumer Choice and Utility -- Elasticity and its Implications -- Market Failure: Externalities -- Market Failure: Public Goods and Common Resources -- Production -- Competitive Markets -- Monopoly -- Monopolistic Competition -- Oligopoly -- Inputs to Production: Labor, Natural Resources, and Technology -- Challenges to Efficient Outcomes -- Taxes and Public Finance -- Income Inequality and Poverty -- Introduction to Macroeconomics -- Measuring Output and Income -- Economic Growth -- Inflation -- Unemployment -- Inflation and Unemployment -- Aggregate Demand and Supply -- Major Macroeconomic Theories -- Fiscal Policy -- The Monetary System -- Monetary Policy -- The Financial System -- Current Topics in Macroeconomics -- International Trade -- Open Economy Macroeconomics -- Economic Crises -- Interest -- Health Care Economics -- Natural Resource Economics -- Agriculture Economics -- Immigration Economics0 aThis catalog contains educational content originally curated by Boundless. In collaboration with the Boundless team, Lumen Learning imported these OER courses to the Lumen Platform, to ensure they remain freely available to the education community after Boundless ceased operations. Lumen maintains the Boundless content in the same condition it was provided to us. Courses may contain issues with formatting, accessibility, and the degree to which content remains current, accurate, and complete.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/546zAccess online version01993nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002700138245007900165264004300244264006000287264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505024900524520062100773542001601394546001601410588004001426650002601466650002401492710003901516856007601555OTLid0000547MnU20260406020711.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aIvits, Shanteleauthor00aBC ReadsbAdult Literacy Fundamental EnglishcShantel IvitsnCourse Pack 6 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aStorytelling Goes Digital -- What's Your Story? -- What's Your Message? -- Setting the Tone -- Writing the Script -- Seeing and Hearing Your Digital Story -- Getting Started With WeVideo -- Bringing It All Together -- Sharing Your Digital Story0 aThis course pack is designed to meet the learning outcomes for Adult Literacy Fundamental English Level 6 (roughly equivalent to grades 7.5 to 9 in the K-12 system). Every chapter includes a level-appropriate, high-interest reading of between 500 and 1,000 words. The readings are freely available in a separate reader with convenient links to the readings in each chapter of this course pack. Font size and line spacing can be adjusted in the online view, and have been enhanced for the print and PDF versions for easier reading. This course pack has been reviewed by subject experts from colleges and universities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/547zAccess online version01991nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002700138245007900165264004300244264006000287264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505024900524520061900773542001601392546001601408588004001424650002601464650002401490710003901514856007601553OTLid0000548MnU20260406020416.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aIvits, Shanteleauthor00aBC ReadsbAdult Literacy Fundamental EnglishcShantel IvitsnCourse Pack 5 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Most Amazing Structure on Earth -- The Many Faces of Genius -- The Many Pathways to Knowledge -- Boost Your Brainpower -- Memory Magic -- Put to the Test -- The Sixth Sense: Intuition -- The Big Five: Personality -- Secrets of a Happy Brain0 aThis course pack is designed to meet the learning outcomes for Adult Literacy Fundamental English Level 5 (roughly equivalent to grades 6 to 7.5 in the K-12 system). Every chapter includes a level-appropriate, high-interest reading of between 500 and 800 words. The readings are freely available in a separate reader with convenient links to the readings in each chapter of this course pack. Font size and line spacing can be adjusted in the online view, and have been enhanced for the print and PDF versions for easier reading. This course pack has been reviewed by subject experts from colleges and universities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/548zAccess online version02228nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100003600160245006200196250000700258264004300265264006100308264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002500491490002700516505020200543520075200745542002701497546001601524588004001540650003501580650002701615650002601642700002301668710003901691856007601730OTLid0000549MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aÇetinkaya-Rundel, Mineeauthor00aIntroduction to Modern StatisticscMine Çetinkaya-Rundel  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenIntroc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- I: Introduction to data -- II: Exploratory data analysis -- III: Regression modeling -- IV: Foundations of inference -- V: Statistical inference -- VI: Inferential modeling -- Appendices0 aIntroduction to Modern Statistics is a re-imagining of a previous title, Introduction to Statistics with Randomization and Simulation. The new book puts a heavy emphasis on exploratory data analysis (specifically exploring multivariate relationships using visualization, summarization, and descriptive models) and provides a thorough discussion of simulation-based inference using randomization and bootstrapping, followed by a presentation of the related Central Limit Theorem based approaches. The second edition of IMS has updated datasets, additional exercises, a new application for chapter 3, and updated text and code to reflect changes in best practices. You can access the full PDF by clicking the Read Free Sample button at the PDF link.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aHardin, Joeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/549zAccess online version01559nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002700155245003700182264004300219264006400262264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505014600503520032600649542002700975546001601002588004101018650002301059710003901082856007601121OTLid0000551MnU20260406020416.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947112049  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aGrafman, Lonnyeauthor00aTo Catch the RaincLonny Grafman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArcata, CaliforniabHumboldt State University Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Components -- 3. Pressure -- 4. Calculations -- 5. Full Systems and Stories -- 6. Other Useful Stuff -- 7. Problem Sets0 aTo Catch the Rain is targeted at makers – DIYers looking for practical solutions to water problems for themselves or their communities. The book also provides an excellent overview of rainwater harvesting for students and teachers in environmental science, sustainable design, international development and engineering.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/551zAccess online version04425nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100002400160245004800184250001600232264004300248264006100291264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002500474490002700499505166800526520140702194542002703601546001603628588004003644650003503684650002703719650002603746700003003772700003603802700002603838710003903864856007603903OTLid0000552MnU20260406020416.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aDiez, Davideauthor00aAdvanced High School StatisticscDavid Diez  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenIntroc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Data collection -- 1.1 Case study -- 1.2 Data basics -- 1.3 Overview of data collection principles -- 1.4 Observational studies and sampling strategies -- 1.5 Experiments -- 2 Summarizing data -- 2.1 Examining numerical data -- 2.2 Numerical summaries and box plots -- 2.3 Considering categorical data -- 2.4 Case study: malaria vaccine (special topic) -- 3 Probability -- 3.1 Defining probability -- 3.2 Conditional probability -- 3.3 The binomial formula -- 3.4 Simulations -- 3.5 Random variables -- 3.6 Continuous distributions -- 4 Distributions of random variables -- 4.1 Normal distribution -- 4.2 Sampling distribution of a sample mean -- 4.3 Geometric distribution -- 4.4 Binomial distribution -- 4.5 Sampling distribution of a sample proportion -- 5 Foundation for inference -- 5.1 Estimating unknown parameters -- 5.2 Confidence intervals -- 5.3 Introducing hypothesis testing -- 5.4 Does it make sense? -- 6 Inference for categorical data -- 6.1 Inference for a single proportion -- 6.2 Difference of two proportions -- 6.3 Testing for goodness of fit using chi-square -- 6.4 Homogeneity and independence in two-way tables -- 7 Inference for numerical data -- 7.1 Inference for a mean with the t-distribution -- 7.2 Inference for paired data -- 7.3 Inference for the difference of two means -- 8 Introduction to linear regression -- 8.1 Line fitting, residuals, and correlation -- 8.2 Fitting a line by least squares regression -- 8.3 Inference for the slope of a regression line -- 8.4 Transformations for skewed data -- A Exercise solutions -- B Distribution tables -- C Distribution Tables -- D Calculator reference, Formulas, and Inference guide0 aWe hope readers will take away three ideas from this book in addition to forming a foundationof statistical thinking and methods. (1) Statistics is an applied field with a wide range of practical applications. (2) You don't have to be a math guru to learn from real, interesting data. (3) Data are messy, and statistical tools are imperfect. But, when you understand the strengths and weaknesses of these tools, you can use them to learn about the real world. Textbook overviewThe chapters of this book are as follows: 1. Data collection. Data structures, variables, and basic data collection techniques. 2. Summarizing data. Data summaries and graphics. 3. Probability. The basic principles of probability. 4. Distributions of random variables. Introduction to key distributions, and how the normal model applies to the sample mean and sample proportion. 5. Foundation for inference. General ideas for statistical inference in the context of estimating the population proportion. 6. Inference for categorical data. Inference for proportions using the normal and chisquare distributions. 7. Inference for numerical data. Inference for one or two sample means using the t distribution, and comparisons of many means using ANOVA. 8. Introduction to linear regression. An introduction to regression with two variables. Instructions are also provided in several sections for using Casio and TI calculators.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aBarr, Christophereauthor1 aÇetinkaya-Rundel, Mineeauthor1 aDorazio, Leaheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/552zAccess online version04951nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000800157050000900165050000700174100002800181245009500209264004300304264007200347264001200419300002200431336002600453337002600479338003600505341002800541490002700569505237200596520124702968542001604215546001604231588004004247650002504287650002604312650003304338650003104371710003904402856007604441OTLid0000553MnU20260406020417.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783744237  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aB72 4aJA71 4aH11 aRobeyns, Ingrideauthor00aWellbeing, Freedom and Social JusticebThe Capability Approach Re-ExaminedcIngrid Robeyns 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- 1. Introduction -- 1.1 Why the capability approach? -- 1.2 The worries of the sceptics -- 1.3 A yardstick for the evaluation of prosperity and progress -- 1.4 Scope and development of the capability approach -- 1.5 A guide for the reader -- 2. Core Ideas and the Framework -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 A preliminary definition of the capability approach -- 2.3 The capability approach versus capability theories -- 2.4 The many modes of capability analysis -- 2.5 The modular view of the capability approach -- 2.6 The A-module: the non-optional core of all capability theories -- 2.7 The B-modules: non-optional modules with optional content -- 2.8 The C-modules: contingent modules -- 2.9 The modular view of the capability account: a summary -- 2.10 Hybrid theories -- 2.11 The relevance and implications of the modular view -- 2.12 A visualisation of the core conceptual elements -- 2.13 The narrow and broad uses of the capability approach -- 2.14 Conclusion -- 3. Clarifications -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Refining the notions of ‘capability' and ‘functioning' -- 3.3 Are capabilities freedoms, and if so, which ones? -- 3.4 Functionings or capabilities? -- 3.5 Human diversity in the capability approach -- 3.6 Collective capabilities -- 3.7 Which notion of wellbeing is used in the capability approach? -- 3.8 Happiness and the capability approach -- 3.9 The capability approach and adaptive preferences -- 3.10 Can the capability approach be an explanatory theory? -- 3.11 A suitable theory for all normative questions? -- 3.12 The role of resources in the capability approach -- 3.13 The capability approach and theories of justice -- 3.14 Capabilities and human rights -- 3.15 Conclusion -- 4. Critiques and Debates -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Is everything that's called a capability genuinely a capability? -- 4.3 Should we commit to a specific list of capabilities? -- 4.4 Why not use the notion of needs? -- 4.5 Does the capability approach only address the government? -- 4.6 Is the capability approach too individualistic? -- 4.7 What about power and political economy? -- 4.8 Is the capability approach a liberal theory? -- 4.9 Why ‘human development' is not the same idea -- 4.10 Can the capability approach change welfare economics? -- 4.11 Taking stock -- 5. Which Future for the Capability Approach? -- References -- Index0 aHow do we evaluate ambiguous concepts such as wellbeing, freedom, and social justice? How do we develop policies that offer everyone the best chance to achieve what they want from life? The capability approach, a theoretical framework pioneered by the philosopher and economist Amartya Sen in the 1980s, has become an increasingly influential way to think about these issues. Wellbeing, Freedom and Social Justice: The Capability Approach Re-Examined is both an introduction to the capability approach and a thorough evaluation of the challenges and disputes that have engrossed the scholars who have developed it. Ingrid Robeyns offers her own illuminating and rigorously interdisciplinary interpretation, arguing that by appreciating the distinction between the general capability approach and more specific capability theories or applications we can create a powerful and flexible tool for use in a variety of academic disciplines and fields of policymaking. This book provides an original and comprehensive account that will appeal to scholars of the capability approach, new readers looking for an interdisciplinary introduction, and those interested in theories of justice, human rights, basic needs, and the human development approach.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/553zAccess online version03017nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245005200163264004300215264009600258264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505127700531520059501808542003002403546001602433588004002449650002602489650002502515710003902540856007602579OTLid0000554MnU20260406020730.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG1281 aManson, Steveneauthor00aMapping, Society, and TechnologycSteven Manson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Maps, Society, and Technology -- 1.1 Maps, Society, & Technology -- 1.2 A Very Short History -- 1.3 Maps & Liberal Education -- 1.4 Conclusion -- 2. Data -- 2.1 What are Spatial Data? -- 2.2 Collecting Spatial Data -- 2.3 Metadata -- 2.4 Census Data -- 2.5 Data Concepts & Problems -- 2.6 Mapping Tools -- 2.7 Conclusion -- 3. Scale and Projections -- 3.1 Scale -- 3.2 Extent vs. Resolution -- 3.3 Coordinates & Projections -- 3.4 Projection Mechanics -- 3.5 Conclusion -- 4. Design and Symbolization -- 4.1 Map Elements -- 4.2 Design Principles -- 4.3 Symbolization -- 4.4 Conclusion -- 5. Simplification -- 5.1 Thematic Map Types -- 5.2 Standardization -- 5.3 Classification -- 5.4 Generalization -- 5.5 Conclusion -- 6. Analysis -- 6.1 Point Pattern Analysis -- 6.2 Autocorrelation Analysis -- 6.3 Proximity Analysis -- 6.4 Correlation Analysis -- 6.6 Conclusion -- 7. Lying With Maps -- 7.1 Little lies -- 7.2 Big Lies -- 7.3 Conclusion -- 8. Surveillance -- 8.1 Surveillance -- 8.2 Inside Surveillance -- 8.3 Outside Surveillance -- 8.4 Conclusion -- 9. Social Maps -- 9.1 Volunteered Information -- 9.2 Neogeography -- 9.3 Digital Divides -- 9.4 Digital Maps, Real world -- 9.5 Conclusion -- 10. Conclusion -- Author and Publication Information -- Acknowledgments0 aThis book is about how to read, use, and create maps. Our exploration of maps will be informed by a contextual understanding of how maps reflect the relationship between society and technology, and how mapping is an essential form of scientific and artistic inquiry. We will also explore how mapping is used to address a variety of societal issues, such as land use planning and political gerrymandering. You will gain insight into the technical underpinnings of mapping as a science approach, complement on-going interest and activities, or provide an applied focus for research or policy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/554zAccess online version02293nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245005400160264004300214264004300257264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002500422490002700447505026700474520092600741542004101667546001601708588004001724650002601764650002601790710003901816856007601855OTLid0000555MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aOndich, Jodyeauthor00aWords of WisdombIntro to PhilosophycJody Ondich 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDuluth, MinnesotabJody Ondichc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- I. Classics -- II. Medieval Materials -- III. Spiritual Philosophy and Tales from the World -- IV. Early Modern Wisdom 1500-1750 -- V. Late Modern Wisdom 1750-1950 CE -- VI. Modern Wisdom -- VII. Links to Additional Great Resources -- Back Matter0 aWords of Wisdom can come from anyone. In this text we discuss topics ranging from "Are Humans good by nature?" to "Is there a God?" to "Do I have the right to my own opinion?" Philosophy is the study of wisdom, and can emerge in our conversations in social media, in school, around the family dinner table, and even in the car. The text uses materials that are 2,500 years old, and materials that were in the news this year. Wise people come in all shapes and types, and from every culture on earth. We have poetry and folktales, sacred writings and letters. Dialogues and interviews, news columns, Ted Talks, You Tube recordings and even comedy are all a part of the content in this text.You will be most successful reading this on line. The formatting in the downloadable versions is not wonderful. There is work being done by the software, but in the meantime, you will want to use it by clicking here on "read book:".1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/555zAccess online version02838nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002600144245005900170264004300229264006400272264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505081600513520089001329542001602219546001602235588004102251650002602292650003102318710003902349856007602388OTLid0000556MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aKelland, Markeauthor00aPersonality Theory in a Cultural ContextcMark Kelland 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Personality -- 2 Culture and Personality -- 3 Sigmund Freud -- 4 Alfred Adler and Harry Stack Sullivan -- 5 Neo-Freudian Perspectives on Personality -- 6 Karen Horney and Erich Fromm -- 7 Psychology of Women -- 8 Carl Rogers and Abraham Maslow -- 9 Viktor Frankl, Rollo May, and Existential Psychology -- 10 Trait Theories of Personality -- 11 Biology and Personality -- 12 Erik Erikson -- 13 Carl Jung -- 14 Yoga and Buddhism as Personality Development Paths -- 15 Religious Perspectives on Personality -- 16 African Perspective on Personality -- 17 Learning Theory and Personality Development -- 18 Social Learning Theory and Personality Development -- 19 Cognitive Perspectives on Personality Development -- 20 Personality Disorders -- 21 References for Personality -- Index -- Attributions0 aWhen you first think of personality, what comes to mind? When we refer to certain people as being “personalities,” we usually mean they are famous, people like movie stars or your favorite band. When we describe a person as having “lots of personality,” we usually mean they are outgoing and fun-loving, the kind of person we like to spend time with. But does this tell us anything about personality itself? Although we may think we have an understanding of what personality is, professional psychologists always seek to move beyond what people think they know in order to determine what is actually real or at least as close to real as we can come. In the pursuit of truly understanding personality, however, many personality theorists seem to have been focused on a particularly Western cultural approach that owes much of its history to the pioneering work of Sigmund Freud.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/556zAccess online version02873nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001600143050001100159050000800170100002800178245010600206264004300312264004900355264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002800526490002700554505125000581520036001831542002702191546001602218588004002234650002302274650002402297650002702321710003902348856007602387OTLid0000557MnU20260406020417.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLachniet, Jasoneauthor00aIntroduction to GNU OctavebA brief tutorial for linear algebra and calculus studentscJason Lachniet 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWytheville, VirginiabJason Lachnietc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Preface -- 1 Basic operation -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Navigating the GUI -- 1.3 Matrices and vectors -- 1.4 Plotting -- Chapter 1 Exercises -- 2 Matrices and linear systems -- 2.1 Linear systems -- 2.2 Polynomial curve fitting -- 2.3 Matrix transformations -- Chapter 2 Exercises -- 3 Calculus -- 3.1 Limits, sequences, and series -- 3.2 Numerical integration -- 3.3 Parametric, polar, and implicit functions -- 3.4 Complex variables -- 3.5 Special functions -- 3.6 Symbolic operations -- Chapter 3 Exercises -- 4 Eigenvalue problems -- 4.1 Eigenvalues and eigenvectors -- 4.2 Markov chains -- 4.3 Diagonalization -- 4.4 Singular value decomposition -- 4.5 Gram-Schmidt and the QR algorithm -- Chapter 4 Exercises -- 5 Additional topics -- 5.1 Three dimensional graphs -- 5.2 Multiple integrals -- 5.3 Vector fields -- 5.4 Statistics -- 5.5 Differential equations -- Chapter 5 Exercises -- 6 Applied projects -- 6.1 SVD and digital image compression -- 6.2 The Gini index and nonlinear curve-fitting -- 6.3 Designing a helical strake: arc length and curvature -- 6.4 Modeling a cave passage: cubic spline curves -- 6.5 Graphs of surfaces and 3D-printing -- A MATLAB compatibility -- B List of Octave commands -- References -- Index0 aThis brief book provides a noncomprehensive introduction to GNU Octave, a free open source alternative to MatLab. The basic syntax and usage is explained through concrete examples from the mathematics courses a math, computer science, or engineering major encounters in the first two years of college: linear algebra, calculus, and differential equations.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/557zAccess online version02274nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001000162050001300172100002500185245009500210264004300305264004100348264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002800511490002700539505017900566520067700745542002701422546001601449588004101465650004301506650003101549650002501580650003601605700002501641700003501666710003901701856007601740OTLid0000558MnU20260406020419.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780994503992  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH1 4aHM586 4aLB1062.61 aJones, Petereauthor00aIntercultural LearningbCritical preparation for international student travelcPeter Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUltimo, AustraliabUTS ePRESSc2019. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1: Culture -- Module 2: Imperialism & Cultural Diversity -- Module 3: Racism & Privilege -- Module 4: Critical Reflection & Culture -- Module 5: Intercultural Practice0 aIntercultural learning: Critical preparation for international student travel aims to take students beyond practical preparation, to equip them with a critical lens through which to view and understand their international experiences. The book leads students toward a deeper understanding of culture and cultural difference through an exploration of challenging concepts such as imperialism, racism, privilege and intercultural practice. As an adjunct to traditional approaches, the book adds a significant and valuable dimension to the process of preparing students for international study, increasing the potential for meaningful and transformative learning experiences.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMiles, Debraeauthor1 aGopalkrishnan, Narayaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/558zAccess online version02903nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146050001000160050000700170100003000177245010500207264004300312264005200355264001200407300002200419336002600441337002600467338003600493341002500529490002700554505085500581520067801436542002702114546001602141588004002157650003502197650002702232650002602259650002602285650003102311710003902342856007602381OTLid0000559MnU20260406020736.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-280 4aBF121 4aH11 aNavarro, Danielleeauthor00aLearning Statistics with RbA tutorial for psychology students and other beginnerscDanielle Navarro 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKensington, AustraliabDanielle Navarroc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Background -- Chapter 1: Why do we learn statistics? -- Chatper 2: A brief introduction to research design -- II. An introduction to R -- Chapter 3: Getting started with R -- Chapter 4: Additional R concepts -- III. Working with data -- Chapter 5: Descriptive statistics -- Chapter 6: Drawing graphs -- Chapter 7: Pragmatic matters -- Chapter 8: Basic programming -- IV. Statistical theory -- Prelude -- Chapter 9: Introduction to probability -- Chapter 10: Estimating unknown quantities from a sample -- Chapter 11: Hypothesis testing -- V. Statistical tools -- Chapter 12: Categorical data analysis -- Chapter 13: Comparing two means -- Chapter 14: Comparing several means (one-way ANOVA) -- Chapter 15: Linear regression -- Chapter 16: Factorial ANOVA -- VI. Other topics -- Chapter 17: Bayesian statistics -- Chapter 18: Epilogue -- References0 aLearning Statistics with R covers the contents of an introductory statistics class, as typically taught to undergraduate psychology students, focusing on the use of the R statistical software. The book discusses how to get started in R as well as giving an introduction to data manipulation and writing scripts. From a statistical perspective, the book discusses descriptive statistics and graphing first, followed by chapters on probability theory, sampling and estimation, and null hypothesis testing. After introducing the theory, the book covers the analysis of contingency tables, t-tests, ANOVAs and regression. Bayesian statistics are covered at the end of the book.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/559zAccess online version02138nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003100136245005000167264004300217264006300260264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505064000500520039301140542001601533546001601549588004001565650003201605700002401637710003901661856007601700OTLid0000560MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSeverance, Charleseauthor00aHigh Performance ComputingcCharles Severance 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc2021. 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Modern Computer Architectures -- 1.1 Memory -- 1.2 Floating-Point Numbers -- 2. Programming and Tuning Software -- 2.1 What a Compiler Does -- 2.2 Timing and Profiling -- 2.3 Eliminating Clutter -- 2.4 Loop Optimizations -- 3. Shared-Memory Parallel Processors -- 3.1 Understanding Parallelism -- 3.2 Shared-Memory Multiprocessors -- 3.3 Programming Shared-Memory Multiprocessors -- 4. Scalable Parallel Processing -- 4.1 Language Support for Performance -- 4.2 Message-Passing Environments -- 5. Appendixes -- 5.1 Appendix C: High Performance Microprocessors -- 5.2 Appendix B: Looking at Assembly Language -- Index -- Attributions0 aThe purpose of this book is to teach new programmers and scientists about the basics of High Performance Computing. Too many parallel and high performance computing books focus on the architecture, theory and computer science surrounding HPC. This book speaks to the practicing chemistry student, physicist, or biologist who need to write and run their programs as part of their research.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aDowd, Kevineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/560zAccess online version02217nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002900145245005900174250001600233264004300249264008000292264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505023700549520057500786542004101361546001601402588004001418650003001458650002301488700002901511700002701540700003001567700003201597700002701629710003901656856007601695OTLid0000562MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aZehnder, Caralyneauthor00aIntroduction to Environmental SciencecCaralyn Zehnder  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Population Ecology -- Chapter 3: Human Demography -- Chapter 4: Non-Renewable Energy -- Chapter 5: Alternative Energy -- Chapter 6: Air Pollution -- Chapter 7: Climate Change -- Chapter 8: Water0 aThis course uses the basic principles of biology and earth science as a context for understanding environmental policies and resource management practices. Our planet is facing unprecedented environmental challenges, from oil spills to global climate change. In ENSC 1000, you will learn about the science behind these problems; preparing you to make an informed, invaluable contribution to Earth's future. I hope that each of you is engaged by the material presented and participates fully in the search for, acquisition of, and sharing of information within our class.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aManoylov, Kalinaeauthor1 aMutiti, Samueleauthor1 aMutiti, Christineeauthor1 aVandeVoort, Allisoneauthor1 aBennett, Donnaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/562zAccess online version02027nam a2200505 i 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.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA421 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aFlynn, Scotteauthor00aConcepts of Fitness and WellnesscScott Flynn 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Healthy Behaviors -- 2. Fitness Principles -- 3. Cardiorespiratory Fitness -- 4. Muscular Fitness -- 5. Flexibility -- 6. Body Composition -- 7. Nutrition -- 8. Weight Management -- 9. Stress -- 10. Cardiovascular Disease -- 11. Cancer -- 12. Substance Use and Abuse -- 13. Sexually Transmitted Infections0 aThis open textbook for Concepts of Fitness and Wellness at Georgia Highlands College was created through a Round Seven ALG Textbook Transformation Grant.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aJellum, Lisaeauthor1 aHoward, Jonathaneauthor1 aMoser, Altheaeauthor1 aMathis, Davideauthor1 aCollins, Christineauthor1 aHenderson, Sharryseeauthor1 aWatjen, Connieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/563zAccess online version04956nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002500140245006500165250001600230264004300246264003800289264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505344000504520042703944542001604371546001604387588004004403650003604443710003904479856007604518OTLid0000565MnU20260406020712.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aDillon, Daveeauthor00aModern Blueprint for College and Career SuccesscDave Dillon  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEl Cajon, CAbDave Dillonc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicense -- What Students May Expect -- Curator's Statement -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- I. Unit 1: Student Success Strategies -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Motivation, Growth Mindset, and Self-Efficacy -- Chapter 3: College Culture and Expectations -- Chapter 4: Creating Your Study Environment -- Chapter 5: Learning Theory -- Chapter 6: Reading Techniques -- Chapter 7: Listening and Note Taking -- Chapter 8: Memorizing -- Chapter 9: Test Preparation and Test Taking -- Chapter 10: Placement Assessment -- Chapter 11: Critical Thinking and Creative Thinking -- Chapter 12: Fact Checking -- Chapter 13: Using Library Databases -- II. Unit 2: Self-Management -- Chapter 14: Time Management in College -- Chapter 15: Procrastination -- Chapter 16: Time Management Skills -- Chapter 17: Prioritization -- Chapter 18: Enhanced Strategies for Time and Task Management -- Chapter 19: Setting Goals and Staying Motivated -- Chapter 20: Cultural Influences on the Perception of Time -- III. Unit 3: Career Development -- Chapter 21: Planning Your Degree Path -- Chapter 22: Effective Planning -- Chapter 23: Using the Career Planning Cycle -- Chapter 24: Life Plan -- Chapter 25: Career Assessments -- Chapter 26: Career Research and Exploration -- Chapter 27: Major and Career Selection -- Chapter 28: Educational Planning -- Chapter 29: Job Search -- Chapter 30: Networking -- Chapter 31: Cover Letter and Resume -- Chapter 31: Interviewing Skills for Success -- Chapter 32: Diversity and Inclusion in the Workplace -- IV. Unit 4: Health and Wellness -- Chapter 33: Introduction to Health and Wellness -- Chapter: 34 Creating Your Best Self -- Chapter 35: Your Overall Well-Being -- Chapter 36: The Mind-Body Connection -- Chapter 37: Mental Health Basics -- Chapter 38: The Role of Social Media on Mental Health -- Chapter 39: Physical Health Basics -- Chapter 40: Safety Consciousness -- Chapter 41: Life Stages Theory -- Chapter 42: Community Resources and On Campus Resources -- Chapter 43: Culturally Relevant Approaches to Health and Wellness -- V. Unit 5: Self and Cultural Awareness -- Chapter 44: Introduction to Understanding Civility and Cultural Competence -- Chapter 45: Appreciation of Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion -- Chapter 46: Diversity and Accessibility -- Chapter 47: Studying at a Predominately White Institution (PWI) -- Chapter 48: Why So Many Questions? -- Chapter 49: Cultural Competence -- Chapter 50: Cultural Humility -- Chapter 51: Navigating the Diversity Landscape and Discrimination -- Chapter 52: Cultural Competence and Self-Awareness -- Chapter 53: Anti-Racism -- VI. Unit 6: Social Development -- Chapter 54: Introduction to Building Relationships -- Chapter 55: The Benefits of Healthy Relationships -- Chapter 56: Building Relationships in College -- Chapter 57: Working in Groups -- Chapter 58: Verbal and Non-verbal Communication -- Chapter 59: Active Listening -- Chapter 60: Interpersonal Skills -- Chapter 61: Mass Media Communication -- Chapter 62: Cross-Cultural Communication -- VII. Unit 7: Financial Literacy -- Chapter 63: Introduction to Financial Literacy -- Chapter 64: Personal Financial Planning -- Chapter 65: Savings, Expenses, and Budgeting -- Chapter 66: Credit Cards -- Chapter 67: College Affordability -- Chapter 68: Personal Budget -- Chapter 69: Retirement Savings -- Chapter 70: Socioeconomic and Cultural Influences on Financial Behaviors and Perspectives0 aA free, Open Educational Resource, Modern Blueprint for College and Career Success is a post pandemic, students' guide for classroom and career success. Covering student success strategies, self-management, career development, health and wellness, self and cultural awareness, social development, and financial literacy, Modern Blueprint includes relevant content for students attending college with an equity perspective.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/565zAccess online version03606nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245008100179264004300260264007400303264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505099100554520143601545542001602981546001602997588004003013650003803053650002603091710003903117856007603156OTLid0000566MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783961100347  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKroeger, Pauleauthor00aAnalyzing meaningbAn introduction to semantics and pragmaticscPaul Kroeger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Foundational concepts -- Chapter 1: The meaning of meaning -- Chapter 2: Referring, denoting, and expressing -- Chapter 3: Truth and inference -- Chapter 4: The logic of truth -- II. Word meanings -- Chapter 5: Word senses -- Chapter 6: Lexical sense relations -- Chapter 7: Components of lexical meaning -- III. Implicature -- Chapter 8: Grice's theory of Implicature -- Chapter 9: Pragmatic inference after Grice -- Chapter 10: Indirect Speech Acts -- Chapter 11: Conventional implicature and use-conditional meaning -- IV. Compositional semantics -- Chapter 12: How meanings are composed -- Chapter 13: Modeling compositionality -- Chapter 14: Quantifiers -- Chapter 15: Intensional contexts -- V. Modals, conditionals, and causation -- Chapter 16: Modality -- Chapter 17: Evidentiality -- Chapter 18: Because -- Chapter 19: Conditionals -- VI. Tense & aspect -- Chapter 20: Aspect and Aktionsart -- Chapter 21: Tense -- Cahpter 22: Varieties of the Perfect -- References -- Index0 aThis book provides an introduction to the study of meaning in human language, from a linguistic perspective. It covers a fairly broad range of topics, including lexical semantics, compositional semantics, and pragmatics. The chapters are organized into six units: (1) Foundational concepts; (2) Word meanings; (3) Implicature (including indirect speech acts); (4) Compositional semantics; (5) Modals, conditionals, and causation; (6) Tense & aspect.Most of the chapters include exercises which can be used for class discussion and/or homework assignments, and each chapter contains references for additional reading on the topics covered.As the title indicates, this book is truly an INTRODUCTION: it provides a solid foundation which will prepare students to take more advanced and specialized courses in semantics and/or pragmatics. It is also intended as a reference for fieldworkers doing primary research on under-documented languages, to help them write grammatical descriptions that deal carefully and clearly with semantic issues. The approach adopted here is largely descriptive and non-formal (or, in some places, semi-formal), although some basic logical notation is introduced. The book is written at level which should be appropriate for advanced undergraduate or beginning graduate students. It presupposes some previous coursework in linguistics, but does not presuppose any background in formal logic or set theory.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/566zAccess online version03556nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002500149245005700174264004300231264008000274264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505089900528520148501427542001602912546001602928588004102944650002302985650002303008700002403031710003903055856007603094OTLid0000567MnU20260406020418.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aSmith, Mollyeauthor00aMicrobiology for Allied Health StudentscMolly Smith 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: An Invisible World -- Chapter 2: The Cell -- Chapter 3: The Eukaryotes of Microbiology -- Chapter 4: Acellular Pathogens -- Chapter 5: Microbial Mechanisms of Pathogenicity -- Chapter 6: Innate Nonspecific Host Defenses -- Chapter 7: Adaptive Specific Host Defenses -- Chapter 8: Diseases of the Immune System -- Chapter 9: Control of Microbial Growth -- Chapter 10: Antimicrobial Drugs -- Chapter 11: Disease and Epidemiology -- Chapter 12: Skin and Eye Infections -- Chapter 13: Respiratory System Infections -- Chapter 14: Urogenital System Infections -- Chapter 15: Digestive System Infections -- Chapter 16: Circulatory and Lymphatic System Infections -- Chapter 17: Nervous System Infections -- Chapter 18: Mechanisms of Microbial Genetics -- Appendix A: Fundamentals of Physics and Chemistry Important to Microbiology -- Appendix B: Mathematical Basics -- Appendix C: Glossary0 aMicrobiology for Allied Health Students is designed to cover the scope and sequence requirements for the single semester Microbiology course for non-majors and allied health students. The book presents the core concepts of microbiology with a focus on applications for careers in allied health. The pedagogical features of Microbiology for Allied Health Students make the material interesting and accessible to students while maintaining the career-application focus and scientific rigor inherent in the subject matter. The scope and sequence of Microbiology for Allied Health Students has been developed and vetted with input from numerous instructors at institutions across the U.S. It is designed to meet the needs of most microbiology courses allied health students. With these objectives in mind, the content of this textbook has been arranged in a logical progression from fundamental to more advanced concepts. The opening chapters present an overview of the discipline, with individual chapters focusing on cellular biology as well as each of the different types of microorganisms and the various means by which we can control and combat microbial growth. The focus turns to microbial pathogenicity, emphasizing how interactions between microbes and the human immune system contribute to human health and disease. The last several chapters of the text provide a survey of medical microbiology, presenting the characteristics of microbial diseases organized by body system.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aSelby, Saraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/567zAccess online version03113nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135100002600146245009200172264004300264264008000307264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002800509490002700537505053100564520128901095542004102384546001602425588004002441650003802481650002602519650002402545700003102569710003902600856007602639OTLid0000568MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aPE14081 aHall, Barbaraeauthor00aCollege ESL WritersbApplied Grammar and Composing Strategies for SuccesscBarbara Hall 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Writing Basics - What Makes a Good Sentence? -- Chapter 2: Sentence Variety - How do I Refine My Writing? -- Chapter 3: Writing Paragraphs - Separating Ideas and Shaping Content -- Chapter 4: Writing Essays - From Start to Finish -- Chapter 5: Revising and Editing -- Chapter 6: Working with Words - Usage, Form, & Context -- Chapter 7: Overview of English Grammar -- Chapter 8: Punctuation and Capitalization -- Chapter 9: Good Writing - Models and Samples -- Chapter 10: Suggested Writing Topics & Grading Rubrics0 aCollege ESL Writers: Applied Grammar and Composing Strategies for Success is designed as a comprehensive grammar and writing etext for high intermediate and advanced level non-native speakers of English. We open the text with a discussion on the sentence and then break it down into its elemental components, before reconstructing them into effective sentences with paragraphs and larger academic assignments. Following that, we provide instruction in paragraph and essay writing with several opportunities to both review the fundamentals as well as to demonstrate mastery and move on to more challenging assignments.We have structured the etext into three basic parts. Part I, Composing Strategies and Techniques, includes a sequenced discussion from composing effective sentences through paragraph and essay writing. This includes the prewriting and planning stages of writing as well as the revising and editing stage in the first five chapters. Part II, Language Use, Grammar, and Mechanics, is meant to be used as a grammar and mechanics handbook as well as the practice and review of idiomatic wording. Part III, All About Writing: Samples, Topics, and Rubrics, has chapters with additional writing topics for practice, sample student papers, and rubrics for evaluating writing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aWallace, Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/568zAccess online version03391nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135100002500143245005500168264004300223264006500266264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505090600508520127401414542002702688546001602715588004102731650002302772650002602795650002602821700003102847710003902878856007602917OTLid0000569MnU20260406020420.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aB721 aPayind, Alameauthor00aKeys to Understanding the Middle EastcAlam Payind 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aColumbus, OhiobThe Ohio State University Pressbooksc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Languages -- Languages -- Linguistic Groups -- Arabic's Influence in the Region -- Islamic Expansion -- Chapter Two: Faith and Religious Identity -- Faith and Religious Identity -- Diverse Religious Identities of the Middle East -- Religious DIversity -- Islam in Middle Eastern Societies -- What is Shar'ia Law -- Religious Pluralism -- Prayer, A Part of Daily Life for Muslims Around the World -- Shi'ism -- The Mystical Tradition of Sufism, or Tasawwuf -- Who are the Salafis/Wahabis? -- Chapter Three: The Middle East and the Impact of Imperialism -- The Middle East and the Impact of Imperialism -- Defining the Term "Middle East" -- National Borders as Foreign Intervention -- The Impact of Imperialism on the Region -- Modernization Versus Westernization -- Gamal Abdul Nasser and Non-Alignment -- Nation States and Stateless Nations -- The U.S. and Post-Bandung Imperial Dominance0 aThis book is intended for readers who have never studied the Middle East, or experts who may wish to fill gaps in their knowledge of the region from other disciplines. Whether for establishing or deepening one's knowledge of the region, these fundamentals are important to know. The languages, cultural, religious and sectarian communities of the region, and selected turning points and influential people in history are starting points for gaining an understanding of the diverse contexts of the region. It isbased on introductoryand graduatecourseson thecontemporaryMiddle East, which the Center's director, Dr. Alam Payind, has been teaching for the past 30 years. The book's co-author,Melinda McClimans,hastaught these and other courses with him, as well as her own,for the past 15years. The material isintendedengage with diverse – even conflicting – culturaland historicalperspectives,andways of perceivingboth Middle Easternandworld historyfrom perspectives within the region. It is not intended to reinforce a monolithic or matter-of-fact perception of the region.For this and many other reasons, images are an important aspect of the knowledge presented. Each chapter starts with links to its image galleries, along with other visual aids and key elements.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aMcClimans, Melindaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/569zAccess online version04422nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144100002800155245005600183264004300239264007800282264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505177900537520141502316542002703731546001603758588004003774650003303814650002503847650003703872710003903909856007603948OTLid0000570MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLB15551 aManes, Michelleeauthor00aMathematics for Elementary TeacherscMichelle Manes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Hawaii Manoac[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Problem Solving -- Introduction -- Problem or Exercise? -- Problem Solving Strategies -- Beware of Patterns! -- Problem Bank -- Careful Use of Language in Mathematics -- Explaning Your Work -- The Last Step -- II. Place Value -- Dots and Boxes -- Other Rules -- Binary Numbers -- Other Bases -- Number Systems -- Even Numbers -- Problem Bank -- Exploration -- III. Number and Operations -- Introduction -- Addition: Dots and Boxes -- Subtration: Dots and Boxes -- Multiplication: Dots and Boxes -- Division: Dots and Boxes -- Number Line Model -- Area Model for Multiplication -- Properties of Operations -- Division Explorations -- Problem Bank -- IV. Fractions -- Introduction -- What is a Fraction? -- The Key Fraction Rule -- Adding and Subtracting Fractions -- What is a Fraction? Revisited -- Multiplying Fractions -- Dividing Fractions: Meaning -- Dividing Fractions: Invert and Multiply -- Dividing Fractions: Problems -- Fractions involving zero -- Problem Bank -- Egyptian Fractions -- Algebra Connections -- What is a Fraction? Part 3 -- V. Patterns and Algebraic Thinking -- Introduction -- Borders on a Square -- Careful Use of Language in Mathematics: = -- Growing Patterns -- Matching Game -- Structural and Procedural Algebra -- Problem Bank -- VI. Place Value and Decimals -- Review of Dots & Boxes Model -- Decimals -- x-mals -- Division and Decimals -- More x -mals -- Terminating or Repeating? -- Matching Game -- Operations on Decimals -- Orders of Magnitude -- Problem Bank -- VII. Geometry -- Introduction -- Tangrams -- Triangles and Quadrilaterals -- Polygons -- Platonic Solids -- Painted Cubes -- Symmetry -- Geometry in Art and Science -- Problem Bank -- VIII. Voyaging on Hokule?a -- Introduction -- Hokule?a -- Worldwide Voyage -- Navigation0 aThis book will help you to understand elementary mathematics more deeply, gain facility with creating and using mathematical notation, develop a habit of looking for reasons and creating mathematical explanations, and become more comfortable exploring unfamiliar mathematical situations.The primary goal of this book is to help you learn to think like a mathematician in some very specific ways. You will:• Make sense of problems and persevere in solving them. You will develop and demonstrate this skill by working on difficult problems, making incremental progress, and revising solutions to problems as you learn more.• Reason abstractly and quantitatively. You will demonstrate this skill by learning to represent situations using mathematical notation (abstraction) as well as creating and testing examples (making situations more concrete).• Construct viable arguments and critique the reasoning of others. You will be expected to create both written and verbal explanations for your solutions to problems. The most important questions in this class are “Why?” and “How do you know you're right?” Practice asking these questions of yourself, of your professor, and of your fellow students.Throughout the book, you will learn how to learn mathematics on you own by reading, working on problems, and making sense of new ideas on your own and in collaboration with other students in the class.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/570zAccess online version03394nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002800136245005800164250000700222264004300229264006200272264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505077200508520150801280542004102788546001602829588004002845650003202885710003902917856007602956OTLid0000572MnU20260406020736.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aFiore, James M.eauthor00aEmbedded Controllers Using C and ArduinocJames Fiore  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bdissidentsc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCourse Introduction -- C Memory Organization -- C Language Basics -- C Language Basics II -- C Storage Types and Scope -- C Arrays and Strings -- C Conditionals and Looping -- C Pointers -- C Look-Up Tables -- C Structures -- C Linked Lists -- C Memory -- C File I/O -- C Command Line Arguments -- Embedded Programming -- Hardware Architecture -- AVR ATmega 328P Overview -- Bits & Pieces: includes and defines -- Bits & Pieces: Digital Input Circuitry -- Bits & Pieces: Digital Input Circuitry -- Bits & Pieces: pinMode -- Bits & Pieces: digitalWrite -- Bits & Pieces: delay -- Bits & Pieces: digitalRead -- Bits & Pieces: Analog Input Circuitry -- Bits & Pieces: analogRead -- Bits & Pieces: analogWrite -- Bits & Pieces: Timer/Counters -- Bits & Pieces: Interrupts0 aThis text is designed to introduce and expand upon material related to the C programming language and embedded controllers, and specifically, the Arduino development system and associated Atmel ATmega microcontrollers. It is intended to fit the time constraints of a typical 3 to 4 credit hour course for electrical engineering technology and computer engineering technology programs, although it could also fit the needs of a hardware-oriented course in computer science. As such, the text does not attempt to cover every aspect of the C language, the Arduino system or Atmel AVR microcontrollers. The first section deals with the C language itself. It is assumed that the student is a relative newcomer to the C language but has some experience with another high level language, for example, Python. This means concepts such as conditionals and iteration are already familiar and the student can get up and running fairly quickly. From there, the Arduino development environment is examined. Unlike the myriad Arduino books now available, this text does not simply rely on the Arduino libraries. As convenient as the libraries may be, there are other, sometimes far more efficient, ways of programming the boards. Many of the chapters examine library source code to see “what's under the hood”. This more generic approach means it will be easier for the student to use other processors and development systems instead of being tightly tied to one platform. There is a lab manual for this textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/572zAccess online version05291nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002800163245006300191264004300254264006200297264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002500481490002700506505320600533520087403739542004104613546001604654588004004670650003804710650004204748710003904790856007604829OTLid0000573MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781796543537  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aFiore, James M.eauthor00aSemiconductor DevicesbTheory and ApplicationcJames Fiore 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bdissidentsc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Semiconductor Fundamentals -- 1.0 Chapter Objectives -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Atomic Structure -- 1.3 Crystals -- 1.4 Doped Materials -- Summary -- Chapter 2: PN Junctions and Diodes -- 2.0 Chapter Objectives -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 The PN Junction -- 2.3 Diode Data Sheet Interpretation -- 2.4 Diode Circuit Models -- 2.5 Other Types of Diodes -- Summary -- Chapter 3: Diode Applications -- 3.0 Chapter Objectives -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Rectification -- 3.3 Clippers -- 3.4 Clampers -- Summary -- Chapter 4: Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs) -- 4.0 Chapter Objectives -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 The Bipolar Junction Transistor -- 4.3 BJT Collector Curves -- 4.4 BJT Data Sheet Interpretation -- 4.5 Ebers-Moll Model -- 4.6 DC Load Lines -- 4.7 BJT Switching and Driver Applications -- Summary -- Chapter 5: BJT Biasing -- 5.0 Chapter Objectives -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 The Need For Biasing -- 5.3 Two-Supply Emitter Bias -- 5.4 Voltage Divider Bias -- 5.5 Feedback Biasing -- Summary -- Chapter 6: Amplifier Concepts -- 6.0 Chapter Objectives -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Amplifier Model -- 6.3 Compliance and Distortion -- 6.4 Frequency Response and Noise -- 6.5 Miller's Theorem -- Summary -- Chapter 7: BJT Small Signal Amplifiers -- 7.0 Chapter Objectives -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Simplified AC Model of the BJT -- 7.3 Common Emitter Amplifier -- 7.4 Common Collector Amplifier -- 7.5 Common Base Amplifier -- 7.6 Multi-Stage Amplifiers -- Summary -- Chapter 8: BJT Class A Power Amplifiers -- 8.0 Chapter Objectives -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 Amplifier Classes -- 8.3 Class A Operation and Load Lines -- 8.4 Loudspeakers -- 8.5 Power Transistor Data Sheet Interpretation -- 8.6 Heat Sinks -- Summary -- Chapter 9: BJT Class B Power Amplifiers -- 9.0 Chapter Objectives -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 The Class B Configuration -- 9.3 Extensions and Refinements -- Summary -- Chapter 10: Junction Field Effect Transistors (JFETs) -- 10.0 Chapter Objectives -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 JFET Internals -- 10.3 JFET Data Sheet Interpretation -- 10.4 JFET Biasing -- Summary -- Chapter 11: JFET Small Signal Amplifiers -- 11.0 Chapter Objectives -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Simplified AC Model of the JFET -- 11.3 Common Source Amplifier -- 11.4 Common Drain Amplifier -- 11.5 Multi-stage and Combination Circuits -- 11.6 Ohmic Region Operation -- Summary -- Chapter 12: Metal Oxide Semiconductor FETs (MOSFETs) -- 12.0 Chapter Objectives -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The DE-MOSFET -- 12.3 DE-MOSFET Biasing -- 12.4 The E-MOSFET -- 12.5 E-MOSFET Data Sheet Interpretation -- 12.6 E-MOSFET Biasing -- Summary -- Chapter 13: MOSFET Small Signal Amplifiers -- 13.0 Chapter Objectives -- 13.1 Introduction -- 13.2 MOSFET Common Source Amplifiers -- 13.3 MOSFET Common Drain Followers -- Summary -- Chapter 14: Class D Power Amplifiers -- 14.0 Chapter Objectives -- 14.1 Introduction -- 14.2 Class D Basics -- 14.3 Pulse Width Modulation -- 14.4 Output Configurations -- Summary -- Chapter 15: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) -- 15.0 Chapter Objectives -- 15.1 Introduction -- 15.2 IGBT Internals -- 15.3 IGBT Data Sheet Interpretation -- 15.4 IGBT Applications -- Summary0 aThe goal of this text, as its name implies, is to allow the reader to become proficient in the analysis and design of circuits utilizing discrete semiconductor devices. It progresses from basic diodes through bipolar and field effect transistors. The text is intended for use in a first or second year course on semiconductors at the Associate or Baccalaureate level. In order to make effective use of this text, students should have already taken coursework in basic DC and AC circuits, and have a solid background in algebra and trigonometry along with exposure to phasors. Calculus is used in certain sections of the text but for the most part it is used for equation derivations and proofs, and is kept to a minimum. For students without a calculus background these sections may be skipped without a loss of continuity. There is also a lab manual for this textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/573zAccess online version05299nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002500145245009300170250000700263264004300270264006200313264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505305500552520101403607542004104621546001604662588004004678650003804718650004204756710003904798856007604837OTLid0000574MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aFiore, Jameseauthor00aOperational Amplifiers & Linear Integrated CircuitsbTheory and ApplicationcJames Fiore  a3e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bdissidentsc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introductory Concepts and Fundamentals -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 The Decibel -- 1.3 Bode Plots -- 1.4 Combining The Elements - Multi-Stage Effects -- 1.5 Circuit Simulations Using Computers -- 1.6 The Differential Amplifier -- Summary -- Chapter 2: Operational Amplifier Internals -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 What Is An Op Amp? -- 2.3 Simple Op Amp Comparator -- 2.4 Op Amp Manufacture -- Summary -- Chapter 3: Negative Feedback -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 What Negative Feedback Is and Why We Use It -- 3.3 Basic Concepts -- 3.4 The Four Variants of Negative Feedback -- 3.5 Limitations On The Use of Negative Feedback -- Summary -- Chapter 4: Basic Op Amp Circuits -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Inverting and Non-inverting Amplifiers -- 4.3 Single Supply Biasing -- 4.4 Current Boosting -- Summary -- Chapter 5: Practical Limitations of Op Amp Circuits -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Frequency Response -- 5.3 Gain-Bandwidth Product -- 5.4 Slew Rate and Power Bandwidth -- 5.5 Offsets -- 5.6 Drift -- 5.7 CMRR and PSRR -- 5.8 Noise -- Summary -- Chapter 6: Specialized Op Amps -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Instrumentation Amplifiers -- 6.3 Programmable Op Amps -- 6.4 Op Amps for High Current, Power, and Voltage Applications -- 6.5 High Speed Amplifiers -- 6.6 Voltage Followers and Buffers -- 6.7 Operational Transconductance Amplifier -- 6.8 Norton Amplifier -- 6.9 Current Feedback Amplifiers -- 6.10 Other Specialized Devices -- Summary -- Chapter 7: Non-Linear Circuits -- 7.1 Introduction -- 7.2 Precision Rectifiers -- 7.3 Wave Shaping -- 7.4 Function Generation -- 7.5 Comparators -- 7.6 Log and Anti-Log Amplifiers -- 7.7 Extended Topic: A Precision Log Amp -- Summary -- Chapter 8: Voltage Regulation -- 8.1 Introduction -- 8.2 The Need For Regulation -- 8.3 Linear Regulators -- 8.4 Switching Regulators -- 8.5 Heat Sink Usage -- 8.6 Extended Topic: Primary Switcher -- Summary -- Chapter 9: Oscillators and Frequency Generators -- 9.1 Introduction -- 9.2 Op Amp Oscillators -- 9.3 Single Chip Oscillators and Frequency Generators -- Summary -- Chapter 10: Integrators and Differentiators -- 10.1 Introduction -- 10.2 Integrators -- 10.3 Differentiators -- 10.4 Analog Computer -- 10.5 Alternatives to Integrators and Differentiators -- 10.6 Extended Topic: Other Integrator and Differentiator Circuits -- Summary -- Chapter 11: Active Filters -- 11.1 Introduction -- 11.2 Filter Types -- 11.3 The Use and Advantages of Active Filters -- 11.4 Filter Order and Poles -- 11.5 Filter Class or Alignment -- 11.6 Realizing Practical Filters -- 11.7 Band-Pass Filter Realizations -- 11.8 Notch Filter (Band-Reject) Realizations -- 11.9 Audio Equalizers -- 11.10 Switched-Capacitor Filters -- 11.11 Extended Topic: Voltage-Controlled Filters -- Summary -- Chapter 12: Analog-to-Digital-to-Analog Conversion -- 12.1 Introduction -- 12.2 The Sampling Theorem -- 12.3 Resolution and Sampling Rate -- 12.4 Digital-to-Analog Conversion Techniques -- 12.5 Analog-to-Digital Conversion -- 12.6 Extended Topic: Digital Signal Processing -- Summary --0 aThe goal of this text, as its name implies, is to allow the reader to become proficient in the analysis and design of circuits utilizing modern linear ICs. It progresses from the fundamental circuit building blocks through to analog/digital conversion systems. The text is intended for use in a second year Operational Amplifiers course at the Associate level, or for a junior level course at the Baccalaureate level. In order to make effective use of this text, students should have already taken a course in basic discrete transistor circuits, and have a solid background in algebra and trigonometry, along with exposure to phasors. Calculus is used in certain sections of the text, but for the most part, its use is kept to a minimum. For students without a calculus background, these sections may be skipped without a loss of continuity. (The sole exception to this being Chapter Ten, Integrators and Differentiators, which hinges upon knowledge of calculus.) There is also a lab manual for this textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/574zAccess online version02162nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002800137245008000165264004300245264005300288264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505025500518520080900773542001601582546001601598588004101614650004201655710003901697856007601736OTLid0000575MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aBeyenir, Serhateauthor02aA Brief Introduction to Engineering Computation with MATLABcSerhat Beyenir 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish Columbia, CanadabSerhat Beyenirc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Getting Started -- Chapter 3: Graphics -- Chapter 4: Introductory Programming -- Chapter 5: Interpolation -- Chapter 6: Numerical Integration -- Chapter 7: Regression Analysis -- Chapter 8: Publishing with MATLAB0 aA Brief Introduction to Engineering Computation with MATLAB is specifically designed for students with no programming experience. However, students are expected to be proficient in First Year Mathematics and Sciences and access to good reference books are highly recommended. Students are assumed to have a working knowledge of the Mac OS X or Microsoft Windows operating systems. The strategic goal of the course and book is to provide learners with an appreciation for the role computation plays in solving engineering problems. MATLAB specific skills that students are expected to be proficient at are: write scripts to solve engineering problems including interpolation, numerical integration and regression analysis, plot graphs to visualize, analyze and present numerical data, and publish reports.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/575zAccess online version02013nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002600149245003200175264004300207264006400250264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505061200491520030201103542001601405546001601421588004101437650002301478650002301501710003901524856007601563OTLid0000576MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aCushwa, Willyeauthor00aHuman BiologycWilly Cushwa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Human Biology and the Scientific Method -- Chapter 2: Chemistry and Life -- Chapter 3: Cells -- Chapter 4: DNA and Gene Expression -- Chapter 5: Digestive System -- Chapter 6: Energy Considerations -- Chapter 7: Blood -- Chapter 8: Heart -- Chapter 9: Blood Vessels -- Chapter 10: Respiratory System -- Chapter 11: Hormones -- Chapter 12: Urinary System -- Chapter 13: Mitosis and Meiosis -- Chapter 14: Reproductive Systems -- Chapter 15: Skeletal System -- Chapter 16: Muscles and Movement -- Chapter 17: Nervous System -- Chapter 18: Special Senses -- Chapter 19: Immune System0 aThis textbook has been created with several goals in mind: accessibility, customization, and student engagement—all while encouraging students toward high levels of academic scholarship. Students will find that this textbook offers a strong introduction to human biology in an accessible format.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/576zAccess online version02668nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002600138245008800164264004300252264008500295264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505063100557520086701188542003002055546001602085588004002101650002602141650002402167710003902191856007602230OTLid0000577MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aAbrams, Shaneeauthor00aEmpoWordbA Student-Centered Anthology & Handbook for College WriterscShane Abrams 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Description, Narration, and Reflection -- Chapter One: Describing a Scene or Experience -- Chapter Two: Telling a Story -- Chapter Three: Reflecting on an Experience -- Assignment: Descriptive Personal Narrative -- Part Two: Text Wrestling -- Chapter Four: Interpretation, Analysis, and Close Reading -- Chapter Five: Summary and Reader-Response -- Chapter Six: Analysis and Synthesis -- Assignment: Text wrestling Analysis -- Part Three: Research and Argumentation -- Chapter Seven: Argumentation -- Chapter Eight: Research Concepts -- Chapter Nine: Interacting with Sources -- Assignment: Persuasive Research Essay0 aEmpoWord is a reader and rhetoric that champions the possibilities of student writing. The textbook uses actual student writing to exemplify effective writing strategies, celebrating dedicated college writing students to encourage and instruct their successors: the students in your class. Through both creative and traditional activities, readers are encouraged to explore a variety of rhetorical situations to become more critical agents of reading, writing, speaking, and listening in all facets of their lives. Straightforward and readable instruction sections introduce key vocabulary, concepts, and strategies. Three culminating assignments (Descriptive Personal Narrative; Text-Wrestling Analysis; Persuasive Research Essay) give students a chance to show their learning while also practicing rhetorical awareness techniques for future writing situations.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/577zAccess online version02290nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002600167245004700193264004300240264005900283264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505028400519520084200803542004101645546001601686588004101702650002301743650002301766710003901789856007601828OTLid0000578MnU20260406020421.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780985226114  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aWong, Eric V.eauthor00aCellsbMolecules and MechanismscEric Wong 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLouisville, KYbAxolotl Academic Publishing Coc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAnatomy of a Cell -- Basic Cell Chemistry -- Bioenergetics -- Membranes -- Metabolism 1 -- Metabolism 2 -- DNA -- Transcription -- Gene Regulation -- Translation -- ER, Golgi, and Vesicles -- Cytoskeleton -- ECM and Adhesion -- Cell Communication -- Cell Cycle -- Advanced Topics0 aYet another cell and molecular biology book? At the very least, you would think that if I was going to write a textbook, I should write one in an area that really needs one instead of a subject that already has multiple excellent and definitive books. So, why write this book, then? First, it's a course that I have enjoyed teaching for many years, so I am very familiar with what a student really needs to take away from this class within the time constraints of a semester. Second, because it is a course that many students take, there is a greater opportunity to make an impact on more students' pocketbooks than if I were to start off writing a book for a highly specialized upper- level course. And finally, it was fun to research and write, and can be revised easily for inclusion as part of our next textbook, High School Biology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/578zAccess online version01575nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002500145245003200170264004300202264004300245264001200288300002200300336002600322337002600348338003600374341002800410490002700438505021800465520025100683542002700934546001600961588004000977650003201017650003701049710003901086856007601125OTLid0000581MnU20260406020741.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aH, Swaroop Ceauthor02aA Byte of PythoncSwaroop H 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSan Francisco, CAbSwaroop C Hc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFirst Steps -- Basics -- Operators and Expressions -- Control flow -- Functions -- Modules -- Data Structures -- Problem Solving -- Object Oriented Programming -- Input and Output -- Exceptions -- Standard Library0 a"A Byte of Python" is a free book on programming using the Python language. It serves as a tutorial or guide to the Python language for a beginner audience. If all you know about computers is how to save text files, then this is the book for you.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/581zAccess online version01662nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001200135100002800147245007100175264004300246264006400289264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505036400530520007800894542001600972546001600988588004101004650002001045650002601065650002101091700003701112710003901149856007601188OTLid0000582MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aEwell, Terry B.eauthor00aMusic Fundamentals 1bPitch and Major Scales and KeyscTerry Ewell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Pitch Notation in Music -- 2. Clef -- 3. Introduction to the Piano Keyboard -- 4. Pitch: Sharp, Flat, and Natural Notes -- 5. Chromatic and Diatonic Half Steps -- 6. Octave Designations in Music -- 7. Key Signatures -- 8. Major Keys and Scales -- 9. Scale Degrees of the Diatonic Scale -- 10. Enharmonic Spelling -- 11. The Circle of Fifths0 aThis collection is the first of five dealing with the rudiments of music.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aSchmidt-Jones, Catherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/582zAccess online version01648nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001200135100002800147245005600175264004300231264006400274264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505036500515520007900880542001600959546001600975588004000991650002001031650002601051650002101077700003701098710003901135856007601174OTLid0000583MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aEwell, Terry B.eauthor00aMusic Fundamentals 2bRhythm and MetercTerry Ewell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Duration: Note Lengths in Written Music -- 2. Duration: Rest Length -- 3. Dots, Ties, and Borrowed Divisions -- 4. Rhythm -- 5. Time Signature -- 6. Introduction to Subdivisions in Simple Meters -- 7. Simple and Compound Time Signatures -- 8. Meter in Music -- 9. Introduction to Subdivisions in Compound Meters -- 10. Pickup Notes and Measures -- 11. Tempo0 aThis collection is the second of five dealing with the rudiments of music.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aSchmidt-Jones, Catherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/583zAccess online version03058nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245003600163264004300199264006400242264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505072100483520121901204542001602423546001602439588004002455650002002495650002602515700002802541710003902569856007602608OTLid0000587MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aBrandt, Anthonyeauthor00aSound ReasoningcAnthony Brandt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Sound Reasoning: A New Way to Listen -- 2. How Music Makes Sense -- 3. Listening Gallery: How Music Makes Sense -- 4. Musical Emphasis -- 5. Listening Gallery: Musical Emphasis -- 6. Musical Form -- 7. Listening Gallery: Musical Form -- 8. Expository and Developmental -- 9. Listening Gallery: Expository and Developmental -- 10. Overall Destiny -- 11. Listening Gallery: Overall Destiny -- 12. Time's Effect on the Material -- 13. Listening Gallery: Time's Effect -- 14. Summary: A Quick Guide for Listening -- 15. Making Music Modern -- 16. Listening Gallery: Making Music Modern -- 17. Conclusion: What is Music Trying to Express? -- 18. Part II: Hearing Harmony -- 19. Part III: The Language of Transformation0 a“Sound Reasoning” is a web-based, introductory music appreciation course. It offers a new approach to music appreciation for adults, focusing on style-independent concepts. While the course concentrates primarily on Western classical and modern music, the concepts that are introduced apply to music of any style or era. The goal of “Sound Reasoning” is to equip you with questions that you may ask of any piece of music, thereby creating a richer and more comprehensive understanding of music both familiar and unfamiliar. Here are some additional features of the course. 1) ”Sound Reasoning” is completely listening based. No ability to read music is required. 2) The course assumes little or no musical background. A minimum of terminology is invoked. 3) Musical examples are interpolated directly into the text. 4) The course is interactive. A “listening gallery” with exercises follows each module, so that you may practice and refine your listening skills. 5) The modules may be studied in sequence or individually. 6)You may easily print a .pdf of any module.. “Sound Reasoning” is designed as both a stand-alone, self-paced course as well as a supplement to existing university classes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aMcClure, Roberteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/587zAccess online version02253nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245004900138250001600187264004300203264006500246264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002500433490002700458505073700485520032001222542004101542546001601583588004001599650002601639650002401665700003701689700002601726710003901752856007601791OTLid0000588MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aYou, Writing! A Guide to College Composition  a3rd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter One: Why Write? -- Chapter Two: A Writing Process for Every Writer -- Chapter Three: Finding Your Audience and Purpose -- Chapter Four: Exploring and Finding a Topic -- Chapter Five: So What? Creating a Thesis Statement -- Chapter Six: Planning Your Writing -- Chapter Seven: Getting a Draft Done -- Chapter Eight: Writing Introductions, Conclusions, and Titles -- Chapter Nine: Writing Moves -- Chapter Ten: You, Thinking Again -- Chapter Eleven: Thinking Again with Others -- Chapter Twelve: Choices in Style and Words -- Chapter Thirteen: Choices in Grammar and Mechanics -- Chapter Fourteen: Using the Research Process -- Chapter Fifteen: Using (or not!) Generative Artificial Intelligence -- Works Cited0 aThis text is meant to be used in any first year College Composition class or as a general guide to college writing. The book focuses on writing as a process, not a product. The goal is to help students discover their own writing process, trying out different methods and strategies to find what works best for them.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aHallsten-Erickson, Kellieauthor1 aSwing, Amy Joeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/588zAccess online version02063nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002600149245003900175264004300214264006400257264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505015900498520075300657542001601410546001601426588004001442650002401482650002601506700003001532710003901562856007601601OTLid0000589MnU20260406020741.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aFrey, Williameauthor00aCorporate GovernancecWilliam Frey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Ethical Leadership -- 2 Ethical Decision-Making -- 3 Social Responsibility -- 4 Changing Organizational -- 5 Business Ethics Bowl -- 6 Course Procedures0 aThis course takes an interdisciplinary approach to ethics in business and provides modules in Ethical Leadership, Ethical Decision-Making, Social Responsibility, and Corporate Governance. Students will actively study ethical theory by carrying out exercises to help them build theory-based tools for encountering ethical problems in business practice. They will also work with cases in business ethics designed to give them practice in developing skills of ethical leadership, ethical decision-making, and carrying out socio-technical analyses to respond to issues of social responsibility. This course will culminate in an Ethics Bowl competition in which students will practice ethics advocacy in a variety of organizational contexts in business.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aCruz-Cruz, Jose aeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/589zAccess online version02451nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245005600159264004300215264004800258264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002500428490002700453505037300480520101000853542004101863546001601904588004001920650002601960710003901986856007602025OTLid0000590MnU20260406020739.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aKeet, Mariaeauthor03aAn Introduction to Ontology EngineeringcMaria Keet 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCape Town, South AfricabMaria Keetc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 First order logic and automated reasoning in a nutshell -- 3 Description Logics -- 4 The Web Ontology Language OWL 2 -- 5 Methods and Methodologies -- 6 Top-down Ontology Development -- 7 Bottom-up Ontology Development -- 8 Ontology-Based Data Access -- 9 Ontologies and natural languages -- 10 Advanced Modelling with Additional Languages Features0 aThis first general textbook An introduction to ontology engineering has as main aim to provide the reader with a comprehensive introductory overview of ontology engineering. A secondary aim is to provide hands-on experience in ontology development that illustrate the theory. The book is divided into three blocks: Block I: logic foundations for ontologies both regarding the languages (mainly First Order predicate Logic, Description Logics, and OWL) and automated reasoning. Block II: developing good ontologies with methods and methodologies, the top-down approach with foundational ontologies, and the bottom-up approach to extract as much useful content as possible from legacy material. Block III: advanced topics with a selection of areas of specialisation, including Ontology-Based Data Access, the interaction between ontologies and natural languages (multilingual ontologies, controlled natural language), and advanced modelling with additional language features (fuzzy and temporal ontologies).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/590zAccess online version02623nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002900162245005500191264004300246264007800289264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002500489490002700514505074100541520068701282542004101969546001602010588004002026650003102066650002502097710003902122856007602161OTLid0000591MnU20260406020832.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781975033729  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM5861 aDeCarlo, Mattheweauthor00aScientific Inquiry in Social WorkcMatthew DeCarlo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Social Work Educationc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to research -- Chapter 2: Beginning a research project -- Chapter 3: Reading and evaluating literature -- Chapter 4: Conducting a literature review -- Chapter 5: Ethics in social work research -- Chapter 6: Linking methods with theory -- Chapter 7: Design and causality -- Chapter 8: Creating and refining a research question -- Chapter 9: Defining and measuring concepts -- Chapter 10: Sampling -- Chapter 11: Survey research -- Chapter 12: Experimental design -- Chapter 13: Interviews and focus groups -- Chapter 14: Unobtrusive research: Qualitative and quantitative approaches -- Chapter 15: Real-world research: Evaluation, single-subjects, and action research -- Chapter 16: Reporting and reading research0 aAs an introductory textbook for social work students studying research methods, this book guides students through the process of creating a research project. Students will learn how to discover a researchable topic that is interesting to them, examine scholarly literature, formulate a proper research question, design a quantitative or qualitative study to answer their question, carry out the design, interpret quantitative or qualitative results, and disseminate their findings to a variety of audiences. Examples are drawn from the author's practice and research experience, as well as topical articles from the literature. There are ancillary materials available for this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/591zAccess online version04346nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153245006800161264004300229264008100272264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505082800530520221901358542004103577546001603618588004003634650003803674650002603712650002403738700002803762700003103790710003903821856007603860OTLid0000592MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780999829233  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aBL100aIntermediate Biblical Greek ReaderbGalatians and Related Texts 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGeorge Fox University Libraryc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLesson One: Galatians 1:1-9 -- Lesson Two: Galatians 1:10-17 -- Lesson Three: Galatians 1:18-24 -- Lesson Four: Galatians 2:1-10 -- Lesson Five: Galatians 2:11-21 -- Lesson Six: Galatians 3:1-9 -- Lesson Seven: Galatians 3:10-18 -- Lesson Eight: Galatians 3:19-29 -- Lesson Nine: Galatians 4:1-11 -- Lesson Ten: Galatians 4:12-20 -- Lesson Eleven: Galatians 4:21-31 -- Lesson Twelve: Galatians 5:1-15 -- Lesson Thirteen: Galatians 5:16-26 -- Lesson Fourteen: Galatians 6:1-10 -- Lesson Fifteen: Galatians 6:11-18 -- Lesson Sixteen: Introduction to Textual Criticism -- Lesson Seventeen: LXX Genesis 12:1-3/LXX Leviticus 18:1-5 -- Lesson Eighteen: LXX Habakkuk 2:1-5/LXX Psalm 142:1-6 -- Lesson Nineteen: James 2:14-24 -- Lesson Twenty: John Chrysostom on Galatians 6:2 -- Lesson Twenty-One: Marcion's Redaction of Galatians0 aAfter completing basic biblical Greek, students are often eager to continue to learn and strengthen their skills of translation and interpretation. This intermediate graded reader is designed to meet those needs. The reader is “intermediate” in the sense that it presumes the user will have already learned the basics of Greek grammar and syntax and has memorized Greek vocabulary words that appear frequently in the New Testament. The reader is “graded” in the sense that it moves from simpler translation work (Galatians) towards more advanced readings from the book of James, the Septuagint, and from one of the Church Fathers. In each reading lesson, the Greek text is given, followed by supplemental notes that offer help with vocabulary, challenging word forms, and syntax. Discussion questions are also included to foster group conversation and engagement. There are many good Greek readers in existence, but this reader differs from most others in a few important ways. Most readers offer text selections from different parts of the Bible, but in this reader the user works through one entire book (Galatians). All subsequent lessons, then, build off of this interaction with Galatians through short readings that are in some way related to Galatians. The Septuagint passages in the reader offer some broader context for texts that Paul quotes explicitly from the Septuagint. The Patristic reading from John Chrysystom comes from one of his homilies on Galatians. This approach to a Greek reader allows for both variety and coherence in the learning process. This reader is a collaborative project that developed out of an advanced Greek course at Portland Seminary (2017-2018). The following students contributed equally to the content of the textbook. Alexander Finkelson (MATS, Portland Seminary, 2018) Bryn Pliska Girard (MATS, Portland Seminary, 2018) Charles E. R. Jesch (MDIV, Portland Seminary, current student) Paul C. Moldovan (MDIV, Portland Seminary, current student) Jenny E. Siefken (MATS, Portland Seminary, current student) Julianna Kaye Smith (MATS, Portland Seminary, 2018) Jana Whitworth (MDIV, Portland Seminary, current student) Kyle J. Williams (MATS, Portland Seminary, 2018)1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks1 aGupta, Nijay K.eeditor1 aSandford, Jonah M.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/592zAccess online version03527nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245006000165264004300225264007300268264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505062800515520181401143542001602957546001602973588004102989650003203030710003903062856007603101OTLid0000593MnU20260406020422.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aKann, Charles W.eauthor00aImplementing a One Address CPU in LogisimcCharles Kann 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 1.1 Basic Components in a CPU -- 1.2 Comparisons of Computer Architectures -- 1.3 Von Neumann and Harvard Architectures -- 2. Assembly Language -- 2.1 What is Assembly Language -- 2.2 Assembly Language Caveats -- 2.3 Assembler Directives -- 2.4 Data types -- 2.5 Designing an Assembly Language -- 2.6 Assembler Programs -- 3. Machine Code -- 3.1 Overview of the machine code instruction format -- 4. Assembler program -- 4.1 Running a program on the One-Address CPU -- 5. CPU implementation -- 5.1 The sign extend unit -- 5.2 The ALU -- 5.3 The Control Unit (CU) -- 5.4 The CPU -- 5.5 Implementing the CU0 aMost computer users have an incorrect, but useful, cognitive metaphor for computers in which the user says (or types or clicks) something and a mystical, almost intelligent or magical, behavior happens. It is not a stretch to describe computer users as believing computers follow the laws of magic, where some magic incantation is entered, and the computer responds with an expected, but magical, behavior. This magic computer does not actually exist. In reality computer are machines, and every action a computer performs reduces to a set of mechanical operations. In fact the first complete definition of a working computer was a mechanical machine designed by Charles Babbage in 1834, and would have run on steam power. Probably the biggest success of Computer Science (CS) in the 20th century was the development of abstractions that hide the mechanical nature of computers. The fact that average people use computers without ever considering that they are mechanistic is a triumph of CS designers. This purpose of this monograph is to break the abstract understanding of a computer, and to explain a computer's behavior in completely in mechanistic terms. It will deal specifically with the Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the computer, as this is where the magic happens. All other parts of a computer can be seen as just providing information for the CPU to operate on. This monograph will deal with a specific type of CPU, a one-address CPU, and will explain this CPU using only standard gates, specifically AND, OR, NOT, NAND and XOR gates, and 4 basic Integrated Circuits (ICs), the Decoder, Multiplexer, Adder, and Flip Flop. All of these gates and components can be described as mechanical transformations of input data to output data, and the overall CPU can then be seen as a mechanical device.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/593zAccess online version03315nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002800150245011200178250001800290264004300308264007500351264001200426300002200438336002600460337002600486338003600512341002500548490002700573505067600600520137301276542004102649546001602690588004002706650003402746650003402780710003902814856007602853OTLid0000594MnU20260406020423.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3154 4aKF385.A41 aRobson, Ruthanneauthor00aLiberty, Equality and Due ProcessbCases, Controversies, and Contexts in Constitutional LawcRuthann Robson  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2019. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: An Introduction to Constitutional Law and The Issue of State Action -- Chapter Two: Introduction To Constitutional Interpretation and Judicial Review -- Chapter Three: Slavery and Racial Equality -- Chapter Four: Race and Equal Protection -- Chapter Five: Nonracial Classifications and Equal Protection -- Chapter Six: Fundamental Rights and Equal Protection -- Chapter Seven: The Privileges or Immunities Clause -- Chapter Eight: Incorporation and Fundamental Rights -- Chapter Nine: The Second Amendment -- Chapter Ten: Unenumerated Rights and Due Process -- Chapter Eleven: Liberty, Due Process, and Equal Protection -- Chapter Twelve: State Constitutions0 aThis Casebook is intended to be used in a course which concentrates on Constitutional Rights and centers the Fourteenth Amendment. It can be used in a first year Law School course with a title such as “Liberty, Equality, and Due Process,” as it is at CUNY School of Law, an upper division Constitutional Rights course, or an advanced undergraduate course focusing on constitutional rights, especially equality and due process. The Casebook begins with the threshold issue of “state action” which orients students to a basic but often under-taught principle of constitutional law. The Casebook then considers judicial review and constitutional interpretation. Chapters 3-6 center on equality, including slavery before the Reconstruction Amendments, equal protection for racial, gender, and other classifications, affirmative action, and fundamental rights in equal protection doctrine. Chapters 7-9 are shorter chapters that consider the Privileges or Immunities Clause, Incorporation of Bill of Rights provisions to the states, and the Second Amendment. Chapter 10 focuses on substantive due process, with Chapter 11 treating the “synergy” between due process and equal protection regarding fundamental rights. The brief last Chapter, Chapter 12, includes materials on state constitutional rights, which can be omitted or integrated into previous subjects.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/594zAccess online version02436nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001300140100003500153245005200188264004300240264007500283264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002500480490002700505505027500532520097300807542004101780546001601821588004001837650003401877650003601911710003901947856007601986OTLid0000595MnU20260406020423.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aLB1062.61 aFines, Barbara Glesnereauthor00aLaw School Materials for SuccesscBarbara Fines 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2013. 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Assessing your Resources -- Chapter Two: Preparing for Class -- Chapter Three: Getting the Most from Class -- Chapter Four: After Class Review -- Chapter Five: Outlining and Exam Preparation -- Chapter Six: Taking an Exam -- Chapter Seven: The Next Semester0 aThe first year of law school is, for many people, one of the most significant transitions of their adult life. Law school demands a lot as it helps you make the transition from your prior identity as student (or as some other occupational role) to your new identity as an attorney. To meet the demands of law school, it is often helpful to have the big picture before you begin – a sense of what it is you are trying to do as you prepare for classes, participate in those classes, review and prepare for exams, take exams, and then begin the cycle once again. Law School Materials for Success is designed to give you the essentials of that process. It is purposefully brief – most law students do not have the time for an extensive examination of the study of law school. Rather, they need a source for some basic, critical advice and some pointers on where to go for more if necessary. That is what this book and the accompanying podcasts are designed to provide.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/595zAccess online version02755nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003000150245005500180264004300235264007500278264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505030600527520123000833542004102063546001602104588004002120650002802160650003402188700003202222710003902254856007602293OTLid0000596MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aBurge, Mark Edwineauthor00aAmerican Contract Law for a Global AgecMark Burge 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2017. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter I: Introduction to Contract Law -- Chapter II: Contract Formation -- Chapter III: Consideration -- Chapter IV: Alternative Regimes -- Chapter V: Contract Defenses -- Chapter VI: Terms and Interpretation -- Chapter VII: Performance and Breach -- Chapter VIII: Remedies -- Chapter IX: Nonparties0 aAmerican Contract Law for a Global Age by Franklin G. Snyder and Mark Edwin Burge of Texas A&M University School of Law is a casebook designed primarily for the first-year Contracts course as it is taught in American law schools, but is configured so as to be usable either as a primary text or a supplement in any upper-level U.S. or foreign class that seeks to introduce American contract law to students. As an eLangdell text, it offers maximum flexibility for students to read either in hard copy or electronic format on most electronic devices. Why “American” Contract Law? Nearly all American contract law texts focus on U.S. law. This volume simply makes that focus explicit. Modern American lawyers face an increasingly global world, and the book makes it clear that American law is not the only important commercial law regime in the world. But much of the value that the cosmopolitan and transnational American-trained lawyer brings to the table is an understanding of the contract law of the United States. To this end, the venerable English cases that exemplify common law doctrine are here presented not in their hoary 19th century settings. but in the 21st century forms that students can intuitively grasp.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aSnyder, Franklin G.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/596zAccess online version02784nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100003500151245008400186264004300270264007500313264001200388300002200400336002600422337002600448338003600474341002500510490002700535505047100562520108701033542004102120546001602161588004002177650004402217650003402261710003902295856007602334OTLid0000597MnU20260406020713.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aKF385.A41 aGreen, Matthew Williameauthor00aSexual Orientation and Gender Identity Employment DiscriminationcMatthew Green 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2017. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. A Federal Statute Protecting LGBT Employees -- III. Title VII and Sexual Orientation -- A. Early Judicial Perspectives -- B. The Evolving Meaning of "Discrimination Because of Sex" -- C. Stereotyping and Sexual Orientation -- D. Sexual Orientation Discrimination Is Sex Discrimination -- IV. Gender Identity and Expression -- A. Gender Identity and Expression and Sex Stereotyping -- B. An alternative route to protecting transgender employees0 aThis Chapter will address the current protections that are available to lesbian, gay, bisexual and transgender (“LGBT”) individuals who allege they have been victims of employment discrimination. The Chapter's primary focus will be on federal statutory law, particularly Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. Although the focus here is on federal law, Appendix I to this Chapter lists the states that protect individuals from public and/or private discrimination under state laws. This topic is explored in four parts: (1) a brief overview of congressional efforts to enact a statute to protect individuals from employment discrimination on the basis of sexual orientation and gender identity; (2) discusses Title VII and sexual orientation; (3) discusses ways in which recent courts have handled sexual orientation discrimination under Title VII; and (4) similarly examines early judicial treatment of claims brought by individuals alleging discrimination on the basis of their gender identity and/or expression and explores how the law has developed in this area as well.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/597zAccess online version02936nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245004600162264004300208264006000251264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505041500488520141800903542003002321546001602351588004002367650002602407650002602433710003902459856007602498OTLid0000598MnU20260406020735.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aPayne, Russ W.eauthor03aAn Introduction to PhilosophycRuss Payne 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: What Philosophy Is -- Chapter 2: Critical Thinking I, Being Reasonable -- Chapter 3: Critical Thinking II: Logic -- Chapter 4: Ancient Philosophy -- Chapter 5: Rationalism -- Chapter 6: Empiricism -- Chapter 7: Philosophy of Science -- Chapter 8: Philosophy of Mind -- Chapter 9: Love and Happiness -- Chapter 10: Meta Ethics -- Chapter 11: Right Action -- Chapter 12: Social Justice0 aThe goal of this text is to present philosophy to newcomers as a living discipline with historical roots. While a few early chapters are historically organized, the goal in the historical chapters is to trace a developmental progression of thought that introduces basic philosophical methods and frames issues that remain relevant today. Later chapters are topically organized. These include philosophy of science and philosophy of mind, areas where philosophy has shown dramatic recent progress. This text concludes with four chapters on ethics, broadly construed. Traditional theories of right action is covered in a third of these. Students are first invited first to think about what is good for themselves and their relationships in a chapter of love and happiness. Next a few meta-ethical issues are considered; namely, whether they are moral truths and if so what makes them so. The end of the ethics sequence addresses social justice, what it is for one's community to be good. Our sphere of concern expands progressively through these chapters. Our inquiry recapitulates the course of development into moral maturity. Over the course of the text, the author has tried to outline the continuity of thought that leads from the historical roots of philosophy to a few of the diverse areas of inquiry that continue to make significant contributions to our understanding of ourselves and the world we live in.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/598zAccess online version02307nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003200153245006300185250001600248264004300264264003900307264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002500468490002700493505061800520520042801138542004101566546001601607588004001623650003801663650002601701700003001727700002501757710003901782856007601821OTLid0000599MnU20260406020741.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781927565506  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAnderson, Catherineeauthor00aEssentials of Linguistics, 2nd EditioncCatherine Anderson  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Authors -- Acknowledgements -- A Note to Instructors -- Chapter 1: Human Language and Language Science -- Chapter 2: Language, Power, and Privilege -- Chapter 3: Phonetics -- Chapter 4: Phonology -- Chapter 5: Morphology -- Chapter 6: Syntax -- Chapter 7: Semantics -- Chapter 8: Pragmatics -- Chapter 9: Reclaiming Indigenous Languages -- Chapter 10: Language Variation and Change -- Chapter 11: Child Language Acquisition -- Chapter 12: Adult Language Learning -- [In progress] Chapter 13: Psycholinguistics and Neurolinguistics -- Appendix 1: PSRs and Flat Tree Structures -- Check Yourself Questions0 aThis Second Edition of Essentials of Linguistics is considerably revised and expanded, including several new chapters, diverse language examples from signed and spoken languages, enhanced accessibility features, and an orientation towards equity and justice. While the primary audience is Canadian students of Introduction to Linguistics, it is also suitable for learners elsewhere, in online, hybrid, or in-person courses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBjorkman, Bronwyneauthor1 aDenis, Derekeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/599zAccess online version02789nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003000135245004800165264004300213264004600256264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002500424490002700449505091600476520064601392542003002038546001602068588004102084650003802125650002602163700003102189700003002220700002602250710003902276856007602315OTLid0000600MnU20260406020425.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1995    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aDinneen, David A.eauthor00aAu Boulot! First-Year FrenchcDavid Dinneen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLawrence, KansasbKU ScholarWorksc[1995] 4c©1995.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapitre Un: etre, avoir, regarder, porter, chercher -- Chapitre Deux: etre, aller -- Chapitre Trois: avoir, -er verbs -- Chapitre Quatre: prendre, faire -- Chapitre Cinq: pouvoir, vouloir, ecrire -- Chapitre Six: dire, boire, -ir verbs -- Chapitre Sept: ouvrir, offrir, lire, dormir -- Chapitre Huit: voir, savoir, connaitre, -re verbs -- Chapitre Neuf: sortir, partir -- Chapitre Dix: venir, tenir -- Chapitre Onze: etre, avoir, aller, -er verbs -- Chapitre Douze: faire, prendre, voir, dire, mettre -- Chapitre Treize: pouvoir, vouloir, ecrire, -ir verbs, recevoir -- Chapitre Quatorze: boire, ouvrir, offrir, servir -- Chapitre Quinze: partir, sortir, mourir, naitre -- Chapitre Seize: -re verbs, lire, dormir, suivre, conduirex -- Chapitre Dix-Sept: savoir, connaitre -- Chapitre Dix-Huit: venir, tenir -- Chapitre Dix-Neuf: Random selection of verbs -- Chapitre Vingt: Random selection of verbs0 aAu boulot! is a two-year college French program consisting of: a textbook, workbook and 21 accompanying audio exercises; as well as a reference grammar, to be used the entire two years. We also insist that our students obtain a full-sized dictionary, and we recommend the HARPER-COLLINS-ROBERT bilingual New Standard Edition. (Instructors will note in reviewing the materials that we provide vocabulary lists at the ends of chapters, with translations, but no glossary. We have become convinced after years of experience that glossaries are counter-productive. It is vital that students learn to use dictionaries, and the sooner the better.)1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aChristiansen, Hopeeauthor1 aKernen, Madeleineeauthor1 aPensec, Herveeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/600zAccess online version03245nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003000135245004600165264004300211264004600254264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002500422490002700447505115000474520095101624542003002575546001602605588004102621650003802662650002602700700003002726710003902756856007602795OTLid0000601MnU20260406020425.0m     o  d s      cr            180907s1989    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aDinneen, David A.eauthor00aChapeau! First-Year FrenchcDavid Dinneen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLawrence, KansasbKU ScholarWorksc[1989] 4c©1989.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPour Commenter: Masculin, feminin -- Chapitre Un: Flagrant desir -- Chapitre Deux: Recherche Susan, desesperement -- Chapitre Trois: Rose bonbon -- Integration 1-3: L'important, c'est d'aimer -- Chapitre Quatre: Les Quatre cents coups -- Chapitre Cinq: Les Saisons du plaisir -- Chapitre Six: L'Ane qui a bu la lune -- Integration 4-6: La Comedie du travail -- Chapitre Sept: Ca va cogner -- Chapitre Huit: Dernier domicile connu -- Chapitre Neuf: Passe ton bac d'abord -- Integration 7-9: Candide ou l'optimisme au XXe -- Chapitre Dix: Chambre avec vue -- Chapitre Onze: Et vogue le navire -- Chapitre Douze: Les ailes du desir -- Integration 10-12: A bout de souffle -- Chapitre Treize: L'Argent de poche -- Chapitre Quatorze: Pourvu que ce soit une fille -- Chapitre Quinze: L'as de pique -- Integration 13-15: Eclair de lune -- Chapitre Seize: Manon des sources -- Chapitre Dix-Sept: Apres la repetition -- Chapitre Dix-Huit: Une Langouste au petit dejeuner -- Chapitre Dix-Neuf: L'etat de bonheur permanent -- Chapitre Vingt: Pauline a la plage -- Chapitre Vingt et un: La grenouille et la baleine -- Chapitre Vingt-Deux: La Derniere seance0 aChapeau! is a first-year college text. Although it may appear, at first glance, to move very fast and introduce a large amount of material early, the vocabulary and grammatical structures that we expect students to control actively by the end of the year are limited in accord with our notion of a reasonable application of the ACTFL proficiency guidelines. As a result, while some instructors may be surprised at such things as the absence of the possessive pronoun, no insistence on the use of optional subjunctives, and no active treatment of the relative dont, others may be disturbed by what we still include in a first-year text. What we do expect students to acquire (which is quantitatively less than what we present in the text for them to know about), we believe they will acquire well, providing a sound basis for further study (formal or informal) and permitting us to say to them, both during and at the end of the course, "Chapeau!"1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aKernen, Madeleineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/601zAccess online version02474nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100003200145245003500177264004300212264007300255264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505047500505520083800980542003001818546001601848588004101864650003801905650004201943710003901985856007602024OTLid0000607MnU20260406020425.0m     o  d s      cr            180916s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aMitofsky, Andrea M.eauthor00aDirect EnergycAndrea Mitofsky 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bA.T. Still Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- I. Survey of Energy Conversion Devices -- 2. Capacitors and Piezoelectric Devices -- 3. Pyroelectrics and Electro-Optics -- 4. Antennas -- 5. Hall Effect -- 6. Photovoltaics -- 7. Lamps, LEDs, and Lasers -- 8. Thermoelectrics -- 9. Batteries and Fuel Cells -- 10. Miscellaneous Energy Conversion Devices -- II. Theoretical Ideas -- 11. Calculus of Variations -- 12. Relating Energy Conversion Processes -- 13. Thomas Fermi Analysis -- 14. Lie Analysis0 aDirect Energy Conversion discusses both the physics behind energy conversion processes and a wide variety of energy conversion devices. A direct energy conversion process converts one form of energy to another through a single process. The first half of this book surveys multiple devices that convert to or from electricity including piezoelectric devices, antennas, solar cells, light emitting diodes, lasers, thermoelectric devices, and batteries. In these chapters, physical effects are discussed, terminology used by engineers in the discipline is introduced, and insights into material selection is studied. The second part of this book puts concepts of energy conversion in a more abstract framework. These chapters introduce the idea of calculus of variations and illuminate relationships between energy conversion processes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/607zAccess online version01974nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002600147245007200173264004300245264004600288264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505017300508520063800681542004101319546001601360588004101376650004301417650002501460710003901485856007601524OTLid0000608MnU20260406020428.0m     o  d s      cr            180916s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aHM5861 aKennedy, Veraeauthor00aBeyond RacebCultural Influences on Human Social LifecVera Kennedy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLemoore, CaliforniabVera Kennedyc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1: Culture and Meaning -- Module 2: Culture As A Social Construct -- Module 3: Cultural Power -- Module 4: Cultural Identity -- Module 5: The Multicultural World0 aThe book is supported by discussion of relevant theory and research in cultural sociology. Beyond Race: Cultural Influences on Human Social Life has stressed learner-centered teaching with the instructor taking on the role of a facilitator of learning. As such, it is expected the instructor will serve as the mediator between the content of this book and learners’ understanding of material on multiple and higher levels. This book does not offer a set of rules in teaching cultural sociology, but rather suggests content and applications to consider and modify as needed by the ever-changing dynamics of instructors and learners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/608zAccess online version02028nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245008900163264004300252264008500295264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002500502490002700527505012300554520076200677542003001439546001601469588004001485650003801525710003901563856007601602OTLid0000609MnU20260406020714.0m     o  d s      cr            180916s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aWalton, Stepheneauthor00aSons & LettresbA pronunciation method for intermediate-level FrenchcStephen Walton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Fiches d'exercies -- Section 1: Voyelles orales -- Section 2: Voyelles nasales -- Section 3: Consonnes0 aSons et lettres provides a set of classroom materials to train students to hear and produce the sounds of French and to recognize the regular spellings used to represent those sounds in print. The materials are inspired by a desire to help students feel more confident about their French pronunciation and more at home saying the many French words, familiar and unfamiliar, which they encounter in their studies, in French media and in their travels. In our experience, students are not given sufficient preparation to successfully decipher and pronounce French words. These materials are intended to fill that gap and to clear away the confusion that English speakers often feel when they see French words with seemingly mysterious combinations of letters.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/609zAccess online version02072nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001400143050001100157100003400168245005400202264004300256264007200299264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505035400548520046800902542004101370546001601411588004101427650002301468650004101491650002701532710003901559856007601598OTLid0000610MnU20260406020426.0m     o  d s      cr            180916s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.31 aBeveridge, Richard W.eauthor00aCollege Algebra & TrigonometrycRichard Beveridge 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRichard W. Beveridgec[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Algebra Review -- 2 Polynomial and Rational Functions -- 3 Exponents and Logarithms -- 4 Functions -- 5 Conic Sections - Circle and Parabola -- 6 Sequences and Series -- 7 Combinatorics -- 8 Right Triangle Trigonometry -- 9 Graphing the Trigonometric Functions -- 10 Trigonometric Identities and Equations -- 11 The Law of Sines The Law of Cosines0 aThis College Algebra text will cover a combination of classical algebra and analytic geometry, with an introduction to the transcendental exponential and logarithmic functions. If mathematics is the language of science, then algebra is the grammar of that language. Like grammar, algebra provides a structure to mathematical notation, in addition to its uses in problem solving and its ability to change the appearance of an expression without changing the value.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/610zAccess online version02582nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001100141100003400152245003600186264004300222264007200265264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505075000514520066301264542004101927546001601968588004101984650004102025650002702066710003902093856007602132OTLid0000611MnU20260406020426.0m     o  d s      cr            180916s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.31 aBeveridge, Richard W.eauthor00aTrigonometrycRichard Beveridge 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRichard W. Beveridgec[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Right Triangle Trigonometry -- 1.1 Measuring Angles -- 1.2 The Trigonometric Ratios -- 1.3 Solving Triangles -- 1.4 Applications -- 1.5 More Applications -- 2. Graphing the Trigonometric Functions -- 2.1 Trigonometric Functions of Non-Acute Angles -- 2.2 Graphing Trigonometric Functions -- 2.3 The Vertical Shift of a Trigonometric Function -- 2.4 Phase Shift -- 2.5 Combining the Transformations -- 3. Trigonometric Identities and Equations -- 3.1 Reciprocal and Pythagorean Identities -- 3.2 Double-Angle Identities -- 3.3 Trigonometric Equations -- 3.4 More Trigonometric Equations -- 4. The Law of Sines; The Law of Cosines -- 4.1 The Law of Sines -- 4.2 The Law of Sines: the ambiguous case -- 4.3 The Law of Cosines -- 4.4 Applications0 aThe precursors to what we study today as Trigonometry had their origin in ancient Mesopotamia, Greece and India. These cultures used the concepts of angles and lengths as an aid to understanding the movements of the heavenly bodies in the night sky. Ancient trigonometry typically used angles and triangles that were embedded in circles so that many of the calculations used were based on the lengths of chords within a circle. The relationships between the lengths of the chords and other lines drawn within a circle and the measure of the corresponding central angle represent the foundation of trigonometry - the relationship between angles and distances.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/611zAccess online version02960nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100003300150245009000183264004300273264007800316264001200394300002200406336002600428337002600454338003600480341002800516490002700544505136700571520038601938542001602324546001602340588004002356650003302396650004202429710003902471856007602510OTLid0000612MnU20260406020741.0m     o  d s      cr            180916s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aRutherford, Cliffordeauthor00aBuilding Maintenance & ConstructionbTools and Maintenance TaskscClifford Rutherford 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Hawaii Manoac[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Safety -- 1.1 First Aid & Personal Protective Equipment -- 1.2 Eye and Face Protection -- 1.3 Hearing Protection -- 1.4 Head Protection -- 1.5 Hand Protection -- 1.6 Respiratory Protection -- 1.7 Foot Protection -- 1.8 Tool & Shop Safety -- 1.9 Ladder Safety & Fall Protection -- Part 2: Hand & Power Tools -- 2.1 Tool Choices and Applications -- 2.2 Measuring, Marking, Leveling & Layout Tools -- 2.3 Nails, Hammers & Pneumatic Nailers -- 2.4 Threaded Fasteners, Drivers, Pliers & Wrenches -- 2.5 Saws -- 2.6 Drills & Accessories -- 2.7 Grinders, Sanders, & Accessories -- Part 3: Mathematics for Maintenance Techs -- 3.1 Required Math Concepts -- 3.2 Ohm's Law, Joules Law, and Series/Parallel Formulas -- Part 4: Plumbing Systems -- 4.1 Piping & Fittings -- 4.2 Domestic Water Service -- 4.3 Drain, Waste, and Vent (DMV) -- 4.4 Valves & Prevention Devices -- 4.5 Faucets, Fixtures, & Fixture Drains -- 4.6 Plumbing for Appliances -- 4.7 Water Heating -- Part 5: Electrical Systems -- 5.1 Electrical Safety -- 5.2 Electrical Tools & Testing Equipment -- 5.3 Electrical Terminology & Lighting -- 5.4 Conduit, Boxes, & Wiring -- 5.5 Fuses & Breakers -- 5.6 Receptacle & Switch Wiring -- 5.7 Outdoor Wiring Considerations -- Part 6: Maintenance Management Systems -- 6.1 Maintenance Categories -- 6.2 Work Order Process -- 6.3 Parts and Material Resources0 aBuilding Maintenance & Construction: Tools and Maintenance Tasks introduces and develops knowledge of basic building maintenance tools and materials, applied skills and techniques, industry health and safety standards, and preventive maintenance and troubleshooting practices required by employers for entry-level positions in the building trades and facilities maintenance fields.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/612zAccess online version02436nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002800148245005600176264004300232264004600275264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505064100498520066801139542001601807546001601823588004101839650002501880650004201905710003901947856007601986OTLid0000614MnU20260406020425.0m     o  d s      cr            180922s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aTA1451 aWoolf, Peter J.eauthor00aChemical Process Dynamics and ControlscPeter Woolf 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAnn Arbor, Michiganbopenmichiganc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I Process Control Introduction -- Chapter 1: Overview -- Chapter 2: Modeling Basics -- Chapter 3: Sensors and Actuators -- Chapter 4: Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams -- Chapter 5: Logical Modeling -- Chapter 6: Modeling Case Studies -- Part II Chemical Process Controls -- Chapter 7: Mathematics for Control Systems -- Chapter 8: Optimization -- Chapter 9: PID Control -- Chapter 10: Dynamical Systems Analysis -- Chapter 11: Control Architectures -- Chapter 12: MIMO Control -- Part III Statistical Analysis for Chemical Process Control -- Chapter 13: Statistics and Probability Background -- Chapter 14: Design of Experiments0 aProcess controls is a mixture between the statistics and engineering discipline that deals with the mechanism, architectures, and algorithms for controlling a process. Some examples of controlled processes are: •Controlling the temperature of a water stream by controlling the amount of steam added to the shell of a heat exchanger. •Operating a jacketed reactor isothermally by controlling the mixture of cold water and steam that flows through the jacket of a jacketed reactor. •Maintaining a set ratio of reactants to be added to a reactor by controlling their flow rates. •Controlling the height of fluid in a tank to ensure that it does not overflow.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/614zAccess online version01562nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245008000167264004300247264007800290264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505025500545520019600800542001600996546001601012588004001028650002901068710003901097856007601136OTLid0000615MnU20260406020714.0m     o  d s      cr            180922s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aGasiorek, Jessicaeauthor00aMessage ProcessingbThe Science of Creating UnderstandingcJessica Gasiorek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Hawaii Manoac[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Message Processing -- Chapter 2: Foundational Concepts -- Chapter 3: Media -- Chapter 4: Communicative Codes -- Chapter 5: Traditional Models of Human Communication -- Chapter 6: The Inferential Model of Human Communication0 aThe text provides an upper-level undergraduate introduction and explanation of the social and cognitive processes involved in human communication, focusing on how people create understanding.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/615zAccess online version02938nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003200156245004600188264004300234264006000277264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505100600511520061501517542001602132546001602148588004002164650002602204700002702230700002302257700002702280700002602307700002802333700002802361710003902389856007602428OTLid0000616MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            180922s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172555  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHD30.41 aGitman, Lawrence J.eauthor00aIntroduction to BusinesscLawrence Gitman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Understanding Economic Systems and Business -- Chapter 2: Making Ethical Decisions and Managing a Socially Responsible Business -- Chapter 3: Competing in the Global Marketplace -- Chapter 4: Forms of Business Ownership -- Chapter 5: Entrepreneurship: Starting and Managing Your Own Business -- Chapter 6: Management and Leadership in Today's Organizations -- Chapter 7: Designing Organizational Structures -- Chapter 8: Managing Human Resources and Labor Relations -- Chapter 9: Motivating Employees -- Chapter 10: Achieving World-Class Operations Management -- Chapter 11: Creating Products and Pricing Strategies to Meet Customers' Needs -- Chapter 12: Distributing and Promoting Products and Services -- Chapter 13: Using Technology to Manage Information -- Chapter 14: Using Financial Information and Accounting -- Chapter 15: Understanding Money and Financial Institutions -- Chapter 16: Understanding Financial Management and Securities Markets -- Chapter 17: Your Career in Business0 aIntroduction to Business covers the scope and sequence of most introductory business courses. The book provides detailed explanations in the context of core themes such as customer satisfaction, ethics, entrepreneurship, global business, and managing change. Introduction to Business includes hundreds of current business examples from a range of industries and geographic locations, which feature a variety of individuals. The outcome is a balanced approach to the theory and application of business concepts, with attention to the knowledge and skills necessary for student success in this course and beyond.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aMcDaniel, Carleauthor1 aShah, Amiteauthor1 aReece, Moniqueeauthor1 aKoffel, Lindaeauthor1 aTalsma, Bethanneauthor1 aHyatt, James C.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/616zAccess online version04114nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245002000167264004300187264006000230264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341002500412490002700437505265700464520038203121542001603503546001603519588004003535650002403575650002603599710003903625856007603664OTLid0000617MnU20260406020838.0m     o  d s      cr            180929s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172579  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aBusiness Ethics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Why Ethics Matter -- 1.1 Being a Professional of Integrity -- 1.2 Ethics and Profitability -- 1.3 Multiple versus Single Ethical Standards -- Chapter 2: Ethics from Antiquity to the Present -- 2.1 The Concept of Ethical Business in Ancient Athens -- 2.2 Ethical Advice for Nobles and Civil Servants in Ancient China -- 2.3 Comparing the Virtue Ethics of East and West -- 2.4 Utilitarianism: The Greatest Good for the Greatest Number -- 2.5 Deontology: Ethics as Duty -- 2.6 A Theory of Justice -- Chapter 3: Defining and Prioritizing Stakeholders -- 3.1 Adopting a Stakeholder Orientation -- 3.2 Weighing Stakeholder Claims -- 3.3 Ethical Decision-Making and Prioritizing Stakeholders -- 3.4 Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) -- Chapter 4: Three Special Stakeholders: Society, the Environment, and Government -- 4.1 Corporate Law and Corporate Responsibility -- 4.2 Sustainability: Business and the Environment -- 4.3 Government and the Private Sector -- Chapter 5: The Impact of Culture and Time on Business Ethics -- 5.1 The Relationship between Business Ethics and Culture -- 5.2 Business Ethics over Time -- 5.3 The Influence of Geography and Religion -- 5.4 Are the Values Central to Business Ethics Universal? -- Chapter 6: What Employers Owe Employees -- 6.1 The Workplace Environment and Working Conditions -- 6.2 What Constitutes a Fair Wage? -- 6.3 An Organized Workforce -- 6.4 Privacy in the Workplace -- Chapter 7: What Employees Owe Employers -- 7.1 Loyalty to the Company -- 7.2 Loyalty to the Brand and to Customers -- 7.3 Contributing to a Positive Work Atmosphere -- 7.4 Financial Intergrity -- 7.5 Criticism of the Company and Whistleblowing -- Chapter 8: Recognizing and Respecting the Rights of All -- 8.1 Diversity and Inclusion in the Workforce -- 8.2 Accommodating Different Abilities and Faiths -- 8.3 Sexual Identification and Orientation -- 8.4 Income Inequalities -- 8.5 Animal Rights and the Implications for Business -- Chapter 9: Professions under the Microscope -- 9.1 Entrepreneurship and Start-Up Culture -- 9.2 The Influence of Advertising -- 9.3 The Insurance Industry -- 9.4 Ethical Issues in the Provision of Health Care -- Chapter 10: Changing Work Environment and Future Trends -- 10.1 More Telecommuting or Less? -- 10.2 Workplace Campuses -- 10.3 Alternatives to Traditional Patterns of Work -- 10.4 Robotics, Artificial Intelligence, and the Workplace of the Future -- Chapter 11: Epilogue: Why Ethics Still Matter -- 11.1 Business Ethics in an Evolving Environment -- 11.2 Committing to an Ethical View -- 11.3 Becoming an Ethical Professional -- 11.4 Making a Difference in the Business World0 aBusiness Ethics is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of the single-semester business ethics course. This title includes innovative features designed to enhance student learning, including case studies, application scenarios, and links to video interviews with executives, all of which help instill in students a sense of ethical awareness and responsibility.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/617zAccess online version02893nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245005800163264004300221264004500264264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505045100486520129100937542002702228546001602255588004002271650003202311700003102343700003002374710003902404856007602443OTLid0000618MnU20260406020427.0m     o  d s      cr            180929s2008    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDemeyer, Sergeeauthor00aObject-Oriented Reengineering PatternscSerge Demeyer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLille, FrancebStéphane Ducassec[2008] 4c©2008.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Introduction -- Chapter 1: Reengineering Patterns -- II Reverse Engineering -- Chapter 2: Setting Direction -- Chapter 3: First Contact -- Chapter 4: Initial Understanding -- Chapter 5: Detailed Model Capture -- III Reengineering -- Chapter 6: Tests: Your Life Insurance! -- Chapter 7: Migration Strategies -- Chapter 8: Detecting Duplicated Code -- Chapter 9: Redistribute Responsibilities -- Chapter 10: Transform Conditionals to Polymorphism0 aThe documentation is missing or obsolete, and the original developers have departed. Your team has limited understanding of the system, and unit tests are missing for many, if not all, of the components. When you fix a bug in one place, another bug pops up somewhere else in the system. Long rebuild times make any change difficult. All of these are signs of software that is close to the breaking point. Many systems can be upgraded or simply thrown away if they no longer serve their purpose. Legacy software, however, is crucial for operations and needs to be continually available and upgraded. How can you reduce the complexity of a legacy system sufficiently so that it can continue to be used and adapted at acceptable cost? Based on the authors' industrial experiences, this book is a guide on how to reverse engineer legacy systems to understand their problems, and then reengineer those systems to meet new demands. Patterns are used to clarify and explain the process of understanding large code bases, hence transforming them to meet new requirements. The key insight is that the right design and organization of your system is not something that can be evident from the initial requirements alone, but rather as a consequence of understanding how these requirements evolve.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aDucasse, Stéphaneeauthor1 aNierstrasz, Oscareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/618zAccess online version02592nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002900145245007000174264004300244264006700287264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505049000528520093001018542003001948546001601978588004001994650003202034650003702066710003902103856007602142OTLid0000619MnU20260406020426.0m     o  d s      cr            180929s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aHow to Think Like a Computer ScientistbC++ VersioncAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The way of the program -- Chapter 2: Variables and types -- Chapter 3: Function -- Chapter 4: Conditionals and recursion -- Chapter 5: Fruitful functions -- Chapter 6: Iteration -- Chapter 7: Strings and things -- Chapter 8: Structures -- Chapter 9: More structures -- Chapter 10: Vectors -- Chapter 11: Member functions -- Chapter 12: Vectors of Objects -- Chapter 13: Objects of Vectors -- Chapter 14: Classes and invariants -- Chapter 15: File Input/Output and apmatrixes0 aThe goal of this book is to teach you to think like a computer scientist. I like the way computer scientists think because they combine some of the best features of Mathematics, Engineering, and Natural Science. Like mathematicians,computer scientists use formal languages to denote ideas (specifically computations). Like engineers, they design things, assembling components into systems and evaluating trade offs among alternatives. Like scientists, they observe the behavior of complex systems, form hypotheses, and test predictions.The single most important skill for a computer scientist is problem-solving. By that I mean the ability to formulate problems, think creatively about solutions, and express a solution clearly and accurately. As it turns out, the process of learning to program is an excellent opportunity to practice problem-solving skills. That’s why this chapter is called “The way of the program.”1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/619zAccess online version05162nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002900145245006800174264004300242264006700285264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505301100529520093103540542003004471546001604501588004104517650003204558650003704590700003404627710003904661856007604700OTLid0000620MnU20260406020426.0m     o  d s      cr            181007s1999    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aHow to Think Like a Computer ScientistbC VersioncAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[1999] 4c©1999.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The way of the program -- 1.1 What is a programming language? -- 1.2 What is a program? -- 1.3 What is debugging? -- 1.4 Formal and natural language -- 1.5 The first program -- 1.6 Glossary -- 1.7 Exercises -- Chapter 2: Variables and types -- 2.1 More output -- 2.2 Values -- 2.3 Variables -- 2.4 Assignment -- 2.5 Outputting variables -- 2.6 Keywords -- 2.7 Operators -- 2.8 Order of operations -- 2.9 Operators for characters -- 2.10 Composition -- 2.11 Glossary -- 2.12 Exercises -- Chapter 3: Function -- 3.1 Floating-point -- 3.2 Constants -- 3.3 Converting from double to int -- 3.4 Math functions -- 3.5 Composition -- 3.6 Adding new functions -- 3.7 Definitions and uses -- 3.8 Programs with multiple functions -- 3.9 Parameters and arguments -- 3.10 Parameters and variables are local -- 3.11 Functions with multiple parameters -- 3.12 Functions with results -- 3.13 Glossary -- 3.14 Exercises -- Chapter 4: Conditionals and recursion -- 4.1 Conditional execution -- 4.2 The modulus operator -- 4.3 Alternative execution -- 4.4 Chained conditionals -- 4.5 Nested conditionals -- 4.6 The return statement -- 4.7 Recursion -- 4.8 Infinite recursion -- 4.9 Stack diagrams for recursive functions -- 4.10 Glossary -- 4.11 Exercises -- Chapter 5: Fruitful functions -- 5.1 Return values -- 5.2 Program development -- 5.3 Composition -- 5.4 Boolean values -- 5.5 Boolean varaiables -- 5.6 Logical operators -- 5.7 Bool functions -- 5.8 Returning from main() -- 5.9 Glossary -- 5.10 Exercises -- Chapter 6: Iteration -- 6.1 Multiple assignment -- 6.2 Iteration -- 6.3 The while statement -- 6.4 Tables -- 6.5 Two-dimensional tables -- 6.6 Encapsulation and generalization -- 6.7 Functions -- 6.8 More encapsulation -- 6.9 Local varaiables -- 6.10 More generalization -- 6.11 Glossary -- 6.12 Exercises -- Chapter 7: Arrays -- 7.1 Increment and decrement operators -- 7.2 Accessing elements -- 7.3 Copying arrays -- 7.4 for loops -- 7.5 Array length -- 7.6 Random numbers -- 7.7 Statistics -- 7.8 Array of random numbers -- 7.9 Passing an array to a function -- 7.10 Counting -- 7.11 Checking the other values -- 7.12 A histogram -- 7.13 A single-pass solution -- 7.14 Random seeds -- 7.15 Glossary -- 7.16 Exercises -- Chapter 8: Strings and things -- 8.1 Containers for strings -- 8.2 String variables -- 8.3 Extracting characters from a string -- 8.4 Length -- 8.5 Traversal -- 8.6 Finding a character in a string -- 8.7 Pointers and Addresses -- 8.8 String concatenation -- 8.9 Assigning new values to string variables -- 8.10 strings are not comparable -- 8.11 Character classification -- 8.12 Getting user input -- 8.13 Glossary -- 8.14 Exercises -- Chapter 9: Structures -- 9.1 Compound values -- 9.2 Point objects -- 9.3 Accessing member variables -- 9.4 Operations on structures -- 9.5 Structures as parameters -- 9.6 Call by value -- 9.7 Call by reference -- 9.8 Rectangles -- 9.9 Structures as return types -- 9.10 Passing other types by reference -- 9.11 Glossary -- 9.12 Exercises0 aThe goal of this book is to teach you to think like a computer scientist. I like the way computer scientists think because they combine some of the best features of Mathematics, Engineering, and Natural Science. Like mathematicians, computer scientists use formal languages to denote ideas (specifically computations). Like engineers, they design things, assembling components into systems and evaluating trade offs among alternatives. Like scientists, they observe the behavior of complex systems, form hypotheses, and test predictions.The single most important skill for a computer scientist is problem-solving. By that I mean the ability to formulate problems, think creatively about solutions, and express a solution clearly and accurately. As it turns out, the process of learning to program is an excellent opportunity to practice problem-solving skills. That’s why this chapter is called “The way of the program.”1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aScheffler, Thomasetranslator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/620zAccess online version04022nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245008600165264004300251264006700294264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002500483490002700508505048100535520241201016542004103428546001603469588004003485650003203525710003903557856007603596OTLid0000621MnU20260406020427.0m     o  d s      cr            181007s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor00aThink Data StructuresbAlgorithms and Information Retrieval in JavacAllen Downey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Interfaces -- Chapter 2: Analysis of Algorithms -- Chapter 3: ArrayList -- Chapter 4: LinkedList -- Chapter 5: Doubly-linked list -- Chapter 6: Tree traversal -- Chapter 7: Getting to Philosophy -- Chapter 8: Indexer -- Chapter 9: The Map interface -- Chapter 10: Hashing -- Chapter 11: HashMap -- Chapter 12: TreeMap -- Chapter 13: Binary search tree -- Chapter 14: Persistence -- Chapter 15: Crawling Wikipedia -- Chapter 16: Boolean search -- Chapter 17: Sorting0 aData structures and algorithms are among the most important inventions of the last 50 years, and they are fundamental tools software engineers need to know. But in my opinion, most of the books on these topics are too theoretical, too big, and too bottom-up: Too theoretical: Mathematical analysis of algorithms is based on simplifying assumptions that limit its usefulness in practice. Many presentations of this topic gloss over the simplifications and focus on the math. In this book I present the most practical subset of this material and eliminate the rest. Too big: Most books on these topics are at least 500 pages, and some are more than 1000. By focusing on the topics I think are most useful for software engineers, I kept this book under 250 pages. Too bottom-up: Many data structures books focus on how data structures work (the implementations), with less about how to use them (the interfaces). In this book, I go “top down”, starting with the interfaces. Readers learn to use the structures in the Java Collections Framework before getting into the details of how they work. Finally, many present this material out of context and without motivation: it’s just one damn data structure after another! I try to alleviate the boredom by organizing the topics around an application—web search—that uses data structures extensively, and is an interesting and important topic in its own right. This application also motivates some topics that are not usually covered in an introductory data structures class, including persistent data structures, with Redis, and streaming algorithms. This book also presents basic aspects of software engineering practice, including version control and unit testing. Each chapter ends with an exercise that allows readers to apply what they have learned. Each exercise includes automated tests that check the solution. And for most exercises, I present my solution at the beginning of the next chapter. This book is intended for college students in computer science and related fields, as well as professional software engineers, people training in software engineering, and people preparing for technical interviews. I assume that the reader knows Java at an intermediate level, but I explain some Java features along the way, and provide pointers to supplementary material. People who have read Think Java or Head First Java are prepared for this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/621zAccess online version02476nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167050001000177100004500187245005300232250001700285264004300302264007700345264001200422300002200434336002600456337002600482338003600508341002500544490002700569505070900596520036201305542001601667546001601683588004001699650002301739650002501762650002401787650002301811700002801834700002901862710003901891856007601930OTLid0000622MnU20260406020824.0m     o  d s      cr            181007s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781948027014  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA773 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aKainoa Fialkowski Revilla, Marieeauthor00aHuman NutritioncMarie Kainoa Fialkowski Revilla  a2020 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Hawaii Manoac2020. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Chapter 1. Basic Concepts in Nutrition -- II. Chapter 2. The Human Body -- III. Chapter 3. Water and Electrolytes -- IV. Chapter 4. Carbohydrates -- V. Chapter 5. Lipids -- VI. Chapter 6. Protein -- VII. Chapter 7. Alcohol -- VIII. Chapter 8. Energy -- IX. Chapter 9. Vitamins -- X. Chapter 10. Major Minerals -- XI. Chapter 11. Trace Minerals -- XII. Chapter 12. Nutrition Applications -- XIII. Chapter 13. Lifespan Nutrition From Pregnancy to the Toddler Years -- XIV. Chapter 14. Lifespan Nutrition During Childhood and Adolescence -- XV. Chapter 15. Lifespan Nutrition in Adulthood -- XVI. Chapter 16. Performance Nutrition -- XVII. Chapter 17. Food Safety -- XVIII. Chapter 18. Nutritional Issues0 aThis textbook serves as an introduction to nutrition for undergraduate students and is the OER textbook for the FSHN 185 The Science of Human Nutrition course at the University of Hawai'i at Mānoa. The book covers basic concepts in human nutrition, key information about essential nutrients, basic nutritional assessment, and nutrition across the lifespan.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aTitchenal, Alaneauthor1 aDraper, Jennifereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/622zAccess online version03324nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003200156245009300188264004300281264008500324264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505129700586520085701883542002702740546001602767588004002783650002402823710003902847856007602886OTLid0000625MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            181012s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771113  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aRobinson, Bonnie J.eeditor00aBritish Literature IIbRomantic Era to the Twentieth Century and BeyondcBonnie Robinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: The Romantic Era -- 1.1 Romanticism in Literature -- 1.2 Historical Context -- 1.3 Recommended Reading -- 1.4 Anna Laetitia Barbauld -- 1.5 Charlotte Smith -- 1.6 William Blake -- 1.7 William Wordsworth -- 1.8 Dorothy Wordsworth -- 1.9 Samuel Taylor Coleridge -- 1.10 George Gordon, Lord Byron -- 1.11 Perey Bysshe Shelley -- 1.12 Felicia Dorothea Hemans -- 1.13 John Keats -- 1.14 Mary Shelley -- Part 2: The Victorian Age -- 2.1 The Victorian Movement in Literature -- 2.2 Historical Context -- 2.3 Recommended Reading -- 2.4 Elizabeth Barrett Browning -- 2.5 Alfred, Lord Tennyson -- 2.6 Robert Browning -- 2.7 Emily Bronte -- 2.8 George Eliot -- 2.9 Matthew Arnold -- 2.10 Charles Dickens -- 2.11 Dante Gabriel Rossetti -- 2.12 Christina Rossetti -- 2.13 William Morris -- 2.14 Gerard Manley Hopkins -- 2.15 Oscar Wilde -- 2.16 Rudyard Kipling -- Part 3: The Twentieth Century and Beyond -- 3.1 Modernism and Postmodernism as Literary Movements -- 3.2 Historical Context -- 3.3. Recommended Reading -- 3.4 Joseph Conrad -- 3.5 William Butler Yeats -- 3.6 Virginia Woolf -- 3.7 James Joyce -- 3.8 D. H. Lawrence -- 3.9 T.S. Eliot -- 3.10 Stevie Smith -- 3.11 Samuel Beckett -- 3.12 Doris Lessing -- 3.13 Fleur Adcock -- 3.14 Anita Desai -- 3.15 Seamus Heaney -- 3.16 Salman Rushdie0 aThe University of North Georgia Press and Affordable Learning Georgia bring you British Literature II: Romantic Era to the Twentieth Century and Beyond. Featuring 37 authors and full texts of their works, the selections in this open anthology represent the literature developed within and developing through their respective eras. This completely-open anthology will connect students to the conversation of literature that has captivated readers in the past and still holds us now. Features: Contextualizing introductions to the Romantic era; the Victorian era; and the Twentieth Century and beyond Over 90 historical images In-depth biographies of each author Instructional Design features, including Reading and Review Questions This textbook is an Open Educational Resource. It can be reused, remixed, and reedited freely without seeking permission.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/625zAccess online version02001nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245005300162264004300215264008000258264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505052000512520034401032542004101376546001601417588004001433650002601473700002501499710003901524856007601563OTLid0000626MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            181012s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aKearns, Torieauthor00aGeneral PsychologybAn IntroductioncTori Kearns 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Origins of Psychology -- Chapter 2: The Methods of Psychology -- Chapter 3: Biological Psychology -- Chapter 4: Sensation & Perception -- Chapter 5: Learning & Behavior -- Chapter 6: States of Consciousness -- Chapter 7: Memory -- Chapter 8: Motivation -- Chapter 9: Stress & Health -- Chapter 10: Cognition: Thinking, Language, and Intelligence -- Chapter 11: Human Development -- Chapter 12: Personality -- Chapter 13: Psychological Disorders -- Chapter 14: Therapy -- Chapter 15: Social Psychology0 aThe NOBA Project is a growing collection of expert-authored, open-licensed modules in psychology, funded by the Diener Education Fund. From these open modules, Tori Kearns and Deborah Lee created an arranged open textbook for her introductory psychology class. This textbook was created under a Round One ALG Textbook Transformation Grant.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aLee, Deboraheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/626zAccess online version02015nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050001000149100002700159245004000186264004300226264008300269264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505042400529520033200953542003001285546001601315588004001331650002301371650003501394650002401429700003701453710003901490856007601529OTLid0000627MnU20260406020741.0m     o  d s      cr            181013s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aSF811 4aRA4401 aJennings, Ryaneauthor00aVeterinary HistologycRyan Jennings 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOhio State University Librariesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Cell -- Chapter 2: Epithelium -- Chapter 3: Connective Tissue -- Chapter 4: Muscle -- Chapter 5: Bone -- Chapter 6: Cardiovascular System -- Chapter 7: Integument -- Chapter 8: Gastrointestinal System -- Chapter 9: Hepatobiliary System -- Chapter 10: Respiratory System -- Chapter 11: Urinary system -- Chapter 12: Male Reproductive System -- Chapter 13: Female Reproductive System -- Chapter 14: The Eye0 aVeterinary Histology is a microscopic anatomy textbook focused on domestic species, including the dog, cat, cattle, horses, swine, and camelids. This digital textbook provides comprehensive, system-specific text as well as high-resolution, annotated images along with chapter-specific glossary of terms and learning objectives.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPremanandan, Christophereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/627zAccess online version02920nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245004200163264004300205264007400248264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505034300499520150300842542001602345546001602361588004002377650003802417710003902455856007602494OTLid0000628MnU20260406020428.0m     o  d s      cr            181014s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKieviet, Pauluseauthor02aA grammar of Rapa NuicPaulus Kieviet 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Phonology -- Chapter 3: Nouns and verbs -- Chapter 4: Closed word classes -- Chapter 5: The noun phrase -- Chapter 6: Possession -- Chapter 7: The verb phrase -- Chapter 8: The verbal clause -- Chapter 9: Nonverbal and copular clauses -- Chapter 10: Mood and negation -- Chapter 11: Combining clauses0 aThis book is a comprehensive description of the grammar of Rapa Nui, the Polynesian language spoken on Easter Island. After an introductory chapter, the grammar deals with phonology, word classes, the noun phrase, possession, the verb phrase, verbal and nonverbal clauses, mood and negation, and clause combinations. The phonology of Rapa Nui reveals certain issues of typological interest, such as the existence of strict conditions on the phonological shape of words, word-final devoicing, and reduplication patterns motivated by metrical constraints. For Polynesian languages, the distinction between nouns and verbs in the lexicon has often been denied; in this grammar it is argued that this distinction is needed for Rapa Nui. Rapa Nui has sometimes been characterised as an ergative language; this grammar shows that it is unambiguously accusative. Subject and object marking depend on an interplay of syntactic, semantic and pragmatic factors. Other distinctive features of the language include the existence of a ‘neutral’ aspect marker, a serial verb construction, the emergence of copula verbs, a possessive-relative construction, and a tendency to maximise the use of the nominal domain. Rapa Nui’s relationship to the other Polynesian languages is a recurring theme in this grammar; the relationship to Tahitian (which has profoundly influenced Rapa Nui) especially deserves attention. The grammar is supplemented with a number of interlinear texts, two maps and a subject index.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/628zAccess online version03174nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002900135245004200164264004300206264007400249264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505028400500520181500784542001602599546001602615588004002631650003802671710003902709856007602748OTLid0000629MnU20260406020428.0m     o  d s      cr            181014s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aBerghäll, Liisaeauthor02aA grammar of MauwakecLiisa Berghäll 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Phonology: a brief overview -- Chapter 3: Morphology -- Chapter 4: Phrase level syntax -- Chapter 5: Clause -- Chapter 6: Functional domains -- Chapter 7: Sentence types -- Chapter 8: Clause combinations -- Chapter 9: Theme, topic, and focus0 aThis grammar provides a synchronic grammatical description of Mauwake, a Papuan Trans-New Guinea (TNG) language of about 2000 speakers on the north coast of the Madang Province in Papua New Guinea. It is the first book-length treatment of the Mauwake language and the only published grammar of the Kumil subgroup to date. Relying on other existing published and unpublished grammars, the author shows how the language is similar to, or different from, related TNG languages especially in the Madang province. The grammar gives a brief introduction to the Mauwake people, their environment and their culture. Although the book mainly covers morphology and syntax, it also includes ashort treatment of the phonological system and the orthography. The description of the grammatical units proceeds from the words/morphology to the phrases, clauses, sentence types and clause combinations. The chapter on functional domains is the only one where the organization is based on meaning/function rather than structure. The longest chapter in the book is on morphology, with verbs taking the central stage. The final chapter deals with the pragmatic functions theme, topic and focus. 13 texts by native speakers, mostly recorded and transcribed but some originally written, are included in the Appendix with morpheme-by-morpheme glosses and a free translation. The theoretical approach used is that of Basic Linguistic Theory. Language typologists and professional Papuanist linguists are naturally one target audience for the grammar. But also two other possible, and important, audiences influenced especially the style the writing: well educated Mauwake speakers interested in their language, and those other Papua New Guineans who have some basic training in linguistics and are keen to explore their own languages.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/629zAccess online version02272nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143100002600153245005000179264004300229264006700272264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505040700516520072300923542001601646546001601662588004001678650003601718650002901754710003901783856007601822OTLid0000630MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            181101s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aPoepsel, Markeauthor00aMedia, Society, Culture and YoucMark Poepsel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Media, Society, Culture and You -- 2. Digital Culture and Social Media -- 3. Media Literacy and Media Studies Research -- 4. Film and Bricolage -- 5. Television through Time -- 6. Music Recording, "Sharing" and the Information Economy -- 7. Radio Broadcasting, Podcasting and "Superbug Media" -- 8. Digital Gaming -- 9. Newspapers and Digital News -- 10. Advertising, Public Relations and Propaganda0 aMedia, Society, Culture, and You is an approachable introductory Mass Communication text that covers major mass communication terms and concepts including "digital culture." It discusses various media platforms and how they are evolving as Information and Communication Technologies change. This book has been peer-reviewed by 6 subject experts and is now available for adoption or adaptation. If you plan to adopt or adapt this open textbook, please let us know by filling out our adoption form. You can view the book's Review Statement for more information about reviewers and the review process. An Accessibility Assessment for this is book has also been prepared to see how this book meets accessibility standards.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/630zAccess online version02976nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245006300161264004300224264008500267264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002500474490002700499505104400526520081701570542003002387546001602417588004002433650003802473710003902511856007602550OTLid0000631MnU20260406020428.0m     o  d s      cr            181102s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKonomi, Emikoeauthor00aBeginning Japanese for ProfessionalsbBook 3cEmiko Konomi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLesson 9: Family -- Dialogue 1 -- 9-1-1 Verb Plain Past Form and ~te Form -- 9-1-2 V-te iru: 'be V-ing' or 'have V-ed' -- 9-1-3 Shitte iru 'know' -- Dialogue 2 -- 9-2-1 X to iu; X to omou -- 9-2-2 ~kke Retrieving Previously Shared Information -- 9-2-3 Classifier for Counting People -- Dialogue 3 -- 9-3-1 ~te form of adjectives -- 9-3-2 donna What Kind of X -- Dialogue 4 -- 9-4-1 Mou and Mada: A Change or No Change in Status -- Review -- Practical Skills -- Listening Exercise -- Homework -- Quiz -- Drill Tape Scripts -- Lesson 10: Can Do's and Cannot Do's -- Dialogue 1 -- 10-1-1 Verb Potential Forms -- 10-1-2 negative Requests -- Dialgoue 2 -- 10-2-1 Expressing Permission -- 10-2-2 Enryo: The Virtue of Holding Back -- Dialogue 3 -- 10-3-1 Expressing Prohibition 'Must not' -- 10-3-2 Noun de mo -- Dialogue 4 -- 10-4-1 Expressing Negative Permission 'Do Not Have To' -- 10-4-2 Expressing Necessities 'must' -- 10-4-3 X-sugiru -- 10-4-4 Verbs of Dressing -- Review -- Homework -- Quiz -- Drill Tape Scripts -- Appendix -- Verb Forms0 aThis textbook is designed for beginning learners who want to learn basic Japanese for the purpose of living and working in Japan. Unlike textbooks written primarily for students, whose content largely centers on student life, this book focuses more on social and professional life beyond school. As a beginning level textbook, this book includes many elementary grammar patterns (Japanese Language Proficiency Test Levels 5 and 4), but the vocabulary and situations are selected specifically for working adults. Explanations are kept concise so as to only cover key points. The main focus is on oral communication and the accompanying audio is to be used extensively. This textbook can be used for self-study, as part of an online course, or as a traditional college course. Audio files are also available online1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/631zAccess online version02469nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001300149100002900162245008000191250001800271264004300289264006600332264001200398300002200410336002600432337002600458338003600484341002800520490002700548505066000575520043501235542001601670546001601686588004001702650002401742650002601766650003601792700003001828700002501858700002501883710003901908856007601947OTLid0000632MnU20260406020754.0m     o  d s      cr            181102s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aLB1062.61 aRussell, Jeffreyeauthor00aTechnical Project Management in Living and Geometric OrdercJeffrey Russell  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WisconsinbUniversity of Wisconsin - Madisonc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Project Management Foundations: Principles and Practices -- 2. Strategy, Project Selection, and Portfolio Management -- 3. Project Initiation, Scope, and Structure -- 4. Procurement -- 5. Team Formation, Team Management, and Project Leadership -- 6. Project Planning -- 7. Project Scheduling -- 8. Managing Project Risks -- 9. Managing Project Value, Budgets, and Costs -- 10. Allocating and Managing Constrained Resources -- 11. Project Monitoring, Analytics, and Control -- 12. Critical Project Management Skill: Negotiation -- 13. Project Closure and Audits -- 14. Personal and Organizational Project Management Growth -- 15. Putting It All Together0 aThe Technical Project Management class is designed to help students build on their past experiences and develop effective strategies for managing complex technical projects, with an emphasis on applying project management concepts to real-world problems. In the weekly web conferences, the class comes together in community to discuss the lesson topics, considering the practical applications of the concepts in each subject area.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aPferdehirt, Wayneeauthor1 aNelson, Johneauthor1 aPrice, Brianeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/632zAccess online version03349nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003000153245004200183264004300225264007400268264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505053500519520170801054542001602762546001602778588004002794650003802834710003902872856007602911OTLid0000633MnU20260406020429.0m     o  d s      cr            181102s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783946234319  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLiljegren, Henrikeauthor02aA grammar of PalulacHenrik Liljegren 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Typological overview -- Chapter 3: Phonology -- Chapter 4: Parts of speech and the lexical profile -- Chapter 5: Nouns -- Chapter 6: Pronouns -- Chapter 7: Adjectives and quantifiers -- Chapter 8: Adverbs and postpositions -- Chapter 9: Verbs -- Chapter 10: Verbal categories -- Chapter 11: Noun phrases and non-verbal agreement -- Chapter 12: Grammatical relations -- Chapter 13: Simple clauses and argument structure -- Chapter 14: Complex constructions -- Chapter 15: Sentence modification0 aThis grammar provides a grammatical description of Palula, an Indo-Aryan language of the Shina group. The language is spoken by about 10,000 people in the Chitral district in Pakistan’s Khyber Pakhtunkhwa Province. This is the first extensive description of the formerly little-documented Palula language, and is one of only a few in-depth studies available for languages in the extremely multilingual Hindukush-Karakoram region. The grammar is based on original fieldwork data, collected over the course of about ten years, commencing in 1998. It is primarily in the form of recorded, mainly narrative, texts, but supplemented by targeted elicitation as well as notes of observed language use. All fieldwork was conducted in close collaboration with the Palula-speaking community, and a number of native speakers took active part in the process of data gathering, annotation and data management. The main areas covered are phonology, morphology and syntax, illustrated with a large number of example items and utterances, but also a few selected lexical topics of some prominence have received a more detailed treatment as part of the morphosyntactic structure. Suggestions for further research that should be undertaken are given throughout the grammar. The approach is theory-informed rather than theory-driven, but an underlying functional-typological framework is assumed. Diachronic development is taken into account, particularly in the area of morphology, and comparisons with other languages and references to areal phenomena are included insofar as they are motivated and available. The description also provides a brief introduction to the speaker community and their immediate environment.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/633zAccess online version03519nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245004400161264004300205264007400248264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505075200499520169301251542001602944546001602960588004002976650003803016710003903054856007603093OTLid0000634MnU20260323020342.0m     o  d s      cr            181103s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKluge, Angelaeauthor02aA grammar of Papuan MalaycAngela Kluge 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Phonology -- Chapter 3: Word-formation -- Chapter 4: Reduplication -- Chapter 5: Word classes -- Chapter 6: Personal pronouns -- Chapter 7: Demonstratives and locatives -- Chapter 8: Noun phrases -- Chapter 9: Adnominal possessive relations -- Chapter 10: Prepositions and the prepositional phrase -- Chapter 11: Verbal clauses -- Chapter 12: Nonverbal clauses -- Chapter 13: Negative, interrogative, and directive clauses -- Chapter 14: Conjunctions and constituent combining -- Appendix A: Word lists -- Appendix B: Texts -- Appendix C: Overview of recorded corpus -- Appendix D: OLAC resources for the languages of the Sarmi regency -- Appendix E: Population totals for West Papua -- Appendix F: Affixation0 aThis book presents an in-depth linguistic description of Papuan Malay, a non-standard variety of Malay. The language is spoken in coastal West Papua which covers the western part of the island of New Guinea. The study is based on sixteen hours of recordings of spontaneous narratives and conversations between Papuan Malay speakers, recorded in the Sarmi area on the northeast coast of West Papua. Papuan Malay is the language of wider communication and the first or second language for an ever-increasing number of people of the area. While Papuan Malay is not officially recognized and therefore not used in formal government or educational settings or for religious preaching, it is used in all other domains, including unofficial use in formal settings, and, to some extent, in the public media. After a general introduction to the language, its setting, and history, this grammar discusses the following topics, building up from smaller grammatical constituents to larger ones: phonology, word formation, noun and prepositional phrases, verbal and nonverbal clauses, non-declarative clauses, and conjunctions and constituent combining. Of special interest to linguists, typologists, and Malay specialists are the following in-depth analyses and descriptions: affixation and its productivity across domains of language choice, reduplication and its gesamtbedeutung, personal pronouns and their adnominal uses, demonstratives and locatives and their extended uses, and adnominal possessive relations and their non- canonical uses. This study provides a starting point for Papuan Malay language development efforts and a point of comparison for further studies on other Malay varieties.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/634zAccess online version03305nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245004000181264004300221264007400264264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505077300515520143001288542001602718546001602734588004002750650003802790710003902828856007602867OTLid0000635MnU20260323020342.0m     o  d s      cr            181103s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783946234111  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aSchackow, Dianaeauthor02aA grammar of YakkhacDiana Schackow 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: The Yakkha language and its speakers -- Chapter 3: Phonology -- Chapter 4: Pronouns, demonstratives, quantifiers, numerals, interrogatives -- Chapter 5: The noun phrase -- Chapter 6: Adjectives and adverbs -- Chapter 7: The geomorphic orientation system -- Chapter 8: Verbal inflection -- Chapter 9: Noun-verb predicates -- Chapter 10: Complex predication -- Chapter 11: Transitivity -- Chapter 12: Simple clauses -- Chapter 13: Nominalization and relativization -- Chapter 14: Adverbial clause linkage -- Chapter 15: Complementation -- Chapter 16: Connectives on the text level -- Chapter 17: Discourse particles and interjections -- Appendix A: Texts -- Appendix B: Yakkha kinship terms -- Appendix C: Index of Yakkha formatives0 aThis grammar provides the first comprehensive grammatical description of Yakkha, a Sino-Tibetan language of the Kiranti branch. Yakkha is spoken by about 14,000 speakers in eastern Nepal, in the Sankhuwa Sabha and Dhankuta districts. The grammar is based on original fieldwork in the Yakkha community. Its primary source of data is a corpus of 13,000 clauses from narratives and naturally-occurring social interaction which the author recorded and transcribed between 2009 and 2012. Corpus analyses were complemented by targeted elicitation. The grammar is written in a functional-typological framework. It focusses on morphosyntactic and semantic issues, as these present highly complex and comparatively under-researched fields in Kiranti languages. The sequence of the chapters follows the well-established order of phonological, morphological, syntactic and discourse-structural descriptions. These are supplemented by a historical and sociolinguistic introduction as well as an analysis of the complex kinship terminology. Topics such as verbal person marking, argument structure, transitivity, complex predication, grammatical relations, clause linkage, nominalization, and the topography-based orientation system have received in-depth treatment. Wherever possible, the structures found were explained in a historical-comparative perspective in order to shed more light on how their particular properties have emerged.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/635zAccess online version01879nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245004900182264004300231264007400274264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505030800525520045900833542001601292546001601308588004001324650003801364710003901402856007601441OTLid0000636MnU20260406020429.0m     o  d s      cr            181103s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783946234210  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aShimelman, Avivaeauthor02aA grammar of Yauyos QuechuacAviva Shimelman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Phonology and morphophonemics -- Chapter 3: Substantives -- Chapter 4: Verbs -- Chapter 5: Particles -- Chapter 6: Enclitics -- Chapter 7: Syntax -- Appendix A: Analysis of the Southern Yauyos Quenchua lexicon -- Appendix B: Further analysis of evidential modifiers0 aThis book presents a synchronic grammar of the southern dialects of Yauyos, an extremely endangered Quechuan language spoken in the Peruvian Andes. As the language is highly synthetic, the grammar focuses principally on morphology; a longer section is dedicated to the language's unusual evidential system. The grammar's 1400 examples are drawn from a 24-hour corpus of transcribed recordings collected in the course of the documentation of the language.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/636zAccess online version02906nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002600163245010600189264004300295264007400338264001200412300002200424336002600446337002600472338003600498341002800534490002700562505028300589520136200872542001602234546001602250588004002266650003202306650002702338700002802365710003902393856007602432OTLid0000637MnU20260406020753.0m     o  d s      cr            181103s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783961100903  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aP1231 aMoran, Steveneauthor04aThe Unicode cookbook for linguistsbManaging writing systems using orthography profilescSteven Moran 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Writing systems -- Chapter 2: The Unicode approach -- Chapter 3: Unicode pitfalls -- Chapter 4: The International Phonetic Alphabet -- Chapter 5: IPA meets Unicode -- Chapter 6: Practical recommendations -- Chapter 7: Orthography profiles -- Chapter 8: Implementation0 aThis text is a practical guide for linguists, and programmers, who work with data in multilingual computational environments. We introduce the basic concepts needed to understand how writing systems and character encodings function, and how they work together at the intersection between the Unicode Standard and the International Phonetic Alphabet. Although these standards are often met with frustration by users, they nevertheless provide language researchers and programmers with a consistent computational architecture needed to process, publish and analyze lexical data from the world's languages. Thus we bring to light common, but not always transparent, pitfalls which researchers face when working with Unicode and IPA. Having identified and overcome these pitfalls involved in making writing systems and character encodings syntactically and semantically interoperable (to the extent that they can be), we created a suite of open-source Python and R tools to work with languages using orthography profiles that describe author- or document-specific orthographic conventions. In this cookbook we describe a formal specification of orthography profiles and provide recipes using open source tools to show how users can segment text, analyze it, identify errors, and to transform it into different written forms for comparative linguistics research.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks1 aCysouw, Michaeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/637zAccess online version02766nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003100156245010400187264004300291264008500334264001200419300002200431336002600453337002600479338003600505341002500541490002700566505040600593520118300999542002702182546001602209588004002225650002402265710003902289856007602328OTLid0000638MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            181116s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771236  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aBennet, Tanya Longeauthor00aWriting and LiteraturebComposition as Inquiry, Learning, Thinking, and CommunicationcTanya Bennet 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWhy Write About Literature? -- Chapter 1: Reading Like a Professional -- Chapter 2: Forming a Perspective on the Subject -- Chapter 3: Effective Argument -- Chapter 4: Experiencing the Power of Poetry -- Chapter 5: The Truths of Fiction -- Chapter 6: All the World's a Stage -- Chapter 7: Creative Nonfiction, The Fourth Genre -- Chapter 8: The Literary Analysis Essay -- Chapter 9: The Research Paper0 aIn the age of Buzzfeeds, hashtags, and Tweets, students are increasingly favoring conversational writing and regarding academic writing as less pertinent in their personal lives, education, and future careers. Writing and Literature: Composition as Inquiry, Learning, Thinking and Communication connects students with works and exercises and promotes student learning that is kairotic and constructive. Dr. Tanya Long Bennett, professor of English at the University of North Georgia, poses questions that encourage active rather than passive learning. Furthering ideas presented in Contribute a Verse: A Guide to First-Year Composition as a complimentary companion, Writing and Literature builds a new conversation covering various genres of literature and writing. Students learn the various writing styles appropriate for analyzing, addressing, and critiquing these genres including poetry, novels, dramas, and research writing. The text and its pairing of helpful visual aids throughout emphasizes the importance of critical reading and analysis in producing a successful composition. Writing and Literature is a refreshing textbook that links learning, literature, and life.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/638zAccess online version03799nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145245010100156264004300257264008500300264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505171000562520087002272542002703142546001603169588004103185650002403226700003203250700002803282710003903310856007603349OTLid0000639MnU20260406020429.0m     o  d s      cr            181116s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771281  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aBritish Literature I AnthologybFrom the Middle Ages to Neoclassicism and the Eighteenth Century 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: The Middle Ages -- 1.1 Learning Outcomes -- 1.2 Introduction -- 1.3 Recommended Reading -- 1.4 The Dream of the Rood -- 1.5 Beowulf -- 1.6 Judith -- 1.7 The Wanderer -- 1.8 The Wife's Lament -- 1.9 The Venerable Bede -- 1.10 Anglo-Saxon Riddles -- 1.11 Marie de France -- 1.12 Middle English Lyrics -- 1.13 Geoffrey Chaucer -- 1.14 Sir Gawain and the Green Knight -- 1.15 Julian of Norwich -- 1.16 The Second Shepherds' Play -- 1.17 Sir Thomas Malory -- 1.18 Everyman -- 1.19 Key Terms -- Part Two: The Tudor Age (1485-1603) -- 2.1 Learning Outcomes -- 2.2 Introduction -- 2.3 Recommended Reading -- 2.4 Thomas More -- 2.5 Thomas Wyatt -- 2.6 Henry Howard, Earl of Surrey -- 2.7 Queen Elizabeth -- 2.8 Edmund Spenser -- 2.9 Sir Walter Raleigh -- 2.10 Sir Philip Sidney -- 2.11 Mary (Sidney) Herbert, Countess of Pembroke -- 2.12 Christopher Marlowe -- 2.13 William Shakespeare -- 2.14 Key Terms -- Part 3: The Seventeenth Century: The Age of Revolution (1603-1688) -- 3.1 Learning Outcomes -- 3.2 Introduction -- 3.3 Recommended Reading -- 3.4 John Donne -- 3.5 Aemilia Lanyer -- 3.6 Ben Jonson -- 3.7 Robert Herrick -- 3.8 Andrew Marvell -- 3.9 Margaret Cavendish, the Duchess of Newcastle -- 3.10 John Milton -- 3.11 John Dryden -- 3.12 Samuel Pepys -- 3.13 Key Terms -- Part 4: Neoclassicism and the Eighteenth Century (1603-1688) -- 4.1 Learning Outcomes -- 4.2 Introduction -- 4.3 Recommended Reading -- 4.4 Aphra Behn -- 4.5 William Congreve -- 4.6 Daniel Defoe -- 4.7 Anne Finch, Countess of Winchilsea -- 4.8 Jonathan Swift -- 4.9 Alexander Pope -- 4.10 Henry Fielding -- 4.11 Lady Mary Wortley Montagu -- 4.12 Samuel Johnson -- 4.13 James Boswell -- 4.14 Olaudah Equiano -- 4.15 Key Terms0 aThe University of North Georgia Press and Affordable Learning Georgia bring you British Literature I: From the Middle Ages to Neoclassicism and the Eighteenth Century. Featuring over 50 authors and full texts of their works, this anthology follows the shift of monarchic to parliamentarian rule in Britain, and the heroic epic to the more egalitarian novel as genre. Features: Original introductions to The Middle Ages; The Sixteenth Century: The Tudor Age; The Seventeenth Century: The Age of Revolution; and Neoclassicism and the Eighteenth Century Over 100 historical images Instructional Design, including Reading and Review Questions and Key Terms Forthcoming ancillary with open-enabled pedagogy, allowing readers to contribute to the project This textbook is an Open Access Resource. It can be reused, remixed, and reedited freely without seeking permission.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aRobinson, Bonnie J.eeditor1 aGetty, Laura J.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/639zAccess online version02326nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100003000159245005700189264004300246264008500289264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002500496490002700521505036000548520074800908542002701656546001601683588004101699650002401740650002601764650002301790710003901813856007601852OTLid0000640MnU20260406020429.0m     o  d s      cr            181116s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aJonick, Christineeauthor00aPrinciples of Financial AccountingcChristine Jonick 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Accounting Cycle for the Service Business-Cash Basis -- Chapter 2: Accounting Cycle for the Service Business-Accrual Basis -- Chapter 3: Accounting Cycle for a Merchandising Business -- Chapter 4: Assets in More Detail -- Chapter 5: Liabilities in More Detail -- Chapter 6: Stockholders' Equity in More Detail -- Chapter 7: Capstone Experiences0 aThe University of North Georgia Press and Affordable Learning Georgia bring you Accounting I. Well-written and straightforward, Principles of Financial Accounting is a needed contribution to open source pedagogy in the business education world. Written in order to directly meet the needs of her students, this textbook developed from Dr. Christine Jonick’s years of teaching and commitment to effective pedagogy. Features: Peer reviewed by academic professionals and tested by students Over 100 charts and graphs Instructional exercises appearing both in-text and for Excel Resources for student professional development This textbook is an Open Education Resource. It can be reused, remixed, and reedited freely without seeking permission.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/640zAccess online version03264nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002300150245006700173250001600240264004300256264007500299264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002500496490002700521505014400548520191200692542004102604546001602645588004002661650002802701650003402729710003902763856007602802OTLid0000641MnU20260406020429.0m     o  d s      cr            181116s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aRicks, Valeauthor04aThe Story of Contract LawbImplementing the BargaincVal Ricks  a4th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc2017. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter I: What Is the Bargain? -- Chapter II: Subsequent Events -- Chapter III: Remedies -- Chapter IV: Third-Party Rights and Obligations0 aThis book is a companion volume to Volume I, "The Story of Contract Law: Formation." Volume I introduces students to law study and teaches basic doctrines of contract formation along with formation defenses. This book, Volume II, The Story of Contract Law: Implementing the Bargain, covers the rest of basic contract doctrine, namely, laws that1) determine the content of the bargain (plain meaning, usage and custom, good faith, mistake in transmission, parol evidence, and express and constructive conditions);2) govern the effect of events that occur after formation (impracticability, frustration, failure of consideration, and risk of loss);3) set remedies—rescission, damages, specific performance—available to courts when liability exists; and4) establish the rights of third parties in contracts by assignment or delegation or as third-party beneficiaries. This book includes many classic teaching cases and introduces new ones. The book also includes many problems, most based on actual cases. The book takes especial care with the doctrine of concurrent conditions, a common-law rule adopted in the late 1700s that required doctrinal readjustment across all the law governing contract performance and remedies. This volume also continues several themes from Volume I. Volume II continues to tie rules to contract law’s central structural idea, that of fair exchange. Also, to the extent helpful to student understanding, Volume II explains doctrines in part through their chronological development. The book introduces the doctrines in the order best conducive to students’ understanding contract law as a regulatory whole; for this volume, it is the order in which the doctrines arise in litigation. Finally, where possible, this volume repeats ideas at helpful points and suggests ties between doctrines so that the structural coherence of contract doctrine becomes easier to understand.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/641zAccess online version03100nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003100138245006200169250001300231264004300244264005600287264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505119500520520077601715542004102491546001602532588004002548650003502588710003902623856007602662OTLid0000642MnU20260406020723.0m     o  d s      cr            181117s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aOlivier, Jean-Pauleauthor00aBusiness MathbA Step-by-Step HandbookcJean-Paul Olivier  a2023-A-D 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2021. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPART 1: Mathematic Fundamentals for Business -- Chapter 1: How To Use This Textbook -- Chapter 2: Back to the Basics -- Chapter 3: General Business Management Applications -- PART 2: Applications in Human Resources, Economics, Marketing, and Accounting -- Chapter 4: Human Resource & Economic Applications -- Chapter 5: Marketing and Accounting Fundamentals -- Chapter 6: Marketing Applications -- Chapter 7: Accounting Applications -- PART 3: Applications in Finance, Banking, and Investing: Working With Single Payments -- Chapter 8: Simple Interest: Working With Single Payment & Applications -- Chapter 9: Compound Interest: Working With Single Payments -- Chapter 10: Compound Interest: Applications Involving Single Payments -- PART 4: Applications in Finance, Banking, and Investing: Working With A Continuous Series of Payments (Annuities) -- Chapter 11: Compound Interest: Annuities -- Chapter 12: Compound Interest: Special Applications of Annuities -- PART 5: Applications in Finance, Banking, and Investing: Amortization and Special Concepts -- Chapter 13: Understanding Amortization & Its Applications -- Chapter 14: Bonds and Sinking Funds -- Chapter 15: Making Good Decisions0 aBusiness Mathematics was written to meet the needs of a twenty-first century student. It takes a systematic approach to helping students learn how to think and centers on a structured process termed the PUPP Model (Plan, Understand, Perform, and Present). This process is found throughout the text and in every guided example to help students develop a step-by-step problem-solving approach. This textbook simplifies and integrates annuity types and variable calculations, utilizes relevant algebraic symbols, and is integrated with the Texas Instruments BAII+ calculator. It also contains structured exercises, annotated and detailed formulas, and relevant personal and professional applications in discussion, guided examples, case studies, and even homework questions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/642zAccess online version02268nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002500138245004200163264004300205264006500248264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505056100490520063101051542004101682546001601723588004101739650002301780710003901803856007601842OTLid0000643MnU20260406020430.0m     o  d s      cr            181201s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.31 aIdema, Timoneauthor00aMechanics and RelativitycTimon Idema 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to classical mechanics -- Chapter 2: Forces -- Chapter 3: Energy -- Chapter 4: Momentum -- Chapter 5: Rotational motion, torque and angular momentum -- Chapter 6: General planar motion -- Chapter 7: General rotational motion -- Chapter 8: Oscillations -- Chapter 9: Waves -- Chapter 10: Einstein's postulates -- Chapter 11: Lorentz transformations -- Chapter 12: Spacetime diagrams -- Chapter 13: Position, energy and momentum in special relativity -- Chapter 14: Relativistic collisions -- Chapter 15: Relativistic forces and waves0 aIn Mechanics and Relativity, the reader is taken on a tour through time and space. Starting from the basic axioms formulated by Newton and Einstein, the theory of motion at both the everyday and the highly relativistic level is developed without the need of prior knowledge. The relevant mathematics is provided in an appendix. The text contains various worked examples and a large number of original problems to help the reader develop an intuition for the physics. Applications covered in the book span a wide range of physical phenomena, including rocket motion, spinning tennis rackets and high-energy particle collisions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/643zAccess online version02742nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003100154245005800185250001600243264004300259264006500302264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002800489490002700517505021600544520132100760542004102081546001602122588004102138650003202179700003002211710003902241856007602280OTLid0000644MnU20260406020430.0m     o  d s      cr            181201s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463665988  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aHugtenburg, Stefaneauthor00aDelftse Foundations of ComputationcStefan Hugtenburg  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction and Learning Objectives -- Chapter 2: Logic -- Chapter 3: Proof -- Chapter 4: Sets, Functions, and Relations -- Chapter 5: Looking Beyond -- Selected Solutions -- Further Reading -- Index0 aDELFTSE FOUNDATIONS OF COMPUTATION is a textbook for a one-quarter introductory course in theoretical computer science. It includes top-ics from propositional and predicate logic, proof techniques, discrete structures, set theory and the theory of computation, along with practical applications to computer science. It has no prerequisites other than a general familiarity with computer programming. This book is derived from Foundations of Computation by Carol Critchlow and David Eck, Version 2.3 (Summer 2011), which is licensed under CC BYNC-SA 4.0. Critchlow and Eck are not associated with the TU Delft editions. This book also uses some material from Wikipedia (English) (en.wikipedia. org), which is licensed under CC BY-SA 3.0. The authors of the TU Delft editions are responsible for any errors, and welcome bug reports and suggestions by email or in person. Thanks to M. de Jong, T. Klos, I. van Kreveld, F. Mulder, H. Tonino, E. Walraven, and all students who reported bugs or provided exercise solutions. This work can be redistributed in unmodified form, or in modified form with proper attribution and under the same licence as the original, for noncommercial uses only, as specified by the Creative Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 Licence (creativecommons.org/licenses/by-ncsa/4.0/).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aYorke-Smith, Neileauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/644zAccess online version02301nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003000140245005100170264004300221264008500264264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505022200526520097800748542001601726546001601742588004001758650003801798710003901836856007601875OTLid0000645MnU20260406020822.0m     o  d s      cr            181208s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTJ1-15701 aVirasak, LamNgeuneauthor00aManufacturing ProcessescLamNgeun Virasakn4-5 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Milling Machines -- Chapter 2: Lathe Machines -- Chapter 3: Drill Presses -- Chapter 4: Bandsaws -- Chapter 5: Surface Grinders -- Chapter 6: Heat Treating -- Chapter 7: Lean Manufacturing -- Chapter 8: CNC0 aThis textbook provides an introduction to the important area of manufacturing processes. This text will explain the hows, whys, and whens of various machining operations, set-ups, and procedures. Throughout this text, you will learn how machine tools operate, and when to use one particular machine instead of another. It is organized for students who plan to enter the manufacturing technology field and for those who wish to develop the skills, techniques, and knowledge essential for advancement in this occupational cluster. The organization and contents of this text focus primarily on theory and practice. The machining processes and technology sections in this textbook cover such machine tools as surface grinders, bandsaws, drill presses, milling machines, and the engine lathe. Additionally, the importance of Computer Numerical Control (CNC) in the operation of the most machine tools is explained, and its role in automated manufacturing is explored thoroughly.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/645zAccess online version01932nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001100139100002800150245005500178264004300233264008500276264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002500483490002700508505036700535520039800902542004101300546001601341588004001357650002301397650002301420710003901443856007601482OTLid0000646MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            181208s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQC21.31 aDavis, Lawrenceeauthor00aBody PhysicsbMotion to MetabolismcLawrence Davis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Purpose and Preparation -- Unit 2: Measuring the Body -- Unit 3: Errors in Body Composition Measurement -- Unit 4: Better Body Composition Measurement -- Unit 5: Maintaining Balance -- Unit 6: Strength and Elasticity of the Body -- Unit 7: The Body in Motion -- Unit 8: Locomotion -- Unit 9: Powering the Body -- Unit 10: Body Heat and The Fight for Life0 aBody Physics sticks to the basic functioning of the human body, from motion to metabolism, as a common theme through which fundamental physics topics are introduced. Related practice, reinforcement and Lab activities are included. See the front matter for more details. Additional supplementary material, activities, and information can be found at: https://openoregon.pressbooks.pub/bpsupmat/1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/646zAccess online version02634nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003200137245007500169264004300244264006500287264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505042700529520103200956542004101988546001602029588004002045650004202085650003002127710003902157856007602196OTLid0000647MnU20260406020715.0m     o  d s      cr            181209s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aAlderliesten, Renéeauthor00aIntroduction to Aerospace Structures and MaterialscRené Alderliesten 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Material physics & properties -- Chapter 2: Environment & durability -- Chapter 3: Material types -- Chapter 4: Manufacturing -- Chapter 5: Aircraft & spacecraft structures -- Chapter 6: Aircraft & spacecraft loads -- Chapter 7: Translating loads to stresses -- Chapter 8: Considering strength & stiffness -- Chapter 9: Design & certification -- Chapter 10: Fatigue & durability -- Chapter 11: Structural joints0 aThis book provides an introduction to the discipline of aerospace structures and materials. It is the first book to date that includes all relevant aspects of this discipline within a single monologue. These aspects range from materials, manufacturing and processing techniques, to structures, design principles and structural performance, including aspects like durability and safety. With the purpose of introducing students into the basics of the entire discipline, the book presents the subjects broadly and loosely connected, adopting either a formal description or an informal walk around type of presentation. A key lessons conveyed within this book is the interplay between the exact science and engineering topics, like solid material physics and structural analysis, and the soft topics that are not easily captured by equations and formulas. Safety, manufacturability, availability and costing are some of these topics that are presented in this book to explain decisions and design solutions within this discipline.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSpace SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/647zAccess online version02013nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153100002500161245004800186264004300234264006200277264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505053200516520032801048542002701376546001601403588004001419650002301459650003001482710003901512856007601551OTLid0000648MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            181214s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781981731732  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aQE11 aAllosso, Daneauthor00aAmerican Environmental HistorycDan Allosso 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota Libraries Publishing Projectc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Prehistory -- Chapter 2: Recontact -- Chapter 3: Colonial North America -- Chapter 4: Frontier and Grid -- Chapter 5: Commons, Mills, Corporations -- Chapter 6: Transportation Revolution -- Chapter 7: Commodities, Centers, Peripheries -- Chapter 8: Green Revolution -- Chapter 9: City Life -- Chapter 10: Wilderness and Country Life -- Chapter 11: Farmers and Agribusiness -- Chapter 12: Treasures Underground -- Chapter 13: Limits to Growth? -- Chapter 14: Economics and Externalities -- Chapter 15: Food and Choice0 aFor too long the environment has been considered little more than a neutral background to history. This text surveys findings of the new field of Environmental History about how the environment of the Americas influenced the actions of people here and how people affected their environments, from prehistory to the present.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/648zAccess online version02015nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143110004800154245008500202264004300287264005700330264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002500509490002700534505054900561520029401110542001601404546001601420588004001436650002301476650002701499710003901526856007601565OTLid0000649MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            181214s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.32 aPortland Community CollegebFacultyeauthor00aOpen Resources for Community College AlgebracPortland Community College Faculty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbPortland Community Collegec[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Variables, Expressions, and Equations -- Chapter 2: Linear Equations and Inequalities -- Chapter 3: Graphing Lines -- Chapter 4: Systems of Linear Equations -- Chapter 5: Exponents and Polynomials -- Chapter 6: Radical Expressions and Equations -- Chapter 7: Solving Quadratic Equations -- Chapter 8: Quantities in the Physical World -- Chapter 9: Topics in Graphing -- Chapter 10: Factoring -- Chapter 11: Functions -- Chapter 12: Rational Functions and Equations -- Chapter 13: Graphs and Equations -- Appendix A: Basic Math Review0 aOpen Resources for Community College Algebra (ORCCA) is an open-source, openly-licensed textbook package (eBook, print, and online homework) for basic and intermediate algebra. At Portland Community College, Part 1 is used in MTH 60, Part 2 is used in MTH 65, and Part 3 is used in MTH 95.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/649zAccess online version02409nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002500153245005400178264004300232264005500275264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505059300507520072601100542003001826546001601856588004001872650002001912710003901932856007601971OTLid0000650MnU20260406020616.0m     o  d s      cr            190114s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781945398872  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aSanders, Taleauthor03aAn Introduction to Technical TheatrecTal Sanders 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aForest Grove, ORbPacific University Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1: Theatre, A Collaborative Art -- Module 2: Organizational Structures -- Module 3: Production Scheduling -- Module 4: Theatre Spaces -- Module 5: Our Stages and Their Equipment -- Module 6: Design and Collaboration -- Module 7: Scenery and Construction -- Module 8: Props and Effects -- Module 9: Stage Management -- Module 10: Costumes and Character Creation -- Module 11: Lighting Design -- Module 12: Lighting Equipment and Control Systems -- Module 13: Sound Design and Equipment -- Module 14: Scene Painting and Color Theory -- Module 15: Stage Crews and Production Etiquette0 aAn Introduction to Technical Theatre draws on the author’s experience in both the theatre and the classroom over the last 30 years. Intended as a resource for both secondary and post-secondary theatre courses, this text provides a comprehensive overview of technical theatre, including terminology and general practices. Introduction to Technical Theatre’s accessible format is ideal for students at all levels, including those studying technical theatre as an elective part of their education. The text’s modular format is also intended to assist teachers approach the subject at their own pace and structure, a necessity for those who may regularly rearrange their syllabi around productions and space scheduling.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/650zAccess online version02087nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003000155245005100185264004300236264007800279264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505014600534520073900680542002701419546001601446588004101462650002901503700002701532700002701559710003901586856007601625OTLid0000651MnU20260406020431.0m     o  d s      cr            190117s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781449330064  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aBounegru, Lilianaeeditor04aThe Data Journalism HandbookcLiliana Bounegru 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEuropean Journalism Centrec[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a01 Front Matter -- 02 Introduction -- 03 In The Newsroom -- 04 Case Studies -- 05 Getting Data -- 06 Understanding Data -- 07 Delivering Data0 aWhen you combine the sheer scale and range of digital information now available with a journalist’s "nose for news" and her ability to tell a compelling story, a new world of possibility opens up. With The Data Journalism Handbook, you’ll explore the potential, limits, and applied uses of this new and fascinating field. This valuable handbook has attracted scores of contributors since the European Journalism Centre and the Open Knowledge Foundation launched the project at MozFest 2011. Through a collection of tips and techniques from leading journalists, professors, software developers, and data analysts, you’ll learn how data can be either the source of data journalism or a tool with which the story is told—or both.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aChambers, Lucyeeditor1 aGray, Jonathaneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/651zAccess online version03872nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002800155245006300183264004300246264005500289264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505207000521520062302591542001603214546001603230588004003246650002903286700003003315700002603345710003903371856007603410OTLid0000652MnU20260406020720.0m     o  d s      cr            190117s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781945398797  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aWesolek, Andreweauthor00aOERbA Field Guide for Academic LibrarianscAndrew Wesolek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aForest Grove, ORbPacific University Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection 1: The Case for OER -- Stakes and Stakeholders: Open Educational Resources - Framing the Issues -- What Does the Research Say About OER? -- Section 2: The Pedagogical Implications of OER -- From Textbook Affordability to Transformative Pedagogy: Growing an OER Community -- Creating Opportunities in Open Education: An Exploration of the Intersections of Information Literacy and Scholarly Communication -- Experiential Learning and Open Education: Partnering with Students to Evaluate OER Accessibility -- Course Material Decisions and Factors: Unpacking the Opaque Box -- An Open Athenaeum: Creating an Institutional Home for Open Pedagogy -- Section 3: OER Advocacy, Partnerships, Sustainability, and Student Engagement -- Open Partnerships: Identifying and Recruiting Allies for Open Educational Resources Initiatives -- Getting to Know You: How We Turned Community Knowledge into Open Advocacy -- Advancing Access for First-Generation College Students: OER Advocacy at UT San Antonio -- Student-Driven OER: Championing the Student Voice in Campus-Wide Efforts -- From Conversation to Cultural Change: Strategies for Connecting with Students and Faculty to Promote OER Adoption -- Making the Connections: The Role of Professional Development in Advocating for OER -- Advocacy in OER: A Statewide Strategy for Building a Sustainable Library Effort -- Interinstitutional Collaborations to Forge Intracampus Connections: A Case Study from the Duke Endowment Libraries -- Section 4: Library-Supported Adoption and Creation Programs -- Seeking Alternatives to High-Cost Textbooks: Six Years of The Open Education Initiative at the University of Massachusetts Amherst -- From Start-Up to Adolescence: University of Oklahoma's OER Efforts -- A Grassroots Approach to OER Adoption: The University of Saskatchewan Experience -- Bringing OER to the Liberal Arts: An Innovative Grant Program -- Transforming Publishing with a Little Help From Our Friends: Supporting an Open Textbook Pilot Project with Friends of the Libraries Grant Funding -- Closing Reflections0 aWe intend this book to act as a guide writ large for would-be champions of OER, that anyone—called to action by the example set by our chapter authors—might serve as guides themselves. The following chapters tap into the deep experience of practitioners who represent a meaningful cross section of higher education institutions in North America. It is our hope that the examples and discussions presented by our authors will facilitate connections among practitioners, foster the development of best practices for OER adoption and creation, and more importantly, lay a foundation for novel, educational excellence.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aLashley, Jonathaneauthor1 aLangley, Anneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/652zAccess online version02169nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000700135245004300142264004300185264008000228264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505016600485520075700651542002701408546001601435588004101451650002501492650003801517650002601555700002901581700004601610710003901656856007601695OTLid0000653MnU20260323020345.0m     o  d s      cr            190124s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aL700aEvaluación del Aprendizaje en Inglés 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aValparaíso, ChilebPontificia Universidad Católica de Valparaísoc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContext -- Unit 1: Exploring assessment principles -- Unit 2: Assessing receptive skills -- Unit 3: Assessing productive and interactive skills -- Course Summary0 aThis course material has been created for the course “Evaluation of comprehension and oral and written production in English” (LCL 462) from the English Language Teaching (ELT) program at the Institute of Literature and Language Sciences, Pontificia Universidad Católica de Valparaíso (PUCV). This course is located in the 8th semester of the curriculum of the bachelor degree of “Pedagogy in English” (English Language Initial Teacher Training) at PUCV. This course corresponds to the area of specific disciplinary training, complements the professional training course “Evaluation of Learning” of the School of Pedagogy and precedes the professional practice, academic-professional activity culminating in the curriculum of this career.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aFonseca, Jannetteauthor1 aHenríquez, Francisca Henríquez,eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/653zAccess online version02410nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245007400134264004300208264007900251264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505065800507520054001165542001601705546002701721588004101748650002501789700003701814700003401851700003601885710003901921856007601960OTLid0000654MnU20260330020726.0m     o  d s      cr            190124s2015    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aDesafíos De La Formación Ciudadana En La Era DigitalbEstadodelarte 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aValparaíso, ChilebPontificia Universidad Católica de Valparaísoc2020. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Marco General: Globalización Y Formación Ciudadana -- 2 Bases Conceptuales De Ciudadanía -- 3 La Ciudadanía Mundial O Global -- 4 El Concepto De Formación Ciudadana -- 5 La Formación Ciudadana Como Respuesta A Los Desafíos Contextuales: Definiendo El Nuevo Perfil Ciudadano -- 6 El Enfoque Por Competencias -- 7 Transformación De Los Espacios De Participación: La Ciudadanía Digital -- 8 Ciudadania Digital Y Transparencia -- 9 La Formación Ciudadana Como Respuesta A Los Desafíos Educacionales: Herramientas Conceptuales Para Abordar El Diseño Curricular -- 10 Aprendizajes Clave Y Matrices En Formación Ciudadana -- 11 Bibliografía --0 aEsta publicación es posible gracias al proyecto “Fortaleciendo la Democracia a través del Ciudadanía Digital en Chile y México”, desarollado por La Biblioteca del Congreso Nacional de Chile y el Instituto Belisario Domínguez del Senado de México, y financiado por el Fondo Conjunto de Cooperación México–Chile (convocatoria 2015). Dicho fondo es administrado por la Agencia de Cooperación Internacional para el Desarrollo de Chile (AGCID) y la Agencia Mexicana de Cooperación Internacional para el Desarrollo (AMEXCID).1 fAttribution  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aGuzmán, David Contreraseeditor1 aSilva, David Aceitunoeauthor1 aZúñiga, Antonio Tapiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/654zAccess online version01920nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245005600162264004300218264008000261264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505024600518520040600764542002701170546001601197588004101213650003301254650002501287700002801312700002601340700002901366710003901395856007601434OTLid0000655MnU20260330020707.0m     o  d s      cr            190124s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014035  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL700aGuía Para Realizar Textos Abiertos Con Estudiantes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aValparaíso, ChilebPontificia Universidad Católica de Valparaísoc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducción -- Colaboradores -- Parte I: Pedagogía abierta -- Parte II: Ideas de proyecto y estudios de caso -- Parte III: Derechos de los estudiantes y responsabilidades de los docentes -- Parte IV: Tareas de muestra -- Parte V: Recursos0 a¿Qué es la pedagogía abierta? ¿Cómo la están poniendo en práctica los profesores en sus aulas para construir textos abiertos y otros recursos educativos abiertos? ¿Cuáles son las ventajas de la pedagogía abierta? Esta sección responde a estas preguntas y proporciona ideas para trabajar dentro de las estructuras de enseñanza existentes para introducir la pedagogía abierta en sus clases.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aMays, Elizabetheeditor1 aDeRosa, Robineauthor1 aJhangiani, Rajiveauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/655zAccess online version02528nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001000154100002700164245008000191264004300271264006900314264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002500505490002700530505026900557520105100826542004101877546001601918588004001934650002801974650002502002710003902027856007602066OTLid0000656MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            190124s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548131  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aHM5861 aWesch, Michaeleauthor04aThe Art of Being HumanbA Textbook for Cultural AnthropologycMichael Wesch 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLesson 1: Fieldwork -- Lesson 2: Culture -- Lesson 3: Evolution -- Lesson 4: Language -- Lesson 5: Infrastructure -- Lesson 6: Social Structure -- Lesson 7: Superstructure -- Lesson 8: Globalization -- Lesson 9: "The Good Life" -- Lesson 10: The Art of Being Human0 aAnthropology is the study of all humans in all times in all places. But it is so much more than that. “Anthropology requires strength, valor, and courage,” Nancy Scheper-Hughes noted. “Pierre Bourdieu called anthropology a combat sport, an extreme sport as well as a tough and rigorous discipline. … It teaches students not to be afraid of getting one’s hands dirty, to get down in the dirt, and to commit yourself, body and mind. Susan Sontag called anthropology a “heroic” profession.” What is the payoff for this heroic journey? You will find ideas that can carry you across rivers of doubt and over mountains of fear to find the the light and life of places forgotten. Real anthropology cannot be contained in a book. You have to go out and feel the world’s jagged edges, wipe its dust from your brow, and at times, leave your blood in its soil. In this unique book, Dr. Michael Wesch shares many of his own adventures of being an anthropologist and what the science of human beings can tell us about the art of being human.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/656zAccess online version02177nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167050001000177100003000187245007100217264004300288264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505061600508520034801124542001601472546001601488588004101504650002301545650002501568650002401593650002301617710003901640856007601679OTLid0000657MnU20260406020431.0m     o  d s      cr            190124s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548117  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA773 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aLindshield, Brianeauthor00aKansas State University Human Nutrition FlexbookcBrian Lindshield 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Nutrition Basics -- Chapter 2: Macronutrient Structures -- Chapter 3: Macronutrient Digestion -- Chapter 4: Macronutrient Uptake, Absorption, & Transport -- Chapter 5: Common Digestive Problems -- Chapter 6: Macronutrient Metabolism -- Chapter 7: Integration of Macronutrient Metabolism -- Chapter 8: Micronutrients Overview & Dietary Reference Intakes (DRIs) -- Chapter 9: Antioxidant micronutrients -- Chapter 10: Macronutrient Metabolism Micronutrients -- Chapter 11: One-Carbon Metabolism Micronutrients -- Chapter 12: Blood, Bones & Teeth Micronutrients -- Chapter 13: Electrolyte Micronutrients0 aThe Kansas State University Human Nutrition (FNDH 400) Flexbook is a textbook for students taking Kansas State University FNDH 400 course.FNDH 400 is a 3-hour, intermediate-level, human nutrition course at Kansas State University take primarily by sophomores and juniors because it has prerequisites of a college biology and chemistry courses.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/657zAccess online version02451nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245002900149250002100178264004300199264006000242264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505070700479520050201186542004101688546001601729588004001745650002401785650002601809700003201835700002901867700003001896710003901926856007601965OTLid0000658MnU20260406020822.0m     o  d s      cr            190126s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aFundamentals of Business  aCanadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface: Teamwork in Business -- Chapter One: Foundations of Business -- Chapter Two: Economics and Business -- Chapter Three: Ethics and Social Responsibility -- Chapter Four: Business in a Global Environment -- Chapter Five: Forms of Business Ownership -- Chapter Six: Entrepreneurship:Starting a Business -- Chapter Seven: Management and Leadership -- Chapter Eight: Structuring Organizations -- Chapter Nine: Operations Management -- Chapter Ten: Motivating Employees -- Chapter Eleven: Managing Human Resources -- Chapter Twelve: Union Management Issues -- Chapter Thirteen: Marketing, Providing Value -- Chapter Fourteen: Accounting and Financial Information -- Chapter Fifteen: Personal Finances0 aAn introductory textbook in business that covers a variety of topics: The Foundations of Business, Economics and Business, Ethics and Social Responsibility, Business in a Global Environment, Forms of Business Ownership, Entrepreneurship: Starting a Business, Management and Leadership, Structuring Organizations, Operations Management, Motivating Employees, Managing Human Resources, Union/Management Issues, Marketing: Providing Value, Accounting and Financial Information, and Personal Finances.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aSkripak, Stephen J.eauthor1 aParsons, Richardeauthor1 aCortes, Anastasiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/658zAccess online version02750nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245005700149264004300206264006000249264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505070900486520093201195542004102127546001602168588004002184650002402224650002502248710003902273856007602312OTLid0000659MnU20260406020715.0m     o  d s      cr            190126s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF541500aeMarketing - The Essential Guide to Online Marketing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to eMarketing -- Chapter 2: E-mail Marketing -- Chapter 3: Online Advertising -- Chapter 4: Affiliate Marketing -- Chapter 5: Search Engine Marketing -- Chapter 6: Search Engine Optimization -- Chapter 7: Pay per Click Advertising -- Chapter 8: Social Media -- Chapter 9: Crowdsourcing -- Chapter 10: Viral Marketing -- Chapter 11: Online Reputation Management -- Chapter 12: Web Public Relations -- Chapter 13: Web Site Development and Design -- Chapter 14: Online Copywriting -- Chapter 15: Web Analytics and Conversion Optimization -- Chapter 16: Mobile Marketing -- Chapter 17: Customer Relationship Management -- Chapter 18: Market Research -- Chapter 19: eMarketing Strategy0 aeMarketing: The Essential Guide to Online Marketing is a textbook intended for third and fourth year marketing students and draws on both academic theory and practical experience. The book offers students information that is applicable to the eMarket industry by providing examples that are easily relatable. The book covers all of the important aspects of online marketing, including the areas associated with search engine marketing, affiliate marketing, web analytics and conversion optimization, web development, online copywriting, online advertising, webPR, online reputation management, pay per click advertising, viral marketing, social media marketing, search engine optimization, eMarketing strategy, market research, mobile marketing, crowd sourcing, and customer relationship management. The book also features summaries, learning objectives and discussion points for each chapter, as well as, a glossary and index.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/659zAccess online version02064nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245003500137250002400172264004300196264006900239264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505048800485520042000973542004101393546001601434588004001450650002601490700002701516700003201543710003901575856007601614OTLid0000660MnU20260406020715.0m     o  d s      cr            190130s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF12100aResearch Methods in Psychology  aNew Zealand Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSaylor Foundationc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Science of Psychology -- Chapter 2: Getting Started in Research -- Chapter 3: Research Ethics -- Chapter 4: Theory in Psychology -- Chapter 5: Psychological Measurement -- Chapter 6: Experimental Research -- Chapter 7: Non-experimental Research -- Chapter 8: Complex Research Designs -- Chapter 9: Survey Research -- Chapter 10: Single-Subject Research -- Chapter 11: Presenting Your Research -- Chapter 12: Descriptive Statistics -- Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics0 aThis textbook is an adaptation of the Research Methods in Psychology that is available on this site in US and Canadian editions. This New Zealand edition is an adaptation to the New Zealand context. The main changes are in Chapters 1 and 3 and the spelling, grammar, and terminology are changed throughout. This textbook is adopted at the University of Waikato in our 200-level research methods in psychology class.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aPrice, Paul C.eauthor1 aJhangiani, Rajiv S.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/660zAccess online version02575nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245004600167264004300213264008500256264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505057000518520092401088542001602012546001602028588004002044650002602084710003902110856007602149OTLid0000661MnU20260406020742.0m     o  d s      cr            190130s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aJohnson, Jeffery L.eauthor00aInferring and ExplainingcJeffery Johnson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Valuing Truth -- Chapter 2: Skepticism -- Chapter 3: The Concept of Knowledge -- Chapter 4: Arguments -- Chapter 5: Inference to the Best Explanation -- Chapter 6: New Data and Experimentation -- Chapter 7: Semmelweis and Childbed Fever -- Chapter 8: Darwin and Common Descent -- Chapter 9: Testimony -- Chapter 10: Textual Interpretation -- Chapter 11: Statistics -- Chapter 12: Correlations and Causes -- Chapter 13: Capital Punishment and the Constitution -- Chapter 14: Evidence, Explanation, and Narrative -- Chapter 15: Explanatory Virtue and Truth0 aInferring and Explaining is a book in practical epistemology. It examines the notion of evidence and assumes that good evidence is the essence of rational thinking. Evidence is the cornerstone of the natural, social, and behavioral sciences. But it is equally central to almost all academic pursuits and, perhaps most importantly, to the basic need to live an intelligent and reflective life. The book further assumes that a particular model of evidence— Inference to the Best Explanation—not only captures the essence of (good) evidence but suggests a very practical, and pedagogically useful, procedure for evidence evaluation. The book is intended primarily for two sorts of introductory courses. First and foremost are courses in critical thinking (or informal or practical logic). In addition, however, the book has application in more general courses (or major sections of courses) in introductory philosophy.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/661zAccess online version01828nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127110003600139245004500175264004300220264005400263264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505057500494520019801069542001601267546001601283588004101299650002301340710003901363856007601402OTLid0000662MnU20260406020432.0m     o  d s      cr            190130s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.22 aCollegebof the Canyonseauthor00aHealth EducationcCollege of the Canyons 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Health -- Chapter 2: Psychological Health -- Chapter 3: Stress Management -- Chapter 4: Relationships and Communication -- Chapter 5: Gender and Sexuality -- Chapter 6: Sexual Health -- Chapter 7: Infectious diseases and Sexually Transmitted Infections (STI's) -- Chapter 8: Substance Use and Abuse -- Chapter 9: Basic Nutrition and Healthy Eating -- Chapter 10: Weight Management -- Chapter 11: Physical Fitness -- Chapter 12: Cardiovascular Disease, Diabetes, and Cancer -- Chapter 13: Environmental Health -- Chapter 14: Health Care Choices0 aReaders will learn about the nature of health, health education, health promotion and related concepts. This will help to understand the social, psychological and physical components of health.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/662zAccess online version02541nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002700153245004300180264004300223264007400266264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505035200517520108500869542001601954546001601970588004001986650003802026710003902064856007602103OTLid0000663MnU20260330020729.0m     o  d s      cr            190131s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783944675473  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aWilbur, Joshuaeauthor02aA grammar of Pite SaamicJoshua Wilbur 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Prosody -- Chapter 3: Segmental phonology -- Chapter 4: Morphological patterns and word classes -- Chapter 5: Nominals I: Nouns -- Chapter 6: Nominals II: Pronouns -- Chapter 7: Adjectivals -- Chapter 8: Verbs -- Chapter 9: Other word classes -- Chapter 10: Derivational morphology -- Chapter 11: Phrase types0 aPite Saami is a highly endangered Western Saami language in the Uralic language family currently spoken by a few individuals in Swedish Lapland. This grammar is the first extensive book-length treatment of a Saami language written in English. While focusing on the morphophonology of the main word classes nouns, adjectives and verbs, it also deals with other linguistic structures such as prosody, phonology, phrase types and clauses. Furthermore, it provides an introduction to the language and its speakers, and an outline of a preliminary Pite Saami orthography. An extensive annotated spoken-language corpus collected over the course of five years forms the empirical foundation for this description, and each example includes a specific reference to the corpus in order to facilitate verification of claims made on the data. Descriptions are presented for a general linguistics audience and without attempting to support a specific theoretical approach, but this book should be equally useful for scholars of Uralic linguistics, typologists, and even learners of Pite Saami.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/663zAccess online version02267nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245004000163264004300203264007400246264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505037800497520081700875542001601692546001601708588004001724650003801764710003901802856007601841OTLid0000664MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190203s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aFriesen, Dianneeauthor02aA grammar of MolokocDianne Friesen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Phonology -- Chapter 3: Grammatical classes -- Chapter 4: Noun morphology -- Chapter 5: Noun phrase -- Chapter 6: Verb root and stem -- Chapter 7: The verb complex -- Chapter 8: Verb phrase -- Chapter 9: Verb types and transitivity -- Chapter 10: Clause -- Chapter 11: The na marker and na constructions -- Chapter 12: Clause combining0 aThis grammar provides the first comprehensive grammatical description of Moloko, a Chadic language spoken by about 10,000 speakers in northern Cameroon. The grammar was developed from hours and years that the authors spent at friends’ houses hearing and recording stories, hours spent listening to the tapes and transcribing the stories, then translating them and studying the language through them. Time was spent together and with others speaking the language and talking about it, translating resources and talking to Moloko people about them. Grammar and phonology discoveries were made in the office, in the fields while working, and at gatherings. In the process, the four authors have become more and more passionate about the Moloko language and are eager to share their knowledge about it with others.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/664zAccess online version02918nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003100153245004300184264004300227264007400270264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505035300521520145700874542001602331546001602347588004002363650003802403710003902441856007602480OTLid0000665MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190203s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783961101252  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aDöhler, Christianeauthor02aA grammar of KomnzocChristian Döhler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Preliminaries -- Chapter 2: Phonology -- Chapter 3: Word classes -- Chapter 4: Nominal morphology -- Chapter 5: Verb morphology -- Chapter 6: Tense, aspect and mood -- Chapter 7: Syntax of the noun phrase -- Chapter 8: Clausal syntax -- Chapter 9: Complex syntax -- Chapter 10: Information structure -- Chapter 11: Aspects of the lexicon0 aKomnzo is a Papuan language of Southern New Guinea spoken by around 250 people in the village of Rouku. Komnzo belongs to the Tonda subgroup of the Yam language family, which is also known as the Morehead Upper-Maro group. This grammar provides the first comprehensive description of a Yam language. It is based on 16 months of fieldwork. The primary source of data is a text corpus of around 12 hours recorded and transcribed between 2010 and 2015. Komnzo provides many fields of future research, but the most interesting aspect of its structure lies in the verb morphology, to which the two largest chapters of the grammar are dedicated. Komnzo verbs may index up to two arguments showing agreement in person, number and gender. Verbs encode 18 TAM categories, valency, directionality and deictic status. Morphological complexity lies not only in the amount of categories that verbs may express, but also in the way these are encoded. Komnzo verbs exhibit what may be called ‘distributed exponence’, i.e. single morphemes are underspecified for a particular grammatical category. Therefore, morphological material from different sites has to be integrated first, and only after this integration can one arrive at a particular grammatical category. The descriptive approach in this grammar is theory-informed rather than theory-driven. Comparison to other Yam languages and diachronic developments are taken into account whenever it seems helpful.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/665zAccess online version01749nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003100135264004300166264005400209264001200263300002200275336002600297337002600323338003600349341002800385490002700413505056400440520010801004542001601112546001601128588004101144650003001185700002801215700002901243710003901272856007601311OTLid0000666MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190203s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE100aAdvanced Water Mathematics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection 1: Unit Dimensional Analysis -- Section 2: Geometric Shapes -- Section 3: Density and Specific Gravity -- Section 4: Chemical Dosage Analysis -- Section 5: Weir Overflow Rate -- Section 6: Water Treatment Math Detention Time -- Section 7: CT Calculations -- Section 8: Pressure, Head Loss, and Flow -- Section 9: Well Yield, Specific Capacity, and Drawdown -- Section 10: Horsepower and Efficiency -- Section 11: Per Capita Water Usage -- Section 12: Blending and Diluting -- Section 13: Scada and the Use of mA -- Section 14: Water Utility Management0 aLearning and Understanding Mathematical Concepts in the Areas of Water Distribution and Water Treatment1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aAlvord, Michaeleauthor1 aBlasberg, Reginaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/666zAccess online version01948nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002900155245005100184264004300235264009600278264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505040000551520042300951542001601374546001601390588004001406650002501446710003901471856007601510OTLid0000667MnU20260330020706.0m     o  d s      cr            190207s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135506  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM5861 aMiller, Kristineeauthor00aIntroduction to Design EquitycKristine Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Learning to Talk about Racism -- Chapter 3: Why History Matters to Design Equity -- Chapter 4: Health Equity and the Built Environment -- Chapter 5: Transportation Equity -- Chapter 6: Information Equity -- Chapter 7: What is Design Thinking and What does it have to do with Equity? -- Chapter 8: Discipline-Specific Professional Design Processes and Equity0 aWhy do affluent, liberal, and design-rich cities like Minneapolis have some of the biggest racial disparities in the country? How can designers help to create more equitable communities? Introduction to Design Equity, an open access book for students and professionals, maps design processes and products against equity research to highlight the pitfalls and potentials of design as a tool for building social justice.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/667zAccess online version03123nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149245006300159250001100222264004300233264005600276264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002500454490002700479505060300506520121301109542004102322546001602363588004002379650002602419650002402445650002302469700002602492700002802518700002802546710003902574856007602613OTLid0000668MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190209s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG17300aIntroduction to Financial AccountingbU.S. GAAP Adaptation  a2021-A 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2019. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Financial Accounting -- Chapter 2: The Accounting Process -- Chapter 3: Financial Accounting and Adjusting Entries -- Chapter 4: The Classified Balance Sheet and Related Disclosures -- Chapter 5: Accounting for the Sale of Goods -- Chapter 6: Assigning Costs to Merchandise -- Chapter 7: Cash and Receivables -- Chapter 8: Long-lived Assets -- Chapter 9: Debt Financing: Current and Long-term Liabilities -- Chapter 10: Equity Financing -- Chapter 11: The Statement of Cash Flows -- Chapter 12: Financial Statement Analysis -- Chapter 13: Proprietorships and Partnerships0 aThis textbook is an adaptation by D. Marchand and Athabasca University of the original text written by D. Annand and H. Dauderis. It is intended for use in entry-level college and university courses in financial accounting. A corporate approach is utilized consistently throughout the book. The adapted textbook includes multiple ancillary student and instructor resources. Student aids include solutions to all end-of-chapter questions and problems, and randomly-generated spreadsheet problems that cover key concepts of each chapter. These provide unlimited practice and feedback for students. Instructor aids include an exam bank, lecture slides, and a comprehensive end-of-term case assignment. This requires students to prepare 18 different year-end adjusting entries and all four types of financial statements, and to calculate and analyze 16 different financial statement ratios. Unique versions can be created for any number of individual students or groups. Tailored solutions are provided for instructors. Another version of the textbook written by D. Annand and adapted by T. Thompson, including .docx files and ancillary material, can be obtained upon request to D. Annand (davida@athabascau.ca).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aAnnand, Davideauthor1 aMarchand, Donnaeauthor1 aDauderis, Henryeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/668zAccess online version02573nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136050001000146050001100156050001300167100003300180245005500213264004300268264006100311264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505082400549520041701373542001601790546001601806588004101822650002501863650003401888650002801922650002801950650003401978710003902012856007602051OTLid0000669MnU20260406020716.0m     o  d s      cr            190213s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aMartella, Michael H.eauthor00aLaw 101bFundamentals of the LawcMichael Martella 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 – Major Factors In Choosing And Working With An Attorney -- Chapter 2 – Comparing And Contrasting Civil And Criminal Law -- Chapter 3 – New York State And Federal Court Structure And Sources Of Law -- Chapter 4 – How The United States And New York State Constitutions Affects Our Lives -- Chapter 5 – The Path Of A New York State Criminal Case -- Chapter 6 – Traffic Stops & DWI -- Chapter 7 – Discrimination Law -- Chapter 8 – The Path Of A Civil Tort Case -- Chapter 9 – Marriage, Divorce And Family Law -- Chapter 10 – Common Estate Planning Processes And Documents -- Chapter 11 – Taxes -- Chapter 12 – Real Estate Transfers -- Chapter 13 – Residential Lease Transactions -- Chapter 14 – Elements Of A Contract, Consumer Protections, And Bankruptcy -- Chapter 15 – Privacy --0 aLaw 101: Fundamentals of Law, New York and Federal Law is an attempt to provide basic legal concepts of the law to undergraduates in easily understood plain English. Each chapter covers a different area of the law. Areas of law were selected based on what legal matters undergraduates may typically encounter in their daily lives. The textbook is introductory by nature and not meant as a legal treatise.Facebook1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/669zAccess online version01703nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100003200160245009300192264004300285264006300328264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505022400568520027400792542002701066546001601093588004001109650002701149650002601176710003901202856007601241OTLid0000670MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190213s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aPoritz, Jonathan A.eauthor00aLies, Damned Lies, or StatisticsbHow to Tell the Truth with StatisticscJonathan Poritz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPueblo, ColoradobColorado State University Puebloc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. One-Variable Statistics: Basics -- Chapter 2. Bi-variate Statistics: Basics -- Chapter 3. Linear Regression -- Chapter 4. Probability Theory -- Chapter 5. Bringing Home the Data -- Chapter 6. Basic Inferences0 aThis is a first draft of a free (as in speech, not as in beer, [Sta02]) (although it is free as in beer as well) textbook for a one-semester, undergraduate statistics course. It was used for Math 156 at Colorado State University–Pueblo in the spring semester of 2017.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/670zAccess online version02348nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003400153245005500187264004300242264006000285264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505061800522520063601140542001601776546001601792588004001808650002301848710003901871856007601910OTLid0000671MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            190222s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989623138  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBelshaw, John Douglaseauthor00aCanadian HistorybPost-ConfederationcJohn Belshaw 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Confederation and the Peoples of Canada -- Chapter 2: Confederation in Conflict -- Chapter 3: Urban, Industrial, and Divided: Socio-Economic Change, 1867-1920 -- Chapter 4: Politics and Conflict in Victorian and Edwardian Canada -- Chapter 5: Immigration and the Immigrant Experience -- Chapter 6: The War Years, 1914-45 -- Chapter 7: Reform Movements from the 1870s to the 1980s -- Chapter 8: The Economy since 1920 -- Chapter 9: Cold War Canada, 1945-1991 -- Chapter 10: This is the Modern World -- Chapter 11: First Nations from Indian Act to Idle No More -- Chapter 12: Canada at the End of History0 aThis textbook introduces aspects of the history of Canada since Confederation. “Canada” in this context includes Newfoundland and all the other parts that come to be aggregated into the Dominion after 1867. Much of this text follows thematic lines. Each chapter moves chronologically but with alternative narratives in mind. What Aboriginal accounts must we place in the foreground? Which structures (economic or social) determine the range of choices available to human agents of history? What environmental questions need to be raised to gain a more complete understanding of choices made in the past and their ramifications?1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/671zAccess online version02535nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137100003200148245012900180250001600309264004300325264007300368264001200441300002200453336002600475337002600501338003600527341002500563490002700588505042900615520081001044542001601854546001601870588004101886650004401927650002601971700002501997710003902022856007602061OTLid0000672MnU20260406020619.0m     o  d s      cr            190222s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aHD30.41 aDixon, Elizabeth A.eauthor00aManagement CommunicationbStrategic Insights and Practical Skills for Modern Business Communication LeaderscElizabeth Dixon  a5th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbThe Marriott School at Brigham Young Universityc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aA New Vision -- Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1 - Your Most Impactful Class -- Chapter 2 - Brand -- Chapter 3 - Write (with Gen Ai) -- Chapter 4 - Analyze -- Chapter 5 - Strategize -- Chapter 6 - Research -- Chapter 7 - Visualize and Interpret Data -- Chapter 8 - Organize -- Chapter 9 - Draft for Impact -- Chapter 10 - Design and Format -- Chapter 11 - Revise -- Chapter 12 - Collaborate -- Chapter 13 - Present -- Appendices0 aThis comprehensive resource covers the full spectrum of business communication: personal branding and employment communication, communicating with generative AI, navigating the writing process, developing information and data literacy skills, professionally formatting documents and presentation media, giving and receiving feedback, delivering difficult messages, communicating collaboratively, and delivering world-class business presentations. Focusing on practical application to real-world scenarios, the content prepares future business leaders to clearly, concisely, concretely, and confidently communicate with diverse audiences. This textbook is an indispensable guide for those seeking to master the art of business communication. For any questions or suggestions, please contact BYUMCOM@byu.edu1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aOrganizational CommunicationvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aThomas, Lisaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/672zAccess online version02570nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003200138245009900170264004300269264004600312264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505016500535520124700700542002701947546001601974588004001990650002802030650003502058710003902093856007602132OTLid0000673MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190224s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aPoritz, Jonathan A.eauthor00aYet Another Introductory Number Theory Textbook (Cryptology Emphasis Version)cJonathan Poritz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPueblo, ColoradobJonathan Poritzc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Well-Ordering and Division -- Chapter 2: Congruences -- Chapter 3: Prime Numbers -- Chapter 4: Cryptology -- Chapter 5: Indices = Discrete Logarithms0 aThis version of YAINTT has a particular emphasis on connections to cryptology. The cryptologic material appears in Chapter 4 and §§5.5 and 5.6, arising naturally (I hope) out of the ambient number theory. The main cryptologic applications – being the RSA cryptosystem, Diffie-Hellman key exchange, and the ElGamal cryptosystem – come out so naturally from considerations of Euler’s Theorem, primitive roots, and indices that it renders quite ironic G.H. Hardy’s assertion [Har05] of the purity and eternal inapplicability of number theory. Note, however, that once we broach the subject of these cryptologic algorithms, we take the time to make careful definitions for many cryptological concepts and to develop some related ideas of cryptology which have much more tenuous connections to the topic of number theory. This material therefore has something of a different flavor from the rest of the text – as is true of all scholarly work in cryptology (indeed, perhaps in all of computer science), which is clearly a discipline with a different culture from that of “pure”mathematics. Obviously, these sections could be skipped by an uninterested reader, or remixed away by an instructor for her own particular class approach.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCryptographyvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/673zAccess online version02766nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143245002100154264004300175264006500218264001200283300002200295336002600317337002600343338003600369341002800405490002700433505058500460520098001045542003002025546001602055588004102071650002402112650002702136700003202163700002702195700003102222710003902253856007602292OTLid0000674MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190228s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.300aAPEX PreCalculus 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAPEX Calculusc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Numbers and Functions -- 1.1 Real Numbers -- 1.2 Introduction to Functions -- 1.3 Factoring and Expanding -- 1.4 Radicals and Exponents -- 1.5 Logarithms and Exponential Functions -- 2 Basic Skills for Calculus -- 2.1 Linear Functions -- 2.2 Solving Inequalities -- 2.3 Function Domains -- 2.4 Graphs and Graphing -- 2.5 Completing the Square -- 3 Solving and Trigonometric Functions -- 3.1 Solving for Variables -- 3.2 Intersections -- 3.3 Fractions and Partial Fractions Decomposition -- 3.4 Introduction to Trigonometric Functions -- 3.5 Trigonometric Functions and Triangles0 aThis text was written as a prequel to the APEXCalculus series, a three–volume series on Calculus. This text is not intended to fully prepare students with all of the mathematical knowledge they need to tackle Calculus, rather it is designed to review mathematical concepts that are often stumbling blocks in the Calculus sequence. It starts basic and builds to more complex topics. This text is written so that each section and topic largely stands on its own, making it a good resource for students in Calculus who are struggling with the supporting mathemathics found in Calculus courses. The topics were chosen based on experience; several instructors in the Applied Mathemathics Department at the Virginia Military Institute (VMI) compiled a list of topics that Calculus students commonly struggle with, giving the focus of this text. This allows for a more focused approach; at first glance one of the obvious differences from a standard Pre-Calculus text is its size.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aChapman, Amy Givlereauthor1 aHerald, Meaganeauthor1 aLibertini, Jessicaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/674zAccess online version02559nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143100002900154245005200183264004300235264006500278264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505103300520520038001553542003001933546001601963588004101979650002302020650002702043710003902070856007602109OTLid0000675MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190228s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.31 aHartman, Gregoryeauthor00aFundamentals of Matrix AlgebracGregory Hartman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAPEX Calculusc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Systems of Linear Equations -- 1.1 Introduction to Linear Equations -- 1.2 Using Matrices To Solve Systems of Linear Equations -- 1.3 Elementary Row Operations and Gaussian Elimination -- 1.4 Existence and Uniqueness of Solutions -- 1.5 Applications of Linear Systems -- 2 Matrix Arithmetic -- 2.1 Matrix Addition and Scalar Multiplication -- 2.2 Matrix Multiplication -- 2.3 Visualizing Matrix Arithmetic in 2D -- 2.4 Vector Solutions to Linear Systems -- 2.5 Solving Matrix Equations AX = B -- 2.6 The Matrix Inverse -- 2.7 Properties of the Matrix Inverse -- 3 Operations on Matrices -- 3.1 The Matrix Transpose -- 3.2 The Matrix Trace -- 3.3 The Determinant -- 3.4 Properties of the Determinant -- 3.5 Cramer’s Rule -- 4 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors -- 4.1 Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors -- 4.2 Properties of Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors -- 5 Graphical Explorations of Vectors -- 5.1 Transformations of the Cartesian Plane -- 5.2 Properties of Linear Transformations -- 5.3 Visualizing Vectors: Vectors in Three Dimensions0 aA college (or advanced high school) level text dealing with the basic principles of matrix and linear algebra. It covers solving systems of linear equations, matrix arithmetic, the determinant, eigenvalues, and linear transformations. Numerous examples are given within the easy to read text. This third edition corrects several errors in the text and updates the font faces.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/675zAccess online version02012nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002600136245005600162264004300218264006500261264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505048200503520044300985542003001428546001601458588004101474650003201515710003901547856007601586OTLid0000676MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190228s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSiemers, Troyeauthor03aAn Introduction to Matlab and MathcadcTroy Siemers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAPEX Calculusc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Matlab: Introduction -- 2 Matlab: Matrices -- 3 Matlab: Functions -- 4 Matlab: Graphics -- 5 Matlab: User Defined Functions -- 6 Matlab: Input/Output -- 7 Matlab: Programming Structures -- 8 Matlab: Applications -- 9 Matlab: Curve Fitting -- 10 Matcad: Introduction -- 11 Mathcad: Entering Equations -- 12 Mathcad: Given/Find and Solve -- 13 Mathcad: Functions -- 14 Mathcad: Matrices -- 15 Mathcad: Graphing -- 16 Mathcad: Curve Fitting -- 17 Mathcad: Calculus and Symbolics0 aThis textbook, or really a “coursebook” for a college freshman-level class, has been updated for Spring 2014 and provides an introduction to programming and problem solving using both Matlab and Mathcad. We provide a balanced selection of introductory exercises and real-world problems (i.e. no “contrived” problems). We include many examples and screenshots to guide the reader. We assume no prior knowledge of Matlab or Mathcad.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/676zAccess online version02286nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002500154245005100179264004300230264006700273264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505029800514520086700812542004101679546001601720588004101736650003201777710003901809856007601848OTLid0000677MnU20260406020433.0m     o  d s      cr            190228s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781469901732  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSweigart, Aleauthor00aMaking Games with Python & PygamecAl Sweigart 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAlbert Sweigartc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - Installing Python and Pygame -- Chapter 2 - Pygame Basics -- Chapter 3 - Memory Puzzle -- Chapter 4 - Slide Puzzle -- Chapter 5 - Simulate -- Chapter 6 - Wormy -- Chapter 7 - Tetromino -- Chapter 8 - Squirrel Eat Squirrel -- Chapter 9 - Star Pusher -- Chapter 10 - Four Extra Games0 aThis book will teach you how to make graphical computer games in the Python programming language using the Pygame library.This book assumes you know a little bit about Python or programming in general. If you don’t know how to program, you can learn by downloading the free book "Invent Your Own Computer Games with Python" from http://inventwithpython.com. Or you can jump right into this book and mostly pick it up along the way. This book is for the intermediate programmer who has learned what variables and loops are, but now wants to know, "What do actual game programs look like?" There was a long gap after I first learned programming but didn’t really know how to use that skill to make something cool. It’s my hope that the games in this book will give you enough ideas about how programs work to provide a foundation to implement your own games.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/677zAccess online version01485nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127245003700136264004300173264004900216264001200265300002200277336002600299337002600325338003600351341002800387490002700415505018700442520029900629542001600928546001600944588004000960650003201000710003901032856007601071OTLid0000678MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            190307s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aWeb Accessibility for Developers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Introduction to WAI-ARIA -- 3. Basic WAI-ARIA -- 4. Interactive WAI-ARIA (Basic) -- 5. Interactive WAI-ARIA (Intermediate) -- 6. Interactive WAI-ARIA (Advanced)0 aWeb Accessibility for Developers is a technical book aimed primarily at programmers. Learn how to develop accessible interactivity on the Web and gain expertise using WAI-ARIA, a W3C specification that enables optimal use of assistive technologies, like screen readers, when navigating the Web.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/678zAccess online version02008nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245004900149264004300198264004900241264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341002800412490002700440505026500467520066600732542002701398546001601425588004001441650002401481650002601505710003901531856007601570OTLid0000679MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            190307s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aDigital Accessibility as a Business Practice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Getting Started -- Chapter 2: Understanding the Big Picture -- Chapter 3: The Committee and the Champion -- Chapter 4: Creating Digital Accessibility Culture -- Chapter 5: Procurement and Accessibility Policy -- Chapter 6: Hiring Accessibility Staff0 aMost business leaders would agree that reaching the broadest audience is good for a business’s bottom line. A good portion of that audience will be people with disabilities. How, though, would an organization go about ensuring it is as accessible as it can be to all its potential clients or customers, including people with disabilities? This book has been created to answer this question, and to demystify “digital accessibility” as a business practice. It brings together all the pieces of the digital accessibility picture, and provides strategies and resources that will help make digital accessibility a part of an organization’s business culture.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/679zAccess online version01658nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127245005400136264004300190264004900233264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505027800459520035300737542002701090546001601117588004001133650003201173710003901205856007601244OTLid0000680MnU20260406020715.0m     o  d s      cr            190307s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aProfessional Web Accessibility Auditing Made Easy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. Aspects of Web Accessibility Auditing -- 2. Introduction to WCAG 2.0 -- 3. Automated Testing Tools -- 4. Manual Testing Strategies -- 5. Assistive Technology Testing -- 6. User Testing -- 7. Web Accessibility Reporting -- 8. Other Accessibility Standards0 aDigital accessibility skills are in high demand, as the world becomes more aware of barriers in digital content that prevent some people from participating in a digital society. These are essential skills for web developers, and essential knowledge for organizations that want to ensure their web content is reaching the broadest audience possible.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/680zAccess online version02493nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245008800144264004300232264004900275264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505066700501520064401168542001601812546001601828588004001844650002501884650003301909700002601942700002401968710003901992856007602031OTLid0000681MnU20260406020742.0m     o  d s      cr            190308s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC98000aWrite Here, Right NowbAn Interactive Introduction to Academic Writing and Research 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Time is on Your Side -- Chapter 2: Evidence -- Chapter 3: The Full Three Storey Thesis -- Chapter 4: From Thesis to Essay -- Chapter 5: Maintaining Focus and Purpose: The Body Paragraphs -- Chapter 6: One Last Time Before You Go: The Conclusion and Final Review -- Chapter 7: Making Your Own Argument -- Chapter 8: Gathering Research and Establishing Evidence -- Chapter 9: Towards the Well-Researched Paper -- Chapter 10: Joining the Conversation: Primary Sources, Secondary Sources, and You -- Chapter 11: Editing and Evolving the Thesis and Outline -- Chapter 12: What Have I Accomplished? Conclusion and Final Assessment -- Chapter 13: Works Cited0 aWrite Here, Right Now: An interactive Introduction to Academic Writing and Research utilizes PressBooks to create and host a writing e-textbook for first year university students that would effectively integrate into the flipped classroom model. The textbook could also be used for non-flipped classroom designs, as the embedded videos, diagrams and linked modules would act as an all-in-one multimedia textbook geared towards multiple learning styles and disciplines. The components of the textbook, including the embedded videos, could be swapped in and out in order to accommodate a professor’s best idea of his/her own course design.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aTucker, Aaroneauthor1 aChafe, Pauleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/681zAccess online version02281nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100004600140245004800186264004300234264004600277264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505042800500520078000928542001601708546001601724588004001740650003601780710003901816856007601855OTLid0000682MnU20260406020434.0m     o  d s      cr            190308s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aat Arlington, University of Texaseauthor00aNo LimitscUniversity of Texas at Arlington 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Welcome to UT Arlington -- Chapter 2: About a University -- Chapter 3: Campus Life - The value Added from Involvement -- Chapter 4: Foundations of Academic Self-Management -- Chapter 5: Self-Directed and Active Learning -- Chapter 6: Avoiding the Hazards Along the Way -- Chapter 7: Healthy Living -- Chapter 8: Self- and Career Exploration -- Chapter 9: Financial Self-Management -- Chapter 10: Campus Resources0 aStudent Success and First Year Experience are learning community courses at UTA that teach new students academic success skills to aid their transition to college. The goal of the courses is to help students identify their individual needs, determine what resources are appropriate, recognize the faculty role in their development, and formulate a plan for an actively engaged and enriched experience from campus to career. The courses will be taught by Peer Academic Leaders (PALs) and faculty, staff and/or graduate students to provide guidance, raise awareness and understanding of students' majors and help support collaborative and co-curricular opportunities available within the School/College. This open educational resource is the required textbook for both courses.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/682zAccess online version01953nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127245004300136264004300179264006600222264001200288300002200300336002600322337002600348338003600374341002800410490002700438505023500465520055900700542001601259546001601275588004001291650003201331700003101363700003701394700003301431710003901464856007601503OTLid0000683MnU20260406020715.0m     o  d s      cr            190314s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aAgent-Based Evolutionary Game Dynamics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WisconsinbUniversity of Wisconsin - Madisonc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication -- Preface -- Part I: Introduction -- Part II: Our first agent-based evolutionary model -- Part III: Spatial interactions on a grid -- Part IV: Games on networks -- Part V: Agent-based models vs ODE models -- Appendices0 aThis book is a guide to implement and analyze simple agent-based evolutionary models using NetLogo. All the models we implement are agent-based, i.e. individual agents and their interactions are explicitly represented in the models. To formalise agents’ interactions we use the basic framework of Evolutionary Game Theory. NetLogo is a multi-agent programmable modeling environment used by hundreds of thousands of students, teachers and researchers all around the globe. No coding experience is necessary to fully understand the contents of this book.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aIzquierdo, Luis R.eauthor1 aIzquierdo, Segismundo S.eauthor1 aSandholm, William H.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/683zAccess online version03929nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245006700139264004300206264008500249264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505126400508520141301772542001603185546001603201588004003217650002503257700002303282700002703305700002503332700002903357700003003386710003903416856007603455OTLid0000685MnU20260406020715.0m     o  d s      cr            190314s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.500aPrinciples of MicroeconomicsbScarcity and Social Provisioning 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Welcome to Economics! -- Chapter 2. Choice in a World of Scarcity -- Chapter 3: Defining Economics: A Pluralistic Approach -- Chapter 4. Demand and Supply -- Chapter 5. Labor and Financial Markets -- Chapter 6. Elasticity -- Chapter 7. Consumer Choices -- Chapter 8. Challenging the Role of Utilitarianism -- Chapter 9. An Institutional Analysis of Modern Consumption -- Chapter 10. Cost and Industry Structure -- Chapter 11. Perfect Competition -- Chapter 12. Monopoly -- Chapter 13. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly -- Chapter 14. The Rise of Big Business -- Chapter 15. Costs and Prices: The Evidence -- Chapter 16. The Megacorp -- Chapter 17. Monopoly and Antitrust Policy -- Chapter 18. Environmental Protection and Negative Externalities -- Chapter 19. Positive Externalities and Public Goods -- Chapter 20. Poverty and Economic Inequality -- Chapter 21. Issues in Labor Markets: Unions, Discrimination, Immigration -- Chapter 22. Information, Risk, and Insurance -- Chapter 23. Financial Markets -- Chapter 24. Public Economy -- Chapter 25. Money and the Theory of the Firm -- Chapter 26. International Trade -- Chapter 27. Globalization and Protectionism -- Chapter 28. The Economics of Globalization and Trade: A Pluralistic Approach0 aPrinciples of Microeconomics: Scarcity and Social Provisioning takes a pluralistic approach to the standard topics of an introductory microeconomics course. The text builds on the chiefly neoclassical material of the OpenStax Principles of Economics text, adding extensive content from heterodox economic thought. Emphasizing the importance of pluralism and critical thinking, the text presents the method and theory of neoclassical economics alongside critiques thereof and heterodox alternatives in both method and theory. This approach is taken from the outset of the text, where contrasting definitions of economics are discussed in the context of the various ways in which neoclassical and heterodox economists study the subject. The same approach–of theory and method, critique, and alternative theory theory and method–is taken in the study of consumption, production, and market exchange, as well as in the applied theory chapters. Historical and contemporary examples are given throughout, and both theory and application are presented with a balanced approach. This textbook will be of interest especially to instructors and students who wish to go beyond the traditional approach to the fundamentals of microeconomic theory, and explore the wider spectrum of economic thought. Instructors may contact Open Oregon Educational Resources for quiz question test banks associated with each chapter.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aDean, Erikeauthor1 aElardo, Justineauthor1 aGreen, Mitcheauthor1 aWilson, Benjamineauthor1 aBerger, Sebastianeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/685zAccess online version02563nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143245008400153250002000237264004300257264008500300264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505067700562520059001239542004101829546001601870588004001886650003601926650002901962700002801991700003102019710003902050856007602089OTLid0000686MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            190314s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.300aDigital FoundationsbIntroduction to Media Design with the Adobe Creative Cloud  aRevised Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Chapter 1: The Metaphor of Using Graphics Applications -- Part II. Chapter 2: Searching and Sampling - Becoming an Expert Web User -- Part III. Chapter 3: Symmetry -- Part IV. Chapter 4: Type on a Grid -- Part V. Chapter 5: Color Theory & Basic Shapes -- Part VI. Chapter 6: Line Art and Flat Graphics -- Part VII. Chapter 7: Scanning -- Part VIII. Chapter 8: Tonal Scale -- Part IX. Chapter 9: Layering and Collage -- Part X. Chapter 10: Repetition and Cloning -- Part XI. Chapter 11: Non-Destructive Editing -- Part XII. Chapter 12: Getting It Out - Digital Output for Web -- Part XIII. Chapter 13: Multiple Pages: Unity -- Part XIV. Chapter 14: Two-Page Spreads0 aDigital Foundations uses formal exercises of the Bauhaus to teach the Adobe Creative Suite. All students of digital design and production—whether learning in a classroom or on their own—need to understand the basic principles of design in order to implement them using current software. Far too often design is left out of books that teach software for the trade and academic markets. Consequently, the design software training exercise is often a lost opportunity for visual learning. This revised edition updates the original text for use with Adobe Creative Cloud 2017 software.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aburrough, xtineeauthor1 aMandiberg, Michaeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/686zAccess online version01869nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100003100139245004200170264004300212264008500255264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505049000517520030201007542001601309546001601325588004001341650002301381710003901404856007601443OTLid0000687MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            190317s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aFisher, Matthew R.eeditor00aEnvironmental BiologycMatthew Fisher 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Environmental Science -- Chapter 2: Matter, Energy, & Life -- Chapter 3: Ecosystems and the Biosphere -- Chapter 4: Community & Population Ecology -- Chapter 5: Conservation & Biodiversity -- Chapter 6: Environmental Hazards & Human Health -- Chapter 7: Water Availability and Use -- Chapter 8: Food & Hunger -- Chapter 9: Conventional & Sustainable Agriculture -- Chapter 10: Air Pollution, Climate Change, & Ozone Depletion -- Chapter 11: Conventional & Sustainable Energy0 aThis open textbook covers the most salient environmental issues, from a biological perspective. The text is designed for an introductory-level college science course. Topics include the fundamentals of ecology, biodiversity, pollution, climate change, food production, and human population growth.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/687zAccess online version02460nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138245005700151264004300208264008500251264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505027900513520080100792542002701593546001601620588004001636650002801676650003401704700002901738700002901767700002701796700003001823700002901853700002901882710003901911856007601950OTLid0000688MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            190317s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A400aIntroduction to the American Criminal Justice System 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Crime, Criminal Justice, and Criminology -- 2: Defining and Measuring Crime and Criminal Justice -- 3: Criminal Law -- 4: Criminal Justice Policy -- 5: Criminological Theory -- 6: Policing -- 7: Courts -- 8: Corrections -- 9: Community Corrections -- 10: Juvenile Justice0 aThere is a dearth of OER textbooks in Criminology and Criminal Justice, which made creating this textbook all the more exciting. At times we faced challenges about what or how much to cover, but our primary goal was to make sure this book was as in-depth as the two textbooks we were currently using for our CCJ 230 introduction course. The only way we were willing to undertake this project as if it was as good, or better than the current books students read. We have had very positive feedback about the required textbooks in the course but consistently heard how expensive the books were to buy. We also needed to ensure we met the learning outcomes outlined by SOU for a general education course, as well as the state of Oregon, to make sure this textbook helps students meet those outcomes.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aBurke, Alison S.eauthor1 aCarter, David E.eauthor1 aFedorek, Brianeauthor1 aMorey, Tiffany L.eauthor1 aRutz-Burri, Loreeauthor1 aSanchez, Shanelleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/688zAccess online version02664nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245006000182250001600242264004300258264006500301264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505074700543520075701290542004102047546001602088588004102104650003002145710003902175856007602214OTLid0000689MnU20260406020435.0m     o  d s      cr            190317s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463661324  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aMiedema, Sape A.eauthor04aThe Delft Sand, Clay & Rock Cutting ModelcSape Miedema  a3rd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Basic Soil Mechanics -- Chapter 3: The General Cutting Process -- Chapter 4: Which Cutting Mechanism for Which Kind of Soil? -- Chapter 5: Dry Sand Cutting -- Chapter 6: Saturated Sand Cutting -- Chapter 7: Clay Cutting -- Chapter 8: Rock Cutting: Atmospheric Conditions -- Chapter 9: Rock Cutting: Hyperbaric Conditions -- Chapter 10: The Occurrence of a Wedge -- Chapter 11: A Wedge in Dry Sand Cutting -- Chapter 12: A Wedge in Saturated Sand Cutting -- Chapter 13: A Wedge in Clay Cutting -- Chapter 14: A Wedge in Atmospheric Rock Cutting -- Chapter 15: A Wedge in Hyperbaric Rock Cutting -- Chapter 16: Exercises -- Chapter 17: Bibliography -- Chapter 18: Figures & Tables -- Chapter 19: Appendices0 aIn dredging, trenching, (deep sea) mining, drilling, tunnel boring and many other applications, sand, clay or rock has to be excavated. This book gives an overview of cutting theories. It starts with a generic model, which is valid for all types of soil (sand, clay and rock) after which the specifics of dry sand, water saturated sand, clay, atmospheric rock and hyperbaric rock are covered. For each soil type small blade angles and large blade angles, resulting in a wedge in front of the blade, are discussed. For each case considered, the equations/model for the cutting forces, power and specific energy are given. The models are verified with laboratory research, mainly at the Delft University of Technology, but also with data from literature.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/689zAccess online version02206nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002900153245012900182250001600311264004300327264006500370264001200435300002200447336002600469337002600495338003600521341002800557490002700585505070300612520027401315542004101589546001601630588004101646650003001687710003901717856007601756OTLid0000690MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190317s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463661416  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aMiedema, Sape A.eauthor00aSlurry TransportbFundamentals, A Historical Overview & The Delft Head Loss & Limit Deposit Velocity FrameworkcSape Miedema  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Dimensionless Numbers & Other Parameters -- Chapter 3: Pressure Losses with Homogeneous Liquid Flow -- Chapter 4: The Terminal Settling Velocity of Particles -- Chapter 5: Initiation of Motion and Sediment Transport -- Chapter 6: Slurry Transport, a Historical Overview -- Chapter 7: The Delft Head Loss & Limit Deposit Velocity Framework -- Chapter 8: Usage of the DHLLDV Framework -- Chapter 9: Comparison of the DHLLDV Framework with Other Models -- Chapter 10: Application of the Theory on a Cutter Suction Dredge -- Chapter 11: Publications -- Chapter 12: Bibliography -- Chapter 13: List of Figures -- Chapter 14: List of Tables -- Chapter 15: Appendices0 aIn dredging, trenching, (deep sea) mining, drilling, tunnel boring and many other applications, sand, clay or rock has to be excavated.The book covers horizontal transport of settling slurries (Newtonian slurries). Non-settling (non-Newtonian) slurries are not covered.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/690zAccess online version01806nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002800157245005000185264004300235264006600278264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505063500521520007701156542001601233546001601249588004101265650002301306710003901329856007601368OTLid0000691MnU20260406020716.0m     o  d s      cr            190320s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781719584463  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aHarmon, Luke J.eauthor00aPhylogenetic Comparative MethodscLuke Harmon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLuke J. Harmonc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - A Macroevolutionary Research Program -- Chapter 2 - Fitting Statistical Models to Data -- Chapter 3 - Introduction to Brownian Motion -- Chapter 4 - Fitting Brownian Motion -- Chapter 5 - Multivariate Brownian Motion -- Chapter 6 - Beyond Brownian Motion -- Chapter 7 - Models of discrete character evolution -- Chapter 8 - Fitting models of discrete character evolution -- Chapter 9 - Beyond the Mk model -- Chapter 10 - Introduction to birth-death models -- Chapter 11 - Fitting birth-death models -- Chapter 12 - Beyond birth-death models -- Chapter 13 - Characters and diversification rates -- Chapter 14 - Summary0 aThis is a book about Phylogenetic Comparative Methods by Luke J. Harmon.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/691zAccess online version02008nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138245002900145264004300174264006200217264001200279300002200291336002600313337002600339338003600365341002800401490002700429505033400456520044700790542002701237546001601264588004001280650003401320650002501354700002801379700002601407710003901433710006201472856007601534OTLid0000692MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            190328s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC5800 4aL700aLearning to Learn Online 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Who am I as an online learner? -- Part II. Who am I on my learning journey with? -- Part III. Who are my instructors? What is their role? -- Part IV. Time Management for Online Learning -- Part V. Professional Communication in the Online Environment -- Part VI. Analyzing Online Assignments -- Part VII. Strategic Reading0 aLearning to Learn Online helps you prepare for online learning success by introducing you to the online learning environment and your role as a learner within it. As you come to understand yourself as an self-directed learner, you will also be introduced to effective learning strategies: time management for online learners, information management, professional communication, and reading strategies. Welcome to your online learning journey!1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aPage, Christinaeauthor1 aVincent, Adameauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor2 aKwantlen Polytechnic UniversitybLearning Centreseauthor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/692zAccess online version02480nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245002900167264004300196264006000239264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002500421490002700446505076200473520063401235542001601869546001601885588004001901650002401941650002601965710003901991856007602030OTLid0000693MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            190411s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780998625775  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aPrinciples of Management 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Managing and Performing -- 2. Managerial Decision-Making -- 3. The History of Management -- 4. External and Internal Organizational Environments and Corporate Culture -- 5. Ethics, Corporate Responsibility, and Sustainability -- 6. International Management -- 7. Entrepreneurship -- 8. Strategic Analysis: Understanding a Firm's Competitive Environment -- 9. The Strategic Management Process: Achieving and Sustaining Competitive Advantage -- 10. Organizational Structure and Change -- 11. Human Resource Management -- 12. Diversity in Organizations -- 13. Leadership -- 14. Work Motivation for Performance -- 15. Managing Teams -- 16. Managerial Communication -- 17. Organizational Planning and Controlling -- 18. Management of Technology and Innovation0 aPrinciples of Management is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of the introductory course on management. This is a traditional approach to management using the leading, planning, organizing, and controlling approach. Management is a broad business discipline, and the Principles of Management course covers many management areas such as human resource management and strategic management, as well behavioral areas such as motivation. No one individual can be an expert in all areas of management, so an additional benefit of this text is that specialists in a variety of areas have authored individual chapters.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/693zAccess online version02679nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245006000167264004300227264006000270264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505054000504520099801044542004102042546001602083588004102099650002402140650002602164710003902190856007602229OTLid0000694MnU20260406020716.0m     o  d s      cr            190411s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172678  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF562500aPrinciples of AccountingnVolume 1 Financial Accounting 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Role of Accounting in Society -- 2. Introduction to Financial Statements -- 3. Analyzing and Recording Transactions -- 4. The Adjustment Process -- 5. Completing the Accounting Cycle -- 6. Merchandising Transactions -- 7. Accounting Information Systems -- 8. Fraud, Internal Controls, and Cash -- 9. Accounting for Receivables -- 10. Inventory -- 11. Long-Term Assets -- 12. Current Liabilities -- 13. Long-Term Liabilities -- 14. Corporation Accounting -- 15. Partnership Accounting -- 16. Statement of Cash Flows -- 17. Answer Key0 aPrinciples of Accounting is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of a two-semester accounting course that covers the fundamentals of financial and managerial accounting. Due to the comprehensive nature of the material, we are offering the book in two volumes. This book is specifically designed to appeal to both accounting and non-accounting majors, exposing students to the core concepts of accounting in familiar ways to build a strong foundation that can be applied across business fields. Each chapter opens with a relatable real-life scenario for today’s college student. Thoughtfully designed examples are presented throughout each chapter, allowing students to build on emerging accounting knowledge. Concepts are further reinforced through applicable connections to more detailed business processes. Students are immersed in the “why” as well as the “how” aspects of accounting in order to reinforce concepts and promote comprehension over rote memorization.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/694zAccess online version02704nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167245006100178264004300239264006000282264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002500464490002700489505050300516520099801019542004102017546001602058588004102074650002402115650002602139650002602165710003902191856007602230OTLid0000695MnU20260406020716.0m     o  d s      cr            190411s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947172593  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHD30.400aPrinciples of AccountingnVolume 2 Managerial Accounting 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Accounting as a Tool for Managers -- 2. Building Blocks of Managerial Accounting -- 3. Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis -- 4. Job Order Costing -- 5. Process Costing -- 6. Activity-Based, Variable, and Absorption Costing -- 7. Budgeting -- 8. Standard Costs and Variances -- 9. Responsibility Accounting and Decentralization -- 10. Short-Term Decision Making -- 11. Capital Budgeting Decisions -- 12. Balanced Scorecard and Other Performance Measures -- 13. Sustainability Reporting -- 14. Answer Key0 aPrinciples of Accounting is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of a two-semester accounting course that covers the fundamentals of financial and managerial accounting. Due to the comprehensive nature of the material, we are offering the book in two volumes. This book is specifically designed to appeal to both accounting and non-accounting majors, exposing students to the core concepts of accounting in familiar ways to build a strong foundation that can be applied across business fields. Each chapter opens with a relatable real-life scenario for today’s college student. Thoughtfully designed examples are presented throughout each chapter, allowing students to build on emerging accounting knowledge. Concepts are further reinforced through applicable connections to more detailed business processes. Students are immersed in the “why” as well as the “how” aspects of accounting in order to reinforce concepts and promote comprehension over rote memorization.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/695zAccess online version01778nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134050001100144100002400155245004800179264004300227264008500270264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505015800529520038600687542001601073546001601089588004001105650002501145650003301170650002601203650002401229710003901253856007601292OTLid0000696MnU20260406020716.0m     o  d s      cr            190412s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aKepka, Jenneauthor00aOregon Writes Open Writing TextcJenn Kepka 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part 1: Situation and Analysis -- Part 2: The Writing Process -- Part 3: Research -- Part 4: Rhetorical Modes -- Part 5: Critical Reading0 aThis textbook guides students through rhetorical and assignment analysis, the writing process, researching, citing, rhetorical modes, and critical reading. Using accessible but rigorous readings by professionals throughout the college composition field, the Oregon Writes Writing Textbook aligns directly to the statewide writing outcomes for English Composition courses in Oregon.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/696zAccess online version02282nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245007400167264004300241264005600284264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505049500517520064701012542004101659546001601700588004001716650002301756650002601779710003901805856007601844OTLid0000698MnU20260406020453.0m     o  d s      cr            190504s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBrooks, Christophereauthor00aWestern CivilizationbA Concise HistorycChristopher BrooksnVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbPortland Community Collegec2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: The Origins of Civilization -- Chapter 2: Egypt -- Chapter 3: The Bronze Age and the Iron Age -- Chapter 4: The Archaic Age of Greece -- Chapter 5: Persia and the Greek Wars -- Chapter 6: The Classical Age of Greece -- Chapter 7: The Hellenistic Age -- Chapter 8: The Roman Republic -- Chapter 9: The Roman Empire -- Chapter 10: The Late Empire and Christianity -- Chapter 11: Byzantium -- Chapter 12: Islam and the Caliphates -- Chapter 13: Early Medieval Europe0 aWestern Civilization: A Concise History is an Open Educational Resource textbook covering the history of Western Civilization from approximately 8000 BCE to the recent past. The textbook is divided into three volumes. The core narrative of the textbook is a political history of the greater Mediterranean region in the ancient period in Volume 1, Europe and European empires in the medieval and early modern periods in Volume 2, and both European and world history in the modern period in Volume 3. Elements of intellectual, cultural, social, and religious history are present throughout, but the main focus of the text is politics over time.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/698zAccess online version02264nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245007400167264004300241264005600284264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505047700517520064700994542004101641546001601682588004001698650002301738650002601761710003901787856007601826OTLid0000699MnU20260406020453.0m     o  d s      cr            190504s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBrooks, Christophereauthor00aWestern CivilizationbA Concise HistorycChristopher BrooksnVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbPortland Community Collegec2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: The High Middle Ages -- Chapter 2: The Crises of the Middle Ages -- Chapter 3: The Renaissance -- Chapter 4: Politics in the Renaissance Era -- Chapter 5: European Exploration and Conquest -- Chapter 6: Reformations -- Chapter 7: Religious Wars -- Chapter 8: Absolutism -- Chapter 9: Trade Empires -- Chapter 10: The Scientific Revolution -- Chapter 11: The Enlightenment -- Chapter 12: The Society of Orders -- Chapter 13: The French Revolution0 aWestern Civilization: A Concise History is an Open Educational Resource textbook covering the history of Western Civilization from approximately 8000 BCE to the recent past. The textbook is divided into three volumes. The core narrative of the textbook is a political history of the greater Mediterranean region in the ancient period in Volume 1, Europe and European empires in the medieval and early modern periods in Volume 2, and both European and world history in the modern period in Volume 3. Elements of intellectual, cultural, social, and religious history are present throughout, but the main focus of the text is politics over time.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/699zAccess online version02339nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245007400167264004300241264005600284264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505055200517520064701069542004101716546001601757588004001773650002301813650002601836710003901862856007601901OTLid0000700MnU20260406020453.0m     o  d s      cr            190504s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBrooks, Christophereauthor00aWestern CivilizationbA Concise HistorycChristopher BrooksnVolume 3 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbPortland Community Collegec2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Napoleon -- Chapter 2: The Industrial Revolution -- Chapter 3: Political Ideologies and Movements -- Chapter 4: The Politics of the Nineteenth Century -- Chapter 5: Culture, Science, and Pseudo-Science -- Chapter 6: Imperialism -- Chapter 7: World War I -- Chapter 8: The Early Twentieth Century -- Chapter 9: Fascism -- Chapter 10: World War II -- Chapter 11: The Holocaust -- Chapter 12: The Soviet Union and the Cold War -- Chapter 13: Postwar Conflict -- Chapter 14: Postwar Society -- Chapter 15: Toward the Present0 aWestern Civilization: A Concise History is an Open Educational Resource textbook covering the history of Western Civilization from approximately 8000 BCE to the recent past. The textbook is divided into three volumes. The core narrative of the textbook is a political history of the greater Mediterranean region in the ancient period in Volume 1, Europe and European empires in the medieval and early modern periods in Volume 2, and both European and world history in the modern period in Volume 3. Elements of intellectual, cultural, social, and religious history are present throughout, but the main focus of the text is politics over time.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/700zAccess online version01824nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002900148245010600177264004300283264008500326264001200411300002200423336002600445337002600471338003600497341002500533490002700558505015500585520042000740542003001160546001601190588004101206650002301247650003001270650002301300710003901323856007601362OTLid0000703MnU20260330020448.0m     o  d s      cr            190515s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aStraton, Jack C.eauthor00aRelativity LitebA Pictorial Translation of Einstein’s Theories of Motion and GravitycJack Straton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: To c or Not to c -- Chapter 2: Mixmaster Universe -- Chapter 3: A Trip to Alpha Centauri -- Chapter 4: Gravity Lite -- Chapter 5: Cosmology0 aRelativity Lite is designed for courses like my 100-student General Astronomy sequence. Relativity Lite translates the mathematical equations conventional relativity texts rely upon into pictures that are readily understood and contain within them the mathematical essentials. This new book would provide the comprehensive coverage needed to understand, in sufficient depth, these three linked areas of our reality.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSpace SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/703zAccess online version03412nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135050001100145100003300156245004600189264004300235264005200278264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505049200504520171700996542002702713546001602740588004002756650003802796650004202834650002302876710003902899856007602938OTLid0000708MnU20260406020450.0m     o  d s      cr            190515s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA145 4aQC21.31 aEllingson, Steven W.eauthor00aElectromagneticscSteven EllingsonnVol 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Preliminary Concepts -- Chapter 2: Magnetostatics Redux -- Chapter 3: Wave Propagation in General Media -- Chapter 4: Current Flow in Imperfect Conductors -- Chapter 5: Wave Reflection and Transmission -- Chapter 6: Waveguides -- Chapter 7: Transmission Lines Redux -- Chapter 8: Optical Fiber -- Chapter 9: Radiation -- Chapter 10: Antennas -- Appendix A: Constitutive Parameters of Some Common Materials -- Appendix B: Mathematical Formulas -- Appendix C: Physical Constants0 aElectromagnetics, volume 2 by Steven W. Ellingson is a 216-page peer-reviewed open textbook designed especially for electrical engineering students in the third year of a bachelor of science degree program. It is intended as the primary textbook for the second semester of a two-semester undergraduate engineering electromagnetics sequence. The book addresses magnetic force and the Biot-Savart law; general and lossy media; parallel plate and rectangular waveguides; parallel wire, microstrip, and coaxial transmission lines; AC current flow and skin depth; reflection and transmission at planar boundaries; fields in parallel plate, parallel wire, and microstrip transmission lines; optical fiber; and radiation and antennas. To express your interest in this book or series, please visit http://bit.ly/vtpublishing-updates Additional resources Problem sets and the corresponding solution manuals; Slides of figures used in and created for the book; LaTeX sourcefiles; Errata for Volume 2; Collaborator portal for the Electromagnetics series; Faculty listserv for the Electromagnetics series. An accessible version will be available in January 2020. The Open Electromagnetics Project Led by Steven W. Ellingson at Virginia Tech, the goal of the Open Electromagnetics Project is to create no-cost openly-licensed content for courses in engineering electromagnetics. The project is motivated by two things: lowering learning material costs for students and giving faculty the freedom to adopt, modify, and improve their educational resources. Books in this Series Electromagnetics, Volume 1 https://doi.org/10.21061/electromagnetics-vol-1 Electromagnetics, Volume 2 https://doi.org/10.21061/electromagnetics-vol-21 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/708zAccess online version03915nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002700144245007300171264004300244264008500287264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505082300549520174201372542004103114546001603155588004103171650002603212650003103238700002503269700003303294700002603327700002503353710003903378856007603417OTLid0000709MnU20260406020547.0m     o  d s      cr            190515s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aCote, Linda R.eauthor00aIntroduction to Statistics in the Psychological SciencescLinda Cote 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louisc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Describing Data Using Distributions and Graphs -- Chapter 3: Measures of Central Tendency and Spread -- Chapter 4: z Scores and the Standard Normal Distribution -- Chapter 5: Probability -- Chapter 6: Sampling Distributions -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Hypothesis Testing -- Chapter 8: Introduction to t Tests -- Chapter 9: Related Samples -- Chapter 10: Independent Samples -- Chapter 11: Analysis of Variance -- Chapter 12: Correlations -- Chapter 13: Linear Regression -- Chapter 14: Chi-Square -- Appendix A: Standard Normal Distribution Table (z Table) -- Appendix B: t Distribution Table (t Table) -- Appendix C: Critical Values for F (F Table) -- Appendix D: Critical Values for Pearson’s r (Correlation Table) -- Appendix E: Chi-Square Table -- Index --0 aIntroduction to Statistics in the Psychological Sciences provides an accessible introduction to the fundamentals of statistics, and hypothesis testing as need for psychology students. The textbook introduces the fundamentals of statistics, an introduction to hypothesis testing, and t Tests. Related samples, independent samples, analysis of variance, correlations, linear regressions and chi-squares are all covered along with expanded appendices with z, t, F correlation, and a Chi-Square table. The text includes key terms and exercises with answers to odd-numbered exercises. Psychology students often find statistics courses to be different from their other psychology classes. There are some distinct differences, especially involving study strategies for class success. The first difference is learning a new vocabulary—it is similar to learning a new language. Knowing the meaning of certain words will help as you are reading the material and working through the problems. Secondly, practice is critical for success; reading over the material is not enough. Statistics is a subject learned by doing, so make sure you work through any homework questions, chapter questions, and practice problems available. Statistical knowledge gives you a set of skills employable in graduate school and the workplace. Data science is a burgeoning field, and there is practical significance in learning this material. The statistics presented in this book are some of the most common ones used in research articles, and we hope by the end of this OER you’ll feel comfortable reading (and not skipping!) the results section of an article. This work is broken into 14 chapters, covering the fundamentals of statistics, and hypothesis testing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aGordon, Rupaeauthor1 aRandell, Chrislyn E.eauthor1 aSchmitt, Judyeauthor1 aGuerra, Rudyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/709zAccess online version02093nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143100002600154245006600180250000800246264004300254264005100297264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002500470490002700495505015200522520076100674542004101435546001601476588004101492650002401533650003501557710003901592856007601631OTLid0000710MnU20251230142515.0m     o  d s      cr            190515s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.31 aÖkten, Girayeauthor00aFirst Semester in Numerical Analysis with JuliacGiray Ökten  a2.1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMathematics, bFlorida State Universityc2020. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Solutions of equations: Root-finding -- 3 Interpolation -- 4 Numerical Quadrature and Differentiation -- 5 Approximation Theory0 aFirst Semester in Numerical Analysis with Julia presents the theory and methods, together with the implementation of the algorithms using the Julia programming language (version 1.1.0). The book covers computer arithmetic, root-finding, numerical quadrature and differentiation, and approximation theory. The reader is expected to have studied calculus and linear algebra. Some familiarity with a programming language is beneficial, but not required. The programming language Julia will be introduced in the book. The simplicity of Julia allows bypassing the pseudocode and writing a computer code directly after the description of a method while minimizing the distraction the presentation of a computer code might cause to the flow of the main narrative.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/710zAccess online version02464nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245003300139264004300172264006300215264001200278300002200290336002600312337002600338338003600364341002800400490002700428505079800455520063701253542004101890546001601931588004101947650002301988710003902011856007602050OTLid0000711MnU20260406020733.0m     o  d s      cr            190515s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.203aAn Introduction to Nutrition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIndependentc[2012] 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Nutrition and You -- Chapter 2: Achieving a Healthy Diet -- Chapter 3: Nutrition and the Human Body -- Chapter 4: Carbohydrates -- Chapter 5: Lipids -- Chapter 6: Proteins -- Chapter 7: Nutrients Important to Fluid and Electrolyte Balance -- Chapter 8: Nutrients Important As Antioxidants -- Chapter 9: Nutrients Important for Bone Health -- Chapter 10: Nutrients Important for Metabolism and Blood Function -- Chapter 11: Energy Balance and Body Weight -- Chapter 12: Nutrition through the Life Cycle: From Pregnancy to the Toddler Years -- Chapter 13: Nutrition through the Life Cycle: From Childhood to the Elderly Years -- Chapter 14: Nutrition and Society: Food Politics and Perspectives -- Chapter 15: Achieving Optimal Health: Wellness and Nutrition -- Chapter 16: Appendix A0 aWelcome to Essentials of Nutrition: A Functional Approach! This book is written for students who are not majoring in nutrition, but want to learn about the fundamental aspects of nutrition and how it applies to their own lives. We have written this book with the assumption that you have little or no prior knowledge of college level chemistry, biology, or physiology. But that does not mean it’s not scientific! Nutrition is a science-based discipline, so all the material included is backed up by rigorous scientific research, but it is presented in a clear, easy-to-understand fashion without requiring a background in science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/711zAccess online version01884nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002500151245009100176264004300267264006100310264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505038600548520022000934542004101154546001601195588004001211650002401251650002601275650003601301700003401337710003901371856007601410OTLid0000712MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            190519s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aAllosso, Daneauthor02aA Short Handbook for writing essays in the Humanities and Social SciencescDan Allosso 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota Libraries Publishing Projectc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aGetting Started Writing -- Chapter 1: Analyzing Texts, Taking Notes -- Chapter 2: Discovering a Topic, Preparing for Discussion -- Chapter 3: Creating a Thesis -- Chapter 4: Ordering Evidence, Building an Argument -- Chapter 5: Coherent Paragraphs -- Chapter 6: Effective Sentences -- Chapter 7: Appropriate Words -- Chapter 8: Revising -- Chapter 9: Revision Checklist -- Appendix0 aA retired master teacher of English and Comparative Literature teams up with his son, a History professor, on a new version of the writing manual he wrote and used for decades at the University of California, Davis.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aAllosso, Salvatore F.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/712zAccess online version03902nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000800157050001000165050001000175245004300185264004300228264009400271264005300365264001200418300002200430336002600452337002600478338003600504341002800540490002700568505120100595520119801796542001602994546001603010588004003026650002303066650003003089650004203119650002303161700003203184700003003216700003003246700002903276710003903305856007603344OTLid0000713MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            190516s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781949373974  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQE1 4aTA145 4aQH30100aIntroduction to Biosystems Engineering 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbAmerican Society of Agricultural and Biological Engineers (ASABE)c[2021] 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aEnergy Systems -- Bioenergy Conversion Systems -- Biogas Energy from Organic Wastes -- Biodiesel from Oils and Fats -- Baling Biomass: Densification and Energy Requirements -- Information Technology, Sensors, and Control Systems -- Basic Microcontroller Use for Measurement and Control -- Visible and Near Infrared Optical Spectroscopic Sensors for Biosystems Engineering -- Data Processing in Biosystems Engineering -- Machinery Systems -- Traction -- Crop Establishment and Protection -- Grain Harvest and Handling -- Mechatronics and Intelligent Systems in Agricultural Machinery -- Natural Resources and Environmental Systems -- Water Budgets for Sustainable Water Management -- Water Quality as a Driver of Ecological System Health -- Quantifying and Managing Soil Erosion on Cropland -- Anaerobic Digestion of Agri-Food By-Products -- Measurement of Gaseous Emissions from Animal Housing -- Plant, Animal, and Facility Systems -- Plant Production in Controlled Environments -- Building Design for Energy Efficient Livestock Housing -- Processing Systems -- Freezing of Food -- Principles of Thermal Processing of Packaged Foods -- Deep Fat Frying of Food -- Irradiation of Food -- Packaging0 aThe discipline of Biosystems Engineering emerged in the 1990s from the traditional strongholds of agricultural engineering and food engineering. Biosystems engineering integrates engineering science and design with applied biological, environmental, and agricultural sciences. Introduction to Biosystems Engineering is targeted at 1st and 2nd year university-level students with an interest in biosystems engineering but who are not yet familiar with the breadth and depth of the subject. It is designed as a coherent educational resource, also available for download as individual digital chapters. The book can be used as a localized, customizable text for introductory courses in Biosystems Engineering globally. It is written as a series of stand-alone chapters organized under six major topics: Food and Bioprocessing; Environment; Buildings and Infrastructure; Information and Communications Technology and Data; Machinery Systems; and Energy. Each chapter is organized around stated learning outcomes and describes key concepts, applications of the concepts, and worked examples. Instructors adopting or reviewing this text are encouraged to register with the publisher using this form.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aHolden, Nicholas M.eeditor1 aWolfe, Mary Leigheeditor1 aOgejo, Jactone A.eeditor1 aCummins, Enda J.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/713zAccess online version01817nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002600138245004700164250001900211264004300230264009000273264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002500485490002700510505045400537520025100991542001601242546001601258588004101274650002501315710003901340856007601379OTLid0000715MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190524s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.31 aDeVoe, Howardeauthor00aThermodynamics and ChemistrycHoward DeVoe  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDepartment of Chemistry and Biochemistry, College Park, MarylandbHoward DeVoec2020. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Systems and Their Properties -- 3 The First Law -- 4 The Second Law -- 5 Thermodynamic Potentials -- 6 The Third Law and Cryogenics -- 7 Pure Substances in Single Phases -- 8 Phase Transitions and Equilibria of Pure Substances -- 9 Mixtures -- 10 Electrolyte Solutions -- 11 Reactions and Other Chemical Processes -- 12 Equilibrium Conditions in Multicomponent Systems -- 13 The Phase Rule and Phase Diagrams -- 14 Galvanic Cells0 aThermodynamics and Chemistry is designed primarily as a textbook for a one-semester course in classical chemical thermodynamics at the graduate or undergraduate level. It can also serve as a supplementary text and thermodynamics reference source.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/715zAccess online version02269nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002600156245011000182264004300292264008500335264001200420300002200432336002600454337002600480338003600506341002500542490002700567505024300594520084800837542002701685546001601712588004001728650002401768710003901792856007601831OTLid0000716MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190528s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771465  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aKurant, Wendyeauthor00aBecoming AmericabAn Exploration of American Literature from Precolonial to Post-RevolutioncWendy Kurant 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Pre- and Early Colonial Literature -- Part Two: Seventeenth Century English Colonial Literature -- Part Three: Revolutionary and Early National Period Literature -- Part Four: Nineteenth Century Romanticism and Transcendentalism0 aThe University of North Georgia Press and Affordable Learning Georgia bring you Becoming America: An Exploration of American Literature from Precolonial to Post-Revolution. Featuring sixty-nine authors and full texts of their works, the selections in this open anthology represent the diverse voices in early American literature. This completely-open anthology will connect students to the conversation of literature that is embedded in American history and has helped shaped its culture. Features: Contextualizing introductions from Pre- and Early Colonial Literature to Early American Romanticism Over 70 historical images In-depth biographies of each author Instructional Design, including Reading and Review Questions This textbook is an open Educational Resource. It can be reused, remixed, and reedited freely without seeking permission.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/716zAccess online version02806nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245004400179264004300223264008500266264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505108300525520059901608542002702207546001602234588004102250650003802291710003902329856007602368OTLid0000717MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190528s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771496  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aBrehe, Steveneauthor00aBrehe’s Grammar AnatomycSteven Brehe 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Grammar? What Grammar? -- 1 Together Forever: Subjects and Predicates -- 2 The Indispensables: Nouns and Verbs -- 3 Get Tense: Verb Tense, Principal Parts, and Irregular Verbs -- 4 Tall, Dark, and Wordsome: Adjectives -- 5 Inevitably, Adverbs -- 6 Among the Prepositions -- 7 You and I and the Personal Pronouns -- 8 You Did What?: Verbs and Their Complements -- 9 All Together Now: Conjunctions, Compounds, and Subordinate Clauses -- 10 Sentencing Guidelines: Building Sentences with Clauses -- 11 Relative Clauses, Which We Need -- 12 I Know That You Know What They Are: Nominal Clauses -- 13 They’re So Dependent: Distinguishing Dependent Clauses -- 14 What, More?: Verbs and Voice, Infinitives, and Passive Complements -- 15 They’re So Common: More on Nouns -- 16 Zowie!: Interjections and the Eight Parts of Speech -- 17 Those Verbing Verbals: Gerunds and Participles -- 18 To Boldly Verb: Infinitives -- 19 What’s That?: More Pronouns -- 20 Many Things: (But no Cabbages or Kings) -- 21 Keeping Those Little Puncs in Line: A Brief Review of Punctuation0 aBrehe’s Grammar Anatomy makes grammar accessible to general and specialist readers alike. This book provides an in-depth look at beginner grammar terms and concepts, providing clear examples with limited technical jargon. Whether for academic or personal use, Brehe’s Grammar Anatomy is the perfect addition to any resource library. Features: Practice exercises at the end of each chapter, with answers in the back of the book, to help students test and correct their comprehension Full glossary and index with cross-references Easy-to-read language supports readers at every learning stage1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/717zAccess online version03706nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001100134050001000145050001000155050000700165245007800172264004300250264008000293264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505107500550520119701625542004102822546001602863588004002879650002502919650003702944650003602981650002603017650003103043700002903074700003003103710003903133856007603172OTLid0000718MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            190528s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aLC980 4aBF121 4aH100aTrauma-Informed School PracticesbBuilding Expertise To Transform Schools 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGeorge Fox University Libraryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection I: Foundational Principles of Trauma-Informed School Practices -- Chapter 1: The State of Public Schools -- Chapter 2: Optimum Development and Academic Readiness -- Chapter 3: When Stress and Trauma Overwhelm Coping Resources -- Chapter 4: Trauma and Classroom Impact -- Chapter 5: Trauma-Informed Response Best Practices -- Chapter 6: The Trauma-Informed School Practices Tri-Phasic Model -- Section II: Implementing Trauma-Informed School Practices -- Chapter 7: Planning for Transition to Trauma-Informed School Practices: District, School, and Educator Considerations -- Chapter 8: Implementing Trauma-Informed School Practices in the Classroom -- Chapter 9: Responding to Behavioral Disruptions Using Trauma-Informed School Practices: Principles and Practices -- Section III: Sustaining Trauma-Informed School Practices -- Chapter 10: Orienting and Supporting Parents as TISP Co-Facilitators -- Chapter 11: Applying Trauma-Informed School Practices to Educator Competencies -- Chapter 12: Nurturing Effective and Sustainable Trauma-Informed School Practices0 aThis textbook represents the combined insight and experience of Morton, a k12 educator, and Berardi, a psychotherapist, both of whom are also university educators with extensive work experience serving districts and their teachers seeking to incorporate trauma-informed principles into their school culture and classroom. The authors identify that the field of education is now ready to deepen its level of response to the paradigm shift created by advances in neuroscience and traumatology. Hence, the primary focus is on identifying and applying trauma-informed educator competencies needed to transform districts, schools, educators, classrooms, and the field of education itself, while also including community members such as parents and board members in these processes - a total system makeover. At the conclusion of this text, the student, educator, or mental health professional will have a deeper understanding of what trauma-informed practice requires of them. This includes practical strategies on how to transform our learning communities in response to the devastating effect of unmitigated stress and trauma on our student's ability to learn and thrive throughout the lifespan.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBerardi, Anna A.eauthor1 aMorton, Brenda M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/718zAccess online version02456nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001800138050001000156050001300166245007800179264004300257264005800300264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505051600535520046101051542004101512546001601553588004101569650002401610650002901634650003301663650003601696700002701732700003001759700003001789700002601819700002601845710003901871856007601910OTLid0000721MnU20260406020519.0m     o  d s      cr            190605s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.3 4aLB1062.600aTechnical and Professional Writing GenresbA Study in Theory and Practice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTechnical Writing, bOklahoma State Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- I. Theory -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Audience -- Chapter 3: Team Work and Collaborative Writing -- Chapter 4: Ethics -- Chapter 5: Document Design -- II. Genres and Practice -- Chapter 6: Emails, Memos, and Texting -- Chapter 7: Applying to Jobs (Resumes/Letters) -- Chapter 8: Technical Instructions -- Chapter 9: Proposals -- Chapter 10: Research -- Chapter 11: Analytical Reports -- Chapter 12: Oral Reports -- Appendix: Technical Instructions -- Additional Student Examples0 aThis modern, open-source guide to technical and professional writing explores workplace composition through theoretical and practical applications. Discussions of multiple writing genres will assist you in understanding how to apply for jobs, how to compose clear and precise business communications once the job has been acquired, and how to create documents -- such as proposals and reports -- that will be instrumental in helping to advance your career.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aHowerton, Ericeeditor1 aBeilfuss, Michaeleauthor1 aPeterson, Katrinaeauthor1 aBettes, Stacieauthor1 aRieger, Katieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/721zAccess online version01688nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245001800145264004300163264007700206264001200283300002200295336002600317337002600343338003600369341002800405490002700433505043300460520007600893542001600969546001600985588004001001650003001041650002301071700002701094700002701121700002701148710003901175856007601214OTLid0000722MnU20260406020510.0m     o  d s      cr            190605s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aRain or Shine 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Soil Patterns, Structure, and Texture -- 3. Soil Water Content and Potential -- 4. Soil Water Flow -- 5. Water Inputs -- 6. Infiltration -- 7. Runoff and Water Erosion -- 8. Redistribution and Drainage -- 9. Solute Transport and Groundwater Pollution -- 10. Evaporation and Wind Erosion -- 11. Transpiration and Root Water Uptake -- 12. Surface Energy Balance and Evapotranspiration -- 13. Soil Temperature0 aThis text is an introduction to soil physical properties and processes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aOchsner, Tysoneauthor1 aHowerton, Ericeeditor1 aEllis, Braideneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/722zAccess online version01653nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050001000148100002800158245005800186264004300244264007700287264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505031700541520009500858542003000953546001600983588004100999650003301040650003401073650003301107710003901140856007601179OTLid0000723MnU20260406020519.0m     o  d s      cr            190605s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aLC9801 aThompson, Pennyeauthor00aFoundations of Educational TechnologycPenny Thompson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a-- Introduction to Educational Technology -- Human Development -- Learning Theory -- Motivation -- Adult & Workspace Learning -- Communication -- Research in Educational Technology -- Instructional Design -- Technology Selection and Integration -- Acceptance and Diffusion of Technology -- Professional Ethics --0 aThis text provides a a graduate level introduction to the field of educational technology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/723zAccess online version02868nam a2200517 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000700156100002700163245005600190264004300246264004500289264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505062000511520063501131542003001766546001601796588004001812650003401852650002501886700002601911700003301937700002901970700002901999700003202028700002802060700002902088700003302117700002802150700002902178700002802207710003902235856007602274OTLid0000724MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            190609s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780989887816  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC5800 4aL71 aCrosslin, Matteauthor00aCreating Online Learning ExperiencescMatt Crosslin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Overview of Online Courses -- Chapter 2: Basic Philosophies -- Chapter 3: Institutional Courses -- Chapter 4: Production Timelines and Processes -- Chapter 5: Effective Practices -- Chapter 6: Creating Effective Course Activities -- Chapter 7: Creating Effective Course Content -- Chapter 8: Open Educational Resources -- Chapter 9: Assessment and Grading Issues -- Chapter 10: Creating Quality Videos -- Chapter 11: Utilizing Social Learning in Online Courses -- Chapter 12: Mindfulness in Online Courses -- Chapter 13: Advanced Course Design -- Chapter 14: Marketing of an Online Course0 aThis book provides an updated look at issues that comprise the online learning experience creation process. As online learning evolves, the lines and distinctions between various classifications of courses has blurred and often vanished. Classic elements of instructional design remain relevant at the same time that newer concepts of learning experience are growing in importance. However, problematic issues new and old still have to be addressed. This handbook explores many of these topics for new and experienced designers alike, whether creating traditional online courses, open learning experiences, or anything in between.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aBenham, Bretteauthor1 aDellinger, Justin T.eauthor1 aPatterson, Ambereauthor1 aSemingson, Peggyeauthor1 aSpann, Catherine A.eauthor1 aUsman, Brittanyeauthor1 aWatkins, Harrieteauthor1 aDellinger, Justin T.eeditor1 aHeiser, Rebeccaeeditor1 aRiviou, Katerinaeeditor1 aUsman, Brittanyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/724zAccess online version02555nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245002300138264004300161264008600204264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341002800412490002700440505038600467520092500853542004101778546001601819588004101835650002401876700003201900700002901932700002601961700002701987700002802014710003902042856007602081OTLid0000725MnU20260406020437.0m     o  d s      cr            190615s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aLet's Get Writing! 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Western Community Collegec[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - Critical Reading -- Chapter 2 - Rhetorical Analysis -- Chapter 3 - Argument -- Chapter 4 - The Writing Process -- Chapter 5 - Rhetorical Modes -- Chapter 6 - Finding and Using Outside Sources -- Chapter 7 - How and Why to Cite -- Chapter 8 - Writing Basics: What Makes a Good Sentence? -- Chapter 9 - Punctuation -- Chapter 10 - Working With Words: Which Word is Right?0 aThis introduction is designed to exemplify how writers think about and produce text. The guiding features are the following: Every good piece of writing is an argument. Everything worth writing and reading begins with a specific question. Improving skills takes practice, feedback, and re-thinking, redoing, revising. The layout of our book implies there is a beginning, middle, and end to a writing course, but because writing is both an art and a skill, people will find their own processes for learning, improving, and using these skills. Writing processes differ because we are each looking for a workable schemata that fits our way of thinking. Try out a variety of writing processes and strategies, and find what works for you. If you are not uncomfortable on this journey, you simply are not stretching yet. Learning is prickly, awkward, and risky, so if it does not feel a bit unnerving, push harder and farther.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aBrowning, Elizabetheauthor1 aDeVries, Kirsteneauthor1 aBoylan, Kathyeauthor1 aKurtz, Jenifereauthor1 aBurton, Katelyneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/725zAccess online version04735nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145245005900156264004300215264007200258264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505208900507520149302596542001604089546001604105588004004121650002704161700003104188700002704219710003904246856007604285OTLid0000726MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783747016  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.304aThe Essence of Mathematics Through Elementary Problems 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Mental Skills -- 1.1 Mental arithmetic and algebra -- 1.2 Direct and inverse procedures -- 1.3 Structural arithmetic -- 1.4 Pythagoras' Theorem -- 1.5 Visualisation -- 1.6 Trigonometry and radians -- 1.7 Regular polygons and regular polyhedra -- 1.8 Chapter 1: Comments and solutions -- II. Arithmetic -- 2.1 Place value and decimals: basic structure -- 2.2 Order and factors -- 2.3 Standard written algorithms -- 2.4 Divisibility tests -- 2.5 Sequences -- 2.6 Commutative, associative and distributive laws -- 2.7 Infinite decimal expansions -- 2.8 The binary numeral system -- 2.9 The Prime Number Theorem -- 2.10 Chapter 2: Comments and solutions -- III. Word Problems -- 3.1 Twenty problems which embody "3 - 1 = 2" -- 3.2 Some classical examples -- 3.3 Speed and acceleration -- 3.4 Hidden connections -- 3.5 Chapter 3: Comments and solutions -- IV. Algebra -- 4.1 Simultaneous linear equations and symmetry -- 4.2 Inequalities and modulus -- 4.3 Factors, roots, polynomials and surds -- 4.4 Complex numbers -- 4.5 Cubic equations -- 4.6 An extra -- 4.7 Chapter 4: Comments and solutions -- V. Geometry -- 5.1 Comparing geometry and arithmetic -- 5.2 Euclidean geometry: a brief summary -- 5.3 Areas, lengths and angles -- 5.4 Regular and semi-regular tilings in the plane -- 5.5 Ruler and compasses constructions for regular polygons -- 5.6 Regular and semi-regular polyhedra -- 5.7 The Sine Rule and the Cosine Rule -- 5.8 Circular arcs and circular sectors -- 5.9 Convexity -- 5.10 Pythagoras' Theorem in three dimensions -- 5.11 Loci and coonic sections -- 5.12 Cubes in higher dimensions -- 5.13 Chapter 5: Comments and solutions -- VI. Infinity: recursions, induction, infinite descent -- 6.1 Proof by mathematical induction I -- 6.2 'Mathematical induction' and 'scientific induction' -- 6.3 Proof by mathematical induction II -- 6.4 Infinite geometric series -- 6.5 Some classical inequalities -- 6.6 The harmonic series -- 6.7 Induction in geometry, combinatorics and number theory -- 6.8 Two problems -- 6.9 Infinite descent -- 6.10 Chapter 6: Comments and solutions0 aIt is increasingly clear that the shapes of reality – whether of the natural world, or of the built environment – are in some profound sense mathematical. Therefore it would benefit students and educated adults to understand what makes mathematics itself ‘tick’, and to appreciate why its shapes, patterns and formulae provide us with precisely the language we need to make sense of the world around us. The second part of this challenge may require some specialist experience, but the authors of this book concentrate on the first part, and explore the extent to which elementary mathematics allows us all to understand something of the nature of mathematics from the inside. The Essence of Mathematics consists of a sequence of 270 problems – with commentary and full solutions. The reader is assumed to have a reasonable grasp of school mathematics. More importantly, s/he should want to understand something of mathematics beyond the classroom, and be willing to engage with (and to reflect upon) challenging problems that highlight the essence of the discipline. The book consists of six chapters of increasing sophistication (Mental Skills; Arithmetic; Word Problems; Algebra; Geometry; Infinity), with interleaved commentary. The content will appeal to students considering further study of mathematics at university, teachers of mathematics at age 14-18, and anyone who wants to see what this kind of elementary content has to tell us about how mathematics really works.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aBorovik, Alexandreeauthor1 aGardiner, Tonyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/726zAccess online version02595nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002700156245005900183264004300242264007200285264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505043900534520104600973542001602019546001602035588004002051650002702091710003902118856007602157OTLid0000727MnU20260406020436.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783741397  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aGardiner, Tonyeauthor00aTeaching Mathematics at Secondary LevelcTony Gardiner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Background: Why focus on Key Stage 3 -- II. The general advice in the Key Stage 3 programme of study -- 1. Aims -- 2. Working mathematically -- III. The listed subject content for Key Stage 3 -- 1. Number (and ratio and proportion) -- 2. Algebra -- 3. Geometry and measures -- 4. Probability and Statistics -- IV. A sample curriculum for all-written from a humane mathematical viewpoint -- 1. Very Brief version -- 2. Brief version0 aTeaching Mathematics is nothing less than a mathematical manifesto. Arising in response to a limited National Curriculum, and engaged with secondary schooling for those aged 11 ̶ 14 (Key Stage 3) in particular, this handbook for teachers will help them broaden and enrich their students’ mathematical education. It avoids specifying how to teach, and focuses instead on the central principles and concepts that need to be borne in mind by all teachers and textbook authors—but which are little appreciated in the UK at present. This study is aimed at anyone who would like to think more deeply about the discipline of ‘elementary mathematics’, in England and Wales and anywhere else. By analysing and supplementing the current curriculum, Teaching Mathematics provides food for thought for all those involved in school mathematics, whether as aspiring teachers or as experienced professionals. It challenges us all to reflect upon what it is that makes secondary school mathematics educationally, culturally, and socially important.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/727zAccess online version02837nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003000153245010100183264004300284264007200327264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505016600576520152000742542001602262546001602278588004002294650002602334710003902360856007602399OTLid0000728MnU20260406020437.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781783742004  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aWilson, Catherineeauthor00aMetaethics from a First Person StandpointbAn Introduction to Moral PhilosophycCatherine Wilson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction and Acknowledgements -- Enquiry I -- Enquiry II -- Enquiry III -- Enquiry IV -- Enquiry V -- Enquiry VI -- Enquiry VII -- Enquiry VIII -- Enquiry IX0 aMetaethics from a First Person Standpoint addresses in a novel format the major topics and themes of contemporary metaethics, the study of the analysis of moral thought and judgement. Metathetics is less concerned with what practices are right or wrong than with what we mean by ‘right’ and ‘wrong.’ Looking at a wide spectrum of topics including moral language, realism and anti-realism, reasons and motives, relativism, and moral progress, this book engages students and general readers in order to enhance their understanding of morality and moral discourse as cultural practices. Catherine Wilson innovatively employs a first-person narrator to report step-by-step an individual’s reflections, beginning from a position of radical scepticism, on the possibility of objective moral knowledge. The reader is invited to follow along with this reasoning, and to challenge or agree with each major point. Incrementally, the narrator is led to certain definite conclusions about ‘oughts’ and norms in connection with self-interest, prudence, social norms, and finally morality. Scepticism is overcome, and the narrator arrives at a good understanding of how moral knowledge and moral progress are possible, though frequently long in coming.Accessibly written, Metaethics from a First Person Standpoint presupposes no prior training in philosophy and is a must-read for philosophers, students and general readers interested in gaining a better understanding of morality as a personal philosophical quest.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/728zAccess online version01808nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002400137245003600161264004300197264006700240264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505034200484520040600826542003001232546001601262588004001278650002501318710003901343856007601382OTLid0000729MnU20260406020716.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM5861 aWeil, Nolaneauthor00aSpeaking of CulturecNolan Weil 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What is Culture? -- Chapter 2: The Human Family -- Chapter 3: Origins and Early Developments of Culture -- Chapter 4: Material Culture -- Chapter 5: Culture as Thought and Action -- Chapter 6: Beliefs, Values, and Cultural Universals -- Chapter 7: Group Membership and Identity -- Chapter 8: Roots of American National Culture0 a“Speaking of Culture” is a collection of instructor-authored background readings intended to accompany other activities, discussions, experiences, projects, and readings for IELI 2470 – Cross-Cultural Perspectives, a course offered by faculty in the Intensive English Language Institute at Utah State University. Its main purpose is to define culture and other concepts often associated with it.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/729zAccess online version01883nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245006600135264004300201264006700244264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505071400488520002201202542004101224546001601265588004001281650002301321700003201344700003001376710003901406856007601445OTLid0000730MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2000aMythology UnboundbAn Online Textbook for Classical Mythology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAegis -- Agamemnon and Iphigenia -- Aphrodite -- Apollo -- Ares -- The Argonauts -- Artemis -- Athena -- Caduceus -- Centaurs -- Chthonian Deities -- The Delphic Oracle -- Demeter -- Dionysus/Bacchus -- Hades -- Hephaestus -- Hera -- Heracles -- Hermes -- Hestia -- Historical Myths -- The Iliad - An Introduction -- Jason -- Miasma -- The Minotaur -- The Odyssey - An Introduction -- The Oresteia - An Introduction -- Origins -- Orpheus -- Persephone -- Perseus -- Poseidon -- Prometheus -- Psychological Myths -- Sphinx -- Story Pattern of the Greek Hero -- Theseus -- The Three Types of Myth -- The Twelve Labors of Heracles -- What is a myth? -- Why are there so many versions of Greek myths? -- XeniaZeus0 aMythology Unbound1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aMellenthin, Jessicaeauthor1 aShapiro, Susan O.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/730zAccess online version02169nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143100002900153245005000182264004300232264006700275264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505029700519520070200816542004101518546001601559588004001575650003601615650002901651710003901680856007601719OTLid0000731MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aChampagne, Brianeauthor00aWriting for Electronic MediacBrian Champagne 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The Newsroom -- 2. Leads -- 3. Common Mistakes -- 4. Interviewing -- 5. VOs -- 6. VOSOTs -- 7. PKGs -- 8. Producing -- 9. Teases and Promos -- 10. Live Shots -- 11. Social Media -- 12. Working With Photographers -- 13. Radio -- 14. Sports -- 15. Motivation and Ethics -- 16. The Job Market0 aWelcome to Writing for Electronic Media, an OER textbook. OER stands for Open Educational Resource, which means it’s free for all who access. Since it is electronic, I will do what I can to keep it updated with the changing media. People’s viewing habits are changing as they migrate to mobile sources, social media, and kitten videos.Television News is still a dominant #1 source, and radio is still the safest way to stay informed in your car. Hopefully, you already have some journalism background. This book does not teach the who, what, when, where, why, and how of reporting; its goal is to teach how to present the journalism you already know via electronic media, primarily television.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/731zAccess online version01795nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002300135245004400158264004300202264006600245264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505047200488520026800960542001601228546001601244588004001260650003001300710003901330856007601369OTLid0000732MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aWebb, Pauleauthor00aIntroduction to OceanographycPaul Webb 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc2020. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to the Oceans -- Chapter 2: Getting our Bearings -- Chapter 3: The Origin and Structure of Earth -- Chapter 4: Plate Tectonics and Marine Geology -- Chapter 5: Chemical Oceanography -- Chapter 6: Physical Oceanography -- Chapter 7: Primary Production -- Chapter 8: Oceans and Climate -- Chapter 9: Ocean Circulation -- Chapter 10: Waves -- Chapter 11: Tides -- Chapter 12: Ocean Sediments -- Chapter 13: Coastal Oceanography -- Chapter 14: Ice0 aIntroduction to Oceanography is a textbook appropriate to an introductory-level university course in oceanography. The book covers the fundamental geological, chemical, physical and biological processes in the ocean, with an emphasis on the North Atlantic region.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/732zAccess online version02639nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245006700171264004300238264006200281264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505066200520520080101182542004101983546001602024588004102040650003202081650003702113710003902150856007602189OTLid0000733MnU20260406020437.0m     o  d s      cr            190622s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aJorgensen, Edeauthor00ax86-64 Assembly Language Programming with UbuntucEd Jorgensen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aComputer Science, Las Vegas, NevadabEd Jorgensenc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1.0 Introduction -- 2.0 Architecture Overview -- 3.0 Data Representation -- 4.0 Program Format -- 5.0 Tool Chain -- 6.0 DDD Debugger -- 7.0 Instruction Set Overview -- 8.0 Addressing Modes -- 9.0 Process Stack -- 10.0 Program Development -- 11.0 Macros -- 12.0 Functions -- 13.0 System Services -- 14.0 Multiple Source Files -- 15.0 Stack Buffer Overflow -- 16.0 Command Line Arguments -- 17.0 Input/Output Buffering -- 18.0 Floating-Point instructions -- 19.0 Parallel Processing -- 20.0 Interrupts -- 21.0 Appendix A - ASCII Table -- 22.0 Appendix B - Instruction Set Summary -- 23.0 Appendix C - System Services -- 24.0 Appendix D - Quiz Question Answers0 aThe purpose of this text is to provide a reference for University level assembly language and systems programming courses. Specifically, this text addresses the x86-64 instruction set for the popular x86-64 class of processors using the Ubuntu 64-bit Operating System (OS). While the provided code and various examples should work under any Linux-based 64-bit OS, they have only been tested under Ubuntu 14.04 LTS (64-bit). The x86-64 is a Complex Instruction Set Computing (CISC) CPU design. This refers to the internal processor design philosophy. CISC processors typically include a wide variety of instructions (sometimes overlapping), varying instructions sizes, and a wide range of addressing modes. The term was retroactively coined in contrast to Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC3).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/733zAccess online version02317nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245006600171264004300237264004400280264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505045600501520070400957542004101661546001601702588004101718650003201759650003701791710003901828856007601867OTLid0000734MnU20260406020437.0m     o  d s      cr            190629s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aJorgensen, Edeauthor00aMIPS Assembly Language Programming using QtSpimcEd Jorgensen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLas Vegas, NevadabEd Jorgensenc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1.0 Introduction -- 2.0 MIPS Architecture Overview -- 3.0 Data Representation -- 4.0 QtSpim Program Formats -- 5.0 Instruction Set Overview -- 6.0 Addressing Modes -- 7.0 Stack -- 8.0 Procedures/Functions -- 9.0 QtSpim System Service Calls -- 10.0 Multi-dimension Array Implementation -- 11.0 Recursion -- 12.0 Appendix A - Example Program -- 13.0 Appendix B - QtSpim Tutorial -- 14.0 Appendix C - MIPS Instruction Set -- 15.0 Appendix D - ASCII Table0 aThere are a number of excellent, comprehensive, and in-depth texts on MIPS assembly language programming. This is not one of them.The purpose of this text is to provide a simple and free reference for university level programming and architecture units that include a brief section covering MIPS assembly language programming. The text assumes usage of the QtSpim simulator. An appendix is included that covers the download, installation, and basic use of the QtSpim simulator.The scope of this text addresses basic MIPS assembly language programming including instruction set usage, stacks, procedure/function calls, QtSpim simulator system services, multiple dimension arrays, and basic recursion.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/734zAccess online version02529nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007300171264004300244264004400287264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505079200508520057301300542004101873546001601914588004101930650003201971650003702003710003902040856007602079OTLid0000735MnU20260406020438.0m     o  d s      cr            190629s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aJorgensen, Edeauthor00aIntroduction to Programming using Fortran 95/2003/2008cEd Jorgensen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLas Vegas, NevadabEd Jorgensenc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Computer Organization -- 3 Getting Started -- 4 Fortran 95/2003/2008 - Basic Elements -- 5 Expressions -- 6 Simple Input and Output -- 7 Program Development -- 8 Selection Statements -- 9 Looping -- 10 Formatted Input/Output -- 11 Characters and Strings -- 12 File Operations -- 13 Single Dimension Arrays -- 14 Multidimensional Arrays -- 15 Subprograms -- 16 Derived Data Types -- 17 Modules -- 18 Recursion -- 19 Character String / Numeric Conversions -- 20 System Services -- 21 Appendix A - ASCII Table -- 22 Appendix B - Start-Up Instructions -- 23 Appendix C - Random Number Generation -- 24 Appendix D - Instrinsic Functions -- 25 Appendix E - Visualization with GNUplot -- 26 Appendix F - Quiz Question Answers -- 27 Appendix G - Fortran 95/2003/2008 Keywords0 aComputers are everywhere in our daily lives. Between the desktop, laptop, phone, bank, and vehicle, it is difficult to completely get away from computers. It only makes sense to learn a little about how a computer really works.This text provides an introduction to programming and problem solving using the Fortran 95/2003/2008 programming language. This introduction is geared for non-computer science majors. The primary focus is on an introduction to problem solving and algorithm development. As such, many details of the Fortran 95/2003/2008 language are omitted.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/735zAccess online version02301nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245007700139264004300216264011900259264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505053600555520053901091542001601630546001601646588004101662650002301703700002801726700003001754700002801784710003901812856007601851OTLid0000736MnU20260406020438.0m     o  d s      cr            190629s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.200aUnfolding the Mystery of Life, Biology Lab Manual for Non-Science Majors 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBiology Department, West Windsor Township, New JerseybEllen Genovesi, Laura Blinderman and Patrick Natalec[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aExercise 1: The Metric System of Measurement -- Exercise 2: Microscopy -- Exercise 3: The Scientific Method -- Exercise 4: Cell Membrane Biology -- Exercise 5: Biomolecules -- Exercise 6: Enzymes -- Exercise 7: Photosynthesis -- Exercise 8: Human Genetics & Cytogenetics -- Exercise 9: Using Genetic Crosses to Analyze a Stickleback Trait -- Exercise 10: Protein Gel Electrophoresis -- Exercise 11: Isolation of DNA From Plants -- Exercise 12: Animal Tissues -- Exercise 13: Microbiology, Food Microbiology and Disease Transmission0 aThis laboratory manual is intended for use in a biology laboratory course taken by non-science majors, pre-biology, and pre-allied health majors. Laboratory exercises provide students with experience in basic laboratory skills, gathering and organizing data, measuring and calculating, hypothesis testing, analysis of data, writing, and laboratory safety. The skill sets are designed to promote the development of critical thought and analysis. Students work with living and preserved specimens, and laboratory reagents and equipment.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aGenovesi, Elleneauthor1 aBlinderman, Lauraeauthor1 aNatale, Patrickeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/736zAccess online version01858nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001400138100003300152245009800185264004300283264004200326264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002500490490002700515505032400542520035800866542002701224546001601251588004101267650003501308650002601343710003901369856007601408OTLid0000737MnU20260406020717.0m     o  d s      cr            190629s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA273-2801 aCrump, Matthew J. C.eauthor00aAnswering questions with databIntroductory Statistics for Psychology StudentscMatthew Crump 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, New YorkbCrump Labc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Why Statistics? -- 2 Describing Data -- 3 Correlation -- 4 Probability, Sampling, and Estimation -- 5 Foundations for inference -- 6 t-Tests -- 7 ANOVA -- 8 Repeated Measures ANOVA -- 9 Factorial ANOVA -- 10 More On Factorial Designs -- 11 Simulating Data -- 12 Thinking about answering questions with data -- 13 GIFs0 aThis is a free textbook teaching introductory statistics for undergraduates in Psychology. This textbook is part of a larger OER course package for teaching undergraduate statistics in Psychology, including this textbook, a lab manual, and a course website. All of the materials are free and copiable, with source code maintained in Github repositories.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/737zAccess online version01756nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245005600167264004300223264006700266264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002500455490002700480505023500507520037000742542001601112546001601128588004001144650002601184700002801210700002901238710003901267856007601306OTLid0000738MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            190629s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aJason, Leonard A.eauthor00aIntroduction to Community PsychologycLeonard Jason 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. Theory, Research, and Practice -- III. Understanding Communities -- IV. Intervention and Prevention Strategies -- V. Tools for Action -- VI. Our Future -- VII. Chapter Quizzes -- VIII. Chapter Lecture Slides0 aThis textbook will show you how to comprehensively analyze, investigate, and address escalating problems of economic inequality, violence, substance abuse, homelessness, poverty, and racism. It will provide you with perspectives and tools to partner with community members and organizations to promote a fair and equitable allocation of resources and opportunities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aGlantsman, Olyaeauthor1 aO'Brien, Jack F.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/738zAccess online version02284nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000900139100002900148245005000177250001800227264004300245264005400288264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505022100519520088700740542004101627546001601668588004101684650002501725650003301750710003901783856007601822OTLid0000739MnU20260406020454.0m     o  d s      cr            190629s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aJA711 aSaros, Daniel E.eauthor00aPrinciples of Political EconomycDaniel Saros  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aValparaiso, IndianabValparaiso Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Part One: An Introduction to Economic Theory -- II. Part Two: Principles of Microeconomic Theory -- III. Part Three: Principles of Macroeconomic Theory -- IV. Part Four: Principles of International Economic Theory0 aThis textbook is unique among economics textbooks. It contains many of the same topics as mainstream textbooks, but it includes and takes very seriously heterodox critiques and alternatives to the mainstream approach to economics. It includes a whole range of alternative theories, including Post-Keynesian, Austrian, Marxian, radical, feminist, institutionalist, and other approaches. The purpose is to teach students about alternative schools of economic thought but also to deepen their understanding of the dominant, neoclassical approach to economics. In this sense, it draws a great deal of inspiration from Richard Wolff and Stephen Resnick’s Contending Economic Theories. Following Wolff and Resnick, an even broader objective is to teach students that economics is a discourse and that no single voice can rightfully claim to have a monopoly on the truth about economics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/739zAccess online version02159nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152245003800162250001900200264004300219264008500262264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505055900524520035901083542003001442546001601472588004001488650002501528650002601553700002601579700002901605710003901634856007601673OTLid0000740MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            190706s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645679649  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aBF12100aWellbeing in Educational Contexts  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Information -- Foreward -- 1. Connecting And Activating Prior Knowledge -- 2. Theoretical Conceptualisations of Wellbeing -- 3. Policy, Frameworks and Legislation Informing a Focus on Wellbeing -- 4. Contemporary Perspectives on the Impactors and Enablers to Wellbeing -- 5. Pragmatic Applications of Embedding an Education Wide Focus on Wellbeing -- 6. Ecological and Contextual Analysis of Wellbeing: in your context -- 7. The Wellbeing of Librarians in the Higher Education Sector -- 8. Conclusion -- 9. Glossary of Terms -- 10. Appendix0 aThis text endeavours to focus on wellbeing promotion in educational contexts as schools and other educational contexts play a pivotal role in teaching students about nonviolence, promoting understanding of diversity, endowing people with a shared purpose and meaning and the skills and behaviours to create a more inclusive, healthy, and positive future.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aCarter, Susaneauthor1 aAndersen, Cecilyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/740zAccess online version01625nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002300138245004300161264004300204264007500247264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505014200496520041200638542002701050546001601077588004001093650002701133710003901160856007601199OTLid0000741MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            190713s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aBrin, Leoneauthor00aTea Time Numerical AnalysiscLeon Brin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDepartment of Mathematics, New Haven, ConnecticutbLeon Q. Brinc2021. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preliminaries -- 2 Root Finding -- 3 Interpolation -- 4 Numerical Calculus -- 5 More Interpolation -- 6 Ordinary Differential Equations0 aThis textbook was born of a desire to contribute a viable, free, introductory Numerical Analysis textbook for instructors and students of mathematics. The ultimate goal of Tea Time Numerical Analysis is to be a complete, one-semester, single-pdf, downloadable textbook designed for mathematics classes. Now includes differential equations. Over 350 pages Over 1000 lines of code Over 200 figures Open source1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/741zAccess online version02248nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002500138245004100163264004300204264005000247264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002800419490002700447505020300474520100700677542001601684546001601700588004001716650002701756710003901783856007601822OTLid0000742MnU20260406020438.0m     o  d s      cr            190713s2004    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aZakon, Eliaseauthor00aMathematical Analysis IcElias Zakon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWest Lafayette, INbThe Trillia Groupc[2004] 4c©2004.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Set Theory -- Chapter 2. Real Numbers. Fields -- Chapter 3. Vector Spaces. Metric Spaces -- Chapter 4. Function Limits and Continuity -- Chapter 5. Differentiation and Antidifferentiation0 aThis award-winning text carefully leads the student through the basic topics of Real Analysis. Topics include metric spaces, open and closed sets, convergent sequences, function limits and continuity, compact sets, sequences and series of functions, power series, differentiation and integration, Taylor's theorem, total variation, rectifiable arcs, and sufficient conditions of integrability. Well over 500 exercises (many with extensive hints) assist students through the material. For students who need a review of basic mathematical concepts before beginning "epsilon-delta"-style proofs, the text begins with material on set theory (sets, quantifiers, relations and mappings, countable sets), the real numbers (axioms, natural numbers, induction, consequences of the completeness axiom), and Euclidean and vector spaces; this material is condensed from the author's Basic Concepts of Mathematics, the complete version of which can be used as supplementary background material for the present text.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/742zAccess online version02235nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001100142050001400153050000800167100003300175245007100208250001700279264004300296264007900339264001200418300002200430336002600452337002600478338003600504341002500540490002700565505022700592520069300819542002701512546001601539588004001555650003501595650004101630650002701671710003901698856007601737OTLid0000743MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            190713s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1717134815  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA440-699 4aQA11 aHitchman, Michael P.eauthor00aGeometry with an Introduction to Cosmic TopologycMichael Hitchman  a2018 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDepartment of Mathematics, McMinnville, OregonbMichael P. Hitchmanc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- An Invitation to Geometry -- The Complex Plane -- Transformations -- Geometry -- Hyperbolic Geometry -- Elliptic Geometry -- Geometry on Surfaces -- Cosmic Topology -- List of Symbols -- References -- Index0 aMotivated by questions in cosmology, the open-content text Geometry with an Introduction to Cosmic Topology uses Mobius transformations to develop hyperbolic, elliptic, and Euclidean geometry - three possibilities for the global geometry of the universe. The text, written for students who have taken vector calculus, also explores the interplay between the shape of a space and the type of geometry it admits. Geometry is suitable for a semester course in non-Euclidean geometry or as a guide to independent study, with over 200 exercises and several essays on topics including the history of geometry, parallax and curvature, and research aimed at determining the shape of the universe.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/743zAccess online version02546nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155245005000165264004300215264006400258264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505070400499520063501203542004101838546001601879588004001895650002401935650002301959700002901982700002202011710003902033856007602072OTLid0000744MnU20260406020717.0m     o  d s      cr            190721s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780888806116  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA440 4aQH30100aUndergraduate Diagnostic Imaging Fundamentals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSaskatoon, SaskatchewanbUniversity of Saskatchewanc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 – Introduction -- Chapter 2 – Principles of Radiation Biology and Radiation Protection -- Chapter 3 – Principles of Imaging Techniques -- Chapter 4 – Contrast Media in Radiology -- Chapter 5 – Approach to Reviewing X-ray Imaging -- Chapter 6 – Brain and Spine -- Chapter 7 – Breast -- Chapter 8 – Cardiovascular -- Chapter 9 – Chest -- Chapter 10 – Gastrointestinal and Abdominal -- Chapter 11 – Gynecology and Obstetrics -- Chapter 12 – Head and Neck -- Chapter 13 – Interventional / Vascular (Invasive) -- Chapter 14 – Musculoskeletal -- Chapter 15 – Pediatric -- Chapter 16 – Urogenital -- Chapter 17 – Normal, Reference Images, Unlabelled and Labelled0 aDiagnostic Imaging principles and concepts are augmented by the presentation of images for common clinical conditions. Guiding principles related to minimizing radiation exposure and requesting the most appropriate imaging examination are addressed.Static images are enhanced by the ability to access images stored and displayed on an Html-5 compatible, Dicom image viewer that simulates a simple Picture Archive and Communication system (PACS). Users can also access other imaging from the Dicom viewer (ODIN), beyond the basic curriculum provided, to further advance their experience with viewing diagnostic imaging pathologies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBurbridge, Brenteauthor1 aMah, Evaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/744zAccess online version02462nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245003800166264004300204264006900247264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505066300493520068001156542004101836546001601877588004001893650002601933650002601959710003901985856007602024OTLid0000745MnU20251230142515.0m     o  d s      cr            190721s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aDowden, Bradley H.eauthor00aLogical ReasoningcBradley Dowden 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPhilosophy Department, Sacramento, CAbBradley H. Dowdenc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 How to Reason Logically -- Chapter 2 Claims, Issues, and Arguments -- Chapter 3 Writing with the Appropriate Precision -- Chapter 4 How to Evaluate Information and Judge Credibility -- Chapter 5 Obstacles to Better Communication -- Chapter 6 Writing to Convince Others -- Chapter 7 Defending Against Deception -- Chapter 8 Detecting Fallacies -- Chapter 9 Consistency and Inconsistency -- Chapter 10 Deductive Reasoning -- Chapter 11 Logical Form and Sentential Logic -- Chapter 12 Aristotelian Logic and Venn-Euler Diagrams -- Chapter 13 Inductive Reasoning -- Chapter 14 Reasoning about Causes and Their Effects -- Chapter 15 Scientific Reasoning0 aThe goal of this book is to improve your logical-reasoning skills. These skills are also called "critical thinking skills." They are a complex weave of abilities that help you get someone's point, generate reasons for your own point, evaluate the reasons given by others, decide what or what not to do, decide what information to accept or reject, explain a complicated idea, apply conscious quality control as you think, and resist propaganda. Your most important critical thinking skill is your skill at making judgments─not snap judgments that occur in the blink of an eye, but those that require careful reasoning. This book is also available as an adaptable Word file.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/745zAccess online version02150nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001400138050001000152100003300162245006400195264004300259264005100302264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505052300530520041101053542003001464546001601494588004001510650003501550650002601585650002601611710003901637856007601676OTLid0000746MnU20260406020742.0m     o  d s      cr            190721s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA273-280 4aBF1211 aPoldrack, Russell A.eauthor00aStatistical Thinking for the 21st CenturycRussell Poldrack 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStanford, CaliforniabRussell Poldrackc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Working with data -- 3 Probability -- 4 Summarizing data -- 5 Fitting models to data -- 6 Data Visualization -- 7 Sampling -- 8 Resampling and simulation -- 9 Hypothesis testing -- 10 Confidence intervals, effect sizes, and statistical power -- 11 Bayesian statistics -- 12 Modeling categorical relationships -- 13 Modeling continuous relationships -- 14 The General Linear Model -- 15 Comparing means -- 16 The process of statistical modeling: A practical example -- 17 Doing reproducible research0 aStatistical thinking is a way of understanding a complex world by describing it in relatively simple terms that nonetheless capture essential aspects of its structure, and that also provide us some idea of how uncertain we are about our knowledge. The foundations of statistical thinking come primarily from mathematics and statistics, but also from computer science, psychology, and other fields of study.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/746zAccess online version02158nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002500138245009000163264004300253264006600296264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505018000539520084900719542004101568546001601609588004101625650002701666710003901693856007601732OTLid0000747MnU20260223020631.0m     o  d s      cr            190721s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aFahim, Arasheauthor00aIntroduction to Financial Mathematics Concepts and Computational MethodscArash Fahim 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDepartment of Mathematics, bFlorida State Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preliminaries of finance and risk managemetn -- 2 Modeling financial assets in discrete-time markets -- 3 Modelling financial asserts in cotinuous-time -- 4 American options0 aIntroduction to Financial Mathematics: Concepts and Computational Methods serves as a primer in financial mathematics with a focus on conceptual understanding of models and problem solving. It includes the mathematical background needed for risk management, such as probability theory, optimization, and the like. The goal of the book is to expose the reader to a wide range of basic problems, some of which emphasize analytic ability, some requiring programming techniques and others focusing on statistical data analysis. In addition, it covers some areas which are outside the scope of mainstream financial mathematics textbooks. For example, it presents marginal account setting by the CCP and systemic risk, and a brief overview of the model risk. Inline exercises and examples are included to help students prepare for exams on this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/747zAccess online version02479nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002900145245005500174264004300229264006500272264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505080800514520049801322542004101820546001601861588004101877650003001918650004201948710003901990856007602029OTLid0000748MnU20260406020439.0m     o  d s      cr            190721s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aTA1451 aMiedema, Sape A.eauthor00aDredging EngineeringbSpecial TopicscSape Miedema 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Terminal Settling Velocity of Particles -- Chapter 2: Steady Uniform Flow in Open Channels -- Chapter 3: Constructing the Shields Curve, Part A -- Chapter 4: Constructing the Shields Curve, Part B -- Chapter 5: Constructing the Shields Curve, Part C -- Chapter 6: Hydraulic Transport of Sand/Shell Mixtures in Relation with the LDV -- Chapter 7: Cutter Head Spillage -- Chapter 8: The Pump/Pipeline System -- Chapter 9: Modeling of the Swing Winches of a Cutter Dredge -- Chapter 10: The Trailing Suction Hopper Dredge -- Chapter 11: Production Estimation of Water Jets and Cutting Blades in Drag Heads -- Chapter 12: The Closing Process of Clamshell Dredges in Water-Satured Sand -- Chapter 13: Notes -- Chapter 14: References -- Chapter 15: List of Figures -- Chapter 16: List of Tables0 aIn dredging, production estimating is carried out mainly with analytical physical models of the different dredging processes.Slurry transport of settling slurries and cutting processes in sand, clay and rock are already covered in two other books by the author.Other processes like hopper sedimentation and erosion, water jet fluidization, cutter head spillage, pump/pipeline dynamics and clamshell dredging are covered in this Special Topics Edition.New topics may be added in the near future1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/748zAccess online version02526nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245003300144264004300177264005300220264001200273300002200285336002600307337002600333338003600359341002800395490002700423505085300450520045701303542001601760546001601776588004001792650002601832650003101858700002801889700003201917700002501949700002701974710003902001856007602040OTLid0000750MnU20260406020735.0m     o  d s      cr            190727s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aChild Growth and Development 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc2019. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Child Development -- Chapter 2: Conception, Heredity, & Prenatal Development -- Chapter 3: Birth and the Newborn -- Chapter 4: Physical Development in Infancy & Toddlerhood -- Chapter 5: Cognitive Development in Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 6: Social and Emotional Development in Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 7: Physical Development in Early Childhood -- Chapter 8: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood -- Chapter 9: Social Emotional Development in Early Childhood -- Chapter 10: Middle Childhood - Physical Development -- Chapter 11: Middle Childhood – Cognitive Development -- Chapter 12: Middle Childhood - Social Emotional Development -- Chapter 13: Adolescence – Physical Development -- Chapter 14: Adolescence – Cognitive Development -- Chapter 15: Adolescence – Social Emotional Development0 aWelcome to Child Growth and Development. This text is a presentation of how and why children grow, develop, and learn. We will look at how we change physically over time from conception through adolescence. We examine cognitive change, or how our ability to think and remember changes over the first 20 years or so of life. And we will look at how our emotions, psychological state, and social relationships change throughout childhood and adolescence.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aParis, Jennifereauthor1 aRicardo, Antoinetteeauthor1 aRymond, Dawneauthor1 aJohnson, Alexaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/750zAccess online version02177nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145245004900157264004300206264009600249264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505062100522520034301143542003001486546001601516588004101532650002301573700002901596700002701625700002401652710003901676856007601715OTLid0000751MnU20260406020439.0m     o  d s      cr            190727s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135537  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.200aQuantitative EcologybA New Unified Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. What is ecology? -- Chapter 2. Ecological theory -- Chapter 3. A basic population model -- Chapter 4. Modeling a single population -- Chapter 5. Differential and difference forms -- Chapter 6. Human population growth -- Chapter 7. Chaos and randomness -- Chapter 8. Theory of interactions -- Chapter 9. Embodied by natural selection -- Chapter 10. Phase space -- Chapter 11. State spaces -- Chapter 12. Predator and prey -- Chapter 13. Humans as predators -- Chapter 14. Humans as prey -- Chapter 15. Theory of disease -- Chapter 16. Competition -- Chapter 17. Mutualism -- Chapter 18. Higher-order models0 aQuantitative Ecology introduces and discusses the principles of ecology from populations to ecosystems including human populations, disease, exotic organisms, habitat fragmentation, biodiversity and global dynamics. The book also reformulates and unifies ecological equations making them more accessible to the reader and easier to teach.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aLehman, Clarenceeauthor1 aLoberg, Shelbyeauthor1 aClark, Adameauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/751zAccess online version01924nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002300156245005600179264004300235264005000278264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505028600505520055600791542001601347546001601363588004101379650002701420710003901447856007601486OTLid0000752MnU20260406020439.0m     o  d s      cr            190727s2011    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781931705011  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aMoser, Leoeauthor03aAn Introduction to the Theory of NumberscLeo Moser 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWest Lafayette, INbThe Trillia Groupc[2011] 4c©2011.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Compositions and Partitions -- Chapter 2. Arithmetic Functions -- Chapter 3. Distribution of Primes -- Chapter 4. Irrational Numbers -- Chapter 5. Congruences -- Chapter 6. Diophantine Equations -- Chapter 7. Combinatorial Number Theory -- Chapter 8. Geometry of Numbers0 aThis book, which presupposes familiarity only with the most elementary concepts of arithmetic (divisibility properties, greatest common divisor, etc.), is an expanded version of a series of lectures for graduate students on elementary number theory. Topics include: Compositions and Partitions; Arithmetic Functions; Distribution of Primes; Irrational Numbers; Congruences; Diophantine Equations; Combinatorial Number Theory; and Geometry of Numbers. Three sections of problems (which include exercises as well as unsolved problems) complete the text.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/752zAccess online version02473nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002700137245005900164264004300223264007900266264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505035400522520100400876542003001880546001601910588004001926650004201966710003902008856007602047OTLid0000753MnU20260406020717.0m     o  d s      cr            190818s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aSteer, Michaeleauthor00aFundamentals of Microwave and RF DesigncMichael Steer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRaleigh, North CarolinabNorth Carolina State University Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Microwave Engineering -- 2 Antennas and the RF Link -- 3 Transmission Lines -- 4 Planar Transmission Lines -- 5 Extraordinary Transmission Line Effects -- 6 Coupled Lines and Applications -- 7 Microwave Network Analysis -- 8 Graphical Network Analysis -- 9 Passive Components -- 10 Impedance Matching -- 11 RF and Microwave Modules0 aFundamentals of Microwave and RF Design enables mastery of the essential concepts required to cross the barriers to a successful career in microwave and RF design. Extensive treatment of scattering parameters, that naturally describe power flow, and of Smith-chart-based design procedures prepare the student for success. The emphasis is on design at the module level and on covering the whole range of microwave functions available. The orientation is towards using microstrip transmission line technologies and on gaining essential mathematical, graphical and design skills for module design proficiency. This book is derived from a multi volume comprehensive book series, Microwave and RF Design, Volumes 1-5, with the emphasis in this book being on presenting the fundamental materials required to gain entry to RF and microwave design. This book closely parallels the companion series that can be consulted for in-depth analysis with referencing of the book series being familiar and welcoming.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/753zAccess online version02102nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002700145245005800172264004300230264007900273264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505014100529520077700670542003001447546001601477588004001493650003801533650004201571710003901613856007601652OTLid0000754MnU20260406020717.0m     o  d s      cr            190818s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aSteer, Michaeleauthor00aMicrowave and RF DesignbRadio SystemscMichael Steer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRaleigh, North CarolinabNorth Carolina State University Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to RF and Microwave Systems -- 2 Modulation -- 3 Transmitters and Receivers -- 4 Antennas and the RF Link -- 5 RF Systems0 aMicrowave and RF Design: Radio Systems is a circuits- and systems-oriented approach to modern microwave and RF systems. Sufficient details at the circuits and sub-system levels are provided to understand how modern radios are implemented. Design is emphasized throughout. The evolution of radio from what is now known as 0G, for early radio, through to 6G, for sixth generation cellular radio, is used to present modern microwave and RF engineering concepts. Two key themes unify the text: 1) how system-level decisions affect component, circuit and subsystem design; and 2) how the capabilities of technologies, components, and subsystems impact system design. This book is suitable as both an undergraduate and graduate textbook, as well as a career-long reference book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/754zAccess online version02097nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002700145245006300172264004300235264007900278264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505020500534520070300739542003001442546001601472588004001488650003801528650004201566710003901608856007601647OTLid0000755MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190818s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aSteer, Michaeleauthor00aMicrowave and RF DesignbTransmission LinescMichael Steer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRaleigh, North CarolinabNorth Carolina State University Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Distributed Microwave Circuits -- 2 Transmission Lines -- 3 Planar Transmission Lines -- 4 Extraordinary Transmission Line Effects -- 5 Coupled Lines and Applications -- 6 Waveguides0 aMicrowave and RF Design: Transmission Lines builds on the concepts of forward- and backward-traveling waves. Many examples are included of advanced techniques for analyzing and designing transmission line networks with microstrip lines primarily used in design examples. Coupled-lines are an important functional element in microwave circuits, and circuit equivalents of coupled lines are introduced as fundamental building blocks in design. The text and examples introduce the often hidden design requirements of mitigating parasitic effects and eliminating unwanted modes of operation. This book is suitable as both an undergraduate and graduate textbook, as well as a career-long reference book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/755zAccess online version02043nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002700145245005300172264004300225264007900268264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505021200524520065200736542003001388546001601418588004001434650003801474650004201512710003901554856007601593OTLid0000756MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190818s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aSteer, Michaeleauthor00aMicrowave and RF DesignbNetworkscMichael Steer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRaleigh, North CarolinabNorth Carolina State University Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to RF and Microwave Networks -- 2 Microwave Network Analysis -- 3 Graphical Network Analysis -- 4 Microwave Measurements -- 5 Passive Components -- 6 Impedance Matching -- 7 Broadband Matching0 aMicrowave and RF Design: Networks presents the tools and techniques required to analyze and design microwave and RF circuits. Because of the finite speed of light, microwave circuits must be considered to be spatially distributed and so there is not a single ground. As such metrics that can be used to describe power flow are of most use. The topics covered include scattering parameters, signal flow graphs, and Smith charts. Acquiring expertise in these is the biggest barriers to a successful career in microwave and RF engineering. This book is suitable as both an undergraduate and graduate textbook, as well as a career-long reference book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/756zAccess online version02272nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002700145245005200172264004300224264007900267264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505021200523520088200735542003001617546001601647588004001663650003801703650004201741710003901783856007601822OTLid0000757MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190818s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aSteer, Michaeleauthor00aMicrowave and RF DesignbModulescMichael Steer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRaleigh, North CarolinabNorth Carolina State University Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to RF and Microwave Modules -- 2 Filters -- 3 Parallel Coupled-Line Filters -- 4 Noise, Distortion, and Dynamic Range -- 5 Passive Modules -- 6 Mixer and Source Modules -- 7 Cascade of Modules0 aMicrowave and RF Design: Modules focuses on the design of systems based on microwave modules. The use of modules has become increasingly important in RF and microwave engineering for rapidly realizing high performance microwave systems. When integration is ultimately to be used, building a system up using modules provides a rapid means of prototyping and testing system concepts. A wide variety of RF modules including amplifiers, local oscillators, switches, circulators, isolators, phase detectors, frequency multipliers and dividers, phase-locked loops, and direct digital synthesizers are considered. Detailed design strategies for synthesizing filters based on parallel coupled lines are presented. The reader will gain an appreciation of design by synthesis. This book is suitable as both an undergraduate and graduate textbook, as well as a career-long reference book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/757zAccess online version01887nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002700145245007100172264004300243264007900286264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505011900542520057100661542003001232546001601262588004001278650003801318650004201356710003901398856007601437OTLid0000758MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190818s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aSteer, Michaeleauthor00aMicrowave and RF DesignbAmplifiers and OscillatorscMichael Steer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRaleigh, North CarolinabNorth Carolina State University Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Active RF -- 2 Linear Amplifiers -- 3 Wideband Amplifiers -- 4 Power Amplifiers -- 5 Oscillators0 aMicrowave and RF Design: Amplifiers and Oscillators presents the design of amplifiers and oscillators in a way that enables state-of-the-art designs to be realized. Detailed strategies and case studies are presented. Design of competitive microwave amplifiers and oscillators is particularly challenging as many trade-offs are required in design, and the design decisions cannot be reduced to a formulaic flow. The emphasis is on developing design skills. This book is suitable as both an undergraduate and graduate textbook, as well as a career-long reference book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/758zAccess online version01697nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137245004300150250000800193264004300201264004800244264001200292300002200304336002600326337002600352338003600378341002500414490002700439505022000466520028200686542004100968546001601009588004001025650003401065650002801099700002601127700003101153710003901184856007601223OTLid0000759MnU20260406020446.0m     o  d s      cr            190824s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A400aTrademark LawbAn Open-Source Casebook  a7.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSchool of Law, bNew York Universityc2020. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Establishing Trademark Rights -- II. Trademark Infringement -- III. Defenses to Trademark Infringement and Related Limitations on Trademark Rights -- IV. False Advertising -- V. Right of Publicity -- VI. Remedies0 aTrademark Law: An Open-Source Casebook is a free, “open” textbook designed for a four-credit trademark course, which is what I teach at NYU School of Law. Model syllabi for four-credit and three-credit courses are available in the Faculty Resources section of this website.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aBeebe, Bartoneauthor1 aDesmarais, John M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/759zAccess online version02592nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245005300161264004300214264007100257264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505024600505520124300751542001601994546001602010588004002026650002302066650002602089710003902115856007602154OTLid0000760MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190824s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aRingmar, Erikeauthor00aHistory of International RelationscErik Ringmar 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2024. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Author -- Acknowledgements -- This book -- Introduction -- China and East Asia -- India and Indianization -- The Muslim Caliphates -- The Mongol Khanates -- Africa -- The Americas -- European Expansion -- Afterthoughts: Walls and Bridges0 aExisting textbooks on international relations treat history in a cursory fashion and perpetuate a Euro-centric perspective. This textbook pioneers a new approach by historicizing the material traditionally taught in International Relations courses, and by explicitly focusing on non-European cases, debates and issues. The volume is divided into three parts. The first part focuses on the international systems that traditionally existed in Europe, East Asia, pre-Columbian Central and South America, Africa and Polynesia. The second part discusses the ways in which these international systems were brought into contact with each other through the agency of Mongols in Central Asia, Arabs in the Mediterranean and the Indian Ocean, Indic and Sinic societies in South East Asia, and the Europeans through their travels and colonial expansion. The concluding section concerns contemporary issues: the processes of decolonization, neo-colonialism and globalization – and their consequences on contemporary society. History of International Relations provides a unique textbook for undergraduate and graduate students of international relations, and anybody interested in international relations theory, history, and contemporary politics.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/760zAccess online version02413nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001100149245002800160264004300188264006000231264001200291300002200303336002600325337002600351338003600377341002500413490002700438505071800465520057001183542001601753546001601769588004101785650002401826650003601850650002601886710003901912856007601951OTLid0000761MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190824s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.400aOrganizational Behavior 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Management and Organizational Behavior -- 2. Individual and Cultural Differences -- 3. Perception and Job Attitudes -- 4. Learning and Reinforcement -- 5. Diversity in Organizations -- 6. Perception and Managerial Decision Making -- 7. Work Motivation for Performance -- 8. Performance Appraisal and Rewards -- 9. Group and Intergroup Relations -- 10. Understanding and Managing Work Teams -- 11. Communication -- 12. Leadership -- 13. Organizational Power and Politics -- 14. Conflict and Negotiations -- 15. External and Internal Organizational Environments and Corporate Culture -- 16. Organizational Structure and Change -- 17. Human Resource Management -- 18. Stress and Well Being -- 19. Entrepreneurship0 aThis OpenStax resource aligns to introductory courses in Organizational Behavior. The text presents the theory, concepts, and applications with particular emphasis on the impact that individuals and groups can have on organizational performance and culture. An array of recurring features engages students in entrepreneurial thinking, managing change, using tools/technology, and responsible management; furthermore, the unique chapter on Social Media and Communication contextualizes the importance and implications of various platforms and communications methods.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/761zAccess online version02106nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002600138245008100164264004300245264008600288264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505035800551520062200909542003001531546001601561588004001577650002401617710003901641856007601680OTLid0000762MnU20260323020629.0m     o  d s      cr            190829s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aWallace, Johneauthor00aInterpreting Love Narratives in East Asian Literature and FilmcJohn Wallace 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of California, Berkeleyc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. About this book and this course -- II. A Theory of Interpretation for Cross-Cultural Reading -- III. Method - Elements of (Course) Interpretive Projects -- IV. Method - Designing and Completing (Course) Interpretive Projects -- V. Cultural Contexts - Traditional Thought Systems in East Asian Love Narratives -- VI. Glossary of Key Terms and Concepts0 aThis book explores the role of traditional East Asian worldviews, ethical values, and common practices in the shaping of East Asian narratives in literature and film. It offers a specific method for this analysis. The interpretive goal is to arrive at interpretations that more accurately engage cultural information so that narratives are understood more closely in terms of their native cultural rather than that of the reader/interpreter. Current neuroscience related to processes of perception and the attribution of meaning form the basis for the theory of interpretation offered in the first half of the volume.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/762zAccess online version03497nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143100002600153245003900179264004300218264007000261264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002500453490002700478505071300505520165201218542001602870546001602886588004102902650003602943650002902979710003903008856007603047OTLid0000763MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190830s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aOlmsted, Jilleauthor00aTools for PodcastingcJill Olmsted 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAmerican Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Acknowledgements -- About the Author -- Chapter 1: Podcasting Growth, Trends, Landscape -- Chapter 2: Title, Description, Music, Cover Art -- Chapter 3: Microphones, Recorders, Filters -- Chapter 4: Best Practices for Recording -- Chapter 5: Interview Preparation, Listening, Ending -- Chapter 6: Scripting, Opens, Bumpers, Outros -- Chapter 7: Voicing Tips, Exercises, Script Marking -- Chapter 8: Audacity, Garageband, Audition Editing -- Chapter 9: Publishing Hosts, Transcription, Promotion -- Chapter 10: How Do You Measure Audience? -- Chapter 11: Avoiding Legal Trouble -- Appendix A: Newsletters, Podcasts, Conferences -- Appendix B: Resources -- Appendix C: Podcast Assignments & Examples0 aWelcome! If you’re interested in learning about the growing universe of podcasting, how it works and finding tools and inspiration to create your own podcast, this online resource is for you. My focus is on audio podcasting and this practical guide will help you navigate the technology and best practices in an easy-to-understand handbook. You will also find many audio and video clips that provide examples and video tutorials leading you through editing software, vocal delivery, promotion ideas and more. All videos have closed captioning and there is an extensive section on the importance of transcription of podcasts to enable web accessibility for the deaf, hearing impaired and language learning audiences. There is also an emphasis on diversity and inclusion with resources listing mentorships and employment opportunities. For even more information click on the extensive links throughout this e-book. In addition, each chapter has learning objectives and there are practice exercises in Appendix C at the end of the e-book along with additional resources about podcasting from newsletters and conferences to how-to-create tools and podcast recommendations. Podcasting is a dynamic way to use your smarts and creativity to tell stories about compelling subjects. This handbook provides instruction and tools to produce your own podcast — whether you are a professional in journalism, the arts, sciences, business or law, an activist or just someone who has a story to tell. The tools discussed are focused on keeping costs low for entry-level podcasters and designed to help anyone who wants to record, edit and distribute podcasts.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/763zAccess online version01923nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245009100181264004300272264005800315264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002500495490002700520505021100547520055300758542004101311546001601352588004001368650003801408710003901446856007601485OTLid0000764MnU20260406020447.0m     o  d s      cr            190907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781937963156  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aFlanzer, Vivianeauthor00aClicaBrasilbPortuguese Language and Culture for Intermediate StudentscVivian Flanzer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUNIT 1: Todos os dias -- UNIT 2: Fim de semana -- UNIT 3: Trajetórias -- UNIT 4: Rio, de norte a sul -- UNIT 5: Na internet -- UNIT 6: Festas, compras, encontros e desencontros -- UNIT 7: Salvador da Bahia0 aClicaBrasil was developed for intermediate level Portuguese language courses at UT-Austin. People all ove the world are now using it for different purposes: self-study, classroom instruction, tutoring, or as a pastime.The lessons in ClicaBrasil integrate reading, writing, listening and reading comprehension, grammar, vocabulary, oral communication, and cultural activities. Numerous video clips (157, to be precise!) that show different Brazilians speaking about their lives, their culture, and their country support and enhance these activities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/764zAccess online version02240nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245009300149264004300242264003700285264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505028200499520068200781542002701463546001601490588004101506650002801547650002401575700002901599700002701628700002801655700003201683710003901715856007601754OTLid0000765MnU20260406020459.0m     o  d s      cr            190907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRS1-441 4aRA44000aDrugs quality control (Theoretical foundation and practical application)bThe Coursebook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMoscow, RussiabРУДНc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1: General Questions of Drug Analysis and Quality Control -- Module 2: Physical Analysis for Medicines Quality Control -- Module 3: Water Quality Control -- Module 4: Chemical Analysis for Medicines Quality Control -- Module 5: Spectral Analysis for Drug Quality Control0 aThe Course book presents the basics of drugs quality control in accordance with regulatory documents (pharmacopoeia of Europe, USA, Japan, Russia) and new data from current scientific periodicals, monographs The features of the physical, spectral and chemical quality control of medicines according to the indicators «identification», «tests» and «assay» are described in detail. Part II presents a workbook, which includes questions for the self-control of the material studied and tasks for a laboratory workshop. The Course book contains reference material and samples of pharmacopoeial articles. The Course book is designed for students of the specialty «Pharmacy».1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPharmacologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPleteneva, T. V.eauthor1 aMorozova, M.A.eauthor1 aUspenskaya, E.Veauthor1 aKhatchaturyan, M.A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/765zAccess online version01646nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245008200138264004300220264003700263264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002800422490002700450505006200477520038000539542002700919546001600946588004100962650002501003700003301028700002801061700002901089700002701118710003901145856007601184OTLid0000766MnU20260406020459.0m     o  d s      cr            190907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.300aDes Bases Physiques Et Chimiques Du Contrôle De La Qualité Des Médicaments 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMoscow, RussiabРУДНc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPartie 1: Chimie Physique -- Partie 2: Chimie Colloïdale0 aLe manuel est un résumé des principales activités du cours de conférences sur la chimie physique et colloïdale (en 2 parties) et constitue la base théorique des méthodes de contrôle de la qualité des médicaments et vise à acquérir les connaissances et les compétences nécessaires pour travailler dans ce domaine. Destiné aux étudiants francophones étrangers.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks1 aKhatchatourian, M.A.eauthor1 aPleteneva, T.V.eauthor1 aUspenskaya, E.V.eauthor1 aMorozova, M.A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/766zAccess online version01954nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002900137245004200166264004300208264007400251264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505061500502520026501117542002701382546001601409588004101425650002301466710003901489856007601528OTLid0000767MnU20260406020447.0m     o  d s      cr            190907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aBarth, Daniel E.eauthor00aAstronomy for EducatorscDaniel Barth 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Starting our Journey of Discovery -- Unit 2: Lunar Phases - A Simple Scientific Model -- Unit 3: Modeling Earth and Moon Together -- Unit 4: Measuring Time in the Sky -- Unit 5: Measuring and Mapping the Sky -- Unit 6: Exploring Gravity -- Unit 7: Proving the Heliocentric Model Correct -- Unit 8: Understanding Big Numbers - Size and Scale in our Solar System -- Unit 9: Orbital Dynamics - Planets and Moons in Motion -- Unit 10: War of the Worlds - How Impacts Build Planets -- Unit 11: The Four Seasons - Two Competing Models -- Unit 12: Safely Observing the Sun -- unit 13: Solar and Lunar Eclipses0 aAstronomy for Educators provides new and accomplished K-12 instructors with concepts and projects for low-cost, high-impact STEM classroom instruction that is built around the National Academies National Research Council's K-12 Framework for Science Education.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/767zAccess online version02004nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003400138245006800172264004300240264007400283264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505035500534520054000889542003001429546001601459588004101475650002301516710003901539856007601578OTLid0000768MnU20260406020447.0m     o  d s      cr            190907s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.31 aGea-Banacloche, Julioeauthor00aUniversity Physics IbClassical MechanicscJulio Gea-Banacloche 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Reference frames, displacement, and velocity -- 2 Acceleration -- 3 Momentum and Inertia -- 4 Kinetic Energy -- 5 Interactions and energy -- 6 Interactions, part 2: Forces -- 7 Impulse, Work and Power -- 8 Motion in two dimensions -- 9 Rotational dynamics -- 10 Gravity -- 11 Simple harmonic motion -- 12 Waves in one dimension -- 13 Thermodynamics0 aThis is a “minimalist” textbook for a first semester of university, calculus-based physics, covering classical mechanics (including one chapter on mechanical waves, but excluding fluids), plus a brief introduction to thermodynamics. The presentation owes much to Mazur’s The Principles and Practice of Physics: conservation laws, momentum and energy, are introduced before forces, and one-dimensional setups are thoroughly explored before two-dimensional systems are considered. It contains both problems and worked-out examples.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/768zAccess online version02013nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001800127050001000145100002700155245011300182264004300295264007400338264001200412300002200424336002600446337002600472338003600498341002800534490002700562505021200589520056300801542004101364546001601405588004101421650002901462650003301491710003901524856007601563OTLid0000769MnU20260406020447.0m     o  d s      cr            190907s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.31 aPope, Adam Rexeauthor00aOpen Technical WritingbAn Open-Access Text for Instruction in Technical and Professional WritingcAdam Pope 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWhat is Technical Writing? -- The User -- Visual Communication & Technical Writing -- Document Design in Technical Writing -- Writing in Genres -- Managing a Project -- Research Methods for Technical Writing0 aThis book presents technical writing as an approach to researching and carrying out writing that centers on technical subject matter. Each and every chapter is devoted to helping students understand that good technical writing is situationally-aware and context-driven. Technical writing doesn’t work off knowing the one true right way of doing things—there is no magic report template out there that will always work. Instead, the focus is on offering students a series of approaches they can use to map out their situations and do research accordingly.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/769zAccess online version02951nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002500150245004800175250000900223264004300232264004600275264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505112500498520066701623542004102290546001602331588004102347650003402388650002802422710003902450856007602489OTLid0000770MnU20260406020626.0m     o  d s      cr            190908s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7200 4aKF385.A41 aSag, Mattheweauthor00aExtended Readings on CopyrightcMatthew Sag  a2022 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aChicago, ‎IllinoisbMatthew Sagc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Copyright Law -- 2. Copyright Subject Matter and Questions of Creativity, Originality, and Intellectual Creation -- 3. The Exclusion of Facts, Ideas, Functions, and Processes from Copyright Protection -- 4. The Historical Development of the Concepts of Reproduction, Adaptation, and Fair Use -- 5. The Reproduction Right -- 6. An Overview of Copyright Limitations and Exceptions -- 7. Expressive Fair Use -- 8. Fair use and non-expressive use -- 9. Copyright subject matter and the boundaries of the work -- 10. Ownership, Authorship and Transfer -- 11. Moral Rights -- 12. Formalities and Duration -- 13. Copyright and Industrial Design -- 14. Copyright in Computer Software -- 15. Distribution & First Scale -- 16. Public Performance, Display & Transmission -- 17. Secondary Liability for Copyright Infringement -- 18. Internet Safe Harbors From Claims of Copyright Infringement -- 19. Digital Rights Management and Copyright Management Information -- 20. Volitional Conduct, Linking and Ancillary Copyright -- 21. Remedies for Copyright Infringement -- 22. Procedural Issues in Copyright Litigation0 aExtended Readings on Copyright is subject to a non-commercial Create Commons license that allows you to add, subtract, and amend as you see fit, provided you extend those terms to any derivative work based on these materials and provided your provide appropriate attribution. I encourage you to share your edits and additions with me, but it is not obligatory.Extended Readings on Copyright can be used as a stand alone textbook on United States copyright law. The individual chapters are available on this website, and these can be used to supplement other materials. Individual chapters are likely to be more up to date than the consolidated build of the book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/770zAccess online version02025nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127245004200136264004300178264006600221264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002500409490002700434505028400461520064600745542001601391546001601407588004001423650003201463700002801495700002501523710003901548856007601587OTLid0000771MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            190908s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aComputer NetworksbA Systems Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPrinceton, New JerseybLarry Peterson and Bruce Daviec[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Foundation -- Chapter 2: Direct Connections -- Chapter 3: Internetworking -- Chapter 4: Advanced Internetworking -- Chapter 5: End-to-End Protocols -- Chapter 6: Congestion Control -- Chapter 7: End-to-End Data -- Chapter 8: Network Security -- Chapter 9: Applications0 aSuppose you want to build a computer network, one that has the potential to grow to global proportions and to support applications as diverse as teleconferencing, video on demand, electronic commerce, distributed computing, and digital libraries. What available technologies would serve as the underlying building blocks, and what kind of software architecture would you design to integrate these building blocks into an effective communication service? Answering this question is the overriding goal of this book—to describe the available building materials and then to show how they can be used to construct a network from the ground up.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aPeterson, Larryeauthor1 aDavie, Bruceeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/771zAccess online version02133nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245004600149264004300195264006300238264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505086100478520010301339542003001442546001601472588004001488650002301528650002401551700003201575700002501607710003901632856007601671OTLid0000772MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            190908s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA44002aA Laboratory Guide to Clinical Hematology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEdmonton, AlbertabUniversity of Alberta Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Red Blood Cells: Normal Morphology -- II. Red Blood Cells: Abnormal RBC Morphology -- III. Red Blood Cells: Abnormal RBC Inclusions -- IV. Red Blood Cells: Hypochromic, Microcytic Anemias -- V. Red Blood Cells: DNA Metabolism Abnormalities & Bone Marrow Failure -- VI. Red Blood Cells: Introduction to Hemolytic Anemias -- VII. Red Blood Cells: Hemoglobinopathies -- VIII. Red Blood Cells: Extrinsic Defects Causing Hemolytic Anemias -- IX. Red Blood Cells: Intrinsic Defects of the RBC Membrane Causing Hemolytic Anemia -- X. White Blood Cells and Platelets: Normal Morphology -- XI. White Blood Cells: Non-Malignant Leukocyte Disorders -- XII. White Blood Cells: Acute Leukemia -- XIII. White Blood Cells: Mature Lymphoid Neoplasms -- XIV. White Blood Cells: Myeloproliferative Neoplasms (MPN) -- XV. White Blood Cells: Myelodysplastic Syndromes (MDS)0 aThis is eBook will be constantly updated, edited, and reviewed as new emerging information arises.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aVillatoro, Valentineauthor1 aTo, Michelleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/772zAccess online version02422nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245004700139264004300186264007200229264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505053000478520078201008542001601790546001601806588004001822650002301862700002801885700003201913710003901945856007601984OTLid0000773MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            190914s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.200aConservation Biology in Sub-Saharan Africa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. What is Conservation Biology? -- 2. Introduction to Sub-Saharan Africa -- 3. What is Biodiversity? -- 4. Why Should We Protect Biodiversity? -- 5. The Scramble for Space -- 6. Our Warming World -- 7. Pollution, Overharvesting, Invasive Species, and Disease -- 8. Extinction Is Forever -- 9. Applied Population Biology -- 10. Conserving Ecosystems -- 11. Preventing Extinctions -- 12. Biodiversity and the Law -- 13. The Importance of Protected Areas -- 14. Conservation on Unprotected Lands -- 15. An Agenda for the Future0 aConservation Biology in Sub-Saharan Africa comprehensively explores the challenges and potential solutions to key conservation issues in Sub-Saharan Africa. Easy to read, this lucid and accessible textbook includes fifteen chapters that cover a full range of conservation topics, including threats to biodiversity, environmental laws, and protected areas management, as well as related topics such as sustainability, poverty, and human-wildlife conflict. This rich resource also includes a background discussion of what conservation biology is, a wide range of theoretical approaches to the subject, and concrete examples of conservation practice in specific African contexts. Strategies are outlined to protect biodiversity whilst promoting economic development in the region.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aWilson, John W.eauthor1 aPrimack, Richard B.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/773zAccess online version01724nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245005900138264004300197264007800240264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505016200495520031700657542001600974546001600990588004001006650002401046700002601070700002701096700002301123700003701146700002801183710003901211856007601250OTLid0000774MnU20260406020743.0m     o  d s      cr            190914s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aEnglish CompositionbConnect, Collaborate, Communicate 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Hawaii Manoac[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. College Success Skills -- Chapter 2. The Writing Process -- Chapter 3. Essay Structure -- Chapter 4. Types of Essays -- Chapter 5. Research Skills0 aThis OER textbook has been designed for students to learn the foundational concepts for English 100 (first-year college composition). The content aligns to learning outcomes across all campuses in the University of Hawai'i system. It was designed, written, and edited during a three day book sprint in May, 2019.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aInoshita, Anneauthor1 aGarland, Karyleauthor1 aSims, Kateeauthor1 aTsutsui Keuma, Jeanne K.eauthor1 aWilliams, Tashaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/774zAccess online version02168nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001000146100002700156245006600183250001900249264004300268264005800311264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002800491490002700519505054500546520038301091542002701474546001601501588004101517650003501558650002701593650002301620710003901643856007601682OTLid0000775MnU20260406020449.0m     o  d s      cr            190914s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aMoore, Pete L.eauthor00aQuantitative Problem Solving in Natural ResourcescPete Moore  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Part I. PROBLEM SOLVING -- Problem Solving as a Process -- A Solved Problem -- ome Teaser Problems -- Part II. NUMERICAL REASONING -- Quantities in the Real World -- Working with Numbers -- Reasoning with Data -- Interlude: Collecting and Managing Data -- Part III. SPATIAL REASONING -- Geometry and Geography -- Triangles -- Part IV. ALGEBRAIC REASONING -- Generalizing Relationships -- Relationships Between Variables -- Part V. MODELING -- Modeling -- Models of Growth and Decay -- Acknowledgments -- Key Terms0 aThis book is a collection of resources focused on solving quantitative problems that non-mathematicians interested in biology and environmental sciences may find compelling. It is not intended as a guide to be followed through a series of skills, but rather as a resource to support the problem-solving process and help lower conceptual and computational barriers along the way.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/775zAccess online version01618nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245005100153264004300204264006700247264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505021500491520034900706542001601055546001601071588004001087650002601127710003901153856007601192OTLid0000776MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            190921s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014073  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB7200aIntroduction to PhilosophybPhilosophy of Mind 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Substance Dualism in Descartes -- 2. Materialism and Behaviorism -- 3. Functionalism -- 4. Property Dualism -- 5. Qualia and Raw Feels -- 6. Consciousness -- 7. Concepts and Content -- 8. Freedom of the Will0 aIntroduction to Philosophy: Philosophy of Mind surveys the central themes in philosophy of mind and places them in a historical and contemporary context intended to engage first-time readers in the field. It focuses on debates about the status and character of the mind and its seemingly subjective nature in an apparently more objective world.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/776zAccess online version02287nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245003800153264004300191264005300234264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002500409490002700434505037700461520080100838542002701639546001601666588004001682650002301722700002901745700002401774710003901798856007601837OTLid0000777MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            191005s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781503608139  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2004aThe American Yawp Vol. IbTo 1877 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPalo Alto, CAbStanford University Pressc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The New World -- 2. Colliding Cultures -- 3. British North America -- 4. Colonial Society -- 5. The American Revolution -- 6. A New Nation -- 7. The Early Republic -- 8. The Market Revolution -- 9. Democracy in America -- 10. Religion and Reform -- 11. The Cotton Revolution -- 12. Manifest Destiny -- 13. The Sectional Crisis -- 14. The Civil War -- 15. Reconstruction0 aIn an increasingly digital world in which pedagogical trends are de-emphasizing rote learning and professors are increasingly turning toward active-learning exercises, scholars are fleeing traditional textbooks. Yet for those that still yearn for the safe tether of a synthetic text, as either narrative backbone or occasional reference material, The American Yawp offers a free and online, collaboratively built, open American history textbook designed for college-level history courses. Unchecked by profit motives or business models, and free from for-profit educational organizations, The American Yawp is by scholars, for scholars. All contributors—experienced college-level instructors—volunteer their expertise to help democratize the American past for twenty-first century classrooms.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aLocke, Joseph L.eeditor1 aWright, Beneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/777zAccess online version02284nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245004200153264004300195264005300238264001200291300002200303336002600325337002600351338003600377341002500413490002700438505037000465520080100835542002701636546001601663588004001679650002301719700002901742700002401771710003901795856007601834OTLid0000778MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            191005s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781503608146  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2004aThe American Yawp Vol. IIbSince 1877 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPalo Alto, CAbStanford University Pressc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a16.Capital and Labor -- 17.Conquering the West -- 18.Life in Industrial America -- 19.American Empire -- 20.The Progressive Era -- 21.World War I and Its Aftermath -- 22.The New Era -- 23.The Great Depression -- 24.World War II -- 25.The Cold War -- 26.The Affluent Society -- 27.The Sixties -- 28.The Unraveling -- 29.The Triumph of the Right -- 30.The Recent Past0 aIn an increasingly digital world in which pedagogical trends are de-emphasizing rote learning and professors are increasingly turning toward active-learning exercises, scholars are fleeing traditional textbooks. Yet for those that still yearn for the safe tether of a synthetic text, as either narrative backbone or occasional reference material, The American Yawp offers a free and online, collaboratively built, open American history textbook designed for college-level history courses. Unchecked by profit motives or business models, and free from for-profit educational organizations, The American Yawp is by scholars, for scholars. All contributors—experienced college-level instructors—volunteer their expertise to help democratize the American past for twenty-first century classrooms.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aLocke, Joseph L.eeditor1 aWright, Beneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/778zAccess online version01931nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003500135264004300170264006500213264001200278300002200290336002600312337002600338338003600364341002800400490002700428505038500455520042000840542004101260546001601301588004101317650003801358700002701396700003101423710003901454856007601493OTLid0000779MnU20260406020449.0m     o  d s      cr            191012s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aLibro LibrebBeginning Spanish 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bErin Huebenerc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLectura cultural: La Patagonia -- Lectura cultural: Las cabeza colosales -- Lectura cultural: -AR verbs -- Lectura cultural: The Verb ir and Places -- Lectura cultural: Food -- Lectura cultural: Health and the Human Body -- Lectura cultural: Saber versus conocer -- Lectura cultural: Childhood and Adolescence -- Lectura cultural: Vacation -- Lectura cultural: The Present Perfect0 aOne of the most important things we can do to hold ourselves accountable for our learning is to engage in goal setting and metacognition—a fancy term for thinking about the way we think and learn. The goals we set should be specific and achievable. Something like “Speak Spanish” is too broad, we need to focus on the steps we need to take to get there and the signs that we will see as proof of our progress.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aHuebener, Erineauthor1 aSteinberg, Jessicaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/779zAccess online version02725nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143100002700154245004200181264004300223264006400266264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505048100507520112500988542001602113546001602129588004002145650002402185650002702209710003902236856007602275OTLid0000780MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            191012s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.31 aShimamoto, Doneauthor00aMultivariable CalculuscDon Shimamoto 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bDon Shimamotoc2020. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Preliminaries -- 1 Rn -- II Vector-valued functions of one variable -- 2 Paths and curves -- III Real-valued functions -- 3 Real-valued functions: preliminaries -- 4 Real-valued functions: differentiation -- 5 Real-valued functions: integration -- IV Vector-valued functions -- 6 Differentiability and the chain rule -- 7 Change of variables -- V Integrals of vector fields -- 8 Vector fields -- 9 Line integrals -- 10 Surface integrals -- 11 Working with differential forms0 aThis book covers the standard material for a one-semester course in multivariable calculus. The topics include curves, differentiability and partial derivatives, multiple integrals, vector fields, line and surface integrals, and the theorems of Green, Stokes, and Gauss. Roughly speaking the book is organized into three main parts corresponding to the type of function being studied: vector-valued functions of one variable, real-valued functions of many variables, and finally the general case of vector-valued functions of many variables. As is always the case, the most productive way for students to learn is by doing problems, and the book is written to get to the exercises as quickly as possible. The presentation is geared towards students who enjoy learning mathematics for its own sake. As a result, there is a priority placed on understanding why things are true and a recognition that, when details are sketched or omitted, that should be acknowledged. Otherwise the level of rigor is fairly normal. Matrices are introduced and used freely. Prior experience with linear algebra is helpful, but not required.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/780zAccess online version02162nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001100149100003100160245005600191250000600247264004300253264008200296264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505080500555520011801360542001601478546001601494588004101510650002401551650003601575650002601611710003901637856007601676OTLid0000781MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            191012s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 aPiercy, Cameron W.eauthor00aProblem Solving in Teams and GroupscCameron Piercy  a2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Groups & Teams Overview -- 1. Defining Teams and Groups -- 2. Cooperation -- 3. Social Comparison -- 4. The Psychology of Groups -- 5. Shared Information Bias -- 6. Inattentional Blindness -- 7. Teams as Systems -- II. Groups & Teams (In)Action -- 8. Professional Writing -- 9. Supplemental Writing Advice -- 10. Persuasive Presentations -- 11. Groups and meetings -- 12. Gantt Charts -- 13. Organizational culture -- 14. Performance Evaluation -- III. Group & Team Theory -- 15. Power in Teams and Groups -- 16. Judgment and Decision Making -- 17. Cultivating a Supportive Group Climate -- 18. Structuration Theory -- 19. Teaming with Machines -- 20. Leadership -- 21. Conformity and Obedience -- 22. Working in Diverse Teams -- 23. Intercultural and Plane Crashes -- 24. Conflict and Negotiation0 aThis textbook covers content relevant to COMS342 Problem Solving in Teams and Groups at the University of Kansas.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/781zAccess online version03826nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144050001000155100003000165245011200195264004300307264007000350264001200420300002200432336002600454337002600480338003600506341002800542490002700570505138600597520110301983542001603086546001603102588004003118650003303158650002503191650003703216650003603253710003903289856007603328OTLid0000782MnU20260409122820.0m     o  d s      cr            191012s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aLC9801 aProkopchuk, Nadiaeauthor00aSharing Our KnowledgebBest Practices for Supporting English Language Learners in SchoolscNadia Prokopchuk 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOPENPRESS.USASK.CAc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Welcoming Environments and Cultural Responsiveness -- 1 - Impact of Culture on EAL Students' Education -- 2 - The Importance of Culturally Responsive Teaching -- 3 - Supporting Newcomer EAL Students in the Elementary Classroom: The First Weeks -- 4 - Teaching EAL Students: Children of Two Language Worlds -- 5 - Culturally Responsive Pedagogy -- 6 - Intercultural Competence and the Inclusive Classroom -- Part 2: Classroom Support for EAL Learners -- 7- Instructional Strategies to Support EAL Learners at Various Stages of the CFR -- 8 - Supporting the Needs of EAL Learners -- 9 - The Power of Visual Notetaking: Empowering EAL Student Learning in the Classroom -- 10 - The Importance of Meaningful and Consistent Assessment Practices -- 11 - Support and Resources for EAL Students and Teachers -- Part 3: Settlement and Refugee Support -- 12 - Integration of Newcomers in Saskatchewan Schools: The Role of Settlement Workers -- 13 - Accessing Academic Language in Math and Science for Refugee Learners -- 14 - Supporting Refugee English Language Learners in Canadian Classrooms -- Part 4: EAL Learners with Special Learning Challenges -- 15 - Trauma and its Impact on Learning -- 16 - Distinguishing Between a Language Acquisition Problem and Learning Challenges in ELL Students -- 17 - Disproportionate Representation of English Language Learners in Special Education0 aTo complete the course ECUR 415.3: Current Issues in EAL, students are required to submit a final paper that reflects their growing knowledge about English as an Additional Language (EAL). EAL is the term used in Saskatchewan to describe students who speak languages other than English and require adequate levels of English to be successful with the school curriculum. Most students enrolled in the online course ECUR 415 are practicing teachers who are working toward a Post-Degree Certificate in EAL Education (PDCEAL), while continuing to live and work in various locations both within and outside of the province. The certificate program, offered through the College of Education, University of Saskatchewan, is recognized by provincial education authorities as being equivalent to one full year of post-degree study. As such, the certificate equips teachers with the knowledge and expertise to be considered teacher-specialists of EAL Education. The course ECUR 415 also attracts some pre-service teachers who are pursuing a Bachelor of Education degree and have an interest in EAL Education.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/782zAccess online version02425nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245001600137264004300153264006400196264001200260300002200272336002600294337002600320338003600346341002800382490002700410505070800437520063101145542003001776546001601806588004101822650002901863700002901892700002701921710003901948856007601987OTLid0000783MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            191013s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.300aBe Credible 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLawrence, KansasbPeter Bobkowski and Karna Youngerc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Information Workflow -- 1. Be Credible -- 2. Search and Re-Search -- 3. Search More Effectively -- 4. Keep Detailed Research Notes -- 5. Attribute All Sources -- II. Evaluating Information -- 6. Evaluate Information Vigorously -- 7. Go Lateral With Cues and Evidence -- 8. Tap Into a Credibility Network -- 9. Contend With Bias -- III. Information Sources -- 10. Google -- 11. Wikipedia -- 12. Public Records -- 13. Open Records and the Freedom of Information -- 14. News -- 15. Nonprofits -- 16. Scholarly Research -- 17. Data -- 18. Market Research -- 19. Public Companies -- 20. Archives -- 21. Interviews: An Introduction -- 22. Interviews: Conversations with Risk -- 23. Licensing Published Work0 aThe primary audience for this book starts with students in Journalism 302: Infomania, a course we teach at the University of Kansas. When they take this class, these students usually are in their second or third semesters in the William Allen White School of Journalism and Mass Communications. They have varied career aspirations. A few of them want to be “traditional” journalists, writing for online news sites, magazines, or newspapers. Some of them want to be broadcast journalists. Many of them want to work in strategic communications, which encompasses public relations, advertising, marketing, and related fields.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aBobkowski, Petereauthor1 aYounger, Karnaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/783zAccess online version04623nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245004800138264004300186264004600229264001200275300002200287336002600309337002600335338003600361341002500397490002700422505099700449520247501446542004103921546001603962588004103978650002504019700003704044700002504081700002804106710003904134856007604173OTLid0000784MnU20260406020449.0m     o  d s      cr            191013s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.300aBending the CurvebClimate Change Solutions 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOakland, CaliforniabeScholarshipc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I Concepts and Solutions -- 1 Climate Change -- 2 Humans, Nature, and the Quest for Climate Justice -- 3 Climate Change and Human Health -- 4 Overview of the Ten Solutions for Bending the Curve -- Part II Ten Solutions -- 5 Your Leadership: Social Movements and Social Solutions to Climate Change -- 6 Social Transformation: Changing Attitudes, Norms, and Behaviors -- 7 Religion, Ethics, and Climate Change -- 8 Communicating Climate Change Science -- 9 Lessons from California -- 10 The Paris Agreement and Its Implementation -- 11 Economics: Emissions, Impacts, and Policy -- 12 Cost-Effective Climate Policies -- 13 Two Evolving Energy Technology Pathways -- 14 Environmentally Sustainable Transportation -- 15 Technologies for Super Pollutants Mitigation -- 16 Enhancing Carbon Sinks in Natural and Working Lands -- Part III Current Topics -- 17 Sea Level Rise from Melting Ice -- 18 Atmospheric Carbon Extraction: Scope, Available Technologies, and Challenges -- 19 Local Solutions0 aClimate change is an urgent problem. Because it is causing new weather extremes and fatal catastrophes, climate change is better termed climate disruption. Bending the curve to flatten the upward trajectory of pollution emissions responsible for climate disruption is essential in order to protect billions of people from this global threat. Education is a key part of the solution. This textbook book lays out ten solutions that together can bend the curve of climate warming below dangerous levels. These solutions fall into six categories: science, societal transformation, governance, economics, technology, and ecosystem management. Four themes emerge from the book: * There is still time to bend the curve. The time to act was yesterday, but if proper actions are taken now, there is still time to avoid disastrous changes. We have to pull on three levers: The carbon lever to achieve zero net emissions of carbon dioxide before 2050; the short-lived climate pollutants lever to drastically reduce concentrations of other major climate pollutants; and the atmospheric carbon extraction lever to remove massive amounts of carbon dioxide from the atmosphere. * Bending the curve will require interdisciplinary solutions. Climate change requires integrating approaches from the natural sciences, social sciences, and humanities, so this textbook—unlike most on climate change solutions—does just that, with chapters written by experts in climate science, social justice, economics, environmental policy, political science, energy technologies, ecology, and religion. Bending the curve also requires preservation and restoration of ecological systems. * Bending the curve requires a radical shift in attitude. This shift requires change in behavior, change in our attitudes towards each other, and change in our attitude towards nature. Climate justice has to be an integral part of the solution. * Technology, market mechanism and policy need to be a part of the solution. New market mechanisms and other policies are required to spur technological innovations and to scale clean technologies globally. There are ancillary materials available for this book. List of Authors: Ramanathan, VeerabhadranAines, RogerAuffhammer, MaxBarth, MattCole, JonathanForman, FonnaHan, HahrieJacobsen, MarkPellow, DavidPezzoli, KeithPress, DanielRignot, EricSamuelsen, ScottSilver, WhendeeSolomon, GinaSomerville, RichardTucker, Mary EvelynVictor, DavidZaelke, DurwoodScott Friese1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks1 aRamanathan, Veerabhadraneeditor1 aAines, Rogereeditor1 aAuffhammer, Maxeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/784zAccess online version02429nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002600137245006100163264004300224264006000267264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505064700504520071501151542001601866546001601882588004001898650002601938710003901964856007602003OTLid0000787MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            191018s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aLevy, Jeffreyeauthor00aPsychologybThe Science of Human PotentialcJeffrey Levy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Science of Psychology -- Chapter 2: Biology and Human Potential -- Chapter 3: Sensation, Perception and Human Potential -- Chapter 4: Emotion, Motivation and Human Potential -- Chapter 5: Direct Learning and Human Potential -- Chapter 6: Indirect Learning and Human Potential -- Chapter 7: Cognition, Intelligence and Human Potential -- Chapter 8: Lifespan Development of Human Potential -- Chapter 9: Personality and Human Potential -- Chapter 10: Social Influences on the Development of Human Potential -- Chapter 11: Problems in the Development of Human Potential -- Chapter 12: The Science of Psychology and Human Potential0 aThe first chapter provides an overview of the textbook and reviews the history of psychology and its methodology. Psychology is described as a science studying how hereditary (nature) and experiential (nurture) variables interact to influence the thoughts, feelings, and behavior of individuals. The remainder of the text will be organized in sections entitled “Mostly Nature” (Biological Psychology; Sensation & Perception; Motivation & Emotion), “Mostly Nurture” (Direct Learning; Indirect Learning (i.e., observational learning and language); Cognition), and “Nature/Nurture” (Human Development; Personality; Social Psychology; Maladaptive Behavior; Professional Psychology and Human Potential).1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/787zAccess online version02165nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100003700139245005400176264004300230264004600273264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505035000496520075900846542001601605546001601621588004001637650002301677710003901700856007601739OTLid0000788MnU20260406020718.0m     o  d s      cr            191018s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aWilk-Blaszczak, Malgosiaeauthor00aHuman Anatomy Lab ManualcMalgosia Wilk-Blaszczak 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLab 1: Anatomical Language -- Lab 2: Bones and Bone Markings -- Lab 3: Spinal Cord and Spinal Nerves -- Lab 4: Brain and Cranial Nerves -- Lab 5: Special Senses -- Lab 6: Respiratory System -- Lab 7: The Cardiovascular system -- Lab 8: Digestive System -- Lab 9: Urinary and Reproductive Systems -- Lab 10: The Muscular and Integumentary systems0 aThis is a lab manual for a college-level human anatomy course. Mastery of anatomy requires a fair amount of memorization and recall skills. The activities in this manual encourage students to engage with new vocabulary in many ways, including grouping key terms, matching terms to structures, recalling definitions, and written exercises. Most of the activities in this manual utilize anatomical models, and several dissections of animal tissues and histological examinations are also included. Each unit includes both pre- and post-lab questions and six lab exercises designed for a classroom where students move from station to station. The vocabulary terms used in each unit are listed at the end of the manual and serve as a checklist for practicals.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/788zAccess online version02750nam a2200517 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000900137050001000146050001000156050001100166050001000177050001300187245003000200264004300230264006000273264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002500455490002700480505046700507520074700974542004101721546001601762588004101778650003401819650002501853650003401878650002801912650002801940650003401968650002802002700003002030700002802060700002902088710003902117856007602156OTLid0000789MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            191026s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A400aBusiness Law I Essentials 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 American Law, Legal Reasoning, and the Legal System -- 2 Disputes and Dispute Settlement -- 3 Business Ethics and Social Responsibility -- 4 Business and the United States Constitution -- 5 Criminal Liability -- 6 The Tort System -- 7 Contract Law -- 8 Sales Contracts -- 9 Employment and Labor Law -- 10 Government Regulation -- 11 Antitrust Law -- 12 Unfair Trade Practices and the Federal Trade Commission -- 13 International Law -- 14 Securities Regulation0 aBusiness Law I Essentials is a brief introductory textbook designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of courses on Business Law or the Legal Environment of Business. The concepts are presented in a streamlined manner, and cover the key concepts necessary to establish a strong foundation in the subject. The textbook follows a traditional approach to the study of business law. Each chapter contains learning objectives, explanatory narrative and concepts, references for further reading, and end-of-chapter questions. Business Law I Essentials may need to be supplemented with additional content, cases, or related materials, and is offered as a foundational resource that focuses on the baseline concepts, issues, and approaches.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aValbrune, Mirandeeauthor1 aDe Assis, Reneeeauthor1 aCardell, Suzanneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/789zAccess online version01396nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245008700162264004300249264004600292264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505004300515520026200558542001600820546001600836588004100852650003800893710003900931856007600970OTLid0000790MnU20260406020450.0m     o  d s      cr            191109s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aSoueid, Aliciaeauthor00aTout un MondebAn Interdisciplinary Approach to Intermediate FrenchcAlicia Soueid 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapitre 1 -- Chapitre 2 -- Chapitre 30 aThis book is intended for use with intermediate level college French classes. Its multidisciplinary approach introduces students to topics and vocabulary associated with fields such as medicine, advertising, travel, business, agriculture, and relationships.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/790zAccess online version02282nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003500135245007500170250001600245264004300261264006500304264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002800491490002700519505036000546520077500906542004101681546001601722588004101738650002601779710003901805856007601844OTLid0000791MnU20260406020450.0m     o  d s      cr            191109s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aKormelink, Joost Grooteauthor00aResponsible InnovationbEthics, Safety and TechnologycJoost Kormelink  a2nd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. Introduction to responsible innovation -- 2. Applied ethics for responsible innovation -- 3. Institutional context of innovations -- 4. Innovation and business -- 5. Frugal innovation -- 6. Implementation of RI by companies: new standard -- 7. Understanding risk -- 8. Risk management and safety engineering -- 9. Value Sensitive Design0 aThis textbook is based on the MOOC Responsible Innovation offered by the TU Delft. It provides a framework to reflect on the ethics and risks of new technologies. How can we make sure that innovations do justice to social and ethical values? How can we minimize (unknown)risks?The book explains: The concept and importance of responsible innovation for society Key ethical concepts and considerations to analyse the risks of new technologies Different types of innovation (e.g. radical, niche, incremental, frugal) Roadmap for Responsible Innovation by Industry The concept of Value Sensitive Design (VSD) It includes a link to all the web lectures as well as case studies ranging from care robots and nuclear energy to Artificial Intelligence and self-driving vehicles.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/791zAccess online version02437nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134050001100144245002800155264004300183264007600226264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505031300479520091200792542001601704546001601720588004101736650002501777650003301802650002401835700002701859700002601886710003901912856007601951OTLid0000794MnU20260406020450.0m     o  d s      cr            191117s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE140800aBad Ideas About Writing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWest Virginia Universityc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBad Ideas About What Good Writing Is -- Bad Ideas About Who Good Writers Are -- Bad Ideas About Style, Usage, and Grammar -- Bad Ideas About Writing Techniques -- Bad Ideas About Genres -- Bad Ideas About Assessing Writing -- Bad Ideas About Writing and Digital Technology -- Bad Ideas About Writing Teachers0 aWe intend this work to be less a bestiary of bad ideas about writing than an effort to name bad ideas and suggest better ones. Some of those bad ideas are quite old, such as the archetype of the inspired genius author, the five-paragraph essay, or the abuse of adjunct writing teachers. Others are much newer, such as computerized essay scoring or gamification. Some ideas, such as the supposed demise of literacy brought on by texting, are newer bad ideas but are really instances of older bad ideas about literacy always being in a cycle of decline. Yet the same core questions such as what is good writing, what makes a good writer, how should writing be assessed, and the like persist across contexts, technologies, and eras. The project has its genesis in frustration, but what emerges is hope: hope for leaving aside bad ideas and thinking about writing in more productive, inclusive, and useful ways.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aBall, Cheryl Eeauthor1 aLoewe, Drew Meauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/794zAccess online version05355nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245008900137264004300226264010900269264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505155900555520253602114542003004650546001604680588004004696650003304736700003304769700003004802700003404832710003904866856007604905OTLid0000795MnU20260406020525.0m     o  d s      cr            191119s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC98000aTeaching in the UniversitybLearning from Graduate Students and Early Career Faculty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech College of Agriculture and Life Sciences, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCh 1: Relational Learning: Creating a “Working Alliance” in the Classroom -- -- VIGNETTE: Supporting International Graduate Teaching Assistants -- Ch 2: Authenticity -- -- VIGNETTE: Structure and Organization to Facilitate Learning in My Large Class During the COVID-19 Pandemic -- Ch 3: Indigenizing Your Classroom: A Practice in Inclusion Pedagogy -- Ch 4: Teaching Practices for Student-Centered Learning Online -- Ch 5: Technology Makes It Easier -- -- VIGNETTE: No really, I don’t have internet -- Ch 6. Fun Fridays: Incorporating Hands-on Learning into Lecture Courses -- Ch 7: Using Grade Appeals as a Learning Tool -- -- VIGNETTE: Does "Fairness" Get in the Way of Learning and Equity? -- Ch 8: How to Oversee a Laboratory Course Taught by Teaching Assistants: Experiences in the Lab and Field -- -- VIGNETTE: Use of Personal Response System in Classrooms Ch 9. Teaching, Training, and Mentoring Students in Research Practices Inside and Outside the Classroom -- -- VIGNETTE: Lessons Learned as a First-Time Experiential Learning Program Instructor -- Ch 10. The Power of Extension: Research, Teaching, and Outreach for Broader Impacts -- Ch 11. Program Planning for Community Engagement and Broader Impacts -- Ch 12: Personalized Advising that Is Purposely Inconsistent: The Constants of Great Advisors and the Variability that Demands Adaptability -- Ch 13. Engaging the Fear: How to Utilize Student Evaluations, Accept Feedback, and Further Teaching Practice -- -- VIGNETTE: So You've Landed the Job... (or Surviving Your First Semester)0 aThe primary objective of this book is to provide a resource for graduate teaching assistants who are looking for practical strategies and guidance as they begin their careers as postsecondary STEM educators. The text is designed to address a comprehensive list of topics to support the professional development of new faculty, recognizing that those holding academic faculty positions within a college or university are expected to be active in teaching, discovery, and outreach. Traditional doctoral education programs have historically emphasized preparation for research and scholarly publications, and for outreach. However, to some extent, many candidates who complete doctoral programs have minimal preparation and training in formal teaching. Contributors to this text have had a unique experience as part of a three-year, college-wide program designed to prepare interested doctoral students for a rewarding academic career. The program is designed to support the professional development of new faculty, recognizing that those holding academic faculty positions within a college or university are expected to be active in teaching, discovery, and outreach. The alumni and scholars of the program have worked collectively to gather resources and implement educational practices in the diverse set of courses they taught in during their three years in the program. Now as new faculty at a variety of postsecondary institutions across the United States, these early-career educators bring their insights and real-world teaching experiences, embedded in contemporary teaching and learning theory to their contributions to this text. What is this resource? This text is a collection of chapters and vignettes intended to provide practical insight into the challenges and opportunities of teaching at the postsecondary level. It is anticipated that the vignettes provide examples of contexts in which the principles of the topic chapters are applied. Goals for this book Support future STEM faculty in their efforts to engage in student-centered teaching practices that create inclusive postsecondary classrooms Support improved the preparation of new faculty to engage in community education and outreach as part of their professional responsibilities. Support graduate students preparing to apply and interview for faculty positions with teaching appointments. If you are an instructor reviewing, adopting, or adapting this textbook, please help us understand your use by filling out this form http://bit.ly/teaching-interest.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aWestfall-Rudd, Donnaeeditor1 aVengrin, Courtneyeeditor1 aElliott-Engel, Jeremyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/795zAccess online version01743nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001800138050001000156245004500166250000800211264004300219264008100262264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505013500520520023900655542004100894546001600935588004000951650002600991650002401017650002901041650003301070700002601103700002601129700002701155710003901182856007601221OTLid0000796MnU20260406020450.0m     o  d s      cr            191123s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.300aWriting UnleashedbContent and Structure  a3.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Dakota University Systemc2020. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTHE STARTING POINT -- CONTENT AND STRUCTURE -- STRATEGIES AND MODES -- GENRES -- THE WRITING PROCESS -- RESEARCH UNIT -- NERD UNIT0 aWelcome to Writing Unleashed, designed for use as a textbook in first-year college composition programs, written as an extremely brief guide for students, jam-packed with teachers’ voices, students’ voices, and engineered for fun.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks1 aPriebe, Sybileauthor1 aMarman, Rondaeauthor1 aAnderson, Danaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/796zAccess online version02536nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245003900153264004300192264006700235264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505041100479520099700890542001601887546001601903588004001919650002601959700002901985700003302014710003902047856007602086OTLid0000797MnU20260406020832.0m     o  d s      cr            191227s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014080  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB7200aIntroduction to PhilosophybEthics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Aren’t Right and Wrong Just Matters of Opinion? On Moral Relativism and Subjectivism -- 2. Can We Have Ethics without Religion? On Divine Command Theory and Natural Law Theory -- 3. How Can I Be a Better Person? On Virtue Ethics -- 4. What’s in it for Me? On Egoism and Social Contract Theory -- 5. Utilitarianism -- 6. Kantian Deontology -- 7. Feminism and Feminist Ethics -- 8. Evolutionary Ethics0 aWe often make judgments about good and bad, right and wrong. Philosophical ethics is the critical examination of these and other concepts central to how we evaluate our own and each others’ behavior and choices. This text examines some of the main threads of discussion on these topics that have developed over the last couple of millenia, mostly within the Western cultural tradition. It considers basic questions about moral and ethical judgment: Is there such a thing as something that is really right or really wrong independent of time, place and perspective? What is the relationship between religion and ethics? How can we reconcile self-interest and ethics? Is it ever acceptable to harm one person in order to help others? What do recent discussions in evolutionary biology or have to say about human moral systems? What is the relation between gender and ethics? The authors invite you to participate in their exploration of these and many other questions in philosophical ethics.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aMatthews, Georgeeauthor1 aHendricks, Christinaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/797zAccess online version02144nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245004900139264004300188264006600231264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002800419490002700447505015000474520084000624542003001464546001601494588004101510650002301551700002501574700002801599700002801627710003901655856007601694OTLid0000798MnU20260406020720.0m     o  d s      cr            191227s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.202aA Student's Guide to Tropical Marine Biology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bKenyon Collegec[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Coral Reefs and Diversity -- II. Common Fish in the Coral Reef -- III. Environmental Threats -- IV. Reef Conservation -- V. Major Marine Phyla0 aA Student’s Guide to Tropical Marine Biology is written entirely by students enrolled in the Keene State College Tropical Marine Biology course taught by Dr. Karen Cangialosi.Our goal was to investigate three main aspects of tropical marine biology: understanding the system, identifying problems, and evaluating solutions. Each of the sections contains chapters that utilize openly licensed material and images, and are rich with hyperlinks to other sources. Some of the most pressing tropical marine ecosystem issues are broken up into five sections: Coral Reefs and Diversity, Common Fishes to the Coral Reef, Environmental Threats, Reef Conservation, and Major Marine Phyla. These sections are not mutually exclusive; repetition in some content between chapters is intentional as we expect that users may not read the whole book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aZanga, Haleyeauthor1 aBoraski, Audreyeauthor1 aOlendorf, Alanaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/798zAccess online version02192nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003600162250004500198264004300243264006400286264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505067300527520038801200542004101588546001601629588004001645650003001685710003901715856007601754OTLid0000799MnU20260406020720.0m     o  d s      cr            191227s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aPanchuk, Karlaeauthor00aPhysical GeologycKarla Panchuk  aFirst University of Saskatchewan Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSaskatoon, SaskatchewanbUniversity of Saskatchewanc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Introduction to Geology -- Chapter 2. The Origin of Earth and the Solar System -- Chapter 3. Earth's Interior -- Chapter 4. Plate Tectonics -- Chapter 5. Minerals -- Chapter 6. The Rock Cycle -- Chapter 7. Igneous Rocks -- Chapter 8. Weathering, Sediment, and Soil -- Chapter 9. Sedimentary Rocks -- Chapter 10. Metamorphism and Metamorphic Rocks -- Chapter 11. Volcanism -- Chapter 12. Earthquakes -- Chapter 13. Geological Structures and Mountain Building -- Chapter 14. Streams and Floods -- Chapter 15. Mass Wasting -- Chapter 16. Earth-System Change -- Chapter 17. Glaciation -- Chapter 18. Geological Resources -- Chapter 19. Measuring Geological Time0 aPhysical Geology is a comprehensive introductory text on the physical aspects of geology, including rocks and minerals, plate tectonics, earthquakes, volcanoes, mass wasting, climate change, planetary geology and much more. It has a strong emphasis on examples from western Canada. It is adapted from "Physical Geology" written by Steven Earle for the BCcampus Open Textbook Program.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/799zAccess online version02160nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245003300144264004300177264005400220264001200274300002200286336002600308337002600334338003600360341002500396490002700421505056500448520046801013542001601481546001601497588004001513650002501553650003101578700002601609700002401635710003901659856007601698OTLid0000800MnU20260406020735.0m     o  d s      cr            191229s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58600aChild, Family, and Community 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Theories That Help Us Understand Families -- Chapter 2: How Children Learn and Understand Their World -- Chapter 3: What is Culture and Why is it Important? -- Chapter 4: How Does Gender Influence Children, Families and Communities? -- Chapter 5: What is a Family? -- Chapter 6: A Closer Look at Parenting -- Chapter 7: Building Trusting Collaborative Relationships with Families -- Chapter 8: Welcoming & Supporting Families -- Chapter 9: Creating Positive Goal-Oriented Relationships with Strengths-Based Attitudes and Relationship-Based Practices0 aOver the years researchers have found the necessity to develop theories of behavior that are specific to family settings. These theories have been developed by people with a variety of areas of emphasis, from family therapists to gerontologists to child development specialists. In this chapter we will briefly discuss six such theories: Bioecological Model, Family Systems, Functionalism, Conflict Theory, Symbolic Interactionism, and Psychological Perspectives.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aLaff, Rebeccaeauthor1 aRuiz, Wendyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/800zAccess online version02289nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245002800135250002000163264004300183264006900226264001200295300002200307336002600329337002600355338003600381341002500417490002700442505048100469520068700950542001601637546001601653588004101669650003001710700003101740700002901771710003901800856007601839OTLid0000801MnU20260406020451.0m     o  d s      cr            200106s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE100aSoils Laboratory Manual  aK-State Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Safety Training and Orientation -- 2 Chemistry and Math Review -- 3 Soil Formation -- 4 Soil Classification and Mapping Continued -- 5 Soil Texture and Structure -- 6 Soil Density -- 7 Soil Pit Field Trips -- 8 Soil and Water Relationships -- 9 Soil Water Measurement and Movement -- 10 Compost Facility Field Trip -- 11 Soil Carbon and Respiration -- 12 Soil Colloids -- 13 Soil Acidity and Adjusting Soil pH -- 14 Soil Nutrient Management -- 15 Soil and Water Conservation0 aThe Soils Laboratory Manual, K-State Edition is designed for students in undergraduate, introductory soil science courses, and highlights the many aspects of soil science, including: soil genesis and classification, soil physical properties, soil-water interaction, soil biology, soil chemistry, and soil fertility. The lab manual includes 15 different laboratories, each one starting with an introduction and pre-lab assignment, followed by in-lab activities, and complimented by post-lab assignment. In-lab activities involve field trips, experiments, observation stations, or problem sets. Post-lab assignments include online quizzes, problem sets, or laboratory summary reports.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aMoorberg, Colby J.eauthor1 aCrouse, David A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/801zAccess online version02178nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100004000146245007400186250001600260264004300276264005900319264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002500500490002700525505014400552520083500696542002701531546001601558588004101574650003501615650002701650710003901677856007601716OTLid0000802MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            200117s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aNordstrom, Jennifer Firkinseauthor00aIntroduction to Game Theoryba Discovery ApproachcJennifer Nordstrom  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMcMinnville, OregonbJennifer Firkins Nordstromc2020. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- What is Game Theory? -- Two-Person Zero-Sum Games -- Repeated Two-Person Zero-sum Games -- Non-Zero-Sum Games -- Backmatter0 aGame theory is an excellent topic for a non-majors quantitative course as it develops mathematical models to understand human behavior in social, political, and economic settings. The variety of applications can appeal to a broad range of students. Additionally, students can learn mathematics through playing games, something many choose to do in their spare time! This text also includes an exploration of the ideas of game theory through the rich context of popular culture. It contains sections on applications of the concepts to popular culture. It suggests films, television shows, and novels with themes from game theory. The questions in each of these sections are intended to serve as essay prompts for writing assignments. Ancillary material are available to verified course instructors by emailing jfirkins@linfield.edu1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/802zAccess online version03661nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002800136245010100164264004300265264007400308264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505095800559520158001517542001603097546001603113588004003129650002703169710003903196856007603235OTLid0000803MnU20260406020452.0m     o  d s      cr            200117s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP1231 aMüller, Stefaneauthor00aGrammatical theorybFrom transformational grammar to constraint-based approachescStefan Müller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLanguage Science Pressc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction and basic terms -- 2 Phrase structure grammar -- 3 Transformational Grammar - Government & Binding -- 4 Transformational Grammar - Minimalism -- 5 Generalized Phrase Structure Grammar -- 6 Feature descriptions -- 7 Lexical Functional Grammar -- 8 Categorical Grammar -- 9 Head-Driven Phrase Structure Grammar -- 10 Construction Grammar -- 11 Dependency Grammar -- 12 Tree Adjoining Grammar -- 13 The Innateness of linguistic knowledge -- 14 Generative-enumerative vs. model-theoretic approaches -- 15 The competence/performance distinction -- 16 Language acquisition -- 17 Generative capacity and grammar formalisms -- 18 Binary branching, locality, and recursion -- 19 Empty elements -- 20 Extraction, scrambling, and passive: one or several descriptive devices? -- 21 Phrasal vs. lexical analyses -- 22 Structure, potential structure and underspecification -- 23 Universal Grammar and comparative linguistics without UG -- 24 Conclusion0 aThis book introduces formal grammar theories that play a role in current linguistic theorizing (Phrase Structure Grammar, Transformational Grammar/Government & Binding, Generalized Phrase Structure Grammar, Lexical Functional Grammar, Categorial Grammar, Head-​Driven Phrase Structure Grammar, Construction Grammar, Tree Adjoining Grammar). The key assumptions are explained and it is shown how the respective theory treats arguments and adjuncts, the active/passive alternation, local reorderings, verb placement, and fronting of constituents over long distances. The analyses are explained with German as the object language. The second part of the book compares these approaches with respect to their predictions regarding language acquisition and psycholinguistic plausibility. The nativism hypothesis, which assumes that humans posses genetically determined innate language-specific knowledge, is critically examined and alternative models of language acquisition are discussed. The second part then addresses controversial issues of current theory building such as the question of flat or binary branching structures being more appropriate, the question whether constructions should be treated on the phrasal or the lexical level, and the question whether abstract, non-visible entities should play a role in syntactic analyses. It is shown that the analyses suggested in the respective frameworks are often translatable into each other. The book closes with a chapter showing how properties common to all languages or to certain classes of languages can be captured.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/803zAccess online version01468nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003500135245006400170264004300234264007300277264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505027800527520008100805542004100886546001600927588004000943650002000983710003901003856007601042OTLid0000804MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            200121s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aSharman, Russell Leigheauthor00aMoving PicturesbAn Introduction to CinemacRussell Sharman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. An Introduction to Cinema -- 1. A Brief History of Cinema -- 2. How to Watch a Movie -- 3. Mise-en-Scène -- 4. Narrative -- 5. Cinematography -- 6. Editing -- 7. Sound -- 8. Acting -- II. Representation in Cinema -- 9. Women in Cinema -- 10. African Americans in Cinema0 aTextbook for 1000- level Communication course: Introduction to Films Studies1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/804zAccess online version03269nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137245003300150264004300183264006300226264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002800411490002700439505063300466520148301099542001602582546001602598588004002614650002802654650003402682700002802716700002402744710003902768856007602807OTLid0000805MnU20260406020452.0m     o  d s      cr            200212s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A404aThe Pay for Success Handbook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStanford, CaliforniabSuzanne Adatto and Paul Brestc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Introduction and Overview -- Antecedents: The Oklahoma "Milestones" Program -- Introduction to an Outcomes Framework: The Theory of Change for a Service Delivery Program -- Pay for Success -- Part Two: Case Studies of PFS Projects -- New York State's PFS Contract for Increasing Employment and Improving Public Safety -- Other PFS Programs -- Part Three: Analysis -- The Government's Role -- Requisites for a PFS Project from the Government's Perspective -- Application of the Criteria to Various PFS Programs -- The Service Provider's Perspective -- Data and Organizational Challenges to an Outcomes-Oriented Approach0 aGovernment agencies frequently contract with nonprofit or for-profit organizations to provide services to improve the well-being of their clients―for example, by reducing recidivism, homelessness, or drug use. Governments have traditionally paid service providers on the basis of the number of clients they treat. The past decade has seen a number of Pay for Success (PFS) or results-based finance (RBF) programs, in which service providers are paid for their outcomes or results. For example, whereas a government agency contracting with a service provider to reduce recidivism among young men released from prison would traditionally have paid the service provider for the hours spent counseling a client, a PFS contract pays the organization for success in reducing the clients’ rate of recidivism from some baseline. This handbook is written for government officials considering the adoption of Pay For Success (PFS) programs and for students in public policy and business schools interested in studying outcomes-oriented government contracts for services. Part One introduces concepts necessary to develop and operate a service delivery program and then surveys some of the issues specific to PFS. Part Two presents two detailed case studies and a number of shorter descriptions of PFS programs. Part Three focuses on the components of PFS programs; it also discusses barriers to their development and ways of overcoming them. An editable file (docx) is also available.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aAdatto, Suzanneeauthor1 aBrest, Pauleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/805zAccess online version02048nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003400135264004300169264007000212264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505009600459520082400555542004101379546001601420588004001436650003801476700003001514700002701544710003901571856007601610OTLid0000806MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            200216s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aSpuntibItaliano elementare 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMuhlenberg Collegec[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Unità 1 -- II. Unità 2 -- III. Unità 3 -- IV. Unità 4 -- V. Unità 5 -- VI. Unità 60 aSpunti: Italiano elementare 1 is a unique program for Italian language learning, authored by the Italian faculty of Muhlenberg College (Pennsylvania, USA). Spunti 1 provides fully elaborated course materials for first-semester Italian that college instructors can use and adapt, or students can use on their own. Spunti 1 consists of: 1) an online Pressbook with grammar explanations, cultural material, vocabulary, videos, and self-correcting interactive exercises; 2) printable packets of in-class activities; and 3) complete lesson plans for one semester. Users are free to use Spunti 1 in whole or in part, and are free to adapt it to their needs. Spunti: Italiano elementare 2 and Spunti: Italiano intermedio are the companion texts for second-, third- and fourth-semester Italian, and are still under development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aLeisawitz, Danieleauthor1 aViale, Danielaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/806zAccess online version01482nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003400135264004300169264007000212264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505008000459520027400539542004100813546001600854588004000870650003800910700003000948700002700978710003901005856007601044OTLid0000807MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            200220s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aSpuntibItaliano elementare 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMuhlenberg Collegec[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. UNITÀ 1 -- II. UNITÀ 2 -- III. UNITÀ 3 -- IV. UNITÀ 4 -- V. UNITÀ 50 aWelcome to Spunti: Italiano elementare 2 – a new, unique program, authored by the Italian faculty of Muhlenberg College, that takes the place of a traditional language textbook. Spunti is a fully designed course that a college instructor of Italian can use and adapt.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aLeisawitz, Danieleauthor1 aViale, Danielaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/807zAccess online version01451nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245004700162264004300209264007000252264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505008500499520026700584542004100851546001600892588004000908650003800948710003900986856007601025OTLid0000808MnU20260406020719.0m     o  d s      cr            200220s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aViale, Danielaeauthor00aSpuntibItaliano intermediocDaniela Viale 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMuhlenberg Collegec[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Lezioni di lingua per intermedio I -- II. Lezioni di lingua per intermedio II0 aWelcome to Spunti: italiano intermedio – a unique program, authored by the Italian faculty of Muhlenberg College, that takes the place of a traditional language textbook. Spunti is a fully designed course that a college instructor of Italian can use and adapt.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/808zAccess online version02233nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100003100139245004800170264004300218264005500261264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505037300493520079300866542003001659546001601689588004001705650002301745710003901768856007601807OTLid0000809MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            200222s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aBovbjerg, Marit L.eauthor00aFoundations of EpidemiologycMarit Bovbjerg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. What is Epidemiology? -- 2. Measures of Disease Frequency -- 3. Surveillance -- 4. Introduction to 2 x 2 Tables, Epidemiologic Study Design, and Measures of Association -- 5. Random Error -- 6. Bias -- 7. Confounding -- 8. Effect Modification -- 9. Study Designs Revisited -- 10. Causality and Causal Thinking in Epidemiology -- 11. Screening and Diagnostic Testing0 aThis book is intended to provide a basic introduction to epidemiologic methods and epidemiologic thinking. After reading this book, you should be able to read an epidemiologic study, understand what the authors did and why, and identify what they found. You will also have the tools to assess the quality of that study—how good is the evidence? What are potential sources of bias, and how might those have affected the results? This book will not teach you enough to be able to design and conduct your own epidemiologic studies—that level of understanding requires several years of specialized training. However, being able to read and understand the scientific literature about human health will allow you to apply that understanding to your own work in a nuanced, sophisticated way.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/809zAccess online version03642nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001300144245006100157264004300218264005300261264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505117900491520119001670542001602860546001602876588004102892650003302933650002502966650003102991700002803022700002703050700002803077710003903105856007603144OTLid0000810MnU20260406020452.0m     o  d s      cr            200229s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLB1139.200aIntroduction to Curriculum for Early Childhood Education 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc2019. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection I: Understanding How Children Learn -- Chapter 1: Foundations in Early Childhood Curriculum: Connecting Theory & Practice -- Chapter 2: The Importance of Play and Intentional Teaching -- Section II: Developing Curriculum to Support Children's Learning -- Chapter 3: The Cycle of Curriculum Planning -- Chapter 4: Developing Curriculum for a Play Centered Approach -- Section III: Setting the Stage for Children's Learning -- Chapter 5: Setting the Stage for Play: Environments -- Chapter 6: Guiding Behavior and Managing the Classroom -- Section IV: Planning for Children's Learning -- Introduction to Planning for Preschoolers -- Chapter 7: Social and Emotional Development -- Chapter 8: Language and Literacy -- Chapter 9: Mathematics -- Chapter 10: Science -- Chapter 11: Creative Arts -- Chapter 12: History & Social Science -- Chapter 13: Physical Development -- Chapter 14: Health and Safety -- Introduction to Planning for Other Ages -- Chapter 15: What Curriculum Looks Like for Infants and Toddlers -- Chapter 16: What Curriculum Looks Like for School-Age Children -- Section V: Making Children's Learning Visible -- Chapter 17: Documentation and Assessment0 aWelcome to learning about how to effectively plan curriculum for young children. This textbook will address: Developing curriculum through the planning cycle Theories that inform what we know about how children learn and the best ways for teachers to support learning The three components of developmentally appropriate practice Importance and value of play and intentional teaching Different models of curriculum Process of lesson planning (documenting planned experiences for children) Physical, temporal, and social environments that set the stage for children’s learning Appropriate guidance techniques to support children’s behaviors as the self-regulation abilities mature. Planning for preschool-aged children in specific domains including Physical development Language and literacy Math Science Creative (the visual and performing arts) Diversity (social science and history) Health and safety How curriculum planning for infants and toddlers is different from planning for older children Supporting school-aged children’s learning and development in out-of-school time through curriculum planning Making children’s learning visible through documentation and assessment1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aParis, Jennifereauthor1 aBeeve, Kristineauthor1 aSpringer, Clinteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/810zAccess online version01798nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002800137245005100165264004300216264004000259264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002800421490002700449505020500476520055600681542001601237546001601253588004001269650002401309710003901333856007601372OTLid0000811MnU20260406020728.0m     o  d s      cr            200229s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aLebert, Richardeauthor00aEvidence-Based Massage TherapycRichard Lebert 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Setting the Groundwork for Evidence-Based Massage -- II. Theories and Treatment Strategies -- III. Clinical Examination -- IV. Massage Therapy for Musculoskeletal Pain -- V. Complementary Therapies0 aMassage Therapists want to help people, and part of our approach requires having a clear message of who we are and the value we offer. Adopting an evidence-based conceptual framework offers a solution, as it can provide a cohesive message of our nature and value. This clinical practice handbook will prove essential to massage therapists, physical therapists, chiropractors, medical doctors, psychologists and other health professionals who care for people with musculoskeletal pain. It will be continuously updated as new research becomes available.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/811zAccess online version01833nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245004000138264004300178264007400221264001200295300002200307336002600329337002600355338003600381341002800417490002700445505036400472520036300836542001601199546001601215588004101231650002301272700002901295700003201324710003901356856007601395OTLid0000812MnU20260406020453.0m     o  d s      cr            200304s2004    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.300aApplications of Maxwell's Equations 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBurnaby, British ColumbiabJohn F. Cochran, Bretislav Heinrichc2020. 4c©2004.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Maxwell's Equations -- 2 Electrostatic Field (I) -- 3 Electrostatic Field (II) -- 4 The Magnetostatic Field I -- 5 The Magnetostatic Field II -- 6 Ferromagnetism -- 7 Time Dependent Electromagnetic Fields -- 8 Electromagnetic Fields and Energy Flow -- 9 Plane Waves I -- 10 Plane Waves II -- 11 Transmission Lines -- 12 Waveguides -- 13 Problems and Answers0 aThis book was developed at Simon Fraser University for an upper-level physics course. Along with a careful exposition of electricity and magnetism, it devotes a chapter to ferromagnets. According to the course description, the topics covered were “electromagnetics, magnetostatics, waves, transmission lines, wave guides,antennas, and radiating systems.”1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks1 aCochran, John F.eauthor1 aHeinrich, Bretislaveauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/812zAccess online version02100nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245004400162264004300206264008500249264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505045800511520054300969542004101512546001601553588004001569650002601609710003901635856007601674OTLid0000813MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            200314s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aAllen, Chriseauthor04aThe Balance of PersonalitycChris Allen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Personality Traits -- 2 Personality Stability -- 3 Personality Assessment -- 4 Sigmund Freud, Karen Horney, Nancy Chodorow: Viewpoints on Psychodynamic Theory -- 5 Carl Jung -- 6 Humanistic and Existential Theory: Frankl, Rogers, and Maslow -- 7 The Nature-Nurture Question -- 8 Self-Regulation and Conscientiousness -- 9 Personality Disorders -- 10 Happiness: The Science of Subjective Well-Being -- 11 Yoga, Buddhism, Personality and Non-Personality0 aThis open access textbook was developed as an upper division undergraduate textbook for theories of personality. Its intended audience are students from Portland State University enrolled in Psychology 432 Personality course. The chapters are shorter than some personality textbooks and in this particular course Psy 432 the textbook is combined with other readings including scientific articles on personality. This open access textbook may be of interest to other courses interested in teaching about theory and research on personality.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/813zAccess online version01620nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100003700139245005800176264004300234264005100277264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002500450490002700475505029300502520012900795542001600924546001600940588004000956650002300996700003901019700003101058700003001089710003901119856007601158OTLid0000814MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            200314s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aChristianson, Jacquelineeauthor03aAn EKG Interpretation PrimercJacqueline Christianson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbNurses International Teamc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 0 - Anatomy and Physiology of the Heart -- Chapter 1 - EKG Basics and Terminology -- Chapter 2 - Electrical Activity of the Heart and Basic Wave Forms on an EKG -- Chapter 3 - EKG Machinery and Setup -- Chapter 4 - Rhythm Interpretation -- Chapter 5 - 12 Leads and Special Rhythms0 aThis book teaches healthcare professionals the basics of EKG interpretation and is available as a Creative Commons resource.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aTeam, Nurses Internationaleeditor1 aorganization, NP-Ceauthor1 aorganization, MSNeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/814zAccess online version03044nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245003300139250001100172264004300183264005600226264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505071900459520120601178542004102384546001602425588004002441650002502481700002502506700002402531710003902555856007602594OTLid0000815MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            200314s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.500aPrinciples of Microeconomics  a2021-A 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2020. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: The Building Blocks -- 1 Introduction to key ideas -- 2 Theories, data and beliefs -- 3 The classical marketplace - demand and supply -- Part Two: Responsiveness and the Value of Markets -- 4 Measures of response: Elasticities -- 5 Welfare economics and externalities -- Part Three: Decision Making by Consumer and Producers -- 6 Individual choice -- 7 Firms, investors and capital markets -- 8 Production and cost -- Part Four: Market Structures -- 9 Perfect competition -- 10 Monopoly -- 11 Imperfect competition -- Part Five: The Factors of Production -- 12 Labour and capital -- 13 Human capital and the income distribution -- Part Six: Government and Trade -- 14 Government -- 15 International trade0 aPrinciples of Microeconomics is an adaptation of the textbook, Microeconomics: Markets, Methods, and Models by D. Curtis and I. Irvine, which provides concise yet complete coverage of introductory microeconomic theory, application and policy in a Canadian and global environment. This adaptation employs methods that use equations sparingly and do not utilize calculus. The key issues in most chapters are analyzed by introducing a numerical example or case study at the outset. Students are introduced immediately to the practice of taking a data set, examining it numerically, plotting it, and again analyzing the material in that form. The end-of-chapter problems involve numerical and graphical analysis, and a small number of problems in each chapter involve solving simple linear equations (intersecting straight lines). However, a sufficient number of questions is provided for the student to test understanding of the material without working through that subset of questions. This textbook is intended for a one-semester course, and can be used in a two-semester sequence with the companion textbook, Principles of Macroeconomics. The three introductory chapters are common to both textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aCurtis, Dougeauthor1 aIrvine, Ianeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/815zAccess online version02683nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245003300139250001100172264004300183264005600226264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505074700459520081701206542004102023546001602064588004002080650002502120700002502145700002402170710003902194856007602233OTLid0000816MnU20260323020723.0m     o  d s      cr            200314s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.500aPrinciples of Macroeconomics  a2021-A 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLyryxc2020. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: The Building Blocks -- 1 Introduction to key ideas -- 2 Theories, data and beliefs -- 3 The classical marketplace - demand and supply -- Part Two: Introduction to Macroeconomics -- 4 Economic activity & performance -- 5 Output, business cycles, growth & employment -- 6 Aggregate expenditure & aggregate demand -- 7 The government sector -- Part Three: Financial Markets & Economic Activity -- 8 Money, banking & money supply -- 9 Financial markets, interest rates, foreign exchange rates & AD -- 10 Central banking and monetary policy -- Part Four: Real GDP, Business Cycles, Policy and Growth -- 11 Inflation, real GDP, monetary policy & fiscal policy -- 12 Exchange rates, monetary policy, and fiscal policy -- 13 Economic growth0 aPrinciples of Macroeconomics is an adaptation of the textbook, Macroeconomics: Theory, Markets, and Policy by D. Curtis and I. Irvine, and presents a complete and concise examination of introductory macroeconomics theory and policy suitable for a first introductory course. Examples are domestic and international in their subject matter and are of the modern era — financial markets, monetary and fiscal policies aimed at inflation and debt control, globalization and the importance of trade flows in economic structure, and concerns about slow growth and the risk of deflation, are included. This textbook is intended for a one-semester course, and can be used in a two-semester sequence with the companion textbook, Principles of Microeconomics. The three introductory chapters are common to both textbooks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aCurtis, Dougeauthor1 aIrvine, Ianeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/816zAccess online version02926nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245005500137250001600192264004300208264005500251264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505081500483520091001298542004102208546001602249588004102265650002902306700002902335700003602364700002502400710003902425856007602464OTLid0000817MnU20260406020453.0m     o  d s      cr            200322s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.300aCommunication, Affect, & Learning in the Classroom  a4th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMorgantown, West VirginiabJason S. Wrenchc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Teaching as a Communication Process -- Chapter 2 Communicating with Instructional Objectives -- Chapter 3 Instructional Communication Strategies -- Chapter 4 Communication, Affect, and Student Needs -- Chapter 5 Learning Styles -- Chapter 6 Classroom Anxieties and Fears -- Chapter 7 Communication and Student Self-Concept -- Chapter 8 Instructional Assessment: Feedback, Grading, and Affect -- Chapter 9 Traditional and Mastery Learning Systems -- Chapter 10 Student Misbehavior and Classroom Management -- Chapter 11 Teacher Misbehaviors and Communication -- Chapter 12 Teacher Self-Concept and Communication -- Chapter 13 Increasing Classroom Affect Through Teacher Communication Style -- Chapter 14 Teacher Temperament in the Classroom -- Chapter 15 Teacher Communication: Performance and Burnout0 aCommunication, Affect, & Learning in the Classroom was original published by Virginia Richmond and Joan Gorham in 1992 and then updated a decade later by Virginia Richmond, Jason S. Wrench, and Joan Gorham in 2001. As we enter into the revision of the 3rd edition of the text, the basic content has not been drastically altered over the years. However, the research in Instructional Communication has clearly become more prominent and stronger. Probably the single most important development in the past two decades was the publication of the Handbook of Instructional Communication: Rhetorical and Relational Perspectives edited by Mottet et al. (2006). The purpose of the handbook was to synthesize the first three decades of research in instructional communication into a single volume that could help both researchers and instructors understand the value of communication in the instructional process.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aWrench, Jason S.eauthor1 aRichmond, Virginia Peckeauthor1 aGorham, Joaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/817zAccess online version03355nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002600138245007900164264004300243264007200286264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505011100535520214800646542001602794546001602810588004002826650002402866710003902890856007602929OTLid0000819MnU20260406020831.0m     o  d s      cr            200322s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aRibó, Ignasieauthor00aProse FictionbAn Introduction to the Semiotics of NarrativecIgnasi Ribó 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Plot -- 3. Setting -- 4. Characterisation -- 5. Narration -- 6. Language -- 7. Theme0 aThis concise and highly accessible textbook outlines the principles and techniques of storytelling. It is intended as a high-school and college-level introduction to the central concepts of narrative theory – concepts that will aid students in developing their competence not only in analysing and interpreting short stories and novels, but also in writing them. This textbook prioritises clarity over intricacy of theory, equipping its readers with the necessary tools to embark on further study of literature, literary theory and creative writing. Building on a ‘semiotic model of narrative,’ it is structured around the key elements of narratological theory, with chapters on plot, setting, characterisation, and narration, as well as on language and theme – elements which are underrepresented in existing textbooks on narrative theory. The chapter on language constitutes essential reading for those students unfamiliar with rhetoric, while the chapter on theme draws together significant perspectives from contemporary critical theory (including feminism and postcolonialism). This textbook is engaging and easily navigable, with key concepts highlighted and clearly explained, both in the text and in a full glossary located at the end of the book. Throughout the textbook the reader is aided by diagrams, images, quotes from prominent theorists, and instructive examples from classical and popular short stories and novels (such as Jane Austen’s Pride and Prejudice, Franz Kafka’s ‘The Metamorphosis,’ J. K. Rowling’s Harry Potter, or Dostoyevsky’s The Brothers Karamazov, amongst many others). Prose Fiction: An Introduction to the Semiotics of Narrative can either be incorporated as the main textbook into a wider syllabus on narrative theory and creative writing, or it can be used as a supplementary reference book for readers interested in narrative fiction. The textbook is a must-read for beginning students of narratology, especially those with no or limited prior experience in this area. It is of especial relevance to English and Humanities major students in Asia, for whom it was conceived and written.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/819zAccess online version03144nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002600149245004400175250001600219264004300235264006400278264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002500464490002700489505084200516520116701358542001602525546001602541588004002557650002302597650002302620710003902643856007602682OTLid0000820MnU20260406020720.0m     o  d s      cr            200329s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aO'Grady, Jackeauthor00aBiotechnology FoundationscJack O'Grady  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax CNXc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Unit 1. The Foundations of Biotechnology -- Chapter 1. The Study of Life -- Chapter 2. The Building Blocks of Life -- Chapter 3. What is Biotechnology? -- Chapter 4. Biotechnician Tools: Measurements & Uncertainty -- Chapter 5. Biotechnician Tools: Preparing Solutions -- Chapter 6. Biotechnician Tools: Basic Laboratory Equipment -- 2 Unit 2. Introduction to Biomanufacturing -- Chapter 7. Cell Structure and Function -- Chapter 8. Microbes -- Chapter 9. Microbial Techniques -- Chapter 10. Microbial Growth -- Chapter 11. Control of Microbial Growth -- 3 Unit 3. Molecular Biotechnology -- Chapter 12. Nucleic Acid Structure & Function -- Chapter 13. Protein Structure and Function -- Chapter 14. Laboratory Techniques: Nucleic Acids and Proteins -- Chapter 15. Viruses, Vaccines, and the Immune System -- Chapter 16. Immunochemistry0 aGiven the broad definition of biotechnology applications and products, it is easy to see how there is enormous overlap within the fields of cellular biology, microbiology, chemistry, and biomedical engineering. It is the goal of this textbook to provide foundational knowledge to begin building your biotechnology toolkit and enter an exciting career of making a difference through biotechnology. This textbook first explores the fundamentals of laboratory science and biotechnology. Unit 1 begins with a dive into the foundation of biology and chemistry by asking what is life and what are the molecules of life? The end of the unit offers a primer into laboratory science; preparing solutions and operating basic lab equipment. Unit 2 brings readers through a vital tool of biomanufacturing, understanding the growth and control of microbes. Many biotechnology products are made by harnessing the work of microbes, and this unit explores this invisible and intriguing world of microorganisms. The final unit, molecular biotechnology, offers a more in-depth look at how biological molecules such as DNA and protein are manipulated into creating useful products.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/820zAccess online version03322nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245004400162264004300206264006600249264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002800437490002700465505098000492520129301472542001602765546001602781588004002797650002002837710003902857856007602896OTLid0000821MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            200416s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aGreen, Chelseaeauthor00aSight-Reading for GuitarcChelsea Green 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Open Strings, Basic Rhythms & the 4/4 Time Signature -- 2. More Open Strings, Rhythms & Time Signatures -- 3. Notes on the First String & Tempo -- 4. Notes on the Second String, Articulations & Voicings -- 5. Notes on the Third String & Dotted Rhythms -- 6. Notes on the Fourth String, Ornaments & the Tie -- 7. Notes on the Fifth String, More Navigation & Ornaments -- 8. Notes on the Sixth String & Dynamics -- 9. Simple vs. Compound Meter -- 10. More Notes, Accidentals & the Eighth-Note Triplet -- 11. More Notes, Color & Navigation -- 12. More Notes, Repetition & Fingerings -- 13. More Notes, Sixteenth Note Rhythms & Dotted Eighth Note Rhythms -- 14. More Notes, Expression & Tuplets -- 15. More Notes & Meter -- 16. More Notes, Key Signatures & Cut Time Meter -- 17. More Notes & Extended Techniques -- 18. More Notes, Thirty-Second Rhythms & Swing -- 19. Playing in Positions -- 20. Intervals, Chords & Strums -- 21. More Enharmonics -- 22. Refining Your Practice0 aSight-Reading for Guitar: The Keep Going Method Book and Video Series teaches guitar players from all musical backgrounds to understand, read and play modern staff notation in real time. The Keep Going Method is designed to impart the knowledge, skills and attitudes needed for sight-reading with efficiency, fun and encouragement. The skill of sight-reading is a difficult to develop, primarily because it is traditionally taught inefficiently. Further, students encounter high levels of emotional discomfort in the beginning stages of skill acquisition. The method in this book is designed to impart the knowledge, skills and attitudes needed for sight-reading with efficiency, clarity and encouragement. All types of guitars apply: electric, steel-string and nylon-string. Each unit contains brief descriptions of musical symbols, play-along duet exercises and compositions, encouragement and methods for self-assessment. The series contains 20 units that start at the beginner level and progress to the intermediate/advanced level. At the completion of the series guitarists will be able to sight-read most rhythms, pitches and other notations relevant to guitar notation. The series also features 30 original duet compositions, of varying styles, created exclusively for this series!1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/821zAccess online version02108nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136100003000146245008400176264004300260264007000303264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505039700550520052700947542003001474546001601504588004101520650003301561650002501594710003901619856007601658OTLid0000822MnU20260406020454.0m     o  d s      cr            200419s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aHM5861 aDavies, Christineeauthor02aA Quick Guide to Quantitative Research in the Social SciencescChristine Davies 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCarmarthen, WalesbUniversity of Wales Trinity Saint Davidc2021. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection 1: What will this resource do for you? -- Section 2: Why are you thinking about numbers? A discussion of the research question and paradigms. -- Section 3: An overview of the Research Process and Research Designs -- Section 4: Quantitative Research Methods -- Section 5: the data obtained from quantitative research -- Section 6: Analysis of data -- Section 7: Discussing your Results0 aThis resource is intended as an easy-to-use guide for anyone who needs some quick and simple advice on quantitative aspects of research in social sciences, covering subjects such as education, sociology, business, nursing. If you area qualitative researcher who needs to venture into the world of numbers, or a student instructed to undertake a quantitative research project despite a hatred for maths, then this booklet should be a real help. The booklet was amended in 2022 to take into account previous review comments.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/822zAccess online version02060nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245005500138264004300193264006500236264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505025000478520066700728542004101395546001601436588004001452650002501492700003101517700003501548710003901583856007601622OTLid0000823MnU20260406020721.0m     o  d s      cr            200419s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.300aCLUEbChemistry, Life, the Universe and Everything 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoulder, ColoradobMichael Klymkowsky, Melanie Cooperc2019. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Atoms -- 2. Electrons and Orbitals -- 3. Elements, Bonding, and Physical Properties -- 4. Heterogeneous Compounds -- 5. Systems Thinking -- 6. Solutions -- 7. A Field Guide to Chemical Reactions -- 8. How Far? How Fast? -- 9. Reaction Systems0 aThis text is intended to provide an in-depth introduction to the key ideas in chemistry. We have designed the book to show how these ideas are developed from simple to complex systems and how they relate to each other. We consider three ideas central to an understanding of chemistry: the structure of matter, the properties of matter, and the energy changes involved in the reorganization of matter; all are connected by the interactions or forces that cause matter to interact. We aim to provide compelling reasons why you will find yourself wanting to learn chemistry and to illustrate what you will be able to do with this knowledge once you have learned it.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks1 aCooper, Melanie M.eauthor1 aKlymkowsky, Michael W.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/823zAccess online version02582nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138245006700151264004300218264005700261264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505039200495520094300887542004101830546001601871588004101887650002601928650002401954650003601978700002702014700002802041710003902069856007602108OTLid0000824MnU20260406020510.0m     o  d s      cr            200424s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.600aMindful Technical WritingbAn Introduction to the Fundamentals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTRAILSc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Unit I: Exploring Technical Writing Fundamentals -- Unit II: Writing Documents -- Unit III: Attending to Design -- Unit IV: Working With Sources -- Unit V: Conducting Research -- Unit VI: Employing Strategies for College Success -- Unit VII: Producing Correspondence -- Unit VIII: Producing Instructions, Short Reports, and Presentations -- Unit IX: Producing Academic Writing0 aWelcome to Mindful Technical Writing: An Introduction to the Fundamentals, an open textbook designed for use in co-requisite course pairings of developmental writing and introductory technical writing, or indeed in other lower-division college writing courses that focus on building study skills alongside effective workplace and academic writing skills. It offers a no-cost alternative to commercial products, combining practical guidance with interactive exercises and thoughtfully designed writing opportunities. This book’s modular design and ample coverage of topics and genres means that it can be used flexibly over semester-long or stretch courses, allowing instructors and students to select the chapters that are most relevant for their needs. By blending new material with reviews of key topics, such as academic integrity, the chapters provide fresh perspectives on matters vital to the development of strong writing skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aAtkinson, Dawneauthor1 aCorbitt, Staceyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/824zAccess online version04540nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002800146245009700174264004300271264005800314264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505263800549520060703187542001603794546001603810588004003826650003503866650002703901700002903928700002803957700003003985710003904015856007604054OTLid0000827MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            200424s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aSeacrest, Tylereauthor00aInformal Calculus with Applications to Biological and Environmental SciencescTyler Seacrest 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTRAILSc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAlgebra Tips and Tricks: Part I -- Algebra Tips and Tricks Part I (Combining Terms, Distributing, Functions, Graphing) -- Homework for Algebra Tips and Tricks: Part I -- Derivative Introduction -- Ball Toss Project -- Position to Velocity -- Homework: Position to Velocity -- Algebra Tips and Tricks Part II (Piecewise Defined Functions) -- Limits -- Homework: Limits -- Algebra Tips and Tricks Part III (Factoring) -- Algebraic Limits -- Homework: Algebraic Limits -- Instantaneous Velocity -- Homework: Instantaneous Velocity -- Algebra Tips and Tricks IV (Tips for dealing with fractions) -- Definition of Derivative Examples -- Project: Hard Definition of Derivative Problems -- Homework: Examples of the Definition of the Derivative -- Project: Killdeer Migration Speed -- Rules for Derivatives -- Algebra Tips and Tricks Part V (Exponents) -- Power Rule -- Homework: Power Rule -- Algebra Tips and Tricks Part VI (Logarithms) -- Exponentials, Logarithms, and Trig Functions -- Homework: Exponents, Logs, Trig Functions -- Product Rule -- Homework: Product Rule -- Quotient Rule -- Homework: Quotient Rule -- Chain Rule -- Homework: Chain Rule -- Multirule Derivatives -- Homework: Multirule Derivatives -- Anti-derivatives -- Homework: Anti-derivatives -- More Derivative Intuition -- Derivatives and Graphs -- Homework: Derivative Graphs -- Second Derivatives and Interpreting the Derivative -- Homework: Second Derivatives and Interpreting the Derivative -- Optimization -- Homework: Optimization -- Derivatives in Space -- Homework: Derivatives in Space -- Differential Equations -- Recurrance Relations -- Homework: Recurrence Relations -- Introduction to Differential Equations -- Homework: Introduction to Differential Equations -- Understanding Differential Equations -- Homework: Understanding Differential Equations -- Initial Value Problems -- Homework: Initial Value Problems -- Growth and Decay -- Homework: Growth and Decay -- Exploring Graphs of Differential Equations -- Project: Modelling with Differential Equations -- Intuition for Integration -- Introduction to Integrals -- Numeric Integration Techniques -- Homework: Numeric Integration Techniques -- Fundamental Theorem of Calculus -- Homework: The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus -- Project: Measuring Streamflow -- Project: Quake Lake -- Rules for Integration -- Power, exponential, trig, and logarithm rules -- Homework: Power, exponential, trig, and logarithmic rules -- u-substitution -- Homework: u-substitution -- Integral Applications -- Homework: Integral Applications -- Integration by Parts -- Homework: Integration by Parts -- Acknowledgements0 aThis book is an approachable introduction to calculus with applications to biology and environmental science. For example, one application in the book is determining the volume of earth moved in the 1959 earthquake that created Quake Lake. Another application uses differential equations to model various biological examples, including moose and wolf populations at Isle Royale National Park, ranavirus in amphibians, and competing species of protozoa. The text focuses on intuitive understanding of concepts, but still covers most of the algebra and calculations common in a survey of calculus course.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aSeacrest, Debbieeeditor1 aLevine, Rebekaheeditor1 aAnderson, Micheleeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/827zAccess online version02347nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001100139050001800150050000800168050001400176100003600190245008900226264004300315264005700358264001200415300002200427336002600449337002600475338003600501341002800537490002700565505032900592520064400921542003001565546001601595588004101611650002301652650002501675650003301700650002601733650002701759710003901786856007601825OTLid0000828MnU20260406020541.0m     o  d s      cr            200424s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQD31.3 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aWettstein, Stephanie G.eauthor00aTechnical Writing and Simple StatisticsbFor laboratory classescStephanie Wettstein 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTRAILSc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDescriptive Statistics -- Using Graphs to Display Data -- Statistical Process Control & Process Control Charts -- Linear Regression -- Statistical Comparison of Two Regressed Slopes -- t-Tests -- The Writing Process -- Team Writing Strategies -- Meeting agendas and notes -- Communication Components -- Appendix -- Templates0 aThis upper division resource focuses on how to communicate results through technical writing, use Excel to perform simple statistics, and create professional charts/documents. Excel tutorials are provided for performing descriptive statistics, t-tests, and linear regression as well as using text boxes, formatting figures and captions, and using Equation Editor to insert equations. Additionally, guidance and examples of different communication components are provided along with team writing strategies and guidelines on how to hold efficient meetings. This textbook was designed for Biology and Chemistry majors for a 400 level course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/828zAccess online version02887nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134050001100144245005600155250002700211264004300238264007100281264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505021700529520129600746542004102042546001602083588004002099650002502139650003302164650002602197650002402223700002702247700002602274700002602300710003902326856007602365OTLid0000829MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            200429s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aPE140800aInformed ArgumentsbA Guide to Writing and Research  aRevised Second Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTexas A&M Universityc2022. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. Getting Started -- III. Rhetorical Situation -- IV. Types of Argumentation -- V. Process and Organization -- VI. Joining the Academic Conversation -- VII. Researched Writing -- VIII: Ethics0 aWelcome to composition and rhetoric! While most of you are taking this course because it is required, we hope that all of you will leave with more confidence in your reading, writing, researching, and speaking abilities as these are all elements of freshman composition. Many times, these elements are presented in excellent textbooks written by top scholars. While the collaborators of this particular textbook respect and value those textbooks available from publishers, we have been concerned about students who do not have the resources to purchase textbooks. Therefore, we decided to put together this Open Educational Resource (OER) explicitly for use in freshman composition courses at Texas A&M University. It is important to note that the focus for this text is on thesis-driven argumentation as that is the focus of the first year writing course at Texas A&M University at the time of development. However, other first year writing courses at different colleges and universities include a variety of types of writing such as personal essays, informative articles, and/or creative writing pieces. The collaborators for this project acknowledge each program is unique; therefore, the adaptability of an OER textbook for first year writing allows for academic freedom across campuses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aPantuso, Terrieeditor1 aLeMire, Saraheeditor1 aAnders, Kathyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/829zAccess online version02427nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003800143264004300181264003800224264001200262300002200274336002600296337002600322338003600348341002800384490002700412505112000439520014001559542004101699546001601740588004001756650002001796650002301816700002301839700002501862700002701887710003901914856007601953OTLid0000830MnU20260316020747.0m     o  d s      cr            200429s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Ancient Near Eastern Art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Sumerian -- 1. Sumer, an introduction -- 2. White Temple and ziggurat, Uruk -- 3. Archaeological reconstructions -- 4. A precious artifact from Sumer, the Warka Vase -- 5. Standing Male Worshipper (Tell Asmar) -- 6. Perforated Relief of Ur-Nanshe -- 7. Signing with a cylinder seal -- 8. War, peace, and the Standard of Ur -- Part II. Akkadian -- 9. Akkad, an introduction -- 10. Victory Stele of Naram-Sin -- Part III. Neo-Sumerian/Ur III -- 11. Seated Gudea holding temple plan -- 12. King Ur-Nammu's Ziggurat of Ur -- Part IV. Babylonian -- 13. Visiting Babylon today -- 14. Law Code Stele of King Hammurabi -- 15. Law Code Stele of King Hammurabi -- 16. The Ishtar Gate and Neo-Babylonian art -- 17. Ishtar Gate and Neo-Babylonian art -- 18. Kassite art: Unfinished Kudurru -- Part V. Assyrian -- 19. Assyria, an introduction -- 20. Lamassu from the citadel of Sargon II -- 21. Ashurbanipal Hunting Lions -- Part VI. Persian -- 22. Ancient Persia, an introduction -- 23. Capital of a column from the audience hall of the palace of Darius I, Susa -- 24. Persepolis: The Audience Hall of Darius and Xerxes0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for Sumerian, Akkadian, Neo-Sumerian / Ur III, Babylonian, Assyrian and Persian art.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/830zAccess online version02153nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003400143264004300177264003800220264001200258300002200270336002600292337002600318338003600344341002800380490002700408505090900435520008101344542004101425546001601466588004001482650002001522650002301542700002301565700002501588700002701613710003901640856007601679OTLid0000831MnU20260330020715.0m     o  d s      cr            200429s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Ancient Egyptian Art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. A beginner's guide -- 1. Ancient Egypt, an introduction -- 2. Ancient Egyptian art -- 3. Materials and techniques in ancient Egyptian art -- Part II. Predynastic and Old Kingdom -- 4. Palette of King Narmer -- 5. An introduction to the Great Pyramids of Giza (Khufu, Khafre, and Menkaure) -- 6. The Pyramid of Khufu -- 7. The Pyramid of Khafre and the Great Sphinx -- 8. The Pyramid of Menkaure -- 9. King Menkaure (Mycerinus) and queen -- 10. The Seated Scribe (Saqqara) -- Part III. Middle and New Kingdom -- 11. Temple of Amun-Re and the Hypostyle Hall, Karnak -- 12. Mortuary Temple and Large Kneeling Statue of Hatshepsut -- 13. House Altar depicting Akhenaten, Nefertiti and Three of their Daughters -- 14. Portrait Head of Queen Tiye -- 15. Thutmose, Model Bust of Queen Nefertiti -- 16. Tutankhamun's tomb (innermost coffin and death mask) -- 17. Last judgement of Hu-Nefer, from his tomb0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for Ancient Egyptian art.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/831zAccess online version03282nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000900157050000700166245006400173250001600237264004300253264008700296264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002500505490002700530505089300557520098201450542003002432546001602462588004002478650002302518650002802541650003102569700002402600700002602624700002902650700003002679710003902709856007602748OTLid0000832MnU20260406020817.0m     o  d s      cr            200514s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781931303637  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aGN25 4aH100aExplorationsbAn Open Invitation To Biological Anthropology  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAmerican Anthropological Associationc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Dedication -- Instructors' Guide for Explorations -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Biological Anthropology -- Chapter 2: A History of Evolutionary Thought -- Chapter 3: Molecular Biology and Genetics -- Chapter 4: Forces of Evolution -- Chapter 5: Meet the Living Primates -- Chapter 6: Primate Ecology and Behavior -- Chapter 7: Stones and Bones: Studying the Fossil Record -- Chapter 8: Primate Evolution -- Chapter 9: Early Hominins -- Chapter 10: Early Members of the Genus Homo -- Chapter 11: Archaic Homo -- Chapter 12: Modern Homo sapiens -- Chapter 13: Race and Human Variation -- Chapter 14: Human Variation: An Adaptive Significance Approach -- Chapter 15: Forensic Anthropology -- Chapter 16: Contemporary Topics: Human Biology and Health -- Chapter 17: Social and Biopolitical Dimensions of Evolutionary Thinking -- Appendix A -- Appendix B -- Appendix C -- Appendix D0 aAnthropology is the study of humanity, in all its biological and cultural aspects, past and present. It is a four-field discipline comprised of biological anthropology, cultural anthropology, archaeology, and linguistic anthropology. The focus of this book is biological anthropology, which explores who we are from biological, evolutionary, and adaptive perspectives. We lay the foundation for this inquiry in the first four chapters by introducing the discipline of anthropology, evolutionary theory, molecular biology and genetics, and the forces of evolution. What's New in the 2nd Edition? Two new chapters; More concise chapters (8,000 to 10,000 words, not including call out boxes); Updated chapters with new discoveries and events; Diversity, equity and inclusion principles applied to the text and images; Enhanced accessibility standards reviewed by the ASCCC-OERI; Instructor guide detailing how to adapt the book to better fit your course. Student reviewed content.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aShook, Betheeditor1 aNelson, Katieeeditor1 aAguilera, Kelsieeeditor1 aNelson, Maryeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/832zAccess online version02016nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003200143264004300175264003800218264001200256300002200268336002600290337002600316338003600342341002800378490002700406505072900433520012601162542004101288546001601329588004001345650002001385650002301405700002301428700002501451700002701476710003901503856007601542OTLid0000833MnU20260126020433.0m     o  d s      cr            200514s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Ancient Aegean Art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Cycladic -- 1. Male Harp Player from Keros -- 2. Frescoes from Akrotiri, Thera -- Part II. Minoan -- 3. The Palace at Knossos (Crete) -- 4. Kamares Ware Jug - a classic example -- 5. Snake Goddess from the palace at Knossos -- 6. Bull's Head Rhyton from the palace at Knossos -- 7. Harvester Vase from Hagia Triada -- 8. Octopus Vase from Palaikastro -- 9. Statuette of a Male Figure (The Palaikastro Kouros) -- 10. Hagia Triada sarcophagus -- 11. Bull-leaping fresco from the palace of Knossos -- 12. Minoan woman or goddess from the palace of Knossos ("La Parisienne") -- Part III. Mycenean Art -- 13. The "Palace" and Grave Circle A -- 14. Mask of Agamemnon -- 15. The Treasury of Atreus -- 16. Lion Gate, Mycenae0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for the Ancient Aegean, including Cycladic, Minoan, and Mycenaean art.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/833zAccess online version01766nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003400143264004300177264003800220264001200258300002200270336002600292337002600318338003600344341002800380490002700408505051800435520008500953542004101038546001601079588004001095650002001135650002301155700002301178700002501201700002701226710003901253856007601292OTLid0000834MnU20260126020433.0m     o  d s      cr            200514s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Ancient Etruscan Art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Etruscan art -- 1. The Etruscans, an introduction -- 2. Bucchero, a black, burnished ceramic ware -- 3. Temple of Minerva and the sculpture of Apollo (Veii) -- 4. Apulu (Apollo of Veii) -- 5. Sarcophagus of the Spouses (Louvre) -- 6. Sarcophagus of the Spouses (Rome) -- 7. Sarcophagus of the Spouses (Rome) -- 8. Tomb of the Triclinium, Tarquinia -- 9. The Francois Tomb, Vulci -- 10. Tomb of the Reliefs, Cerveteri -- 11. The Chimera of Arezzo -- 12. Bronze Mars of Todi -- 13. Aule Metele (Arringatore)0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for the Ancient Etruscan art.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/834zAccess online version01424nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003100143264004300174264003800217264001200255300002200267336002600289337002600315338003600341341002800377490002700405505018600432520007800618542004100696546001600737588004000753650002000793650002300813700002300836700002500859700002700884710003900911856007600950OTLid0000835MnU20260323020635.0m     o  d s      cr            200525s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Ancient Greek Art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. A beginner's guide -- Part II. Pottery -- Part III. Daedalic and Archaic -- Part IV. Early Classical -- Part V. Classical -- Part VI. Late Classical -- Part VII. Hellenistic0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for Ancient Greek art.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/835zAccess online version01489nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003100143264004300174264003800217264001200255300002200267336002600289337002600315338003600341341002800377490002700405505024700432520008200679542004100761546001600802588004000818650002000858650002300878700002300901700002500924700002700949710003900976856007601015OTLid0000836MnU20260330020718.0m     o  d s      cr            200525s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Ancient Roman art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. An introduction to the art of Ancient Rome -- Part II. Ancient Roman Wall Painting -- Part III. Ancient Roman Republic -- Part IV. Ancient Rome: Early Empire -- Part V. Ancient Rome: Middle Empire -- Part VI. Ancient Rome: Late Empire0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for the Ancient Roman art.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/836zAccess online version03746nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002800150245012500178250001900303264004300322264006200365264001200427300002200439336002600461337002600487338003600513341002800549490002700577505097700604520149801581542004103079546001603120588004103136650003403177650003403211710003903245856007603284OTLid0000837MnU20260406020458.0m     o  d s      cr            200525s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3400 4aKF385.A41 aFerguson, Gerryeauthor00aGlobal CorruptionbIts Regulation under International Conventions, US, UK, and Canadian Law and PracticecGerry Ferguson  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, British ColumbiabUniversity of Victoriac2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Acronyms -- About the Editor -- Contributing Authors and Co-Authors -- Preface and Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1 - Corruption in Context: Social, Economic, and Political Dimensions -- Chapter 2 - Bribery and Other Offences -- Chapter 3 - Jurisdiction, Corporate Liability, Accomplices, and Inchoate Offences -- Chapter 4 - Money Laundering -- Chapter 5 - Asset Recovery and Mutual Legal Assistance -- Chapter 6 - Investigation and Prosecution -- Chapter 7 - Criminal and Civil Sanctions and Remedies -- Chapter 8 - The Lawyer's Ethical and Professional Duties -- Chapter 9 - Compliance Programs, Risk Assessments, and Due Diligence -- Chapter 10 - Public Officials and Conflicts of Interest -- Chapter 11 - Regulation of Lobbying -- Chapter 12 - Public Procurement -- Chapter 13 - Whistleblower Protections -- Chapter 14 - Campaign Finance: Controlling the Risks of Corruption and Public Cynicism -- Chapter 15 - Collective Action -- Chapter 16 - The Role of NGOs0 aThis book has been specifically created to make it easier for professors to offer a law school course on global corruption. It is also designed as a resource tool for all persons working in the anti-corruption field. The book is issued under a creative commons license and can be used for free in whole or in part for non-commercial purposes. The first chapter sets out the general context of global corruption: its nature and extent, and some views on its historical, social, economic and political dimensions. Each subsequent chapter sets out international standards and requirements in respect to combatting corruption – mainly in the UN Convention Against Corruption (UNCAC) and the OECD Bribery of Foreign Officials Convention (OECD Convention). The laws of the United States and United Kingdom are then set out as examples of how those Convention standards and requirements are met in two influential jurisdictions. Finally, the law of Canada is set out. Thus, a professor from Africa, Australia, New Zealand or English speaking countries in Asia and Europe has a nearly complete coursebook – for example, that professor can delete the Canadian sections of this book and insert the law and practices of his or her home country in their place. While primarily directed to a law school course on global corruption, this book will be of interest and use to professors teaching courses on corruption from other academic disciplines and to lawyers and other anti-corruption practitioners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/837zAccess online version02420nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136245007400145264004300219264008400262264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505022800523520095700751542004101708546001601749588004001765650002501805650003301830700002901863700002701892710003901919856007601958OTLid0000838MnU20260406020454.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aJA7100aCommunity Resilience to Climate ChangebTheory, Research and Practice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection I: Introduction & Key Concepts -- Section II: Resilience in Theory -- Section III: Identifying & Evaluating Resilience -- Section IV: Resilience in Practice -- Section V: Future Directions -- Section VI: Conclusions0 aThis reader is an Open Educational Resource, meant to accompany a graduate or higher-level undergraduate university course in climate change resilience, adaptation, and/or planning. While the material is geared toward students in urban and regional planning, it may also be of interest to students of urban studies, public health, geography, political science, sociology, risk management, and others. Each section of this volume includes (1) an introductory summary, (2) a reading list with full text articles, (3) student exercises meant to enhance understanding and facilitate in-class discussion, and (4) additional discussion prompts or activities for instructors to use in class. The format of materials is intended to convey key concepts, while leaving ample space for student exploration, discourse, and creativity. Lessons may culminate in an applied, imaginative final project, a sample framework of which is provided at the end of Section VI.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aHellman, Dana E.eauthor1 aShandas, Vivekeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/838zAccess online version01443nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002700149245005400176250001600230264004300246264004100289264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505021900504520007200723542004100795546001600836588004000852650002400892650002600916710003900942856007600981OTLid0000839MnU20260406020753.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aLacher, Marcuseauthor00aBusiness Computers 365 Version 2.0cMarcus Lacher  aVersion 2.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Paul, MinnesotabOpendorac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Personal Computer Basics -- Word Chapter 1 -- Word Chapter 2 -- Excel Chapter 1 -- Excel Chapter 2 -- Access Chapter 1 -- Access Chapter 2 -- PowerPoint Chapter 1 -- PowerPoint Chapter 2 -- Appendix0 aIntro to Computer Applications or Business Computers for Office 3651 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/839zAccess online version02835nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245003900181264004300220264006800263264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505061600508520111601124542004102240546001602281588004102297650002002338710003902358856007602397OTLid0000840MnU20260406020454.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548162  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aMaxwell, Steveneauthor00aTeaching Low BrasscSteven Maxwell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBrass History -- The Overtone Series -- General Intonation Tendencies -- Embouchure -- Embouchure Problems -- General intonation Tendencies -- Instruments, Mouthpieces, and Equipment -- Low Brass Literature -- Basic Instrument Maintenance -- Vibrato -- Low Brass in the Marching Band -- Baritone vs. Euphonium-What's the difference by David Werden -- Appendix I - Trombone/Euphonium Etudes -- Appendix II - Tuba Etudes -- Appendix III - Warm-ups -- Appendix IV - Trombone Slide Positions / Euphonium FIngerings -- Appendix V - Tuba Fingerings -- Appendix VI - Major Scales -- Bibliography -- About the Author --0 aThe purpose of this textbook is to provide resources about teaching low brass instruments to music educators and future music educators. The book was developed by the author as part of the open/alternative textbook initiative at Kansas State University. It Is the textbook used for the Kansas State University course Music 239-Low Brass Techniques and Materials. The textbook focuses on two areas: basic information including pedagogical material for teaching low brass students and low brass etudes. The information is divided into several categories including brass history, the overtone series, general intonation tendencies, embouchure, instruments and equipment, literature, maintenance, vibrato, and low brass in the marching band. Pedagogical material is interspersed throughout each of the chapters. Etudes are incorporated in the appendix of the textbook. These etudes are intended to be used in a laboratory setting with future music educators learning each low brass instrument for the first time. Instrument fingerings, slide positions, and simple warm-up material is also available in the appendix.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/840zAccess online version02804nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002700154245005500181264004300236264006800279264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505009800524520158100622542004102203546001602244588004002260650002702300710003902327856007602366OTLid0000841MnU20260406020724.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548179  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP1231 aRussell, Caroleauthor00aLinguistics for Teachers of EnglishcCarol Russell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- History -- Language as Communication -- Dialects -- Language in the Classroom0 aThe primary goals of this text are to acquaint prospective teachers of English with certain aspects of the history, structure, and use of the English Language. Through considering the nature of the English language; how language and culture are interconnected as well as how it is acquired and how and why it changes, readers will come to a fuller understanding of sociolinguistics. This text discusses the nature of language, as well as how it is acquired; how and why languages change, and how the English language in particular has changed (and continues to change); why different varieties of English have developed, and why they continue to be used; how linguists have attempted to account for the (ir)regularities of English; how language and culture are related; and how linguistics can be used as a tool in the classroom. This text presents important topics for English teachers to know: the relationship between “standard” and “nonstandard” dialects, how and why language varies, how we can make informed decisions about what is “right” and “wrong” in language use, and generally how a sound knowledge of how language works can inform and benefit the pedagogical strategies needed to develop as a teacher. Ultimately, I want readers to think about language in ways not thought of before: objectively, passionately, critically, analytically, and logically. This allows readers to move beyond memorization of facts to original thought (which is sort of like the difference between knowing how to add and subtract, and being able to balance a checkbook).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/841zAccess online version01923nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002800154245011400182250001600296264004300312264006100355264001200416300002200428336002600450337002600476338003600502341002800538490002700566505041500593520031101008542002701319546001601346588004001362650003201402710003901434856007601473OTLid0000842MnU20260406020724.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798331222161  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDavies, Stepheneauthor00aBlueprintsbCreating, Describing, and Implementing Designs for Larger-scale Software ProjectscStephen Davies  aversion 2.5 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aComputer Science, bUniversity of Mary Washingtonc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aGetting off the ground -- The "software crisis" -- Classes and objects -- Memory matters -- Exceptions -- UML class diagrams -- The Singleton pattern -- Java odds 'n' ends -- UML sequence diagrams -- Persistence and hydration -- Inheritance (1 of 2) -- Inheritance (2 of 2) -- The Factory pattern -- Team software development -- Doing design (1 of 2) -- Doing design (2 of 2) -- Use cases -- Documenting an API0 aBlueprints is a concise yet comprehensive coverage of Object-Oriented Analysis and Design concepts, suitable for a second programming course in Computer Science. It introduces and teaches application development in a command-line environment, and assumes basic expertise with the Java programming language.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/842zAccess online version01665nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002800146245006700174250001600241264004300257264006100300264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002500483490002700508505011900535520041200654542002701066546001601093588004001109650002701149710003901176856007601215OTLid0000843MnU20260406020455.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aDavies, Stepheneauthor02aA Cool Brisk Walk Through Discrete MathematicscStephen Davies  aversion 2.2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aComputer Science, bUniversity of Mary Washingtonc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMeetup at the trailhead -- Sets -- Relations -- Probabiltiy -- Structures -- Counting -- Numbers -- Logic -- Proof0 aA Cool Brisk Walk Through Discrete Mathematics - and its companion site "allthemath" - are completely-and-forever-free-and-open-source educational materials dedicated to the mathematics that budding computer science practitioners actually need to know. They feature the fun and addictive teaching of award-winning lecturer Dr. Stephen Davies of the University of Mary Washington in Fredericksburg, Virginia!1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/843zAccess online version04242nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000900135245005100144264004300195264004000238264001200278300002200290336002600312337002600338338003600364341002800400490002700428505160500455520142402060542004103484546001603525588004003541650003803581650002703619700003003646700002503676700002803701710003903729856007603768OTLid0000844MnU20260406020725.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aP12303aLa lingüística hispánicabUna introducción 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAthens, OHbAshwini Ganeshanc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCapítulo 1: Una breve introducción a la lingüística -- Lengua y Lenguaje -- Competencia lingüística y competencia comunicativa -- El bilingüismo y el mutilingüismo -- Las características del lenguaje -- Las reglas prescriptivas y descriptivas -- Los diferentes campos de estudio en la lingüística -- Las funciones del lenguaje -- Tipos de variación -- Qué hacer con la lingüística -- Ejercicios: Las características del lenguaje -- Ejercicios: Las reglas prescriptivas y descriptivas -- Ejercicios: Los diferentes campos de estudio en la lingüística -- Ejercicios: Las funciones del lenguaje -- Ejercicios: Tipos de variación -- Clave de ejercicios -- Capítulo 2: Los sonidos de español -- Los fonos de español -- ¿Cómo producimos los fonemas? -- Articulación de las vocales -- Articulación de las consonantes -- La fonética de la lengua de las señas mexicana -- La transcripción fonémica y la división silábica -- Los alófonos y la transcripción fonética -- Los problemas del sistema consonántico y vocálico -- Los acentos -- Ejercicios: El aparato fonador -- Ejercicios: Las vocales -- Ejercicios: Los puntos de articulación -- Ejercicios: Los modos de articulación -- Ejercicios: Los puntos y modos de articulación -- Ejercicios: Punto, modo, y sonoridad -- Ejercicios: La transcripción fonémica y la división silábica -- Ejercicios: Hiato, sinéresis, y sinalefa -- Ejercicios: Los diptongos y triptongos -- Ejercicios: La transcripción fonémica de oraciones -- Ejercicios: Los alófonos -- Ejercicios: Transcripción fonética -- Clave de ejercicios0 aEditoras: Paige Wilson, Margaret Saine, y Anna Traini Este libro, todavía en desarrollo, se dirige a estudiantes de español en universidades estadounidenses y pretende ofrecer una breve y simple introducción a la lingüística hispánica. Incluye conceptos básicos de la lingüística, brinda ensayos que abarcan temas de interés social conectando la lingüística con la vida diaria, y ejercicios para practicar los conceptos. También hay enlaces a materiales relevantes disponibles en la red. El libro está creado enteramente por textos escritos y materiales compartidos por estudiantes mayoritariamente de pregrado y también cuenta con el trabajo y esfuerzo de estudiantes-editoras en un proyecto a largo plazo de pedagogía abierta. Editors: Paige Wilson, Margaret Saine, and Anna Traini This book, a work in progress, is aimed at students of Spanish in universities in the USA and intends to offer a brief and simple introduction to the field of Hispanic Linguistics. It includes basic concepts in linguistics, essays that address topic of social relevance connecting linguistics to everyday life, and exercises to practice the concepts. Links to relevant material across the internet are also provided. The book is entirely created from texts and materials authored by mainly undergraduate students and it also includes the work and effort of student-editors, as part of a long-term open pedagogy project.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks1 aGaneshan, Ashwinieauthor1 aWison, Paigeeeditor1 aSaine, Margareteeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/844zAccess online version02091nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002600155245006600181264004300247264008100290264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505057800548520036501126542004101491546001601532588004101548650002501589710003901614856007601653OTLid0000845MnU20260406020725.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936153121  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM5861 aMapes, Meggieeauthor00aSpeak Out, Call InbPublic Speaking as AdvocacycMeggie Mapes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Librariesc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Advocacy and Audiences -- 1. Public Speaking As Advocacy -- 2. Centering Audiences -- Part II. Arguments and Information -- 3. Selecting and Formulating Arguments -- 4. Researching Arguments -- 5. Crafting Arguments -- 6. Organizing and Outlining -- Part III. Aesthetics and Delivery -- 7. Creating an Aesthetic Experience -- 8. Verbal Delivery -- 9. Nonverbal Delivery -- 10. Presentation Aids -- 11. Rehearsing Your Presentation -- Part IV. Approaches -- 12. Informative Speaking -- 13. Persuasive Speaking -- 14. Online Public Speaking -- 15. Ceremonial Speaking0 aSpeak Out, Call In: Public Speaking as Advocacy is a contemporary, interdisciplinary public speaking textbook that fuses rhetoric, critical/cultural studies, and performance to offer an up-to-date resource for students. With a focus on advocacy, this textbook invites students to consider public speaking as a political, purposeful form of information-sharing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/845zAccess online version01730nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000900135100003600144245003800180264004300218264005700261264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505057500495520003401070542001601104546001601120588004001136650003801176650002701214710003901241856007601280OTLid0000846MnU20260406020725.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aP1231 aViana da Silva, Eduardoeauthor00aBate-PapocEduardo Viana da Silva 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSeattle, WashingtonbUniversity of Washingtonc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnidade 1 – Parte A - Apresentações -- Unidade 1 – Parte B - Dia a dia -- Unidade 2 – Parte A - Descrições -- Unidade 2 – Parte B - Profissões -- Unidade 3 – Parte A - Universidade -- Unidade 3 – Parte B - Esportes -- Unidade 4 – Parte A - Comida -- Unidade 4 – Parte B - Restaurantes -- Unidade 5 – Parte A - Família -- Unidade 5 – Parte B - Casas -- Unidade 6 – Parte A - Viagens -- Unidade 6 – Parte B - Transporte -- Unidade 7 - Parte A - Corpo Humano -- Unidade 7 - Parte B - Sua Vida -- Unidade 8 - Parte A - Descobertas e Invenções0 aAn Introduction to Portuguese1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/846zAccess online version02029nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137245004600147250002500193264004300218264004900261264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505039200487520040900879542002701288546001601315588004001331650002901371650002401400700002701424700002801451700002501479710003901504856007601543OTLid0000847MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            200625s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA44000aVaccine Practice for Health Professionals  a1st Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Immunizations -- Chapter 2: Understanding the Timing of Vaccines -- Chapter 3: Vaccine Administration and Storage -- Chapter 4: Vaccine Safety -- Chapter 5: Responding to Vaccine Hesitancy -- Chapter 6: Misinformation Associated with Immunizations -- Chapter 7: Expanding the Scope of Practice for Nurses and Other Health Professionals Involved in Immunization0 aThis open access textbook is intended to guide best practices in vaccine delivery in Canada. This resource is designed for students in post-secondary health profession programs, including nursing. It may also be useful for graduate students and healthcare providers. This textbook provides information related to clinical practice, including the administration of vaccine, and communication with clients.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aSt-Amant, Oonaeauthor1 aLapum, Jennifereauthor1 aEnglish, Kimeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/847zAccess online version02506nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245004600137264004300183264004800226264001200274300002200286336002600308337002600334338003600360341002800396490002700424505083700451520053501288542002701823546001601850588004001866650002401906700003101930700002701961700002901988710003902017856007602056OTLid0000848MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            200627s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA44004aThe Complete Subjective Health Assessment 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to the Complete Subjective Health Assessment -- The Complete Subjective Health Assessment -- Reasons for Conducting a Complete Subjective Health Assessment -- Categories and Influencing Factors -- Reflective Questions -- Chapter 2: The Complete Subjective Health Assessment -- Introductory Information: Demographic and Biographic Data -- Main Health Needs (Reasons for Seeking Care) -- The PQRSTU Assessment -- Current and Past Health -- Mental Health and Mental Illnesses -- Functional Health -- Preventative Treatments and Examinations -- Family Health -- Cultural Health -- Reference and Reflective Questions -- Chapter 3: Cultural Safety and Care Partners -- Cultural Safety -- Care Partners -- Reflective Questions -- Chapter 4: Summary -- Health History Summary -- Reflective Questions -- Key Takeaways0 aThis textbook is designed for the novice learner who is seeking to develop a foundational understanding of the complete subjective health assessment in the context of health and illness. The textbook deconstructs the categories of the complete subjective health assessment, providing learners with explanations and examples of what constitutes relevant subjective data. This textbook provides an opportunity to learn how to respond to normal, abnormal, and critical findings when completing a complete subjective health assessment1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aLapum, Jennifer L.eauthor1 aSt-Amant, Oonaeauthor1 aHughes, Michelleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/848zAccess online version01838nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137245008800147264004300235264004800278264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505015400503520043500657542004101092546001601133588004001149650002501189650002401214700003101238700002701269700002901296710003901325856007601364OTLid0000849MnU20260406020726.0m     o  d s      cr            200627s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA44000aInterpreting Canada’s 2019 Food Guide and Food Labelling for Health Professionals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: An Introduction to Canada's Food Guide -- Chapter 2: Nutrition Labelling -- Chapter 3: Integrating the Food Guide into the Nursing Process0 aThis textbook provides the novice learner with a foundational understanding of Canada’s 2019 Food Guide and Food Labelling. It highlights important considerations for future health professionals seeking to adopt the new food guide into their practice, including strategies towards healthy eating. This open textbook underscores a relational inquiry approach to inform discussions with clients about nutrition and healthy eating.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aLapum, Jennifer L.eauthor1 aSt-Amant, Oonaeauthor1 aHughes, Michelleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/849zAccess online version02420nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161245005900172264004300231264005500274264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505062300503520058401126542004101710546001601751588004001767650002301807650002701830700002501857700002501882710003901907856007601946OTLid0000850MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200627s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780359042111  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.300aElementary Abstract AlgebrabExamples and Applications 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKilleen, TexasbJustin Hill and Chris Thronc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preliminaries -- 2 Complex Numbers -- 3 Modular Arithmetic -- 4 Modular Arithmetic, Decimals, and Divisibility -- 5 Set Theory -- 6 Functions: Basic Concepts -- 7 Introduction to Cryptography -- 8 Sigma Notation -- 9 Polynomials -- 10 Symmetries of Plane Figures -- 11 Permutations -- 12 Introduction to Groups -- 13 Further Topics in Cryptography -- 14 Equivalence Relations and Equivalence Classes -- 15 Cosets and Quotient Groups (a.k.a. Factor Groups) -- 16 Error-Detecting and Correcting Codes -- 17 Isomorphisms of Groups -- 18 Homomorphisms of Groups -- 19 Group Actions -- 20 Introduction to Rings and Fields0 aThis book is not intended for budding mathematicians. It was created for a math program in which most of the students in upper-level math classes are planning to become secondary school teachers. For such students, conventional abstract algebra texts are practically incomprehensible, both in style and in content. Faced with this situation, we decided to create a book that our students could actually read for themselves. In this way we have been able to dedicate class time to problem-solving and personal interaction rather than rehashing the same material in lecture format.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aHill, Justineeditor1 aThron, Chriseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/850zAccess online version01949nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245003900155264004300194264004500237264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505042200459520032300881542001601204546001601220588004001236650003301276650004201309700002601351700003301377700002601410710003901436856007601475OTLid0000851MnU20260406020726.0m     o  d s      cr            200627s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648169977  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aApplied Fluid Mechanics Lab Manual 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aExperiment #1: Hydrostatic Pressure -- Experiment #2: Bernoulli's Theorem Demonstration -- Experiment #3: Energy Loss in Pipe Fittings -- Experiment #4: Energy Loss in Pipes -- Experiment #5: Impact of a Jet -- Experiment #6: Orifice and Free Jet Flow -- Experiment #7: Osborne Reynolds' Demonstration -- Experiment #8: Free and Forced Vortices -- Experiment #9: Flow Over Weirs -- Experiment #10: Pumps -- References0 aThis lab manual provides students with the theory, practical applications, objectives, and laboratory procedure of ten experiments. The manual also includes educational videos showing how student should run each experiment and a workbook for organizing data collected in the lab and preparing result tables and charts.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMaterials SciencevTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aAhmari, Habibeauthor1 aMd Imran Kabir, Shaheauthor1 aBowers, Ginnyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/851zAccess online version03034nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127245002600136264004300162264005400205264001200259300002200271336002600293337002600319338003600345341002800381490002700409505049300436520143900929542004102368546001602409588004002425650003802465700002702503700002702530710003902557856007602596OTLid0000853MnU20260406020726.0m     o  d s      cr            200627s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7602aA Tale of Two Systems 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2017. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. TeachEngineering (TE) Overview -- 2. Why Build (Twice!) Instead of Buy, Rent or Open Source? -- 3. TE 1.0 – XML -- 4. TE 2.0 – JSON -- 5. Relational (TE 1.0) vs. NoSQL (TE 2.0) -- 6. Document Accessioning -- 7. Why Build Revisited -- 8. The Develop… Test… Build… Deploy Cycle -- Appendix A: When Editing Code Files, Use a Text Editor; Not(!) a Word Processor -- Appendix B: (Unintended?) Denial of Service Attack -- Appendix C: Fake Link Requests -- Appendix D: I am robot…0 aThis is the story of a web-based information system rebuild. The system in question is www.teachengineering.org, a digital library of K-12 engineering curriculum that was built from the ground up with established technology and which for 13 years enjoyed lasting support from its growing user community and its sponsors. These 13 years, however, cover the period during which smart phones and tablets became commonplace, during which the Internet of Things started replacing the Semantic Web, during which NoSQL databases made their way out of the research labs and into everyday development shops, during which we collectively started moving IT functions and services into ‘the cloud,’ and during which computing performance doubled a few times, yet again. During this same period, TeachEngineering’s user base grew from a few hundred to more than 3 million users annually, its collection size quadrupled, it went through several user interface renewals, and significant functionality was added while having an exemplary service record, and it enjoyed continued financial support from its sponsors. In this monograph we provide a side-by-side of this rebuild. We lay out the choices made in the old architecture —we refer to it as TE 1.0— and compare and contrast them with the choices made for TE 2.0. We explain why both the 1.0 and 2.0 choices were made and discuss the advantages and disadvantages associated with them.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aReitsma, Renéeauthor1 aKrueger, Kevineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/853zAccess online version01929nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245008300138264004300221264005400264264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505067700495520008301172542003001255546001601285588004001301650002501341700002301366700002601389700002501415710003901440856007601479OTLid0000854MnU20260406020726.0m     o  d s      cr            200627s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.300aChemical Biology & Biochemistry Laboratory Using Genetic Code Expansion Manual 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Background -- 2. Overview of Laboratory Responsibilities Tentative Schedule -- 3. Objectives for Week 1 -- 4. Concepts for Choosing and Expressing Mutants -- 5. Objectives for Week 2 -- 6. Concepts for Protein Expression -- 7. Methods for Protein Expression -- 8. Concepts for SDS-PAGE -- 9. Methods for SDS-PAGE -- 10. Objectives for Week 3 -- 11. Concepts for Protein Purification and Desalting -- 12. Methods for Protein Purification and Desalting -- 13. Microfluidizer Lysis Method -- 14. Objectives for Week 4 -- 15. Methods for Protein Standard Curves and SDS-PAGE -- 16. Objectives for Weeks 5-9 -- 17. Concepts for Enzyme Assays -- 18. Methods for Enzyme Assays0 aChemical Biology & Biochemistry Laboratory Using Genetic Code Expansion Manual1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks1 aMehl, Ryaneauthor1 avan Zee, Karieauthor1 aKean, Kelseyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/854zAccess online version02534nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245006400153264004300217264006800260264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505057000505520076601075542003001841546001601871588004101887650002401928700003001952700002401982700002702006710003902033856007602072OTLid0000855MnU20260406020457.0m     o  d s      cr            200629s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548247  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBL100aStudying the BiblebThe Tanakh and Early Christian Writings 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection I Introduction -- Chapter One The Bible and Literature -- Chapter Two The Composition, Editing, and Transmission of the Bible -- Section II The Hebrew Bible -- Chapter Three The Torah -- Chapter Four The Former Prophets -- Chapter Five The Latter Prophets -- Chapter Six The Writings -- Chapter Seven Apocalypse -- Chapter Eight The Apocrypha and Post-Exilic Literature -- Section III The Early Christian Writings -- Chapter Nine The Gospels -- Chapter Ten The Acts of the Apostles -- Chapter Eleven The Pauline Letters -- Chapter Twelve The General Letters0 aStudying the Bible: The Tanakh and Early Christian Writings is a university-level, textbook introduction to the study of the Bible, its literary forms, and historical and cultural contexts. This textbook is a companion to the Bible courses taught in the English Department at Kansas State University, in particular ENGL 470 The Bible, though it is available for use in other courses and contexts. This textbook examines the Hebrew Bible (also known as the Tanakh) and the early Christian writings of the New Testament. It is an introduction to the analysis of biblical texts, their histories, and their interpretations. The emphasis throughout this textbook is on the literary qualities of these biblical texts as well as their cultural and historical contexts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aReligionvTextbooks1 aEiselein, Gregoryeauthor1 aGoins, Annaeauthor1 aWood, Naomi J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/855zAccess online version03662nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245005000154250001900204264004300223264006800266264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505150800511520090502019542004102924546001602965588004102981650003803022700003203060700002603092700003103118710003903149856007603188OTLid0000856MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200629s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548155  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aUnmanned Aircraft Systems in the Cyber Domain  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - A View of the UAS Market -- Chapter 2 - UAS Law - Legislation, Regulation, and Adjudication -- Chapter 3 - Understanding Hostile Use and Cyber-Vulnerabilities of UAS -- Chapter 4 - INFOSEC – Protecting UAS Information Channels & Components -- Chapter 5 - Intelligence & Red Teaming -- Chapter 6 - Case Studies in Risk for UAS -- Chapter 7 - UAS SAA Methodologies, Conflict Detection -- Chapter 8 - Designing UAS Systems for Stealth -- Chapter 9 - Case Study Smart Skies Project -- Chapter 10 - UAS Intelligence, Surveillance and Reconnaissance (ISR) -- Chapter 11 - UAS Weapons -- Chapter 12 - UAS System Deployment and Information Dominance (ID) -- Chapter 13 - Data Links Functions, Attributes and Latency -- Chapter 14 - Exposing UAS Vulnerabilities via Electronic Warfare (EW) and Countering with Low Probability Intercept Signals (LPI) -- Chapter 15 - Africa - World’s First Busiest Drone Operational Proving Ground -- Chapter 16 - Chinese Drones in Spratly Islands, and Chinese Threats to USA forces in Pacific -- Chapter 17 - High-Altitude Platforms (HAPS) – A Promise not Reached -- Chapter 18 - C-UAS and Large Scale Threats -- Chapter 19 - Audiology, Acoustic Countermeasures against Swarms and Building IFF Libraries -- Chapter 20 - Legal and Regulatory – Where It Was, Where It Is and What’s Ahead? -- Chapter 21 - Chinese UAS Proliferation along New Silk Road Sea/Land Routes -- Chapter 22 - Ethics in the New Age of Autonomous Systems and Artificial Intelligence (AI)0 aUnmanned Aircraft Systems are an integral part of the US national critical infrastructure. The authors have endeavored to bring a breadth and quality of information to the reader that is unparalleled in the unclassified sphere. This textbook will fully immerse and engage the reader / student in the cyber-security considerations of this rapidly emerging technology that we know as unmanned aircraft systems (UAS). The first edition topics covered National Airspace (NAS) policy issues, information security (INFOSEC), UAS vulnerabilities in key systems (Sense and Avoid / SCADA), navigation and collision avoidance systems, stealth design, intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance (ISR) platforms; weapons systems security; electronic warfare considerations; data-links, jamming, operational vulnerabilities and still-emerging political scenarios that affect US military / commercial decisions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aNichols, Randall K.eauthor1 aMumm, Hans C.eauthor1 aLonstein, Wayne D.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/856zAccess online version02740nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245005700177250001600234264004300250264006900293264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505022700539520134100766542003002107546001602137588004002153650002002193650002602213710003902239856007602278OTLid0000857MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200629s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548407  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aRosine, Amyeauthor00aVocal Techniques for the InstrumentalistcAmy Rosine  a2nd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- The Vocal Instrument -- Motivation -- Respiration -- Phonation -- Resonance -- Articulation -- Learning and Performing Vocal Solos -- Identifying Voice Type -- Adolescent Singers -- Appendix -- Bibliography0 aVocal Techniques, the course title used at many institutions, is essentially a voice class for instrumentalists, and is often a required course for instrumental music education majors seeking all-level certification. Students take at least one Vocal Techniques course to learn proper singing technique along with basic pedagogy. Some courses include teaching techniques as they apply to adolescent singers. The focus of the course is the development of the individual singing voice. This includes breathing, tone production, articulation, musicality and textual expression and understanding. Students also develop confidence in front of groups, improve their general vocal quality, and learn that a healthy voice serves them well in general and performance classrooms. The purpose of this text is to teach instrumental music education students about vocal production as it applies to solo singing. Beginning with a foundational understanding of breathing, singers will learn about the vocal instrument (anatomy), how to create clear, pleasant, tone (phonation and resonance), pronounce words clearly (articulation and diction) and the similarities and differences of singing technique when compared to that of their major instrument. This is the first textbook to explore teaching voice as it directly pertains to playing an instrument.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/857zAccess online version01977nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245008700167264004300254264005400297264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505008500528520079100613542002701404546001601431588004001447650002501487710003901512856007601551OTLid0000858MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            200629s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM5861 aHurst, Allison L.eauthor00aClassical Sociological Theory and Foundations of American SociologycAllison Hurst 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Marx and Engels -- II. Durkheim -- III. Weber -- IV. Early American Sociology0 aThere are a few major themes that come up over and over again during the course of classical sociological theory’s development. All three classical theorists were writing at a time when sociology was a new and emerging discipline. This new discipline was called forth by momentous social changes taking place in European (and American) society during this time period. These changes were related to the rise of capitalism, industrialization, and new political representation for the majority of people (or, at least, a desire for such by many). Calls for socialism emerged as a response to recognition of new social divisions. Each of the three theorists you will read here weighed in on these historical changes, theorizing the contours and dynamics of this new “modern” society.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/858zAccess online version02452nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245003000139250001600169264004300185264005400228264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505034300459520095800802542003001760546001601790588004001806650002301846700002801869700002601897700002801923710003901951856007601990OTLid0000859MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200629s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.200aEntomology 311 Lab Manual  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWeek 1: Introduction to Collection and Curation -- Week 2: Paleoptera and the Primitive Insects -- Week 3: Coleoptera and Lepidoptera -- Week 4: Orthopteroid Orders -- Week 5: Hemiptera -- Week 6: Pests, Predators, and Parasitoids, Pt. II -- Week 7: Soil Insects -- Week 8: Pollinators -- Week 9: The Human Body Biome -- Insect Collection0 aLabs in this book supplement the information gained in lecture, as well as providing some perspective and experience with hands-on applications of ideas in pest management. The labs are presented in week-by-week order, so the pre-labs and reading for week 1 are labeled “Pre-Lab 1” and “Week 1 Reading”. Pre-Labs are assignments to be done before lab meets, and will be due at the beginning of Lab. Complete the labs using your textbook, web resources, or the reading assigned for the week. Readings are short 1-3 page “chapters” covering background topics pertinent to the upcoming lab, particular groups of insects/arthropods, or methods used in Pest Management. This should be read before coming to Lab each week. Lab Assignments need to be printed and brought to class so that they can be completed as a group in Lab. It is sometimes helpful to read through the assignment ahead of time to get an idea of the subject matter for the week.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aScherr, Melissaeauthor1 aAdams, Danieleeditor1 aBullock, Bayleeeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/859zAccess online version01861nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245005600167250001600223264004300239264005400282264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505016900513520057500682542004101257546001601298588004001314650003001354710003901384856007601423OTLid0000860MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            200701s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aSchmittner, Andreaseauthor00aIntroduction to Climate SciencecAndreas Schmittner  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2018. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Weather -- 2. Observations -- 3. Paleoclimate -- 4. Theory -- 5. Carbon -- 6. Processes -- 7. Models -- 8. Impacts -- 9. Economics -- 10. Ethics -- 11. Solutions0 aThis book describes how Earth's climate is changing, how it has been changing in the recent geological past and how it may change in the future. It covers the physical sciences that build the foundations of our current understanding of global climate change such as radiation, Earth's energy balance, the greenhouse effect and the carbon cycle. Both natural and human causes for climate change are discussed. Impacts of climate change on natural and human systems are summarized. Ethical and economical aspects of human-caused climate change and solutions are presented.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/860zAccess online version02383nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100003100150245007000181250001600251264004300267264005400310264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505063500541520056301176542003001739546001601769588004001785650003401825650002301859710003901882856007601921OTLid0000861MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200701s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aQH3011 aCampbell, Holly V.eauthor00aMarine Law and Policy for Scientists and ManagerscHolly Campbell  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1 - Our Public Oceans -- Unit 2 - Management of Protected Marine Species -- Unit 3 - Managing Through Specially Designated Areas -- Unit 4 - Our Fisheries -- Unit 5 - Regulating Ocean Impacts -- Unit 6 - Introduction to International Fisheries Management -- Unit 7 - Current Problems in American Ocean Management: Illegal, Unreported, and Unregulated (IUU) Fishing -- Unit 8 - U.S. Management of Offshore Energy -- Unit 9 - Coastal Management in the United States -- Unit 10 - Restoring Marine Environments: The Roles of Innovative Regulatory, Planning and Human Dimensions Tools -- Unit 11 – The Future of Ocean Management0 aThis open educational resource is designed for use by undergraduate and graduate ocean science, natural resource, fisheries and wildlife, and environmental policy students enrolled in a ten-week academic quarter. The purpose of this project is to provide students and non-law professionals with a freely accessible, clearly written guide to support engaging and effective learning. As such, the book serves as a gateway and an invitation to become a well informed, committed and involved ocean citizen as well as to explore the field beyond our course study.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/861zAccess online version02354nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127245007400136250001600210264004300226264005400269264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505054700500520058101047542004101628546001601669588004001685650003301725700003401758700002801792700003301820710003901853856007601892OTLid0000862MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            200701s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA7100aState and Local Government and PoliticsbProspects for Sustainability  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction and Themes -- Chapter 2: Federalism -- Chapter 3: The New Margins: Sustainability -- Chapter 4: Key Actors and the Policy Process in State and Local Governments -- Chapter 5: State Constitutions -- Chapter 6: Legislatures -- Chapter 7: Executives -- Chapter 8: Courts -- Chapter 9: State and Local Bureaucracy and Administration -- Chapter 10: Budgeting and Sustainability -- Chapter 11: Entitlements -- Chapter 12: Traditional and Visible Services: Criminal Justice, Education, Transportation and Emergency Management0 aOur book represents a unique opportunity for three generations of scholars to reflect upon and collectively consider their decades’ long research, and the meaning of that research to both the broader society and to students of contemporary politics. Nicholas Lovrich served as a graduate school mentor to Brent Steel, and Brent in turn mentored Christopher A. Simon as an undergraduate and guided him to study with Lovrich. Steel and Lovrich have collaborated on research for over 30 years, while Simon has frequently collaborated with Steel and Lovrich for nearly 20 years.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aSimon, Christopher A.eauthor1 aSteel, Brent S.eauthor1 aLovrich, Nicholas P.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/862zAccess online version04542nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153050000900163050001000172245005900182250001600241264004300257264005700300264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505238500534520070702919542001603626546001603642588004103658650002303699650004303722650003303765650002503798700003103823700003003854700003003884700003103914710003903945856007603984OTLid0000863MnU20240325081522.0m     o  d s      cr            200702s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781734328905  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aHM621 4aJA71 4aHM58600aSlavery to LiberationbThe African American Experience  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRichmond, KentuckybEncompass Digital Archivec2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCh. 1: Introduction to the African American Experience, by Aaron Thompson -- Ch. 2: Concepts of Beauty: Black and White Connotations, by Norman Powell -- Ch. 3: Gumboot Dancing, Origins, Influences and Uses, by Nicola Mason -- Ch. 4: “The Strong Cords of Affection” Enslaved African American Families and Escape to the U.S. North and Canada, 1800 1861, by Oran Kennedy -- Ch. 5: Some Notes on the History of Black Sexuality in the United States, by John P. Elia -- Ch. 6: Race, Identity, and Choice: Black Voices on Liberia and the American Colonization Society, Thomas Keefe -- Ch. 7: The Education of African Americans in the U.S., by Jayne Beilke -- Ch. 8: “It is Our Freedom that Makes Us Different”: Freedom and Identity in Post-Civil War Indian Territory and Oklahoma, by Leroy Myers -- Ch. 9: Eco-ability: The Complex Embodiment of Blind Lemon Jefferson, by Jonathan S. Lower -- Ch. 10: "Fire on the Hills" : The All-Black 2nd Ranger Infantry Company, by James Sandy -- Ch. 11: Prophecy in the Streets: Prophetic Christianity and the Civil Rights Movement, by Richard Thomas -- Ch. 12: “The Whole Matter Revolves around the Self-Respect of My People”: Black Conservative Women in the Civil Rights Era, by Joshua D. Farrington -- Ch. 13: The Origins of Africana Studies: A Brief History of a Scholar Activist Tradition, by Sekhmet Ra Em Kht Maat and Shelby Pumphre -- Ch. 14: The Vanguard of the Revolution: A Retrospective Analysis of the Black Panther Party, by Umeme Sababu -- Ch. 15: "Black Steel”: Intraracial Rivalry, Soft Power, and Prize Fighting in the Cold War World, by Andrew Smith -- Ch. 16: Black Martial Artists: Modernity in Pursuit of an African Fighting System in the African Diaspora, by Latif A. Tarik -- Ch. 17: Womanifesto: Historicizing the Literary Activism of Claudia Jones and Assata Shakur, by Kimberly F. Monroe -- Ch. 18: Critical Issues in African American Health, by Kevin McQueeney -- Ch. 19: Black Radicalism, Black Consciousness, Black History, Black Liberation, Black YouTube: A New Age Revolution, by Cheryl Mango -- Ch. 20: For the Culture: Examining the Electoral Success of African American Incumbents in the U.S. Congress, by Emmitt Y. Riley, III -- About the Editors and Contributors -- Ch. 14: For the Culture: Examining the Electoral Success of African American Incumbents in the U.S. Congress, by Emmitt Y. Riley III0 aSlavery to Liberation: The African American Experience gives instructors, students, and general readers a comprehensive and up-to-date account of African Americans’ cultural and political history, economic development, artistic expressiveness, and religious and philosophical worldviews in a critical framework. It offers sound interdisciplinary analysis of selected historical and contemporary issues surrounding the origins and manifestations of White supremacy in the United States. By placing race at the center of the work, the book offers significant lessons for understanding the institutional marginalization of Blacks in contemporary America and their historical resistance and perseverance.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aFarrington, Joshuaeauthor1 aPowell, Norman W.eauthor1 aGraham, Gwendolyneauthor1 aAnyanwu, Ogechi E.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/863zAccess online version03902nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137100002600148245004800174264004300222264003700265264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505128400479520151001763542001603273546001603289588004103305650003303346650003403379710003903413856007603452OTLid0000864MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200702s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC58001 aBeatty, Brianeauthor00aHybrid-Flexible Course DesigncBrian Beatty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbEdTech Booksc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit I. Hybrid-Flexible Course Design to Support Student-Directed Learning Paths -- 1.1. Beginnings -- 1.2. Costs and Benefits for Hybrid-Flexible Courses and Programs -- 1.3. Values and Principles of Hybrid-Flexible Course Design -- 1.4. Designing a Hybrid-Flexible Course -- Unit II. Implementation and Adoption of Hybrid-Flexible Instruction -- 2.1. Teaching a Hybrid-Flexible Course -- 2.2. Learning in a Hybrid-Flexible Course -- 2.3. Supporting Hybrid-Flexible Courses and Programs -- 2.4. Expanding the Implementation of Hybrid-Flexible Courses and Programs -- 2.5. Evaluating the Impact of Hybrid-Flexible Courses and Programs -- Unit III. Hybrid-Flexible Implementations Around the World -- 3.1. Fitting Flexibility Across the Curriculum -- 3.2. One Size Fits None -- 3.3. New Technologies Deliver on the Promise of HyFlex -- 3.4. Using HyFlex in Statistics for Engineers and (Data) Scientists -- 3.5. HyFlex in Northern Ontario -- 3.6. HyFlex at Montana State University Billings -- 3.7. A Faculty Transitional Journey from Single Mode to HyFlex Teaching -- 3.8. Hyflex Learning within the Master of Teaching Program@KU Leuven -- 3.9. Increasing Flexibility, Satisfaction, and Efficiency Using the Hybrid Flexible Approach -- 3.10. Contribute Your Hybrid-Flexible Story0 aThis volume provides readers with methods, case stories, and strategies related to Hybrid-Flexible (HyFlex) course design so that they may make decisions about using it themselves and even begin their own HyFlex course (re)design. More specifically, based on the needs identified for their course(s), readers will be able to a) determine if and how HyFlex course design could help them solve critical needs, b) take advantage of emerging opportunities to improve their education practice, enabling them to better serve more students, c) gain an awareness of the HyFlex design, d) find their own innovative HyFlex solution to their specific challenges, and e) begin the HyFlex implementation process using strategies similar to those used by instructors described in this book. The volume describes the fundamental principles of HyFlex design, explains a process for design and development, and discusses implementation factors that instructors have experienced in various higher education institutions. These factors include the drivers, the variations in implementation approaches and constraints, and the results (e.g., student scores, student satisfaction). A series of worksheets provides specific guidance that can be used by individuals or teams engaging in HyFlex design projects at their own institution. Case reports from institutions and faculty who have successfully implemented HyFlex-style courses provide a rich set of real-world stories to draw insights for a reader’s own design setting.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/864zAccess online version03042nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001300139245005700152264004300209264006700252264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505033900496520150300835542002302338546001602361588004102377650003002418650003402448700002702482700003202509710003902541856007602580OTLid0000865MnU20260223020649.0m     o  d s      cr            200702s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKBP1572 4aKF385.A400aProfessional ResponsibilitybAn Open-Source Casebook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLexington, KentuckybBrian L. Frye & Elizabeth Schillerc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection 1: Introduction -- Section 2: The Attorney-Client Relationship -- Section 3: The Legal Duties of an Attorney -- Section 4: Conflicts of Interest -- Section 5: Confidentiality -- Section 6: Advocacy & Conduct -- Section 7: The Regulation of the Legal Profession -- Section 8: Justifying the Rules of Professional Responsibility0 aWe wanted this casebook to be as easy to use and understand as possible. Accordingly, we included not only cases, but also the text of the rules and restatements, as well as concise explanations of the relevant law. Each chapter of the book addresses a different issue, in the following format. First, it clearly and concisely explains the relevant law governing that issue. Then provides the relevant text of any statutes, Model Rules, sections of the Restatement of the Law Governing Lawyers, or other sources, with a link to an open-source versions of the full text, when available. It provides one or more heavily edited cases intended to illustrate the application of the law at issue, with a link to an open-source version of the full text of the case. Each case is preceded by a brief summary of its facts, reasoning, and holding, and followed by questions intended to indicate subjects for further investigation or discussion. And finally, it includes citations to law review articles and other materials relevant to the law at issue, with links to open-source versions of those materials, when available. This casebook covers a wide range of different subjects related to the professional responsibility of attorneys. While it is possible to cover all of this material in a three credit-hour course, you may wish to omit some subjects. You may also wish to supplement the materials in this casebook with additional materials. We encourage you to use this casebook in any way that you like.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aProcedural LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aFrye, Brian L.eauthor1 aSchiller, Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/865zAccess online version02997nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001100139245003100150264004300181264005400224264001200278300002200290336002600312337002600338338003600364341002500400490002700425505116700452520065101619542003002270546001602300588004002316650002302356650002502379700002502404700003002429700002502459710003902484856007602523OTLid0000866MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            200702s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQD31.300aBiochemistrybFree For All 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBasic Biology -- Basic Chemistry -- Water and Buffers -- Amino Acids -- Protein Structure -- Structure and Function of Nucleic Acids -- Structure and Function of Carbohydrates -- Structure and Function of Lipids -- Membranes: Basic Concepts -- Membranes: Transport -- Membranes: Other Considerations -- Catalysis: Basic Principles -- Catalysis: Control of Activity -- Catalysis: Mechanisms -- Blood Clotting -- Energy: Basics -- Electron Transport and Oxidative Phosphorylation -- Photophosphorylation -- Metabolism of Sugars -- Metabolism of Polysaccharides -- Citric Acid Cycle -- Metabolism of Fats and Fatty Acids -- Metabolism of Other Lipids -- Metabolis of Amino Acids and the Urea Cycle -- Metabolism of Nucleotides -- Genes and Genomes -- DNA Replication -- DNA Repair -- Transcription -- RNA Processing -- Translation -- Regulation of Gene Expression -- Cell Signaling -- Basic Techniques -- Point by Point: In the Beginning -- Point by Point: Structure and Function -- Point by Point: Membranes -- Point by Point: Catalysis -- Point by Point: Energy -- Point by Point: Metabolism -- Point by Point: Information Processing -- Point by Point: Techniques0 aWe are happy to welcome you to our second Open Educational Resource (OER) textbook, Biochemistry Free For All. Biochemistry is a relatively young science, but its rate of growth has been truly impressive. The rapid pace of discoveries, which shows no sign of slowing, is reflected in the steady increase in the size of biochemistry textbooks. Growing faster than the size of biochemistry books have been the skyrocketing costs of higher education and the even faster rising costs of college textbooks. These unfortunate realities have created a situation where the costs of going to college are beyond the means of increasing numbers of students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aChemistryvTextbooks1 aAhern, Kevineauthor1 aRajagopal, Indiraeauthor1 aTan, Taralyneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/866zAccess online version01982nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100005900136245008800195264004300283264004800326264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505031500551520053600866542002701402546001601429588004001445650003201485710003901517856007601556OTLid0000867MnU20260330020736.0m     o  d s      cr            200705s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aDigital Education Strategies, The Chang Schooleauthor00aUnderstanding Document AccessibilitycThe Chang School Digital Education Strategies 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, OntariobRyerson Universityc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout Document Accessibility -- Authoring Techniques for Accessible Office Documents: Word Processing Applications -- Authoring Techniques for Accessible Office Documents: Spreadsheet Applications -- Authoring Techniques for Accessible Office Documents: Presentation Applications -- PDF Production Applications0 aWith much of the world gone digital, learning to create documents that are accessible to everyone is becoming a necessary skill. Intended for a general audience, this free resource reviews a wide range of document authoring applications, including the tools they contain for creating accessible documents, and tests them to ensure they do not contain potential barriers. Learn how to create accessible word processed documents, spreadsheets, presentation slides, and PDF documents, among others, so they are accessible to everyone.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/867zAccess online version02566nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003300135245005100168250001400219264004300233264005300276264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002800451490002700479505036800506520112200874542001601996546001602012588004102028650002002069710003902089856007602128OTLid0000868MnU20260406020500.0m     o  d s      cr            200705s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aBoltz, Christopher Reauthor00aTechnical Theatre PracticumcChristopher Boltz  aVersion 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Jobs in Technical Theatre -- Chapter 2: Working in a New Venue -- Chapter 3: Performance Etiquette -- Chapter 4: The Actor Scene Breakdown -- Chapter 5: Scenery -- Chapter 6: Stage Properties -- Chapter 7: Stage Lighting -- Chapter 8: Costumes -- Chapter 9: Sound -- Chapter 10: Blocking Notation -- Chapter 11: Production -- Chapter 12: Cueing Scripts0 aWelcome to the exciting world of technical theatre. Studying this topic can lead to many different careers in several different sectors of the economy. The general skills needed for any of the careers or sectors have many things in common. Workers need to be dead-line oriented, as most productions have firm timelines that cannot be altered. Critical thinking and analysis are much needed skills. Almost every project in the field is unique and technicians and designers alike must discover the best way of reaching a project’s goal. Creative problem solving is trait successful practitioners have in common. With every project being unique, there are no guaranteed solutions to the problems that are presented. Technicians draw on their vast experience of what worked in the past that can be adapted to be a solution to the current problems. Clear communication and collaboration round out the necessary skills. No technical theatre project is ever handled by one person on their own. Collaboration with many people is the norm, and successful collaboration requires clear written and verbal communication skills.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/868zAccess online version02153nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002700137245006400164264004300228264007300271264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505040400521520063900925542004101564546001601605588004101621650002601662710003901688856007601727OTLid0000869MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200705s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aPayne, Whitneyeauthor00aHuman Behavior and the Social Environment IIcWhitney Payne 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Traditional Paradigms & Dominant Perspectives on Individuals -- II. Alternative Perspectives on Individuals -- III. Perspectives on Families -- IV. Perspectives on Groups -- V. Stages of Group Development & Group Think -- VI. Perspectives on Organizations -- VII. Perspectives on Communities -- VIII. Communities & Police Relations -- IX. Global Perspectives & Theories -- X. Additional Resources0 aThese materials will help students and instructors alike explore human behavior and how it is shaped and impacted by both traditional and non-traditional paradigms. This text will also support the reader in having a deeper understanding of how the environment, in all of its complexity, can affect individuals, families, groups, and communities. It is my hope that the information contained in this book will help you, as a future social worker, approach client systems with empathy, understanding, and a compassionate curiosity that allows for comprehensive assessment, individualized approaches to treatment, and continuity of care.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/869zAccess online version02302nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245005100163250001600214264004300230264008400273264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505044900534520070000983542001601683546001601699588004001715650002501755700003301780710003901813856007601852OTLid0000870MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            200705s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG1281 aDorrell, Davideauthor00aIntroduction to Human GeographycDavid Dorrell  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc2019. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Geography -- Chapter 2: Population and Health -- Chapter 3: Migration -- Chapter 4: Folk Culture and Popular Culture -- Chapter 5: The Geography of Language -- Chapter 6: Religion -- Chapter 7: Ethnicity and Race -- Chapter 8: Political Geography -- Chapter 9: Development and Wealth -- Chapter 10: Agriculture and Food -- Chapter 11: Industry -- Chapter 12: Human Settlements -- Chapter 13: Environment and Resources0 aGeography is a diverse discipline that has some sort of connection to most every other academic discipline. This connection is the spatial perspective, which essentially means if a phenomenon can be mapped, it has some kind of relationship to geography. Studying the entire world is a fascinating subject, and geographical knowledge is fundamental to a competent understanding of our world. In this chapter, you will learn what geography is as well as some of the fundamental concepts that underpin the discipline. These fundamental terms and concepts will be interwoven throughout the text, so a sound understanding of these topics is critical as you delve deeper into the chapters that follow.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks1 aHenderson, Joseph P.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/870zAccess online version02238nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002500149245003800174250001600212264004300228264005400271264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505043400502520066500936542003001601546001601631588004001647650002401687650002601711710003901737856007601776OTLid0000871MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            200705s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aMorris, Johneauthor00aStrategic ManagementcJohn Morris  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2023. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part 1. Strategic Management Overview -- Part 2. Corporate Governance -- Part 3. The External Environment -- Part 4. Internal Capability -- Part 5. Business-level Strategy -- Part 6. Formulating Strategy -- Part 7. Corporate-level Strategy -- Part 8. Analysis and Reporting -- Index to Tools and Models Used in the Textbook -- Publication History -- Creative Commons License -- Recommended Citations -- Versioning0 aThis open source textbook is derived from many sources, initially from the Principles of Management by Carpenter, Bauer, and Erdogan, but there is abundant new content as well. It is published under a Creative Commons license and as such there is no charge ever for this textbook. The most important change from 1e is that static content was removed to make room for student-generated dynamic content. Throughout the book look for the names of contributing students in the red colored example boxes. As the term progresses, you will see new examples appear as fellow students research and summarize topics for current events, all are curated by the instructor.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/871zAccess online version02685nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002800139245004100167250001600208264004300224264005400267264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505059600498520100501094542003002099546001602129588004002145650002302185710003902208856007602247OTLid0000873MnU20260406020745.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aBruslind, Lindaeauthor00aGeneral MicrobiologycLinda Bruslind  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Microbiology -- 2. Microscopes -- 3. Cell Structure -- 4. Bacteria: Cell Walls -- 5. Bacteria: Internal Components -- 6. Bacteria: Surface Structures -- 7. Archaea -- 8. Introduction to Viruses -- 9. Microbial Growth -- 10. Environmental Factors -- 11. Microbial Nutrition -- 12. Energetics & Redox Reactions -- 13. Chemoorganotrophy -- 14. Chemolithotrophy & Nitrogen Metabolism -- 15. Phototrophy -- 16. Taxonomy & Evolution -- 17. Microbial Genetics -- 18. Genetic Engineering -- 19. Genomics -- 20. Microbial Symbioses -- 21. Bacterial Pathogenicity -- 22. The Viruses0 aWelcome to the wonderful world of microbiology! Yay! So. What is microbiology? If we break the word down it translates to “the study of small life,” where the small life refers to microorganisms or microbes. But who are the microbes? And how small are they? Generally microbes can be divided in to two categories: the cellular microbes (or organisms) and the acellular microbes (or agents). In the cellular camp we have the bacteria, the archaea, the fungi, and the protists (a bit of a grab bag composed of algae, protozoa, slime molds, and water molds). Cellular microbes can be either unicellular, where one cell is the entire organism, or multicellular, where hundreds, thousands or even billions of cells can make up the entire organism. In the acellular camp we have the viruses and other infectious agents, such as prions and viroids. In this textbook the focus will be on the bacteria and archaea (traditionally known as the “prokaryotes,”) and the viruses and other acellular agents.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/873zAccess online version02859nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007800163250001600241264004300257264008400300264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505019700561520150800758542003002266546001602296588004002312650003002352710003902382856007602421OTLid0000874MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aGranshaw, Frankeauthor00aClimate ToolkitbA Resource Manual for Science and ActioncFrank Granshaw  aVersion 2.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2021. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Weather / Climate Basics -- Part II. Present Impacts -- Part III. Past Climate Change -- Part IV. Potential Climate Change -- Part V. Going forward - Mitigation, adaptation, and action0 aThe Climate Toolkit is a resource manual designed to help the reader navigate the complex and perplexing issue of climate change by providing tools and strategies to explore the underlying science. As such it contains a collection of activities that make use of readily available on-line resources developed by research groups and public agencies. These include web-based climate models, climate data archives, interactive atlases, policy papers, and “solution” catalogs. Unlike a standard textbook, it is designed to help readers do their own climate research and devise their own perspective rather than providing them with a script to assimilate and repeat. The activities in the manual are divided into five sections that include weather and climate basics, present climate impacts, past climate change, future change and impacts, and strategies for climate mitigation and adaptation. These are followed by three appendices which contain information about the on-line tools used in the activities in this manual; a catalog of on-line and print resources produced by research groups, government agencies, and community groups involved in climate and sustainability work; and background on the history and key players in the international climate negotiation process. Though originally aimed at undergraduate non-science majors, the manual has been broadened for a wider audience in non-academic settings like community groups, service organizations, workplace study groups, and faith communities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/874zAccess online version01772nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001200157050001000169245002500179264004300204264003700247264001200284300002200296336002600318337002600344338003600370341002800406490002700434505026800461520038300729542001601112546001601128588004001144650002301184650002801207650002401235710003901259856007601298OTLid0000875MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781734914115  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRS1-441 4aRA44000aNursing Pharmacology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Kinetics & Dynamics -- II. Legal/Ethical -- III. Antimicrobials -- IV. Autonomic Nervous System -- V. Respiratory -- VI. Cardiovascular & Renal System -- VII. Gastrointestinal -- VIII. Central Nervous System -- IX. Endocrine -- X. Analgesic and Musculoskeletal0 aThis open access Nursing Pharmacology textbook is designed for entry-level undergraduate nursing students. It explains basic concepts of pharmacology and describes common medication classes. This book is not intended to be used as a drug reference book, but direct links are provided to DailyMed, which provides trustworthy information about marketed drugs in the United States.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aPharmacologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/875zAccess online version02307nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245007100167250001600238264004300254264005000297264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505049200524520070701016542002701723546001601750588004101766650002301807710003901830856007601869OTLid0000876MnU20260406020500.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHG1731 aBarreto, Humbertoeauthor00aIntermediate Microeconomics with Microsoft ExcelcHumberto Barreto  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGreencastle, IndianabHumberto Barretoc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Consumer Behavior -- 1 Budget Constraint -- 2 Satisfaction -- 3 Optimal Choice -- 4 Comparative Statics -- 5 Endowment Models -- 6 Bads -- 7 Search Theory -- 8 Behavioral Economics -- 9 Rational Addiction -- II The Firm -- 10 Production Function -- 11 Input Cost Minimization -- 12 Output Profit Maximization -- 13 Input Profit Maximization -- 14 Consistency -- 15 Monopoly -- 16 Game Theory -- III The Market System -- 17 Partial Equilibrium -- 18 General Equilibrium -- IV Conclusion0 aThis book is based on the idea that there is a particular framework used by economists to interpret observed reality. This framework has been called the economic way of thinking, the economic approach, and the method of economics. This book is different from the many other books that attempt to teach microeconomics in three ways: It explicitly applies the recipe of the economic approach in every example. It uses concrete examples via Microsoft Excel in every application, which enables the reader to manipulate live graphs and learn numerical methods of optimization. The majority of the content is in the Excel workbooks which the reader uses to create meaning. You learn by doing, not by reading.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/876zAccess online version02427nam a2200505 i 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.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3400 4aK623 4aK3154 4aK7265 4aKB3790 4aK7200 4aKF385.A400aFundamentals of Business Law 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDenver, ColoradobMelissa Randallc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Law and Types of Legal Systems -- 2. The United States Court System -- 3. Litigation -- 4. Alternative Dispute Resolution -- 5. The Constitution -- 6. International Law -- 7. Administrative Law -- 8. Criminal Law -- 9. Torts -- 10. Contracts -- 11. Sales Contracts -- 12. Writing Contracts -- 13. Employment Law -- 14. Anti-Discrimination Law -- 15. Agency -- 16. Business Organizations -- 17. Partnerships -- 18. Corporations -- 19. Antitrust Law -- 20. Consumer Law -- 21. Workplace Privacy and Information Security -- 22. Property -- 23. Intellectual Property -- 24. Bankruptcy0 aUndergraduate business law textbook written by Melissa Randall and Community College of Denver Students in collaboration with lawyers and business professionals for use in required 200 level business law courses in the United States. This book is an introductory survey of the legal topics required in undergraduate business law classes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAdministrative LawvTextbooks 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aRandall, Melissaeauthor1 aStudents, Community College of Denvereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/877zAccess online version02150nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007000163264004300233264005400276264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505042400507520063800931542003001569546001601599588004001615650003001655710003901685856007601724OTLid0000878MnU20260406020747.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aMilison, Andreweauthor00aPermaculture DesignbTools for Climate ResiliencecAndrew Milison 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Climate Assessment -- 1. Climate -- 2. Climate Classification Systems -- 3. The Climate Analogue Tool -- 4. Climate Analogue Examples -- 5. Climate Change Projections -- 6. Climate Change Analogue -- 7. Climate Change Analogue Examples -- Part 2: Design Strategies for Climate Resilience -- 8. Drought, Heat, and Erratic Rainfall -- 9. Wildfire -- 10. Tropical Cyclone Effects -- 11. Sea Level Rise and Flooding0 aClimate is also where we begin the design process in another tool referenced in the Permaculture design system. This is the Scale of Landscape Permanence, originated by P.A.Yeomans, the founder of Keyline™ Design. Yeomans asserts that the order of design is: Climate Landshape Water Supply Roads/Access Trees Structures Subdivision Fences Soil This book is predominantly about climate, and the macro influences of climate and climate change on design. As we get through the topics of climate analogues and climate change forecasting, we will end up moving down this list to see the climate’s influence on specific design choices.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/878zAccess online version03113nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001200153100003700165245004700202264004300249264005500292264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505056300524520136001087542003002447546001602477588004002493650002002533650002602553650002102579710003902600856007602639OTLid0000879MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            200707s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780472901289  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aFosler-Lussier, Danielleeauthor00aMusic on the MovecDanielle Fosler-Lussier 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAnn Arbor, MIbUniversity of Michigan Pressc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Migration -- Chapter 1 Colonialism in Indonesia: Music Moving with an Occupying Force -- Chapter 2 The Romani Diaspora in Europe: Mutual Influences -- Chapter 3 The African Diaspora in the United States: Appropriation and Assimilation -- Part 2: Mediation -- Chapter 4 Sound Recording and the Mediation of Music -- Chapter 5 Music and Media in the Service of the State -- Part 3: Mashup -- Chapter 6 Composing the Mediated Self -- Chapter 7 Copyright, Surveillance, and the Ownership of Music -- Chapter 8 Localizations: Mediated Selves Mixing Musics0 aMusic is a mobile art. When people move to faraway places, whether by choice or by force, they bring their music along. Music creates a meaningful point of contact for individuals and for groups; it can encourage curiosity and foster understanding; and it can preserve a sense of identity and comfort in an unfamiliar or hostile environment. As music crosses cultural, linguistic, and political boundaries, it continually changes. While human mobility and mediation have always shaped music-making, our current era of digital connectedness introduces new creative opportunities and inspiration even as it extends concerns about issues such as copyright infringement and cultural appropriation. With its innovative multimodal approach, Music on the Move invites readers to listen and engage with many different types of music as they read. The text introduces a variety of concepts related to music's travels—with or without its makers—including colonialism, migration, diaspora, mediation, propaganda, copyright, and hybridity. The case studies represent a variety of musical genres and styles, Western and non-Western, concert music, traditional music, and popular music. Highly accessible, jargon-free, and media-rich, Music on the Move is suitable for students as well as general-interest readers. Citable link: https://doi.org/10.3998/mpub.98538551 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/879zAccess online version02535nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245006100162264004300223264007300266264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505045600516520097500972542004101947546001601988588004002004650002602044710003902070856007602109OTLid0000880MnU20260406020746.0m     o  d s      cr            200711s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aTyler, Susaneauthor00aHuman Behavior and the Social Environment IcSusan Tyler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. The Person in Environment -- II. The Biopsychosocial Dimension -- III. The Sociocultural Dimension -- IV. The Social Change Dimension -- V. Pre-Pregnancy & Prenatal Development -- VI. Development in Infancy & Toddlerhood -- VII. Development in Early Childhood -- VIII. Development in Middle Childhood -- IX. Development in Adolescence -- X. Development in Early Adulthood -- XI. Development in Middle Adulthood -- XII. Development in Late Adulthood0 aThat’s what we are here to find out – Human Behavior and the Social Environment (HBSE) – How do they connect? How does it shape us? Why do we think and feel the way we do? This will be explored throughout this course by examining human behavior throughout life stage developments and our interactions with the social environment. This course will explore theoretical perspectives in Social Work to help provide a foundation for organizing thoughts about client needs and issues they are seeking supports for. Theories will then be connected to important developmental, social, and cultural issues that present throughout each stage of life to create an overall picture of a client’s experience and how we can use this information to have a better understanding of how people we work with are influenced and why. Knowledge of typical development in each stage of life will also inform the Social Worker if any other supports, resources, or services may be needed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/880zAccess online version02628nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003800140245007000178250001600248264004300264264004300307264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505030400527520120600831542002302037546001602060588004102076650003402117710003902151856007602190OTLid0000881MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200711s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aSprigman, Christopher Joneauthor04aThe Indigo BookbA Manual of Legal CitationcChristopher Sprigman  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHealdsburg, CAbPublic Resourcec2016. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aA. Background Rules -- B. Cases -- C. Statues Rules, Regulations, and Other Legislative & Administrative Materials -- D. Court & Litigation Documents -- E. Books & Non-Periodicals -- F. Journals, Magazines & Newspaper Articles -- G. Internet Sources -- J. Tables -- K. CODICIL -- L. Acknowledgements0 aWelcome to The Indigo Book 2.0—a free, Creative Commons-dedicated implementation of the uniform system of citation commonly used in United States legal documents. The Indigo Book (2d ed. 2021) isn’t the same as The Bluebook: A Uniform System of Citation (21st ed. 2020), but it does implement the same system of citation that The Bluebook does. The scope of The Indigo Book’s coverage is roughly equivalent to The Bluebook’s “Bluepages”—that is, The Indigo Book covers legal citation for U.S. legal materials, as well as books, periodicals, and Internet and other electronic resources. For the materials that it covers, anyone using The Indigo Book will produce briefs, memoranda, law review articles, and other legal documents with citations that are compatible with the Uniform System of Citation. Although law students, scholars, and legal professionals sometimes talk about legal citation as if it is truly uniform, the fact is that legal citation has never actually been a uniform national system. Accordingly, The Indigo Book also provides insight into some of the discretionary preferences and jurisdiction specific variations found in legal citation throughout the United States.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/881zAccess online version02190nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143245002200153264004300175264005400218264001200272300002200284336002600306337002600332338003600358341002800394490002700422505017200449520085700621542003001478546001601508588004001524650003601564650002901600700002901629700003101658710003901689856007601728OTLid0000882MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200712s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.300aNew Media Futures 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection 1: Theorizing the Future -- Section 2: Where Change is Unlikely -- Section 3: Things That Are Likely to Change -- Section 4: Methods -- Section 5: Provocations0 aThis book is intended for use in a large introductory class in new media in a program that covers the “full-stack” including critical/cultural studies, media management, diffusion of innovation, and synthetic media production. The first half of this basic sequence covered new media and democracy, finance, intellectual property law, basic games, and transmedia. The second half of the sequence covers many topics related to aesthetics, design, technology, and methodology. To that end, this book needed to be written so that it would be helpful for many different professors and trajectories of study. This book is in neither engineering, social science, nor the humanities, but also all of those. At the same time, this is a program in the Communication Studies and Media Studies traditions of the United States and that texture will come across.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aFaltesek, Danieleauthor1 aAdams, Danieleillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/882zAccess online version02497nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245007000181264004300251264006100294264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505034200529520101400871542004101885546001601926588004001942650003801982710003902020856007602059OTLid0000883MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            200712s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798605022282  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK11 aFiore, James M.eauthor00aAC Electrical Circuit AnalysisbA Practical ApproachcJames Fiore 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bdissidentsc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Fundamentals -- Chapter 2: Series RLC Circuits -- Chapter 3: Parallel RLC Circuits -- Chapter 4: Series-Parallel RLC Circuits -- Chapter 5: Analysis Theorems and Techniques -- Chapter 6: Nodal and Mesh Analysis -- Chapter 7: AC Power -- Chapter 8: Resonance -- Chapter 9: Polyphase Power -- Chapter 10: Decibels and Bode Plots0 aWelcome to the AC Electrical Circuit Analysis, an open educational resource (OER). The goal of this text is to introduce the theory and practical application of analysis of AC electrical circuits. It assumes familiarity with DC circuit analysis. If you have not studied DC circuit analysis, it is strongly recommended that you read the companion OER text, DC Electrical Circuit Analysis before continuing. Both texts are offered free of charge under a Creative Commons non-commercial, share-alike with attribution license. For your convenience, along with the free pdf and odt files, print copies are available at a very modest charge. Check my web sites for links. This text is based on the earlier Workbook for AC Electrical Circuits, which it replaces. The original expository text has been greatly expanded and includes many examples along with computer simulations. For the convenience of those who used the Workbook, many of the problem sets are the same, with some re-ordering depending on the chapter.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/883zAccess online version02324nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245007000181264004300251264006100294264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505039100529520079200920542004101712546001601753588004001769650003801809710003901847856007601886OTLid0000884MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            200712s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781654515478  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK11 aFiore, James M.eauthor00aDC Electrical Circuit AnalysisbA Practical ApproachcJames Fiore 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bdissidentsc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Fundamentals -- Chapter 2: Basic Quantities -- Chapter 3: Series Resistive Circuits -- Chapter 4: Parallel Resistive Circuits -- Chapter 5: Series-Parallel Resistive Circuits -- Chapter 6: Analysis Theorems and Techniques -- Chapter 7: Nodal & Mesh Analysis, Dependent Sources -- Chapter 8: Capacitors -- Chapter 9: Inductors -- Chapter 10: Magnetic Circuits and Transformers0 aWelcome to DC Electrical Circuit Analysis, an open educational resource (OER). The goal of this text is to introduce the theory and practical application of analysis of DC electrical circuits. It is offered free of charge under a Creative Commons non-commercial, share-alike with attribution license. For your convenience, along with the free pdf and odt files, print copies are available at a very modest charge. Check my web sites for links. This text is based on the earlier Workbook for DC Electrical Circuits, which it replaces. The original expository text has been greatly expanded and includes many examples along with computer simulations. For the convenience of those who used the Workbook, many of the problem sets are the same, with some re-ordering depending on the chapter.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/884zAccess online version02303nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245005600138250001800194264004300212264005400255264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505034800486520081700834542003001651546001601681588004001697650002501737700002501762700002701787710003901814856007601853OTLid0000885MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            200716s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF541500aStrategic Marketing in the Global Forest Industries  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: The Context of The Forest Industry and Its Markets -- Chapter 2: Understanding Forest Products Marketing -- Chapter 3: The Marketing Environment, An Information Approach -- Chapter 4: Strategy and Strategic Planning -- Chapter 5: Marketing Structures -- Chapter 6: Marketing Functions -- Chapter 7: Putting Together a Marketing Plan0 aThe forest industry is increasingly global and every marketer of forest products should have a global perspective. As a natural resource-based industry, the forest industry has an especially high profile role in environmental protection and is increasingly involved in climate change mitigation and management. Global forests are not only important because they provide a source of industrial raw material, but also because of the various other human needs they satisfy. A forest products marketer should have a basic understanding of the role that global forests play in society. Major societal trends are impacting the external environment within which the forest industry operates. We provide an overview of global forests and a brief description of the markets for the main categories of the forest industry.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aHansen, Ericeauthor1 aJuslin, Heikkieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/885zAccess online version02372nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001100161245005800172250001900230264004300249264004900292264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505027300518520088100791542001601672546001601688588004101704650002101745650002701766700002501793700002901818710003901847856007601886OTLid0000886MnU20260406020501.0m     o  d s      cr            200716s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781941823033  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.300aTransition to Higher MathematicsbStructure and Proof  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Louis, MissouribOpen Scholarshipc2015. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 0. Introduction -- Chapter 1. Preliminaries -- Chapter 2. Relations -- Chapter 3. Proofs -- Chapter 4. Principle of Induction -- Chapter 5. Limits -- Chapter 6. Cardinality -- Chapter 7. Divisibility -- Chapter 8. The Real Numbers -- Chapter 9. Complex Numbers0 aThis book is written for students who have taken calculus and want to learn what “real mathematics" is. We hope you will find the material engaging and interesting, and that you will be encouraged to learn more advanced mathematics. This is the second edition of our text. It is intended for students who have taken a calculus course, and are interested in learning what higher mathematics is all about. It can be used as a textbook for an "Introduction to Proofs" course, or for self-study. Chapter 1: Preliminaries, Chapter 2: Relations, Chapter 3: Proofs, Chapter 4: Principles of Induction, Chapter 5: Limits, Chapter 6: Cardinality, Chapter 7: Divisibility, Chapter 8: The Real Numbers, Chapter 9: Complex Numbers. The last 4 chapters can also be used as independent introductions to four topics in mathematics: Cardinality; Divisibility; Real Numbers; Complex Numbers.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aProofvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aDumas, Bob Aeauthor1 aMcCarthy, John Eeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/886zAccess online version01940nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002900144245012100173264004300294264008400337264001200421300002200433336002600455337002600481338003600507341002800543490002700571505049100598520021801089542003001307546001601337588004001353650003301393650002501426710003901451856007601490OTLid0000887MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200719s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aLamoreaux, Aliseeauthor00aWriting Instruction Tips For Automated Essay GradersbHow To Design an Essay for a Non-human ReadercAlise Lamoreaux 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Robo-Grader: Artificial Intelligence As An Automated Essay Grading System, The Backstory -- 2. Thinking Like A Robo-Grader: What The Research Tells Us... Words Matter! -- 3. Organizational Style & Structure of Response for a Robo-Grader -- 4. Read Like A Robo-Grader: Developing Audience Awareness -- 5. Writing For A Robo-Grader: Understanding the Toulmin Method -- 6. Practice Activities For Reading Like A Robo-Grader: Become A Reading Detective -- 7. Postscript: Closing Thoughts0 aAs schools, as well as the workplace, become more automated, and remote or distance learning/working becomes the “new normal,” understanding and leveraging artificial intelligence will become a critical skill.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/887zAccess online version02489nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245006800135264004300203264008400246264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505055700507520079001064542001601854546001601870588004001886650002301926700003301949700003001982710003902012856007602051OTLid0000888MnU20260330020733.0m     o  d s      cr            200719s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2000aOregon’s HistorybPeople of the Northwest in the Land of Eden 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Origins: Indigenous Inhabitants and Landscapes -- 2. Curiosity, Commerce, Conquest, and Competition: Fur Trade Empires and Discovery -- 3. Oregon Fever and Western Expansion: Manifest Destiny in the Garden of Eden -- 4. Native Americans in the Land of Eden: An Elegy of Early Statehood -- 5. Statehood: Constitutional Exclusions and the Civil War -- 6. Oregon at the Turn of the Twentieth Century -- 7. The Dawn of the Civil Rights Movement and the World Wars in Oregon -- 8. Cold War and Counterculture -- 9. End of the Twentieth Century and Beyond0 aThis “open textbook” is a social and cultural history of the people of Oregon representing powerful figures from the dominant Euro-American culture, the marginalized and oppressed, and social and political reformers who shaped the historical legacy of the state. It is a story of the diverse array of immigrants who helped build the state and strengthen it. The title is a recollection of the racial fantasies that European-American settlers created in their expansionist vision of the West and the state of Oregon. Initially the Oregon Territory was built on intolerance and racial exclusivity, but eventually Oregon embraces its diversity, but not without struggle and heartache. Our journey through the past starts with an essential question, “Who are the people of Oregon?”1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks1 aMichaels, Athanasioseauthor1 aHakanson, Kaitlineeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/888zAccess online version02122nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245002000158264004300178264005900221264001200280300002200292336002600314337002600340338003600366341002500402490002700427505040700454520057500861542001601436546001601452588004001468650003601508700002501544700002501569700002701594710003901621856007601660OTLid0000889MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200719s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693176  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.600aCollege Success 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Exploring College -- 2. Knowing Yourself as a Learner -- 3. Managing Your Time and Priorities -- 4. Planning Your Academic Pathways -- 5. Reading and Notetaking -- 6. Studying, Memory, and Test Taking -- 7. Thinking -- 8. Communicating -- 9. Understanding Civility and Cultural Competence -- 10. Understanding Financial literacy -- 11. Engaging in a Healthy Lifestyle -- 12. Planning for Your Future0 aOpenStax College Success is a comprehensive and contemporary resource that serves First Year Experience, Student Success, and College Transition courses. Developed with the support of hundreds of faculty and coordinators, the book addresses the evolving challenges and opportunities of today’s diverse students. Engagement, self-analysis, personal responsibility, and student support are reflected throughout the material. College Success also includes an array of student surveys and opinion polls, and OpenStax will regularly provide the results to adopting faculty.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aBaldwin, Amyeauthor1 aAugust, Lisaeauthor1 aBennett, Jameseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/889zAccess online version03324nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245004400144250001600188264004300204264006000247264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002500429490002700454505092000481520119701401542004102598546001602639588004002655650002602695650003102721700002802752700003102780710003902811856007602850OTLid0000890MnU20260406020830.0m     o  d s      cr            200719s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aFundamentals of Psychological Disorders  a3rd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPullman, WashingtonbWashington State Universityc2018. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Setting the Stage -- Module 1: What is Abnormal Psychology? -- Module 2: Models of Abnormal Psychology -- Module 3: Clinical Assessment, Diagnosis, and Treatment -- Part II. Mental Disorders - Block 1 -- Module 4: Mood Disorders -- Module 5: Trauma- and Stressor-Related Disorders -- Module 6: Dissociative Disorders -- Part III. Mental Disorders - Block 2 -- Module 7: Anxiety Disorders -- Module 8: Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders -- Module 9: Obsessive-Compulsive and Related Disorders -- Part IV. Mental Disorders - Block 3 -- Module 10: Feeding and Eating Disorders -- Module 11: Substance-Related and Addictive Disorders -- Part V. Mental Disorders - Block 4 -- Module 12: Schizophrenia Spectrum and Other Psychotic Disorders -- Module 13: Personality Disorders -- Part VI. Mental Disorders - Block 5 -- Module 14: Neurocognitive Disorders -- Module 15: Contemporary Issues in Psychopathology --0 aFundamentals of Psychological Disorders (formerly Abnormal Psychology) is an Open Education Resource written by Alexis Bridley, Ph.D. and Lee W. Daffin Jr., Ph.D. through Washington State University. The book tackles the difficult topic of mental disorders in 15 modules and is updated through the DSM-5-TR. This journey starts by discussing what abnormal behavior is by attempting to understand what normal behavior is. Models of abnormal psychology and clinical assessment, diagnosis, and treatment are then discussed. With these three modules completed, the authors next explore several classes of mental disorders in 5 blocks. Block 1 covers mood, trauma and stressor related, and dissociative disorders. Block 2 covers anxiety, somatic symptom, and obsessive-compulsive disorders. Block 3 covers eating and substance-related and addictive disorders. Block 4 tackles schizophrenia spectrum and personality disorders. Finally, Block 5 investigates neurocognitive disorders and then ends with a discussion of contemporary issues in psychopathology. Disorders are covered by discussing their clinical presentation and DSM Criteria, epidemiology, comorbidity, etiology, and treatment options.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBridley, Alexiseauthor1 aDaffin Jr., Lee W.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/890zAccess online version02186nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003300153245007600186264004300262264008400305264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002800511490002700539505029900566520070200865542002701567546001601594588004101610650002001651650002601671710003901697856007601736OTLid0000891MnU20260406020501.0m     o  d s      cr            200719s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771311  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aMorgan-Ellis, Esthereeditor00aResonancesbEngaging Music in Its Cultural ContextcEsther Morgan-Ellis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContributions and Acknowledgments -- How to Use this Book -- Unit 1 - Music as a Field of Practice and Study -- Unit 2 - Music for Storytelling -- Unit 3 - Music for Entertainment -- Unit 4 - Music for Political Expression -- Unit 5 - Functional Music -- Unit 6 - Evaluating Music -- Appendices0 aResonances: Engaging Music in Its Cultural Context offers a fresh curriculum for the college-level music appreciation course. The musical examples are drawn from classical, popular, and folk traditions from around the globe. These examples are organized into thematic chapters, each of which explores a particular way in which human beings use music. Topics include storytelling, political expression, spirituality, dance, domestic entertainment, and more. The chapters and examples can be taught in any order, making Resonances a flexible resource that can be adapted to your teaching or learning needs. This textbook is accompanied by a complete set of PowerPoint slides and learning objectives.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/891zAccess online version01969nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002900155245006000184264004300244264004500287264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505034300509520052600852542001601378546001601394588004001410650004201450710003901492856007601531OTLid0000892MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            200721s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648169823  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aBoardman, Bonnieeauthor00aIntroduction to Industrial EngineeringcBonnie Boardman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. What is Industrial Engineering? -- 2. Teamwork -- 3. What is Problem Solving? -- 4. Big Ideas in Industrial Engineering -- 5. Using Models -- 6. Deming's 14 Points -- 7. People in the System -- 8. Systems Thinking -- 9. Lean Operations -- 10. The IE Approach -- 11. Organizations' Missions, Visions, and Values -- 12. Lifelong Learning0 aThis book was created for an undergraduate Introduction to Industrial Engineering course at The University of Texas at Arlington (UTA). The chapters give an overview of the profession and an introduction to some of the tools used by industrial engineers in industry. There are interactive content exercises included at the end of most chapters. This interactive content aims to engage students in the content as they are reading. The book will continue to revised and updated with new information as it becomes necessary.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/892zAccess online version02139nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003200155245005700187264004300244264004500287264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505049000509520054100999542004101540546001601581588004001597650002501637710003901662856007601701OTLid0000893MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            200721s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648169915  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM5861 aMauldin, Rebecca L.eauthor00aFoundations of Social Work ResearchcRebecca Mauldin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Introduction to research -- Chapter Two: Linking methods with theory -- Chapter Three: Ethics in social work research -- Chapter Four: Design and causality -- Chapter Five: Defining and measuring concepts -- Chapter Six: Sampling -- Chapter Seven: Survey research -- Chapter Eight: Experimental design -- Chapter Nine: Unique features of qualitative research -- Chapter Ten: Unobtrusive research -- Chapter Eleven: Real-world research -- Chapter Twelve: Reporting research0 aThis textbook was created to provide an introduction to research methods for BSW and MSW students, with particular emphasis on research and practice relevant to students at the University of Texas at Arlington. It provides an introduction to social work students to help evaluate research for evidence-based practice and design social work research projects. It can be used with its companion, A Guidebook for Social Work Literature Reviews and Research Questions by Rebecca L. Mauldin and Matthew DeCarlo, or as a stand-alone textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/893zAccess online version02328nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002500147245005800172264004300230264009000273264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505084400540520031001384542003001694546001601724588004001740650003501780650002401815710003901839856007601878OTLid0000894MnU20260406020727.0m     o  d s      cr            200721s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aSF811 4aRA4401 aMalone, Erineauthor00aLarge Animal SurgerybSupplemental NotescErin Malone 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVeterinary Population Medicine, bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Finding Resources -- General Surgery -- General pharmacology -- Equine Drugs -- Food Animal Drugs -- Food Animal Drug Regulations -- Equine and Camelid Castration -- FA youngstock processing -- LA Respiratory Issues -- Eye surgery -- LA umbilical disorders -- Bladder, Urethra and Ureters -- Male urogenital surgery -- Female urogenital surgery -- Food/Fiber Cesarean Sections -- Large animal masses -- Large animal cutaneous neoplasia -- Large animal wounds -- Equine Oral, Esophageal and Rectal disorders -- Equine Colic -- FA GI Diagnostics & GI Surgery Principles -- FA GI Topics -- Equine Lameness -- Equine podiatry -- Equine joint disorders -- Equine tendons and ligaments -- Equine bone disorders -- Equine muscle trauma -- Bovine Lameness -- Swine, SRC and poultry lameness -- LA Orthopedic Emergencies -- Appendix0 aThis textbook includes basic principles of large animal surgery and anesthesia, how to apply those principles to cases and situations, and discover ways of finding answers when you don’t remember the information, are presented with cases that aren’t “textbook” and/or things don’t go as planned.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/894zAccess online version02741nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127245005900140264004300199264006000242264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505056100479520100901040542003002049546001602079588004002095650003102135700002802166700002902194700002902223710003902252856007602291OTLid0000895MnU20260406020728.0m     o  d s      cr            200721s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.204aThe ELCbAn Early Childhood Learning Community at Work 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Setting up the Early Learning Community (ELC) -- 1. Building Blocks for the ELC -- Part II: Case Studies2. Improving Children’s Socio-Dramatic Play -- 3. Developing a Science Area -- 4. Improving Opportunities for Physical Play -- 5. Improving Play at the Sensory Table -- 6. Boys’ Capacity to Express Emotions -- 7. Improving Differentiation during Morning Meetings -- Part III: Reflections -- 8. Participants’ Responses to the ELC -- 9. Conclusion -- Appendix A: Educators’ Questionnaire -- Appendix B: Teacher Candidates’ Questionnaire0 aThe ELC professional development model was designed to improve the quality of teacher candidates’ Practicum field placements and align teaching in field placements with Learning Standards used in the teacher education program. Teams of four educators from varied settings worked in a Practicum placement setting for one semester to improve their teaching and align it with Learning Standards. An action research approach improved teaching challenges teams faced. Research articles were read to improve teams’ teaching challenges by implementing one agreed strategy. Teams video-recorded, assessed, and reflected on the impact of the strategy on their teaching, on teacher candidates’ learning and on children’s learning. This text compiles six case studies from this model to illustrate how teaching challenges were improved. Appropriate for practiced educators as well as educators in training, this text provides a real world look into applying Learning Standards in early childhood classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aBridge, Heathereauthor1 aMelita, Lorraineeauthor1 aRoiger, Patriciaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/895zAccess online version02697nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000900139100002900148245005300177264004300230264005400273264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505010300504520144900607542004102056546001602097588004002113650002302153650003202176710003902208856007602247OTLid0000896MnU20260406020822.0m     o  d s      cr            200721s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQA761 aO'Neil, Shawn T.eauthor02aA Primer for Computational BiologycShawn O'Neil 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2017. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Introduction to Unix/Linux -- Part II: Programming in Python -- Part III: Programming in R0 aA Primer for Computational Biology aims to provide life scientists and students the skills necessary for research in a data-rich world. The text covers accessing and using remote servers via the command-line, writing programs and pipelines for data analysis, and provides useful vocabulary for interdisciplinary work. The book is broken into three parts: Introduction to Unix/Linux: The command-line is the “natural environment” of scientific computing, and this part covers a wide range of topics, including logging in, working with files and directories, installing programs and writing scripts, and the powerful “pipe” operator for file and data manipulation. Programming in Python: Python is both a premier language for learning and a common choice in scientific software development. This part covers the basic concepts in programming (data types, if-statements and loops, functions) via examples of DNA-sequence analysis. This part also covers more complex subjects in software development such as objects and classes, modules, and APIs. Programming in R: The R language specializes in statistical data analysis, and is also quite useful for visualizing large datasets. This third part covers the basics of R as a programming language (data types, if-statements, functions, loops and when to use them) as well as techniques for large-scale, multi-test analyses. Other topics include S3 classes and data visualization with ggplot2.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/896zAccess online version02167nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002600138245004200164264004300206264005400249264001200303300002200315336002600337337002600363338003600389341002500425490002700450505056400477520049601041542004101537546001601578588004101594650002801635650002701663710003901690856007601729OTLid0000897MnU20260406020502.0m     o  d s      cr            200721s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.31 aRosulek, Mikeeauthor04aThe Joy of CryptographycMike Rosulek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2021. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a0 Review of Concepts & Notation -- 1 One-Time Pad & Kerckhoffs' Principle -- 2 The Basics of Provable Security -- 3 Secret Sharing -- 4 Basing Cryptography on Intractable Computations -- 5 Pseudorandom Generators -- 6 Pseudorandom Functions & Block Ciphers -- 7 Security Against Chosen Plaintext Attacks -- 8 Block Cipher Modes of Operation -- 9 Chosen Ciphertext Attacks -- 10 Message Authentication Codes -- 11 Hash Functions -- 12 Authenticated Encryption & AEAD -- 13 RSA & Digital Signatures -- 14 Diffie-Hellman Key Agreement -- 15 Public-Key Encryption0 aThe pedagogical approach is anchored in formal definitions/proof of security, but in a way that I believe is more accessible than what is "traditional" in crypto. All security definitions are written in a unified and simplified "game-based" style. For an example of what security definitions look like in this style, see the index of security definitions (which will make more sense after reading chapters 2 & 4). A new web-based only version is available at the Joy of Cryptography website.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCryptographyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/897zAccess online version02842nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001100148245009100159264004300250264007600293264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002800491490002700519505078800546520073801334542001602072546001602088588004002104650002402144650002302168650002602191700003202217700003002249700002602279710003902305856007602344OTLid0000898MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            200723s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG173 4aHD30.400aFinancial Management for Small BusinessesbFinancial Statements & Present Value Models 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Management -- 1. Financial Management and the Firm -- 2. Alternative Forms of Business Organizations -- 3. The Federal Tax System -- Part II: Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities, and Threats -- 4. Financial Statements -- 5. Financial Ratios -- 6. System Analysis -- Part III: Homogeneous Measures and Present Value Models -- 7. Homogeneous Measures -- 8. Present Value Models -- 9. Homogeneous Sizes -- 10. Homogeneous Terms -- 11. Homogeneous Tax Rates -- 12. Homogeneous Rates of Return -- 13. Homogeneous Investment Types -- 14. Homogeneous Liquidity -- 15. Homogeneous Risk Measures -- Part IV: Present Value Model Applications -- 16. Loan Analysis -- 17. Land Investments -- 18. Leases -- 19. Financial Investments -- 20. Yield Curves -- 21. Epilogue: One Thing More…0 aThis book is for those whose financial management focus is on small businesses. For you, we adapt the traditional financial management themes emphasized in corporate financial management courses to meet the needs of small businesses. Many financial managers of small businesses come from farms or agribusinesses. Others are interested in working for or starting businesses in the food or retail sectors. In most cases, these businesses aren’t organized as C-corporations impacting things like taxes, depreciation, and legal requirements around compiling and reporting financial data. They are rarely publicly traded which creates unique constraints to raising debt and equity capital and calculating required risk-adjusted returns.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aRobinson, Lindon J.eauthor1 aHanson, Steven D.eauthor1 aBlack, J. Royeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/898zAccess online version02779nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245006600179264004300245264005200288264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505035400517520127600871542003002147546001602177588004002193650003002233700002702263710003902290856007602329OTLid0000899MnU20260406020744.0m     o  d s      cr            200723s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781551954424  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aWaldron, Johneauthor00aGeological Structuresba Practical IntroductioncJohn Waldron 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEdmonton, CanadabOpen Education Albertac2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aA. Geological Structures -- B. Orientation of Structures -- C. Primary Structures -- D. Stereographic Projection -- E. Folds -- F. Boudinage -- G. Kinematic Analysis and Strain -- H. Fabrics -- I. Dynamic Analysis: Stress -- J. Fractures -- K. Faults -- I. Tectonic Environments of Faulting -- M. Shear Zones -- N. Extraterrestrial Impact Structures0 aThis manual is about structures that occur within the Earth’s crust. Structures are the features that allow geologists to figure out how parts of the Earth have changed position, orientation, size and shape over time. This work requires careful observation and measurements of features at the surface of the Earth, and deductions about what’s below the surface. The practical skills you will learn in this course form the foundation for much of what is known about the history of the Earth, and are important tools for exploring the subsurface. They are essential for Earth scientists of all kinds. The course that this document supports is about doing structural geology. It’s not possible to be a good geologist (or to pass the course) just by learning facts. You have to be able to solve problems. Do your lab work conscientiously and get as much as possible done during lab sessions when instructors are available to help you. This manual consists of both readings and lab exercises, which alternate through the text. The readings are designed to be read and understood outside the lab sessions, whereas the labs contain specific instructions and questions to be completed. Before each lab, be sure you have covered the readings that come immediately before it.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aSnyder, Morganeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/899zAccess online version03373nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003300140245009400173264004300267264007400310264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505039300561520178200954542004102736546001602777588004102793650003602834700002602870710003902896856007602935OTLid0000902MnU20260406020502.0m     o  d s      cr            200730s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aMruk, Christopher J.eeditor00aSucceeding at Your InternshipbA Handbook Written for and with StudentscChristopher Mruk 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBowling Green, OhiobBowling Green State University Librariesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What This Book is About and How to Use It -- Chapter 2: Finding and Preparing for a Suitable Internship Site -- Chapter 3: Getting Started at the Site -- Chapter 4: Using Supervision Effectively -- Chapter 5: The Importance of Ethics -- Chapter 6: Appreciating Cultural Diversity (Multiculturalism) -- Chapter 7: Learning to Be Competent -- Chapter 8: Completing the Internship0 aThere are several textbooks for students whose majors include internships in human services, broadly defi­­­ned, such as case management, counseling, criminal justice, and social work. Most of these books are written in an academic format. Typically, it involves an introduction to a theoretical orientation that concerns working with others followed by a series of chapters devoted to learning professional skills associated with a given discipline. This approach is fine, as far as it goes, but also has two drawbacks. One is that the texts are usually sold by main stream publishers, which means they are expensive. Another is that they seldom address what might be described as the experiential dimension of the internship that most beginners face on their own. This new book addresses both concerns. The fact that it is offered as a free text addresses the first issue, of course, but the second one requires a new approach. It began with asking students to talk about what they experienced when going through their first internship and what they would tell others about how to make it a successful one. That work led to a structured narrative about basic practical topics, such as finding an internship, getting started there, making effective use of supervision, understanding ethics, appreciating cultural diversity, becoming competent, and completing the internship. The text includes descriptions, suggestions, and exercises. It may be used as either a primary course text or, due to its relative brevity, a supplemental one. Although the lead editor is an experienced clinician and professor who has supervised internships for a variety of human services majors over many years, the book was written with and for students to make it more readable and more useful.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMoor, John C.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/902zAccess online version03098nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127110006100140245010100201264004300302264006200345264001200407300002200419336002600441337002600467338003600493341002800529490002700557505046100584520146901045542002702514546001602541588004002557650003602597710003902633856007602672OTLid0000903MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            200807s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.62 aKwantlen Polytechnic University Learning Centreseauthor00aUniversity 101bStudy, Strategize and SucceedcKwantlen Polytechnic University Learning Centres  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Learning in University: The Critical Skill of Metacognition -- II. Plan for Success: Knowing Yourself and Setting Goals -- III. Your First Week: Getting Organized and Finding Resources -- IV. Manage Your Time: Study Strategies for Busy Students -- V. Learn From Lectures and Texts -- VI. Study Smart – Use Powerful Strategies to Remember, Understand and Apply -- VII. Get Those Projects Done -- VIII. Get Ready for Exams -- IX. Evaluate and Move Ahead0 aWelcome to university! Whether this is your first time in post-secondary education, or whether you are returning to studies, you’re arriving with some goals you want to achieve. Perhaps you are taking a focused program to lead you into your desired career. Perhaps you are exploring courses in different areas, providing a foundation for future specialization. Wherever you are in your journey, you find yourself in a learning environment that is different from one you have experienced before. A good foundation for university is learning how to learn. By taking the time to read this book and work through the exercises included, you are investing in the skills that will support you in all of your classes and future learning. Successful students share a set of skills and habits in common. The good news is that these skills are not a secret; anyone can learn the skills that support successful learning. By taking some time to learn proven study strategies, you will be able to reach your learning goals, and avoid the pitfalls that can take you off-track. Who is this book for? This book focuses on the skills you’ll need to be successful in undergraduate courses or other adult education classes. If you are: new to university studies returning to university after some time away a mature student an international student or a continuing student who wants to improve their current skills and strategies this book is meant to support you in your journey.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/903zAccess online version02819nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002900163245009400192264004300286264006100329264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505084300567520078301410542001602193546001602209588004002225650003002265650002302295710003902318856007602357OTLid0000904MnU20260330020724.0m     o  d s      cr            200810s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989864012  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aNakano, Michelleeauthor00aRed Seal Landscape Horticulturist Identify Plants and Plant RequirementscMichelle Nakano 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1 - Plant Identification -- 1. Introduction to Plant -- 2. Introduction to Taxonomy -- 3. Introduction to Taxons -- 4. Introduction to Binomial Nomenclature -- 5. Conventions for Binomial Nomenclature -- 6. Nomenclature Review -- 7. The Meaning of Plant Names -- 8. Plant Growth -- 9. Introduction to Plant Classification -- 10. Classify Plants by Life Cycle -- 11. Introduction to Dichotomous Keys -- 12. Key to Plant Classification -- 13. Introduction to Plant Morphology -- 14. Plant Morphology - Leaves -- 15. Plant Morphology - Conifers -- 16. Plant Morphology - Flowers and Fruit -- 17. Plant Family Characteristics -- Part 2 Plant Requirements and Use -- 18. Plant Habitats -- 19. Plant Use Categories -- 20. Plant Growth Characteristics -- 21. Characteristics of weedy species -- 22. Plant Hardiness -- 23. Plant Requirements0 aRed Seal Landscape Horticulturist Identify Plants and Plant Requirements is an adaptation of KPU HORT 1155 Introduction to Plant Materials Lecture Notes. It is an editable, open access learning resource with interactive web based experiences customized for horticulture students studying plant identification. This first edition supports student achievement of the Level 1 and 2 learning goals for Red Seal Landscape Horticulturist Line F2: Identify plant and plant requirements for a range of plants commonly used in horticulture Employ correct naming and plant identification terminology Identify morphological characteristics, growing requirements, use and availability Use a dichotomous key for plant identification Explain plant hardiness Identify weedy and invasive plants1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/904zAccess online version01521nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003100140245003800171264004300209264006200252264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505023600491520022100727542001600948546001600964588004000980650003601020710003901056856007601095OTLid0000905MnU20260406020732.0m     o  d s      cr            200812s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aBrinkerhoff, Celiaeauthor00aDoing ResearchcCelia Brinkerhoff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use This Tutorial -- Acknowledgements -- I. Part 1. Get Started on Your Research -- II. Part 2. Recognize Types of Information -- III. Part 3. Develop your Search Strategy -- IV. Part 4. Evaluate your Sources0 aA modules-based approach to learning research skills that emphasizes the reflective nature of information discovery, the contextual basis for evaluating that information, and a recognition that information has value.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/905zAccess online version03146nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155245006900168250001600237264004300253264004500296264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505078100515520104801296542004102344546001602385588004102401650002602442650003602468700002902504700004202533700003402575710003902609856007602648OTLid0000906MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            200813s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956862225  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aLB1062.600aInterpersonal CommunicationbA Mindful Approach to Relationships  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc2023. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Communication -- Chapter 2: Overview of Interpersonal Communication -- Chapter 3: Intrapersonal Communication -- Chapter 4: Verbal Elements of Communication -- Chapter 5: Nonverbal Communication -- Chapter 6: Cultural and Environmental Factors in Interpersonal Communication -- Chapter 7: Talking and Listening -- Chapter 8: Building and Maintaining Relationships -- Chapter 9: Conflict in Relationships -- Chapter 10: Friendship Relationships -- Chapter 11: Family & Marriage Relationships -- Chapter 12: Interpersonal Communication in Mediated Contexts -- Chapter 13: Interpersonal Relationships at Work -- Chapter 14: The Dark Side of Interpersonal Communication -- Glossary -- Answer Keys -- About the Authors0 aInterpersonal Communication: A Mindful Approach to Relationships helps readers examine their own one-on-one communicative interactions using a mindfulness lens. The writing team of Jason S. Wrench, Narissra M. Punyanunt-Carter, and Katherine Thweatt incorporates the latest communication theory and research to help students navigate everyday interpersonal interactions. The 14 chapters in this book cover topics typically taught in an undergraduate interpersonal communication course: family interactions, interpersonal dynamics, language, listening, nonverbal communication, and romantic relationships, as well as exploring emerging areas such as self-compassion, body positivity, friendships, and “the dark side”. The writing takes on a purposefully informal tone to engage readers. Each chapter is broken into different sections that have unique instructional outcomes, key takeaways, and exercises, and concludes with real-world case studies and sample quiz questions. Also included is an extensive glossary with over 350 definitions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aWrench, Jason S.eauthor1 aPunyanunt-Carter, Narissra M.eauthor1 aThweatt, Katherine S.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/906zAccess online version02626nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000900142050000900151245005500160250001600215264004300231264006700274264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505046300518520089400981542004101875546001601916588004001932650003201972650003702004700003102041700002902072710003902101856007602140OTLid0000907MnU20260406020502.0m     o  d s      cr            200819s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1491980559  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA7600aThink RakubHow to Think Like a Computer Scientist  a2nd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGreen Tea Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- I Starting with the Basics -- 1 The way of the program -- 2 Variables, Expressions and Statements -- 3 Functions -- 4 Loops, Conditionals and Recursion -- 5 Fruitful Subroutines -- 6 Iteration -- 7 Strings -- 8 Case study: Word Play -- 9 Arrays and Lists -- 10 Hashes -- 11 Case study: Data Structure Selection -- II Moving Forward -- 12 Classes and Objects -- 13 Regexes and Grammar -- 14 Functional Programming in Raku -- 15 Some Final Advice --0 aThe title of this book was originally Think Perl 6, but since Perl 6 has been renamed Raku, we have also changed the title of the book. Think Raku is an introduction to computer science and programming intended for people with little or no experience. This aim of this book is not primarily to teach Raku, but instead to teach the art of programming, using the Raku language. After having completed this book, you should hopefully be able to write programs to solve relatively difficult problems in Raku, but my main aim is to teach computer science, software programming, and problem solving rather than solely to teach the Raku language itself. Think Raku is a free book available under a Creative Commons license. Readers are free to copy and distribute the text; they are also free to modify it, which allows them to adapt the book to different needs, and to help develop new material.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aRosenfeld, Laurenteauthor1 aDowney, Allen B.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/907zAccess online version02427nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134050001000147050001000157100002800167245007900195264004300274264005400317264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505086000548520030501408542001601713546001601729588004001745650003101785650002501816650002501841650002401866710003901890856007601929OTLid0000908MnU20260406020736.0m     o  d s      cr            200819s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1139.2 4aRA773 4aRA4401 aParis, Jennifereauthor00aSafety, Health, and Nutrition in Early Childhood EducationcJennifer Paris 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrefaceSection I: Introduction -- Chapter 1: Children’s Well-Being and Early Childhood Education -- Section II: Safety -- Chapter 2: Preventing Injury & Protecting Children’s Safety -- Chapter 3: Creating Safe Indoor Environments -- Chapter 4: Creating Safe Outdoor Environments -- Chapter 5: Caring for Minor Injuries and Preparing for and Managing Emergencies -- Chapter 6: Child Maltreatment -- Section III: Health -- Chapter 7: Promoting Good Health & Wellness -- Chapter 8: Prevention of Illness -- Chapter 9: Supportive Health Care -- Chapter 10: Children with Special Health Care Needs -- Chapter 11: Children’s Mental Health -- Section IV: Nutrition -- Chapter 12: Basic Nutrition for Children -- Chapter 13: Protecting Good Nutrition and Physical Wellness -- Chapter 14: Providing Good Nutrition -- Chapter 15: Menu Planning and Food Safety0 aEarly childhood is a critical time in development. Many outcomes, both positive and negative, have their beginnings in these years. It is vital that children’s health and safety be protected. High-quality early care and education programs can play a valuable role in improving outcomesfor children.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/908zAccess online version01600nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136050001300146245004200159264004300201264007200244264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002500438490002700463505010700490520020200597542003000799546001600829588004100845650002500886650003400911650002800945700002900973700003101002700003001033710003901063856007601102OTLid0000909MnU20260406020502.0m     o  d s      cr            200824s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aK7200 4aKF385.A400aOpen-Source PropertybA Free Casebook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Source Propertyc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Foundations -- Part II: Possession -- Part III: Interests -- Part IV: Transfers -- Part V: Use0 aOpen Source Property: A Free Casebook is a free resource for instructors and students of the first-year Property Law course at American law schools, and anyone else with an interest in the subject.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks1 aClowney, Stepheneeditor1 aGrimmelmann, Jameseeditor1 aGrynberg, Michaeleeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/909zAccess online version02545nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002600167245006300193250001600256264004300272264006100315264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505052800553520083201081542001601913546001601929588004001945650002301985650002402008710003902032856007602071OTLid0000910MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            200908s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781641760904  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aMurphy, Jamieeauthor00aTransitions to Professional Nursing PracticecJamie Murphy  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen SUNYc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 -- Professional Nursing Practice -- Baccalaureate Education -- Healthcare in the 21st Century -- Accountability -- Autonomy -- References -- Chapter 2 -- Nursing Philosophy -- Professional Development -- References -- Chapter 3 -- Interprofessional Communication -- Interprofessional Collaboration -- Critical Thinking -- Evidence-Based Practice -- References -- Chapter 4 -- Leadership in Nursing -- References -- Chapter 5 -- Nursing Theory -- References -- Chapter 6 -- Professional Organizations -- References0 aTransitions to Professional Nursing Practice provides a pivotal learning experience for students transitioning from an associate degree education to a baccalaureate degree. Content includes a broad overview of the nursing profession, the role of accrediting and professional organizations with a strong focus on the American Nurses Association’s foundational documents. The competencies of the Standards of Professional Practice and the Code of Ethics are weaved throughout the text. Topics covered in this text include professional nursing practice, baccalaureate education, healthcare in the 21st century, autonomy and accountability, nursing philosophy, professional development, communication, interprofessional collaboration, critical thinking, introduction to evidence-based practice, and nursing leadership and theory.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/910zAccess online version01857nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002600149245007700175264004300252264005200295264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505046000524520026500984542001601249546001601265588004101281650002301322650002301345710003901368856007601407OTLid0000911MnU20260406020503.0m     o  d s      cr            200908s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aO'Grady, Jackeauthor00aQuality Assurance & Regulatory Affairs for the BiosciencescJack O'Grady 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustin, TexasbAustin Community Collegec[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION TO BIOTECHNOLOGY & QUALITY ASSURANCE -- CHAPTER 2: INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY PRINCIPLES -- CHAPTER 3: QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS -- CHAPTER 4: THE FOOD & DRUG ADMINISTRATION -- CHAPTER 5: GOOD GUIDANCE PRACTICES (GXPs) -- CHAPTER 6: THE DRUG APPROVAL PROCESS -- CHAPTER 7: THE REGULATION OF BIOLOGICS -- CHAPTER 8: MEDICAL DEVICE & COMBINATION PRODUCTS -- CHAPTER 9: REGULATION OF FOOD & OTHER PRODUCTS -- CHAPTER 10: FDA ENFORCEMENT0 aThis 125-page course textbook, entitled Quality Assurance & Regulatory Affairs for the Biosciences, was created by Jack O'Grady, M.S., professor at Austin Community College. This textbook accompanies the course BITC 1340: Quality Assurance for the Biosciences.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/911zAccess online version01997nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245007800138264004300216264010100259264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505011600537520062000653542004101273546001601314588004101330650002601371650002401397700002501421700002601446700002401472710003901496856007601535OTLid0000912MnU20260406020735.0m     o  d s      cr            200913s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aAdvanced Community College ESL CompositionbAn Integrated Skills Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. The Writing Process -- II. Sentence Structure -- III. Literary Analysis -- IV. Critical Thinking and Reading0 aThis book has been created to provide a framework for building your skills in writing and critical thinking. It provides access to published samples from professional authors along with essay drafts from ESL students who have polished their skills in their respective writing courses. The themes in the readings will give you a variety of topics to discuss with your classmates, which may inspire your own deeper thinking and writing. Overall, we hope that as you proceed through these chapters, you will build confidence and develop your voice in the classroom and beyond. Welcome to the world of academic writing!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aPerez, Edgareauthor1 aBehseta, Saraeauthor1 aRae, Jenelleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/912zAccess online version03310nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154050001500163050000700178100003100185245007500216264004300291264008600334264001200420300002200432336002600454337002600480338003600506341002800542490002700570505051000597520138001107542003002487546001602517588004002533650003202573650002502605650003802630650005002668650003102718710003902749856007602788OTLid0000913MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            200923s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780999797013  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA76 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aGlushko, Robert J.eauthor04aThe Discipline of Organizingb4th Professional EditioncRobert Glushko 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of California, Berkeleyc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Foundations for Organizing Systems -- II. Design Decisions in Organizing Systems -- III. Activities in Organizing Systems -- IV. Resources in Organizing Systems -- V. Resource Description and Metadata -- VI. Describing Relationships and Structures -- VII. Categorization: Describing Resource Classes and Types -- VIII. Classification: Assigning Resources to Categories -- IX. The Forms of Resource Descriptions -- X. Interactions with Resources -- XI. The Organizing System Roadmap -- XII. Case Studies0 aWe organize things, we organize information, we organize information about things, and we organize information about information. But even though “organizing” is a fundamental and ubiquitous challenge, when we compare these activities their contrasts are more apparent than their commonalities. We propose to unify many perspectives about organizing with the concept of an Organizing System, defined as an intentionally arranged collection of resources and the interactions they support. Every Organizing System involves a collection of resources, a choice of properties or principles used to describe and arrange resources, and ways of supporting interactions with resources. By comparing and contrasting how these activities take place in different contexts and domains, we can identify patterns of organizing. We can create a discipline of organizing in a disciplined way. The 4th edition builds a bridge between organizing and data science. It reframes descriptive statistics as organizing techniques, expands the treatment of classification to include computational methods, and incorporates many new examples of data-driven resource selection, organization, maintenance, and personalization. It introduces a new “data science” category of discipline-specific content, both in the chapter text and in endnotes, marked with [DS] in editions that contain endnotes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/913zAccess online version02024nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134050001100147050001000158100002400168245005400192264004300246264007300289264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505020200539520053100741542004101272546001601313588004001329650002501369650003101394650003701425650002501462710003901487856007601526OTLid0000914MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            200926s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1139.2 4aLB1555 4aHM5861 aLang, Dianaeauthor00aParenting and Family Diversity IssuescDiana Lang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Key Concepts -- II. Parenting Theory -- III. Family Theories -- IV. Parenting Styles -- V. Child-Rearing Strategies -- VI. Child-rearing in a Variety of Contexts -- VII. Developmental Milestones0 aThis book has been created for students and all individuals who work with children and families (e.g., educators, parents, caregivers, direct support workers, etc.) in diverse contexts. It is imperative to understand how and what factors may influence child outcomes across the lifespan. Therefore, key concepts related to parenting, child-rearing, care-giving, and parenting education are outlined in this textbook to provide historical, theoretical, and practical perspectives across vast settings and developmental domains.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/914zAccess online version02769nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154050000900163100002800172245009800200250001600298264004300314264008100357264001200438300002200450336002600472337002600498338003600524341002800560490002700588505081600615520052301431542002701954546001601981588004001997650003902037650003202076650002502108650003802133650003702171710003902208856007602247OTLid0000915MnU20260406020734.0m     o  d s      cr            200928s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781715320041  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA76 4aQA761 aDavies, Stepheneauthor04aThe Crystal Ball Instruction ManualcStephen DaviesnVolume One: Introduction to Data Science  aversion 1.1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Mary Washingtonc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 A trip to Jupyter -- 3 Three kinds of atomic data -- 4 Memory pictures -- 5 Calculations -- 6 Scales of measure -- 7 Three kinds of aggregate data -- 8 Arrays in Python (1 of 2) -- 9 Arrays in Python (2 of 2) -- 10 Interpreting Data -- 11 Assoc. arrays in Python (1 of 3) -- 12 Assoc. arrays in Python (2 of 3) -- 13 Assoc. arrays in Python (3 of 3) -- 14 Loops -- 15 EDA: univariate -- 16 Tables in Python (1 of 3) -- 17 Tables in Python (2 of 3) -- 18 Tables in Python (3 of 3) -- 19 EDA: bivariate (1 of 2) -- 20 EDA: bivariate (2 of 2) -- 21 Branching -- 22 Functions (1 of 2) -- 23 Functions (2 of 2) -- 24 Recoding and transforming -- 25 Machine Learning: concepts -- 26 Classification: concepts -- 27 Decision trees (1 of 2) -- 28 Decision trees (2 of 2) -- 29 Evaluating a classifier0 aA perfect introduction to the exploding field of Data Science for the curious, first-time student. The author brings his trademark conversational tone to the important pillars of the discipline: exploratory data analysis, choices for structuring data, causality, machine learning principles, and introductory Python programming using open-source Jupyter Notebooks. This engaging read will allow any dedicated learner to build the skills necessary to contribute to the Data Science revolution, regardless of background.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/915zAccess online version02798nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100002600143245009600169264004300265264007900308264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002800509490002700537505036300564520122100927542004102148546001602189588004002205650003302245650003102278710003902309856007602348OTLid0000916MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            201002s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aHubert, Davideauthor00aAttenuated DemocracybA Critical Introduction to U.S. Government and PoliticscDavid Hubert 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSalt Lake Community Collegec[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Thinking Like a Political Scientist -- Part 2: Constitutional Foundations -- Part 3: Congress -- Part 4: The Presidency -- Part 5: The Supreme Court -- Part 6: The Federal Bureaucracy -- Part 7: Linkage Institutions -- Part 8: Electoral Politics and Public Opinion -- Part 9: Individual Political Behavior -- Part 10: Civil Rights and Civil Liberties0 aThe U.S. political system suffers from endemic design flaws and is notable for the way that a small subset of Americans—whose interests often don’t align with those of the vast majority of the population—wields disproportionate power. Absent organized and persistent action on the part of ordinary Americans, the system tends to serve the already powerful. That’s why this text is called Attenuated Democracy. To attenuate something is to make it weak or thin. Democracy in America has been thin from the beginning and continues to be so despite some notable progress in voting rights. As political scientists Benjamin Page and Martin Gilens wrote, “The essence of democracy is not just having reasonably satisfactory policies; the essence of democracy is popular control of government, with each citizen having an equal voice.” (1) Since this is likely to be your only college-level course on the American political system, it is important to point out the structural weaknesses of our system and the thin nature of our democracy. Whenever you get the chance—in the voting booth, in your job, perhaps if you hold elected office—I encourage you to do something about America’s attenuated democracy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/916zAccess online version05795nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000900138050000700147245005100154264004300205264005300248264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505437800478520014804856542004105004546001605045588004005061650002605101650002405127650002505151650003105176700002305207700002805230710003905258856007605297OTLid0000917MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            201004s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aG128 4aH104aThe Western WorldbDaily Readings on Geography 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGlen Ellyn, Illinois bCollege of DuPagec[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. What is the Western World? -- 2. What is Regional Geography? -- 3. Cultural Geography -- 4. Economic Geography -- 5. Historical Geography -- 6. Physical Geography -- 7. Political Geography -- 8. Population Geography -- 9. Urban Geography -- 10. Medical Geography -- 11. Pacific Realm -- 12. Pacific Realm: Regional Example -- 13. Pacific Realm: Cultural Geography I -- 14. Pacific Realm: Economic Geography I -- 15. Pacific Realm: Historical Geography I -- 16. Pacific Realm: Physical Geography I -- 17. Pacific Realm: Political Geography I -- 18. Pacific Realm: Population Geography I -- 19. Pacific Realm: Urban Geography I -- 20. Pacific Realm: Cultural Geography II -- 21. Pacific Realm: Economic Geography II -- 22. Pacific Realm: Historical Geography II -- 23. Pacific Realm: Physical Geography II -- 24. Pacific Realm: Political Geography II -- 25. Pacific Realm: Population Geography II -- 26. Pacific Realm: Urban Geography II -- 27. Pacific Realm: Overview -- 28. North America -- 29. North America: Regional Example -- 30. North America: Cultural Geography I -- 31. North America: Economic Geography I -- 32. North America: Historical Geography I -- 33. North America: Physical Geography I -- 34. North America: Political Geography I -- 35. North America: Population Geography I -- 36. North America: Urban Geography I -- 37. North America: Medical Geography I -- 38. North America: Cultural Geography II -- 39. North America Economic Geography II -- 40. North America: Historical Geography II -- 41. North America: Physical Geography II -- 42. North America: Political Geography II -- 43. North America: Population Geography II -- 44. North America: Urban Geography II -- 45. North America: Overview -- 46. Europe -- 47. Europe: Regional Example -- 48. Europe: Cultural Geography I -- 49. Europe: Economic Geography I -- 50. Europe: Historical Geography I -- 51. Europe: Physical Geography I -- 52. Europe: Political Geography I -- 53. Europe: Population Geography I -- 54. Europe: Urban Geography I -- 55. Europe: Cultural Geography II -- 56. Europe: Economic Geography II -- 57. Europe: Historical Geography II -- 58. Europe: Physical Geography II -- 59. Europe: Political Geography II -- 60. Europe: Population Geography II -- 61. Europe: Urban Geography II -- 62. Europe: Overview -- 63. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR) -- 64. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Regional Example -- 65. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Cultural Geography I -- 66. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Economic Geography I -- 67. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Historical Geography I -- 68. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Physical Geography I -- 69. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Political Geography I -- 70. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Population Geography I -- 71. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Urban Geography I -- 72. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Cultural Geography II -- 73. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Economic Geography II -- 74. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Historical Geography II -- 75. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Physical Geography II -- 76. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Political Geography II -- 77. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Population Geography II -- 78. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Urban Geography II -- 79. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Overview -- 80. Russian Domain -- 81. Russian Domain: Regional Example -- 82. Russian Domain: Cultural Geography I -- 83. Russian Domain: Economic Geography I -- 84. Russian Domain: Historical Geography I -- 85. Russian Domain: Physical Geography I -- 86. Russian Domain: Political Geography I -- 87. Russian Domain: Population Geography I -- 88. Russian Domain: Urban Geography I -- 89. Russian Domain: Cultural Geography II -- 90. Russian Domain: Economic Geography II -- 91. Russian Domain: Historical Geography II -- 92. Russian Domain: Physical Geography II -- 93. Russian Domain: Political Geography II -- 94. Russian Domain: Population Geography II -- 95. Russian Domain: Urban Geography II -- 96. Russian Domain: Overview -- 97. Russian Domain: Physical Geography III -- 98. North America: Cultural Geography III -- 99. Europe: Population Geography III -- 100. Latin America and the Caribbean (LACAR): Political Geography III --0 aIn essay format, this textbook considers examples of various sub-categories of Geography in combination with five regions of the Western World.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aQuam, Joeleauthor1 aCampbell, Scotteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/917zAccess online version02177nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002700166245003900193250002500232264004300257264006000300264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002500482490002700507505060200534520034401136542004101480546001601521588004001537650002501577650002301602700002701625710003901652856007601691OTLid0000918MnU20260406020748.0m     o  d s      cr            201006s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781774200032  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aBall, David W.eauthor00aIntroductory ChemistrycDavid Ball  a1st Canadian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. What is Chemistry -- Chapter 2. Measurements -- Chapter 3. Atoms, Molecules, and Ions -- Chapter 4. Chemical Reactions and Equations -- Chapter 5. Stoichiometry and the Mole -- Chapter 6. Gases -- Chapter 7. Energy and Chemistry -- Chapter 8. Electronic Structure -- Chapter 9. Chemical Bonds -- Chapter 10. Solids and Liquids -- Chapter 11. Solutions -- Chapter 12. Acids and Bases -- Chapter 13. Chemical Equilibrium -- Chapter 14. Oxidation and Reduction -- Chapter 15. Nuclear Chemistry -- Chapter 16. Organic Chemistry -- Chapter 17. Kinetics -- Chapter 18. Chemical Thermodynamics0 aThe goal of this textbook is not to make you an expert. True expertise in any field is a years-long endeavor. Here I will survey some of the basic topics of chemistry. This survey should give you enough knowledge to appreciate the impact of chemistry in everyday life and, if necessary, prepare you for additional instruction in chemistry.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKey, Jessie A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/918zAccess online version02677nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002600148245005000174264004300224264010100267264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505040900545520104500954542004101999546001602040588004102056650002602097650002402123650002902147710003902176856007602215OTLid0000919MnU20260406020734.0m     o  d s      cr            201008s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aP91.31 aMarteney, Jimeauthor00aArguing Using Critical ThinkingcJim Marteney 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Standing Up For Your Point Of View -- 2: Communicating An Argument -- 3: Clash -- 4: Claims -- 5: Building Your Case With Issues, Analysis And Contentions -- 6: Evidence -- 7: Reasoning -- 8: Validity Or Truth -- 9: Changing Beliefs, Attitudes and Behavior -- 10: Decision Making - Judging an Argument -- 11: Discovering, Examining and Improving Our Reality -- 12: The Foundations of Critical Thinking0 aThere is a quote that has been passed down many years and is most recently accounted to P.T. Barnum, “There is a sucker born every minute.” Are you that sucker? If you were, would you like to be “reborn?” The goal of this book is to help you through that “birthing” process. Critical thinking and standing up for your ideas and making decisions are important in both your personal and professional life. How good are we at making the decision to marry? According to the Centers for Disease Control, there is one divorce in America every 36 seconds. That is nearly 2,400 every day. And professionally, the Wall Street Journal predicts the average person will have 7 careers in their lifetime. Critical thinking skills are crucial. Critical thinking is a series learned skills. In each chapter of this book you will find a variety of skills that will help you improve your thinking and argumentative ability. As you improve, you will grow into a more confident person being more in charge of your world and the decisions you make.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/919zAccess online version02077nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245006800179264004300247264006400290264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505009100531520080400622542004101426546001601467588004101483650003801524650002601562710003901588856007601627OTLid0000920MnU20260406020504.0m     o  d s      cr            201018s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947112421  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aDean, Mattheweauthor00aSpanish IbBeginning Spanish Language and CulturecMatthew Dean 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArcata, CaliforniabHumboldt State University Pressc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1.En la universidad -- 2. La familia -- 3.En casa -- 4.De compras -- 5.Los pasatiempos0 aThis peer-reviewed textbook is designed for the true beginner with U.S. college students in mind. It contains themed chapters, which are divided into 8 sections. Each section has its own set of learning objectives, and is further separated into three types of assignments, Para estudiar en casa (with detailed explanations), Para practicar en casa (homework exercises), and Para practicar en clase (paired and group classwork activities). The explanations and primary input are written to be easily comprehensible. The individual exercises are geared towards acquisition of form and function, and the communicative classwork exercises promote interpersonal exchanges between students. The digital copy includes some embedded audio files, and we are developing a website to house many more resources.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/920zAccess online version01930nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000700156100002500163245006900188264004300257264006400300264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505014900541520054100690542002701231546001601258588004101274650004401315650003101359700002701390710003901417856007601456OTLid0000921MnU20260406020504.0m     o  d s      cr            201018s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781947112445  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH11 aMorgan, Kyleeauthor04aThe American LGBTQ Rights MovementbAn IntroductioncKyle Morgan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArcata, CaliforniabHumboldt State University Pressc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTHE BEGINNINGS -- THE HOMOPHILE MOVEMENT -- GAY LIBERATION -- RESPONSE TO ADVERSITY -- THE AIDS ERA -- THE LGBTQ RIGHTS MOVEMENT -- BATTLEFRONTS0 aThe American LGBTQ Rights Movement: An Introduction is a peer-reviewed chronological survey of the LGBTQ fight for equal rights from the turn of the 20th century to the early 21st century. Illustrated with historical photographs, the book beautifully reveals the heroic people and key events that shaped the American LGBTQ rights movement. The book includes personal narratives to capture the lived experience from each era, as well as details of essential organizations, texts, and court cases that defined LGBTQ activism and advocacy.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aRodriguez, Megeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/921zAccess online version02201nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136050000700145100003200152245004800184264004300232264008600275264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505020400538520072400742542004101466546001601507588004101523650002801564650002701592650002601619650003101645710003901676856007601715OTLid0000922MnU20260406020504.0m     o  d s      cr            201018s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aP123 4aH11 aAllard-Kropp, Manoneauthor00aLanguages and WorldviewcManon Allard-Kropp 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louisc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPART 1 Language and Culture: Concepts and Definitions -- PART 2 Conveying Meaning -- PART 3 The Ethnolinguistic Perspective -- PART 4 Language, Worldviews, and Intercultural Communication -- ADDENDUM0 aAsking and answering questions about what culture entails and examines the fundamental properties and intertwining nature of language and culture. This text explores linguistic relativity, lexical differences among languages and intercultural communication, including high and low contexts. Changes to a variety of OER works were made by Manon Allard-Kropp in the Department of Language and Cultural Studies to tailor the text to fit the needs of the Languages and World View course at the University of Missouri–St. Louis. Materials from the original sources have been combined, reorganized, and added to by the current author, and any conceptual or typographical errors are the responsibility of the current author.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/922zAccess online version02508nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002400144245005500168264004300223264008600266264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505023600529520109900765542004101864546001601905588004101921650002601962650003101988710003902019856007602058OTLid0000923MnU20260406020504.0m     o  d s      cr            201018s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aVotaw, Kateeauthor00aGeneral Psychology for Honors StudentscKate Votaw 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louisc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aINTRODUCTION -- PSYCHOPHYSIOLOGY -- CONSCIOUSNESS -- PERCEPTION -- HEALTHY LIVING -- LEARNING AND MEMORY -- SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY -- PSYCHOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENT -- PERSONALITY AND PSYCHOLOGICAL DISORDERS -- THERAPY AND PSYCHOPHARMACOLOGY0 aWhat are the most effective methods to study for a test? What are the meanings of dreams? How do illusions work? With whom are you most likely to fall in love? These are just a few of the questions that have been asked by psychologists since the birth of the field as an area of scientific research in the 1870’s. This text surveys the basic concepts, theories, and pivotal findings over the past 100 years in the science of Psychology, with special emphasis on contemporary concepts and findings focused on the relation of the brain to normal and pathological behaviors. Psychology has long evolved past the psychodynamic influence to include biological, social, learning, motivational, and developmental perspectives, to name a few. Contemporary psychologists go beyond philosophical or anecdotal speculation and rely on empirical evidence to inform their conclusions. Similarly, readers will push beyond pre-existing schemas and misconceptions of the field of psychology to an understanding of contemporary quantitative research methods as they are used to predict and test human behavior.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/923zAccess online version02585nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138110006800151245008700219264004300306264007900349264001200428300002200440336002600462337002600488338003600514341002800550490002700578505021800605520108900823542003001912546001601942588004001958650002601998650002402024650003602048710003902084856007602123OTLid0000924MnU20260330020737.0m     o  d s      cr            201018s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.62 aDepartment of English, Linguistics, and Writing Studieseauthor00aTechnical Writing @ SLCCcDepartment of English, Linguistics, and Writing Studies  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSalt Lake Community Collegec[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. The Writing Process -- II. Introduction to Writing in the Sciences -- III. Introduction to Writing in Engineering -- IV. Citation & Copyright -- V. Civic-Engagement and Technical Writing -- VI. Project Planning0 aWhat is technical writing? You can think of it as writing about specialized topics or you could also think of it as using technology to communicate your ideas. A science lab report, a specification, a change order for building construction, or patient education materials–just to name a few–are all considered technical writing. Similarly if you design a webpage or a brochure this can also be considered technical writing. Academic writing, the writing you do for school, generally is informative or persuasive writing and usually only comes in a few different genres. In technical writing, on the other hand, one is often documenting what was done (such as a science experiment or auto repair invoice). Therefore the format of the writing is often as important as the content. This leads to an emphasis on usability and accessibility for your documents. Finally, although citing your sources is important in all writing, you will find that in some fields of technical writing, such as the sciences and engineering, it is one of the more important considerations of your writing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/924zAccess online version02662nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001600136050000900152050000800161100002400169245006500193264004300258264005500301300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505015200521520124600673542004101919546001601960588004101976650003202017650002402049650003702073650002702110710003902137856007602176OTLid0000925MnU20260406020508.0m     o  d s      cr            201018suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA76 4aQA11 aLiu, Yaningeauthor00aFirst Semester in Numerical Analysis with PythoncYaning Liu 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDenver, ColoradobAuraria Institutional Repository  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Solutions of equations: Root-finding -- 3 Interpolation -- 4 Numerical Quadrature and Differentiation -- 5 Approximation Theory0 aThe book is based on “First semester in Numerical Analysis with Julia”, written by Giray Ökten. The contents of the original book are retained, while all the algorithms are implemented in Python (Version 3.8.0). Python is an open source (under OSI), interpreted, general-purpose programming language that has a large number of users around the world. Python is ranked the third in August 2020 by the TIOBE programming community index, a measure of popularity of programming languages, and is the top-ranked interpreted language. We hope this book will better serve readers who are interested in a first course in Numerical Analysis, but are more familiar with Python for the implementation of the algorithms. The first chapter of the book has a self-contained tutorial for Python, including how to set up the computer environment. Anaconda, the open-source individual edition, is recommended for an easy installation of Python and effortless management of Python packages, and the Jupyter environment, a web-based interactive development environment for Python as well as many other programming languages, was used throughout the book and is recommended to the readers for easy code development, graph visualization and reproducibility.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/925zAccess online version02478nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000900135050001000144050000700154100002800161245003900189250001400228264004300242264005400285264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505080300516520039001319542001601709546001601725588004101741650003001782650002501812650002301837650003101860700002601891710003901917856007601956OTLid0000926MnU20260406020505.0m     o  d s      cr            201109s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aG128 4aQH301 4aH11 aPatrich, Jeremyeauthor00aPhysical GeographycJeremy Patrich  aVersion 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Introduction to Geography as a Discipline -- Unit 2: Earth’s Place within the Cosmos -- Unit 3: Introduction to Geology & Geologic Time -- Unit 4: Mapping Earth’s Surface -- Unit 5: Earth-Sun Relationships: Reasons for the Seasons -- Unit 6: Earth’s Atmosphere -- Unit 7: Elements of Weather & Climate -- Unit 8: Basic Mineral Development -- Unit 9: Igneous Rocks -- Unit 10: Sedimentary Rocks -- Unit 11: Metamorphism & Metamorphic Rocks -- Unit 12: Weathering & Soils -- Unit 13: Earths Dynamic Surface: Plate Tectonics -- Unit 14: Earths Dynamic Surface: Tectonics Force -- Unit 15: Earths Dynamic Surface: Volcanoes -- Unit 16: Shaped by Coastal Processes -- Unit 17: Shaped by Rivers & Running Water -- Unit 18: Shaped by Wind as a Geomorphic Agent -- Unit 19: Shaped by Glaciers0 aWelcome to Physical Geography at College of the Canyons. This textbook was designed especially for College of the Canyons students, as a resource to instill the knowledge and adventure that the discipline of geography holds for so many of us. The following units will cover a wide array of topics such as: Earth’s grid system, rivers, oceans, deserts, basic geology, and cartography.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aRadtke, Trudieeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/926zAccess online version03771nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245004200167264004300209264007000252264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505047400499520218600973542002703159546001603186588004003202650002603242650002603268710003903294856007603333OTLid0000927MnU20260406020734.0m     o  d s      cr            201110s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aMatthews, George W.eauthor00aPhilosophical EthicscGeorge Matthews 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGeorge W. Matthewsc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Some Preliminaries -- 1 The Examined Life -- 2 A Little Bit of Logic -- 3 Fallacies and Biases -- II Ethics Culture and Religion -- 4 Relativism -- 5 Religion and Ethics -- III Reconstructing Norms -- 6 Egoism -- 7 Social Contract Theory -- 8 Utilitarianism -- 9 Kant and the ethics of duty -- IV Applied Ethics -- 10 Theory in Practice -- 11 Euthanasia -- 12 Liberty and its Limits -- 13 Crime and Punishment -- 14 Animals and Ethics -- 15 Ethics and the Environment0 aThis book is an introduction to philosophical ethics intended for use in introductory college or high school level courses. It has grown out of lecture notes I shared with the first students who took my online Ethics course at the Pennsylvania College of Technology almost 20 years ago. Since then it has seen more development in a variety of forms – starting out as a pdf document, and then evolving into a static set of WordPress pages and finally now as a book written in bookdown and hosted at GitHub. This text represents my attempt to scratch a couple of itches. The first is my wanting a presentation of the major philosophical approaches to ethics that I can actually agree with and that is integrated into my overall teaching method. I tend to teach philosophy to beginners and so there is a fair amount of discussion of the tools used by philosophers and of the ways in which their approach differs from that of their colleagues in other disciplines. There are of course many good quality ethics textbooks out there, and yet none has exactly matched my way of wanting to present the material. Teaching ethics over the years has been a process of active exploration and constant revision of my approach as I have come to a more nuanced and richer appreciation of what ethical thinking and theorizing is all about, as well as some ideas about how I think the main strands of argument relate to each other. Yes this is a partisan effort, but it’s all subject to revision and refinement based on, I hope at least, the better argument. That’s what I am trying to get across here. The second itch I am trying to scratch has to do with initiatives in open education, and I’d like this text to contribute in its own small way to the much larger and more influential open source movement and philosophy of which I consider it a part. Knowledge is only ours to share. Yes of course writers, developers and publishers do hard work that deserves compensation. But intellectual property, it seems to me, is a false idol that deserves to be smashed. So here is my effort to chip away at it – knowledge should free us and and not sink us into both literal and figurative debt.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/927zAccess online version04820nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002700163245020900190250001600399264004300415264006900458264001200527300002200539336002600561337002600587338003600613341002800649490002700677505172100704520172802425542002704153546001604180588004104196650003204237650003804269710003904307856007604346OTLid0000928MnU20260406020734.0m     o  d s      cr            201114s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946011138  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aWolske, Martineauthor02aA Person-Centered Guide to Demystifying TechnologybWorking together to observe, question, design, prototype, and implement/reject technology in support of people's valued beings and doingscMartin Wolske  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUrbana, IllinoisbUniversity of Illinois Library - Urbanac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to the Book -- -- Orange Unit: A Person-Centered Launch -- -- 1A: Information Systems -- -- 1B: Introduction to Electronic Circuits -- -- 2A: Critical Social + Technical Perspective -- -- 2B: Electronic Components in Series -- -- 3A: The Unknown Tech Innovators -- -- 3B: Computer Building Blocks -- -- 4A: Storytelling in the Information Sciences -- -- 4B: Meet the Microcomputer -- -- 4C: Getting Started with the Raspberry Pi -- -- 4D: Coding Electronics -- -- Orange Unit Review -- -- Blue Unit: Computational Tinkering -- -- 1A: The Logic of Hardware and Programming -- -- 1B: Essential Coding Concepts -- -- 2A: The Methodological Landscape -- -- 2B: Make Music with Code -- -- 3A: Valued, Inclusive Information and Computing Technology Experiences -- -- 3B: Build Functions for Remixable Code -- -- 4A: Sharing Our Counterstories -- -- 4B: Raspberry Pi Counterstory Little Free Library -- -- Blue Unit Review -- -- REMIX: Ideating and Iterating Code: Scratch Example -- -- Rainbow Unit: Networks Big and Small -- -- 1A: Programmable Electronics, Smart Technology, and the Internet of Things -- -- 1B: Connecting Our Electronic ‘Thing’ to a Wider World -- -- 2A: Digital Internets, Past and Present -- -- 2B: The Infrastructure of the Internet -- -- 3A: The Digitization of Divides -- -- 3B: A Person-Centered Network Information System Adventure -- -- 4A: Recovering Community: Designing for Social Justice -- -- 4B: Community-Centered Design: An Emergent Strategy for Community Organizing and Action -- -- Rainbow Unit Review -- -- Introducing the Unix Command Line -- -- Raspberry Pi Networking 1010 -- -- Network Troubleshooting -- -- Security and Privacy -- -- Glossary -- -- Bibliography0 aDigital technologies old and new are not objects that can be packed inside a box. They are a seamless, indivisible combination of people, organizations, policies, economies, histories, cultures, knowledge, and material things that are continuously shaped and reshaped. Every one of us innovates-in-use our everyday technologies; we just do not always know it. We are shaped by the networked information tools in our midst, and we shape them and thereby shape others. While many of the chapters in this book can be approached as standalone explorations, as many around the world have done, its full potential comes when collaboratively taken as a journey through twelve sessions. Each session in this second, revised edition includes two thematically linked chapters, one more socially oriented and one more technically oriented. Sessions are brought together into three larger generative themes that are built from three decades of participatory design in and with community, and from the teaching of these concepts and practices in courses and workshops. Approached within a community of practice, learning outcomes include discovering ways to advance power, both power within and power with others; advancing our technical skills, but also and even more, our progressive community engagement skills, our critical sociotechnical skills, and our cognitive, information, and social-emotional skills; and progressing our culturally competent collective leadership through social justice storytelling within a framing of reciprocity. In so doing, this textbook seeks to address the call placed by the Rev. Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr. – to rapidly shift from a ‘thing-oriented’ society to a ‘person-oriented’ society.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/928zAccess online version02812nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002900164245007800193250004000271264004300311264009600354264001200450300002200462336002600484337002600510338003600536341002800572490002700600505089000627520060801517542003002125546001602155588004002171650002602211650002402237650002602261710003902287856007602326OTLid0000929MnU20260406020734.0m     o  d s      cr            201114s1999    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135667  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aB721 aWilson, David C.eauthor02aA Guide to Good ReasoningbCultivating Intellectual VirtuescDavid Wilson  aSecond edition, revised and updated 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[1999] 4c©1999.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One: Reasoning and Arguments -- Chapter One: Good Reasoning -- Chapter Two: What Makes an Argument? -- Part Two: Clarifying Arguments -- Chapter Three: A Framework for Clarifying -- Chapter Four: Streamlining -- Chapter Five: Specifying -- Chapter Six: Structuring -- Part Three: Evaluating Arguments -- Chapter Seven: A Framework for Evaluating -- Chapter Eight: Fallacies -- Part Four: Evaluating the Truth of the Premises -- Chapter Nine: How to Think About Truth -- Part Five: Evaluating Deductive Logic -- Chapter Ten: How to Think About Deductive Logic -- Chapter Eleven: If–Then Arguments -- Chapter Twelve: Either–Or Arguments and More -- Part Six: Evaluating Inductive Logic -- Chapter Thirteen: How to Think About Inductive Logic -- Chapter Fourteen: Inductive Generalization -- Chapter Fifteen: Arguments from Analogy -- Chapter Sixteen: Explanatory Arguments -- --0 aA Guide to Good Reasoning has been described by reviewers as “far superior to any other critical reasoning text.” It shows with both wit and philosophical care how students can become good at everyday reasoning. It starts with attitude—with alertness to judgmental heuristics and with the cultivation of intellectual virtues. From there it develops a system for skillfully clarifying and evaluating arguments, according to four standards—whether the premises fit the world, whether the conclusion fits the premises, whether the argument fits the conversation, and whether it is possible to tell.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/929zAccess online version03658nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001000144100003300154245006000187250000700247264004300254264008500297264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002500504490002700529505121000556520101401766532017002780542001602950546001602966588004002982650004303022650003103065650002503096710003903121856007603160OTLid0000930MnU20260406020840.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH1 4aHM5861 aPearce, Elizabeth B.eauthor00aContemporary FamiliesbAn Equity LenscElizabeth Pearce  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Authors -- Letter to Students -- Dedication -- Epigraph -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Foreward: Nana Osei-Kofi -- Foreward: Amy Hofer and Michaela Willi-Hooper -- Chapter 1: Social Constructions -- Chapter 2: Studying Families -- Chapter 3: Connection, Community, Love, and Partnering -- Chapter 4: Nurturance, Parenting, and Caregiving -- Chapter 5: Routines, Traditions, and Culture -- Chapter 6: Representation and Belonging in Social Systems -- Chapter 7: Health and Health Care -- Chapter 8: Housing -- Chapter 9: Safety and Stability -- Chapter 10: Food and Water -- Chapter 11: Justice -- Chapter 12: Visual Culture -- Chapter 13: Education and Employment -- Chapter 14: Meaning and Purpose -- Glossary -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgements -- About the Authors -- Appendix A: Foundational Theory Table -- Appendix B: Comparison of Family Rituals and Family Routines -- Appendix C: Psychosocial Lifespan Development Theory -- Appendix E Origin Story from the 1st Edition of Contemporary Families: An Equity Lens -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aThis universally accessible text provides students with a foundational understanding of the changing experiences and needs of contemporary families in the United States. It emphasizes the multi-directional influence of social structure as well as the impacts of difference, power, and oppression. Using an intersectional lens and placing the diversity of families at its core, the text prepares students with a range of majors and career paths to use their sociological imaginations, identify privilege and oppression, practice inclusion and take part in increasing equity for families, whether at the professional level, the personal level or both.Resources for students and instructors include chapter learning objectives, key terms with definitions, chapter activities, and reflective questions for application and discussion. In addition, instructors have access to chapter questionnaires for formative assessment, larger summative assignments, and a crosswalk to identify the location of specific topics.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do. 1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/930zAccess online version03058nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245005400179264004300233264007200276264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505081600525520110401341542001602445546001602461588004002477650002602517650002602543710003902569856007602608OTLid0000932MnU20260406020823.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800640559  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aMcAleer, Seaneauthor00aPlato's 'Republic'bAn IntroductioncSean McAleer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Fathers and Sons -- 2. Taming the Beast: Socrates versus Thrasymachus -- 3. A Fresh Start -- 4. Blueprints for a Platonic Utopia: Education and Culture -- 5. Starting to Answer the First Question: The Political Virtues -- 6. The Republic’s First Question Answered at Last: Personal Justice -- 7. Questions about the Idea Polis: The Three Waves -- 8. Surfing the Third Wave: Plato’s Metaphysical Elevator, the Powers Argument, and the Infallibility of Knowledge -- 9. The Philosopher’s Virtues -- 10. Metaphors to Think by: The Sun and Divided Line Analogies -- 11. The Allegory of the Cave -- 12. The Decline and Fall of the Ideal City-Soul -- 13. The Republic’s Second Question Answered: Three and a Half Arguments that the Just Life is Happier -- 14. Are We There Yet? Tying up Loose Ends in Book X0 aThis book is a lucid and accessible companion to Plato’s Republic, throwing light upon the text’s arguments and main themes, placing them in the wider context of the text’s structure. In its illumination of the philosophical ideas underpinning the work, it provides readers with an understanding and appreciation of the complexity and literary artistry of Plato’s Republic. McAleer not only unpacks the key overarching questions of the text – What is justice? And Is a just life happier than an unjust life? – but also highlights some fascinating, overlooked passages which contribute to our understanding of Plato’s philosophical thought. Plato’s 'Republic': An Introduction offers a rigorous and thought-provoking analysis of the text, helping readers navigate one of the world’s most influential works of philosophy and political theory. With its approachable tone and clear presentation, it constitutes a welcome contribution to the field, and will be an indispensable resource for philosophy students and teachers, as well as general readers new to, or returning to, the text.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/932zAccess online version01864nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167245004800177264004300225264008500268264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505035200530520022300882542004101105546001601146588004001162650002301202650002401225650002301249700002801272700002701300710003901327856007601366OTLid0000933MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780578763507  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA440 4aQH30100aHistology and Embryology for Dental Hygiene 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Cell biology review -- 2. Histology review -- 3. Histology of the oral mucosa -- 4. Histology of tooth and periodontal tissues -- 5. Histology of glands, lymphatics and sinuses -- 6. Early development -- 7. Pharyngeal arches -- 8. Tooth development -- 9. Enamel development -- 10. Dentin-pulp complex development -- 11. Periodontium development0 aThis eBook makes use of animated images to focus on concepts in histology and embryology, as well as hyperlinks to promote non-linear reading and learning. It is aimed at college students in a dental hygienist program.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aSheldahl, Lairdeauthor1 aYapp, Raye Anneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/933zAccess online version02798nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167050001000177245004800187250001900235264004300254264008400297264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505048500558520090301043542003001946546001601976588004001992650002302032650002502055650002402080650002302104700002802127700002902155700002902184710003902213856007602252OTLid0000934MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350035  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA773 4aRA440 4aQH30100aNutritionbScience and Everyday Application  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Authors -- Acknowledgements -- Updates Made to OER -- Unit 1 - Designing A Healthy Diet -- Unit 2 - Nutrition Science and Information Literacy -- Unit 3 - Molecules of Life: Photosynthesis, Digestion, and Metabolism -- Unit 4- Carbohydrates -- Unit 5 - Lipids -- Unit 6 - Protein -- Unit 7- Body Weight and Health -- Unit 8 - Vitamins and Minerals Part 1 -- Unit 9 - Vitamins and Minerals Part 2 -- Unit 10 - Nutrition throughout the Lifespan -- Glossary0 aThis book is designed as an Open Education Resource (OER) for introductory nutrition courses and has been adopted for use in high schools and colleges. Topics covered include basic nutrition and metabolism, information literacy, body weight and health, nutrition across life stages, dietary supplements, an in-depth look at each of the macronutrients, and major functions of vitamins and minerals. The second edition of Nutrition: Science and Everyday Application was released in August 2022. The second edition includes a fully revised Unit 7 (Body Weight and Health) and minor revisions to Unit 10 (Nutrition and Physical Activity). In June 2023, Unit 2 (Nutrition Science and Information Literacy) was significantly updated along with the ancillary materials for Unit 2. The remainder of the OER and the accompanying ancillary materials are the same as the first edition, originally published in1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aCallahan, Aliceeauthor1 aLeonard, Heathereauthor1 aPowell, Tamberlyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/934zAccess online version02385nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001300152050001100165245009000176264004300266264008500309264001200394300002200406336002600428337002600454338003600480341002800516490002700544505016700571520087700738542002701615546001601642588004001658650002501698650003101723650003701754700002201791700003501813710003901848856007601887OTLid0000936MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648769835  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1139.2 4aLB155500aTrauma Informed Behaviour SupportbA Practical Guide to Developing Resilient Learners 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Understand and empathise -- II. Observe and reflect -- III. Prevent and contain -- IV. Connect and validate -- V. Teach and reinforce -- VI. Survive and thrive0 aIf we want to impact the world of children who have experienced trauma then we must change not only ourselves and our classroom, but we must change our schools, our organisations, and our systems of care for children. We must all speak out for these children who have no voice to bring awareness of new educational and mental health approaches to children who will become tomorrow’s failed adults unless they receive our understanding and our help. For whatever reason you have been attracted to this book, you have come to the right place. You may at times put it down and wonder if the challenge is too great, but trust me it is not. If you stay engaged with this book and with a child who has experienced trauma then you will learn new understandings, new ideas and new ways to reach the mind, the heart and the soul of young people who need our support and our love.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks1 aAyre, Kayeauthor1 aKrishnamoorthy, Govindeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/936zAccess online version01697nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245003800153264004300191264006700234264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505014900478520038800627542001601015546001601031588004001047650002601087650002601113700002401139700003301163710003901196856007601235OTLid0000937MnU20260406020749.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014097  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB7200aIntroduction to PhilosophybLogic 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. What is Logic? -- 2. Evaluating Arguments -- 3. Formal Logic in Philosophy -- 4. Informal Fallacies -- 5. Necessary and Sufficient Conditions0 aIntroduction to Philosophy: Logic provides students with the concepts and skills necessary to identify and evaluate arguments effectively. The chapters, all written by experts in the field, provide an overview of what arguments are, the different types of arguments one can expect to encounter in both philosophy and everyday life, and how to recognise common argumentative mistakes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aMartin, Beneeditor1 aHendricks, Christinaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/937zAccess online version02469nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002900149245010100178264004300279264005800322264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505105700557520020701614542004101821546001601862588004001878650003601918650002601954710003901980856007602019OTLid0000938MnU20260406020735.0m     o  d s      cr            201130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5549 4aHD30.41 aHughes, Clarethaeauthor00aCritical Employment, Ethical, and Legal Scenarios in Human Resource DevelopmentcClaretha Hughes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUniversity Libraries, bUniversity of Arkansasc2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Criteria for Case Scenario Analysis -- Topic 1: Professional Responsibility and Relationships Between Career Development Professionals and clients -- Topic 2: Providing Career Services Online -- Topic 3: Using Technology and Social Media in Human Resource and Workforce Development (HRWD) -- Topic 4: Supervising, Training, and Teaching Employees -- Topic 5: Ethics of Mentoring -- Topic 6: All Employees’ Access to Career Development, Training and Development, and Organization Development Activities -- Topic 7: Power and Privilege Dynamics -- Topic 8: Authenticity of Allies -- Topic 9: Ethics of Career Development and Training and Development Assessments -- Topic 10: Protected Class Bias -- Topic 11: Covert Conditioning of Girls/Women Away from Male-Dominated Fields -- Topic 12: Educational Opportunity Bias -- Topic 13: Occupational Segregation and Promotional Ceilings -- Topic 14: Confidentiality -- Topic 15: Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) -- Topic 16: Artificial Intelligence (AI) and HRD -- Bibliography -- Author Bio0 aThis book provides mini-cases for HRD and other disciplines to use for engaging students in incident discussions. Exploring ways to solve problems and make decisions about situations that occur at work.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/938zAccess online version02263nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001100147050001000158050000700168100002800175245004800203264004300251264008600294264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505036600557520049100923542004101414546001601455588004101471650004301512650004301555650002901598650004401627650003101671710003901702856007601741OTLid0000939MnU20260406020505.0m     o  d s      cr            201211s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aHM621 4aHQ1101 4aP91.3 4aH11 aAhrndt, Shannoneauthor00aIntercultural CommunicationcShannon Ahrndt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louisc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCHAPTER 1: Introduction to Intercultural Communication -- CHAPTER 2: Social Categorization, Stereotyping, and Discrimination -- CHAPTER 3: Beliefs, Values, and Cultural Universals -- CHAPTER 4: Introduction to Race and Ethnicity -- CHAPTER 5: The Impacts of Social Class -- CHAPTER 6: Gender and Gender Inequality -- CHAPTER 7: Socialization and Human Sexuality0 aIntercultural Communication examines culture as a variable in interpersonal and collective communication. It explores the opportunities and problems arising from similarities and differences in communication patterns, processes, and codes among various cultural groups. It explores cultural universals, social categorization, stereotyping and discrimination, with a focus on topics including race, ethnicity, social class, religion, gender and sexuality as they relate to communication.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aIntercultural CommunicationvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/939zAccess online version02884nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002900148245004600177264004300223264007600266264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505028500519520147100804542001602275546001602291588004002307650002502347650002302372710003902395856007602434OTLid0000940MnU20260406020753.0m     o  d s      cr            201216s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 avan Gestel, Keeseeditor00aEnvironmental ToxicologycKees van Gestel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEnvironmental Toxicologyc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Environmental toxicology -- Chapter 2: Environmental Chemistry, Chemicals -- Chapter 3: Environmental Chemistry, from Fate to Exposure -- Chapter 4: Toxicology -- Chapter 5: Population, Community and Ecosystem Ecotoxicology -- Chapter 6. Risk assessment & regulation --0 aThis open online textbook on Environmental Toxicology aims at covering the field in its full width, including aspects of environmental chemistry, ecotoxicology, toxicology and risk assessment. With that, it will contribute to improving the quality, continuity and transparency of the education in environmental toxicology. We also want to make sure that fundamental insights on fate and effects of chemicals gained in the past are combined with recent approaches of effect assessment and molecular analysis of mechanisms causing toxicity. The book consists of six chapters, with each chapter being divided into several sub-chapters to enable covering all aspects relevant to the topic. All chapters are designed in a modular way, which each module having clear training goals and being flagged with a number of keywords. Most modules have an average length of 1000-2000 words, a limited number of references, and 3-5 figures and/or tables. A few modules are enlighted with short clips, animations or movies to allow better illustration of the theory. The introduction chapter of the book, for instance, contains a short interview with two key experts reflecting on the development of the field over the past 30 years. The book contains tools for self-study and training, like a (limited) number of questions at the end of each module. For the future we foresee the addition of separate exercises and other tools that may help the student in understanding the theory.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/940zAccess online version02649nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245008600134264004300220264010100263264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505063800541520076301179542003001942546001601972588004101988650002602029650003102055700003502086700003902121710003902160856007602199OTLid0000941MnU20260406020505.0m     o  d s      cr            201226s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aDigging into ArchaeologybA Brief OER Introduction to Archaeology with Activities 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Introduction to Anthropological Archaeology -- 2: History (up until the 1960s) -- 3: History (the 1960s and beyond) -- 4: The Archaeological Record and Site Formation Processes -- 5: Artifact Preservation -- 6: How to Find Archaeological Sites -- 7: Excavation -- 8: Dating Methods – Relative and Absolute Dating -- 9: Artifact Analysis -- 10: Reconstructing Environments and Subsistence Patterns -- 11: Social Archaeology -- 12: Bioarchaeology -- 13: Archaeological Interpretation and Application of Theory -- 14: Historical Archaeology -- 15: New Frontiers in Archaeology -- 16: Legal and Ethical Considerations in Archaeology0 aThis book is intended for use in a variety of introductory archaeology settings, such as in lectures and lab courses. This text can complement an existing traditional text or completely replace a standard text. It can be used for its activities or as a study resource. When we wrote this text, we designed the chapters to be brief, providing concise and to-the-point information. This book is not intended to replace lectures or direct instruction from an instructor; rather, it supports learning in a variety of settings and formats. The book can be printed in whole, read digitally, or used piecemeal in either format. However you use this text, we hope that you find it serves as an instructive learning tool and that you dig archaeology as much as we do!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArcheologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aPaskey, Amanda Walcotteauthor1 aCisneros, AnnMarie Beasleyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/941zAccess online version02133nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153245005500161264004300216264006700259264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505032200503520057600825542001601401546001601417588004001433650002601473650002601499650002401525700002601549700003301575710003901608856007601647OTLid0000942MnU20260406020750.0m     o  d s      cr            201226s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014233  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB72 4aBL100aIntroduction to PhilosophybPhilosophy of Religion 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The Intertwining of Philosophy and Religion in the Western Tradition -- 2. Reasons to Believe – Theoretical Arguments -- 3. Non-Standard Arguments for God’s Existence -- 4. Reasons Not to Believe -- 5. Debunking Arguments against Theistic Belief -- 6. From Philosophy of (Mono)theism to Philosophy of Religions0 aIntroduction to Philosophy: Philosophy of Religion introduces some of the major traditional arguments for and against the existence of God, as well as some less well-known, but thought-provoking arguments for the existence of God, and one of the most important new challenges to religious belief from the Cognitive Science of Religion. An introductory chapter traces the connection between philosophy and religion throughout Western history, and a final chapter addresses the place of non-Western and non-monotheistic religions within contemporary philosophy of religion.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks1 aBranson, Beaueeditor1 aHendricks, Christinaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/942zAccess online version02762nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100002700158245010700185264004300292264006900335264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002800526490002700554505076000581520081101341542004102152546001602193588004002209650003602249710003902285856007602324OTLid0000943MnU20260330020452.0m     o  d s      cr            201226s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781439919866  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aHiggins, Shawneauthor00aBridgesbUnited States Academia for First-Generation and International College StudentscShawn Higgins 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Broad Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Accreditation and Types of Institutions -- 2. International United States College Campuses -- 3. Study Abroad in the United States -- 4. College Fairs -- 5. Outreach Services -- 6. Community Serving Colleges and Universities -- 7. College Rankings -- 8. Campus Visits -- 9. College Websites and Other Internet Resources -- 10. Applications -- 11. Common Challenges -- 12. Academic Advising -- 13. Credentials, Majors, and Requirements -- 14. Instructors and Professors -- 15. Diversity, Inclusion, and Equity -- 16. Rights and Responsibilities -- 17. More Quotes From the Field -- 18. Twenty Academic Jargon Words You Might Need to Know -- 19. Grammar for Composition Resources and Review -- 20. Academic Situations and Scripts -- 21. Pop Culture Index0 aBridges introduces students to a wide range of concepts, institutions, histories, and artifacts of United States college and university life. After discussing these items in easy-to-scan, concise, nuance-free prose, this textbook then offers useful lists, templates for writing and speaking in different discourses and situations, thought-provoking questions and activities for self-study and for classroom work, and pertinent hyperlinks for further information. Bridges is designed to help first-generation, first-year, English language learners, and/or culturally unfamiliarized students more fully and successfully explore their educational environments. By using this book, students will be better prepared for the academic and social challenges of successfully undertaking higher education in English.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/943zAccess online version01393nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002200146245006700168264004300235264007300278264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505008900528520014100617542002700758546001600785588004100801650003500842650002700877710003900904856007600943OTLid0000944MnU20260406020506.0m     o  d s      cr            210104s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aLee, Caraeauthor00aMath in SocietybMathematics for liberal arts majorscCara Lee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOregon, PortlandbPortland Community College Math Departmentc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Logic and Sets -- 2 Financial Math -- 3 Statistics -- 4 Probability -- 5 Democracy0 aWe dedicate this book to our students. May you have greater ease in paying for college and grow your proficiency and confidence in math.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/944zAccess online version02763nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002600136245008900162264004300251264007300294264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002500489490002700514505111900541520053401660542001602194546001602210588004002226650003202266710003902298856007602337OTLid0000945MnU20260406020737.0m     o  d s      cr            210105s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCho, Yongyeoneauthor00aTutorials of Visual Graphic Communication Programs for Interior DesigncYongyeon Cho 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart One. AutoCAD -- Chapter 1. Introduction of AutoCAD -- Chapter 2. Draw floor plans -- Chapter 3. Create dimensions and components -- Chapter 4. Draw elevation and sections -- Chapter 5. Draw ceiling plans -- Chapter 6. Set sheets -- Chapter 7. Symbols and prints -- Part Two. Revit -- Chapter 8. Introduction to Revit -- Chapter 9. Create a site -- Chapter 10. Set grids, levels, dimensions, & building columns -- Chapter 11. Add/edit beams, walls, & curtain walls -- Chapter 12. Understand visibility settings, add/edit floor & ceilings -- Chapter 13. Add/edit stairs, rails, & roof -- Chapter 14. Add/edit windows, doors, lighting fixtures, furniture, tags, & sheets -- Chapter 15. Add/edit model-in-place components & edit family -- Chapter 16. Add/edit elevation, section, detail, text, annotation, & rooms -- Chapter 17. Add/edit views, lighting, & materials -- Chapter 18. Create Revit rendering, Revit clouding rendering -- Part Three. Enscape -- Chapter 19. Introduction to Enscape -- Chapter 20. Edit model & materials -- Chapter 21. Edit lighting and create a video -- Chapter 22. Edit render outputs0 aThis book is for the beginning level of both architecture and interior design students who learn computer graphic communication software. The author developed multiple tutorials to teach three computer graphic applications, AutoCAD, Revit, and Enscape. AutoCAD is an essential computer drafting software which is 2D drawing software. Revit is a Building Information Modeling software, which is 3D based modeling software. Lastly, Enscape is a real-time rendering, animation, and virtual reality plug-in for users' 4D experiences.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/945zAccess online version02178nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002200144245005700166264004300223264007000266264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505011700513520090400630542004101534546001601575588004001591650003301631650002501664710003901689856007601728OTLid0000946MnU20260406020825.0m     o  d s      cr            210110s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aNeal, Tedeauthor00aElementary Earth and Space Science MethodscTed Neal 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Physics -- II. Space Science -- III. Earth Science -- IV. Climate Science -- V. Course Materials and Pedagogy0 aWe created this book to help you as both a college student and a future teacher. Dr. Ted Neal asked us to help him create this resource from the perspective of students who have taken Science Methods II–what would we want in a textbook for this course? With this in mind, we have gathered and created resources to help you better understand science and feel confident in your abilities as a future teacher. This book is divided into five parts which align with the Science Methods II course: Physics Space Science Earth Science Climate Science Course Materials and Pedagogy Within each part, the material is broken down into smaller chapters. Here you will find written explanations, video links, glossary terms, key takeaways, and practice quizzes to help you understand the material. This book is designed to be a flexible resource; use it as much or as little as you need throughout the course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/946zAccess online version02662nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001200142050000700154245005300161264004300214264006000257264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002500439490002700464505071300491520075801204542001601962546001601978588004001994650002502034650003102059700003202090700002702122710003902149856007602188OTLid0000947MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            210111s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1947172433  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aPrinciples of Macroeconomics for AP® Courses 2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Welcome to Economics! -- Chapter 2 Choice in a World of Scarcity -- Chapter 3 Demand and Supply -- Chapter 4 Labor and Financial Markets -- Chapter 5 The Macroeconomic Perspective -- Chapter 6 Economic Growth -- Chapter 7 Unemployment -- Chapter 8 Inflation -- Chapter 9 The International Trade and Capital Flows -- Chapter 10 The Aggregate Demand/Aggregate Supply Model -- Chapter 11 The Keynesian Perspective -- Chapter 12 The Neoclassical Perspective -- Chapter 13 Money and Banking -- Chapter 14 Monetary Policy and Bank Regulation -- Chapter 15 Exchange Rates and International Capital Flows -- Chapter 17 The Impacts of Government Borrowing -- Chapter 18 Macroeconomic Policy Around the World0 aPrinciples of Macroeconomics for AP® Courses 2e covers the scope and sequence requirements for an Advanced Placement® macroeconomics course and is listed on the College Board’s AP® example textbook list. The second edition includes many current examples and recent data from FRED (Federal Reserve Economic Data), which are presented in a politically equitable way. The outcome is a balanced approach to the theory and application of economics concepts. The second edition was developed with significant feedback from current users. In nearly all chapters, it follows the same basic structure of the first edition. General descriptions of the edits are provided in the preface, and a chapter-by-chapter transition guide is available for instructors.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aGreenlaw, Steven A.eauthor1 aShapiro, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/947zAccess online version02013nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002800162245004000190264004300230264004600273264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505028000496520059200776542003701368546001601405588004001421650002401461650002701485710003901512856007601551OTLid0000948MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            210111s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCorral, Michaeleauthor00aElementary CalculuscMichael Corral 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLivonia, MichiganbMichael Corralc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 The Derivative -- 2 Derivatives of Common Functions -- 3 Topics in Differential Calculus -- 4 Applications of Derivatives -- 5 The Integral -- 6 Methods of Integration -- 7 Analytic Geometry and Plane Curves -- 8 Applications of Integrals -- 9 Infinite Sequences and Series0 aThis textbook covers calculus of a single variable, suitable for a year-long (or two-semester) course. Chapters 1-5 cover Calculus I, while Chapters 6-9 cover Calculus II. The book is designed for students who have completed courses in high-school algebra, geometry, and trigonometry. Though designed for college students, it could also be used in high schools. The traditional topics are covered, but the old idea of an infinitesimal is resurrected, owing to its usefulness (especially in the sciences). There are 943 exercises in the book, with answers and hints to selected exercises.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/948zAccess online version02046nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245002500135264004300160264006200203264001200265300002200277336002600299337002600325338003600351341002800387490002700415505038500442520053200827542004101359546001601400588004001416650002301456650002601479700002501505700002701530710003901557856007601596OTLid0000949MnU20260406020826.0m     o  d s      cr            210111s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2000aModern World History 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota Libraries Publishing Projectc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Modern World History Begins in Asia2. Europe and Africa3. The Americas and Columbus4. Early Globalization and Revolutions5. Troubled Nineteenth Century6. Imperialism7. The Great War8. Modern Crisis9. World War II10. Decolonization11. Cold War12. Neoliberal Globalization13. Limits to Growth?14. Appendix A: Choosing a Chief Executive and Voting15. Appendix B: Finance and Taxes0 aWelcome to Modern World History! This is the textbook for an undergraduate survey course taught at all the universities and most of the colleges in the Minnesota State system. Similar courses are taught at institutions around the United States and the world, so the authors have made the text available as an open educational resource that teachers and learners can read, adapt, and reuse to meet their needs. We’d like to hear from people who have found the text useful, and we’re always open to questions and suggestions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aAllosso, Daneauthor1 aWilliford, Tomeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/949zAccess online version02866nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000700142245009400149264004300243264005200286264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505129100515520037701806542001602183546001602199588004002215650002502255700002702280700002802307700003002335710003902365856007602404OTLid0000950MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210114s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a0889534381  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aEthical Use of Technology in Digital Learning EnvironmentsbGraduate Student Perspectives 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCalgary, AlbertabUniversity of Calgaryc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Underlying Ethical Issues and Value of Technologies: Artificial Intelligence, Social Networking Services, 3D Printing -- Chapter 1: Ethical Considerations When Using Artificial Intelligence-Based Assistive Technologies in Education -- Chapter 2: Beware: Be Aware - The Ethical Implications of Teachers Who Use Social Networking Sites (SNSs) to Communicate -- Chapter 3: From Consumers to Prosumers: How 3D Printing is Putting Us in the Driver’s Seat for Creation and the Ethical Considerations that Accompany this Shift. -- Part II: Promoting Equity in Personalized Learning Contexts: Academic Resource Sharing, Adaptive Learning Systems, STEM, Assistive Technologies -- Chapter 4: Ethical Issues in Academic Resource Sharing -- Chapter 5: Adaptive Learning Systems in Modern Classrooms -- Chapter 6: STEM Beyond the Acronym: Ethical Considerations in Standardizing STEM Education in K-12 -- Chapter 7: Considerations of Equitable Standards in the Implementation of Assistive Technology -- Part III: Nurturing Ethical Awareness in Institutional Contexts: Admissions and Communications -- Chapter 8: Who Gets In? Examining Ethics and Equity in Post-Secondary Admissions -- Chapter 9: To What Extent Does Fake News Influence Our Ability to Communicate in Learning Organizations?0 aThis book is the result of a co-design project in a class in the Masters of Education program at the University of Calgary. The course, and the resulting book, focus primarily on the safe and ethical use of technology in digital learning environments. The course was organized according to four topics based on Farrow’s (2016) Framework for the Ethics of Open Education.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aBrown, Barbaraeauthor1 aRoberts, Verenaeauthor1 aJacobsen, Micheleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/950zAccess online version03908nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135100002800143245008200171264004300253264008500296264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505028200558520239300840542003003233546001603263588004103279650002303320650003803343650002603381710003903407856007603446OTLid0000951MnU20260406020507.0m     o  d s      cr            210119s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aP511 aFriedberg, Nilaeauthor00aDecoding the 1920sbA Reader for Advanced Learners of RussiancNila Friedberg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aМихаил Зощенко -- Александра Коллонтай -- Исаак Бабель -- Илья Ильф и Евгений Петров -- Михаил Булгаков -- Исаак Бабель -- Дмитрий Фурманов -- Андрей Платонов0 aThe materials presented in this book were developed for an advanced-level content-based Russian language course at Portland State University entitled “Russian Literature of the Twentieth Century: The 1920s.” Literature of this period is a major part of the Russian canon, but is notoriously difficult for learners of Russian to read in the original, due both to its stylistic complexity and the relative obscurity of its historical, political, and cultural references. And yet, this decade is crucial for understanding Russia – not only in the Soviet period, but also today. This was the period, when Mikhail Zoshchenko, Isaak Babel, Mikhail Bulgakov, and Andrei Platonov meticulously documented the birth of the “New Soviet Man,” his “newspeak” and Soviet bureaucratese; when Alexandra Kollontai, a Marxist revolutionary and a diplomat, wrote essays and fiction on the “New Soviet Woman”; when numerous satirical works were created; when Babel experimented with a literary representation of dialects (e.g.,Odessa Russian or Jewish Russian). These varieties of language have not disappeared. Bureaucrats still use some form of bureaucratese. Numerous contemporary TV shows imitate the dialects that Babel described. Moreover, Bulgakov’s “Heart of a Dog” gave rise, due largely to its film adaptation, to catch-phrases that still appear throughout contemporary Russian media, satirical contexts, and everyday conversation. Thus, the Russian literature of the 1920s does not belong exclusively to the past, but has relevance and interpretive power for the present, and language learners who wish to pursue a career in humanities, media analysis, analytical translation, journalism, or international relations must understand this period and the linguistic patterns it established. The textbook is intended for adult learners, and contains language assignments that would, on the one hand, help students transition to ACTFL’s Advanced proficiency level (i.e., be able to create "narratives, descriptions, and summaries … using paraphrasing and elaboration” (ACTFL 2012: 12).), but at the same time promote meaningful engagement with literary texts. The assignments in this textbook are multilevel ones, and thus offer a solution for multilevel classes that include literate heritage Russian speakers, Intermediate High, Advanced, or even Superior-level readers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/951zAccess online version02677nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050001000149050001000159100002600169245006400195264004300259264005500302264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505070900534520070501243542003001948546001601978588004001994650002302034650002502057650003502082650002302117710003902140856007602179OTLid0000952MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA773 4aSF811 4aQH3011 aCherian, Gitaeauthor02aA Guide to the Principles of Animal NutritioncGita Cherian 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction to Nutrition -- II. Gastrointestinal Tract, Digestive Organs, and Processes -- III. Carbohydrates, Structures and Types -- IV. Carbohydrates, Digestion and Absorption -- V. Carbohydrates, Metabolism -- VI. Lipids, Structure -- VII. Lipids, Digestion -- VIII. Lipids, Transport, Deposition, and Metabolism -- IX. Proteins -- X. Proteins, Digestion and Absorption -- XI. Proteins, Metabolism -- XII. Proteins and Amino Acids, Quality -- XIII. Vitamins -- XIV. Water-Soluble Vitamins (B and C) -- XV. Minerals -- XVI. Microminerals -- XVII. Bioenergetics -- XVIII. Water in Animal Nutrition -- XIX. Feed Additives -- XX. Measurement of Feed and Nutrient Utilization in Food-Producing Animals0 aBased on over 20 years of teaching experience in animal nutrition, this study guide will enhance learning basic food animal nutritional principles.In this introductory text, six fundamental nutrients, their structure, digestion, and metabolism are covered. A brief introduction to bioenergetics, feed additives, nutrient analysis, digestive organs and processes in monogastric and ruminant animals, and methods for assessing nutrient utilization are also included.Each chapter is illustrated with a new terms box, key points, and review questions.This study guide is an essential learning tool for undergraduate students majoring in animal sciences, veterinary medicine, or other related disciplines.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/952zAccess online version02243nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002700148245007700175264004300252264005500295264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505020100527520089400728542003001622546001601652588004001668650002301708650002301731710003901754856007601793OTLid0000953MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            210130s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aSmyth, Williameauthor00aAll Things FlowbFluid Mechanics for the Natural SciencescWilliam Smyth 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction2 Review of elementary linear algebra3 Cartesian vectors and tensors 4 Tensor calculus5 Fluid kinematics6 Fluid dynamics7 Vortices8 Waves9 Nonlinear, hydrostatic flow over topography0 aThis book began as lecture notes for an Oregon State University course in fluid mechanics, designed for beginning graduate students in physical oceanography. Because of its fundamental nature, this course is often taken by students outside physical oceanography, e.g., atmospheric science, civil engineering, physics and mathematics. In later courses, the student will discover esoteric fluid phenomena such as internal waves that propagate through the sky, water phase changes that govern clouds, and planetary rotation effects that control large-scale winds and ocean currents. In contrast, this course concerns phenomena that we have all been familiar with since childhood: flows you see in sinks and bathtubs, in rivers, and at the beach. In this context, we develop the mathematical techniques and scientific reasoning skills needed for higher-level courses and professional research.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/953zAccess online version01816nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001300149245003300162264004300195264005500238264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002800415490002700443505011700470520043500587542004101022546001601063588004001079650002401119650002601143650002401169650003601193700002501229700002501254710003901279856007601318OTLid0000954MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.600aBusiness Writing Style Guide 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- The Writing Process -- Writing Essentials -- Writing and Business Models -- Feedback and Grading0 aIt is the goal of this book to help students do the following:• Apply basic concepts for effective and concise business writing.• Compile a well written report acceptable within a business context.• Follow a writing process designed for business students.• Demonstrate critical thinking, reasoning, and persuasion.• Communicate in writing using a business model.• Apply resources for improving business writing skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMorris, Johneauthor1 aZwart, Julieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/954zAccess online version02755nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144050001100155050001000166050001000176245003300186264004300219264005500262264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505037800494520097100872542002701843546001601870588004001886650003301926650002501959650003701984650002302021650003602044650002302080700002702103700002802130710003902158856007602197OTLid0000955MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            210130s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aQC21.3 4aLB1555 4aLC980 4aQH30100aExploring Physical Phenomena 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Exploring the Nature of Light Phenomena -- Unit 2: Exploring the Nature of Thermal Phenomena -- Unit 3: Considering the Influence of Light and Thermal Phenomena on Local Weather -- Unit 4: Considering the Influence of Light and Thermal Phenomena on Global Climate -- Unit 5: Exploring the Nature of Astronomical Phenomena in the Context of the Sun/Earth/Moon System0 aThis course is intended for prospective and practicing elementary and middle school teachers. By exploring physical phenomena in class, you will learn science in ways in which you are expected to teach science in schools or in informal settings such as afterschool programs, youth group meetings, and museum workshops. This course also is appropriate for general science students and others interested in exploring some of the physical phenomena underlying global climate change. The theme for the course is: What happens when light from the Sun shines on the Earth? The emphasis is on questioning, predicting, exploring, observing, discussing, reading, and writing about what one thinks and why. This first unit focuses on exploring the nature of light phenomena. Among the unit’s many goals are two primary ones: to learn about light phenomena and to learn about ways to foster science learning for yourself and others such as your family, friends, and students.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 avan Zee, Emilyeauthor1 aGire, Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/955zAccess online version02710nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139100003200146245004900178264004300227264005500270264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505092200502520064401424542004102068546001602109588004002125650002502165650003102190710003902221856007602260OTLid0000956MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210130s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aEmerson, Patrick M.eauthor00aIntermediate MicroeconomicscPatrick Emerson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1: Preferences and Indifference Curves -- Module 2: Utility -- Module 3: Budget Constraint -- Module 4: Consumer Choice -- Module 5: Individual Demand and Market Demand -- Module 6: Firms and their Production Decisions -- Module 7: Minimizing Costs -- Module 8: Cost Curves -- Module 9: Profit Maximization and Supply -- Module 10: Market Equilibrium – Supply and Demand -- Module 11: Comparative Statics - Analyzing and Assessing Changes in Markets -- Module 12: Input Markets -- Module 13: Perfect Competition -- Module 14: General Equilibrium -- Module 15: Monopoly -- Module 16: Pricing Strategies -- Module 17: Game Theory -- Module 18: Models of Oligopoly – Cournot, Bertrand and Stackleberg -- Module 19: Monopolistic Competition -- Module 20: Externalities -- Module 21: Public Goods -- Module 22: Asymmetric Information -- Module 23: Uncertainty and Risk -- Module 24: Time – Money Now or Later?0 aIntermediate Microeconomics is a comprehensive microeconomic theory text that uses real world policy questions to motivate and illustrate the material in each chapter. Intermediate Microeconomics is an approachable yet rigorous textbook that covers the entire scope of traditional microeconomic theory and includes two mathematical approaches, allowing instructors to teach the material with or without calculus. With real-world policy topics as an entree into each subject, Intermediate Microeconomics will help students engage with the material and facilitate learning not only the concepts, but their importance and application as well.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/956zAccess online version03291nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245007700149264004300226264005500269264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505062400501520137101125542004102496546001602537588004002553650002302593650002302616700003002639700003302669700002902702700003502731710003902766856007602805OTLid0000957MnU20260406020508.0m     o  d s      cr            210130s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aMonitoring Animal Populations and their HabitatsbA Practitioner's Guide 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Lessons Learned from Current Monitoring Programs -- 3. Community-Based Monitoring -- 4. Goals and Objectives Now and Into the Future -- 5. Designing a Monitoring Plan -- 6. Factors to Consider When Designing the Monitoring Plan -- 7. Putting Monitoring to Work on the Ground -- 8. Field Techniques for Population Sampling and Estimation -- 9. Techniques for Sampling Habitat -- 10. Database Management -- 11. Data Analysis in Monitoring -- 12. Reporting -- 13. Uses of the Data: Synthesis, Risk Assessment and Decision Making -- 14. Changing the Monitoring Approach -- 15. The Future of Monitoring0 aWe designed this book to offer a comprehensive overview of the monitoring process, from start to finish. Although there are books that deal with sampling design and the quantitative analysis of population data, there are few that provide practical advice covering the entire evolution of a monitoring plan from incorporating stakeholder input to data collection to data management and analysis to reporting. This book strives to present an overview of this process. We also acknowledge that any such effort tends to reflect the interests and expertise of the authors, and as such, there is a distinct emphasis on monitoring vertebrate populations and upland habitats. Although many of our examples tend to focus on bird populations and forested habitats, we have made an attempt to cover other taxa and habitat types as well, and many of the recommendations and suggestions that we present are applicable to a diversity of monitoring programs. This book was written to fill a practical need and also to embrace a set of values that we hold dear. We wanted a book that could be used in a classroom because we feel that students in natural resources programs need to know how to design a monitoring program when they enter the workforce. We also realize that many former students now in the workforce did not have that training and may find this book of value to them.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMcComb, Brenda C.eauthor1 aZuckerberg, Benjamineauthor1 aVesely, David G.eauthor1 aJordan, Christopher A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/957zAccess online version04289nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000900140050000700149245002700156250001600183264004300199264005500242264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002800419490002700447505014100474520283200615542004103447546001603488588004003504650003403544650003303578650003103611700003303642700003603675700002903711710003903740856007603779OTLid0000958MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210131s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aJA71 4aH100aOpen Judicial Politics  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Actors in the Judicial Process -- II. Court Procedures -- III. Decision Making -- IV. Public Opinion -- V. Media -- VI. Policy Making0 aThe impetus for this volume was a multitude of conversations regarding pedagogy and teaching related to our judicial process courses. Based on these conversations, we identified four main threads or needs of our colleagues: First, many of us bring or want to bring more “political science” into our classes, though we also want to avoid the high costs of reinventing successful existing courses to do so. Second, our programs all require a political methodology course, and we want to reinforce those lessons in our substantive courses. We want to encourage our students’ understanding of how to read and understand research studies as well as how to craft their own research questions. Third, we want to keep our courses as current as possible. And fourth, we wanted to find a way to bring the cost of our courses down, as we see so many students struggle with the high costs of a college degree. This volume (as well as any future editions) addresses each of these concerns. Open Judicial Politics is a compilation of new and original research in judicial politics written specifically for the undergraduate audience, thus providing accessible examples of political science research that also address some of the more current concerns and controversies in our field. Additionally, every article is accompanied by some type of classroom activity—from basic discussion questions to full-blown simulations—that makes it easier for instructors to adapt the material to their courses and enhance classes with interactives. The chapters of the volume generally follow the well-worn path of most textbooks of judicial politics, making the volume an easy companion for adoption, and the material should fit seamlessly into the preestablished structures of most courses. Finally, the volume is an open-source resource, and adoption of the text adds no cost for our students. Whether one uses one or ten articles, the cost remains nil. This volume includes twenty-two original contributions that we have grouped into nine parts. The studies cover the breadth and scope of the field of judicial politics, with attention to appellate and trial courts, national high courts and intermediate appellate courts, and US courts and their international counterparts, thus providing a large range of materials to complement any judicial process course or text. We are especially pleased that undergraduate students played key roles in the creation of several of these studies, performing data collection and analysis as well as complete authorship from stem to stern. For the second edition, we have added fifteen articles that continue to illustrate key concepts and aspects of judicial politics, following the same formula of empirical research tailored to an undergraduate audience, accompanied by a variety of classroom activities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSolberg, Rorie Spilleeditor1 aDiascro, Jennifer Segaleeditor1 aWaltenburg, Ericeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/958zAccess online version02116nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002600146245004000172250001600212264004300228264008400271264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505083100532520009301363542004101456546001601497588004001513650003501553650002701588710003901615856007601654OTLid0000959MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210131s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aChase, Morganeauthor00aTechnical MathematicscMorgan Chase  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Order of Operations -- Negative Numbers -- Decimals -- Fractions -- Accuracy and Significant Figures -- Precision and GPE -- Formulas -- Perimeter and Circumference -- Percents Part 1 -- Ratios, Rates, Proportions -- Scientific Notation -- Percents Part 2 and Error Analysis -- The US Measurement System -- The Metric System -- Converting Between Systems -- Other Conversions -- Angles -- Triangles -- Area of Polygons and Circles -- Composite Figures -- Converting Units of Area -- Surface Area of Common Solids -- Area of Regular Polygons -- Volume of Common Solids -- Converting Units of Volume -- Pyramids and Cones -- Percents Part 3 -- Mean, Median, Mode -- Probability -- Standard Deviation -- Right Triangle Trigonometry -- Slope -- Non-Right Triangle Trigonometry -- Radian Measure -- Exercise Answers0 aThis developmental-level mathematics textbook is intended for career-technical students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/959zAccess online version02152nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002900165245005000194264004300244264007600287264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505019300540520075500733542004101488546001601529588004101545650004201586650002301628710003901651856007601690OTLid0000960MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            210131s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781736577905  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQH3011 aBrooks, Geoffreyeauthor00aBio-Inspired Sensory SystemscGeoffrey Brooks 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bFlorida State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Introduction -- Chapter 2 General Concepts from Engineering and Biology -- Chapter 3 Photo-sensory Systems -- Chapter 4 Mechano-sensory Systems -- Chapter 5 Chemo-sensory Systems0 aUsing natural sensory system concepts to develop and improve sensory systems will continue to thrive for many years to come. Technology advances rapidly (Moore’s Law) as does our understanding of biological principles and designs. These trends fuel the fertile grounds of bio-inspired sensory systems, a topic that is inherently multidisciplinary. This book will serve well as either an academic text on the subject or an introduction to the variety of proven bio-inspired designs. The focus is on sensory systems that interpret environmental stimuli. It introduces natural photo-, mechano-, and chemo-sensory systems across the animal kingdom and also summarizes various novel engineering ideas that glean ideas from these natural sensory systems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/960zAccess online version02497nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003200149245008300181264004300264264007300307264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505069800557520062401255542002701879546001601906588004001922650002301962650002301985710003902008856007602047OTLid0000961MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            210206s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aHaen Whitmer, Karrieauthor02aA Mixed Course-Based Research Approach to Human PhysiologycKarri Haen Whitmer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSafety and Compliance in the Human Physiology Laboratory -- Scientific Methods and Human Subjects Research -- Conducting Background Research in the Sciences -- Clinical Techniques: Assessment of Vital Signs -- Introduction to Data Acquisition in Human Physiology -- Molecules of Life: The Central Dogma and RNA Vaccines -- Properties of Blood as a Buffer and Blood Glucose -- Body Temperature Homeostasis -- Clinical Techniques: The Neurological Assessment -- Patellar and Achilles Reflexes -- Human Nerve Conduction Velocity (NCV) -- Auditory and Visual Pathways -- Voluntary Muscle Activity -- Assessment of Cardiovascular Function -- Assessment of Pulmonary Function -- The Electrooculogram0 aThe Biology 256 Laboratory course was designed to provide students with hands-on access to modern techniques in human physiological analyses using the course-based research pedagogical approach. In this course, students will learn how to perform literature searches; generate research questions and hypotheses; design experiments; collect, analyze, visualize and interpret data; and present scientific findings to others. The Biol 256L curriculum offers a high-impact human physiology experience that fosters the critical thinking skills required to be a successful citizen in a modern world filled with misinformation.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/961zAccess online version03584nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245005900144264004300203264003800246264001200284300002200296336002600318337002600344338003600370341002800406490002700434505178600461520063102247542003002878546001602908588004102924650003302965650002502998700003103023700002903054710003903083856007603122OTLid0000962MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            210206s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL700aDesign for LearningbPrinciples, Processes, and Praxis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbEdTech Booksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part I. Instructional Design Practice -- Understanding1. Becoming a Learning Designer2. Designing for Diverse Learners3. Conducting Research for Design4. Determining Environmental and Contextual Needs5. Conducting a Learner Analysis -- Exploring6. Problem Framing7. Task and Content Analysis8. Documenting Instructional Design Decisions -- Creating9. Generating Ideas10. Instructional Strategies11. Instructional Design Prototyping Strategies -- Evaluating12. Design Critique13. The Role of Design Judgment and Reflection in Instructional Design14. Instructional Design Evaluation15. Continuous Improvement of Instructional Materials -- Part II. Instructional Design Knowledge -- Sources of Design Knowledge16. Learning Theories17. The Role of Theory in Instructional Design18. Making Good Design Judgments via the Instructional Theory Framework19. The Nature and Use of Precedent in Designing20. Standards and Competencies for Instructional Design and Technology Professionals -- Instructional Design Processes21. Design Thinking22. Robert Gagné and the Systematic Design of Instruction23. Designing Instruction for Complex Learning24. Curriculum Design Processes25. Agile Design Processes and Project Management -- Designing Instructional Activities26. Designing Technology-Enhanced Learning Experiences27. Designing Instructional Text28. Audio and Video Production for Instructional Design Professionals29. Using Visual and Graphic Elements While Designing Instructional Activities30. Simulations and Games31. Designing Informal Learning Environments32. The Design of Holistic Learning Environments33. Measuring Student Learning -- Design Relationships34. Working With Stakeholders and Clients35. Leading Project Teams36. Implementation and Instructional Design0 aOur purpose in this book is twofold. First, we introduce the basic skill set and knowledge base used by practicing instructional designers. We do this through chapters contributed by experts in the field who have either academic, research-based backgrounds, or practical, on-the-job experience (or both). Our goal is that students in introductory instructional design courses will be able to use this book as a guide for completing a basic instructional design project. We also hope the book is useful as a ready resource for more advanced students or others seeking to develop their instructional design knowledge and skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aMcDonald, Jason K.eauthor1 aWest, Richard E.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/962zAccess online version02481nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127245002100140264004300161264008500204264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002800411490002700439505053200466520077300998542004101771546001601812588004001828650003601868700003001904700002901934700002901963710003901992856007602031OTLid0000963MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210206s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.600aAcademic Success 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Part A: Successful Beginnings -- Beginnings -- Adjusting to University -- Successful Connections -- II. Part B: Successful Foundations -- English Language Foundations -- Working with Information -- III. Part C: Successful Study Skills -- Goals and Priorities -- Combatting Procrastination -- Time Management -- Study Space -- Reading -- Notetaking -- Thinking -- IV. Part D: Successful Assessment -- Managing Assessment -- Writing Assignments -- Types of Assignments -- Presentations -- Preparing for Exams -- Types of Exams0 aAcademic Success is designed to help students on their university journey. It is divided into four parts, each reflecting different aspects of a student’s tertiary experience. Part A: Successful Beginnings addresses what it is like to be a new student at an Australian university. Part B: Successful Foundations introduces basic skills in English language, techniques for accessing and working with information, and understanding academic integrity. Part C: Successful Study Skills presents the everyday, core skills that successful students use while at university. Lastly, Part D: Successful Assessment meets head-on the challenges of tertiary assessments. This open book ultimately aids students across all disciplines in achieving academic success at university.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aHargreaves, Wendyeauthor1 aBartlett, Cristyeauthor1 aDerrington, Kateeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/963zAccess online version03628nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002600140245007200166264004300238264006800281264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505112100526520138201647542004103029546001603070588004103086650003603127710003903163856007603202OTLid0000964MnU20260406020510.0m     o  d s      cr            210206s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aOlivier, Jakoeauthor00aSelf-directed multimodal learning in higher educationcJako Olivier 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAOSIS Publishingc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1Self-directed multimodal learning within a context of transformative open education -- Chapter 2The affordances of the Community of Inquiry framework for self-directed blended learning in South African research -- Chapter 3Adaptive learning technology to enhance self-directed learning -- Chapter 4A systematic literature review to probe design guidelines for a self-directed blended learning environment -- Chapter 5Diffractive pathways in self-directed multimodal learning: experiences from Botswana and South Africa -- Chapter 6Implementing cooperative learning elements in Google Docs to optimise the online social presence in a self-directed environment -- Chapter 7Situated and culturally appropriate self-directed multimodal learning -- Chapter 8Scaffolding teachers’ critical reflection in a South African distance learning programme through a design-based study -- Chapter 9Optimising the Community of Inquiry principles of online self-directed learning environments -- Chapter 10Blending and cooperating in the computer literacy classroom: An opportunity to develop self-directed learning skills0 aThis book aims to provide an overview of theoretical and practical considerations in terms of self-directed multimodal learning within the university context. Multimodal learning is approached in terms of the levels of multimodality and specifically blended learning and the mixing of modes of delivery (contact and distance education). As such, this publication will provide a unique snapshot of multimodal practices within higher education through a self-directed learning epistemological lens. The book covers issues such as what self-directed multimodal learning entails, mapping of specific publications regarding blended learning, blended learning in mathematics, geography, natural science and computer literacy, comparative experiences in distance education as well as situated and culturally appropriate learning in multimodal contexts. This book provides a unique focus on multimodality in terms of learning and delivery within the context of self-directed learning. Therefore, the publication would not only advance the scholarship of blended and open distance learning in South Africa, but also the contribute to enriching the discourse regarding self-direction. From this book readers will get an impression of the latest trends in literature in terms of multimodal self-directed learning in South Africa as well as unique empirical work being done in this regard.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/964zAccess online version03153nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003400137245003900171264004300210264011700253264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505080700547520119501354542004102549546001602590588004002606650004202646710003902688856007602727OTLid0000965MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            210208s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aJohnson, Eric Raymondeauthor00aAerospace StructurescEric Johnson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKevin T. Crofton Department of Aerospace and Ocean Engineering, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Function of Flight Vehicle Structural Members -- 2. Aircraft Loads -- 3. Elements of Thin-Walled Bar Theory -- 4. Some Aspects of the Structural Analysis -- 5. Work and Energy Methods -- 6. Applications of Castigliano's Theorems -- 7. Arches, Rings, and Fuselage Frames -- 8. Laminated Bars of Fiber-Reinforced Polymer Composites -- 9. Failure Initiation in FRP Compositives -- 10. Structural Stability of Discrete Conservative Systems -- 11. Buckling of Columns and Plates -- 12. Introduction to Aeroelasticity -- 13. Fracture of Cracked Members -- 14. Design of a Landing Strut and Wing Spar -- 15. Direct Stiffness Method -- 16. Applications of the Direct Stiffness Method -- 17. Finite Element Method -- 18. Introduction to Flexible Body Dynamics -- Appendix A: Linear Elasticity of Solid Bodies0 aAerospace Structures by Eric Raymond Johnson is a 600+ page text and reference book for junior, senior, and graduate-level aerospace engineering students. The text begins with a discussion of the aerodynamic and inertia loads acting on aircraft in symmetric flight and presents a linear theory for the status and dynamic response of thin-walled straight bars with closed and open cross-sections. Isotropic and fiber-reinforced polymer (FRP) composite materials including temperature effects are modeled with Hooke’s law. Methods of analyses are by differential equations, Castigliano’s theorems, the direct stiffness method, the finite element method, and Lagrange’s equations. There are numerous examples for the response axial bars, beams, coplanar trusses, coplanar frames, and coplanar curved bars. Failure initiation by the von Mises yield criterion, buckling, wing divergence, fracture, and by Puck’s criterion for FRP composites are presented in the examples. Professors, if you are considering or reviewing this book for adoption in your course, please let us know here. Problem sets: http://hdl.handle.net/10919/104169 ePub and LaTeX source files: Expected late spring 20221 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/965zAccess online version04289nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002800137245004900165264004300214264010000257264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505091400531520228401445542001603729546001603745588004003761650002303801710003903824856007603863OTLid0000966MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            210208s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aOrth, Donald J.eauthor00aFish, Fishing, and ConservationcDonald Orth 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Department of Fish and Wildlife, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication -- Copyright and License Information -- Introduction -- About the Author -- Acknowledgements -- Additional Resources and Links -- Instructor Resources -- 1. Fish, Fishing, and Why They Matter -- 2. Values Drive Fish Conservation -- 3. Sensory Capabilities of Fish -- 4. Ethical Reasoning and Conservation Planning -- 5. Pain, Sentience, and Animal Welfare -- 6. Public Aquariums and Their Role in Education, Science, and Conservation -- 7. Gender and Fishing -- 8. Angling and Conservation of Living Fishy Dinosaurs -- 9. Fly Fishing’s Legacy for Conservation -- 10. Recreational Fishing and Keep Fish Wet -- 11. Integrating Fishers in the Management of Arapaima -- 12. Conserving Tunas: The Most Commercially Valuable Fish on Earth -- 13. Groupers and Spawning Aggregations -- 14. Menhaden and Forage Fish Management -- 15. Takeaways for Successful Fish Conservation -- Glossary -- Accessibility0 aFish, Fishing, and Conservation is a 389-page, peer-reviewed open textbook intended for undergraduate students who are exploring majors in Fish & Wildlife. It is also relevant to a general audience or for use in courses which explore social and ethical aspects of fish, fishing and conservation. People, places, and approaches to fishing are as varied as the diverse fish fauna that exist on the planet. As conservation planners recognize the value of substantial engagement of stakeholders in decision making and ineffectiveness of rigid top-down management approaches, Fish, Fishing, and Conservation asserts that all peoples must play a role in conservation. Through case studies, engaging narrative and graphics, and exercises, the text explores major motivations for fishing and non-fishing related values, responsible fisheries practices, the rights of all people to decide how to manage and conserve fish, their habitats, and how they are utilized in the context of overfishing as a pressing global problem for which appropriate solutions are not easily found nor implemented. Introductory chapters examine fish, fishing, and why fish matter and examine the role of values in driving conservation initiatives. Fish and their unique sensory capabilities are described along with a review of recent studies to examine issues of pain, sentience, and learning in fishes living in a foreign, underwater world. The text incorporates these new findings in conservation and management leading readers to evaluate and adopt suitable approaches to ethical reasoning which consider the welfare needs of wild and cultured fishes. Later chapters focus on the role of gender in fishing, conservation organizations, recreational fishing, and a focus on specific fisheries that reveal the principles of conservation and management as they play out in major controversies. Additionally, the textbook contains audio recordings of professional profiles by Virginia Tech students. These are linked at the beginning of each end-of-chapter Professional Profile. Audio recordings are also available on Spotify: https://open.spotify.com/show/06SnqAigflPXUgGNIHZxAX?si=Sljj3q9NRyOcclbmEE3npA Please let us know if you are reviewing or adopting this book https://bit.ly/fishandconservation_interest1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/966zAccess online version03793nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002700137245008600164264004300250264009500293264001200388300002200400336002600422337002600448338003600474341002800510490002700538505066000565520198201225542004103207546001603248588004003264650002403304710003903328856007603367OTLid0000967MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            210208s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aLeClair, Reneeeauthor00aCell Biology, Genetics, and Biochemistry for Pre-Clinical StudentscRenee LeClair 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Biochemistry basics2. Basic laboratory measurements 3. Fed and fasted state 4. Fuel for now 5. Fuel for later 6. Lipoprotein metabolism and cholesterol synthesis 7. Pentose phosphate pathway (PPP), purine and pyrimidine metabolism 8. Amino acid metabolism and heritable disorders of degradation9. Disorders of monosaccharide metabolism and other metabolic conditions10. Genes, genomes, and DNA 11. Transcription and translation 12. Gene regulation and the cell cycle 13. Human genetics 14. Linkage studies, pedigrees, and population genetics 15. Cellular signaling 16. Plasma membrane 17. Cytoplasmic membranes 18. Cytoskeleton 19. Extracellular matrix0 aCell Biology, Genetics, and Biochemistry for Pre-Clinical Students is an undergraduate medical-level resource for foundational knowledge across the disciplines of genetics, cell biology and biochemistry. This USMLE-aligned text is designed for a course in first-year undergraduate medical course that is delivered typically before students start to explore systems physiology and pathophysiology. The text is meant to provide the essential information from these content areas in a concise format that would allow learner preparation to engage in an active classroom. Clinical correlates and additional application of content is intended to be provided in the classroom experience. The text assumes that the students will have completed medical school prerequisites (including the MCAT) in which they will have been introduced to the most fundamental concepts of biology and chemistry that are essential to understand the content presented here. This resource should be assistive to the learner later in medical school and for exam preparation given the material is presented in a succinct manner, with a focus on high-yield concepts. The 276-page text was created specifically for use by pre-clinical students at Virginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine and was based on faculty experience and peer review to guide development and hone important topics. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting parts or the whole of the text are requested to register their interest at: https://bit.ly/interest-preclinical. Instructors and subject matter experts interested in and sharing their original course materials relevant to pre-clinical education are requested to join the instructor portal at https://www.oercommons.org/groups/pre-clinical-resources/10133. Suggested Citation LeClair, Renée J., (2021). Cell Biology, Genetics, and Biochemistry for Pre-Clinical Students, Blackburg, VA: Virginia Tech Publishing. https://doi.org/10.21061/cellbio. Licensed with CC BY NC-SA 4.0.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/967zAccess online version01384nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245004900162264004300211264006300254264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505016400494520010600658542004100764546001600805588004000821650002000861650002600881710003900907856007600946OTLid0000968MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210213s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aWeidner, Brianeauthor00aBrass Techniques and PedagogycBrian Weidner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPalni Pressc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. General Brass Techniques and Pedagogies -- II. Instrument Specific Techniques and Pedagogies -- III. Guided Practice Lessons -- IV. Resources and Activities0 aTextbook for undergraduate brass methods course focusing on brass instrument techniques and pedagogy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/968zAccess online version02327nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135050001000146245002100156264004300177264006500220264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002800407490002700435505033300462520077500795542004101570546001601611588004001627650003001667650002301697650002301720700002801743700003101771710003901802856007601841OTLid0000969MnU20260406020509.0m     o  d s      cr            210213s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQC21.3 4aQH30100aCoastal Dynamics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Overview -- 2 Large-scale geographical variation of coasts -- 3 Ocean waves -- 4 Global wave and tidal environments -- 5 Coastal hydrodynamics -- 6 Sediment transport -- 7 Cross-shore transport and profile development -- 8 Longshore transport and coastline changes -- 9 Coastal inlets and tidal basins -- 10 Coastal protection0 aThis textbook on Coastal Dynamics focuses on the interrelation between physical wave, flow and sediment transport phenomena and the resulting morphodynamics of a wide variety of coastal systems. The textbook is unique in that it explicitly connects the dynamics of open coasts and tidal basins; not only is the interaction between open coasts and tidal basins of basic importance for the evolution of most coastal systems, but describing the similarities between their physical processes is highly instructive as well. This textbook emphasizes these similarities to the benefit of understanding shared processes such as nonlinearities in flow and sediment transport. Some prior knowledge with respect to the dynamics of flow, waves and sediment transport is recommended.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBosboom, Juditheauthor1 aStive, Marcel J.F.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/969zAccess online version01804nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002700162245005600189264004300245264004400288264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002500454490002700479505027100506520039200777542003001169546001601199588004001215650002101255650002701276710003901303856007601342OTLid0000970MnU20260406020614.0m     o  d s      cr            210213s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aAxler, Sheldoneauthor00aMeasure, Integration & Real AnalysiscSheldon Axler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSan Francisco, CAbSheldon Axlerc2021. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Riemann Integration -- 2 Measures -- 3 Integration -- 4 Differentiation -- 5 Product Measures -- 6 Banach Spaces -- 7 Lp Spaces -- 8 Hilbert Spaces -- 9 Real and Complex Measures -- 10 Linear Maps on Hilbert Spaces -- 11 Fourier Analysis -- 12 Probability Measures0 aThis book seeks to provide students with a deep understanding of the definitions, examples, theorems, and proofs related to measure, integration, and real analysis. The content and level of this book fit well with the first-year graduate course on these topics at most American universities. This textbook features a reader-friendly style and format that will appeal to today's students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aProofvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/970zAccess online version01872nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002600138245009000164264004300254264009600297264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505042300570520026600993542003001259546001601289588004001305650002601345650002401371710003901395856007601434OTLid0000971MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210213s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aJahn, Gary R.eauthor00a"The Death of Ivan Ilich"bAn Electronic Study Edition of the Russian TextcGary Jahn 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Leo Tolstoy and "The Death of Ivan Ilich" -- The Russian Text of "The Death of Ivan Ilich" -- An English Translation of "The Death of Ivan Ilich" -- The Russian and English texts of "The Death of Ivan Ilich" Presented Side by Side -- A Fully Glossed Russian Text of "The Death of Ivan Ilich" with Explanatory and Interpretive Annotations -- Bibliography of Studies Pertaining to "The Death of Ivan Ilich"0 aThe Russian text of "The Death of Ivan Ilich" is presented for study in various formats: accompanied by an English translation; fully glossed, with explanatory and interpretive annotations; and supplemented by introductory remarks and an extensive bibliography.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/971zAccess online version02115nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002900144245007800173264004300251264003800294264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505021500509520077100724542001601495546001601511588004101527650003301568650002501601710003901626856007601665OTLid0000972MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            210303s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aWest, Richard E>eauthor00aFoundations of Learning and Instructional Design TechnologycRichard West 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbEdTech Booksc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCover -- I. Definitions and History -- II. Learning and Instruction -- III. Design -- IV. Technology and Media -- V. Becoming an LIDT Professional -- VI. Preparing for an LIDT Career -- Final Reading Assignment0 aThis book received the 2018 AECT Outstanding Book Award! "What is this field?" "Where have we come from as a discipline, and where are we going?" "What do I want to study?" These and other questions are typical for new students in the field of Learning and Instructional Design Technology. This textbook is designed to help answer these questions and provide the quickest route to understanding the history and current trends in the field. After surveying classic theories and writings, as well as more recent applications of theory and practice, students will be better prepared to chart their own course and careers within the discipline. This book is designed to support foundations courses common in departments, as well as seminars on current trends and issues.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/972zAccess online version02044nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158100002900168245007000197264004300267264006400310264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505049100551520032901042542004101371546001601412588004001428650003301468650004201501710003901543856007601582OTLid0000973MnU20260406020510.0m     o  d s      cr            210304s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463663786  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aKnoop, Victor L.eauthor00aTraffic Flow TheorybAn introduction with exercisescVictor Knoop 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2021. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Variables -- 2 Cumulative curves -- 3 Relationships of traffic variables -- 4 Shock wave theory -- 5 Shockwave theory: moving bottlenecks -- 6 Traffic states and Phenomena -- 7 Car-following -- 8 Microscopic lane change models -- 9 Use of traffic models -- 10 Macroscopic Dynamic Traffic flow Models -- 11 An Introduction to Node Models -- 12 Macroscopic fundamental diagram -- 13 Method of characteristics -- 14 Headway models -- 15 Traffic state dynamics in three representations --0 aTraffic processes cause several problems in the world. Traffic delay, pollution are some of it. They can be solved with the right road design or traffic management (control) measure. Before implementing these designs of measures, though, their effect could be tested. To this end, knowledge of traffic flow theory is needed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/973zAccess online version02289nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245004300167250002300210264004300233264008500276264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505049600538520046801034542002701502546001601529588004001545650002301585650002301608700002801631700002501659700002901684700002701713710003901740856007601779OTLid0000974MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210304s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648769859  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aFundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology  aAustralian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Levels of Organisation, Homeostasis and Nomenclature -- II. Cells and Reproduction -- III. Tissues, Organs, Systems -- IV. Integumentary System -- V. Blood -- VI. Cardiovascular System -- VII. Lymphatic System and Immunity -- VIII. Respiratory System -- IX. Muscle System -- X. Skeletal System -- XI. Musculoskeletal System -- XII. Digestive System -- XIII. Nervous System -- XIV. Endocrine System -- XV. Reproductive System -- XVI. Pregnancy and Human Development -- XVII. Urinary System0 aThe University of Southern Queensland (USQ) is committed to advancing the use of open textbooks in higher education. This textbook is a tool to support first year anatomy and physiology courses taught in Australia, aiming to provide students with an increased access to free, high-quality learning materials. The material in this textbook is largely based on OpenStax’s Anatomy & Physiology textbook, however, has been modified for Australian course curriculum.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aChruścik, Annaeauthor1 aKauter, Kateeauthor1 aWhiteside, Elizaeauthor1 aWindus, Louisaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/974zAccess online version02471nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135050000700145100002800152245005400180264004300234264005800277264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002500457490002700482505011200509520110400621542002701725546001601752588004001768650003801808650004301846650002601889650003101915710003901946856007601985OTLid0000975MnU20260406020512.0m     o  d s      cr            210304s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aHM621 4aH11 aOkur, Jeannetteeauthor00aHer Şey Bir Merhaba ile Başlar!cJeannette Okur 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCOERLLc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÜnite 1: Aile -- Ünite 2: Aşk ve Evlilik -- Ünite 3: Doğa ve Çevrecilik -- Ünite 4: Sanat ve Siyaset0 aHer Şey Bir Merhaba ile Başlar! was developed for intermediate level Turkish language courses at the University of Texas at Austin. Intermediate learners and their instructors may use it for different purposes: self-study, classroom instruction, tutoring, or as a pastime. The lessons in Her Şey Bir Merhaba ile Başlar! integrate reading, listening and viewing comprehension, writing and speaking practice, grammar, vocabulary, and cultural activities. Dozens of audio and video clips of Turkish speakers describing their lives, their culture, and their country support and enhance these activities. The Her Şey Bir Merhaba ile Başlar! textbook, interactive H5P exercises, and YouTube channel comprise a media-rich open educational resource (OER) developed by Dr. Jeannette Okur at the University of Texas at Austin and published by the Center for Open Educational Resources and Language Learning under the U.S. Department of Education Title VI Grant #P229A180003, with additional support from the UT Liberal Arts Instructional Technology Services and the UT Center for Middle Eastern Studies.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/975zAccess online version02454nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245005000167264004300217264008500260264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002500467490002700492505026800519520097900787542001601766546001601782588004001798650002301838650002301861700002501884700003201909710003901941856007601980OTLid0000976MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210305s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350431  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aGeneral Biology IbSurvey of Cellular Biology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. 1. Reference Information -- II. The Process of Science -- III. Themes and Concepts of Biology -- IV. Cell Structure and Function -- V. Membranes and movement of molecules -- VI. Enzyme-catalyzed reactions -- VII. How cells obtain energy -- VIII. Photosynthesis0 aBI101: Survey of Cellular Biology is intended for one term of the introductory biology course for non-science majors taught at many two- and four-year colleges. The concepts of cellular biology, as they apply to the study of life, are introduced, including parts of a cell, metabolism, and homeostasis. This textbook incorporates the mandates found in Vision and Change and focuses on the non-content aspects of biology education that are just as important. Additionally, this book explicitly teaches the general education outcomes that we have identified as important for this class. This textbook pulls together biology content resources that are accessible for our community college non-major biology students, as well as resources to provide them with explicit instruction in the quantitative literacy, communication, and information literacy general education outcomes as they relate to the biology content they are learning. Contact the author for inquiries about quiz1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBartee, Lisaeauthor1 aAnderson, Christineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/976zAccess online version02441nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245006200167264004300229264008500272264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505026500534520095400799542001601753546001601769588004001785650002301825650002301848700002501871700003201896710003901928856007601967OTLid0000977MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            210305s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350448  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aGeneral Biology IIbSurvey of Molecular Life and Genetics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Reference Information -- II. The Process of Science -- III. Themes and Concepts of Biology -- IV. Cell Structure and Function -- V. Membranes and movement of molecules -- VI. Enzyme-catalyzed reactions -- VII. How cells obtain energy -- VIII. Photosynthesis0 aBI102: Survey of Molecular Life and Genetics is intended for one term of the introductory biology course for non-science majors taught at many two- and four-year colleges. The concepts of genetics, as they apply to the study of life, are introduced, including the principles of inheritance, genetics, and gene regulation. This textbook incorporates the mandates found in Vision and Change and focuses on the non-content aspects of biology education that are just as important. Additionally, this book explicitly teaches the general education outcomes that we have identified as important for this class. This textbook pulls together biology content resources that are accessible for our community college non-major biology students, as well as resources to provide them with explicit instruction in the quantitative literacy, communication, and information literacy general education outcomes as they relate to the biology content they are learning.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBartee, Lisaeauthor1 aAnderson, Christineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/977zAccess online version02082nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001000147050000700157100003300164245009900197264004300296264008400339264001200423300002200435336002600457337002600483338003600509341002500545490002700570505022000597520049600817542003001313546001601343588004001359650004301399650004301442650002901485650003101514710003901545856007601584OTLid0000978MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210306s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aHM621 4aP91.3 4aH11 aGodwin-Jones, Roberteauthor00aLanguage and Culture in Context - A Primer on Intercultural CommunicationcRobert Godwin-Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Commonwealth Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Broadening Horizons -- 2: Building Identities -- 3: Using Language -- 4: Conversing and Relating -- 5: Communicating Nonverbally -- 6: Contextualizing Intercultural Communication -- 7: Encountering Other Cultures0 aThe text introduces some of the key concepts in intercultural communication as traditionally presented in (North American) courses and textbooks, namely the study of differences between cultures, as represented in the works and theories of Edward Hall and Geert Hofstede. Common to these approaches is the prominence of context, leading to a view of human interactions as dynamic and changeable, given the complexity of language and culture, as human agents interact with their environments.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aIntercultural CommunicationvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/978zAccess online version02012nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135100002700146245010500173264004300278264009700321264001200418300002200430336002600452337002600478338003600504341002800540490002700568505025200595520050800847542002701355546001601382588004001398650002301438650002601461650002401487710003901511856007601550OTLid0000979MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210314s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aPE14081 aKurtz, Jenifereeditor00aAmerican Literature IbAn Anthology of Texts From Early America Through the Civil WarcJenifer Kurtz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Literature of Exploration and Discovery -- II. Literature of Colonial America -- III. Literature of the Revolutionary Period -- IV. Literature of the New Nation -- V. Literature of the Romantic Era -- VI. Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform0 aThis book offers an anthology of texts that includes letters, journals, poetry, newspaper articles, pamphlets, sermons, narratives, and short fiction written in and about America beginning with collected oral stories from Native American tribes and ending with the poetry of Emily Dickinson. Many major and minor authors are included, providing a sampling of the different styles, topics, cultures, and concerns present during the formation and development of America through the mid-nineteenth century.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/979zAccess online version03216nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001100153050001000164100003000174245006500204264004300269264004600312264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002500480490002700505505012800532520186800660542003002528546001602558588004102574650003002615650002302645650002302668710003902691856007602730OTLid0000980MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            210321s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780578867175  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aMurphy, Thomas W.eauthor00aEnergy and Human Ambitions on a Finite PlanetcThomas Murphy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOakland, CaliforniabeScholarshipc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Setting the Stage: Growth and Limitations -- II. Energy and Fossil Fuels -- III. Alternative Energy -- IV. Going Forward0 aWhere is humanity going? How realistic is a future of fusion and space colonies? What constraints are imposed by physics, by resource availability, and by human psychology? Are default expectations grounded in reality? This textbook, written for a general-education audience, aims to address these questions without either the hype or the indifference typical of many books. The message throughout is that humanity faces a broad sweep of foundational problems as we inevitably transition away from fossil fuels and confront planetary limits in a host of unprecedented ways—a shift whose scale and probable rapidity offers little historical guidance. Salvaging a decent future requires keen awareness, quantitative assessment, deliberate preventive action, and—above all—recognition that prevailing assumptions about human identity and destiny have been cruelly misshapen by the profoundly unsustainable trajectory of the last 150 years. The goal is to shake off unfounded and unexamined expectations, while elucidating the relevant physics and encouraging greater facility in quantitative reasoning. After addressing limits to growth, population dynamics, uncooperative space environments, and the current fossil underpinnings of modern civilization, various sources of alternative energy are considered in detail— assessing how they stack up against each other, and which show the greatest potential. Following this is an exploration of systemic human impediments to effective and timely responses, capped by guidelines for individual adaptations resulting in reduced energy and material demands on the planet’s groaning capacity. Appendices provide refreshers on math and chemistry, as well as supplementary material of potential interest relating to cosmology, electric transportation, and an evolutionary perspective on humanity’s place in nature.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/980zAccess online version02297nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003000135245006200165264004300227264004600270264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505053800493520065301031542003001684546001601714588004101730650002301771650002601794710003901820856007601859OTLid0000981MnU20260406020510.0m     o  d s      cr            210328s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aSchneewind, Saraheauthor03aAn Outline History of East Asia to 1200cSarah Schneewind 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOakland, CaliforniabeScholarshipc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One East Asia to 1045 BC -- Chapter Two The Zhou Period (1045 – 256 BC) -- Chapter Three From Warring States Two Empire (480 BC -207 BC) -- Chapter Four The Han Empire and Its Neighbors -- Chapter Five Religion and Society in Han (206 BC – AD 220) -- Chapter Six A World of Many Powers (AD 200 – AD 580) -- Chapter Seven Consolidating Unified Regimes (c. 500-780) -- Chapter Eight Aristocratic Societies 1: Tang and Silla -- Chapter Nine Aristocratic Societies 2: Hei’an Japan -- Chapter Ten The Commercial Revolution0 aThis is the second edition of the open access textbook that arose out of a course at the University of California, San Diego, called HILD 10: East Asia: The Great Tradition. The course covers what have become two Chinas, Japan, and two Koreas from roughly 1200 BC to about AD 1200. As we say every Fall in HILD 10: “2400 years, three countries, ten weeks, no problem.” The book does not stand alone: the teacher should assign primary and secondary sources, study questions, dates to be memorized, etc. The maps mostly use the same template to enable students to compare them one to the next. The 1st edition is in the supplemental material tab.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/981zAccess online version02587nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156245001500166250001600181264004300197264006400240264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505023200481520113000713542001601843546001601859588004001875650002301915650002301938700003301961700003101994700002502025710003902050856007602089OTLid0000982MnU20260406020616.0m     o  d s      cr            210328s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463663960  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH30100aBSc Optics  a2nd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Basic Electromagnetic and Wave Optics -- Geometrical Optics -- Optical Instruments -- Polarisation -- Interference and Coherence -- Scalar Diffraction Optics -- Lasers -- About the Authors -- References -- Appendices0 aThis book treats optics at the level of students in the later stage of their bachelor or the beginning of their master. It is assumed that the student is familiar with Maxwell’s equations. Although the book takes account of the fact that optics is part of electromagnetism, special emphasis is put on the usefulness of approximate models of optics, their hierarchy and limits of validity. Approximate models such as geometrical optics and paraxial geometrical optics are treated extensively and applied to image formation by the human eye, the microscope and the telescope. Polarisation states and how to manipulate them are studied using Jones vectors and Jones matrices. In the context of interference, the coherence of light is explained thoroughly. To understand fundamental limits of resolution which cannot be explained by geometrical optics, diffraction theory is applied to imaging. The angular spectrum method and evanescent waves are used to understand the inherent loss of information about subwavelength features during the propagation of light. The book ends with a study of the working principle of the laser.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKonijnenberg, Sandereauthor1 aAdam, Aurèle J.L.eauthor1 aUrbach, Pauleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/982zAccess online version01393nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003800143264004300181264003900224264001200263300002200275336002600297337002600323338003600349341002800385490002700413505010300440520008500543542004100628546001600669588004000685650002000725650002300745650002600768700002300794700002500817700002600842710003900868856007600907OTLid0000983MnU20260223020858.0m     o  d s      cr            210401s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Italian art in the 1300s 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. A Beginner's Guide -- Part II. Florence -- Part III. Siena -- Part IV. Pisa, Pistoia, Rome0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for Italian art in the 1300s.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/983zAccess online version01476nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245003800143264004300181264003900224264001200263300002200275336002600297337002600323338003600349341002800385490002700413505018500440520008500625542004100710546001600751588004000767650002000807650002300827650002600850700002300876700002500899700002700924710003900951856007600990OTLid0000984MnU20260223020858.0m     o  d s      cr            210401s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Italian art in the 1400s 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. A Beginner's Guide -- Part II. Central Italy: Painting -- Part III. Central Italy: Sculpture and Architecture -- Part IV. Northern Italy: Venice, Ferrara and the Marches --0 aThis book contains all of Smarthistory’s content for Italian art in the 1400s.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aEzra, Rutheeditor1 aHarris, Betheeditor1 aZucker, Steveneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/984zAccess online version02038nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003300154245004000187264004300227264005500270264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505024400502520065700746542003001403546001601433588004001449650003201489650002801521710003901549856007601588OTLid0000985MnU20260406020511.0m     o  d s      cr            210401s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101059  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBorradaile, Glencoraeauthor00aDefend DissentcGlencora Borradaile 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Why Digital Security? -- Part 1: An Introduction to Cryptography -- Part 2: Digital Suppression of Social Movements (in the US) -- Part 3: Defending Social Movements (in the US) -- Conclusion: Selecting Digital Security Tools0 aDefend Dissent is an introduction to cryptography paired with the social impacts of surveillance and the protective potential of encryption, with a focus on US social movements. Each chapter ends with a story that brings social context to the material—from surveillance used against contemporary US protests to the African National Congress’s use of partially manual encryption in fighting apartheid in South Africa in the 80s.This book can be read linearly, or you can pick and choose what you would like to learn about. Each chapter is prefaced with what you should read first (for background) and concludes with what you might want to read next.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aCryptographyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/985zAccess online version02145nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002700168245005600195264004300251264008500294264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002800501490002700529505037500556520056100931542001601492546001601508588004001524650004201564650003801606710003901644856007601683OTLid0000986MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350615  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aMoran, Camereneauthor00aInterpretation of Metal Fab DrawingscCameren Moran 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Interpreting metal fab drawings -- 2. Blue Print Review -- 3. Joint types and Terminology -- 4. Basics of Welding Symbols -- 5. Supplementary Welding Symbols -- 6. Fillet Weld Symbols -- 7. Groove Welding Symbols -- 8. Plug Weld symbols -- 9. Spot, Seam, Stud Welding Symbols -- 10. Edge Weld Symbols -- 11. Process and Method -- 12. Pipe Symbols -- 13. Pipe Drawings0 aInterpreting metal fab drawings is a course that introduces the principles of interpretation and application of industrial fabrication drawings. Basic principles and techniques of metal fabrication are introduced by planning and construction of fixtures used in fabrication from drawings. Basic tools and equipment for layout fitting of welded fabrications are utilized. Covers the use and application of the AWS welding symbols. This course will utilize blueprints and welding symbols and will apply them in classroom and in shop as practical assignments.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/986zAccess online version02569nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245004600158264004300204264008500247264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505071100509520064601220542003001866546001601896588004001912650003601952700002701988700002602015700002702041710003902068856007602107OTLid0000987MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350257  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.600aIntegrated and Open Interpreter Education 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Section 1 -- Engage: Interpreters in the Community - Service Learning, Citizenship, and Civic Engagement -- II. Section 2 -- Linguistic & Cultural Aspects of Interpreting -- Orientation to the Interpreted Interaction -- Interpreting English Grammar Classes: Theories, Tips, & Tools -- Developing Confident and Competent DeafBlind Interpreters -- III. Section 3 -- Reflective Practice: Interpreter Mindset, Pre-Interpreting, Technical Skills, Adaptive Skills, and Supervision -- IV. Section 4 -- Historical, Collective, & Individual Professional Identity Narratives -- Internal Cartography: Our Professional Identity Journeys -- V. Section 5 -- Practice: The Necessary Preparation for working with People0 aThis Open Educational Resource (OER) on interpreting offers authors and readers free and open access to current, relevant, easy-to-access, and free materials. The editors have created a space where emerging scholars in the field of signed language interpreting make contributions with the ability to revise as the interpreting studies discipline and the scholars, themselves, develop and change. This OER provides faculty and students readings and practical application experiences that connect program specific coursework and concepts across the interpreter education curriculum emphasizing the holistic nature of the field of interpreting.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMaroney, Elisaeauthor1 aSmith, Amandaeauthor1 aHewlett, Saraheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/987zAccess online version01652nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003000155245003600185264004300221264008500264264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505037400526520018000900542001601080546001601096588004001112650002301152710003901175856007601214OTLid0000988MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350219  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aBallard, Jason S.eauthor00aRadiation SafetycJason Ballard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: History of Radiation Safety -- Unit 2: Ionizing Radiation & Units of Measurement -- Unit 3: Basic Atomic Theory & Science -- Unit 4: Radiation Types & Midterm Review -- Unit 5: Activity, Half Life, & Half Value Layers -- Unit 6: X-ray -- Unit 7: Biological Effects -- Unit 8: More Biological Effects of Radiation -- Unit 9: Caution Signage and Detection Devices0 aThe purpose of this OER is to provide students with a comprehensive textbook aligned with the NDT 130 (Radiographic Testing) course as taught at Linn-Benton Community College.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/988zAccess online version02410nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245005300167264004300220264008500263264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505080000525520035901325542001601684546001601700588004001716650002301756650002301779700002501802700002801827700003001855710003901885856007601924OTLid0000989MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350400  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aPrinciples of BiologybBiology 211, 212, and 213 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aClass Descriptions -- The Process of Science -- Chemistry for Biology -- Biological Molecules -- What is Life? -- Cell Structure and Function -- The Cell Membrane and Transport -- Cell Communication -- Enzyme-catalyzed reactions -- How cells obtain energy -- Photosynthesis -- Cell Division - Binary Fission and Mitosis -- BIOLOGY 212 - Genetics -- DNA and Chromosome Structure -- DNA Replication -- Mutations -- Protein Synthesis -- Gene Regulation -- Meiosis - Sexual Reproduction -- Patterns of Inheritance -- Genetics: Dog Coat Color -- Biotechnology -- BIOLOGY 213 - Ecology and Evolution -- Introduction to Evolution -- Evolution in Action -- Evolutionary Relationships -- Ecology and the Biosphere -- Population and Community Ecology -- Ecosystems -- Conservation Biology and Biodiversity0 aThe Principles of Biology sequence (BI 211, 212 and 213) introduces biology as a scientific discipline for students planning to major in biology and other science disciplines. Laboratories and classroom activities introduce techniques used to study biological processes and provide opportunities for students to develop their ability to conduct research.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBartee, Lisaeauthor1 aShriner, Waltereauthor1 aCreech, Catherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/989zAccess online version01634nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002400168245004000192264004300232264008500275264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505021600537520022800753542001600981546001600997588004001013650004201053650003801095710003901133856007601172OTLid0000990MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350318  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aCostin, Riceauthor00aBasic Blueprint ReadingcRic Costin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Cover -- 2. The Language of Lines -- 3. Visualization -- 4. Technical Sketching -- 5. Scaling -- 6. Dimensioning -- 7. Auxiliary Views -- 8. Sectional Views -- 9. Machined Features -- 10. Print Interpretation0 aThis is an entry level blueprint reading book written for the first year welding student. The book will be used in the first term of a two year welding program to familiarize the student to sketching and reading blueprints.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/990zAccess online version03138nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156100002600169245005200195264004300247264008500290264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505172500552520019002277542001602467546001602483588004002499650002602539650002402565650003602589710003902625856007602664OTLid0000991MnU20260406020615.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350097  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aFleming, Willeauthor00aTechnical Writing for TechnicianscWill Fleming 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. WEEK 1 -- What is Technical Writing/Technical Communication? -- II. WEEK 2 -- Audience/Reader Types -- Writing Effective Emails -- Sample Student Email -- Grammar Lesson 1 - Capitalization -- III. WEEK 3 -- Intake Documents -- Intake Document Student Sample (Auto/Diesel) -- Intake Document Student Sample (Mechatronics) -- Grammar Lesson 2 - Apostrophes/Possessive S -- IV. WEEK 4 -- Writing Instructions -- Document Design Basics -- Using Visuals -- V. WEEK 5 -- Delivering Bad News/Written Apologies -- Grammar Lesson 3 - Possessive Pronouns & Other Commonly Confused Words -- Seven Goals for Delivering Bad News -- Optional Article: Seven Tips on How to Apologize in the Business World -- VI. WEEK 6 -- Project Completion/Documenting Work Completed -- Project Completion Student Sample - Automotive Invoice -- Project Completion Student Sample - Welding -- Closeout Documentation Information for Welding and Fabrication Jobs (Welding Dept.) -- Grammar Lesson 4 - Quotation Marks -- VII. WEEK 7 -- Accident and Incident Reports -- Sample Student Accident Report -- VIII. WEEK 8 -- Resumes -- Resume Checklist -- Eight Resume Tips -- Resume Sample (Diesel Mechanic) -- Resume Sample (Pipe Welder) -- Resume Sample (Welding) -- IX. WEEK 9 -- Employment Documents - Cover Letters -- Sample Student Cover Letter - Welding -- Sample Student Cover Letter - Automotive -- Employment Documents: Inquiry Letters -- Annotated Job Inquiry Sample -- X. WEEK 10 -- Final Quiz Grammar Review -- Technical Descriptions -- Technical Description (sample 1) -- Technical Description (sample 2) -- XI. Additional Resources for Writing/Technical Communication -- General Design Concepts -- Basic Design and Readability in Publications0 aTechnical Writing for CTE is an open source e-textbook designed specifically for use in LBCC’s WD4 (Technical Writing for Welders) and all versions of IN4 (Technical Writing for CTE).1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/991zAccess online version02300nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001300153245005700166264004300223264008500266264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505015900528520078900687542004101476546001601517588004001533650003801573650002601611650003601637700002601673700002801699700003601727710003901763856007601802OTLid0000992MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350769  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aLB1062.600aExplorations 1bGrammar for the Experienced Beginner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: BE Verb in the Simple Present -- Chapter 2: Present Progressive -- Chapter 3: Simple Present -- Chapter 4: Simple Present & Present Progressive0 aWelcome to Explorations 1: Grammar for the Experienced Beginner. This English grammar textbook was designed for a class of Clackamas Community College (CCC) ESOL students who need only a review of the BE verb and are ready to learn the simple present and present progressive tenses. This textbook has four chapters. Each chapter covers a grammatical point/component/element. Chapter 1 is a review of the BE verb. The BE is special and has its own rules (different from other verbs). Chapter 2 is the Present Progressive tense. This is the tense we use when we are talking about things happening now or near now. Chapter 3 is the Simple Present Tense. We use the Simple Present Tense to talk about facts, routines, and habitual activities. Chapter 4 is a comparison of chapter 3 and 4.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aCaisee, Susaneauthor1 aRueda, Jennifereauthor1 aEmens-Hesslink, Kristeeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/992zAccess online version03548nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100003400167245006100201264004300262264007600305264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505138300558520096201941542004102903546001602944588004102960650002303001650002303024710003903047856007603086OTLid0000993MnU20260406020512.0m     o  d s      cr            210409s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781736577912  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aHacisalihoglu, Gokhaneauthor00aFrom Growing to BiologybPlants 1ecGokhan Hacisalihoglu 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bFlorida State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCHAPTER 01. PLANTAE KINGDOM -- CHAPTER 02. PLANT CELLS AND TISSUES -- CHAPTER 03. ROOT SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 04. SHOOT SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 05. SYSTEMATICS -- CHAPTER 06. ALGAE (PROTISTA PHYLUM) -- CHAPTER 07. BRYOPHYTES -- CHAPTER 08. SEEDLESS PLANTS (FERNS AND FERN RELATIVES) -- CHAPTER 09. GYMNOSPERMS (CONE BEARING) -- CHAPTER 10. FLOWERS, FRUITS, AND SEEDS (FLOWERING ANGIOSPERMS) -- CHAPTER 11. PLANT HORMONES -- CHAPTER 12. GENETICS -- CHAPTER 13. PLANT NUTRITION -- CHAPTER 14. WATER AND SOLUTE TRANSPORT -- CHAPTER 15. SECONDARY GROWTH -- CHAPTER 16. PHOTOSYNTHESIS (PS) -- CHAPTER 17. CELLULAR RESPIRATION -- CHAPTER 18. INDOOR VERTICAL FARMING AND CULTIVATING PLANTS IN MICROGRAVITY -- CHAPTER 19. HUMAN NUTRITION FROM PLANTS AND PLANT-BASED PROTEINS -- CHAPTER 20. SEED GERMINATION AND SEEDLING ESTABLISHMMENT -- CHAPTER 21. TEA GROWING, BREW, AND LEAVES -- CHAPTER 22. COFFEE GROWING, ROAST, GRIND, AND BEANS -- CHAPTER 23. SUSTAINABLE AGRICULTURE AND FOOD SYSTEMS -- CHAPTER 24. SYNTHETIC BIOLOGY AND CRISPR GENE EDITING IN CROPS -- CHAPTER 25. MINING PLANT SUPERB VARIETIES FOR INCREASED RESILIENCE TO SUBOPTIMAL CONDITIONS -- CHAPTER 26. FUNGI KINGDOM -- CHAPTER 27. CYANOBACTERIA AND VIRUSES (COVID-19 PANDEMIC EDITION) -- CHAPTER 28. GROWTH MINDSET AND GRIT -- CHAPTER 29. STUDENT LEARNING -- CHAPTER 30. HOW TO STUDY STEM (SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, ENGINEERING AND MATH)0 aReady to find out how plants are grown and function? Take a fantastic voyage through plants. From Growing to Biology: Plants 1e brings the latest information for understanding of traditional and modern plant growing, form, and production. Topics covered in 30 chapters include concise and up-to-date ‘big picture’ infographics, student learning outcomes (SLOs), key vocabulary, assessment, as well as identification of 120 species, and more. Moreover, author Dr. G. Hacisalihoglu emphasizes on leaning concepts, binding those concepts together with visuals approach to make learning faster and more memorable. From Growing to Biology: Plants 1e is packed full of horticultural information that is ideal for both academia and industry growers. It is basic enough that if you are just getting started learning plants, you will be able to catch up. Always remember that practice makes permanent and keep going to take your learning plant bio to new levels.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/993zAccess online version02167nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001100148100002900159245006200188264004300250264007300293264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505035900543520059900902542001601501546001601517588004001533650002401573650003201597650002501629710003901654856007601693OTLid0000995MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            210412s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHB615 4aHF54151 aApple, Laurie M.eauthor00aIntroduction to Apparel Production WorkbookcLaurie Apple 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit I: Sewing Supplies and Terminology -- Unit II: Fabrics and Materials Used in Sewing -- Unit III: Pattern Envelope, Cutting and Marking -- Unit IV: Learning the Parts of the Sewing Machine and Serger -- Unit V: How to Thread JUKI DDL 8700 Sewing Machine -- Unit VI: Sewing Practice and Samples -- Unit VII: Sewing Projects -- Appendix0 aWelcome to Introduction to Apparel Production. Whether you are part of the college class or learning on your own, you will gain important concepts and techniques in beginning apparel production. This workbook is to accompany the activities through in person teaching or online learning. There will be graphics and videos to help guide you through each step of this workbook. There are 6 learning units and a sewing projects unit in this workbook. The sewing projects unit contains 4 projects: tote bag, skirt, shirt and pants. The pattern numbers may change due to the availability of patterns.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEntrepreneurshipvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/995zAccess online version01603nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002600136245003700162250001800199264004300217264004400260264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505010800481520042200589542002701011546001601038588004001054650003201094710003901126856007601165OTLid0000996MnU20260406020616.0m     o  d s      cr            210427s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBourke, Chriseauthor00aComputer Science IcChris Bourke  aVersion 1.3.7 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLincoln, NebraskabChris Bourkec[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. The C Programming Language -- II. The Java Programming Language -- III. The PHP Programming Language0 aThis textbook covers the traditional introductory Computer Science I topics but takes a unique approach. Topics are covered in a language-agnostic manner in the first part with supplemental parts that cover the same concepts in a specific language. The current version covers C, Java, and PHP. This textbook as been used in several Computer Science I sections over multiple years at the University of Nebraska-Lincoln1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/996zAccess online version02483nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138245006300151250001600214264004300230264007200273264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002500467490002700492505061500519520045901134542004101593546001601634588004101650650002601691650002401717650003601741700002701777700002901804700002601833700002601859700003701885710003901922856007601961OTLid0000997MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            210427s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.600aHowdy or Hello?bTechnical and Professional Communications  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTexas A&M Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Rhetorical Situation -- Chapter 3: Ethics -- Chapter 4: Persuasion -- Chapter 5: Writing Skills -- Chapter 6: Organization -- Chapter 7: Design -- Chapter 8: Graphics -- Chapter 9: The Writing Process -- Chapter 10: Revising and Editing -- Chapter 11: Research -- Chapter 12: Avoiding Plagiarism and Citing Sources Properly -- Chapter 13: Collaborative -- Chapter 14: Oral Communication -- Chapter 15: Correspondence -- Chapter 16: Applications -- Chapter 17: Instructions -- Chapter 18: Proposals -- Chapter 19: Informational Reports -- Chapter 20: Recommendation Reports0 aTechnical writing courses introduce you to some of the most important aspects of writing in the worlds of science, technology, and business—in other words, the kind of writing that scientists, nurses, doctors, computer specialists, government officials, engineers, and other professionals do as a part of their regular work. The skills learned in technical writing courses can be useful in other fields as well, including education and social sciences.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMcKinney, Matteeditor1 aPattison, Kalanieeditor1 aLeMire, Saraheeditor1 aAnders, Kathyeauthor1 aHagstrom-Schmidt, Nicoleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/997zAccess online version02264nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144100002700155245003600182264004300218264005500261264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505046700493520057400960542004101534546001601575588004001591650003301631650002501664650002601689650002401715710003901739856007601778OTLid0000998MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210427s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aPE14081 aOlson, Rebeccaeauthor00aRomeo and JulietcRebecca Olson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Play -- Act 1 -- Act 2 -- Act 3 -- Act 4 -- Act 5 -- Educational Resources for Teachers -- Racism -- Ableism -- Classism -- Contextualization -- Supplementary Lesson Plans -- Act I Focus: Family Dynamics and Misogynistic Language in the Early Modern Period -- Act II Focus: Representation of Class Through Language -- Act III Focus: Gender Dynamics and Storyline -- Act IV Focus: Language Variance Across Editions -- Act V Focus: The Narrative of Shakespeare0 aThis edition of Romeo and Juliet was edited by students for students. We believe that reliably edited versions of the play should be available for free online. But we wanted ours to be easy to get in other ways as well. The editors—Oregon State University students who remember, far better than their professors, what it was like to read the play for the first time—carefully considered every pronoun, punctuation mark, and footnote. Our goal: to make a friendly, confidence-building edition that supported classroom activities at the high school and college level.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/998zAccess online version01815nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002800156245003800184264004300222264008500265264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505044900527520022800976542001601204546001601220588004001236650002601276650002401302710003901326856007601365OTLid0000999MnU20260406020512.0m     o  d s      cr            210427s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350103  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aKrause, Timothyeauthor02aA Christmas CarolcTimothy Krause 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. -- Marley's Ghost -- Analyze What You Read -- Interpret What You Read - Scene 1 -- Interpret What You Read - Scene 2 -- Interpret What You Read - Scene 3 -- II. -- The First of the Three Spirits -- Analyze What You Read -- Connect to What You Read -- III. -- The Second of the Three Spirits -- Analyze What You Read -- Compare And Contrast What You Read -- IV. -- The Last of the Three Spirits -- Analyze What You Read -- Share What You Read0 aThis version of the classic holiday story has been slightly abridged and lightly adapted for advanced students of English language. The text includes comprehension checks, discussion questions, and collaborative activities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/999zAccess online version02185nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245003000145264004300175264009700218264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002800437490002700465505075700492520022001249542004101469546001601510588004001526650003001566650002301596700003101619700003301650710003901683856007701722OTLid0001000MnU20260406020616.0m     o  d s      cr            210429s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aIntroduction to Petrology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1: Overview -- 1.1 What is Petrology? -- 1.2 How is This Book Organized? -- 1.3 Why is Petrology Useful? -- Module 2: Using the Petrographic Microscope -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Thin Sections -- 2.3 Light and Optics Part 1: Electromagnetic Spectrum, Properties of Light -- 2.3 Light and Optics Part 2: Refractive Index, Polarized Light, Birefringence -- 2.4 Parts of the Petrographic Microscope -- 2.5 Common Issues Using a Petrographic Microscope -- 2.6 Properties Under Plane Polarized Light -- 2.7 Properties Under Cross Polarized Light -- 2.8 Interference Figures: Part 1 -- 2.8 Interference Figures: Part 2 -- 2.9 Atlas of Minerals in Thin Section -- 2.10 Synthesis Exercises -- Bushveld Igneous Complex -- Southwestern Virginia Case Study0 aLearn about igneous and metamorphic rocks (and how to analyze them), the fun way! Students learn concepts and practice knowledge by conducting inquiries guided with examples based on videos and interactive diagrams.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aJohnson, Elizabetheauthor1 aLiu, Juhong Christieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1000zAccess online version02009nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003300155245005700188264004300245264005500288264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505034800520520051500868542002701383546001601410588004001426650003001466650002301496710003901519856007701558OTLid0001001MnU20260406020616.0m     o  d s      cr            210521s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781974427345  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aArnedo, Manuel Solereauthor00aFundamentals of Aerospace EngineeringcManuel Arnedo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadrid, SpainbManuel Fernando Soler Arnedoc2017. 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Introduction -- 1 The Scope -- 2 Generalities -- II The aircraft -- 3 Aerodynamics -- 4 Aircraft structures -- 5 Aircraft instruments and systems -- 6 Aircraft propulsion -- 7 Mechanics of flight -- III Air Transportation, Airports, and Air Navigation -- 8 Air transportation -- 9 Airports -- 10 Air navigation: ATM -- 11 Air navigation: CNS0 aFundamentals of Aerospace Engineering covers an undergraduate, introductory course to aeronautical engineering and aims at combining theory and practice to provide a comprehensive, thorough introduction to the fascinating, yet complex discipline of aerospace engineering. This book is the ulterior result of three year of teaching a course called Aerospace Engineering in the first year of a degree in aerospace engineering (with a minor in air navigation) at the Universidad Rey Juan Carlos, in Madrid, Spain.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSpace SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1001zAccess online version01936nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003500153245008700188264004300275264006900318264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002500509490002700534505023400561520050100795542003001296546001601326588004001342650003801382650002601420710003901446856007701485OTLid0001002MnU20260406020512.0m     o  d s      cr            210521s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781439919972  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aCorrales-Martin, Normaeauthor00a¡Que viva la música!bRepaso de conversación en españolcNorma Corrales-Martin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Broad Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Guías y herramientas de trabajo -- II. Canciones y actividades -- III. Principios y temas de gramática viva: Una gramática centrada en el verbo -- IV. Bibliografía general -- V. Canciones por estructuras gramaticales clave0 a¡Qué viva la música! Repaso de conversación en español, or Long Live Music! Spanish Conversational Review is an open textbook intended for conversational review, typically a fourth-semester Spanish class. The textbook is organized around nine different songs that provide students opportunities to practice, aurally and orally, as well as in writing, the main communicative goals and key grammatical structures learned in previous classes. It can also be used in similar high school classes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1002zAccess online version02429nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245003200179264004300211264006100254264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002800437490002700465505038400492520092700876542001601803546001601819588004001835650003801875650002601913710003901939856007701978OTLid0001003MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210527s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101050  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aRanjan, Rajiveauthor00aBasic Hindi IcRajiv Ranjan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Hindi Letters & Script -- Chapter 2: Beginning Conversations -- Chapter 3: परिवार "Family" -- Chapter 4: Describing Places -- Chapter 5: Expressing Likes, Dislikes, Needs, and Possession -- Chapter 6: Giving Instruction and Making Request -- Chapter 7: Expressing Present, Past, and Future Actions -- Chapter 8: Talking About the Past and Completed Actions0 aBasic Hindi I is an online, interactive, and tech-enhanced textbook that promotes speaking, listening, reading, writing, and cultural skills. Each Chapter in this book has clear stated learning outcomes, a review of previous chapters, reading/listening sections, study abroad section, relevant grammatical items, and cultural notes. The pedagogical approach in the book is mixed and informed by the socio-cultural approaches and the generative approaches of the Second Language Acquisition theory. The mixed theoretical backgrounds match diverse learning and teaching philosophies and styles. Following the learning outcomes guided by American Council of Teaching Foreign Language (ACTFL), this textbook aims for the novice learners to attain intermediate low to mid-level proficiency level. The textbook incorporates pictures, audio-visual materials, and activities developed on the H5P platform to keep learners engaged.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1003zAccess online version02728nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002800167245008400195264004300279264007700322264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505081800576520068901394542004102083546001602124588004002140650002302180650002302203710003902226856007702265OTLid0001004MnU20260406020755.0m     o  d s      cr            210527s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101067  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aBierema, Andreaeauthor03aAn Interactive Introduction to Organismal and Molecular BiologycAndrea Bierema 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction to Science -- 1. Nature of Science -- 2. Scientific Controversies -- 3. Information Communication -- 4. Stakeholders and Authority -- 5. Bibliographies -- II. Organismal Biology -- 6. Introduction to Ecology -- 7. Biodiversity -- 8. Systems Thinking and the Carbon Cycle -- 9. Climate Change -- 10. Species Interactions -- 11. Population Growth -- 12. Evolution -- 13. Phylogenetic Trees: Modeling Evolution -- III. Molecular Biology -- 14. Introduction to Molecular Biology -- 15. Protein Structure and Function -- 16. Protein Synthesis Overview -- 17. Protein Synthesis I: Transcription -- 18. Protein Synthesis II: RNA Processing -- 19. Protein Synthesis III: RNA Interference -- 20. Protein Synthesis IV: Translation -- 21. Protein Synthesis V: Additional Regulation -- 22. Genetic Engineering0 aThis "textbook" is interactive, meaning that although each chapter has text, they also have interactive HTML5 content, such as quizzes, simulations, interactive videos, and images with clickable hotspots. Students receive instant feedback when they complete the interactive content, and therefore, can learn and check their understanding all in one place. The first unit introduces students to the nature of science, including scientific controversies, and information literacy, including how to analyze literature and identify stakeholders. Unit 2 is organismal biology, including carbon cycling and population growth, and unit 3 is molecular biology with a focus on gene expression.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1004zAccess online version01597nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002600167245004600193264004300239264007700282264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505015900536520025700695542004100952546001600993588004001009650002301049650002301072710003901095856007701134OTLid0001005MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210527s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101098  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aHenley, Caseyeauthor00aFoundations of NeurosciencecCasey Henley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Neuron Structure & Function -- II. Neuronal Communication -- III. Nervous System Organization -- IV. Sensory Systems -- V. Motor System -- VI. Behavior0 aFoundations of Neuroscience is aimed at undergraduate students new to the field of neuroscience. The first edition specifically targets students enrolled in Neurobiology at Michigan State University and primarily contains topics covered in that course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1005zAccess online version01533nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050001000154100002600164245004400190264004300234264006500277264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002500464490002700489505015900516520013500675542003000810546001600840588004000856650003200896650002600928650002400954650002900978710003901007856007701046OTLid0001006MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210610s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aPE1408 4aP91.31 aKraft, Nicoleeauthor00aWriting Fabulous FeaturescNicole Kraft 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aColumbus, OhiobThe Ohio State University Pressbooksc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Uncovering the Magic of Features -- II. Interviewing -- III. Writing to be Read -- IV. Revising and Being Read -- V. Learning Features from the Experts0 a"Writing Fabulous Features" teaches the art and craft of feature writing to help readers learning to write non-fiction with flair.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPrint JournalismvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1006zAccess online version02529nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143050000700153100002400160245003800184250003100222264004300253264005000296264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505073200523520045801255542001601713546001601729588004001745650003601785650002901821650003101850700002601881700003001907700003001937710003901967856007702006OTLid0001007MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210610s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.3 4aH11 aDaly, Dianaeauthor00aHumans R Social MediacDiana Daly  a2024 "Living Book" Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTucson, AZbThe University of Arizonac[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface: About this Book -- Inviting Coauthors in Shared Governance of this OER Textbook -- Introduction -- Mainbody -- Identity -- Old to New Media -- Regulation -- Privacy and Publics -- Algorithms -- Equity and Gender -- Activism -- Memes -- Information -- Relationships -- Our Transformed Selves -- Art -- Wellness -- ¡Voices Media Collections -- Gallery of ¡Voices Graphic Profile Pictures -- Gallery of Audio Stories -- Gallery of Video Stories -- Gallery of Memes -- Gallery of episodes of the Social Media & Ourselves Podcast -- Thank you to the students who openly licensed the work included in our collections -- Core Concepts (a Glossary) -- Guidelines and Template for Contributing a Chapter to HRSM -- Conclusion0 aSocial media and humans exist in a world of mutual influence, and humans play central roles in how this influence is mediated and transferred. Originally created by University of Arizona Information scholar Diana Daly, this 2024 "living book" edition of Humans R Social Media welcomes additional authors and features contributions by students to help readers understand how we as humans shape social media, and how social media shapes our world in turn.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aKuru, Jacquieeauthor1 aFripp, Alexandriaeauthor1 aSchneider, Nathaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1007zAccess online version02227nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002700163245003900190264004300229264006500272264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505016200514520090700676542001601583546001601599588004001615650003201655650003801687710003901725856007701764OTLid0001008MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            210610s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800641778  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aRossi, Robertoeauthor00aInventory AnalyticscRoberto Rossi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRoberto Rossic[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Inventory Systems -- Deterministic Inventory Control -- Demand Forecasting -- Stochastic Inventory Control -- Multi-echelon Inventory Systems0 aInventory Analytics provides a comprehensive and accessible introduction to the theory and practice of inventory control – a significant research area central to supply chain planning. The book outlines the foundations of inventory systems and surveys prescriptive analytics models for deterministic inventory control. It further discusses predictive analytics techniques for demand forecasting in inventory control and also examines prescriptive analytics models for stochastic inventory control. Inventory Analytics is the first book of its kind to adopt a practicable, Python-driven approach to illustrating theories and concepts via computational examples, with each model covered in the book accompanied by its Python code. Originating as a collection of self-contained lectures, Inventory Analytics will be an indispensable resource for practitioners, researchers, teachers, and students alike.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1008zAccess online version03912nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001200135100003100147245006700178264004300245264004200288264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505098800504520175701492542003703249546001603286588004103302650002003343650002603363650002103389710003903410856007703449OTLid0001010MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210626s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aHutchinson, Roberteauthor00aMusic Theory for the 21st-Century ClassroomcRobert Hutchinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTacoma, WAbRobert Hutchinsonc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Basic Concepts -- 2 Major Scales and Key Signatures -- 3 Minor Scales and Key Signatures -- 4 Basics of Rhythm -- 5 Intervals -- 6 Triads -- 7 Roman Numerals and Cadences -- 8 Seventh Chords -- 9 Harmonic Progression and Harmonic Function -- 10 Non-Chord Tones -- 11 Melodic Analysis -- 12 Form in Popular Music -- 13 Phrases in Combination -- 14 Accompanimental Textures -- 15 Creating Contrast Between Sections -- 16 Figured Bass -- 17 Secondary Dominant Chords -- 18 Secondary Diminished Chords -- 19 Mode Mixture -- 20 The Neapolitan Chord -- 21 Augmented Sixth Chords -- 22 Modulation -- 23 Enharmonic Modulation -- 24 Binary and Ternary Forms -- 25 Sonata and Rondo Forms -- 26 Voice Leading Triads -- 27 Voice Leading Seventh Chords -- 28 Voice Leading With Non-Chord Tones -- 29 Voice Leading Chromatic Harmonies -- 30 Introduction to Counterpoint -- 31 Introduction to Jazz Theory -- 32 Impressionism and Extended Tonality -- 33 Set Theory -- 34 Serialism -- 35 Minimalism0 aMusic Theory for the 21st–Century Classroom is an openly–licensed online four–semester college music theory textbook. This text differs from other music theory textbooks by focusing less on four–part (SATB) voiceleading and more on relating harmony to the phrase. Also, in traditional music theory textbooks, there is little emphasis on motivic analysis and analysis of melodic units smaller than the phrase. In my opinion, this led to students having difficulty with creating melodies, since the training they are given is typically to write a “melody” in quarter notes in the soprano voice of part writing exercises. When the assignments in those texts ask students to do more than this, the majority of the students struggle to create a melody with continuity and with appropriate placement of harmonies within a phrase because the text had not prepared them to do so. In Music Theory for the 21st–Century Classroom, students learn about motive, fragment, phrase, and subphrase, as well as types of melodic alteration like inversion, intervallic change, augmentation, diminution, rhythmic change, ornamentation, extension, and retrograde. By understanding motive and subphrase (also known as “phrase segment” or “phrase member”), I believe students will better understand the logic and construction of melodies, which will aid them in creating their own music. This text is meant to take the student from the basics of reading and writing pitches and rhythms through twelve–tone technique and minimalism over the course of four semesters. Whenever possible, examples from popular music and music from film and musical theater are included to illustrate melodic and harmonic concepts, usually within the context of the phrase.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1010zAccess online version01519nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245002500137250001600162264004300178264008600221264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505013300484520024500617542002700862546001600889588004100905650002300946700003200969700002801001710003901029856007701068OTLid0001011MnU20260406020514.0m     o  d s      cr            210626s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH30100aMarine Ecology Notes  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCarsten Dormann and Arne Schroederc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 The Abiotic Environment -- 2 Primary Productivity -- 3 Secondary (and higher) production -- 4 Ocean Habitats -- 5 Human Effect0 aThis books is a general introduction to Marine Ecology, accompanying a lecture and excursion. It targets students without prior knowledge of the subject. The content is taken largely from Wikipedia, but curated and augmented by the authors.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aDormann, Carsten F.eauthor1 aSchroeder, Arneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1011zAccess online version02126nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002900149245006200178264004300240264005500283264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505027500515520071400790542003001504546001601534588004001550650002301590650002301613710003901636856007701675OTLid0001012MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210626s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aNaithani, Sushmaeauthor00aHistory and Science of Cultivated PlantscSushma Naithani 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Origins of Agriculture -- The Origins of Crop Plants -- Colonial Agriculture -- Cataloging, Classification, and Deliberate Hybridizations -- The Early History of Genetics -- Genetic Improvement in Cereal Crops and the Green Revolution -- Genetically Engineered Crops0 aHistory and Science of Cultivated Plants narrates how humans transitioned from foragers to farmers and have arrived at present-day industrial agriculture-based civilization. It entails myths, historical accounts, and scientific concepts to describe how human efforts have shaped and produced easier to grow, larger, tastier, and more nutritious fruits, vegetables, and grains from wild plants. Using examples of various economically and socially important crops central to human civilization, the book describes the origin of crop plants, the evolution of agricultural practices, fundamental concepts of natural selection vs. domestication, experimental and methodical plant breeding, and plant biotechnology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1012zAccess online version02649nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245002500167264004300192264003800235264001200273300002200285336002600307337002600333338003600359341002800395490002700423505044400450520105600894542001601950546001601966588004001982650002302022650002402045700003302069700003302102710003902135856007702174OTLid0001013MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210628s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781734914146  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aNursing Fundamentals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Scope of Practice -- II. Communication -- III. Diverse Patients -- IV. Nursing Process -- V. Safety -- VI. Cognitive Impairments -- VII. Sensory Impairments -- VIII. Oxygenation -- IX. Infection -- X. Integumentary -- XI. Comfort -- XII. Sleep and Rest -- XIII. Mobility -- XIV. Nutrition -- XV. Fluids and Electrolytes -- XVI. Elimination -- XVII. Grief and Loss -- XVIII. Spirituality -- XIX. Care of the Older Adult -- XX. Answer Key0 aThis Nursing Fundamentals textbook is an open educational resource with CC-BY licensing developed for entry-level nursing students. Content is based on the Wisconsin Technical College System (WTCS) statewide nursing curriculum for the Nursing Fundamentals course (543-101), the 2019 NCLEX-RN Test Plan, the 2020 NCLEX-PN Test Plan, and the Wisconsin Nurse Practice Act. This book introduces the entry-level nursing student to the scope of nursing practice, various communication techniques, and caring for diverse patients. The nursing process is used as a framework for providing patient care based on the following nursing concepts: safety, oxygenation, comfort, spiritual well-being, grief and loss, sleep and rest, mobility, nutrition, fluid and electrolyte imbalance, and elimination. Care for patients with integumentary disorders and cognitive or sensory impairments is also discussed. Learning activities have been incorporated into each chapter to encourage students to use critical thinking while applying content to patient care situations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aErnstmeyer, Kimberlyeeditor1 aChristman, Elizabetheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1013zAccess online version02716nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245001900167264004300186264003800229264001200267300002200279336002600301337002600327338003600353341002800389490002700417505099700444520057601441542001602017546001602033588004002049650002302089650002402112700003302136700003302169710003902202856007702241OTLid0001014MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            210628s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781734914122  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aNursing Skills 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Chapter 1 General Survey -- II. Chapter 2 Health History -- III. Chapter 3 Blood Pressure -- IV. Chapter 4 Aseptic Technique -- V. Chapter 5 Math Calculations -- VI. Chapter 6 Neurological Assessment -- VII. Chapter 7 Head and Neck Assessment -- VIII. Chapter 8 Eye and Ear Assessment -- IX. Chapter 9 Cardiovascular Assessment -- X. Chapter 10 Respiratory Assessment -- XI. Chapter 11 Oxygen Therapy -- XII. Chapter 12 Abdominal Assessment -- XIII. Chapter 13 Musculoskeletal Assessment -- XIV. Chapter 14 Integumentary Assessment -- XV. Chapter 15 Administration of Enteral Medications -- XVI. Chapter 16 Administration of Medications Via Other Routes -- XVII. Chapter 17 Enteral Tube Management -- XVIII. Chapter 18 Administration of Parenteral Medications -- XIX. Chapter 19 Specimen Collection -- XX. Chapter 20 Wound Care -- XXI. Chapter 21 Facilitation of Elimination -- XXII. Chapter 22 Tracheostomy Care & Suctioning -- XXIII. Chapter 23 IV Therapy Management -- XXIV. Answer Keys0 aThis open access Nursing Skills textbook includes physical assessments routinely performed by entry-level registered nurses and basic nursing skills performed by licensed practical nurses. It is based on the Wisconsin Technical College System (WTCS) statewide nursing curriculum for the Nursing Skills course (543-102), the 2019 NCLEX-RN Test Plan, the 2020 NCLEX-PN Test Plan, and the Wisconsin Nurse Practice Act. Learning activities are included to encourage the student to engage in critical thinking and apply the nursing process while analyzing assessment findings.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aErnstmeyer, Kimberlyeeditor1 aChristman, Elizabetheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1014zAccess online version02507nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050000800143100002800151245006000179264004300239264005600282264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505024300515520109800758542001601856546001601872588004001888650002301928650002701951700002701978710003902005856007702044OTLid0001016MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            210628s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA11 aKaschner, Scotteauthor00aLinear Transformations on Vector SpacescScott Kaschner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 0: Functions on Sets -- Chapter 1: Vector Spaces -- Chapter 2: Bases -- Chapter 3: Linear Transformation -- Chapter 4: More Fun with Matrices -- Chapter 5: Square Matrices and Invariant Subspaces -- Appendix -- Glossary0 aLinear Transformations on Vector Spaces serves primarily as a textbook for undergraduate Linear Algebra courses. While standard Linear Algebra books begin by focusing on solving systems of linear equations and associated procedural skills, our book begins by developing a conceptual framework for the topic using the central objects, vector spaces and linear transformations. It covers the same concepts, skills, and, applications as conventional texts in a one-semester course, but students walk away with a much richer and more useful mastery of the topics. The book is structured to facilitate the implementation of the flipped classroom. The text features a continuous narrative to illuminate the big picture of the material and is written to help students develop their textbook reading skills. Also, there are “Explorations” scattered throughout each section; these are quick first examples intended for students to complete while reading before class meetings. Additional materials include section overview homework assignments and worksheets that can be used for in-class practice.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aRussell, Ambereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1016zAccess online version02259nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245006400163264004300227264005600270264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505027700503520082600780542001601606546001601622588004001638650003201678700002501710700003401735710003901769856007701808OTLid0001017MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            210628s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBible, Paul W.eauthor03aAn Open Guide to Data Structures and AlgorithmscPaul Bible 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Acknowledgements -- Algorithms, Big-O, and Complexity -- Recursion -- Sorting -- Search -- Linked Lists -- Stacks and Queues -- Hashing and Hash Tables -- Search Trees -- Priority Queues -- Dynamic Programming -- Graphs -- Hard Problems -- Contributors0 aThis textbook serves as a gentle introduction for undergraduates to theoretical concepts in data structures and algorithms in computer science while providing coverage of practical implementation (coding) issues. The field of computer science (CS) supports a multitude of essential technologies in science, engineering, and communication as a social medium. The varied and interconnected nature of computer technology permeates countless career paths making CS a popular and growing major program. Mastery of the science behind computer science relies on an understanding of the theory of algorithms and data structures. These concepts underlie the fundamental tradeoffs that dictate performance in terms of speed, memory usage, and programming complexity that separate novice programmers from professional practitioners.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aMoser, Lucaseauthor1 aScarlato, Mia M.eillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1017zAccess online version03730nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000800157100003000165245003900195264004300234264005700277264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505128000511520128201791542001603073546001603089588004003105650002603145650002103171650002403192710003903216856007703255OTLid0001019MnU20260406020842.0m     o  d s      cr            210628s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956390155  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-5000 4aBL11 aMcGrath, James F.eauthor04aThe Bible and MusiccJames McGrath 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Preface -- Introduction -- I. History -- 1. Ancient Music behind and in the Bible -- 2. Chanting in Synagogues -- 3. Chanting in Churches -- 4. The Protestant Reformatiion and Metrical Psalms -- 5. Spirituals -- 6. Contemporary Christian Music -- II. Texts -- 7. Creation -- 8. Psalms -- 9. Isaac and Family -- 10. Exodus -- 11. King David (and His Famlily, Friends, and Enemies) -- 12. Elijah -- 13. Romance in the Bible? Ruth and Boaz, Samson and Delilah -- 14. Songs of Songs -- 15. Esther -- 16. Salome -- 17. The Magnificat and Nunc Dimittis -- 18. Our Father -- 19. Revelation -- 20. Alleluias and Allusions -- 21. Biblical Music without Words -- 22. Bringing Texts Together -- III. People and Genres -- 23. Hildegard of Bingen -- 24. Salamone -- 25. Johann Sebastian Bach -- 26. Passions: Bach and Beyond -- 27. The Bible as Musical, Oratorio, and Opera -- 28. Handel's Messiah -- 29. Lilii Boulanger -- 30. Arnold Schoenberg -- 31. John Rutter -- 32. Christmas Carols -- 33. Arvo Part -- 34. Andrea Clearfield -- 35. Roxanna Panufnik -- Conclusion -- Appendix 1: Paths through This Book -- Appendix 2: Making Music with Apps, Websites, and Software -- Appendix 3: For Further Listening -- General Bibliography -- Media Bibliography -- Contributors0 aThe Bible and Music by Dr. James F. McGrath provides an introduction and overview of the various ways that music and the Bible have been and continue to be connected. Part 1 focuses on history, presenting what we know about how music in the Ancient Near East sounded, how markings in the Masoretic Text of the Hebrew Bible have been interpreted as musical symbols, how chanting of biblical texts has featured liturgically in synagogues and churches, the impact of the Protestant Reformation, and musical developments in North America as enslaved Africans encountered biblical texts and stories. Part 2 focuses on specific texts in Jewish and Christian scripture and looks at how they have been interpreted through the process of setting them to music, including the soundtracks of cinematic depictions of biblical narrative and allusions to the Bible in popular music. Part 3 focuses on composers from the Middle Ages all the way down to the present day. Throughout the book, musical examples are not merely mentioned but embedded so that reading and listening may be seamlessly combined. The book does not presume prior knowledge of either music or the Bible, and additional links within the text provide definitions and further explanations for those who need or desire them.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1019zAccess online version02019nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245001600153264004300169264005600212264001200268300002200280336002600302337002600328338003600354341002800390490002700418505015200445520072900597542001601326546001601342588004001358650003801398650002601436700002601462700002901488710003901517856007701556OTLid0001020MnU20260406020610.0m     o  d s      cr            210628s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956390216  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aComunidades 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Instructor Guide -- Student Guide -- ¡Soy yo! -- Mis amistades -- Mi familia -- Mi comunidad -- Mi universidad -- Contributors0 aThis is a textbook for first-semester Spanish with a focus on the cultural products, practices and perspectives of Spanish-speaking communities in the world today. This text is designed to build students’ cultural and communicative proficiency at the novice level through interaction with authentic resources and real-life video conversations featuring native Spanish speakers living in the American Midwest. Each chapter includes interactive activities focused on each of the three modes of communication (interpretive, interpersonal and presentational), at least one Integrated Performance Assessment, exercises with automated feedback and prompts that promote cross-cultural comparisons through research and reflection.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aIkeda, Yurikoeauthor1 aBaumgardt, Juliaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1020zAccess online version02646nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050001300148050001000161100002900171245005700200250001400257264004300271264006400314264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505032600555520099500881542003701876546001601913588004101929650004201970650002302012650003802035650002302073710003902096856007702135OTLid0001023MnU20260406020514.0m     o  d s      cr            210706s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQC21.3 4aTJ1-1570 4aQH3011 aBar-Meir, Genickeauthor00aStability of Ships and Other BodiescGenick Bar-Meir  aver 0.7.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPotto Projectc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Introduction to Stability -- 2 Marine Bodies Definitions -- 3 Mathematics for Stability -- 4 Mass Centroid -- 5 Moment of Inertia -- 6 Pressure -- 7 Buoyancy -- 8 Direct Examination -- 9 Metacenter -- 10 Variable Density Floating Bodies -- 11 Rolling -- 12 Dimensional Analysis -- 13 Experiment for Stability0 aThis book, Stability of Ships and Other Bodies, describes the fundamentals when and why floating bodies are stable. In addition, it describes steps that transforms un–stable bodies to stable. This book is designed to replace all the other books and inseminate that recent developed technology and advances. The material in standard books is so entrenched, old, and outdated material that one can be only amazed. For example, concept like potential stability is not discussed or even mentioned in any of all the books that this author review. This book written from physical point of view rather then construction point of view like all the books review by this author on stability. It is hoped that the book could be used as a reference book for people who have at least some basics knowledge of science areas such as algebra, basic physics, etc. Even without deep understating the graphs in this book can be used to find necessarily quantities needed to understand if to fix your vessel.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1023zAccess online version04878nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003000148245006100178264004300239264006500282264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505094600524520279901470542001604269546001604285588004104301650002304342650002304365710003904388856007704427OTLid0001025MnU20260406020514.0m     o  d s      cr            210722s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aKerlin, Thomas W.eauthor00aFuture EnergybOpportunities & ChallengescThomas Kerlin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKnoxville, TNbThe University of Tennessee Librariesc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. GETTING STARTED -- Chapter 1 – Introduction to the Energy Story -- Chapter 2 – Fundamentals -- Chapter 3 – Energy Production and Consumption -- Part II. ENERGY SOURCES -- Chapter 4 – Fossil Fuels -- Chapter 5 – Renewables -- Chapter 6 – Solar Energy -- Chapter 7 – Biofuels -- Chapter 8 – Wind Energy -- Chapter 9 – Hydroenergy -- Chapter 10 – Geothermal Energy -- Chapter 11 – Nuclear Energy -- Chapter 12 – Hydrogen -- Chapter 13 – Energy Transport -- Part III: ENERGY DEMAND -- Chapter 14 – Population and Energy Demand -- Chapter 15 – Residential Energy Use -- Chapter 16 – Commercial Energy Use -- Chapter 17 – Industrial Energy Use -- Chapter 18 – Transportation Energy Use -- Chapter 19 – Energy and Climate Change -- Chapter 20 – Energy Conservation and Efficiency -- Part IV: CREATING SUSTAINABLE ENERGY -- Chapter 21 – Energy, Economics, and Government -- Chapter 22 – Summing Up0 aHow can we produce enough sustainable energy while avoiding unacceptable environmental consequences? To evaluate the various energy options, we must understand the science of each potential energy source and energy use technology. This book presents the science in an easy-to-understand way to enable readers to make informed decisions about what is possible and practical, and to choose lifestyle options to implement in their personal lives. America and the world face daunting questions about how we produce energy and how we use it. Conservation and improved energy efficiency can help reduce energy requirements, but cannot halt the steady increase in energy consumption. An increasing world population and increasing energy appetites in emerging economies will create competition for energy resources for all nations. The possibilities for future energy production include fossil fuels (oil, natural gas, coal, oil sands, and oil shale), biofuels, solar, wind, hydro-energy, geothermal, and nuclear (probably fission and possibly fusion). Each of these sources has relative advantages and disadvantages. The problem is to produce enough sustainable energy while avoiding unacceptable environmental consequences, especially climate change. In order to evaluate the potential of the various energy options, one must understand the basic science that underlies each potential energy source and energy use technology. This knowledge will enable us to determine what is possible and practical and, maybe more importantly, what is impossible or impractical. Fortunately most of the pertinent science is old, well established and, for the most part, quite simple. This science provides a framework into which one can insert real data and draw conclusions. Without such quantitative assessments, claims about capabilities of the various energy options must be viewed as unverified assumptions rather than hard facts. This book presents the essential science in an easy-to-understand, yet comprehensive way. A big change in the ways that we produce and use energy is inevitable. Informed choices will help avoid waste, avoid unnecessary disruptions in our lives, and avoid undesirable environmental effects. The purpose of this book is to help the reader make informed decisions about which energy production technologies to support and which energy use technologies and lifestyle options to implement in his/her personal life. This book was originally published in 2013 by the International Society of Automation. Rights for this work have been reverted to the author by the original publisher. To report your interest or share that you have adopted Future Energy: Opportunities & Challenges, please complete this short form. To provide feedback or report errata, please complete this short form.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1025zAccess online version02664nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245006300161264004300224264005900267264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505026900503520129300772542001602065546001602081588004002097650002302137650002602160710003902186856007702225OTLid0001026MnU20260330020502.0m     o  d s      cr            210722s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aPoblet, Inéseauthor00aWriting for ChangebAn Advanced ELL ResourcecInés Poblet 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAnn Arbor, MichiganbWhatcom Community Collegec[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCreating Our Classroom Culture -- Getting Ready to Write -- Chapter 1: Identity -- Chapter 2: World Englishes -- Chapter 3: Power and Poetry -- Chapter 4 ¡Si, Se Puede! -- Chapter 5: Food Deserts -- Chapter 6: Protecting Mauna Kea -- Chapter 7: Black Lives Matter0 aThis book has been a part of my pandemic journey with a goal of building English language learner resources, gathering up what I have learned about anti-racist, culturally responsive, and decolonization approaches. I know that I have not nearly met this goal in this single resource and that there is so much more to do. I am simply starting on the collective path and am so humbled to join fellow colleagues in the work of rewriting the myths and false narratives of our field. This goes well beyond one specific discipline. It is a call to all educators and all institutions to choose love in action, to choose change. This OER text includes the following: an introduction to creating a collectivist culture to support learning models and activities about multiple ways of organizing ideas in an essay. short readings and discussion highlighting the work of community organizers, activists, and social justice movements writing prompts that ask learners to synthesize, reflect on, and connect to the topics projects inviting learners to apply the content to their community environment additional resources offering multiple modalities for further learning including videos, articles, and podcasts a contrastive and multilingual approach to exploring grammar patterns to support writing1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1026zAccess online version03538nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100003000167245003400197264004300231264004600274264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505140100497520100901898542002702907546001602934588004002950650002302990650002303013710003903036856007703075OTLid0001027MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            210722s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341826  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aBriggs, George M.eauthor00aInanimate LifecGeorge Briggs 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Organisms -- Chapter 2: Taxonomy and Phylogeny -- Chapter 3: Boundaries -- Chapter 4: Organism form: composition, size, and shape -- Chapter 5: Cellular Structure in Inanimate Life -- Chapter 6: Organ, Tissue, and Cellular Structure of Plants -- Chapter 7: Producing Form: Development -- Chapter 8: Vascular plant anatomy: primary growth -- Chapter 9: Secondary growth -- Chapter 10: Vascular Plant Form -- Chapter 11: Reproduction and sex -- Chapter 12: Fungal sex and fungal groups -- Chapter 13: Sex and reproduction in non-seed plants -- Chapter 14: The Development of Seeds -- Chapter 15: Sex and Reproduction in Seed Plants -- Chapter 16: Reproduction: development and physiology -- Chapter 17: Sex, evolution, and the biological species concept -- Chapter 18: Matter, Energy and Organisms -- Chapter 19: Cellular Respiration -- Chapter 20: Photosynthesis -- Chapter 21: Metabolic diversity -- Chapter 22: Nutrition and nutrients -- Chapter 23: Soils -- Chapter 24: Material movement and diffusion’s multiple roles in plant biology -- Chapter 25: Plant growth—patterns, limitations and models -- Chapter 26: Interactions Involving Conditions -- Chapter 27: Biotic Interactions -- Chapter 28: Agriculture -- Chapter 29: Weeds and weed control -- Chapter 30: Threats to agriculture: insects and pathogens -- Chapter 31: Propagating plants and developing new plants -- Organisms0 aInanimate Life is an open textbook covering a very traditional biological topic, botany, in a non-traditional way. Rather than a phylogenetic approach, going group by group, the book considers what defines organisms and examines four general areas of their biology: structure (their composition and how it comes to be), reproduction (including sex), energy and material needs, and their interactions with conditions and with other organisms. Although much of the text is devoted to vascular plants, the book comparatively considers ‘EBA = everything but animals’ (hence the title): plants, photosynthetic organisms that are not plants (‘algae’, as well as some bacteria and archaebacteria), fungi, and ‘fungal-like’ organisms. The book includes brief ‘fact sheets’ of over fifty organisms/groups that biologists should be aware of, ranging from the very familiar (corn, yeast) to the unfamiliar (bracket fungi, late-blight of potato). These groups reflect the diversity of inanimate life.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1027zAccess online version02402nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245002700153264004300180264004600223264001200269300002200281336002600303337002600329338003600355341002500391490002700416505025800443520097500701542003001676546001601706588004001722650003801762650002601800700003901826700003501865710003901900856007701939OTLid0001028MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            210728s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341802  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aYo puedobpara empezar 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducción -- Unidad 1: Los sonidos del español -- Unidad 2: ¿Quiénes somos? -- Unidad 3: Mis planes -- Unidad 4: En mi casa -- Unidad 5: En la comunidad -- Verbs: Spanish to English -- Glosario Español -- Glosario Inglés -- Objetivos por unidad0 aYou have learned two words in a second language just by reading the title of the book. Think about that for a moment and reflect upon your prior foreign language experiences. Often, students enter language classes with previously acquired skills, be they from secondary school or another college. Many say, “I have studied Spanish for years and don’t know how to speak or write it,” while others are a bit anxious about taking a second language for the first time, but all are overwhelmed by the expensive textbooks and online packages that don’t seem to be practical or relevant. We sought to change these common complaints by creating materials that take a new approach to learning a second language based upon the skills that we deem most useful and that will enable our students to confidently express themselves in Spanish.The text is designed for beginning Spanish language students. The pedagogical approach incorporates the flipped classroom methodology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aSilvaggio-Adams, Elizabetheauthor1 aVallejo-Alegre, Rocíoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1028zAccess online version02825nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245002900153264004300182264004600225264001200271300002200283336002600305337002600331338003600357341002500393490002700418505040600445520124800851542003002099546001602129588004002145650003802185650002602223700003902249700003502288710003902323856007702362OTLid0001029MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            210728s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341819  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aYo puedobsegundos pasos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducción -- Vocabulary Lists & Glossaries -- Unidad 1: Los conceptos que debes saber -- Unidad 2: De compras y la ropa -- Unidad 3: Las comidas y los restaurantes -- Unidad 4: Estudiando en el extranjero -- Unidad 5: Consejos para tus estudios en el extranjero -- Verbos y conjugaciones con traducción -- Verbs: Spanish to English -- Glosario Español -- Glosario Inglés -- Objetivos por unidad0 aPerhaps you remembered what the title of your book means from your previous experiences with Spanish. That is a great start! As you begin the equivalent of a second semester Spanish course with these materials, some of you might think about how long it has been since you studied Spanish while others may come to the class with some background knowledge. We want you to know this book has been designed with many types of learners in mind. Our goals were to address the need for students to achieve the ability to communicate in written and spoken form. We sought to address a common statement by students that may have previous experiences, be they from secondary school or another college that say, “I have studied Spanish for years and don’t know how to speak or write it.” We also sought to present a reasonable alternative to the expensive textbooks and online packages that don’t seem to be practical or relevant. We sought to enhance second language learning by creating our own materials that take a new approach, the flipped classroom model, to learning a second language based upon the skills that we deem most useful and that will enable our students to confidently express themselves in Spanish–tú puedes con Yo puedo 2.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aSilvaggio-Adams, Elizabetheauthor1 aVallejo-Alegre, Rocíoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1029zAccess online version01780nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245003600162250003000198264004300228264006000271264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505040300508520009200911542004101003546001601044588004001060650002601100650003101126700002901157700002701186700002901213710003901242856007701281OTLid0001030MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210802s2014    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781774200155  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aPrinciples of Social Psychology  a1st International Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introducing Social Psychology -- 2. Social Cognition -- 3. The Self -- 4. Attitudes, Behavior, and Persuasion -- 5. Perceiving Others -- 6. Influencing and Conforming -- 7. Liking and Loving -- 8. Helping and Altruism -- 9. Aggression -- 10. Working Groups: Performance and Decision Making -- 11. Stereotypes, Prejudice, and Discrimination -- 12. Competition and Cooperation in Our Social Worlds0 aHelping students organize their thinking about social psychology at a conceptual level.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aJhangiani, Rajiveauthor1 aTarry, Hammondeauthor1 aStangor, Charleseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1030zAccess online version03871nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002900144245006700173264004300240264007000283264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505072500530520198601255542003003241546001603271588004003287650002303327650003103350710003903381856007703420OTLid0001031MnU20260406020517.0m     o  d s      cr            210805s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH301 4aH11 aBakermans, Marjaeauthor00aClimate LessonsbEnvironmental, Social, LocalcMarja Bakermans 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWorcester, MassachusettsbWorcester Polytechnic Institutec[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Climate Systems -- 1. Atmosphere -- 2. Hydrosphere -- 3. Cryosphere and Lithosphere -- 4. Biosphere -- Part II. Social Impacts of Climate Change -- 5. Climate Change Impacts on Food Systems -- 6. The Societal Impacts of Climate Change on Water Resources -- 7. Climate Change Impacts on Human Health -- 8. Inequalities Due to Climate Change -- Part III. Communities and Climate Change -- 9. Puerto Rico -- 10. Boston -- 11. The Himalayas -- 12. Fiji -- Part IV. In Search of Solutions -- 13. Rigged for Oil Rigs -- 14. Climate Change Impacts on Native Hawaiian Population -- 15. Destigmatizing Nuclear Energy to Decarbonize the Worlds' Power Supply -- 16. Small Scale Carbon Capture Implementation and Utilization0 aAnthropogenic climate change is one of the, if not the most, pressing issues of our times. The problems that it causes range across many social and environmental domains from habitat and species loss and displacement to the more human and social concerns and issues of access to water, sea level rise that affects coastal communities, to economic degradation as a result of the aforementioned and other connected issues such as increased frequency of storms, droughts, wildfires, and the like. We also know that the affects of climate change are not distributed evenly across populations- that many will and do feel the negative effects of this slow developing problem earlier and more intensely than others based on where they are located both geographically and within economic and other socio-cultural hierarchies. We also know that recently, there is a marked effort to begin to move away from simply decrying the horrors of climate change to a continued recognition of those horrors as they exist now and into the future alongside attempts to begin to come to terms with the changing climate and to rethink the ways that our social and environmental relations and communities are organized with an eye toward both adapting to these changes and mitigating further damage. There is, however, much work to be done. This book was co-authored by undergraduate students at Worcester Polytechnic Institute while exploring the influences of Earth systems and human systems on climate change and the communities at most risk in an interdisciplinary project-based first year course. This course attempts to bring together knowledge of the science of ecological and climate systems and their changing status with knowledge of the social and communal structures within which these systems are embedded and through which they have been influenced. The book highlights key interests and insights of current students in their quest to think through these issues and to create a better world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1031zAccess online version03577nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050001300166050001000179100003500189245006200224250001600286264004300302264007500345264001200420300002200432336002600454337002600480338003600506341002800542490002700570505035900597520186100956542001602817546001602833588004002849650004202889650002302931650003802954650002302992710003903015856007703054OTLid0001035MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210815s2004    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781949373639  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQC21.3 4aTJ1-1570 4aQH3011 aMarchman III, James F.eauthor00aAerodynamics and Aircraft PerformancecJames Marchman III  a3rd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc[2004] 4c©2004.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Aerodynamics -- 2. Propulsion -- 3. Additional Aerodynamics Tools -- 4. Performance in Straight and Level Flight -- 5. Altitude Change: Climb and Glide -- 6. Range and Endurance -- 7. Accelerated Performance: Takeoff and Landing -- 8. Accelerated Performance: Turns -- 9. The Role of Performance in Aircraft Design: Constraint Analysis0 aAerodynamics and Aircraft Performance, 3rd edition is a college undergraduate-level introduction to aircraft aerodynamics and performance. This text is designed for a course in Aircraft Performance that is taught before the students have had any course in fluid mechanics, fluid dynamics, or aerodynamics. The text is meant to provide the essential information from these types of courses that is needed for teaching basic subsonic aircraft performance, and it is assumed that the students will learn the full story of aerodynamics in other, later courses. The text assumes that the students will have had a university level Physics sequence in which they will have been introduced to the most fundamental concepts of statics, dynamics, fluid mechanics, and basic conservation laws that are needed to understand the coverage that follows. It is also assumed that students will have completed first year university level calculus sequence plus a course in multi-variable calculus. Separate courses in engineering statics and dynamics are helpful but not necessary. Any student who takes a course using this text after completing courses in aerodynamics or fluid dynamics should find the chapters of this book covering those subjects an interesting review of the material. The 236-page text was created specifically for use by undergraduate students in Aerospace Engineering and was based on Professor Marchman’s many years of experience teaching related subject matter as well as his numerous wind tunnel research projects related to aircraft aerodynamics and his personal experience as the owner and pilot of a general aviation airplane. It has been used at Virginia Tech and other universities. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting parts or the whole of the text are requested to register their interest at: https://bit.ly/aerodynamics_interest.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1035zAccess online version04417nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134050000700144245007500151264004300226264006300269264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505155000509520156502059542004103624546001603665588004003681650002503721650004303746650003103789700003003820700004103850710003903891856007703930OTLid0001036MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            210815s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aHM621 4aH100aKnowing HomebBraiding Indigenous Science with Western SciencenBook 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, British ColumbiabUniversity of Victoriac[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Theoretical, Historical and Epistemological Foundations -- Chapter 1 - Braiding Indigenous Science with Western Science -- Chapter 2 - Why Transforming the Science Curriculum is Necessary for Aboriginal Students -- Chapter 3 - “Coming to Know”: A Framework for Indigenous Science Education -- Chapter 4 - Creating Change: Instructional Strategies, Teacher Education, Teaching Science in Rural Aboriginal and Urban Multicultural Schools -- Chapter 5 - Representations of Indigenous Science in Textbooks, Curriculum Resources, and Government Documents -- II. Understanding and Acknowledging Indigenous Science -- Chapter 6 - Indigenous Science: Proven, Practical and Timeless -- Chapter 7 - A Window into the Indigenous Science of Some Indigenous Peoples of Northwestern North America -- III. Understanding Children’s Ideas, Beliefs and Worldviews -- Chapter 8 - When Uncles Become Killer Whales: Bridging Indigenous Science, Western Science and Worldviews -- Chapter 9 - Changing Students’ Perceptions of Scientists, the Work of Scientists, and Who Does Science -- IV. Indigenous Science Curriculum -- Chapter 10 - Seasonal Wheel -- Chapter 11 - Money from the Sea: A Cross-cultural Indigenous Science Problem-solving Activity -- Chapter 12 - Dzaxwan (Oolichan Fish): Stories my Elders Told Me -- Chapter 13 - Gwaya'elas, How We Do Things: The Development and Evaluation of Dzaxwan Curriculum -- Chapter 14 - Storytelling is our Textbook and Curriculum Guide -- Chapter 15 - Gitga'at Plant Project: Bridging the Gap between Generations0 aKnowing Home attempts to capture the creative vision of Indigenous scientific knowledge and technology that is derived from an ecology of a home place. The traditional wisdom component of Indigenous Science—the values and ways of decision-making—assists humans in their relationship with each other, the land and water, and all of creation. Indigenous perspectives have the potential to give insight and guidance to the kind of environmental ethics and deep understanding that we must gain as we attempt to solve the increasingly complex problems of the 21st century. Braiding Indigenous Science and Western Science is a metaphor used to establish a particular relationship. Linked by braiding, there is a certain reciprocity. Each strand remains a separate entity, but all strands come together to form the whole. When we braid Indigenous Science with Western Science we acknowledge that both ways of knowing are legitimate forms of knowledge. The book provides a window into the vast storehouse of innovations and technologies of the Indigenous peoples who live in Northwestern North America. It is our hope that the Indigenous Science examples, research and curriculum models will inspire deep reflection regarding the under-representation of Aboriginal students in the sciences. It is intended that the rich examples and cases, combined with the resources listed in the appendices, will enable teachers and students to explore Indigenous Science examples in the classroom, and in addition, support the development of curriculum projects in home places.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSnively , Gloriaeeditor1 aWilliams, Wanosts’a7 Lornaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1036zAccess online version01856nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154245012800162264004300290264009000333264001200423300002200435336002600457337002600483338003600509341002500545490002700570505019100597520027300788542004101061546001601102588004101118650002401159650002701183700002701210700002701237700002801264700002601292710003901318856007701357OTLid0001037MnU20260406020515.0m     o  d s      cr            210816s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA100aOptimal, Integral, Likely Optimization, Integral Calculus, and Probability for Students of Commerce and the Social Sciences 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVancouver, BCbBruno Belevan, Parham Hamidi, Nisha Malhotra, and Elyse Yeagerc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Vectors and Geometry in Two & Three Dimensions -- 2 Partial Derivatives -- 3 Integration -- 4 Probability -- 5 Sequence and Series -- A Proofs and Supplements -- B High school material0 aOptimal, Integral, Likely is a free, open-source textbook intended for UBC’s course MATH 105: Integral Calculus with Applications to Commerce and Social Sciences. It is shared under the Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aBelevan, Brunoeauthor1 aHamidi, Parhameauthor1 aMalhotra, Nishaeauthor1 aYeager, Elyseeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1037zAccess online version01865nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100002600160245009000186264004300276264006200319264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505053500558520008701093542002701180546001601207588004001223650003501263650002701298650002601325710003901351856007701390OTLid0001038MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            210816s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aOja, Michelleeauthor00aPSYC 2200bElementary Statistics for the Behavioral and Social SciencescMichelle Oja 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Description -- 1: Introduction to Behavioral Statistics -- 2: What Do Data Look Like? (Graphs) -- 3: Descriptive Statistics -- 4: Distributions -- 5: Using z -- 6: APA Style -- Unit 2: Mean Differences -- 7: Inferential Statistics and Hypothesis Testing -- 8: One Sample t-test -- 9: Independent Samples t-test -- 10: Dependent Samples t-test -- 11: BG ANOVA -- 12: RM ANOVA -- 13: Factorial ANOVA (Two-Way) -- Unit 3: Relationships -- 14: Correlations -- 15: Regression -- 16: Chi-Square -- Unit 4: Wrap Up -- 17: Wrap Up0 aWelcome to behavioral statistics, a statistics textbook for social science majors!1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1038zAccess online version03168nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144050001000155245008600165264004300251264003800294264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505044700509520137800956542004102334546001602375588004102391650003302432650002502465650003702490650003602527700002902563700002602592710003902618856007702657OTLid0001039MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            210816s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aLC98000aBuilding Democracy for AllbInteractive Explorations of Government and Civic Life 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbEdTech Booksc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTopic 1. The Philosophical Foundations of the United States Political System -- Topic 2. The Development of the United States Government -- Topic 3. Institutions of United States Government -- Topic 4. The Rights and Responsibilities of Citizens -- Topic 5. The Constitution, Amendments, and Supreme Court Decisions -- Topic 6. The Structure of Massachusetts State and Local Government -- Topic 7. Freedom of the Press and News/Media Literacy0 aDesigned as a core or supplementary text for upper elementary, middle and high school teachers and students, Building Democracy for All offers instructional ideas, interactive resources, multicultural content, and multimodal learning materials for interest-building explorations of United States government as well as students’ roles as citizens in a democratic society. It focuses on the importance of community engagement and social responsibility as understood and acted upon by middle and high school students—core themes in the 2018 Massachusetts 8th Grade Curriculum Framework, and which are found in many state history and social studies curriculum frameworks around the country. Building Democracy for All has been developed by a collaborative writing team of higher education faculty, public school teachers, educational librarians, and college students who are preparing to become history and social studies teachers. The primary editors and curators are from the University of Massachusetts Amherst College of Education. Contributing teachers come from school districts in the Connecticut River valley region of western Massachusetts (Amherst, Gateway, Westfield, Hampshire Regional, and Springfield). As an open resource, the book is being revised constantly by the members of the writing team to ensure timely inclusion of online resources and information.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks1 aMaloy, Robert W.eauthor1 aTrust, Torreyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1039zAccess online version02761nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245006500145264004300210264005300253264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505061500483520087601098542003001974546001602004588004002020650003002060650002302090700002402113700002502137700002802162710003902190710004502229856007702274OTLid0001040MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210822s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aDigging into Canadian SoilsbAn Introduction to Soil Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGlen Ellyn, Illinois bCollege of DuPagec[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Digging In -- 1. Introduction -- 2. Soil Genesis -- 3. Soil Organic Matter -- 4. Soil Physics -- 5. Soil Chemistry -- 6. Soil Biodiversity and Ecology -- 7. Soil Nutrient Cycling -- 8. Soil Classification and Distribution -- II. Digging Across Canada -- 9. Soils of British Columbia and Yukon: The Western Cordillera -- 10. Soils of the Prairie Provinces -- 11. Soils of Ontario -- 12. Soils of Quebec -- 13. Soils of the Atlantic Provinces -- III. Digging Deeper -- 14. Soil Mineralogy -- 15. Soil Health and Management -- 16. Soil Reclamation and Remediation of Disturbed Lands -- 17. Digital Soil Mapping0 aWritten entirely by members of the Canadian Society of Soil Science, "Digging into Canadian Soils: An Introduction to Soil Science" provides an introduction to the core disciplines of soil science, and introduces the concepts and vocabulary needed by students just beginning their soil science journey. The textbook provides supplementary materials that are specific to regions in Canada, or may be of specific interest beyond what might be considered introductory soil science material. Importantly, the textbook also is intended to introduce students to the Canadian System of Soil Classification by providing examples from across the length and breadth of the world’s second largest country, and to the Canadian Society of Soil Science, whose members share a common passion for soil science and are keen to share and instill this passion with students across Canada.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKrzic, Majaeeditor1 aWalley, Franeeditor1 aDiochon, Amandaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor2 aCanadian Society of Soil Scienceeauthor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1040zAccess online version03632nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001300152245004500165264004300210264007800253264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002500453490002700478505101900505520133901524542004102863546001602904588004002920650003102960650003602991700002603027700002703053700002603080710003903106856007703145OTLid0001041MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210826s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781949373219  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aLB1062.600aGraduate Research Methods in Social Work 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Social Work Educationc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Introduction to research -- 1. Science and social work -- 2. Starting your research project -- 3. Searching the literature -- 4. Critical information literacy -- 5. Writing your literature review -- Part 2: Conceptualizing your research project -- 6. Research ethics -- 7. Theory and paradigm -- 8. Reasoning and causality -- 9. Writing your research question -- Part 3: Using quantitative methods -- 10. Quantitative sampling -- 11. Quantitative measurement -- 12. Survey design -- 13. Experimental design -- 14. Univariate analysis -- 15. Bivariate analysis -- 16. Reporting quantitative results -- Part 4: Using qualitative methods -- 17. Qualitative data and sampling -- 18. Qualitative data collection -- 19. A survey of approaches to qualitative data analysis -- 20. Quality in qualitative studies: Rigor in research design -- 21. Qualitative research dissemination -- 22. A survey of qualitative designs -- Part 5: Research in practice -- 23. Program evaluation -- 24. Sharing and consuming research0 aWe designed our book to help graduate social work students through every step of the research process, from conceptualization to dissemination. Our textbook centers cultural humility, information literacy, pragmatism, and an equal emphasis on quantitative and qualitative methods. It includes extensive content on literature reviews, cultural bias and respectfulness, and qualitative methods, in contrast to traditionally used commercial textbooks in social work research. Our author team spans across academic, public, and nonprofit social work research. We love research, and we endeavored through our book to make research more engaging, less painful, and easier to understand. Our textbook exercises direct students to apply content as they are reading the book to an original research project. By breaking it down step-by-step, writing in approachable language, as well as using stories from our life, practice, and research experience, our textbook helps professors overcome students’ research methods anxiety and antipathy. If you decide to adopt our resource, we ask that you complete this short Adopter’s Survey that helps us keep track of our community impact. You can also contact profmattdecarlo@gmail.com for a student workbook, homework assignments, slideshows, a draft bank of quiz questions, and a course calendar.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aDeCarlo, Matteauthor1 aCummings, Coryeauthor1 aAgnelli, Kateeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1041zAccess online version03400nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153050001300163100002900176245010800205264004300313264008200356264001200438300002200450336002600472337002600498338003600524341002800560490002700588505090600615520114801521542003002669546001602699588004102715650003802756650004202794650003802836710003902874856007702913OTLid0001042MnU20260406020516.0m     o  d s      cr            210826s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936153251  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aFrost, Victor S.eauthor00aIntroduction to Communication SystemsbAn Interactive Approach Using the Wolfram LanguagecVictor Frost 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Librariesc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Signals & Systems Review -- 3. Baseband Data Transmission -- 4. Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) -- 5. Double - Sideband Suppressed Carrier (DSB-SC) Modulation -- 6. Quadrature Modulation/Multiplexing -- 7. Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) and Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) -- 8. Double Sideband Large Carrier (DSB - LC) - Commercial AM -- 9. Single and Vestigial Sideband Modulation (SSB and VSB) -- 10. Frequency and Phase Modulation (FM/PM) -- 11. Superheterodyne Receiver -- 12. Communications Channels, Noise and Link Budgets -- 13. Performance of Analog Modulation with Noise -- 14. Performance of Digital Modulation with Noise -- 15. Multimegabit/sec Terrestrial Wireless Communication Systems: Impairments and Implementation -- 16. Introduction to Error Detection and Correction Techniques -- 17. Appendix net*TIMS FreeWire Laboratory Experiments0 aThis ebook provides a unique pedagogical approach to teaching the fundamentals of communication systems using interactive graphics and in-line questions. The material opens with describing the transformation of bits into digital baseband waveforms. Double-sideband suppressed carrier modulation and quadrature modulation then provide the foundation for the discussions of Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK), Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), M-ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (M-QAM), M-ary Phase Shift Keying (MPSK), and the basic theory of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). Traditional analog modulation systems are also described. Systems trade-offs, including link budgets, are emphasized. Interactive graphics allow the students to engage with and visualize communication systems concepts. Interactivity and in-line review questions enables students to rapidly examine system tradeoffs and design alternatives. The topics covered build upon each other culminating with an introduction to the implementation of OFDM transmitters and receivers, the ubiquitous technology used in WiFi, 4G and 5G communication systems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1042zAccess online version03465nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245005700161250001600218264004300234264006200277264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505081500516520139801331542003002729546001602759588004002775650003302815650003102848700003002879700003002909710003902939856007702978OTLid0001043MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210827s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989864753  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH100aPolitical Ideologies and WorldviewsbAn Introduction  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction: Approaching Political Ideologies -- Dis(placement) and Indigenous Worldview: What I Learned From Coyote -- Liberalism: From The "Free Men" to the "Free Market" -- Conservatism: Slow Change Please! -- Socialism. Two Centuries of Social Progress -- Anarchism: No Gods, No Masters -- Nationalism: A Modern Ideology Summoning an Eternal Past -- Multiculturalism: Public Philosophy and Public Policy -- Populism: 'The Will of the People'? -- Fascism: An Unusual Ideology -- Islamism and Its Relation to Islam and the West: Common Themes and Varieties -- Confucianism: A Living Ideology -- The Green Ideology: A Future for the Planet? -- Feminism: Rising Up Against the Patriarchal Order -- Concluding remarks: Ideology in the Globalized Future -- References -- Glossary0 aPolitical Ideologies and Worldviews: An Introduction 2nd edition takes a “pluralist” approach and, in addition to being the first open textbook on its subject, also pushes back against the Eurocentric tendencies of standard textbooks by including chapters on Indigenous worldviews and Confucianism. Providing the latest scholarship on “classical ideologies” (liberalism, conservatism, socialism, anarchism, etc.), the textbook also includes innovative chapters on populism, feminism, and multiculturalism, as well as looking at the future of ideologies in a globalized world. Joining together scholars from Canada and beyond, the text also contains discussion questions to help students and readers to think further. This new edition features more text breaks, images, tables and exercises throughout the chapters, making it even more interactive and accessible. This open textbook will be a great asset for introductory courses at the college and university levels on political ideologies and political thought and philosophy, but could also be used in other disciplines, as each chapter assesses the state of the ideology in today’s world. The general reader looking for a better understanding of the competing ideological currents of our time – currents which flow into our daily political debates and real-life government decisions – will also greatly benefit from this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aVézina, Valérieeeditor1 aTaylor, Alexandraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1043zAccess online version03662nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001100136050000800147050001400155100002800169245005700197264004300254264006600297264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505048900540520190201029542001602931546001602947588004102963650003203004650003503036650002703071650002603098710003903124856007703163OTLid0001044MnU20260406020516.0m     o  d s      cr            210827s2010    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aYakir, Benjamineauthor00aIntroduction to Statistical ThinkingcBenjamin Yakir 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBenjamin Yakirc[2010] 4c©2010.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Introduction to Statistics -- 1 Introduction -- 2 Sampling and Data Structures -- 3 Descriptive Statistics -- 4 Probability -- 5 Random Variables -- 6 The Normal Random Variable -- 7 The Sampling Distribution -- 8 Overview and Integration -- II Statistical Inference -- 9 Introduction to Statistical Inference -- 10 Point Estimation -- 11 Confidence Intervals -- 12 Testing Hypothesis -- 13 Comparing Two Samples -- 14 Linear Regression -- 15 A Bernoulli Response -- 16 Case Studies0 aThe target audience for this book is college students who are required to learn statistics, students with little background in mathematics and often no motivation to learn more. It is assumed that the students do have basic skills in using computers and have access to one. Moreover, it is assumed that the students are willing to actively follow the discussion in the text, to practice, and more importantly, to think. Teaching statistics is a challenge. Teaching it to students who are required to learn the subject as part of their curriculum, is an art mastered by few. In the past I have tried to master this art and failed. In desperation, I wrote this book. This book uses the basic structure of generic introduction to statistics course. However, in some ways I have chosen to diverge from the traditional approach. One divergence is the introduction of R as part of the learning process. Many have used statistical packages or spreadsheets as tools for teaching statistics. Others have used R in advanced courses. I am not aware of attempts to use R in introductory level courses. Indeed, mastering R requires much investment of time and energy that may be distracting and counterproductive for learning more fundamental issues. Yet, I believe that if one restricts the application of R to a limited number of commands, the benefits that R provides outweigh the difficulties that R engenders. Another departure from the standard approach is the treatment of probability as part of the course. In this book I do not attempt to teach probability as a subject matter, but only specific elements of it which I feel are essential for understanding statistics. Hence, Kolmogorov’s Axioms are out as well as attempts to prove basic theorems and a Balls and Urns type of discussion. On the other hand, emphasis is given to the notion of a random variable and, in that context, the sample space.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1044zAccess online version03838nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002700153245010000180264004300280264004600323264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002500491490002700516505116900543520150301712542003003215546001603245588004103261650002003302650002603322710003903348856007703387OTLid0001045MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210827s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341994  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aMount , Andreeauthor00aFundamentals, Function, and FormbTheory and Analysis of Tonal Western Art MusiccAndre Mount  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Fundamentals -- 1. Introduction to Rhythm and Meter -- 2. Beat Division -- 3. Simple Meters -- 4. Compound Meters -- 5. Pitch -- 6. Major Scales -- 7. Minor Scales -- 8. Major Keys and Key Signatures -- 9. Minor Keys and Key Signatures -- 10. The Circle of Fifths -- II. Diatonic Polyphony and Functional Harmony -- 11. Intervals -- 12. Basic Two-Voice Interval Progressions -- 13. Triads -- 14. Three- and Four-Voice Progressions -- 15. Nonharmonic Tones -- 16. Minor Scale Variants -- 17. The vii° Chord -- 18. Seventh Chords -- 19. The Dominant Seventh Chord -- 20. Fully-diminished Seventh Chords -- 21. Figured Bass -- 22. Phrases, Cadences, and Harmonic Function -- 23. Auxiliary Sonorities -- 24. The Pre-Dominant Function -- 25. Diatonic Descending-fifth Sequences -- 26. Other Diatonic Sequences -- III. Modulation and Chromatic Harmony -- 27. Applied Chords -- 28. Modulation -- 29. Mixture -- 30. Advanced Mixture -- 31. The Neapolitan Chord -- 32. Augmented Sixth Sonorities -- 33. Chromatic Pre-Dominants -- 34. Other Chromatic Harmonies -- IV. Form -- 35. Sentences and Periods -- 36. Binary Form -- 37. Ternary and Rondo Forms -- 38. Sonata Form0 aFundamentals, Function, and Form by Andre Mount—with editorial and pedagogical input from Lee Rothfarb—provides its readers with a comprehensive study of the theory and analysis of tonal Western art music. Mount begins by building a strong foundation in the understanding of rhythm, meter, and pitch as well as the notational conventions associated with each. From there, he guides the reader through an exploration of polyphony—the simultaneous sounding of multiple independent melodies—and an increasingly rich array of different sonorites that grow out of this practice. The book culminates with a discussion of musical form, engaging with artistic works in their entirety by considering the interaction of harmonic and thematic elements, but also such other musical dimensions as rhythm, meter, texture, and expression. Along the way, Mount supplements the text with over eight hundred musical examples which, in the online version of the text, include embedded audio files for immediate aural reinforcement of theoretical concepts. Most of these examples are drawn from the literature, including nearly 200 excerpts by women and other underrepresented groups. The reader is also given the opportunity to check their understanding of the text with interactive exercises at every step of the way. Fundamentals, Function, and Form was written with the undergraduate music student in mind, but self-guided readers would also be rewarded with a deep understanding of this musical tradition.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1045zAccess online version03045nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002500167245005500192264004300247264004600290264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505048100513520140600994542004102400546001602441588004002457650002302497650002302520710003902543856007702582OTLid0001046MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            210829s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341543  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aAhern, Hollyeauthor00aMicrobiologybA Laboratory ExperiencecHolly Ahern 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBiosafety Practices and Procedures for the Microbiology Laboratory -- The Microscopic World -- Bacteriological Culture Methods -- The Human Skin Microbiome Project -- Differential Staining Techniques -- Metabolism, Physiology, and Growth Characteristics of Cocci -- Metabolism, Physiology, and Growth Characteristics of Bacilli -- Microbiological Food Safety -- The War on Germs -- Epidemiology and Public Health -- Blood: The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly -- Microbe Mythbuster0 aAs a group of organisms that are too small to see and best known for being agents of disease and death, microbes are not always appreciated for the numerous supportive and positive contributions they make to the living world. Designed to support a course in microbiology, Microbiology: A Laboratory Experience permits a glimpse into both the good and the bad in the microscopic world. The laboratory experiences are designed to engage and support student interest in microbiology as a topic, field of study, and career. This text provides a series of laboratory exercises compatible with a one-semester undergraduate microbiology or bacteriology course with a three- or four-hour lab period that meets once or twice a week. The design of the lab manual conforms to the American Society for Microbiology curriculum guidelines and takes a ground-up approach — beginning with an introduction to biosafety and containment practices and how to work with biological hazards. From there the course moves to basic but essential microscopy skills, aseptic technique and culture methods, and builds to include more advanced lab techniques. The exercises incorporate a semester-long investigative laboratory project designed to promote the sense of discovery and encourage student engagement. The curriculum is rigorous but manageable for a single semester and incorporates best practices in biology education.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1046zAccess online version02462nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002900150245006000179264004300239264008300282264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002500487490002700512505028500539520093000824542004101754546001601795588004101811650004201852650003801894700002801932710003901960856007701999OTLid0001047MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210829s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aBaker, Daniel W.eauthor00aEngineering StaticsbOpen and InteractivecDaniel Baker 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bDaniel Baker and William Haynesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction to Statics -- 2 Forces and Other Vectors -- 3 Equilibrium of Particles -- 4 Moments and Static Equivalence -- 5 Rigid Body Equilibrium -- 6 Equilibrium of Structures -- 7 Centroids and Centers of Gravity -- 8 Internal Loadings -- 9 Friction -- 10 Moments of Inertia0 aEngineering Statics is a free, open-source textbook appropriate for anyone who wishes to learn more about vectors, forces, moments, static equilibrium, and the properties of shapes. Specifically, it has been written to be the textbook for Engineering Mechanics: Statics, the first course in the Engineering Mechanics series offered in most university-level engineering programs. This book’s content should prepare you for subsequent classes covering Engineering Mechanics: Dynamics and Mechanics of Materials. At its core, Engineering Statics provides the tools to solve static equilibrium problems for rigid bodies. The additional topics of resolving internal loads in rigid bodies and computing area moments of inertia are also included as stepping stones for later courses. We have endeavored to write in an approachable style and provide many questions, examples, and interactives for you to engage with and learn from.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks1 aHaynes, Williameauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1047zAccess online version02662nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001000154245006600164264004300230264005500273264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505096800505520047001473542003001943546001601973588004001989650003302029650002502062700003302087700002802120710003902148856007702187OTLid0001048MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210829s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780870710223  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aHM58604aThe Environmental Politics and Policy of Western Public Lands 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. The Changing West -- The Old West, the New West, and the Next West? -- Western Public Land Law and the Evolving Management Landscape -- Rangeland Policy and Management in a Changing West -- II. Forest, Wildfire, and Water -- Professionalism versus Politics -- Wildland Fire Policy and Climate Change -- The Changing Fate of Western Rivers -- III. Wilderness and Wildlife -- Wild Places and Irreplaceable Resources -- National Parks -- Introduction to Wildlife Management on Public Lands -- Endangered Species, Wildlife Corridors, and Climate Change in the US West -- IV. Development, Sovereignty, and Conflict in the West -- Renewable Energy Development in the American West -- Regulating Oil and Gas on Federal Lands under Presidents Bush, Obama, and Trump -- Mining on Federal Land -- Implications of Tribal Sovereignty, Federal Trust Responsibility, and Congressional Plenary Authority for Native American Lands Management -- Western Rebellion -- Conclusion0 aIn this volume, Erika Allen Wolters and Brent Steel have brought together the experts who can explain the evolution of public lands policies and politics in all their complexities. While their subject is complex, their prose is clear, and while their subject is torn by some of the most viciously self-interested, deceitful arguments in politics today, their prose is calm, factual, and evenhanded. No one should underestimate what a rare and valuable gift this is.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aWolters, Erika Alleneeditor1 aSteel, Brent S.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1048zAccess online version02256nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137245005800147264004300205264007100248264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505072300496520030701219542004101526546001601567588004001583650004401623650002901667700003301696700002501729710003901754856007701793OTLid0001049MnU20260406020757.0m     o  d s      cr            210829s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aP91.300aSmall Group CommunicationbForming & Sustaining Teams 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJasmine R. Linabaryc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Group & Team Communication Overview -- 1. Introducing Small Group Communication -- II. Forming Groups -- 2. Understanding Group Formation -- 3. Identifying Group Roles -- 4. Establishing and Maintaining Group Norms -- 5. Working in Diverse Teams -- 6. Negotiating Power in Groups -- III. Sustaining Groups -- 7. Cultivating a Supportive Group Climate -- 8. Navigating Group Conflict -- 9. Confronting and Preventing Social Loafing -- 10. Making Decisions in Groups -- 11. Engaging in Group Problem-Solving -- 12. Identifying Leaders -- 13. Leading in Groups -- IV. Putting Group Communication Skills into Practice -- 14. Facilitating Group Meetings -- 15. Enhancing Creativity in Groups -- 16. Presenting as a Group0 aSmall Group Communication: Forming & Sustaining Teams is an interdisciplinary textbook focused on communication in groups and teams. This textbook aims to provide students with theories, concepts, and skills they can put into practice to form and sustain successful groups across a variety of contexts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aOrganizational CommunicationvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aLinabary, Jasmine R.eeditor1 aCastro, Mooneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1049zAccess online version02397nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000900137050001300146100003000159245007600189250001600265264004300281264007300324264001200397300002200409336002600431337002600457338003600483341002800519490002700547505033100574520058200905542004101487546001601528588004001544650003301584650002701617650003601644700002601680700002801706700002601734700002601760700002501786710003901811856007701850OTLid0001050MnU20260406020817.0m     o  d s      cr            210830s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aP123 4aP95-95.61 aGuskaroska, Agataeauthor00aOral Communication for Non-Native Speakers of EnglishcAgata Guskaroska  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- PART I. FUNDAMENTALS OF ORAL COMMUNICATION -- Chapter 1. Listening -- Chapter 2. Speaking -- PART II. PRONUNCIATION ESSENTIALS -- Chapter 3. Segmentals -- Chapter 4. Thought Groups -- Chapter 5. Word Stress -- Chapter 6. Prominence -- Chapter 7. Intonation -- BACK MATTER -- Authors & Contributors -- Key Terms0 aThis book is an essential instructional tool for developing oral communication skills in academic settings, specifically designed for international graduate students, teaching assistants, postdoctoral researchers, and those preparing to enter academia. The second edition introduces dedicated chapters on developing listening, speaking, and pronunciation. Through its wide array of interactive online activities, suitable for both classroom teaching and individual practice, learners can actively develop the skills needed for success in English-speaking academic environments.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aSpeech CommunicationvTextbooks1 aGoodale, Erikeauthor1 aKochem, Timothyeauthor1 aGhosh, Monicaeauthor1 aCompton, Lilyeauthor1 aCotos, Elenaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1050zAccess online version02266nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001100134050001000145245008700155264004300242264007300285264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505031200535520064400847542004101491546001601532588004001548650002501588650003701613650003601650700002401686700003001710710003901740856007701779OTLid0001051MnU20260406102356.0m     o  d s      cr            210830s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1555 4aLC98000aTeaching Math for Emergent BilingualsbBuilding on Culture, Language, and Identity 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Emergent Bilinguals in Math Class2. Culturally Sustaining Pedagogy for/with Emergent Bilinguals3. EB-focused Strategies and Challenging Tasks4. Power & Participation of Mathematical Discussion5. Translanguaging & Word Problems6. Connecting Learned Mathematics to Emergent Bilingual Families and Community0 aThis book is designed for pre-service/in-service teachers and others who will work or work with K–12 students who have linguistically and culturally diverse backgrounds, especially students of other languages (English language learners/Emergent bilingual/multilingual). The core concept of this course is helping teachers understand the needs of various Emergent Bilinguals (a.k.a. English language learners (ELLs)/English Learners (ELs), learn to use their language and culture as a resource in mathematics classrooms and implement research-based instructional strategies that are effective to teach mathematics for Emergent Bilinguals.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks1 aI, Ji-Yeongeauthor1 aMartinez, Ricardoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1051zAccess online version01538nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138245004000148264004300188264007300231264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505010500481520025600586542004100842546001600883588004000899650002500939650002300964700002300987700002601010710003901036856007701075OTLid0001052MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210830s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH30100aFood Product Development Lab Manual 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. Required Skills -- III. Formulation -- IV. Processing -- V. Commercialization0 aA practical how-to illustrating the process of developing a new food product from ideation and formulation to processing and lastly commercialization. This book highlights the overall process and gives instructions for each of the steps along the way.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aPrusa, Keneauthor1 aGilbert, Kateeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1052zAccess online version02258nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002700145245006500172250001900237264004300256264005000299264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002500471490002700496505040700523520061600930542003001546546001601576588004001592650003801632650004201670700003201712710003901744856007701783OTLid0001055MnU20260406020521.0m     o  d s      cr            210830s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aFonseca, Aaroneauthor00aOpen Signals and Systems Laboratory ExercisescAaron Fonseca  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- MATLAB Basics -- Sampled Sounds, Echo, and Reverberation -- Introduction to CyDAQ and DAD -- CyDAQ Impulse Response -- Frequency Response and System Identification -- Fourier Series Part I -- Fourier Series Part II -- Introduction to Digital Images -- Digital Image Processing -- Pulse-Width Modulation and Filter Design -- Sampling and Aliasing -- Demodulation with a Software Defined Radio0 aOpen Signals and Systems Laboratory Exercises is a collection of lab assignments that have been used in EE 224: Signals and Systems I in the Department of Electrical and Computer Engineering at Iowa State University. These lab exercises have been curated, edited, and presented in a consistent format to improve student learning. This second edition provides a thorough coverage of the MATLAB concepts needed to complete each exercise, and incorporates hardware descriptions and explanations into the exercises that had integrated new lab equipment. A ZIP file containing additional materials is also available.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aDickerson, Julie A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1055zAccess online version03172nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157100002600164245006800190264004300258264006900301264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505073700547520124401284542003002528546001602558588004002574650002502614650003102639710003902670856007702709OTLid0001057MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            210901s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781439919842  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aWargo, Donaldeauthor00aEconomics for LifebReal World Financial LiteracycDonald Wargo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Broad Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle Page -- Copyright -- Dedication -- Table Of Contents -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- 1. Your First Big Job: How to Get It -- 2. Flourishing in Your Job and Well-Being in Your Life -- 3. The Importance of Behavioral Economics -- 4. What is Money? -- 5. Analyzing Your Current Financial Situation -- 6. Budgets and Saving -- 7. Credit Cards, Auto Loans, and Other Personal Debt -- 8. Student Loans -- 9. Understanding the Time Value of Money -- 10. Banks and Financial Institutions -- 11. Buying a Home -- 12. Insurance: What Do You Need? -- 13. Investing Fundamentals -- 14. Investing in Mutual Funds -- 15. Saving for Retirement -- 16. Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy-Government Intervention in Your Life -- References0 aAmerica has evolved into an ownership society. Home-buying decisions, resource allocation, debt exposure, and financial planning for the future are now left to individuals, many of whom may lack the financial understanding to evaluate and make sound decisions. Economics, with its insistence on quantifying ideas and putting specific quantitative values on all manner of phenomena, can help sort through the questions. Economics for Life: Real-World Financial Literacy is designed to help soon-to-be college graduates start their "real lives" with a better understanding of how to analyze the financial decisions that they will soon have to make. Written in an easy-to-read, conversational style, this textbook will help students learn how to make decisions on saving and investing for retirement, buying a car, buying a home, as well as how to safely navigate the use of debit and credit cards. Donald T. Wargo is an Associate Professor of Instruction at Temple University. Prior to his teaching career, he held executive positions in a number of large real estate companies in the Philadelphia area, including vice president of finance and president. For fifteen of those years, he ran his own development company, Wargo Properties, Inc.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1057zAccess online version03137nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245002400155264004300179264008400222264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505037000483520162200853542004102475546001602516588004102532650002302573700002402596700002702620710003902647856007702686OTLid0001058MnU20260406020519.0m     o  d s      cr            210908s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781949373707  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH30100aTree Steward Manual 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Cooperative Extension, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. About Advanced Virginia Cooperative Extension Master Gardeners and the Tree Steward Training Manual 2. The Learning Experience 3. The Benefits (and Disadvantages) of Trees 4. Botany of Trees 5. Tree Taxonomy, Identification, and Measurement 6. Soil Properties and Management 7. Trees and Ecology 8. Siting, Selecting, and Planting 9. Tree Health Care and Pruning0 aTree Steward Manual is designed for Virginia Cooperative Extension Master Gardeners who are training to be certified advanced Master Gardener tree stewards. Written by a dedicated team of volunteers who themselves completed advanced Master Gardener tree steward training, the manual covers a wide range of topics, specific to each region of Virginia, including identifying trees, selecting and planting appropriate trees for local landscapes, caring for trees, and troubleshooting tree problems. In Virginia, advanced Master Gardener tree steward training is offered by the local Extension Master Gardener (EMG) program. Once the training is completed, volunteers become certified advanced EMG tree stewards and commit to a specific number of volunteer hours working on local tree steward projects. EMG tree stewards work on projects based on the needs of their local community as determined mutually between the local agent/coordinator and active tree stewards. While Tree Steward Manual was developed with EMG training in mind, it is also appropriate for general readers who want to deepen their knowledge of trees and tree care. ​​ We would appreciate hearing from you. To tell us how you are using this book, please register your use at https://bit.ly/treestewardmanual_interest. Attribution This book was created by a dedicated team of Extension Master Gardener Volunteers and published in 2021. The book was edited by Carol King and Laura Marlowe. Chapters were authored by Carol King, Megan Tierney, Daina Henry, Patsy McGrady, Gwen Harris, Cherilyn Kern, Laurie Fox, Ed Olsen, Carol Fryer, and Cindy Ogle.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKing, Caroleeditor1 aMarlowe, Lauraeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1058zAccess online version02862nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245009100161264004300252264009400295264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002500511490002700536505046600563520116601029542004102195546001602236588004102252650002002293700003302313700002602346710003902372856007702411OTLid0001059MnU20260406020519.0m     o  d s      cr            210908s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aRosin, Jordaneauthor00aStorytelling on ScreenbAn Online Playback Theatre Archive and GuidebookcJordan Rosin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech School of Performing Arts, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword by Jo Salas How to Use the Archive and Guidebook Introduction to the Project -- I. The Archive Performance #1 World Playback Theatre: "New Beginnings" Performance #2 The Ume Group: “Voices in the Stone” at Virginia Tech Performance #3 Pangea Playback Theatre: “What Now?” -- II. The Guidebook What is Playback Theatre? Roles Concepts Forms Further Reading, Listening, and ViewingAppendix I: Adding to this ArchiveAppendix II: Additional Viewing0 aPlayback Theatre is a form of community-centered storytelling theater where the audience tells stories, which are then reflected by a company of actors and musicians. Storytelling on Screen: An Online Playback Theatre Archive and Guidebook is an open education resource consisting of a collection of full-length recordings of online Playback Theatre performances, and a 55-page explanatory guidebook. The guidebook, featuring a foreword by Playback Theatre co-founder, Jo Salas, explains the adaptation to online performances and some of the key concepts, roles, and forms involved in online Playback Theatre. The resource as a whole is suitable for a wide range of theatre students in courses such as applied theatre, theatre for social justice, improvisation, theatre appreciation, or acting. The guidebook contains hyperlinks to specific sections of the archive where students can see a given form or concept in action, allowing for a comparison of how different companies approach a given form. If you are an artist, educator, or theatre-maker using this resource, please help us understand your use by filling out this form https://bit.ly/playback_interest1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks1 aVogel, Heidi Winterseauthor1 aLebron, Sammyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1059zAccess online version03542nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002900149245005000178264004300228264012400271264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002800517490002700545505070300572520163001275542004102905546001602946588004002962650002403002650002603026710003903052856007703091OTLid0001060MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            210908s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aHopkins, Erin A.eauthor00aSustainable Property ManagementcErin Hopkins 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDepartment of Department of Apparel, Housing, and Resource Management, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCopyright -- Introduction -- About the Author -- Acknowledgments -- Instructor Resources -- List of Abbreviations -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Sustainable Property Management -- Chapter 2: The Three Spheres of Sustainable Property Management -- Chapter 3: Stakeholder Motivations for Sustainable Property Management Practices -- Chapter 4: Sustainable Building Maintenance and Repair Practices -- Chapter 5: The Intersection of Sustainable Property Management and Risk Management -- Chapter 6: Integrating Sustainable Practices into Marketing and Leasing -- Chapter 7: Financial Evaluation of Sustainable Building Initiatives -- Chapter 8: Health and Well-Being Considerations -- Glossary -- Index0 aAlthough “sustainability,” as used in the real estate context, is about preserving the environment, it is about more than that. In sustainable property management, sustainability encompasses three spheres—environmental, social, and economic. Sustainable property management is about reconciling these three spheres throughout the operations and maintenance phase of the building lifecycle in such a way that a balance is achieved between economic development and protection of environmental and social resources. This textbook explains how ecologically sustainable concepts may be implemented throughout the various property management operation functions while also considering the other spheres of sustainability. It also incorporates the theme of sustainable building practices as a human science as well as a building science by highlighting motivations and impacts to various stakeholders. The author draws on various industry examples to illustrate these concepts and provides many experiential activities for students to apply these concepts. Sustainable Property Management is intended for students majoring in property management and real estate at both the undergraduate and graduate levels. It can be incorporated into an existing property management operations course or used for a stand-alone course focused on sustainable property management. It is available online for free in multiple formats and also as an affordable print edition. Are you reviewing or adopting this book for a course? Please help us understand your use by completing this form https://bit.ly/interest_sustainable_property_management.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1060zAccess online version01907nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142050001300149110006300162245010900225264004300334264007300377264001200450300002200462336002600484337002600510338003600536341002800572490002700600505019100627520037500818542002701193546001601220588004001236650005001276650003101326650003601357710003901393856007701432OTLid0001062MnU20260406020617.0m     o  d s      cr            210916s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH1 4aLB1062.62 aIowa State University Library Instruction Serviceseauthor00aLibrary 160bIntroduction to College-Level ResearchcIowa State University Library Instruction Services  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Getting started with research -- Chapter 2: Locating information -- Chapter 3: Search techniques -- Chapter 4: Evaluating information -- Chapter 5: Using information ethically0 aYou will learn how scholarly information is produced, organized, and accessed; how to construct and use effective search strategies in a variety of web tools and scholarly databases; how to choose finding tools appropriate to the type of information you need; critical thinking skills in the evaluation of resources; and best practices in the ethical use of information.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1062zAccess online version03452nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136050001300146100002400159245006100183250001900244264004300263264006500306264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341008700493490002700580505013400607520183800741532015802579542002702737546001602764588004102780650002502821650003402846650003402880710003902914856007702953OTLid0001063MnU20260223020727.0m     o  d s      cr            210916s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aK3154 4aKF385.A41 aDunman, Joeeauthor00aReligion in the LawbAn Open Access CasebookcJoe Dunman  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bL. Joe Dunmanc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbpageBreakMarkersbpageNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Preface -- Introduction -- First Principles -- Establishment -- Free Exercise -- Special Problems -- Acknowledgements0 aThis casebook features over 70 cases from American courts that involve, in some important way, religious belief and action. The book is divided into sections: First Principles, Establishment, Free Exercise, and Special Problems. Each section includes landmark or otherwise influential cases that have influenced American law and religious practice. Most cases come from the U.S. Supreme Court but the lower federal and state courts are also represented.In the contextual introductions to each section and subpart, I have tried to give the reader a basis for understanding how the cases came about and why I chose them for this book. I have tried to minimize editorial comment. I have cited some scholarship where I think it would be helpful, but please do not mistake this as an attempt to produce a comprehensive treatise on the subject of religion in the law. It is a casebook, and a short one, all things considered. At the end of each introductory part is a short “further reading” list. I chose those articles because I found each of them interesting and useful to understanding the topics that precede them. Their selection is not necessarily an endorsement of each author’s arguments, though I do agree with some of them.I designed this casebook specifically for my own use upper level law school seminar called Law & Religion. Class sessions using this book are intended to be student-led, round table talks with the professor acting as discussion prompter and neutral mediator. Generally, 2-5 cases are assigned for each class session. I selected, edited, and arranged the cases to complement each other thematically and chronologically to the best of my ability. Many of the cases include overlapping topics and could fit into multiple categories, so I took some liberties in their arrangement. Your mileage may vary.1 aImages have captions and alt tags, the content is navigable by keyboard and has a complete table of contents, no information is conveyed solely by color.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1063zAccess online version01966nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158245005500168264004300223264005700266300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505009500488520056900583542004101152546001601193588004101209650003301250650004201283700003401325700002601359700002701385700002801412710003901440856007701479OTLid0001064MnU20260406020518.0m     o  d s      cr            210917suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463664448  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA14500aPorts and WaterwaysbNavigating the changing world 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Open  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI General introduction -- II Ports and terminals -- III Waterways -- IV System performance0 aBefore you lies the book ‘Ports and Waterways - Navigating the changing world’, written by the Ports and Waterways team, part of the Civil Engineering and Geosciences faculty at Delft University of Technology. It integrates the content of a number of separate lecture notes we used in our teaching activities and updates this information where relevant. The integration reflects our vision that ports and waterways should be viewed as parts of a coherent system that supports waterborne supply chains, and that their integral design and operation is essential.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 avan Koningsveld, Markeauthor1 aVerheij, Henkeauthor1 aTaneja, Poonameauthor1 ade Vriend, Huibeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1064zAccess online version02234nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003200137245009400169264004300263264007000306264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505032700553520074800880542004101628546001601669588004101685650004201726710003901768856007701807OTLid0001065MnU20260406020517.0m     o  d s      cr            210918s2001    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aRichards, Donald E.eauthor00aBasic Engineering Science - A Systems, Accounting, and Modeling ApproachcDonald Richards 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTerre Haute, IndianabRose-Hulman Institute of Technologyc[2001] 4c©2001.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 – Introduction -- Chapter 2 – Basic Concepts -- Chapter 3 – Conservation of Mass -- Chapter 4 – Conservation of Charge -- Chapter 5 – Conservation of Linear Momentum -- Chapter 6 – Conservation of Angular Momentum -- Chapter 7 – Conservation of EnergyChapter 8 – Entropy Production and Accounting0 aThis textbook is based on a different paradigm for organizing an engineering science core --- a systems, accounting and modeling approach --- that emphasizes the common, underlying concepts of engineering science. Although this approach is not new, as most graduate students have been struck by this idea sometime during their graduate education, its use as the organizing principle for an undergraduate curriculum is new. By focusing on the underlying concepts and stressing the similarities between subjects that are often perceived by students (and taught by faculty) as unconnected topics, this approach provides engineering students a foundational framework for recognizing and building connections as they travel through their education.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1065zAccess online version02479nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127110003000135245003900165264004300204264007400247300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505079300486520062101279542003001900546001601930588004101946650003801987710003902025856007702064OTLid0001066MnU20260406020518.0m     o  d s      cr            210918suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP512 aSeanbGuillicksoneeditor00aPalabras propiascSean Guillickson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Libraries  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Módulos con enfoque en Latinoamérica -- Literaturas prehispánicas -- La ciudad en la historia de América Latina -- Cicatriz de la memoria: La matanza de 1932 en El Salvador -- Voces indígenas en el cine, Parte I: Indigenidad -- Voces indígenas en el cine, Parte II: Narrativas del agua -- La nueva izquierda latinoamericana -- Pachamama -- Diego Maradona: héroe épico, mito nacional -- #NiUnaMenos -- II. Módulos con enfoque en España -- Las siete partidas de Alfonso X «el Sabio» -- El camino de Santiago y El códice calixtino -- Los moriscos, parte I: Los moriscos en la historia -- Los moriscos, parte II: Los moriscos en la literatura -- III. Módulos transatlánticos y globales -- Cristóbal Colón: La narrativa del encuentro -- La emigración gallega a América --0 aThe goal of this project is to provide high-quality, accessible primary sources to those teaching and studying the histories and cultures of the Spanish-speaking world and the indigenous peoples of Latin America. Our modules cover a wide range of topics, but all consist of the same essential parts: A brief introduction that provides socio-historical context for the primary document. The text itself, often glossed for improved comprehension by non-native speakers of Spanish. A set of activities that range from comprehension to analysis, from using new vocabulary to answering creative writing and essay prompts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1066zAccess online version01538nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001200135100003100147245004700178264004300225264007400268264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505012300519520019900642542003000841546001600871588004000887650002000927650002600947650002100973700003000994710003901024856007701063OTLid0001067MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            210920s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aMihalka , Mattheweauthor00aMusic in World CulturescMatthew Mihalka  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. Place -- III. Identity and Politics -- IV. Theatre -- V. Dance -- VI. Religion and Spirituality0 aThis text provides just a small sampling of some of the various musical styles and traditions that might be found, though the skills developed in this course can be applied to any type of music.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aHunter, Justin R.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1067zAccess online version01856nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003000134100002700164245005500191264004300246264007400289264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505043000540520029700970542003001267546001601297588004001313650002501353710003901378856007701417OTLid0001068MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210920s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aBeasley, Jennifereauthor1 aHaulmark, Myraeauthor00aIntroduction to Education (BETA)cJennifer Beasley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Why Teach? -- 2. What is the Purpose of School? -- 3. Who are Today's Students? -- 4. How Do Social Issues Affect Students? -- 5. What is Taught? -- 6. What Makes an Effective Teacher? -- 7. What is a Positive Classroom Environment? -- 8. What are the Ethical and Legal Issues in Schools? -- 9. What is an Educational Philosophy? -- 10. Excellence or Equity...Which is More Important? -- 11. What Can a New Teacher Expect?0 aThis book was written to provide students with an introduction to the field of education. The book is broken into chapters that focus on questions students may have about education in general. Although some chapters may go into more depth than others, this is created as an introductory text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1068zAccess online version02476nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245002700143264004300170264003900213264001200252300002200264336002600286337002600312338003600338341002800374490002700402505031300429520099900742542004101741546001601782588004001798650002001838650002301858650002601881700002601907700002901933710003901962856007702001OTLid0001069MnU20260408084423.0m     o  d s      cr            210920s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aGuide to Byzantine Art 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbSmarthistoryc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. A beginner's guide -- II. Early Byzantine art and architecture, c. 330-700 C.E. -- III. The Iconoclastic Controversy, c. 700s-843 C.E. -- IV. Middle Byzantine art and architecture, c. 843-1204 C.E. -- V. The Latin Empire, c. 1204–1261 C.E. -- VI. Late Byzantine Art and Architecture, c. 1261–1453 C.E.0 aThe “Beginner’s guide” introduces foundational concepts, such as the chronology of Byzantine history, sacred imagery, and wearable objects. Subsequent sections are arranged chronologically, covering the Early Byzantine period (c. 330–700), the Iconoclastic Controversy (c. 700s–843), the Middle Byzantine period (843–1204), the Latin Empire (c. 1204–1261), and the Late Byzantine period (c. 1261–1453) and beyond. These sections include thematic essays on Byzantine art and architecture, essays that focus on key works (subtitled artworks in focus or architecture in focus), and essays that explore Byzantium’s relationships with other cultures (subtitled cross-cultural perspectives). Finally, we have included questions for study or discussion to encourage teachers, students, and other readers to engage with videos and other content on the Smarthistory website which could not be included in this book format but which we believe richly compliments what is presented here.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aFreeman, Evaneeditor1 aMcClanan , Anneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1069zAccess online version01850nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100003400154245011000188264004300298264008500341264001200426300002200438336002600460337002600486338003600512341002800548490002700576505026100603520037900864542004101243546001601284588004001300650003201340710003901372856007701411OTLid0001070MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210925s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648769873  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSlaughter, Richard A.eauthor00aDeleting DystopiabRe-Asserting Human Priorities in the Age of Surveillance CapitalismcRichard Slaughter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Starting points and emerging issues -- II. Case studies and implications -- III. Framing solutions -- IV. Humanising and democratising the IT revolution -- V. The IT revolution reassessed -- VI. Witnesses to the revolution -- VII. Resistance and renewal0 aDeleting Dystopia confirms that the existential threats posted by the misuse of advanced digital technologies are real. But, in place of apathy and fatalism, Slaughter explores ways of understanding the threat, conceptualising solutions and identifying strategies that lead away from digital authoritarian futures towards those funded on humanly viable values and practices.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1070zAccess online version02082nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050001400142050001600156050001100172050000800183100002900191245004500220264004300265264005800308264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505030800543520052100851542002701372546001601399588004001415650004101455650002101496650002701517710003901544856007701583OTLid0001071MnU20260406020757.0m     o  d s      cr            210926s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a1977730035  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aCallahan, Danieleauthor00aEuclid's Elements ReduxcDaniel Callahan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSamplec[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Angles, Parallel Lines, Parallelograms -- 2 Rectangles -- 3 Circles -- 4 Inscription and Circumscription -- 5 Theory of Proportions -- 6 Applications of Proportions -- 7 Elementary Number Theory -- 8 Proportions & Geometric Sequences -- 9 Applied Number Theory -- 10 Irrational Numbers -- 14 Solutions0 a"Euclid's 'Elements' Redux" is an open textbook on mathematical logic and geometry based on Euclid's "Elements" for use in grades 7-12 and in undergraduate college courses on proof writing. Many problem solvers throughout history wrestled with Euclid as part of their early education including Copernicus, Kepler, Galileo, Sir Isaac Newton, Ada Lovelace, Abraham Lincoln, Bertrand Russell, and Albert Einstein. This edition is part of an effort to ensure that tomorrow's great thinkers will have that same privilege.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aProofvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1071zAccess online version02241nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245003500162264004300197264005600240264001200296300002200308336002600330337002600356338003600382341002500418490002700443505049700470520052100967542003001488546001601518588004001534650002301574650003101597700003201628700002801660700002701688710003901715856007701754OTLid0001072MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210927s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944455248  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH301 4aH100aImpact of Materials on Society 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGainesville, FloridabUniversity of Floridac[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnderstanding the Material World -- Clay: The Entanglement of Earth in the Age of Clay -- Ceramics: Firing Clay and Flaking Stone -- Concrete: Engineering Society through Social Spaces -- Copper and Bronze: The Far-Reaching Consequences of Metallurgy -- Gold and Silver: Precious Metals and Coinage -- Steel: Carnegie and Creative Destruction -- Aluminum: Alcoa and Anti-Trust -- Polymers: Fantastic Plastics in Postwar America -- Writing Materials: The Politics and Preservation of Knowledge0 aThis textbook supports the Impact of Materials on Society course and teaching materials, developed with the Materials Research Society. The textbook offers an exploration into materials (including ceramics, clay, concrete, glass, metals, and polymers) and the relationship with technologies and social structures. The textbook was developed by an interdisciplinary team from Engineering and Liberal Arts and Sciences, including anthropologists, sociologists, historians, media studies experts, Classicists, and more.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aAcord, Sophia Krzyseauthor1 aJones, Kevin S.eauthor1 aBryant, Marshaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1072zAccess online version02489nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050000700148100003100155245004400186264004300230264007000273264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505023100520520101800751542003001769546001601799588004101815650002601856650002401882650002601906650003101932710003901963856007702002OTLid0001073MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210927s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aBF121 4aH11 aRobinson, Thaddeuseauthor00aArguments in ContextcThaddeus Robinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMuhlenberg Collegec[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. An Introduction to Reasoning -- II. Argument Analysis -- III. An Introduction to Evaluation -- IV. An Introduction to Deductive Arguments -- V. Common Inductive Arguments -- VI. Social Arguments -- VII. Scientific Reasoning0 aArguments in Context is a comprehensive introduction to critical thinking that covers all the basics in student-friendly language. Intended for use in a semester-long course, the text features classroom-tested examples and exercises that have been chosen to emphasize the relevance and applicability of the subject to everyday life. Three themes are developed as the text proceeds from argument identification and analysis, to the standards and techniques of evaluation: (i) the importance of asking the right questions, (ii) the influence of biases, cognitive illusions, and other psychological factors, and (iii) the ways that social situations and structures can enhance and impoverish our thinking. On this last point, the text includes sustained discussion of disagreement, cooperative dialogue, testimony, trust, and social media. Overall, the text aims to equip readers with a set of tools for working through important decisions and disagreements, and to help them become more careful and active thinkers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1073zAccess online version01956nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245006300166264004300229264006900272264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505029600518520052800814542001601342546001601358588004001374650003801414650002601452710003901478856007701517OTLid0001074MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210927s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHaider, Rebecca Aleauthor00aAdvanced Academic Grammar for ESL StudentscRebecca Haider 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebecca Al Haiderc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1-Earth Science -- Chapter 1-Ocean Currents -- Chapter 2-Tsunamis -- Chapter 3-Glaciers -- Unit 2-Resistance -- Chapter 4-Street Art -- Chapter 5-Egyptian Revolution -- Unit 3-Health and Nutrition -- Chapter 6-Genetically Modified Organisms (GMOs) -- Chapter 7-Sugar -- Chapter 8- Sleep0 aThis textbook was created for an advanced academic grammar course for ESL students. By the end of the course, students will recognize and demonstrate the appropriate use of advanced grammar structures. To meet these outcomes, students will listen to aural language that includes the target structures, identify and edit grammar errors in written language, read and analyze texts that include the target grammar structures, and demonstrate the correct and appropriate use of target structures in written and spoken language.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1074zAccess online version06346nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167245005100177250001600228264004300244264004600287264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002500455490002700480505409400507520093604601542001605537546001605553588004005569650002805609650002905637650002405666700002905690700002605719700003905745710003905784856007705823OTLid0001075MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            210927s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341840  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRS1-441 4aRA421 4aRA44000aPublic Health in Pharmacy PracticebA Casebook  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. An ounce of prevention: pharmacy applications of the USPSTF guidelines -- 2. Communicating health information: hidden barriers and practical approaches -- 3. Medication safety: to ‘error’ is human -- 4. Drawing the line: preventing sexually transmitted infections -- 5. Interprofessional collaboration: transforming public health through team work -- 6. HIV and hepatitis C co-infection: a double-edged sword -- 7. Ethical decision-making in global health: when cultures clash -- 8. Safe opioid use in the community setting: reverse the curse? -- 9. The ‘state’ of things: epidemiologic comparisons across populations -- 10. Saying what you mean doesn’t always mean what you say: cross-cultural communication -- 11. The cough heard ‘round the world: working with tuberculosis -- 12. More than just diet and exercise: social determinants of health and well-being -- 13. Deciphering immunization codes: making evidence-based recommendations -- 14. Getting to the point: importance of immunizations for public health -- 15. Smoke in mirrors: the continuing problem of tobacco use -- 16. Plant now, harvest later: services for rural underserved patients -- 17. Telepharmacy: building a connection to close the healthcare gap -- 18. Hormonal contraception: from emergency coverage to long-term therapy -- 19. From belly to baby: preparing for a healthy pregnancy -- 20. When disaster strikes: managing chaos and instilling lessons for future events -- 21. Anticipating anthrax and other bioterrorism threats -- 22. In the stroke of time: pharmacist roles in the management of cerebrovascular accident -- 23. Alcohol use disorder: beyond prohibition -- 24. Immunizing during a pandemic: considerations for COVID-19 vaccinations -- 25. Sweetening the deal: improving health outcomes for patients with diabetes mellitus -- 26. The hidden burden of hemodialysis: personal and economic impacts -- 27. Only a mirage: searching for healthy options in a food desert -- 28. Sex education: counseling patients from various cultural backgrounds -- 29. Harm reduction for people who use drugs: A life-saving opportunity -- 30. Digging deeper: improving health communication with patients -- 31. Equity for all: providing accessible healthcare for patients living with disabilities -- 32. Laying the foundation for public health priorities: Healthy People 2030 -- 33. Staying on track: reducing missed immunization opportunities in the pediatric population -- 34. When love hurts: caring for patients experiencing interpersonal violence -- 35. Pharmacists and Medicare Part D: helping patients navigate their prescription benefits -- 36. Expanding the pharmacists’ role: assessing mental health and suicide -- 37. Bridging the gap between oncology and primary care: a multidisciplinary approach -- 38. A stigma that undermines care: opioid use disorder and treatment considerations -- 39. Deprescribing in palliative care: applying knowledge translation strategies -- 40. Let your pharmacist be your guide: navigating barriers to pharmaceutical access -- 41. Open-door policy: a window into creation, implementation, and assessment -- 42. PrEPare yourself: let’s talk about sex -- 43. Unexpected souvenirs: parasitic and vector-borne infections during and after travel -- 44. You say medication, I say meditation: effectively caring for diverse populations -- 45. The Sustainable Development Goals and pharmacy practice: a blueprint for health -- 46. Experiences of a Caribbean immigrant: going beyond clinical care -- 47. Medicine for the soul: spirituality in pharmacy -- 48. Uncrossed wires: working with non-English speaking patient populations -- 49. Unintended consequences of e-cigarette use: a public health epidemic -- 50. A toxic situation: the roles of pharmacists and poison control centers -- 51. Prescription for change: advocacy and legislation in pharmacy -- 52. Travel medicine: what you need to know before you go -- 53. A pharmacist’s obligation: advocating for change -- 54. The great undoing: a multigenerational journey from racism to social determinants of health0 aThis casebook, now in its second edition, is a collaboration of over 90 individuals with expertise and training in public health pharmacy. A total of 54 chapters are presented, covering a broad array of topics relevant to pharmacy applications of public health. These topics include, but are not limited to, cross-cultural care, health literacy and disparities, infectious disease, health promotion and disease prevention, medication safety, structural racism, advocacy/policy analysis, chronic disease, women’s health, rural health, travel medicine and more. The book is designed to allow educators/students to choose chapters of interest as they feel suited, as each chapter is independent from the others. Each chapter contains learning objectives and an introduction to the topic, followed by a case and questions. The chapter closes with commentary from the authors and patient-oriented considerations for the topic at hand.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPharmacologyvTextbooks 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aCovvey, Jordan Reauthor1 aArya, Vibhutieauthor1 aMager, Natalie A. DiPietroeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1075zAccess online version02290nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245005500160264004300215264004300258264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505024800478520093900726542004101665546001601706588004001722650002601762650002401788710003901812856007701851OTLid0001076MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210927s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBL11 aOndich, Jodyeauthor00aWorld Religionsbthe Spirit SearchingcJody Ondich 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDuluth, MinnesotabJody Ondichc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. About Religion -- II. Asian Origins -- III. Indian Sub-Continent Origins -- IV. Middle Eastern Origins -- V. Tribal Traditions: Africa, Australia and the Americas -- VI. European Origins: Paganism, Nordic, Wicca -- VII. Syncretic traditions0 aHumans across the globe and throughout millennia have searched for answers to questions like, "why are we here?" or "what am I supposed to do with my life?" And the answers people have found, or created, or chosen, have varied as widely as the cultures and people themselves. Some people focus on rules. Some focus on afterlives. Some look to become whole. Some seek adventure and learning. So this text, while full of various ways that people have searched and discovered and created, is only touching a few of the bigger traditions in our world. Hopefully each chapter will introduce the reader to some ideas from that specific tradition that enlighten them as to how a specific group of people think, believe, and live. This text is set up to be an ebook. The various videos, links and resources will only really work if the user keeps to the digital format. Read this book on a device--it will be a much more rewarding experience!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1076zAccess online version02715nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002700168245004800195264004300243264005500286264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505031900518520119900837542004102036546001602077588004002093650004202133650003802175710003902213856007702252OTLid0001077MnU20260406020618.0m     o  d s      cr            210927s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101103  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aLiburdy, Jameseauthor00aIntermediate Fluid MechanicscJames Liburdy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. Mathematical Tools -- III. Bernoulli Equation -- IV. Potential Flow Basics -- V. Potential Flows -- VI. The Panel Method: An Introduction -- VII. Introduction to Viscous Flows -- VIII. Boundary Layer Flows -- IX. Integral Boundary Layer Relationships -- X. Introduction to Turbulence Effects0 aThis book is meant to be a second course in fluid mechanics that stresses applications dealing with external potential flows and intermediate viscous flows. Students are expected to have some background in some of the fundamental concepts of the definition of a fluid, hydrostatics, use of control volume conservation principles, initial exposure to the Navier-Stokes equations, and some elements of flow kinematics, such as streamlines and vorticity. It is not meant to be an in-depth study of potential flow or viscous flow, but is meant to expose students to additional analysis techniques for both of these categories of flows. We will see applications to aerodynamics, with analysis methods able to determine forces on arbitrary bodies. We will also examine some of the exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equations based on classical fluid mechanics. Finally we will explore the complexities of turbulent flows and how for boundary layer flows one can predict drag forces. This compilation is drafted from notes used in the course Intermediate Fluid Mechanics, offered to seniors and first year graduate students who have a background in mechanical engineering or a closely related area.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1077zAccess online version02426nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100003100160245005100191264004300242264005500285264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505024700517520097300764542003001737546001601767588004101783650003501824650002701859650002601886710003901912856007701951OTLid0001078MnU20260406020519.0m     o  d s      cr            210929s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aGreenwood, Mark C.eauthor00aIntermediate Statistics with RcMark Greenwood 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBozeman, MontanabMontana State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Preface -- 2 (R)e-Introduction to statistics -- 3 One-Way ANOVA -- 4 Two-Way ANOVA -- 5 Chi-square tests -- 6 Correlation and Simple Linear Regression -- 7 Simple linear regression inference -- 8 Multiple linear regression -- 9 Case studies0 aIntroductory statistics courses prepare students to think statistically but cover relatively few statistical methods. Building on the basic statistical thinking emphasized in an introductory course, a second course in statistics at the undergraduate level can explore a large number of statistical methods. This text covers more advanced graphical summaries, One-Way ANOVA with pair-wise comparisons, Two-Way ANOVA, Chi-square testing, and simple and multiple linear regression models. Models with interactions are discussed in the Two-Way ANOVA and multiple linear regression setting with categorical explanatory variables. Randomization-based inferences are used to introduce new parametric distributions and to enhance understanding of what evidence against the null hypothesis “looks like”. Throughout, the use of the statistical software R via Rstudio is emphasized with all useful code and data sets provided within the text. This is Version 3.0 of the book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1078zAccess online version01652nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002400137245004100161264004300202264007400245264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505018900496520040000685542001601085546001601101588004001117650002901157710003901186856007701225OTLid0001079MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            210929s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aMeade, Lynneauthor00aAdvanced Public SpeakingcLynn Meade 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Writing a Speech -- II. Presenting a Speech -- III. Presentation Aids for Speech -- IV. Speeches -- V. Considerations for Speech -- VI. Classroom Activities and Additional Resources0 aThis advanced public speaking textbook is designed to encourage you as a speaker and to help you sharpen your skills. It is written to feel like you are sitting with a trusted mentor over coffee as you receive practical advice on speaking. Grow in confidence, unleash your personal power and find your unique style as you learn to take your speaking to the next level--polished and professional.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1079zAccess online version02524nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245006300166264004300229264008400272264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505017500533520118800708542003001896546001601926588004001942650003801982650002602020710003902046856007702085OTLid0001081MnU20260406020619.0m     o  d s      cr            211012s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aDolidon, Annabelleeauthor00aCITOYEN.NE.SbConversation en FrançaiscAnnabelle Dolidon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Bases culturelles -- 2. Questions contemporaines -- 3. Voyager, étudier, se soigner -- 4. Le monde professionnel et l’économie -- 5. L’art et les divertissements0 aCITOYEN.NE.S is a French language method for the conversation class at the intermediate/ advanced level. Content and activities are built around the concepts of diversity, inclusivity and equity, and engage students to practice French while questioning and participating in the world they live in – to be full citizens whatever their background, their race or their gender identity. As the French spelling of the title indicates, the book embraces écriture inclusive and uses it for instructions and general information for all students. The book is composed of five chapters covering various themes. None of them provides again basic vocabulary from first- and second-year French courses, like food and body parts. Instead, each chapter builds on students’ previous knowledge and takes them further to develop language and cultural skills. Each chapter presents a mix of vocabulary lists and activities, authentic documents and others that have been written for the book, based on research. Chapters end with creative activities and one overarching assignment that help students go deeper in topics of interest. Early chapters have two grammar reviews, later chapters only one.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1081zAccess online version02102nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100003100150245008500181264004300266264008400309264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505037500570520050500945542003001450546001601480588004101496650003301537650004201570710003901612856007701651OTLid0001082MnU20260406020519.0m     o  d s      cr            211012s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aKhodadadi, Anahitaeauthor00aBasic Concepts of Structural Design for Architecture StudentscAnahita Khodadadi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPART I. MAIN BODY -- 1. Loads on Structures 32. Forces and Vector Analysis 173. Equilibrium 314. Catenary Cables and Arches 455. Trusses 656. Lattice Domes 877. Material Properties 1048. Cross-sectional Properties 1159. Shear and Bending Stress in Simple Beams 12510. Deflection in Simple Beams 13411. Buckling in Columns 14412. Load Tracing 150 -- PART II. BIBLIOGRAPHY0 aThis book aims to narrate fundamental concepts of structural design to architecture students such that they have minimum involvement with math problem-solving. Within this book, students learn about different types of loads, forces and vector addition, the concept of equilibrium, internal forces, geometrical and material properties of structural elements, and rules of thumb for estimating the proportion of some structural systems such as catenary cables and arches, trusses, and frame structures.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1082zAccess online version02533nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100002800160245005500188250001600243264004300259264008500302264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002500509490002700534505066500561520061001226542002701836546001601863588004001879650003501919650002701954650002601981710003902007856007702046OTLid0001083MnU20260406020520.0m     o  d s      cr            211013s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aWebb, Rachel L.eauthor00aMostly Harmless Elementary StatisticscRachel Webb  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface and Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Data -- Chapter 2: Organizing Data -- Chapter 3: Descriptive Statistics -- Chapter 4: Probability -- Chapter 5: Probability Distributions -- Chapter 6: Confidence Intervals for One Population -- Chapter 7: Hypothesis Tests for One Population -- Chapter 8: Hypothesis Tests & Confidence Intervals for Two Populations -- Chapter 9: Chi-Square Tests -- Chapter 10: Analysis of Variance -- Chapter 11: Linear Regression Analysis -- Answers to Odd Numbered Exercises -- Data Sources and References -- Glossary -- Symbols -- Greek Letter Pronunciations -- Mostly Harmless Elementary Statistics Formula Packet0 aThis text is for an introductory level probability and statistics course with an intermediate algebra prerequisite. The focus of the text follows the American Statistical Association’s Guidelines for Assessment and Instruction in Statistics Education (GAISE). Software examples provided for Microsoft Excel, TI-84 & TI-89 calculators. Students new to statistics are sure to benefit from this ADA accessible and relevant textbook. The examples are current and resonate with everyday life. The casual narrative style, has a conversational tone to provide an inclusive and easy to read format for students.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1083zAccess online version01712nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137110005800144245007000202264004300272264008400315264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505025100576520024100827542004101068546001601109588004001125650002601165650003101191710003901222856007701261OTLid0001084MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            211013s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH12 aHuman Development Teaching and Learning Groupeauthor00aHuman DevelopmentcHuman Development Teaching and Learning Group  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit I: Meta-theories -- Unit 2: Research Methods -- Unit 3: Infancy -- Unit 4: Family -- Unit 5: Early Childhood -- Unit 6: Middle Childhood -- Unit 7: Adolescence -- Unit 8: Early Adulthood -- Unit 9: Middle Adulthood -- Unit 10: Late Adulthood0 aThis open textbook is designed for Human Development, a core Psychology course. This course provides a bird’s eye view of major milestones and developmental tasks during each age period, starting at conception and ending with old age.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1084zAccess online version02193nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003000135264004300165264004900208264001200257300002200269336002600291337002600317338003600343341002800379490002700407505009800434520096500532542003001497546001601527588004001543650003801583650002601621700002601647700003001673710003901703856007701742OTLid0001085MnU20260406020619.0m     o  d s      cr            211014s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aTutt* a tavola!nVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmherst, MassachusettsbUMass Amherstc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMain Body -- Capitolo 1 -- Capitolo 2 -- Capitolo 3 -- Capitolo 4 -- Capitolo 5 -- Capitolo 60 aThis new open educational resource is for Elementary Italian. Our goal is for this book to be comprehensive, user-friendly, inclusive, and cost-effective. Tutt* a tavola has two parts, one for each course, with six chapters in each. Generally speaking, each chapter addresses three to four grammatical topics and includes a vocabulary section related to a cultural theme. The vocabulary is also incorporated into the grammatical presentations and exercises. There is also a short reading in each chapter regarding different aspects of culture and language, to address those questions of diversity and inclusion that are often missing from the textbooks we have used in the past. To include more culture, we have also included multimedia: each chapter begins with a song that is used as a starting point for the inductive presentation of the chapter’s content, and ends with a video (a film clip, an interview, social media) that summarizes the ideas covered.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGiufre, Stacyeauthor1 aMasterson, Melinaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1085zAccess online version01595nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003000135264004300165264005000208264001200258300002200270336002600292337002600318338003600344341002800380490002700408505010100435520036300536542003000899546001600929588004000945650003800985650002601023700002601049700003001075710003901105856007701144OTLid0001086MnU20260406020619.0m     o  d s      cr            211014s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aTutt* a tavola!nVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmherst, MassachusettsbUMass Amherstc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMain Body -- Capitolo 7 -- Capitolo 8 -- Capitolo 9 -- Capitolo 10 -- Capitolo 11 -- Capitolo 120 aThis book has all of the same features as the first volume: an opening song for each chapter (Ascoltiamo!); vocabulary and grammar sections; exercises based on a film clip (Guardiamo!); and more in-depth explorations of cultural topics (Punto culturale). It also introduces a new section, Leggiamo!, in which we begin reading short literary texts in Italian.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGiủe, Stacyeauthor1 aMasterson, Melinaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1086zAccess online version02462nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245004100162264004300203264008200246264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505019100505520107200696542001601768546001601784588004001800650002301840650003101863700002701894700002701921710003901948856007701987OTLid0001087MnU20260330020507.0m     o  d s      cr            211015s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800642621  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH301 4aH100aNegotiating Climate Change in Crisis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSteffen Böhm and Sian Sullivanc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Paradigms -- Ii. What counts? -- Iii. Extraction -- Iv. Dispatches from a climate change frontline country—Namibia, Southern Africa -- V. Governance -- Vi. Finance -- Vii. Action(s)0 aClimate change negotiations have failed the world. Despite more than thirty years of high-level, global talks on climate change, we are still seeing carbon emissions rise dramatically. This edited volume, comprising leading and emerging scholars and climate activists from around the world, takes a critical look at what has gone wrong and what is to be done to create more decisive action. Composed of twenty-eight essays—a combination of new and republished texts—the anthology is organised around seven main themes: paradigms; what counts?; extraction; dispatches from a climate change frontline country; governance; finance; and action(s). Through this multifaceted approach, the contributors ask pressing questions about how we conceptualise and respond to the climate crisis, providing both ‘big picture’ perspectives and more focussed case studies. This unique and extensive collection will be of great value to environmental and social scientists alike, as well as to the general reader interested in understanding current views on the climate crisis.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBöhm, Steffeneeditor1 aSullivan, SIaneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1087zAccess online version01951nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000800155100003500163245005300198264004300251264005300294264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505014300524520059000667542003001257546001601287588004001303650004201343650002601385650002601411710003901437856007701476OTLid0001088MnU20260330020508.0m     o  d s      cr            211015s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936323883  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aB721 aSchultz-Bergin, Marcuseauthor04aThe Primacy of the PubliccMarcus Schultz-Bergin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGlen Ellyn, Illinois bCollege of DuPagec[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Foundations of Engineering Ethics -- II. The Principles of Ethical Design -- III. Cases & Activities -- IV. Writing Advice & Strategies0 aThe Primacy of the Public presents a framework for engineering and technology ethics focused around three core ethical principles: the principle of welfare, the autonomy principle, and the fairness principle. To support this framework, the book begins with an examination of multiple perspectives we may take on engineering and technology, all of which support the centrality of ethical analysis and evaluation. These include the nature of engineering as a profession, the social context of engineering and technology, and the view that many technologies constitute social experiments.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1088zAccess online version04010nam a2200529 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050001000148245003200158264004300190264007700233264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505071000487520165801197542001602855546001602871588004002887650003302927650003402960650003302994700002803027700002803055700002603083700003203109700002603141700002903167700002803196700002803224700002803252700003203280700002403312700002803336710003903364856007703403OTLid0001089MnU20260406020756.0m     o  d s      cr            211015s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aLC98000aLearning in the Digital Age 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Board Games and Learning: Why Care in the Digital Age? -- Effective Instruction in Blended Learning Environments -- Podcasting as a Mode of Motivation in Online and Blended Learning -- Virtual Proctoring and Academic Integrity -- Personal Learning Networks: Defining and Building a PLN -- Digital Learners in the Workplace -- Digital Literacies and the Skills of the Digital Age -- Playful Approaches to Learning -- The Digital Divide -- Ignored Conversations: Higher Education Funding in the Digital Age -- Literacy in the Digital Age: From Traditional to Digital to Mobile Digital Literacies -- The Digital Divide and the Lack of Financial Literacy Among First Generation -- Resources --0 aThis book is designed to serve as a textbook for classes exploring the nature of learning in the digital age. The genesis of this book is a desire to use OERs in all my teachings, coupled with the realization that the resources that I was looking for were not available and as such I needed to contribute in creating them. It is thus a small attempt to contribute to the vast repository of Open Educational Resources. When discussing learning in the digital age, most focus on the technology first. However, the emphasis made in this book is that it’s about the learner not just the technology. One of the things that is easy to lose track of when talking about learning in the digital age is the learner. Technology is important and it has significant impact but it is still about the person who is using the technology. Many people conflate learning in the digital age with technology in today’s age. This important misconception is common and results from our failure to examine our understanding of what “learning” really is. Of course, Most of this depends on a person’s epistemology. There are numerous definitions of what learning is and often they come to how a person sees the world. Some argue that learning is about a change in behavior due to experiences, others state simply that learning is being able to do something new that you were not able to do before. Regardless of what side you choose, to understand what learning in the digital age is, one has to understand what learning itself is. I am immensely thankful to the authors for sharing their ideas freely and for the reviewers who volunteered their time to give feedback.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aAsino, Tutalenieeditor1 aBayeck, Rebeccaeauthor1 aBrown, Wilmoneauthor1 aFrancis, Raymond W.eauthor1 aKolski, Tammieauthor1 aEssmiller, Kathyeauthor1 aGreen, Cathy L.eauthor1 aLewis, Sarah L.eauthor1 aMcCabe, Corrineeauthor1 aShikongo, Josephineeauthor1 aWise, Tammyeauthor1 aFulgencio, Joseeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1089zAccess online version03132nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245006000161264004300221264007300264264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505120700514520079001721542004102511546001602552588004002568650002002608650002602628710003902654856007702693OTLid0001090MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            211015s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aCurnow, Kathyeauthor04aThe Bright ContinentbAfrican Art HistorycKathy Curnow 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMSL Academic Endeavorsc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Orientation to Africa and its Art -- Chapter 1.1: General Introduction -- Chapter 1.2: Gender, Materials, Techniques in Traditional Art -- Chapter 1.3: Training and Patronage in Traditional Art -- Chapter 1.4: Contemporary African Art: Materials, Gender and Training -- Chapter 1.5: Patronage in Contemporary African Art -- Chapter 2: Analyzing and Discussing African Art -- Chapter 2.1 Elements of Design -- Chapter 2.2 Principles and Considerations of Design -- Chapter 2.3 "Rules" for Traditional African Art -- Chapter 2.4 Stylistic Analysis -- Chapter 2.5 Contextual Analysis -- Chapter 3: Themes in African Art -- Chapter 3.1 Animals -- Chapter 3.2 Coupling Up -- Chapter 3.3 Motherhood -- Chapter 3.4 Art and Youth Initiation -- Chapter 3.5 Art and Medicine -- Chapter 3.6: Art and Divination -- Chapter 3.7 Art and Death -- Chapter 3.8 Portraiture -- Chapter 3.9 African Art as Inspiration -- Chapter 4: The Impact of Religion and Hierarchy on African Art -- Chapter 4.1 Traditional Religion and Art -- Chapter 4.2 Christianity and Art -- Chapter 4.3 Islam and Art -- Chapter 4.4 Art in Nomadic Societies -- Chapter 4.5 Art in Small-Scale Communities -- Chapter 4.6 Kingdom-based art0 aThis book aims to act as your map through the world of African art. As such, it will help you define the competencies you need to develop–visual analysis, research, noting what information is critical, asking questions, and writing down your observations–and provide opportunities for you to practice these skills until you are proficient. It will also expose you to new art forms and the worlds that produced them, enriching your understanding and appreciation. This is an ongoing project. Your text will not be complete the day you first click on it, but will be written as we proceed through the course. Because it will be used for other courses beyond your own, you may find that it includes materials beyond those your class demands. Encourage your curiosity–chase after it.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1090zAccess online version02139nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245004500149264004300194264007200237264001200309300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505056400486520039501050542004101445546001601486588004001502650002301542650002301565700002501588700002401613710003901637856007701676OTLid0001091MnU20260406020757.0m     o  d s      cr            211015s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aGenetics, Agriculture, and Biotechnology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Mitosis and Meiosis -- 2. DNA: The Genetic Material -- 3. DNA Mutations -- 4. PCR and Gel Electrophoresis -- 5. Gene Expression: Transcription -- 6. Gene Expression: Translation -- 7. Gene Expression: Applied Example (Part 1) -- 8. Gene Expression: Applied Example (Part 2) -- 9. Regulation of Gene Expression -- 10. Genetic Pathways -- 11. Recombinant DNA Technology -- 12. Genetic Engineering -- 13. Introduction to Mendelian Genetics -- 14. Deviations from Mendelian Genetics: Linkage (Part 1) -- 15. Deviations from Mendelian Genetics: Linkage (Part 2)0 aThis textbook provides an introduction to plant genetics and biotechnology for the advancement of agriculture. A clear and structured introduction to the topic for learners new to the field of genetics, the book includes: an introduction to the life cycle of the cell, DNA and how it relates to genes and chromosomes, DNA analysis, recombinant DNA, biotechnology, and transmission genetics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aSuza, Waltereauthor1 aLee, Donaldeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1091zAccess online version02439nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001100167100003400178245008200212264004300294264008500337264001200422300002200434336002600456337002600482338003600508341002800544490002700572505082300599520031901422542004101741546001601782588004001798650002401838650002601862650002501888710003901913856007701952OTLid0001092MnU20260406020757.0m     o  d s      cr            211015s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648769866  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aHF54151 avan der Hoorn, Bronteeauthor00aVisuals for influencebin project management and beyondcBronte van der Hoorn 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart A: Get visual, build influence, drive action -- 1. A call to visualise -- 2. The science of visuals -- 3. Visuals in project work -- Part B: Visual fundamentals -- 4. Tools for creating visuals -- 5. Visual norms and styling -- 6. The design process -- Part C: Visual archetypes for project management -- Archetype 1: Comparison between options -- Archetype 2: Comparison over time -- Archetype 3: Variable-based comparison -- Archetype 4: Sequence - timeline of activities -- Archetype 5: Sequence - process timeline -- Archetype 6: Reasons and drivers -- Archetype 7: Anticipated outcomes or benefits -- Archetype 8: Related items -- Archetype 9: Hierarchy of items -- Archetype 10: Comparison of relative values -- Archetype 11: Pictorial - contributions of parts to outcomes -- Archetype 12: Progress tracking0 a‘Visuals for influence: in project management and beyond’ is a practical guide with 24 visuals to download, adapt and deploy to engage your stakeholders. This practical guide will build your confidence and practical skills to quickly and effectively leverage the benefits of visuals to maximise your influence.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1092zAccess online version01746nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143100003500153245006400188264004300252264005800295264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505017900530520040000709542003001109546001601139588004001155650003201195650002901227710003901256856007701295OTLid0001093MnU20260406020827.0m     o  d s      cr            211016s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aWielechowski, Benjamineauthor00aIntroduction to Narrative JournalismcBenjamin Wielechowski 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDearborn, MichiganbUM-Dearborn Open Educationc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a. Main Body -- 1. Ethics -- 2. Research -- 3. The Five Elements of Fiction -- 4. Theme -- 5. Character -- 6. Setting -- 7. Plot -- 8. Point of View -- 9. Digital Storytelling0 aThis textbook was created for beginning narrative journalists exploring the craft. It is inspired by the Narrative Journalism course (JASS/COMP/ENGL 310) at the University of Michigan-Dearborn, and it is intended to be used as a guide and handbook. It is structured around the five elements of fiction, and provides both instruction and student examples of various narrative journalism projects.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPrint JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1093zAccess online version02638nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156245004500166264004300211264003900254264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002500415490002700440505040900467520098300876542001601859546001601875588004001891650002401931650002301955700002901978700003102007700003402038700002802072710003902100856007702139OTLid0001094MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            211016s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783030748173  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG17300aLiquidity, Markets and Trading in Action 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc2021. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aEconomics and the Equity Market: A Microeconomics Course Application -- Liquidity, Trading, and Price Determination in Equity Markets: A Finance Course Application -- Liquidity and the Impact of Information Shocks: A Macroeconomics Course Application -- Trading and Technology: An Information Systems Course Application\ -- Experiencing Market Dynamics with TraderEx: A Trading Decision-Making Simulation0 aThis open access book addresses four standard business school subjects: microeconomics, macroeconomics, finance and information systems as they relate to trading, liquidity, and market structure. It provides a detailed examination of the impact of trading costs and other impediments of trading that the authors call “frictions”. It also presents an interactive simulation model of equity market trading, TraderEx, that enables students to implement trading decisions in different market scenarios and structures. Addressing these topics shines a bright light on how a real-world financial market operates, and the simulation provides students with an experiential learning opportunity that is informative and fun. Each of the chapters is designed so that it can be used as a stand-alone module in an existing economics, finance, or information science course. Instructor resources such as discussion questions, Powerpoint slides and TraderEx exercises are available online.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aOzenbas , Denizeauthor1 aPagano, Michael S.eauthor1 aSchwartz , Robert A.eauthor1 aWeber, Bruce W.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1094zAccess online version02699nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245004800134264004300182264007300225264001200298300002200310336002600332337002600358338003600384341002800420490002700448505116500475520041701640542003002057546001602087588004002103650002502143700002602168700002702194710003902221856007702260OTLid0001095MnU20260406020757.0m     o  d s      cr            211016s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aHumanizing Science through STEAM Challenges 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aGrandpa’s Out-Growth Forest -- The Gift of Water -- Kewanee’s Appreciation of Earth -- The Life of a Lily -- The Storyteller -- Now Our Minds Are One -- Mother Earth -- Honorable Harvest -- Loving our land -- Windigo Footprints -- Grandma’s Healing Herbs -- The New Neighbor -- That’s Not Science -- The Lost and Found of Beauty in Nature -- Lily and the Community Garden -- The Gift of Rain -- A Spring Day -- Summer Camp -- Skywoman Falling -- The Student is the Teacher -- Forest Adventures -- Henry’s Harvest Life -- Marvin’s Bountiful Reward -- The Gods of Tahawus -- Remi’s Adventure -- Genesis and Willow -- Generosity in the Powwow -- The Thanksgiving Address -- Puhpowee -- Jimmy’s Yummy Goodness -- The Honorable Harvest -- Ella’s Sweet Surprise -- Who Is Hiding in the Rain? -- Our Lilies -- A Good Home -- Grace's Green Beans -- Maple Nation -- It All Started with a Pond -- Jacqui’s Garden -- The Lichen Tale -- Dahila’s Summer Garden -- Finding Your Roots Again -- Be a Good Citizen -- The Value of Teamwork -- Growing Season -- Where Am I From? -- The Backyard Forest -- The Salamander Hunt -- Lilah’s Forest -- The Bayou0 aIn a science methods course during the Covid19 pandemic, 51 future elementary teachers authored children's books and then read them aloud as part of a giving-back, service-learning activity as Open Educational Resources (OER). The 51 children's stories and their accompanying audiobooks aim to integrate STEM and the Arts to humanize science and scientific inquiry with history and philosophy of science in mind.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aBahng, EunJineauthor1 aHauptman, Johneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1095zAccess online version02043nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003300135245005700168264004300225264006600268264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505025700508520069200765542003701457546001601494588004001510650002701550710003901577856007701616OTLid0001096MnU20260406020619.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aYoshiwara, Katherineeauthor00aModeling, Functions, and GraphscKatherine Yoshiwara 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBruce Yoshiwarac2020. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Functions and Their Graphs -- 2. Modeling with Functions -- 3. Power Functions -- 4. Exponential Functions -- 5. Logarithmic Functions -- 6. Quadratic Functions -- 7. Polynomials and Rational Functions -- 8. Linear Systems -- 9. Sequences and Series0 aModeling, Functions, and Graphs covers the content of a typical college algebra course with an emphasis on functions and modeling; when combined with a trigonometry text or supplement, this text can be used in a precalculus course. The text employs a variety of applications to motivate mathematical thinking. Each chapter opens with a problem of historical or contemporary significance highlighting the material in the chapter, and includes by an Investigation that previews the skills to be introduced. These Investigations can be used in class as guided explorations or as projects for small groups. We have also provided a set of more challenging Projects at the end of each chapter.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1096zAccess online version01579nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001100141050000800152100003300160245003800193264004300231264006600274264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505028300517520011600800542003700916546001600953588004000969650004101009650002701050710003901077856007701116OTLid0001097MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA440-699 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aYoshiwara, Katherineeauthor00aTrigonometrycKatherine Yoshiwara 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBruce Yoshiwarac2021. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Triangles and Circles -- 2. Trigonometric Ratios -- 3. Laws of Sines and Cosines -- 4. Trigonometric Functions -- 5. Equations and Identities -- 6. Radians -- 7. Circular Functions -- 8. More Functions and Identities -- 9. Vectors -- 10. Polar Coordinates and Complex Numbers0 aThis text covers the content of a standard trigonometry course, beginning with a review of facts from geometry.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1097zAccess online version01477nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003300162245004400195264004300239264006600282264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002500470490002700495505024600522520006400768542003700832546001600869588004000885650002300925650002700948710003900975856007701014OTLid0001098MnU20260406020757.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aYoshiwara, Katherineeauthor00aElementary AlgebracKatherine Yoshiwara 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBruce Yoshiwarac2021. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Variables -- 2. Linear Equations -- 3. Graphs and Linear Equations -- 4. Applications of Linear Equations -- 5. Exponents and Roots -- 6. Quadratic Equations -- 7. Polynomials -- 8. Algebraic Fractions -- 9. More About Exponents and Roots0 aThis text introduces the basic skills and ideas of algebra.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1098zAccess online version02092nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003300162245004600195264004300241264006600284264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505030000524520062200824542003701446546001601483588004101499650002301540650002701563710003901590856007701629OTLid0001099MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aYoshiwara, Katherineeauthor00aIntermediate AlgebracKatherine Yoshiwara 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBruce Yoshiwarac2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Linear Models -- 2. Applications of Linear Models -- 3. Quadratic Models -- 4. Applications of Quadratic Models -- 5. Functions and Their Graphs -- 6. Powers and Roots -- 7. Exponential Functions -- 8. Polynomials and Rational Functions -- 9. Equations and Graphs -- 10. Logarithmic Functions0 aIntermediate Algebra is a textbook for students who have some acquaintance with the basic notions of variables and equations, negative numbers, and graphs, although we provide a "Toolkit" to help the reader refresh any skills that may have gotten a little rusty. In this book we journey farther into the subject, to explore a greater variety of topics including graphs and modeling, curve-fitting, variation, exponentials and logarithms, and the conic sections. We use technology to handle data and give some instructions for using a graphing calculator, but these can easily be adapted to any other graphing utility.1 fFree Documentation License (GNU)  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1099zAccess online version05229nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007200163250001900235264004300254264009200297264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002500511490002700536505044200563520358601005542002704591546001604618588004104634650003804675650002604713710003904739856007704778OTLid0001100MnU20260406020522.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2002    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMoag, Rodney F.eauthor00aMalayalambA University Course and Reference Grammar .cRodney Moag  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustin, TexasbThe Center for Asian Studies at The University of Texas at Austinc2018. 4c©2002.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLesson one -- Lesson two -- Lesson three -- Lesson four -- Lesson five -- Lesson six -- Lesson seven -- Lesson eight -- Lesson nine -- Lesson ten -- Lesson eleven -- Lesson twelve -- Lesson thirteen -- Lesson fourteen -- Lesson fifteen -- Lesson sixteen -- Lesson seventeen -- Lesson eighteen -- Lesson nineteen -- Lesson twenty -- Lesson twenty one -- Lesson twenty two -- Lesson twenty three -- Lesson twenty four -- Lesson twenty five0 aThis textbook was developed to meet two distinct yet related needs. The more basic goal was to respond to the paucity of teaching materials suited to the needs of U.S. learners of Malayalam, particularly at the university level. Though some materials had previously been produced both in India and in the US, including three sets of materials co-written by the author, none were at all suited to the needs and purposes of American university students. Some of the author is earlier materials were ad hoc in nature, while the 510-page course written for Peace Corps volunteers concentrated on language for daily social interactions only. Both the Peace Corps materials and most of the materials written in India were written in Romantranscription, thus making no serious attempt to teach the Malayalam script or the skills of reading or writing. The Malayalam ·materials produced in India by various scholars or teach~rs were not readily available in the West, and were moreqver designed for Indian learners for whom formal explanations of the grammar and culture are largely unnecessary, since many of the grammar and discourse conventions are similar or identical to those found in their own mother tongues. Thus the texts available at that time lacked much of what was essential to the Western learner of the language. A couple more sets of teaching materials have come out in: the intervening 20 years, and some may now be ordered via the Internet. A partial list of these materials appears in the prologue following lesson Twenty-five in this text. These books are, ingeneral, designed to prepare the learner to handle everyday living situations in Malayalam, and as such can be useful adjuncts once the present volume has been thoroughly studied. This text was conceived and designed to go beyond social conversation to prepare the Western learner to use the language as a research tool. To meet this goal the skills pf literacy in Malayalam are essential, but this is only a beginning. It is also necessary to have some familiarity with the formal style of the language, used in most types of written matter and in platform and other types of formal speaking. This is still a need uniquely met by this text. The irony is that our student audience has grown and diversified, so that the textbook for the Malayalam classes here at Texas must serve two rather different types of students. There are still a number of graduate students who seek out Malayalam as a research tool for their academic work. fu the past dozen years or so the Malayalam classes are being taken by increasing numbers of second generation Malayalis who have either been born in North America or spent most of their lives here. They are normally undergraduates whose goals do not include doing academic research in Kerala. They are mainly interested in being able to communicate better with relatives in Kerala and their interest in literacy extends mainly to being able towrite letters to grandparents or other non-English-speaking relatives. The majority of lessons containing conversations with friends and family members in the book can still serve their purposes well. The second need to be met by this textbook was that of a reference grammar which could be used by linguists to glean accurate information about various aspects of the Malayalam language such as its phonology, syntax (grammar), 'semantics, and discourse. This type of reference grammar could serve both specialists in other Dravidian languages, as well as general linguists examining a specific feature in many unrelated languages.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1100zAccess online version03285nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003300135264004300168264007400211264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002800407490002700435505033900462520168500801542004102486546001602527588004002543650002002583650002602603700002502629700002902654700002702683700002302710700002602733710003902759856007702798OTLid0001101MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN8500aFundamentals of Music Theory 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Edinburghc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Topic 0 Music theory in critical and global context -- Topic 1 Musical notes, scales, and the rudiments of notation -- Topic 2 Tonal music language - concepts and theory -- Topic 3 Musical Time and Rhythm -- Topic 4 More on Chords -- Topic 5 Music theory code-breaking reference guide -- Topic 6 Chord functions in practice0 aThis open e-book is the result of a project funded by a University of Edinburgh Student Experience Grant, Open e-Textbooks for access to music education. The project was a collaboration between Open Educational Resources Service, and staff and student interns from the Reid School of Music. As a proof-of-concept endeavour, the project aimed to explore how effectively we could convert existing course content into convenient and reusable open formats suitable for use by staff and students both within and beyond the University. The resulting e-book presents open licensed educational materials that deal with the building blocks of musical stave (sometimes known as staff) notation, a language designed to communicate about musical ideas which is in use around the world. The resources in this e-book include video lectures and their transcripts, as well as supporting text explanations, examples and illustrations. The materials introduce topics such as the organisation of discrete pitches into scales and intervals, and temporal organisation of musical sounds as duration, in rhythm and metre. These rudiments are presented through an introduction to the elements of five-line stave notation, and through critical discussion of the advantages and limitations served by notational systems in the representation and analysis of musical sounds. This serves as the basis of further explanations, to illustrate musical concepts including key, time signature, harmonisation, cadence and modulation. We anticipate that subsequent versions of this e-book will update and develop the contents and presentation of the materials, following the success of this student-led collaboration.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aMoran, Nikkieauthor1 aEdwards, Michaeleauthor1 aWorth, Richardeauthor1 aMoir, Zackeauthor1 aKitchen, Johneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1101zAccess online version02560nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002700165245020700192264004300399264008700442264001200529300002200541336002600563337002600589338003600615341002800651490002700679505055100706520058001257542004101837546001601878588004101894650002501935650002401960700002501984700002502009710003902034856007702073OTLid0001102MnU20260406020521.0m     o  d s      cr            211115s2021    mnu     o     0   0 chi d  a9789869292955  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA4401 aChiang, I-Yuaneauthor00aUnderstanding the “General Principles of Food Hygiene” (including  GHP and HACCP) published in 2020 by Codex Alimentarius, and its applications on food industry and catering in TaiwancI-Yuan Chiang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSoftware Liberty Association, Taiwanc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Features of the New General Principles of Food Hygiene, and about this Book -- Chapter 2: General Principles of Food Hygiene: Introduction and Terms Definition -- Chapter 3: General Principles of Food Hygiene: Good Hygiene Practice: Introduction and Control of Food Hazards -- Chapter 4: General Principles of Food Hygiene: Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point (HACCP) System and Guidelines for Its Application -- Appendix: Comparison of HACCP 12 steps from Codex, USDA, USFDA, ISO 22000, and HACCP regulations/guidance of Taiwan0 aThe Codex Alimentarius published a new version of ‘’General Principles of Food Hygiene’’ in November 2020. The series of the document has been critical for countries/organizations to develop and revise their food regulations/certifications. Thus, the new release will trigger revisions on food regulations/certifications. We translated ‘’General Principles of Food Hygiene’’ and added food regulations and GHP/HACCP examples from Taiwan to this book. Therefore, it could be a nice stepping stone to understand food regulations and the food industry in Taiwan.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Chinese.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aHsu, Chia-Hoeauthor1 aLin, Meng-Yueauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1102zAccess online version03784nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007100163250000800234264004300242264005900285264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505048000521520219901001542003003200546001603230588004003246650002003286710003903306856007703345OTLid0001103MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            211116s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aBrooks, Charleseauthor02aA Practical Approach to Understanding Music TheorycCharles Brooks  a1st 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCollier Library, bUniversity of North Alabamac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Dedication -- Section One -- Section 1.1: Basics -- Section 1.2: Reading Music -- Section 1.3: Form and Structure -- Section Two: Melody -- Section 2.1: Scales -- Section 2.2: Flavor of Music Using Scales -- Section 2.3: Modes -- Section Three: Harmony -- Section 3.1: Circle of Fifths -- Section 4: Rhythm -- Section 4.1: Notation -- Section 5: Putting it all Together -- Section 5.1: Practice, Application, and Performance -- Back Matter -- Acknowledgements0 aA Practical Approach to Understanding Music Theory is a textbook designed for the non-music performance major or music business/audio engineer who needs to professionally interface with musicians without needing to write or compose music. The material is designed around a spiral learning model in which a very simple straightforward concept is introduced, defined and explained. From this point and forward the book adds one element of music theory after another until a broad base of musical understanding and application is achieved. Even though the spiral learning model has a linear approach, the book is also laid out in a manner that any music student or hobbyist may treat it as a research manual to search out specific explanations of musical situations they encounter. This text is meant to be an all-inclusive explanation of how music is created, graphically distributed and performed for those who are not majoring in music theory, performance or education. It is aimed at those who are seeking a career in audio engineering, music business, artist representation, minoring in music, teaching lessons in a local community or someone who just wants to learn to play and understand music on a deeper level. The material is designed around a spiral learning model in which a very simple straightforward concept is introduced, defined and explained. From this point and forward the book adds one element of music theory after another until a broad base of musical understanding and application is achieved. Even though the spiral learning model has a linear approach, the book is also laid out in a manner that any music student or hobbyist may treat it as a research manual to search out specific explanations of musical situations they encounter. This text is meant to be an all-inclusive explanation of how music is created, graphically distributed and performed for those who are not majoring in music theory, performance or education. It is aimed at those who are seeking a career in audio engineering, music business, artist representation, minoring in music, teaching lessons in a local community or someone who just wants to learn to play and understand music on a deeper level.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1103zAccess online version04990nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153050000800161100002800169245005800197264004300255264007200298264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002500492490002700517505240500544520132402949542001604273546001604289588004004305650002004345650002304365650003804388650002604426710003904452856007704491OTLid0001104MnU20260406020833.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800642560  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD20 4aP511 aPeek, Philip @.eauthor00aAncient Greek IbA 21st Century ApproachcPhilip Peek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1 The Greek Alphabet -- Module 2 More Sounds and Punctuation -- Module 3 Accents and Accenting Verbs I -- Module 4 Adverbs -- Module 5 Conjunctions and Accenting Verbs II -- Module 6 Endings Create Meaning -- Guest Feature 1 Stefan Hagel Teaches Us How to Sing -- Module 7 Nouns, Pronouns, and their Case Functions -- Module 8 Prepositions and Prefixes -- Module 9 The Verb and μι-Verbs εἰμί, δίδωμι, τίθημι -- Module 10 The Verbs ἔχω, ποιέω, ἔρχομαι, φημί -- Module 11 The Definite Article and Persistent Accent -- Module 12 Substantive Adjectives and the Article -- Module 13 Third Declension Nouns -- Guest Feature 2 Tom Holland on the Art of Translating Herodotos -- Module 14 First Declension Nouns in –η and -ᾱ and τίς, τί; τις, τι; ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅτι -- Module 15 Attributive and Predicate Position -- Module 16 Second Declension Nouns -- Module 17 The Future Indicative and Infinitive Active of ἔχω, ἐλαύνω, ἔρχομαι and the Dynamic Infinitive -- Module 18 The Personal Pronouns; εἷς, οὐδείς, and μηδείς; the Dative and Accusative of Respect; Time Expressions -- Module 19 οἶδα and the Present and Future Indicative and Infinitive Middle and Passive of ἐλαύνω, καλέω, φέρω, δίδωμι, τίθημι -- Guest Feature 3 Joe Goodkin, Singer and Songwriter -- Module 20 First and Second Declension Adjectives and Common Adjectives and Pronouns: αὐτός, οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος, and -ων, -ουσα, -ον -- Module 21 First Declension Short Alpha Nouns -- Module 22 The Relative Pronoun -- Module 23 The Imperfect and Aorist Indicative of λέγω, ἔχω, ἐργάζομαι, δίδωμι, τίθημι -- Module 24 Contract Verbs -- Module 25 The Infinitive in Indirect Statement and πρίν- and ὥστε-Clauses -- Guest Feature 4 Amy R. Cohen on Performing and Translating Ancient Greek Drama -- Module 26 Additional Common Adjectives: πᾶς, μέγας, πολύς, ἡδύς, ἀληθής, and -ᾱς, -ᾱσα, -αν -- Module 27 Comparative and Superlative Adjectives and Adverbs; Dative of Degree of Difference -- Module 28 εἰμί and εἶμι -- Module 29 δείκνυμι and φημί -- Guest Feature 5 Diane Rayor on Translating Sappho and Euripides -- Module 30 ἵημι and ἵστημι0 aIn this elementary textbook, Philip S. Peek draws on his twenty-five years of teaching experience to present the ancient Greek language in an imaginative and accessible way that promotes creativity, deep learning, and diversity. The course is built on three pillars: memory, analysis, and logic. Readers memorize the top 250 most frequently occurring ancient Greek words, the essential word endings, the eight parts of speech, and the grammatical concepts they will most frequently encounter when reading authentic ancient texts. Analysis and logic exercises enable the translation and parsing of genuine ancient Greek sentences, with compelling reading selections in English and in Greek offering starting points for contemplation, debate, and reflection. A series of embedded Learning Tips help teachers and students to think in practical and imaginative ways about how they learn. This combination of memory-based learning and concept- and skill-based learning gradually builds the confidence of the reader, teaching them how to learn by guiding them from a familiarity with the basics to proficiency in reading this beautiful language. Ancient Greek I: A 21st-Century Approach is written for high-school and university students, but is an instructive and rewarding text for anyone who wishes to learn ancient Greek.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1104zAccess online version02631nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245009800153264004300251264008400294264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505048500555520072901040542002701769546001601796588004001812650002301852650002601875700002801901700003201929700003201961700003001993700003002023700002802053710003902081856007702120OTLid0001105MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648769897  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2002aA Possession ForeverbA Guide to Using Commemorative Memorials and Monuments in the Classroom 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Part A -- 1. Introduction to Memorials and Monuments -- 2. The Visual Language of Memorials and Monuments -- II. Part B -- 3. War Memorials in the Australian Commemorative Landscape -- 4. Counter Memorials and Monuments -- 5. Commemorating Genocide Holocaust Memorials in Australia and Overseas -- III. Part C -- 6. An Education in Commemoration: The Australian Curriculum, Commemoration and Memorials -- 7. Guide to Using Memorials and Monuments as a Resource in the Classroom0 aThis open textbook will guide educators and students through the process of using local monuments and memorials to contextualise, interrogate and extend their knowledge of historical events at a national and international level. Students will learn how to use local history to create an organic patchwork of local stories, interviews, photographs and artefacts contributed by, and for, the community and contextualised nationally and internationally. Through this process they will assume the role of historians rather than passive consumers of dominant ideologies and understand how historical events have shaped diverse views, including their own, of issues such as social justice, democracy, human rights and citizenship.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aKerby , Martineauthor1 aBaguley , Margareteauthor1 aGehrmann , Richardeauthor1 aBedford , Alisoneauthor1 aRowling , Samaraeeditor1 aAndersen, Nikkieeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1105zAccess online version02697nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245003700160264004300197264006200240264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505019600479520138200675542004102057546001602098588004102114650003802155650002602193710003902219856007702258OTLid0001106MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aPolley, Carleauthor00aElementary MandarincCarl Polley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Introduction -- 2: First Contact -- 3: Origins and Language -- 4: Family -- 5: Ordering Food and Drink -- 6: At the Restaurant -- 7: At the Hotel -- 8: Shopping -- 9: Review and Conclusion0 aThis course is designed for learners with no background in Chinese. It introduces basic structures of the Mandarin Chinese language with emphasis on listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. Students will gain these four skills in standard Mandarin Chinese, attaining approximately the Novice-High level on the ACTFL-ETS (American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages) proficiency scale. Topics of conversation include basic greetings, names, family, work, study, and hobbies. Upon successful completion of this course, the student should be able to: Exchange information about familiar topics using phrases and simple sentences, sometimes supported by memorized language, and ask and answer simple questions about everyday situations in short social interactions. (Interpersonal Communication) Verbally convey basic information on familiar topics using phrases and simple sentences. (Presentational Speaking) Write short messages and notes on familiar topics related to everyday life. (Presentational Writing) Interpret spoken words, phrases, and simple sentences related to everyday life by recognizing pieces of information and by identifying the main topic. (Interpretive Listening) Interpret familiar words, phrases, and sentences within short and simple texts related to everyday life and identify the main idea of written materials. (Interpretive Reading)1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1106zAccess online version03439nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001000161100003000171245009100201264004300292264007100335264001200406300002200418336002600440337002600466338003600492341002500528490002700553505049300580520172701073542001602800546001602816588004002832650003602872650002902908710003902937856007702976OTLid0001107MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800641846  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aLewis, Richard S.eauthor00aTechnology, Media Literacy, and the Human SubjectbA Posthuman ApproachcRichard Lewis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction: Problematizing our Relations with Media Technologies -- Part I: Situating the Interdisciplinary Concepts -- 2. Situating Media Literacy -- 3. Understanding the Medium Through the Technological Relation -- 4. The Posthuman: Situating the Subject in Human-Tech Relations -- Part II: Developing a Posthuman Approach: A Framework and Instrument -- 5. Developing the Intrasubjective Mediating Framework -- 6. Developing an Instrument to Leverage the Framework -- 7. Conclusion0 aWhat does it mean to be media literate in today’s world? How are we transformed by the many media infrastructures around us? We are immersed in a world mediated by information and communication technologies (ICTs). From hardware like smartphones, smartwatches, and home assistants to software like Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, and Snapchat, our lives have become a complex, interconnected network of relations. Scholarship on media literacy has tended to focus on developing the skills to access, analyze, evaluate, and create media messages without considering or weighing the impact of the technological medium—how it enables and constrains both messages and media users. Additionally, there is often little attention paid to the broader context of interrelations which affect our engagement with media technologies. This book addresses these issues by providing a transdisciplinary method that allows for both practical and theoretical analyses of media investigations. Informed by postphenomenology, media ecology, philosophical posthumanism, and complexity theory the author proposes both a framework and a pragmatic instrument for understanding the multiplicity of relations that all contribute to how we affect—and are affected by—our relations with media technology. The author argues persuasively that the increased awareness provided by this posthuman approach affords us a greater chance for reclaiming some of our agency and provides a sound foundation upon which we can then judge our media relations. This book will be an indispensable tool for educators in media literacy and media studies, as well as academics in philosophy of technology, media and communication studies, and the post-humanities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1107zAccess online version03313nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135050000700145100003600152245010700188264004300295264006100338264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505159600576520038002172542004102552546001602593588004002609650003802649650004302687650002602730650003102756710003902787856007702826OTLid0001108MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aHM621 4aH11 aLópez-Aguilera, Ana M.eauthor00aCulturas hispanas a través de la pantalla / Hispanic Cultures Through the ScreencAna López-Aguilera 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota Libraries Publishing Projectc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Culturas hispanas a través de la pantalla -- 1. Street Food Latin America—Comida para hacerte sentir bien -- 2. Joe T Hodo—“¿Para qué tener una Malinche cuando puedes tener un Cortés?” -- 3. Cartas a mi Ex—“Una radiografía del amor en la era de la soledad” -- 4. Jane the Virgin—Telenovelas: el drama de la vida común y corriente -- 5. Vida–Soplaré y soplaré, y tu casita derribaré -- 6. La Niña—Reconciliación -- 7. “Canción sin miedo” (2020) de Vivir Quintana y el coro El palomar—Feminicidios -- 8. “La cumbia de la memoria” (2016) de Rebeca Lane—Derechos humanos -- 9. “Shock” (2011) de Ana Tijoux—Protestas de estudiantes -- 10. “This land is your land” (2017) de Los jornaleros del norte—Fronteras -- 11. “Urge” (2017) de Lila Downs—Corazones, cuerpos, cuidar -- II. Hispanic Cultures Through the Screen -- 12. Street Food Latin America—Comfort Food -- 13. Joe T Hodo—"Why choose a Malinche when you can have a Cortés?" -- 14. Cartas a mi Ex—“A report of love in the era of loneliness” -- 15. Jane the Virgin—Telenovelas, the drama of everyday life -- 16. Vida–I´ll huff and I´ll puff and I´ll blow your house down -- 17. La Niña—Reconciliation -- 18. “Canción sin miedo” (2020) by Vivir Quintana and El palomar—Feminicides -- 19. “La cumbia de la memoria” (2016) by Rebeca Lane—Human Rights -- 20. “Shock” (2011) by Ana Tijoux—Protests -- 21. “This land is your land” (2017) by Los jornaleros del norte—Fences -- 22. “Urge” (2017) by Lila Downs—Hearts, bodies, caring0 aEste libro de texto busca fomentar el visionado crítico de productos audiovisuales contemporáneos y el reflexionar sobre la representación de las culturas hispanas en webseries y vídeos musicales. This textbook aims to promote critical viewing of contemporary audiovisual products and thinking about the representation of Hispanic cultures in web series and music videos.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1108zAccess online version03493nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245004500153264004300198264007100241264001200312300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341002800434490002700462505078700489520152801276542003002804546001602834588004002850650002002890650002602910700002802936700002702964710003902991856007703030OTLid0001109MnU20260406020522.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800641969  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN8500aDocumentary Making for Digital Humanists 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The Humanist Auteur -- 2. Learning to Love the Camera -- 3. The Production Process -- 4. Concept and Planning -- 5. Collaboration -- 6. Precedent -- 7. Choosing Your Filmmaking Equipment -- 8. Core Methods -- 9. Settings, Lenses, Focus, and Exposure -- 10. Composing a Shot — Tips and Techniques -- 11. Shots and Compositions Considered -- 12. The Visual Language of Cinema -- 13. Interviews -- 14. Recording Audio and Creating Soundscapes -- 15. Light -- 16. Camera Movement -- 17. The Two-Page Film School -- 18. Post-Mortem: Making a Short Documentary about the 2016 Presidential Election -- 19. Post-Production Workflow -- 20. The Three-Act Structure -- 21. The Protagonist -- 22. Assembly -- 23. Editing Workflow in Adobe Premiere Pro -- 24. Distribution and Dissemination0 aThis fluent and comprehensive field guide responds to increased interest, across the humanities, in the ways in which digital technologies can disrupt and open up new research and pedagogical avenues. It is designed to help scholars and students engage with their subjects using an audio-visual grammar, and to allow readers to efficiently gain the technical and theoretical skills necessary to create and disseminate their own trans-media projects. Documentary Making for Digital Humanists sets out the fundamentals of filmmaking, explores academic discourse on digital documentaries and online distribution, and considers the place of this discourse in the evolving academic landscape. The book walks its readers through the intellectual and practical processes of creating digital media and documentary projects. It is further equipped with video elements, supplementing specific chapters and providing brief and accessible introductions to the key components of the filmmaking process. This will be a valuable resource to humanist scholars and students seeking to embrace new media production and the digital landscape, and to those researchers interested in using means beyond the written word to disseminate their work. It constitutes a welcome contribution to the burgeoning field of digital humanities, as the first practical guide of its kind designed to facilitate humanist interactions with digital filmmaking, and to empower scholars and students alike to create and distribute new media audio-visual artefacts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aReid, Darren R.eauthor1 aSanders, Bretteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1109zAccess online version02103nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000700135245005500142264004300197264009700240264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505051600514520032901030542004101359546001601400588004001416650002301456650002501479650002601504700002901530700003001559710003901589856007701628OTLid0001110MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aL700aFoundations of American EducationbA Critical Lens 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Foundations of American Education -- Chapter 1: The Teaching Profession -- Chapter 2: Influences on Learning: Student Differences and Similarities -- Chapter 3: Philosophical and Historical Foundations of Education in the United States -- Chapter 4: Schools in the United States -- Chapter 5: Ethical & Legal Issues in Education -- Part II: Education in Action -- Chapter 6: Curriculum: Planning, Assessment, & Instruction -- Chapter 7: Classroom Environment -- Chapter 8: And Now What? The Path Forward0 aIn this survey text, readers will explore the foundations of American education through a critical lens. Topics include the teaching profession, influences on student learning, philosophical and historical foundations, structures of schools, ethical and legal issues, curriculum, classroom environment, and the path forward.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aWells , Melissaeauthor1 aClayton, Courtneyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1110zAccess online version01853nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003300156245005800189264004300247264006100290264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505060200528520012401130542004101254546001601295588004001311650002401351710003901375856007701414OTLid0001111MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989864500  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aCarpenter, Katherineeeditor00aIntroduction to EntrepreneurshipcKatherine Carpenter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Unit 1: What is Entrepreneurship? -- 1. Defining Entrepreneurship -- 2. The Role Entrepreneurs have in Today’s Society -- 3. Different types of Entrepreneurship -- II. Unit 2: Entrepreneurial Characteristics -- 4. Entrepreneurial Traits, Skills and Abilities -- 5. The Entrepreneurial Mindset -- 6. Creativity and Innovation in Entrepreneurship -- III. Unit 3: The Entrepreneurial Process -- 7. Entrepreneurial Process -- 8. Unit 4 Assignment Preparation -- IV. Unit 4: Your Entrepreneurial Potential -- 9. Unit 4 Assignment Delivery: Entrepreneurial Plan -- 10. Course Wrap up and Reflection0 aLearn about entrepreneurship and what makes entrepreneurs successful, all while developing your entrepreneurial skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1111zAccess online version02139nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002400138245008700162264004300249264006100292264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505058400527520040201111542004101513546001601554588004101570650002601611650002401637710003901661856007701700OTLid0001112MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            211118s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aMills, Annaeauthor00aHow Arguments Work - A Guide to Writing and Analyzing Texts in CollegecAnna Mills 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Introduction -- 2: Reading to Figure out the Argument -- 3: Writing a Summary of Another Writer’s Argument -- 4: Assessing the Strength of an Argument (Logos) -- 5: Responding to an Argument -- 6: The Research Process -- 7: Forming a Research-Based Argument -- 8: How Arguments Appeal to Emotion (Pathos) -- 9: How Arguments Establish Trust and Connection (Ethos) -- 10: Writing an Analysis of an Argument’s Strategies -- 11: The Writing Process -- 12: Essay Organization -- 13: Correcting Grammar and Punctuation -- 14: Style: Shaping Our Sentences -- 15: Teacher's Guide0 aHow Arguments Work takes students through the techniques they will need to respond to readings and make sophisticated arguments in any college class. This is a practical guide to argumentation with strategies and templates for the kinds of assignments students will commonly encounter. It covers rhetorical concepts in everyday language and explores how arguments can build trust and move readers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1112zAccess online version02914nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003100137245005900168264004300227264009600270264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505019900543520158500742542004102327546001602368588004002384650002402424710003902448856007702487OTLid0001113MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            211120s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aLeClair, Renée J.eauthor00aNeuroscience for Pre-Clinical StudentscRenée LeClair 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNeuron and astrocyte metabolism -- Neurotransmitters — ACh, glutamate, GABA, and glycine -- Neuropeptides and unconventional neurotransmitters -- Amino acid metabolism and specialized products0 aNeuroscience for Pre-Clinical Students covers neuroenergetics, neurotransmitters, neuropeptides, and selected amino acid metabolism and degradation. This USMLE-aligned text is designed for a first-year undergraduate medical course and is meant to provide the essential biochemical information from these content areas in a concise format to enable students to engage in an active classroom. Hence, it does not cover neurophysiology and neuroanatomy; and clinical correlates and additional application of content are intended to be provided in the classroom experience. The text assumes that the students will have completed medical school prerequisites (including the MCAT) in which they will have been introduced to the most fundamental concepts of biology and chemistry that are essential to understand the content presented here. With its focus on high-yield concepts, this resource will assist the learner later in medical school and for exam preparation. The 49-page text was created specifically for use by pre-clinical students at Virginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine and was based on faculty experience and peer review to guide development and hone important topics. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting parts or the whole of the text are requested to register their interest at: https://bit.ly/interest-preclinical. Instructors and subject matter experts interested in and sharing their original course materials relevant to pre-clinical education are requested to join the instructor portal at https://www.oercommons.org/groups/pre-clinical-resources/10133.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1113zAccess online version02017nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135100003100146245013700177264004300314264006500357264001200422300002200434336002600456337002600482338003600508341002800544490002700572505017900599520055100778542004101329546001601370588004101386650003801427650002601465650002401491710003901515856007701554OTLid0001114MnU20260406020522.0m     o  d s      cr            211202s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aPE14081 aDavenport, Charityeauthor00aIt’s All Greek to Me! Using Authentic Readings to Improve Knowledge of the English Language and Western CulturecCharity Davenport 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKnoxville, TNbThe University of Tennessee Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Why Study Greek Mythology? -- Unit 2: Crime and Punishment -- Unit 3: Adventure and The Hero's Journey -- Unit 4: Hubris and Nemesis -- Unit 5: Love and Metamorphosis0 a“It’s All Greek to Me!” has everything—entertaining stories, academic articles in a variety of disciplines, vocabulary crossover in literary and academic readings, connections to local, American, and Western culture, and plenty of chances for critical thinking for advanced students of English as a Second Language (ESL). All readings are authentic with minimal adaptation from a variety of sources. This textbook also gives help for advanced level grammar and writing issues, using outside sources, and reading and vocabulary strategies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1114zAccess online version01849nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100003300143245005100176250001900227264004300246264004600289264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002500457490002700482505036500509520032300874542003001197546001601227588004001243650003301283650003101316710003901347856007701386OTLid0001115MnU20260406020523.0m     o  d s      cr            211202s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aKantack, Benjamin R.eauthor00aAmericabThe User’s ManualcBenjamin Kantack  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aWilliamsport, PAbTekakwitha Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Politics -- The Constitution -- Federalism -- Civil Liberties -- Civil Rights -- Public Opinion -- Interest Groups -- Parties -- Elections -- Congress -- The Presidency -- The Bureaucracy -- The Courts -- Media -- Appendix A: Declaration of Independence -- Appendix B: U.S. Constitution -- Glossary -- Index -- Photo Credits -- About the Author0 aAmerica: The User’s Manual is a free textbook written for introductory undergraduate courses in American politics and government, covering the creation and principles of the Constitution, the fundamentals of American public opinion and political behavior, and the basic functions of the three branches of government.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1115zAccess online version02148nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245004500153264004300198264006700241264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505036000485520060900845542001601454546001601470588004001486650002601526650002601552700003001578700003801608710003901646856007701685OTLid0001116MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            211213s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014257  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB7200aIntroduction to PhilosophybEpistemology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Traditional Epistemology -- 1. The Analysis of Knowledge -- 2. Epistemic Justification -- 3. Sources of Knowledge: Rationalism, Empiricism, and the Kantian Synthesis -- 4. Skepticism -- II. Expanded Epistemology -- 5. Epistemic Value, Duty, and Virtue -- 6. Epistemology, Probability, and Science -- 7. Social Epistemology -- 8. Feminist Epistemologies0 aIntroduction to Philosophy: Epistemology engages first-time philosophy readers on a guided tour through the core concepts, questions, methods, arguments, and theories of epistemology—the branch of philosophy devoted to the study of knowledge. The book progresses systematically while placing key ideas and thinkers in historical and contemporary context. Central topics include the analysis of knowledge, the nature of epistemic justification, rationalism vs. empiricism, skepticism, the value of knowledge, the ethics of belief, Bayesian epistemology, social epistemology, and feminist epistemologies.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aBarnett, Brian C.eeditor1 aHendricks, Christinaeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1116zAccess online version02938nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127110004400137245007900181264004300260264006800303264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505085600548520094701404542002302351546001602374588004002390650004202430710003902472856007702511OTLid0001117MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1452 aFederal Aviation Administrationeauthor00aAirplane Flying Handbook (FAA-H-8083-3C)cFederal Aviation Administration  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc2023. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Flight Training -- Chapter 2: Ground Operations -- Chapter 3: Basic Flight Maneuvers -- Chapter 4: Energy Management: Mastering Altitude and Airspeed Control -- Chapter 5: Maintaining Aircraft Control: Upset Prevention and Recovery Training -- Chapter 6: Takeoffs and Departure Climbs -- Chapter 7: Ground Reference Maneuvers -- Chapter 8: Airport Traffic Patterns -- Chapter 9: Approaches and Landings -- Chapter 10: Performance Maneuvers -- Chapter 11: Night Operations -- Chapter 12: Transition to Complex Airplanes -- Chapter 13: Transition to Multiengine Airplanes -- Chapter 14: Transition to Tailwheel Airplanes -- Chapter 15: Transition to Turbopropeller-Powered Airplanes -- Chapter 16: Transition to Jet-Powered Airplanes -- Chapter 17: Transition to Light Sport Airplanes (LSA) -- Chapter 18: Emergency Procedures0 aThe Airplane Flying Handbook provides basic knowledge that is essential for pilots. This handbook introduces basic pilot skills and knowledge that are essential for piloting airplanes. It provides information on transition to other airplanes and the operation of various airplane systems. It is developed by the Flight Standards Service, Airman Testing Standards Branch, in cooperation with various aviation educators and industry. This handbook is developed to assist student pilots learning to fly airplanes. It is also beneficial to pilots who wish to improve their flying proficiency and aeronautical knowledge, those pilots preparing for additional certificates or ratings, and flight instructors engaged in the instruction of both student and certificated pilots. It introduces the future pilot to the realm of flight and provides information and guidance in the performance of procedures and maneuvers required for pilot certification.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1117zAccess online version03784nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000800137050000700145245002100152264004300173264005100216264001200267300002200279336002600301337002600327338003600353341002800389490002700417505079900444520176001243542002703003546001603030588004003046650003303086650002003119650002503139650002603164700002603190700003003216710003903246856007703285OTLid0001118MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aN85 4aL700aMaking and Being 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBrooklyn, New YorkbPioneer Works Pressc2019. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Entry Points -- Part 2: Spaces of Learning -- Chapter 1: Why Now -- Chapter 2: Spaces of Learning -- Chapter 3: Who Do You Honor? -- Chapter 4: Teacher/Facilitator Guides (The First Five Weeks) -- Part 3: Capacities -- Chapter 5: Capacities -- Chapter 6: How Are You in the World and How Is the World in You? -- Part 4: The Lifecycle Framework -- Chapter 7: Lifecycle Phases and Framework -- Chapter 8: Understanding the Lifecycle Framework from Multiple Perspectives -- Chapter 9: Support -- Chapter 10: Source -- Chapter 11: Depart -- Chapter 12: Transfer -- Chapter 13: Labor -- Chapter 14: Narrate -- Chapter 15: Encounter -- Chapter 16: Tools -- Chapter 17: Copyright -- Chapter 18: Acquire -- Part 5: To Be Continued -- Chapter 19: Imaging the Future -- Chapter 20: How We Work --0 aMaking and Being offers a framework for teaching art that emphasizes contemplation, collaboration, and political economy. Authors Susan Jahoda and Caroline Woolard, two visual arts educators and members of the collective BFAMFAPhD*, share ideas and teaching strategies that they have adapted to spaces of learning which range widely, from self-organized workshops for professional artists to Foundations BFA and MFA thesis classes. This hands-on guide includes activities, worksheets, and assignments and is a critical resource for artists and art educators today. Making and Being is a book, a series of videos, a deck of cards, and an interactive website with freely downloadable content (click on links below to download worksheets, activities, and chapters as PDFs and editable Google Docs). *BFAMFAPhD is a collective that formed in 2012 to make art, reports, and teaching tools to advocate for cultural equity in the United States. The work of the collective is to bring people together to analyze and reimagine relationships of power in the arts. BFAMFAPhD core members are: Susan Jahoda, Emilio Martínez Poppe, Agnes Szanyi, Emily Tareila, Vicky Virgin, and Caroline Woolard. We wrote this book for those of you who want a holistic art education that includes how to be both more fully present with yourself and with others. The term holistic means that the parts of any given system are intimately interconnected; that they are understandable only in relation to the whole system. How can you talk about making a new project without talking about labor conditions? How can you talk about labor conditions without talking about payment? It’s time to address your artistic labor, your budgets your storage units, your gifts, and your well-being.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aJahoda, Susaneauthor1 aWoolard, Carolineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1118zAccess online version02121nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002100166245003300187264004300220264006100263264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505053400501520043901035542004101474546001601515588004001531650002501571650002301596710003901619856007701658OTLid0001119MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989864524  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aLiu, Xineauthor00aOrganic Chemistry IcXin Liu 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 Basic Concepts in Chemical Bonding and Organic Molecules -- Chapter 2 Fundamental of Organic Structures -- Chapter 3 Acids and Bases: Organic Reaction Mechanism Introduction -- Chapter 4 Conformations of Alkanes and Cycloalkanes -- Chapter 5 Stereochemistry -- Chapter 6 Structural Identification of Organic Compounds: IR and NMR Spectroscopy -- Chapter 7 Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions -- Chapter 8 Elimination Reactions -- Chapter 9 Free Radical Substitution Reaction of Alkanes -- Chapter 10 Alkenes and Alkynes0 aAn open textbook that is suitable for the first semester of Organic Chemistry. Basic concepts of the structures and reactivities of organic molecules are covered in this open textbook. Besides the fundamental discussions of organic acids-bases, stereochemistry, IR and NMR, this book also includes the topics of substitution and elimination reactions, radical substitution of alkanes, preparation and reactions of alkenes and alkynes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1119zAccess online version02339nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002900165245010900194264004300303264006400346264001200410300002200422336002600444337002600470338003600496341002500532490002700557505051600584520057401100542004101674546001601715588004101731650004201772650002301814710003901837856007701876OTLid0001120MnU20260406020523.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463664578  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQH3011 aSlinger, Jill H.eauthor00aBuilding with Nature & BeyondbPrinciples for designing nature based engineering solutionscJill Slinger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Engineering - Building with Nature -- Chapter 1: Building with Nature: An Issue of Trade-offs -- Chapter 2: Engineering Design Principles -- Chapter 3: Ecological Design Principles -- Chapter 4: Integrated BwN Design -- Chapter 5: Assessing BwN Design -- Part II: Beyond Engineering - Building With Nature -- Chapter 6: Why Beyond Engineering? -- Chapter 7: Stakeholder Analysis & Mapping -- Chapter 8: Cooperative Game Theory -- Chapter 9: Social Design Theory -- Chapter 10: Towards Building Coalition0 aThis book is based upon the edX MOOCs Engineering: Building with Nature and Beyond Engineering: Building with Nature. The Engineering: Building with Nature MOOC, explores the use of natural materials and ecological processes in achieving effective and sustainable hydraulic infrastructure designs, distilling Engineering and Ecological Design Principles. In the Beyond Engineering: Building with Nature course, the missing element of Social Design Principles is developed and taught. Join us in exploring the interface between hydraulic engineering, nature and society!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1120zAccess online version02222nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001100154050000800165100002800173245005300201264004300254264006900297264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002500488490002700513505030800540520063400848542002701482546001601509588004001525650003201565650002501597650003501622650002701657710003901684856007701723OTLid0001121MnU20260406020523.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781838291303  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aJones, Derek M.eauthor00aEvidence-based Software EngineeringcDerek Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bKnowledge Softwarec2020. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Human cognition -- 3 Cognitive capitalism -- 4 Ecosystems -- 5 Projects -- 6 Reliability -- 7 Source code -- 8 Stories told by data -- 9 Probability -- 10 Statistics -- 11 Regression modeling -- 12 Miscellaneous techniques -- 13 Experiments -- 14 Data preparation -- 15 Overview of R0 aThis book discusses what is currently known about software engineering, based on an analysis of all the publicly available data. This aim is not as ambitious as it sounds, because there is not a great deal of data publicly available. The intent is to provide material that is useful to professional developers working in industry; until recently researchers in software engineering have been more interested in vanity work, promoted by ego and bluster. The material is organized in two parts, the first covering software engineering and the second the statistics likely to be needed for the analysis of software engineering data.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1121zAccess online version02380nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001300147245006400160264004300224264006300267264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505017600507520087100683542004101554546001601595588004001611650004401651650002901695650003601724700003001760700002401790700002801814710003901842856007701881OTLid0001122MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aP91.3 4aLB1062.600aEffective Professional CommunicationbA Rhetorical Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSaskatoon, SaskatchewanbUniversity of Saskatchewanc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Communication -- Rhetorical Theory -- Technical Writing Essentials -- Technical Correspondence -- Applying for a job -- Writing a Report -- Public Speaking0 aWelcome to Effective Professional Communication, your text book for the RCM 200 course at the University of Saskatchewan in Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. As you already know, this course focuses on communicating in professional environments. Even if you haven’t held a job before, you know–at least on a basic level–that how you communicate changes depending on the context of your situation; specifically, you talk differently when you speak to customers/clients versus your co-workers versus your supervisors. Our goal in this text is to break down the communication process in professional environments so you can maximize your chance to get hired and retain your job once you graduate from university. We will do this by looking at communication through political, rhetorical, ethical, and interpersonal lenses and applying this knowledge to your future career.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aOrganizational CommunicationvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aBennetch, Rebekaheauthor1 aOwen, Coreyeauthor1 aKeesey, Zacharyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1122zAccess online version03936nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050000700148245003400155264004300189264004500232264001200277300002200289336002600311337002600337338003600363341002800399490002700427505154800454520115902002542001603161546001603177588004003193650004303233650004403276650003103320700003303351700002603384710003903410856007703449OTLid0001123MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220107s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aHQ1101 4aH100aGendered LivesbGlobal Issues 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Introduction -- Chapter 1: Key Concepts -- Chapter 2: Key Perspectives -- Part II: South Asia -- Chapter 3: Introducing the Region -- Chapter 4: Controlling National Borders by Controlling Reproduction -- Chapter 5: Understanding Caste and Kinship within Hijras, a “Third” Gender Community in India -- Chapter 6: The “City” and “The Easy Life”: Work and Gender among Sherpa in Nepal -- Part III: Latin America -- Chapter 7: Latin America: Introducing the Region -- Chapter 8: Being a Good Mexican Man by Embracing “Erectile Dysfunction” -- Chapter 9: Intersectionality and Normative Masculinity in Northeast Brazil -- Chapter 10: Mexico’s Antipoverty Program Oportunidades and the Shifting Dynamics of Citizenship for Ñuu Savi (Mixtec) Village Women -- Chapter 11: Q’eqchi’-Maya Women: Memory, Markets, and Multilevel Marketing in Guatemala -- Part IV: The Caribbean -- Chapter 12: The Caribbean: Introducing the Region -- Chapter 13: Quinceañeras: Girls’ Coming-of-Age Parties in Contemporary Havana, Cuba -- Chapter 14: Jamaican Realities of Masculinities and Sexualities: “How Far Have We Come since Michel Foucault?” -- Part V: The Global North (North America and Europe) -- Chapter 15: The Global North: Introducing the Region -- Chapter 16: Mothers Acting up Online -- Chapter 17: Male Sex Work in Canada: Intersections of Gender and Sexuality -- Chapter 18: Intersectionality and Muslim Women in Belgium -- Chapter 19: Fatherhood and Family Relations in Transnational Migration from Mezcala, Mexico0 aA gender studies textbook that takes an anthropological approach. Gendered Lives takes a regional approach to examine gender issues from an anthropological perspective with a focus on globalization and intersectionality. Chapters present contributors’ ethnographic research, contextualizing their findings within four geographic regions: Latin America, the Caribbean, South Asia, and the Global North. Each regional section begins with an overview of the broader historical, social, and gendered contexts, which situate the regions within larger global linkages. These introductions also feature short project/people profiles that highlight the work of community leaders or non-governmental organizations active in gender-related issues. Each research-based chapter begins with a chapter overview and learning objectives and closes with discussion questions and resources for further exploration. This modular, regional approach allows instructors to select the regions and cases they want to use in their courses. While they can be used separately, the chapters are connected through the book’s central themes of globalization and intersectionality.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aFernandez, Nadine T.eauthor1 aNelson, Katieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1123zAccess online version01971nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153245002600163264004300189264006400232264001200296300002200308336002600330337002600356338003600382341002800418490002700446505012900473520056000602542004101162546001601203588004001219650003001259650002301289700003201312700003201344700002701376700003001403710003901433856007701472OTLid0001124MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            220117s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463664899  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aSurveying and Mapping 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Land surveying -- II Mathematical geodesy -- III GPS positioning -- IV Remote sensing -- V Reference systems -- VI Mapping0 aThis book provides an introduction, at academic level, into the field of surveying and mapping. The book has been compiled based on hand-outs and readers written for the third-year course Surveying and Mapping, in the bachelor program Civil Engineering at Delft University of Technology. This book covers a wide range of measurement techniques, from land surveying, GPS/GNSS and remote sensing to the associated data processing, the underlying coordinate reference systems, as well as the analysis and visualization of the acquired geospatial information.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aTiberius, Christianeauthor1 avan der Marel, Hanseauthor1 aReudink, Renéeauthor1 avan Leijen, Freekeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1124zAccess online version04597nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156245003200169264004300201264005900244264001200303300002200315336002600337337002600363338003600389341002500425490002700450505152000477520180901997542001603806546001603822588004003838650002603878650002403904650003603928700004003964700002704004700002804031710003904059856007704098OTLid0001125MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            220117s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693473  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.600aWriting Guide with Handbook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1 The Things We Carry: Experience, Culture, and Language -- Chapter 1 The Digital World: Building on What You Already Know to Respond Critically -- Chapter 2 Language, Identity, and Culture: Exploring, Employing, Embracing -- Chapter 3 Literacy Narrative: Building Bridges, Bridging Gaps -- Unit 2 Bridging the Divide Between Personal Identity and Academia -- Chapter 4 Memoir or Personal Narrative: Learning Lessons from the Personal -- Chapter 5 Profile: Telling a Rich and Compelling Story -- Chapter 6 Proposal: Writing About Problems and Solutions -- Chapter 7 Evaluation or Review: Would You Recommend It? -- Chapter 8 Analytical Report: Writing from Facts -- Chapter 9 Rhetorical Analysis: Interpreting the Art of Rhetoric -- Chapter 10 Position Argument: Practicing the Art of Rhetoric -- Chapter 11 Reasoning Strategies: Improving Critical Thinking -- Chapter 12 Argumentative Research: Enhancing the Art of Rhetoric with Evidence -- Chapter 13 Research Process: Accessing and Recording Information -- Chapter 14 Annotated Bibliography: Gathering, Evaluating, and Documenting Sources -- Chapter 15 Case Study Profile: What One Person Says About All -- Unit 3 Navigating Rhetoric in Real Life -- Chapter 16 Print or Textual Analysis: What You Read -- Chapter 17 Image Analysis: What You See -- Chapter 18 Multimodal and Online Writing: Creative Interaction between Text and Image -- Chapter 19 Scripting for the Public Forum: Writing to Speak -- Chapter 20 Portfolio Reflection: Your Growth as a Writer0 aWriting Guide with Handbook aligns to the goals, topics, and objectives of many first-year writing and composition courses. It is organized according to relevant genres, and focuses on the writing process, effective writing practices or strategies—including graphic organizers, writing frames, and word banks to support visual learning—and conventions of usage and style. The text includes an editing and documentation handbook, which provides information on grammar and mechanics, common usage errors, and citation styles. Writing Guide with Handbook breaks down barriers in the field of composition by offering an inviting and inclusive approach to students of all intersectional identities. To meet this goal, the text creates a reciprocal relationship between everyday rhetoric and the evolving world of academia. Writing Guide with Handbook builds on students’ life experiences and their participation in rhetorical communities within the familiar contexts of personal interaction and social media. The text seeks to extend these existing skills by showing students how to construct a variety of compelling compositions in a variety of formats, situations, and contexts. The authors conceived and developed Writing Guide with Handbook in 2020; its content and learning experiences reflect the instructional, societal, and individual challenges students have faced. The authors invite students and instructors to practice invitational, rather than confrontational, discussions even as they engage in verbal and written argument. Instructors will be empowered to emphasize meaning and voice and to teach empathy as a rhetorical strategy. Students will be empowered to negotiate their identities and their cultures through language as they join us in writing, discovering, learning, and creating.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aRobinson, Michelle Bacheloreauthor1 aJerskey, Mariaeauthor1 aFulwiller, Tobyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1125zAccess online version02072nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153245006200161264004300223264006600266264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505037500509520041500884542001601299546001601315588004001331650002001371650002601391650002601417700002801443700003201471700003101503710003901534856007701573OTLid0001126MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220117s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014295  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aB7200aIntroduction to PhilosophybAesthetic Theory and Practice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. What is Aesthetics? -- 2. What is a Work of Art? -- 3. What is the Connection between Artworks and Emotions? -- 4. What is the Connection Between Art and Morality? -- 5. What Makes an Artwork Beautiful? -- 6. What Makes Nature Beautiful? -- 7. The Significance of Environmental Aesthetics -- 8. Aesthetics and Politics -- 9. Engaging with Indigenous Art Aesthetically0 aAesthetic Theory and Practice offers fresh perspectives on canonical and emerging topics in aesthetics, and also brings attention to a number of culturally sensitive topics that are customarily silenced in introductions to philosophical aesthetics. The papers are heterogeneous in terms of length and degrees of difficulty, inviting the reader into the study of contemporary aesthetics, which spans a lifetime.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aSaito , Yurikoeauthor1 aSonderegger , Rutheauthor1 aKleesattel , Ineseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1126zAccess online version01944nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156100002600169245003200195264004300227264006300270264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505030000510520043700810542004101247546001601288588004001304650002601344650002401370650003601394710003901430856007701469OTLid0001127MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220117s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798783934094  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aPriebe, Sybileauthor00aWrite or LeftcSybil Priebe 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSybil Priebec2022. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Intro to Creative Writing -- Chapter 2: Review of Elements -- Chapter 3: Poetry -- Chapter 4: Flash Fiction -- Chapter 5: Fiction -- Chapter 6: Drama -- Chapter 7: Nonfiction -- Chapter 8: Experimental Literature -- Chapter 9: Final Chapter -- Chapter 10: Assignment and Project Ideas0 aIn this book, we'll go over some of the general principles of writing practices as well as advice and tips on how to write creatively, but mainly, you’ll be introduced to as many genres and categories as possible. We won’t get bogged down in doing the writing process “perfectly” or creating “perfect literature.” The goal is to learn about as many genres as possible, practice writing in those genres, and get feedback.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1127zAccess online version02332nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000700135245007000142264004300212264006900255264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505020200501520087400703542003001577546001601607588004101623650002501664650003801689650002601727700003501753700003001788710003901818856007701857OTLid0001129MnU20260406020620.0m     o  d s      cr            220205s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aL700aSalón de ClasebIntermediate Spanish for Education Professionals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Los estudiantes inmigrantes en la educación K-12 -- II. La educación bilingüe en los Estados Unidos -- III. El sistema educativo en los países hispanohablantes -- IV. El ecosistema educativo0 aSalón de clase, Intermediate Spanish for Education Professionals is a comprehensive intermediate Spanish open access textbook with reading, listening, speaking, and writing practice for students who have an interest and/or intend to pursue a career in the field of Education (teachers, administrators, counselors, psychologists, social workers, support staff members, paraprofessionals, among others). This Open Education Resource (OER) aims to explore the role of Spanish language and Spanish speakers in the American education system, as well as to improve student communicative abilities in Spanish. Salón de clase integrates interactive activities (h5p), video interviews with Spanish speakers to present authentic materials, and topics related to education. Grammar is not presented as a standalone topic, but it is seemly integrated into all parts of this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aCastro Ortiz, Fernandoeauthor1 aZimotti, Giovannieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1129zAccess online version02790nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245005600138250002700194264004300221264009600264264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505021700537520129600754542004102050546001602091588004002107650002602147650002402173700002702197700002602224700002602250710003902276856007702315OTLid0001130MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220205s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aInformed ArgumentsbA Guide to Writing and Research  aRevised Second Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTerri Pantuso, Sarah LeMire, and Kathy Andersc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- II. Getting Started -- III. Rhetorical Situation -- IV. Types of Argumentation -- V. Process and Organization -- VI. Joining the Academic Conversation -- VII. Researched Writing -- VIII: Ethics0 aWelcome to composition and rhetoric! While most of you are taking this course because it is required, we hope that all of you will leave with more confidence in your reading, writing, researching, and speaking abilities as these are all elements of freshman composition. Many times, these elements are presented in excellent textbooks written by top scholars. While the collaborators of this particular textbook respect and value those textbooks available from publishers, we have been concerned about students who do not have the resources to purchase textbooks. Therefore, we decided to put together this Open Educational Resource (OER) explicitly for use in freshman composition courses at Texas A&M University. It is important to note that the focus for this text is on thesis-driven argumentation as that is the focus of the first year writing course at Texas A&M University at the time of development. However, other first year writing courses at different colleges and universities include a variety of types of writing such as personal essays, informative articles, and/or creative writing pieces. The collaborators for this project acknowledge each program is unique; therefore, the adaptability of an OER textbook for first year writing allows for academic freedom across campuses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aPantuso, Terrieauthor1 aLeMire, Saraheauthor1 aAnders, Kathyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1130zAccess online version01820nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003700135264004300172264007000215264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002800407490002700435505028000462520035800742542004101100546001601141588004001157650003801197650002601235700003101261700003801292710003901330856007701369OTLid0001131MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220205s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aReflexiones sobre nuestra lengua 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRio Grande, TXbThe University of Texas Rio Grande Valleyc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Unidad 1: Para Comenzar -- II. Unidad 2: Para conocernos -- III. Unidad 3: Seguimos andando -- IV. Unidad 4: Poco a poco vamos llegando -- V. Unidad 5: Un nuevo comienzo -- VI. Unidad 6: Mapa de ruta -- VII. Unidad 7: Trazando nuevas rutas -- VIII. Unidad 8: Final de ruta0 aReflexiones sobre nuestra lengua se compone de ocho unidades temáticas pertinentes a la realidad social de los hablantes de español como lengua de herencia en los Estados Unidos. Además de enfocarse en la escritura como un proceso, se enfatiza el desarrollo de una conciencia sociolingüística y crítica del lenguaje en esta población estudiantil.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aHernández, Yaninaeauthor1 aEsteban Hernández, Joséeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1131zAccess online version02500nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001300162245006500175264004300240264008500283264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505074900545520036001294542003001654546001601684588004001700650002601740650003101766650003601797700002501833700002601858700002801884700002601912710003901938856007701977OTLid0001132MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220205s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645326116  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH1 4aLB1062.604aThe Australian Handbook for Careers in Psychological Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. An Introduction to Careers in Psychological Science -- 2. Introduction To Career Development -- 3. Research Methods in the Psychological Sciences -- 4. The Essence of Ethics for Psychological Researchers and Psychologists -- 5. Clinical Psychological Science -- 6. Applications and Careers for Counsellors and Counselling Psychologists -- 7. Social Psychology -- 8. Developmental Psychology -- 9. Neuroscience and Careers -- 10. Industrial, Work, and Organisational Psychology -- 11. Psychology and Law in Australia -- 12. Sport Psychology -- 13. Environmental Psychology -- 14. Applications and Careers in Psychology within Public Health and Community Settings to Build Wellbeing and Promote Social Justice -- 15. Psychology in the Military0 aDespite psychology being one of the most popular undergraduate programs, students often report not knowing how training in psychology relates to careers. With chapters written by experts across Australia, this book explores just some of the many ways that students can apply their training in psychological science across a variety of careers and sectors.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMachin, Tonyeauthor1 aMachin, Tanyaeauthor1 aJeffries, Carlaeauthor1 aHoare, Nanceyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1132zAccess online version02163nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100003600165245005400201264004300255264009500298264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505053000570520041601100542003001516546001601546588004001562650003501602650002401637710003901661856007701700OTLid0001133MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220205s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135827  aMnUbengcMnU 4aSF811 4aRA4401 aKustritz, Margaret Rooteauthor00aVeterinary Preventive MedicinecMargaret Kustritz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Terminology -- 2. Vaccines and Vaccinations: Introduction -- 3. Vaccines and Vaccinations: Individual Animals -- 4. Vaccines and Vaccinations: Production Animals -- 5. Parasite Control -- 6. Reproduction Control -- 7. Care of the Young -- 8. Dentistry -- 9. Behavior -- 10. Nutrition: Basics -- 11. Nutrition: Herbivores -- 12. Nutrition: Omnivores and Carnivores -- 13. Biosecurity -- 14. Backyard Poultry / Caged Birds / Fish / Reptiles / Amphibians -- 15. Mammals I -- 16. Mammals II / Marsupials -- 17. Drug Management0 aGoals of preventive medicine are to protect, promote, and maintain health and well-being and to prevent disease, disability, and death. Veterinary preventive medicine is an important component of veterinary training not only to ensure animal health but also to help veterinary students learn necessary information and skills for participation in global animal and human health challenges and disease prevention.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1133zAccess online version01858nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245004500135264004300180264008400223264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505021800484520046200702542003001164546001601194588004001210650003801250650002601288700002901314700002501343710003901368856007701407OTLid0001134MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aBeginning Spanish ¡Empecemos por aquí! 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2022. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: La clase de espanol -- Chapter 2: Las personas y las perspectivas -- Chapter 3: La cultura y los viajes -- Chapter 4: La vida que vivimos -- Chapter 5: Nuestro pasado -- Chapter 6: El cambio y el futuro0 aBeginning Spanish ¡Empecemos por aquí! focuses on the development of communication skills in interpretive, interpersonal, and presentational modes while centering student voices. Activities engage learners in real exchanges of information on topics that are relevant to adult students. In addition to language-acquisition learning outcomes, this text supports learning outcomes in diversity, equity, inclusion, cultural sustainability, and social justice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aCeciliano, Jennyeauthor1 aNotman, Lisaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1134zAccess online version02767nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002900137245016100166264004300327264008200370264001200452300002200464336002600486337002600512338003600538341002800574490002700602505031800629520123300947542004102180546001602221588004002237650002402277710003902301856007702340OTLid0001135MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aSchroder, Laurieeauthor00aApplying the International Classification of Functioning, Disability & HealthbA Team-Based/Project Based Course for Undergraduate StudentscLaurie Schroder 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEast Tennessee State Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule One: Thinking, thinking, thinking -- Module Two: Introduction to the WHO International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health -- Module Three: Body Structure & Function -- Module Four: Activity and Participation -- Module Five: Environmental & Personal Factors -- Module Six: Program Proposal0 aThis text is a complete team-based and project-based learning course focused on the application of the World Health Organization’s International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF) to unique groups of program clients and patients. It is designed to engage undergraduate students in exploration of the different facets of the ICF, in how the ICF differs from medical and social models because of these facets, and how each applies to, and ensures, an awareness of all of the ways in which health affects and is affected by peoples’ characteristics and environments. The text includes readings, digital links, readiness assurance elements, and guidelines for individual and team deliverables, but can also be used as a stand-alone text to provide a rich constructivist approach to understanding the structure of the ICF and how to use it for problem solving and decision-making with a patient/client population. It is the author’s intention that the text be used as suits the instructor, and modified to fit the pre-professional or paraprofessional healthcare students being taught, so while case study examples for rehabilitation are include, the text will lend itself to any patient or client group.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1135zAccess online version03381nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137050000700150050001100157245003900168264004300207264008200250264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505032000509520165700829542003002486546001602516588004102532650003302573650002502606650003102631650003702662700002902699700002902728700002502757700002502782710003902807856007702846OTLid0001136MnU20260409120842.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLB1139.2 4aL7 4aLB155500aTeaching Early and Elementary STEM 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEast Tennessee State Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Introduction to STEM -- Unit 2: Theory & Framework -- Unit 3: Integration -- Unit 4: Standards, Lesson Planning, & Assessment -- Unit 5: Integrated STEM Through Physical Science Anchor Standards -- Unit 6: Life Science -- Unit 7: Earth and Space Science -- Unit 8: Technology and Engineering -- Unit 9: Math0 aThis Open Access Educational textbook, "Teaching Early and Elementary STEM", was written to support pre-service early childhood and elementary teachers in their journey to become facilitators of science, technology, engineering, and math, or “STEM,” and "integrated STEM" in their future classrooms. Students who read and use this text will deepen their understanding of “STEM” and “integrated STEM,” learn what early childhood and elementary students need to know and be able to do in relation to STEM, and understand ways to create activity plans and implement current research-based approaches to teaching and pedagogy. This text arose out of our Early/Elementary STEM Collaboration project, which started in 2017 with the intention of increasing the quality of teacher preparation in STEM across early childhood and elementary education. The team is composed of math and science education professors, classroom in-service teachers, and pre-service teachers in pre-school through fifth grade. We are driven by the values of collaboration, strengths-based approaches to teaching and learning, constructivist philosophy of teaching and learning, and applied STEM experiences to increase access and equity. Our model of preparing pre-service teachers has been published elsewhere in more detail (Robertson, Nivens, & Lange, 2019). We built this open access product to include the following: 1) completely new content that includes input from our team as well as examples of integrated STEM learning experiences; 2) adaptations of existing resources, and; 3) compilations of existing free resources (e.g., Next Generation Science Standards).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks1 aLange, Alissa A,eauthor1 aRobertson, Lauraeauthor1 aPrice, Jamieeauthor1 aCraven, Amieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1136zAccess online version02319nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245004700145250000700192264004300199264004700242264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002800411490002700439505044800466520068100914542004101595546001601636588004001652650003001692650002301722700003101745700002901776710003901805856007701844OTLid0001137MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30104aThe Story of EarthbAn Observational Guide  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHouston, TXbUniversity of Houstonc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Changelog -- Chapter 0: Geologic Skills -- Chapter 1: Geologic Time -- Chapter 2: Plate Tectonics -- Chapter 3: Earth Materials -- Chapter 4: Sedimentary Structures -- Chapter 5: Stratigraphy -- Chapter 6: Fossil Preservation -- Chapter 7: Fossils -- Chapter 8: Fossils and Paleoenvironments -- Chapter 9: Geologic Structures and Mapping -- Chapter 10: Interpreting Earth's History using Maps -- Chapter 11: Paleoclimate -- Glossary0 aThis is the second edition of our open-access lab manual for a historical geology lab released for the Fall 2023 semester. It focuses on student observations. We have uploaded this book to Lulu Press so that you may have them print a copy for you. The cost is $21.63 plus shipping. We believe in free access to educational materials, therefore we collect no revenue from Lulu. The price you pay is simply the cost Lulu charges to print the materials for you. You can also download a printable PDF version to print on your own. Do you plan on using the lab manual? Have any questions, comments, suggestions, or notice an error? Please fill out our contact form and let us know!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aHauptvogel, Danieleauthor1 aSisson, Virginiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1137zAccess online version02065nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135245014000146264004300286264007900329264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505034200585520039900927542004101326546001601367588004001383650002301423650002601446650002401472700002901496700002601525710003901551856007701590OTLid0001138MnU20260302020531.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aPE140803aAn Introduction to African and Afro-Diasporic Peoples and Influences in British Literature and Culture before the Industrial Revolution 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReclamations Following a History of Exclusion -- Imagining Africa: Entrenching Stereotypes -- Race and Religion -- Constructions of Race in Britain -- An Interview with Josie Gill -- An Interview with Angela F. Jacobs -- An Interview with Miranda Kaufmann -- An Interview with Onyeka Nubia -- Brief Biographies of Black People in Britain0 aFunded by the University System of Georgia’s “Affordable Learning Georgia” initiative, An Introduction to African and Afro-Diasporic Peoples and Influences in British Literature and Culture before the Industrial Revolution corrects, expands, and celebrates the presence of the African Diaspora in the study of British Literature, undoing some of the anti-Black history of British studies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aElmore, Jonathaneauthor1 aHalpin, Jennieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1138zAccess online version02228nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245003500160264004300195264005100238264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002500411490002700436505023100463520073100694542001601425546001601441588004001457650002601497650002601523700002401549700002801573700002601601700003001627700003301657710003901690856007701729OTLid0001139MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aMagnus, P.D.eauthor00aforall xbCalgarycP.D. Magnus 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCalgary, AlbertabUniversity of Calgaryc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Key notions of logic -- Truth-functional logic -- Truth tables -- Natural deduction for TFL -- First-order logic -- Interpretations -- Natural deduction for FOL -- Modal logic -- Metatheory -- Appendices -- Glossary0 aforall x: Calgary is a full-featured textbook on formal logic. It covers key notions of logic such as consequence and validity of arguments, the syntax of truth-functional propositional logic TFL and truth-table semantics, the syntax of first-order (predicate) logic FOL with identity (first-order interpretations), symbolizing English in TFL and FOL, and Fitch-style natural deduction proof systems for both TFL and FOL. It also deals with some advanced topics such as modal logic, soundness, and functional completeness. Exercises with solutions are available. It is provided in PDF (for screen reading, printing, and a special version for dyslexics), HTML (with additional accessibility features), and in LaTeX source code.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aButton, Timeauthor1 aTrueman, Roberteauthor1 aZach, Richardeauthor1 aLoftis, J. Roberteauthor1 aThomas-Bolduc, Aaroneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1139zAccess online version02043nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245003700161264004300198264006900241264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505025100487520070400738542001601442546001501458588004001473650002601513650002601539710003901565856007701604OTLid0001140MnU20260323020442.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2021    mnu     o     0   0 ger d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aWimmer, Simoneauthor00aforall xbDortmundcSimon Wimmer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSimpson Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Zentrale Begriffe der Logik -- II Wahrheitsfunktionale Logik -- III Wahrheitstabellen -- IV Natürliche Herleitung für die WFL -- V Die Logik erster Ordnung -- VI Interpretationen -- VII Natürliche Herleitung für die LEO -- VIII Modale Logik0 aforall x: Dortmund is an adaptation and German translation of forall x: Calgary. As such, it is a full-featured textbook on formal logic. It covers key notions of logic such as consequence and validity, the syntax of truth-functional (propositional) logic and truth-table semantics, the syntax of first-order (predicate) logic with identity and first-order interpretations, formalizing German in TFL and FOL, and Fitch-style natural deduction proof systems for both TFL and FOL. It also deals with some advanced topics such as the syntax and (Kripke-)semantics of modal logic. The book is provided in PDF and in LaTeX source code. A booklet with solutions for all exercises in the book is available.1 fAttribution  aIn German.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1140zAccess online version02763nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127110004800135245006000183264004300243264008600286264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505027300546520133900819542001602158546001902174588004002193650002602233650002602259710003902285856007702324OTLid0001141MnU20260406020525.0m     o  d s      cr            220219s2022    mnu     o     0   0 por d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB722 aGrupo de Estudos em Lógica da UFRNeauthor00aPara TodxsbNatalcGrupo de Estudos em Lógica da UFRN  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGrupo de Estudos em Lógica da UFRNc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI Introdução Informal à Lógica -- II Lógica Verofuncional – LVF -- III Tabelas de Verdade -- IV Lógica de Primeira Ordem – LPO -- V Interpretações -- VI Dedução Natural para a LVF -- VII Dedução Natural para a LPO -- VIII Lógica Modal -- IX Metateoria0 aPara Todxs: Natal é um livro didático completo sobre lógica formal. Ele aborda noções fundamentais como consequência lógica e validade de argumentos, a sintaxe da lógica proposicional verofuncional (LVF) e a semântica de tabelas-verdade, a sintaxe da lógica de predicados de primeira ordem (LPO) com identidade (interpretações de primeira ordem), traduções (formalizações) do português para LVF e LPO, além de sistemas de prova em dedução natural (estilo Fitch) para LVF e LPO. Também são abordados alguns tópicos mais avançados, como a correção da LVF e uma introdução à lógica modal. O livro está disponível em PDF otimizado para visualização em tela, com links coloridos. Todos os arquivos fonte em LaTeX estão disponíveis, e podem ser também utilizados para gerar uma outra versão PDF otimizada para impressão. Posteriormente, versões especiais para visualização em tela de dispositivos eletrônicos, versões em folha preta, uma versão com fonte especial para disléxicos, além de um caderno com as soluções dos exercícios também serão produzidos. Um editor/verificador de provas para o sistema usado no livro está disponível online em andersonnakano.hyperphp.com, em versão traduzida ao português por Anderson Luis Nakano do editor original disponível em Open Logic Project.1 fAttribution  aIn Portuguese.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1141zAccess online version03151nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137050000700150100002700157245005900184264004300243264007700286264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002800485490002700513505043300540520150300973542001602476546001602492588004002508650003302548650002502581650003102606710003902637856007702676OTLid0001142MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            220301s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aStramel, Janeteauthor00aMathematics Methods for Early ChildhoodcJanet Stramel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bFort Hays State Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The Importance of Early Childhood Mathematics -- 2. Mathematics Milestones -- 3. Mathematics in Preschool -- 4. Mathematics Standards -- 5. Teaching Mathematics Through Problem Solving -- 6. Early Number Concepts and Number Sense -- 7. Whole Number Place Value -- 8. Whole Number Computation -- 9. Early Fraction Concepts -- 10. Geometry and Measurement -- 11. Algebraic Thinking -- 12. Data and Data Analysis -- 13. Glossary0 aWelcome to Early Childhood Mathematics! This course satisfies the Early Childhood Unified requirements in the state of Kansas for a teaching license Birth to Grade 3. Most people agree that early childhood includes the period from infancy until eight years of age, characterized by rapid and complex growth in physical, cognitive, and social domains. Math skills must be taught in early childhood. Children should be provided a foundation to succeed in elementary school and beyond. Teachers should focus lessons in early childhood around the basic skills that will help to advance future mathematics. From preschool to the end of elementary school, children are setting the foundation for future life skills. Learning mathematics is “a ‘natural’ and developmentally appropriate activity for young children” (Ginsberg, Lee, and Boyd, 2008). Through their everyday interactions with the world, many children develop informal concepts about space, quantity, size, patterns, and operations. Unfortunately, not all children have the same opportunities to build these informal and foundational concepts of mathematics in their day-to-day lives (Sherman-LeVos, 2010). Young children are naturally curious, and the best time to begin mathematics is at a time while the young child’s brain is rapidly developing. Mathematics in early childhood helps children develop critical thinking and reasoning skills early on and it’s the key to the foundation for success in their formal schooling years.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1142zAccess online version02546nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003000162250000600192264004300198264007900241264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505074700497520071401244542001601958546001601974588004001990650003802030710003902068856007702107OTLid0001143MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220307s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLinam, Rebeccaeauthor00aGerman 101cRebecca Linam  a1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Alabamac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout German 101 -- Table of Contents -- 1. Section 1-1 -- 2. Section 1-2 -- 3. Section 1-3 -- 4. Section 1-4 -- 5. Section 1-5 -- 6. Section 1-6 -- 7. Section 1-7 -- 8. Section 1-8 -- 9. Section 1-9 -- 10. Section 1-10 -- 11. Section 1-11 -- 12. Section 1-12 -- 13. Section 1-13 -- 14. Section 1-14 -- 15. Chapter 1 - Glossary -- 16. Section 2-1 -- 17. Section 2-2 -- 18. Section 2-3 -- 19. Section 2-4 -- 20. Section 2-5 -- 21. Section 2-6 -- 22. Section 2-7 -- 23. Section 2-8 -- 24. Chapter 2 - Glossary -- 25. Section 3-1 -- 26. Section 3-2 -- 27. Section 3-3 -- 28. Section 3-4 -- 29. Section 3-5 -- 30. Section 3-6 -- 31. Section 3-7 -- 32. Chapter 3 - Glossary -- Chapter 1 - Extra Practice -- Chapter 2 - Extra Practice -- Dictionary0 aFeatures of German 101: Short articles and dialogues in each chapter. Extra practice for each grammar concept. Links to an interactive video series that reviews grammar and vocabulary. Comic strips to promote interest, reading, and provide additional visual examples. Exercises for both in-class and out of class. Links to German music with grammar concepts. A range of songs from the 1980s to the present day is included to help introduce the music culture. Links to videos that reteach each grammar concept and pronounce new words. Oral Proficiency Interview practice at the end of each chapter with helpful tips. Quick upgrades as necessary. As feedback is received, more practice and videos will be added.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1143zAccess online version03126nam a2200493 i 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.0m     o  d s      cr            220307s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aLC980 4aPE14081 aBranson, Tylereauthor00aWho Teaches WritingcTyler Branson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- A Memoirist Teaches Narrative -- A Reluctant Student Teaches the Literacy Narrative -- A Shakespearean Teaches Narrative -- A Former First-year Comp Student Teaches Narrative -- A Feminist Teaches Writing through Institutional Ethnography -- A Writing Studies Scholar Teaches Interview-Based Writing Assignments -- Interdisciplinary Writing Instructors Teach Autoethnographic Creativity and Social Consciousness -- A Writing Center Administrator Teaches Service Learning -- A Literature Scholar Teaches Structuring Paragraphs in a Research Essay -- A Modernist Teaches Analysis -- Creative Writers Teach Techniques for Analyzing Any Text -- Applied Linguists Teach Analyzing Writing -- A Poet Teaches Analysis -- A Sociolinguist Teaches Evaluating Language -- A Film Scholar Teaches Evaluative Writing -- A Librarian Teaches Evaluating Information -- A Sports Rhetorician Teaches Evaluation --0 aWho Teaches Writing is an open teaching and learning resource being used in English Composition classes at Oklahoma State University. It was authored by contributors from Oklahoma State University and also includes invited chapters from faculty and staff at institutions both inside and outside of Oklahoma. Contributors include faculty from various departments, contingent faculty and staff, and graduate instructors. One purpose of the resource is to provide short, relatively jargon-free chapters geared toward undergraduate students taking First-Year Composition. Support for this project was provided in part by OpenOKState and Oklahoma State University Libraries.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aBrooks, Roneauthor1 aCadman, Danaeauthor1 aCephus, Heidieauthor1 aChilders, Sara Betheauthor1 aDevore, Elizabetheauthor1 aSicari, Annaeauthor1 aHogg, Charlotteeauthor1 aHorton, Ho'omana Nathaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1144zAccess online version01758nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245002300149264004300172264005300215300002200268336002600290337002600316338003600342341002800378490002700406505023500433520038700668542004101055546001601096588004001112650002301152650002301175700003501198700003501233710003901268856007701307OTLid0001145MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220310s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aBotany in Hawaiʻi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPearl City, HIbLeeward Community Collegec2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Introduction To Plants -- 2: Roots -- 3: Stems -- 4: Leaves -- 5: Flowers, fruits and seeds -- 6: Plant evolution and non-vascular plants -- 7: Ferns and lycophytes -- 8: Gymnosperms -- 9: Angiosperms -- 10: Plants in Hawai‘i0 a"Botany in Hawai‘i" discusses introductory topics of Botany through examples of the native and introduced plants found in Hawai‘i. It includes anatomy and physiology of seeds, roots, leaves, stems, fruits and flowers and covers the main plant groups from nonvascular to flowering plants. This book provides a visual reference to botanical concepts and terminology for beginners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aElliott, Daniela Dutraeauthor1 aVelasquez, Paula Mejiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1145zAccess online version02426nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100003400163245012700197264004300324264006400367264001200431300002200443336002600465337002600491338003600517341002800553490002700581505061000608520053901218542004101757546001601798588004001814650003201854650003801886710003901924856007701963OTLid0001146MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220310s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463665155  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aKoutamanis, Alexandereauthor00aBuilding Information - Representation and ManagementbPrinciples and Foundations for the Digital EracAlexander Koutamanis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPART I. DIGITIZATION -- 1. Digital information -- 2. Digitization in AECO -- PART II. REPRESENTATION -- 3. Symbolic representation -- 4. Analogue representations -- 5. Building representation in BIM -- PART III. INFORMATION -- 6. Data and information -- 7. Information management -- PART IV. MANAGEMENT -- 8. Decisions and information -- 9. Process diagrams -- 10. Information diagrams -- PART V. EXERCISES -- 11. Exercise I: Maintenance -- 12. Exercise II: Change management -- 13. Exercise III: Circularity for existing buildings -- 14. Exercise IV: Energy transition -- 15. Exercise V: Waste management0 aThe book presents a coherent theory of building information, focusing on its representation and management in the digital era. It addresses issues such as the information explosion and the structure of analogue building representations to propose a parsimonious approach to the deployment and utilization of symbolic digital technologies like BIM. It also considers the matching representation of AECO processes in terms of tasks, so as to connect to information processing and support both information management and decision taking.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1146zAccess online version01924nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245005100137264004300188264008800231264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505046800496520032600964542001601290546001601306588004001322650002401362700003001386700003001416710003901446856007701485OTLid0001147MnU20260406020758.0m     o  d s      cr            220311s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA44000aMedical Terminology for Healthcare Professions 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Word Parts and Rules -- 2. Prefixes and Suffixes -- 3. Body Terminology -- 4. Sensory Systems -- 5. Integumentary System -- 6. Skeletal System -- 7. Muscular System -- 8. Nervous System -- 9. Cardiovascular System -- 10. Blood Vessels and Blood -- 11. Lymphatic and Immune Systems -- 12. Respiratory System -- 13. Digestive System -- 14. Endocrine System -- 15. Urinary System -- 16. Male Reproductive System -- 17. Female Reproductive System -- 18. Obstetrics0 aMedical Terminology for Healthcare Professions is an Open Educational Resource (OER) that focuses on breaking down, pronouncing, and learning the meaning of medical terms within the context of anatomy and physiology. This resource is targeted for Healthcare Administration, Health Sciences, and Pre-Professional students.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aNelson, Andrea M.eauthor1 aGreene, Katherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1147zAccess online version01759nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100003200149245005100181264004300232264006100275264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505037500513520023500888542004101123546001601164588004001180650002401220650002501244710003901269856007701308OTLid0001148MnU20260309021221.0m     o  d s      cr            220311s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aDolbec, Pierre-Yanneauthor00aDigital Marketing StrategycPierre-Yann Dolbec 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Paul, MNbConcordia University Open Textbooksc2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Digital Marketing -- Understanding the Digital Consumer -- Planning for a Digital Marketing Campaign -- Introduction to Digital Strategy -- Reach: Generating Awareness and Attracting Visitors -- Act: Creating Content -- Act: Lead Generation and Lead Nurturing -- Convert: Conversion Optimization -- Engage: Building Loyalty and Co-Creating With Customers0 aThe Internet has transformed how businesses conduct their activities and how consumers go about buying products. This textbook aims to provide a way of conceptualizing how to do marketing online and a strategic framework to do so.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1148zAccess online version03109nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245006500144264004300209264006600252264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505120700495520063801702542001602340546001602356588004002372650002602412650003102438700003302469700002802502700002502530700002802555710003902583856007702622OTLid0001149MnU20260406020621.0m     o  d s      cr            220311s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aCase Studies in Community Psychology PracticebA Global Lens 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Part One: Community Building -- 1. Cultural Development in Underrepresented Communities: Using an Empowerment and Citizen Participation Approach -- 2. Dare2Dialogue: Promoting Inclusion Through Storytelling and Dialogue -- 3. Green Space Programs as a Shared Growth and Communal Process: A Somali Gardener’s Journey in Minnesota -- II. Part Two: Global Perspectives -- 4. Better Together: Creating Alternative Settings to Reduce Conflict Among Youth in Lebanon -- 5. Promoting Community-Driven Change in Family and Community Systems to Support Girls’ Holistic Development in Senegal -- III. Part Three: Evaluation Research -- 6. Lessons from Conducting an Equity-Focused, Participatory Needs Assessment -- 7. Program Evaluation: A Fundamental Component in Effective Community Practice -- 8. Showing up and Standing with: An Intersectional Approach to a Participatory Evaluation of a Housing First Program -- IV. Part Four: Community and Public Health -- 9. A Plan for Prevention: Measuring Equity from the Start -- 10. Working with Survivors of Gender-Based Violence -- 11. Journeying Past Hurt: Creating and Sustaining Trauma-Informed Healing Practices With Black Pregnant and Parenting Mothers0 aThere is no better way to demonstrate the work and impact of community psychologists and allies than by showcasing actual projects conducted in partnership with communities. This textbook displays this work in a dynamic case study format that will ignite students' desire and passion to study and become future community psychologists or those whose heart beats with the beloved community. You can find community psychologists and allies partnering with communities to change racist policies, end health disparities, create alternate settings for youth, foster community-based models to heal trauma, evaluate programs, and much more!1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aPalmer, Geraldine L.eauthor1 aRogers, Todd L.eauthor1 aViola, Judaheauthor1 aEngel, Maronicaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1149zAccess online version03141nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245003300161264004300194264005900237264001200296300002200308336002600330337002600356338003600382341002500418490002700443505088700470520103901357542001602396546001602412588004002428650002802468650003102496700002802527700002802555700003202583710003902615856007702654OTLid0001150MnU20260406020820.0m     o  d s      cr            220311s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693992  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aH100aIntroduction to Anthropology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 What Is Anthropology? -- Chapter 2 Methods: Cultural and Archaeological -- Chapter 3 Culture Concept Theory: Theories of Cultural Change -- Chapter 4 Biological Evolution and Early Human Evidence -- Chapter 5 The Genus Homo and the Emergence of Us -- Chapter 6 Language and Communication -- Chapter 7 Work, Life, and Value: Economic Anthropology -- Chapter 8 Authority, Decisions, and Power: Political Anthropology -- Chapter 9 Social Inequality -- Chapter 10 The Global Impact of Human Migration -- Chapter 11 Forming Family through Kinship -- Chapter 12 Gender and Sexuality -- Chapter 13 Religion and Culture -- Chapter 14 Anthropology of Food -- Chapter 15 Anthropology of Media -- Chapter 16 Art, Music, and Sport -- Chapter 17 Medical Anthropology -- Chapter 18 Human-Animal Relationship -- Chapter 19 Indigenous Anthropology -- Chapter 20 Anthropology on the Ground0 aDesigned to meet the scope and sequence of your course, OpenStax Introduction to Anthropology is a four-field text integrating diverse voices, engaging field activities, and meaningful themes like Indigenous experiences and social inequality to engage students and enrich learning. The text showcases the historical context of the discipline, with a strong focus on anthropology as a living and evolving field. There is significant discussion of recent efforts to make the field more diverse—in its practitioners, in the questions it asks, and in the applications of anthropological research to address contemporary challenges. In addressing social inequality, the text drives readers to consider the rise and impact of social inequalities based on forms of identity and difference (such as gender, ethnicity, race, and class) as well as oppression and discrimination. The contributors to and dangers of socioeconomic inequality are fully addressed, and the role of inequality in social dysfunction, disruption, and change is noted.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aHasty, Jennifereauthor1 aLewis, David G.eauthor1 aSnipes, Marjorie M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1150zAccess online version02524nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001000141100002600151245007500177264004300252264008100295264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505014800553520117700701542004101878546001601919588004001935650003501975650002402010710003902034856007702073OTLid0001151MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            220321s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQP1-(981) 4aRA4401 aBinks, Andreweauthor00aCardiovascular Pathophysiology for Pre-Clinical StudentscAndrew Binks 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine, bVirginia Tech Librariesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Arrhythmias2. Heart Failure3. Hypertension4. Valvular Disease5. Heart Sounds and Murmurs6. Congenital Heart Disease7. Ischemic Heart Disease0 aCardiovascular Pathophysiology for Pre-Clinical Students, is an undergraduate medical-level resource for foundational knowledge of common cardiovascular diseases, disorders and pathologies. This text is designed for a course pre-clinical undergraduate medical curriculum and it is aligned to USMLE(r) (United States Medical Licensing Examination) content guidelines. The text is meant to provide the essential information from these content areas in a concise format that would allow learner preparation to engage in an active classroom. Clinical correlates and additional application of content is intended to be provided in the classroom experience. The text assumes that the students will have an understanding of basic cardiovascular physiology that will be helpful to understand the content presented here. This resource should be assistive to the learner later in medical school and for exam preparation given the material is presented in a succinct manner, with a focus on high-yield concepts. Instructors interested in reviewing, adopting, or adapting parts or the whole of the text are requested to register their interest at: https://bit.ly/interest-preclinical.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aClinical PhysiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1151zAccess online version02281nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002600137245005100163250001200214264004300226264005700269264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505038200500520070600882542004101588546001601629588004101645650002501686700003501711700003301746710003901779856007701818OTLid0001152MnU20260406020525.0m     o  d s      cr            220324s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA7731 aMiles, Mary Peauthor00aSports Nutrition Laboratory ManualcMary Miles  a1st Ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTRAILSc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLABORATORIES1 - Laboratory Safety and Standard Operating Procedures2 - Substrate Utilization 3 - Carbohydrate Supplementation and Glycemic Responses4 - Hydration5 - Metabolic Health and Energy Availability -- APPENDICESA - Guidelines, Format, and Requirements for Laboratory Reports B - Best Practices to Prevent Laboratory Acquired InfectionsC - Suggested Laboratory Equipment0 aThis lab manual is designed for the upper division and graduate sports nutrition courses, covering, supporting, and reinforcing fundamental nutritional concepts. This manual provides hands-on experience that will help strengthen student’s knowledge and application of the material. Labs focus on learning areas of exercise intensity and substrate utilization, measuring glycemic responses to selected food items with or without exercise, designing sports drinks and testing rehydration responses, and metabolic health. Additionally, this manual provides a step-by-step guide to strengthen student’s ability to generate data and convey their results in a scientific manner. GitHub format available.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks1 aWilson, Stephanie M.G.eauthor1 aChamberlin, Morgan Leauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1152zAccess online version03157nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138050001400146100002900160245007700189264004300266264006300309264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505060500549520130401154542004102458546001602499588004002515650003502555650002702590650002602617710003902643856007702682OTLid0001153MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220407s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aSarty, Gordon E.eauthor00aIntroduction to Applied Statistics for Psychology StudentscGordon Sarty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSaskatoon, SaskatchewanbUniversity of Saskatchewanc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Background and Motivation -- 2. Descriptive Statistics: Frequency Data (Counting) -- 3. Descriptive Statistics: Central Tendency and Dispersion -- 4. Probability and the Binomial Distributions -- 5. The Normal Distributions -- 6. Percentiles and Quartiles -- 7. The Central Limit Theorem -- 8. Confidence Intervals -- 9. Hypothesis Testing -- 10. Comparing Two Population Means -- 11. Comparing Proportions -- 12. ANOVA -- 13. Power -- 14. Correlation and Regression -- 15. Chi Squared: Goodness of Fit and Contingency Tables -- 16. Non-parametric Tests -- 17. Overview of the General Linear Model0 aIntroduction to Applied Statistics for Psychology Students, by Gordon E. Sarty (Professor, Department of Psychology, University of Saskatchewan) began as a textbook published in PDF format, in various editions between 2014-2017. The book was written to meet the needs of University of Saskatchewan psychology students at the undergraduate (PSY 233, PSY 234) level. In 2019-2020, funding was provided through the Gwenna Moss Centre for Teaching and Learning, along with technical assistance from the Distance Education Unit, to update and adapt this book, making it more widely available in an easy-to-use and more adaptable digital (Pressbooks) format. The update also made revisions so that the book could be published with a license appropriate for open educational resources (OER). OERs are defined as “teaching, learning, and research resources that reside in the public domain or have been released under an intellectual property license that permits their free use and re-purposing by others” (Hewlett Foundation). This textbook and other OERs like it are openly licensed using a Creative Commons license, and are offered in various digital and e-book formats free of charge. Printed editions of this book can be obtained for a nominal fee through the University of Saskatchewan bookstore.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1153zAccess online version02043nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137050000700148110003700155245005700192264004300249264010700292264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505027000576520049300846542004101339546001601380588004101396650003301437650003401470650002501504710003901529856007701568OTLid0001155MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220407s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC5800 4aL72 aDLINQ staff contributorseauthor04aThe Asynchronous CookbookcDLINQ staff contributors  2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOffice of Digital Learning & Inquiry, Middlebury Collegec2021. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Some Key Concepts -- 3. Group and Team Work in Asynchronous Settings -- 4. Discussion Activities -- 5. Mapping Activities -- 6. Games -- 7. Simulations & Labs -- 8. Writing, Storytelling, and Publishing -- 9. Presentations -- 10. Class Climate0 aWhether you're teaching mostly in person but looking for some regular, asynchronous activities to add to your course, or teaching a fully online course, this resource is for you. The activities in this cookbook draw on research and good practice in online course design to provide recipes - concise and specific instructions and examples - for adding asynchronous activities to a course. Meaningful interaction between students and instructors is a key ingredient in all of these recipes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aDistance EducationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1155zAccess online version03440nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001000141100002600151245006500177264004300242264009600285264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505061600558520162001174542004102794546001602835588004002851650003502891650002402926710003902950856007702989OTLid0001156MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220419s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQP1-(981) 4aRA4401 aBinks, Andreweauthor00aPulmonary Physiology for Pre-Clinical StudentscAndrew Binks 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: Fundamentals -- 2: Mechanics of the Lungs -- 3: Lung Volumes and Compliance -- 4: Distribution of Ventilation -- 5: Airflow and Airway Resistance -- 6: Dynamic Airway Compression -- 7: Fundamentals of Gas Exchange -- 8: Perfusion and Diffusion Limitations in Gas Exchange -- 9: Pulmonary Blood Flow -- 10: Pulmonary Capillaries and Non-Ventilatory Function -- 11: Arterial CO₂ and Ph -- 12: Alkalosis and Acidosis -- 13: Ventilation and Perfusion -- 14: The Alveolar Gas Equation and Alveolar-Arterial PO₂ Difference -- 15: Pulmonary Shunts -- 16: Gas Transport -- 17: Control of Breathing -- 18: Dyspnea0 aPulmonary Physiology for Pre-Clinical Students is an undergraduate medical-level resource for foundational knowledge of pulmonary physiology. This text is designed for a course pre-clinical undergraduate medical curriculum and it is aligned to USMLE(r) (United States Medical Licensing Examination) content guidelines. The text is meant to provide the essential information from these content areas in a concise format that would allow learner preparation to engage in an active classroom. Clinical correlates and additional application of content is intended to be provided in the classroom experience. This resource should be assistive to the learner later in medical school and for exam preparation given the material is presented in a succinct manner, with a focus on high-yield concepts. The 101-page text was created specifically for use by pre-clinical students at Virginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine and was based on faculty experience and peer review to guide development and hone important topics. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting parts or the whole of the text are requested to register their interest at: https://bit.ly/interest-preclinical. Instructors and subject matter experts interested in and sharing their original course materials relevant to pre-clinical education are requested to join the instructor portal at https://www.oercommons.org/groups/pre-clinical-resources/10133. Binks, Andrew., (2022). Pulmonary Physiology for Pre-Clinical Students, Roanoke: Virginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine. https://doi.org/10.21061/pulmonaryphysiology. Licensed with CC BY NC-SA 4.0.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aClinical PhysiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1156zAccess online version03020nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127100002600141245007000167264004300237264009600280264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505028100553520158800834542004102422546001602463588004002479650003502519710003902554856007702593OTLid0001157MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220419s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQP1-(981)1 aBinks, Andreweauthor00aPulmonary Pathophysiology for Pre-Clinical StudentscAndrew Binks 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1: The Obstructive Lung Diseases -- 2: Upper Airway Infections -- 3: Lower Airway Infections -- 4: The Restrictive Lung Diseases -- 5: Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome -- 6: Lung Cancer -- 7: Pulmonary Embolism -- 8: Immunological Diseases of the Lung -- 9: Pleural Disease0 aPulmonary Pathophysiology for Pre-Clinical Students is an undergraduate medical-level resource for foundational knowledge of pulmonary pathophysiology. This text is designed for a course pre-clinical undergraduate medical curriculum and it is aligned to USMLE(r) (United States Medical Licensing Examination) content guidelines. The text is meant to provide the essential information from these content areas in a concise format that would allow learner preparation to engage in an active classroom. Clinical correlates and additional application of content is intended to be provided in the classroom experience. The text assumes that the students will have an understanding of basic cardiovascular physiology that will be helpful to understand the content presented here. This resource should be assistive to the learner later in medical school and for exam preparation given the material is presented in a succinct manner, with a focus on high-yield concepts. The 82-page text was created specifically for use by pre-clinical students at Virginia Tech Carilion School of Medicine and was based on faculty experience and peer review to guide development and hone important topics. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting parts or the whole of the text are requested to register their interest at: https://bit.ly/interest-preclinical. Instructors and subject matter experts interested in and sharing their original course materials relevant to pre-clinical education are requested to join the instructor portal at https://www.oercommons.org/groups/pre-clinical-resources/10133.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aClinical PhysiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1157zAccess online version02509nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005400135264004300189264008400232264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505040600493520093700899542002701836546001701863588004001880650002001920650002601940700002801966700002501994710003902019856007702058OTLid0001158MnU20260406020526.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2016    mnu     o     0   0 jpn d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN8500aIntroduction to ArtbDesign, Context, and Meaning 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc2022. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: What is Art? -- Chapter Two: The Structure of Art -- Chapter Three: Significance of Materials Used in Art -- Chapter Four: Describing Art -- Chapter Five: Meaning in Art -- Chapter Six: Connecting Art to Our Lives -- Chapter Seven: Form in Architecture -- Chapter Eight: Art and Identity -- Chapter Nine: Art and Power -- Chapter Ten: Art and Ritual Life -- Chapter Eleven: Art and Ethics0 aIntroduction to Art: Design, Context, and Meaning offers a comprehensive introduction to the world of Art. Authored by four USG faculty members with advance degrees in the arts, this textbooks offers up-to-date original scholarship. It includes over 400 high-quality images illustrating the history of art, its technical applications, and its many uses.Combining the best elements of both a traditional textbook and a reader, it introduces such issues in art as its meaning and purpose; its meaning and purpose; its structure, material, and form; and its diverse effects on our lives. Its digital nature allows students to follow links to applicable sources and videos, expanding the students' educational experiences beyond the textbook. Introduction to Art: Design, Context, and Meaning provides a new and free alternative to traditional textbooks, making it an invaluable resource in our modern age of technology and advancement.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Japanese.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aSachant, Pamelaeauthor1 aBlood, Peggyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1158zAccess online version02427nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156245004000166264004300206264005900249264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505067900485520054001164542001601704546001501720588004101735650002301776650002301799700002701822700002801849700002401877710003901901856007701940OTLid0001159MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2017    mnu     o     0   0 pol d  a9788394883812  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH30100aFizyka dla szkół wyższychnTom 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCzęść 1 Mechanika -- Rozdział 1 Jednostki i miary -- Rozdział 2 Wektory -- Rozdział 3 Ruch prostoliniowy -- Rozdział 4 Ruch w dwóch i trzech wymiarach -- Rozdział 5 Zasady dynamiki Newtona -- Rozdział 6 Zastosowania zasad dynamiki Newtona -- Rozdział 7 Praca i energia kinetyczna -- Rozdział 8 Energia potencjalna i zasada zachowania energii -- Rozdział 9 Pęd i zderzenia -- Rozdział 10 Obroty wokół stałej osi -- Rozdział 11 Moment pędu -- Rozdział 12 Równowaga statyczna i sprężystość -- Rozdział 13 Grawitacja -- Rozdział 14 Mechanika płynów -- Część 2 Fale i akustyka -- Rozdział 15 Drgania -- Rozdział 16 Fale -- Rozdział 17 Dźwięk0 aFizyka dla szkół wyższych. Tom 1 dopasowana jest pod względem zakresu i układu treści do typowych kursów wprowadzających z fizyki ogólnej opartych na analizie matematycznej. Podręcznik kładzie nacisk na powiązania między teorią a praktycznymi zastosowaniami, wyjaśniając zagadnienia fizyczne w ciekawy i zrozumiały sposób, lecz z zachowaniem niezbędnego rygoru matematycznego. Liczne, dobrze dobrane przykłady pokazują, jak podejść do zadania, jak wykorzystać wzory i wreszcie jak sprawdzić i uogólnić wynik.1 fAttribution  aIn Polish.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMoebs, Williameauthor1 aLing, Samuel J.eauthor1 aSanny, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1159zAccess online version02465nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156245004000166264004300206264005900249264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505071600485520054001201542001601741546001601757588004101773650002301814650002301837700002701860700002801887700002401915710003901939856007701978OTLid0001160MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9788394883829  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH30100aFizyka dla szkół wyższychnTom 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCzęść 1: Termodynamika -- Rozdział 1: Temperatura i ciepło -- Rozdział 2: Kinetyczna teoria gazów -- Rozdział 3: Pierwsza zasada termodynamiki -- Rozdział 4: Druga zasada termodynamiki -- Część 2: Elektryczność i magnetyzm -- Rozdział 5: Ładunki elektryczne i pola -- Rozdział 6: Prawo Gaussa -- Rozdział 7: Potencjał elektryczny -- Rozdział 8: Pojemność elektryczna -- Rozdział 9: Prąd i rezystancja -- Rozdział 10: Obwody prądu stałego -- Rozdział 11: Siła i pole magnetyczne -- Rozdział 12: Źródła pola magnetycznego -- Rozdział 13: Indukcja elektromagnetyczna -- Rozdział 14: Indukcyjność -- Rozdział 15: Obwody prądu zmiennego -- Rozdział 16: Fale elektromagnetyczne0 aFizyka dla szkół wyższych. Tom 2 dopasowana jest pod względem zakresu i układu treści do typowych kursów wprowadzających z fizyki ogólnej opartych na analizie matematycznej. Podręcznik kładzie nacisk na powiązania między teorią a praktycznymi zastosowaniami, wyjaśniając zagadnienia fizyczne w ciekawy i zrozumiały sposób, lecz z zachowaniem niezbędnego rygoru matematycznego. Liczne, dobrze dobrane przykłady pokazują, jak podejść do zadania, jak wykorzystać wzory i wreszcie jak sprawdzić i uogólnić wynik.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMoebs, Williameauthor1 aLing, Samuel J.eauthor1 aSanny, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1160zAccess online version02232nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156245004000166264004300206264005900249264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505048400485520054000969542001601509546001501525588004101540650002301581650002301604700002701627700002801654700002401682710003901706856007701745OTLid0001161MnU20260330020607.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2017    mnu     o     0   0 pol d  a9788394883836  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH30100aFizyka dla szkół wyższychnTom 3 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCzęść 1: Optyka -- Rozdział 1: Natura światła -- Rozdział 2: Optyka geometryczna i tworzenie obrazu -- Rozdział 3: Interferencja -- Rozdział 4: Dyfrakcja -- Część 2: Fizyka współczesna -- Rozdział 5: Teoria względności -- Rozdział 6: Fotony i fale materii -- Rozdział 7: Mechanika kwantowa -- Rozdział 8: Struktura atomu -- Rozdział 9: Fizyka materii skondensowanej -- Rozdział 10: Fizyka jądrowa -- Rozdział 11: Fizyka cząstek elementarnych i kosmologia0 aFizyka dla szkół wyższych. Tom 3 dopasowana jest pod względem zakresu i układu treści do typowych kursów wprowadzających z fizyki ogólnej opartych na analizie matematycznej. Podręcznik kładzie nacisk na powiązania między teorią a praktycznymi zastosowaniami, wyjaśniając zagadnienia fizyczne w ciekawy i zrozumiały sposób, lecz z zachowaniem niezbędnego rygoru matematycznego. Liczne, dobrze dobrane przykłady pokazują, jak podejść do zadania, jak wykorzystać wzory i wreszcie jak sprawdzić i uogólnić wynik.1 fAttribution  aIn Polish.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMoebs, Williameauthor1 aLing, Samuel J.eauthor1 aSanny, Jeffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1161zAccess online version02460nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245001600162264004300178264005900221264001200280300002200292336002600314337002600340338003600366341002800402490002700430505036300457520084200820542001601662546001501678588004101693650002601734650003101760700003001791700003201821700003101853700003801884710003901922856007701961OTLid0001162MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2020    mnu     o     0   0 pol d  a9788394883881  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH100aPsychologia 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWstęp do psychologii -- Prowadzenie badań -- Biopsychologia -- Stany świadomości -- Wrażenia zmysłowe i spostrzeganie -- Uczenie się -- Myślenie i inteligencja -- Pamięć -- Psychologia rozwojowa -- Emocje i motywacje -- Osobowość -- Psychologia społeczna -- Psychologia pracy i organizacji -- Stres -- Zaburzenia psychiczne -- Terapia i leczenie0 aPsychologia powstała z myślą o studentach jednosemestralnego kursu wstęp do psychologii. Podręcznik jest obszernym omówieniem wszystkich podstawowych zagadnień w ujęciu klasycznym z uwzględnieniem wiedzy najnowszej. Książka zawiera również opis zaburzeń psychicznych i wprowadza terminologię zgodną z DSM-5 oraz ICD. Wydanie jest polską adaptacją wydania drugiego aktualizowanego Psychology 2e OpenStax. Publikacja została dostosowana do potrzeb polskich studentów i wymogów na uczelniach w Polsce. Uwzględniona została potrzeba lokalizacji kulturowej. Szersze modyfikacje wprowadzono w rozdziałach „Badania”, „Emocje i motywacje”, „Osobowość” oraz „Psychologia społeczna”, a rozdział poświęcony psychologii pracy i organizacji został stworzony w całości na potrzeby polskiego czytelnika.1 fAttribution  aIn Polish.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSpielman, Rose M.eauthor1 aJenkins, William J.eauthor1 aLovett, Marilyn D.eauthor1 aCzarnota-Bojarska, Joannaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1162zAccess online version02370nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002600145245012500171264004300296264007000339264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505062900586520051401215542004101729546001601770588004101786650003001827650002301857710003901880856007701919OTLid0001163MnU20260406020526.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aDavies, Rondieauthor00aGeology Online Lab ActivitiesbAn Open Educational Resource for Community College Students and InstructorscRondi Davies 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCUNY Academic Worksc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. How do scientists study Earth? -- 2. Mineral resources and how we use them -- 3. What are the different types of plate boundaries? -- 4. How do we classify igneous rocks, and where do they form? -- 5. What do sedimentary rocks tell us about the past? -- 6. How can we read metamorphic rocks? -- 7. How do scientists measure earthquakes? -- 8. How do we measure geological time? -- 9. Glacial Landforms of New York -- 10. Geography and Landforms of New York -- 11.1 How is climate changing? -- 11.2 How is climate changing? -- 12.1 AMNH Hall of Planet Earth Field Trip -- 12.2 AMNH Hall of Planet Earth Field Trip (online)0 aThe online geology lab for community college students was developed by Dr. Rondi Davies, a faculty member at Queensborough Community College, City University New York, during two years of forced online synchronous learning brought on by the COVID-19 pandemic. This open educational resource collects many of Dr. Davies’ favorite open-access materials and supplements them with her own work within a single, cohesive laboratory manual intended for two-year, non-major college students from the New York area.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1163zAccess online version02656nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245007500164264004300239264007000282264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505025300529520094500782542004101727546002701768588004101795650002501836650003101861700004401892700003401936700004401970700004902014700004302063710003902106856007702145OTLid0001164MnU20260316020525.0m     o  d s      cr            220502s2022    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942701404  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aModelo Kaizen en el sector públicobKaizen model in the public sector 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Marco Teórico – Metodología “Kaizen” y Gestión de la Calidad -- 2. Base legal en Ecuador para mejorar la calidad en las Instituciones Públicas -- 3. Estructuración del modelo de mejora para la eficiencia en las instituciones públicas0 aLas instituciones del sector público deben acogerse a las necesidades emanadas por sus usuarios, por esto son controladas por diferentes entidades gubernamentales y cumplen diferentes normativas legales. Bajo este enfoque surgen diferentes metodologías para la eficiencia y eficacia, el libro responde a un modelo “Kaizen” pero bajo la metodología gubernamental de Gobierno por Resultados. El modelo presentado utiliza herramientas de calidad como identificación de las mudas que corresponden a los desperdicios, aplicación de las 5s que es una metodología aplicada a la limpieza, orden, planificación, seguridad y autodisciplina, estas dos herramientas bajo un esquema PHVA que no es más que el proceso de planificar, hacer, verificar y actuar. Para poder aplicar este modelo se debe obtener datos de los procesos y actividades, con lo cual se tiene un antecedente y poder medir el cumplimiento de los objetivos institucionales1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCésar Iván, Casanova-Villalbaeauthor1 aJaqueline, Maybellineeauthor1 aCésar, Rivadeneira – Moreiraeauthor1 aFrancisco Marcelo, Ramos – Secairaeauthor1 aFranklin Roberto, Bueno-Moyanoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1164zAccess online version03671nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134050001300144100002900157245006900186264004300255264006600298264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505061400541520181201155542004102967546001603008588004103024650003103065650002503096650003603121710003903157856007703196OTLid0001165MnU20260406020526.0m     o  d s      cr            220506s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM586 4aLB1062.61 aWilliams, Monicaeauthor00aResearch Methods for Criminal  Justice StudentscMonica Williams 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMonica Williamsc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Thinking Like a Researcher -- 1. Scientific Research -- 2. Paradigms, Theories, and Research -- 3. Ethics in Research -- II. Research Design -- 4. Research questions -- 5. Research approaches and goals -- 6. Research methodologies -- 7. Measurement -- 8. Sampling -- III. Qualitative Data Collection and Analysis Techniques -- 9. Focus groups -- 10. Field research -- 11. Qualitative data analysis -- IV. A Qualitative and Quantitative Data Collection Technique -- 12. Interviews -- V. Quantitative Data Collection and Analysis Techniques -- 13. Surveys -- 14. Experiments -- 15. Quantitative data analysis0 aThis book is based on two open-access textbooks: Bhattacherjee’s (2012) Social science research: Principles, methods, and practices and Blackstone’s (2012) Principles of sociological inquiry: Qualitative and quantitative methods. I first used Bhattacherjee’s book in a graduate-level criminal justice research methods course. I chose the book because it was an open educational resource that covered the major topics of my course. While I found the book adequate for my purposes, the business school perspective did not always fit with my criminal justice focus. I decided to rewrite the textbook for undergraduate and graduate students in my criminal justice research methods courses. As I researched other open- educational resources for teaching social science research methods, I found Blackstone’s book, which covered more of the social science and qualitative methods perspectives that I wanted to incorporate into my book. As a result, this open-access textbook includes some content from both previous works along with my own additions based on my extensive experience and expertise in conducting qualitative and quantitative research in social science settings and in mentoring students through the research process. My Ph.D. is in Sociology, and I currently teach undergraduates and graduate students in a criminal justice program at Weber State University. Throughout my career, I have conducted and published the results of research projects using a variety of methods, including surveys, case studies, in-depth interviews, participant observation, content analysis, and secondary analysis of quantitative data. I have also mentored undergraduates in conducting community-based research projects using many of these same methods with the addition of focus groups and program evaluations.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1165zAccess online version03252nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000900153050000700162100003500169245011800204264004300322264007000365264001200435300002200447336002600469337002600495338003600521341002800557490002700585505071400612520117701326542004102503546001602544588004102560650002302601650002602624650003302650650003102683710003902714856007702753OTLid0001166MnU20260105020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220512s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789942701404  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aJA71 4aH11 aGarcía-Osorio, Nelsoneauthor03aLa política petrolera en el gobierno de la revolución ciudadanabEl caso del Campo SachacNelson García-Osorio 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAntecedentes -- Sistema de explotación del recurso natural petróleo -- Entorno jurídico en el contexto de los recursos naturales -- Constitución de la República del Ecuador -- Ley de hidrocarburos -- Sistema especial de licitaciones y reglamentos -- Reglamento de contratación para obras, bienes y servicios específicos de Petroecuador y sus empresas filiale -- Antecedentes de explotación en el Campo Sacha -- El Proceso de transferencia del Campo Sacha a Operaciones Río Napo CEM -- Contrato modificatorio al contrato No 2009073 de servicios específicos -- Contrato modificatorio al contrato No. 2009073 y a su modificatorio No. 2009085 de servicios específicos -- Conclusiones -- Recomendaciones0 aEn la primera parte, se realiza un resumen del manejo del petróleo a partir de 1972 hasta la actualidad, así como también se describe la política petrolera aplicada por los gobiernos, desde la administración del doctor Oswaldo Hurtado hasta la administración del señor Guillermo Lasso. En la segunda, se analiza el entorno jurídico en el contexto de los recursos naturales especialmente del petróleo, en el marco de la Ley de Hidrocarburos y de la Constitución de la República del Ecuador. Y en la tercera, se analiza la producción en el Campo Sacha, adjudicada a ORNCEM mediante el contrato de servicios específicos y de acuerdo a sus dos contratos modificatorios. Se concluye con algunas consideraciones que se deben tomar en cuenta y que llaman a la reflexión cuando se proponen y ejecutan contratos cuyo beneficio no es el mejor para el país. Por otro lado, los bosques son grandes “limpiadores” de dióxido de carbono, al ser destruidos se anula su potencial de absorción y, por lo tanto, contribuyen al calentamiento global del planeta por el incremento de gases de efecto invernadero, razón por la cual, se debe contrarrestar la deforestación.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1166zAccess online version02021nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002900145245005600174264004300230264007500273264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505042100525520044400946542001601390546001601406588004001422650003201462650003701494710003901531856007701570OTLid0001167MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220512s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aBernstein, Davideauthor00aPatterns for Beginning ProgrammerscDavid Bernstein 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Madison Universityc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Patterns Requiring Knowledge of Types, Variables, and Arithmetic Operators -- II. Patterns Requiring Knowledge of Logical and Relational Operators, Conditions, and Methods -- III. Patterns Requiring Knowledge of Loops, Arrays, and I/O -- IV. Patterns Requiring Advanced Knowledge of Arrays and Arrays of Arrays -- V. Patterns Requiring Knowledge of String Objects -- VI. Patterns Requiring Knowledge of References0 aProgramming patterns are solutions to problems that require the creation of a small fragment of code that will be part of a larger program. Hence, this book is about teaching you how to write such fragments of code. However, it is not about teaching you the syntax of the statements in the fragments, it assumes that you already know the syntax. Instead, it is about finding solutions to problems that arise when first learning to program.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1167zAccess online version02074nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135100002700143245004100170264004300211264006400254264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505027000495520064500765542003001410546001601440588004001456650002601496650002601522650002401548710003901572856007701611OTLid0001168MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220512s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB72 4aBL11 aHanneken, Toddeauthor00aTheological QuestionscTodd Hanneken 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTodd Hannekenc2022. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 What questions did the Israelites ask? -- 3 What questions did the early Jews and Christians ask? -- 4 What questions did Christendom ask? -- 5 What questions did the protestant reformers ask? -- 6 What questions did 20th century Christians ask?0 aTheological Questions is an Open Educational Resource (free textbook) that originates from St. Mary’s University in San Antonio and was created with funding form the Atla OER Grant Program. This open textbook was used at St. Mary's in the first of two required core theology courses. It is designed to give a broad historical overview of theological questions from the perspective of the Catholic tradition. It seeks to represent fairly a variety of questions and answers within and beyond the Catholic tradition. This OER is a foundation for other teachers of introductory courses in theology who may wish to adapt it for their purposes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1168zAccess online version02301nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100002800143245007300171264004300244264008400287264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505016900548520095200717542003001669546001601699588004001715650002501755650003101780710003901811856007701850OTLid0001169MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220513s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH11 aSerbulo, Leanneeauthor00aUrban LiteracybLearning to Read the City Around YoucLeanne Serbulo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2022. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Introduction -- Acknowledgments -- Dedication -- Accessibility Statement -- Cities -- Environment -- Development -- Representation -- Culture -- Housing0 aThis book introduces students to the basic concepts of urban studies. It is an interdisciplinary text that was developed for lower-division undergraduate students. The book is organized into thematic chapters that explore different aspects of urban life, such as the environment, housing, and culture. Each chapter introduces a new way of conceptualizing the city, presents core theories and concepts, and provides examples and case studies from cities around the globe to illustrate the ideas presented in the text. At the end of each chapter, there are review questions and a series of interactive field activities where students can apply the concepts introduced in the chapter to a real-world setting. Many of the field activities can be adapted to online or remote learning modalities. This textbook is appropriate for interdisciplinary courses with urban themes or for introductory urban studies, urban sociology, or urban geography classes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1169zAccess online version03198nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002900135245007600164264004300240264005800283264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505139700515520053501912542004102447546001602488588004102504650002002545650002602565700003502591700002602626700003202652710003902684856007702723OTLid0001170MnU20260406020527.0m     o  d s      cr            220526s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aMiller, Angela Leauthor00aAmerican EncountersbArt, History, and Cultural IdentitycAngela Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Louis, MObWashington University Librariesc2018. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: The Art of Indigenous Americans before 1500 C.E. -- Chapter 2: The Old World and the New: First Phases of Encounter, 1492-1750 -- Chapter 3: Early Colonial Arts, 1632-1734 -- Chapter 4: Late Colonial Encounters: The New World, Africa, Asia, and Europe, 1735-1797 -- Chapter 5: Art, Revolution, and The New Nation, 1776-1828 -- Chapter 6: The Body Politic, 1828-1865 -- Chapter 7: Native and European Arts at the Boundaries of Culture: The Frontier West and Pacific Norrthwest, 1820s-1850s -- Chapter 8: Nature's Nation, 1820-1865 -- Chapter 9: Post-War Challenges: Reconstruction, the Centennial Years, and Beyond, 1865-1900 -- Chapter 10: A New Internationalism: The Arts in an Expanding World, 1876-1900 -- Chapter 11: Exploration and Retrenchment: The Arts in Unsettling Times, 1890-1900 -- Chapter 12: The Arts Confront the New Century: Renewal and Continuity, 1900-1920 -- Chapter 13: Transnational Exchanges: Modernism and Modernity Beyond Borders, 1913-1940 -- Chapter 14: The Arts and the City, 1913-1940 -- Chapter 15: Searching for Roots, 1918-1940 -- Chapter 16: Social Visions: The Arts in the Depression years, 1929-1941 -- Chapter 17: Cold War and the Age of the Atom: Consensus and Anxiety, 1945-1960 -- Chapter 18: Art into Life, 1960-1980 -- Chapter 19: American Art in Flux, 1980-Present -- Glossary -- Notes -- Bibliography -- Picture Credits -- Index0 aAmerican Encounters provides a narrative of the history of American art that focuses on historical encounters among diverse cultures, upon broad structural transformations such as the rise of the middle classes and the emergence of consumer and mass culture, and on the fluid conversations between "high" art and vernacular expressions. The text emphasizes the intersections among cultures and populations, as well as the exchanges, borrowings, and appropriations that have enriched and vitalized our collective cultural heritage.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBerlo, Janet Catherineeauthor1 aWolf, Bryan Jeauthor1 aRoberts, Jennifer Leauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1170zAccess online version05404nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155050000700165245004400172264004300216264003900259264001200298300002200310336002600332337002600358338003600384341002800420490002700448505333200475520076703807542004104574546001604615588004004631650004304671650002304714650003104737700002604768700003204794700002804826710003904854856007704893OTLid0001171MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220526s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781778060304  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aQH301 4aH100aFood StudiesbMatter, Meaning, Movement 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Introduction -- How to use this book -- Submissions and Review -- Adopting this Book -- Accessibility Statement -- About the Editors -- Creative: Illustrating Food, Ali Kenefick -- Creative: Poetics and Politics, David Szanto -- Perspective: Food and Identity, Kate Gardner Burt -- Case: Japanese Food Identity, Maya Hey -- Creative: Food Practices Photo Essay, Lynn M. Walters -- Case: 'Reading' Menus, L. Sasha Gora -- Creative: Tasting 'Authenticity,' Annika Walsh and fin-xuan lee -- Case: Foood in Samoa, Garrett Hillyer -- Perspective: Place-Based Designations, Eden Kinkaid -- Creative: Food Tours, Natalie Doonan -- Perspective: Food Meanings, Marylynn Steckley -- Perspective: Gastronomy, Stan Blackley and Donald Reid -- Case: Food ni Kyrgyzstan, Christian Kelly Scott and Guangqing Chi -- Creative: Street Food Vendors, Vincent Andrisani -- Case: School Lunchtimes, Yukari Seko and Lina Rahouma -- Creative: Collaborative Eating Performances, Annika Walsh -- Perspective: Food Relationships, Sara Rotz -- Creative: Poems for Pollniatoors, Andrea Elena Noriega -- Case: Food and Folklore, Lucy Long -- Perspective: Household Foodwork, Mary Anne Martin and Michael Classens -- Creative: Making Mead, Joshua Steckley -- Perspective: Nutrition Paradigms, Alissa Overend -- Perspective: Eating Healthy, Jennifer Brady -- Activity: Classifying Food, Erin Sperling and Sara Scharf -- Creative: The Foodish Gaze, Annika Walsh -- Perspective: Food Allergies, Janis Goldiie -- Creative: Form and Matter, Annika Walsh -- Perspective: Salt, Liam Cole Young -- Case: Artisan Cheese, Amy Trubek -- Perspective: Disordered Eating, Danyael Lutgens and Andrew Ryder -- Case: Superfood Advertising, Anne F. MacLennan and Irena Knezevic -- Perspective: Breast Milk, Janet Colson -- Perspective: Food Insecurity, Michael Classens and Mary Anne Martin -- Creative: Food System Blues, Faris Ahmed and Tommy Wall -- Creative: Food Waste, Pamela Tudge -- Perspective: Food Access, Laine Young -- Case: Food Rescue, Leda Cooks -- Perspective: Financialization of Food, Phoebe Stephens -- Creative: Solidarity for Food Businesses, Annika Walsh -- Perspective: Fair Trade, Eefje De Gelder -- Case: Migrant Farm Workers, Courtney Jane Clause -- Case: Pollinator Ecologies, D. Susan Willis Chan and Jennifer Marshman -- Perspective: Pollinators and People, Jennifer Marshman and D. Susan Willis Chan -- Creative: Ode to Pollinators, Andrea Elena Noriega -- Case: Community Gardens; Howard Rosing, Ben Helphand, and Amy DeLorenzo -- Case: Backyard Chickens, Johanna Wilkes -- Creative: Ode to Nature, Andrea Elena Noriega -- Perspective: Fisheries, Kristen Lowitt -- Creative: Foood Tarot Toolkit, Markéta Dolejšová -- Perspective: Digital Agriculture, Mascha Gugganig and Kelly Bronson -- Case: Food Traceability, Blue Miaoran Dong -- Case: Food Safety Act, Amanda Shankland -- Creative: A Last Supper, Stephanie Couey -- Case: Meat in Literature, Stephanie Couey -- Perspective: Meat and Materiality, Kristie O'Neill -- Case: Food and Art, Edward Whittall -- Perspective: Sustainable Protein; Ryan Katz-Rosene, Andrew Heffernan, and Anil Arora -- Perspective: Eating Insects, Laura Shine -- Case: Veganism and Morality, Melissa Montanari -- Creative: Herding Humans, Annika Walsh -- Glossary -- Recommended Citations -- --0 aFood Studies aims to help readers understand and address numerous issues within food, food culture, and food systems. These subjects transcend disciplinary boundaries and call attention to how matter, meaning, and movement produce complex and dynamic food-human realities. Chapters range from sovereignty to breastfeeding, financialization to food porn, pollination to fair trade. Embedded throughout, art, poetry, illustration, and audiovisual works offer moments to reflect on and synthesize the text-based entries. Through reading, classroom discussion, and engaging with the extensive pedagogical tools, learners and teachers alike may acquire a new sense of things foodish—along with a new sense of their own place and role within food systems themselves.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSzanto, Davideauthor1 aDi Battista, Amandaeauthor1 aKnezevic, Irenaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1171zAccess online version02256nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002600140245006300166264004300229264005000272264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505060300499520055901102542004101661546001601702588004101718650003101759710003901790856007701829OTLid0001172MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220526s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.21 aThird, Sheryleauthor00aReflective Practice in Early Years EducationcSheryl Third 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aON, CanadabFanshawe College Pressboksc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Land Acknowledgements -- Forward -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Reflective Practice -- Chapter 2: Reflective Practice -- Chapter 3: Models and Theories of Practice -- Chapter 4: Am I a reflective practitioner? -- Chapter 5: Writing for reflection -- Chapter 6 - Everyday Reflection -- Chapter 7: Reclaiming Reflective Practice -- Chapter 8: The disposition, values, principles, and ethics of a reflective practitioner -- Chapter 9: Communities of Practice and the Reflective Process -- Chapter 10: Professional Practice and the Critical Reflective Process -- Versioning History --0 aThis resource will provide a context that will allow the reader to consider their obligation to reflect from their own perspective and will explore how to create a practice that best suits their professional setting. This book will bring together in one place the history, the values, the skills and disposition required to be a reflective practitioner. It is a textbook with elements of a workbook, embedded are opportunities to watch, to think, to write, and to listen allowing the reader to become a purposeful and intentional reflective practitioner.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1172zAccess online version02610nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245004400167264004300211264007100254264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505016200502520134700664542001602011546001602027588004102043650002302084700002502107710003902132856007702171OTLid0001174MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220526s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aMeixler, Marcia Seauthor00aConservation techniquescMarcia Meixler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew Brunswick, New JerseybRutgers University Library Pressc2021. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Foreward -- Introduction -- Fundamental Techniques -- Biologically-Focused Techniques -- Habitat-Focused Techniques -- Holistic Techniques0 aThis book fosters the recognition of options for making progress toward increased environmental conservation through an understanding of the underlying science and practice of a variety of conservation techniques. Today, there are expected benefits from integrated science and practice, and many people are promoting this as the way forward to improve our environment. Over time, trends emerge regarding the best way to conserve the environment, but so far an outstanding solution has not emerged. Each conservation technique has its foundational concepts, limitations, and implementation issues. Reviewing a collection of techniques provides a basis for considering which approach will be best for any specific environmental challenge. This book should advance the recognition of the challenges managing the environment, techniques that can be used to address the challenges, and the ways they might help foster the integration of science and the practice of ecological conservation. This book is intended for students and management professionals who might benefit from a vision and guiding path that leads toward achieving ecological conservation for the long-term. This book is unique in the Open Educational Resources (OER) space as it seeks to present a range of conservation techniques with differing science concepts and applications.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBain, Mark Beauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1174zAccess online version01558nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000900135100002500144245006700169264004300236264004700279264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505040700503520003100910542001600941546001600957588004000973650003001013650002501043710003901068856007701107OTLid0001175MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220527s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aG1281 aCheung, Wingeauthor00aArcade Expression Crash Course with COVID-19 datacWing Cheung 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSAN MARCOS, CALIFORNIAbWing Cheungc2021. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Configuring pop-ups and labels in ArcGIS Pro with Arcade expressions -- Part 2: Configuring symbology in ArcGIS Pro with Arcade expressions -- Part 3: Configuring pop-ups and labels in ArcGIS Online with Arcade expressions -- Part 4: Using Logic in Arcade -- Part 5: Decoding Values and Dates -- Part 6: Working with geometry in Arcade -- Part 7: Working with data dictionaries in ArcGIS Online0 aWritten for ArcGIS Pro 2.51 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1175zAccess online version02680nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002500156245007000181250001600251264004300267264005400310264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505083600541520056601377542003001943546001601973588004101989650004402030700002602074700002802100700002602128710003902154856007702193OTLid0001176MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220527s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101318  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ11011 aButts, Tracyeeditor00aWomen WorldwidebTransnational Feminist PerspectivescTracy Butts  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface and Acknowledgments -- Women Worldwide -- Transnational Feminism: Reshmi Dutt-Ballerstadt and Kiana Anderson -- World Media: Janell Hobson -- Global Politics of the Body: Tracy Butts -- Sexualities Worldwide: Sharadha Kalyanam -- Politics of Women's Health: Mehra Shirazi -- Reproductive Freedoms: Jayamala Mayilsamy and Kamalaveni Veni -- Families in Global Context: Rebecca J. Lambert -- Gender-Based Violence Worldwide: Patti Duncan -- Women's Work in a Global Economy: Paula Sheridan -- Women and Environmental Politics: Luhui Whitebear -- Women and Political Systems Worldwide: Carrie N. Baker and Marcela Rodrigues-Sherley -- Women, War and Peace: Amanda Milburn -- Religion in Women's Lives Worldwide: Shannon Garvin -- Women's Activism Worldwide: Khatera Afghan and Folah Fletcher -- About the Authors -- Versioning0 aDuring the past few years, we’ve witnessed how interconnected our world is. These instances of global interconnection—both positive and negative—have differing impacts on people based on gender while also creating and reinforcing the ways people experience gender. We see that experiences of gender are always shaped by nationality, race/ethnicity, sexual identity, social class, ability, age, and religion. This social construction of gender, its shaping of the world, and its effects on individuals and groups of people are at the core of this textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks1 aDuncan, Pattieeditor1 aLockhart, Janeteeditor1 aShaw, Susan Meeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1176zAccess online version08476nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245004800163264004300211264005900254264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002500435490002700460505683100487520050107318542001607819546001607835588004007851650003307891700002707924700003507951710003907986856007708025OTLid0001179MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            220527s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA711 aRom, Mark Carleauthor00aIntroduction to Political SciencecMark Rom 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Unit 1. Introduction to Political Science -- Chapter 1. What Is Politics and What is Political Science? -- Introduction -- 1.1 Defining Politics: Who Gets What, When, Where, How, and Why? -- 1.2 Public Policy, Public Interest, and Power -- 1.3 Political Science: The Systematic Study of Politics -- 1.4 Normative Political Science -- 1.5 Empirical Political Science -- 1.6 Individuals, Groups, Institutions, and International Relations -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Unit 2. Individuals -- Chapter 2. Political Behavior is Human Behavior -- Introduction -- 2.1 What Goals Should We Seek in Politics? -- 2.2 Why Do Humans Make the Political Choices That They Do? -- 2.3 Human Behavior Is Partially Predictable -- 2.4 The Importance of Context for Political Decisions -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 3. Political Ideology -- Introduction -- 3.1 The Classical Origins of Western Political Ideologies -- 3.2 The Laws of Nature and the Social Contract -- 3.3 The Development of Varieties of Liberalism -- 3.4 Nationalism, Communism, Fascism, and Authoritarianism -- 3.5 Contemporary Democratic Liberalism -- 3.6 Contemporary Ideologies Further to the Political Left -- 3.7 Contemporary Ideologies Further to the Political Right -- 3.8 Political Ideologies That Reject Political Ideology: Scientific Socialism, Burkeanism, and Religious Extremism -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 4. Civil Liberties -- Introduction -- 4.1 The Freedom of the Individual -- 4.2 Constitutions and Individual Liberties -- 4.3 The Right to Privacy, Self-Determination, and the Freedom of Ideas -- 4.4 Freedom of Movement -- 4.5 The Rights of the Accused -- 4.6 The Right to a Healthy Environment -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 5. Political Participation and Public Opinion -- Introduction -- 5.1 What Is Political Participation? -- 5.2 What Limits Voter Participation in the United States? -- 5.3 How Do Individuals Participate Other Than Voting? -- 5.4 What Is Public Opinion and Where Does It Come From? -- 5.5 How Do We Measure Public Opinion? -- 5.6 Why Is Public Opinion Important? -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Unit 3. Groups -- Chapter 6. The Fundamentals of Group Political Activity -- Introduction -- 6.1 Political Socialization: The Ways People Become Political -- 6.2 Political Culture: How People Express Their Political Identity -- 6.3 Collective Dilemmas: Making Group Decisions -- 6.4 Collective Action Problems: The Problem of Incentives -- 6.5 Resolving Collective Action Problems -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 7. Civil Rights -- Introduction -- 7.1 Civil Rights and Constitutionalism -- 7.2 Political Culture and Majority-Minority Relations -- 7.3 Civil Rights Abuses -- 7.4 Civil Rights Movements -- 7.5 How Do Governments Bring About Civil Rights Change? -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 8. Interest Groups, Political Parties, and Elections -- Introduction -- 8.1 What Is an Interest Group? -- 8.2 What Are the Pros and Cons of Interest Groups? -- 8.3 Political Parties -- 8.4 What Are the Limits of Parties? -- 8.5 What Are Elections and Who Participates? -- 8.6 How Do People Participate in Elections? -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Unit 4. Institutions -- Chapter 9. Legislation -- Introduction -- 9.1 What Do Legislatures Do? -- 9.2 What Is the Difference between Parliamentary and Presidential Systems? -- 9.3 What Is the Difference between Unicameral and Bicameral Systems? -- 9.4 The Decline of Legislative Influence -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 10. Executives, Cabinets, and Bureaucracies -- Introduction -- 10.1 Democracies: Parliamentary, Presidential, and Semi-Presidential Regimes -- 10.2 The Executive in Presidential Regimes -- 10.3 The Executive in Parliamentary Regimes -- 10.4 Advantages, Disadvantages, and Challenges of Presidential and Parliamentary Regimes -- 10.5 Semi-Presidential Regimes -- 10.6 How Do Cabinets Function in Presidential and Parliamentary Regimes? -- 10.7 What Are the Purpose and Function of Bureaucracies? -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 11. Courts and Law -- Introduction -- 11.1 What Is the Judiciary? -- 11.2 How Does the Judiciary Take Action? -- 11.3 Types of Legal Systems around the World -- 11.4 Criminal versus Civil Laws -- 11.5 Due Process and Judicial Fairness -- 11.6 Judicial Review versus Executive Sovereignty -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 12. The Media -- Introduction -- 12.1 The Media as a Political Institution: Why Does It Matter? -- 12.2 Types of Media and the Changing Media Landscape -- 12.3 How Do Media and Elections Interact? -- 12.4 The Internet and Social Media -- 12.5 Declining Global Trust in the Media -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Unit 5. States and International Relations -- Chapter 13. Governing Regimes -- Introduction -- 13.1 Contemporary Government Regimes: Power, Legitimacy, and Authority -- 13.2 Categorizing Contemporary Regimes -- 13.3 Recent Trends: Illiberal Representative Regimes -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 14. International Relations -- Introduction -- 14.1 What Is Power, and How Do We Measure It? -- 14.2 Understanding the Different Types of Actors in the International System -- 14.3 Sovereignty and Anarchy -- 14.4 Using Levels of Analysis to Understand Conflict -- 14.5 The Realist Worldview -- 14.6 The Liberal and Social Worldview -- 14.7 Critical Worldviews -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 15. International Law and International Organizations -- Introduction -- 15.1 The Problem of Global Governance -- 15.2 International Law -- 15.3 The United Nations and Global Intergovernmental Organizations (IGOs) -- 15.4 How Do Regional IGOs Contribute to Global Governance? -- 15.5 Non-state Actors: Nongovernmental Organizations (NGOs) -- 15.6 Non-state Actors beyond NGOs -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- Chapter 16. International Political Economy -- Introduction -- 16.1 The Origins of International Political Economy -- 16.2 The Advent of the Liberal Economy -- 16.3 The Bretton Woods Institutions -- 16.4 The Post–Cold War Period and Modernization Theory -- 16.5 From the 1990s to the 2020s: Current Issues in IPE -- 16.6 Considering Poverty, Inequality, and the Environmental Crisis -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Review Questions -- Suggested Readings -- References -- Index0 aDesigned to meet the scope and sequence of your course, OpenStax Introduction to Political Science provides a strong foundation in global political systems, exploring how and why political realities unfold. Rich with examples of individual and national social action, this text emphasizes students’ role in the political sphere and equips them to be active and informed participants in civil society. Learn more about what this free, openly-licensed textbook has to offer you and your students.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aHidaka, Masakieauthor1 aWalker, Rachel Bzostekeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1179zAccess online version09356nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245002600155264004300181264005900224300002200283336002600305337002600331338003600357341002500393490002700418505774000445520050108185542001608686546001608702588004008718650002308758700002908781700002908810700002708839710003908866856007708905OTLid0001180MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            220527s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693541  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHG17300aPrinciples of Finance 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1. Introduction to Finance -- Why it Matters -- 1.1 What Is Finance? -- 1.2 The Role of Finance in an Organization -- 1.3 Importance of Data and Technology -- 1.4 Careers in Finance -- 1.5 Markets and Participants -- 1.6 Microeconomic and Macroeconomic Matters -- 1.7 Financial Instruments -- 1.8 Concepts of Time and Value -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Video Activity -- Chapter 2. Corporate Structure and Governance -- Why it Matters -- 2.1 Business Structures -- 2.2 Relationship between Shareholders and Company Management -- 2.3 Role of the Board of Directors -- 2.4 Agency Issues: Shareholders and Corporate Boards -- 2.5 Interacting with Investors, Intermediaries, and Other Market Participants -- 2.6 Companies in Domestic and Global Markets -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Video Activity -- Chapter 3. Economic Foundations: Money and Rates -- Why It Matters -- 3.1 Microeconomics -- 3.2 Macroeconomics -- 3.3 Business Cycles and Economic Activity -- 3.4 Interest Rates -- 3.5 Foreign Exchange Rates -- 3.6 Sources and Characteristics of Economic Data -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 4. Accrual Accounting Process -- Why It Matters -- 4.1 Cash versus Accrual Accounting -- 4.2 Economic Basis for Accrual Accounting -- 4.3 How Does a Company Recognize a Sale and an Expense? -- 4.4 When Should a Company Capitalize or Expense an Item? -- 4.5 What Is “Profit” versus “Loss” for the Company? -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 5. Financial Statements -- Why It Matters -- 5.1 The Income Statement -- 5.2 The Balance Sheet -- 5.3 The Relationship between the Balance Sheet and the Income Statement -- 5.4 The Statement of Owner’s Equity -- 5.5 The Statement of Cash Flows -- 5.6 Operating Cash Flow and Free Cash Flow to the Firm (FCFF) -- 5.7 Common-Size Statements -- 5.8 Reporting Financial Activity -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 6. Measures of Financial Health -- Why It Matters -- 6.1 Ratios: Condensing Information into Smaller Pieces -- 6.2 Operating Efficiency Ratios -- 6.3 Liquidity Ratios -- 6.4 Solvency Ratios -- 6.5 Market Value Ratios -- 6.6 Profitability Ratios and the DuPont Method -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 7. Time Value of Money I: Single Payment Value -- Why It Matters -- 7.1 Now versus Later Concepts -- 7.2 Time Value of Money (TVM) Basics -- 7.3 Methods for Solving Time Value of Money Problems -- 7.4 Applications of TVM in Finance -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 8. Time Value of Money II: Equal Multiple Payments -- Why It Matters -- 8.1 Perpetuities -- 8.2 Annuities -- 8.3 Loan Amortization -- 8.4 Stated versus Effective Rates -- 8.5 Equal Payments with a Financial Calculator and Excel -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 9. Time Value of Money III: Unequal Multiple Payments Values -- Why It Matters -- 9.1 Timing of Cash Flows -- 9.2 Unequal Payments Using a Financial Calculator or Microsoft Excel -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 10. Bonds and Bond Valuation -- Why It Matters -- 10.1 Characteristics of Bonds -- 10.2 Bond Valuation -- 10.3 Using the Yield Curve -- 10.4 Risks of Interest Rates and Default -- 10.5 Using Spreadsheets to Solve Bond Problems -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 11. Stocks and Stock Valuation -- Why It Matters -- 11.1 Multiple Approaches to Stock Valuation -- 11.2 Dividend Discount Models (DDMs) -- 11.3 Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) Model -- 11.4 Preferred Stock -- 11.5 Efficient Markets -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 12. Historical Performance of US Markets -- Why It Matters -- 12.1 Overview of US Financial Markets -- 12.2 Historical Picture of Inflation -- 12.3 Historical Picture of Returns to Bonds -- 12.4 Historical Picture of Returns to Stocks -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Video Activity -- Chapter 13. Statistical Analysis in Finance -- Why It Matters -- 13.1 Measures of Center -- 13.2 Measures of Spread -- 13.3 Measures of Position -- 13.4 Statistical Distributions -- 13.5 Probability Distributions -- 13.6 Data Visualization and Graphical Displays -- 13.7 The R Statistical Analysis Tool -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 14. Regression Analysis in Finance -- Why It Matters -- 14.1 Correlation Analysis -- 14.2 Linear Regression Analysis -- 14.3 Best-Fit Linear Model -- 14.4 Regression Applications in Finance -- 14.5 Predictions and Prediction Intervals -- 14.6 Use of R Statistical Analysis Tool for Regression Analysis -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 15. How to Think about Investing -- Why It Matters -- 15.1 Risk and Return to an Individual Asset -- 15.2 Risk and Return to Multiple Assets -- 15.3 The Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) -- 15.4 Applications in Performance Measurement -- 15.5 Using Excel to Make Investment Decisions -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 16. How Companies Think about Investing -- Why It Matters -- 16.1 Payback Period Method -- 16.2 Net Present Value (NPV) Method -- 16.3 Internal Rate of Return (IRR) Method -- 16.4 Alternative Methods -- 16.5 Choosing between Projects -- 16.6 Using Excel to Make Company Investment Decisions -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 17. How Firms Raise Capital -- Why It Matters -- 17.1 The Concept of Capital Structure -- 17.2 The Costs of Debt and Equity Capital -- 17.3 Calculating the Weighted Average Cost of Capital -- 17.4 Capital Structure Choices -- 17.5 Optimal Capital Structure -- 17.6 Alternative Sources of Funds -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 18. Financial Forecasting -- Why It Matters -- 18.1 The Importance of Forecasting -- 18.2 Forecasting Sales -- 18.3 Pro Forma Financials -- 18.4 Generating the Complete Forecast -- 18.5 Forecasting Cash Flow and Assessing the Value of Growth -- 18.6 Using Excel to Create the Long-Term Forecast -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Chapter 19. The Importance of Trade Credit and Working Capital in Planning -- Why It Matters -- 19.1 What Is Working Capital? -- 19.2 What Is Trade Credit? -- 19.3 Cash Management -- 19.4 Receivables Management -- 19.5 Inventory Management -- 19.6 Using Excel to Create the Short-Term Plan -- Summary -- Key Terms -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Video Activity -- Chapter 20. Risk management and the Financial Manager -- Why It Matters -- 20.1 The Importance of Risk Management -- 20.2 Commodity Price Risk -- 20.3 Exchange Rates and Risk -- 20.4 Interest Rate Risk -- Summary -- Key Terms -- CFA Institute -- Multiple Choice -- Review Questions -- Problems -- Video Activity -- Index0 aDesigned to meet the scope and sequence of your course, Principles of Finance provides a strong foundation in financial applications using an innovative use-case approach to explore their role in business decision-making. An array of financial calculator and downloadable Microsoft Excel data exercises also engage students in experiential learning throughout. With flexible integration of technical instruction and data, this title prepares students for current practice and continual evolution.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aDahlquist, Julieeauthor1 aKnight, Rainfordeauthor1 aAdams, Alan S.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1180zAccess online version02644nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135050001100145100003300156245007100189264004300260264007300303264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505049900553520082001052542001601872546001601888588004101904650002001945650004301965650004402008700002702052700002702079710003902106856007702145OTLid0001185MnU20260406020622.0m     o  d s      cr            220604s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aHM621 4aHQ11011 aReddy-Best, Kelly L.eauthor00aDress, Appearance, and Diversity in U.S. SocietycKelly Reddy-Best 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use This Book -- I. Dress Theories and Concepts -- 1. Orientation -- 2. Dress, Appearance, and Identity -- 3. Identity, Social Justice, and Dress -- 4. Social Science Theories -- 5. Culture -- 6. Subculture and Group Membership -- 7. Fashion Theories -- II. Dress and Marginalized Communities -- 8. Sex and Gender -- 9. Sexuality -- 10. Beauty and Attractiveness -- 11. Disability -- 12. Religion -- 13. Race and Ethnicity -- Final Student Reflection -- Book Contributors0 aThis book introduces topics about identity, dress, and the body. Through the content, readers explore how individuals and communities use dress as a way to communicate (i.e. “negotiate” in fashion studies) their various identities. There is heightened attention to social justice, power, privilege, and oppression. That is, the content focuses on the experiences of historically marginalized communities and the ways they navigate dress and dressing their bodies in different contexts. In the first part of the book, readers are introduced to concepts and theories related to fashion, clothing, dress, and/or accessories. In the second part, readers examine the role that fashion, clothing, dress, and/or accessories play in identity development for individuals in marginalized communities in the United States.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks1 aElder, Abbey Keeditor1 aHassall, Lesyaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1185zAccess online version02421nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100003300161245005000194250001600244264004300260264005500303264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505038100535520083000916542003001746546002701776588004001803650003301843650003101876710003901907856007701946OTLid0001186MnU20260406020528.0m     o  d s      cr            220607s2021    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9781955101325  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aBorradaile, Glencoraeauthor02aA la defensa del disensocGlencora Borradaile  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNavegación -- Agradecimientos -- Introducción: el porqué de la seguridad digital -- Parte 1: Introducción a la criptografía -- Parte 2: Represión digital de movimientos sociales (en EUA) -- Parte 3: Defensa de los movimientos sociales (en EUA) -- Conclusión: elección de herramientas de seguridad digital -- Licencia Creative Commons -- Citas recomendadas -- Versiones0 aA la defensa del disenso es una introducción a la criptografía que atiende los efectos sociales de la vigilancia, así como el potencial de protección que brinda el cifrado, con un enfoque en los movimientos sociales nacidos en Estados Unidos. Cada capítulo termina con una historia que aporta un contexto social al material: desde la vigilancia contra protestas contemporáneas en Estados Unidos, hasta la forma en que el Congreso Nacional Africano usó cifrado parcialmente manual para luchar contra el Apartheid en la Sudáfrica de los años 80 del siglo pasado.Puedes leer este libro en forma lineal o puedes elegir los temas sobre los cuales te gustaría aprender. Al inicio de cada capítulo se menciona lo que deberías leer primero (como antecedente) y al final, lo que podría ser de tu interés a continuación.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1186zAccess online version02239nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002600168245006000194264004300254264008500297264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505075300559520019901312542003001511546001601541588004001557650003301597650003101630700002501661700002701686710003901713856007701752OTLid0001187MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220607s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648769804  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLB1139.21 aCarter, Susaneauthor00aOpening Eyes onto Inclusion and DiversitycSusan Carter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducing the key ideas -- Differing childhoods: Transgressing boundaries through thinking differently -- Celebrating diversity: Focusing on inclusion -- Opening eyes onto diversity and inclusion in early childhood education -- Fostering first year nurses’ inclusive practice: A key building black for patient centred care -- Positioning ourselves in multicultural education: Opening our eyes to culture -- Creating an inclusive school for refugees and students with English as a second language or dialect -- Opening eyes to vision impairment: Inclusion is just another way of seeing -- Setting the scene: The importance of Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander cultural perspectives in education (the danger of the single story) -- Conclusion0 aSusan Carter; Professor Lindy-Anne Abawi; Professor Jill Lawrence; Associate Professor Charlotte Brownlow; Renee Desmarchelier; Melissa Fanshawe; Kathryn Gilbey; Michelle Turner; and Jillian Guy1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aAbawi, Lindyeauthor1 aLawrence, Jilleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1187zAccess online version02123nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000900137100002900146245004100175264004300216264007300259264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505025400509520071300763542003001476546001601506588004001522650003301562650003801595710003901633856007701672OTLid0001188MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220607s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aQA761 aAckerman, Gary Leauthor00aTechnology in SchoolscGary Ackerman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bhackscience.educationc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. What Exactly is School? -- 2. Working in Schools -- 3. Infrastructure in Schools -- 4. Supporting School IT Infrastructure -- 5. Users in Schools -- 6. Technology in Teaching -- 7. IT Decision-Making in Schools -- 8. Getting Hired0 aMy purpose in writing this book is to give readers a view into the work of managing information technology in schools. IT professionals will notice differences (some nuanced and some significant) between the needs and expectations of IT users in business and IT in school. With the more complete and more accurate concept the nature of the computing environment necessary for successful schooling, which I intend to provide through this book, IT professionals will be better prepared to meet those needs. Educators will also benefit from this book by clarifying the nature of their IT needs and how these may be different from those that are familiar to IT professionals who are hired to work in your school.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1188zAccess online version01951nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002900163245007200192264004300264264004600307264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505052800530520017001058542003001228546001601258588004001274650003001314650002301344700002601367700003201393710003901425856007701464OTLid0001189MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            220619s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648169717  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aHossain, Sahadateauthor00aProperties and Behavior of SoilbOnline Lab ManualcSahadat Hossain 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgements -- I. Main Body -- 1. Determinaition of Moisture Content -- 2. Specific Gravity Test -- 3. Sieve Analysis -- 4. Hydrometer Analysis -- 5. Atterberg Limit Test -- 6. Compaction Test -- 7. In-Situ Density -- 8. Permeability Test -- 9. Direct Shear Test -- 10. Triaxial Test -- 11. Unconfined Compressive Strength Test -- 12. Consolidation Test -- Bibliography -- Links by Chapter -- Accessibility Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aThis project aims to provide a complete guide for the CE/AREN 3143 course (Properties and Behavior of Soil). Students will be benefitted from this online lab manual.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aIslam, Azijuleauthor1 aBadhon, Faria Fahimeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1189zAccess online version02040nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002700144245005800171250001900229264004300248264006400291264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505043500532520039300967542002701360546001601387588004001403650002501443650003301468700002501501710003901526856007701565OTLid0001190MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            220619s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aGruwell, Cindyeauthor00aCritical Thinking in Academic ResearchcCindy Gruwell  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part I. What is Critical Thinking? -- Part II. Barriers to Critical Thinking -- Part III. Analyzing Arguments -- Part IV. Making an Argument -- Part V. Research Questions -- Part VI. Sources and Information Needs -- Part VII. Types of Sources -- Part VIII. Precision Searching -- Part IX. Evaluating Sources -- Part X. Ethical Use and Citing Sources -- Part XI. Copyright Basics -- Works Cited -- About the Authors0 aCritical Thinking in Academic Research - 2nd Edition provides examples and easy-to-understand explanations to equip students with the skills to develop research questions, evaluate and choose the right sources, search for information, and understand arguments. This 2nd Edition includes new content based on student feedback as well as additional interactive elements throughout the text.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aEwing, Robineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1190zAccess online version02019nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153100002600179245004900205264004300254264008500297264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505064400559520015201203542001601355546001601371588004001387650002701427700002601454700002501480710003901505856007701544OTLid0001191MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220619s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645326109  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aFein, Erich Ceauthor1 aGilmour, Johneauthor00aStatistics for Research StudentscErich Fein 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Country -- Accessibility Information -- About the Authors -- Introduction -- I. Chapter One - Exploring Your Data -- II. Chapter Two - Test Statistics, p Values, Confidence Intervals and Effect Sizes -- III. Chapter Three- Comparing Two Group Means -- IV. Chapter Four - Comparing Associations Between Two Variables -- V. Chapter Five- Comparing Associations Between Multiple Variables -- VI. Chapter Six- Comparing Three or More Group Means -- VII. Chapter Seven- Moderation and Mediation Analyses -- VIII. Chapter Eight- Factor Analysis and Scale Reliability -- IX. Chapter Nine- Nonparametric Statistics -- References0 aThis book aims to help you understand and navigate statistical concepts and the main types of statistical analyses essential for research students.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aMachin, Taynaeauthor1 aHendry, Liameauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1191zAccess online version02187nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002600162245003600188250002000224264004300244264008500287264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505051900549520042001068542004101488546001601529588004001545650002501585650002301610700002801633710003901661856007701700OTLid0001192MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220620s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645326130  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aQH3011 aLexis, Louiseeauthor00aHow To Do SciencecLouise Lexis  aRevised Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgment of Country -- Accessibility Information -- About the Authors -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- I. Main Body -- 1. Science and the Scientific Method -- 2. Design for Discovery -- 3. Using Statistical Analyses -- 4. Data Visualisation -- 5. Accessing Scientific Literature and Referencing -- 6. Communicating Scientific Discoveries to Peers -- 7. Writing a Literature Review -- 8. Sharing Science with the Community -- 9. Your Life and Career as a Scientist -- Glossary -- Accessibility Assessment0 a'How To Do Science' has been written for students of the life sciences who are actively engaged in the scientific process. This guide introduces you to what it means to be a scientist. You will learn about the scientific method and how to carry out many tasks of a scientist, including: designing experiments, visualising data, accessing scientific literature, communicating science, and writing literature reviews.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aJulien, Briannaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1192zAccess online version02661nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002700151245009600178264004300274264006100317264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505035500555520102500910542004101935546001601976588004101992650002602033650002402059650003602083700002802119710003902147856007702186OTLid0001193MnU20260406020528.0m     o  d s      cr            220624s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aAtkinson, Dawneauthor00aIntermediate College WritingbBuilding and Practicing Mindful Writing SkillscDawn Atkinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aButte, MontanabMontana Technological Unviersityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Unit I: Exploring College Writing Fundamentals -- Unit II: Writing Documents -- Unit III: Attending to Design -- Unit IV: Working with Sources -- Unit V: Conducting Research -- Unit VI: Employing Strategies for College Success -- Unit VII: Producing Correspondence -- Unit VIII: Producing Academic Writing -- Unit IX: Refining Your Writing0 aWelcome to Intermediate College Writing: Building and Practicing Mindful Writing Skills, an open textbook designed for use in university‐level courses that focus on cultivating study skills alongside effective academic and workplace writing skills. It offers a no‐cost alternative to commercial products, combining practical guidance with interactive exercises and thoughtfully designed writing opportunities. This textbook’s modular design and ample coverage of topics and genres means that it can be used flexibly over semester‐long or stretch courses, allowing instructors and students to select the chapters that are most relevant for their needs. By blending new material with reviews of key topics, such as academic integrity, the chapters provide fresh perspectives on matters vital to the development of strong writing skills. The book adapts, builds upon, and expands material covered in our first open textbook, Mindful Technical Writing: An Introduction to the Fundamentals (Atkinson & Corbitt, 2021).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aCorbitt, Staceyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1193zAccess online version02325nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003700137245004700174264004300221264005700264300002200321336002600343337002600369338003600395341002800431490002700459505040300486520086900889542002701758546001601785588004101801650002901842710003901871856007701910OTLid0001194MnU20260406020530.0m     o  d s      cr            220627suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4211 aAntunez, Hector Giovannieauthor00aPrinciples of EpidemiologycHector Antunez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universities  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I -- Author's Biography -- Introduction -- Part II -- 1. What is Epidemiology?2. History of Epidemiology -- Timeline of history of epidemiology -- 3. Epidemiology of Infectious Diseases -- 4. Person, Place and Time -- 5. Study Designs Commonly used in Epidemiology -- 6. Basic Epidemiological Methods and Calculations -- 7. More advanced calculations: Odds Ratios and Relative Risk -- Glossary0 aMost books about epidemiology are written for graduate students but this book is especially designed for undergraduates, who are taking an introductory course in epidemiology, and especially for those students who want to know more about epidemiology. But not because it is directed mainly to undergraduates and not to graduate students the course has less rigour and quality, it is because the concepts are introduced, and presented in an easier and simplified form, so, the study of epidemiology becomes less intimidating. While teaching epidemiology for several years, I have found that some students don’t choose epidemiology as a career because the content seems too complicated, presenting the content in a practical manner, and simpler (although some epidemiological concepts are very complex); should motivate students to learn about this subject matter.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1194zAccess online version02129nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245003900163264004300202264007000245264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002500437490002700462505044000489520053000929542003001459546001601489588004101505650003801546700002601584700002901610710003901639856007701678OTLid0001195MnU20260406020533.0m     o  d s      cr            220627s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aYoon, Sang-Seokeauthor00aBeginning Korean 1cSang-Seok Yoon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a책을 펴내면서 Forward -- 등장인물 Characters -- 0. 과 한글 Hangeul, Korean Characters -- 1. 과 안녕하세요 Hello -- 2. 과 오늘 뭐 해요 What are you doing today -- 3. 과 집이 어디예요 Where is your house -- 4. 과 오늘 한국어 수업이 있어요 I have a Korean class today -- 5. 과 어제 왜 안 왔어요 Why didn’t you come yesterday -- 6. 과 생일 파티를 했어요 I had a birthday party0 aThe Beginning Korean 1 is designed for elementary Korean learners to practice and learn how to communicate in Korean. It provides basic grammar, vocabulary, and discourse information that are essential to beginning level students. This book is ideal for learners at the Novice Low to Novice High levels who want to practice writing and pronouncing hangeul, communicate in Korean by creating sentences using basic grammar and vocabulary, and understand and create simple conversations that are useful in everyday conversations1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aPark, Joung-Aeeditor1 aYoo, Jeehaeeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1195zAccess online version03248nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100002600157245004000183264004300223264009600266264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505172300539520032402262542003002586546001602616588004002632650002302672700002602695700002502721710003902746856007702785OTLid0001196MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220630s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135872  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aMichaels, Tomeauthor04aThe Science of PlantscTom Michaels 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Plants in our Lives -- 1.1 What is horticulture? -- 1.2 Science and Experimentation -- 1.3 Plant Parts we Eat -- Chapter 1: Terms -- Chapter 2: Taxonomy and Seed Germination -- 2.1 Plant Taxonomy -- 2.2 Introduction to Seed Germination -- Chapter 2: Terms -- Chapter 3: How Plants Grow, Part 1 -- 3.1 Leaves -- 3.2 Shoots -- 3.3 Roots -- Chapter 3: Terms -- Chapter 4: How Plants Grow, Part 2 -- 4.1 Growth Patterns and Inflorescences -- 4.2 Plant Hormones -- Chapter 4: Terms -- Chapter 5: Inside Plants -- 5.1 Inside Leaves -- 5.2 Inside Stems -- 5.3 Inside Roots -- Chapter 5: Terms -- Chapter 6: Cells, Tissues, and Woody Growth -- 6.1 Plant Cells and Tissues -- 6.2 Woody Growth -- Chapter 6: Terms -- Chapter 7: Meristems and Flowers -- 7.1 Meristem Morphology -- 7.2 Flower Morphology -- Chapter 7: Terms -- Chapter 8: Fruit -- 8.1 Fruit Morphology -- Chapter 8: Terms -- Chapter 9: Seeds -- 9.1 Seed Morphology -- 9.2 Seed Physiology -- Chapter 9: Terms -- Chapter 10: Grafting -- 10.1 Grafts and Wounds -- 10.2 Unique Storage Organs -- Chapter 10: Terms -- Chapter 11: Water and Light -- 11.1 Plants and Water -- 11.2 Light and Photosynthesis -- Chapter 11: Terms -- Chapter 12: Soils, Fertility, and Plant Growth -- 12.1 Soils, Fertility, and Plant Growth -- Chapter 12: Terms -- Chapter 13: Sexual Reproduction -- 13.1 DNA -- 13.2 Mitosis -- 13.3 Meiosis -- Chapter 13: Terms -- Chapter 14: Variation and Plant Breeding -- 14.1 Gametogenesis -- 14.2 Inheritance of Big Differences -- 14.3 Linkage and Inheritance of Small Differences -- 14.4 Plant Breeding -- Chapter 14: Terms -- Chapter 15: Invasive plants and GMOs -- 15.1 Invasive plants -- 15.2 GMOs -- Chapter 15: Terms -- Glossary of Terms0 aAn approachable guide to the fundamentals of plant science. Created for horticulture students, gardeners, science teachers, and anyone interested in understanding plants and how they grow. This is the required text for HORT 1001/6001 Plant Propagation at the University of Minnesota Department of Horticultural Science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aHoover, Emilyeauthor1 aIrish, Lauraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1196zAccess online version01778nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002500145100002500170245006600195264004300261264005600304264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505033200537520025400869542002701123546001601150588004101166650003201207650003701239710003901276856007701315OTLid0001197MnU20260406020529.0m     o  d s      cr            220707s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aLee, Sheldoneauthor1 aBuzby, Meganeauthor00aMathematical Modeling and Simulation with MATLABcSheldon Lee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aJuneau, AK bUniversity of Alaska Southeastc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Programming in MATLAB -- 3. Iterative Methods -- 4. Matrices -- 5. Discrete Models -- 6. Continuous Models -- 7. Stochastic Modeling -- A. In-class Activities and Exercises -- B. Solutions to in-class Exercises -- C. Selected Solutions -- D. MATLAB Commands -- E. Debugging -- F. Completed Proofs -- Index0 aThis textbook attempts to provide you with an overview of the commonly used basic mathematical models, as well as a wide range of applications. It offers a perspective that brings you back to the modeling process and the assumptions that go into it.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1197zAccess online version05452nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002700155245008800182264004300270264011800313264001200431300002200443336002600465337002600491338003600517341002800553490002700581505231800608520190902926542001604835546001604851588004104867650002604908700002804934710003904962856007705001OTLid0001198MnU20260406020529.0m     o  d s      cr            220711s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780578932361  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF1211 aZenko, Zacharyeeditor00aEssentials of Exercise and Sport PsychologybAn Open Access TextbookcZachary Zenko 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSociety for Transparency, Openness, and Replication in Kinesiologyc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1. Introduction to Exercise Psychology -- Chapter 2. Theories of Physical Activity -- Chapter 3. Promoting Self-Determined Motivation for Physical Activity: From Theory to Intervention Work -- Chapter 4. Exercise Behavior Change Revisited: Affective-Reflective Theory -- Chapter 5. Predictors and Correlates of Physical Activity and Sedentary Behavior -- Chapter 6. Personality and Physical Activity -- Chapter 7. Body Image and Physical Activity -- Chapter 8. Youth Physical Activity and Considerations for Interventions -- Chapter 9. Emotion Regulation of Others and Self (EROS) During the COVID-19 Pandemic -- Chapter 10. Social Support, Relationships, and Physical Activity -- Chapter 11. Strategies to Facilitate More Pleasant Exercise Experiences -- Chapter 12. Affective Responses to Exercise: Measurement Considerations for Practicing Professionals -- Chapter 13. Perceived Effort and Exertion -- Chapter 14. Mindfulness in Physical Activity -- Chapter 15. Exercise and Physical Activity for Depression -- Chapter 16. Physical Activity and Exercise for the Prevention and Management of Anxiety -- Chapter 17. Physical Activity and Severe Mental Illness -- Chapter 18. Exercise and Chronic Fatigue -- Chapter 19. Taking the Field: An Introduction to the Field of Sport Psychology -- Chapter 20. Get Your Head in the Game: Examining the Use of Psychological Skills in Sport -- Chapter 21. Motivation in Coaching: Promoting Adaptive Psychological Outcomes -- Chapter 22. Self-Control in Sports -- Chapter 23. Music in Sport: From Conceptual Underpinnings to Applications -- Chapter 24. Values-Based Coaching: The Role Coaches in Moral Development -- Chapter 25. Leadership Development in Sports Teams -- Chapter 26. Group Dynamics in Sport -- Chapter 27. Self, Relational, and Collective Efficacy in Athletes -- Chapter 28. Diagnosing Problems, Prescribing Solutions, and Advancing Athlete Burnout Research -- Chapter 29. Psychological Stress and Performance -- Chapter 30. Organizational Stress in Competitive Sport -- Chapter 31. Rehabilitation from Sport Injury: A Social Support Perspective -- Chapter 32. Promoting Adherence to Rehabilitation through Supporting Patient Well-Being: A Self-Determination Perspective -- Chapter 33. Working in Sport, Exercise, and Performance Psychology0 aThis text represents the collaboration of more than 70 authors from multiple countries. Essentials of Exercise and Sport Psychology: An Open Access Textbook brings this diverse set of experts together to provide a free, open, accessible textbook for students studying exercise and sport psychology. Primarily directed at undergraduate students, this well-referenced book is also appropriate for graduate students.The topics covered are broad, ranging from an Introduction to Exercise Psychology (Chapter 1), to an Introduction to Sport Psychology (Chapter 19), to Working in Sport, Exercise, and Performance Psychology (Chapter 33). Importantly, students should recognize that each author brings their individual perspectives, experiences, and expertise to this book. Therefore, some chapters may share overlapping content, but the content is discussed in unique ways. For example, Chapters 2, 3, 4, and 5 focus on physical activity and exercise behavior. While content in these chapters is related, it is not redundant. To fully understand the complex world of exercise and sport psychology, students are encouraged to engage with diverse perspectives from many authors.Chapters also contain learning exercises to prompt students and instructors to engage with the material on a deeper level. For effective review, students and instructors are encouraged to complete these learning exercises and discuss responses together.The majority of this textbook was written during the global COVID-19 pandemic. We are tremendously grateful for all of the efforts and expertise of the many contributors to this project. Despite the challenges of teaching, researching, and surviving in the pandemic, the authors persisted. As a result, Essentials of Exercise and Sport Psychology: An Open Access Textbook is completed; we think you will enjoy using it as you pursue this challenging and fascinating area of study!1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aJones, Leightoneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1198zAccess online version03849nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100004400166245010800210264004300318264007100361264001200432300002200444336002600466337002600492338003600518341002800554490002700582505153500609520093302144542004103077546002703118588004103145650003603186650002503222700003703247700003903284710003903323856007703362OTLid0001199MnU20260323020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220718s2022    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942701428  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5549 4aHM5861 aHerrera-Sánchez, Maybelline J.eauthor00aAnálisis Científico de la Ética desde la Perspectiva MultidisciplinariacMaybelline Herrera-Sánchez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Resumen -- Ética frente a la discriminación contra la mujer en el ambiente laboral en el Ecuador -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas -- Cómo se manejan los individuos en las organizaciones según la ética y los procesos humanos de negocio -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas -- La ética en la agricultura para el cuidado del medio ambiente en el Ecuador -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas -- Clima organizacional y gestión académica del docente de la Universidad Técnica “Luis Vargas Torres” de Esmeraldas sede Santo Domingo -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas -- La Ética y la Responsabilidad Social Empresarial, un reto para las Empresas en preservar los recursos naturales del Ecuador -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas -- La ética y la discriminación laboral en el área de recursos humanos -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas -- La ética en la publicidad de las empresas multinacionales -- Resumen -- Introducción -- Metodología -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Referencias bibliográficas0 aEl presente manuscrito es resultado de investigaciones multidisciplinarias bajo diferentes perspectivas científicas-académicas, mediante la confrontación de criterios de diferentes autores bajo un enfoque descriptivo que señala la importancia de ética en varios escenarios actuales como son en la discriminación de la mujer en ambiente laboral, el manejo de los individuos dentro de las organizaciones, dentro de la agricultura al momento de producir y cultivar, como la ética afecta al clima organizacional y lagestión docente dentro del caso de estudio de una universidad, la ética y la responsabilidad social empresarial como reto de las empresas, la discriminación laboral como comportamiento poco ético en el área de recursos humanos, y por ultimo una contrastación de la ética en la publicidad de las empresas. Estos estudios se realizan desde una mirada científica y se la acerca a la realidad ecuatoriana.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aOlmedo Jumbo, Geovely J.eauthor1 aQuezada Valarezo, Yeska D.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1199zAccess online version01690nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050001000149100002600159245003900185264004300224264005800267264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505027800502520025400780542001601034546001601050588004001066650002301106650002401129650002301153710003901176856007701215OTLid0001200MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220718s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aShook, Sheryleauthor04aThe Science of SleepcSheryl Shook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHonolulu, HawaiibKapi'olani Community Collegec2024. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Guide to the Textbook -- Yawning and an Introduction to Sleep -- Sleep Wellness -- The Sleeping Brain: Neuroanatomy, Polysomnography, and Actigraphy -- Circadian Rhythm -- Animals -- Dreams -- Sleep Disorders -- Politics, Sleep, and You -- Image Credits0 aThe Science of Sleep teaches us the vital importance of sleep and how it determines our mental and physical health. It explores the neuroscience of sleep and cultural, social, and political aspects of how people view sleep and are affected by sleep.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1200zAccess online version01890nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002600139245005400165264004300219264005900262264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505052200498520030901020542001601329546001601345588004001361650002301401710003901424856007701463OTLid0001201MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220718s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aShook, Sheryleauthor00aAnatomy and Physiology 2 Lab ManualcSheryl Shook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHonolulu, HawaiibKapi'olani Community Collegec[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Cover Image Credits -- Introduction -- Lab Orientation and Safety -- PHYL 142L Study Guide -- Chapter 1. Endocrine Anatomy -- Chapter 2. Blood Lab -- Chapter 3. Cardiovascular Anatomy -- Chapter 4. Cardiovascular Experiments -- Chapter 5. Heart Dissection -- Chapter 6. Respiratory System Anatomy -- Chapter 7. Respiratory Physiology Experiment -- Chapter 8. Digestive System Anatomy -- Chapter 9. Urinary System Anatomy -- Chapter 10. Reproductive System Anatomy -- Chapter 11. Fetal Pig Dissection -- Appendix0 aThis manual is a guide for anatomy and physiology laboratory exercises. It includes dissection guidance with detailed images; instructions for physiology experiments including foundational content; and gross anatomy study guides for six body systems. Videos and tutorial links provide additional support.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1201zAccess online version02010nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003400150245006900184264004300253264005100296264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505049900524520033401023542002701357546001601384588004001400650004201440650003801482710003901520856007701559OTLid0001202MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aBaughman, Jacqulyn A.eauthor00aIntroduction to Mechanical Engineering DesigncJacqulyn Baughman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction 1: Course Description, Objectives, and Module Overview -- Introduction 2: Course Setup and Design Process (DFSS) -- Introduction 3: DMADVR Phases and Tools within the DFSS Process -- Introduction 3a: DMADVR - Test for Understanding Activity -- Module 00 - Micro-economy Kit -- Module 1 - Define -- Module 2 - Measure -- Module 3- Analyze -- Module 4A - Design -- Module 4B - Design Continued -- Module 5 - Verify -- Module 6 - Report Results -- Appendix 1: Accessibility Assessment0 aA collection of readings and exercises aligned with the course, ME 270, Introduction to Mechanical Engineering Design, at Iowa State University. This course provides an overview of mechanical engineering design with applications to thermal and mechanical systems, and an introduction to current design practices used in industry.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1202zAccess online version02051nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137245003300150264004300183264005100226264001200277300002200289336002600311337002600337338003600363341002800399490002700427505042100454520044400875542004101319546001601360588004001376650004201416650003801458700002501496700002801521710003901549856007701588OTLid0001203MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-157002aA Guide to MATLAB for ME 160 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Basic Commands in MATLAB -- Chapter 3: MATRIX Operations -- Chapter 4: Writing Scripts -- Chapter 5: Commands -- Chapter 6: Graphing in MATLAB -- Chapter 7: Graphical User Interface -- Chapter 8: Functions and Function Handles -- Chapter 9: Inputting and Outputting Data -- Chapter 10: Projects -- Appendix A: Additional MATLAB Resources -- Appendix B: A commentary on this work0 aThis textbook provides an introduction to the MATLAB programming language for first-year mechanical engineering students enrolled in ME 160, Mechanical Engineering Problem Solving with Computer Applications. Designed to follow the content taught in class, this book provides a supplement to in-class learning that is presented at a level that is understandable to a student with no experience coding before coming to Iowa State University.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks1 aBray, Austineauthor1 aMontazami, Rezaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1203zAccess online version04416nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001800127050001000145100002500155245003800180250001900218264004300237264005100280264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341005800453490002700511505181400538520066102352532065003013542004103663546001603704588004003720650002903760650003303789700002703822700002903849710003903878856007703917OTLid0001204MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.31 aCotos, Elenaeauthor00aPreparing to PublishcElena Cotos  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbstructuralNavigation2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Organization of this Book -- Note to Students -- Note to Instructors -- Accessibility Statement -- Chapter 1: Goals and Strategies of a Research Article -- Research and Research Arguments -- Sections of a Research Article -- Goals and Strategies of a Research Article -- Summary -- Chapter 2: Writing the Introduction -- Goals of the Introduction Section -- Introduction Goal 1: Establishing a Knowledge Territory -- Introduction Goal 2: Identifying a Niche -- Introduction Goal 3: Addressing the Niche -- Summary -- Drafting Your Introduction -- Chapter 3: Writing the Methods -- Goals of the Methods Section -- Methods Goal 1: Conceptualizing the Study's Methods -- Methods Goal 2: Describing the Study -- Methods Goal 3: Analyzing the Data -- Summary -- Drafting Your Methods -- Chapter 4: Writing the Results -- Goals of the Results Section -- Results Goal 1: Approaching the Niche -- Results Goal 2: Occupying the Niche -- Results Goal 3: Construing the Niche -- Results Goal 4: Expanding the Niche -- Summary -- Drafting your Results -- Chapter 5: Writing the Discussion/Conclusion -- Goals of the Discussion/Conclusion Section -- Discussion/Conclusion Goal 1: Re-establishing the Territory -- Discussion/Conclusion Goal 2: Framing Principal Findings -- Discussion/Conclusion Goal 3: Reshaping the Territory -- Discussion/Conclusion Goal 4: Establishing Additional Territory -- Summary -- Drafting Your Discussion -- Chapter 6: Writing the Abstract -- Defining Abstracts -- Goals of an Abstract -- Formal Features of Abstracts: Length, Word Choice, and Grammar -- Summary: Writing the Abstract -- Chapter 7: Preparing to Publish -- Selecting a Target Journal -- Preparing to Submit -- Understanding the Peer Review Process -- What's Next? -- About the Contributors -- Acknowledgements --0 aThis book offers a wealth of instructional material on the topic of research article writing for publication and thesis or dissertation completion. The text provides graduate student writers with helpful information, strategies, and tips on navigating disciplinary writing in their fields and how to understand, dissect, and ultimately, construct their own research article. The text is organized according to a standard research article format, breaking down each section of the empirical research in a simple and straightforward manner to help graduate students build a quality, argument-driven manuscript as they write up their empirical study findings.1 aAll chapters are designed to work with screen-reader technology;
All content is not conveyed only by color;
All visual elements are provided with alternative text;
All content is grouped under headings and subheadings;
All featured sections are marked by callout boxes and icons (e.g., warm-up, examples, key takeaways, explore & apply).
Additionally, we followed the guidelines published by “Accessibility Toolkit – 2nd Edition” of BCcampus. We hope these considerations make this e-book accessible to as many users as possible. Please contact us for questions or issues accessing the chapters of this e-book at shuffman@iastate.edu.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks1 aHuffman, Saraheauthor1 aBecker, Kimberlyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1204zAccess online version02947nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245009900161264004300260264005100303264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505130400531520054001835542003002375546001602405588004002421650002002461710003902481856007702520OTLid0001205MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aCho, Yongyeoneauthor00aTutorials of Visual Graphic Communication Programs for Interior Design, Volume 2cYongyeon Cho 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part One. Image Search/ Diagramming/ Data Visualization -- Chapter 1. Image searching techniques & Diagramming -- Chapter 2. Illustrator - Basic -- Chapter 3. Illustrator - Diagram -- Chapter 4. Depthmap X - Data visualization -- Part Two. Hybrid Digital Drawing -- Chapter 5. Wacom tablet & Painter - User interface -- Chapter 6. Painter - Tools and brushes -- Chapter 7. Painter - Auto painting & Clone painting -- Chapter 8. iPad & Procreate -- Part Three. Advanced Modeling -- Chapter 9. Revit - Family parameter -- Chapter 10. Revit - Nested family -- Chapter 11. Revit - Organic shaped walls -- Chapter 12. Revit - Organic shaped ceiling and column -- Chapter 13. Revit - Sketchup models -- Chapter 14. Sketchup advanced modeling -- Part Four. Advanced Rendering -- Chapter 15. Vray for Sketchup -- Chapter 16. Lumion - User interface and import 3D model -- Chapter 17. Lumion - surroundings, objects, and materials -- Chapter 18. Lumion - Lightings, scenes, and outputs -- Chapter 19. Photoshop - brushes and quick retouch -- Chapter 20. Photoshop - Advanced rendering post-production -- Part Five. 3D Video Animation -- Chapter 21. Enscape - walk-through video -- Chapter 22. Lumion - walk-through video -- Chapter 23. Premiere - Video pro-production -- Appendix: Ancillaries0 aThis book is for advanced-level architecture and interior design students who have in-depth knowledge and skills with computer-aided visualization software. The author developed a total of twenty-two chapters to teach practical graphic presentation techniques for architectural presentations. Readers will learn these techniques by following step-by-step tutorials. This book includes multiple exercises for the reader's practice. After completing the tutorials, readers will be able to apply these techniques to their design projects.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1205zAccess online version01899nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002800145245004900173250001600222264004300238264005700281264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505033100512520039200843542001601235546001601251588004001267650003001307650002301337700002501360710003901385856007701424OTLid0001206MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aAnderson, Ambereauthor00aIntroduction to Soil SciencecAmber Anderson  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Getting Started -- Soil Development and Classification -- Soil Physical Properties -- Soil Geography -- Soil Water, Aeration and Temperature -- Soil Chemistry and Minerology -- Soil Management -- Soil Erosion -- Soil Fertility -- Soil Organisms and Organic Matter -- Case Studies -- Adoption and Feedback Forms0 aThis textbook introduces readers to introductory soil science topics including the physical, chemical, and biological properties of soils; soil formation, classification, and global distribution; soil health, soils and humanity, and sustainable land management. The second edition brings forward new information about soil water and soil chemistry alongside updates to the core chapters.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aFidel, Rivkaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1206zAccess online version01815nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245006200144264004300206264005100249264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002800422490002700450505031000477520033600787542002701123546001601150588004001166650002501206650003101231700002401262700002701286710003901313856007701352OTLid0001207MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58600aIndividual and Family Development, Health, and Well-being 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Theories -- Research -- Families and Other Influences on Development -- Heredity, Prenatal Development, and Birth -- Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Early Childhood -- Middle to Late Childhood -- Adolescence -- Early Adulthood -- Middle Adulthood -- Late Adulthood -- Death, Dying, and Mourning0 aThis book provides an overview of lifespan developmental tasks (physical, cognitive, language, social, emotional) examined from individual and family theoretical perspectives. It covers topics related to families, diversity, individual and family health and well-being, and reciprocal relationships as affected by external factors.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSociologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aLang, Dianaeauthor1 aCone, Nicholaseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1207zAccess online version02204nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245005300139264004300192264005800235264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002800415490002700443505051800470520047500988542004101463546001601504588004001520650002101560700002801581700002801609700003701637700002801674710003901702856007701741OTLid0001209MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-500000aComprehensive Musicianship, A Practical Resource 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Contributors -- Introduction -- Why Study Music Theory -- Chapter 1: Basics of Rhythm and Meter -- Chapter 2: Basics of Pitch -- Chapter 3: Scales and Modes -- Chapter 4: Intervals -- Chapter 5: Introduction to Chords -- Chapter 6: Functional Harmony -- Chapter 7: Melody -- Chapter 8: Melodic Form -- Chapter 9: Introduction to Counterpoint -- Chapter 10: Voice Leading in Harmonic Progressions -- Chapter 11: Harmonizing a Melody -- Music Theory Workbook -- Sight Singing and Aural Training Supplement0 aThis OER presents an integrated suite of learning resources developed for the core music theory and musicianship curriculum at the University of Northern Iowa School of Music. It provides a more comprehensive symbiosis of musicianship and music theory learning than can be found in existing textbooks, including engaging and progressive video demonstrations and interactive listening and vocal exercises that integrate musical knowledge with foundational musical skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aHarlow, Randalleauthor1 aPeyton, Heathereauthor1 aSchwabe, Jonathan Clarkeeauthor1 aSwilley, Danieleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1209zAccess online version02093nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001100134245003900145264004300184264005800227264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002800407490002700435505059300462520030301055542001601358546001601374588004001390650002501430650003701455700002801492700002801520700003101548710003901579856007701618OTLid0001210MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB155500aMethods of Teaching Early Literacy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- About the Book -- Introduction -- Chapter 1. What is Literacy? Multiple Perspectives on Literacy -- Chapter 2. Foundations of Early Literacy -- Chapter 3. Phonological Awareness -- Chapter 4. Phonics: Breaking the Code to Words -- Chapter 5. Supporting Literacy Learning in the Early Childhood Classroom -- Chapter 6. Vocabulary -- Chapter 7. Fluency and Comprehension -- Chapter 8. Writing -- Chapter 9. Literacy Instruction for Diverse Learners -- Chapter 10. Reading and Writing Across Content Areas – Disciplinary Literacy -- Review Statement -- About the Authors0 aThis textbook covers theories, teaching strategies, and instructional materials pertinent to teaching reading and writing in grades PK-3, with an emphasis on integrating reading, writing, speaking, and listening, as well as integration across content areas while addressing diversity and inclusion.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks1 aGurjar, Nanditaeauthor1 aMeacham, Sohyuneauthor1 aBeecher, Constanceeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1210zAccess online version01793nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100008200147245011900229264004300348264005800391264001200449300002200461336002600483337002600509338003600535341002800571490002700599505031700626520021500943542004101158546001601199588004001215650002501255650002301280710003901303856007701342OTLid0001211MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aQH3011 aDepartment of Food Science and Human Nutrition, Iowa State Universityeauthor00aBasic Scientific Food Preparation Lab ManualcIowa State University Department of Food Science and Human Nutrition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1 Laboratory Equipment and Procedures -- 2 Fruits and Vegetables -- 3 Food Preservation -- 4 Beverages -- 5 Crystallization -- 6 Starch Characteristics and Cookery -- 7 Deep Fat Frying -- 8 Dairy Foods -- 9 Eggs -- 10 Foams -- 11 Meats -- 12 Gluten Development -- 13 Steam Leavening -- Appendices0 aThis lab book is intended for use in both the lab and kitchen. Each section of the book contains learning objectives, lab problems to be solved, recipes, questions, and observation charts for the input of data.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1211zAccess online version02413nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003300153245004600186264004300232264004600275264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505091400498520030501412542003001717546001601747588004001763650003801803700002901841700004101870710003901911856007701950OTLid0001213MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220719s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648169700  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aRuiz-Pérez, Ignacioeauthor00aManual de RedaccióncIgnacio Ruiz-Pérez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Mavs Open Press -- Accessibility Statement -- Mavs Open Press -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- I. Los falsos cognados -- Introducción -- Lenguas en contacto/préstamos lingüísticos -- Falsos cognados o amigos -- Lista de falsos cognados más frecuentes -- Ejercicios de repaso -- Antes de leer -- Lectura: Ilán Stavans, El Quixote -- Cuestionario sobre la lectura -- Ejercicios: Escritura en movimiento -- Ejercicios de repaso -- II. Los vicios de dicción -- Introducción -- Los vicios de dicción -- Ejercicios de repaso -- Antes de leer -- Lectura: Alejandro Higashi, “Escribir con buena ortografía… no tiene precio” -- Cuestionario sobre la lectura -- Ejercicios: Escritura en movimiento -- Ejercicios de repaso -- Bibliography -- Links by Chapter -- Image Credits -- Accessibility Rubric -- Mavs Open Press -- Errata and Versioning History -- Mavs Open Press0 aThis textbook is for advanced Spanish composition students. The textbook includes topics on grammar and syntax, as well as exercises and readings providing the students a more personalized and effective learning experience adjusted to the specific challenges they encounter in today’s global world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aCarone, Michelleeauthor1 aSánchez Hernández, Eloísaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1213zAccess online version02386nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002700155245014700182264004300329264008800372264001200460300002200472336002600494337002600520338003600546341002800582490002700610505048000637520058701117542004101704546001601745588004001761650002501801700002901826700002901855710003901884856007701923OTLid0001214MnU20260406020534.0m     o  d s      cr            220721s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789869292962  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA7731 aChiang, I-Yuaneauthor00aComparisons of the Codex Alimentarius Principles of Nutrition Labelling and Relevant Guidelines of Taiwan and the United StatescI-Yuan Chiang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSoftware Liberty Association, Taiwanc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeward -- Preface -- Acknowledgment -- Chapter 1 About Nutrition Labeling and This Book -- Chapter 2 CODEX GUIDELINES ON NUTRITION LABELING -- Chapter 3 GENERAL PRINCIPLES FOR ESTABLISHING NUTRIENT REFERENCE VALUES FOR THE GENERAL POPULATION (ANNEX 1 OF THE CODEX GUIDELINES ON NUTRITION LABELLING) -- Chapter 4 GUIDELINES ON FRONT-OF-PACK NUTRITION LABELLING (ANNEX 2 OF THE CODEX GUIDELINES ON NUTRITION LABELLING) -- Chapter 5 Regulations of Nutrition Labeling in Taiwan0 aCodex Guidelines on Nutrition Labelling and The US 21 CFR PART 101.9 Nutrition Labeling are the primary references for Taiwan FDA to establish and amend the nutrition labeling regulations. In January 2022, Codex updated the Guidelines on Nutrition Labelling. We finished the translation in April and integrated the related regulations from Taiwan and the US into this book. The expected audiences include food manufacturers in the international food trade and college students in food and nutrition majors. We hope the bilingual book can provide a general framework for the readers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks1 aYuan, Yi-Wenetranslator1 aLiang, Hsuanetranslator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1214zAccess online version02356nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137100002700148245004800175264004300223264007700266264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505075400520520046501274542001601739546001601755588004101771650002501812650002901837710003901866856007701905OTLid0001215MnU20260406020530.0m     o  d s      cr            220725s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.3 4aHF54151 aLawson, Cheryleauthor00aIntroduction to Social MediacCheryl Lawson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Part I: Marketing Principles -- Marketing in the Age of COVID-19 -- How Many P's are in Marketing Now? -- Social Media Marketing, A Brief History -- What Business Are You Even In? -- Do You Even Google? -- Who Is Your Customer? -- Competition Check -- Social Media History...How Did We Get Here -- Part 2: Social Media Marketers and Marketing Strategy -- Applying Basic Marketing Principles to Social Media Marketing -- What's it All For? -- The ROI of Your Mother (GaryVee said it, not me) -- Every Network is an Island -- What Network is on Now? -- Content Speaks -- Time Management -- We're Engaged! Aren't We? -- Social Media Jobs. Why Understanding Basic Marketing Principles Will Put You Ahead of the Rest -- YOLO -- Bibliography --0 aThis book is aimed at managers, business owners, marketing managers, and aspiring social media marketing interns and managers. I will assume that however accomplished in your own field - baker, developer, teacher and that even as successful business owners, you approach the topic of social media marketing as a beginner. Even if you are an avid personal user of social networks, we will treat this book as a guided tour of social media for marketing purposes.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMarketingvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1215zAccess online version02524nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001100148100002700159245003800186250001600224264004300240264003900283264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505045600496520086800952542004101820546001601861588004001877650002401917650003201941650002501973710003901998856007702037OTLid0001216MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220727s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHB615 4aHF54151 aShields, Kerrieauthor00aLeading InnovationcKerri Shields  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Business Innovation Foundation -- Chapter 2: Thinking Creatively -- Chapter 3: Service Innovation -- Chapter 4: Process Innovation -- Chapter 5: Sustainable Innovation -- Chapter 6: Growth Strategy -- Chapter 7: Design Thinking -- Chapter 8: Product Innovation -- Chapter 9: New Venture Innovation -- Chapter 10: Technological Innovation -- Chapter 11: Innovation Risks -- Chapter 12: Leading Innovation -- Glossary of Terms0 aInnovation today considers the economic, environmental, and/or social sustainability of an innovative initiative from its inception or idea generation through to its commercialization or implementation. This concept applies to many types of innovation such as products, processes, services, technologies, and business models. Companies use innovation as a means to gain a competitive advantage and bring value to business stakeholders. This book introduces business innovation, from incremental innovation such as enhancing the performance of an existing product, service, or process, to radical or disruptive innovation such as one that has a significant impact on a market. The content examines how leaders foster a culture of innovation, how companies turn creativity into innovation, and how innovation transforms not only organizations but economies as well.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEntrepreneurshipvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1216zAccess online version02627nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002700149245004500176250001600221264004300237264003900280264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002500441490002700466505061700493520086901110542004101979546001602020588004002036650002402076650002502100710003902125856007702164OTLid0001217MnU20260406020759.0m     o  d s      cr            220727s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aShields, Kerrieauthor00aCustomer Centric StrategycKerri Shields  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Defining Customer Centricity -- Chapter 2: Being a Customer Service Representative (CSR) -- Chapter 3: Managing a Customer Service Team -- Chapter 4: Working in a Customer Contact Center -- Chapter 5: Managing a Customer Contact Center -- Chapter 6: Using Contact Center Technology to Improve Customer Experience -- Chapter 7: Designing Products, Services, and Processes with Customers in Mind -- Chapter 8: Using Design Thinking to Improve Customer Experience -- Chapter 9: Building Strong Customer Relationships -- Chapter 10: Leading a Customer Centric Strategy -- Glossary of Terms0 aCustomer centricity is about organizational transformation making the customer the focus for business decisions, processes, product development, services, and procedures. Some companies purport to be customer centric but they fall short in connecting this concept throughout all functional areas of the business. While it is important to offer superb customer service, being customer centric is far more than that. It's about mapping the customer journey to discover customer needs and wants, what's working and what is not, then taking action to improve the customer experience. Customer loyalty is built through providing exceptional customer experiences. This in turn increases revenues through positive company image, referrals, and increased customer lifetime value. Most organizations today realize that they must focus on the customer to remain competitive.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1217zAccess online version03464nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001300147100003300160245009700193250001900290264004300309264007500352264001200427300002200439336002600461337002600487338003600513341002800549490002700577505090900604520122301513542004102736546001602777588004102793650004202834650002802876650003402904710003902938856007702977OTLid0001219MnU20260406020624.0m     o  d s      cr            220727s2002    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aTA145 4aKF385.A41 aBartholomew, Stewarteauthor00aConstruction ContractingbBusiness and Legal Principles, Second EditioncStewart Bartholomew  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc[2002] 4c©2002.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Interface of the Law with the Construction Industry -- 2. Contract Formation, Privity of Contract, and Other Contract Relationships -- 3. The Prime Contract—An Overview -- 4. Prime Contract—Format and Major Components -- 5. Owner–Construction Contractor Prime Contract "Red Flag" Clauses -- 6. Labor Agreements -- 7. Purchase Order and Subcontract Agreements -- 8. Insurance Contracts -- 9. Surety Bonds -- 10. Joint–Venture Agreements -- 11. Bid and Proposals -- 12. Mistakes in Bids -- 13. Breach of Contract -- 14. Contract Changes -- 15. Differing Site Conditions -- 16. Delays, Suspensions, and Terminations -- 17. Liquidated Damages, Force Majeure, and Time Extensions -- 18. Allocating Responsibility for Delays -- 19. Constructive Acceleration -- 20. Common Rules of Contract Interpretation -- 21. Documentation and Records -- 22. Construction Contract Claims -- 23. Dispute Resolution0 aThis introduction to construction contracting as it applies to typical, every-day situations explains “theoretical” ideas in terms of what really happens in practice. It emphasizes the more common case law holdings and industry customs that help avoid troublesome legal issues during the completion of a project. Instructors reviewing or adopting this book are encouraged to register at https://bit.ly/interest_construction_contracting Any derivatives of this work must comply with the use and attribution requirements of the Creative Commons license, and include the following statement, “This material was previously published by Pearson Education, Inc.” Construction Contracting, 2nd edition is an "out of print," rights-reverted book for which the author's estate has given permission for digitization and release under a CC BY NC SA 4.0 license. It was previously published in 2002 by Pearson ISBN 1-13-091055-4. The copyright page has been edited and graphics redrawn. A new cover, dedication, acknowledgements, how to adopt this book, and author biography have been added, and the table of contents has been revised. As the book has been reformatted, the original back of the book index is not included.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1219zAccess online version02715nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002500139245005700164264004300221264004600264264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505040800487520125900895542001602154546001602170588004002186650002302226710003902249856007702288OTLid0001220MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            220801s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aParks, Dylaneauthor00aMicrobiomesbHealth and the EnvironmentcDylan Parks 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- I. An Introduction to Microbiomes -- II. Analyzing Microbiomes -- III. Human Health and Disease -- IV. Environmental Microbiomes -- V. Other Microbiome Applications -- VI. Journal Club -- VII. Case Studies -- VIII. Additional Resources -- Bibliography -- Image Credits -- Derivative Notes -- Accessibility Rubric0 aMicrobiomes: Health and the Environment was created to provide accessible insight into the novel and complex world of polymicrobial community interactions. As we push forward into the future of medicine and environmental health, it is imperative that we learn from each other, from history, and keep up to date with the latest advances in research and technology. This book not only provides content from the latest microbiome studies, but contains interactive tools, videos, and thought-provoking questions to help the reader hone and truly understand the respective topic. Though there is much overlap between themes due to the ubiquitous nature of microbes, the book is broken down into sections pertaining to both human health (e.g., gut health and disease, as well as other organ-specific niches) and aspects of the environment (e. g., nutrient cycling and climate change, marine health, soil and plant health, etc.) influenced by microbes. However, the content is designed to bridge ideas and aspects between these themes to support the One Health concept: that the health of people, animals, and the environment are all interconnected. This project will continue to grow with new findings, and adapt with the ever-changing world of microorganisms.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1220zAccess online version02847nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245005400167264004300221264004200264264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505105100483520075201534542001602286546001602302588004002318650002302358710003902381856007702420OTLid0001221MnU20240325082943.0m     o  d s      cr            220802s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHG1731 aBigel, Kenneth S.eauthor00aIntroduction to Financial AnalysiscKenneth Bigel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, New YorkbOpen Touroc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- Author's Acknowledgements -- Open Touro Acknowledgements -- Preface -- Part I: Financial Statements and Ratio Analysis, and Forecasting -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Financial Statement Analysis: The Balance Sheet -- Chapter 3: Financial Statements Analysis: The Income Statement -- Chapter 4: Financial Statements and Finance -- Part II: Ratio Analysis and Forecasting Modeling -- Chapter 5: Financial Ratios and Forecasting; Liquidity and Solvency Ratios -- Chapter 6: Profitability and Return Ratios, and Turnover -- Chapter 7: Market Ratios -- Chapter 8: Cash Flow, Depreciation, and Financial Projections -- Chapter 9: Corporate Forecasting Models -- Part III: The Time Value of Money -- Chapter 10: The Time Value of Money: Simple Present- and Future-Values -- Chapter 11: The Time Value of Money: Annuities, Perpetuities, and Mortgages -- Part IV: Interest Rates, Valuation, and Return -- Chapter 12: Fixed Income Valuation -- Chapter 13: Interest Rates -- Chapter 14: Equity Valuation and Return Measurement0 aThis Open Textbook is a dynamic guide incorporating the essential skills needed to build a foundation in Financial Analysis. Students and readers will learn how to insightfully read a Financial Statement, utilize key financial ratios in order to derive forward-looking investment-related inferences from the accounting data, engage in elementary forecasting and modeling, master the theory of the Time Value of Money, and learn to price stocks and bonds in an environment in which interest rates constantly change. Ample problems and solutions, and review questions are provided to the student so that s/he can gauge his/her progress. This text will be continually updated in order to provide novel information and enhance students’ experiences.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1221zAccess online version03208nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002800136245005300164250001600217264004300233264007400276264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505083500527520125901362542002702621546001602648588004102664650002502705710003902730856007702769OTLid0001222MnU20250811082901.0m     o  d s      cr            220802s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK6231 aBeswick, Samueleauthor00aTort LawbCases and CommentariescSamuel Beswick  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOttawa, OntariobCanLII: Canadian Legal Information Institutec[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Trespass to the Person -- 3. Intentional Infliction of Mental Suffering -- 4. Invasion of Privacy -- 5. Defamation and Harassment -- 6. Defences -- 7. Intentional Interference with Real Property -- 8. Intentional Interference with Chattels -- 9. Remedies (I) -- 10. Tort Theory -- 11. Examination Questions (I) -- 12. No-fault Compensation schemes -- 13. Negligence: (i) Duty of Care -- 14. Negligence: (ii) Breach of Duty of Care -- 15. Negligence: (iii) Damage -- 16. Negligence: (iv) Causation of Damage in Fact -- 17. Negligence: (v) Remoteness of Damage in Law -- 18. Defences (II) -- 19. Difficult Categories of Negligence -- 20. Remedies (II) -- 21. Nuisance -- 22. Strict Liability Torts -- 23. Vicarious Liability -- 24. Tort Law and Legal Systems -- 25. Examination Questions (II) -- Index of Cases0 aThe law of obligations concerns the legal rights and duties owed between people. Three primary categories make up the common law of obligations: tort, contract, and unjust enrichment. This casebook provides an introduction to tort law: the law that recognises and responds to civil wrongdoing. The material is arranged in two parts. Part I comprises §§1-11 and addresses intentional and dignitary torts and the overarching theories and goals of tort law. Part II comprises §§12-25 and addresses no-fault compensation schemes, negligence, nuisance, strict liability, and tort law’s place within our broader legal systems. This casebook was compiled and edited by Assistant Professor Samuel Beswick of the University of British Columbia Peter A. Allard School of Law. Maddison Zapach (J.D. expected 2023) provided research assistance on the first edition (published July 2021). We gratefully acknowledge the influence on our approach to this subject of Professor Joost Blom QC of the Allard School of Law, Professor John C.P. Goldberg of Harvard Law School, and Associate Professor Rosemary Tobin of the University of Auckland Faculty of Law. The support of Open UBC and the UBC Teaching and Learning Enhancement Fund is also gratefully acknowledged.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1222zAccess online version02724nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001400155100003200169245010100201264004300302264004500345264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505060500567520092301172542001602095546001602111588004002127650002902167650002602196710003902222856007702261OTLid0001223MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            220808s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160035  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aQA273-2801 aKindratt, Tiffany Beauthor00aBig Data for EpidemiologybApplied Data Analysis Using National Health SurveyscTiffany Kindratt 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- 1. Introduction -- 2. Overview of National Health Surveys -- 3. Literature Review -- 4. Basic Data Analysis -- 5. Complex Survey Design Features -- 6. National Health Interview Survey -- 7. Medical Expenditure Panel Survey -- 8. Health Information National Trends Survey -- 9. Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System -- 10. National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey -- 11. Dissemination -- 12. Conclusions -- Links by Chapter -- Image Credits -- Errata and Versioning History -- Accessibility Rubric0 aNational data sets provide an avenue for students to practice data analytic skills while also answering meaningful research questions. This open education resource was developed to train future public health professionals how to conduct secondary data analysis of national health surveys using SAS statistical software. SAS software was selected because it is one of the most commonly used software programs used among public health departments and academia. The book includes details on how to analyze public-use data from five common national health surveys, including the National Health Interview Survey (NHIS), Medical Expenditure Panel Survey (MEPS), Health Information National Trends Survey (HINTS), Behavior Risk Factor Surveillance System (BRFSS) and National Health and Nutrition and Examination Survey (NHANES). All datasets and corresponding syntax files are available from the Open ICPSR Data Repository.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1223zAccess online version02822nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143100002600154245006700180250001600247264004300263264004900306264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505040200532520125200934542002702186546001602213588004102229650002302270650002702293710003902320856007702359OTLid0001224MnU20260406020532.0m     o  d s      cr            220808s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.31 aBrin, Leon Q.eauthor00aTea Time Linear Algebra Explorations in MathematicscLeon Brin  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew Haven, ConnecticutbLeon Q. Brinc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- I. Matrix Mechanics -- 1. Matrix Calculations -- 2. Row Operations -- 3. Matrix Algebra -- II. Matrix Abstraction -- 4. Vector Spaces and Inner Product Spaces -- 5. Exploring Vector Spaces and Inner Product Spaces -- III. Applications -- 6. Mathematical Applications -- 7. Further Applications -- Solutions to Selected Exercises -- Answers to Selected Exercises -- Index -- Bibliography0 aThis creation is an all-purpose open source textbook for linear algebra classes of all ilks. Inside you will find a complete and engaging introduction to linear algebra, making it a perfect primary resource for classroom study. Take a ride through the landscape of linear algebra from basic mechanics through inner product spaces. 386 pages Over 1000 exercises with over 200 detailed solutions and hundreds more answers Over 250 illustrations Nearly 150 live SageMathCell links Open source Now with online homework and course management at MyOpenMath! Presented in a conversational style with plenty of motivation, illustrations, applications, and theory, this text should be a comfortable read for most beginning mathematicians. Readers and instructors alike will appreciate the numerous detailed exercise solutions accompanying each section. Examine the distribution of bicycles in the Capital Bikeshare system, model an un-preheated oven baking brownies, reproduce sounds via Fourier series, explore reptiles like the one decorating this cover, and more. Read proofs of the rank and nullity theorem, the determinant expansion formula, existence and uniqueness of solutions of linear systems and others. It's all here in Tea Time Linear Algebra.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1224zAccess online version02482nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138100002500146245006000171264004300231264006500274264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505036000516520097100876542004101847546001601888588004001904650002401944650002401968710003901992856007702031OTLid0001225MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            220816s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aBL11 aOndich, Jodyeauthor00aReading the Bible as LiteraturebA JourneycJody Ondich 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to This Text -- How to approach reading the Bible -- A Timeline for the Bible -- The Dead Sea Scrolls -- I. Where and how did it all start? -- II. The Torah -- III. The Prophets: Neviim -- IV. The writings: Ketuvim -- V. Beginnings of the Christian Writings -- VI. The Gospels -- VII. The Earliest Christians -- VIII. Apocalypse -- Contact Me0 aThe Bible is one of the most published books in human history. It is also one of the most misquoted, misunderstood and misused books in human history. This happens because people are not always aware that the Bible is not a book, it is a collection of diverse writings. The Bible might even be called an anthology, and it will include everything from poetry to genealogy, pithy sayings to architectural mandates, mythology to letters. Knowing what one is reading helps one understand the ideas in the writings. We read letters in the context of who wrote them and who received them. We read sermons understanding the speaker's perspective may differ from the listener's perspective. So this text is an attempt to give historic, literary, geographical and cultural context to a complex and often poorly understood set of materials. This is very much an ebook, and needs to be used in that format. Pdfs and other printed versions will lose a great deal of the content.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1225zAccess online version02535nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001100157050001100168100003200179245005700211264004300268264006300311264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505061300551520069201164542001601856546001601872588004001888650002301928650003501951650002301986710003902009856007702048OTLid0001226MnU20240325082952.0m     o  d s      cr            220816s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798985775402  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQA37.3 4aQC21.31 aWadehra, Jogindra Meauthor00aMathematics for Biomedical PhysicscJogindra Wadehra 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDetroit, MIbWayne State University Library Systemc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Differential Calculus -- Chapter 2: Integral Calculus -- Chapter 3: Infinite Series -- Interlude -- Chapter 4: Fourier Series -- Chapter 5: Complex Variables -- Chapter 6: Determinants -- Chapter 7: Matrices -- Chapter 8: Vector Analysis -- Chapter 9: Curvilinear Coordinates and Multiple Integrals -- Chapter 10: Vector Calculus -- Chapter 11: First Order Differential Equations -- Chapter 12: Diffusion Equation -- Chapter 13: Probability Distribution Functions -- Appendix A: Limiting Value of Sinθ/θ as θ->0 -- Appendix B: -- Appendix C: -- Appendix D: Areas Under the Standard Normal Curve0 aMathematics for Biomedical Physics is an open access peer-reviewed textbook geared to introduce several mathematical topics at the rudimentary level so that students can appreciate the applications of mathematics to the interdisciplinary field of biomedical physics. Most of the topics are presented in their simplest but rigorous form so that students can easily understand the advanced form of these topics when the need arises. Several end-of-chapter problems and chapter examples relate the applications of mathematics to biomedical physics. After mastering the topics of this book, students would be ready to embark on quantitative thinking in various topics of biology and medicine1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1226zAccess online version02269nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127100002800143245008300171250001200254264004300266264005000309264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505039100536520074200927542003001669546001601699588004001715650003601755710003901791856007701830OTLid0001227MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220816s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-56501 aZamith, Rodrigoeauthor04aThe American Journalism HandbookbConcepts, Issues, and SkillscRodrigo Zamith  a1st Ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmherst, MassachusettsbUMass Amherstc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- I. Conceptual Foundations -- II. Media Effects -- III. Influences on Journalistic Media -- IV. Journalism Economics -- V. Journalistic Audiences -- VI. History of U.S. Journalism -- VII. Journalism Law and Ethics -- VIII. Preparing a News Story -- IX. Sourcing and Verifying Information -- X. Creating Journalistic Content -- XI. Future of Journalism0 aThis book is designed to help us understand the many changes to U.S. journalism and imagine new futures for it – futures in which it can serve as an even more useful tool for promoting a well-functioning society. But, before we can imagine new futures, we must take a step back and examine the institution of U.S. journalism through a critical and in-depth lens. This book aims to offer just that. It provides a conceptual foundation for understanding the development, logic, and practice of journalism in the United States; describes some of the key challenges, tensions, and opportunities it has faced, is facing, and will likely face; and offers guidance to help individuals develop the skills needed engage in impactful journalism.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1227zAccess online version02319nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001600143100002800159245005800187250001200245264004300257264008100300264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505033900558520076600897542003001663546001601693588004001709650003601749650003201785710003901817856007701856OTLid0001228MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220816s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aPN4699-56501 aZamith, Rodrigoeauthor04aThe International Journalism HandbookcRodrigo Zamith  a1st Ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmherst, MasachussetsbUniversity of Massachusetts Amherst Librariesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- I. Conceptual Foundations -- II. Media Effects -- III. Cultural Models of Journalism -- IV. Influences on Journalistic Media -- V. Journalism Economics -- VI. Global Journalism -- VII. Sourcing Information -- VIII. Labor Conditions -- IX. Regional Journalism -- Acknowledgements -- About the Author -- Copyright Notice0 aInternational journalism is crucial to our understanding of the world beyond our own borders. This book is designed to explain key theories and concepts that allow us to understand the general practice of journalism around the world, and to illustrate some of the challenges that arise from practicing journalism in those contexts. It begins by providing a theoretical foundation that helps us understand why international journalism matters and the key forces that shape what it looks like; highlights some of the key challenges to bearing witness to developments, sourcing information, and simply doing 'the job' of journalism; and describes important similarities and differences in how journalism is imagined and performed in different regions of the world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aPrint JournalismvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1228zAccess online version03682nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002800166245004600194264004300240264009600283264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002500501490002700526505081200553520167601365542003003041546001603071588004003087650002403127650002903151710003903180856007703219OTLid0001229MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            220817s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135889  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aP91.31 aHallsby, Atillaeauthor00aReading Rhetorical TheorycAtilla Hallsby 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Contributors -- Main Body -- Chapter 1: What is Rhetorical Theory? -- Chapter 2: The "Origins" of Rhetorical Theory -- Chapter 3: Propaganda and the Common Good -- Chapter 4: The Symbol -- Chapter 5: The Sign -- Chapter 6: Rhetoric and Ideology -- Chapter 7: Rhetoric and Argumentation -- Chapter 8: Rhetoric and Narrative -- Chapter 9: Visual Rhetoric -- Chapter 10: The Rhetorical Situation -- Chapter 11: The Settler Situation -- Chapter 12: The Secrecy Situation -- Chapter 14: The Digital Situation -- Assignments and Study Guides -- Short Paper 1: The Encomium -- Short Paper 2: Annotation Assignment -- Short Paper 3: Rhetorical Analysis -- Exam 1 Study Guide: Chapters 1-5 -- Exam 2 Study Guide: Chapters 6-9 -- Exam 3 Study Guide: Chapters 10-14 -- Appendix: Definitions of Rhetoric0 aThis is a textbook that was originally designed for a 3000-level large lecture course on “Rhetorical Theory” at the University of Minnesota, Twin-Cities. An interdisciplinary tradition, rhetorical theory describes how speech, representation, and power are managed by techniques and technologies of communication. The plan of this book moves from rhetoric as an art of speech to rhetoric as a technology of power. The early chapters provide definitions and context for rhetoric as speech, middle chapters (e.g., on signs, symbols, visual images, argumentation, and narrative) describe rhetoric as representation, and the concluding chapters (e.g., on settler colonialism, secrecy, and digital rhetoric) elaborate on rhetoric as a technology of power. Of course, there is considerable overlap across these areas: the chapter on “rhetoric and ideology” sets the stage for later understandings of rhetoric as power; the chapter on “the rhetorical situation” hearkens back to the introductory understanding of rhetoric as speech. The book includes (audio and/or video) recordings with each chapter, as well as guidelines for proposed written assignments. Students using this resource should gain a thorough understanding of what rhetoric is, how it was practiced historically and today, and the ways that rhetoric wields an invisible influence over contemporary public and political life. Additionally, this book is designed for use across a variety of modalities, including in-person, online (synchronous/asynchronous), and hybridized formats. Additional resources (PowerPoint slides, quiz/exam questions) are also available to confirmed instructors upon request.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1229zAccess online version03402nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145100003300157100003300190245007100223264004300294264006300337264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002800522490002700550505091700577520132201494542001602816546001602832588004102848650002302889710003902912856007702951OTLid0001230MnU20260406020623.0m     o  d s      cr            220819s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781734914160  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-1201 aChristman, Elizabetheauthor1 aErnstmeyer, Kimberlyeauthor00aNursingbMental Health and Community ConceptscElizabeth Christman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRiver Falls, WIbChippewa Valley Technical Collegec[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Preface -- Standards and Conceptual Approach -- Chapter 1: Foundational Mental Health Concepts -- Chapter 2: Therapeutic Communication and the Nurse-Client Relationship -- Chapter 3: Stress, Coping, and Crisis Intervention -- Chapter 4: Application of the Nursing Process to Mental Health Care -- Chapter 5: Legal and Ethical Considerations in Mental Health Care -- Chapter 6: Psychotropic Medications -- Chapter 7: Depressive Disorders -- Chapter 8: Bipolar Disorders -- Chapter 9: Anxiety Disorders -- Chapter 10: Personality Disorders -- Chapter 11: Psychosis and Schizophrenia -- Chapter 12: Childhood and Adolescence Disorders -- Chapter 13: Eating Disorders -- Chapter 14: Substance Use Disorders -- Chapter 15: Trauma, Abuse, and Violence -- Chapter 16: Community Assessment -- Chapter 17: Vulnerable Populations -- Chapter 18: Environmental Health and Emergency Preparedness -- Answer Key0 aThis textbook is an open educational resource with CC-BY licensing developed specifically for prelicensure nursing students. The e-book and downloadable versions are free. Affordable print versions are published in collaboration with XanEdu and available on Amazon and in college bookstores. Content is based on the Wisconsin Technical College System (WTCS) statewide nursing curriculum for the Nursing Mental Health and Community Concepts course (543-110), the NCLEX-RN Test Plan, 1 and the American Psychiatric Nurses Association Education Council’s Crosswalk Toolkit: Defining and Using Psychiatric-Mental Health Nursing Skills in Undergraduate Nursing Education. 2 Mental health and community health concepts are discussed while emphasizing stress management techniques, healthy coping strategies, referrals to community resources, and other preventative interventions. Nursing care for individuals with specific mental health and substance use disorders is examined, and the nurse’s role in community health needs assessments and caring for vulnerable populations is introduced. The e-book is free and can be viewed online or downloaded as a PDF or other formats for offline use. Affordable print versions are also published in collaboration with XanEdu and are available on Amazon and in college bookstores.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNursingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1230zAccess online version02369nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153100002600161245004400187264004300231264004600274264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505090700497520031001404542001601714546001601730588004001746650002001786650002301806650002601829710003901855856007701894OTLid0001231MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220822s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160042  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD201 aMcCurdy, Leaheauthor00aWhere Does Art Come From?cLeah McCurdy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- How to Read this Book & Land Acknowledgment -- Where Does Art Come From? An Introduction -- Where Are We Going? -- Who Am I? -- What Is Divine? -- What Is Beautiful? -- What Is Important to Us? -- Will You Tell a Story? -- Who Came Before Us? -- Where Do Babies Come From? -- What Happens When We Die? -- Why Does Size Matter? -- What Will I Get Out of It? -- Why Do They Have More Than Us? -- Why Do I Have to Do What You Say? -- Why Do People Take What Doesn't Belong to Them? -- Can We Live Together? -- Neheb is Dead by Emery Martinez-Blas -- We will Never Be Perfect and That's Okay by Celeste Smith -- The Post-Colonial Igbo Identity by Chinamerem Ahuchaogu -- Image Credits -- Accessibility Rubric -- Timelapses for Transformational Sketches -- Errata and Versioning History -- Mental Maps of Art History0 aWho am I? What is beautiful? Where do babies come from? These questions populate our lives and inform our perceptions of the world. Explore these questions according to the expressions of artists from all over the world. Go beyond Western art to consider where art comes from and how it impacts all of us.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1231zAccess online version01581nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100003100162245005200193250001600245264004300261264006900304264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002500495490002700520505035000547520003600897542002700933546001600960588004100976650002301017650002701040710003901067856007701106OTLid0001232MnU20260406020534.0m     o  d s      cr            220822s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aZaigralin, Ivan G.eauthor00aBasic Algebra with ApplicationscIvan Zaigralin  a6th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIvan G. Zaigralinc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Chapter 1. Concepts -- Chapter 2. Linear Equations -- Chapter 3. Graphing -- Chapter 4. Linear Systems -- Chapter 5. Polynomial Equations -- Chapter 6. Factoring Polynomials -- Chapter 7. Rational Expressions -- Chapter 8. Radicals -- Chapter 9. Quadratic Equations -- Appendix A. To Instructors -- Appendix B. To Developers -- Index0 aBasic Algebra with Applications1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1232zAccess online version04878nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135100003400146100002700180245004300207264004300250264007600293264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002800491490002700519505091500546520276701461542003004228546001604258588004004274650003804314650002404352710003904376856007704415OTLid0001233MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220824s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aPE14081 aMcKnight, Kathryn Joyeauthor1 aKuhnheim, Jilleauthor00aPara vivir con saludcKathryn McKnight 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAlbuquerque, New MexicobKathryn Joy McKnight and Jill Kuhnheimc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDescargar el libro (Downloading the book) -- About the cover illustration -- Introduction for Instructors -- Goals and Learning Objectives -- I. Parte I: Los géneros expresivos y cómo leerlos -- Capítulo 1: The College of Physicians and Surgeons of Columbia University Reading Guide for Reflective Practice -- Capítulo 2: Cómo leer la narrativa -- Capítulo 3: Cómo leer la poesía: -- Capítulo 4: Cómo leer el teatro -- Capítulo 5: Cómo leer el cine -- II. Parte II: Unidades temáticas -- Capítulo 1: Las experiencias médicas, la ficción y la empatía -- Capítulo 2: Nuestros conceptos de salud son culturales -- Capítulo 3: La experiencia de la enfermedad -- Capítulo 4: La medicina como conocimiento y actividad humanos -- Capítulo 5: Cuerpo, género y sexualidad -- Capítulo 6: Estados de ánimo -- Capítulo 7: El final de la vida -- Glosario de términos literarios y cinematográficos0 aWe are asking anyone who adopts this webbook or uses portions of it in their teaching to please let us know at this link (click here). Para vivir con salud: Leyendo la salud y la literatura is the first textbook to introduce literary and textual analysis of Hispanic literature through the lens of health, illness, and medicine. The book meets the needs of the fast-growing numbers of Spanish majors and minors who are preparing themselves for careers in healthcare, in which they will engage Hispanic communities. These students seek advanced-level study of Hispanic culture and language that prepares them to communicate about health-related issues. While a growing number of literature departments teach Spanish courses with a health focus and most require their majors and minors to take an introductory course in literary or textual analysis, the crucial connection between the study of literature and professionalization in healthcare is generally not being made for or by these students. The movements of Narrative Medicine and Health Humanities have shown persuasively that healthcare providers benefit from a humanistic preparation that promotes empathy across difference; builds an understanding of how culture, language, and history shape our knowledge of health, illness, and medicine; and trains students in narrative competence to better understand and collaborate with patients and colleagues. Para vivir con salud is designed especially for the often-required Introduction to Hispanic Literature or Introduction to Textual Analysis course in most college Spanish programs, allowing individual sections to be transformed into a learning experience that prepares health professionals and brings them into greater engagement in literary and cultural studies in the Spanish major or minor. Para vivir con salud includes classics of Hispanic narrative, drama, and poetry—pieces by authors such as Cervantes, Garcilaso, Sor Juana, Martí, Neruda, Castellanos, Pizarnik, and Morejón, less-well-known literary authors and a wealth of other types of cultural texts. While the primary genres of poetry, narrative and drama are well represented, the book includes expository essays, journalism, memoir, testimony, song, film, television, and visual art. It presents voices and experiences from the diverse Hispanic world, including European, Creole, Indigenous, Mestizo, Afro-Hispanic, Latinx, and Jewish perspectives. Selections are almost evenly divided between male and female authors. While the latter half of the twentieth century and the beginning of the twenty-first century comprise a little more than half of the selections, about 20% of the texts pre-date the twentieth century. Seventeen countries are represented, including the United States.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1233zAccess online version03207nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003000138245006300168264004300231264008000274264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505035200528520167700880542002702557546001602584588004002600650002402640700002802664700002502692710003902717856007702756OTLid0001236MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220824s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aTurlington, Anitaeauthor00aCompact Anthology of World Literature IIcAnita Turlington 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 4—The Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centuries -- Unit I: The Age of Reason -- Unit II: The Near East and Asia -- Part 5—The Long Nineteenth Century -- Unit I Romanticism -- Unit II Realism -- Part 6—The Twentieth Century and Contemporary Literature -- Unit I Modernism -- Unit II Postcolonial Literature -- Unit III Contemporary Literature0 aThe Compact Anthology of World Literature, Parts 4, 5, and 6 is designed as an e-book to be accessible on a variety of devices: smart phone, tablet, e-reader, laptop, or desktop computer. Students have reported ease of accessibility and readability on all these devices. To access the ePub text on a laptop, desktop, or tablet, you will need to download a program through which you can read the text. We recommend Readium, an application available through Google. If you plan to read the text on an Android device, you will need to download an application called Lithium from the App Store. On an iPhone, the text will open in iBooks. Affordable Learning Georgia has also converted the .epub files to PDF. Because .epub does not easily convert to other formats, the left margin of the .pdf is very narrow. ALG recommends using the .epub version. Although the text is designed to look like an actual book, the Table of Contents is composed of hyperlinks that will take you to each introductory section and then to each text. Texts from a variety of genres and cultures are included in each unit. Additionally, each selection or collection includes a brief introduction about the author and text(s), and each includes 3 – 5 discussion questions. Texts in the public domain--those published or translated before 1923--are replicated here. Texts published or translated after 1923 are not yet available in the public domain. In those cases, we have provided a link to a stable site that includes the text. Thus, in Part 6, most of the texts are accessible in the form of links to outside sites. In every case, we have attempted to connect to the most stable links available.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aHorton, Mattheweauthor1 aGetty, Lauraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1236zAccess online version03500nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001000166100003300176245011300209264004300322264008500365264001200450300002200462336002600484337002600510338003600536341002800572490002700600505126200627520083901889542002702728546001602755588004102771650002602812650002902838650002402867700003102891700002802922710003902950856007702989OTLid0001237MnU20260406020534.0m     o  d s      cr            220825s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771885  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHD30.4 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aHamilton, Whitney N.eauthor04aThe Fundamentals of Healthcare AdministrationbNavigating Challenges and Coordinating CarecWhitney Hamilton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Authors -- Acknowledgments -- Preface -- Managing the Case of Mr. Rodriquez -- Part I. Overview of Healthcare Organizations -- Chapter 1: Healthcare Organizations -- Chapter 2: Overview of Healthcare Management -- Chapter 3: Healthcare Technology and Information Strategies -- Chapter 4: Emerging Trends in Healthcare Organizations and Their Managerial Implications -- Part II: Leadership -- Chapter 5: The Convergence of Leaders and Managers -- Chapter 6: Building a Foundation in Leadership and Management Theory -- Chapter 7: The Role of Leaders and Managers in Establishing Organizational Ethics -- Chapter 8: Core Leadership and Managerial Processes -- Part III: Organizational Behavior and Models -- Chapter 9: Organizational Theory and Behavior Practices in Healthcare: Examining the Three Lenses of the Healthcare Industry -- Chapter 10: Analysis of Organizational Models -- Part IV: Organizational Culture Performance and Change -- Chapter 11: Eliminating Health Disparities in Healthcare Organizations through Cultural Proficiency -- Chapter 12: Organizational Culture in Healthcare -- Chapter 13: Organizational Performance -- Chapter 14: Managing Organizational Change -- Chapter 15: Organizational Challenges from a Global Perspective0 aThis book is written for those interested in acquiring a thorough knowledge base relative to the intricacies of the organizational theories, customs, and insights significant to the management of health service organizations. It examines the foundational aspects of leadership and management as they relate to establishing and maintaining the principles and practices within healthcare organizations. The book opens with a discussion on the differences between health, healthcare, and health care while providing an overview of healthcare management and organizational trends. It culminates in discussions of leadership, management, motivation, organizational behavior, and management thinking. Additionally, it discusses topics of information technology, teamwork, health disparities, organizational culture, performance, and change.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aHowell, Dorothy J.eauthor1 aJordan, Melissaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1237zAccess online version04103nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002800155245009300183264004300276264008500319264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002500526490002700551505036800578520248400946542002703430546001603457588004103473650002403514700003003538700003303568710003903601856007703640OTLid0001238MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220825s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771915  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aHowe, Deanna L.eauthor00aHealthcare in the  United StatesbNavigating the Basics of a Complex SystemcDeanna Howe 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Preface -- Introduction -- Overview of Health -- Healthcare Workforce -- Healthcare Settings -- Federal and State Funded Healthcare -- Private Insurance -- Special Populations -- Access Issues in Healthcare -- Cost of Healthcare -- Quality in Healthcare -- Technology Use in Healthcare -- National Healthcare Systems -- Glossary -- Contributors0 aThis book is a collaborative effort among three faculty members from the Darton College of Health Professions, Nursing Department, at Albany State University, a Historically Black College and University (HBCU), and part of the UniversitySystem of Georgia. The book idea originated from a grant-funded program to create open education resources (OER) for students learning in UniversitySystem of Georgia’s eMajor courses. The cost of education in the United States is remarkably expensive, and the added burden of purchasing textbooks for each course can be prohibitive. The opportunity to create free educational materials has been a rewarding experience. A free pdf form of this text is available for download. The authors of this book are registered nurses who have each worked 25 or more years in various roles and specialties within our healthcare system. There have been many changes throughout the years. The authors’ experience and knowledge are from a nursing perspective not found in other texts of similar content.The healthcare system has advanced tremendously since the very beginning of our formalized system. The most significant growth has been in technology use to support, diagnose, increase patient safety, and document patient outcomes.However, more can be done to ensure a system that meets all our citizens’ healthcare needs.Readers of this text will learn a brief history of our healthcare system and explore the current state of health in the U.S. In the next 12 chapters, readers will: consider health as defined using determinants of health discover the many types of healthcare providers seen throughout the system differentiate between the different types of healthcare settings explore state and federal programs that provide oversight examine private insurance and managed care plans survey access issues and the cost of healthcare review how state and federal government provides support to special populations discover the quick expansion of technology use in healthcare assess quality determinants and accreditation standards compare national healthcare systems presently used to the present U.S.healthcare system identify advantages of a national healthcare system for the UnitedStates This book will describe and explain our current healthcare system’s complexities by providing the basics of many components in easy to understand terminology. Each chapter includes essential features to assist the student in learning and understanding.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aDozier, Andrea L.eauthor1 aDickenson, Sheree O.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1238zAccess online version01666nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100003400165245005400199264004300253264008500296264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505030800558520003900866542002700905546001600932588004100948650002900989650002401018700002601042700003201068700002801100710003901128856007701167OTLid0001239MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220825s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771854  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aBrinson, Sarah Godwineauthor00aOverview ofbHealthcare CompliancecSarah Brinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Healthcare Compliance -- Ethics and Law -- Health Insurance & Reimbursement -- Quality Improvement -- Strategic Planning -- Managing Healthcare Professionals & Strategic Management of Human Resources -- Healthcare Technology -- Special Topics and Emerging Issues in Healthcare Management0 aOverview of: Healthcare Compliance1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aClack, Lesleyeauthor1 aGill, Larecia Moneyeauthor1 aGosa, Laura Kimeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1239zAccess online version02218nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003000156245005800186264004300244264008500287264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505031900549520076200868542002701630546001601657588004101673650002601714710003901740856007701779OTLid0001240MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220825s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771458  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF56251 aJonick, Christineeauthor00aPrinciples of Managerial AccountingcChristine Jonick 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Pressc[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Managerial Accounting Concepts -- Chapter 2: Job Order Costing -- Chapter 3: Process Costing -- Chapter 4: Activity-Based Costing -- Chapter 5: Cost Volume Profit Analysis -- Chapter 6: Variable Costing Analysis -- Chapter 7: Budgeting -- Chapter 8: Variance Analysis -- Chapter 9: Differential Analysis0 aThe University of North Georgia Press and Affordable Learning Georgia bring you Principles of Managerial Accounting. Well-written and straightforward, Principles of Managerial Accounting is a needed contribution to open source pedagogy in the business education world. Written in order to directly meet the needs of her students, this textbook developed from Dr. Jonick’s years of teaching and commitment to effective pedagogy. Features: Peer reviewed by academic professionals and tested by students Over 100 charts and graphs Instructional exercises appearing both in-text and for Excel Resources for student professional development This textbook is an Open Education Resource. It can be reused, remixed, and reedited freely without seeking permission.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAccountingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1240zAccess online version01580nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002900154245006800183264004300251264007700294300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505032600536520005100862542002700913546001600940588004100956650003300997700003001030700003001060710003901090856007701129OTLid0001241MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220825suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781940771830  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA711 aMartin, Kimberlyeauthor00aPublic PolicybOrigins, Practice, and AnalysiscKimberly Martin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Georgia Press  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Public Policy -- Chapter 2: Origins and Actors -- Chapter 3: Foundations of the Policy Process -- Chapter 4: Problem Identification and Agenda Setting -- Chapter 5: Policy Design and Formulation -- Chapter 6: Policy Implementation -- Chapter 7: Policy Analysis and Evaluation0 aPublic Policy: Origins, Practice, and Analysis1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aLee Jr., Keith E.eauthor1 aHall, John Powelleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1241zAccess online version02365nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100003000167245006700197264004300264264005300307264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505056100537520060401098542001601702546001601718588004001734650002301774650002401797700003001821710003901851856007701890OTLid0001242MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220901s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957213309  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQM1-695 4aRA4401 aNolan, Michael F.eauthor00aHuman AnatomybSelf-Assessment Review QuestionscMichael Nolan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- PART 1: Self-Assessment Questions -- 1 Back and Spine -- 2 Upper Limb -- 3 Lower Limb -- 4 Thoracic Wall -- 5 Pleura and Lungs -- 6 Mediastinum -- 7 Abdomen -- 8 Pelvis and Perineum -- 9 Head and Face -- 10 Mouth and Pharynx -- 11 Neck and Larynx -- 12 Orbit -- 13 Eye -- 14 Ear -- PART 2: Answer Key -- 1 Back and Spine -- 2 Upper Limb -- 3 Lower Limb -- 4 Thoracic Wall -- 5 Pleura and Lungs -- 6 Mediastinum -- 7 Abdomen -- 8 Pelvis and Perineum -- 9 Head and Face -- 10 Mouth and Pharynx -- 11 Neck and Larynx -- 12 Orbit -- 13 Eye -- 14 Ear0 aHuman anatomy is one of the foundational disciplines in the training of health care professionals. Knowledge of human structure at both the macroscopic and microscopic levels serves as a framework for the study of normal function and dysfunction. This workbook presents a series of questions related to a particular area of anatomy. Answers to those questions are included at the end of the book. This approach to self-assessment in basic human anatomy will be helpful to students in preparing for clinical-based learning activities as well as for other types of knowledge assessment and evaluation.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aMcNamara, John P.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1242zAccess online version03236nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002700162245005500189264004300244264007300287300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505078100525520125501306542003002561546001602591588004102607650002402648650003502672650002702707710003902734856007702773OTLid0001243MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220901suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aMurphy, Stuarteauthor04aThe Art of Polynomial InterpolationcStuart Murphy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPennsylvania State University  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Techniques -- Chapter One - Elimination (Substitution) Interpolation -- Chapter One - Practice Exercises -- Chapter Two - Newton's Divided Difference Interpolation -- Chapter Two- Practice Exercises -- Chapter Three- Quadratic Spline Interpolation -- Chapter Three- Practice Exercises -- Chapter Four - Least Squares Regression -- Chapter Four- Practice Exercises -- Chapter Five- Measuring the Least Squares Fit/Exponential Least Squares Regression -- Chapter Five- Practice Exercises -- Chapter Six - Approximation with Taylor Series -- Chapter Six- Practice Exercises -- Chapter Seven - Taylor Series Remainder Test -- Chapter Seven- Practice Exercises -- Solutions to Selected Practice Exercises -- Acknowledgments -- About the Author -- Versioning History0 aThe inspiration for this text grew out of a simple question that emerged over a number of years of teaching math to Middle School, High School and College students. Practically speaking, what is the origin of a particular polynomial? So much time is spent analyzing, factoring, simplifying and graphing polynomials that it is easy to lose sight of the fact that polynomials have a wealth of practical uses. Exploring the techniques of interpolating data allows us to view the development and birth of a polynomial. This text is focused on laying a foundation for understanding and applying several common forms of polynomial interpolation. The principal goals of the text are: Breakdown the process of developing polynomials to demonstrate and give the student a feel for the process and meaning of developing estimates of the trend (s) a collection of data may represent. Introduce basic matrix algebra to assist students with understanding the process without getting bogged down in purely manual calculations. Some manual calculations have been included, however, to assist with understanding the concept. Assist students in building a basic foundation allowing them to add additional techniques, of which there are many, not covered in this text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1243zAccess online version02686nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000700156100002600163245005600189250001900245264004300264264006500307264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505025700549520113700806542004101943546001601984588004002000650002402040650003102064700002502095700002802120710003902148856007702187OTLid0001244MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220905s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789462362994  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aH11 aEnserink, Beneauthor00aPolicy Analysis of Multi-Actor SystemcBen Enserink  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1 Introduction -- 2 Problem Formulation in Complex Environments -- 3 Systems Analysis -- 4 Actor Analysis -- 5 Exploring the Future -- 6 From Synthesis to Plan of Action -- 7 The Research Plan -- 8 Preparing an Issue Paper -- Annex -- About the Authors0 aPolicy of Multi-Actor Systems is an introduction into the art of craft of problem exploration and problem structuring. It positions policy analysis as a scientific discipline focused on systems analysis in a multi-actor context to support better informed decision-making. The approach presented in this book is considered to be the cornerstone of the curricula of the Faculty of Technology, Policy and Management of Delft University of Technology and underlies the research on (the governance of) socio-technical systems. Systems thinking applied in a multi-actor environment and its inherent multi-disciplinary character is what makes this work stand out from traditional hard- and soft systems approaches. The core of the book is dedicated to systems analysis, actor- or stakeholder-analysis and discusses methods for dealing with uncertainty. These analytical activities combined lead to a rich problem description and to plans for further research. Due to the stepwise approach this book serves as a basis for any problem analysis both for our bachelor and master students, our alumni worldwide and any interested practitioners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBots, Pietereauthor1 avan Daalen, Elseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1244zAccess online version03615nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003100138245005500169264004300224264008600267264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505179500530520071602325542002703041546001603068588004103084650002403125710003903149856007703188OTLid0001245MnU20260330020611.0m     o  d s      cr            220905s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aPeterson, Scott D.eauthor00aAmerican Literatures Prior to 1865cScott Peterson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louisc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit I. Colonial Literature- Puritan Beginnings - Smith, Bradford, & Morton -- Unit II. Colonial Literature - Puritan Beginnings - Winthrop, Bradstreet, & Sewall -- Unit III. Colonial Literature- Puritan Beginnings - Mather, Williams, & Rowlandson -- Unit IV. Colonial Literature - Of the Revolution - Franklin, Crevecoeur, Paine -- Unit V. Colonial Literature - Jefferson & the Federalist Paper -- Unit VI. Colonial Literature - John & Abigail Adams- John Adams & Thomas Jefferson -- Unit VII. Colonial Literature - Wheatley, Pontiac, & Occom -- Unit VIII. Literature of Native American Perspectives and Discovery - Seneca & Iroquois -- Unit IX. Literature of Native American Perspectives and Discovery - Pima, Cherokee, Penobscot, & Passamquoddy -- Unit X. Literature of Native American Perspectives and Discovery - Peyote Cult & Origin of Disease and Medicine -- Unit XI. Literature of Native American Perspectives and Discovery - De Vaca & The Pueblo Revolt of 1680 -- Unit XII. Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform - Garrison & Grimke -- Unit XIII. Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform - Whittier & Child -- Unit XIV. Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform - Stanton & Fern -- Unit XV. Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform -Davis & Douglass -- Unit XVI. Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform -Equiano, Truth & Stowe -- Unit XVII. Literature of the New Nation - Irving & Cooper -- Unit XVIII. Literature of the New Nation -Emerson o& Thoreau -- Unit XX. Literature of the New Nation - Hawthorne- Blithedale Romance -- Unit XXI. Literature of the New Nation - Melville -- Unit XXII. Literature of the New Nation - Melville - "Benito Cereno" Part II -- Unit XXIII. Literature of the New Nation - Poe -- Unit XXIV. Literature of the New Nation - Poe (Continued)0 aThis work was created as part of the University Libraries’ Open Educational Resources Initiative at the University of Missouri–St. Louis. A web version of this text can be found at https://umsystem.pressbooks.pub/alpt1865/. This anthology of American Literatures Prior to 1865, is organized chronologically into four units, focusing on Colonial Literature, Literature of Native American Perspectives and Discovery, Literature of Nineteenth Century Reform, and Literature of the New Nation. It includes introductions to the many authors included to enhance the reader's contextual understanding of the chosen texts. This anthology is essential reading for any student or scholar of Early American literature.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1245zAccess online version03120nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003000135245007400165264004300239264007300282264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505049700532520151301029542003002542546001602572588004002588650002602628710003902654856007702693OTLid0001246MnU20260406020535.0m     o  d s      cr            220905s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aKorman, Daniel Z.eauthor00aLearning from ArgumentsbAn Introduction to PhilosophycDaniel Korman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPhilPapers Foundationc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface for Students -- Preface for Instructors -- Introduction -- Chapter 1: Can God Allow Suffering? -- Chapter 2: Why You Should Bet on God -- Chapter 3: What Makes You You -- Chapter 4: Don't Fear the Reaper -- Chapter 5: No Freedom -- Chapter 6: You Know Nothing -- Chapter 7: Against Prisons and Taxes -- Chapter 8: The Ethics of Abortion -- Chapter 9: Eating Animals -- Chapter 10: What Makes Things Right -- Appendix A: Logic -- Appendix B: Writing -- Appendix C: Theses and Arguments0 aLearning from Arguments is a novel approach to teaching Introduction to Philosophy. It advances accessible versions of key philosophical arguments, in a form that students can emulate in their own writing, and with the primary aim of cultivating an understanding of the dynamics of philosophical argumentation. The book contains ten core chapters, covering the problem of evil, Pascal’s wager, personal identity, the irrationality of fearing death, free will and determinism, Cartesian skepticism, the problem of induction, the problem of political authority, the violinist argument, the future-like-ours argument, the ethics of eating meat, utilitarianism (both act and rule), and the trolley problem. Additionally, there is an introductory chapter explaining what arguments are and surveying some common argumentative strategies, an appendix on logic explaining the mechanics and varieties of valid arguments, and an appendix providing detailed advice for writing philosophy papers. Each of the ten core chapters offers a sustained argument for some controversial thesis, specifically written for an audience of beginners. The aim is to introduce newcomers to the dynamics of philosophical argumentation, using some of the arguments standardly covered in an introductory philosophy course, but without the additional hurdles one encounters when reading the primary sources of the arguments: challenging writing, specialized jargon, and references to unfamiliar books, philosophers, or schools of thought.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1246zAccess online version02230nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001500109040001800124050000700142050001500149050000700164050001300171100002800184245012000212250002300332264004300355264008500398264001200483300002200495336002600517337002600543338003600569341002800605490002700633505061400660520015501274542004101429546001601470588004001486650002501526650005001551650003101601650003601632710003901668856007701707OTLid0001247MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            220905s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645326  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH1 4aLB1062.61 aAndersen, Nikkieauthor00aEnhancing Inclusion, Diversity, Equity and Accessibility (IDEA) in Open Educational Resources (OER)cNikki Andersen  aAustralian Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of First Peoples -- Accessibility Information -- About the Editor -- Peer Reviewers -- Introduction -- Definitions -- I. Main Body -- Framework for Reviewing Inclusion, Diversity, Equity, and Accessibility in Open Educational Resources -- Diverse and Inclusive Imagery -- Example Names -- Inclusive Language -- Researchers and References -- Diverse Examples and Balanced Perspectives -- Appropriate Terminology and Inclusive Metadata -- Accessibility, Usability and Universal Design for Learning -- Anti-Racist and Inclusive Open Pedagogy -- Resources -- References -- Accessibility Assessment0 aThis practical guide provides a framework and tips to enhance inclusion, diversity, equity, inclusion and accessibility in Open Educational Resources.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1247zAccess online version03272nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001100143050000800154100002500162245004200187264004300229264001200272300002200284336002600306337002600332338003600358341002800394490002700422505044800449520173700897542004102634546001602675588004102691650002302732650002702755710003902782856007702821OTLid0001248MnU20260406020629.0m     o  d s      cr            220905s2012    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 aRedden, Johneauthor00aAdvanced AlgebracJohn Reddennv. 1.0 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 4c©2012.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- Acknowledgements -- Preface -- Chapter 1: Algebra Fundaments -- Chapter 2: Graphing Functions and Inequalities -- Chapter 3: Solving Linear Systems -- Chapter 4: Polynomial and Rational Function -- Chapter 5: Radical Function and Equations -- Chapter 6: Solving Equations and Inequalities -- Chapter 7: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- Chapter 8: Conic Sections -- Chapter 9: Sequences, Series, and Binomial Theorem0 aIntermediate Algebra is the second part of a two-part course in Algebra. Written in a clear and concise manner, it carefully builds on the basics learned in Elementary Algebra and introduces the more advanced topics required for further study of applications found in most disciplines. Used as a standalone textbook, it offers plenty of review as well as something new to engage the student in each chapter. Written as a blend of the traditional and graphical approaches to the subject, this textbook introduces functions early and stresses the geometry behind the algebra. While CAS independent, a standard scientific calculator will be required and further research using technology is encouraged. Intermediate Algebra clearly lays out the steps required to build the skills needed to solve a variety of equations and interpret the results. With robust and diverse exercise sets, students have the opportunity to solve plenty of practice problems. In addition to embedded video examples and other online learning resources, the importance of practice with pencil and paper is stressed. This text respects the traditional approaches to algebra pedagogy while enhancing it with the technology available today. In addition, Intermediate Algebra was written from the ground up in an open and modular format, allowing the instructor to modify it and leverage their individual expertise as a means to maximize the student experience and success. The importance of Algebra cannot be overstated; it is the basis for all mathematical modeling used in all disciplines. After completing a course sequence based on Elementary and Intermediate Algebra, students will be on firm footing for success in higher-level studies at the college level.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1248zAccess online version03175nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000900137050000700146100003300153245006300186264004300249264006500292264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505048200534520138001016542003002396546001602426588004102442650003302483650003202516650002502548700003202573700003202605710003902637856007702676OTLid0001249MnU20260406020624.0m     o  d s      cr            220908s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aQA76 4aL71 aMiller, Carrie Lewiseauthor00aGame Based and Adaptive Learning StrategiescCarrie Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Suggested Learning Outcomes -- I. Chapter 1- Overview of the Game-Based and Adaptive Learning -- II. Chapter 2- Games in Education -- III. Chapter 3- Simulations -- IV. Chapter 4- Gamification -- V. Chapter 5- Virtual Worlds -- VI. Chapter 6- Faculty Showcase -- VII. Chapter 7- Suggested Assignments -- Appendix I: Handout to investor groups from Investor-Entrepreneur Simulation -- Appendix II: Handout to investor groups from Investor-Entrepreneur Simulation0 aThis book is designed to accompany a graduate-level instructional design course: Game-Based and Adaptive Learning, but could also be used for undergraduate teacher education or instructional design courses. The original texts and material for this book came from the development of a course for Brandeis University as part of their MS in Learner Experience Design program. This material can be used to teach pre-service teachers, in-service teachers, and instructional designers about game-based and adaptive learning. Assessments used in the actual Game-based and Adaptive Learning course are included in the final chapter and serve as recommendations for assessments of the learning outcomes. The material in this book pairs well with Using Game-Based Learning Online – A Cookbook of Recipes by The EGG. The Faculty Showcase materials were developed by dedicated faculty during the course of a year-long game development workshop in which faculty were introduced to GBL, developed game prototypes, played a variety of games, and finally playtested their designs. The work they continue to do in the area of GBL is part of the inspiration for this book. If you would like to contribute your own case study, please contact me at carrie.miller@mnsu.edu for consideration. Carrie Lewis Miller, Ph.D.- editor/author- Instructional Designer, Minnesota State University, Mankato1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aBatsaikhan, Odbayareauthor1 aPluskwik, Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1249zAccess online version02468nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158100003000168245009300198264004300291264004600334264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505085600557520040601413542001601819546001601835588004001851650003301891650004201924710003901966856007702005OTLid0001250MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220915s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160059  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aMakhmalbaf, Atefeeauthor00aBuilding Information Modeling using Revit for Architects and EngineerscAtefe Makhmalbaf 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1: Revit Interface -- Chapter 2: Walls, Curtain Walls, Windows and Doors -- Chapter 3: Floors, Roofs and Ceilings -- Chapter 4: Stairs, Railings and Ramps -- Chapter 5: Adding- Modifying Families -- Chapter 6: Massing- Conceptual Mass -- Chapter 7: Model In-Place -- Chapter 8: Schematic Design and Room & Color Fill Plans -- Chapter 9: Materials, Visualization and Rendering -- Chapter 10: Details and Annotations -- Chapter 11: Workflow -- Worksharing -- Chapter 12: Schedules and Project Phasing -- Chapter 13: Drawing Sets and Construction Documents -- Chapter 14: Site Modelings -- Chapter 15: MEP- Fire Protection and Fabrication Parts -- Chapter 16: Structural Systems -- Links by Chapter -- Errata and Versioning History -- Accessibility Rubric0 aThis book offers a web-based multimedia platform to enable students in Architecture, Civil Engineering, and Construction Engineering to learn fundamentals of BIM using Revit and be able to create building architectural, mechanical and structural models, develop construction documentation and analyze building performance. The platform include: book chapters on detailed Revit instructions and videos.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1250zAccess online version02867nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145100002800152245011200180264004300292264007100335264001200406300002200418336002600440337002600466338003600492341002800528490002700556505063300583520093301216542004102149546001602190588004102206650002602247650003102273700002602304700002302330710003902353856007702392OTLid0001251MnU20260105020643.0m     o  d s      cr            220915s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789942701435  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aArroyo, Vernazaeauthor00aResultados Científicos de la Investigación Multidisciplinaria desde la Perspectiva ÉticacVernaza Arroyo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Resumen -- Capítulo 1 -- La discriminación del trabajo desde una perspective ética, caso de estudio en la Provincia de Santo Domingo -- Capítulo 2 -- Importancia de los principios éticos en los negocios globales -- Capítulo 3 -- La ética publicitaria de las empresas ecuatorianas como responsabilidad social de los grupos de interés -- Capítulo 4 -- La ética y los sistemas de mercado frente al constante cambio laboral en la ciudad de Quito -- Capítulo 5 -- La ética del cuidado dentro de las organizaciones sociales -- Capítulo 6 -- El impacto del comportamiento de los individuos en las organizaciones0 aEl presente manuscrito es resultado de investigaciones multidisciplinarias bajo diferentes perspectivas científicas-académicas, mediante la confrontación de criterios de diferentes autores bajo un enfoque descriptivo que señala la importancia de ética en varios escenarios actuales como son la discriminación del trabajo dentro del caso de estudio en Santo Domingo, se resalta la importancia de los principios éticos en los negocios globales, se analiza la perspectiva ética de la publicad en empresas ecuatorianas bajo un enfoque de responsabilidad social, se aborda temáticas como la ética laboral desde la perspectiva de un mercado cambiante, al igual que la ética en organizaciones sociales y por último se abordan el tema el impacto del comportamiento de los individuos dentro de las organizaciones empresariales. Estos estudios se realizan desde una mirada científica y se la acerca a la realidad ecuatoriana.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aDavid, Girardeauthor1 aBone, Minaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1251zAccess online version02309nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001300147100002700160245006200187264004300249264006000292264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505084100529520021201370542004101582546001601623588004001639650003601679650004201715650003801757710003901795856007701834OTLid0001252MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            220919s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTP155 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aYu Yan, Claireeauthor00aIntroduction to Engineering ThermodynamicscClaire Yu Yan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensing Info -- About the Author -- Acknowledgments -- Accessibility Statement -- For Students: How to Access and use this Textbook -- For Instructors -- Preface -- Nomenclature -- 1. Basic Concepts and Definitions -- 2. Thermodynamic Properties -- 3. Ideal and Real Gasses -- 4. The First Law of Thermodynamics for Closed Systems -- 5. The First Law of Thermodynamics for a Control Volume -- 6. Entropy and the Second Law of Thermodynamics -- Appendix A: Thermodynamic Properties of Water -- Appendix B: Thermodynamic Properties of Ammonia -- Appendix C: Thermodynamic Properties of R134a -- Appendix D: Thermodynamic Properties of Carbon Dioxide -- Appendix E: Critical Properties of Selected Fluids -- Appendix F: Triple Point of Selected Substances -- Appendix G: Properties of Various Substances -- Glossary -- Versioning History0 aThe book is most suitable for a one-term, introductory engineering thermodynamics course at the undergraduate level. It may also be used for self-learning of fundamental concepts of classical thermodynamics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1252zAccess online version02354nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000700135100002500142245003500167250001400202264004300216264005300259264001200312300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341002500434490002700459505043700486520056900923542002701492546001601519588004001535650002001575650002501595700002701620700002601647700002501673700002601698700002901724700002701753710003901780856007701819OTLid0001254MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            220926s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aL71 aGotham, Markeauthor00aOpen Music TheorycMark Gotham  aVersion 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aFairfax, VAbVirtual Library of Virginiac[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Fundamentals -- Chapter 2: Counterpoint and Galant Schemas -- Chapter 3: Form -- Chapter 4: Diatonic Harmony, Tonicization, and Modulation -- Chapter 5: Chromaticism -- Chapter 6: Jazz -- Chapter 7: Popular Music -- Chapter 8: 20th- and 21st-Century Techniques -- Chapter 9: Twelve-Tone Music -- Chapter 10: Orchestration -- Anthology -- Workbook -- Chapters in Development -- Glossary0 aOpen Music Theory is a natively-online open educational resource intended to serve as the primary text and workbook for undergraduate music theory curricula. OMT2 provides not only the material for a complete traditional core undergraduate music theory sequence (fundamentals, diatonic harmony, chromatic harmony, form, 20th-century techniques), but also several other units for instructors who have diversified their curriculum, such as jazz, popular music, rhythm, counterpoint, and orchestration. This version also introduces a complete workbook of assignments.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aGullings, Kyleeauthor1 aHamm, Chelseyeauthor1 aHughes, Bryneauthor1 aJarvis, Brianeauthor1 aLavengood, Meganeauthor1 aPeterson, Johneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1254zAccess online version04346nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003000155245009000185264004300275264008300318264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505108100578520199001659542004103649546001603690588004103706650002403747700003703771700003603808710003903844856007703883OTLid0001255MnU20240122131643.0m     o  d s      cr            220927s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9786185667627  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aKourtis, Stefanoseauthor00aIntroduction to Implant ProsthodonticsbA Case-Based Clinical GuidecStefanos Kourtis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bKallipos Open Academic Editionsc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbbreviations used in the text -- Prologue -- Chapter 1 -- Diagnostic Elements for Treatment Planning in Implant Restorations -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 1 -- Chapter 2 -- Radiographic and Surgical Guides -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 2 -- Chapter 3 -- Implant Overdentures -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 3 -- Chapter 4 -- Impression techniques for implant restorations -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 4 -- Chapter 5 -- Intra-Oral Scanning -- Digital Impressions for Implant Restorations -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 5 -- Chapter 6 -- Cement-retained Implant Restorations -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 6 -- Chapter 7 -- Screw-retained Implant Restorations -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 7 -- Chapter 8 -- Completely Digital Workflow for Implant Restorations -- Abstract -- Knowledge background -- References for Chapter 8 -- Glossary of scientific terms0 aDental implants have been an established treatment option for partially and completely edentulous patients for decades. In the first years of their clinical use, the theoretical background on osseointegration and implant prosthodontics was covered by textbooks that have been characterized as “classical”, and any further research results were reported in scientific papers. During the years, the continuing introduction of new prosthetic components and treatment options has led to evolution in Implant Prosthodontics. Clinicians are informed on these innovations from research papers but each of them is focused on a specific topic or technique. The purpose of this book is to offer a thorough introduction to current Implant Prosthodontics, combining theory and practice in an easy-to-read manner. In each chapter the needed theoretical background and principles are reported, and the techniques are presented with clinical examples in step-by-step manner. The aim is to guide the dentist in his practice combining the needed knowledge with the clinical application and relevance. For this reason, it can be characterized as “A case-based Clinical Guide”. On the other side, clinicians are always concerned about the stages or steps in each technique and for this reason, emphasis has been given to the detailed description of each case with critical discussion on the selection of each specific treatment option. The content of this book is divided in 9 chapters that cover the whole clinical procedure for an implant restoration, from the presurgical evaluation to the fabrication and delivery. The chapters include the needed diagnostic elements for the treatment planning, the design and fabrication of radiographic and surgical guides, the impression techniques, the use of intra-oral scanning, an overview of cement- and screw retained restorations, the digital workflow in implant restorations and the principles for selection and fabrication of implant overdentures.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aLampropoulos, Panagiotiseauthor1 aPolychronakis, Nikolaoseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1255zAccess online version02331nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002800153245011300181264004300294264003800337300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002500485490002700510505069200537520039601229542004101625546001601666588004001682650002301722650002601745700002901771700002901800710003901829856007701868OTLid0001256MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            221003suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160066  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aCole, Stephanieeauthor00aHow History is MadebA Student’s Guide to Reading, Writing, and Thinking in the DisciplinecStephanie Cole 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Press  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- About this Project -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- I. Thinking Historically -- II. Reading Historically -- III. Researching Historically -- IV. Writing Historically -- V. Performing Historically -- VI. Skills for Success -- VII. UTA Campus Resources -- VIII. Degree Planning and Beyond, Advice from the UTA History Department -- Bibliography -- Appendix A- Database Rules and Datatypes -- Appendix B - Working With Multiple Tables -- Appendix C- Database Troubleshooting and Coding -- Appendix D- Database Design and Parts of a Database -- Appendix E- Writing Criteria/ Example Rubric -- Image Credits -- Accessibility Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aLearn what it means to think like an historian! Units on “Thinking Historically,” “Reading Historically,” “Researching Historically,” and “Writing Historically” describe the essential skills of the discipline of history. “Performing Historically” offers advice on presenting research findings and describes some careers open to those with an academic training in history.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBreuer, Kimberlyeauthor1 aPalmer, Scott W.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1256zAccess online version03653nam a2200493 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001500144050000700159050001000166100002500176245007600201264004300277264007100320264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505026300568520185300831542003002684546001602714588004102730650003302771650002502804650005002829650002502879650003102904700002902935700003002964700002202994700002703016710003903043856007703082OTLid0001257MnU20260406020536.0m     o  d s      cr            221003s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH1 4aHM5861 aAdams, Kevineauthor00aUsing Open Educational Resources to Promote Social JusticecKevin Adams 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aChicago, ILbAssociation of College and Research Librariesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Section I. Theory and Problematizing -- Section II. Open Praxis -- Section III. Decolonizing Learning in the Global South -- Section IV. Scaling up with Institutional Policies (Approaches) -- Section V. Building and Decolonizing OER Platforms0 aAs so often is the case, the idea for this book came from a twisting path. Not long after we began collaborating and presenting together at conferences, we were invited to draft a chapter on critical race theory (CRT) in academic libraries. An invited chapter is, of course, very flattering, so we proceeded without much thought to who the publisher would be. Angela had been working on social justice issues for a while at that point, while CJ had a wealth of expertise on open educational resources (OER). We merged our two areas of expertise in drafting that chapter, discussing OER as an opportunity to not only save students money but incorporate CRT into the curriculum—both in content and in practice. We submitted the final draft and were dismayed when we received the publication agreement. The publisher was unwilling to allow us to retain the copyright, even after we shared the licensing agreement that the Association of College & Research Libraries (ACRL) Press uses as an example. In discussing how to proceed—should we submit this chapter somewhere else?—we realized that we were really excited about extending the discussion of OER beyond just ensuring that all students can afford to access their course materials. So we pitched the idea of an edited volume on this topic to a publisher that we know has publishing practices we support (chapter authors retain copyright and select the Creative Commons license they prefer for their work), and here we are! Our entrance to academic work on social justice was through a focus on CRT. We outline this background here but wish to emphasize that it explicitly addresses only one aspect of social justice. For us, the structural understanding of racism in the United States creates a foundation upon which to understand other structures of oppression as well as intersectionality.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aAnderson, Murrayeauthor1 aBecknell, Elissaheauthor1 aIvory, CJeeditor1 aPashia, Angelaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1257zAccess online version03868nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144050001500155050000700170245007300177264004300250264007100293264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505032400541520211200865542004102977546001603018588004003034650003303074650002503107650002403132650005003156650003103206700002903237700002803266710003903294856007703333OTLid0001258MnU20260406020536.0m     o  d s      cr            221003s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aPE1408 4aZ665-718.8 4aH100aIntersections of Open Educational Resources and Information Literacy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aChicago, ILbAssociation of College and Research Librariesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeward -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- Part 1: Foundations -- Part 2: Teaching Info Lit with OER -- Part 3: Librarian Support of Open Pedagogy/OER -- Part 4: Social Justice/Untold Stories -- Part 5: Student Advocacy -- Part 6: Spreading the Love: Training Future Advocates and Practitioners -- About the Authors0 a"The present volume is timely not only because it models creative and effective strategies to advance both open education and information literacy, but especially because it poses critical questions and urges practitioners to go well beyond questions of access to and the use of information. It demands reflection on what is being accessed (and what is not), who is gaining access (and who is not), who is providing access (and who is not), and what the goal is of this access (and what lies beyond access)."—from the Foreword by Rajiv S. Jhangiani Information literacy skills are key when finding, using, adapting, and producing open educational resources (OER). Educators who wish to include OER for their students need to be able to find these resources and use them according to their permissions. When open pedagogical methods are employed, students need to be able to use information literacy skills as they compile, reuse, and create open resources. Intersections of Open Educational Resources and Information Literacy captures current open education and information literacy theory and practice and provides inspiration for the future. Chapters include practical applications, theoretical musings, literature reviews, and case studies and discuss social justice issues, collaboration, open pedagogy, training, and advocacy. The book is divided into six parts: Foundations Teaching Info Lit with OER Librarian Support of Open Pedagogy/OER Social Justice/Untold Stories Student Advocacy Spreading the Love: Training Future Advocates and Practitioners Chapters cover topics including library-led OER creation; digital cultural heritage and the intersections of primary source literacy and information literacy; situated learning and open pedagogy; critical librarianship and open education; and developing student OER leaders. Intersections of Open Educational Resources and Information Literacy—which went through an open peer review process—informs and inspires on OER, info lit, and their many iterative convergences. It is available as an open access edition at https://bit.ly/ACRLOERInfoLit.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCullen, Mary Anneeditor1 aDill, Elizabetheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1258zAccess online version02114nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002200138245003400160250001600194264004300210264005500253264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505029700485520064400782542001601426546001601442588004001458650002601498650002401524700002601548700002601574710003901600856007701639OTLid0001259MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            221003s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aDelf, Lizeauthor02aA Dam Good ArgumentcLiz Delf  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction to Argument at the College Level -- II. Analyzing Persuasion -- III. Constructing Arguments -- IV. Working with Sources -- V. Style, Form, Mechanics -- Alternatives to Traditional Grading -- Antiracist and Inclusive Pedagogy Resources -- Creative Commons License -- Versioning0 aArguments are all around us. Everywhere we look, someone is trying to get our attention, change our minds, or sell us something. Learning about how persuasion works will make you a more thoughtful and skeptical consumer of all that content, so that you can come to your own conclusions and recognize the underlying assumptions that inform those attempts to persuade you. This book is about analyzing others' arguments and crafting your own. The rhetorical choices that you make as a writer–from evidence to structure to tone–impact how your audience will receive your ideas. Using those tools effectively will help your voice be heard.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aDrummond, Robeauthor1 aKelly, Kristyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1259zAccess online version01964nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003300148245005400181264004300235264005200278264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505043900504520038700943542004101330546001601371588004101387650002301428650002301451710003901474856007701513OTLid0001260MnU20250815144708.0m     o  d s      cr            221010s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aLikharev, Konstantineauthor00aPart CMbClassical MechanicscKonstantin Likharev 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStony Brook, NYbStony Brook Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Contents -- Chapter 1: Review of Fundamentals -- Chapter 2: Lagrangian Analytical Mechanics -- Chapter 3: A Few Simple Problems -- Chapter 4: Rigid Body Motion -- Chapter 5: Oscillations -- Chapter 6: From Oscillations to Waves -- Chapter 7: Deformations and Elasticity -- Chapter 8: Fluid Mechanics -- Chapter 9: Deterministic Chaos -- Chapter 10: A Bit More of Analytical Mechanics -- Exercise Problems with Model Solutions0 aEssential Graduate Physics, Lecture Notes and Problems This Book is brought to you for free and open access by the Department of Physics and Astronomy at Academic Commons. It has been accepted for inclusion in Essential Graduate Physics by an authorized administrator of Academic Commons. For more information, please contact mona.ramonetti@stonybrook.edu, hu.wang.2@stonybrook.edu.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1260zAccess online version01991nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003400148245006100182264004300243264005200286264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505045800512520038700970542004101357546001601398588004101414650002301455650002301478710003901501856007701540OTLid0001261MnU20250815144628.0m     o  d s      cr            221010s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aLikharev, Konstantitneauthor00aPart EMbClassical ElectrodynamicscKonstantitn Likharev 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStony Brook, NYbStony Brook Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Contents -- Chapter 1: Electric Charge Interaction -- Chapter 2: Charges and Conductors -- Chapter 3: Dipoles and Dielectrics -- Chapter 4: DC Currents -- Chapter 5: Magnetism -- Chapter 6: Electromagnetism -- Chapter 7: Electromagnetic Wave Propagation -- Chapter 8: Radiation, Scattering, Interference, and Diffraction -- Chapter 9: Special Relativity -- Chapter 10: Radiation by Relativistic Charges -- Exercise Problems with Model Solutions0 aEssential Graduate Physics, Lecture Notes and Problems This Book is brought to you for free and open access by the Department of Physics and Astronomy at Academic Commons. It has been accepted for inclusion in Essential Graduate Physics by an authorized administrator of Academic Commons. For more information, please contact mona.ramonetti@stonybrook.edu, hu.wang.2@stonybrook.edu.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1261zAccess online version01982nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003300148245005200181264004300233264005200276264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002500450490002700475505045900502520038700961542004101348546001601389588004101405650002301446650002301469710003901492856007701531OTLid0001262MnU20250815124955.0m     o  d s      cr            221010s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aLikharev, Konstantineauthor00aPart QMbQuantum MechanicscKonstantin Likharev 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStony Brook, NYbStony Brook Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Contents -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: 1D Wave Mechanics -- Chapter 3: Higher Dimensionality Effects -- Chapter 4: Bra-ket Formalism -- Chapter 5: Some Exactly Solvable Problems -- Chapter 6: Perturbation Approaches -- Chapter 7: Open Quantum Systems -- Chapter 8: Multiparticle Systems -- Chapter 9: Elements of Relativistic Quantum Mechanics -- Chapter 10: Making Sense of Quantum Mechanics -- Exercise Problems with Model Solutions0 aEssential Graduate Physics, Lecture Notes and Problems This Book is brought to you for free and open access by the Department of Physics and Astronomy at Academic Commons. It has been accepted for inclusion in Essential Graduate Physics by an authorized administrator of Academic Commons. For more information, please contact mona.ramonetti@stonybrook.edu, hu.wang.2@stonybrook.edu.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1262zAccess online version01817nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003400148245005700182264004300239264005200282264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505028800508520038700796542004101183546001601224588004101240650002301281650002301304710003901327856007701366OTLid0001263MnU20250815124523.0m     o  d s      cr            221010s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aLikharev, Konstantitneauthor00aPart SMbStatistical MechanicscKonstantitn Likharev 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStony Brook, NYbStony Brook Universityc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Contents -- Chapter 1: Review of Thermodynamics -- Chapter 2: Principles of Physical Statistics -- Chapter 3: Ideal and Not-So-Ideal Gases -- Chapter 4: Phase Transitions -- Chapter 5: Fluctuations -- Chapter 6: Elements of Kinetics -- Exercise Problems with Model Solutions0 aEssential Graduate Physics, Lecture Notes and Problems This Book is brought to you for free and open access by the Department of Physics and Astronomy at Academic Commons. It has been accepted for inclusion in Essential Graduate Physics by an authorized administrator of Academic Commons. For more information, please contact mona.ramonetti@stonybrook.edu, hu.wang.2@stonybrook.edu.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1263zAccess online version03485nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002500145245004700170250001900217264004300236264009300279264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505042800549520185600977542004102833546001602874588004002890650003002930650002302960710003902983856007703022OTLid0001264MnU20260406020841.0m     o  d s      cr            221010s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aNeser, Lauraeauthor00aIntroduction to Earth SciencecLaura Neser  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech Department of Geosciences, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2023. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Understanding Science2. Plate Tectonics3. Minerals4. Igneous Processes and Volcanoes5. Weathering, Erosion, and Sedimentary Rocks6. Metamorphic Rocks7. Geologic Time8. Earth History9. Crustal Deformation and Earthquakes10. Mass Wasting11. Water12. Earth's Coastlines and Oceans13. Deserts and Glaciers14. Meteorology15. Global Climate Change16. Energy and Mineral Resources17. Origin of the Universe and Our Solar System0 aIntroduction to Earth Science, Second Edition is an open textbook designed to provide a comprehensive introduction to Earth Science that can be freely accessed online, read offline, printed, or purchased as a print-on-demand book. It is intended for a typical 1000-level university introductory course in the Geosciences, although its contents could be applied to many other related courses. This text includes various important features designed to enhance the student learning experience in introductory Earth Science courses. These include a multitude of high-quality figures and images within each chapter that help to clarify key concepts. Self-test assessment questions are embedded in each online chapter that help students focus their learning. QR codes are provided for each assessment to allow students using print or PDF versions to easily access the quiz from an internet-capable device of their choice. The sequence of the book differs from mainstream commercial texts. It has been arranged to present elementary or foundational knowledge regarding rocks and minerals prior to discussion of more complex topics in Earth Science. Similar to the layout of the first edition, this book dedicates one chapter to each of the three major rock types, the processes of mass wasting, geological time, Earth history, and the origin of the universe and our Solar System. Additionally, the second edition includes a new chapter on meteorology, and combines the previously separate chapters on deserts and glaciers into a single, comprehensive chapter that explores these extreme environments. The first edition of this book is available at: https://doi.org/10.21061/introearthscience. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting this textbook: please help us understand your use by filling out this form: https://bit.ly/interest_intro_earth_science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1264zAccess online version03258nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002800140245005200168264004300220264006200263264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505064200502520148801144542003002632546001602662588004002678650002602718650003602744710003902780856007702819OTLid0001265MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            221012s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aAffleck, Monicaeeditor00aPeople Learning and DevelopmentcMonica Affleck 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgement -- Chapter 1: Strategic Role of Training and Development in Organizations -- Chapter 2: How Do Adults Learn? -- Chapter 3: Employee Motivation and Engagement -- Chapter 4: Training Needs Analysis -- Chapter 5: Training Design -- Chapter 6: Training Delivery -- Chapter 7: On-the-job training -- Chapter 8: Off-the-job training -- Chapter 9: Training Program Evaluations -- Chapter 10: Transfer of Learning -- Chapter 11: Employee Training and Technology -- Chapter 12: Future of Learning -- Chapter 13: Performance Management -- Chapter 14: Coaching Performance -- About the Editor -- List of Contributors0 aAre you interested in the topic of people learning and development or are tasked to implement learning and training opportunities in your workplace? We invite you to use this resource full of information and tools to help support people and organizations in their learning journey. Learning happens everywhere, and you will explore the different modes of learning on and off the job. But is a training program actually the right solution to address a performance issue in your organization? Learn how to conduct a needs analysis to help you decide what is in the best interest of the organization and people. Training and learning opportunities have to be properly designed to be effective and deliver the results you expect. Find out how adults learn and what motivates them to develop their skills. Discover how learning supports the performance management process and how to ensure that learning gets transferred into the workplace. The ultimate goal of training and development is to increase productivity, employee engagement, and to make a positive impact on the organization’s bottom line. So, evaluating training and development programs is critical to determine the company’s return on investment (ROI). You will find all of this and more in this resource to help you invest in and reap the benefits of talent development in your company. Remember, this is an interactive resource. We invite you to answer the questions at the end of each chapter to test your knowledge.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1265zAccess online version02367nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002900149245004100178264004300219264005300262264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002800437490002700465505029900492520092600791542001601717546001601733588004001749650002301789650002401812700002901836710003901865856007701904OTLid0001266MnU20260406020537.0m     o  d s      cr            221017s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQM1-695 4aRA4401 aNolan, Michael Feauthor00aApplied Human AnatomycMichael Nolan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- How to Use the Manual -- 1 Back and Spine -- 2 Shoulder Girdle and Upper Limb -- 3 Hip Girdle and Lower Limb -- 4 Thorax -- 5 Lungs and Pleura -- 6 Heart -- 7 Abdomen -- 8 Heart and Face -- 9 Neck -- 10 Mouth and Pharynx -- 11 Orbit and Eye -- 12 Ear -- 13 Answer Key0 aThe structure of the human body is usually considered in courses in gross anatomy. These courses typically consist of lectures by the faculty, readings in assigned textbooks and the study of photographs and illustrations in human anatomy atlases. However, as student’s progress through the curriculum and move into the more clinical or practice oriented phases, many discover that the anatomical knowledge they actually need is somewhat different from the kind they possess. What many encounter is difficulty in applying their knowledge to a clinical setting. Applied Human Anatomy was created to better integrate material that is more often than not treated separately in contemporary health care curricula. It is hoped that through this integration students will develop a deeper and more lasting knowledge and understanding of human anatomy as they are likely to need it in the evaluation and management of patients.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aMcNamara, John Peauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1266zAccess online version02198nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002600140245004500166250001600211264004300227264004400270264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505075600491520036401247542001601611546001601627588004101643650003601684710003901720856007701759OTLid0001267MnU20250113083638.0m     o  d s      cr            221017s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aDufek, Deniseeauthor00aFYE 103 Career ExplorationcDenise Dufek  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEscanaba, MichiganbBay Collegec[2017] 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1 -- Objectives -- 1.1 Introduction -- 1.2 Getting Started -- 1.3 Lecture Notes -- 1.4 Assignments -- 1.5 Learning About Ourselves -- 1.6 VIA Character Strengths -- 1.7 Linking Our Personality to Career Paths -- 1.8 Personal Reflection Paper -- 1.9 Summary -- Unit 2 -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Lecture Notes -- 2.3 Assignments -- 2.4 Creating a Game Plan -- 2.5 Worker Re-Employment -- 2.6 Occupational Outlooks -- 2.7 Create a Job Search Plan -- 2.8 Dr. Kit's "Success At Work" Videos -- 2.9 Summary -- Unit 3 -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Assignments -- 3.3 Lecture Notes -- 3.4 Stress Management -- 3.5 Recognizing & Coping with Long-Term Stress -- 3.6 Short-Term Stress, Causes, & Coping Tips -- 3.7 The Power of Positive Thinking -- 3.8 Summary0 aOverview: Online OER text created for First Year Experience (FYE) Career Exploration by Denise Dufek for Bay College. © 2017 Bay College and Content Creators. Except where otherwise noted this work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/4.0/.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1267zAccess online version02554nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000700156245006600163264004300229264005800272264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505026200507520098300769542001601752546001601768588004001784650004401824650003101868700003001899700002801929700002901957700003001986710003902016856007702055OTLid0001268MnU20260406020625.0m     o  d s      cr            221020s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781438491707  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH100aIntroduction to LGBTQ+ StudiesbA Cross-Disciplinary Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAlbany, NYbState University of New York Pressc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Introduction -- Theoretical Foundations -- Global Histories -- U.S. Histories -- Prejudice and Health -- Relationships, Families, and Youth -- Culture -- Research -- Contributors -- Glossary -- Adoption & Feedback Form -- Review Statement0 aDesigned for an introductory course, this textbook takes a cross-disciplinary approach to the study of LGBTQ+ issues that helps students grasp core concepts through a variety of different perspectives. Introduction to LGBTQ+ Studies offers accessible, academically sound information on a wide range of topics, including history, culture, and Queer Theory; an exploration of LGBTQ+ relationships, families, parenting, health, and education; and how to conduct research on LGBTQ+ topics. The book explores LGBTQ+ issues from the ancient world to contemporary global perspectives. Employing an intersectional analysis, the textbook highlights how sexuality and gender are simultaneously experienced and constructed through other structures of inequality and privilege, such as race and class. The text supports multiple learning styles by integrating visual elements, multimedia resources, discussion and project prompts, and resources for further research throughout the textbook.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aAmory, Deborah P.eauthor1 aMassey, Sean G.eauthor1 aMiller, Jennifereauthor1 aBrown, Allison P.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1268zAccess online version02709nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100002700167245009200194250001600286264004300302264007400345264001200419300002200431336002600453337002600479338003600505341002500541490002700566505067600593520079001269542003002059546001602089588004002105650002402145650002602169710003902195856007702234OTLid0001269MnU20260406020625.0m     o  d s      cr            221024s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781936323999  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aOguz, Abdullaheauthor00aProject ManagementbNavigating the Complexity with a Systematic ApproachcAbdullah Oguz  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMSL Academic Endeavorsc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface and Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Project Management -- Chapter 2: Strategy, Objectives, and Project Selection -- Chapter 3: Project Initiation -- Chapter 4: Project Planning and the Project Scope -- Chapter 5: Stakeholder Management -- Chapter 6: Communication Management, Leadership, and Project Team Management -- Chapter 7: Scheduling -- Chapter 8: Resource Management -- Chapter 9: Budget and Procurement -- Chapter 10: Project Risks -- Chapter 11: Monitoring and Controlling -- Chapter 12: Agile (Adaptive) Project Management -- Chapter 13: Closing the Project -- Chapter 14: Generative Artificial Intelligence (GenAI) and Project Management0 aThe world has become more complicated with the introduction and development of new technologies and methods, and novel risks such as Covid-19 pandemic. Competition has been tougher than it used to be. Organizations strive to keep up with the changes in the internal and external environment. In the light of unprecedented changes, project managers must be prepared in response to the demands from their organizations and key stakeholders like clients, customers and government agencies. This book covers the fundamentals of project management, and aims to guide undergraduate and graduate students to acquire the building blocks of project management. This book also includes Microsoft Project tutorials for project scope, schedule, resources, and cost, and monitoring and controlling.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1269zAccess online version02143nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245004500179264004300224264006000267264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002500449490002700474505050200501520044501003542001601448546001601464588004001480650002601520650002601546700002801572700002901600710003901629856007701668OTLid0001270MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            221024s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693596  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aSmith, Nathaneauthor00aIntroduction to PhilosophycNathan Smith 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Introduction to Philosophy -- Chapter 2. Critical Thinking, Research, Reading, and Writing -- Chapter 3. The Early History of Philosophy around the World -- Chapter 4. The Emergence of Classical Philosophy -- Chapter 5. Logic and Reasoning -- Chapter 6. Metaphysics -- Chapter 7. Epistemology -- Chapter 8. Value Theory -- Chapter 9. Normative Moral Theory -- Chapter 10. Applied Ethics -- Chapter 11. Political Philosophy -- Chapter 12. Contemporary Philosophies and Social Theories --0 aDesigned to meet the scope and sequence of your course, Introduction to Philosophy surveys logic, metaphysics, epistemology, theories of value, and history of philosophy thematically. To provide a strong foundation in global philosophical discourse, diverse primary sources and examples are central to the design, and the text emphasizes engaged reading, critical thinking, research, and analytical skill-building through guided activities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aBrowne, Gregoryeauthor1 aConkling, Parisheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1270zAccess online version01825nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002700144245009000171250001900261264004300280264008500323264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505050900585520005801094542004101152546001601193588004001209650004301249650003101292710003901323856007701362OTLid0001271MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            221024s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH11 aKrumrey, Kareneauthor00aIntercultural Communication for the Community College (Second Edition)cKaren Krumrey  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDisclaimer: Graphics in Progress -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- Main Body -- Chapter 1- The Study of Intercultural Communication -- Chapter 2- Starting With Culture -- Chapter 3- Self & Identity -- Chapter 4- Verbal Communication -- Chapter 5- Nonverbal Communication -- Chapter 6- Conflict -- Chapter 7- Relationships -- Chapter 8- Popular Culture and Social Media -- Chapter 9- Tourism -- Chapter 10- Business -- Chapter 11- Education -- Chapter 12- Healthcare -- Glossary -- References -- Index0 aIntercultural Communication for the Community College1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1271zAccess online version02458nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138100002800145100002700173245005200200264004300252264008500295264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505117300557520005401730542004101784546001601825588004001841650004401881650003101925710003901956856007701995OTLid0001273MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            221024s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH11 aGoerling, Erikaeauthor1 aWolfe, Emersoneauthor00aIntroduction to Human SexualitycErika Goerling 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- I. Part 1: Reflections and Explorations in Human Sexuality -- 1. Chapter 1- Community Agreements and Terminology -- 2. Chapter 2- Human Sexuality Theories -- 3. Chapter 3- Sexology through Time and Contemporary Sex Research -- 4. Chapter 4- Sex Differentiation, Anatomy, and Physiology -- 5. Chapter 5- Gender -- 6. Chapter 6- Sexual Orientation -- 7. Chapter 7- Attraction -- 8. Chapter 8- Sexual Response and the Biochemistry of Love -- 9. Chapter 9- Sexual Behaviors (and Safer Sex) -- 10. Chapter 10- Intimate Relationships -- II. Part 2- Professional and Clinical Topics in Human Sexuality -- 11. Chapter 11- Part 2 Terminology Review -- 12. Chapter 12- Sexual Development Through the Lifespan -- 13. Chapter 13- Contraception -- 14. Chapter 14- Sexually Transmitted Infections -- 15. Chapter 15- Conception, Pregnancy, and Birth -- 16. Chapter 16- Variations in Sexual Behavior -- 17. Chapter 17- Sexual Dysfunction and Treatment -- 18. Chapter 18- Sexual Marketplace -- 19. Chapter 19- Trauma, Therapy, and Trauma Informed Care -- 20. Chapter 20- Ability, Intersectionality, Body Image, and Reclaiming Our Bodies -- About the Authors -- Appendix0 aThis is an introductory human sexuality textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1273zAccess online version02580nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001100135050001000146050001300156100002600169245014200195264004300337264008700380264001200467300002200479336002600501337002600527338003600553341002800589490002700617505043800644520065401082542001601736546001601752588004001768650002001808650002401828650003201852650002601884650003601910700003101946700002901977710003902006856007702045OTLid0001274MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221031s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aHF5001 4aHB615 4aLB1062.61 aForshee, Zaneeauthor04aThe Path to FundingbThe Artist’s Guide to Building Your Audience, Generating Income, and Realizing Career SustainabilitycZane Forshee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaltimore, MarylandbThe Peabody Institute of The Johns Hopkins Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle -- Foreward -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- I. The Artist -- 1. Introduction -- 2. Your Artistry and Values -- II. The Community -- 4. Your Audience -- 5. Funders and Other Partners -- III. The Creative Project -- 6. Project Descriptions -- 7. Project Budgets -- 8. Project Timelines -- 9. Project Viability -- 10. Make It Happen -- References -- Glossary -- About the Artists -- About the Team -- About the Peabody Institute0 aBased on coursework developed at Peabody Conservatory, this book breaks down the process of developing an artist mission statement, generating new ideas for creative projects, and creating an engaging project description. It also covers methods for artists to identify their audience, generate a comprehensive project budget, collect compelling work samples, and identify potential funders to support their creative work. Written by a team of active artists and educators, this resource provides creatives with tools and strategies to communicate passionately and effectively about their work and take control of their financial and artistic future.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEntrepreneurshipvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aManceor, Christinaeauthor1 aMcGinness, Robineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1274zAccess online version03331nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153100002400161245004700185264004300232264006000275264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505132800512520079101840542004102631546001602672588004102688650003802729650002602767650002402793710003902817856007702856OTLid0001275MnU20240325083102.0m     o  d s      cr            221107s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798986876801  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aBL11 aEwald, Oweneauthor00aElementary New Testament GreekcOwen Ewald 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSeattle, WAbSeattle Pacific University Libraryc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Alphabet, words, and names; Nominal Sentences -- Chapter 2: Verbs and basic clauses; Contract Verbs; the Definite Article ("the"; Negation -- Chapter 3: Cases and Gender -- Chapter 4: Prepositions -- Chapter 5: Adjectives; Predicate and Attributive positions -- Chapter 6: Verb tenses -- Chapter 7: Verb moods (including Participles) -- Chapter 8: Other patterns of nouns and verbs, including Middle-Only verbs -- Chapter 9: Pronouns and conjunctions -- Chapter 10: Complex Sentences -- Chapter 11: Special verbs -- Chapter 12: Third declension (consonant stems), Part 1 -- Chapter 13: Third declension, Part 2 -- Chapter 14: Participles, concluded -- Chapter 15: Verb Voices: Active, Middle, and Passive -- Chapter 16: Perfect (Stative) Aspect -- Chapter 17: Subjunctive Mood -- Chapter 18: Other Verb Uses -- Chapter 19: Extra Verbs, Athematic and Contract Verbs -- Chapter 20: Final pieces -- Appendix A: Note to Instructors -- Appendix B: The Fifteen Tenses of English and Their Latin and Greek Equivalents -- Appendix C: Second and Root Aorists -- Appendix D: Principal Parts of Verbs -- Appendix E: all the forms of "be" -- Appendix F: Vocabulary English-Greek (whole course) -- Appendix G: Vocabulary Greek-English (whole course) -- Appendix H: All the Verb Forms -- Appendix I: Conspectus of Noun Endings0 aThis open-access textbook helps students learn to read New Testament Greek at the elementary level. It includes clear, concise explanations of grammar and syntax, helpful examples, and essential vocabulary, with no assumption of previous language study, and it does not require accents for most forms. At the end of each of its twenty chapters, students will find short Greek-language episodes from the life of a fictional early Christian family of Jewish ancestry, short readings from the Greek New Testament and Septuagint, and review/homework exercises that can help reinforce new concepts and vocabulary. This book can help students prepare to read Nijay Gupta and Jonah Sandford’s Intermediate Greek Reader: Galatians and Related Texts, also available as an open-access textbook.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1275zAccess online version02519nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002800138245005400166264004300220264008500263264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505036600525520105200891542003001943546001601973588004001989650002402029710003902053856007702092OTLid0001276MnU20260406020828.0m     o  d s      cr            221107s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aMason, Dyana P.eauthor00aIntroduction to the Nonprofit SectorcDyana Mason 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Preface -- 1. Introduction -- 2. Theories -- 3. Mission, Ethics and Accountability in the Nonprofit Sector -- 4. Government-Nonprofit Relationships -- 5. Volunteers and Voluntary Action -- 6. Philanthropy and Charitable Giving -- 7. Social Movement and Advocacy -- 8. Social Enterprises and Entrepreneurship -- 9. International Organizations0 aNonprofit organizations are on the front lines in communities, providing an important foundation for the social safety net in the United States and around the world. They also provide places where people can gather, share ideas and build community. They often accomplish amazing feats with few resources. This book was designed to be used in an undergraduate-level introductory course in the nonprofit sector. It provides an overview of the vocabulary used in defining the work of nonprofit organizations, topics of interest to nonprofit managers, and describes the primary roles nonprofits play in American (and to a lesser extent international) communities. The book also considers the growing numbers and influence of social enterprises and other “social innovation” organizations. Throughout, it brings in leading themes of accountability, ethics and obligations facing many nonprofit organizations as they go about their work – challenges that should be well understood by anyone interested in becoming a leader in the nonprofit sector.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1276zAccess online version03250nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245008200163264004300245264010300288264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505031000568520170100878542004102579546001602620588004102636650002702677650002602704700003002730710003902760856007702799OTLid0001277MnU20240325083105.0m     o  d s      cr            221107s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP1231 aMosley, Alberteauthor03aAn Introduction to LogicbFrom Everyday Life to Formal SystemscAlbert Mosley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSmith College Open Educational Resources: Textbooksc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Contents -- Introduction: Language and Rationality -- Chapter 1: The Structure of Arguments -- Chapter 2: Classical Logic -- Chapter 3: Categorical Inferences -- Chapter 4: Modern Logic -- Chapter 5: Applications of Modern Logic -- Chapter 6: Inductive Inferences -- Chapter 7: Informal Fallacies0 aAn introduction to the discipline of logic covering subjects from the structures of arguments, classical and modern logic, categorical and inductive inferences, to informal fallacies. Over 30 years of development provides a sound empirical based pedagogy throughout the text. Examples in ordinary language using familiar examples avoids the suggestion of an alien cultural imposition. A focus on the basic representational techniques of classical and modern logic. Students introduced to basic concepts of set theory, using Venn diagrams to represent statements and evaluate arguments. Students introduced to basic concepts of propositional logic and the use of truth-tables. Students introduced to basic concepts of predicate logic and the use of mixed quantifiers. Students introduced to the relationship between logic diagrams, circuit diagrams, and gate diagrams in computer science. Students introduced to the use of logic in ordinary and scientific contexts. Students provided a historical introduction to the development of modern probability theory and its relationship to logic. Students introduced to basic concepts of statistical inference, with non-technical treatments of hasty and biased statistical generalizations. And a unique treatment of stereotypical thinking in terms of statistical syllogisms. Students introduced to basic notions in analogical and causal inference. Exercises requiring both passive (recognition) and active (construction) skills. Exercises including locutions and examples from standard English and ethnic dialects of English (African-American, Hispanic-American, etc) Answers for sample exercises provided, making the text closer to a self-teaching module1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBaltazar, Eulalioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1277zAccess online version02704nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003500149245005200184264004300236264006700279264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505063100523520091701154542004102071546001602112588004002128650002302168650002302191710003902214856007702253OTLid0001279MnU20260406020539.0m     o  d s      cr            221109s2009    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aRamroop Singh, Natashaeauthor00aIntroduction to GeneticscNatasha Ramroop Singh 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKamloops, British ColumbiabThompson Rivers Universityc[2009] 4c©2009.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1- Mendel's First Law and Meiosis -- Chapter 2- Mendel's Second Law: Independent Assortment -- Chapter 3- The Cell Cycle and Mitosis -- Chapter 4- Pedigree Analysis -- Chapter 5- The Complementation Test -- Chapter 6- Alleles at a Single Locus -- Chapter 7- The Central Dogma- Mutations and Biochemical Pathways -- Chapter 8- Gene Interactions -- Chapter 9- Linkage and Recombination Frequency -- Chapter 10- Sex Chromosomes & Sex Linkage -- Chapter 11- Recombination Mapping of Gene Loci -- Chapter 12- Physical Mapping of Chromosomes and Genomes -- Chapter 13- Genes and COVID-19 Susceptibility in Humans -- Appendix0 aGenetics, otherwise known as the Science of Heredity, is the study of biological information, and how this information is stored, replicated, transmitted and used by subsequent generations. The study of genetics can be sub-divided into three main areas: Transmission Genetics, Molecular Genetics, and Population Genetics. In this Introductory text, the focus is on Transmission or Classical Genetics, which deals with the basic principles of heredity and the mechanisms by which traits are passed from one generation to the next. The work of Gregor Mendel is central to Transmission Genetics; as such, there is a discussion about the pioneering work performed by him along with Mendel’s Laws, as they pertain to inheritance. Other aspects of Classical Genetics are covered, including the relationship between chromosomes and heredity, the arrangement of genes on chromosomes, and the physical mapping of genes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1279zAccess online version04507nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002900149245005300178264004300231264008300274264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505169800534520163602232542002703868546001603895588004103911650002303952650004203975710003904017856007704056OTLid0001280MnU20260406020540.0m     o  d s      cr            221110s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aTA1451 aDouglas, Tania Seeditor00aBiomedical Engineering for AfricacTania Douglas 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRondebosch, Cape Town, South AfricabUniversity of Cape Town Librariesc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreliminary Pages -- Chapter 1. Introduction -- Chapter 2. The Case for Biomedical Engineers in African Hospitals: A Clinician’s Point of View -- Chapter 3. Recent Developments in Biomedical Engineering Education in Africa: A Focus on Nigeria and the University of Ibadan -- Chapter 4. Creating a Department of Biomedical Engineering and an Undergraduate Programme – The University of Lagos Experience -- Chapter 5. Biomedical Engineering in Ethiopia -- Chapter 6. Biomedical Engineering and Entrepreneurship -- Chapter 7. Problem Identification and Needs Assessment for Healthcare Technologies -- Chapter 8. Frugal Biodesign: An approach for Developing Appropriate Medical Devices in Low-resource Settings -- Chapter 9. Materials for Medical Devices -- Chapter 10. User-Centred Design in a Health Innovation Course to Address Hearing Loss in the Elderly -- Chapter 11. Implementing a Design Methodology: Concept for a Head Positioning Device for Hospital Beds -- Chapter 12. Medical Device Concept for Burn Wound Exudate Detection -- Chapter 13. Infant Warming Device for Neonatal Surgery in a Low-Resource Settings -- Chapter 14. Needle Disposal Device for Use in Low-Resource Settings -- Chapter 15. An Electronically Controlled Gravity Feed Infusion Set for Intravenous Fluids -- Chapter 16. A Prototype Metabolic Cage for Rats and Mice for Biomedical Research in Nigeria -- Chapter 17. Biomedical Engineering Ethics -- Chapter 18. Intellectual Property Protection and Commercialisation -- Chapter 19. Medical Device Regulation in Africa -- Chapter 20. Healthcare Technology Management -- Chapter 21. Healthcare Technology Management in Zimbabwe -- Chapter 22. Mobile Health for Africa0 aHealth technology innovation in low- and middle-income countries (LMICs), including countries in Africa, falls far short of meeting the healthcare needs of these settings. The result is a heavy reliance on products and technologies imported from industrialised countries that are often not suited to, or sustainable for, LMICs. Appropriate healthcare products for LMICs are best developed in these countries, where local knowledge and understanding of needs, context and available resources may be incorporated into designs and implementation plans. The objectives for enabling health technology development in LMICs include: 1) expanding the base of expertise through research training programmes with a problem-solving focus; 2) stimulating new knowledge, approaches and solutions by enabling innovation; and 3) integrating research communities within and across institutions to build critical mass. The field of biomedical engineering is central to health technology innovation. This book is a response to the need for biomedical engineering capacity in Africa. It is grounded in the African context. It serves as a resource for academics and students in biomedical engineering, for those interested in entering the field in any capacity and for practitioners at every stage of product development. University leaders intent on establishing new biomedical engineering programmes or departments, may draw on the content for guidance on structuring their offerings. The book reaches beyond Africa, as it is relevant to other LMIC settings, and provides insights to guide global health initiatives focused on technology innovation.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1280zAccess online version02623nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138100002600145245005100171264004300222264004000265264001200305300002200317336002600339337002600365338003600391341002500427490002700452505093800479520048701417542001601904546001601920588004101936650004401977650003102021700002702052700003002079710003902109856007702148OTLid0001281MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            221114s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH11 aRahman, Susaneauthor00aSexuality, the Self, and SocietycSusan Rahman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKentfield, CAbSusan Rahmanc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSexuality, the Self, and Society -- Introduction -- Chapter 1: What is Human Sexuality? -- Chapter 2: Research Methods and Ethics in Human Sexuality -- Chapter 3: Development and Structure of The Human Reproductive System -- Chapter 4: Pleasure, Sexual Arousal and Response -- Chapter 5: Gender Identity, Gender Roles, and Gender Differences -- Chapter 6: Sexual Orientation -- Chapter 7: Bias and Discrimination in Human Sexuality -- Chapter 8: Attraction, Love and Relationship Formation -- Chapter 9: Relationship Styles, Communication, Sexual Behavior, and Fantasies -- Chapter 10: Conception, Pregnancy and Childbirth -- Chapter 11: Sexuality Through the Lifespan -- Chapter 12: Contraception, Abortion, and Sexually Transmitted Infections -- Chapter 13: Sexual Health -- Chapter 14: Consent, Coercion, and Sexual Violence -- Chapter 15: Sex(uality) Work that Engages with the Body -- Sexuality, The Self, and Society Conclusion0 aContent included in Sexuality, the Self, and Society is aligned with the typical scope for an introductory, interdisciplinary Human Sexuality Textbook. It is written to be a complete text for a semester length course but could be used, in part, reorganized, or edited in true OER fashion. It is meant to be accessible, relevant, and inclusive. It also will not remain static meaning that the author will continue to update periodically and those who adopt may do so as they see fit.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBowman, Nathaneauthor1 aJackson, Dahmitraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1281zAccess online version02660nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000800136050000700144100002600151245011900177264004300296264004000339264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002500501490002700526505101400553520034201567542001601909546001601925588004101941650002801982650002302010650003102033700002802064700003002092710003902122856007702161OTLid0001282MnU20260406020540.0m     o  d s      cr            221114s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aD20 4aH11 aRahman, Susaneauthor02aA People’s History of Structural Racism in AcademiabFrom A(dministration of Justice) to Z(oology)cSusan Rahman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKentfield, CAbSusan Rahmanc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensing -- 1: Introduction -- 2: A Look at Structural Racism by Discipline -- Administration of Justice -- Anthropology -- Architecture -- Art- Dance -- Art- Drama -- Art- Visual -- Art History -- Astronomy -- Biology -- Business -- Career Counseling -- Career Technology Education (CTE) -- CTE -Fire Technology -- CTE- Graphic Design -- CTE - Multimedia Studies -- Chemistry -- Communication/Film/Speech -- Computer Science -- Early Childhood Education -- Economics -- Engineering -- English -- English as Second Language -- Environmental Science -- Ethnic Studies -- Geography -- Geology -- Health Education -- History -- Human Sexuality -- Languages -- Library and Information Science -- Mathematics -- Mathematics- Statistics -- Music -- Music/Musical Performance/ers -- Philosophy -- Physics -- Physics- Astrophysics -- Political Science -- Psychology -- Sociology -- Zoology -- Conclusion -- Acknowledgements -- Reflections from the Authors -- A List of Resources for Further Exploration -- References0 aThe contents of this book were developed under an Open Textbooks Pilot grant from the Fund for the Improvement of Postsecondary Education (FIPSE), U.S. Department of Education. However, those contents do not necessarily represent the policy of the Department of Education, and you should not assume endorsement by the Federal Government.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSunder, Prateekeauthor1 aJackson, Dahmitraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1282zAccess online version01748nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003800150245006100188264004300249264006300292300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505024800520520024400768542004101012546001601053588004001069650004201109650003801151700002701189700003001216710003901246856007701285OTLid0001283MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            221114suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aOsgood, Elisabeth (Libby)eauthor00aEngineering MechanicsbStaticscElisabeth (Libby) Osgood 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPrince Edward Island, CanadabRobertson Library Pressbooks  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Fundamental Concepts -- Chapter 2: Particles -- Chapter 3: Rigid Body Basics -- Chapter 4: Rigid Bodies -- Chapter 5: Trusses -- Chapter 6: Internal Forces -- Chapter 7: Inertia -- Appendix A: Included Open Textbooks0 aIntroduction to engineering mechanics: statics, for those who love to learn. Concepts include: particles and rigid body equilibrium equations, distributed loads, shear and moment diagrams, trusses, method of joints and sections, & inertia.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks1 aCameron, Gaylaeauthor1 aChristensen, Emmaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1283zAccess online version03962nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001000162100002900172245006900201264004300270264009600313264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505113400586520154501720542003003265546001603295588004003311650002903351650003103380650002503411710003903436856007703475OTLid0001284MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            221115s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946135926  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.3 4aH1 4aHM5861 aWalker, Susan K.eauthor00aCritical Perspectives on Technology and the FamilycSusan Walker 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aVideo welcome and book content overview -- About the Book -- About Teaching for Critical Perspectives on Technology and the Family -- With Gratittude -- About the Author (or, the payoff for paying attention) -- Chapter 1: Ten Truths about Technology -- Chapter 2: Ways of Understanding Families and Technology -- Chapter 3: Differences Within and Across Familes' Technology Use -- Chapter 4: Technology Use and Couple Relationships -- Chapter 5: Technology Use and Impacts in Children, Youth and Young Adults -- Chapter 6: Technology Use by Parents -- Chapter 7: Technology’s Influence on Parent-Child Relationships -- Chapter 8: Technology Use for Family Communication and Connectivity -- Chapter 9: What Boundaries? Technology's Role in Work and Family Balance -- Chapter 10: Technology Use in Family Health and Money Management -- Chapter 11: Technology Integration in the Practice of Family Professionals -- Chapter 12: Shifting the Culture: Policy, Practice and Research toward Healthy Family Technology Use -- Readings and Resources to Complement this Book -- 50 Classroom Assessment Techniques (CATS) by Angelo and Cross0 aFrom the perspective of a long time family practitioner, researcher, and educator, and technology innovator, this textbook offers the first comprehensive view of technology in the family for college students, professionals and the public. Each chapter offers content and a complete reference list, learning activities, ideas for critical blog posting and additional readings. The beginning chapters cover foundational information about our societal use of information and communications technology, family theories and ways of understanding families, and how families differ in their use and access to ICT. The main body of the book (chapters 4-10) covers elements of the family from couple relationships and dating apps, to children’s use and impacts on development from early childhood through young adulthood, use by parents and in the parent-child relationship, shared use by family members, and then topics important to family life: work-family balance and health and financial management and technology. The end of the book pivots to look closely at use by family professionals, the competencies needed to integrate technology into practice, and policy as a proactive and systemic avenue for change. End of book material include an additional reading list and recommended web content, social media and thought leaders. The authors lends her ideas on teaching for critical thinking with an overview at the beginning of the book, and classroom assessment ideas (actually short ways to engage learners in critical thinking activities).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1284zAccess online version06177nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050000800143100002800151245004000179250001700219264004300236264010300279264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002500504490002700529505033200556520458700888542001605475546001605491588004105507650002405548650002705572700002305599700002905622710003905651856007705690OTLid0001285MnU20250815123807.0m     o  d s      cr            221121s1994    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA11 aCallahan, Jameseauthor00aCalculus in ContextcJames Callahan  a2008 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSmith College Open Educational Resources: Textbooksc[1994] 4c©1994.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. A Context for Calculus -- 2. Successive Approximations -- 3. The Derivative -- 4. Differential Equations -- 5. Techniques of Differentiation -- 6. The Integral -- 7. Periodicity -- 8. Dynamical Systems -- 9. Functions of Several Variables -- 10. Series and Approximations -- 11. Techniques of Integration -- 12. Case Studies0 aDesigning the curriculum We believe that calculus can be for students what it was for Euler and the Bernoullis: a language and a tool for exploring the whole fabric of science. We also believe that much of the mathematical depth and vitality of calculus lies in connections to other sciences. The mathematical questions that arise are compelling in part because the answers matter to other disciplines. We began our work with a "clean slate," not by asking what parts of the traditional course to include or discard. Our starting points are thus our summary of what calculus is really about. Our curricular goals are what we aim to convey about the subject in the course. Our functional goals describe the attitudes and behaviors we hope our students will adopt in using calculus to approach scientific and mathematical questions. Starting Points Calculus is fundamentally a way of dealing with functional relationships that occur in scientific and mathematical contexts. The techniques of calculus must be subordinate to an overall view of the questions that give rise to these relationships. Technology radically enlarges the range of questions we can explore and the ways we can answer them. Computers and graphing calculators are much more than tools for teaching the traditional calculus. The concept of a dynamical system is central to science. Therefore, differential equations belong at the center of calculus, and technology makes this possible at the introductory level. The process of successive approximation is a key tool of calculus, even when the outcome of the process--the limit--cannot be explicitly given in closed form. Curricular Goals Develop calculus in the context of scientific and mathematical questions. Treat systems of differential equations as fundamental objects of study. Construct and analyze mathematical models. Use the method of successive approximations to define and solve problems. Develop geometric visualization with hand-drawn and computer graphics. Give numerical methods a more central role. Functional Goals Encourage collaborative work. Enable students to use calculus as a language and a tool. Make students comfortable tackling large, messy, ill-defined problems. Foster an experimental attitude towards mathematics. Help students appreciate the value of approximate solutions. Teach students that understanding grows out of working on problems. Impact of Technology Differential equations can now be solved numerically, so they can take their rightful place in the introductory calculus course. The ability to handle data and perform many computations makes exploring messy, real-world problems possible. Since we can now deal with credible models, the role of modelling becomes much more central to the subject. The text illustrates how we have pursued the curricular goals. Each goal is addressed within the first chapter which begins with questions about describing and analyzing the spread of a contagious disease. A model is built: a model which is actually a system of coupled non-linear differential equations. We then begin a numerical exploration on those equations, and the door is opened to a solution by successive approximations. Our implementation of the functional goals is also evident. The text has many more words than the traditional calculus book--it is a book to be read. The exercises make unusual demands on students. Most are not just variants of examples that have been worked in the text. In fact, the text has rather few "template'' examples. Shifts in Emphasis It will also become apparent to you that the text reflects substantial shifts in emphasis in comparison to the traditional course. Here are some of the most striking: How the emphasis shifts: increase: concepts, geometry, graphs, brute force, numerical solutions decrease: techniques, algebra, formulas, elegance, closed-form solutions Since we all value elegance, let us explain what we mean by "brute force." Euler's method is a good example. It is a general method of wide applicability. Of course when we use it to solve a differential equation like y'(t) = t, we are using a sledgehammer to crack a peanut. But at least the sledgehammer works. Moreover, it works with coconuts (like y' = y(1 - y/10)), and it will even knock down a house (like y' = cos2(t)). Students also see the elegant special methods that can be invoked to solve y' = t and y' = y(1 - y/10) (separation of variables and partial fractions are discussed in chapter 11), but they understand that they are fortunate indeed when a real problem will succumb to such methods.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aCox, Davideauthor1 aHoffman, Kennetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1285zAccess online version02399nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002600148245005200174264004300226264010300269264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505049500549520074401044542001601788546001601804588004101820650002501861650002301886710003901909856007701948OTLid0001286MnU20240325083114.0m     o  d s      cr            221121s1973    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aFleck, Georgeeauthor00aCase Studies in Systems ChemistrycGeorge Fleck 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSmith College Open Educational Resources: Textbooksc[1973] 4c©1973.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbstract -- Introduction -- Systems Chemistry: Putting it All Together -- Taking it Apart, versus Putting it Together: Implications for the Chemistry Curriculum -- Concepts of Systems Chemistry -- Carboxylic Acid Equilibria -- Chapter 1. Titration of a Mononprotic Acid -- Chapter 2. Titration of a Diprotic Acid -- Chapter 3. Polyprotic Acid Equilibria -- Appendices -- Appendix I. Programming for the Plotter -- Appendix II. National Bureau of Standards Buffers for Calibrating a pH Meter0 aThis publication was produced as a teaching tool for college chemistry.The book is a text for a computer-based unit on the chemistry of acid-base titrations, and is designed for use with FORTRAN or BASIC.computer systems, and with a programmable electronic calculator, in a variety of educational settings. The text attempts to present computer programs that are relatively free of reliance on specialized large computer systems programs. The case-study approach presented is highly research and laboratory oriented. Similar subject matter is conventionally taught in most introductory college chemistry courses, but this text material attempts greater depth of instruction through utilization of the computational resources of a computer.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1286zAccess online version02858nam a2200505 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157050001000164050001000174050001000184050000700194100003000201245008800231264004300319264006300362264001200425300002200437336002600459337002600485338003600511341002800547490002700575505065300602520068201255542003001937546001601967588004001983650002502023650002302048650003302071650002402104650002302128650003102151700002902182700002502211710003902236856007702275OTLid0001287MnU20250917190004.0m     o  d s      cr            221130s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798985775419  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aL7 4aLC980 4aRA440 4aQH301 4aH11 aMcNeill, Cyntheraeauthor00aUrban HealthbA Practical Application for Clinical Based LearningcCynthera McNeill 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDetroit, MIbWayne State University Library Systemc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- About the Contributors -- Foreword -- Chapter 1. Defining Urban Health in the Inner City -- Chapter 2. Clinician Preparation for Urban Health Practice -- Chapter 3. Social Determinants of Health in Urban Communities -- Chapter 4. Health Care in the Inner City: Primary Care Perspective -- Chapter 5. Mental Health Disparities in Urban Communities: Impact of Urban Living on Mental Health -- Chapter 6. Tertiary Patient Management -- Chapter 7. Urban Health Disparities and the COVID 19 Pandemic: The Perfect Storm -- Appendix: Examining and addressing COVID-19 racial disparities in Detroit0 aUrban Health: A Practical Application for Clinical Based Learning is an openly licensed, peer-reviewed textbook for clinical-based nursing educators covering barriers in urban health and their impact on patient health outcomes. The authors explore perspectives of urban communities, urban patients, and urban healthcare providers to offer insight into how healthcare providers can address disparities in urban healthcare, provide meaningful care with the lived experiences of urban patients in mind, and improve patient-provider communication by moving towards a more solution-driven, team-based care approach. Features include learning activities, exemplars, and case studies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aStephens, Umeikaeauthor1 aWalker, Taraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1287zAccess online version02237nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245004300162264004300205264005600248264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505074300481520044601224542001601670546001601686588004001702650002901742710003901771856007701810OTLid0001288MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            221202s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aMiller, Caraeauthor00aWriting for Digital MediacCara Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Publisher's Note -- Critical Literacy -- Introduction -- The Myth of the Digital Panacea -- Screens, Spins, and Perceptions of "Reality" -- Surveillance Capitalism -- Privileged Spaces -- Affordances and Constraints: A Critical Analysis of Digital Spaces -- Rhetorical Literacy -- The Everyday Function of Rhetoric -- Rhetoric as a Social Tool -- Rhetoric in the Digital Realm -- Multimodality -- Rhetoric and the Ideological Turn -- Functional Literacy -- Best Practices for Digital Writing -- Writing the Genres of the Web -- Basic Design Principles -- Branding, Content Strategy, and SEO -- Accessibility and Inclusion -- Remix Culture and Copyright -- Editing Your Work -- Final Thoughts -- Back Matter -- Contributors0 aThis textbook focuses on writing and digital media. Increasingly, writing is published on digital platforms like social media, websites, and blogs, and this online writing performs a variety of personal, professional, academic, and civic functions. The textbook discusses these functions from a critical and rhetorical perspective and provides practical skills and strategies that students can put into practice in their own digital writing.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1288zAccess online version03562nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001000166100002900176245007200205264004300277264005600320264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505045600553520172301009542001602732546001602748588004002764650002302804650002402827650002302851700002602874700003002900700002502930700003302955710003902988856007703027OTLid0001289MnU20260406020838.0m     o  d s      cr            221202s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956390407  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aThapaliya, Arbineauthor00aUltrasound Physics and its Application in MedicinecArbin Thapaliya 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Preface -- Abbreviations and Acronyms -- List of Definitions -- Basic Principles of Ultrasound -- Ultrasound Instrumentation -- 2D, 3D, and 4D Ultrasound Imaging -- Ultrasound Bioeffects and Safety -- Obstetric Ultrasound -- Musculoskeletal Sonography -- The Heart and Echocardiography -- Pulmonary Ultrasound -- Abdominal Ultrasound -- Vascular Sonography -- Focused Assessment With Sonography in Trauma(FAST) Exam -- Contributors0 aUltrasound has a wide range of medical applications. Some of these include obstetrics (monitoring the progress of pregnancy), oncology (monitoring the growth of tumors), cardiology (visualizing the heart function and physiology), biopsy (guiding needles in various procedures), and physiotherapy. For example, today, an estimated 60-70% of pregnant women in the United States undergo ultrasound examination during pregnancy. An estimated 250 million fetal ultrasound examinations are performed every year in the USA. In the last few decades, ultrasound technology has expanded to medical imaging in various other specialties: Anesthesiology, Critical Care, Emergency Medicine, General Pediatrics, Internal Medicine, Obstetrics and Gynecology (OB-GYN), Pediatric Emergency Medicine, Physiatry, Sports Medicine, and Surgery. The increasing demand in the use of ultrasound technology in various biomedical fields points to a future in which medical professionals will be required to possess a general knowledge of ultrasound technology. While currently most medical professionals rely on technicians to perform the imaging studies, there can be a high degree of operator dependent results. Therefore, a solid foundation of the technological properties of ultrasound would give health care providers a competitive advantage in the future. This is one of the first goals of this textbook. This textbook also covers general aspects of diagnostic ultrasound providing an excellent reference for both beginners and professionals. In addition, this textbook has end-of-the-chapter experiments that will help educators conduct labs for students and any other learners to enhance their learning and solidify the practical skills.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aSithole, Aleceauthor1 aWelsh, Michael J.eauthor1 aDana, Gastoneauthor1 aMarshall, Katieeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1289zAccess online version01810nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002800140100002600168245008600194264004300280264005500323264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505032900555520027700884542004101161546001601202588004001218650002601258650003601284710003901320856007701359OTLid0001292MnU20260406020800.0m     o  d s      cr            221205s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aClevinger, Karaeauthor1 aRust, Stepheneauthor00aWriting as InquirybA Guide to WR 121 at the University of OregoncKara Clevinger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEugene, ORbUniversity of Oregon Librariesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface: Writing for College -- Thanks, Acknowledgements, and Attribution -- Chapter One: Introduction to Writing as a Process of Inquiry -- Chapter Two: Contexts for Writing -- Chapter Three: Critical Reasoning and Inquiry -- Chapter Four: Composing Academic Essays -- Chapter Five: The Writing Process -- About the Authors0 aWelcome to our creative commons OER (open educational resource) for Writing 121 at the University of Oregon. This resource is designed for students to be a zero-cost, high-quality guide to academic writing, with the goal of preparing you for success in college and beyond.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1292zAccess online version02201nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002700139245004600166264004300212264005800255264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002500435490002700460505021100487520088000698542004101578546001601619588004101635650002601676650002101702710003901723856007701762OTLid0001293MnU20260406020541.0m     o  d s      cr            221206s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aStewart, Tobineauthor00aFoundational Sight SingingcTobin Stewart 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTRAILSc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to the Melodic Chapters -- Chapter 1 -- Introduction to the Rhythm Chapters -- Chapter 2 -- Chapter 3 -- Chapter 4 -- Chapter 5 -- Chapter 6 -- Chapter 7 -- Chapter 8 -- Chapter 9 -- Chapter 100 aSight reading music can be a daunting endeavor for aspiring, and even experienced, musicians. Foundational Sight Singing was created to provide a systematic approach to learn to read, hear and perform music. The ordered presentation of both melodies and rhythms in this text helps students develop accuracy and fluency in sight singing which is a fundamental skill for all musicians. It is a text for developing proficiency in reading and sight singing that can be used in a variety of contexts from individual practice to choral or instrumental ensemble rehearsals to college ear training courses. Multiple exercises are provided for drilling and practice at each level throughout the text to grow the students’ fluency and proficiency in reading and performing pitch and rhythm. This text will help students build a solid foundation upon which they can establish mastery.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1293zAccess online version02420nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001300154100003300167245004600200264004300246264008500289264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505067200551520039701223542001601620546001601636588004001652650002501692650003401717700003201751700002601783700002801809700003301837710003901870856007701909OTLid0001294MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221212s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101356  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKF385.A41 aSolberg, Rorie Spilleeditor00aCivil Rights and LibertiescRorie Solberg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Case List -- Incorporation -- Press Freedoms -- Religious Freedoms -- Speech and Expression -- Privacy -- Second Amendment -- Equal Protection: Race -- Equal Protection: Gender and Other Groups -- Voting Rights -- Contributors -- Justice Serving on the Court 1790-1834 -- Justice Serving on the Court 1835-1889 -- Justice Serving on the Court 1890-1937 -- Median Justice Scores Per Year 1937-2018 -- Justice Serving on the Court 1937 - 1949 -- Justice Serving on the Court 1950- 1969 -- Justice Serving on the Court 1970-1989 -- Justice Serving on the Court 1990-2009 -- Justice Serving on the Court 2010-2021 -- Creative Commons License -- Versioning0 aThis volume focuses on the constitutional doctrine and law in the areas of civil rights and liberties. It contains excerpts of landmark cases covering the first amendment, second amendment, fourteenth amendment and the right to privacy. The excerpts include the constitutional issues in these cases that are related to civil rights and liberties with other questions of law and dicta omitted.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aClairmont, Kimberlyeauthor1 aJeknic, Petareauthor1 aMason, Sarah R.eauthor1 aMetzdorf, Alexandriaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1294zAccess online version03746nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100002700158245010600185264004300291264006500334264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505109100576520146901667542004103136546001603177588004103193650003403234710003903268856007703307OTLid0001295MnU20260223020808.0m     o  d s      cr            221212s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798746520340  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aFernandez, Beneauthor00aLegal Writing I & IIbLegal Research and Writing & Introduction to Litigation PracticecBen Fernandez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBen Fernandezc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCopyright -- Preface -- Introduction -- Part I: Objective Writing -- 1. Sources of Law -- 2. Legal Research -- 3. Briefing Cases -- 4. Applying Cases and Analogical Reasoning -- 5. Analyzing Statues and Marshaling Facts -- 6. Citation -- 7. IRAC -- 8. Objective Legal Memoranda -- 9. Other Examples of Legal Writing -- 10. Improving Your Writing -- Part II: Persuasive Essay -- 11. Credibility -- 12. Bias -- 13. Ethical Rules for Advocacy -- 14. Civil and Appellate Procedure -- 15. Requirements for Civil Motions and Standards for Appeals -- 16. Persuasive Writing -- 17. Memoranda in Support of MOtions -- 18. Motion Session -- 19. Appellate Briefs -- 20. Oral Argument -- Appendix -- Case Briefing Exercise -- Clampitt v. Spencer -- Eppler v. Tarmac -- Sample Case Briefs -- Clampitt v. Spencer Brief -- Eppler v. Tarmac Brief -- Case Analogy Exercise -- Malczewski v. Florida -- Sample Case Analogy -- IRAC Exercise -- Young v. Kirsch -- State Farm V. Mosharaf -- Southland v. Thousand Oaks -- Sample IRAC -- Legal Memorandum Exercise -- Sample Legal Memorandum -- About the Author0 aLegal Writing I & II; Legal Research and Writing & Introduction to Litigation Practice contains a brief discussion of all of the topics covered in a law school courses on legal writing, including a typical first semester course on legal research, analysis and writing an objective memorandum, as well as a second semester course on persuasion and writing an appellate brief, motion to dismiss or motion for summary judgment. The discussion focuses on the basics of analogical reasoning and persuasion and leaves out the minutiae. Each topic is taken one step at a time, with each step building on the step before it. The sources of law are presented first, then legal research, and reading and analyzing cases and statutes. The book covers analogizing a case to a fact pattern and marshaling the relevant facts to the elements of a statutory rule next. And then first section of the book concludes with legal citation, CRAC and CREAC, and writing a legal research memorandum. The text also includes a lot of samples and examples of how the author would write a case brief, a legal memoranda and an appellate brief, as well as an appendix with charts, outlines and exercises students can use to practice these skills. Legal Writing I & II; Legal Research and Writing & Introduction to Litigation Practice covers all the skills students need to know to work at a law firm, and everything students have to learn to begin practicing in litigation department of a firm.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1295zAccess online version04249nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100003000168245010400198264004300302264006500345264001200410300002200422336002600444337002600470338003600496341002800532490002700560505151000587520149002097542004103587546001603628588004103644650002803685650003403713710003903747856007703786OTLid0001296MnU20260223020808.0m     o  d s      cr            221212s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798453368501  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK7265 4aKF385.A41 aFernandez, Ben L.eauthor00aTransactional DraftingbIntroduction to Contract Drafting and Transactional PracticecBen Fernandez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBen Fernandezc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCopyright -- Preface -- Introduction -- 1. Getting up to Speed (Preparing to Draft) -- 2. Drafting Obligations, Rights, Prohibitions and Descriptive Statements -- 3. Avoiding Potentially Ambiguous Words and Phrases -- 4. Organizing a Contract's Beginning Sections -- 5. Drafting the Core Obligations and Organizing Deal Provisions -- 6. Organizing a Contract's Ending Sections -- 7. Brainstorming for Future Contingencies -- 8. Drafting with Precedent Documents -- 9. Tailoring Precedent Documents for a Deal -- 10. Revising the Other Side's Completed Documents -- 11. Negotiating Contract Provisions -- 12. Ethical Issues in Contract Drafting -- 13. Getting the Contract Signed (Closing the Deal) -- 14. Drafting With Document Assembly Programs and Closing with On Line Resources -- 15. Drafting a Contract Amendment -- Appendix -- Flowchart for Drafting Contract Provisions -- Contract Drafting Checklist -- Drafting Exercises -- Transcript of Client Intake for Laptop Purchase Agreement -- Memorandum for Residential Lease Agreement -- Memorandum for Sale of Assets Agreement -- Transcript of Client Intake for Consulting Services Agreement -- Introduction to Commercial Real Estate Loan Documents -- Sample Commercial Real Estate Loan Documents -- Promissory Note -- Guaranty -- Mortgage -- Assignment of Rents and Leases -- Construction Loan Agreement -- Revised Construction Loan Agreement (Tailored for a Deal) -- Revised Construction Loan Agreement (Revised for the Other Side) -- About The Author0 aTransactional Drafting: Introduction to Contract Drafting and Transactional Practice contains a condensed presentation of all of the topics typically covered in an upper-level law school class on contract drafting. The book covers drafting from scratch including writing in plain English (not using legalese), avoiding ambiguity, and drafting covenants, rights and prohibitions consistently (using "will" or "shall" for covenants, "may" for rights, and "will not" or "shall not" for prohibitions). And it covers contract organization, from the title and the exordium to the core covenant, deal provisions and "boilerplate," to the testimonium and the signature blocks. The book also includes material on getting up to speed before you start drafting and brainstorming for contingencies after you have finished. In addition to drafting from scratch the book introduces students to the wide range of skills involved in transactional practice. There are chapters on revising form documents, both when you are the original drafter and when you represent the other side. Also, the book includes chapters on negotiating contract language, handling a closing (i.e., verifying authority and getting the documents signed), dealing with ethical issues that arise in contract drafting and execution, drafting a contract amendment, and using computers to draft contracts. Transactional Drafting includes everything students need to know to “hit the ground running” as a transactional attorney.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aContract LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1296zAccess online version02101nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245003000179264004300209264007700252264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002800451490002700479505046500506520050400971542001601475546001601491588004001507650003801547650002601585710003901611856007701650OTLid0001297MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101177  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aSok, Vathanakeauthor00aBasic KhmercVathanak Sok 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Image Credits -- Foreword -- Preface -- Introduction -- I. Chapter I: What is your name? -- II. Chapter II: What is your job? -- III. Chapter III: I have one sibling. -- IV. Chapter IV: What time is it? -- V. Chapter V: I was born in 1985. -- VI. Chapter VI: I went to Cambodia last year. -- VII. Chapter VII: I want to be a teacher. -- VIII. Chapter VIII: Can I meet him today? -- Appendix I: Translation of Conversations and Audio Scripts0 aThis online interactive theme-based open textbook is for beginner learners of the Khmer language. This book aims to provide a practical introduction to speaking, listening, and reading. By the end of this course, students will be at the B1 level of the Common Framework for Language and at the low intermediate level on the American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages (ACTFL) proficiency scales. Basic Khmer is funded by the Open Educational Resources Program at Michigan State University.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1297zAccess online version02015nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245002900179264004300208264007700251264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505049900505520038501004542001601389546001601405588004001421650003801461650002601499710003901525856007701564OTLid0001298MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101197  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aRanjan, Rajiveauthor00aBasic UrducRajiv Ranjan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgment -- Image Credits -- Introduction -- I. Chapter 1: Urdu and Urdu Script -- II. Chapter 2: Beginning Conversations -- III. Chapter 3. خاندان "Family" -- IV. Chapter 4: Describing Places -- V. Chapter 5: Expressing Likes, Dislikes, Needs, and Possession -- VI. Chapter 6: Giving Instructions and Making Requests -- VII. Chapter 7: Expressing Past, Present, and Future Actions -- VIII. Chapter 8: Talking About the Past and Completed Actions -- IX. Urdu Letters - Table Options0 aBasic Urdu is a theme-based, interactive open-source online textbook for the true novice learners of the Urdu language. The book uses mixed pedagogical approaches to language teaching to match diverse teaching and learning styles. It aims to help learners achieve intermediate low to mid-proficiency levels set by the American Council on the Teaching of Foreign Languages (ACTFL).1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1298zAccess online version04542nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156100003400169245007200203264004300275264007700318264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002800517490002700545505203200572520119502604542004103799546001603840588004003856650002803896650003403924700003003958700002803988710003904016856007704055OTLid0001299MnU20260406020625.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101203  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aSmith, Christopher E.eauthor00aCriminal ProcedurebUndergraduate Edition AuthorcChristopher Smith 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNotices and Recommended Citation -- Disclaimer -- About CALI eLangdell Press -- About the Authors -- Notices and Permissions -- Image Credits -- I. Introduction -- II. Why Is Criminal Procedure So Important? -- III. Key Cases for Incorporation (Nationalization) of the Bill of Rights -- IV. Fourth Amendment: What Is a Search? -- V. Fourth Amendment: What Is a Search? Some Specifics -- VI. Fourth Amendment: What Is a Search? More Specifics -- VII. Fourth Amendment: Probable Cause and Reasonable Suspicion -- VIII. Fourth Amendment: Seizures and Arrests -- IX. Fourth Amendment: Warrants -- X. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Permissible Warrantless Search Situations) -- XI. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 2) -- XII. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 3) -- XIII. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 4) -- XIV. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 5) -- XV. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 6) -- XVI. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 7) -- XVII. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 8) -- XVIII. Fourth Amendment: Warrant Exceptions (Part 9) -- XIX. Fourth Amendment: Stop and Frisk -- XX. Fourth Amendment: Reasonable Suspicion -- XXI. Interrogations: Due Process and the Voluntariness Requirement -- XXII. Interrogations: The Miranda Rule -- XXIII. Interrogations: What Is Custody? -- XXIV. Interrogations: The Miranda Rule—Waiver -- XXV. Interrogations: The Miranda Rule: Exceptions -- XXVI. Interrogations: Sixth Amendment: The Massiah Rule -- XXVII. Introduction to the Exclusionary Rule -- XXVIII. When Does the Exclusionary Rule Apply? -- XXIX. Exclusionary Rule: Suppression Hearings and Monetary Damages -- XXX. Sixth Amendment: Right to Counsel -- XXXI. Sixth Amendment: Right to Counsel -- XXXII. Identification: Right to Counsel -- XXXIII. Identification: Best Practices and State Approaches -- XXXIV. Plea Bargaining -- XXXV. Sixth Amendment: Speedy Trial -- XXXVI. Sixth Amendment: Trial by Jury -- XXXVII. Eighth Amendment Issues -- Appendix0 aAn open textbook for undergraduate Criminal Procedure courses that are typically required of criminal justice majors. The book uses U.S. Supreme Court opinions to illuminate the definition of rights concerning search and seizure, right to counsel, and other aspects of the criminal justice process. This open textbook seeks to make undergraduates familiar with judicial reasoning as well as the definitions of rights relevant to individuals who are drawn into contact with criminal justice officials. The chapters give significant attention to police procedures and individual rights under the Fourth Amendment related to searches, including those using warrants and the situations in which warrant searches are permissible. The book also covers rights in the context of police interrogation, including Miranda warnings and exceptions to the Miranda rule. In addition, there is coverage of the exclusionary rule, right to counsel, plea bargaining, and trial rights. It concludes with a brief examination of rights related to sentencing. This resource challenges undergraduates to understand the development and changes affecting rights as new decisions are issued by the U.S. Supreme Court.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aTrachtenberg, Beneauthor1 aAlexander, Anneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1299zAccess online version02299nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245003600177264004300213264007700256264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505024900510520087500759542001601634546001601650588004001666650003801706650002601744700002701770710003901797856007701836OTLid0001300MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101081  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aIssa, Sadameauthor00aElementary Arabic IcSadam Issa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Image Credits -- Preface -- Introduction -- I. Greetings and Introductions -- II. My Family and Friends -- III. Food and Drinks -- IV. My House -- V. States and Feelings -- VI. Things Around Us -- Appendix: Audio Transcripts0 aThis open textbook is intended for beginning students of Arabic in their first semester. This OER is unique in its presentation of Arabic language content through theme-based modules. Each theme is addressed through vocabulary, grammar, reading, speaking, and writing components. Each chapter includes self-check embedded quizzes that help learners digest language concepts. The book is also designed with teachers in mind. Each chapter includes pair work and group tasks that the teacher can implement in class and other parts that can be assigned as homework. The focus of the book is to build literacy in Standard Arabic structure in a simplified and sequenced approach while emphasizing speaking skills. By the end of this course, students will be well prepared for building their competence in a sequenced and organized manner in the following parts of this series.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aMohamed, Aymaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1300zAccess online version02388nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245003900179264004300218264007700261264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505033500515520089800850542003001748546001601778588004001794650003801834650002601872710003901898856007701937OTLid0001301MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101159  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aZhou, Wenyingeauthor00aElementary Chinese IcWenying Zhou 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Image Credits -- Introduction -- I. Introduction: The Basics of Chinese -- II. Lesson 1: First Contact -- III. Lesson 2: Family Members and Occupations -- IV. Lesson 3: My Treat -- V. Lesson 4: Hobbies -- VI. Lesson 5: Eating and Drinking -- VII. Lesson 6: Making Phone Calls -- VIII. Lesson 7: Learning Chinese0 aThis open textbook is designed for beginners learning Chinese as a second/foreign language. This book aims to introduce learners to standard Chinese pronunciation, character knowledge, basic conversational phrases, grammar and vocabulary use, and cultural knowledge. Throughout the eight chapters, learners will explore: greetings and self-introduction, hobbies, nationalities, family members and occupations, inviting friends to dinner, talking about food and beverage, making phone calls, and talking about classes and exams. Learning activities include audio recordings so students can listen to the pronunciation of vocabulary words and observe dialogue between speakers. The book also includes videos with captions, allowing learners to listen, watch, and read. Original interactive activities have been created by the author to facilitate the practice of target vocabulary and dialogues.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1301zAccess online version02357nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002600153245004000179264004300219264007700262264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505026900516520093200785542003001717546001601747588004001763650003801803650002601841710003901867856007701906OTLid0001302MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101166  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aZhou, Wenyingeauthor00aElementary Chinese IIcWenying Zhou 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Image Credits -- Introduction -- I. Lesson 8: New Semester -- II. Lesson 9: Transportation -- III. Lesson 10: Shopping -- IV. Lesson 11: Weather and Climate -- V. Lesson 12: Eating on Campus and Outside -- VI. Lesson 13: Locations and Directions0 aElementary Chinese II is aimed at those who have learned Chinese as a second/foreign language for one semester, using the OER textbook “Elementary Chinese I“. This open textbook contains six main lessons, including topics such as school life, shopping, transportation, weather, eating out, and asking and giving directions. They are organized in a straightforward and well-structured manner that are easy to follow. Within each lesson, there are a set of two dialogues or a set of one dialogue plus one narration. The texts of the dialogues or narrations are created to provide real-life Chinese language to beginning learners. After the texts, vocabulary words are listed for them to study and review. Grammatical points are explained in English and example sentences are provided for students to understand. Each dialogue or narration ends with culture notes where learners can read and better understand the target text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1302zAccess online version03165nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002800167245004900195264004300244264007700287264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505028500541520170800826542002702534546001602561588004002577650002302617650002302640710003902663856007702702OTLid0001303MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101227  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aHedges, Valerieeauthor00aIntroduction to NeurosciencecValerie Hedges 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Image Credits -- Introduction -- I. Introduction to Neuroscience -- II. Cells of the Nervous System Structure & Function -- III. Neuronal Communication -- IV. Nervous System Organization -- V. Sensory Systems -- Additional Review Answers -- Images of Animations0 aIntroduction to Neuroscience is designed for undergraduate students enrolled in introductory neuroscience courses. This book specifically targets students enrolled in Introduction to Neuroscience 1 and Introduction to Neuroscience 2 at Michigan State University and primarily contains topics covered in those courses. This first edition will guide students through the structure and function of nervous system cells and nervous system structures, signaling within the nervous system, and introduce various sensory systems. A future edition that will be completed in spring 2023 will include the somatosensory system, motor systems, motivation and reward, stress, sex and the brain, emotions, nervous system disorders, learning, and memory. This text has been remixed and revised from two different open educational resources aimed at undergraduate neuroscience students: Foundations of Neuroscience by Casey Henley, Michigan State University The Open Neuroscience Initiative by Austin Lim, DePaul University In addition, new original content has been added to supplement what was provided in the above texts. The text includes many images and animations throughout and will be divided into shorter chapters that focus on a single topic. As this text is meant for undergraduate students, the writing is aimed at students that have not taken a neuroscience course before. Neuroscience terminology will be defined throughout the text through the use of the embedded Glossary terms to help with ease of reading. Additionally, important terms are bolded. Each chapter will end with an interactive quiz for student self-evaluation of the content. Find errors or have suggestions? Please email hedgesva@msu.edu1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1303zAccess online version02116nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100003000161245005700191264004300248264007700291264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505021300545520062800758542004101386546001601427588004001443650003201483650002501515650002601540700002401566710003901590856007701629OTLid0001304MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101210  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aL71 aChambliss, Julianeauthor00aMaking Sense of Digital HumanitiescJulian Chambliss 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Image Credits -- Foreword -- Introduction -- I. Data, Ethics, and Society -- II. Global Digital Humanities -- III. Community and Digital Humanities -- IV. Teaching and Learning -- Appendix0 aTaking up the challenge of navigating the complex world of digital humanities, Making Sense of Digital Humanities offers readers an exploration of the many ways scholars have employed the diverse toolkit of digital humanities to create a better understanding of the synergies and disruptions created by technological change. Rooted in a concern for the daunting tasks associated with teaching and learning about the digital humanities, this volume hopes to provide easy entry into a complex topic while highlighting how an understanding of digital humanities can transform our thinking about technology in the modern world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aMoll, Elleneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1304zAccess online version02237nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145100003000152245008900182264004300271264007700314264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505024800568520080800816542001601624546001601640588004001656650002501696650002601721710003901747856007701786OTLid0001305MnU20260330020749.0m     o  d s      cr            221214s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781626101036  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aChambliss, Julianeauthor00aReframing Digital HumanitiesbConversations with Digital HumanistscJulian Chambliss 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMichigan State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Foreword -- Introduction -- I. Visioning Digital Humanities -- II. Identity and Digital Humanities -- III. Cultural Reproduction and Digital Humanities -- IV. Community and Digital Humanities -- Appendix: New Digital Worlds0 aGrowing from Reframing History, a podcast about history theory and practice, Reframing Digital Humanities: Conversations with Digital Humanists, Julian Chambliss, Professor of English at Michigan State University, brings together a diverse group of digital humanities practitioners to reflect on theory and practice. From the question of public engagement and knowledge production to considerations of identity and cultural production, the conversations presented in this work shed light on the ways digital humanities offer scholars tools to ask humane questions. Are the benefits promised being achieved? Are the right tools and training available? Are we asking the right questions? In this volume, scholars deeply engaged in using digital tools reflect on their work and this dynamic academic field.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1305zAccess online version02283nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001300136100003200149245005100181250000900232264004300241264007000284264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505033800531520067400869542004101543546001601584588004101600650002501641650003401666700002901700700002801729710003901757856007701796OTLid0001306MnU20260406020626.0m     o  d s      cr            221219s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK623 4aKF385.A41 aElias, Stella Burcheauthor00aRules and Laws for Civil ActionscStella Elias  a2023 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Some notes on reading the rules -- United States Constitution -- Federal Rules of Civil Procedure -- Federal Rules of Evidence -- Federal Rules of Appellate Procedure -- Title 28 of the United States Code -- Title 42 of the United States Code -- Selected Iowa State Statutes -- Selected Long Arm Statutes -- Documents0 aRules and Laws for Civil Actions is an open-access resource for law students containing the U.S. Constitution, Federal Rules of Civil Procedure, Federal Rules of Evidence, Federal Rules of Appellate Procedure, and selected federal and state statutes. The book was created by a team of faculty members at the University of Iowa College of Law to supplement the study of Civil Procedure, Evidence, Constitutional Law, and other law school courses. In addition to containing the official text, each legal source found in Rules and Laws for Civil Actions is accompanied by an introductory section written by an Iowa Law professor explaining its significance and background.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aMuller, Derek T.eauthor1 aRantanen, Jasoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1306zAccess online version01969nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245003900161264004300200264003800243264001200281300002200293336002600315337002600341338003600367341002800403490002700431505057800458520033701036542001601373546001601389588004001405650002001445650002601465710003901491856007701530OTLid0001307MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            221219s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aPipino, Kiaraeeditor00a#TheatreAppreciationcKiara Pipino 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOneonta, NYbSUNY Oneontac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Title Page -- I. Theatre: The Basics -- 1. Why Theater? -- 2. Theatrical Spaces -- 3. How to Read a Play and Watch a Production -- 4. Genres and Styles -- II. Professionals in Theatre: Who Does What? -- 5. The Actor -- 6. The Director -- 7. The Producer -- 8. The Playwright -- 9. The Set Team -- 10. The Costume Team -- 11. The Lighting and Sound Teams -- III. The Culture of Theatre -- 12. Theater History, in Brief! -- 13. Applied Theater -- 14. Musical Theatre -- 15. Global Theatre -- Theatre Appreciation: A Student's Perspective -- Essential Bibliography0 a#TheatreAppreciation is a textbook for introductory level lecture classes such as Theatre Appreciation and Introduction to Theatre. It provides insight about the art and craft of theatre, a brief exploration of theatre history, and discussion about the styles and forms of theatre along with an overview of professions in the field.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1307zAccess online version02568nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002700144245007200171264004300243264003000286300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505041000481520105400891542003001945546001601975588004101991650003302032650002502065710003902090856007702129OTLid0001308MnU20260406020543.0m     o  d s      cr            221229suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aPitler, Howardeauthor00aSupporting Technology Integration for School LeaderscHoward Pitler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbEdTech Books  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1- Looking in The Rearview Mirror -- Chapter 2- Device Possibilities and Resources -- Chapter 3- Models, Methods, and Modalities -- Chapter 4- Movements -- Chapter 5- Differentiated Learning -- Chapter 6- Digital Safety and Digital Citizenship -- Chapter 7- Pedagogical Implication, Putting it All Together -- References -- Back Matter -- Author Information -- Citation Information0 aThis Open Educational Resource (OER) textbook is written as the primary resource for a 3-hour graduate course delivered online by The Teachers College at Emporia State University. The course is designed to prepare school leaders (teachers, instructional coaches, administrators, etc.) for the integration and application of diverse educational technologies into classrooms and schools in ways that reflect a theoretical, research-based, and practical understanding of curriculum development and the effective uses of technology. The course explores practical ways to integrate technology into both teaching and learning and the critical importance of adequate training and professional development for successful integration. This intensive course is delivered completely online over a seven-week period using Canvas. Canvas is a web-based learning management system or LMS. It is used by learning institutions, educators, and students to access and manage online course learning materials and communicate skill development and learning achievement.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1308zAccess online version01998nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000800139050001000147100002700157245005800184250001600242264004300258264004700301300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505053400513520028901047542001601336546001601352588004001368650002301408650003001431650002301461710003901484856007701523OTLid0001309MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230103suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aGibson, Yvetteeauthor00aRangeland Ecosystems of the Western UScYvette Gibson  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State University  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Autecology -- Ecosystem Biogeography -- Species Biology -- Population Ecology -- Synecology -- Ecological Systems Thinking -- Community Ecology -- Ecosystem Disturbance -- Nonequilibrium Ecology and Ecosystem Resiliency -- Shrubland and Desert Ecosystems -- Sagebrush Ecosystems -- Pinyon-Juniper Woodland Ecosystems -- Mojave Desert Ecosystems -- Sonoran Desert Ecosystems -- References -- Species list: Plants -- Species list: Animals -- Species list: Birds and Insects -- Creative Commons License -- Versioning0 aRangeland Ecosystems of the Western US conveys fundamentals of autecology and synecology and general information about the primary ecosystems covered. Its structure will provide a framework that can be applied to understand and analyze any arid shrubland, desert, or woodland savanna.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1309zAccess online version02101nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002700163245007400190264004300264264004000307264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002500469490002700494505031800521520060700839542001601446546001601462588004101478650003801519650004201557710003901599856007701638OTLid0001310MnU20260406020543.0m     o  d s      cr            230105s2013    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781934891179  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aMurmann, Boriseauthor00aAnalysis and Design of Elementary MOS Amplifier StagescBoris Murmann 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aStanford, CAbBoris Murmannc[2013] 4c©2013.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Transfer Characteristic of the Common-Source Voltage Amplifier -- Chapter 3: Frequency Response of the Common-Source Voltage Amplifier -- Chapter 4: The Common-Gate and Common-Drain Stages -- Chapter 5: Biasing Circuits -- Chapter 6: Multistage Amplifiers -- Index0 aAnalyzes core linear analog circuit designs: common-source, common-gate, and common-drain stages Design-oriented approach; analyzes various circuits through examples and exercises Part of the Modular Series of Microelectronic Device and Circuit Design Each module in the series provides a brief fundamental look at a specific topic "As of November 1, 2022, National Technology and Science Press ("NTS") has discontinued publication of 'Analysis and Design of Elementary MOS Amplifier Stages.' Accordingly, NTS has returned all copyrights and attendant rights with respect to the work to Boris Murmann."1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1310zAccess online version03622nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002500140245008700165264004300252264006700295264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505087700539520153801416542001602954546002702970588004002997650003603037700003003073700002903103710003903132856007703171OTLid0001311MnU20260309021156.0m     o  d s      cr            230106s2021    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aDillon, Daveeauthor00aPlan para el éxito en la universidad y la carrera profesionalcDave Dillonnv 1.3 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensia -- Dedicatoria -- Lenguaje inclusivo de género -- Prólogo -- Prefacio -- ¿Qué puede esperar le estudiante? -- Reconocimientos -- Introducción -- Unidad 1: Lanzamiento -- Unidad 2: Tiempo, herramientas, y ambiente de estudio -- Unidad 3: Pensamiento crítico y lectura a nivel universitario -- Unidad 4: Escritura de nivel universitario -- Unidad 5: Escuchar y tomar apuntes -- Unidad 6: Estrategias para presentar exámenes -- Unidad 7: Exploración profesional -- Unidad 8: Socializar y prosperar en la universidad -- Unidad 9: Salud -- Unidad 10: Finanzas y recursos -- Unidad 11: Conclusión -- Anexo A: Trabajos originales -- Anexo B: Graduación -- Anexo C: Evaluación de las habilidades de estudio -- Anexo D: Películas y lecturas recomendadas -- Anexo E: Recursos para educadores -- Historial de versiones -- Evaluación de accesibilidad -- Glosario0 aBlueprint for Success in College and Career es una remezcla de cuatro REA (recursos educativos abiertos) ya existentes: A Different Road To College: A Guide For Transitioning To College For Non-traditional Students de Alise Lamoreaux, How to Learn Like a Pro! de Phyllis Nissila, Foundations of Academic Success: Words of Wisdom, editado por Thomas Priester, College Success, proporcionado por Lumen Learning, y un libro de texto previamente protegido por derechos de autor con contenido que ahora tiene licencia abierta: Blueprint for Success in College: Indispensable Study Skills and Time Management Strategies, de Dave Dillon. Blueprint for Success in College and Career, un OER (Open Educational Resource) es una guía gratuita para que les estudiantes tengan éxito en el aula y en su carrera. Este texto, diseñado para mostrar cómo tener éxito en la universidad y en la preparación de la carrera, se centra en las técnicas de estudio, la gestión del tiempo, la exploración de la carrera, la salud y los conocimientos financieros. Solicite una copia impresa: https://www.lulu.com/shop/dave-dillon-and-norma-c%C3%A1rdenas-and-linnea-spitzer-and-patricia-v%C3%A1zquez-g%C3%B3mez/plan-para-el-%C3%A9xito-en-la-universidad-y-la-carrera-profesional/paperback/product-vdwq2g.html?page=1&pageSize=4 Este libro es una versión clonada de Blueprint for Success in College and Career por Dave Dillon, publicada con Pressbooks por Rebus Community bajo una licencia CC BY (Attribution). Puede haber diferencias respecto al original.1 fAttribution  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aHill, Linda Bruceeauthor1 aLamoreaux, Aliseeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1311zAccess online version04506nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000800136050001000144100002500154245008600179250001900265264004300284264004000327300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505070800532520259501240542001603835546001603851588004003867650003203907650003003939650002303969710003903992856007704031OTLid0001312MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230109suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aCheung, Wingeauthor00aEarth, Space, and Environmental Science Explorations with ArcGIS ProcWing Cheung  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSAN MARCOS, CALIFORNIAbWing Cheung  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Where are our flood hazard areas? And who is living there? -- Chapter 2: Exploring the characteristics and impacts of historical hurricanes -- Chapter 3: Want to fly a drone? Know B4UFLY! -- Chapter 4: Analyzing wildfire extent and response in California -- Chapter 5: Assessing social vulnerability in areas impacted by Hurricane Florence -- Chapter 6: Analyzing volcanic hazards near Kilauea Volcano, Hawai’i -- Chapter 7: Collecting field data with Collector for ArcGIS -- Chapter 8: Natural hazards on the edge -- Chapter 9: Exploring the world’s water resources -- Chapter 10: Visualizing global climate change under different emission scenarios -- Chapter 11: Plan your Mars landing0 aWhen I first started teaching Geographic Information Systems (GIS) over 15 years ago, there were only a handful of GIS tutorial books on the market. While a few of them focused on a particular theme, many of them were mainly technical publications with no unifying theme. These publications are perfect for teaching new users about basic GIS operations and continue to be invaluable to many users today. However, these publications consisted of tutorials focusing on vastly different real-world scenarios, and felt a little disjointed to integrate into a class that focuses on a specific field (e.g. Environmental Science, Geography, Urban Planning). Since then, I am happy to see that there has been a proliferation of publications that are not only focused on introducing the technology, but also provide an introduction to a specific field as well as GIS. It is with this consideration in mind that I wrote this book to not only introduce students to the tools in ArcGIS Pro, but also to provide a glimpse into some of the topics that may be covered in an introductory course in Geography, Environmental Science, or related disciplines. I aimed to achieve a balance of technical instruction and information about Earth, Space, and Environmental Sciences, to make this publication helpful for new GIS learners, as well as students who may be interested in learning about the applications of GIS in the Earth, Space, and Environmental Sciences. Before you begin with the book, please download and unzip the data for the book at https://tinyurl.com/ESESGIS. Each chapter will begin with a list of the technical objectives for the lab exercise, which is particularly useful to refer to should you need a refresher on how to perform a particular task at a later date. The list of technical objectives is followed by a short introduction that provides the context for the exercise. Subsequently, you will find the step-by-step directions for the exercises with questions embedded throughout (in yellow highlight) to ensure that you are on the right track. To obtain a copy of the answer key for the questions, please email me at wcheung@palomar.edu with a copy of your current faculty identification or other forms of professional identification. To complete the exercises in this book, you will need access to ArcGIS Pro 3.0 (and ArcGIS Online with credits for some chapters). Please remember to first download the exercise data for the book at https://tinyurl.com/ESESGIS. I wish you a wonderful time exploring various topics in GIS and Earth, Space, and Environmental Sciences in this book.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1312zAccess online version02595nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001300152100002700165245006100192264004300253264006900296300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505058700530520079301117542003001910546001601940588004001956650003101996650003602027700003002063710003902093856007702132OTLid0001313MnU20260406020544.0m     o  d s      cr            230109suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780888654861  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aLB1062.61 aRobinson, Oraleauthor00aPracticing and Presenting Social ResearchcOral Robinson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish Columbia, CanadabUniversity of British Columbia Library  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Licensing Info -- Book Reviews -- Acknolwedgements -- Guide to the Manual -- I. Generating and Developing Original Research Ideas -- II. Developing a Research Proposal -- III. Ethics Review -- IV. Researching with Self-Care -- V. Academic Writing -- VI. The Literature Review -- VII. Writing the Methods Section -- VIII. Data Collection -- IX. Qualitative Data Analysis -- X. Quantitative Data Analysis -- XI. Writing the Discussion and Conclusion -- XII. Presenting Your Research -- XIII. Publishing Your Research -- Glossary -- Versioning History -- Contact Information0 aThis open-access textbook is for those who want to write exemplary social research. It provides an extensive outline of each step of the research process: outlining practical tools for conceptualizing its beginnings, generating proposals, getting ethics approval, relaxing from the stresses of research, writing academically, conducting a literature review, drafting a methods section, collecting the right data, formulating the findings, and sharing the results. Woven throughout each chapter are testimonies of other students who have likewise persevered through the research process, relating their obstacles, solutions, and motivations to each stage of the research process to illuminate not only the technical goals of research, but also the emotional maturity that research entails.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aWilson, Alexandereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1313zAccess online version02733nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100002500143245004900168264004300217264004800260264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505082200485520080801307542001602115546001602131588004002147650002502187650003102212710003902243856007702282OTLid0001314MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH11 aCheung, Wingeauthor00aFundamentals of Human GeographycWing Cheung 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSAN MARCOS, CALIFORNIAbWing Cheungc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe book is available in a PDF and a web-based interactive textbook. The PDF version does not include videos, sound clips, interactive maps, and graphs. Additionally, certain accessibility features, such as alt text for images, are not present in the PDF version. Thus, for the full experience, please refer to the web-based interactive textbook version. -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Human Geography -- Chapter 2: Population and Health -- Chapter 3: Migration -- Chapter 4: Folk and Popular Culture -- Chapter 5: The Geography of Language -- Chapter 6: The Geography of Religion -- Chapter 7: Ethnicity and Race -- Chapter 8: Political Geography -- Chapter 9: Development and Wealth -- Chapter 10: Agriculture and Food -- Chapter 11: Industry -- Chapter 12: Human Settlements -- Chapter 13: Environment and Resources0 aFundamentals of Human Geography is a college-level digital textbook aimed at introducing undergraduate students to the field of human and cultural geography. This digital textbook was initially conceived as an interactive supplemental guide for an open-source textbook on Human Geography (Introduction to Human Geography ). However, as more materials were added to this digital textbook, it slowly evolved into a standalone textbook on Human Geography which can be used by itself or as a supplemental guide. Be sure to explore all of the interactive content in each chapter and read the captions carefully, as a number of critical concepts are introduced in the interactive content. Be sure to also review the FAQ section for answers to commonly asked questions about technical aspects of this textbook.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1314zAccess online version02619nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100002500161245006800186250001600254264004300270264010100313264001200414300002200426336002600448337002600474338003600500341002500536490002700561505059800588520069601186542003001882546001601912588004101928650003301969650003102002700002702033700002102060710003902081856007702120OTLid0001315MnU20260406020544.0m     o  d s      cr            230116s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781735198002  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aFranco, Josheauthor00aIntroduction to Political Science Research MethodscJosh Franco  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- About the Authors -- History of this OER -- Table of Tables -- Table of Figures -- Chapter 1 - Introduction -- Chapter 2 - History and Development of the Empirical Study of Politics -- Chapter 3 - The Scientific Method -- Chapter 4 - Theories, Hypotheses, Variables, and Units -- Chapter 5 - Conceptualization, Operationalization, Measurement -- Chapter 6 - Elements of Research Design -- Chapter 7 - Qualitative Methods -- Chapter 8 - Quantitative Research Methods and Means of Analysis -- Chapter 9 - Research Ethics -- Chapter 10 - Conclusion -- Appendices -- References -- Index0 aIntroduction to Political Science Research Methods, authored by Dr. Josh Franco, Dr. Charlotte Lee, Kau Vue, Dr. Dino Bozonelos, Dr. Masahiro Omae, and Dr. Steven Cauchon, is an Open Education Resource textbook licensed CC BY-NC that surveys the research methods employed in political science. The textbook includes chapters that cover: history and development of the empirical study of politics; the scientific method; theories, hypotheses, variables, and units; conceptualization, operationalization and measurement of political concepts; elements of research design including the logic of sampling; qualitative and quantitative research methods and means of analysis; and research ethics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aLee, Charlotteeauthor1 aVue, Kaueauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1315zAccess online version02139nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245004400166264004300210264004200253300002200295336002600317337002600343338003600369341002800405490002700433505048300460520059500943542002701538546001601565588004001581650002601621650002601647710003901673856007701712OTLid0001316MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230116s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aHuenemann, Charlieeauthor00aKnowledge For HumanscCharlie Huenemann 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLogan, UtahbCharlie Huenemannc2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- I. 1. Knowledge: The Basics -- II. 2. Skepticism: A Dialogue -- III. 3. The Grand Deception Doubt (Or, the GDD) -- IV. 4. First Answer to the Skeptic -- V. 5. Second Answer to the Skeptic -- VI. 6. Scientific Knowledge -- VII. 7. Social Conditions of Knowledge -- VIII. 8. Knowing Our Weaknesses -- IX. 9. How to Argue with Other People -- X. 10. Bayesianism and What Is Likely -- XI. 11. Epistemology and the Internet -- XII. 12. Conspiracy Theories -- Appendix0 aKnowledge for Humans is a textbook aimed at introducing students to fundamental questions about knowledge and skepticism. Many topics often covered in epistemology textbooks are also covered here, such as radical Cartesian skepticism, phenomenalism, externalism, and naturalism. But the text also covers useful topics that are not usually included, such as the social conditions for knowledge, common fallacies, Bayesianism, the internet, conspiracy theories, and how we should go about arguing with one another. It’s written in an easy-going style with clear examples and funny diagrams.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1316zAccess online version04307nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100003200145245005700177264004300234264004100277264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505057800495520261801073542001603691546001603707588004103723650003003764650002303794710003903817856007703856OTLid0001317MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230116s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aBurger, Benjamin J.eauthor04aThe Essential Guide to Planet EarthcBenjamin Burger 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLogan, UtahbBenjamin Burgerc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction -- 2. Intended Audience of This Textbook -- 3. Purpose of Writing an Open Text and What That Means -- 4. About the Author -- 5. About this textbook -- 6. Digging Deeper -- 7. Vocabulary and Glossary of Terms -- 8. Table of Contents -- 8.1 Section 1: EARTH’S SIZE, SHAPE, AND MOTION IN SPACE -- 8.2 Section 2: EARTH’S ENERGY -- 8.3 Section 3: EARTH’S MATTER -- 8.4 Section 4: EARTH’S ATMOSPHERE -- 8.5 Section 5: EARTH’S WATER -- 8.6 Section 6: EARTH’S SOLID INTERIOR -- 8.7 Section 7: EARTH’S LIFE -- 8.8 Section 8: EARTH’S HUMANS AND FUTURE0 aEvery moment of your life will be from the perspective of a single planet—Planet Earth. You were born here and you will die here. This textbook is a guide to your home, to your place in the universe. By taking this course, you will learn about your home planet: how it works and how we know it works this way. This course is a user's manual for planet Earth, with direct recommendations for future generations, such as yourself, to maintain its health and natural wonders. As an astute student, you will be introduced to the theoretical principles of science and of how to defend yourself from the spread of ignorance. You will learn about Earth’s dimensions and motions, as well as how to navigate its surface. You will learn how energy originates from the closest star (the Sun), its Moon, and other sources of energy in the Earth’s active core and how this energy can be used and stored. You will learn basic scientific principles of matter, the makeup of substances that form the field of chemistry. You will examine the planet’s atmosphere, the air that you are breathing as you read this, and how that air is slowly changing. You will explore the vast abundance of Earth’s water, covering the planet in enormous oceans, abundant lakes, and rivers, as well as frozen water locked within snow and ice. You will learn how to predict wind and storms and how climates shift. You will lead your own exploration of the solid interior of the Earth, the composition of mountains, rocks, and dirt. You will learn about life, the most unique feature of the planet. You will explore theories of how life arose and how it has evolved and changed over time, learning that you are of Earth and the story of your own origin on this planet. You will undertake an examination of the great biomes of jungles, forests, and deserts and the life that exists within them. You will survey the important field of biology as you learn about life and its interactions with the planet. In the end, you will come to face the ominous future of your own planet, of the changes that are now occurring. Your planet is not the same as your ancestors, nor grandparents, nor your parents at your age—Earth today is quickly being altered, and you will need to adapt to this change. This course will teach you how to prepare for this change and how to protect the planet from further alteration to the point that it becomes lifeless. This class will be challenging, but with enough dedication and commitment, you will succeed in learning the material. You will cherish the knowledge presented in this class for the rest of your life.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1317zAccess online version02795nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002300149245009300172250001900265264004300284264008800327264001200415300002200427336002600449337002600475338003600501341002800537490002700565505077200592520074201364542004102106546001602147588004002163650002302203650002402226700003102250710003902281856007702320OTLid0001318MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230116s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aBush, Jakeeauthor00aMental Health is a VerbbA Pocket Guide to Mental Health for Nursing StudentscJake Bush  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Title Page -- Module 1: Mental Health Versus Mental Illness -- Module 2: Theoretical Models Used In Mental Health Nursing -- Module 3: Clinical Assessment, Problems, and Treatment -- Module 4: Psychopharmacology -- Module 5: Mental Health Promotion -- Module 6: Legal and Ethical Issues -- Module 7: Therapeutic Communication -- Module 8: Depression -- Module 9: Anxiety -- Module 10: Bipolar -- Module 11: Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders -- Module 12: Eating Disorders -- Module 13: Substance Abuse and Addiction -- Module 14: Schizophrenia -- Module 15: Personanality Disorders -- Module 16: Neurocognitive Disorders -- Module 17: Childhood Disorders -- Module 18: Psychiatric Emergencies -- Module 19: Grief and Loss -- Appendix -- References0 aMENTAL HEALTH IS A VERB is an open education resource written by Jake Bush, Ph.D., RN, CNE, and Jill Van Der Like, DNP, MSN, RNC through the University of West Florida which addresses mental health nursing care. The book opens with a foundational module that provides a brief history of mental health treatment, pertinent theorists, and the underpinning concepts of mental health versus mental illness, followed by a separate chapter on psychopharmacology. The heart of the text is arranged into the most common mental health diagnoses. Additionally, this second edition includes the addition of case studies (modules 8-19), two virtual simulation activities (modules 7 and 13), and a mental health cumulative study guide as an appendix.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aVan Der Like, Jilleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1318zAccess online version03753nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245005000139264004300189264009300232264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505093300502520166401435542004103099546001603140588004003156650002103196700003103217700002703248710003903275856007703314OTLid0001319MnU20260330020616.0m     o  d s      cr            230124s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-500000aOriginal Études for the Developing Conductor 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVirginia Tech School of Performing Arts, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFeatured Composers 1) Arias, Spencer: The Jester 2) Biedenbender, David: Swirl 3) Botti, Susan: Vespers (Walking in Beauty) 4) Bozone, Judy: Lyrah 5) Browne, Matthew: Saunter 6) Browne, Matthew: Tarantella 7) Bumgarner, Trevor: Choppy Frontier 8) Chen, Yi: Ban (Beat) 9) Davids, Brent Michael: Native American Étude 10) Flagello, Gala: Bulletproof 11) Grafe, Max: Fanfare With Afterimages 12) Herryman Rodriguez, Ivette: Tumbao Pesante 13) Jolley, Jennifer: Legend of the Moonlight Above 14) Joyce, Molly: Offbeat 15) Lamb, Alexis: Addolcimento (Sweetly, Softening) 16) Lambrecht, Lynnsey: Festive Fugue 17) Li, Shuying: Étude for Conductors 18) Lorenz, Ricardo: Estudio a Cuatro Voces 19) McCune, Sally Lamb: Pony Hollow Trail 20) Purrington, Hilary: Keepsake 21) Rowe, Will: Loose Canon 22) Sherwood-Gabrielson, Christopher: Last Waltz in Paris 23) Specht, Elena: Fortress 24) Tann, Hilary: Moonrise 25) Zare, Roger: Reverie0 aOriginal Études for the Developing Conductor is a collection of supplemental études designed to enhance contemporary conducting pedagogy by amplifying the voices of composers from historically excluded groups. Each étude was commissioned from and composed by a living composer, the majority of whom are woman-identifying composers and/or composers of color. Each étude also addresses multiple specific pedagogical goals common to all conducting classrooms. Conducting textbooks commonly include musical examples to expose student conductors to various musical challenges and situations. However, due to the relative ease of using only music from the public domain, most examples found in commercially published books are excerpts of larger works composed by deceased cisgender white men of European descent. Often, this music bears little relation to a significant portion of the music contemporary students engage with and perform. These excerpts also tend to be quite short (i.e., less than a minute) and do not create cohesive, self-contained musical arcs. Instructors adopting or reviewing this text are encouraged to record their use on this form: https://bit.ly/original-etudes-interest. This helps the book's sponsors to understand this open textbook's impact. This project was made possible in part by financial support from the University Libraries at Virginia Tech Collaborative Research Grant, University of North Carolina at Greensboro University Libraries’ Textbook Affordability Program (TAP) Grants, and additional funding, technical, and publishing support from the Open Education Initiative of the University Libraries at Virginia Tech.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aCaldwell, Jonathaneeditor1 aShapiro, Derekeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1319zAccess online version02476nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001000161050000800171100002800179245006700207264004300274264007300317264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002500512490002700537505060400564520055101168542004101719546001601760588004101776650002401817650004201841650002701883700002801910710003901938856007701977OTLid0001320MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            230125s2001    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781958291030  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA299.6-433 4aTA145 4aQA11 aVardeman, Steveeauthor00aBasic Engineering Data Collection and AnalysiscSteve Vardeman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIowa State Universityc[2001] 4c©2001.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- 1 Introduction -- 2 Data Collection -- 3 Elementary Descriptive Statistics -- 4 Describing Relationships Between Variables -- 5 Probability: The Mathematics of Randomness -- 6 Introduction to Formal Statistical Inference -- 7 Inference for Unstructured Multisample Studies -- 8 Inference for Full and Fractional Factorial Studies -- 9 Regression Analysis—Inference for Curve- and Surface-Fitting -- Appendix A: More on Probability and Model Fitting -- Appendix B: Tables -- Answers to Section Exercises -- Index -- Additional Materials: Data Sets -- Additional Materials: Formula Sheets0 aIn Basic Engineering Data Collection and Analysis, Stephen B. Vardeman and J. Marcus Jobe stress the practical over the theoretical. Step by step, students get real engineering data and scenario examples along with chapter-long case studies that illustrate concepts in realistic, thoroughly detailed situations. This approach encourages students to work through the material by carrying out data collection and analysis projects from problem formulation through the preparation of professional technical reports—just as if they were on the job.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnalysisvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aJobe, J. Marcuseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1320zAccess online version02412nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100003500167245004500202264004300247264006300290264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505080300530520045801333542001601791546001601807588004001823650002301863650002401886710003901910856007701949OTLid0001321MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230127s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781734914115  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aSandquist Reuter, Myraeauthor00aNursing AssistantcMyra Sandquist Reuter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRiver Falls, WIbChippewa Valley Technical Collegec[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Preface -- Foundational Concepts -- I. Chapter 1: Communicate Professionally Within a Health Care Setting -- II. Chapter 2: Demonstrate Professionalism in the Workplace -- III. Chapter 3: Maintain a Safe Health Care Environment -- IV. Chapter 4: Adhere to Principles of Infection Control -- V. Chapter 5: Provide for Personal Care Needs of Clients -- VI. Chapter 6: Provide for Basic Nursing Care Needs -- VII. Chapter 7: Demonstrate Reporting and Documentation of Client Data -- VIII. Chapter 8: Utilize Principles of Mobility to Assist Clients -- IX. Chapter 9: Promote Independence Through Rehabilitation/Restorative Care -- X. Chapter 10: Provide Care for Clients Experiencing Acute and Chronic Health Conditions -- XI. Chapter 11: Apply Knowledge of Body Systems to Client Care0 aChippewa Valley Technical College is pleased to announce the release of the Nursing Assistant OER textbook with CC BY licensing. This book was developed for use in Nursing Assistant courses with funding from the Higher Education Emergency Relief Fund (HEERF). It contains remixed content from Open RN textbooks and other OER sources as well as new content. Chapters contain interactive learning activities and videos of instructor skills demonstrations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1321zAccess online version02511nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002300135245003300158264004300191264005100234264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002800407490002700435505066100462520077401123542001601897546001501913588004101928650003801969650002602007710003902033856007702072OTLid0001323MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230130s2022    mnu     o     0   0 fre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLaw, Jameseauthor00aGrammaire OuvertecJames Law 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbBYU Open Textbook Networkc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAvant-propos -- Noms et pronoms -- Les noms -- Les pronoms personnels -- Les pronoms démonstratifs -- Les pronoms relatifs -- les pronoms idéfinis -- Modifcateurs -- Les déterminants -- Les quantifieurs -- Les adjectifs -- Les adverbes -- Les comparatif et le superlatif -- Les prépositions -- Verbes -- Les verbes -- Les verbes réfléchis -- L'indicatif -- Le présent -- Le passé composé -- L'imparfait -- Le plus-que-parfait -- Le futur -- Le conditionnel -- Le subjonctif -- L'impératif -- Les participes -- L'infinitif -- Les temps littéraires -- Transformations -- Les conjonctions -- Le négation -- L'interrogation -- Le discours rapporté0 aCe livre est une grammaire pédagogique du français destinée aux apprenants de niveau avancé. 28 chapitres approfondissent les concepts essentiels de la grammaire française (noms et pronoms, modificateurs, verbes, transformations). Chaque concept est introduit de manière inductive par un extrait littéraire accompagné de questions avant d'être présenté en détail. La présentation est soutenue par des exemples authentiques tirés d'un corpus linguistique (le Corpus de référence du français contemporain) et par des notes sur la variation dialectale et stylistique. Des exercices pour vérifier la compréhension accompagnent chaque concept. Le texte ne favorise aucun dialecte comme standard mais présente plutôt le français dans toute sa variété.1 fAttribution  aIn French.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1323zAccess online version02529nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245008100162264004300243264008400286264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505058300547520077101130542003001901546001601931588004001947650003801987650002602025710003902051856007702090OTLid0001324MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230130s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aWawire, Brendaeauthor00aHujambo! A Standards-Based Approach to Introductory KiswahilicBrenda Wawire 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLawrence, KSbOpen Language Resource Center at the University of Kansasc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSomo la kwanza -- Kwa uwanja wa ndege -- Kukutana na familia wenyeji -- Majirani -- Hamjambo wanafunzi? -- Wewe unasoma masomo gani? -- Nambari yako ya simu ni gani? -- Familia -- Familia yangu -- Familia ya mwenyeji -- Familia kubwa -- Kazi gani? -- Shughuli za kila siku na uraibu -- Anafanya nini? Wanafana nini? -- Shughuli za kila siku -- Kusema wakati -- Shughuli za starehe -- Utafanya nini keshi? -- Tunakaa wapi? -- Nyumba ya familia yangu pokezi -- Kuna nini katika vyumba mbali mbali katika nyumba? -- Nje ya nyumba -- Mtaa na ujirani -- Kukodisha nyumba -- Apendices0 aHujambo! provides a complete curriculum for introductory Kiswahili that chronicles the adventures of two American students studying abroad in Tanzania for an academic year. It is designed for an introductory Kiswahili course at the college level with approximately 150 contact hours of instruction (5 hours a week for two 15-week semesters, or 5 hours a week for three 10-week quarters). It provides a foundational understanding of Kiswahili and the cultures of those who share it as a common language. Students will acquire the basics of Kiswahili grammar and build a core vocabulary of approximately 1,000 words, including the most common words for everyday interactions and the individual vocabulary they need to speak about their own academic and personal lives.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1324zAccess online version03282nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100003400167245005000201264004300251264006000294264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505116300528520089301691542001602584546001602600588004002616650002402656650002502680700002402705700002702729710003902756856007702795OTLid0001325MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            230130s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781711471525  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aGomez Albrecht, Mariaeauthor00aPrinciples of MarketingcMaria Gomez Albrecht 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1. Setting the Stage -- Chapter 1. Marketing and Customer Value -- Chapter 2. Strategic Planning in Marketing -- Unit 2. Understanding the Marketplace -- Chapter 3. Consumer Markets and Purchasing Behavior -- Chapter 4. Business Markets and Purchasing Behavior -- Chapter 5. Market Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning -- Chapter 6. Marketing Research and Market Intelligence -- Chapter 7. Marketing in a Global Environment -- Chapter 8. Marketing in a Diverse Marketplace -- Unit 3. Product, Promotion, Price, and Place -- Chapter 9. Products: Consumer Offerings -- Chapter 10. Maintaining a Competitive Edge with New Offerings -- Chapter 11. Services: The Intagible Product -- Chapter 12. Pricing Products and Services -- Chapter 13. Integrated Marketing Communications -- Chapter 14. The Promotion Mix: Advertising and Public Relations -- Chapter 15. The Promotion Mix: Personal Selling and Sales Promotion -- Chapter 16. Direct, Online, Social Media, and Mobile Marketing -- Chapter 17. Distribution: Delivering Customer Value -- Chapter 18. Retailing and Wholesaling -- Chapter 19. Sustainable Marketing: The New Paradigm -- Answer Key -- Index0 aPrinciples of Marketing is designed to meet the scope and sequence for a one-semester marketing course for undergraduate business majors and minors. Principles of Marketing provides a solid grounding in the core concepts and frameworks of marketing theory and analysis so that business students interested in a major or minor in marketing will also be prepared for more rigorous, upper-level elective courses. Concepts are further reinforced through detailed, diverse, and realistic company and organization scenarios and examples from various industries and geographical locations. To illuminate the meaningful applications and implications of marketing ideas, the book incorporates a modern approach providing connections between topics, solutions, and real-world problems. Principles of Marketing is modular, allowing flexibility for courses with varied learning outcomes and coverage.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aGreen, Markeauthor1 aHoffman, Lindaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1325zAccess online version03179nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156050000700169100002800176245004800204264004300252264006200295264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505066600534520121301200542001602413546001602429588004002445650002802485650003402513650003102547700002202578700002902600710003902629856007702668OTLid0001327MnU20260406020801.0m     o  d s      cr            230202s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989864647  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A4 4aH11 aHassan, Shereeneauthor00aIntroduction to CriminologycShereen Hassan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensing Info -- Accessibility Statement -- For Students: How to Use this Book -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- 1. What is Crime? -- 2. Typologies and Patterns of Crime -- 3. Media and Crime -- 4. Race and Crime -- 5. Methods and Counting Crime -- 6. Biological Influences on Criminal Behaviour -- 7. Psychological Theories of Crime -- 8. Sociological Theories of Crime -- 9. Learning Theories -- 10. Critical Criminology -- 11. Feminist Criminology -- 12. Cultural Criminology -- 13. Green Criminology -- 14. Victimology -- 15. Crimes of the Powerful -- 16. Environmental Criminology -- 17. Restorative, Transformative Justice -- Glossary -- Contributors0 aAlthough this open education resource (OER) is written with the needs and abilities of first-year undergraduate criminology students in mind, it is designed to be flexible. As a whole, the OER is amply broad to serve as the main textbook for an introductory course, yet each chapter is deep enough to be useful as a supplement for subject-area courses; authors use plain and accessible language as much as possible, but introduce more advanced, technical concepts where appropriate; the text gives due attention to the historical “canon” of mainstream criminological thought, but it also challenges many of these ideas by exploring alternative, critical, and marginalized perspectives. After all, criminology is more than just the study of crime and criminal law; it is an examination of the ways human societies construct, contest, and defend ideas about right and wrong, the meaning of justice, the purpose and power of laws, and the practical methods of responding to broken rules and of mending relationships. Special thanks to Leah Ballantyne, LLB LLM, a Cree lawyer from the Mathias Colomb Cree Nation in Pukatawagan, Manitoba, who provided expert Indigenous consultation/editing for this textbook.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aLett, Daneauthor1 aBallantyne, Leaheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1327zAccess online version02257nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100004500137245008200182264004300264264006900307264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505066400553520045301217542002301670546001601693588004001709650004201749710003901791856007701830OTLid0001328MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230202s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aAdministration, Federal Aviationeauthor00aPilot’s Handbook of Aeronautical KnowledgecFederal Aviation Administration 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Table of Contents -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Flying -- Chapter 2: Aeronautical Decision-Making -- Chapter 3: Aircraft Construction -- Chapter 4: Principles of Flight -- Chapter 5: Aerodynamics of Flight -- Chapter 6: Flight Controls -- Chapter 7: Aircraft Systems -- Chapter 8: Flight Instruments -- Chapter 9: Flight Manuals and Other Documents -- Chapter 10: Weight and Balance -- Chapter 11: Aircraft Performance -- Chapter 12: Weather Theory -- Chapter 13: Aviation Weather Services -- Chapter 14: Airport Operations -- Chapter 15: Airspace -- Chapter 16: Navigation -- Chapter 17: Aeromedical Factors -- Appendices -- Glossary -- Index0 aThe Pilot’s Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge (PHAK) is an essential book for any Remote, Sport, Recreational, Private, Commercial, and Instructor Pilot. It provides basic knowledge that is vital for all pilots. This handbook introduces pilots to the broad spectrum of knowledge that will be needed as they progress in their pilot training. This handbook is useful to beginning pilots, as well as those pursuing more advanced pilot certificates.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1328zAccess online version02203nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100003000150245003600180250003100216264004300247264004200290264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505070900509520034801218542001601566546001601582588004101598650003401639650002801673710003901701856007701740OTLid0001329MnU20260223020811.0m     o  d s      cr            230202s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aK72001 aGrynberg, Michaeleauthor00aTrademark LawcMichael Grynberg  a2022 Edition (Version 2.0) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aChicago, ILbMichael Grynbergc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Trademark Law -- Distinctiveness -- Generic marks -- Non-Word Marks, Colors, and Trade Dress -- Trade Dress and Product Design -- Functionality -- Aesthetic Functionality -- Non-Traditional Marks -- Obtaining Trademarks Rights Through Use of the Mark -- Geographic Protection -- Abandonment -- Registration -- Trademark use and Infringement -- Likelihood of Confusion -- Likelihood of Confusion (cont'd) -- Broadened theories of confusionn -- Secondary Liability -- Trademarks and Domain Names -- Dilution -- Dilution (cont'd) -- Fair Use -- Nominative Fair Use -- First Sale -- Expressive Uses and the First Amendment -- Trademark Procedure -- False Advertising -- The Right of Publicity0 aWelcome to trademark law. This introductory chapter has three purposes. First, it outlines some basics of trademark law at a very high level of generality. Second, it outlines some traditional arguments for the protection of trademark rights. Finally, it introduces some issues that complicate the development and application of trademark law.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aProperty LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1329zAccess online version02219nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135050001000149100002600159245010500185264004300290264006100333264001200394300002200406336002600428337002600454338003600480341002800516490002700544505053300571520038201104542004101486546001601527588004101543650002701584650002601611650002601637700003001663710003901693856007701732OTLid0001330MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230206s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-280 4aBF1211 aCastro, Leyreeauthor00aData Analysis in the Psychological SciencesbA Practical, Applied, Multimedia ApproachcLeyre Castro 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aJohnson County, IAbUniversity of Iowa Librariesc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Main Body -- Unit 1. Introduction to Statistics for Psychological Science -- Unit 2. Managing Data -- Unit 3. Descriptive Statistics for Psychological Research -- Unit 4. Descriptive Statistics with Excel -- Unit 5. Statistics with R: Introduction and Descriptive Statistics -- Unit 6. Brief Introduction to Statistical Significance -- Unit 7. Correlational Measures -- Unit 8. Scatterplots and Correlational Analysis in R -- Unit 9. Simple Linear Regression -- Unit 10. Simple Linear Regression in R -- Glossary0 aThis open resources textbook contains 10 Units that describe and explain the main concepts in statistical analysis of psychological data. In addition to conceptual descriptions and explanations of the basic analyses for descriptive statistics, this textbook also explains how to conduct those analyses with common statistical software (Excel) and open-source free software (R).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aMordkoff, J. Tobyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1330zAccess online version04298nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050000800167050001000175100004600185245014500231250001900376264004300395264006800438264001200506300002200518336002600540337002600566338003600592341002800628490002700656505045600683520240601139542002703545546001603572588004003588650003503628650002303663650002703686650002303713710003903736856007703775OTLid0001331MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230206s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781365583384  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQC21.3 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aAnagnostopoulos, Konstantinosn N.eauthor00aCOMPUTATIONAL PHYSICSbA Practical Introduction to Computational Physics and Scientific Computing (using C++)cKonstantinosn Anagnostopoulos  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAthens, GreecebNational Technical University of Athensc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword to the Second Edition -- Foreward to the First Edition -- 1. The Computer -- 2. Kinematics -- 3. Logistic Map -- 4. Motion of a Particle -- 5. Planar Motion -- 6. Motion in Space -- 7. Electrostatics -- 8. Diffusion Equation -- 9. The Anharmonic Oscillator -- 10. Time Independent Schrodinger Equation -- 11. The Random Walker -- 12. Motet Carlo Simulations -- 13. Simulation of the d = 2 Ising Model -- 14. Critical Exponents -- Bibliography0 aThis book is an introduction to the computational methods used in physics, but also in other scientific fields. It is addressed to an audience that has already been exposed to the introductory level of college physics, usually taught during the first two years of an undergraduate program in science and engineering. It assumes no prior knowledge of numerical analysis, programming or computers and teaches whatever is necessary for the solution of the problems addressed in the text. It can be used as a textbook in introductory computational physics or scientific computing classes. The book starts with very simple problems in particle motion and ends with an in-depth discussion of advanced techniques used in Monte Carlo simulations in statistical mechanics. The level of instruction rises slowly, while discussing problems like the diffusion equation, electrostatics on the plane, quantum mechanics and random walks. All the material can be taught in two semesters, but a selection of topics can form the material of a one semester course. The book aims to provide the students with the background and the experience needed in order to advance to high performance computing projects in science and engineering. It puts emphasis on hands--on programming of numerical code but also on the production, analysis and interpretation of data. But it also tries to keep the students motivated by considering interesting applications in physics, like chaos, quantum mechanics, special relativity and the physics of phase transitions. There is a C++ and a Fortran edition for the core programming. Data analysis is performed using the powerful tools of the GNU/Linux environment. All the necessary software is open source and freely available. The book and the accompanying software are given under a Creative Commons License/GNU public License as a service to the community. It can be used freely as a whole, or any part of it, in any form, by anyone. There is no official distribution of hard copies, but you can use the printing service of your preference in order produce any number of copies you need for you and/or your students. For the lazy ones, a very nice and cheap paperback can be purchaced from lulu.com, amazon.com and conventional bookstores. The ebook can be read in most electronic devices like your PC, tablet or favorite ebook reader and it is freely available from the book's website.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1331zAccess online version01753nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001700109040001800126050001100144050001300155100002700168245007100195264004300266264007000309264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002800501490002700529505032700556520010000883542003000983546001601013588004101029650002601070650002401096650003601120700002901156700003001185710003901215856007701254OTLid0001332MnU20240503135909.0m     o  d s      cr            230206s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a978173432829  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aParrot, Jill Meauthor04aThe CommonsbTools for Reading, Writing, and RhetoriccJill Parrot 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRichmond, KentuckybEastern Kentucky University Librariesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Why OER? -- How to use this eTextbook- for Instructors -- How to use This eTextbook- for Students -- On Campus Resources -- Metacognitive Critical Reading -- Reading, Writnig, and Rhetoric in a Nutshell -- Rhetorical Awareness in College Writing -- MLA Formating Basics -- Themes for Readinig -- Common Texts0 aAn Open Textbook for English 101: Reading, Writing, and Rhetoric at Eastern Kentucky University1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aAshby, Dominic Jeauthor1 aCollins, Jonathoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1332zAccess online version05498nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050000800149050001000157100006900167245018300236250003200419264004300451264006800494264001200562300002200574336002600596337002600622338003600648341002800684490002700712505057300739520343101312542002704743546003004770588004004800650003504840650002304875650002704898650002304925710003904948856007704987OTLid0001333MnU20260316020635.0m     o  d s      cr            230206s2016    mnu     o     0   0 gre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQC21.3 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aΑναγνωστόπουλος, Κωνσταντίνοςeauthor00aΥπολογιστική ΦυσικήbΈνα βιβλίο του Κωνσταντίνου ΑναγνωστόπουλουcΚωνσταντίνος Αναγνωστόπουλος  aδεύτερη έκδοση 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAthens, GreecebNational Technical University of Athensc[2016] 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aΠρόλογος1. Ο ϒπολογιστής2. Περιγραφή της Κίνησης3. Η Λογιστική Απεικόνιση4. Κίνηση Σωματιδίου5. Κίνηση στο Επίπεδο6. Κίνηση στο Χώρο7. Ηλεκτροστατική8. Εξίσωση Διάχυσης9. Ο Αναρμονικός Ταλαντωτής10. Η Εξίσωση Schrödinger11. Ο Τυχαίος Περιπατητής12. Προσομοιώσεις Μόντε Κάρλο13. Το Πρότυπο Ising14. Κρίσιμοι ΕκθέτεςΒιβλιογραφία0 aΤο βιβλίο αυτό είναι μια εισαγωγή στις υπολογιστικές μεθόδους που χρησιμοποιούνται στη φυσική και άλλα επιστημονικά πεδία. Απευθύνεται σε κοινό που έχει ήδη εκτεθεί σε μαθήματα γενικής φυσικής που διδάσκονται στα δύο πρώτα έτη πανεπιστημιακών τμημάτων θετικών επιστημών και επιστημών του μηχανικού. Δεν υποθέτει κανένα υπόβαθρο αριθμητικής ανάλυσης, προγραμματισμού ή χρήσης υπολογιστή και παρουσιάζει ό,τι είναι απαραίτητο για την επίλυση των προβλημάτων που παρουσιάζονται στο βιβλίο. Μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί ως κύριο σύγγραμμα σε εισαγωγικά μαθήματα υπολογιστικής φυσικής και επιστημονικού προγραμματισμού. Το βιβλίο ξεκινάει με πολύ απλά προβλήματα πάνω στην κίνηση σωματιδίου και ολοκληρώνεται με μία εις βάθος συζήτηση προχωρημένων μεθόδων προσομοίωσης Μόντε Κάρλο στη στατιστική φυσική. Το επίπεδο διδασκαλίας είναι διαβαθμισμένο ως προς τη δυσκολία του, παρουσιάζοντας προβλήματα όπως η εξίσωση διάχυσης, δυναμικά συστήματα, ηλεκτροστατική στο επίπεδο, κβαντομηχανική και οι τυχαίες διαδρομές. Όλο το υλικό που παρουσιάζεται στο βιβλίο μπορεί να διαδαχθεί άνετα σε δύο εξάμηνα. Με κατάλληλη επιλογή θεμάτων, μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί και σε ένα πλήρες μάθημα ενός εξαμήνου. Το βιβλίο αποσκοπεί να δώσει στους φοιτητές το υπόβαθρο και την εμπειρία που απαιτείται ώστε να προχωρήσουν σε προγράμματα υπολογισμών υψηλής απόδοσης. Δίνει έμφαση στον εμπειρικό προγραμματισμό αριθμητικών προγραμμάτων, αλλά και στην παραγωγή, ανάλυση και φυσική ερμηνεία των δεδομένων. Επίσης γίνεται προσπάθεια να διατηρηθεί το ενδιαφέρον του αναγνώστη μέσα από την παρουσίαση της αριθμητικής επίλυσης γνωστών και ενδιαφέροντων προβλημάτων φυσικής, οπως χαοτικών συστημάτων, κβαντομηχανικής, ειδικής θεωρίας της σχετικότητας και της φυσικής των μεταβάσεων φάσης. Το βιβλίο και το συνοδευτικό λογισμικό δίνονται ελεύθερα, αδειοδοτούμενα υπό Creative Commons License/GNU public License.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Greek, Modern (1453-).0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1333zAccess online version02185nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003100138245005200169264004300221264007800264300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505080900507520019701316542002701513546001601540588004001556650002601596650002401622700002301646700002601669710003901695856007701734OTLid0001334MnU20260330020750.0m     o  d s      cr            230209suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aPeterson, Scott D.eauthor00aAmerican Literatures After 1865cScott Peterson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louis  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- I. Contemporary Fiction: Metamodernism 101 / Silko / Faulkner -- II. Contemporary Fiction: Hughes / Walker / Cather -- III. Late Romanticism: Whitman / Dickinson -- IV. Realism: Twain / Harte / Howells / Bierce -- V. Realism: James / Jewett / Chopin -- VI. Realism: Freeman / Chesnutt / Gilman -- VII. Naturalism & Modernism: Norris / Crane / London / Washington / Du Bois -- VIII. Modernism: Frost / Stevens / Williams / Pound / Moore / Eliot -- IX. Modernism: Millay / Cummings / Fitzgerald / Hemingway -- X. Modernism: Miller -- XI. Southern Renaissance and Harlem Renaissance: Glasgow / Welty / Fauset / Larsen / Cullen -- XII. Southern Renaissance: O'Connor / Williams -- XIII. Southern Renaissance & Postmodernism: Williams / Baldwin / Rich / Morrison / Plath / Ginsberg -- Glossary0 aThis book is an anthology of American Literatures After 1865, a reimagining of the open educational resource: Writing the Nation: A Concise Introduction to American Literature 1865 to Present.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aBerke, Amyeauthor1 aBleil, Roberteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1334zAccess online version02060nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156100002500169245005500194264004300249264006000292264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002500474490002700499505016200526520070200688542001601390546001601406588004001422650002401462650003401486700002601520710003901546856007701585OTLid0001336MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230213s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693350  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aKF385.A41 aKline, Davideauthor00aIntroduction to Intellectual PropertycDavid Kline 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface and Foreward -- Patent Basics -- Patent Enforcement -- Copyright Basics -- Trademark Basics -- Trade Secret Basics -- Glossary -- Answer Key -- Index0 aIntroduction to Intellectual Property provides a clear, effective introduction to patents, copyright, trademarks, and trade secrets. The text may be used by students and instructors in formal courses, as well as those applying intellectual property considerations to entrepreneurship, marketing, law, computer science, engineering, design, or other fields. The luminaries involved with this project represent the forefront of knowledge and experience, and the material offers considerable examples and scenarios, as well as exercises and references. Introduction to Intellectual Property was originally developed by the Michelson 20MM Foundation, released under the title The Intangible Advantage.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aKappos, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1336zAccess online version02998nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100004500137245007800182264004300260264006900303264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505139700549520046501946542002302411546001602434588004002450650004202490710003902532856007702571OTLid0001337MnU20260406020547.0m     o  d s      cr            230213s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aAdministration, Federal Aviationeauthor00aAviation Weather Handbook FAA-H-8083-28AcFederal Aviation Administration 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Acknowledgements -- Disclaimer Note -- Notice -- Summary of Changes -- Chapter 1. Introduction -- Chapter 2. Aviation Weather Service Program -- Chapter 3. Overview of Aviation Weather Information -- Chapter 4. The Earth's Atmosphere -- Chapter 5. Heat and Temperature -- Chapter 6. Water Vapor -- Chapter 7. Earth-Atmosphere Heat Imbalances -- Chapter 8. Atmospheric Pressure and Altimetry -- Chapter 9. Global Circulations and Jet Streams -- Chapter 10. Wind -- Chapter 11. Air Masses, Fronts, and the Wave Cyclone Model -- Chapter 12. Vertical Motion and Clouds -- Chapter 13. Atmospheric Stability -- Chapter 14. Precipitation -- Chapter 15. Weather Radar -- Chapter 16. Mountain Weather -- Chapter 17. Tropical Weather -- Chapter 18. Weather and Obstructions to Visibility -- Chapter 19. Turbulence -- Chapter 20. Icing -- Chapter 21. Arctic Weather -- Chapter 22. Thunderstorms -- Chapter 23. Space Weather -- Chapter 24. Observations -- Chapter 25. Analysis -- Chapter 26. Advisories -- Chapter 27. Forecasts -- Chapter 28. Aviation Weather Tools -- Appendix A. Cloud Types -- Appendix B. Standard Conversion Chart -- Appendix C. Density Altitude Calculation -- Appendix D. Special Terminal Operation Procedures (STOP) for Operations in a Noncontiguous State -- Appendix E. Abbreviations, Acronyms, and Initialisms -- Appendix F. Units of Measurement -- Appendix G. Websites0 aThis handbook is designed as a technical reference for all who operate in the National Airspace System (NAS). Pilots, dispatchers, and operators will find this handbook a valuable resource for flight planning and decision making. This handbook conforms to pilot weather training and certification concepts established by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The discussion and explanations reflect the most commonly used weather products and information.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1337zAccess online version03095nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245006100177264004300238264006000281264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505103300515520085801548542001602406546001602422588004002438650002302478650002602501700002702527700002702554710003902581856007702620OTLid0001338MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230213s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781711471433  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aKordas, Anneauthor00aWorld History, Volume 2bFrom 1400cAnn KordasnVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Unit 1. Connections Across Continents -- Chapter 1. Understanding the Past -- Chapter 2. Exchange in East Asia and the Indian Ocean -- Chapter 3. Early Modern Africa and the Wider World -- Chapter 4. The Islamic World -- Chapter 5. Foundations of the Atlantic World -- Unit 2 An Age of Revolution, 1750-1914 -- Chapter 6. Colonization and Economic Expansion -- Chapter 7. Revolutions in Europea and North America -- Chapter 8. Revolutions in Latin America -- Chapter 9. Expansion in the Industrial Age -- Chapter 10. Life and Labor in the Industrial World -- Unit 3 The Modern World, 1914-Present -- Chapter 11. The War to End All Wars -- Chapter 12. The Interwar Period -- Chapter 13. The Causes and Consequences of World War II -- Chapter 14. Cold War Conflicts -- Chapter 15. The Contemporary World and Ongoing Challenges -- Appendix A. Glossary -- Appendix B. World History, Volume 2, from 1400: Maps Timelines -- Appendix C. World Maps -- Appendix D. Recommended Resources for the Study of World History -- Index0 aWorld History, Volume 2: from 1400 is designed to meet the scope and sequence of a world history course from 1400 offered at both two-year and four-year institutions. Suitable for both majors and non majors World History, Volume 2: from 1400 introduces students to a global perspective of history couched in an engaging narrative. Concepts and assessments help students think critically about the issues they encounter so they can broaden their perspective of global history. A special effort has been made to introduce and juxtapose people’s experiences of history for a rich and nuanced discussion. Primary source material represents the cultures being discussed from a firsthand perspective whenever possible. World History, Volume 2: from 1400 also includes the work of diverse and underrepresented scholars to ensure a full range of perspectives.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aLynch, Ryan J.eauthor1 aNelson, Brookeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1338zAccess online version02782nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100003500144245005300179264004300232264008500275264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505068000537520085401217542004102071546001602112588004002128650002502168650002602193700002202219700002702241710003902268856007702307OTLid0001339MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230213s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aBF1211 aKrishnamoorthy, Govindeauthor00aTrauma Informed EducationcGovind Krishnamoorthy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of First Peoples -- Accessibility Information -- About the Editors -- Foreword by Dr. Emily Berger -- Introduction -- I. Main Body -- 1. Helping Traumatised Children Learn with Dr. Dave Ziegler -- 2. Educating Students with Blocked Trust with Dr. Kim Golding -- 3. Trauma Informed Classroom Management with Betsy de Thierry -- 4. Teaching Self-Regulation with Ms. Leah Kuypers -- 5. Conscious Discipline with Dr. Becky Bailey -- 6. Preventing Challenging Behaviours with Dr. Laura Riffel -- 7. Trauma Informed Social-Emotional Learning with Professor Maurice Elias -- 8. Creating Sanctuary in Schools with Professor Sandra Bloom -- Conclusion by Dayna Schimke0 aAs an educator, have you ever wondered about students, “Why can’t she just control her behaviour?” or “Why did he do that?” The demands of the classroom, and the scrutiny of teachers, often leave little time for teachers to consider the complex needs of children experiencing traumatic stress. Drawing on their lived experience and professional expertise, the conversations with trauma-informed education experts in this unique book offer educators an opportunity to develop a deeper understanding of the needs of students and strategies for responding with compassion and empathy. In a time of rapidly emerging scientific discovery, and social and political challenges, this book encourages educational leaders to question the fundamental assumptions of dominant pedagogical practices and sets the foundations for innovation in education.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks1 aAyre, Kayeauthor1 aSchimke, Daynaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1339zAccess online version03347nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002400151245008500175264004300260264006500303264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505062200545520141901167542004102586546001602627588004002643650002602683650002402709650003602733700002602769700002602795710003902821856007702860OTLid0001341MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230214s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aFalik, Adameauthor00aRhetoric MattersbA Guide to Success in the First Year Writing ClasscAdam Falik 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaton Rouge, LAbLOUIS: The Louisiana Library Networkc2021. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- Chapter 1: The Introduction -- Chapter 2: Reading in Writing Class -- Chapter 3: Thinking and Analyzing Rhetorically -- Chapter 4: Writing a Summary and Synthesizing -- Chapter 5: The Writing Process -- Chapter 6: Structuring, Paragraphing, and Styling -- Chapter 7: Revising and Refining -- Chapter 8: Multimodal Reading and Visual Rhetoric -- Chapter 9: The Research Process -- Chapter 10: Sources and Research -- Chapter 11: Ethical Source Integration: Citation, Quoting, and Paraphrasing -- Chapter 12: Documentation Styles: MLA and APA -- Works Cited -- Appendix A: Checklist for Accessibility0 aRhetoric Matters: A Guide to Success in the First Year Writing Class offers students necessary concepts and practice to learn all the elements needed for successful first year writing and set the stage for future writing success in college. This textbook was created as part of the Interactive OER for Dual Enrollment project, facilitated by LOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network and funded by a $2 million Open Textbooks Pilot Program grant from the Department of Education. This project supports the extension of access to high-quality post-secondary opportunities to high school students across Louisiana and beyond. This project features a collaboration between educational systems in Louisiana, the library community, Pressbooks technology partner, and workforce representatives. It will enable and enhance the delivery of open educational resources (OER) and interactive quiz and assessment elements for priority dual enrollment courses in Louisiana and nationally. Developed OER course materials will be released under a license that permits their free use, reuse, modification and sharing with others.The target audience for this project and this textbook are dual enrollment students. Dual enrollment is the opportunity for a student to be enrolled in high school and college at the same time. A dual enrollment student receives credit on both their high school and college transcripts for the same course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aLa Rue, Dorieeauthor1 aWatts, Traceyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1341zAccess online version03414nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245006100162264004300223264005800266300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341002800434490002700462505023200489520198000721542004102701546001602742588004002758650003802798650002602836700003402862700002802896710003902924856007702963OTLid0001342MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230214suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHuebener, Erineauthor00aLibro LibrebAn Introduction to Spanish IcErin Huebener 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaton Rouge, LAbLOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Author Page -- Attribution Statement -- Table of Contents -- I. Capítulo Uno: Sobre Mí -- II. Capítulo Dos:¿Cómo somos? -- III. Capítulo Tres: Nuestra Rutina -- IV. Capítulo Cuatro: Mi familia -- Appendix0 aWelcome to Elementary Spanish! This textbook was designed in cooperation with the Louisiana Board of Regents Open Educational Textbook Pilot program. Designed by Elementary Instructors as a cooperative effort across Louisiana, this textbook will introduce you to the basic elements of the Spanish language through the use of self directed and active learning. This book is an adaptation of the open textbook “¡LIBRO LIBRE!: A free textbook for introductory Spanish” (which can be found at http://librolibre.net/) and was written by Erin Huebener. We have adapted Libro Libre: A Free Textbook for Introductory Spanish, originally released in 2018, to better fit a traditional 16-week semester schedule. “Libro Libre: A Free Textbook for Introductory Spanish” is licensed under CC BY-NC-SA 4.0. This textbook was created as part of the Interactive OER for Dual Enrollment project, facilitated by LOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network and funded by a $2 million Open Textbooks Pilot Program grant from the Department of Education. This project supports the extension of access to high-quality post-secondary opportunities to high school students across Louisiana and beyond. This project features a collaboration between educational systems in Louisiana, the library community, Pressbooks technology partner, and workforce representatives. It will enable and enhance the delivery of open educational resources (OER) and interactive quiz and assessment elements for priority dual enrollment courses in Louisiana and nationally. Developed OER course materials will be released under a license that permits their free use, reuse, modification and sharing with others.The target audience for this project and this textbook are dual enrollment students. Dual enrollment is the opportunity for a student to be enrolled in high school and college at the same time. A dual enrollment student receives credit on both their high school and college transcripts for the same course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aCuellar, Handy Acostaeauthor1 aFeldman, Yelanieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1342zAccess online version03716nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002300139245006500162264004300227264006500270300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505033700500520221400837542001603051546001603067588004003083650002603123650002103149700002803170700002803198710003903226856007703265OTLid0001343MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230214s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aLe, Bonnieeauthor00aMusic AppreciationbHistory, Culture, and ContextcBonnie Le 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaton Rouge, LAbLOUIS: The Louisiana Library Networkc2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- I. Music Fundamentals -- II. History of Western Music before 1600 -- III. History of Western Music after 1600 -- IV. Music of the 20th and 21st Centuries -- V. Listening to Genres -- VI. Music of Louisiana, the Americas, and the World -- Appendix A -- Appendix B: Checklist for Accessibility -- References0 aMusic makes us human. Every culture on earth has music. In fact, every human society extending back into prehistoric times has had music. Most of us are surrounded by music. We use it to enhance our mood and to regulate our metabolism, to keep us awake and help us go to sleep, as background to accompany the work, study, exercise, and relaxation that fills our days. But it is precisely when music steps out of this background and asks for our attention, engages our memory and our expectations, that it becomes a fundamentally artistic endeavor. Music is a sonic response to a question that’s not really about sound at all, but rather is historical and social. The study of music is the study of human thought, experience, and history. This course is about the musical imagination. It’s how to think about music, but it’s also about music as a mode of thinking. (inspired by Michael Hays, Professor of Architectural Theory at Harvard University’s Graduate School of Design: Welcome to The Architectural Imagination (edx.org). This textbook was created as part of the Interactive OER for Dual Enrollment project, facilitated by LOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network and funded by a $2 million Open Textbooks Pilot Program grant from the Department of Education. This project supports the extension of access to high-quality post-secondary opportunities to high school students across Louisiana and beyond. This project features a collaboration between educational systems in Louisiana, the library community, Pressbooks technology partner, and workforce representatives. It will enable and enhance the delivery of open educational resources (OER) and interactive quiz and assessment elements for priority dual enrollment courses in Louisiana and nationally. Developed OER course materials will be released under a license that permits their free use, reuse, modification and sharing with others.The target audience for this project and this textbook are dual enrollment students. Dual enrollment is the opportunity for a student to be enrolled in high school and college at the same time. A dual enrollment student receives credit on both their high school and college transcripts for the same course.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aScully, Franciseauthor1 aEdwards, Steveneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1343zAccess online version03397nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245009100159264004300250264005800293300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505103200516520117901548542001602727546001602743588004002759650002002799650002602819700003102845700003102876710003902907856007702946OTLid0001344MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230214suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aHall, Doriseauthor00aExploring the ArtsbA Brief Introduction to Art, Theatre, Music, and DancecDoris Hall 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaton Rouge, LAbLOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Acknowledgements -- I. Main Body -- 1. Chapter 1: Elements, Vocabulary, and Iconography of Visual Art -- 2. Chapter 2: Mediums in Visual Art -- 3. Chapter 3: Ancient Arts (Prehistoric, Ancient Near East, Egyptian) -- 4. Chapter 4: Classical Period to Middle Ages -- 5. Chapter 5: Renaissance to Realism -- 6. Chapter 6: Impressionism to Modern -- 7. Chapter 7: An Introduction to the Theater and its Elements -- 8. Chapter 8: The Greek Origins of Western Theater -- 9. Chapter 9: Technical Theater -- 10. Chapter 10: The Actor's Craft -- 11. Chapter 11: Other Theater Traditions -- 12. Chapter 12: Introduction to Music -- 13. Chapter 13: Music in the Middle Ages and the Renaissance -- 14. Chapter 14: Baroque and Classical Music -- 15. Chapter 15: Music of the Romantic Era -- 16. Chapter 16: Music of the 20th Century -- 17. Chapter 17: Introduction to Dance -- 18. Chapter 18: Elements of Dance -- 19. Chapter 19: Dance History and Styles -- II. Summary -- Appendix A: Checklist for Accessibility0 aThis textbook was created as part of the Interactive OER for Dual Enrollment project, facilitated by LOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network and funded by a $2 million Open Textbooks Pilot Program grant from the Department of Education. This project supports the extension of access to high-quality post-secondary opportunities to high school students across Louisiana and beyond. This project features a collaboration between educational systems in Louisiana, the library community, Pressbooks technology partner, and workforce representatives. It will enable and enhance the delivery of open educational resources (OER) and interactive quiz and assessment elements for priority dual enrollment courses in Louisiana and nationally. Developed OER course materials will be released under a license that permits their free use, reuse, modification and sharing with others. The target audience for this project and this textbook are dual enrollment students. Dual enrollment is the opportunity for a student to be enrolled in high school and college at the same time. A dual enrollment student receives credit on both their high school and college transcripts for the same course.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBerkeley, Kimberlyeauthor1 aKhan, Nubia Nuraineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1344zAccess online version03896nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002700151245006800178264004300246264005800289300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505060700512520204601119542001603165546001603181588004003197650002603237650002403263650003603287700003003323700002903353710003903382856007703421OTLid0001345MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230214suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aFontenot, Kirkeauthor00aWriting RhetoricallybFraming First Year WritingcKirk Fontenot 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaton Rouge, LAbLOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- Introduction -- Adaptation Statement -- Course Contents and Syllabus -- Major Writing Assignments, Student Worksheets, and Rubrics -- Chapter 1: Invention -- Chapter 2: Arrangement -- Chapter 3: Drafting and Revising -- Chapter 4: Editing and Proofreading -- Chapter 5: Narrative -- Chapter 6: Description -- Chapter 7: Definition -- Chapter 8: Illustration/Example -- Chapter 9: Compare/Contrast -- Chapter 10: Evaluation -- Chapter 11: Cause and Effect -- Chapter 12: Argument -- Chapter 13: Grammar and Mechanics Mini-lessons -- Appendix A: Checklist for Accessibility -- Glossary0 aThis course equips students with a strong understanding of how to use rhetorical modes that underpin much academic writing. The textbook covers modes related to creative writing, such as narration and illustration, while also covering analytically-focused modes such as comparison and cause and effect. Detailed assignment sheets are supplemented by helpful student worksheets for each major paper assignment. The book's final chapter includes grammar and style exercises. This textbook has been heavily adapted from material taken from English Composition I: Rhetorical Methods-Based, an OER developed and authored by Lumen Learning. Each chapter’s author has edited and created new content using Lumen Learning’s text as its primary source material, except where otherwise indicated. Where applicable, other source materials have been noted at the chapter level. This textbook was created as part of the Interactive OER for Dual Enrollment project, facilitated by LOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network and funded by a $2 million Open Textbooks Pilot Program grant from the Department of Education. This project supports the extension of access to high-quality post-secondary opportunities to high school students across Louisiana and beyond. This project features a collaboration between educational systems in Louisiana, the library community, Pressbooks technology partner, and workforce representatives. It will enable and enhance the delivery of open educational resources (OER) and interactive quiz and assessment elements for priority dual enrollment courses in Louisiana and nationally. Developed OER course materials will be released under a license that permits their free use, reuse, modification and sharing with others.The target audience for this project and this textbook are dual enrollment students. Dual enrollment is the opportunity for a student to be enrolled in high school and college at the same time. A dual enrollment student receives credit on both their high school and college transcripts for the same course1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aRodrigue, Shelleyeauthor1 aWaller, Wanda M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1345zAccess online version03968nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002200140245006900162264004300231264006500274300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505071900504520204001223542004103263546001603304588004003320650002603360650003603386700003003422700002603452710003903478856007703517OTLid0001347MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230214s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aKim, Saraeauthor00aIt’s About ThembPublic Speaking in the 21st CenturycSara Kim 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaton Rouge, LAbLOUIS: The Louisiana Library Networkc2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- What is an Open Textbook? -- Chapter 1: Why Public Speaking Matters Today -- Chapter 2: Building Confidence -- Chapter 3: Audience Analysis -- Chapter 4: The Importance of Listening -- Chapter 5: Ethics -- Chapter 6: Researching Your Speech -- Chapter 7: Supporting Ideas and Building Arguments -- Chapter 8: Organizing and Outlining -- Chapter 9: Delivery -- Chapter 10: Introductions and Conclusions -- Chapter 11: Language -- Chapter 12: Presentation Aids -- Chapter 13 Informative Speaking -- Chapter 14: Persuasive Speaking -- Chapter 15: Special Occasion Speaking -- Chapter 16: Online Public Speaking -- About the Contributors -- Adaptations -- Glossary -- Appendix A: Checklist for Accessibility0 aIn addition to original material this book is an adaptation of Introduction to Speech Communication authored by Sarah E. Hollingsworth, Kathryn Weinland, Sasha Hanrahan, and Mary Walker with a CC BY-NC-SA license. Introduction to Speech Communication includes original work as well as adapted and remixed material from Exploring Public Speaking: 4th Edition licensed CC BY-NC-SA, Stand Up, Speak Out licensed CC BY-NC-SA, and Fundamentals of Public Speaking licensed CC BY. It’s About Them: Public Speaking in the 21st Century also adapted a chapter from Speak Out, Call In: Public Speaking as Advocacy authored by Meggie Mapes that is licensed CC BY-NC-SA. The information on “What is an Open Textbook?” is adapted from Introduction to Philosophy: Epistemology by Christina Hendricks with a CC-BY license. See the Adaptations section for specific changes. This textbook was created as part of the Interactive OER for Dual Enrollment project, facilitated by LOUIS: The Louisiana Library Network and funded by a $2 million Open Textbooks Pilot Program grant from the Department of Education. This project supports the extension of access to high-quality post-secondary opportunities to high school students across Louisiana and beyond. This project features a collaboration between educational systems in Louisiana, the library community, Pressbooks technology partner, and workforce representatives. It will enable and enhance the delivery of open educational resources (OER) and interactive quiz and assessment elements for priority dual enrollment courses in Louisiana and nationally. Developed OER course materials will be released under a license that permits their free use, reuse, modification and sharing with others.The target audience for this project and this textbook are dual enrollment students. Dual enrollment is the opportunity for a student to be enrolled in high school and college at the same time. A dual enrollment student receives credit on both their high school and college transcripts for the same course1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMarshall, Douglaseauthor1 aPulliam, Juneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1347zAccess online version03031nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139100002900146245005500175264004300230264004400273300002200317336002600339337002600365338003600391341002800427490002700455505111300482520083001595542001602425546001602441588004002457650002502497650003102522710003902553856007702592OTLid0001348MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230216suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aCaplan, Arthur Jeauthor02aA Practicum in Behavioral EconomicscArthur Caplan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSalt Lake City, UtahbUEN Digital Press  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aA Practicum in Behavioral Economics -- Dedication -- Acknowledgments -- This Book's Approach -- The Book's Genesis and Tips on How to Use It -- A (Very) Brief History fo the Origin of Behavioral Economciis -- Introduction -- I. Section 1- The Irrational Quirks of Homo sapiens -- 1. Miscalculations, Cognitive Illusions, Misjudgments, and ‘Effects' -- 2. The Biases and Fallacies of Homo sapiens -- II. Section 2- Homo economicus Versus Homo sapiens -- 3. The Rationality of Homo economicus -- 4. The Reality of Homo sapiens -- 5. Laboratory Experiments: The Rationality of Homo economicus Versus the Reality of Homo sapiens -- 6. Laboratory Experiments: Additional Differences Between Homo economicus and Homo sapiens -- III. Section 3- Behavioral Game Theory -- 7. Some Classic Games of Iterated Dominance -- 8. Some Classic Simultaneous-Move Games -- IV. Section 4- Empirical Studies and Field Experiments -- References -- Appendix A- Example Response Cards -- Appendix B- Student Survey -- Appendix C- Example Presentation Slides -- Appendiix D- Example Course Outliniesn -- Appendix E- Linkages Matrix0 aA Practicum in Behavioral Economics is a practice-based textbook covering the broad field of behavioral economics. Because behavioral economics is foremost a “test-and-learn” field of scientific inquiry that evolves according to experimental outcomes, so too should students test-and-learn. As such, the book’s primary goal is to help students experience behavioral economics through participation in the same experiments and games that serve as the foundations for, and shape the contours of, the field. With the help of this book students learn behavioral economics firsthand, and in the process create their own experiences. They learn about themselves – about how they make private and public choices under experimental conditions – at the same time as they learn about the field of behavioral economics itself.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1348zAccess online version02732nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002300153245006900176264004300245264006500288264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505026300530520127900793542001602072546001602088588004102104650002702145700002702172700003102199710003902230856007702269OTLid0001349MnU20260406020548.0m     o  d s      cr            230220s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463666657  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aVuik, Keeseauthor00aNumerical Methods for Ordinary Differential EquationscKees Vuik 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Interpolation -- Numerical differentiation -- Nonlinear equatitons -- Numerical integration -- Numberical time integration of initial-value problems -- The finite-difference method for boundary-value problems -- The instationary heat equation0 aIn this book we discuss several numerical methods for solving ordinary differential equations. We emphasize the aspects that play an important role in practical problems. We confine ourselves to ordinary differential equations with the exception of the last chapter in which we discuss the heat equation, a parabolic partial differential equation. The techniques discussed in the intro-ductory chapters, for instance interpolation, numerical quadrature and the solution to nonlinear equations, may also be used outside the context of differential equations. They have been in-cluded to make the book self-contained as far as the numerical aspects are concerned. Chapters, sections and exercises marked with a * are not part of the Delft Institutional Package. The numerical examples in this book were implemented in Matlab, but also Python or any other programming language could be used. A list of references to background knowledge and related literature can be found at the end of this book. Extra information about this course can be found at http://NMODE.ewi.tudelft.nl, among which old exams, answers to the exercises, and a link to an online education platform. We thank Matthias Moller for his thorough reading of the draft of this book and his helpful suggestions.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aVermolen, Fredeauthor1 avan Gijzen, Martineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1349zAccess online version02100nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050001000161100003200171245010200203264004300305264003800348300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505050600551520040501057542001601462546002701478588004001505650003601545650002901581710003901610856007701649OTLid0001350MnU20260323020504.0m     o  d s      cr            230220suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9781648169854  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aRodríguez, Juliáneauthor00aPRODUCCIÓN DE NOTICIAS TELEVISIVAS EN ESPAÑOL EN ESTADOS UNIDOS DE AMÉRICAcJulián Rodríguez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Press  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessiblility Statement -- ACERA DE ESTE PROYECTO -- AGRADECIMIENTOS -- 1. INTRODUCCIÓN -- 2. LAS NARRATIVAS DE LAS NOTICIAS EN ESPAÑOL EN TELEVISIÓN -- 3. LAS SALAS DE REDACCIÓN DE TELEVISIÓN -- 4. LOS MERCADOS DE TELEVISIÓN Y EL AVANCE DE LA CARRERA PROFESIONAL -- 5. SISTEMAS DE PRODUCCIÓN AUTOMATIZADOS PARA NOTICIEROS TELEVISIVOS -- 6. LAS LIMITANTES DE LA LENGUA Y LAS TÉCNICAS DE EDICIÓN -- 7. CONCLUSIÓN -- Accessiblity Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aProducción de Noticias Televisivas en Español en Estados Unidos de América es el primer Recurso Educativo Abierto (REA) dedicado exclusivamente al tema. Este REA expone la terminología empleada en las salas de redacción, facilita el entendimiento de la profesión y presenta ejemplos reales que conllevan al mejoramiento de la educación y la producción de noticias televisivas estadounidenses.1 fAttribution  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1350zAccess online version02905nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002500155245005200180264004300232264007500275264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002800472490002700500505037800527520128000905542002702185546001602212588004102228650004202269700002602311700003002337700002402367710003902391856007702430OTLid0001351MnU20260406020548.0m     o  d s      cr            230220s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9786070265440  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aWolf, Gunnareauthor00aFundamentos de sistemas operativoscGunnar Wolf 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMexico City, MexicobUniversidad Nacional Autónoma de Méxicoc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPresentación -- Punto de partida -- Relación con el hardware -- Administración de procesos -- Planificación de procesos -- Administración de memoria -- Organización de archivos -- Sistemas de archivos -- A. Software libre y licenciamiento -- B. Virtualización -- C. El medio físico y el almacenamiento -- Acerca de los autores -- Índice de figuras -- Bibliografía0 aTodos los usuarios de equipos de cómputo (esto es, prácticamente cualquier persona del mundo) tienen contacto con un sistema operativo, y ciertas expectativas acerca de su funcionamiento. ¿Cómo es que un sistema operativo puede gestionar y compartir los recursos de cómputo? Hoy en día, a pesar de que menos de una decena es conocida por la población en general, hay cientos de sistemas operativos en uso y bajo un desarrollo activo. Cada uno de ellos persigue distintos fines, sea por la arquitectura o la capacidad de los equipos en que se ejecutará, características específicas que implementa, o persigue atraer un segmento distinto de la población. Todos ellos, sin embargo, realizan las mismas operaciones básicas, parten de los mismos fundamentos. Este libro, diseñado para servir como bibliografía para un curso de Sistemas Operativos para licenciatura, presenta las principales áreas en que se divide el trabajo de un sistema operativo. El libro está escrito nativamente en español, salvando las inconveniencias en que muchas veces incurren las traducciones técnicas. Los autores (uno mexicano, dos argentinos y uno colombiano) procuraron que el lenguaje y los términos empleados resulten lo más neutros y universales a la región latinoamericana.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aRuiz, Estebaneauthor1 aBergero, Federicoeauthor1 aMeza, Erwineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1351zAccess online version04174nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002400153245009600177264004300273264006400316300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002500490490002700515505138100542520156301923542003003486546001603516588004003532650002303572650002603595700002503621700002603646710003903672856007703711OTLid0001352MnU20260406020628.0m     o  d s      cr            230227suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800648722  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aHansen, Janeeditor04aThe European ExperiencebA Multi-Perspective History of Modern Europe, 15002000cJan Hansen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishers  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit 1 Identities -- Chapter 1.1 Ideas of Europe -- Chapter 1.2 Borders -- Chapter 1.3 Migration -- Chapter 1.4 Europe's Other(ed)s: The Americas, Africa, Asia, and the Middle East -- Unit 2 Societies -- Chapter 2.1 Demographic Change -- Chatper 2.2 Interethnic Relations -- Chapter 2.3 Household and Family -- Chapter 2.4 Inequalities -- Unit 3 Power and Citizenshpi -- Chapter 3.1 State-Building and Nationalism -- Chaptetr 3.2 Empire and Colonialism -- Chapter 3.3 Revolutions and Civil Wars -- Chapter 3.4 Peace and Conflict -- Chapter 3.5 Protest and Social Movements -- Unit 4 Knowledge -- Chapter 4.1 Science and Technological Change -- Chapter 4.2 Social Engineering and Welfare -- Chapter 4.3 Education and Knowledge Transfer -- Chapter 4.4 Understanding and Controllinig the Environment -- Unit 5 Economy -- Chapter 5.1 Entrepeneurs, Companies, Markets -- Chapter 5.2 Distribution Wealth -- Chapter 5.3 Production and Consumption -- Chapter 5.4 Labour and Forced Labour -- Unit 6 Living with Differencce -- Chapter 6.1 Religions -- Chapter 6.2 Ideologies -- Chapter 6.3 Centres and Pripheries -- Chapter 6.4 Gnerations and Lifecycles -- Unit 7 Cultural Encounters -- Chapter 7.1 Experiments and Avant-Gardes -- Chapter 7.2 Mass Media and Popular Culture -- Chapter 7.3 Sports and Leisure -- Chapter 7.4 Heritage and Memory -- List of Authors -- Index0 aThe European Experience brings together the expertise of nearly a hundred historians from eight European universities to internationalise and diversify the study of modern European history, exploring a grand sweep of time from 1500 to 2000. Offering a valuable corrective to the Anglocentric narratives of previous English-language textbooks, scholars from all over Europe have pooled their knowledge on comparative themes such as identities, cultural encounters, power and citizenship, and economic development to reflect the complexity and heterogeneous nature of the European experience. Rather than another grand narrative, the international author teams offer a multifaceted and rich perspective on the history of the continent of the past 500 years. Each major theme is dissected through three chronological sub-chapters, revealing how major social, political and historical trends manifested themselves in different European settings during the early modern (1500–1800), modern (1800–1900) and contemporary period (1900–2000). This resource is of utmost relevance to today’s history students in the light of ongoing internationalisation strategies for higher education curricula, as it delivers one of the first multi-perspective and truly ‘European’ analyses of the continent’s past. Beyond the provision of historical content, this textbook equips students with the intellectual tools to interrogate prevailing accounts of European history, and enables them to seek out additional perspectives in a bid to further enrich the discipline1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aHung, Jocheneeditor1 aIra, Jaroslaveeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1352zAccess online version01720nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167050000700177100003100184245005800215264004300273264005800316264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505024600551520018400797542003000981546001601011588004001027650002301067650002301090650002601113650003101139710003901170856007701209OTLid0001353MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230227s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781739214807  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH301 4aBF121 4aH11 aHall, Catherine N.eeditor00aIntroduction to Biological PsychologycCatherine Hall 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aFalmer, EnglandbUniversity of Sussex Libraryc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCredits -- Foreword -- Background to Biological Psychology -- Organisation of the nervous system -- Neuronal communication -- Sensing the environment and perceiving the world -- Interacting with the world -- Dysfunction of the nervous system0 aAn open access textbook designed primarily for use by first and second year undergraduate students of British Psychological Society accredited Psychology degree courses in the UK.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1353zAccess online version03659nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001200156050000700168100002900175245006000204264004300264264003900307264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002500468490002700493505115100520520120801671542003002879546001602909588004002925650002402965650002502989650003103014700003503045700002903080710003903109856007703148OTLid0001354MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            230306s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781909890695  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aCampante, Filipeeauthor00aAdvanced MacroeconomicsbAn Easy GuidecFilipe Campante 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLondon, EnglandbLSE Pressc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part 1: Growth Theory -- Growth theory preliminaries -- The neoclassical growth model -- An application: The small open economy -- Endogenous growth models I: Escaping diminishing returns -- Endogenous growth models II: Technological change -- Proximate and fundamental causes of growth -- Part 2: Overlapping Generations Models -- Overlapping generations models -- An application: Pension systems and transitions -- Unified growth theory -- Part 3: Consumption and Investment -- Consumption -- Consumption under uncertainty and macro finance -- Investment -- Part 4: Short Term Fluctuations -- Real business cycles -- (New) Keynesian theories of fluctuations: A primer -- Unemployment -- Part 5: Monetary and Fiscal Policy -- Fiscal policy I: Public debt and the effectiveness of fiscal policy -- Fiscal policy II: The long-run determinants of fiscal policy -- Monetary policy: An introduction -- Rules vs Discretion -- Recent debates in monetary policy -- New developments in monetary and fiscal policy -- Appendix A: Very brief mathematical appendix -- Appendix B: Simulating an RBC model -- Appendix C: Simulating a DSGE model0 aMacroeconomic policy is one of the most important policy domains, and the tools of macroeconomics are among the most valuable for policy makers. Yet there has been, up to now, a wide gulf between the level at which macroeconomics is taught at the undergraduate level and the level at which it is practiced. At the same time, doctoral-level textbooks are usually not targeted at a policy audience, making advanced macroeconomics less accessible to current and aspiring practitioners. This book, born out of the Masters course the authors taught for many years at the Harvard Kennedy School, fills this gap. It introduces the tools of dynamic optimization in the context of economic growth, and then applies them to a wide range of policy questions – ranging from pensions, consumption, investment and finance, to the most recent developments in fiscal and monetary policy. It does so with the requisite rigor, but also with a light touch, and an unyielding focus on their application to policy-making, as befits the authors’ own practical experience. Advanced Macroeconomics: An Easy Guide is bound to become a great resource for graduate and advanced undergraduate students, and practitioners alike.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSturzenegger, Federicoeauthor1 aVelasco, Andréseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1354zAccess online version02019nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245006600171264004300237264002900280300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002800419490002700447505028800474520057200762542004101334546001601375588004001391650003201431650002801463650003801491710003901529856007701568OTLid0001355MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230306suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aTolboom, Ryaneauthor00aComputer Systems SecuritybPlanning for SuccesscRyan Tolboom 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNewark, NJbRyan Tolboom  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLegal -- Acknowledgements -- Instructional Notes -- 1. Introduction -- 2. Cryptography -- 3. Malware -- 4. Protocols -- 5 Attacks -- 6. Security Solutions -- 7. Access Controls -- 8. Vulnerability Management and Compliance -- 9. Incident Response and Continuity -- 10. Virtualization0 aThe text, labs, and review questions in this book are designed as an introduction to the applied topic of computer security. With these resources students will learn ways of preventing, identifying, understanding, and recovering from attacks against computer systems. This text also presents the evolution of computer security, the main threats, attacks and mechanisms, applied computer operation and security protocols, main data transmission and storage protection methods, cryptography, network systems availability, recovery, and business continuation procedures.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aCryptographyvTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1355zAccess online version04261nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001500162050000700177100002600184245011100210264004300321264006800364264001200432300002200444336002600466337002600492338003600518341002800554490002700582505143800609520132502047542001603372546001603388588004103404650003303445650002503478650005003503650003103553700003603584700002703620700002803647710003903675856007703714OTLid0001357MnU20260406020549.0m     o  d s      cr            230306s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781779952653  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aOlivier, Jakoeeditor00aContextualised open educational practicesbTowards student agency and self-directed learningcJako Olivier 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAOSIS Publishingc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Open educational practices for self-directed learning: An open educational resources fellowship as a case study -- Chapter 2: Multilingual digital education for social justice through localised self-directed open educational practices in South Africa -- Chapter 3: What open educational resources’ incorporation in education might contribute including implications for self-directed learning -- Chapter 4: Multilingual philosophy glossaries: Steps towards socially just pedagogical praxis -- Chapter 5: Designing an open educational resource as part of a technology-enhanced practice environment developing the oral interactional competence of beginner language learners -- Chapter 6: Decolonising the journalism curriculum through co-creating an OER textbook with students -- Chapter 7: Stories students tell about their learning experiences creating open educational resources in a music education module -- Chapter 8: Second-year health students’ perspectives on developing open educational resources -- Chapter 9: An open educational resource as a tool to create awareness around infectious diseases: A focus on the human immunodeficiency virus, Mycobacterium tuberculosis and the severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus -- Chapter 10: How decolonial practices can assist with researching open educational resources and developing open legal pedagogies from a South African perspective -- References -- Index0 aThis book covers original research on the implementation of open educational practices through the use of open educational resources at the university level. The emphasis on open education in this book is on contextualising resources, supporting student agency and fostering self-directed learning specifically within a South African milieu. The envisaged chapters cover conceptual and review research and empirical work focussing on open educational practices and the use of renewable assessments. The work starts off with an overview of an institutional-wide open education project that prompted the research followed by research on open education in terms of various modules in the health science, music education, law, philosophy, dietetics, anthropology, French language learning, journalism and political science. There is a clear gap in the literature on open education in terms of open educational practices, specifically in terms of contextualising resources, supporting student agency and fostering self-directed learning in a South African context. Despite the existence of some general works on open education in terms of policy, social justice and open textbooks, this book will be unique in exploring the intersections of openness, specifically with contextualisation, student agency and self-directedness.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 adu Toit-Brits, Charleneeeditor1 aBunt, Byron J.eeditor1 aDhakulkar, Amiteeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1357zAccess online version03370nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140100004000147245012500187264004300312264009600355264001200451300002200463336002600485337002600511338003600537341002800573490002700601505070400628520118601332542004102518546001602559588004002575650002502615650003102640700002902671700002802700700003702728700002702765700002802792710003902820856007702859OTLid0001358MnU20260406020802.0m     o  d s      cr            230306s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aPegorraro Schull, Christineeauthor00aEarly Childhood LiteracybEngaging and Empowering Emergent Readers and Writers, Birth  Age 5cChristine Pegorraro Schull 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 - Building Connections that Support Emergent Literacy -- Chapter 2 - Recognizing the Power of the Early Years -- Chapter 3 - Examining Theories that Support Literacy Development -- Chapter 4 - Understanding and Valuing Children's Home Literacy Environments -- Chapter 5 - Building the Environment for Play-Based Learning -- Chapter 6 - Understanding Emergent Literacy Assessment Practices -- Chapter 7 - Language Development: Promoting Speaking, Listening & Communicating -- Chapter 8 - Reading Development: Engaging Emergent Readers -- Chapter 9 - Writing Development: Nurturing Emergent Writers -- Chapter 10 - Planning for What's Next as Emergent Readers and Writers Progress0 aThis textbook, Early Childhood Literacy: Engaging and Empowering Emergent Readers and Writers Birth-Age 5, outlines the connection between different areas of language and literacy and describes strategies for supporting development and promoting instruction. Early literacy includes reading, writing, and language development. Writing includes any early writing attempts and pre-writing behaviors just as reading includes any early reading attempts and recognition of symbols and sounds. Language also includes listening and speaking (oral language) and the use of gestures and signs to communicate. The term oral language is commonly used to describe early language development separately from reading and writing. This text assumes oral language is a component of language and embraces the broader term to underscore the communication practices outside of listening and speaking. For example, some children use sign language or a picture board. For these reasons, the textbook will focus on language development in its totality, including oral language. This textbook is focused on birth to age 5 because early literacy development is crucial for future learning and development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aLa Croix, Leslieeauthor1 aMiller, Sara E.eauthor1 aAustin, Kimberly Sanderseauthor1 aKidd, Julie K.eauthor1 aMedina, Melanieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1358zAccess online version01782nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002500149245003100174264004300205264005100248264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002500421490002700446505040300473520024400876542003001120546001601150588004001166650002301206650002301229700002801252710003901280856007701319OTLid0001359MnU20260406020627.0m     o  d s      cr            230310s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aSuza, Waltereeditor00aCrop GeneticscWalter Suza 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDigital Press, bIowa State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the PBEA Series -- Reproduction in Crop Plants -- Flower Morphology and Distribution -- Controlled Hybridization: Self-incompatibility, Male-sterility, and Sex-inheritance -- Gene Segregation and Genetic Recombination -- Linkage -- Population Genetics -- Inbreeding and Heterosis -- Inheritance of Quantitative Traits -- Mutations and Variation -- Ploidy: Polyploidy, Aneuploidy, and Haploidy0 aThis book provides an introduction to genetic concepts such as reproductive systems, recombination, mutation, segregation and linkage analysis, inbreeding, quantitative inheritance, fertility regulation, population genetics and polyploidy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aLamkey, Kendalleeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1359zAccess online version02119nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007500171250003100246264004300277264003300320264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505041200530520047200942542004101414546001601455588004001471650003201511650003801543700002401581710003901605856007701644OTLid0001360MnU20260406020628.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (English)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicense -- Preface by Scott Chacon -- Preface by Ben Straub -- Dedications -- Contributors -- Introduction -- Getting Started -- Git Basics -- Git Branching -- Git on the Server -- Distributed Git -- GitHub -- Git Tools -- Customizing Git -- Git and Other Systems -- Git Internals -- Appendix A: Git in Other Environment -- Appendix B: Embedding Git in your Applications -- Appendix C: Git Commands -- Index0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1360zAccess online version02104nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007700171250003300248264004300281264003300324264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505039100534520047200925542004101397546001801438588004001456650003201496650003801528700002401566710003901590856007701629OTLid0001361MnU20260323020708.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 bul d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Bulgarian)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.58-28-g132fc121, 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aНачало -- Основи на Git -- Клонове в Git -- GitHub -- Git инструменти -- Настройване на Git -- Git и други системи -- Git на ниско ниво -- Приложение A: Git в други среди -- Приложение B: Вграждане на Git в приложения -- Приложение C: Git команди0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Bulgarian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1361zAccess online version02102nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007600171250003100247264004300278264003300321264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505038300531520047200914542004101386546002701427588004001454650003201494650003801526700002401564710003901588856007701627OTLid0001362MnU20260406020628.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Español)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aInicio - Sobre el Control de Versiones -- Fundamentos de Git -- Ramificaciones en Git -- Git en el Servidor -- Git en entornos distribuidos -- GitHub -- Herramientas de Git -- Personalización de Git -- Git y Otros Sistemas -- Los entresijos internos de Git -- Apéndice A: Git en otros entornos -- Apéndice B: Integrando Git en tus Aplicaciones -- Apéndice C: Comandos de Git0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1362zAccess online version02043nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007400171250003100245264004300276264003300319264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505033900529520047100868542004101339546001501380588004001395650003201435650003801467700002401505710003901529856007701568OTLid0001363MnU20260330020613.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 fre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (French)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDémarrage rapide -- Les bases de Git -- Les branches avec Git -- Git sur le serveur -- Git distribué -- GitHub -- Utilitaires Git -- Personnalisation de Git -- Git et les autres systèmes -- Les tripes de Git -- Annexe A: Git dans d’autres environnements -- Annexe B: Embarquer Git dans vos applications -- Annexe C: Commandes Git0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn French.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1363zAccess online version02286nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007300171250003100244264004300275264003300318264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505056700528520047201095542004101567546003001608588004001638650003201678650003801710700002401748710003901772856007701811OTLid0001364MnU20260330020613.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 gre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Greek)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aΞεκινώντας με το Git -- Τα θεμελιώδη στοιχεία του Git -- Διακλαδώσεις στο Git -- Το Git στον διακομιστή -- Κατανεμημένο Git -- GitHub -- Εργαλεία του Git -- Εξατομίκευση του Git -- Το Git και άλλα συστήματα -- Εσωτερική λειτουργία του Git -- Appendix A: Το Git σε άλλα περιβάλλοντα -- Appendix B: Ενσωμάτωση του Git στις εφαρμογές μας -- Appendix C: Εντολές Git0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Greek, Modern (1453-).0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1364zAccess online version02097nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007600171250003100247264004300278264003300321264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505038800531520047200919542004101391546001701432588004001449650003201489650003801521700002401559710003901583856007701622OTLid0001365MnU20260323020505.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 jpn d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Japanese)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a使い始める -- Git の基本 -- Git のブランチ機能 -- Gitサーバー -- Git での分散作業 -- GitHub -- Git のさまざまなツール -- Git のカスタマイズ -- Gitとその他のシステムの連携 -- Gitの内側 -- 付録 A: その他の環境でのGit -- 付録 B: Gitをあなたのアプリケーションに組み込む -- 付録 C: Gitのコマンド0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Japanese.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1365zAccess online version02021nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007400171250003100245264004300276264003300319264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505031600529520047200845542004101317546001501358588004001373650003201413650003801445700002401483710003901507856007701546OTLid0001366MnU20260406020549.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 kor d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Korean)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a시작하기 -- Git의 기초 -- Git 브랜치 -- Git 서버 -- 분산 환경에서의 Git -- GitHub -- Git 도구 -- Git맞춤 -- Git과 여타 버전 관리 시스템 -- Git의 내부 -- 부록 A: 다양한 환경에서 Git 사용하기 -- 부록 B: 애플리케이션에 Git 넣기 -- 부록 C: Git 명령어0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Korean.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1366zAccess online version02175nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007500171250003100246264004300277264003300320264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505046800530520047200998542004101470546001601511588004001527650003201567650003801599700002401637710003901661856007701700OTLid0001367MnU20260406020549.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 rus d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Russian)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aВведение -- Основы Git -- Ветвление в Git -- Git на сервере -- Распределенный Git -- GitHub -- Инструменты Git -- Настройка Git -- Git и другие системы контроля версий -- Приложение A: Git в других окружениях -- Приложение B: Встраивание Git в ваши приложения -- Приложение C: Команды Git0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Russian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1367zAccess online version01996nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002700145245007500172250003100247264004300278264003300321264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505028900531520047200820542004101292546001501333588004001348650003201388650003801420700002401458710003901482856007701521OTLid0001368MnU20260323020506.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 ger d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scottteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (German)cScottt Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aErste Schritte -- Git Grundlagen -- Git Branching -- Git auf dem Server -- Verteiltes Git -- GitHub -- Git Tools -- Git einrichten -- Git und andere Systeme -- Git Interna -- Anhang A: Git in anderen Umgebungen -- Anhang B: Git in Ihre Anwendungen einbetten -- Anhang C: Git Kommandos0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn German.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1368zAccess online version01978nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007500171250003100246264004300277264003300320264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505027100530520047200801542004101273546001601314588004001330650003201370650003801402700002401440710003901464856007701503OTLid0001369MnU20260330020752.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2014    mnu     o     0   0 chi d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Chinese)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a起步 -- Git 基础 -- Git 分支 -- 服务器上的 Git -- 分布式 Git -- GitHub -- Git 工具 -- 自定义 Git -- Git 与其他系统 -- Git 内部原理 -- 附录 A: 在其它环境中使用 Git -- 附录 B: 在你的应用中嵌入 Git -- 附录 C: Git 命令0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Chinese.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1369zAccess online version03006nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050000800149050001000157100002700167245009200194264004300286264007200329264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505022300578520142600801542003002227546001602257588004002273650002302313650004202336650002702378650002302405700002802428710003902456856007702495OTLid0001370MnU20260323020541.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aTA145 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aSauter, Thomaseauthor00aIntroduction to Systems BiologybWorkbook for Flipped-Classroom TeachingcThomas Sauter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Chapter 1: Biochemcial networks in the matrix form -- Chapter 2: Metabolic modeling -- Chapter 3: the magic of change and how to find itt -- Chapter 4: Physical modeling and non-linear enzyme0 aThis book is an introduction to the language of systems biology, which is spoken among many disciplines, from biology to engineering. Authors Thomas Sauter and Marco Albrecht draw on a multidisciplinary background and evidence-based learning to facilitate the understanding of biochemical networks, metabolic modeling and system dynamics. Their pedagogic approach briefly highlights core ideas of concepts in a broader interdisciplinary framework to guide a more effective deep dive thereafter. The learning journey starts with the purity of mathematical concepts, reveals its power to connect biological entities in structure and time, and finally introduces physics concepts to tightly align abstraction with reality. This workbook is all about self-paced learning, supports the flipped-classroom concept, and kick-starts with scientific evidence on studying. Each chapter comes with links to external YouTube videos, learning checklists, and Integrated real-world examples to gain confidence in thinking across scientific perspectives. The result is an integrated approach that opens a line of communication between theory and application, enabling readers to actively learn as they read. This overview of capturing and analyzing the behavior of biological systems will interest adherers of systems biology and network analysis, as well as related fields such as bioinformatics, biology, cybernetics, and data science.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aAlbrecht, Marcoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1370zAccess online version02373nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155100002500162245008000187264004300267264008500310264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002800517490002700545505029200572520074000864542003001604546001601634588004001650650002601690650003101716700003201747700002601779700003001805710003901835856007701874OTLid0001371MnU20260406020628.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645679601  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aBeel, Nathaneauthor00aCommon Client Issues in CounsellingbAn Australian PerspectivecNathan Beel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of First Peoples -- Accessibility Information -- Introduction -- Main Body -- Addictions -- Anxiety -- Child Maltreatment -- Crisis -- Depression -- Domestic Violence -- Grief and Loss -- Relationship Difficulties -- Trauma in Adults -- Trauma in Children and Adolescence0 aCommon Client Issues in Counselling: An Australian Perspective focuses on common mental health issues, such as grief and loss, anxiety, and depression, experienced by clients presenting for counselling. The focus throughout is on providing an Australian perspective, highlighting contemporary understandings, as well as suggesting practical and integrative responses to each common issue. All of the authors, reviewers, and editors work within Australian counselling settings, including private practice, not for profit organisations and academic contexts. By drawing on the authors’ extensive experience, and using a contextual rather than diagnostic approach, each chapter is brought to life with valuable insights and suggestions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aChinchen, Christineeauthor1 aMachin, Tanyaeauthor1 adu Plessis, Caroleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1371zAccess online version04511nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002900145245008900174264004300263264003300306264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505091000516520245401426542001603880546001603896588004003912650003203952650003703984710003904021856007704060OTLid0001372MnU20260406020551.0m     o  d s      cr            230313s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aScargall, Stteveeauthor00aProgramming Persistent MemorybA Comprehensive Guide for DeveloperscStteve Scargall 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction to Persistent Memory Programming -- Persistent Memory Architecture -- Operating Systetm Support for Persistent Memory -- Fundamental Concepts of Persistent Memory Programming -- Introducing the Persistent Memory Develpoment Kit -- Iibpmem: Low-Level Persistent Memory Support -- Iibpmemobj: A Native Transactional Object Store -- libpmemobj-cpp: The Adaptable Language - C++ and Persistent Memory -- pmemkv: A Persistent In-Memory Key-Value Store -- Volatile Use of Persistent Memory -- Designing Data Structures for Persistent Memory -- Debugging Persistent Memory Applications -- Enabling Persistence Using a Real-World Application -- Concurrency and Persistent Memory -- Profiling and Performance -- PMDK Internals: Important Algorithms and Data Structures -- Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability (RAS) -- Remote Persistent Memory -- Advanced Topics -- Back Matter0 aBeginning and experienced programmers will use this comprehensive guide to persistent memory programming. You will understand how persistent memory brings together several new software/hardware requirements, and offers great promise for better performance and faster application startup times—a huge leap forward in byte-addressable capacity compared with current DRAM offerings. This revolutionary new technology gives applications significant performance and capacity improvements over existing technologies. It requires a new way of thinking and developing, which makes this highly disruptive to the IT/computing industry. The full spectrum of industry sectors that will benefit from this technology include, but are not limited to, in-memory and traditional databases, AI, analytics, HPC, virtualization, and big data. Programming Persistent Memory describes the technology and why it is exciting the industry. It covers the operating system and hardware requirements as well as how to create development environments using emulated or real persistent memory hardware. The book explains fundamental concepts; provides an introduction to persistent memory programming APIs for C, C++, JavaScript, and other languages; discusses RMDA with persistent memory; reviews security features; and presents many examples. Source code and examples that you can run on your own systems are included. What You’ll Learn Understand what persistent memory is, what it does, and the value it brings to the industry Become familiar with the operating system and hardware requirements to use persistent memory Know the fundamentals of persistent memory programming: why it is different from current programming methods, and what developers need to keep in mind when programming for persistence Look at persistent memory application development by example using the Persistent Memory Development Kit (PMDK) Design and optimize data structures for persistent memory Study how real-world applications are modified to leverage persistent memory Utilize the tools available for persistent memory programming, application performance profiling, and debugging Who This Book Is For C, C++, Java, and Python developers, but will also be useful to software, cloud, and hardware architects across a broad spectrum of sectors, including cloud service providers, independent software vendors, high performance compute, artificial intelligence, data analytics, big data, etc.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1372zAccess online version02040nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007900171250003100250264004300281264003300324264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505032800531520047200859542004101331546002001372588004001392650003201432650003801464700002401502710003901526856007701565OTLid0001373MnU20260406020803.0m     o  d s      cr            230315s2014    mnu     o     0   0 aze d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Azerbaijani)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBaşlanğıc -- Git’in Əsasları -- Git’də Branch -- Server’də Git -- Paylanmış Git -- GitHub -- Git Alətləri -- Git’i Fərdiləşdirmək -- Git və Digər Sistemlər -- Git’in Daxili İşləri -- Appendix A: Digər Mühitlərdə Git -- Appendix B: Proqramlara Git Daxil Etmək -- Appendix C: Git Əmrləri0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Azerbaijani.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1373zAccess online version02002nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007300171250003100244264004300275264003300318264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505029000528520047200818542004101290546002301331588004001354650003201394650003801426700002401464710003901488856007701527OTLid0001374MnU20260323020506.0m     o  d s      cr            230315s2014    mnu     o     0   0 dut d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Dutch)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAan de slag -- Git Basics -- Branchen in Git -- Git op de server -- Gedistribueerd Git -- GitHub -- Git Tools -- Git aanpassen -- Git en andere systemen -- Git Binnenwerk -- Bijlage A: Git in andere omgevingen -- Bijlage B: Git in je applicaties inbouwen -- Bijlage C: Git Commando’s0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Dutch; Flemish.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1374zAccess online version02001nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007700171250003100248264004300279264003300322264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505029000532520047200822542004101294546001801335588004001353650003201393650003801425700002401463710003901487856007701526OTLid0001375MnU20260323020506.0m     o  d s      cr            230315s2014    mnu     o     0   0 slv d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Slovenian)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPričetek -- Osnove Git -- Veje Git -- Git na strežniku -- Distribuirani Git -- GitHub -- Orodja Git -- Prilagoditev Git-a -- Git in drugi sistemi -- Notranjost Git-a -- Appendix A: Git v drugih okoljih -- Appendix B: Vključevanje Git-a v vašo aplikacijo -- Appendix C: Git Commands0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Slovenian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1375zAccess online version02141nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002600145245007600171250003100247264004300278264003300321264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505043100531520047200962542004101434546001801475588004001493650003201533650003801565700002401603710003901627856007701666OTLid0001376MnU20260323020506.0m     o  d s      cr            230315s2014    mnu     o     0   0 ukr d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aChacon, Scotteauthor00aPro GitbEverything You Need to Know About Git (Ukranian)cScott Chacon  aVersion 2.1.359-2-g27002dd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew York, NYbApressc[2014] 4c©2014.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aВступ -- Основи Git -- Галуження в git -- Git на сервері -- Розподілений Git -- GitHub -- Інструменти Git -- Налаштування Git -- Git and Other Systems -- Git зсередини -- Додаток A: Git в інших середовищах -- Додаток B: Вбудовування Git у ваші застосунки -- Додаток C: Команди Git0 aThe entire Pro Git book, written by Scott Chacon and Ben Straub and published by Apress, is available here. All content is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non Commercial Share Alike 3.0 license. Print versions of the book are available on Amazon.com. The version found here has been updated with corrections and additions from hundreds of contributors. If you see an error or have a suggestion, patches and issues are welcome in its GitHub repository.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Ukrainian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks1 aStraub, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1376zAccess online version03765nam a2200589 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050000700166050001000173100003100183245006800214250001600282264004300298264006200341264001200403300002200415336002600437337002600463338003600489341002800525490002700553505052200580520139501102542003002497546001602527588004002543650004302583650004402626650003102670650002502701700002702726700003202753700002602785700002802811700002802839700002602867700002502893700002702918700002802945700003102973700002503004700003003029710003903059856007703098OTLid0001377MnU20260406020629.0m     o  d s      cr            230316s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989864685  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aHQ1101 4aH1 4aHM5861 aMaultsaid, Deirdreeeditor00aCases on Social IssuesbFor Class DiscussioncDeirdre Maultsaid  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensing Info -- Accessibility Statement -- List of Contributors -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Case 1: Homophobia at Work -- Case 2: Safety in an Indigenous Community -- Case 3: The Family Ranch and Oil and Gas Pipelines -- Case 4: Invisible Disabilities in the Workplace -- Case 5: Employee Anxiety in the Restaurant Industry -- Case 6: Safety for Women, Transgender Women and Non-Binary People at Work -- Case 7: Bullying of Immigrants and Refugees at Work -- Contributor Biographies -- Versioning History0 aThis Open Education resource, “Cases on Social Issues: For Class Discussion – 2nd Edition”, includes valuable cases for student use on issues of discrimination, diversity, equity, inclusion and general social issues in the workplace. Included are cases for discussion on workplace scenarios as follows: homophobia; working with Indigenous communities; oil and gas pipelines and the family ranch; invisible disabilities; employee anxiety; safety for women, transgender women and non-binary people; and the bullying of new immigrants and refugees. The critical events portrayed in the cases are realistic and emotional, and most feature the experiences of under-represented and marginalized people. These thoughtful, contemporary cases pose ethical dilemmas about social issues that encourage post-secondary students and instructors to have stimulating, inclusive, and compassionate discussions. Inspired by input from post-secondary students and authored by students and people who are usually under-represented in education material, this resource is designed for upper-level undergraduate or graduate students in the humanities, social sciences, business, healthcare, science, agriculture, environmental studies, Indigenous studies, land use studies, law and more. Each case is supplemented with modifiable discussion prompts, notes for teaching strategies, and a short reading list.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aDoyle, Briannaeauthor1 aWai Shan Li, Celineeauthor1 aJohn, Gregoryeauthor1 aGill, Gursimrateauthor1 aBeavington, Leeeauthor1 aSangha, Leslieauthor1 aGarg, Nikhileauthor1 aKabaria, Richaeauthor1 aKulewksa, Saraheauthor1 aParmar, Simrenpriteauthor1 aHtun, Thalineauthor1 aAthembo, Winifredeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1377zAccess online version01853nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002400136245009400160250001600254264004300270264006200313264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505035000552520035800902542002701260546001601287588004001303650003201343710003901375856007701414OTLid0001381MnU20260406020803.0m     o  d s      cr            230320s2005    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aFogel, Karleauthor00aProducing Open Source SoftwarebHow to Run a Successful Free Software ProjectcKarl Fogel  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bKarl Fogelc[2005] 4c©2005.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Getting Started -- Technical Infrastructure -- Social and Political Infrastructure -- Organizations and Money: Business, Non-Profits, and Governments -- Communications -- Packaging, Releasing, and Daily Developments -- Managing Participants -- Legal Matters: Licenses, Copyrights, Ttrandemarks and Patents -- Copyright0 aProducing Open Source Software is a book about the human side of open source development. It describes how successful projects operate, the expectations of users and developers, and the culture of free software. The book is released under an open copyright. You can buy it in bookstores, order copies from O'Reilly Media, or browse and download it here.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1381zAccess online version02678nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002700167245006800194264004300262264005900305264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505049500541520095701036542004101993546001602034588004102050650002302091650002302114700002702137710003902164856007702203OTLid0001382MnU20260406020550.0m     o  d s      cr            230327s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957213477  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aReed, Kathleeneauthor00aVirginia Cooperative Extension Gardener HandbookcKathleen Reed 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Cooperative Extensionc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBotany -- Soils and Nutrient Management -- Entomology -- Plant Pathology -- Abiotic Stress Effects on Plant Growth and Development -- Diagnosing Plant Damage -- Integrated Pest Management and Pesticide Safety -- Plant Propagation -- The Vegetable Garden -- Fruits in the Home Garden -- Lawns -- Indoor Plants -- Woody Landscape Plants -- Pruning -- Herbaceous Landscape Plants -- Landscape Design -- Water Quality and Conservation -- Habitat Gardening for Wildlife -- Virginia Native Plants0 aVirginia Cooperative Extension Gardener Handbook is a guide for all gardeners in Virginia. It covers a variety of topics important for beginning and experienced gardeners, including soil health, native plants, and integrated pest management. This manual provides an understanding of the basics of gardening in Virginia and helps to build a strong foundation of gardening knowledge. Resources for additional reading can be found at the end of each chapter. We encourage readers to take a deeper dive into the topics that interest them and continue their learning journey. Virginia Cooperative Extension (VCE) is the outreach and engagement branch of Virginia Tech and Virginia State University, Virginia’s land-grant universities. Through VCE, Extension agents, specialists, and volunteers work to share knowledge and advance the wellbeing of all Virginians. This handbook serves as the main training text for new Extension Master Gardener volunteers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aJohnson, Devoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1382zAccess online version03679nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100002400161245010500185264004300290264003900333264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505057500546520192001121542001603041546001603057588004003073650003303113650003103146710003903177856007703216OTLid0001383MnU20260406020630.0m     o  d s      cr            230327s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781909890732  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aKelly, Pauleauthor00aConflict, War and Revolutionbthe problem of politics in international political thoughtcPaul Kelly 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLondon, EnglandbLSE Pressc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Conflict, war, revolution and the character of politics -- Thucydides: The naturalness of war -- Augustine: The problem of peace in a violent world -- Machiavelli: Politics and the use of violence -- Hobbes: Solving the problem of conflict -- Locke: Liberalism and the externalisation of conflict -- Rousseau: The threat of the international order -- Clausewitz: The professionalisation of war -- Lenin and Mao: Revolution, violence and war -- Schmitt: The danger of the international liberal order -- Conclusion: Realisms in international political theory0 aViolence and war were ubiquitous features of politics long before the emergence of the modern state system. Since the late 18th century major revolutions across the world have further challenged the idea of the state as a final arbiter of international order. This book discusses ten major thinkers who have questioned and re-shaped how we think about politics, violence and relations between states – Thucydides, Augustine, Machiavelli, Hobbes, Locke, Rousseau, Clausewitz, Lenin and Mao, and Schmitt. Conflict, war and revolution have generally been seen in political thought as problems to be managed by stable domestic political communities. In different ways, all the paradigmatic thinkers here acknowledge them instead as inevitable dimensions of human experience, manifested through different ways of acting politically – while yet offering radically distinct answers about how they can be handled. This book dramatically broadens the canon of political thought by considering perspectives on the international system that challenge its historical inevitability and triumph. Drawing on history, theology, and law as well as philosophy, Paul Kelly introduces thinkers who challenge fundamentally the ways in which we should think about the nature and scope of political institutions and agents. He illuminates many troubling contemporary conflicts with a critical and historical perspective. This book is primarily intended for second year and upwards undergraduate students in general political theory and international theory, and advanced international relations students. Each chapter is also downloadable on its own for use in courses considering only some of the ten theorists covered. Written in an accessible way Conflict, War and Revolution will also interest advanced general readers with interests in the historical thought underpinnings of political ideas and today’s international politics.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1383zAccess online version01854nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003100153245005100184264004300235264006700278264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505070900522520003801231542002301269546001601292588004101308650002701349710003901376856007701415OTLid0001384MnU20260406020551.0m     o  d s      cr            230327s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780986571602  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aMorris, Dave Witteeauthor00aIntroduction to Arithmetic GroupscDave Morris 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bDeductive Pressc[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a-- Part I. Introduction -- What is a Locally Symmetric Space? -- Geometric Meaning of R-rank and Q-rank -- Brief Summary -- Part II. Fundamentals -- Basic Properties of Lattices -- What is an Arithmetic Groups? -- Examples of Arithmetic Groups -- SL (n, Z) is a lattice in SL (n, R) -- Part III. Important Concepts -- Real Rank -- Q-Rank -- Quasi-Isometries -- Unitary Representations -- Amenable Groups -- Kazhdan's Property (T) -- Ergodic Theory -- Part IV. Major Results -- Mostow Rigidity Theorem -- Margulis Superrigidity Theorem -- Normal Subgroups of T -- Arithmetic Subgroups of Classical Groups -- Construction of a Coarse Fundamental Domain -- Ratner's Theorems of Unipotent Flows -- Appendices0 aIntroduction to Arithmetic Groups1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1384zAccess online version02567nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001100153050000800164100002900172245013600201264004300337264004600380264001200426300002200438336002600460337002600486338003600512341002800548490002700576505043700603520077901040542001601819546001601835588004001851650002001891650002601911650002401937650002601961700003001987710003902017856007702056OTLid0001385MnU20260406020551.0m     o  d s      cr            230403s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783631882917  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aPE1408 4aB721 aKarpouzou, Peggyeeditor00aSymbiotic Posthumanist Ecologies in Western Literature, Philosophy and ArtbTowards Theory and PracticecPeggy KarpouzounVolume 11 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLausanne, SwitzerlandbPeter Langc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLooking through the Symbiotic Lens -- "We Are The Earth": Posthumanist Realizations in the Era of the Anthropocene -- Introduction: Towards a Symbiosis of Posthumanism and Environmental Humanities or Paving Narratives for the Symbiocene -- Part I: Framing the Symbiotic Posthumanist Ecologies -- Part II. Symbiotic Posthumanist Ecologies in Literature and Art -- Part III. Symbiotic Posthtumanist Ecologies in Contitental Philosophy0 aThrough the burgeoning fields of Posthumanities and Environmental Humanities, this edition examines the changing conception of human subjectivity, agency, and citizenship as shaped by the dynamic interplays between nature, technology, science, and culture. The proposed ‘symbiotic turn’, (the awareness of the multitude of interactions and mutual interdependencies among humans, non-humans and their environment) aspires to explore the complex recompositions of the “human” in the 21st century. By organizing and promoting interdisciplinary dialogue at multiple levels, both in theory and practice, Symbiotic Posthumanist Ecologies is suggested as a new narrative about the biosphere and technosphere, which is embodied literarily, philosophically, and artistically.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aZampaki, Nikoletaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1385zAccess online version02094nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245007500166264004300241264003800284300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505042100487520046900908542004101377546001601418588004001434650003801474650002601512700003401538700003201572710003901604856007701643OTLid0001386MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            230403suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMassery, Laurie A.eauthor00aConversaciones CorrientesbTemas de Cultura y SociedadcLaurie Massery 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAshland, VirginiabLaurie Massery  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the book: description, design and teaching methodology -- About the authors -- Acknowledgements -- Guidelines for authors and contributors -- I. ¿Cuál es tu historia? -- II. Caminos que se presentan -- III. Controversias y polémicas del siglo XXI -- IV. La diversidad del español y del mundo hispano -- V. Actividades suplementarias -- VI. Pruebas y entrevista final -- VII. Suggestions for activity design0 aThis book is designed to facilitate conversation in Spanish among intermediate and post-intermediate learners of Spanish. The following online textbook allows students to read about, review and discuss interesting, entertaining and relevant topics that will undoubtedly elicit conversation and friendly debate among classmates. Topics including spirituality, family design, life choices, social norms and even history and its impact on Generation Z, are discussed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBordera, María Joséeauthor1 aLarrea-Rubio, Pedroeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1386zAccess online version02776nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100004300163245007700206264004300283264007100326264001200397300002200409336002600431337002600457338003600483341002800519490002700547505025100574520116400825542004101989546002702030588004102057650003202098650003702130700004302167700004002210710003902250856007702289OTLid0001387MnU20260406020551.0m     o  d s      cr            230403s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942701459  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aCelí Párraga, Ricardo Javiereauthor00aProgramación Web del Frontend al BackendcRicardo Javier Celí Párraga 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I -- Fundamentos de Programación Web -- Capítulo II -- Framework CSS -- Capítulo III -- Programación Frontend -- Capítulo IV: -- Programación Backend -- Referencicas Bibliogáficas0 aEn este libro se investigó los fundamentos de la programación web, así como las tecnologías esenciales para lograr crear aplicaciones web, tales como HTML y CSS. Se documentó los conceptos básicos de la programación Frontend utilizando el lenguaje de programación JavaScript, se documentó también los conceptos de la programación Backend utilizando el lenguaje de programación PHP. Este libro tiene como objetivo involucrarse en la programación web iniciando con el estudio del Frontend hasta el Backend con los conceptos básicos, códigos y ejemplos, utilizando tecnologías de programación gratuitas accesibles para cualquier estudiante, para llegar a crear aplicaciones dinámicas con acceso a base de datos. Como resultado se obtuvo que se puede llegar a crear aplicaciones web complejas utilizando tecnologías actuales gratuitas, con un diseño agradable, diseñándolo fácilmente con un Framework CSS como Bootstrap, y utilizando JQuery como una librería para crear rápidamente aplicaciones con JavaScript. Se utilizó además PHP por ser uno de los lenguajes más utilizados para crear aplicaciones conectadas a bases de datos MySQL.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks1 aBoné Andrade, Miguel Fabricioeauthor1 aMora Olivero, Aldo Patricioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1387zAccess online version05094nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003300156245006800189264004300257264004600300264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505187500523520202002398542004104418546001604459588004004475650002604515650002404541700002704565710003904592856007704631OTLid0001388MnU20260406020803.0m     o  d s      cr            230403s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341918  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aIverson, Christophereauthor00aProcessesbWriting Across Academic CareerscChristopher Iverson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Homage to Dr. Marcia Littenberg, former Chair, FSC WID -- Writers on Writing -- Messages from the Nursing Department -- Utilizing a Writing in the Disciplines (WID) Course to Teach Nursing Students about Their Profession -- The Importance of Correct Perspective of the Nursing Profession -- How Nursing Taught Me to Write Scholarly -- My Education in Writing as a Nurse -- Messages from STEM and Health Science Scholars -- Sexual and Asexual Reproductive Stages of Fungi -- Medical Maladies and Existential Healing -- Who Runs Boston? A Descriptive Report of Performance-Related Characteristics of Boston Marathon Qualifiers -- Writing in Science: Creating a Lab Write-Up -- It’s a Marsh Mallow World in the Summer -- Discourse Analysis: The Impact of the Unspoken Word -- Messages from Writers on Writing and Education -- Former Beat Writer Reflects -- The Process of Writing as a Spontaneous Act of Storytelling: From the Classroom to a Published Essay -- “The Generation and Uses of Chaos”: Rhetorical Invention as the Taming of a Wild Garden -- Collaborative Composing: Demystifying the Literature Review and the Writing Process, Together -- On Writing Philosophy -- Learning Outcomes -- Staying Engaged while Staying Home -- The Art of Editorial Conversation -- A Pedagogical Template for Preparing Undergraduate Student Scientific Laboratory Reports and First Submissions to Academic Journals -- Messages from Scholars about History and Culture -- The Messengers of War -- The Beauty of Spirited Writing -- The Art of Being Green: Mimesis and the Environment in Book II of The Faerie Queene -- Una Vida Aislada: The Theme of Isolation in The House on Mango Street -- The Advantages of Quick Writing Bursts -- Another Possible Source of Hawthorne’s Hester Prynne -- A Brief Survey of US Accounting -- Writing in Criminal Justice: The Process0 aProcesses: Writing Across Academic Careers is an edited collection featuring writing from students, faculty, and staff at Farmingdale State College, a State University of New York (SUNY) campus on Long Island. Each contributor reflects on their own writing as well as writing in their fields/disciplines. Namely, they reflect on their writing processes, hence the name of the book. The FSC Writing in the Disciplines committee curated excerpts of published or unpublished work from faculty, students, and administrators across departments and offices. The result is Processes: Writing Across Academic Careers, a collection of writing samples and reflections on the processes that made those pieces of writing possible. This book shows that, while writing looks and functions differently in different disciplines, college communities center on writing. From the college president to the faculty to the students, each member of the community grapples with writing, even in disciplines not considered to be writing-intensive. The text features compositions from nursing, STEM and health sciences, education, and history and culture. The examples span from reflections on the role of writing in one’s academic career, examples of professional writing in the sciences, research papers, conference proposals, to laboratory reports. The examples of published or works-in-progress are accompanied by thoughtful reflections on how the author crafted their work. The collection presents an opportunity for scholars to acknowledge the centrality of writing in their everyday work. Students learning how to write in college and about writing conventions in their specific disciplines will gain an overview of writing they will encounter in their academic career and an appreciation for the multitudes of ways writers work. Perfect for introductory writing courses, and useful modularly for any class that touches on writing or information literacy, this text is a unique, honest, and practical resource for any undergraduate.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aEhrenfeld, Daneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1388zAccess online version01990nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100003300143245004100176264004300217264009700260264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505039200534520034200926542004101268546001601309588004001325650002801365650002501393650003101418700002701449710003901476856007701515OTLid0001389MnU20260406020803.0m     o  d s      cr            230403s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH11 aRosenfeld, Christineeauthor00aHuman GeographycChristine Rosenfeld 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Main Body -- Thinking Geographically -- 2. Geographic Tools & Methods -- 3. Population, Migraiton, & SPatial Demography -- 4. Interpreting Placec & Cultural Landscape -- 5. Nature & Society -- 6. Agricultural & Food Systems -- 7. Economy & Development -- 8. Power, Politices, & Place -- 9. Geography of Religion -- 10. Geography of Language -- 11. Urban & Suburban Spaces0 aWelcome to Human Geography! If you are interested in how humans interact with the environment and how human systems are geographically distributed over space, then you’ve found your place. We hope that find this textbook useful and enjoyable; please dive in by clicking “Contents” to immerse yourself in all-things-human geography.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArea StudiesvTextbooks 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBurtch, Nathaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1389zAccess online version02504nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138100003000145245009300175264004300268264009700311264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505056600585520058701151542004101738546001601779588004001795650002601835650002401861650003101885700002701916700003501943710003901978856007702017OTLid0001390MnU20260406020803.0m     o  d s      cr            230403s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aH11 aBayraktar, Breanaeauthor00aSupporting English Language Learners in First-Year College CompositioncBreana Bayraktar 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aHow Supporting ELLs in FYC is Organized -- I. Learning How to Take Notes -- II. Narrative: I Went From Prison to Professor -- III. Expository: Sweet, Sour & Resentful -- IV. Expository: Why Rituals Are Good -- V. Argument: Why do People Fall for Fake News? -- VI. Argument: Misinformation and Biases Infect Social Media, Both Intentionally and Accidentally -- VII. Identifying Thesis Statements, Claims, and Evidence -- VIII. Understanding Academic Assignments -- IX. Answer Keys for Instructors -- X. Supplemental Grammar Information -- Appendix -- Permissions0 aSupporting ELLs in FYC is organized around five key essays, selected to coordinate with the essay styles commonly taught in first-year/first-semester composition courses. This organization is planned to offer instructors the flexibility to best support the pacing of the composition course. There are 2 expository, 1 narrative, and 2 argument essays. Each module includes one essay, with accompanying activities and supporting materials. Expository: Sweet, Sour & Resentful Expository: Why Rituals Are Good Narrative: Prison to Professor Argument: Fake News Argument: Misinformation1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aGeorge, Elaineeauthor1 aSchetchikova, Nataliyaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1390zAccess online version02137nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135100002800149245007500177264004300252264007000295264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505022800542520069900770542003001469546001601499588004101515650002701556650002601583700002601609710003901635856007701674OTLid0001391MnU20260406020630.0m     o  d s      cr            230409s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aWard, Caitlin Eeauthor03aAn Intuitive, Interactive, Introduction to BiostatisticscCaitlin Ward 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Data Summaries and Presentation -- Study Design -- Introduction to Probability and Simulation -- Probability Distributions -- Sampling Distributions and the Central Limit Theorem -- Introduction to Inference0 a"An Intuitive, Interactive Introduction to Biostatistics" is an introductory statistics textbook oriented towards towards undergraduate students in the health sciences. While covering the breadth of material typically presented in a first semester statistics course, including introductions to probability and distributions, study design, CLT, hypothesis testing, and inference, IIIB distinguishes itself with its focus on cultivating student intuition through the use of guided questions and interactive simulation-based applets. Written in R, this open-source text has been created with customizability in mind, offering instructors maximal flexibility in arranging and modifying the content.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aNolte, Collineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1391zAccess online version03868nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100003600153245005900189264004300248264006200291264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505162800530520097002158542003003128546002703158588004003185650003803225650002603263700003103289700003403320710003903354856007703393OTLid0001392MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            230409s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9781989864654  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aRojas-Primus, Constanzaeauthor03aLa hora del cuento en españolcConstanza Rojas-Primus 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensing Info -- Accessibility statement -- Agradecimientos/Acknowledgements -- Reconocimientot de tierras/Land Acknowledgement -- Prefacio/Preface -- Primera parte -- El perrito quiere jugar -- El perrito quiere jugar -- El patito tonto -- La reina de la granja -- El pollo morado -- Vista panorámica -- Un mono en la granja -- El zorro malo en la granja del Señor Jorge -- El cuento del hombre cerdo -- El cuento del hombre cerdo -- El lobo mentiroso -- El granjero enfermo -- El cumpleaños de la gata -- El poder del “NO” -- El perro inteligente -- La gallina pata -- La gran fiesta -- Part One -- The Puppy Wants to Play -- A Day in the Life of Farmer Gustavo -- The Silly Duckling -- The Queen of the Farm -- The Purple Chicken -- Panoramic View -- A Monkey on the Farm -- The Bad Fox on Mr. Jorge's Farm -- The Tale of the PigMan -- The Farm of Prosperity -- The Lying Wolf -- The Sick Farmer -- The Female Cat's Birthday -- The Power of "NO" -- The Smartt Dog -- The Hen Who Thinks She Is a Duck -- The Big Party -- Segunda parte -- Un día con Mia -- El Sueño de la cabra -- Mi rosa roja -- Penny limpia la clase -- La tucán mandona -- La cerdita voladora -- El lápiz morado -- ¡A mí me encanta ayudar! -- Ema la bailarina -- El manzano -- Hogar dulce hogar -- La chica con la cometa -- Part Two -- A Day with Mia -- The Dream of the Nanny-Goat -- My Red Rose -- Penny Cleans the Classroom -- The Bossy Toucan -- The Flying Gilt -- The Purple Pencil -- I Love to Help! -- Ema the Dancer -- The Apple Tree -- Home Sweet Home -- The Girl with the Kite -- Información biográfica/Biographical information0 aLa hora del cuento en español is a collection of children’s stories in Spanish authored by Kwantlen Polytechnic University (KPU) students and edited by KPU Faculty Constanza Rojas-Primus and KPU alumna Sofía Rodríguez. The first part of this collection is a selection of stories written by KPU Spanish 1100 students between Fall 2017 and Spring 2019 as a result of a collaboration between KPU Spanish and Guildford Public Library Language Literacy Program “Storytime in Spanish”. The second part of this collection is a selection of stories written by KPU Spanish 1101 students between Fall 2020 and Spring 2022 as a result of an interuniversity collaboration in support of UNESCO´s Sustainable Development Goals Agenda 2030. All stories are narrated by Constanza Rojas-Primus and have been translated into English by Sofía Rodríguez. The illustrations in the cover and first part of this collection are artwork of KPU Fine Arts student Cheyenne Pokeda.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aRodríguez, Sofíaeauthor1 aPokeda, Cheyenneeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1392zAccess online version03233nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100004000148245007800188264004300266264007100309264001200380300002200392336002600414337002600440338003600466341002800502490002700530505056600557520134801123542004102471546002702512588004102539650002502580650002302605700004502628700004602673710003902719856007702758OTLid0001393MnU20260406020552.0m     o  d s      cr            230410s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aSánchez Clara Isabel, Ruizeauthor00aFundamentos Teóricos de Química InorgánicacRuiz Sánchez Clara Isabel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos de Química Inorgánica -- Capítulo II: Sistema Internacional de Unidades -- Capítulo III: Estructura de la Materia -- Capítulo IV: Sistem Periódico de los Elementos -- Capítulo V: Enlace Químico -- Capítulo VI: Nomenclatura Química Inorgánica -- Capítulo VII: Reacciones y Ecuaciones Químicas -- Capítulo VIII: Estequiometria De Las Reacciones Químicas -- Capítulo IX: Discontinuidad de la Materia -- Capítulo X: Los Sistemas Dispersos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aConocer los fundamentos teóricos de la química inorgánica es esencial para comprender los conceptos y principios esenciales de esta rama de la química, que se enfoca en el estudio de los elementos y compuestos inorgánicos; proporcionando una base teórica sólida para el estudio de otras áreas de esta ciencia. "Fundamentos Teóricos de Química Inorgánica", además de temas clave de la química inorgánica, como la teoría del enlace de valencia y la química de los elementos, también cubre temas importantes como la estructura de la materia, la teoría cuántica, la estequiometría y la clasificación de las reacciones químicas. Asimismo, se destaca la inclusión de temas relacionados con la medición de las propiedades de la materia, la descripción de los sistemas dispersos, entre otros. El objetivo de este libro es brindar una base sólida de conocimientos en química inorgánica, que permita al lector comprender los principios y fundamentos teóricos que rigen esta disciplina, con un enfoque claro y didáctico. El libro proporciona un excelente recurso tanto para estudiantes como para docentes. Razón por la que, "Fundamentos Teóricos de Química Inorgánica" es una obra esencial para aquellos que deseen profundizar en el conocimiento de la química inorgánica y comprender mejor sus conceptos fundamentales.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aFeijoo Robinson Jasmany, Herreraeauthor1 aSalgado María de Lourdes, Correaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1393zAccess online version03461nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245006300167264004300230264009300273264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002500488490002700513505040700540520188900947542002702836546001602863588004002879650003802919650002602957710003902983856007703022OTLid0001394MnU20260330020615.0m     o  d s      cr            230410s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aZapata, Gabriela C.eauthor00aTrayectos 1bMi vida en la universidadcGabriela Zapatan1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustin, TXbCenter for Open Educational Resources and Language Learning (COERLL)c[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublishing & Licensing Information -- Table of Contents -- About the Project -- Program Features -- Theoretical and Pedagogical Framework -- Module Components and Organization -- Icons -- Introducción -- Módulo introductorio: Interacciones -- Módulo 1: Somos estudiantes universitarios -- Módulo 2: Mi vida fuera de la universidad: Mi familia -- Módulo 3: Mi vida fuera de la universidad: Mi hogra0 aTrayectos is an open curriculum for beginning second language (L2) learners of Spanish. The textbook offers the following features to L2 Spanish students and instructors: Learner-centered fresh, multimodal content, based on Learning by Design, a pedagogy inspired by the Multiliteracies movement (Kalantzis et al., 2005, 2016, 2019; Zapata, 2022). The four modules in Volume I connect the life worlds of learners with the life worlds of diverse Spanish speakers. Instruction incorporating the following features: Multimodal texts (e.g., readings, videos, posters) based on a variety of textual genres that contextualize topics about the lives of real university students; Communicative activities that bind language form to cultural meaning within real-life contexts, and offer students opportunities to discover how to use new Spanish vocabulary and grammar in diverse sociocultural situations; Critical thinking and language awareness tasks that showcase different varieties of Spanish, including those spoken in the United States, and help learners explore the Spanish-speaking world, including local Hispanic/Latinx communities; and Culminating tasks that oblige learners to synthesize their new linguistic and cultural knowledge into a personal, multimodal text. Supplementary digital resources that provide students with opportunities to practice the content learned through self-correcting activities (Práctica individual) and to use Spanish to broaden their knowledge of and critically analyze issues related to diversity, equity, and inclusion in the Spanish-speaking world (Voces de nuestro mundo; available at http://bit.ly/VocesMundo). An open copyright license (Creative Commons license) that gives all users the right to adapt the textbook and to share their new content with others, and digital how-to sections for instructors to answer their students’ unique needs.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1394zAccess online version03325nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245005200166264004300218264009300261264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505028200528520188900810542002702699546001602726588004102742650003802783650002602821710003902847856007702886OTLid0001395MnU20260330020540.0m     o  d s      cr            230410s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aZapata, Gabriela Ceauthor00aTrayectos 2bMás sobre mícGabriela Zapatan2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustin, TXbCenter for Open Educational Resources and Language Learning (COERLL)c[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublishing & Licensing Information -- Table of Contents -- About the Project -- Program Features -- Theoretical and Pedagogical Framework -- Module Components and Organization -- Icons -- Módulo 1: Mi vida diaria -- Módulo 2: Mi estilo de vida -- Módulo 3: Mis celebraciones0 aTrayectos is an open curriculum for beginning second language (L2) learners of Spanish. The textbook offers the following features to L2 Spanish students and instructors: Learner-centered fresh, multimodal content, based on Learning by Design, a pedagogy inspired by the Multiliteracies movement (Kalantzis et al., 2005, 2016, 2019; Zapata, 2022). The four modules in Volume I connect the life worlds of learners with the life worlds of diverse Spanish speakers. Instruction incorporating the following features: Multimodal texts (e.g., readings, videos, posters) based on a variety of textual genres that contextualize topics about the lives of real university students; Communicative activities that bind language form to cultural meaning within real-life contexts, and offer students opportunities to discover how to use new Spanish vocabulary and grammar in diverse sociocultural situations; Critical thinking and language awareness tasks that showcase different varieties of Spanish, including those spoken in the United States, and help learners explore the Spanish-speaking world, including local Hispanic/Latinx communities; and Culminating tasks that oblige learners to synthesize their new linguistic and cultural knowledge into a personal, multimodal text. Supplementary digital resources that provide students with opportunities to practice the content learned through self-correcting activities (Práctica individual) and to use Spanish to broaden their knowledge of and critically analyze issues related to diversity, equity, and inclusion in the Spanish-speaking world (Voces de nuestro mundo; available at http://bit.ly/VocesMundo). An open copyright license (Creative Commons license) that gives all users the right to adapt the textbook and to share their new content with others, and digital how-to sections for instructors to answer their students’ unique needs.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1395zAccess online version03315nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002600163245014100189264004300330264006300373264001200436300002200448336002600470337002600496338003600522341002500558490002700583505034700610520170000957542003002657546001602687588004102703650003202744650003702776710003902813856007702852OTLid0001396MnU20251117021213.0m     o  d s      cr            230410s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789801801238  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aRojas, Sergioeauthor00aPrealgebra via Python ProgrammingbFirst Steps to Perform Large Scale Computational Tasks in the Sciences and EngineeringscSergio Rojas 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSergio Rojasc2024. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Contents -- Getting, installing, and testing the programming python environment -- Whole numbers in Python -- Applications involving Whole Numbers via Python -- Reading and writing (input/output) in Python -- Integers and Rational numbers in Python -- Decimal numbers in Python -- Graphing and data visualization in Python -- Index0 aThis book was written for students and instructors who want to learn how to use a computer for other than the most common uses, such as web browsing, document creation, or paying bills online. This book is for anyone who wants to perform computational tasks that they design. In other words, if you wish to learn how to program a computer, this book is for you. Because prealgebra is a subject that practically everyone is supposed to learn in grade school, it provides a platform to introduce basic computer programming concepts. Consequently, this book should also be of interest to students in middle or high school who want to learn how to program, and who are willing to invest the time and effort in learning a programming language that they could continue using throughout their schooling and in their professional life. Similarly, this book could also be of interest to pre-service and in-service mathematics teachers wishing to have at their disposal a complementary tool to assist in fostering understanding, competency, and interest in mathematics among their students. This book can be integrated with the teachers’ curriculum as way to tackle non-traditional math problems using an inexpensive modern computer language. By the end of the book, a reader will have learned enough to be able to write a preliminary, step-by-step one variable equation solver that can be expanded in the future to use with more complex equations. In other words, by the end of the book, you will be able to write code that programs their machines to solve equations. This code is foundational and readers are ecouraged to learn on their own how to build on it to suit their mathematics learning needs.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1396zAccess online version02200nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001300148100003100161245006200192264004300254264004100297264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505055600515520034401071542004101415546001601456588004101472650002401513650003401537650003401571700002701605700003001632710003901662856007701701OTLid0001397MnU20260406020633.0m     o  d s      cr            230415s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aK3154 4aKF385.A41 aHosmanek, Andrew Jeauthor00aBusiness Law, Ethics, and SustainabilitycAndrew Hosmanek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aIowa City, IAbOpenHawks OERc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part I. Main Body -- 1. Law and Risk Management -- 2. Introduction to Law and Legal Systems -- 3. Courts and the Legal Process -- 4. Alternative Dispute Resolution -- 5. Corporate Social Responsibility and Business Ethics -- 6. Constitutional Law and US Commerce -- 7. Administrative and Environmental Law -- 8. Criminal Law -- 9. Introduction to Tort Law -- 10. Products Liability -- 11. Introduction to Contract Law -- 12. Small Business Organizations -- 13. Agency and Employment Law -- 14. Employment Discrimination Law -- Appendix0 aBusiness Law, Ethics, and Sustainability is a textbook for undergraduate law courses. It covers business law topics such as contracts, business organizations, employment law, and torts, as well as a general survey of American law. Additional topics include Constitutional law, civil rights, environmental law, criminal law, and litigation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aSmith, Brendaneauthor1 aDayton, Michael Jeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1397zAccess online version02649nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245012500161264004300286264007400329300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505060500568520086701173542004102040546001602081588004002097650002002137650002602157710003902183856007702222OTLid0001398MnU20260406020631.0m     o  d s      cr            230424suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aLeon, Mecheleeauthor00aPublic Speaking as Performance SubtitlebPracticing Public Speaking in the Theatre & Performance ClassroomcMechele Leon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Libraries  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublic Speaking as Performance -- I. Prologue -- 1. Thinking about Public Speaking -- 2. Actor Tools for Public Speakers -- III. Context -- 3. Speaking Occassion -- 4. Audience Analysis -- 5. Ways of Delivering Speeches -- 6. From Page to Stage -- III. Speechwriting -- 7. Writing for Listeners -- 8. Purpose and Thesis -- 9. Structure and Organization -- 10. Introductions and Conclusions -- 11. Ethics in Public Speaking -- 12. Language in Speechwriting -- 13. Presentation Aids -- IV. Purposes -- 14. Informative Speeches -- 15. Persuasive Speeches -- 16. Special Ocassion Speeches -- Bibliography0 aPublic Speaking as Performance: Practicing Public Speaking in the Theatre & Performance Classroom is an innovative public speaking textbook written by theatre educators. It combines the essential elements of speechwriting with the tried and true skills that actors learn to communicate a story to an audience. In chapters such as “Actor Tools for Public Speakers” and “From Page to Stage,” the textbook provides students with a creative and accessible approach to delivering speeches. Drawing on the tradition of teaching public speaking in theatre and drama departments—a practice that is still maintained in some institutions—this textbook emphasizes the performative nature of communication. Educators teaching public speaking in theatre and performance departments will find this a textbook particularly suited to the interests of their students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1398zAccess online version02019nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245004100159264004300200264006000243264001200303300002200315336002600337337002600363338003600389341002800425490002700453505040100480520057200881542001601453546001601469588004101485650002701526710003901553856007701592OTLid0001399MnU20260406020631.0m     o  d s      cr            230424s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aKirk, Donnaeauthor00aContemporary MathematicscDonna Kirk 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Sets -- Chapter 2. Logic -- Chapter 3. Real Number Systems and Number Theory -- Chapter 4. Number Representation and Calculation -- Chapter 5. Algebra -- Chapter 6. Money Management -- Chapter 7. Probability -- Chapter 8. Statistics -- Chapter 9. Metric Measurement -- Chapter 10. Geometry -- Chapter 11. Voting and Apportionment -- Chapter 12. Graph Theory -- Chapter 13. Math and Art0 aContemporary Mathematics is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements for a liberal arts mathematics course. This resource provides stand-alone sections with a focus on showing relevance in the features as well as the examples, exercises, and exposition. Contemporary Mathematics integrates technology applications, projects, and highlights a diverse group of contributors to mathematics, statistics, and related fields. Print copies of this book will be available for the fall 2023 semester. You can sign up to be notified when print copies are available.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1399zAccess online version02397nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002600163245009500189264004300284264004300327264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002800492490002700520505076300547520043801310542004101748546001601789588004001805650002701845650002301872710003901895856007701934OTLid0001400MnU20260406020631.0m     o  d s      cr            230424s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780648468189  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aPakay, Julianeauthor00aFoundations of Biomedical SciencebQuantitative Literacy Theory and ProblemscJulian Pakay 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Country -- Publisher Information -- Accessibility Information -- About the Author -- Acknowledgments -- Main Body -- 1. Introduction to quantitative literacy -- 2. Measurement uncertainty and significant figures -- 3. Estimation (sanity checking) -- 4. Biological scale -- 5. Scientific notation and SI units -- 6. Blood composition -- 7. Solutions and concentrations -- 8. Dilutions -- 9. Medical diagnostics – Measurement, uncertainty and distributions -- 10. Medical diagnostics – Sensitivity and specificity -- 11. Correlation, causation and confounding variables -- 12. Growth and decay – Exponents and logarithms -- 13. Further reading and bibliography -- Appendix: Answers to problems -- Versioning History -- Review Statement0 aFoundations of Biomedical Science: Quantitative Literacy Theory and Problems is designed to help students develop the fundamental mathematical and quantitative literacy required to navigate and interpret evidence-based Biomedical data. This will provide students with the skills and confidence to habitually question any quantitative data they come across and to use these skills to make informed judgements regarding their veracity.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1400zAccess online version02003nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003400148245007200182250001600254264004300270264006500313264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002500500490002700525505020600552520057700758542001601335546002301351588004001374650002301414650002301437700002901460710003901489856007701528OTLid0001401MnU20260330020540.0m     o  d s      cr            230424s2026    mnu     o     0   0 dut d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aAkker, Harrie van deneauthor00aFysische Transportverschijnselen - Denken in BalansencHarrie Akker  a6th edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aVoorrwoorrd -- Balansen -- Mechanismen, kentallen, krachten -- Warmtetransport -- Massatransport -- Stromingsleer -- Uitgewerkte tentamenopgaven -- Symbolenlijst -- Voorbeeldenlijst -- Trefwoordenlijst0 aDe transport- en overdrachtsprocessen van warmte, massa en impuls worden naar hun analogie behandeld. De processen worden beschreven met behulp van macro- en microbalansen die in veel gevallen leiden tot differentiaalvergelijkingen. Ook veel aspecten van stromingsleer komen op deze manier aan de orde en zo bereidt het boek ook voor op moderne Computational Fluid Dynamics technieken. Het doel van het boek is ook studenten te trainen in het oplossen van problemen waarbij transportverschijnselen centraal staan. Daartoe bevat het boek bijna 100 uitgewerkte vraagstukken.1 fAttribution  aIn Dutch; Flemish.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aMudde, Robert F.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1401zAccess online version02649nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100002500158245004100183264004300224264005200267300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505030600484520128500790542001602075546001602091588004002107650003602147710003902183856007702222OTLid0001402MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            230424suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693664  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aBaldwin, Amyeauthor00aCollege Success ConcisecAmy Baldwin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrreface -- 1. Transitioning to College -- 2. Managing Your Time and Priorities -- 3. Reading and Note-Taking -- 4. Studying, Memory, and Test Taking -- 5. Building Relationships -- 6. Maintaining Your Mental Health and Managing Stress -- 7. Understanding Financial Literacy -- 8. Planning Your Future0 aOpenStax College Success Concise serves First Year Experience, Student Success, and College Transition courses, and can also be used as a supplementary resource in courses across the curriculum. With the input of hundreds of instructors and academic success experts, the authors carefully prioritized the most critical topics to align to briefer courses. The offering covers material such as college culture, time management, mindset, study skills, test preparation, financial literacy, health, and planning for the future. While much of the material is very similar to the original College Success book, this version was holistically edited and updated. Users will see additions such as a new section on group work and greatly expanded coverage of stress management and wellbeing. While College Success Concise is a self-contained work with a logical flow and narrative, our open (CC-BY) license and multiple formats allow instructors and students to utilize content from the original College Success text, as well. Ancillaries such as the Instructor’s Manual, Test Bank, and Lecture Slides will specifically support College Success Concise. Print copies of this book will be available for the fall 2023 semester. You can sign up to be notified when print copies are available.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1402zAccess online version03327nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245008500177264004300262264008100305300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505172500551520041402276542001602690546001602706588004002722650002302762650002402785700002802809710003902837856007702876OTLid0001403MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            230426suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aAndresen, Kathyeauthor00aLeading Change in Health SystemsbStrategies for RN-BSN StudentscKathy Andresen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooks  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- Introduction -- I. Chapter 1 Navigating Leadership -- 1.1 Leadership Styles -- 1.2 Emotional Intelligence -- 1.3 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 1 References & Attribution -- II. Chapter 2 Leading Effective Solutions in Organizations -- 2.1 Organizational Structure -- 2.2 Organizational Vision, Mission, and Values -- 2.3 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 2 References & Attribution -- III. Chapter 3 Leading Effective Teams -- 3.1 Roles and Responsibilities of Health Care Professionals -- 3.2 Interprofessional Communication -- 3.3 Teams and Teamwork -- 3.4 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 3 References & Attribution -- IV. Chapter 4 Leading Evidence-Informed Decision Making -- 4.1 Evidence-Informed Decision Making -- 4.2 Standards of Quality Care -- 4.3 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 4 References & Attribution -- V. Chapter 5 Leading Effective Change -- 5.1 Theoretical Approach to Change -- 5.2 Conflict Management -- 5.3 Interprofessional Collaborative Practice -- 5.4 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 5 References & Attribution -- VI. Chapter 6 Leading Effective Outcomes -- 6.1 Quality Improvement Process -- 6.2 Quality Improvement Measures -- 6.3 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 6 References & Attribution -- VII. Chapter 7 Leading Person-Centered Health Systems -- 7.1 Person-Centered Care -- 7.2 Health Care Trends and Issues -- 7.3 Spotlight Application -- Chapter 7 References & Attribution -- About the Contributors -- Glossary -- Appendices -- Appendix A Scholarly Writing Resources -- Appendix B Team Stepps Strategies -- Appendix C Communication Strategies -- Appendix D Conflict Management Strategies -- Appendix E Person-Centered Strategies -- Appendix F Teaching Strategies0 aLeading Change in Health Systems: Strategies for RN-BSN Students is designed for practicing nurses pursuing a Bachelor of Science in Nursing. This book is focused on building upon previous knowledge, skills and attitudes Registered Nurses (RNs) related to leadership in healthcare systems. Readers will be able to apply the theoretical knowledge gained from this course in their clinical practice environment.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aSwanson, Charlieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1403zAccess online version04260nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001100140100003200151245012100183250001200304264004300316264005700359264001200416300002200428336002600450337002600476338003600502341002500538490002700563505223100590520067502821542001603496546001603512588004103528650002403569650003603593700003003629700003203659700003103691710003903722856007703761OTLid0001404MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            230426s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP95-95.6 4aPE14081 aAbbott, Jennifer Y.eauthor00aPublic Speaking and Democratic ParticipationbSpeech, Deliberation, and Analysis in the Civic RealmcJennifer Abbott  a2nd ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Public Speaking as the Intersection of Rhetoric and Democracy -- Unproductive Public Discourse and the Politics of Polarization -- Changing Our Public Communication Toward Productive Discourse -- Productive Discourse Is Responsible, Not Necessarily Polite -- The Ethics of Public Speaking -- The Ethics of Listening -- Standpoint Theory and Ethical Rhetoric -- Preparing to Conduct Credible Research -- Finding and Documenting Research Sources -- Knowing Your Audience -- Adapting to Your Audience -- Organizing Your Presentation with a Strong Thesis Statement -- Organizing Your Main Points -- Organizing Your Presentation with an Introduction, Conclusion, and Transitions -- Writing a Preparation Outline -- Using Style to Harness the Power of Language -- Engaging Your Audience Through Delivery and Memory -- Effectively Using Verbal, Nonverbal, and Televisual Delivery -- Preparing a Presentation Outline or Manuscript for an Effective Delivery -- Speaking Informatively Through Deliberative Presentations -- Framing and Organizing Deliberative Presentations -- Helping Communities Make Difficult Decisions Through Deliberative Discussions -- Facilitating Deliberative Discussions -- Persuading an Audience to Modify Their Beliefs, Attitudes, or Courses of Action -- Developing Your Persuasive Speech Through Invention, Framing, and Refutation -- Building Sound Arguments Through Quality Evidence -- Identifying Reasoning Patterns and Fallacies -- Choosing Visual Aids for Civic Engagement -- Designing and Using Visual Aids to Reach an Audience -- Rhetorical Criticism as Civic Engagement -- Rhetorical Criticism: Context, Method, and Democratic Principles -- Public Communication Analysis: Rhetorical Artifacts and Historical Context -- Public Communication Analysis: Description, Interpretation, and Evaluation -- Ideological Criticism: Rhetorical Artifacts and Historical Context -- Ideological Criticism: Description, Interpretation, and Evaluation -- Appendix A: Sample Preparation Outline for an Informative Speech -- Appendix B: Sample Preparation Outline for a Persuasive Speech -- Appendix C: Sample Presentation Outline for an Extemporaneous Delivery -- Glossary of Key Terms -- Contributors0 aThe second edition of Public Speaking and Democratic Participation: Speech, Deliberation, and Analysis in the Civic Realm equips students to effectively participate in and transform their communities through speech. Drawing on the ancient study of rhetoric, the textbook teaches students informative and persuasive speaking skills to develop and empower their public voice. Unique to this textbook, content is also provided on the democratic practices of deliberative discussion facilitation and rhetorical analysis. Together, these abilities help students recognize divisive civic discourse, counter social injustice, and nurture a healthier and more inclusive society.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aSpeech CommunicationvTextbooks1 aMcDorman, Todd F.eauthor1 aTimmerman, David M.eauthor1 aLamberton, L. Jilleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1404zAccess online version02728nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100003700136245007000173264004300243264005700286264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002500465490002700490505077200517520082501289542001602114546001602130588004002146650003302186700003102219710003902250856007702289OTLid0001406MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            230426s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA711 aWilson, Laura Merrifieldeeditor04aThe Exciting Dynamics of State and Local GovernmentcLaura Wilson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Acknowledgements -- Case Study Chapter 1 -- An Introduction to State and Local Government -- Case Study Chapter 2 -- The Impact of Federalism -- Case Study Chapter 3 -- Fifty State Constitutions -- Case Study Chapter 4 -- State Legislatures -- Case Study Chapter 5 -- Governors and the Executive Branch -- Case Study Chapter 6 -- State Judicial Systems -- Case Study Chapter 7 -- Direct Democracy -- Case Study Chapter 8 -- Political Participation -- Case Study Chapter 9 -- Campaigns and Elections -- Case Study Chapter 10 -- Political Parties -- Case Study Chapter 11 -- How Do Media and Interest Groups Influence State Government? -- Case Study Chapter 12 -- Local Government Structure and Organization -- Contributors -- Supplemental Materials0 aThis book provides readers with both a large-scale overview of state government (including its responsibilities and rights established through federalism, political institutions such as the executive, legislative, and judicial branches, and political behavior such as voting, interest groups, and the media) in addition to guiding individual examinations of states through case studies incorporated in each chapter. The text gives readers a greater understanding of the role and responsibilities of state and local government. Utilizing state comparisons and highlights, in content included in both the chapters and the accompanying case studies, readers delve into the intricate world of comparative government while analyzing the differences and similarities, as well as the reasons for them, between and among states.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks1 aSchufeldt, Gregorteeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1406zAccess online version02706nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000900135100003800144245012600182264004300308264005700351264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002500530490002700555505091200582520057401494542001602068546002702084588004002111650003802151650002702189710003902216856007702255OTLid0001407MnU20260406020814.0m     o  d s      cr            230426s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aP1231 aGonzalez, Angela Pacheco eauthor00aCulturas y Civilizaciones de los Países Hispanos (Cultures and Civilizations of the Hispanic Countries)cAngela Gonzalez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNOTA DEL EDITOR -- DEDICACIÓN -- PREFACIO -- INTRODUCCIÓN -- BLOQUE 1: EL ESPAÑOL EN ÁFRICA Y EUROPA -- CAPÍTULO 1 - GUINEA ECUATORIAL -- CAPÍTULO 2 - ESPAÑA -- BLOQUE 2: EL ESPAÑOL EN AMÉRICA DEL NORTE -- CAPÍTULO 3 - HISPANOS EN LOS ESTADOS UNIDOS -- CAPÍTULO 4 - MÉXICO -- BLOQUE 3: EL ESPAÑOL EN AMÉRICA DEL SUR -- CAPÍTULO 5 - PERÚ -- CAPÍTULO 6 - BOLIVIA -- CAPÍTULO 7 - ECUADOR -- CAPÍTULO 8 - CHILE -- CAPÍTULO 9 - ARGENTINA -- CAPÍTULO 10 - PARAGUAY -- CAPÍTULO 11 - URUGUAY -- CAPÍTULO 12 - COLOMBIA -- CAPÍTULO 13 - VENEZUELA -- BLOQUE 4: EL ESPAÑOL EN EL CARIBE HISPANOHABLANTE -- CAPÍTULO 14 - CUBA -- CAPÍTULO 15 - REPÚBLICA DOMINICANA -- BLOQUE 5: EL ESPAÑOL EN AMÉRICA CENTRAL -- CAPÍTULO 16 - GUATEMALA -- CAPÍTULO 17 - EL SALVADOR -- CAPÍTULO 18 - NICARAGUA -- CAPÍTULO 19 - HONDURAS -- CAPÍTULO 20 - COSTA RICA -- CAPÍTULO 21 - PANAMÁ -- COLABORADORAS0 aLa presente obra, Culturas y civilizaciones de los países hispanos, nace con el propósito de ofrecer una visión amplia y profunda de las culturas que conforman el mundo hispanohablante, desde sus raíces históricas, sus civilizaciones y movimientos sociales hasta sus complejidades contemporáneas. Este libro ha sido diseñado con la intención de proporcionar a los estudiantes de estudios hispanos una herramienta esencial para desarrollar un análisis crítico y reflexivo sobre los diversos aspectos de las sociedades que componen este vasto universo cultural.1 fAttribution  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1407zAccess online version02432nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100003200139245009700171264004300268264005700311264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002500490490002700515505054900542520066301091542001601754546001601770588004001786650002301826700002801849700002601877700002701903710003901930856007701969OTLid0001408MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            230426s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.21 aHilliard, Vanessa Keauthor00aComparative Vertebrate and Human AnatomybEcology, Evolution, and FunctioncVanessa Hilliard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: History and Core Concepts -- The Nonvertebrate Chordates -- Vertebrate Origins -- Embryology -- Form and Function -- Integument -- Bone and Cartilage -- The Skull -- Postcranial Axial Skeleton -- Appendicular Skeleton -- Muscle Tissue -- Gross Muscle Anatomy -- Digestive System -- Respiratory System -- Circulatory System -- Urogenital System: Excretion -- Urogenital System: Reproduction -- Central Nervous System -- Peripheral Nervous System -- Nervous System: Sensory Organs -- Endocrine System -- Attributions -- Contributors0 aThis book provides an ecology- and function-oriented approach to understanding the evolution of vertebrate structure. The text has a modular format, such that each module can be used as a stand-alone instructional tool, or grouped together as a comprehensive textbook, making the text versatile for use in courses with diverse structures. The text also includes human-specific modules for each anatomical system, as many small, liberal arts colleges teach comparative and human anatomy in a single course. Detailed, human-specific modules may be added or removed, as needed for individual courses, depending on the scope and learning objectives of the class.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks1 aWhitenack, Lisaeauthor1 aRyerson, Billeauthor1 aCheu, Amyeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1408zAccess online version02784nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001000167245006100177264004300238264005600281264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505036100511520116400872542001602036546001602052588004002068650002402108650002602132650002902158700003202187700002702219710003902246856007702285OTLid0001409MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            230426s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956390476  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aP91.300aLeveraging Data Visualization to Communicate Effectively 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologue -- Communicate Results -- What is Data Visualization? -- Leverage Data Visualizations to Show Trends and Insights -- Interactive Dashboards -- More Than Charts! -- Visualize Data with Purpose -- The Power of Business Intelligence -- Leveraging Data Visualization to Communicate Across Gaps -- Instructor Solution and Resource Guide -- Contributors0 aThis textbook introduces students to the principles of effective data visualization and how to use visualization techniques to effectively communicate information and insights. Additionally, it shares presentation strategies to address communication gaps that could arise if the visualized data does not have the proper context and labeling. Students will learn how to select appropriate chart types and design effective visualizations that clearly convey data patterns and trends, to support data-driven decisions. The textbook also covers best practices for labeling, scaling, and annotating visualizations, as well as techniques for avoiding common pitfalls and biases in data visualization. Through hands-on exercises and projects, students will have the opportunity to practice creating a variety of visualizations using tools such as Excel, Power Business Intelligence (BI) and several problem-solving tools like Ishikawa, SWOT, PEST/LE, decision tree and more. Students will be able to process, analyze and visualize data to evaluate patterns and trends, and learn ways to communicate more effectively regardless of the setting or the type of audience.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aMitchell, Jennie L.eauthor1 aDeckard, Trenteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1409zAccess online version01968nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000800137100002800145245006300173264004300236264005600279264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002500457490002700482505029700509520054300806542001601349546001601365588004001381650003301421650002401454710003901478856007701517OTLid0001410MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            230426s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aBL11 aJones, Karen E.eauthor00aCurriculum Development for Christian MinistrycKaren Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Introduction -- Establishing the Essentials -- Biblical and Theological Foundations -- Considering the Audience -- Content and Structure -- Understanding Teaching and Learning -- Establishing Curricular Outcomes -- Bringing Curriculum to Life -- Evaluation -- Contributors0 aThis text prepares students to develop curriculum for their ministry or Christian organizations. It encompasses both theory and practice, helping students understand the educational and organizational need for curricular planning, the biblical and theological foundations, and insight and skill in implementing a comprehensive curriculum plan. The entire process of development is presented, from vision to evaluation. Each section includes questions or mini-assignments to help students process the content in ways that enhance learning.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1410zAccess online version02300nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245002800137264004300165264005800208264001200266300002200278336002600300337002600326338003600352341002800388490002700416505067900443520047801122542004101600546001601641588004001657650003201697650002801729700002801757700002501785710003901810856007701849OTLid0001411MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            230428s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB61500aAdaptive Apparel Design 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: A Guide for Adaptive Apparel Design and Soft Goods Product Developers -- Chapter 1. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Research -- Chapter 2. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Sketching -- Chapter 3. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Creating a Sample Notebook -- Chapter 4. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Creating a Mood or Inspiration Board -- Chapter 5. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Patternwork -- Chapter 6. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Creating a First Sample -- Chapter 7. The Adaptive Apparel Designer’s Guide to Creating the Completed Ensemble -- About the Authors -- Review Statement0 aThis instructional text and designer resources have been prepared to support those learning about adaptive apparel design. The text is easy for students, scholars, and designers to use, and is organized around the apparel design process: research, sketching, developing a sample notebook, mood or inspiration board, pattern work, first sample, and the completed ensemble. Users can read from beginning to end or jump into resources related to their current phase of design.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEntrepreneurshipvTextbooks 0aArea StudiesvTextbooks1 aMcKinney, Elleneauthor1 aEike, Racheleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1411zAccess online version02100nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002800145100002800173245003400201264004300235264005800278264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505056400513520038201077542003001459546001601489588004001505650003001545650002301575710003901598856007701637OTLid0001413MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230428s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aSuza, Walter P.eeditor1 aLamkey, Kendalleeditor00aCrop ImprovementcWalter Suza 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the PBEA Series -- Basic Principles of Plant Breeding -- Pedigree Naming Systems and Symbols -- Genetic Variation and Germplasm Usage -- Refresher on Population and Quantitative Genetics -- Steps in Cultivar Development -- Breeding Methods -- Participatory Plant Breeding and Participatory Variety Selection -- Common Bean Breeding -- Cowpea Breeding -- Millet Breeding -- Rice Breeding -- Sorghum Breeding -- Sweetpotato Breeding -- Groundnut Breeding -- Cassava Breeding -- Seed Systems and Certification -- Contributors -- Applied Learning Activities0 aThis textbook covers basic principles in the genetic improvement of crop plants. Emphasis is placed on methods of cultivar development in self-pollinating, cross-pollinating, and asexually propagating crops. Relevant examples of crop improvement research in Africa are utilized to cover factors affecting cultivar release, multiplication, and distribution of high-quality seed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1413zAccess online version02465nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001500138050000700153050001300160100002900173245005200202264004300254264010100297264001200398300002200410336002600432337002600458338003600484341002500520490002700545505042500572520060200997542001601599546001601615588004001631650002601671650002401697650005001721650003101771650003601802700002701838700002601865710003901891856007701930OTLid0001414MnU20260406020834.0m     o  d s      cr            230429s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aZ665-718.8 4aH1 4aLB1062.61 aButler, Walter Deauthor00aIntroduction to College ResearchcWalter Butler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle Page -- A Note for Instructors -- Read Online or Download this Book -- Introduction -- The Age of Algorithms -- Disinformation -- Fact-Checking -- Types of Information Sources -- Getting Your Research Started -- Search Strategies -- Finding Materials in the Library -- Using Library Databases -- Searching the Web: Strategies and Considerations -- Ethical and Legal Use of Information -- Citing Sources -- Glossary0 aThis book acknowledges our changing information landscape, covering key concepts in information literacy to support a research process with intention. We start by critically examining the online environment many of us already engage with every day, looking at algorithms, the attention economy, information disorder and cynicism, information hygiene, and fact-checking. We then move into an exploration of information source types, meaningful research topics, keyword choices, effective search strategies, library resources, Web search considerations, the ethical use of information, and citation.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aSargent, Alohaeauthor1 aSmith, Kelseyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1414zAccess online version02076nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002500149245004200174264004300216264005000259300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002800419490002700447505062300474520028901097542003001386546001601416588004001432650002301472650002301495700002801518700002801546710003901574856007701613OTLid0001416MnU20260406020631.0m     o  d s      cr            230502suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aSuza, Waltereeditor00aMolecular Plant BreedingcWalter Suza 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Press  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the PBEA Series -- Molecular Plant Breeding Concepts -- Markers and Sequencing -- Modeling and Data Simulation -- Data Management and Quality Control -- Cluster Analysis, Association, and QTL Mapping -- Marker Assisted Backcrossing -- Genome Construction -- Marker Based Management of Plant Genetic Resources -- Biotechnological Tools for Broadening Genetic Variation -- Modern Tools for Line Development and Predicting Hybrid Performance -- Genomic Tools for Variety Registration and Protection -- Introduction to Bioinformatics -- Comparative Mapping and Genomics -- Applied Learning Activities -- Contributors0 aThis book focuses on genomics and plant biotechnology approaches used in plant breeding, the analysis of genomic data, and their application in quality control measures. The application of alternative genomic technologies to enhance conventional breeding strategies is also presented.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aLamkey, Kendalleeditor1 aBeavis, Williameauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1416zAccess online version02539nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001000144100002700154245008500181264004300266264005000309300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505107500524520024601599542004101845546001601886588004101902650003301943650002501976650003602001710003902037856007702076OTLid0001417MnU20260406020631.0m     o  d s      cr            230502suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLC9801 aDyches, Jeanneeauthor00aSupporting Secondary Teachers’ Critical Disciplinary LiteraciescJeanne Dyches 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Press  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Residential Segregation and Parable of the Polygons -- What Can We Do About Climate Change? A Socratic Seminar in Biology -- Debating through the Lens of Interpretive Communication -- Examining Poverty in Latin American Countries: A Poster Carousel -- Using Cornell Notes to Guide Students Watching “Music” Episode of Explained -- Using RAFT to Analyze Pascal’s “Claim-to-fame” -- Gender Inequality, Fishbowl Discussion -- Annotating Informational Text and Literary Non-Fiction in ELA -- The Great Depression: Jigsaw Method -- Addressing The Effects of Minimum Wage Through Collaborative Conversation -- Using the Fishbowl Strategy to Discuss Book Banning -- Langston Hughes and Walt Whitman; Venn Diagrams -- Analyzing “War Girls” using a TPCASTT Guided Close Reading -- Finding Imagery in “Still I Rise” by Maya Angelou with The Response Heuristic -- Collaborative Discussion About How Viruses are Spread -- Using Read-Write-Pair-Share to Discuss Housing Insecurity -- Brave New World: Using the Character Anatomy in Critical Literacy0 aCo-created with students in the course EDUC 395: Teaching Disciplinary Literacy and supported by CDL experts, this textbook offers accessible, research-based, multidisciplinary CDL strategies ready for implementation in secondary classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1417zAccess online version03134nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245004900159264004300208264005200251300002200303336002600325337002600351338003600377341002500413490002700438505115500465520085001620542001602470546001602486588004002502650002302542650002602565700002602591700002702617710003902644856007702683OTLid0001418MnU20260406020820.0m     o  d s      cr            230502suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aKordas, Anneauthor00aWorld HistorycAnn KordasnVolume 1: to 1500 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStax  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1 Early Human Societies -- Chapter 1. Understanding the Past -- Chapter 2. Early Humans -- Chapter 3. Early Civilizations and Urban Societies -- Chapter 4. The Near East -- Chapter 5. Asia in Ancient Times -- Unit 2. States and Empires, 1000 BCE-500 CE -- Chapter 6. Mediterranean Peoples -- Chapter 7. Experiencing the Roman Empire -- Chapter 8. The Americas in Ancient Times -- Chapter 9. Africa in Ancient Times -- Unit 3. An Age of Religion, 500-1200 CE -- Chapter 10. Empires of Faith -- Chapter 11. The Rise of Islam and the Caliphates -- Chapter 12. India, the Indian Ocean Basin, and East Asia -- Chapter 13. The Post-Roman West and the Crusading Movement -- Unit 4. A Global MIddle Ages, 1200-1500 CE -- Chapter 14. Pax Mongolica: The Steppe Empire of the Mongols -- Chapter 15. States and Societies in Sub-Saharan Africa -- Chapter 16. Climate Change and Plague in the Fourteenth Century -- Chapter 17. The Ottomans, the Mamluks, and the Ming -- Appendix A. Glossary -- Appendix B. Worl History, Volume 1, to 1500: Maps and Timelines -- Appendix C. World Maps -- Appendix D. Recommended Resources for the Study of Worl History -- Index0 aWorld History, Volume 1: to 1500 is designed to meet the scope and sequence of a world history course to 1500 offered at both two-year and four-year institutions. Suitable for both majors and non majors World History, Volume 1: to 1500 introduces students to a global perspective of history couched in an engaging narrative. Concepts and assessments help students think critically about the issues they encounter so they can broaden their perspective of global history. A special effort has been made to introduce and juxtapose people’s experiences of history for a rich and nuanced discussion. Primary source material represents the cultures being discussed from a firsthand perspective whenever possible. World History, Volume 1: to 1500 also includes the work of diverse and underrepresented scholars to ensure a full range of perspectives.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aLynch, Ryan Jeauthor1 aNelson, Brookeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1418zAccess online version01825nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002800151245010400179264004300283264003000326264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505021900533520040200752542002701154546001601181588004001197650002601237650002401263650003601287710003901323856007701362OTLid0001419MnU20260406020631.0m     o  d s      cr            230502s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aLynne, Patriciaeauthor00aReading and Writing Successfully in CollegebA Guide for Students [Revised Edition]cPatricia Lynne 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 - Successful College Reading -- Chapter 2 - Doing Intellectual Work -- Chapter 3 - Writing Process in College -- Chapter 4 - Writing with Sources -- Glossary -- Works Cited -- Grant Information0 aThis textbook provides students with guidelines for understanding writing tasks as intellectual work using Bloom’s Taxonomy and for treating the writing process as a set of variable activities that move along a trajectory from idea or assignment to a finished product. The book also includes chapters on strengthening reading strategies and on finding, evaluating, and using sources effectively.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1419zAccess online version02924nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001200139050001000151050001000161100002400171245008700195264004300282264009700325264001200422300002200434336002600456337002600482338003600508341002800544490002700572505126000599520015201859542001602011546001602027588004002043650002302083650002302106650002402129650002302153700003002176700002802206700003402234700002802268700003002296710003902326856007702365OTLid0001421MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230508s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQM1-695 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aMarz, Aylineauthor00aAnatomy and Physiology Laboratory Manual for Nursing and Allied HealthcAylin Marz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: An Introduction to the Human Body -- Chapter 2: The Chemical Level of Organization -- Chapter 3: The Cellular Level of Organization -- Chapter 4: The Tissue Level of Organization -- Chapter 5: The Integumentary System -- Chapter 6: Bone Tissue and the Skeletal System -- Chapter 7: Axial Skeleton -- Chapter 8: The Appendicular Skeleton -- Chapter 9: Joints -- Chapter 10: Muscle Tissue -- Chapter 11: The Muscular System -- Chapter 12: The Nervous System and Nervous Tissue -- Chapter 13: Anatomy of the Nervous System -- Chapter 14: The Somatic Nervous System -- Chapter 15: The Autonomic Nervous System -- Chapter 16: The Neurological Exam -- Chapter 17: The Endocrine System -- Chapter 18: The Cardiovascular System: Blood -- Chapter 19: The Cardiovascular System: The Heart -- Chapter 20: The Cardiovascular System: Blood Vessels and Circulation -- Chapter 21: The Lymphatic and Immune System -- Chapter 22: The Respiratory System -- Chapter 23: The Digestive System -- Chapter 24: Metabolism and Nutrition -- Chapter 25: The Urinary System -- Chapter 26: Fluid, Electrolyte and Acid-Base Balance -- Chapter 27: The Reproductive System -- Chapter 28: Development and Inheritance -- Tutorial on Drawing Anatomical Structures0 aAuthors’ Institution: Norfolk State University, Norfolk, VA, USA Funding: Virtual Library of Virginia (VIVA) Course Redesign Grant, 2020 – 20231 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKamatchi, Ganesaneauthor1 aD'Silva, Josepheauthor1 aPrabhakaran, Krishnaneauthor1 aChandra, Rajeeveauthor1 aIsekeije, Solomoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1421zAccess online version03261nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100004700154245013600201264004300337264007100380264001200451300002200463336002600485337002600511338003600537341002800573490002700601505035900628520155100987542004102538546002702579588004102606650003202647700004102679700003902720710003902759856007702798OTLid0001422MnU20260406020553.0m     o  d s      cr            230508s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942711915  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSolano-Gutiérrez, Gerardo Alfredoeauthor00aEvolución del Computador desde el ABC de su Arquitectura hasta la Construcción de una PC GamercGerardo Alfredo Solano-Gutiérrez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Arquitectura y Organización -- Capítulo II: Generaciones de las computadoras -- Capítulo III: Memorias -- Capítulo IV: Herramientas para el mantenimiento y reparación del computador -- Capítulo V: El arte de construir tu propia PC gamer: Una guía paso a paso0 aEl libro es una obra completa que aborda distintos aspectos importantes de la informática, desde la arquitectura y organización de la computadora hasta la construcción de una PC gamer. En el primer capítulo se explica de manera detallada la arquitectura y organización de los ordenadores, mientras que en el segundo se analizan las diferentes generaciones de ordenadores y su evolución a lo largo del tiempo, llegando hasta la inteligencia artificial. El tercer capítulo está dedicado a la memoria de la computadora y su funcionamiento, mientras que en el cuarto se explican las herramientas necesarias para el mantenimiento y la reparación de la PC, desde la clonación de discos duros hasta la construcción de dispositivos multi boot. Por último, el quinto capítulo se enfoca en las PC gamer's y ofrece una guía completa para los entusiastas de los juegos, brindando un procedimiento paso a paso para construir su propio PC gamer. Este libro es valioso tanto para estudiantes de sistemas como para profesionales de la computación, ya que cubre temas fundamentales como la arquitectura y organización de computadoras, historia y evolución, el diseño de computadoras, la memoria, las herramientas de mantenimiento y reparación de computadoras, y cómo armar una computadora de mayor rendimiento para usuarios jugadores. En resumen, esta obra ofrece información útil y completa sobre la evolución de la computadora, desde sus inicios hasta la actualidad, y brinda herramientas y consejos prácticos para su uso y mantenimiento1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aNúñez-Freire, Luis Alfonsoeauthor1 aMendoza-Loor, José Javiereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1422zAccess online version02819nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100004200136245010100178264004300279264007100322264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505028600570520119300856542004102049546002702090588004102117650003202158700004302190700004002233700004402273710003902317856007702356OTLid0001423MnU20260406020553.0m     o  d s      cr            230508s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCeli-Párraga, Ricardo Javiereauthor00aIngeniería del Software IbRequerimientos y Modelado del SoftwarecRicardo Javier Celi-Párraga 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Introducción a la Ingeniería del Software -- Capítulo II: El Proceso del Software -- Capítulo III: Ingeniería de Requerimientos -- Capítulo IV: Modelado del Software -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Capítulo I:0 aEn este libro se investigó los fundamentos de la ingeniería del software y se documentó los conceptos básicos del software y los procesos para la creación de software, se documentó también cómo llevar a cabo un análisis de requerimientos de software, cuáles son los tipos de requerimientos, cómo obtenerlos, documentarlos, validarlos y modelarlos mediante diferentes tipos de diagramas. Este libro tiene como objetivo aplicar los conceptos y teorías de administración para la creación de software de calidad mediante las diferentes metodologías, técnicas y herramientas de la ingeniería del software para que el profesional de sistemas informáticos sea capaz de gestionar con eficiencia y en ambientes éticos y de responsabilidad proyectos inmersos en la creación software. Se investigó varios libros llegando a realizar un compendio de las partes más importantes y se llegó a la conclusión de que la ingeniería del software proporciona varias metodologías para el desarrollo del software y varios modelos para el diseño de software que el profesional puede utilizar dependiendo las diferentes necesidades o las diferentes situaciones o proyectos a desarrollar.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aBoné-Andrade, Miguel Fabricioeauthor1 aMora-Olivero, Aldo Patricioeauthor1 aSarmiento-Saavedra, Juan Carloseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1423zAccess online version02823nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100004200136245010400178264004300282264007100325264001200396300002200408336002600430337002600456338003600482341002800518490002700546505033700573520114300910542004102053546002702094588004102121650003202162700004302194700004002237700004402277710003902321856007702360OTLid0001424MnU20260406020554.0m     o  d s      cr            230508s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aCeli-Párraga, Ricardo Javiereauthor00aIngeniería del Software IIbImplementación, Pruebas y MantenimientocRicardo Javier Celi-Párraga 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Implementación del Software -- Capítulo II: Pruebas y Validación del Software -- Capítulo III: Evolución, Confiabilidad y Seguridad Del Software -- Capítulo IV: Metodologías de Desarrollo de Aplicaciones Web Seguras -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Capítulo I:0 aEn este libro se investigó los procesos de implementación, pruebas y mantenimiento de la ingeniería del software y se documentó los diferentes tipos de pruebas de software para validar el correcto funcionamiento de un software, se documentó también los procesos de evolución de un software para lograr un correcto mantenimiento del software. Este libro tiene como objetivo aplicar los conceptos y teorías de validación del software con el fin de crear de software de calidad, confiable, que se encuentre disponible, protegido y seguro, para que el profesional de sistemas informáticos sea capaz de gestionar con eficiencia y en ambientes éticos y de responsabilidad proyectos inmersos en la creación software. Se investigó varios libros llegando a realizar un compendio de las partes más importantes y se llegó a la conclusión de que la ingeniería del software proporciona varias técnicas para la evaluación y validación del software y varias metodologías para el desarrollo de software confiable y seguro que el profesional puede utilizar dependiendo las diferentes necesidades, situaciones o proyectos a desarrollar1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aBoné-Andrade, Miguel Fabricioeauthor1 aMora-Olivero, Aldo Patricioeauthor1 aSarmiento-Saavedra, Juan Carloseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1424zAccess online version02527nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100004300148245008600191264004300277264007100320264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002800513490002700541505037200568520082800940542004101768546002701809588004101836650002401877650002301901700004501924700004401969710003902013856007702052OTLid0001425MnU20260406020554.0m     o  d s      cr            230508s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG1731 aLópez-Pérez, Patricio Javiereauthor00aNIIF FULLbUna guía práctica para su aplicacióncPatricio Javier López-Pérez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Cápitulo I: Marco Conceptual -- Cápitulo II: Inventario -- Cápitulo III: Propiedad Planta y Equipo -- Cápitulo IV: Deterioro del Valor de los Activos -- Cápitulo V: Efectos de las Variaciones en las Tasas de Cambio de la Moneda Extranjera -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl presente manual de NIIF proporciona una visión completa y detallada de los principales aspectos que deben requerir en la aplicación de las normas internacionales de información financiera. En primer lugar, se aborda el marco conceptual de las NIIF y su importancia en la elaboración de estados financieros de alta calidad y comprensibilidad. A continuación, se profundizará en la contabilización de inventarios, propiedad, planta y equipo, y el deterioro de activos, presentando los principales criterios para la medición, reconocimiento y presentación de dichas partidas. Por último, se explica de manera clara y precisa el proceso de conversión de monedas en los estados financieros, detallando los métodos y tasas de cambio a utilizar en la contabilización de transacciones y saldos en moneda extranjera.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aQuiñónez-Cabeza, Betty Maribeleauthor1 aPreciado-Ramírez, Joffre Dannyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1425zAccess online version02517nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001100139050001000150100002600160245005300186264004300239264004300282264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505020100502520100500703542004101708546001601749588004001765650002301805650002501828650002301853700003601876700002701912700002801939710003901967856007702006OTLid0001426MnU20260406020804.0m     o  d s      cr            230518s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aPakay, Julianeauthor00aThreshold Concepts in BiochemistrycJulian Pakay 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Studying biology at the molecular level -- Chapter 2: How to study biology at the molecular level -- Chapter 3: The universality of life -- Chapter 4: Information flow through organisms0 aBiochemistry (and Molecular Biology) represent one of the fastest-growing fields of scientific research and technical innovation and the resulting biotechnology is increasingly applied to other fields of study. So, an understanding of Biochemistry is increasingly important for students in all biological disciplines. However, at the same time, the content is inherently complex, highly abstract, and often deeply rooted in the pure sciences – mathematics, chemistry, and physics. This makes it difficult to both learn and to teach. This book is designed as a succinct and focused resource, specifically aimed to help students grasp key threshold concepts in Biochemistry. Due to their troublesome nature, understanding threshold concepts is a cognitively demanding task. By using a series of thematically linked case studies that accompany theory, the cognitive load will be reduced. This will free up students to focus on learning concepts rather than distracting them with unnecessary specifics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aDuivenvoorden, Hendrikaeauthor1 aShafee, Thomaseauthor1 aClarke, Kaitlineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1426zAccess online version02543nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001400109040001800123050001200141050001000153100004800163245008500211264004300296264003800339264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505063600554520073201190542001601922546001601938588004001954650002301994650002402017710003902041856007702080OTLid0001427MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230518s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a173491419  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aOpen RN, Open Resources for Nursingeauthor00aNursing Management and Professional ConceptscOpen Resources for Nursing Open RN 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Chapter 1 - Overview of Management and Professional Issues -- Part II. Chapter 2 - Prioritization -- Part III. Chapter 3 - Delegation and Supervision -- Part IV. Chapter 4 - Leadership and Management -- Part V. Chapter 5 - Legal Implications -- Part VI. Chapter 6 - Ethical Practice -- Part VII. Chapter 7 - Collaboration Within the Interprofessional Team -- Part VIII. Chapter 8 - Health Care Economics -- Part IX. Chapter 9 - Quality and Evidence-Based Practice -- Part X. Chapter 10 - Advocacy -- Part XI. Chapter 11 - Preparation for the RN Role -- Part XII. Chapter 12 - Burnout and Self-Care -- Part XIII. Answer Keys0 aThis book introduces concepts related to nursing leadership and management, prioritization strategies, delegation and supervision, legal implications of nursing practice, ethical nursing practice, collaboration within the interprofessional team, health care economics, quality and evidencebased practice, advocacy, preparation for the RN role, and the avoidance of burnout with self-care. Several online, interactive learning activities are included in each chapter that encourage application of content to patientcare situations. Additionally, the Appendix includes a “suite of patients” with suggested prompts for classroom discussion to assist students in applying concepts from the book to real patient-care situations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1427zAccess online version02306nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100004800149245006400197264004300261264003800304264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505037100519520080700890542001601697546001601713588004001729650002301769650002401792710003901816856007701855OTLid0001428MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230518s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aOpen RN, Open Resources for Nursingeauthor00aNursing Advanced SkillscOpen Resources for Nursing Open RN 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Chapter 1 Initiate IV Therapy -- Part II. Chapter 2 Administer IV Push Medications -- Part III. Chapter 3 Administer Blood Products -- Part IV. Chapter 4 Manage Central Lines -- Part V. Chapter 5 Insert Nasogastric and Feeding Tubes -- Part VI. Chapter 6 Manage Chest Tube Drainage Systems -- Part VII. Chapter 7 Interpret Basic ECG -- Part VIII. Answer Keys0 aThis textbook is an open educational resource with CC-BY licensing developed specifically for prelicensure nursing students. The e-book and downloadable versions are free. Affordable print versions are published in collaboration with XanEdu and available on Amazon and in college bookstores. Content is based on the Wisconsin Technical College System (WTCS) statewide nursing curriculum for the Nursing Advanced Skills course (543-112) and the NCLEX-RN Test Plan. 1 Content includes advanced skills for registered nurses, such as intravenous infusion, blood product administration, management of central lines and chest tube systems, basic electrocardiogram interpretation, and nasogastric/feeding tube insertion, and builds on basic nursing skills discussed in the Open RN Nursing Skills OER textbook.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1428zAccess online version02713nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002900135245004700164250000800211264004300219264005700262264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505106100496520051901557542004102076546001602117588004102133650002302174650002602197710003902223856007702262OTLid0001430MnU20260406020554.0m     o  d s      cr            230518s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aFlynn, Robert J.eauthor02aA History of the Middle EastcRobert Flynn  a1.1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbPortland Community Collegec[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter One: Introduction -- Chapter Two: Muhammad and Islam, c. 570-632 -- Chapter Three: The Arab Conquest and the Establishment of the Caliphate, 632-809 -- Chapter Four: Religious, Social, and Intellectual Changes, 632-1258 -- Chapter Five: The Decline of the Arab Empire, 809-1300 -- Chapter Six: The Gunpowder Empires, 1300-1566 -- Chapter Seven: Ottoman Crisis and Adaptation, 1566-1768 -- Chapter Eight: Western Intrusions, Eastern Responses, 1768-1878 -- Chapter Nine: The Twilight of the Ottoman Empire, 1878-1916 -- Chapter Ten: “A Peace to End All Peace", 1916-1922 -- Chapter Eleven: The Independent States, 1923-1948 -- Chapter Twelve: The Middle East Under European Control, 1923-1948 -- Chapter Thirteen, The Establishment of Israel, 1918-1948 -- Chapter Fourteen: The Age of Nasser, 1949-1967 -- Chapter Fifteen: Arabia, Turkey, and Iran, 1949-1979 -- Chapter Sixteen: The Middle East After Nasser, 1967-1979 -- Chapter Seventeen: Transition and Stalemate, 1980-1990 -- Chapter Eighteen: The Gulf War and Its Legacy, 1990-20010 aThe History of the Middle East is a single volume account of the region’s development from the time of Muhammad to the eve of the 2001 al-Qaeda attacks. It isintended to serve as the main textbook for a single semester or term class and is designed to be accessible to students who do not possess prior knowledge of the region or its history. It offers a relatively concise narrative of the region’s historical development that seeks to avoid oversimplification on the one hand and overcomplexity on the other.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1430zAccess online version02219nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001500144050000700159245005200166264004300218264008200261264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505063300520520023901153542003001392546001601422588004001438650003301478650002501511650005001536650003101586700002501617700002701642710003901669856007701708OTLid0001433MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230529s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH100aIntroduction to Library and Information Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTwin Falls, IdahobCollege of Southern Idaho Pressbooks Network (CSI)c[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Library History and Essential Functions -- Data, Information, and Knowledge -- History of Libraries -- Library Services -- Acquisitions -- Collection Development -- Classficiation and Cataloging -- Facilities and Funding -- Circulation -- Reference Librarianship -- Preservation -- Part II. Improvements and Adapatations in the Modern World -- Intellectual Freedom -- Digitial Initiatives and Library 2.0 -- Representation in the Library -- Copyright -- Part III. Supporting the Public to Obtain Public Support -- Patron Services -- Reader's Advisory -- The Modern Library Experience -- Part IV. Conclusion -- Conclusion0 aThis book explores the history, present, and future of library science, both in theory and in practice. It examines the place of the librarian as arbiter of information access in a constantly-changing and modernizing global community.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aHepler, Reedeauthor1 aHoralek, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1433zAccess online version03425nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245005600149264004300205264007100248264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505034400496520173200840542004102572546002702613588004102640650002302681650002302704700004402727700005102771700004502822700003202867710003902899856007702938OTLid0001434MnU20260330020542.0m     o  d s      cr            230529s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aBiotecnología Ambiental, Aplicaciones y Tendencias 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Agradecimientos. -- Indice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Guía de Biotecnología Ambiental -- Capítulo II: Análisis bibliométrico como una Herramienta en la Biotecnología Ambiental -- Capítulo III: Práticas de laboratorio y cuestionario sobre biotecnología ambiental -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Anexos0 aLa Biotecnología Ambiental emplea el uso de organismos para la prevención, monitoreo y remediación de los ecosistemas, al mismo tiempo permite la generación de bioproductos y energía limpia. El libro consistió en tres capítulos, en el primero se establece los fundamentos de la Biotecnología Ambiental y sus aplicaciones en entornos terrestre, acuático y aéreo; además, se presentan herramientas aplicadas como los biosensores en el monitoreo ambiental, la fitorremediación en varios contextos de América Latina y el fortalecimiento de la agricultura sustentable. En el segundo capítulo se describe la importancia de un estudio bibliométrico y el enfoque para las diversas investigaciones, se detalla un manual de uso, que permite su replicabilidad en otros contextos. Además de presentar un caso de estudio aplicado al tema central de este libro, que sistematiza los temas más estudiados, las tendencias, revistas y países con mayores contribuciones. En el tercer capítulo se presentan varias prácticas de laboratorio y una sección de preguntas, que pueden ser empleadas en otras instituciones educativas o de manera autónoma. En conclusión, los capítulos son complementarios entre sí, facilitando la comprensión e interés del lector. El área de mayor relevancia corresponde a la biorremediación en suelos contaminados por hidrocarburos y metales pesados, los grupos más frecuentes en la revisión fueron hongos, cianobacterias y organismos genéticamente modificados. Finalmente, existe una oportunidad del uso y la potencial combinación de las técnicas basadas en metagenómica, ADN ambiental, inteligencia artificial para el desarrollo de las nuevas tendencias de la Biotecnología Ambiental1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aChicaiza-Ortiz, Cristhian Davideauthor1 aRivadeneira-Arias, Virginia del Carmeneauthor1 aHerrera-Feijoo, Robinson Jasmanyeauthor1 aAndrade, Jean Carloeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1434zAccess online version02956nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245005600143250001600199264004300215264010100258264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002500481490002700506505066500533520100101198542003002199546001602229588004102245650003302286650003102319700002802350700002502378700002702403710003902430856007702469OTLid0001435MnU20260406020554.0m     o  d s      cr            230602s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH100aIntroduction to Comparative Government and Politics  a1st edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 – Why Study Comparative Politics -- Chapter 2 – How to Study Comparative Politics – Using Comparative Methods -- Chapter 3 – States and Regimes -- Chapter 4 – Democracies and Democratization -- Chapter 5 – Non-democracies and Democratic Backsliding -- Chapter 6 – Political Identity – Culture, Race, Ethnicity, and Gender -- Chapter 7 – Political Identity – Nationalism, Religion, and Class -- Chapter 8 – Political Economy -- Chapter 9 – Collective Action and Social Movements -- Chapter 10 – Comparative Public Opinion -- Chapter 11 – Political Violence -- Chapter 12 – Challenges and Questions in Comparative Politics0 aIntroduction to Comparative Government and Politics, 1st edition, is an Open Education Resource Textbook that surveys contemporary comparative politics. The textbook is organized thematically and includes chapters that cover a wide range of topics in comparative politics: how and what comparativists study; methods in comparative politics; states and regimes; democracies and democratization; non-democracies and democratic backsliding, political identity, including culture, race and ethnicity, gender, nationalism, religion, and class; political economy; collective action and social movements; comparative public opinion; political violence; and globalization and fragmentation. Each chapter accompanied by a case study or a comparative study, one of the main methodological tools used in comparative politics. By contextualizing the concepts, we hope to help students learn the comparative method, which to this day remains one of the most important methodological tools for all researchers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBozonelos, Dinoeauthor1 aWendt, Juliaeauthor1 aLee, Charlotteeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1435zAccess online version03248nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002500139245009100164264004300255264005500298264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505178900530520030702319542004102626546001602667588004002683650002602723650002102749710003902770856007702809OTLid0001436MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230602s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aWayte, Larryeauthor00aPay for PlaybHow the Music Industry Works, Where the Money Goes, and WhycLarry Wayte 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEugene, ORbUniversity of Oregon Librariesc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. History and Structure of the Music Industry -- Church and Court Patronage -- Public Concerts and Celebrity -- Music Printing -- Tin Pan Alley and Music Publishing -- How does the Publishing Industry Work? -- The First Format War: Cylinder vs. Disk -- Ralph Peer and Country Music -- Radio -- The Great Depression and the 1930s -- The Development of National Record Charts -- World War II and the ASCAP and Musicians Strikes -- Post-War Boom, Independent Labels, and Rock and Roll -- The Transformative 1960s -- The 1970s and Genre Stratification -- The 1980s and 90s: Consolidation and MTV Pop Superstars -- Napster, the iPod, and Streaming: The Record Industry in the New Millennium -- The Record Industry Today -- The Record Contract -- The Live Music Industry -- Music in Social Media -- Independent Music Production and Distribution -- Who Does What in the Record Industry? -- Part II. Copright and Music -- Copyright Theory and History -- Additional Music Copyright Terms and Concepts You Should Know -- The Music Royalty System Today -- Mechanical Rights -- Performance Rights -- Sound Recordings -- Synch Rights for Video and Music -- Dramatic Musical Works -- Copyright Criticism and Alternatives -- Part III. Copyright Infringement of Musical Works -- How a Musical Work Copyright Infringement Case Works -- How much copying is too much? -- Fair Use -- Damages -- Landmark Musical Work Copyright Infringement Cases -- Part IV. Copyright Infringement of Sound Recordings -- Consumer Sound and Video Copying Devices — The Cassette and Home Video Recorder (Sony vs. Betamax) -- Contributory and Vicarious Liability for Peer-to-Peer File Sharing Services: The Napster and Grokster cases -- The Digital Millennium Copyright Act -- Sampling and Sound Recording Copyrights0 aThe history of music is closely linked to the history of copyright law. This book explores how the law shaped music and the music industry. From church and court patronage in pre-19th Century Europe, to the effects of social media on music, this book explores the abiding influence of the law on music.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1436zAccess online version02238nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001100148245007600159264004300235264004000278264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002500440490002700465505023200492520070400724542004101428546001601469588004001485650002401525650004201549650002501591700002901616700002601645700002901671710003901700856007701739OTLid0001437MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230609s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aTA145 4aHF541500aCrawford AutomationbA Guided Application of Structured Problem Solving 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Crawford Case -- Theory: Practical Problem-Solving Approach -- Activity: Apply the Practical Problem-Solving Approach to the Case Appendices -- Alternative Test for Complex Images and Figures0 aThis is a multimedia-enabled case in which students will be guided, by an industry expert, to apply structured problem-solving that addresses a typical supply chain problem, missing parts. What first appears as the issue may be a symptom of a root cause(s). The case utilizes videos, data files for analytics, audio recording, and videogame-style exercises to find the missing box of parts. The case is a collaboration between the Conestoga Centre for Supply Chain Innovation and ATS Automation and utilizes the ATS Business Model (ABM) approach to identifying and solving root causes. The case can be used in any Continuous Improvement course or program for either Business or Engineering students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aThomson, Stepheneauthor1 aHollis, Kevineauthor1 aTurnbull, Laurieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1437zAccess online version04020nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245005800149264004300207264007100250264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341002800443490002700471505062100498520205101119542004103170546002703211588004103238650002303279650002303302700004003325700004503365700004603410700003803456710003903494856007703533OTLid0001438MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            230609s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aPrincipios Básicos de Bioquímica para Agroecología 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Introducción a la bioquímica -- Capítulo II: Estructura y función de las biomoléculas -- Capítulo III: Células eucariotas -- Capítulo IV: Estructura celular y orgánulos de las células vegetales -- Capítulo V: Metabolismo celular y fotosíntesis -- Capítulo VI: Enzimas y regulación metabólica -- Capítulo VII: Metabolismo de los nutrientes en la agroecología -- Capítulo VIII: Interacciones planta-microorganismo -- Capítulo IX: Biotecnología y aplicaciones en la agroecología -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro "Principios Básicos de Bioquímica para Agroecología" es una obra que busca proporcionar a los estudiantes de esta disciplina una base sólida en los fundamentos de la bioquímica, escrita por un equipo de docentes investigadores, se presenta como un recurso didáctico para aquellos estudiantes que buscan comprender la relación entre la química, la bioquímica y la agricultura, iniciando con la definición conceptual de bioquímica. A medida que avanza el texto, se profundiza en los conceptos de estructuras de la célula vegetal, sus características y funciones, así como también se describen las proteínas, lípidos, carbohidratos y ácidos nucleicos. Además, aborda temas importantes para la agroecología, como la fotosíntesis y la función de los nutrientes en las plantas. El enfoque en estos temas permite a los estudiantes de agroecología entender cómo los principios de la bioquímica son relevantes para el estudio de la agricultura y la producción de alimentos. Así también incluye una variedad de recursos de apoyo para el aprendizaje, como cuadros, tablas, diagramas y ejemplos. Estos recursos ayudan a los estudiantes a visualizar y comprender los conceptos difíciles de la bioquímica, y a aplicarlos a situaciones del mundo real. Una de las características más destacadas de este documento es su lenguaje accesible y fácil de entender. Los autores han evitado el uso excesivo de terminología técnica y han explicado los conceptos de manera clara y concisa. Esto hace que sea adecuado para estudiantes de diversos niveles y antecedentes académicos. En conclusión, es material bibliográfico valioso y esencial para cualquier estudiante que desee comprender los principios básicos de la bioquímica y su aplicación en el campo de la agroecología. Con una escritura clara, recursos de apoyo útiles y un enfoque en temas relevantes para la agricultura, representa una excelente herramienta para el aprendizaje y la comprensión de la bioquímica y su relación con la producción de alimentos.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aRuiz-Sánchez, Clara Isabeleauthor1 aHerrera-Feijoo, Robinson Jasmanyeauthor1 aCorrea-Salgado, María de Lourdeseauthor1 aHidalgo-Hugo, Luis Danieleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1438zAccess online version03180nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245006100149264004300210264007100253264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505033800501520141800839542004102257546002702298588004102325650002402366650002602390700004402416700004202460700004902502700004302551700004802594710003902642856007702681OTLid0001439MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            230609s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF562500aSistema de Costos por Órdenes de Producción para PYMES 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Generalidades sobre Contabilidad de Costos -- Capítulo II: Naturaleza de los costos -- Capítulo III: Sistemas de Costos por Órdenes de Producción -- Capítulo IV: Resúmenes de Costos y los Estados Financieros -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro “Sistema de Costos por Órdenes de Producción para PYMES” es un libro que se enfoca en la contabilidad de costos y cómo se puede aplicar en las pequeñas y medianas empresas. El libro se enfoca en el sistema de costos por órdenes de producción, que es un sistema que se utiliza para calcular los costos de producción de un producto específico. Este sistema es muy útil para las empresas que producen productos personalizados o productos que tienen una gran cantidad de variaciones. El libro cubre los conceptos básicos de la contabilidad de costos y cómo se pueden aplicar en las pequeñas y medianas empresas. También cubre los diferentes tipos de costos que existen y cómo se pueden calcular. Además, el libro cubre el sistema de costos por órdenes de producción en detalle y cómo se puede utilizar para calcular los costos de producción. El libro “Sistema de Costos por Órdenes de Producción para PYMES” es una guía útil para las pequeñas y medianas empresas que buscan mejorar su contabilidad de costos. El libro cubre los conceptos básicos de la contabilidad de costos y cómo se pueden aplicar en las pequeñas y medianas empresas. También cubre los diferentes tipos de costos que existen y cómo se pueden calcular. Además, el libro cubre el sistema de costos por órdenes de producción en detalle y cómo se puede utilizar para calcular los costos de producción.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks1 aNúñez-Liberio, Rosa Verónicaeauthor1 aSuarez-Núñez, Marco Vinicioeauthor1 aNavarrete-Zambrano, Cecilia Mercedeseauthor1 aRuiz-López, Silvana Elizabetheauthor1 aAlmenaba-Guerrero, Patricia Yajairaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1439zAccess online version02738nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245003800145264004300183264005800226264001200284300002200296336002600318337002600344338003600370341002800406490002700434505044600461520080000907542004101707546001601748588004101764650003001805650002301835700003701858700003001895700002701925700002901952700002501981700002802006700002902034700002502063700002702088700002502115710003902140856007702179OTLid0001440MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            230621s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aClimate Justice in Your Classroom 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSeattle, WashingtonbUniversity of Washingtonc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Examining Air Quality Inequity in Major US Cities During the COVID-19 Pandemic -- Exploring Links Between Agroforestry, Food Security, and Land Sovereignty -- Understanding the Impacts of Ocean Acidification on Shellfish and Reliant Communities in the Pacific Northwest -- Unequal Impacts: Justice at the Intersection of Risk and Exposure to Severe Weather Threat -- Exploring Issues of Coastal Climate Justice Through Haikus0 aAs the inequitable impacts of climate change become more evident and destructive, it is essential for climate and environmental justice, as well as methods of civic engagement, to be taught at a high-level to college-level students. This book provides real examples of how professors at the University of Washington integrated these critical issues into their teachings, both in targeted lessons and as throughlines across an entire course. These samples of how environmental and climate justice have been successfully integrated into higher-level education can serve as both a record of the UW's progress towards centering JEDI at the heart of all students, and as a model for future instructors to use as they work to incorporate more aspects of justice and engagement into their own material.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aAnderson-Frey, Alexandraeauthor1 aJohnson, Brittanyeauthor1 aNuwer, Mikelleeauthor1 aThompson, Luanneeauthor1 aTurner, Alexeauthor1 aBertram, Miriameeditor1 aBrooks, Madelineeeditor1 aOlson, Issaceeditor1 aPrice, Heathereeditor1 aTurner, Alexeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1440zAccess online version02168nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000800139050001000147100002300157245004800180264004300228264011500271264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002800508490002700536505022400563520072200787542001601509546001601525588004001541650002301581650002701604650002301631710003901654856007701693OTLid0001441MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230713s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aBest, Alexeauthor00aIntroducing Mathematical BiologycAlex Best 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSchool of Mathematics and Statistics, Sheffield, South Yorkshire, EnglandbThe University of Sheffieldc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- I. Population ecology -- II. Infectious disease -- III. Immune and cell dynamics -- IV. Gene networks -- V. Pharmacokinetics -- VI. Background reviews -- Final thoughts and acknowledgements -- References0 aMathematical modelling plays an increasingly important role in almost any area of life sciences, and this interactive textbook focuses on the areas of population ecology, infectious diseases, immunology and cell dynamics, gene networks and pharmacokinetics. It is aimed at anyone who is interested in learning about how to model biological systems, including undergraduate and postgraduate mathematics students who have not studied mathematical biology before, life-sciences students with an interest in modelling, and post-16 mathematics students interested in university-level material. Some mathematical knowledge is assumed, and the mathematical models used are all in the form of ordinary differential equations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1441zAccess online version02316nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245004800149264004300197264007100240264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505032800488520064300816542004101459546002701500588004101527650002401568650002601592700004101618700004401659700004601703700004101749710003901790856007701829OTLid0001442MnU20260323020510.0m     o  d s      cr            230713s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aCapital Social y la Intención de Emprender 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Introducción -- Capítulo II: Marco de Referencia -- Capítulo III: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo IV: Resultados y discusión -- Capítulo V: Conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias -- Bibliográficas -- Anexos0 aDescubrir qué factores motivan e influyen en la actividad emprendedora es un tema de gran interés para investigadores, formuladores de política socioeconómica, académicos y para las personas en general. A lo largo de este libro, los autores nos relatan de forma amena y comprensible cómo nuestro entorno cercano y lejano forma una serie de valores, actitudes y creencias que predisponen o no al individuo a emprender. Un libro que sin duda va a enriquecer nuestro espíritu emprendedor, dando respuesta a preguntas que alguna vez nos hemos planteado en torno a las personas que toman la gran decisión de crear sus propios negocios.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aBravo Bravo, Idilia Fernandaeauthor1 aCedeño Aguilar, Carlos Albertoeauthor1 aSantander Salmon, Erika Stephaniaeauthor1 aBarba Mosquera, Angela Elenaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1442zAccess online version02335nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003100135245004700166264004300213264007500256264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505040400508520079600912542004101708546001601749588004001765650002601805650002601831710003901857856007701896OTLid0001443MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            230713s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aSangiacomo, Andreaeauthor04aThe Tragedy of the SelfcAndrea Sangiacomo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGroningen, NetherlandsbUniversity of Groningen Open Textbooksc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Lecture Zero: Theme -- Lecture One: Enaction -- Lecture Two: Naturalism -- Lecture Three: Shamanism -- Lecture Four: Mysticism -- Lecutre Five: Seers -- Lecture Six: Witnesses -- Lecture Seven: Tragedy -- Lecture Eight: Dialectric -- Lecture Nine: Music -- Lecture Ten: Life -- Lecture Eleven: Relations -- Lecture Twelve: Action -- Lecture Thirteen: Development -- Theme -- Bibliography0 aWhy do human beings interpret their overall experience in terms of selfhood? How was the notion and sense of self shaped at different times and in different cultures? What sort of problems or paradoxes did these constructions face? These lectures address these and related questions by sketching a roadmap of possible theoretical avenues for conceiving of the self, bringing to the foreground its soteriological implications, while also testing this theoretical outlook against insights offered by various disciplines. Exploring the cross-cultural spectrum of possible ways of conceiving of the self invites the more existential question of whether any of these possibilities might offer resources for dealing with the tragedies of today’s world, or maybe even saving it from some of them.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1443zAccess online version03365nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135050001000145100002200155245008800177264004300265264007800308264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002800508490002700536505166800563520039302231542004102624546001602665588004002681650002302721650004302744650002502787700002702812710003902839856007702878OTLid0001445MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            230720s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aHM621 4aHM5861 aDay, Lisaeeditor00aAccessible AppalachiabAn Open-Access Introduction to Appalachian StudiescLisa Day 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEastern Kentucky Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Accessibility Statement -- Introduction -- Arts in Appalachia -- Chapter 1 The Making of Appalachian Music -- Chapter 2 Fiddle and Banjo Music of Southern Appalachia -- Chapter 3 Unaccompanied Singing Traditions of Southern Appalachia -- Chapter 4 Writing about Appalachia and of Appalachia: Contextualizing Appalachian Literature since the Civil War -- Chapter 5 Appalshop and Appalachian Agency -- Natural Resources and Environmental Justice in Appalachia -- Chapter 6 Appalachian Agriculture and Food Systems -- Chapter 7 Appalachian Foodways -- Chapter 8 Chestnut Country: An Environmental History of the American Chestnut in the Appalachian Commons -- Chapter 9 Shine On: Distilling, Cultural Rebellion, and the Fluid Construction of Criminality -- Chapter 10 The Waterlord: Gus Isom and the Tennessee Valley Authority -- Cultures of Appalachia -- Chapter 11 Native American Cultures of Appalachia -- Chapter 12 Folklore of Appalachia -- Chapter 13 The Intersectional Redneck: Appalachian Identity Politics in Historical and Contemporary Perspective -- Chapter 14 Social Capital for Appalachia's Youth -- Social Justice in Appalachia -- Chapter 15 The Great Society in the Mountains: Shaping Appalachia through the 1960s and Beyond -- Chapter 16 Ravaged Land and Polarized People: Community Responses to Strip Mining in Eastern Kentucky, 1946 - 1972 -- Chapter 17 Black Lung: A Continuing Struggle for Coal Miners in Appalachia -- Health in Appalachia -- Chapter 18 A Matter of Justice: Legal Response to the Appalachian Opioid Crisis -- Chapter 19 Restorative Justice amid Appalachia's Opioid Struggles -- About the Contributors -- Index0 aAccessible Appalachia: An Open-Access Introduction to Appalachian Studies is an edited collection of original scholarship. The textbook offers an interdisciplinary perspective and is ideal for introductory classes in Appalachian Studies. Available free to students everywhere, this textbook features coverage of Appalachian artistic, cultural, historical, natural, and social development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aJohnson, Jacobeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1445zAccess online version02859nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001200135100003000147245005000177264004300227264007100270264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505057400515520111801089542002702207546001602234588004002250650002002290650002602310650002102336710003902357856007702396OTLid0001446MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230724s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aM1-50001 aChenette, Timothyeauthor00aFoundations of Aural SkillscTimothy Chenette 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUtahbUtah Education Network Digital Press with Pressbooksc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - Attention -- Chapter 2 - Moving to Music (Meter) -- Chapter 3 - Tonic/Collection and Solfége -- Chapter 4 - Music's Materiality: Timbre, Envelope, Dynamics, Register, and Texture -- Chapter 5 - Musical Memory -- Chapter 6 - Internal Hearing and Intonation -- Chapter 7 - Rhythm Skills -- Chapter 8 - Improvisation Skills -- Chapter 9 - Playback -- Chapter 10 - Transcription -- Chapter 11 - Sight Reading Skills -- Chapter 12 - Ensemble Skills -- Chapter 13 - Dictation -- Chapter 14 - Closure, Repetition, and Contrast -- Chapter 15 - Listening for Chords0 aFoundations of Aural Skills is a research-based, accessible, relevant, creative, inclusive, empowering textbook for teaching introductory aural skills. The first seven chapters provide thorough instruction in aural fundamentals, allowing students to build their foundations from a variety of starting points. The following chapters address the traditional tasks of sight-reading and dictation, but also improvisation, mimicking music you hear (“playback”), transcription, and ensemble skills. The final two chapters add some basic form- and chord-listening skills. Every section includes creative activities that learners can try out on their own or do in class. Embedded playlists for practicing listening skills include a diverse range of music that will connect with students’ preferences and allow them to experience music they haven’t worked with before. While the text is primarily designed for a first semester or year of instruction, it also includes some instruction on modulation, chromaticism, and mixed meter, and future additions/development will make these advanced applications more robust.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1446zAccess online version02419nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002700139245004800166264004300214264005500257264001200312300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341002800434490002700462505040000489520093200889542001601821546001601837588004101853650002601894650002101920710003901941856007701980OTLid0001447MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            230806s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aYoung, Gregoryeauthor00aTheory Fundamentals WorkbookcGregory Young 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBozeman, MontanabMontana State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Tones, Semitones, and the Major Scale -- Chapter 2: Intervals -- Chapter 3: Key Signatures -- Chapter 4: Minor Scales and Key Signatures -- Chapter 5: Transposition -- Chapter 6: Triads -- Chapter 7: Triadic Inversions and Figured bass -- Chapter 8: Chorale Style -- Chapter 9: Voice Leading -- Chapter 10: Cadences -- Chapter 11: Dominant Sevenths -- Chapter 12: Harmonizing a Melody0 aThis workbook is a practical method for learning the rudiments of music, which are essential to a thorough understanding of music in general. Designed as a supplement to professional instruction rather than a manual for self instruction, the text is intentionally brief. The emphasis is on using practical exercises to develop fluency. Aural, vocal, and keyboard skills must be integrated into the study of music theory from the very beginning. I encourage all students, regardless of their principal instrument, to learn to hear, sing, and play on the piano everything that they do in theory. All exercises in this book should be completed thoroughly. Usually a sample will be completed in brackets for each exercise, as a demonstration. Fluency with these basic materials of music will be a great asset to any further musical endeavors. For students who need additional exercises, suggestions for further study will be given.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1447zAccess online version02203nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003300148245006800181250001800249264004300267264009200310264001200402300002200414336002600436337002600462338003600488341002500524490002700549505037200576520060800948542004101556546001601597588004001613650002501653650002301678710003901701856007701740OTLid0001448MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230806s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aAdeyiga, Adedoyin M.eauthor00aLaboratory ManualbGeneral Chemistry I HonorscAdedoyin Adeyiga  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCalculations In the Chemistry Laboratory -- Experiment One: Which Antacid is Most Effective? -- Experiment Two: Extraction of Fat and Determination of Fat Content of Candy Bars -- Experiment Three: Identifying Some Constituents of Bones -- Experiment Four: Synthesis of Tylenol -- Experiment Five: Separation and Identification of Components of Combination Analgesics0 aGeneral Chemistry I Honors Laboratory Manual (2023) is an eTextbook designed to provide a practical, hands-on approach to learning chemistry for students taking General Chemistry I Honors courses. The manual covers fundamental principles of chemistry, including atomic structure, chemical bonding, stoichiometry, gas laws, and thermodynamics. The book is divided into chapters, each focusing on a specific topic. Each experiment in the manual is accompanied by step-by-step instructions, pre-lab questions, and post-lab questions, helping students to develop their analytical and problem-solving skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1448zAccess online version02603nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003000148245010200178250001800280264004300298264009100341264001200432300002200444336002600466337002600492338003600518341002800554490002700582505050300609520085801112542002701970546001601997588004002013650002502053650002302078710003902101856007702140OTLid0001449MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230806s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aAlbert, Daniel R.eauthor00aChemistry Techniques and ExplorationsbAn Introductory Chemistry Laboratory ManualcDaniel Albert  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSafety and Record Keeping -- Separating Substances, Measuring Mass, and Analyzing Data - Technique Laboratory -- Measuring Volumes - Technique Laboratory -- Reaction Types and Qualitative Analysis - Technique Laboratory -- What is Contaminating the Water Supply? - Exploration Laboratory -- Titrations Technique Laboratory -- What is the Acidity of Vinegar? - Exploration Laboratory -- Absorption Spectroscopy Technique Laboratory -- What is the Dye Composition of a Drink? - Exploration Laboratory0 aChemistry Techniques and Explorations (2023) by Dr. Daniel R. Albert is an eTextbook laboratory manual for first semester introductory chemistry courses. The manual includes two different types of experiments (Technique and Exploration) designed to engage students in chemistry laboratory practices. Technique laboratories are designed for students to learn and practice chemistry laboratory skills that are utilized in a wide variety of disciplines. Exploration laboratories provide freedom and time for students to use previously acquired skills toward answering a new application focused question. Exploration laboratories help build the scientific thinking skills necessary to approach novel problems. The goal of this lab manual is to build both fundamental techniques and problem-solving skills that aid students in becoming practicing scientists.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1449zAccess online version02005nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138100003400145245006400179250001800243264004300261264009100304264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002800517490002700545505023200572520054100804542002701345546001601372588004001388650004401428650003101472710003901503856007701542OTLid0001450MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230806s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH11 aClemens, Colleen Lutzeauthor00aIntroduction to Women’s & Gender StudiescColleen Clemens  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aGender -- Feminisms -- Intersectionality -- Gender Equity -- Gender & the World -- Gender Inequity Throughout History -- Gender Issues in Today’s Society -- Gender Gaps -- Pathways to Gender Equity -- Supporting Gender Equity0 aIntroduction to Women’s and Gender Studies (2023) is an eTextbook designed to provide an introduction to the fields of Women’s Studies and Gender Studies for students taking introductory courses. The textbook touches on a variety of subjects including gender theories, feminisms, intersectionality, equity, and activism. Chapters contain questions to consider and list of suggested readings by theorists and activists. This multimedia eTextbook incorporates videos and podcasts to create a rich introductory experience for students.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1450zAccess online version02384nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003900138245003600177250001800213264004300231264009100274264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505016100542520105800703542002701761546001601788588004001804650002601844650002401870710003901894856007701933OTLid0001451MnU20260330020616.0m     o  d s      cr            230806s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aPfannenstiel, Amber Nicoleeauthor00aWeb WritingcAmber Pfannenstiel  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: Introduction to Web Writing -- Chapter Two: Web Writing with the Rhetorical Situation -- Chapter Three: Content Strategy and Content Management0 aWeb Writing (2023) by Dr. A Nicole Pfannenstiel is designed to provide a practical, rhetorical approach to web writing and content strategy analysis for students completing advanced writing courses. The eTextbook uses the rhetorical situation and key concepts to help readers/students understand how to write within specific web spaces for specific audiences drawing on appropriate discourse community conventions. It includes a chapter devoted to the rhetorical situation and key concepts to help students analyze and build their understanding of existing communication. It also includes a chapter outlining approaches to content strategy analysis, using the rhetorical situation and key concepts to understand the rich public data provided through social media accounts to support learners understanding effective web writing. The content analysis overview helps students build skills for analyzing writing, for collecting and analyzing qualitative and quantitative social media data, and for drawing conclusions about content strategy best practices.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1451zAccess online version02967nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002800137245005700165264004300222264008800265264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505024100530520160900771542004102380546001602421588004002437650002402477710003902501856007702540OTLid0001453MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230806s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aValaitis, Kareneauthor00aExploring the U.S. Healthcare SystemcKaren Valaitis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Overview of the U.S Healthcare System -- Chapter 2: Delivery Systems -- Chapter 3: Health Insurance -- Chapter 4: Access, Quality & Cost -- Chapter 5: Current Issues in Healthcare Policy -- Chapter 6: Technology in Healthcare0 aWelcome to Exploring the U.S. Healthcare System. This open educational resource (OER) introduces students to foundational characteristics of the U.S. healthcare system. It begins with an overview of the healthcare system that includes a brief history and a description of the current state of health in the U.S. The second chapter describes health delivery systems, including inpatient, outpatient, post-acute, longterm, palliative, and hospice care. An introduction to health insurance in the third chapter will include an overview of basic concepts, private insurance, public insurance, and recent trends. The fourth chapter presents issues related to the triple aim of improving access to care, increasing the quality of care, and lowering the cost of care. The fifth chapter reviews how the government intervenes in healthcare and presents current policy issues related to the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act and value-based contracting. The final chapter on the topic of technology in healthcare provides an overview of health information technology, health information legislation, emerging technologies, and the future of health information technology. Chapter content is supplemented with additional material such as reports, briefs, figures, infographics, definitions, and key terms. Chapters two through six end with a “knowledge check” exercise to actively engage students with the content. While this OER book was curated and created for undergraduate students in the field of healthcare, it is my hope that it will continue to be customized to other programs and shared again.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1453zAccess online version02749nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245007000149264004300219264007000262264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505036000509520089800869542004101767546002701808588004101835650002401876650002601900700004701926700004701973700005602020700003902076700003802115700004602153710003902199856007702238OTLid0001454MnU20260330020543.0m     o  d s      cr            230808s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aGestión del Cambio como Fundamento de la Dirección Estratégica 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Participación del Cambio Estratégico en La Dirección Estratégica -- Capítulo II: La Dirección Estratégica como Modelo de Cambio -- Capítulo III: Competencias Esenciales para la Dirección Estratégica -- ANEXOS -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro es una obra completa que examina la integración vital de la dirección estratégica y la gestión del cambio. El primer capítulo argumenta que el cambio estratégico es un componente crucial de la dirección estratégica, destacando la necesidad de anticipar y adaptarse a las fluctuaciones en el entorno de negocio. El segundo capítulo presenta la dirección estratégica como un modelo de cambio, subrayando la importancia de alinear la estrategia con la visión y los objetivos de la empresa para impulsar el cambio efectivo. El capítulo final analiza las competencias esenciales necesarias para la dirección estratégica, enfatizando en habilidades como el liderazgo, la toma de decisiones informada y la gestión de la incertidumbre. Esta obra es una guía esencial para aquellos que buscan comprender y aplicar efectivamente la gestión del cambio en un marco estratégico.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aTerán-Guerrero, Fernando Neptalíeauthor1 aGuerrero-Espinosa, Mercy Elizabetheauthor1 aVizcaíno-Villavicencio, Viviana de Lourdeseauthor1 aGaibor-Mendoza, John Steeteauthor1 aPico-Lescano, Juan Carloseauthor1 aSandoval-Cárdenas, Marco Vinicioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1454zAccess online version02940nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138245007700148264004300225264009600268264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505100300541520065801544542003002202546001602232588004102248650002402289650002302313700002902336700003002365700003102395710003902426856007702465OTLid0001455MnU20260406020555.0m     o  d s      cr            230808s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG17300aEquilibrium Displacement ModelsbTheory, Applications, & Policy Analysis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter One: Equilibrium Displacement Models -- Chapter Two: Equilibrium Displacement Model Applications -- Chapter Three: Mathematical Tools for Evaluating Market Perturbations -- Chapter Three, Appendix A: Review of Linear Algebra and Differential Calculus -- Chapter Four: Economic Modeling in Primal and Dual Environments -- Chapter Four, Appendix A: Homogeneity of Degree 1 Production Functions and the Development of a Dual EDM System -- Chapter Four, Appendix B: Multiplicative Technology Shocks -- Chapter Five: EDM Policy Applications: One Output, Two Inputs -- Chapter Six: Relaxing the Assumption of Perfect Competition -- Chapter Seven: EDM Policy Applications: Multiple Markets -- Chapter Eight: Consumer Surplus, Producer Surplus, and Deadweight Losses -- Chapter Nine: Sensitivity Analyses of Equilibrium Displacement Models -- Chapter Nine, Appendix A: Constructing and Estimating EDM Confidence Intervals using Simulation Procedures -- Chapter Ten: Summary -- References0 aApplied economists frequently use equilibrium displacement models (EDMs), also termed linear elasticity models, for policy analyses because they can be used to estimate changes in prices and quantities that result from exogenous economic or policy shocks. These models are also widely used to estimate changes in producer and consumer surplus caused by exogenous economic shocks and to quantify the short- and long-term impacts of a variety of economic and regulatory actions across multiple markets. For the first time, a textbook that contains all of the theory and applications of EDMs along with a set of spreadsheet files is available in one place.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks1 aBrester, Gary W.eauthor1 aAtwood, Joseph A.eauthor1 aBoland, Michael A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1455zAccess online version03068nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005600135264004300191264008200234264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505106200493520083601555542002702391546001602418588004102434650002302475650002602498700002502524700002902549710003902578856007702617OTLid0001456MnU20260406020556.0m     o  d s      cr            230808s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2000aWorld History Since 1500bAn Open and Free Textbook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEast Tennessee State Universityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAuthor Biographies -- Acknowledgement -- Table of Contents -- Chapter 1: The World in 1500 -- Chapter 2: Expanding Empires, Europe and the Americas 1500-1700 -- Chapter 3: Cultural Encounters and Expanding Empires in Asia and Eurasia 1500-1700 -- Chapter 4: Islamic Empires - Mughals, Ottomans and Safavids 1500-1700 -- Chapter 5: Age of Reason - The Scientific Revolution, Enlightened Thought and its Impact -- Chapter 6: Challenging the Old Order - The Age of Revolutions -- Chapter 7: Remaking the World - The Industrial Revolution, Workers and a New Economic Order -- Chapter 8: Nation Building and Reform 1700-1900 -- Chapter 9: Managing Modernity in Asia 1700-1900 -- Chapter 10: The Second Wave of Imperialism 1700-1900 -- Chapter 11: World in Crisis, Conflict, and the Struggle for Independence - World War I, the Indian Independence Movement and the Russian Revolution -- Chapter 12: Interwar Years and the Rise of Fascism -- Chapter 13: World War II -- Chapter 14: Cold War and Decolonization of the World from 1950 -- Chapter 15: The Modern World0 aWorld History Since 1500: An Open and Free Textbook is designed to cover world history from 1500 to the present in 15 chapters. The OER-supported textbook can be downloaded as a pdf or viewed online. The textbook serves to weave insights from many perspectives into stories and narratives that will help students develop a framework to organize and connect ideas, geographical locations, and timelines allowing them to think critically and broadly about the world around them. In addition to helping students master the sequence and scope of world history from 1500, the textbook helps develop empathy for people who live and lived in different parts of the world and during different historical times leading to the creation of empathic and knowledgeable global citizens who are aware of and concerned about the world around them.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aRankin, Johneauthor1 aWeise, Constanzeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1456zAccess online version02666nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245002500144264004300169264007700212264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002800411490002700439505040500466520107200871542004101943546001601984588004002000650003102040650002502071700004302096700002502139710003902164856007702203OTLid0001457MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230808s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58600aSocial Data Analysis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvidence, Rhode IslandbRhode Island College Digital Publishingc2023. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- How to Use This Book -- Section I. Introducting Social Data Analysis -- Section II. Quantitative Data Analysis -- Section III. Qualitative Data Analysis -- Section IV. Quantitative Data Analysis with SPSS -- Section V. Qualitative and Mixed Methods Data Analysis with Dedoose -- Glossary -- Modified GSS Codebook for the Data Used in this Text -- Works Citied -- About the Authors0 aSocial data analysis enables you, as a researcher, to organize the facts you collect during your research. Your data may have come from a questionnaire survey, a set of interviews, or observations. They may be data that have been made available to you from some organization, national or international agency or other researchers. Whatever their source, social data can be daunting to put together in a way that makes sense to you and others. This book is meant to help you in your initial attempts to analyze data. In doing so it will introduce you to ways that others have found useful in their attempts to organize data. You might think of it as like a recipe book, a resource that you can refer to as you prepare data for your own consumption and that of others. And, like a recipe book that teaches you to prepare simple dishes, you may find this one pretty exciting. Analyzing data in a revealing way is at least as rewarding, we’ve found, as it is to cook up a yummy cashew carrot paté or a steaming corn chowder. We’d like to share our pleasure with you.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aArthur, Mikaila Mariel Lemonikeauthor1 aClark, Rogereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1457zAccess online version02171nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245008800149264004300237264008800280264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002500490490002700515505040900542520051500951542004101466546001601507588004001523650002301563650002401586700002901610700003001639710003901669856007701708OTLid0001458MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230808s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aCareer CornerstonesbEstablishing a Foundation for a Career in Healthcare (Revised) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Scholarly Research Skills -- Chapter 2: Academic Writing and Integrity -- Chapter 3: Healthcare Careers -- Chapter 4: Job Skills -- Chapter 5: Ethics -- Chapter 6: Professionalism -- Chapter 7: Communication in Healthcare -- Chapter 8: Life Management -- Appendix A: Tables -- Appendix B: Image Credits -- Appendix C: Offline Copies of Test Yourself Quizzes0 aCareer Cornerstones: Establishing a Foundation for a Career in Healthcare (Revised) is an Open Educational Resource (OER) that focuses on career skills required for students entering their respective health profession's program. This book is designed to help students be successful not only in their health profession's educational program, but also as they start to intern or work in healthcare settings. This resource is targeted for Healthcare Administration, Health Sciences, and Pre-Professional students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aNelson, Andrea Meauthor1 aGreene, Katherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1458zAccess online version02529nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245008300137264004300220264007700263264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505030400517520085900821542001601680546001601696588004001712650004301752700003001795700003201825700003601857700002601893700002301919700002501942700002401967710003901991856007702030OTLid0001459MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230814s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.700aUniversity Academic Writing for International StudentsbA Usage-based Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Writing Through Narrative -- Writing for Information Purposes -- Writing to Persuade -- Email Guidelines -- Using Outside Material and Avoiding Plagiarism -- Evaluating Your Sources -- Writing Summaries (Descriptive and Evaluative) -- Transitional Devices -- Presenting with Examples0 aThis resource is designed specifically to meet the academic writing needs of international students studying at universities in the United States. The materials in the book can be covered within a 14-week semester, but each chapter or section may also be used independently. Based on a series of needs analysis projects, this resource provides an overview of major rhetorical patterns of writing that are commonly used in university settings in the United States. These commonly required genres include descriptive and evaluative summaries, short essays, comparison and contrast assignments, literature reviews, descriptive reports, and proposals. The resource includes chapters that address the structure and purpose of these more common genres, including an awareness of the ways that the target audience and situation should shape the writing of each.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aIntercultural CommunicationvTextbooks1 aModer, Carol Lynneauthor1 aAvalos-Rivera, Alyseauthor1 aHorton, Ho'omana Nathaneauthor1 aKinfe, Miriameauthor1 aSims, Pauleauthor1 aFrench, Setheauthor1 aZhao, Yelineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1459zAccess online version02432nam a2200517 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001100137245004800148264004300196264007600239264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002800437490002700465505038500492520040200877542001601279546001601295588004001311650003301351650002401384700002501408700003401433700002701467700002701494700002701521700002901548700002901577700002801606700003501634700002801669700002901697700003501726700003701761710003901798856007701837OTLid0001460MnU20260406020805.0m     o  d s      cr            230817s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aPE140800aWriting Spaces at Oklahoma State University 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWriting Spaces and Building a Sustainable OER -- Our Approach and Editorial Team -- Meet the Writing Spaces Team -- I. Listening to And Representing an Argument -- II. Analyzing and Evaluating an Argument -- III. Describing and Explaining a Scholarly Conversation -- IV. Entering and Participating in a Scholarly Conversation -- V. Selected Essays on Writing Processes -- Appendix0 aThis resource focuses on the various processes involved in researching answers to various inquiry questions and building effective arguments within and outside academic contexts. The curriculum takes students through the processes of listening/summarizing, asking questions, characterizing scholarly debates, and entering those debates in order to meaningfully contribute to ongoing conversations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aHoward, Daneeeditor1 aO'Neil, Courtney Lundeeditor1 aDriscoll, Danaeauthor1 aDaniel, Joshuaeauthor1 aMeints, Josiaheeditor1 aEssmiller, Kathyeeditor1 aStewart, Mary K.eauthor1 aVetter, Mattheweauthor1 aDaniels-Lerberg, Traceeauthor1 aDiFruscio, Markeeditor1 aTinsley, Natashaeeditor1 aRecchia, Roseannaeillustrator1 aGarcia-Boswell, Victoriaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1460zAccess online version02877nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245010000144264004300244264005400287264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002800463490002700491505026900518520127200787542004102059546002702100588004102127650002502168650003302193700004602226700004502272700004602317710003902363856007702402OTLid0001461MnU20260406020556.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2022    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC98000aEstrategias de enseñanza - aprendizaje en la educación superiorbUna experiencia en la ESPOCH 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmbato, EcuadorbCiencia Digital Editorialc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPRÓLOGO -- INTRODUCCION -- CAPÍTULO I: EL PROCESO DE ENSEÑANZA - APRENDIZAJE: SU RELACIÓN CON LAS ESTRATEGIAS DIDÁCTICAS EN LA EDUCACIÓN SUPERIOR -- CAPÍTULO II: METODOLOGÍAS DE LA ENSEÑANZA - APRENDIZAJE -- CAPÍTULO III: CASO PRÁCTICO -- BIBLIOGRÁFICA0 aLos cambios experimentados en los últimos años en el contexto científico-tecnológico y educativo, han revolucionado las formas de pensar y actuar. Ante esto la comunidad educativa en los diferentes niveles de enseñanza, incluyendo la Educación Superior, se han visto en la necesidad de repensar y adaptar las estrategias de enseñanza-aprendizaje para poder dar respuestas a la diversidad existente en cada grupo escolar y nivel de enseñanza. En el caso de la Educación Superior lo expuesto a presupuesto no sólo, el diseño de nuevos modelos educativos y curriculares, sino también ha implicado un hacer pedagógico y didáctico diferente, frente a un alumnado permeado por los avances tecnológicos, con aspiraciones y necesidades cada vez más creciente. Es por ello que el hecho de enseñar en los tiempos modernos en el contexto de la Educación Superior exige contar con un profesorado altamente calificado, preparado y competente, capaz de hacer frente a un proceso de enseñanza-aprendizaje donde los estudiantes deben ser gestores de su propio aprendizaje y los docentes facilitadores de las estrategias de enseñanza para el logro de un aprendizaje que fomente la formación integral y la preparación para la inserción laboral de forma adecuada.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aToledo Castillo, Norma del Rocíoeauthor1 aVillacís Venegas, Norma Yolandaeauthor1 aPeñafiel Moncayo, Isabel Romanéeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1461zAccess online version02905nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140245007600147264004300223264007000266264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505029200513520110800805542004101913546002701954588004101981650002502022650003102047700003902078700003502117700003402152700003502186700004102221700003802262700004302300710003902343856007702382OTLid0001462MnU20260406020556.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL700aDesarrollo del Pensamiento Creativobmediante Juegos Libres para Niños 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo III: Metodología -- Capítulo IV: Análisis de resultados -- Anexos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEste trabajo de investigación tuvo como objetivo evaluar la eficacia de los juegos libres en el desarrollo del pensamiento creativo en los estudiantes de 5 años de la Institución Educativa Nº 329 de Huancavelica. La metodología de los juegos libres ofrece una educación dinámica y activa en los estudiantes, la cual incentiva el desarrollo del pensamiento creativo en los estudiantes de 5 años, a través de un mayor sentido de seguridad y confianza en sí mismos. Esta metodología se realizó en un ambiente motivador y áreas libres, centrándose en la participación dinámica y motivadora, con el fin de fortalecer sus capacidades y habilidades, buscando que ellos desarrollen un aprendizaje autónomo. Con los resultados obtenidos se puede afirmar que los juegos libres favorecen directamente en el desarrollo del pensamiento creativo en los niños de 5 años, toda vez que t de Student con 53 grados de libertad, para muestras independientes, con una significancia del 5%, muestra un valor de 0.038 el cual es inferior al valor planteado, aceptando la hipótesis alternativa como válida.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aTerrazo-Luna, Esther Gloryeauthor1 aRiveros-Anccasi, Dakereauthor1 aGonzales-Castro, Abeleauthor1 aOré-Rojas, Juan Joséeauthor1 aRojas-Quispe, Angel Epifanioeauthor1 aCayllahua-Yarasca, Ubaldoeauthor1 aTorres-Acevedo, Christian Luiseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1462zAccess online version02767nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140245008700147264004300234264007000277264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002800469490002700497505031100524520093800835542004101773546002701814588004101841650002501882650003101907700003901938700003501977700004302012700004102055700003302096700003602129700004002165710003902205856007702244OTLid0001463MnU20260302020507.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL700aHabilidades PerceptivasbMejorando el Aprendizaje Remoto en Estudiantes de 5 años 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo III: Metodología -- Capítulo IV: Análisis de resultados -- Capítulo V: Conclusiones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa presente investigación tuvo como objetivo determinar el nivel de relación entre las habilidades perceptivas y el aprendizaje de la matemática de los niños y las niñas de 5 años de una Institución Educativa de Huancavelica, en la educación remota. El diseño empleado fue el correlacional y la muestra lo conformaron 46 estudiantes de 5 años de una institución de educación inicial de Huancavelica. Los instrumentos empleados fueron, la lista de cotejo para cada variable con 30 ítems. Los resultados evidencian que existe relación estadísticamente significativa entre las habilidades perceptivas y el aprendizaje de la matemática en los estudiantes de 5 años de una institución educativa de Huancavelica, en la educación remota. Estos resultados cuantitativos, con un r=0.75, representan una correlación positiva moderada, según el cuadro de índices de correlación de Hernández, Fernández y Baptista (2018)1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aTerrazo-Luna, Esther Gloryeauthor1 aRiveros-Anccasi, Dakereauthor1 aTorres-Acevedo, Christian Luiseauthor1 aRojas-Quispe, Angel Epifanioeauthor1 aCencho-Pari, Abrahameauthor1 aCoronel-Capani, Jessicaeauthor1 aYaulilahua-Huacho, Russbelteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1463zAccess online version01647nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001500134050000700149245005800156264004300214264008100257264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002800460490002700488505019700515520016500712542003000877546001600907588004000923650002500963650005000988650003101038700002501069700002701094710003901121856007701160OTLid0001464MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH100aCataloging with MARC, RDA, and Classification Systems 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTwin Falls, IdahobCollege of Southern Idaho Pressbooks Network (CSI)c2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction and Acknowledgements -- H5P Information -- Overview of Cataloging and Copy Cataloging -- Cataloging Schema -- Call Numbers -- Classficiation Website Aids -- Shelving -- Conclusion0 aThis book goes over a wide range of cataloging schemata, tools, and norms. It presents a concise but thorough view of the basics of library cataloging practice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aHepler, Reedeauthor1 aHoralek, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1464zAccess online version03448nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001000144245007900154264004300233264011700276264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505076100570520132001331542003002651546001602681588004002697650003302737650002502770650003302795700003402828700002302862700002502885710003902910856007702949OTLid0001465MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aLC98004aThe Art and Science of Teaching AgriculturebFour Keys to Dynamic Learning 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aDepartment of Agricultural, Leadership, and Community Education, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication -- Foreword -- Introduction -- About the Editors -- About the Authors -- Acknowledgements -- Instructor Resources -- The Discipline of Agricultural Education -- Psychology of Learning -- Principles of Teaching and Learning -- Learning as Problem Solving -- Inclusive Teaching -- Dynamics of Teaching -- Planning for Effective Instruction -- Delivering Content With Technology -- Assessing Agricultural Education -- Applied Leadership Development through FFA -- Supervised Agricultural Experiences -- Effective Use of the Agriculture Laboratory Environment to Support Student Learning -- Appendix 12A: In-School Agriculture Laboratory Environments -- Appendix 12B: Introductory Considerations for Laboratory Safety and Management -- Accessibility0 aThe Art and Science of Teaching Agriculture: Four Keys to Dynamic Learning is a methods of teaching book. Specifically, it is a collection of thoughts, best practices, strategies, and techniques for planning, delivering, and assessing teaching and learning. This resource is assembled from among the best teaching professors in agricultural communication, education, and leadership in America. They have narrated their favorite class sessions … sessions chosen with the goal of making us all better teachers. You will quickly grasp the four fundamental keys of solid, basic, time-tested formal and nonformal teaching: Laying the Foundation, Connecting with Students, Designing Instruction, and Applying Learning. These keys are shared with you through the unique voices of the authors to provide a multiperspective approach to teaching. The authors offer both secondary and postsecondary educators in both formal and nonformal educational environments the opportunity to build confidence in planning, delivering, and assessing the depths of the variables inherent in learning. You will acquire the foundation to teach so your learners can learn dynamically. Are you reviewing or adopting this book for a course? Please help us understand your use by filling out this form: https://bit.ly/teachagriculture_interest1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aWhittington, M. Susieeeditor1 aRudd, Rickeeditor1 aElliot, Jackeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1465zAccess online version03051nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100007900137245013800216264004300354264006800397264001200465300002200477336002600499337002600525338003600551341002800587490002700615505066700642520115501309542002302464546001602487588004002503650004202543710003902585856007702624OTLid0001466MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aFederal Aviation Administration, U.S. Department of Transportationeauthor00aAviation Maintenance Technician HandbookbGeneral (FAA-H-8083-30B)cU.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Safety, Ground Operations, & Servicing -- Chapter 2: Regulations, Maintenance Forms, Records, & Publications -- Chapter 3: Mathematics in Aviation Maintenance -- Chapter 4: Aircraft Drawings -- Chapter 5: Physics for Aviation -- Chapter 6: Aircraft Weight & Balance -- Chapter 7: Aircraft Materials, Hardware. & Processes -- Chapter 8: Cleaning & Corrosion Control -- Chapter 9: Fluid Lines & Fittings -- Chapter 10: Inspection Concepts & Techniques -- Chapter 11: Hand Tools & Measuring Devices -- Chapter 12: Fundamentals of Electricity & Electronics -- Chapter 13: Mechanic Privileges & Limitations -- Chapter 14: Human Factors -- Glossary -- Index0 aThe Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook–General (FAA-H-8083-30B) was developed as one of a series of three handbooks for persons preparing for mechanic certification with airframe or powerplant ratings, or both. It is intended that this handbook will provide basic information on principles, fundamentals, and technical procedures in the subject matter areas common to both the airframe and powerplant ratings. Emphasis in this volume is on theory and methods of application. The handbook is designed to aid students enrolled in a formal course of instruction preparing for FAA certification as a maintenance technician as well as for current technicians who wish to improve their knowledge. This volume contains information on mathematics, aircraft drawings, weight and balance, aircraft materials, processes and tools, physics, electricity, inspection, ground operations, and FAA regulations governing the certification and work of maintenance technicians. New to this volume is a section addressing how successful aviation maintenance technicians incorporate knowledge and awareness of ethics, professionalism and human factors in the field1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1466zAccess online version03726nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100007900137245014100216264004300357264006800400264001200468300002200480336002600502337002600528338003600554341002800590490002700618505048100645520201301126542002303139546001603162588004003178650004203218710003903260856007703299OTLid0001467MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aFederal Aviation Administration, U.S. Department of Transportationeauthor00aAviation Maintenance Technician HandbookbPowerplant (FAA-H-8083-32B)cU.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Aircraft Engines -- Chapter 2: Engine Fuel & Fuel Metering Systems -- Chapter 3: Induction & Exhaust Systems -- Chapter 4: Engine Ignition & Electrical Systems -- Chapter 5: Engine Starting Systems -- Chapter 6: Lubrication & Cooling Systems -- Chapter 7: Propellers -- Chapter 8: Engine Removal & Replacement -- Chapter 9: Engine Fire Protection Systems -- Chapter 10: Engine Maintenance & Operation -- Chapter 11: Light-Sport Aircraft Engines -- Glossary -- Index0 aThe Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook–Powerplant (FAA-H-8083-32B) is one of a series of three handbooks for persons preparing for certification as a powerplant mechanic. It is intended that this handbook provide the basic information on principles, fundamentals, and technical procedures in the subject matter areas relating to the powerplant rating. It is designed to aid students enrolled in a formal course of instruction, as well as the individual who is studying on his or her own. Since the knowledge requirements for the airframe and powerplant ratings closely parallel each other in some subject areas, the chapters which discuss fire protection systems and electrical systems contain some material which is also duplicated in the Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook–Airframe (FAA-H-8083-31B). This handbook contains an explanation of the units that make up each of the systems that bring fuel, air, and ignition together in an aircraft engine for combustion. It also contains information on engine construction features, lubrication systems, exhaust systems, cooling systems, cylinder removal and replacement, compression checks, and valve adjustments. Because there are so many different types of aircraft in use today, it is reasonable to expect that differences exist in airframe components and systems. To avoid undue repetition, the practice of using representative systems and units is carried out throughout the handbook. Subject matter treatment is from a generalized point of view and should be supplemented by reference to manufacturer's manuals or other textbooks if more detail is desired. This handbook is not intended to replace, substitute for, or supersede official regulations or the manufacturer’s instructions. Occasionally the word “must” or similar language is used where the desired action is deemed critical. The use of such language is not intended to add to, interpret, or relieve a duty imposed by Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR).1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1467zAccess online version03210nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245007700137264004300214264007000257264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505039000504520134800894542004102242546002702283588004102310650002302351700004102374700004502415700004002460700003402500700005002534700004102584700004702625710003902672856007702711OTLid0001468MnU20260406020557.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH30100aTransformando la GanaderíabEvaluación de las Explotaciones de Vacunos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Metodología -- Capítulo III: Análisis de resultados -- Capítulo IV: Discusión, Conclusiones y Recomendaciones -- Anexos -- Anexo 1: Instrumentos de recolección de datos -- Anexo 2: Instrumentos de recolección de datos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl estudio se realizó en 18 distritos de la provincia de Huancavelica, encuestando a 426 productores de bovino durante 2020. Los productores, con un nivel educativo primario o sin educación en su mayoría, se dedican principalmente a la agricultura y la ganadería, y no suelen recibir sueldo por su trabajo. La raza principal de ganado es la Brown Swiss (37.6%), y los productores mantienen un promedio de 6.5 cabezas de vacuno, con un sistema de producción semi extensivo. El objetivo principal de la crianza de bovinos es la producción de leche (46.9%) y doble propósito (44.1%), aunque la mayoría de los productores no puede determinar el peso vivo del bovino que vende. Aunque se practica el pastoreo y la suplementación con sal común, no se conservan pastos para la temporada seca, y la mayoría de los productores tiene dificultades para detectar el celo y determinar la edad al primer servicio. Predomina la monta natural, sin mejoramiento genético, y no se realiza un manejo adecuado de enfermedades como la mastitis y la fasciola. Los productores carecen de equipos y maquinarias, no reciben asistencia técnica adecuada y no siguen un calendario sanitario. Se concluye que la administración y la asistencia técnica en áreas como la reproducción, la sanidad, el mejoramiento genético y la alimentación son deficientes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aRamos-Acuña, Hebert Ernestoeauthor1 aPalomino-Pastrana, Pedro Antonioeauthor1 aYaulilahua-Huacho, Russbelteauthor1 aZela-Payi, Nelly Olgaeauthor1 aSumarriva-Bustinza, Liliana Asuncióneauthor1 aPorras-Roque, María Soledadeauthor1 aCamposano-Córdova, Alvaro Ignacioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1468zAccess online version03324nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138245006600151264004300217264007000260264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505035600507520171300863542004102576546002702617588004102644650002802685650003402713700003802747700003702785710003902822856007702861OTLid0001469MnU20260330020543.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A400aPeculado Doloso y el Principio de Proporcionalidad de la Pena 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Marco teórico -- Capítulo III: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo IV: Resultados de investigación -- Capítulo V: Discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl presente trabajo se inicia del problema cuando se investiga de qué manera al sancionar con una misma pena en el delito de Peculado Doloso afecta el principio de proporcionalidad, por lo que es necesario remitirnos al artículo 387 del Código Penal, cuyo tenor es como sigue: El funcionario o servidor público que se apropia o utiliza, en cualquier forma, para sí o para otro, caudales o efectos cuya percepción, administración o custodia le estén confiados por razón de su cargo, será reprimido con pena privativa de la libertad no menor de dos ni mayor de ocho años. Constituye circunstancia agravante si los caudales o efectos estuvieran destinados a fines asistenciales o a programas de apoyo social. En estos casos, la pena privativa de la libertad será no menor de cuatro ni mayor de diez años. Según lo establecido por el Acuerdo Plenario N.° 4-2005/CJ-116, Pleno jurisdiccional de las Salas Penales Permanentes y Transitoria de la Corte Suprema de Justicia, los elementos del tipo penal de peculado son (i) la existencia de una relación funcional, (ii) la percepción, administración o custodia, (iii) apropiación o utilización, (iv) el destinatario: para sí o para un tercero, (v) caudales y efectos. El resultado fue que al sancionar con una misma pena en el delito de Peculado Doloso en su modalidad de apropiación y utilización visten de igual contenido de ilicitud, pese a las diferencias si las apreciamos desde una perspectiva patrimonialista o de salvaguarda del derecho de propiedad del ente público, en la modalidad de utilizar existe un exceso en la penalización afectándose el principio de proporcionalidad, razón por la cual debe tener un tratamiento distinto.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aEstrada-Ayre, Cesar Percyeauthor1 aPorras-Sarmiento, Syntiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1469zAccess online version03752nam a2200577 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000800139050001200147050001000159050001000169050000700179245009100186264004300277264007000320264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505061500567520116801182542004102350546002702391588004102418650002302459650003002482650002502512650002402537650002302561650003102584700004702615700004002662700004502702700004002747700004402787700004602831700004502877700004802922700004202970700004603012710003903058856007703097OTLid0001470MnU20260330020544.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aQE1 4aHB171.5 4aRA440 4aQH301 4aH100aSinergia CientíficabIntegrando las Ciencias desde una Perspectiva Multidisciplinaria 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Capítulo I: Respuestas productivas de cuyes (Cavia porcellus) a la suplementación con harina de amaranto (Amaranthus caudatus y curcuma (Curcuma longa): Un enfoque innovador para la cuyicultura sostenible -- Capítulo II: Los Derechos Humanos y su enfoque en las poblaciones vulnerables -- Capítulo III: Enfoque innovador en el diseño de revestimientos para cunetas: material compuesto de polímeros reciclados -- Capítulo IV: Avance de la facturación electrónica y su impacto económico en la sector de imprentas -- Capítulo V: Neuromarketing y su Influencia en la Rentabilidad de las PYMES0 a"Sinergia Científica: Integrando las Ciencias desde una Perspectiva Multidisciplinaria" es un compendio de estudios que abarcan diversas disciplinas, uniendo la ciencia en un esfuerzo colectivo para resolver problemas complejos. El primer capítulo presenta una innovación en la cuyicultura sostenible, explorando la suplementación alimenticia con harina de amaranto y cúrcuma en cuyes. El segundo capítulo se adentra en el ámbito social, analizando los Derechos Humanos desde la perspectiva de las poblaciones vulnerables. En el tercer capítulo, se introduce un enfoque innovador en ingeniería civil, utilizando polímeros reciclados para el diseño de revestimientos de cunetas. El cuarto capítulo examina el impacto económico de la facturación electrónica en el sector de imprentas, un avance tecnológico crucial en la era digital. Finalmente, el quinto capítulo explora la influencia del neuromarketing en la rentabilidad de las PYMES, uniendo la neurociencia y el marketing para optimizar las estrategias comerciales. Este libro es un testimonio de cómo la integración multidisciplinaria puede conducir a soluciones innovadoras y sostenibles.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aGuamán Rivera, Santiago Alexandereauthor1 aHerrera-Feijoo, Robinson J.eauthor1 aParedes-Peralta, Armando Vinicioeauthor1 aRuiz-Sánchez, Clara Isabeleauthor1 aBonilla-Morejón, Diego Marceloeauthor1 aSamaniego-Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aParedes-Fierro, Eduardo Joselitoeauthor1 aFernández-Vélez, Cristina Vanessaeauthor1 aAlmeida-Blacio, Jorge Hernáneauthor1 aRivadeneira-Moreira, Julio Césareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1470zAccess online version02404nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245006600134264004300200264006400243264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505051700484520070601001542003001707546001601737588004101753650003101794700002801825700002801853700003301881710003901914856007701953OTLid0001471MnU20260406020632.0m     o  d s      cr            230818s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aDeveloping Human PotentialbA Personal Approach to Leadership 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLincoln, NebraskabUniversity of Nebraska Pressbooksc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How I See Myself -- Defining My Personal Values -- Definining My Vision & Setting Personal Goals -- Communicating with Leadership Congruence -- Nonverbal Communication & Active Listening in Small Groups -- Developing Trust & Being Trustworthy -- Perceptions are Only From My Point of View -- Diversity & Inclusion -- Meeting the Challenge of Effective Groups & Teams Membership -- Engaging with Empathy -- Managing Conflict Expectations -- Leadership & Civic Engagement: Becoming the Change Maker0 aThis Online Educational Resource (OER) textbook provides an overview and introduction to personal leadership through the lens of how students can develop and maximize their own interpersonal skills. Interpersonal skills are crucial to navigating the professional world and can help us to better understand ourselves. This textbook approaches interpersonal skills from a personal level and allows the reader to immerse themselves into activities and scholarship across topical areas. Through the text, learners can create their own Personal Leadership Philosophy and expand this into a Civic Leadership Philosophy to help them understand the impact leaders can have on their communities and workplaces.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMatkin, Gina S.eauthor1 aHeadrick, Jasoneauthor1 aSunderman, Hannah M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1471zAccess online version02449nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245006100162264004300223264003700266264001200303300002200315336002600337337002600363338003600389341002800425490002700453505082100480520054301301542004101844546001601885588004001901650004201941710003901983856007702022OTLid0001472MnU20260406020558.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aBreen, Saraheauthor00aBiomedical Engineering Lab ManualcSarah BreennVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNorman, OklahomabSHAREOKc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1 Introduction to Functional Human Models -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 1 Lab Procedure -- Post Lab Activity -- Module 2 Functional Human Models -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 2 Lab Procedure -- Module 2 Post Lab Activity -- Module 3 Musculoskeletal Lever Systems -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 3 Lab Procedure -- Module 3 Post Lab Activity -- Module 4 Bioimaging Introduction -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 4 Lab Procedure -- Module 4 Post Lab Activity -- Module 5 Factors Influencing Force Production -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 5 Lab Procedure -- Module 5 Post Lab Activity -- Module 6 Uniaxial Testing & Anisotropy -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 6 Lab Procedure -- Module 6 Post Lab Activity -- Module 7 Uniaxial Testing of Viscoelastic Material -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 7 Lab Procedure -- Module 7 Post Lab Activity0 aThe lab manual was written as the first installment that coincides with two lab courses taught at the University of Oklahoma (BME3171, BME3181). These courses are designed to provide Biomedical Engineering students with lab skills and experience in biomedical engineering research and clinical techniques. This manual is used with BME3171 Lab 1 and the following topics are covered in this lab manual; functional human models, musculoskeletal lever systems, bioimaging (ultrasound), bioelectricity (electromyography), & uni-axial testing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1472zAccess online version02321nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245006100162264004300223264003700266264001200303300002200315336002600337337002600363338003600389341002800425490002700453505072600480520051001206542004101716546001601757588004001773650004201813710003901855856007701894OTLid0001473MnU20260323020513.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aBreen, Saraheauthor00aBiomedical Engineering Lab ManualcSarah BreennVolume 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNorman, OklahomabSHAREOKc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 1 Introduction to BME3181 & Microscopy -- Module 1 Lab Procedure -- Module 2 Micropipetting & Dilutions -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 2 Lab Procedure -- Procedure Exercise 1 (Quick Test) -- Procedure Exercise 2 (Pipetting Challenge) -- Module 3 Fluorescence -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 3 Lab Procedure -- Module 4 Aseptic Technique & Cell Passaging -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 4 Lab Procedure -- Module 4 Post Lab Activity -- Module 5 Live/Dead Assay -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 5 Lab Procedure -- Module 5 Post Lab Activity -- Module 6 Primary Cell Isolation -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 6 Lab Procedure -- Module 7 dsDNA Quantification Assay -- Pre Lab-Review -- Module 7 Lab Procedure -- Module 7 Post Lab Activity0 aThe lab manual was written as the second installment that coincides with two lab courses taught at the University of Oklahoma (BME3171, BME3181). These courses are designed to provide Biomedical Engineering students with lab skills and experience in biomedical engineering research and clinical techniques. This manual is used with BME3181 Biomedical Engineering Lab 2 and the following wet lab topics are covered in this lab manual; bioimaging, cell culture, tissue engineering, live-dead and DNA assays.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1473zAccess online version02497nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003100155245006100186264004300247264006400290264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505033100531520104300862542001601905546001601921588004001937650004201977710003902019856007702058OTLid0001474MnU20260330020544.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463666923  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aSchuurman, Michieleauthor00aAir Safety InvestigationbThe JourneycMichiel Schuurman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication -- Introduction -- How to read this book -- Chapter 1 What is an Air Safety Investigation? -- Chapter 2 Gathering the Facts -- Chapter 3 Logic and Hypothesis -- Chapter 4 Scrutinizing the Speculation -- Chapter 5 What do we Know? -- Chapter 6 Can we Learn Anything? -- Epilogue -- Answers to questions -- References0 a"Air Safety Investigation – The Journey" is an introductory book that explores the world of air safety investigation. Unlike a how-to manual for investigating aviation accidents, this book focuses on the essential knowledge and mindset required to conduct a safety investigation. It covers the various phases of an investigation, from gathering facts to formulating safety recommendations, with each chapter addressing a different relevant aspect. With the increasing complexity of investigations, critical thinking, logic, and speculation are essential skills for investigators to possess. This book delves into these topics, offering thought-provoking examples and questions to address the challenges of drawing conclusions and obtaining positive investigative outcomes. Its aim is to help students and readers interested in air safety develop the necessary mindset and knowledge to conduct an investigation. By the end of the book, readers will gain a deeper understanding of the complexities involved in an air safety investigation.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1474zAccess online version02120nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100002700143245008700170264004300257264005400300264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505053000531520043201061542001601493546001601509588004101525650003301566650003101599710003901630856007701669OTLid0001475MnU20260406020558.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aJohnson, Jerryeauthor00aRomance Lands and Conservation in the Greater Yellowstone EcosystemcJerry Johnson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBozeman, MontanabMontana State Universityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Romance and Sludge in the American West -- Chapter 2: 1862-1872 A Decade for the West and a National Park for the World -- Chapter 3: A Short lesson in conservation biology -- Chapter 4: Four New Things -- Chapter 5: Institutions - How things get done -- Chapter 6: Transitions in GYE -- Chapter 7: A new view of public lands in GYE -- Chapter 8: A Word for Private Lands -- Chapter 9: It's Not All Bad but Let's Be Careful Out There -- Chapter 10: What does the future hold? A Conclusion, of Sorts0 aTo fully grasp the significance of this story we explore the history of the West, the development of Yellowstone National Park, something about the discipline of conservation biology and related policy sciences, Grizzly bear recovery, and eventually the contemporary economy and social setting of the region. The Greater Yellowstone is a model of how to build a regional system of international importance and local well-being.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1475zAccess online version02239nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100009600138245015700234264004300391264007600434264001200510300002200522336002600544337002600570338003600596341002800632490002700660505031900687520060801006542004101614546001601655588004001671650002601711650002401737710003901761856007701800OTLid0001476MnU20260406020558.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aDepartment of Writing Studies, Rhetoric, and Composition, Roger Williams Universityeauthor00aThinking RhetoricallybWriting for Professional and Public AudiencescRoger Williams University Department of Writing Studies, Rhetoric, and Composition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBristol, Rhode IslandbRoger Williams University Open Publishingc2023. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- Defining Professional and Public Writing -- Part I. Content Knowledge -- Part II. Writing Process Knowledge -- Part III. Rhetorical Knowledge -- Part IV. Genre Knowledge -- Part V. Discourse Community Knowledge -- Part VI. Metacognitive Knowledge -- RWU Writing Program Glossary0 aThinking Rhetorically: Writing in Professional and Public Contexts is dedicated to introducing students to a lifelong commitment of engaging with these problems that matter. As an academic discipline, Writing Studies’ contribution to engaging with problems can be applied to all areas of study and to all types of problems because we focus on the way language itself—discourse—is created and exchanged in the service of engaging problems. Writing Studies deepens students’ rhetorical awareness of how the ongoing conversations between groups of people shape and express the problems that matter.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1476zAccess online version03026nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245017600143264004300319264007000362264001200432300002200444336002600466337002600492338003600518341002800554490002700582505036300609520124300972542004102215546002702256588004102283650002502324650003102349700003902380700004402419700004902463710003902512856007702551OTLid0001477MnU20260406020559.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH100aIntroducción a la estructura ecológica principal del Distrito Capital y su región ambientalbConceptos fundamentales, ordenamiento territorial e instrumentos jurídicos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Nociones necesarias para estudiar y comprender las instituciones del ordenamiento ambiental del territorio -- Capítulo II: Conceptos centrales de la EEP - Artículos del subcapítulo 1 del Capítulo 4 del Título Segundo -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl Distrito Capital, como entidad territorial localizada en el centro de la Sábana de Bogota, tiene la responsabilidad política y administrativa de liderar la sostenibilidad ambiental y articularse con la Corporación Autónoma Regional de Cundinamarca (CAR) con miras a preservar la estructura ecológica del territorio y propiciar usos sostenibles del suelo (urbano y rural). Para ello existe un conjunto de herramientas e instrumentos administrativos contemplados en el Plan de Ordenamiento Territorial (POT) del Distrito Capital que todos los ciudadanos deberían conocer y usar para proteger los ecosistemas de la sabana de Bogota y los derechos humanos asociados con la sostenibilidad ambiental. El objetivo de esta publicación es contribuir a la divulgación de dichas herramientas, mediante conceptualización y síntesis de la información jurídica relevante sobre la materia. Para lograr este propósito, este libro está estructurado en dos partes, la primera plantea una contextualización teórica e historia sobre el ordenamiento territorial en Bogotá y la segunda parte presenta los principales conceptos de la estructura ecológica principal siguiendo el articulado del POT de Bogotá - Decreto Distrital 555 de 2021.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aVargas-Fonseca, Alan Davideauthor1 aBorja-Cuadros, Odilia Margaritaeauthor1 aCristiano-Mendivelso, Julián Felipeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1477zAccess online version03079nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139100003600146245012900182264004300311264007000354264001200424300002200436336002600458337002600484338003600510341002800546490002700574505032100601520117700922542004102099546002702140588004102167650002502208650003102233700004602264700004702310700003002357700004302387700004102430700004602471710003902517856007702556OTLid0001478MnU20260330020545.0m     o  d s      cr            230822s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aReymundo-Soto, Emilianoeauthor00aObligaciones Tributarias y su Influencia en la Recaudación Fiscal de las Micro y Pequeñas EmpresascEmiliano Reymundo-Soto 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo III: Metodología -- Capítulo IV: Análisis de resultados -- Capítulo V: Discusión, Conclusiones y Recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa investigación titulada: “Obligaciones tributarias y su influencia en la recaudación fiscal de las micro y pequeñas empresas” tuvo como propósito reflejar la influencia de las obligaciones tributarias en la recaudación fiscal, también busca reducir la informalidad, y ampliar la base tributaria mediante beneficios otorgados a las micro y pequeñas empresas que se acojan a los regímenes tributarios, con la finalidad de aumentar la recaudación fiscal. La estructura se desarrollado en base de cuatro capítulos, el CAPÍTULO I trata sobre el planteamiento del problema, la formulación, objetivos y justificación, CAPÍTULO II abarcó los antecedentes de estudio, bases teóricas sobre el tema de investigación, bases conceptuales, definición de términos, hipótesis, variables y la operacionalización de variables, el CAPÍTULO III contiene los materiales y métodos que se utilizó en el presente estudio finalmente el CAPÍTULO IV trató sobre la discusión de resultados, análisis de la información y la prueba de hipótesis. Como parte final del presente estudio comprende las conclusiones, recomendaciones, referencias bibliográficas y anexos.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aFernández-Condori, Xiomara Paduaeauthor1 aEchevarria-Quispe, Estheysi Viannyeauthor1 aQuispe-Cusi, Yurieauthor1 aGutiérrez-Quispe, Erick Zenoneauthor1 aPalacios-Aguilar, Luis Julioeauthor1 aRamírez-Laurente, Andrés Jesúseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1478zAccess online version03045nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000800154050001500162050000700177100002800184245006200212250001600274264004300290264003900333264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505086800549520076601417542001602183546001602199588004002215650003902255650003202294650002602326650002602352650005002378650003102428710003902459856007702498OTLid0001479MnU20260406020558.0m     o  d s      cr            230824s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780473722944  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aB72 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aFrické, Martineauthor00aArtificial Intelligence and LibrarianshipcMartin Frické  a3rd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aTucson, ArizonabSoftOptionc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Intellectual Background -- Chapter 2: Chatbots -- Chapter 3: Language Models -- Chapter 4: Large Language Models -- Chapter 5: Large Multimodal Models -- Chapter 6: Evaluation and the Future -- Chapter 7: Bias and Unfairness -- Chapter 8: Bias in Machine Learning and Librarianship -- Chapter 9: What Might Natural Language Processing (NLP) Bring to Librarianship? -- Chapter 10: What are the Opportunities for Librarians? -- Chapter 11: Librarians as Synergists -- Chapter 12: Librarians as Sentries -- Chapter 13: Librarians as Educators -- Chapter 14: Librarians as Managers -- Chapter 15: Librarians as Astronauts -- Appendix A: Some Theoretical Background to Librarianship -- Appendix B: Working with LLMS -- Appendix C: Two Important Methodological Points -- Appendix D: Causal Diagrams -- Appendix E: Knowledge Graphs -- Glossary -- Bibliography0 aCourses on Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Librarianship in ALA-accredited Masters of Library and Information (MLIS) degrees are rare. We have all been surprised by ChatGPT and similar Large Language Models. Generative AI is an important new area for librarianship. It is also developing so rapidly that no one can really keep up. Those trying to produce AI courses for the MLIS degree need all the help they can get. This book is a gesture of support. It consists of about 100,000 words on the topic, with a 4-500 item bibliography. The third edition has changes and additions. These include: a new Chapter 6 on evaluation and the future new materials in Chapter 5 on current large language and multimodal models scattered revisions, corrections, and updates.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1479zAccess online version02817nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245013200162264004300294264006900337264001200406300002200418336002600440337002600466338003600492341002800528490002700556505023900583520142200822542002702244546001602271588004002287650002402327710003902351856007702390OTLid0001480MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            230828s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aTuttle, Alexeauthor00aGeneral Inpatient Management of Pediatric Diabetes Mellitus at University of Iowa Stead Family Children's HospitalcAlex Tuttle 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit 1: An Overview of Diabetes Mellitus -- Unit 2: Insulin Basics -- Unit 3: Creating and Discussing Insulin Regimens -- Unit 4: Management of Pediatric Diabetes According to Stead Family Children's Hospital Protocols0 aThis eBook is a medical education resource intended to supplement the knowledge, skills, and attitudes of medical students and pediatric residents in furthering their own knowledge about the general inpatient management of pediatric diabetes mellitus. This book may be of further use to any physician, advanced practitioners, or nurses who may also encounter pediatric patients with diabetes mellitus in the inpatient hospital setting. This book is specific to protocols and preferences for pediatric diabetes management at the University of Iowa Stead Family Children's Hospital. However, it also contains overarching concepts that transcend location wherever pediatric diabetes may be managed. At the time of publication, this book includes 4 Units, each consisting of 4-7 Chapters. Unit 1 introduces readers to an overview of diabetes mellitus, including its definition, diagnostic criteria, laboratory evaluation, clinical diagnosis, and key differences between Type 1 and Type 2 diabetes. Unit 2 dives into understanding different types of insulins and their uses. Unit 3 walks readers through the creation of initial insulin regimens for pediatric patients with new-onset diabetes. Lastly, Unit 4 dives into the details of pediatric diabetes management at Stead Family Children’s Hospitals according to the protocols and capabilities of the institution and preferences of the pediatric endocrinology division.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1480zAccess online version01752nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002800134245004900162264004300211264006200254264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505026500493520039500758542001601153546001601169588004001185650002501225700002401250710003901274856007701313OTLid0001481MnU20260316020643.0m     o  d s      cr            230828s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aBearman, Andreaeauthor00aTechnology Tools for LeaderscAndrea Bearman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPalni Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Design Thinking -- Chapter 2: Program Charter -- Chapter 3: Budgeting for New Technology -- Chapter 4: Progress Report -- Chapter 5: Communication -- Chapter 6: Failing Successfully -- Chapter 7: Continuous Improvement -- Chapter 8: Privacy Concerns0 aWith the vast and varied technologies available to leaders, it is no doubt managing these technologies can be challenging. Yet, leaders must have a sense of which technologies will help the organization and its members to be successful. While an organizational leader does not need to be a technology expert, having an awareness of the impact technology has on an organization is important.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aNoyes, Jilleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1481zAccess online version03054nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155100002700162245004300189264004300232264005900275264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505039000511520149700901542004102398546001602439588004002455650002602495650003102521710003902552856007702591OTLid0001482MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            230828s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798986876825  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aBikos, Lynetteeauthor00aReCentering Psych StatscLynette Bikos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSeattle, WAbSeattle Pacific University Libraryc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Ready_Set_R -- Preliminary Analyses -- One Sample t-tests -- Independent Samples t-test -- Paired Samples t-test -- One-way ANOVA -- Factorial (Between-Subjects) ANOVA -- One-Way Repeated Measures ANOVA -- Mixed Design ANOVA -- Analysis of Covariance -- Type I Error -- Examples for Follow-up to Factorial ANOVA -- One-Way Repeated Measures with a Multivariate Approach0 aTo center a variable in regression means to set its value at zero and interpret all other values in relation to this reference point. Regarding race and gender, researchers often center male and White at zero. Further, it is typical that research vignettes in statistics textbooks are similarly seated in a White, Western (frequently U.S.), heteronormative, framework. ReCentering Psych Stats seeks provide statistics training for psychology students (undergraduate, graduate, and post-doctoral) in a socially and culturally responsive way. All lessons use the open-source statistics program, R (and its associated packages). Each lesson includes a chapter and screencasted lesson, features a workflow for statistical decision-making, and includes all R code necessary to conduct the statistic. Research vignettes are drawn from the published psychology literature. When possible, these articles are authored by individuals who hold identities that have, been marginalized in the scientific literature; correctly use the statistic that is being taught in the lesson; and focus on issues of justice, equity, inclusion, or and diversity. When possible, lessons include interviews with researchers from the featured vignettes. Each chapter includes suggestions for practice that are graded in complexity, such that learners can choose the degree of challenge. ReCentering Psych Stats is perpetually-in-progress; suggestions for corrections or chapters are welcomed: ReCenteringPsychStats@spu.edu1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1482zAccess online version03961nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100003400156245005500190250001800245264004300263264005800306264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002500486490002700511505124800538520087001786532057802656542003003234546001603264588004003280650002603320650002403346700002703370700002603397710003903423856007703462OTLid0001483MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            230828s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780915996179  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aSchraffenberger, J.D.eauthor00aElements of Creative WritingcJ.D. Schraffenberger  a(2nd edition) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCedar Falls, IowabUniversity of Northern Iowac2023. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Fiction -- Chapter One: One Great Way to Write a Short Story -- Chapter Two: Plotting -- Chapter Three: Counterpointed Plotting -- Chapter Four: Showing and Telling -- Chapter Five: Characterization and Method Writing -- Chapter Six: Character and Dialogue -- Chapter Seven: Setting, Stillness, and Voice -- Chapter Eight: Point of View -- Chapter Nine: Learning the Unwritten Rules -- Poetry -- Chapter One: A Poetry State of Mind -- Chapter Two: The Architecture of a Poem -- Chapter Three: Sound -- Chapter Four: Inspiration and Risk -- Chapter Five: Endings and Beginnings -- Chapter Six: Figurative Language -- Chapter Seven: Forms, Forms, Forms -- Chapter Eight: Go to the Image -- Chapter Nine: The Difficult Simplicity of Short Poems and Revision -- Creative Nonfiction -- Chapter One: Creative Nonfiction and the Essay Beyond "Just The Facts" -- Chapter Two: Truth and Memory, Truth in Memory -- Chapter Three: Research and History -- Chapter Four: Writing Environments -- Chapter Five: Notes on Style -- Chapter Six: Figurative Language -- Chapter Seven: Imagery and the Senses -- Chapter Eight: Writing the Body -- Chapter Nine: Forms -- Back Matter -- Authors, NAR Staff, and Contributors -- Accessibility Statement0 aThis free and open access textbook introduces new writers to some basic elements of the craft of creative writing in the genres of fiction, poetry, and creative nonfiction. The authors—Rachel Morgan, Jeremy Schraffenberger, and Grant Tracey—are editors of the North American Review, the oldest and one of the most well-regarded literary magazines in the United States. We've selected nearly all of our readings and examples from writing that has appeared in our pages over the years. This 2nd edition includes several new topics and some new pieces from NAR. Because we had a hand in publishing these pieces originally, our perspective as editors permeates this book. As such, they hope that even seasoned writers might gain insight into the aesthetics of our magazine as we analyze and discuss some reasons this work is so remarkable—and therefore teachable.1 aThis ebook is displayed in the software Manifold; detailed documentation is available regarding Manifold's accessibility commitment and features, which strive to meet accessibility standards WCAG 2.1 AA. Multiple formats are provided, including online ebook and Google Doc, to allow for offline use and use with various accessibility software. The open licensing of this work allows for translation and changing formats as needed for any user, without additional permissions needed, as long as proper attribution is given and the license of each included work is followed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aMorgan, Racheleauthor1 aTracey, Granteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1483zAccess online version02767nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003600135245004500171264004300216264006100259264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505055600497520105001053542003002103546001602133588004002149650003802189650002602227700002402253710003902277856007702316OTLid0001484MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            230830s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aRojas-Primus, Constanzaeauthor00a¡Voy en camino!cConstanza Rojas-Primus 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- How to use ¡Voy en camino! -- Unidad 1 (Unit 1) - ¡A conocernos! (Let's Know Each Other!) -- Unidad 2 (Unit 2) - Las preferencias y la vida social (Preferences and Social Life) -- Unidad 3 (Unit 3) - Las descripciones (Descriptions) -- Unidad 4 (Unit 4) - La vida universitaria y el tiempo libre (University Life and Spare Time) -- Unidad 5 (Unit 5) - La rutina diaria (Daily Routine) -- Unidad 6 (Unit 6) - ¡A viajar! (Let's Travel!) -- Unidad 7 (Unit 7) - Historias y cuentos (Stories and Tales) -- Appendix: Grammar Tables -- Glossary0 a¡Voy en camino! means “I’m on my way” in Spanish. Since learning an additional language and the culture is a journey in itself, ¡Voy en camino! captures the voyage to get there. ¡Voy en camino! has been created to serve the first two introductory Spanish language courses at Kwantlen Polytechnic University (KPU) and to solidify our commitment to Zero Textbook Cost (ZTC). All units of study are designed to be interactive with embedded audio, videos and links for learners to practice the material along the way. Learners can self-pace and self-test their knowledge both individually and with the assistance of an instructor. ¡Voy en camino! has plenty of opportunities to practice writing and speaking with downloadable capabilities becoming a Spanish teaching and learning tool that promotes and supports sustainable renewable learning. With its digital format and open publication ¡Voy en camino! is also meant to join the Spanish teaching open education community and provide access to learning to interested users along the way.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aRobles, Anaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1484zAccess online version03851nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100007900137245013900216264004300355264006800398264001200466300002200478336002600500337002600526338003600552341002800588490002700616505073800643520188301381542002303264546001603287588004003303650004203343710003903385856007703424OTLid0001485MnU20260406020634.0m     o  d s      cr            230908s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aFederal Aviation Administration, U.S. Department of Transportationeauthor00aAviation Maintenance Technician HandbookbAirframe (FAA-H-8083-31B)cU.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Aircraft Structures -- Chapter 2: Aerodynamics, Aircraft Assembly, Rigging -- Chapter 3: Aircraft Fabric Covering -- Chapter 4: Aircraft Metal Structural Repair -- Chapter 5: Aircraft Welding -- Chapter 6: Aircraft Wood & Structural Repair -- Chapter 7: Advanced Composite Materials -- Chapter 8: Aircraft Painting & Finishing -- Chapter 9: Aircraft Electrical System -- Chapter 10: Aircraft Systems -- Chapter 11: Communication & Navigation -- Chapter 12: Hydraulic & Pneumatic Power Systems -- Chapter 13: Aircraft Landing Gear Systems -- Chapter 14: Aircraft Fuel Systems -- Chapter 15: Ice & Rain Protection -- Chapter 16: Cabin Environmental Control Systems -- Chapter 17: Fire Protection Systems -- Glossary -- Index0 aThe Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook—Airframe (FAA-H-8083-31B) is one of a series of three handbooks for persons preparing for certification as an airframe or powerplant mechanic. This handbook provides basic information on principles, fundamentals, and technical procedures in the subject matter areas relating to the airframe rating. It is designed to aid students enrolled in a formal course of instruction, as well as the individual who is studying on their own. Since the knowledge requirements for the airframe and powerplant ratings closely parallel each other in some subject areas, the chapters which discuss fire protection systems and electrical systems contain some material which is also duplicated in the Aviation Maintenance Technician Handbook—Powerplant (FAA-H-8083-32B). This handbook contains information on airframe construction features, assembly and rigging, fabric covering, structural repairs, and aircraft welding. The handbook also contains an explanation of the units that make up the various airframe systems. Because there are so many different types of aircraft in use today, it is reasonable to expect that differences exist in airframe components and systems. To avoid undue repetition, the practice of using representative systems and units is carried out throughout the handbook. Subject matter treatment is from a generalized point of view and should be supplemented by reference to manufacturers’ manuals or other textbooks if more detail is desired. This handbook is not intended to replace, substitute for, or supersede official regulations or manufacturers’ instructions. Occasionally the word “must” or similar language is used where the desired action is deemed critical. The use of such language is not intended to add to, interpret, or relieve a duty imposed by Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (14 CFR).1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1485zAccess online version02143nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245006800177264004300245264004300288264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505038500508520061000893542004101503546001601544588004101560650002801601650002401629710003901653856007701692OTLid0001486MnU20260406020559.0m     o  d s      cr            230908s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRS1-441 4aRA4401 aPolice, Sara B.eauthor00aPrecision Nutrition and Advanced Culinary MedicinecSara Police 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLexington, KentuckybUKnowledgec2023. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Culinary Challenges Preparation -- Emerging Concepts in Precision Nutrition -- Cardiovascular Disease & Nutritional Considerations -- Neurological and Mental Health Disorders & Nutritional Considerations -- Cancer & Nutritional Considerations -- Gastrointestinal (GI) Health, Microbiome & Nutritional Considerations -- Renal Conditions & Nutritional Considerations0 aThis electronic textbook (eBook) and/or eBook chapters are designed to accompany NS801, Precision Nutrition and Advanced Culinary Medicine, a 1-credit, 8-week online medical elective course for the University of Kentucky College of Medicine Office of Medical Education curricula. Reading for the course will be labeled to align with the content of the online course; such that Module 2 is aligned with Chapter 2, Module 3 with Chapter 3, and so on. As an open access textbook supported by the University of Kentucky Libraries Alternative Textbook program, all sources will be linked and readily available.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPharmacologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1486zAccess online version01986nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145100002900152245007500181264004300256264008400299264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002800505490002700533505034000560520037000900542002701270546001601297588004001313650002801353650003101381700002601412700003401438710003901472856007701511OTLid0001487MnU20260330020754.0m     o  d s      cr            230914s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645326147  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aMcAlister, Chriseauthor00aLost Without ItbHow GPS is more than just navigationcChris McAlister 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Acknowledgement of First Peoples -- Accessibility Information -- Acknowledgements -- About the Author -- Foreword -- Introduction -- Part I: Fundamentals -- Part II: Datums and Coordinates -- Part III: GNSS Basic Principles -- Part IV: Code Observable -- Part V: DGPS -- Part VI: Phase Observable -- Part VII: GNSS Projects0 aThe navigation that we get from GPS is just a tiny component of how it impacts our lives - from banking to mapping to just knowing where stuff is, it's now a critical part of how humanity functions. This book takes you through all the basics of how GPS works, kind of like a how-to, just in case zombies take out all those smart scientists that keep it all running!1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArea StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aKing, Deboraheeditor1 aHoffmann, Samaraeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1487zAccess online version03089nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100004000155245007300195264004300268264007000311264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505036100558520135500919542004102274546002702315588004102342650002402383700003702407700003102444700004702475700004102522710003902563856007702602OTLid0001488MnU20260406020600.0m     o  d s      cr            230914s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942714640  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aVallejo-López, Alida Bellaeauthor00aEnfermedades Respiratorias del Siglo XXIcAlida Bella Vallejo-López 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: COVID 19: conociendo al agente causal -- Capítulo II: Problemas respiratorios en el embarazo -- Capítulo III: El asma problemas respiratorios -- Capítulo IV: La fibrosis pulmonar y su impacto de en la salud -- Capítulo V: Aspergilosis en la función pulmonar -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEn el esquema actual, las Instituciones de Educación Superior, tienen la gran responsabilidad de apoyar en el crecimiento académico y orientar de forma permanente en el proceso de enseñanza- aprendizaje, a los integrantes de la comunidad universitaria, con el fin de aportar para un mejor desempeño de los aspirantes a profesionales, que asisten a sus aulas. Los problemas del aparato respiratorio han sido en los últimos tiempos causa de pérdidas de vidas, en especial desde la aparición del COVID 19 que trajo una pandemia de proporciones nunca vistas, es por esa razón que se considera importante realizar una recopilación de datos importantes referentes a esta temática de salud. Considerando que las enfermedades respiratorias constituyen problemas de salud que conllevan un alto riesgo de impacto en la calidad de vida de las personas y que pueden causar la muerte de las personas sino se detectan se tratan a tiempo, conocerlas y prevenirlas es una prioridad. En cada área de especialidad, se pretende cumplir con los estándares establecidos en forma ética e integral. En el área de la salud la misión es formar un profesional de calidad, con una visión integral del mundo, formar un hombre comprometido con los problemas de salud, que afectan a la humanidad, capaz de enfrentar situaciones críticas de la práctica cotidiana.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aRamírez-Amaya, Josefinaeauthor1 aKou-Guzmán, Juanaeauthor1 aValdez-Aguagallo, Franklin Rodolfoeauthor1 aRamírez- Morán, Lady Dianaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1488zAccess online version03571nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003400155245008300189264004300272264007000315264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505038900562520169200951542004102643546002702684588004102711650002402752700004402776700004302820700003202863700004102895700004602936700003902982710003903021856007703060OTLid0001489MnU20260406020600.0m     o  d s      cr            230914s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942714657  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aQuispe-Rojas, Rodrigoeauthor00aAnsiedad en la era COVID-19bEstado, Rasgo y ResilienciacRodrigo Quispe-Rojas 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo III: Metodología -- Capítulo IV: Análisis de resultados -- Capítulo V: Discusión, Conclusiones y Recomendaciones -- Discusión -- Conclusión -- Recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEsta investigación analiza los niveles de ansiedad-rasgo y ansiedad-estado, modificando una ansiedad-estado como un estado emocional inmediato, evolucionando en el tiempo. Mientras que la ansiedad rasgo se refiere a diferencias individuales relativamente estables en la ansiedad. Tuvo como objetivo determinar niveles de ansiedad estado - rasgo en tiempos de pandemia Covid-19 en trabajadores de Red de Salud Angaraes - Huancavelica, 2021. Metodología: investigación básica, nivel descriptivo, método analítico sintético, diseño no experimental, transaccional, descriptivo, técnica utilizada, encuesta, se utilizó Inventario Ansiedad Rasgo Estado (IDARE), se tuvo muestra de 110 trabajadores. Resultados: Concerniente a niveles de ansiedad estado, se evidencia nivel bajo 7,27%, nivel medio 41,82% y 50,91% nivel alto. Respecto a ansiedad rasgo, 6.36%, nivel bajo, 40,91 % nivel medio y el 52,73% nivel alto. Respecto al género para ansiedad estado, para femeninos 2.73% nivel bajo, 20.00% nivel medio y 30.91% nivel alto; para masculinos, 4,55% nivel bajo, 21,82% nivel medio y 20,00% nivel alto. De acuerdo con el género, ansiedad rasgo, femeninos presentan 1,82% nivel bajo, 20.00% nivel medio y 31,82% nivel alto. Género masculino presentan 4,55% nivel bajo, nivel medio 20,91% y 20,91% nivel alto. Respecto a edad, trabajadores de 21 a 30 años presentan ansiedad estado en nivel bajo (2,7%), 22,7% nivel medio, y 9,1% nivel alto; de 31 a 40 años 2,7% nivel bajo, nivel medio 13,6%, y 34,5% nivel alto. Conclusión: Los trabajadores de la Red de Salud Angaraes, presentan nivel alto de ansiedad estado 50,91%, respecto a ansiedad rasgo, presentan un nivel alto 52,73%.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPacovilca Alejo, Olga Vicentinaeauthor1 aZea-Montesinos, Cesar Ciprianoeauthor1 aUreta-Jurado, Raúleauthor1 aCamposano-Córdova, Yda Floreauthor1 aJauregui-Sueldo, Charo Jacquelineeauthor1 aSánchez-Ramos, Blas Oscareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1489zAccess online version03740nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100003900158245018100197264004300378264007000421264001200491300002200503336002600525337002600551338003600577341002800613490002700641505054500668520178901213542004103002546002703043588004103070650003403111700004403145700004903189710003903238856007703277OTLid0001490MnU20260302020509.0m     o  d s      cr            230914s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942714671  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aVargas-Fonseca, Alan Davideauthor00aEstructura Ecológica Principal de la Localidad de EngativábEstudio desde una perspectiva de ordenamiento territorial y sus instrumentos jurídicoscAlan David Vargas-Fonseca 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Historia de la localidad de Engativá -- Capítulo II: Ordenamineto -- Capítulo III: Características de la localidad -- Capítulo IV: Estructura Ecológica Principal de la localidad de Engativá -- Capítulo V: Componentes ambientales no previstos en la Enstructura Ecológica Principal -- Capítulo VI: Aeropuerto El Dorado como pasivo ambiental -- Capítulo VII: Conclusiones y observaciones finales -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEngativá es una de las 21 divisiones político – administrativas del Distrito Capital de Bogotá (Colombia), y se distingue por su composición urbana, una alta densidad poblacional y sus suelos dedicados principalmente al uso residencial, comercial e industrial. No obstante, este territorio también es caracterizable por la presencia de ecosistemas ricos en biodiversidad que se encuentran amenazados por factores asociados a la urbanización y los efectos del cambio climático. En esta localidad se encuentran tres humedales urbanos de categoría RAMSAR: Juan Amarillo, Jaboque y Santa María del Lago, además, en materia de ordenamiento hídrico, por la jurisdicción administrativa de Engativá se encuentra una porción de terreno de las cuencas del río Bogotá y del río salitre. Por otra parte, entre las áreas verdes constitutivas del tejido urbano como los parques de carácter vecinal, sobresalen las áreas complementarias para la conservación como el jardín botánico y el Parque regional La Florida. En relación con estos ecosistemas urbanos, que hacen parte de la Estructura Ecológica Principal del Distrito Capital y su región ambiental, el presente libro contiene un análisis de cada uno de estos componentes, resaltando elementos de su trayectoria histórica, las regulaciones jurídicas especializadas y una descripción de los desafíos específicos. Uno de los propósitos de la sistematización de información aquí recogida es hacer evidentes los matices del ordenamiento urbano ambiental gestionado en la jurisdicción administrativa de Engativá: un lugar donde convergen la vitalidad urbana y la naturaleza en un equilibrio frágil, marcado por una trayectoria compleja de degradación ambiental y adoptación de los habitantes al territorio.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aBorja-Cuadros, Odilia Margaritaeauthor1 aCristiano-Mendivelso, Julián Felipeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1490zAccess online version03701nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002300135245010700158264004300265264007600308264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505078900561520167601350542004103026546001503067588004103082650003803123650002603161700002403187710003903211856007703250OTLid0001491MnU20260406020600.0m     o  d s      cr            230914s2023    mnu     o     0   0 kor d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKim, Kyuineauthor00aBasic English for Teaching Korean 수업이 참 쉬워지는 한국어 교실 기초 영어cKyuin Kim 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSheffield, South Yorkshire, EnglandbThe University of Sheffieldc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a들어가며 -- 저자 -- 목차 -- 이 책의 특징 -- Part I: Class Orientation 수업 오리엔테이션 -- First Day of Class 첫 수업 시작하기 -- Class Introduction 수업 소개하기 -- Useful Expressions in Korean Class 수업 관련 유용한 표현 소개하기 -- Part II: Class Organization 수업 진행 -- Vocabulary 어휘 설명하기 -- Grammar 문법 설명하기 -- Speaking/Listening/Reading/Writing 말하기/듣기/읽기/쓰기 설명하기 -- Activity 활동 설명하기 -- Assignment & Next Class Notice 과제 및 다음 수업 안내하기 -- Part III: Class Wrap-up -- Assessment 평가 설명하기 -- Feedback & Wrap-up 피드백 및 학기 수업 마무리하기 -- Appendix -- Vocabulary 어휘 모아 보기 -- Expressions 표현 모아 보기0 aThe book is titled "Basic English for Teaching Korean," and its primary audience consists of Korean teachers whose native language is not English and who plan to work in an English-speaking country. Given the increasing global demand for learning the Korean language, many individuals aspire to become Korean instructors. Among these future Korean educators, there are those who lack confidence in their English speaking skills and seek guidance on effectively teaching the Korean language using clear and fluent English. They are also interested in acquiring the appropriate terminology and expressions for conveying aspects of the Korean language and culture when instructing in the classroom. Within this book, we will offer a comprehensive, step-by-step guide on how to teach the Korean language in English. "수업이 참 쉬워지는 한국어 교실 기초 영어"는 영어 실력이 부족하다고 느끼시거나 영어에 자신감이 없으 신 한국어 선생님들이 수업에 필요한 영어를 쉽게 익힐 수 있도록 구성한 책 입니다. 생소한 영어가 아닌, 우리가 알고 있는 영어를 최대한 활용 할 수 있도록 핵심적인 내용을 간결하게 담는 데 초점을 두었습니다. 책은 한 학기의 흐름에 맞추어 ‘수업 소개-수업 진행-수업 마무리’의 세 파트로 구분됩니다. 각 파트를 이루는 챕터들은 세부 상황으로 구 분하여 핵심 단어와 표현, 응용 문장과 대화를 수록했습니다. 설레는 학기의 시작부터 마음 따뜻해지는 학기 마무리까지 이 책 한 권으로 선생님들께 도움을 드릴 수 있다면 좋겠습니다.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Korean.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aPark, Seheeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1491zAccess online version01841nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100003000144245005200174264004300226264008400269264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505037400530520029300904542004101197546001601238588004001254650002601294650003101320710003901351856007701390OTLid0001492MnU20260406020829.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aScarbrough, Stevyeauthor00aPsychology of Human RelationscStevy Scarbrough 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWelcome -- Chapter 1: Self-Concept -- Chapter 2: Cultural Diversity -- Chapter 3: Behavioral Change -- Chapter 4: Personality Development -- Chapter 5: Emotions -- Chapter 6: Perception -- Chapter 7: Interpersonal Communication -- Chapter 8: Stress -- Chapter 9: Conflict Resolution -- Chapter 10: Workplace Success -- Appendix A: Assignments -- Appendix B: Discussions0 aUnderstanding human relations is a valuable skill for anyone entering into the job market. The aim of this textbook is to aid readers in understanding their own behaviors and the behaviors of others with the intent of engaging in positive interactions in personal and professional spaces.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1492zAccess online version02140nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002500168245003900193264004300232264006400275264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505024100516520058800757542001601345546002301361588004001384650004201424650003801466700003801504700003101542700002901573710003901602856007701641OTLid0001493MnU20260406020635.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2023    mnu     o     0   0 dut d  a9789463667241  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aCool, Jan C.eauthor00aWerktuigkundige SystemencJan Cool 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSystemen -- Modelvorming -- Evenwichten -- Wrijving en weerstand -- Stabiliteit -- Mechanische versterkers -- Spanningen en vervormingen -- Materialen -- Veren -- Aandrijving -- Dynamische systemen -- Comparologie -- Energie -- Eenheden0 aHet boek Werktuigkundige Systemen is een compacte inleiding op het systeemdenken in de werktuigbouwkunde, met nadruk op inzicht en grafische methoden, gelardeerd met prikkelende werkingsprincipes en constructie-elementen. Velen merken dat ze nog lang nadat ze het vak gedaan hebben dit boek als naslagwerk gebruiken en het steeds meer gaan waarderen, ook omdat het boek de basis legt voor veel vervolgvakken en projecten. Het boek is al jarenlang in gebruik bij eerstejaars studenten Werktuigbouwkunde aan de TU Delft. Diverse docenten gebruiken het bij vakken of ontwerp­projecten.1 fAttribution  aIn Dutch; Flemish.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks1 aTuijthof, Gabriëlle J.M.eeditor1 aRadaelli, Giuseppeeeditor1 aVroom, Regine W.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1493zAccess online version02890nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002900168245010000197264004300297264005000340264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505016500567520150300732542001602235546001602251588004102267650004202308650003802350710003902388856007702427OTLid0001494MnU20240325083727.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780988881129  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aVenkataraman, P.eauthor00aEssential Mechanics - Statics and Strength of Materials with MATLAB and OctavecP. Venkataraman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aRochester, New YorkbRIT Scholar Worksc2023. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreliminaries -- Helpful Concepts -- Why Designs Fail? -- Particles and Equilibrium -- Rigid Body -- Truss -- Beams and Bending -- Torsion in Shafts -- Buckling0 aEssential Mechanics - Statics and Strength of Materials with MATLAB and Octave combines two core engineering science courses - “Statics” and “Strength of Materials” - in mechanical, civil, and aerospace engineering. It weaves together various essential topics from Statics and Strength of Materials to allow discussing structural design from the very beginning. The traditional content of these courses are reordered to make it convenient to cover rigid body equilibrium and extend it to deformable body mechanics.The e-book covers the most useful topics from both courses with computational support through MATLAB/Octave. The traditional approach for engineering content is emphasized and is rigorously supported through graphics and analysis. Prior knowledge of MATLAB is not necessary. Instructions for its use in context is provided and explained. It takes advantage of the numerical, symbolic, and graphical capability of MATLAB for effective problem solving. This computational ability provides a natural procedure for What if? exploration that is important for design. The book also emphasizes graphics to understand, learn, and explore design. The idea for this book, the organization, and the flow of content is original and new. The integration of computation, and the marriage of analytical and computational skills is a new valuable experience provided by this e-book. Most importantly the book is very interactive with respect to the code as it appears along with the analysis.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1494zAccess online version02740nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002500164245005900189264004300248264006400291264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505044000532520105700972542001602029546001602045588004002061650003502101650002702136700002402163700002702187710003902214856007702253OTLid0001495MnU20260406020601.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463667401  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 avan Kan, Joseauthor00aNumerical Methods in Scientific ComputingcJos van Kan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReview of some basic mathematical concept -- A crash course in PDE’s -- Finite difference methods -- Finite volume methods -- Minimization problems in physics -- The numerical solution of minimization problems -- The weak formulation and Galerkin’s method -- Extension of the FEM -- Solution of large systems of equations -- The heat- or diffusion equation -- The wave equation -- The transport equation -- Moving boundary problems0 aThis is a book about numerically solving partial differential equations occurring in technical and physical contexts and the authors have set themselves a more ambitious target than to just talk about the numerics. Their aim is to show the place of numerical solutions in the general modeling process and this must inevitably lead to considerations about modeling itself. Partial differential equations usually are a consequence of applying first principles to a technical or physical problem at hand. That means, that most of the time the physics also have to be taken into account especially for validation of the numerical solution obtained. This book aims especially at engineers and scientists who have ’real world’ problems. It will concern itself less with pesky mathematical detail. For the interested reader though, we have included sections on mathematical theory to provide the necessary mathematical background. Since this treatment had to be on the superficial side we have provided further reference to the literature where necessary.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aSegal, Guuseauthor1 aVermolen, Fredeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1495zAccess online version03225nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050000800156100002500164245006900189264004300258264006400301264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505020700542520172100749542001602470546001602486588004002502650003502542650002702577700002402604700002702628700003202655710003902687856007702726OTLid0001496MnU20260406020601.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463667326  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA11 avan Kan, Joseauthor00aClassical Numerical Methods in Scientific ComputingcJos van Kan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReview of some basic mathematical concepts -- A crash course in PDEs -- Finite difference methods -- Finite volume methods -- Non-linear equations -- The heat- or diffusion equation -- The wave equation0 aPartial differential equations are paramount in mathematical modelling with applications in engineering and science. The book starts with a crash course on partial differential equations in order to familiarize the reader with fundamental properties such as existence, uniqueness and possibly existing maximum principles. The main topic of the book entails the description of classical numerical methods that are used to approximate the solution of partial differential equations. The focus is on discretization methods such as the finite difference, finite volume and finite element method. The manuscript also makes a short excursion to the solution of large sets of (non)linear algebraic equations that result after application of discretization method to partial differential equations. The book treats the construction of such discretization methods, as well as some error analysis, where it is noted that the error analysis for the finite element method is merely descriptive, rather than rigorous from a mathematical point of view. The last chapters focus on time integration issues for classical time-dependent partial differential equations. After reading the book, the reader should be able to derive finite element methods, to implement the methods and to judge whether the obtained approximations are consistent with the solution to the partial differential equations. The reader will also obtain these skills for the other classical discretization methods. Acquiring such fundamental knowledge will allow the reader to continue studying more advanced methods like meshfree methods, discontinuous Galerkin methods and spectral methods for the approximation of solutions to partial differential equations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aApplied mathematicsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aSegal, Guuseauthor1 aVermolen, Fredeauthor1 aKraaijevanger, Hanseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1496zAccess online version02360nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100003300163245009300196250001200289264004300301264006400344264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505064900585520046001234542001601694546001601710588004001726650003801766650004201804710003901846856007701885OTLid0001497MnU20260406020601.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463667128  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aMontagne, Anton J.M.eauthor00aStructured Electronics DesignbA Conceptual Approach to Amplifier DesigncAnton Montagne  a3rd ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Modeling and specification of amplifiers -- Amplification Mechanism -- Active Devices -- Basic amplification: CS stage -- Balancing techniques -- Design of feedback amplifier configurations -- Application and specification of operational amplifiers -- Introduction to amplifier biasing -- Modeling of negative feedback circuits -- Amplifier performance and controller requirements -- Frequency compensation -- Local feedback stages -- Multi-stage Feedback Amplifiers -- Amplifier Biasing -- Signal Modeling (selected topics) -- System Modeling (selected topics) -- Network Theory (selected topics) -- Noise in electronic systems0 aMany people consider analog electronic circuit design complex. This is because designers can achieve the desired performance of a circuit in many ways. Together, theoretical concepts, circuit topologies, electronic devices, their operating conditions, and the system's physical construction constitute an enormous design space in which it is easy to get lost. For this reason, analog electronics often is regarded as an art rather than a solid discipline.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1497zAccess online version04341nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002900166245003600195250002000231264004300251264005900294264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505193700527520121702464542004103681546001603722588004103738650002503779650002303804710003903827856007703866OTLid0001498MnU20260406020635.0m     o  d s      cr            230928s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781951693985  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aMcMurry, John E.eauthor00aOrganic ChemistrycJohn McMurry  aA Tenth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication and Preface -- Chapter 1: Structure and Bonding -- Chapter 2: Polar Covalent Bonds; Acids and Bases -- Chapter 3: Organic Compounds: Alkanes and Their Stereochemistry -- Chapter 4: Organic Compounds: Cycloalkanes and Their Stereochemistry -- Chapter 5: Stereochemistry at Tetrahedral Centers -- Chapter 6: An Overview of Organic Reactions -- Chapter 7: Alkenes: Structure and Reactivity -- Chapter 8: Alkenes: Reactions and Synthesis -- Chapter 9: Alkynes: An Introduction to Organic Synthesis -- Chapter 10: Organohalides -- Chapter 11: Reactions of Alkyl Halides: Nucleophilic Substitutions and Eliminations -- Chapter 12: Structure Determination: Mass Spectrometry and Infrared Spectroscopy -- Chapter 13: Structure Determination: Nuclear Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy -- Chapter 14: Conjugated Compounds and Ultraviolet Spectroscopy -- Chapter 15: Benzene and Aromaticity -- Chapter 16: Chemistry of Benzene: Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution -- Chapter 17: Alcohols and Phenols -- Chapter 18: Ethers and Epoxides; Thiols and Sulfides -- Chapter 19: Aldehydes and Ketones: Nucleophilic Addition Reactions -- Chapter 20: Carboxylic Acids and Nitriles -- Chapter 21: Carboxylic Acid Derivatives: Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution Reactions -- Chapter 22: Carbonyl Alpha-Substitution Reactions -- Chapter 23: Carbonyl Condensation Reactions -- Chapter 24: Amines and Heterocycles -- Chapter 25: Biomolecules: Carbohydrates -- Chapter 26: Biomolecules: Amino Acids, Peptides, and Proteins -- Chapter 27: Biomolecules: Lipids -- Chapter 28: Biomolecules: Nucleic Acids -- Chapter 29: The Organic Chemistry of Metabolic Pathways -- Chapter 30: Orbitals and Organic Chemistry: Pericyclic Reactions -- Chapter 31: Synthetic Polymers -- Appendix A. Nomenclature of Polyfunctional Organic Compounds -- Appendix B. Acidity Constants for Some Organic Compounds -- Appendix C. Glossary -- Appendix D. Periodic Table -- Answer Key0 aJohn McMurry's Organic Chemistry is renowned as the most clearly written book available for organic chemistry. In John McMurry's words, "I wrote this book because I love writing. I get great pleasure and satisfaction from taking a complicated subject, turning it around until I see it clearly from a new angle, and then explaining it in simple words." In Organic Chemistry: A Tenth Edition from OpenStax, McMurry continues this tradition while updating scientific discoveries, highlighting new applications, scrutinizing every piece of art, and providing example problems to assist students. Organic Chemistry: A Tenth Edition continues to meet the scope and sequence of a two-semester organic chemistry course that follows a functional group approach. A highlighted list of changes along with a detailed table of contents and ancillary descriptions can be found on the Instructor and Student resources sections of this page. John McMurry decided to publish Organic Chemistry: A Tenth Edition under an open license as a tribute to his son, Peter McMurry, who passed away from cystic fibrosis in December 2019. Please click here to learn more about Peter's legacy and to support the fight against cystic fibrosis.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1498zAccess online version03226nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002800155245010400183264004300287264006800330264001200398300002200410336002600432337002600458338003600484341002800520490002700548505137900575520069801954542001602652546001602668588004002684650002402724710003902748856007702787OTLid0001499MnU20260406020635.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781439921289  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aSnyder, Sean E.eauthor02aA Developmental Systems Guide for Child and Adolescent Behavioral Health PractitionerscSean Snyder 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Broad Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Theoretical and Practical Foundations -- Our Framework within the Developmental Systems Perspective -- A Developmental Systems Approach to Understanding Race and Ethnicity within Child Development and Psychopathology -- Assessment, Clinical Formulation, and Diagnosis: A Biopsychosocial Framework within the Developmental Systems Lens -- Psychosocial Intervention and Treatment: From Problem to Action -- Psychopharmacology through a Developmental Systems Lens -- Therapeutic Approaches for Specific Disorders -- Intellectual Disabilities/Intellectual Developmental Disorders (IDD) -- Autism Spectrum Disorder in Children and Adolescents -- Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder in Children and Adolescents -- Depressive Disorders in Children and Adolescents -- Anxiety Disorders in Children and Adolescents -- Trauma and Stressor Related Disorders in Children and Adolescents -- Disruptive Behavior Disorders in Youth -- Substance Use Disorders in Youth -- Eating Disorders in Children and Adolescents -- Psychosis in Children and Adolescents -- Suicide and Self-Injurious Thoughts and Behaviors in Children and Adolescents -- Gender, Sexuality, and Psychosocial Care -- Organizational Considerations -- Clinical Supervision of Youth-Serving Clinicians -- Getting Evidence-Based Interventions to People: Implementation Science -- Contributors -- Image Credits0 aA Developmental Systems Guide for Child and Adolescent Behavioral Health Practitioners provides clinicians with actionable evidence-based practices for the assessment, diagnosis, and treatment of child and adolescent mental and behavioral health. This approach combines developmental psychology and ecological systems in recognition of the fact that children’s developmental challenges, tasks, and capacities intersect with the risks and protective factors of their environment. Chapters feature detailed case studies and conclude with conversations with clinicians in which they share targeted recommendations for patient evaluation, treatment approaches, and family engagement and support.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1499zAccess online version02076nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003200155245007000187264004300257264003600300264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505050300513520044201016542004101458546001601499588004101515650004201556710003901598856007701637OTLid0001500MnU20260406020601.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781970194005  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aCarpinelli, John D.eauthor03aAn Animated Introduction to Digital Logic DesigncJohn Carpinelli 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNewark, NJbNJIT Libraryc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Background -- Chapter 1: Digital Systems and Numbers -- Chapter 2: Boolean Algebra -- Part II: Combinatorial Logic -- Chapter 3: Digital Logic Fundamentals -- Chapter 4: More Complex Components -- Chapter 5: More Complex Functions -- Part III: Sequential Logic -- Chapter 6: Sequential Components -- Chapter 7: More Complex Sequential Components -- Chapter 8: Sequential Circuits -- Part IV: Advanced Topics -- Chapter 9: Asynchronous Sequential Circuits -- Chapter 10: Programmable Devices0 aThis book is designed for use in an introductory course on digital logic design, typically offered in computer engineering, electrical engineering, computer science, and other related programs. Such a course is usually offered at the sophomore level. This book makes extensive use of animation to illustrate the flow of data within a digital system and to step through some of the procedures used to design and optimize digital circuits.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1500zAccess online version02351nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002600137245005900163264004300222264008400265264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505025600526520078500782542004101567546001601608588004001624650002401664700002601688700002601714700002601740700003001766700002901796710003901825856007701864OTLid0001501MnU20260406020635.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aHamper, Chriseauthor00aOregon EMS Psychomotor Skills Lab ManualcChris Hamper 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSafety -- Assessment Tasks -- Team Function -- Airway and Breathing Skills -- Dynamic Multi-Skill Assessments -- Trauma Operations -- Medical Operations -- Pharmacology -- Pediatric & Obstetrics -- Medical Patient Assessment Team Lead Final Evaluation0 aEmergency Medical Technicians (EMTs) must be prepared for an array of possible emergencies while on duty. These skills must be ingrained through practice to withstand the stress of an emergency scene: ready at a moment’s notice, should the patient condition necessitate. Within this book you will find many of the skills an EMT will be expected to perform. Each student is required to complete each skill a minimum number of times. This effort will assist the instructional team in tracking your progress, as well as provide you with the documentation necessary to prove proficiency for national and state certification. The skills in this text are important to master but remember, a truly proficient EMT is refreshing old skills and acquiring new ones throughout their career.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aCurtz, Carmeneauthor1 aKennel, Jamieeauthor1 aEdwins, Hollyeauthor1 aClasseen, Micheleeeditor1 aWhitman, Kristineeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1501zAccess online version02515nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245009900162264004300261264006100304264001200365300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002800487490002700515505012800542520121800670542004101888546001601929588004101945650002401986700002702010710003902037856007702076OTLid0001502MnU20260406020635.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aTaylor, Dawneauthor00aUrinalysis AtlasbA Pictorial Guide to Formed Elements in Urine (Doty and Taylor)cDawn Taylor 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Cellular Elements -- Casts -- Crystals -- Yeast, Parasites and Bacteria -- Artifacts and Mucus -- Resources0 aIn Medical Laboratory Science (MLS) Urinalysis course, students learn to evaluate normal and abnormal formed urinary elements through microscopic examination of urine sediment. They learn to interpret results and correlate with other laboratory data to identify disease. Access to quality atlases are a vital tool in the students’ learning process. Because the cost of printing pictures is so great, the price of printed atlases is high. The number of images included is limited. And many excellent atlases are now out of print. This project seeks to eliminate those challenges for students by giving access to an Open Educational Resource (OER) atlas for urinalysis. This format is easily accessed during students’ time on campus and will continue into their careers as medical laboratory scientists. There are currently not many medical subject resources available as open resources. It is our hope that other healthcare professionals will find these resources beneficial. This project is unique in that students are the main contributors of the pictures used. While not entirely comprehensive at this point, the OER platform will allow for continual updating as new images and information become available.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aDoty, Carolineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1502zAccess online version01917nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001500152050000700167100003100174245009100205264004300296264006600339264001200405300002200417336002600439337002600465338003600491341002800527490002700555505014700582520048400729542001601213546001601229588004001245650002501285650005001310650003101360710003901391856007701430OTLid0001503MnU20260323020547.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781989014318  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aSchilling, Kaitlineauthor00aMaking RipplesbA Guidebook to Challenge Status Quo in OER CreationcKaitlin Schilling 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Purpose of OER Creation -- Storytelling in Education -- Equity-minded Pedagogy -- Practices as Community Service -- Beyond OER0 aMaking Ripples: A Guidebook to Challenge Status Quo in OER Creation is a short resource designed to expand your understanding of inequities in the educational systems through breaking down the work into smaller pieces with opportunities for you to reflect, identify strategies for action, and locate resources and community members to connect with. The purpose of this guide is to explore strategies for you as OER creators to incorporate equitable practices into your workflows.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1503zAccess online version01694nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001500134050000700149100003100156245008800187264004300275264006600318264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505006700561520037400628542001601002546001601018588004001034650002501074650005001099650003101149710003901180856007701219OTLid0001504MnU20260323020547.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aSchilling, Kaitlineauthor00aBeyond the HorizonbBroadening Our Understanding of OER EfficacycKaitlin Schilling 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRebus Communityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- OER Landscape -- Opportunities in OER Efficacy0 aBeyond the Horizon: Broadening Our Understanding of OER Efficacy is a concise yet comprehensive resource designed to provide insight into the current state of research and reporting on Open Educational Resources (OER) efficacy. This guide explores existing frameworks, delves into key themes and gaps, and highlights emerging opportunities in the realm of OER efficacy.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1504zAccess online version02813nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127100002400142245007300166264004300239264007100282264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505027300530520133500803542003002138546001602168588004002184650005002224700002502274700002402299710003902323856007702362OTLid0001505MnU20260406020635.0m     o  d s      cr            231008s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.81 aBonn, Mariaeauthor00aScholarly Communication Librarianship and Open KnowledgecMaria Bonn 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aChicago, ILbAssociation of College and Research Librariesc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Foreword: ScholComm Is Rad -- Part I. What is Scholarly Communication? -- Part II. Scholarly Communication and Open Culture -- Part III. Voices from the Field: Perspectives, Intersctions, and Case Studies -- Conclusion: Adding Your Voice to the Conversation0 aThe intersection of scholarly communication librarianship and open education offers a unique opportunity to expand knowledge of scholarly communication topics in both education and practice. Open resources can address the gap in teaching timely and critical scholarly communication topics—copyright in teaching and research environments, academic publishing, emerging modes of scholarship, impact measurement—while increasing access to resources and equitable participation in education and scholarly communication. Scholarly Communication Librarianship and Open Knowledge is an open textbook and practitioner’s guide that collects theory, practice, and case studies from nearly 80 experts in scholarly communication and open education. Divided into three parts: What is Scholarly Communication? Scholarly Communication and Open Culture Voices from the Field: Perspectives, Intersections, and Case Studies The book delves into the economic, social, policy, and legal aspects of scholarly communication as well as open access, open data, open education, and open science and infrastructure. Practitioners provide insight into the relationship between university presses and academic libraries, defining collection development as operational scholarly communication, and promotion and tenure and the challenge for open access.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks1 aBolick, Josheauthor1 aCross, Willeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1505zAccess online version04135nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001000166100003000176245011100206264004300317264006400360264001200424300002200436336002600458337002600484338003600510341002800546490002700574505020900601520256000810542001603370546001603386588004003402650002403442650004203466650002403508700002803532700002503560710003903585856007703624OTLid0001507MnU20260406020602.0m     o  d s      cr            231015s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463667302  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aTA145 4aRA4401 avan Straten, Barteauthor00aCreating a circular healthcare economybSustainable strategies for a circular healthcarecBart van Straten 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the authors -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- Part I: Circular engineering principles -- Part II: Using (medical) waste as source for raw material -- Part III: A sustainable market -- Authors' notes0 aOur world is the only planet, as far as we know, which harbors life. The number of humans on our planet has grown tremendously in recent centuries. In 1800 one billion humans occupied our earth; on 15 November 2022, this number reached 8 billion. A result of this growth, the emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2), the primary greenhouse gas emitted by human activities, drastically increased. The increased concentrations of greenhouse gases in our atmosphere foster the long-term increase of our earth’s temperatures, also referred to as global warming. While the earth’s population grew, so did our mass consumption society. After the Second World War humanity witnessed gigantic global economic development with great technological improvements. Computers, laptops, airplanes, tablets and Internet of Things connected humans all over the world. The hunger for plastics and steel grew as all products had to be manufactured in ever-increasing volumes. As the economy developed, our consumption grew apace. The healthcare sector has seen the same increase of consumption. The number of patients grew, and so did the number of single-use medical products. As products become more complex and more different materials were combined., recycling became more difficult. Thus, hospitals transformed into waste factories with ever-growing waste streams. The consumption of (disposable) medical devices takes up scarce raw materials and contributes to the growing CO2 emissions. In this book, Van Straten, Alvino and Horeman present their findings on how to create a sustainable healthcare economy by introducing different circular strategies. In 9 chapters, they present a wide variation of studies as practical cases to show what strategies and actions can be taken in order to implement sustainable strategies for a circular healthcare. This book was written in line with the courses the authors developed at TU Extension School, the open online education edX platform of Delft University of Technology/TU Delft, a leading university in science and technology, recognized for its world-class research. This book is a manual for everyone who follows the online course ‘Circular strategies for a sustainable healthcare’, but certainly also for everyone who wants to discover more about circular strategies and wants to understand the principles and practices of circular economy and urban mining. This book is suitable for students, researchers, policymakers and practitioners in the fields of healthcare sustainability, management, business and economics.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aAlvino, Letiziaeauthor1 aHoreman, Timeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1507zAccess online version01706nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135100003100143245007200174264004300246264007300289264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505044600539520006000985542001601045546001601061588004001077650002301117650003801140650002601178710003901204856007701243OTLid0001508MnU20260330020619.0m     o  d s      cr            231015s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aP511 aJones, Linda Caroleauthor00aLanguage Encounters on the French Colonial MississippicLinda Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I. Introduction and Overview -- French, Native Peoples and Communication -- Part II. Communication Without Words -- Signs, Gestures and Body Languages -- Art, Objects and Imagery -- Ceremony, Ritual and Oratory -- Maps and Landmarks -- Part III. Communication With Words -- Interpreters -- Misunderstanding and Deception -- When Words Were Spoken -- When Words Were Written -- Part IV. Epilouge -- After French (and Spanish) Colonialism0 aAre you using this textbook in your class? Let me know!1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1508zAccess online version02108nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245004600161264004300207264007300250264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505039800500520061400898542001601512546001601528588004001544650002001584650002601604710003901630856007701669OTLid0001509MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231015s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aDeaton, Sherieauthor00aTeaching Apparel ProductioncSheri Deaton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit 1: Understanding Yourself and Your Students -- Unit 2: Getting Prepared -- Unit 3: Pattern Instruction Sheet, Cutting, and Marking -- Unit 4: Sewing Supplies and Pressing Equipment -- Unit 5: Hand Sewing -- Unit 6: Fasteners -- Unit 7: Seams -- Unit 8: Apparel Construction -- Unit 9: Finishing Touches -- Unit 10: Sample Projects -- Unit 11: Resources -- Author Biography0 aThis text was written to provide students and teacher candidates with an introductory understanding of the skills associated with teaching apparel production. The book is broken into units and chapters that focus on essential skills for constructing garments and, more specifically, teaching others how to construct apparel and apparel-related products. Readers are invited to explore this text in any order, as it is not necessary to read each unit or chapter in sequence. Embedded within each chapter are key concepts related to the topic, pedagogical tips and tricks, a variety of resources, and references1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1509zAccess online version03123nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001400153050000900167050000700176100002500183245010200208250001600310264004300326264006800369264001200437300002200449336002600471337002600497338003600523341002800559490002700587505081300614520093001427542003002357546001602387588004102403650002702444650002602471650003302497650003102530710003902561856007702600OTLid0001510MnU20260406020602.0m     o  d s      cr            231015s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781735198019  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-280 4aJA71 4aH11 aFranco, Josheauthor00aPolimetricsbA Stata Companion to Introduction to Political Science Research MethodscJosh Franco  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSan Diego, CaliforniabOpen Political Science (OPoliSci)c2023. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- List of Figures -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1 - Overview -- Chapter 2 - Stata Software Tour and Getting Started -- Chapter 3 - Datasets: Cross-section, Time Series, and Panel -- Chapter 4 - Data Management -- Chapter 5 - Descriptive Statistics -- Chapter 6 - Model Selection -- Chapter 7 - Linear Models -- Chapter 8 - Binary Outcome Models -- Chapter 9 - Ordinal Outcome Models -- Chapter 10 - Categorical Outcome Models -- Chapter 11 - Count Outcome Models -- Chapter 12 - Panel Data Linear Models -- Chapter 13 - Panel Data Binary Outcome Models -- Chapter 14 - Panel Data Ordinal Outcome Models -- Chapter 15 - Panel Data Categorical Outcome Models -- Chapter 16 - Panel Data Count Outcome Models -- Chapter 17 - Survival Modes -- Chapter 18 - Share -- Chapter 19 - Reflection -- References0 aPolimetrics: A Stata Companion, authored by Dr. Josh Franco, is an Open Education Resource workbook licensed CC BY-NC and designed as a Stata companion to Introduction to Political Science Research Methods. This workbook provides a tour of the Stata software, an introduction to cross-sectional, time series, and panel data, and an introduction to a variety of models. I review models where the outcome is linear, binary, ordinal, categorical, and count. Additionally, I have an interpretation chapter on survival models. Each “Models” chapter has a similar organizational structure: about, estimated time, what is the model, how are models run in Stata, how do we interpret the model results, and a real-world example of model results in a Creative Commons licensed, peer-reviewed journal article. Additionally, mini-assignment instructions and a rubric are included so students can practice their interpretation skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1510zAccess online version03158nam a2200613 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100002800149245005900177264004300236264005600279264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505029600512520086400808542004101672546001601713588004001729650005001769650003101819700003201850700003001882700002701912700003001939700002701969700002901996700002702025700002902052700002302081700002902104700003002133700003202163700003002195700003102225700002802256700002802284700003302312700002402345700003102369700002802400710003902428856007702467OTLid0001512MnU20260330020547.0m     o  d s      cr            231015s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aReed, Amanda B.eauthor00aInternational LibrariesbAn Open TextbookcAmanda Reed 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBuffalo, New YorkbThe University at Buffaloc2023. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Contributing Authors -- Copyright -- Austrailia -- China -- Costa Rica -- Croatia -- Ecuador -- Egypt -- Finland -- France -- Germany -- Hong Kong -- Iceland -- Japan -- Ireland -- New Zealand -- Palestine -- Poland -- Portugal -- Spain -- Sweden -- Turkey -- United Arab Emirates0 aInternational Libraries: An Open Textbook is a reference sourcebook about the libraries and the field of librarianship in non-North American countries around the world. Each chapter in this volume includes a profile of a featured country’s variety of libraries, its library histories, its systems of library education, and its library practices, laws, and professional associations. Graduate students in the University at Buffalo’s Department of Information Science authored these chapters for the LIS 503: International Librarianship course during the summer term of 2019. The text was developed under the a Creative Commons license (CC BY-NC-SA 4.0) as an open educational resource that can be adapted for future sections of the International Librarianship course or for similar courses offered in library and information programs at other institutions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aJohnson, Sarah M.H.eauthor1 aSeverson, Heathereauthor1 aGreen, Michaeleauthor1 aRubin, Melissa L.eauthor1 aWindholz, Anneeauthor1 aDehais, Celia J.eauthor1 aTaylor, Hannaheauthor1 aGilligan, Siobaneauthor1 aWong, Mieneauthor1 aCernik, Laura E.eauthor1 aDavis, Matthew C.eauthor1 aGates, Christine E.eauthor1 aQuinn, Mallory S.eauthor1 aRoberts, Deanna K.eauthor1 aWejchert, Emilyeauthor1 aLynch, Kathleeneauthor1 aHarrington, Sarah R.eauthor1 aDuka, Anitaeauthor1 aMontini, Tara E.M.eauthor1 aSchaefer, Sallyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1512zAccess online version02037nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245004400135264004300179264005700222264001200279300002200291336002600313337002600339338003600365341002800401490002700429505072800456520020601184542003001390546001601420588004001436650003001476700002501506700002801531710003901559856007701598OTLid0001513MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231018s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE100aQuantitative Methods for Plant Breeding 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the PBEA Series -- Chapter 1: Basic Principles -- Chapter 2: Distributions and Probability -- Chapter 3: Central Limit Theorem, Confidence Intervals, and Hypothesis Tests -- Chapter 4: Categorical Data - Binary -- Chapter 5: Categorical Data Multivariate -- Chapter 6: Continuous Data -- Chapter 7: Linear Correlation, Regression and Prediction -- Chapter 8: The Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) -- Chapter 9: Two Factor ANOVAs -- Chapter 10: Mean Comparisons -- Chapter 11: Randomized Complete Block Design -- Chapter 12: Data Transformation -- Chapter 13: Multiple Regression -- Chapter 14: Nonlinear Regression -- Chapter 15: Multivariate Analysis -- Algebra Review Guide -- Contributors -- Applied Learning Activities0 aThis open textbook covers common statistics used in agriculture research, including experimental design in plant breeding and genetics, as well as the analysis of variance, regression, and correlation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aSuza, Waltereeditor1 aLamkey, Kendalleeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1513zAccess online version02060nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245004500135264004300180264005700223264001200280300002200292336002600314337002600340338003600366341002800402490002700430505055100457520040501008542003001413546001601443588004001459650003001499700002501529700002801554710003901582856007701621OTLid0001514MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            231018s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE100aQuantitative Genetics for Plant Breeding 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the PBEA Series -- Chapter 1: Gene Frequencies -- Chapter 2: Linkage -- Chapter 3: Resemblance Between Relatives -- Chapter 4: Measures of Similarity -- Chapter 5: Gene Effects -- Chapter 6: Components of Variance -- Chapter 7: Estimates of Variance -- Chapter 8: Mating Designs -- Chapter 9: Selection Response -- Chapter 10: G x E -- Chapter 11: Multiple Trait Selection -- Chapter 12: Multi Environment Trials: Linear Mixed Models -- Chapter 13: Simulation Modeling -- Plant Breeding Basics -- Applied Learning Activities -- Contributors0 aThis open textbook is intended to expose students to the application of quantitative genetic models to plant breeding populations. Specific topics include conducting and interpreting multi-environment trials, resource allocation using engineering principles, genetic modeling of quantitative traits, simulation modeling, variance, covariance and heritability, prediction, selection, and genetic gain.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aSuza, Waltereeditor1 aLamkey, Kendalleeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1514zAccess online version02142nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245002500135264004300160264005700203264001200260300002200272336002600294337002600320338003600346341002800382490002700410505051800437520050200955542003001457546001601487588004001503650003001543700002501573700002801598700002601626710003901652856007701691OTLid0001515MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            231018s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE100aCultivar Development 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the PBEA Series -- Chapter 1: Plant Breeders Rise to the Challenge of Feeding the World -- Chapter 2: The Process of Cultivar Development: Pure Line Variety -- Chapter 3: New Line Development and New Line Evaluation: Single-cross Hybrid -- Chapter 4: New Line Development and New Line Evaluation: Clonally Propagated Cultivars -- Chapter 5: Value-added Trait Integration -- Chapter 6: Optimization of Product Pipeline -- Chapter 7: Launching Improved Cultivars -- Contributors -- Applied Learning Activities0 aThis open textbook places emphasis on the design of a process pipeline for continuous development of new improved cultivars as a means to implement the cycle of crop improvement. Essential topics in New Line Development and New Line Evaluation are addressed, such as choice of parents, creation of progeny, and evaluation and selection of progeny. Students learn to design a process pipeline to produce improved cultivars that meet a specific product target which represents stakeholders’ needs.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks1 aSuza, Waltereeditor1 aLamkey, Kendalleeditor1 aMumm, Rita H.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1515zAccess online version02848nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002700154245011800181264004300299264006500342264001200407300002200419336002600441337002600467338003600493341002800529490002700557505041800584520118701002542004102189546001602230588004102246650003902287650003202326710003902358856007702397OTLid0001516MnU20260330020548.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789403430270  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aBiehl, Michaeleauthor04aThe Shallow and the DeepbA biased introduction to neural networks and old school machine learningcMichael Biehl 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGroningen, NetherlandsbUniversity of Groningen Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- From neurons to networks -- Learning from example data -- The Perceptron -- Beyond linear separability -- Feed-forward networks for regression and classification -- Distance-based classifiers -- Model evaluation and regularization -- Preprocessing and unsupervised learning -- Concluding quote -- Appendix A: Optimization -- List of figures -- List of algorithms -- Abbrev. and acronyms -- Bibliography0 aThe Shallow and the Deep is a collection of lecture notes that offers an accessible introduction to neural networks and machine learning in general. However, it was clear from the beginning that these notes would not be able to cover this rapidly changing and growing field in its entirety. The focus lies on classical machine learning techniques, with a bias towards classification and regression. Other learning paradigms and many recent developments in, for instance, Deep Learning are not addressed or only briefly touched upon. Biehl argues that having a solid knowledge of the foundations of the field is essential, especially for anyone who wants to explore the world of machine learning with an ambition that goes beyond the application of some software package to some data set. Therefore, The Shallow and the Deep places emphasis on fundamental concepts and theoretical background. This also involves delving into the history and pre-history of neural networks, where the foundations for most of the recent developments were laid. These notes aim to demystify machine learning and neural networks without losing the appreciation for their impressive power and versatility.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1516zAccess online version03243nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100003300144245008200177264004300259264007600302264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505062600555520132301181542001602504546001602520588004102536650002402577650003102601700002902632700002502661700003102686710003902717856007702756OTLid0001517MnU20260406020602.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA440 4aH11 aCirignano, Sherri M.eauthor00aCommunity interventions in obesity-related chronic diseasescSherri Cirignano 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNew Brunswick, New JerseybRutgers University Libraries (RUcore)c2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- Chapter One: Definition of Obesity: Current Trends and Statistics -- Chapter Two: Measuring Obesity and Balancing Calories -- Chapter Three: Intro to the Consequences of Obesity -- Chapter Four: Dietary Interventions for Obesity Prevention -- Chapter Five: Physical Activity Interventions for Obesity Prevention -- Chapter Six: Community Interventions in Obesity Prevention -- Chapter Seven: Community Intervention in Childhood Obesity -- Chapter Eight: Cancer and its Relationship to Obesity -- Chapter Nine: A Health Equity Lens in Obesity Related Chronic Disease Prevention Programs0 aThe rate of obesity continues to climb in the United States in all age groups. National reports, including the Trust for America’s Health annual report State of Obesity: Better Policies for a Healthier America, highlight key findings and policy recommendations. The need to continue to work towards stabilization of the obesity epidemic could not be more important as consequences of this chronic disease can be dire, potentially affecting physical health with an increase in risk for chronic diseases including cardiovascular disease, type 2 diabetes and several types of cancer as well as potentially affecting behavioral health. Curbing the high rates of obesity is particularly of importance when considering the prevalence of childhood obesity, which is on the rise not only in the United States but is also increasing globally. Although there are certain risk factors such as genetics that are not modifiable in this group, there are many dietary, physical activity and environmental factors that are modifiable through lifestyle changes. This course will explore ways to address these lifestyle changes for children through adults with both federally- and NGO- based community interventions that are working towards combating overweight and obesity and how they aim to do so with a health equity lens in mind.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aElnakib, Sara A.eauthor1 aEnsle, Kareneauthor1 aZellers, Christineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1517zAccess online version01572nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100002700149245008500176264004300261264008100304264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505011800562520023500680542003000915546001600945588004000961650005001001650003101051710003901082856007701121OTLid0001518MnU20260330020755.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aMakula, Amandaeauthor00aPower, Profit, and PrivilegebProblematizing Scholarly PublishingcAmanda Makula 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Librariesc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- Part I: The Fundamentals -- Part II: (Some) Problems -- Part III: Assignments0 aThis open course introduces students to the scholarly communications system — with particular emphasis on the scholarly journal publishing mechanism — wherein new information is created, evaluated, disseminated, and preserved.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1518zAccess online version01969nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100002400149245006800173264004300241264008400284264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505041900545520035100964542002701315546001601342588004001358650005001398650003101448710003901479856007701518OTLid0001519MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aFord, Emilyeauthor00aPeer ReviewbA Critical Primer and Practical CoursecEmily Ford 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPortland State University Libraryc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- What is Peer Review? -- Opportunities and Challenges in Peer Review -- Bias and Power Structures in Peer Review -- Critically Examining Established Peer-Review Practices -- Innovations in Peer Review -- Librarians and Peer Review -- Developing Peer-Review Norms, Guidelines, and Expectations for LIS or Your Discipline -- Developing Your Peer-Review Practice -- About the Author0 aThis book is a self-paced, open access training in peer review. In eight modules it asks readers to engage in a variety of activities to learn the who, what, why, and how of peer review. It is geared to library professionals, library school students, or other academic professionals who must understand and/or engage with the peer-review process.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1519zAccess online version03240nam a2200589 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100003200149245006600181264004300247264005200290264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505085700519520049501376542003001871546001601901588004001917650005001957650003102007700002802038700003102066700003202097700003502129700003102164700002302195700003202218700002802250700002502278700002502303700002602328700002802354700002602382700002602408700002802434700002102462700002402483700002702507710003902534856007702573OTLid0001520MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aMcNally, Michael B.eeditor00aContemporary Issues in Collection ManagementcMichael McNally 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEdmonton, CanadabOpen Education Albertac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aEditor's Introduction -- Physical or Digital: The Fundamental Challenge of Modern Collection Development -- As Seen on BookTok: Exploring Interactions Between TikTok and Public Library Collection Development -- Challenges to 2SLGBTQ+ Collections: A Guide for Libraries -- Locked In: EBook Loan Limitations and Licensing Agreements in Public Libraries -- The Ebook Pricing War: The Fight for Control Between Libraries and Publishers -- Issues in the Management of Accessible Collections in Public Libraries for People with Physical Disabilities -- What Little We Know About the Hidden Challenges for Library Users with Invisible Disabilities -- “Just in Time” Collection Development: Background and Current Challenges -- Climate Change Considerations in Public Library Collection Development -- Collection Development and Management of Research Data0 aThis edited, openly licensed, textbook examines several different issues in collection management. Topics covered include physical vs. digital collections; the impact of BookTok on collections; challenges to 2SLGBTQ+ collections ; ebook licensing; ebook pricing; accessible collections for users with physical disabilities; accessible collections for users with invisible disabilities; "just in time"/demand-driven acquisitions; climate change and collections and research data collections.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCameron, Kelseyeauthor1 aChiovelli, Chelseaeauthor1 aDeschamps, Danielleeauthor1 aGrande-Sherbert, Martyeauthor1 aHakimizadeh, Sadafeauthor1 aIp, Andreweauthor1 aKomarnytska, Olesyaeauthor1 aNowakowsky, Amyeauthor1 aPei, Winstoneauthor1 aPope, Nicoleeauthor1 aPouliot, Reiseauthor1 aRamsey, Melissaeauthor1 aSieben, Juliaeauthor1 aTrotter, Maiaeauthor1 aTurnbull, Graceeauthor1 aVoy, Kateauthor1 aWang, Dandieauthor1 aWillauer, Fayeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1520zAccess online version03698nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100004300163245005200206264004300258264007000301264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505094200548520128601490542004102776546002702817588004102844650002302885650002602908650002402934700004602958700004203004700004703046700004303093710003903136856007703175OTLid0001521MnU20260406020603.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942714688  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aRA4401 aViteri-Robayo, Carmen Patriciaeauthor00aAntropología AlimentariacCarmen Viteri-Robayo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Prologo -- Primera Parte: Historia de la alimentación -- Capítulo I: Alimentación de los primeros homínidos -- Capítulo II: Alimentación en el paleolítico -- Capítulo III: Alimentación en el neolítico -- Segunda Parte: Corrientes antropológicas en las culturas antiguas -- Capítulo IV: Alimentación en el antiguo Egipto -- Capítulo V: La alimentación en la civilización romana -- Capítulo VI: Alimentación en la antigua China -- Capítulo VII: Alimentación de las culturas precolombinas Aztecas, Incas, Mayas -- Capítulo VIII: Alimentación ancestral - Sumak Kawsay -- Tercera Parte: La revolución industrial en los cambios de alimentación -- Capítulo IX: La antropología alimentaria y la revolución industrial -- Capítulo X: La alimentación y revolución verde -- Cuarta Parte: Sistemas alimentarios sostenibles -- Capítulo XI: Alimentación del futuro -- Capítulo XII: La nutrición como ciencia0 aEl libro presenta una exploración profunda de la relación entre la alimentación y la evolución humana. Inicia descifrando los cambios dietéticos de los primeros homínidos y cómo estos cambios influenciaron su desarrollo físico y cognitivo, desde la dentición hasta el aumento del tamaño cerebral. Luego analiza la influencia cultural y sociopolítica en la dieta de antiguas civilizaciones como Egipto, Roma y China. Se destaca la alimentación en culturas precolombinas, resaltando la diversidad agrícola, sus prácticas sostenibles y la conexión cósmica con la tierra. Aborda también, la Revolución Industrial y cómo transformó los patrones alimentarios, llevando a problemas de salud en la modernidad. También se discute la "revolución verde" y las tecnologías para mejorar la producción alimentaria. Y finalmente se explica sobre la sostenibilidad en los sistemas alimentarios y las innovaciones para el futuro, como la carne de laboratorio y la nutrición basada en insectos. El libro concluye reconociendo la nutrición como una ciencia multidisciplinaria, que busca garantizar la salud y calidad de vida. Esta obra es el resultado de un esfuerzo colectivo de académicos que buscan entender la alimentación humana desde sus orígenes hasta el presente.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aMallitasig-Endara, Fatima Vanessaeauthor1 aTapia-Barahona, Sayuri Adalideauthor1 aRobayo-Zurita, Verónica Alexandraeauthor1 aLozada-Tobar, Leticia Andreinaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1521zAccess online version03081nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001100152100004700163245011000210264004300320264007000363264001200433300002200445336002600467337002600493338003600519341002800555490002700583505034100610520114200951542004102093546002702134588004102161650002502202650003702227700004702264700004302311700003502354700004602389700003002435700004202465710003902507856007702546OTLid0001522MnU20260406020603.0m     o  d s      cr            231021s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942714695  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB15551 aPacheco-Altamirano, Amancia Maríaeauthor00aComprendiendo la LecturabDel Nivel Literal al Crítico en Estudiantes de EBAcAmancia Pacheco-Altamirano 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema y su importancia -- Capítulo II: Antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo III: Metodología -- Capítulo IV: Análisis de resultados -- Capítulo V: Discusión, Conclusiones y Recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEste libro de investigación trata sobre que los momentos de la lectura mejoran la comprensión lectora en los niveles literal, inferencial y crítico de los estudiantes del segundo grado “E” del ciclo avanzado del CEBA “Politécnico Regional del Centro”- Huancayo, es de naturaleza cuantitativa, tipo aplicada, diseño pre experimental, con pre test y pos test en un solo grupo, muestra no probabilística. Se aplicó un pre test para diagnosticar su comprensión de textos, luego una propuesta experimental basada en la estrategia los momentos de la lectura de Isabel Solé y un post test para determinar los efectos. Se demostró estadísticamente que la aplicación de esta estrategia permite mejorar significativamente la comprensión lectora en el nivel literal, inferencial y crítico. Esto se fundamenta porque en el pre test la mayoría de estudiantes alcanzó calificaciones inferiores a 10 (escala vigesimal); pero, en el post test la mayoría superó este promedio en estos niveles. En el calculó se evidenció que existen diferencias significativas entre las puntuaciones del pre y post test de 6,6 puntos p < 0,05.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks1 aCamposano-Córdova, Alvaro Ignacioeauthor1 aTorres-Acevedo, Christian Luiseauthor1 aOré-Rojas, Juan Joséeauthor1 aGavidia-Anticona, Júber Amílcareauthor1 aYauri-Huiza, Yenieauthor1 aRojas-Quispe, Ángel Epifanioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1522zAccess online version03864nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100004300158245016800201264004300369264007000412264001200482300002200494336002600516337002600542338003600568341002800604490002700632505060200659520146801261542004102729546002702770588004102797650003402838700004702872700004102919700005002960700004403010700004203054700004603096700004203142700004503184700004903229710003903278856007703317OTLid0001523MnU20260406020603.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651006  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aBonilla-Morejon, Diego Marceloeauthor04aLos gritos silenciosos de las víctimas de violencia de génerobUn enfoque desde la perspectiva pre procesal y procesal penal en el EcuadorcDiego Bonilla-Morejon 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: La violencia de género y su visibilizacion en todas las formas -- Capítulo II: Actores directos e indirectos en la protección de los derechos de las víctimas de violencia de género -- Capítulo III: La investigación previa como fase pre procesal en los delitos de violencia de género -- Capítulo IV: La etapa procesal penal en los delitos de violencia de género -- Capítulo V: La justicia terapéutica: Una alternativa en el sistema penal ecuatoriano -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aCon la globalización en la que nos encontramos la violencia contra la mujer o miembros del núcleo familiar ha ido en aumento ya que se desarrolla en cada uno de los hogares y esta ocurre cuando existe actos violentos por parte del agresor hacia las víctimas de este particular la mayoría de los casos son puestos en conocimiento de las autoridades competente. Hay que entender que América Latina donde los países son menos desarrollados, la violencia ocurre contra la mujer y ésta no tiene un índice real, debido a que la mayoría no pone en conocimiento de qué son víctimas de violencia. En el Estado ecuatoriano existen diversos tipos de violencia que son conocidos por fiscalía de mayor forma se dan los casos de violencia física y violencia psicológica estos tipos de violencia son los que se relacionan entre sí, es decir, la agresión física y psicológica. En el Ecuador con la reforma del Código Orgánico Integral Penal en el año 2019 y su posterior vigencia y aplicación en mes en el mes de junio del 2020, se da la implementación de nuevos mecanismos legales para suspender la sustanciación del proceso en materia de violencia contra la mujer o miembros del núcleo familiar, como procedimientos especiales para solucionar los problemas de esta materia considerando que la norma constitucional establece que el Estado garantizará a la víctima la sanción del agresor mediante procedimientos especiales en relación a la violencia.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aBonilla-Morejón, Jefferson Steveneauthor1 aGuano-Fogacho, Jaime Enriqueeauthor1 aMeléndez-Carrasco, Patricio Vladimireauthor1 aMurillo-Ramos, Franklin Remigioeauthor1 aPeña-Chauvín, Sarita Maríaeauthor1 aSamaniego-Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aSolis-Miranda, Diego Fernandoeauthor1 aVásquez-Quinatoa, Luis Humbertoeauthor1 aNúñez-Ribadeneyra, Ronny Alejandroeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1523zAccess online version03282nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153050001000163100004600173245018500219264004300404264007000447264001200517300002200529336002600551337002600577338003600603341002800639490002700667505027000694520144200964542004102406546002702447588004102474650003002515650002402545650002302569700004702592700004202639700003902681710003902720856007702759OTLid0001524MnU20260309020909.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651013  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aGonzález-Marcillo, Raúl Lorenzoeauthor00aPastos Tropicales de la Amazonia Ecuatoriana Tomo IbAvances científicos sobre sistemas silvopastoriles como estrategia de reconversión de la ganaderíacRaúl González-Marcillo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Problemática -- Capítulo II: Marco teórico -- Capítulo III: Metodología para estudios de pastos tropicales en las amazonia norte del Ecuador -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa rápida expansión de la frontera agrícola como consecuencia desmesurada de la deforestación y cambios antropogénicos a nivel mundial, es un tema de preocupación por la comunidad científica internacional. Además, frente a una lucha contra el cambio climático por efecto de la ganadería, una de las principales estrategias para la mitigación de gases de efecto invernadero, lo constituyen alternativas sostenibles si uso de productos con alta huella de carbono, revalorizando, además, los recursos locales. En el caso de la zona norte de Ecuador, a pesar de los limitados atributos respecto a gradiente de fertilidad de los suelos, la cría de ganado ya sea de leche y/o doble propósito representa uno de los eslabones más fuertes dentro de la economía de las familias. Por lo tanto, es menester investigar alternativas de producción que nos permitan conservar los recursos naturales dada la fragilidad de estos ecosistemas megadiversos. Mediante este libro se plasma que el uso de sistemas ganaderos convencionales, degradan los recursos naturales con mermas significativas de la productividad, así como bajo réditos económicos. En consecuencia, la implementación de sistemas silvopastoriles como alternativa tecnológica de fácil instalación, es sin duda el camino para alcanzar sistemas ganaderos más eficientes, amigables con el medio ambiente, diversificando además los ingresos económicos de la población.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aGuamán-Rivera, Santiago Alexandereauthor1 aGuerrero-Pincay, Angela Editheauthor1 aOrtiz-Naveda, Nelson Renéeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1524zAccess online version03422nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001300167100004800180245013900228264004300367264007000410264001200480300002200492336002600514337002600540338003600566341002800602490002700630505052200657520152401179542004102703546002702744588004102771650002402812650002602836650003402862710003902896856007702935OTLid0001525MnU20260406020604.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651020  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aKF385.A41 auerrero-Velástegui, César Andréseauthor00aEntorno Empresarial desde la Gestión del Derecho LaboralbBreves Apuntes desde una Perspectiva AcadémicacCésar uerrero-Velástegui 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Capítulo I: Introducción al derecho laboral -- Capítulo II: Código del trabajo -- Capítulo III: Formas de terminación del contrato de trabajo y el fondo de reserva -- Capítulo IV: Los riesgos del trabajo, los accidentes laborales, las enfermedades profesionales -- Capítulo V: El contrato colectivo, elementos, personas que intervienen y modelo de contrato colectivo -- Capítulo VI: Ley orgánica de servicio público -- Capítulo VII: Glosario -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl entorno empresarial permite analizar los factores exógenos y endógenos que influyen en la empresa y la actividad en la que se desenvuelve en el sector industrial, razón por la cual es necesario identificar los elementos del macro y micro entorno que inciden de forma positiva o negativa en la gestión empresarial. En ese sentido el ámbito legal es uno de los factores elementales que el Empresario debe considerar. El entorno empresarial y el derecho laboral son dos aspectos esenciales de la economía moderna que están estrechamente interconectados. El entorno empresarial se refiere a los factores externos que influyen en las operaciones de una organización, mientras que la legislación laboral regula la relación entre empleadores y empleados. Esta obra proporcionará una visión general del entorno empresarial y el derecho laboral, así como analizará los elementos necesarios para actuar de forma ética y legal en la gestión empresarial. El entorno empresarial está determinado por varios factores políticos, económicos, sociales, tecnológicos, ecológicos y legales que marcan el campo de acción de la gestión empresarial. Más aún en ámbitos de derecho laboral, los aspectos legales que intervienen en la relación entre el empleador y el empleado deben gestionarse conforme lo dictamina la normativa vigente, salvaguardando derechos y verificando el cumplimiento de obligaciones, pues el impacto del entorno empresarial en las organizaciones y sus operaciones puede ser significativo.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1525zAccess online version03463nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156050001300167100004900180245015500229264004300384264007000427264001200497300002200509336002600531337002600557338003600583341002800619490002700647505033600674520151101010542004102521546002702562588004102589650002402630650002602654650003402680700004502714700004102759700004202800700004702842710003902889856007702928OTLid0001526MnU20260406020604.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651037  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.4 4aKF385.A41 aGuerrero-Velástegui, César Andréseauthor00aGestión EmpresarialbConcepción Legal bajo enfoque del proceso administrativo. Apuntes desde la perspectiva académica.cCésar Guerrero-Velástegui 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Generalidades del derecho empresarial -- Capítulo II: Organización jurídica empresarial -- Capítulo III: Instrumentos jurídicos empresariales -- Capítulo IV: Mercados -- Capítulo V: Conflictividad empresarial -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLos principios de gestión empresarial y la concepción jurídica de la empresa son dos aspectos cruciales para cualquier negocio exitoso. Mientras que los principios de la gestión empresarial se centran en el logro de los objetivos organizacionales mediante una planificación, organización y dirección eficaces, la concepción jurídica de la empresa se ocupa de los requisitos y regulaciones legales que las empresas deben cumplir. Comprender la intersección entre estas dos áreas es esencial para que cualquier propietario o gerente de negocio garantice el éxito de su empresa. En esta obra exploraremos los principios de la gestión empresarial, la concepción jurídica de la empresa y cómo se interrelacionan en su contenido. La gestión empresarial eficaz es esencial para lograr los objetivos organizacionales, maximizar las ganancias y mantener una ventaja competitiva. Los principios de la gestión empresarial incluyen la planificación, la organización y el liderazgo. La planificación implica definir objetivos, identificar recursos y crear estrategias para alcanzar las metas. Organizar implica crear estructuras organizativas, delegar responsabilidades y establecer canales de comunicación. Liderar implica motivar a los empleados, resolver conflictos y fomentar el trabajo en equipo. Estos tres principios son interdependientes y deben trabajar juntos para garantizar el éxito de cualquier negocio. Debiendo actuar de forma ética y apegado a derecho para su próspera gestión.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aGodoy-Calvachi, Xavier Alexandereauthor1 aCastro-Cruz, Leonardo Danieleauthor1 aTorres-Pérez, Jimena Maribeleauthor1 aTerán-Guerrero, Fernando Neptalíeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1526zAccess online version03361nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100004900167245014700216264004300363264007000406264001200476300002200488336002600510337002600536338003600562341002800598490002700626505050900653520147701162542004102639546002702680588004102707650002402748650002602772700004902798710003902847856007702886OTLid0001527MnU20260406020604.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651044  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aGuerrero-Velástegui, César Andréseauthor00aEntorno Empresarial y Gestión del MarketingbPerspectiva Teórica para el Desarrollo de Proyectos de TitulacióncCésar Guerrero-Velástegui 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos de investigación -- Capítulo II: Problema de investigación -- Capítulo III: Marco teórico -- Capítulo IV: Marco metodológico -- Capítulo V: Análisis e interpretación de resultados -- Capítulo VI: Conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Capítulo VII: Formato para validación del instrumento mediante juicio de expertos -- Capítulo VIII: Validación -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl entorno empresarial, la gestión del marketing y la forma de administrar empresas cambia de manera constante conforme el ambiente en el que se desenvuelve, razón por la cual es fundamental identificar una ruta de investigación que delinee el camino a seguir. Por esta razón es fundamental iniciar estos procesos desde la academia, pues un proyecto de grado es un aspecto crucial del desarrollo académico de los estudiantes que cursan estudios de pregrado o posgrado. Es una oportunidad para que los estudiantes demuestren su dominio de un tema en particular y muestren sus habilidades de investigación. En esta obra, discutiremos el propósito de un proyecto de grado, los pasos necesarios para desarrollar un proyecto exitoso y los desafíos comunes que enfrentan los estudiantes durante el proceso. Hay diferentes tipos de proyectos de grado, incluidos tesis, disertaciones, artículos académicos y proyectos finales; cuyos resultados y entregables esperados incluyen un informe escrito, una presentación oral y una defensa del proyecto, la finalidad es brindar acompañamiento en el proceso mediante la inclusión de elementos técnicos, dinámicos y rigurosos que permitan la generación de conocimiento emergente en el ámbito empresarial, incluyendo elementos reflexivos y prácticos que permitan aportar con rigurosidad académica y científica el desarrollo de trabajos de titulación y reformular la forma de trabajar y replicarlo en el ámbito laboral.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aGonzález-Garcés, Liliana Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1527zAccess online version03300nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157100004700164245010100211264004300312264007000355264001200425300002200437336002600459337002600485338003600511341002800547490002700575505042700602520131501029542004102344546002702385588004102412650002502453650003102478700004702509700004402556700004202600700005102642700004502693710003902738856007702777OTLid0001528MnU20260406020604.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651051  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aTerán-Guerrero, Fernando Neptalíeauthor00aPlaneación estratégicabConceptos y herramientas para su aplicacióncFernando Terán-Guerrero 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Conociendo la planeación estratégica -- Capítulo II: Planeación estratégica: diagnóstico interno -- Capítulo III: Planificación estratégica: diagnóstico externo -- Capítulo IV: Planificación estratégica: implantación y control en las organizaciones -- Capítulo V: Anexos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEn el dinámico mundo de los negocios, la planificación estratégica se erige como el cimiento de la excelencia organizacional. El libro "PLANEACIÓN ESTRATÉGICA: CONCEPTOS Y HERRAMIENTAS PARA SU APLICACIÓN" sumerge al lector en un viaje fascinante a través de los pilares de la planeación estratégica y su implementación efectiva. Se exploran conceptos esenciales como la misión, la visión y los valores, se desmenuza el proceso administrativo y se establecen las categorías clave de planificación: estratégica, táctica y operativa. Los principios fundamentales sirven como cimiento para la travesía estratégica. Se destaca la importancia de analizar tanto el entorno interno como externo, empleando herramientas como el análisis FODA. La fórmula mágica se completa con la creación de objetivos estratégicos y un plan de acción con ciclos que abarcan la planificación, implementación y control. Descubra cómo los KPIs emergen como pilares esenciales para medir el rendimiento y respaldar decisiones informadas. Además, el Cuadro de Mando Integral (CMI) amplía la visión, llevando la medición más allá de lo financiero y proporcionando una perspectiva completa del desempeño. Este libro es un faro para aquellos que buscan navegar con éxito en el turbulento mar de los negocios.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMartínez-Martínez, Eduardo Joséeauthor1 aPluas-Llamuca, Geovanni Gonzaloeauthor1 aRomán-Aguirre, Rubén Daríoeauthor1 aHernández-Altamirano, Héctor Enriqueeauthor1 aGallardo-Chiluisa, Nelly Narcisaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1528zAccess online version02670nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135100002800149245004500177264004300222264005000265264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002500437490002700462505080900489520074501298542002702043546001602070588004102086650002702127650002602154710003902180856007702219OTLid0001529MnU20260406020604.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aBaxter, John R.eauthor00aIntroduction to ProbabilitycJohn Baxter 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinneapolis, MinnesotabJohn R. Baxterc2026. 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Preface -- Probability and Events -- Assumptions for probability, and their consequences -- Models with continuous sample spaces -- Conditional probability -- Independence and its consequences -- Tricky little problems -- Independent sequences -- Counting -- Random variables -- Expected values, finite range case -- More properties of expected value -- Independent random variables, first applications -- Waiting times -- Random variables with countable range -- Exponential waiting times and generable random variables -- Cumulative distribution functions -- Moments, variables and inequalities -- Poisson random variables -- Joint distributions and densities -- Convolutions -- Normal random variables and the Central Limit Theorem -- Appendices -- Bibliography -- Index -- List of figures0 aThis is an introduction to probability theory, designed for self-study. It covers the same topics as the one-semester introductory courses which I taught at the University of Minnesota, with some extra discussion for reading on your own. The reasons which underlie the rules of probability are emphasized. Probability theory is certainly useful. But how does it feel to study it? Well, like other areas of mathematics, probability theory contains elegant concepts, and it gives you a chance to exercise your ingenuity, which is often fun. But in addition, randomness and probability are part of our experience in the real world, present everywhere and yet still somewhat mysterious. This gives the subject of probability a special interest.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1529zAccess online version02893nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100002600149245012700175264004300302264008100345264001200426300002200438336002600460337002600486338003600512341002800548490002700576505061300603520089901216542003002115546001602145588004002161650005002201650003102251700003302282700002702315700002502342710003902367856007702406OTLid0001530MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aHintz, Carrieeauthor00aFinding BalancebCollaborative Workflows for Risk Management in Sharing Cultural Heritage Collections OnlinecCarrie Hintz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Kansas Librariesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Teamwork Makes the Dream Work: Building the Right Team -- Identifying Your Institutional Risk Tolerance -- Evaluating Licensing and Permissions for Archival Materials -- Processing with Rights in Mind -- Mapping a Workflow That Works -- Case Study: Emory University Libraries -- Conclusion -- References -- Appendix A: Rose Library Copyright Workflow Task Force Charter -- Appendix B: Rights and Risk Matrix for Manuscript Collections -- Appendix C: Emory University Libraries Deed of Gift/Sale Template -- Appendix D: Rose Library's Post-Processing Rights and Risk Assessment Report Template0 aDigitizing rare and unique historical documents so they can be shared online is mission-critical work for most cultural heritage institutions, but it can be difficult to complete this work, especially intellectual property rights management, at a scale that matches user demand. The authors of this open educational resource offer guidance for creating scalable, cross-functional workflows using a risk-management approach that increases efficiency and distributes responsibility for rights assessment work more equitably across stakeholders. It includes advice for navigating knowledge gaps, building an engaged team with the right skillsets, reimagining workflows, and rethinking traditional archival processing workflows to build capacity for rights analysis during arrangement and description. Each chapter includes a helpful exercise for implementing this guidance in your own institution.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aKowalski, Melanie T.eauthor1 aQuigley, Saraheauthor1 aBailey, Jodyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1530zAccess online version02398nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245005700161264004300218264006500261264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505047300503520079600976542002701772546001601799588004101815650003801856650002601894710003901920856007701959OTLid0001531MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2020    mnu     o     0   0 swa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMwangi, Petereauthor00aElementary SwahilibLugha na UtamadunicPeter Mwangi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEvanston, IllinoisbNorthwestern University Librariesc2023. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Swahili -- Salamu za Kiswahili/Swahili Greetings -- Shuguli za Kila Siku/Daily Activities -- Nyakati za Kiswahili/Swahili Tenses -- Kumkaribisha Mgeni/Welcoming the Visitor -- Familia/Family -- Kazi/Occupation -- Familia, Nchi, Uraia, na Lugha/Family, Country, Nationality, and Language -- Nina Lakini Sina/I have but I do not have -- Ninapenda lakini sipendi/I Like but I Do Not Like -- Je, Unasoma Wapi?/Where Do You Study? -- Nambari/Nominal Numbers0 aElementary Swahili: Lugha na Utamaduni is intended for both heritage and non-heritage elementary Swahili learners. It introduces the learners to aspects of Standard Swahili language and culture with the view of enhancing their intercultural competence in Swahili. The topics are well-integrated to enable the learners to easily apply what they learn in each topic into their daily interactions in Swahili about themselves, family, friends, immediate world, and East Africa. Thus, at the end of Elementary Swahili, learners should be able to carry out basic conversations in Swahili about themselves, their world, and East Africa. Further, the coursebook will incorporate common Swahili cultural practices in all the topics with the view of enhancing the learners’ intercultural competence.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Swahili.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1531zAccess online version02813nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136100003000143245008200173264004300255264007000298264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505089000545520073501435542004102170546001602211588004002227650002502267650003102292710003902323856007702362OTLid0001532MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH11 aLant, Christophereauthor00aNatural Resources SustainabilitybAn introductory synthesiscChristopher Lant 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUtahbUtah Education Network Digital Press with Pressbooksc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Natural Resources Sustainability in a Nutshell -- Chapter 2: Lessons from Environmental Histroy -- Chapter 3: Relevant Fundamentals of Physical Geography and Geology -- Chapter 4: Relevant Fundamentals of Ecology -- Chapter 5: Human Population and Sustainability -- Chapter 6: The Neoclassical Economics Approach to Sustainability -- Chapter 7: Learning from Oxymorons I - Ecological Economnics -- Chapter 8: Learning from Oxymorons II - Industrial Ecology -- Chapter 9: Property, Policy, and Insitutional Economics -- Chapter 10: Political Ecology -- Chapter 11: Using Land Sustainability -- Chapter 12: Water Resource Sustainability -- Chapter 13: Wealth from the Earth - Mineral Resources -- Chapter 14: Energy Sustainability -- Chapter 15: Policies for Natural Resources Sustainability -- Chapter 16: Envisioning a Sustainable American Way of Life -- Appendix0 aThis text has evolved from 20 semesters teaching the undergraduate courses Geography, People, and the Environment and Environment and Society. It is designed for freshmen through junior-level courses at community, junior and four-year colleges and universities in the United States. Focused upon the dilemma of environmental sustainability, geography and the emergent field of ecological economics are emphasized in a trans-disciplinary framework. It provides—in a one semester or one quarter undergraduate course that requires no prerequisites—a fundamental background in the essentials students need to deal with natural resource and environmental issues as an informed citizen while building a foundation for further study.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1532zAccess online version02671nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153100002700163245005000190264004300240264004500283264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002500450490002700475505027000502520113500772542004101907546001601948588004101964650003802005650004202043700002902085700003102114710003902145856007702184OTLid0001533MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            231025s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781942341963  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aHata, David M.eauthor00aIntroduction to Vacuum TechnologycDavid Hata 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- About The Authors -- Industry Testimonials -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Vacuum: An Enabling Technology -- Chapter 2: The Behavior of Gases -- Chapter 3: An Introduction to Vacuum Systems -- Chapter 4: Rough Vacuum Regime -- Glossary -- Index0 aVacuum systems are critical to many industries. They are vital to establishing required process pressures, establishing a clean process environment, and removing reaction by-products from the process chamber. This text, a revision and expansion of David Hata’s Introduction to Vacuum Technology published in 2008, addresses basic topics in vacuum technology for individuals tasked with maintaining vacuum systems and instructors teaching technician-level courses. The topics are carefully curated to the needs of technicians in a production environment and the types of vacuum systems used, and the accompanying laboratory manual and instructor’s guide support the delivery of lecture-laboratory courses. This book approaches vacuum systems from a pressure regime viewpoint, covering basic vacuum science, followed by the rough vacuum regime, including gas load, pumping mechanisms, pressure measurement, vacuum system construction, and basic troubleshooting concepts. The study of high vacuum systems follows and the same topics are revisited, and finally the topics of leak detection and residual gas analysis are discussed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aBrewer, Elena V.eauthor1 aLouwagie, Nancy J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1533zAccess online version01880nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145100002500152245004800177264004300225264006900268264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505015500514520057700669542003001246546001601276588004101292650002601333650003101359710003901390856007701429OTLid0001534MnU20260406020636.0m     o  d s      cr            231031s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946011190  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aReisner, Anneauthor00aReading Social Science MethodscAnn Reisner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUrbana, IllinoisbUniversity of Illinois Library - Urbanac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Getting Started -- Part II: Survey Analysis -- Part III: Content Analysis -- Part IV: Experimental Analysis -- Part V: Summary and Conclusions0 aScience has great potential to benefit society, but this potential comes with risks as well. Directed at introductory level social science and humanities majors, this textbook teaches the rules and limits of social science methods. Reisner starts from the assumption that it is not necessary to be able to do research to read and judge the soundness of research publications. The chapters guide students through an explicit set of rules for reading research articles developed from three common research methods: content analysis, survey research, and experimental method.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1534zAccess online version02960nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245006600160264004300226264009700269264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002500488490002700513505031800540520137800858542001602236546001602252588004102268650002702309700002702336700002902363700002802392700002602420710003902446856007702485OTLid0001535MnU20260406020605.0m     o  d s      cr            231031s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aAdams, Henryeauthor00aCounting Rocks! An Introduction to CombinatoricscHenry Adams 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bHenry Adams, Rachel Pries, and Maria Gillespiec2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Contents -- What is combinatorics? -- Counting principles -- Counting combinations -- Pascal's triangle and the Binomial Theorem -- Proof techniques in combinatorics -- Recurrence relations -- Generating functions -- Graph theory basics -- Trees -- Graph optimization -- Planar graphs -- Graph coloring0 aThis textbook, Counting Rocks!, is the written component of an interactive introduction to combinatorics at the undergradaute level. Throughout the text, we link to videos where we describe the material and provide examples; see the Youtube playlist on the Colorado State University (CSU) Mathematics YouTube channel. The major topics in this text are counting problems (Chapters 1-4), proof techniques (Chapter 5), recurrence relations and generating functions (Chapters 6-7), and graph theory (Chapters 8-12). The material and the problems we include are standard for an undergraduate combinatorics course. In this text, one of our goals was to describe the mathematical structures underlying problems in combinatorics. For example, we separate the description of sequences, permutations, sets and multisets in Chapter 3. In addition to the videos, we would like to highlight some other features of this book. Most chapters contain an investigation section, where students are led through a series of deeper problems on a topic. In several sections, we show students how to use the free online computing software SAGE in order to solve problems; this is especially useful for the problems on recurrence relations. We have included many helpful figures throughout the text, and we end each chapter (and many of the sections) with a list of exercises of varying difficulty.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aEmmrich, Kellyeauthor1 aGillespie, Mariaeauthor1 aGolden, Shannoneauthor1 aPries, Racheleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1535zAccess online version03957nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157100003900164245012500203264004300328264007000371264001200441300002200453336002600475337002600501338003600527341002800563490002700591505027300618520214100891542004103032546002703073588004103100650002503141650003103166700003803197700003203235700004203267700004603309700004003355710003903395856007703434OTLid0001536MnU20260323020518.0m     o  d s      cr            231101s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651068  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aDeza-Matías, Alberto Hugoeauthor00aEvaluación de la Satisfacción Laboral y Rendimiento Productivo de los Piscicultores ComunitarioscAlberto Deza-Matías 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Planteamiento del problema -- Marco teórico -- Metodología de la investigación -- Resultados -- Discusión -- Conclusiones -- Recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl objetivo fue Evaluación del Satisfacción Laboral y Rendimiento Productivo de los Piscicultores Comunitarios. El trabajo de investigación se realizó en las unidades productoras de truchas de la comunidad de Pacococha, distrito y provincia de Castrovirreyna. Las variables de estudio fueron la satisfacción laboral y la productividad. El tipo de investigación es básica. El nivel de la investigación es Correlacional. El método es descriptivo, cualitativo y cuantitativo, describiéndose las variables involucradas y analizando su incidencia e interrelación en función a la relación causa – efecto. El diseño de investigación fue descriptivo – correlacional. En la investigación se tuvo como población a 20 piscicultores entre trabajadores y jefes, y debido a que el número de unidades que la integraron resulto accesible en su totalidad, esta fue igual a la muestra, es decir los 20 piscicultores. Para el sustento de la parte teórica se consultó diferentes fuentes bibliográficas y para el trabajo de campo se aplicó cuestionarios a la muestra identificada, formulándose dos instrumentos, que fueron validados oportunamente por juicio de expertos, a fin de efectivizar su aplicación correspondiente, los instrumentos utilizados fueron los cuestionarios de encuesta de satisfacción laboral y productividad, donde cada pregunta fue realizada de acorde a las variables considerando sus dimensiones e indicadores, con los cuales se obtuvo la información pertinente de los trabajadores de las unidades productoras. Los resultados nos muestran un coeficiente de correlación de Pearson r = 0.672, con un nivel de significancia menor a 0,05 (p-valor = 0,001). Por lo tanto, al ser el p-valor significativo concluimos que existe correlación entre las variables de estudio, se acepta la hipótesis alterna con un nivel de confianza del 95%. Como conclusión principal se ha determinado a través de la investigación que la productividad del factor humano se relaciona de forma positiva y moderada con la satisfacción laboral del personal de producción de las piscigranjas, con un grado de relación del 45.2%.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCastrejón-Valdez, Manueleauthor1 aRojas-Felipe, Edwineauthor1 aMencia-Sánchez, Noemi Gladyseauthor1 aRodríguez-Deza, Jorge Washingtoneauthor1 aYaulilahua-Huacho, Russbelteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1536zAccess online version03166nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153050001000161100005100171245011100222264004300333264007000376264001200446300002200458336002600480337002600506338003600532341002800568490002700596505025600623520140500879542004102284546002702325588004102352650003002393650002702423650002302450700004102473700004502514700004502559710003902604856007702643OTLid0001537MnU20260330020550.0m     o  d s      cr            231101s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651075  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aAstudillo-Martínez, Washington Javiereauthor00aUn Análisis Científico del Ruido Ambiental y Laboral en Sectores UrbanoscWashington Astudillo-Martínez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Contextualización de la realidad y el Análisis de la problemática -- Metodología -- Análisis de resultados -- Conclusiones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 a¿Cuál es el nivel de ruido existente Av. Av. 3 de Julio y sus intersecciones entre la calle Ambato y la Y del Indio Colorado de la ciudad de Santo Domingo?, el presente trabajo de investigación tiene como objetivo principal conocer el nivel de ruido existente en este sector de la ciudad, con el fin de determinar el alcance de su afectación y sobre todo sus fuentes, se realizó la evaluación correspondiente de acuerdo con la normativa TULSMA. y Decreto Ejecutivo N° 2393, aplicando la investigación de campo se midió la presencia de ruido ambiental y ocupacional, se requirió del uso de dosímetros calibrados y certificados para obtener información precisa. En esta investigación se estudió estas importantes intersecciones, siendo que, en cuanto a normativa ambiental sobrepasa el nivel tolerable con un diferencial de 10 decibeles en promedio, mientras que en referencia del ruido laboral esta intersección está por debajo de los niveles permisibles con al menos 9 decibeles en promedio, las posibles enfermedades subyacentes más comunes encontradas fueron el estrés, los dolores de cabeza que afectaban principalmente a la población comerciante permanente, y la actividad que mayor emisión de ruido produjo fue el tránsito vehicular, del mismo modo se identificó que el día que se produjo mayor contaminación acústica fue el sábado entre las 11:30 am hasta la 13:00 pm.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aAndrade-Bravo, Aida Gabrielaeauthor1 aGarcía-Valdez, Jonathan-Douglaseauthor1 aAlmenaba-Guerrero, Yuli Fernandaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1537zAccess online version02957nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002900147245009700176264004300273264007600316264001200392300002200404336002600426337002600452338003600478341002800514490002700542505030000569520119000869542002702059546001602086588004002102650002902142650002402171700002702195700002702222700002602249700002602275700002502301700002602326700003102352710003902383856007702422OTLid0001538MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            231101s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aWhiteing, Nicolaeauthor00aCase Studies for Health, Research and Practice in Australia and New ZealandcNicola Whiteing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSouthern Cross Universityc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aHow to use this book -- About the authors -- Acknowledgement of Country -- Accessibility statement -- Versioning -- Glossary of icons -- Part 1: The Calos-Clark Family -- Part 2: Lucy's Story -- Part 3: The Shero Family -- Part 4: The Lewis Family -- Part 5: The Rossi Family -- Review statement0 aThe OER includes case studies of 5 families from a variety of backgrounds in metropolitan and regional Queensland (QLD), New South Wales (NSW), and Victoria (VIC), Australia. Case studies have been popular in nursing to help students bring their learning to life and enhance their critical thinking. However, often case studies appear in one unit or one particular content area to aid students learning for a particular condition or point in time. Taking a transformational, place-based approach, the OER case studies for health are set within metropolitan and regional areas, so learning is contextual and relatable. Case studies increase in complexity so that students can be introduced to and ‘get to know’ the families from their first year of study. As students progress through their studies, they meet the families again in different, often more complex scenarios. The families experience a variety of political and socio-economic circumstances, which helps students to learn about various healthcare contexts, build knowledge and understanding about the families’ circumstances from a holistic, person-centred, interprofessional perspective, and engage at a deeper level.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aShinners, Lucyeauthor1 aGraham, Nicoleeauthor1 aNasrawi, Dimaeauthor1 aWilson, Donnaeauthor1 aFoster, Annaeauthor1 aKunst, Eliciaeauthor1 aGreenhill, Jenneneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1538zAccess online version02729nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005900135264004300194264006900237264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505063600483520080901119542004101928546001601969588004101985650003802026650002602064700002702090700002702117700003702144700003402181710003902215856007702254OTLid0001539MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            231129s2023    mnu     o     0   0 ita d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aPiacere!bElementary Italian at The University of Iowa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Part I: Saluti e prezentazioni -- Part II: Oggetti e cose -- Part III: Caratteristiche -- Part IV: Azioni -- Part V: La famiglia -- Part VI: Attività e passatempi -- Part VII: Giorni e ore -- Part VIII: Luoghi -- Part IX: Viaggi -- Part X: La cucina -- Part XI: Attività quotidiane -- Part XII: I giochi e gli sport -- Part XIII: La moda -- Part XIV: La mia storia e il mio futuro -- Part XV: Il lavoro e le spese -- Part XVI: "Uno, nessuno e centomila" -- Part XVII: Cercare casa -- Part XIX: La storia e le arti -- Part XX: Le mie idee e i miei programmi -- Part XXI: Le emozioni -- Appendix0 aPiacere! is an elementary Italian open-access textbook authorized by the Italian faculty of The University of Iowa. A comprehensive and flexible e-textbook, this Open Education Resource aims to support students’ acquisition of the grammar and vocabulary that ensure meaningful communication as well as to enhance students’ familiarity with Italian culture. Piacere! is divided into twenty-one units, which revolve around a specific theme, in order to facilitate a comprehensive learning and use of the language. Units include the following components: grammar, vocabulary, conversations, and readings. While in its organization the textbook is meant to offer the students with a flexible and approachable individual study experience, each component may be easily translated into classroom activities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Italian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGemmani, Luciaeauthor1 aLottini, Ireneeauthor1 aSartini-Rideout, Claudiaeauthor1 aTrucchia, Andreaeillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1539zAccess online version01953nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109100002500127245004700152264004300199264008000242264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505032200499520056900821542002701390546001601417588004001433650002601473710003901499856007701538OTLid0001540MnU20260406020806.0m     o  d s      cr            231204s2017    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU1 aUrich, Alleneauthor00aMethods for Stress ManagementcAllen Urich 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPennsylvania State Universityc2023. 4c©2017.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Stress -- Chapter 2: Managing Stress -- Chapter 3: Relaxation -- Chapter 4: Communication -- Chapter 5: Managing Anger -- Chapter 6: Anxiety -- Chapter 7: Healthy Eating -- Chapter 8: Physical Activity and Exercise -- Chapter 9: Efficient Time Management -- Chapter 10: Implementing a Stress Reduction Plan0 aStress is a feeling you get when faced with a challenge. In small doses, stress can be good for you because it makes you more alert and gives you a burst of energy. For instance, if you start to cross the street and see a car about to run you over, that jolt you feel helps you to jump out of the way before you get hit. But feeling stressed for a long time can take a toll on your mental and physical health. Even though it may seem hard to find ways to de-stress with all the things you have to do, it’s important to find those ways. Your health depends on it.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1540zAccess online version02661nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002900165245003400194264004300228264007400271264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505040100522520108600923542004102009546001602050588004002066650002902106650002402135710003902159856007702198OTLid0001541MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            231207s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957213651  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aBaker, Charlotteeauthor00aEpidemiologycCharlotte Baker 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Author -- Acknowledgements -- Instructor Resources -- Epidemiology in Sum -- Measuring Things in Epidemiology -- Study Designs -- Diagnostics and Screening -- The Wrecking Ball: Bias, Confounding, Interaction and Effect Modification -- Study Guide: Measuring Things in Epidemiology -- Study Guide: Study Designs -- Study Guide: Diagnostics and Screening -- Accessibility0 aEpidemiology is an openly licensed text designed for medical degree–seeking clinical students without a prior background in public health. Using sports medicine and injury prevention examples and applications, it aims to provide students with the basics of epidemiology terms and concepts and is intended to guide medical school students as they prepare for the USMLE Step 1 Exam and to transition from student to clinician. It includes an introduction to general concepts and terminology of epidemiology, study designs and their relationship to clinical questions, and the use of epidemiology in clinical diagnosis and screening of disease. Concluding sections of the book present sources of errors in epidemiologic studies, including bias, confounding, and effect modification. The book is notable for its use of accessible, inclusive figures and examples, and end-of-chapter study guides that summarize the chapter visually. Are you reviewing or adopting this book for a course? Please help us understand your use by filling out this form: https://bit.ly/interest_epidemiology1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1541zAccess online version03438nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100003300145245004800178250002600226264004300252264012600295264001200421300002200433336002600455337002600481338003600507341002800543490002700571505056600598520160601164542003002770546001602800588004002816650003802856650004202894710003902936856007702975OTLid0001542MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            231207s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA1451 aEllingson, Steven W.eauthor00aRadio Systems EngineeringcSteven Ellingson  aRevised First Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBradley Department of Electrical & Computer Engineering at Virginia Tech, Blacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Antenna Fundamentals -- Propagation -- Noise -- Analog Modulation -- Digital Modulation -- Radio Link Analysis -- Two-Port Concepts -- Impedance Matching -- Amplifiers -- Linearity, Multistage Analysis, and Dynamic Range -- Antenna Integration -- Analog Filters & Multiplexers -- Frequency and Quadrature Conversion in the Analog Domain -- Receivers -- Frequency Synthesis -- Transmitters -- Digital Implementation of Radio Functions -- Appendix A: Empirical Modeling of Mean Path Loss -- Appendix B: Characteristics of Some Common Radio Systems0 aUsing a systems framework, this textbook provides a clear and comprehensive introduction to the performance, analysis, and design of radio systems for students and practicing engineers. Presented within a consistent framework, the first part of the book describes the fundamentals of the subject: propagation, noise, antennas, and modulation. The analysis and design of radios including RF circuit design and signal processing is covered in the second half of the book. Key features Numerous examples within the text involve realistic analysis and design activities, and emphasize how practical experiences may differ from theory or taught procedures. RF circuit design and analysis is presented with minimal involvement of Smith charts, enabling students to more readily grasp the fundamentals. Both traditional and software-defined/direct sampling technology are described with pros and cons of each strategy explained. Are you reviewing or adopting this book for a course? Please help us understand your use by filling out this form: https://bit.ly/interest_radiosystemsengineering_revised1st Radio Systems Engineering (Revised First Edition) was previously published by Cambridge University Press (2016) ISBN 9781107068285. This version is © Steven W. Ellingson and has been lightly updated to correct known errata, minor issues with text and figures, and to present examples in color highlight boxes and some figures in color. It is made freely available and under a Creative Commons Attribution NonCommercial International License (CC BY NC 4.0) with permission from Cambridge University Press.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1542zAccess online version02316nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245009700149264004300246264005700289264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505018000523520091900703542003001622546001601652588004101668650002301709650002401732700002801756700003001784710003901814856007701853OTLid0001543MnU20260406020606.0m     o  d s      cr            231221s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aSocial Determinants of Health in Nursing EducationbIntegrating Into Curriculum and Practice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSocial Determinants of Health -- What is Cultural Aptitude? -- Incorporating into Nursing Curriculum -- Case Studies -- Facilitator Guide -- Photo Credits -- About the Authors0 aThis workbook was established with nurse educators and nursing students in mind to provide knowledge, guidance, and support for integrating SDOH across the nursing education spectrum. Contents from this workbook are applicable to pre-licensure baccalaureate nursing programs, RN-to-BSN programs, and graduate education. A strategic approach for this workbook was purposefully designed to meet the structure of the National Council of State Boards of Nursing (NCSBN) Clinical Judgment Measure Model® with a combined focus on the four spheres of care supported by the American Association of Colleges of Nursing (AACN®). Our goal with this workbook is to lead educators and students on a directed path of discovering how SDOH is an integral part of nursing practice and how nurses can implement effective interventions to positively impact the health outcomes of individuals, families, communities, and aggregates.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aBowker, Dawn M.eauthor1 aKerkove, Karla S.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1543zAccess online version01927nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001200139050001000151100002800161245003900189264004300228264005700271264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505037100505520038100876542003001257546001601287588004001303650002301343650002301366650002401389710003901413856007701452OTLid0001545MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240110s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQM1-695 4aRA4401 aBastawros, Halaeauthor00aHuman ReproductioncHala Bastawros 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout this book -- The Female Reproductive System -- Female Endocrinology -- The Male Reproductive System -- Male Endocrinology -- Stages of Life -- Gametogenesis, Fertilization, and Implantation -- Genetic Disorders -- Normal Pregnancy -- Labor and Birth -- Contraception -- Infertility -- Sexual Transmitted Diseases -- Pelvic Pain -- About the Author -- Reviewers0 aThis open textbook is designed to provide a deep understanding of the biological and biomedical aspects of human reproduction, covering a wide range of topics from basic reproductive biology to clinical applications. The book starts with foundational knowledge and progresses to more advanced topics while also including real-world clinical orientation for practical contexts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1545zAccess online version02400nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002600140245006400166264004300230264005400273264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505057900504520070601083542001601789546001601805588004001821650003401861700002701895710003901922856007701961OTLid0001546MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aAustin, Meganeauthor00aAdvanced Legal ResearchbProcess and PracticecMegan Austin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEugene, ORbUniversity of Oregon Librariesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAdvanced Legal Research: Process and Practice -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Overview of the Research Process and Legal Analysis -- Client Scenario -- Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion Topics -- Weekly Research Journal Entries -- Research Log Assignment -- Final Project -- Offline Preparation for Research -- Finding and Using Secondary Sources -- Finding and Using Enacted Law (Statutes and Ordinances) -- Finding and Using Case Law -- Finding and Using Administrative Law -- Finding and Using Legislative Law -- Updating, Reading, Analyzing, and Organizing Sources0 aWritten for students and instructors in an advanced legal research course, this book uses the steps of the legal research process to facilitate skills practice, collaboration, and reflection. It proposes a hypothetical as a basis for practicing the research process steps and encourages students and instructors to contribute other hypotheticals. The text also includes sample assignments, demonstration videos, and discussion and reflection questions, with opportunities for students and instructors to contribute additional questions. This text uses an approach that emphasizes student reflection on the development of research skills, with the benefit of repeated and consistent formative feedback.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aService, Alliaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1546zAccess online version02606nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245008700152264004300239264007000282264001200352300002200364336002600386337002600412338003600438341002800474490002700502505028000529520086600809542004101675546002701716588004101743650003101784700004001815700004301855700004001898700003601938700004701974700004702021710003902068856007702107OTLid0001547MnU20260323020519.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651082  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aInteracciones Familiares y AutoestimabUn Estudio entre Estudiantes de Secundaria. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Planteamiento del problema -- Capítulo II: Antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo III: Metodología -- Capítulo IV: Análisis de resultados -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl presente libro tuvo como objetivo determinar la clima social familiar y autoestima en estudiantes de nivel secundaria de Huancavelica, metodológicamente la investigación fue tipo aplicada, diseño no experimental de nivel correlacional y descriptivo, la población de estudio fue de 138 estudiantes de nivel de educación secundaria de edades 15 y 17 años del colegio "Francisca Diez Canseco de Castilla" en Huancavelica de muestreo probabilístico con técnica encuesta de escala de medición que incluye noventa ítems, diez sub dimensiones y tres dimensiones de confiabilidad entre 0.88 y 0.91, se utilizó el programa SPSS. Los resultados indican una relación positiva de intensidad baja entre el Clima Social Familiar y la Autoestima, con coeficiente de correlación 0.29. Se concluye, el clima social ayuda a mejor la autoestima de los estudiantes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMadrid-Gómez, Karina Eddmyeauthor1 aHerrera-Aponte, Milca Betsabéeauthor1 aArias-Huánuco, Jesús Meryeauthor1 aZevallos-Parave, Ysabeleauthor1 aCamposano-Córdova, Alvaro Ignacioeauthor1 aLLancari-Choccelahua, Rosa Belindaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1547zAccess online version02695nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245009100152264004300243264007000286264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002800478490002700506505031000533520092800843542004101771546002701812588004101839650003101880700004001911700004001951700003601991700004302027700004702070700004002117710003902157856007702196OTLid0001548MnU20260406020606.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651099  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aEstrategias activas para el aprendizaje autónomobUn enfoque en Alumnos de Secundaria 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Estrategias activas -- Capítulo II: Aprendizaje autónomo como pilar del proceso del aprendizaje -- Capítulo III: Análisis e interpretación de resultados, conclusiones y sugerencias -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl manuscrito presenta un enfocado en evaluar el desarrollo del aprendizaje autónomo en alumnos de secundaria. A través de pruebas aplicadas antes y después de intervenciones educativas, se recopilaron datos para las alumnas y un grupo control. Los resultados evidencian una evolución positiva en la autonomía de aprendizaje, destacando mejoras en la autoevaluación, la planificación, la autorregulación y las habilidades comunicativas y sociales. Las estrategias de motivación demostraron ser un componente crucial, potenciando la confianza y la motivación intrínseca de los estudiantes para aprender y gestionar sus emociones efectivamente. Los hallazgos resaltan la importancia de fomentar un entorno educativo que apoye el desarrollo de habilidades autodirigidas, sugiriendo que tales enfoques pueden influir significativamente en la capacidad del estudiantado para aprender de manera independiente y eficaz.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMadrid-Gómez, Karina Eddmyeauthor1 aArias-Huánuco, Jesús Meryeauthor1 aZevallos-Parave, Ysabeleauthor1 aAlfaro-Saavedra, Maura Nataliaeauthor1 aCamposano-Córdova, Alvaro Ignacioeauthor1 aYaulilahua-Huacho, Russbelteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1548zAccess online version03394nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245012200152264004300274264007000317264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002800509490002700537505030200564520171100866542004102577546002702618588004102645650003102686700004002717700004002757700003602797700004702833710003902880856007702919OTLid0001549MnU20260330020551.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651105  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aEntre el Autoconocimiento y la AutoestimabExplorando el Programa “Súbete a mi Auto” en el ámbito Universitario 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema, su importancia y marco teórico -- Capítulo II: Metodología -- Capítulo III: Análisis de resultados, discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro de investigación tuvo como objetivo determinar la influencia del Programa “Súbete a mi Auto” en autoestima en los estudiantes universitarios, la investigación fue tipo aplicada de nivel explicativo, diseño cuasi experimental. La muestra de estudio es de 25 estudiantes para el grupo experimental y 25 estudiantes para el grupo de control con técnicas de psicometría e instrumentos como el cuestionario; los resultados: Basado en las mediciones de la autoestima en las fases del pre test y post test, en efecto los resultados de la autoestima total en el pre test el nivel muy bajo el grupo de control tiene un 3,7% de casos y el 7.4% el grupo experimental y en el nivel muy alto el grupo de control tiene un 7,4% de casos y el 25,9% el grupo experimental; resultados de la autoestima general en el pre test en el nivel muy bajo el grupo control tiene un 25,9% de casos y el 33,3% el grupo experimental y en el nivel muy alto el grupo control tiene un 0,0% de casos y el 0,0% el grupo experimental. Resultados de la autoestima total en el post test En el nivel muy bajo el grupo control tiene un 0,0% de casos y el 0,0% el grupo experimental y en el nivel muy alto el grupo control tiene un 37,0% de casos y el 55,6% el grupo experimental; resultados de la autoestima general en el post test En el nivel muy bajo el grupo control tiene un 3,7% de casos y el 0,0% el grupo experimental en el nivel muy bajo el grupo control tiene un 3,7% de casos y el 0,0% el grupo experimental y en el nivel muy alto el grupo control tiene un 11,1% de casos y el 18,5% el grupo experimental. Se concluye el programa mejora la autoestima en los estudiantes mostrando resultados favorables en más del 95%.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMadrid-Gómez, Karina Eddmyeauthor1 aArias Huánuco, Jesús Meryeauthor1 aZevallos Parave, Ysabeleauthor1 aCamposano Córdova, Alvaro Ignacioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1549zAccess online version03540nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245011400152264004300266264007000309264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002800501490002700529505029000556520174500846542004102591546002702632588004102659650003102700700004602731700004402777700004102821700004802862700004202910700005002952710003903002856007703041OTLid0001550MnU20260309020914.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651112  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH103aEl derecho a ser padresbRompiendo los paradigmas del derecho de familia, bajo una concepción legal o ilegal 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: La maternidad subrogada y su afectación legal -- Capítulo II: La maternidad subrogada en España y Ecuador -- Capítulo III: La adopción: Una forma legal de ser padres -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aHablar acerca del derecho a ser padres es una realidad que no siempre se reconoce como tal, pero que, desde un punto de vista subjetivo, va más allá de un simple capricho. Se trata de un juego de complementariedad destinado a la formación de una familia. En Ecuador, la maternidad subrogada carece de regulación dentro del marco legal. A pesar de los intentos por normar estos procedimientos de reproducción humana, no se ha alcanzado un consenso entre aquellos encargados de crear leyes. Esto ha generado divergencias de criterios entre los legisladores, resultando en la falta de conclusiones y permitiendo que este tipo de procedimientos continúe sin garantizar el interés superior del menor ni de los padres subrogantes. Esta obra aborda la importancia del derecho a ser padres desde una perspectiva que puede considerarse ilegal en algunos casos y legal en otros, siendo la adopción parte de esta última categoría. La adopción se caracteriza como una institución jurídica que facilita el establecimiento de vínculos afectivos entre aquellos padres que carecen de hijos y viceversa. Para quienes anhelan tener un hijo, es esencial cumplir con los requisitos establecidos por la legislación vigente, ya que el simple deseo no es suficiente. En este contexto, tanto la maternidad subrogada como la adopción se presentan como mecanismos que posibilitan a individuos y parejas alcanzar la paternidad, si bien difieren en sus procesos y circunstancias. El objetivo de este texto es ofrecer una comprensión clara de los mecanismos asociados a cada proceso, rompiendo paradigmas en el ámbito del derecho de familia y destacando que ambos conducen a la oportunidad de formar una familia, siendo esta la base del tejido social.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSamaniego Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aBonilla-Morejón, Diego Marceloeauthor1 aMartínez-Tapia, José Davideauthor1 aNavarrete-Valladolid, María Isabeleauthor1 aSolis-Miranda, Diego Fernandoeauthor1 aZambrano-Villacrés, Dayana Estefanyaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1550zAccess online version03190nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145245003400156264004300190264005900233264001200292300002200304336002600326337002600352338003600378341002800414490002700442505080300469520099701272542001602269546001602285588004002301650002402341700002802365700002902393700002502422700002802447700002802475700002702503700003002530700002702560700002902587710003902616856007702655OTLid0001551MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961585310  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF500100aWorkplace Software and Skills 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 - Technology in Everyday Life and Business -- Chapter 2 - Essentials of Software Applications for Business -- Chapter 3 - Creating and Working in Documents -- Chapter 4 - Document Preparation -- Chapter 5 - Advanced Document Preparation -- Chapter 6 - Preparing Presentations -- Chapter 7 - Advanced Presentation Skills -- Chapter 8 - Content Management Systems and Social Media in Business -- Chapter 9 - Working with Spreadsheets -- Chapter 10 - Advanced Excel Formulas, Functions, and Techniques -- Chapter 11 - Advanced Excel Spreadsheets: Statistical and Data Analysis -- Chapter 12 - Using Excel in Accounting and Financial Reporting -- Chapter 13 - Understanding and Using Databases -- Chapter 14 - Advanced Database Use -- Chapter 15 - Integrating Applications -- Index0 aWorkplace Software and Skills is designed to flexibly support a range of courses covering computer literacy, Microsoft Office, and Google Suite applications. The textbook covers both hard and soft skills that are applicable to a broad range of academic majors and careers. Chapters combine studio learning and guided practice with scaffolded activities designed to reinforce a student’s ability to perform higher-order tasks independently. Workplace Software and Skills leverages complementary product features in spreadsheet, word processing, presentation, and similar applications. Modules are designed for maximum flexibility by including both Microsoft Office Suite and Google Suite applications, in order to best reflect the skills needed for today’s workforce. Authentic activities and real-world contexts develop a cumulative and thorough understanding, which reinforces the importance of cross-platform proficiency. Highly visible features also note Apple/Mac functions as needed.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks1 aBolling, Tammieeauthor1 aMitchell, Angelaeauthor1 aScott, Tanyaeauthor1 aWheeler, Nyrobieauthor1 aLepore, Bridgeteauthor1 aWalton, Janineeauthor1 aBurgoyne, Timothyeauthor1 aArguello, Rickeauthor1 aFalduto, Valereeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1551zAccess online version02433nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245003700158264004300195264006900238264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505025500484520085400739542003001593546001601623588004101639650003601680700002901716700002601745700002701771700003401798700003101832700003201863710003901895856007701934OTLid0001552MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946011213  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.600aWriting for Inquiry and Research 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUrbana, IllinoisbUniversity of Illinois Library - Urbanac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Chapter 1: Annotated Bibliography -- Chapter 2: Proposal -- Chapter 3: Literature Review -- Chapter 4: Research Essay -- Appendix I: Writing Strategies -- Appendix II: Reading Strategies -- Appendix III: Research Strategies0 aWriting for Inquiry and Research guides students through the composition process of writing a research paper. The book divides this process into four chapters that each focus on a genre connected to research writing: the annotated bibliography, proposal, literature review, and research essay. Each chapter provides significant guidance with reading, writing, and research strategies, along with significant examples and links to external resources. This book serves to help students and instructors with a writing-project-based approach, transforming the research process into an accessible series of smaller, more attainable steps for a semester-long course in research writing. Additional resources throughout the book, as well as in three appendices, allow for students and instructors to explore the many facets of the writing process together.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aKessler, Jeffreyeauthor1 aBennett, Markeauthor1 aPrimeau, Saraheauthor1 aWilliams, Charitianneeauthor1 aCostello, Virginiaeauthor1 aArmstrong, Annie R.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1552zAccess online version02747nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155245005600165264004300221264006900264264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505052400510520092601034542003001960546001601990588004102006650002902047650002402076700003002100700002702130700002602157700002602183710003902209856007702248OTLid0001553MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781946011152  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA44000aDrug Use and MisusebA Community Health Perspective 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUrbana, IllinoisbUniversity of Illinois Library - Urbanac2022. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- Introduction -- Drug Use and Misuse Overview -- How Drugs Work in the Body and the Brain -- Social Determinants of Drug Use, Misuse, and Involvement -- Gateway Drugs (Caffeine, Alcohol, Tobacco, Marijuana) -- Sedative Hypnotics, Psychotherapeutic Drugs, Psychedelics, and Hallucinogens -- Opioids, Stimulants, Depressants, and Inhalants -- Prescription Medication, Over-the-Counter Drugs, Dietary Supplements, and Appearance and Performance Enhancers -- Evidence-Based Prevention and Treatment Models0 aDrug Use and Misuse: A Community Health Perspective provides students with an introduction to the biological, psychological, and legal aspects of drug use and misuse through the lens of community health and discusses the impact of drug use and misuse on community health. The book contains eight distinct chapters addressing the background of drug use and misuse, including key terms, as well as an introduction to different categories of drugs including gateway drugs, opioids, and prescription drugs, and a conclusion that describes evidence-based prevention and treatment models. Originally developed for use in the popular undergraduate survey course “Drug Use and Abuse” taught at the University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign, the book is aimed at students learning about community health and the effects of drug use in a variety of contexts, such as survey courses for pharmacology, psychology, or public health.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aBazan, Christy N.eauthor1 aBarnes, Brandieauthor1 aSantens, Ryaneauthor1 aVerone, Emilyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1553zAccess online version02204nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002900155245007800184264004300262264003800305264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505037300520520066400893542003001557546001601587588004001603650004201643700002901685710003901714856007701753OTLid0001554MnU20260406020608.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800084650  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 avan Ewijk, Stijneauthor03aAn Introduction to Waste Management and Circular EconomycStijn van Ewijk 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLondon, EnglandbUCL Pressc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbbreviations -- SI units and prefixes -- List of boxes -- List of exercises -- Foreword -- Acknowledgements -- Materials and waste -- The impacts of waste -- Assessment methods -- Policy and legislation -- Waste prevention -- Collection and treatment -- Waste recycling -- Energy recovery and disposal -- The circular economy -- Further reading -- References -- Index0 aThis introductory textbook provides an essential interdisciplinary guide to waste management and circular economy. It helps students to understand the drivers of waste, the environmental, social, and economic impacts of waste generation, and best practices and technologies for waste management, recycling, energy recovery and disposal. With helpful, full-colour diagrams throughout, each chapter includes learning objectives, introduction to concepts and themes, exercises and review sections, to guide students through the book. The textbook is ideal for teaching environmental engineering and science, as well as interdisciplinary environmental programmes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aStegemann, Juliaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1554zAccess online version01881nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100003000140245010700170264004300277264007300320264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505066300570520004901233542004101282546001601323588004001339650003601379710003901415856007701454OTLid0001555MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aMcBride, Wendy L.eauthor00aSourcing, summarizing, and synthesizingb  Skills for effective research writing cWendy McBride 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- The objective of a literature review -- Matters of tone and style -- Raising the level (grammar support) -- Articles and nouns (grammar support) -- Strong research questions -- Producing a workable thesis statement -- Identifying and deploying source material -- Question structure (grammar support) -- Paragraph and sentence structure (grammar support) -- Paraphrasing and summarizing -- Summarizing and synthesizing -- Sentence strength and variety (grammar support) -- Using parallel structures effectively (grammar support) -- The annotated bibliography -- The literature review structure and function -- Producing effective abstracts0 aAn open educational text written by McBride.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1555zAccess online version01996nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002700138245006600165264004300231264005700274264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002500453490002700478505021400505520061000719542004101329546001601370588004001386650002401426700003001450700002601480710003901506856007701545OTLid0001556MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aLucas, Kristeneauthor00aBusiness CommunicationbFive Core CompetenciescKristen Lucas 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSAALCKc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Becoming Competent -- Chapter 2: Professional -- Chapter 3: Clear -- Chapter 4: Concise -- Chapter 5: Evidence-Driven -- Chapter 6: Persuasive -- Afterword: Communicating Competently and Confidently0 aBusiness Communication: Five Core Competencies is a practical, engaging book designed to help undergraduate students and business professionals develop competence and build confidence in their business writing skills. Readers will learn about the five core competencies of business communication: professional, clear, concise, evidence-driven, and persuasive. They also will learn strategies for applying each of these competencies across a range of real-world business scenarios. Each chapter includes Communication Tips, Your Turn Exercises, and how-to advice for writing a variety of business messages.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks1 aRawlins, Jacob D.eauthor1 aHaugen, Jennaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1556zAccess online version01912nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002400136245005700160250001600217264004300233264005400276264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505033000507520047900837542003001316546001601346588004001362650003201402710003901434856007701473OTLid0001557MnU20260406020637.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aLetaw, Laraeauthor00aHandbook of Software Engineering MethodscLara Letaw  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Agile -- Project Management and Teamwork -- Requirements -- Unified Modeling Language Class and Sequence Diagrams -- Monolith versus Microservice Architectures -- Paper Prototyping -- Inclusivity Heuristics -- Code Smells and Refactoring -- Conclusion -- Glossary -- References -- Accessibility and Versioning0 aSoftware engineering can help people create sustainable, extensible programs that solve problems people care about.I won’t tell you how to be a software engineer; you’ll learn that over time by doing it. Instead, this book is about software engineering methods: Ways people achieve specific objectives in software engineering—that can save your project. My hope is that, after reading this book (or parts of it), you’ll feel better equipped for software engineering.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1557zAccess online version01833nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002900138245005600167250001800223264004300241264005800284264001200342300002200354336002600376337002600402338003600428341002800464490002700492505041100519520030300930542004101233546001601274588004101290650002401331710003901355856007701394OTLid0001558MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aRenfro, Jayme L.eauthor00aPublic AdministrationbThe EssentialscJayme Renfro  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCedar Falls, IowabUniversity of Northern Iowac2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Public Administration: The Basics -- Chapter 2: The Public Sector -- Chapter 3: Organizational Management and the Foundations of Administration -- Chapter 4: Organizational Behavior -- Chapter 5: Public Policy -- Chapter 6: Public Budgeting and Finance -- Chapter 7: Public Human Resources Management -- Chapter 8: Ethics and Accountability in Public Administration -- Conclusion0 aPublic Administration: The Essentials provides students with the conceptual foundation they need for an introduction to the field of public administration. This OER textbook covers the most critical issues in the field through the use of classic texts and theory as well as through modern examples.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1558zAccess online version02247nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002700134245004800161264004300209264005900252264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505050300488520069300991542001601684546001601700588004001716650002501756710003901781856007701820OTLid0001559MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aProctor, Jasoneauthor00aTeaching Methods & PracticescJason Proctor 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen OCOc2023. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- About Annotation -- Managing Learner Behavior -- Classroom Norms & Procedures -- Teacher Voice -- Classroom Layout & Teacher Radar -- Individual Student Corrections -- Using Questions to Engage & Assess -- Cooperative Learning -- Planning Instruction & Assessment -- Identifying Learning Outcomes -- Planning Assessments -- Developing Rubrics & Scoring Guides -- Responding to Student Needs -- Planning Instruction & Learning Experiences -- Scoring & Grading Practices -- Appendix0 aThis book is intended to serve as a resource for novice teachers as they master the art of effective classroom management, assessment, and lesson planning. At the undergraduate level, this book is designed to accompany the instruction in the EDUC 4353: Secondary Teaching Methods & Practices course before the full-internship experience. At the graduate level, this book is designed to support the instruction in the EDUC 5283: Teaching Methods course with a special focus on supporting Alternatively Certified Educators. Each chapter presents a component of the teaching and learning process critical for teacher development and describes how that component is relevant to the classroom.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1559zAccess online version03612nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245007600162264004300238264007000281264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505039000528520188500918542004102803546002702844588004102871650002402912650003102936700003902967700004003006700004003046710003903086856007703125OTLid0001560MnU20260406020608.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651150  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA440 4aH100aSeguridad e higiene en el trabajo una visión holista en el nuevo siglo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Definición y legislación de seguridad industrial, nacional e internacional -- Capítulo II: Accidentes de trabajo -- Capítulo III: Factores de riesgo laboral y matriz de riesgo -- Capítulo IV: Señalética e inspecciones de equipos de seguridad -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEn el nuevo contexto globalizado, el campo laboral abarca múltiples áreas en las que se desenvuelven trabajadores que aportan la producción y generan ingresos a la economía de un país, en este contexto, es imprescindible proteger la integridad de los obreros que están día a día expuestos a diversas situaciones que pueden generar desde leves hasta graves problemas en su integridad física y en su salud en general. La Identificación de peligros y evaluación de riesgos, permite elaborar las medidas de prevención para precautelar la integridad de los trabajadores dentro de cada empresa dependiendo de su área de competencia. Ya que pueden sufrir accidentes, lesiones físicas, enfermedades ocupaciones que deterioran la calidad de vida de las personas. Según la Organización Internacional del Trabajo OIT, a nivel mundial al menos 108.000 trabajadores mueren en su lugar de trabajo cada año. Datos de países industrializados muestran que los trabajadores de la construcción tienen una probabilidad entre 3 y 4 veces mayor de morir a causa de accidentes en el trabajo que otros trabajadores. Con estos antecedentes, en el mundo se han creado medidas de precaución de trabajo para la disminución de accidentes, implantando normativas internacionales. Diseñar e implementar un sistema de gestión de seguridad y salud ocupacional basada en normas internacionales permite transformar los entornos laborales en ambientes más amigables y productivos en las empresas. Se considera imprescindible proteger al personal, a través de la implementación de procesos de Seguridad y Salud Ocupacional, enmarcados en los requisitos legales aplicables a cada país, la capacitación, adquisición de herramientas y equipos adecuados, además de tener acceso a servicios de atención de salud, permitirán optimizar la eficiencia de su labor en todas las áreas laborales.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aHoffmann-Jaramillo, Karleseauthor1 aFlores-Murillo, Carlos Reneeauthor1 aVallejo-López, Alida Bellaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1560zAccess online version02827nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245011100161264004300272264007000315264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505032700562520107900889542004101968546002702009588004102036650003202077650003102109700004102140700003602181700003902217700003302256710003902289856007702328OTLid0001561MnU20260406020608.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651129  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aH100aFortalecimiento Metodológico de la Seguridad Informática en PosgradosbAnálisis y Estrategias de Mejora 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema, su importancia y marco teórico -- Capítulo II: Materiales y métodos -- Capítulo III: Análisis de resultados -- Capítulo IV: Discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro de investigación, contiene el informe sistematizado sobre el análisis de riesgos de la seguridad de la información para la Universidad Nacional Hermilio Valdizán de Huánuco, tuvo como objetivo realizar el análisis de riesgos que permita generar controles para minimizar la probabilidad de ocurrencia e impacto de los riesgos asociados con las vulnerabilidades y amenazas de seguridad de la información existentes en la Universidad Nacional Hermilio Valdizán de Huánuco. El método aplicado tuvo la finalidad de profundizar el análisis e interpretación de los resultados en donde se utilizó el tipo de investigación aplicada de diseño no experimental, descriptivo, se trabajó con una muestra total de los activos informáticos de la Universidad Nacional Hermilio Valdizán de Huánuco, seleccionados mediante el tipo de muestreo no probabilístico intencional. Para estimar los estadígrafos se usó la estadística descriptiva e inferencial. Obteniendo como resultado la disminución del riesgo actual de los activos informáticos a su nivel mínimo.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aPicoy-Gonzales, Juan Antonioeauthor1 aHuarcaya-Taype, Rosauraeauthor1 aContreras-Canto, Omar Hanseauthor1 aOmonte-Vilca, Amandaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1561zAccess online version03354nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245011000164264004300274264007000317264001200387300002200399336002600421337002600447338003600473341002800509490002700537505028500564520164400849542004102493546002702534588004102561650002502602650003102627700004202658700003902700700003602739700004102775710003902816856007702855OTLid0001562MnU20260330020552.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651136  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aOptimización del Proceso PresupuestariobEstrategias y Gestión Administrativa para Resultados Efectivos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema, su importancia y antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo II: Metodología -- Capítulo III: Resultados, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro de investigación tuvo como objetivo es investigar la relación, sistematización y articulación entre las variables de nuestro estudio como lo son el proceso presupuestario y la gestión administrativa, que se pueden realizar el municipio, considerando también la especificidad de los objetivos, donde se estableció la relación entre las dimensiones de los procesos presupuestarios y la gestión administrativa, estas dimensiones fueron la programación, la formulación, la aprobación, la ejecución y la evaluación. Para la obtención de nuestros resultados fue necesario aplicar algunos instrumentos de medición, como considerar la Escala de Likert. Metodología la investigación fue aplicada, nivel correlacional descriptivo con diseño descriptivo transversal no experimental. Resultado, el proceso presupuestario tiene una estrecha relación con la gestión administrativa de la Municipalidad, la intensidad de la influencia identificada es de 0,94. En cuanto a las dimensiones, la programación tiene una relación significativa p<0,05 con la gestión administrativa de r=0,74; mientras que la dimensión formulación presenta una relación de significancia de r=0,82, considerada positiva; en cuanto a dimensión aprobación tiene una relación significativa p<0,05 con la gestión administrativa de r = 0.83, la cual se clasifica positiva; La ejecución tiene una relación significativa con la gestión administrativa de r=0.80, la cual se clasifica como una relación positiva. Finalmente, la dimensión evaluación tiene una relación significativa de r=0.81, la cual se clasifica como una relación positiva.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aContreras-De La Cruz, Claudioeauthor1 aGaspar-Quispe, Julio Cesareauthor1 aHuarcaya-Taype, Rosauraeauthor1 aPicoy-Gonzales, Juan Antonioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1562zAccess online version03164nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001200155050000700167245011900174264004300293264007000336264001200406300002200418336002600440337002600466338003600492341002800528490002700556505029300583520126500876542004102141546002702182588004102209650004202250650002502292650003102317700004102348700003602389700003902425700003302464700004202497700003902539710003902578856007702617OTLid0001563MnU20260316020609.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651143  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aHB171.5 4aH100aSabores ConectadosbTransformando la Gastronomía a través de las Tecnologías de la Información y Comunicación 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El problema, su importancia y antecedentes teóricos -- Capítulo II: Metodología -- Capítulo III: Análisis de resultados, discusión y conclusiones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro de investigación contiene informe sistematizado sobre la influencia de los tics en beneficio del sector gastronómico de la ciudad de Huánuco, cuyos resultados pueden producir un cambio significativo en el uso tecnologías de la información. Tuvo como objetivo determinar el grado de influencia de las tecnologías de la información y la comunicación en el desempeño laboral de las Pymes más reconocidas del sector gastronómico de la ciudad de Huánuco. El método aplicado tuvo como finalidad profundizar en el análisis e interpretación de los resultados. donde se utilizó el diseño no experimental, con un nivel explicativo correlacional descriptivo, se trabajó con una muestra de 50 trabajadores de Pymes del sector gastronomía, seleccionados por el tipo de muestreo por selección intencional a los que se les aplicó un cuestionario. Para estimar las estadísticas se utilizó estadística descriptiva e inferencial y para contrastar las hipótesis se aplicó la prueba de correlación. Con un resultado de P = 0.00, entre 0.00 y 0.19 en la escala Rho de Spearman. Se concluye, las Tecnologías de la Información y de la Comunicación ayuda en el desempeño laboral de las Pymes en el sector gastronómico en la ciudad de Huánuco.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aPicoy-Gonzales, Juan Antonioeauthor1 aHuarcaya-Taype, Rosauraeauthor1 aContreras-Canto, Omar Hanseauthor1 aOmonte-Vilca, Amandaeauthor1 aContreras-De La Cruz, Claudioeauthor1 aGaspar-Quispe, Julio Cesareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1563zAccess online version03325nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245017200155264004300327264007000370264001200440300002200452336002600474337002600500338003600526341002800562490002700590505038800617520160701005542004102612546002702653588004102680650004202721700004402763700002802807710003902835856007702874OTLid0001564MnU20260309020917.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651174  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aAlgoritmo de inteligencia artificial para la detección de cultivos de cacao (Teobroma cacao L.), banano (Musa paradisiaca L.) y palma africana (Elaeis guineensis J.). 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Índice de Anexos -- Índice de Ecuaciones -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Contextualización y fundamentación teórica de la investigación -- Capítulo II: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo III: Resultados, discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Anexos0 aSe analiza la expansión e intensificación de la agricultura no regulada e insostenible, principalmente en América Latina, enfocándose en Ecuador, donde la degradación del suelo está estrechamente relacionada con prácticas agrícolas insostenibles. Destaca la importancia de una planificación territorial exhaustiva y el uso de teledetección para evaluar cambios en el uso del suelo y la cobertura vegetal​​. La investigación se centra en la zona norte de las provincias del Guayas y de Los Ríos en Ecuador, enfocándose en el procesamiento de imágenes satelitales para detectar cultivos de banano, cacao y palma. Utiliza una metodología experimental y cuantitativa para comparar la efectividad de distintas metodologías de clasificación, evaluando la precisión del método de inteligencia artificial Bosques Aleatorios usando imágenes del satélite Sentinel-2. Los resultados del estudio incluyen el preprocesamiento de imágenes satelitales, el cálculo de índices espectrales NDVI y RESI, y la clasificación supervisada de las imágenes de Sentinel-2 utilizando los métodos de Máxima Verosimilitud y Bosques Aleatorios. Se realizaron análisis estadísticos detallados, incluyendo la validación de resultados mediante matrices de confusión y el cálculo del coeficiente Kappa​​. En conclusión, el manuscrito ofrece una comprensión profunda de cómo la teledetección y la inteligencia artificial pueden ayudar en la detección y clasificación de cultivos en áreas específicas, contribuyendo a la gestión agrícola y la planificación territorial sostenible​​.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aZambrano-Garcia, Oliver Michaeleauthor1 aVlassova, Lidiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1564zAccess online version03541nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245019200155264004300347264007000390264001200460300002200472336002600494337002600520338003600546341002800582490002700610505034100637520183400978542004102812546002702853588004102880650004202921700004202963700004603005710003903051856007703090OTLid0001565MnU20260105020825.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651181  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aDinámica poblacional de Spodoptera frugiperda, Diatraea saccharalis y Dalbulus maidis en el cultivo de maíz (Zea mays L.) durante la época seca en cinco localidades del cantón Mocache 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Índice de Anexos -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Contextualización y fundamentación teórica de la investigación -- Capítulo II: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo III: Resultados, discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Anexos0 aEl manuscrito titulado " Dinámica poblacional de Spodoptera frugiperda, Diatraea saccharalis y Dalbulus maidis en el cultivo de maíz (Zea mays L.) durante la época seca en cinco localidades del cantón Mocache" aborda un estudio en el cultivo de maíz, el cual es afectado por estas plagas, siendo un factor limitante en la producción. Se destacan las consecuencias del uso excesivo de insecticidas, tales como la resistencia de las plagas y la contaminación ambiental, y se propone el manejo integrado de plagas (MIP) como alternativa sostenible. El estudio incluye la utilización de trampas para el monitoreo y control de plagas, una herramienta clave para la toma de decisiones en el manejo del cultivo​​. La metodología empleada en la investigación comprende la localización de la investigación en cinco localidades, el uso de métodos descriptivos y correlacionales, y el análisis de variables como datos climáticos, porcentaje de infestación, número de especímenes capturados por trampa, presencia de insectos benéficos, y correlaciones entre estas variables​​.Los resultados obtenidos revelan la infestación de Spodoptera frugiperda, Diatraea saccharalis y Dalbulus maidis en las localidades estudiadas, la fluctuación poblacional de estas plagas y su relación con factores climáticos, y la eficiencia de las trampas de luz y trampas adhesivas para capturar adultos de estas especies. Además, se reporta la presencia de insectos benéficos en el área de estudio​​. En la discusión se analiza el impacto de estos hallazgos en el contexto del manejo de plagas en cultivos de maíz​​. Finalmente, las conclusiones y recomendaciones se centran en estrategias para mejorar el control de plagas y la sostenibilidad de la producción de maíz en las áreas afectadas por estas plagas​​.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aBurgos-Macias, Tyron Jonathaneauthor1 aGaibor-Fernández, Ramiro Remigioeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1565zAccess online version03266nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155245011900165264004300284264007000327264001200397300002200409336002600431337002600457338003600483341002800519490002700547505034100574520157100915542004102486546002702527588004102554650004202595650002402637700004602661700004502707710003902752856007702791OTLid0001566MnU20260309020919.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651198  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aRA44000aÁcido oxálico, alternativa orgánica para el control de varroasis (Varroa destructor) en abejas (Apis mellifera) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Índice de Anexos -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Contextualización y fundamentación teórica de la investigación -- Capítulo II: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo III: Resultados, discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Anexos0 aEl documento titulado "Ácido oxálico alternativa orgánica para el control de varroasis (Varroa destructor) en abejas (Apis mellifera)" expone la relevancia de la apicultura en Latinoamérica, particularmente en Ecuador, destacando su contribución económica a través de productos como miel, cera, polen, propóleo y Apitoxina. La investigación se enfoca en el ácaro Varroa destructor, un parásito perjudicial para las abejas, que afecta tanto a las crías como a las adultas, debilitando y potencialmente llevando a la muerte a las colmenas. El estudio resalta la importancia del uso de productos orgánicos para el control de la Varroasis, siendo el ácido oxálico uno de los más efectivos. Este compuesto, presente de manera natural en ciertas plantas y en la miel, se ha demostrado altamente eficaz en el control de la Varroa, especialmente en periodos sin cría, logrando una eficacia superior al 90%. La metodología del estudio incluyó investigación bibliográfica y de campo, realizada en el recinto Aguas Frías en la provincia de Los Ríos, Cantón Mocache, durante noviembre y diciembre de 2018. Se emplearon métodos analíticos y deductivos para estudiar la presencia del ácaro Varroa destructor en colmenas de abejas Apis mellifera, utilizando fuentes primarias y secundarias. El experimento implicó el manejo de 20 colmenas, evaluando cinco tratamientos diferentes en cuatro repeticiones, con aplicaciones de ácido oxálico y amitraz para determinar la población de ácaros y el estado de las colmenas a lo largo de cinco semanas​​.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aIbarra-Navarrete, Yordan Santiagoeauthor1 aPinargote-Mendoza, Edgar Rodolfoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1566zAccess online version02786nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245009300153264004300246264007000289264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505033400536520120000870542004102070546002702111588004102138650002702179700004302206700004702249710003902296856007702335OTLid0001567MnU20260105020827.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651211  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA100aProcesos de producción de tilapias (Oreochromis niloticus) con aplicación informática 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Introducción, contexto y estado del arte -- Capítulo II: Identificación de requisitos y descripción de aplicación -- Capítulo III: Metodología de trabajo, evaluación de aplicación, conclusiones y trabajos futuros -- Referencias Bibliográficas -- Anexos0 aEl manuscrito se centra en el desarrollo de un software para optimizar la producción de tilapias, abordando aspectos como el crecimiento, costo y rentabilidad. Utilizando herramientas tecnológicas avanzadas, se pretende facilitar la gestión de datos para los piscicultores, permitiendo procesos más eficientes, económicos y precisos. Los factores clave incluyen el peso, la temperatura, el crecimiento absoluto, el crecimiento térmico de los peces, y proyecciones mensuales de costos, producción y rentabilidad. El software, desarrollado en Java y utilizando la plataforma Eclipse, busca equilibrar agilidad y precisión en el tratamiento de datos. El trabajo se apoya en la revisión bibliográfica y entrevistas con piscicultores. Se emplea un enfoque de análisis de componentes principales y correlación de Pearson para asociar variables relevantes. Se evalúa la aplicación mediante datos históricos y pruebas piloto, ajustando funcionalidades para garantizar resultados fiables. Se destaca la importancia de interfaces amigables para usuarios no expertos en tecnología y se propone la expansión a aplicaciones móviles y la adaptación a otras especies de interés zootécnico.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aMacías-Véliz, José Nolbertoeauthor1 aChicharro-López, Francisco Israeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1567zAccess online version02670nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000700153245005700160264004300217264007000260264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505033400507520106700841542004101908546002701949588004101976650002702017650003102044700004202075700003902117710003902156856007702195OTLid0001568MnU20260406020609.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651204  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aH100aElementos básicos de Análisis Inteligente de Datos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos de análisis inteligentes de datos con R -- Capítulo II: Técnicas en R para la preparación de los datos -- Capítulo III: Técnicas supervisadas -- Capítulo IV: Técnicas no supervisadas -- Glosario -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEste libro trata sobre conceptos elementales junto con scripts cortos de código basado en R Project para hacer análisis inteligente de datos. La relación entre la teoría y la práctica es fundamental en la comprensión de una disciplina, así la aplicación de procedimientos y funciones específicas en tareas elementales es el propósito de este texto. La idea central del texto tiene origen en la asignatura denominada “Análisis Inteligente de Datos”, una cátedra en la que el profesor aporta con elementos fundamentales basados en conceptos y ejercicios prácticos usando R Project. Hoy en día, la disponibilidad de herramientas para la minería de datos es sin duda muy grande. Usuarios con conocimientos básicos pueden aprovechar de utilitarios intuitivos implementados en poderosos entornos de desarrollo. Nosotros hemos querido dar un enfoque al texto hacia una audiencia con mayor relación a la programación y software. Específicamente que constituya una guía básica para estudiantes que inician en el campo de la Inteligencia de datos.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aJaramillo-Chuqui, Iván Fredyeauthor1 aVillarroel-Molina, Ricardoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1568zAccess online version03323nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245010700152264004300259264007400302264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505091500553520114901468542003002617546001602647588004102663650002502704700003302729700003102762700002802793710003902821856007702860OTLid0001569MnU20260406020609.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957213682  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aConducting Mixed-Methods ResearchbFrom Classical Social Sciences to the Age of Big Data and Analytics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Mixed-Methods Research as the Third Research Approach -- Chapter 2: Philosophical Foundations of Mixed-Methods Research -- Chapter 3: Nature of Theory in Mixed-Methods Research -- Chapter 4: Appropriateness of Using a Mixed-Methods Research Approach -- Chapter 5: Basic Strategies for Mixed-Methods Research -- Chapter 6: Mixed-Methods Data Collection Strategies -- Chapter 7: Qualitative and Quantitative Data Analysis Strategies -- Chapter 8: Mixed-Methods Data Analysis Strategies -- Chapter 9: Mixed-Methods Research and Big Data Analytics -- Chapter 10: Generating Meta-Inferences in Mixed-Methods Research -- Chapter 11: Mixed-Methods Research Paper Templates -- Chapter 12: Guidelines for Editors and Reviewers of Mixed-Methods Research -- Chapter 13: Challenges and Strategies in Conducting, Writing, and Publishing Mixed-Methods Research -- Author Biographies0 aScholars in the social sciences are increasingly expected to incorporate both quantitative and qualitative techniques and methods into their research. The growth of “mixed-methods” research is evident in social science disciplines ranging from psychology and management to marketing and information systems. This book is designed to provide principles, strategies, and guidance specifically for researchers in these disciplines so that they can use mixed-methods research more effectively. In thirteen chapters, Conducting Mixed-Methods Research takes readers through the research process, from defining research questions to writing articles using a mixed-methods approach. For those who are well trained in either qualitative or quantitative methods, the book shows them how to think about the purposes of mixed-methods research, design mixed-methods studies, and develop meta-inferences by integrating findings from both methods. Throughout, the discussion is grounded in examples taken from published research, carefully chosen to highlight best practices, thus opening a window into a broad body of mixed-methods research applications.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aVenkatesh, Viswanatheauthor1 aBrown, Susan (Sue)eauthor1 aSullivan, Yuliaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1569zAccess online version01794nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245002900152264004300181264008400224264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505034800485520016500833542004100998546001601039588004001055650002501095700003501120700002601155700003201181700002401213700003101237710003901268856007701307OTLid0001570MnU20260406020835.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781312028470  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aFoundations of Education 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle Page -- Introduction -- Why Teach? -- History of US Education -- Educational Philosophies -- Students, Educators and Community -- Building a Classroom Community -- Teaching and Learning -- Curriculum and Academic Standards -- Assessment -- Governance and Finance -- Ethical and Legal Issues in Education -- Becoming a Teacher -- Appendix0 aThis dynamic and equity-focused Open Educational Resource serves as a multifaceted textbook for Foundations of Education courses in post secondary institutions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aAbuAssaly-George, Lisaeauthor1 aBunney, Kanoeeauthor1 aDe Valdenebro, Cecieauthor1 aMead, Tanyaeauthor1 aMargolis, Jennifereeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1570zAccess online version02003nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245006800135264004300203264005400246264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002800422490002700450505055700477520011701034542003001151546001501181588004001196650003801236650002601274700002501300700003101325700002801356700003001384700002601414700002501440710003901465856007701504OTLid0001571MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240113s2023    mnu     o     0   0 ara d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aIntroduction to ArabicbEgyptian Arabic for first-year students 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEugene, ORbUniversity of Oregon Librariesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit One: Greetings and basic introductions -- Unit Two: "Ismii Muhammad ...ana maSrii" -- Unit Three: Izzayyak?! Hadirtak min Eugene? -- Unit Four: Hadirtak Taalib hina? -- Unit Five: الساعة كام لو سمحت؟ -- Unit Six: ازيّ الجو في مصر؟ -- Unit Seven: انت ساكن في بيت ولا شقة؟ -- Unit Eight: هوايات -- Unit Nine: العيلة -- Unit Ten: فين ؟ مين؟ ليه؟ -- Unit Eleven: في المطعم (In the restaurant) -- Unit Twelve: ...كل يوم انا -- Additional Dialogues0 aThis book presents materials for mastering the Arabic alphabet and the student's first steps in Egyptian Arabic.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn Arabic.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGhazy, Amiraeauthor1 aEissa, Abdulrahmaneauthor1 aElsherif, Hananeauthor1 aHollenberg, Davideauthor1 aLoy, Benjamineauthor1 aRizk, Kerloseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1571zAccess online version02165nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005800135264004300193264009500236264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505058600508520039101094542003001485546001601515588004001531650002001571650002601591700003001617700002801647710003901675856007701714OTLid0001572MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240114s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN8500aCommunicating FashionbTrend Research and Forecasting 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Authors -- Chapter 1 - Trends Research & Fingertip Dictionary -- Chapter 2 - Understanding your Aesthetic Response -- Chapter 3 - Developing a Collective Perspective -- Chapter 4 - Trend Industry and Forecasting -- Chapter 5 - Trend Drivers and Mega Trends: Local and Global Contexts -- Chapter 6 - Trend Lifecycles and Adopter Categories -- Chapter 7 - The Trend Research Toolkit -- Chapter 8 - Innovations and Trend Forecasting -- Chapter 9 - The Form of the Trend: Design and the Body -- Chapter 10 - Recognizing Trend Patterns in Product Relationships0 aCommunicating Fashion offers a holistic view of the interrelationships involved in trend research, including data collection, analysis and reporting, and forecasting what that direction means for design. The book’s primary focus is on the process of observing and collecting desk and field data to understand interrelationships among products, user experience, and contextual factors.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGoncu Berk, Gozdeeauthor1 aDeLong, Marilyneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1572zAccess online version02925nam a2200505 i 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.0m     o  d s      cr            240114s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU1 aAltman, Hilaryeauthor00aInterpersonal CommunicationbContext and ConnectioncHilary Altman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAcademic Senate for California Community Collegesc2023. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction to Interpersonal Communication -- Communication and Self -- Perception and Communication -- Verbal Elements of Communication -- Nonverbal Elements of Communication -- Listening -- Emotions -- Communication Climate -- Interpersonal Conflict -- Building and Maintaining Relationships -- Dark Side of Communication -- Interpersonal Communication in the Workplace -- Back Matter0 aInterpersonal Communication: Context and Connection provides an engaging overview of interpersonal communication grounded in theory, research, and practical application, with an eye to the lived experience of college students. The first three chapters provide the foundation of interpersonal communication with an examination of the theoretical and conceptual background of communication, self, and perception. The next section of the book examines unique features of messaging, with an exploration of listening, verbal, and nonverbal communication. Chapters 7, 8, and 9 explore dynamic factors that shape interpersonal relationships, including emotions, climate, and conflict. The final chapters of the book delve into communication in context through building and maintaining relationships, the dark side of communication, and workplace relationships.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aClancy, Kristineeauthor1 aColeman, Elizabetheauthor1 aEncarnacion, Lizeauthor1 aKhanna, Anueauthor1 aKicenski, Karyleauthor1 aLeonard, Victoriaeauthor1 aMata, Alexeauthor1 aMoran, Rebecaeauthor1 aPlump, Brielleeauthor1 aReitzel, Armedaeauthor1 aRuggeri-DiLello, Tiffanyeauthor1 aWeidner, Ericeauthor1 aYee, Kimberlieeauthor1 aHoppe-Nagao, Angelaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1573zAccess online version02077nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003000162264004300192264007800235264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505077200490520020101262542001601463546001601479588004001495650003801535650002601573710003901599856007701638OTLid0001574MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240115s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLinam, Rebeccaeauthor00aGerman 201cRebecca Linam 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Alabamac2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReview from GR 102 -- Kapitel 7-1: Time expressions: vor, seit, schon -- Kapitel 7-2: Simple past of haben -- Kapitel 7-3: Ein-word adjective endings -- Kapitel 7-4: Simple past of modal verbs -- Kapitel 7-5: Reflexive verbs (accusative) -- Kapitel 7-6: Plusquamperfekt -- Kapitel 8-1: Simple Past (das Präteritum) -- Kapitel 8-2: Als, wenn, wann -- Kapitel 8-3: Infinitive phrases with zu, um…zu, ohne…zu -- Kapitel 8-4: Lassen vs. verlassen vs. gehen -- Kapitel 9-1: Reflexive Verbs (with dative) -- Kapitel 9-2: Verbs with Prepositional Complements -- Kapitel 9-3: Da- and wo-compounds -- Kapitel 9-4: Present and Past Participles (with adjective endings review) -- 9-5: Adjectival Nouns -- Kapitel 7 - Glossary -- Kapitel 8 - Glossary -- Kapitel 9 - Glossary0 aThis book is a continuation of GR 102. It features review from GR 101-102, explanations of grammar, videos to reteach concepts, extra practice, and several reading selections to reinforce grammar.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1574zAccess online version01725nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003000162264004300192264007800235264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505044500490520017600935542001601111546001601127588004001143650003801183650002601221710003901247856007701286OTLid0001575MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240115s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLinam, Rebeccaeauthor00aGerman 202cRebecca Linam 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Alabamac2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Kapitel 10.1: Relative Clauses -- Kapitel 10.2: Directional Prefixes hin und her. -- Kapitel 10.3: Relative Pronouns for Indefinite Pronouns -- Kapitel 11.1: Subjunctive II -- Kapitel 11.2: Indirect Speech (Subjunctive I) -- Kapitel 12.1: Passive -- Kapitel 12.2: Adjective Endings Without Definite or Indefinite Articles -- Kapitel 12.3: Past Subjunctive -- Kapitel 10 Glossary -- Kapitel 11 Glossary -- Kapitel 12 Glossary0 aThis book is a continuation of GR 201. It focuses on grammar found most often in literary selections and essays as well as several reading selections to reinforce grammar.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1575zAccess online version01802nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003000162264004300192264007800235264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505051200490520018601002542001601188546001601204588004001220650003801260650002601298710003901324856007701363OTLid0001576MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240115s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLinam, Rebeccaeauthor00aGerman 102cRebecca Linam 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Alabamac2024. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aSection 4-1 -- Section 4-2 -- Section 4-3 -- Section 4-4 -- Section 4-5 -- Section 4-6 -- Section 4-7 -- Section 4-8 -- Section 4-9 -- Section 5-1 -- Section 5-2 -- Section 5-3 -- Section 5-4 -- Proficiency Interviews 1 -- Proficiency Interviews 2 -- Proficiency Interviews 3 -- Proficiency Interviews 4 -- Proficiency Interviews 5 -- Section 6-1 -- Section 6-2 -- Section 6-3 -- Section 6-4 -- Section 6-5 -- Chapter 4 Glossary -- Chapter 5 Glossary -- Chapter 6 Glossary -- Proficiency Interviews Glossary0 aThis book is a continuation of GR 101. It features easy-to-read explanations of grammar, up-to-date videos, extra practice, and interactive exercises, as well as reading selections.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1576zAccess online version01564nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003000162264004300192264007800235264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505021100490520024900701542001600950546001600966588004000982650003801022650002601060710003901086856007701125OTLid0001577MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240115s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLinam, Rebeccaeauthor00aGerman 350cRebecca Linam 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Alabamac2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Kapitel 1: Familie, Freunde, Bekannte -- Kapitel 2: Die tägliche Routine -- Kapitel 3: Das Studium und die Technologie -- Kapitel 4: Reisen und Hobbys -- Kapitel 5: Rollenspiele -- Appendix0 aThis book focuses on conversation. It contains several prompts that can be adapted to different levels of difficulty or turned into classroom discussions. They can also serve as a grammar review if needed. A review of pronunciation is included.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1577zAccess online version02309nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002700167245004800194264004300242264005400285264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002800461490002700489505033600516520073700852542003001589546001601619588004001635650002301675650002301698700002501721700003701746710003901783856007701822OTLid0001578MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101387  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aDalton, Laureneauthor00aFundamentals of Cell BiologycLauren Dalton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Introduction and Review -- Visualizing Cells through Microscopy -- Biological Membranes -- DNA, Chromosomes, and the Interphase Nucleus -- The Endomembrane System -- Mitochondria and Chloroplasts -- The Cytoskeleton -- Cell Signaling -- The Cell Cycle and Mitosis -- Glossary -- About the Authors and Illustrator0 aThis textbook is focused specifically on the principles and concepts of a foundational Cell Biology course. The book takes a more conceptual approach that highlights how scientists study cells, and how to analyze and interpret experimental results. Rather than focusing primarily on historical experiments that were key to our understanding of cells, the book explores a range of more modern experimental techniques so that students can begin to understand how cells are studied now, in the 21st century. The book includes over 200 newly created illustrations and animations, that were specifically designed for this book, as well as review questions at the end of each chapter, to help students explore and understand the material.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aYoung, Robineauthor1 aNg-Cornish, Heathereillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1578zAccess online version01909nam a2200493 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127245005500138250001800193264004300211264007100254264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002500447490002700472505024800499520008600747542003000833546001600863588004100879650002600920650002400946700003200970700003201002700002901034700002801063700003701091700002701128700003001155700002601185700002601211700003501237700002701272710003901299856007701338OTLid0001579MnU20260406020609.0m     o  d s      cr            240116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800aSurface and SubtextbLiterature, Research, Writing  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTexas A&M Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Poetry -- Short Story -- Novella -- Novel -- Drama -- Film -- Creative Nonfiction -- Writing a Literary Essay: Moving from Surface to Subtext -- Using Sample Documents Effectively -- Glossary -- Index of Authors and Their Works0 aOpen-educational resource textbook created by the TAMU English 203 OER Committee.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aFrancis, Jr., Jameseauthor1 aCarly-Miles, Claireeauthor1 aClough, Kimberlyeauthor1 aCooper, R. Pauleauthor1 aHagstrom-Schmidt, Nicoleeauthor1 aRozier, Traviseauthor1 aThielman, Franceseauthor1 aTodd, Dorothyeauthor1 aLeMire, Saraheauthor1 aAnders, Kathy Christieeauthor1 aMcKinney, Matteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1579zAccess online version02216nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002400138245009100162264004300253264008800296264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505017700561520085300738542004101591546001601632588004001648650002601688650002401714710003901738856007701777OTLid0001580MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240116s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aYoung, Judyeauthor00aIntroduction to LiteraturebFairy Tales, Folk Tales, and How They Shape UscJudy Young 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Literature: What? Why? How? -- Reading and Understanding Fairy Tales and Folk Tales -- Writing about Fairy Tales and Folk Tales -- Fairy Tales -- Folk Tales0 aIntroduction to Literature: Fairy Tales, Folk Tales, and How They Shape Us introduces college freshmen to the study of literature through a focus on texts that, generally, they already know, or think they know, and how those texts aim to shape audiences to be compliant cultural objects. The book is organized around several prominent story groups, including various genres and forms, meant to promote discussion and discovery leading to students’ understanding that these texts function as cultural sculptors of readers’ principles and behaviors. Students develop the skill of analyzing texts and creating sound arguments about them through class discussions and a series of writing assignments. Ideally, they leave the course understanding how to create a sound argument and, more pointedly, that there is no such thing as “just a story.”1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1580zAccess online version02017nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100002900150245005800179264004300237264008800280264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505036100545520046600906542004101372546001601413588004001429650003401469650002401503710003901527856007701566OTLid0001581MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aRA4401 aJackman, Tiffanyeauthor00aLegal Fundamentals of Healthcare LawcTiffany Jackman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Author: Beyond the pages, igniting minds -- The Business of Medicine -- Healthcare Reform -- Torts -- Contract Law -- Privacy, Intellectual Property, and Cyberlaw -- Ethical Considerations -- Leading for Safety -- Organizational Liability -- Anti Fraud Abuse -- IRAC Analysis & Writing a Case Brief -- Glossary -- Acknowledgements0 aHealthcare, a field dedicated to the well-being of individuals and communities, operates within an intricate web of legal principles. Understanding these laws is not simply a professional necessity for doctors, nurses, administrators, and researchers; it’s also an ethical imperative for anyone who interacts with the healthcare system. This book is your compass, guiding you through the labyrinth of legal fundamentals that shape the landscape of healthcare.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1581zAccess online version02445nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245003500149264004300184264009500227264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505061500499520070701114542004101821546001601862588004001878650002401918650002501942710003901967856007702006OTLid0001582MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240128s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF541500aMastering Strategic Management 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2024. 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher Information -- Chapter 1: Mastering Strategy: Art and Science -- Chapter 2: Leading Strategically -- Chapter 3: Evaluating the External Environment -- Chapter 4: Managing Firm Resources -- Chapter 5: Selecting Business-Level Strategies -- Chapter 6: Supporting the Business-Level Strategy: Competitive and Cooperative Moves -- Chapter 7: Competing in International Markets -- Chapter 8: Selecting Corporate-Level Strategies -- Chapter 9: Executing Strategy through Organizational Design -- Chapter 10: Leading an Ethical Organization: Corporate Governance, Corporate Ethics, and Social Responsibility0 aTeaching the strategic management course can be a challenge for many professors. In most business schools, strategic management is a “capstone” course that requires students to draw on insights from various functional courses they have completed (such as marketing, finance, and accounting) in order to understand how top executives make the strategic decisions that drive whether organizations succeed or fail. Although students have taken these functional courses, many students have very little experience with major organizational choices. It is this inexperience that can undermine many students’ engagement in the course. For questions about this textbook please contact textbookuse@umn.edu1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1582zAccess online version02099nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002900145245007100174264004300245264005800288264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505050200523520044501025542003001470546001601500588004001516650003001556650002301586710003901609856007701648OTLid0001583MnU20260330020623.0m     o  d s      cr            240131s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aGessler, Thea B.eauthor00aExperiences in Biodiversity ResearchbA Field CoursecThea Gessler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknolwedgements -- Welcome to Experiences in Biodiversity Research -- Module 1: In the Field -- Module 2: Peer Review -- Module 3: Preparing Professional Materials -- Module 4: Research Proposals -- Appendix 1: Example Schedule -- Appendix 2: Lakeside Laboratory Itinerary -- Appendix 3: Rubrics -- Appendix 4: Survey -- Appendix 5: Reading a Scientific Paper -- Appendix 6: Starting Research Proposals -- Appendix 7: Table of Assignments -- Appendix 8: Personal Statement Brainstorming Questions0 aThis handbook was developed to support the course, Experiences in Biodiversity Research, which exists to provide early undergraduates with experience in the practice of biodiversity research and demystify the path to careers in this field. Although this course is situated within Iowa State University, guidance for educators is provided throughout the handbook to support those interested in teaching similar courses at other universities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1583zAccess online version02954nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050001000142245009500152250001600247264004300263264008400306264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002800512490002700540505065700567520091701224542003002141546001602171588004102187650005002228650002402278700002602302700003002328710003902358710007002397856007702467OTLid0001587MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240301s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aRA44000aHealth Sciences Collection DevelopmentbAn Overview of Fundamental Knowledge and Practices  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Commonwealth Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForward -- Core Collection Development Books -- Contributors -- Collection Development Policies -- Assessment -- Acquisition Models -- Unique Collection Genres -- Collection Considerations in Non-Academic Health Sciences Libraries -- Managing Relationships with Vendors -- Licensing and Copyright -- Budget and Planning -- Cooperative Arrangements and Consortia -- Interlibrary Loan and Document Delivery -- Open Content and Deposition of Materials -- Communication and Outreach Considerations for Collection Development -- Collection Development Staffing Models -- Professional Development -- Glossary -- Versioning History & Topics for Future Updates0 aThis work was created by members of the Medical Library Association’s Collection Development Caucus to provide librarians with key concepts about health sciences collection development. The chapters provide an overview of the responsibilities and tasks involved in the development and management of health sciences collections; it is recommended that readers refer to the references and further reading sections in each chapter for a more detailed look at each topic. The first edition was published in 2019 and was updated with a second edition in 2023. This updated edition has a new section on unique collection genres; addresses Diversity, Equity, Inclusion and Accessibility in collections; incorporates significant updates to and expansion of previous content; and includes a glossary. New additions to each chapter, as applicable, include key communities and online courses for professional development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aGau, Karen H.eeditor1 aKovar-Gough, Iriseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor2 aMedical Library Association Collection Development Caucuseauthor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1587zAccess online version02202nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001400153050001000167100002900177245011000206264004300316264009500359264001200454300002200466336002600488337002600514338003600540341002800576490002700604505025500631520064100886542001601527546001601543588004101559650002701600650002601627650002301653710003901676856007701715OTLid0001588MnU20260406020609.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781959870029  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-280 4aQH3011 aFieberg, John R.eauthor00aStatistics for EcologistsbA Frequentist and Bayesian Treatment of Modern Regression ModelscJohn Fieberg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- Preface -- Models for Normally Distributed Responses -- What Variables to Include in a Model? -- Frequentist and Bayesian Inferential Frameworks -- Models for Non-Normal Data -- Models for Correlated Data -- Appendix -- References0 aEcological data pose many challenges to statistical inference. Most data come from observational studies rather than designed experiments; observational units are frequently sampled repeatedly over time, resulting in multiple, non-independent measurements; response data are often binary (e.g., presence-absence data) or non-negative integers (e.g., counts), and therefore, the data do not fit the standard assumptions of linear regression (Normality, independence, and constant variance). This book will familiarize readers with modern statistical methods that address these complexities using both frequentist and Bayesian frameworks.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1588zAccess online version02184nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003000134245008000164264004300244264005900287264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505090200523520016401425542004101589546001601630588004101646650003101687710003901718856007701757OTLid0001589MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aSheppard, Valerieeauthor00aResearch Methods for the Social SciencesbAn IntroductioncValerie Sheppard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Statement -- Preface -- About This Book -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Research Methods -- Chapter 2: Ethics in Research -- Chapter 3: Developing a Research Question -- Chapter 4: Measurement and Units of Analysis -- Chapter 5: The Literature Review -- Chapter 6: Data Collection Strategies -- Chapter 7: Sampling Techniques -- Chapter 8: Data Collection Methods: Survey Research -- Chapter 9: Analysis Of Survey Data -- Chapter 10: Qualitative Data Collection & Analysis Methods -- Chapter 11: Quantitative Interview Techniques & Considerations -- Chapter 12: Field Research: A Qualitative Research Technique -- Chapter 13: Unobtrusive Research: Qualitative And Quantitative Approaches -- Chapter 14: The Research Proposal -- Chapter 15: Sharing Your Research -- Chapter 16: Reading and Understanding Social Research -- Chapter 17: Research Methods in the Real World -- List of Links0 aThis textbook provides a broad overview of research methods utilized in sociology. It will be of particular value for students who are new to research methods.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1589zAccess online version02647nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100003400144245014100178264004300319264005200362264001200414300002200426336002600448337002600474338003600500341002800536490002700564505085100591520050701442542001601949546001601965588004001981650002502021650003302046700002702079700002702106710003902133856007702172OTLid0001590MnU20260323020521.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aBriganti, Jonathan S.eauthor00aFostering Communities of Transformation in STEM Higher EducationbA Multi-institutional Collection of DEI InitiativescJonathan Briganti 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreparing STEM Teachers to Be Change Makers -- Resequencing the Chemistry Curriculum to Retain Chemistry Majors -- Delayed Enrollment in General Chemistry Recitation -- Assessing Changes in Student Engagement Using a Mixed-Methods Approach -- Development and Assessment of a Four-Week Summer Research Experience for Undergraduates -- Creating Impactful Moments -- Community, Curriculum, and CUREs -- We’re All in This Together -- VIGNETTE: Reflecting on the Impact of Engelpalooza -- Teaching to Make Math Resonate -- Strategies for Creating and Sustaining Inclusive Makerspaces -- Creating a Space in the Curriculum for Effective Mentoring to Foster Student Connections and Agency -- Gunpowder Code Club -- Using Departmental Book Clubs to Bridge the Faculty-Staff-Student Gap -- Institutionally Advancing Inclusive Excellence -- From the Soul0 aDive into the multifaceted landscape of inclusive excellence in STEM education with Fostering Communities of Transformation in STEM Higher Education. This scholarly work examines transformative initiatives from Virginia Tech, Radford University, Trinity Washington University, and Towson University, showcasing their role as catalysts in cultivating inclusive excellence across diverse STEM disciplines. Take inspiration from their projects and guidance from their lessons learned with this collection.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aSible, Jill C.eauthor1 aBrown, Anne M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1590zAccess online version02925nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003600149245008700185264004300272264008200315264001200397300002200409336002600431337002600457338003600483341002800519490002700547505043400574520121001008542003002218546001602248588004002264650002302304650002402327700002902351700003102380710003902411856007702450OTLid0001591MnU20260406020638.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aLaForest, Shelly Philipeauthor00aInclusive Approach to Anthropometric Body Measurement AssessmentscShelly LaForest 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bToronto Metropolitan Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Contact information and Acknowledgements -- Learning Outcomes -- Introduction to Anthropometric Body Measurement Assessments -- Problematizing Anthropometric Body Measurement Assessments -- Inclusive Approaches to Anthropometric Body Measurement Assessments -- Weight and Height -- Body Mass Index -- Other Anthropometric Body Measurement Assessments -- Children and Body Measurements -- Key Takeaways -- Glossary0 a“Inclusive Approach to Anthropometric Body Measurement Assessments” is an open educational resource (OER) created for undergraduate nursing students at the introductory level. The resource introduces students to body measurements, but does so in an inclusive manner. This resource is a unique contribution to nursing education as content is theoretically informed by an inclusive approach to assessment that incorporates culturallyresponsive techniques related to race/ethnicity, gender/sex/ sexual orientation, body sizes/types, and ability/disability. It is part of the first health assessment resource that is informed by clinical judgment with the goal to facilitate students’ clinical decision making and ability to prioritize care by recognizing and acting on cues and signs of clinical deterioration. Interactive clinical judgment activities and formative assessments to evaluate a student’s learning are integrated throughout the resource. The integration of clinical judgment throughout this resource will support students’ capacity to enhance patient safety and equitable health outcomes as well as their success in writing national nursing exams to become licensed to work as a Nurse.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aHughes, Michelleeauthor1 aNielsen, Lisa Setoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1591zAccess online version02660nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002600144245007400170264004300244264007200287264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505030100536520101800837542004101855546001601896588004001912650002501952650003301977700002902010700002602039700002902065700002802094710003902122856007702161OTLid0001592MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aGasson, Susaneauthor00aConfident SupervisorsbCreating Independent ResearcherscSusan Gasson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Cook Universityc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Country -- About the Authors and Editors -- Preface -- Introduction -- Higher Degree Researcher Reflections -- Collaborative Approaches -- Capacity Building -- Diverse Research Environments -- Future Focus -- Conclusion -- Glossary -- Accessibility Statement -- Version History0 aConfident Supervisors is intended to be both a textbook and a professional development resource for Higher Degree Research supervisors and researcher developers involved in providing workshops and resources to support research supervisors in their practice. Throughout this book, authors introduce different theoretical frameworks and concepts to provide supervisors with tools and strategies for responding to the challenges and opportunities associated with research supervision. It contains chapters written by current supervisors and research support partners who are engaged in the scholarship of supervision and can share the practical and theoretical constructs they employ in their practice. The authors have been drawn from a broad range of higher education and research contexts and contribute understandings of local and global relevance. This openly available eBook responds to turbulent times in higher education, offering practical tips and suggestions for supervisors to pivot to changing contexts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aBruce, Christineeauthor1 aStoodley, Ianeauthor1 aBlacker, Jillianeauthor1 aWinter, Abigaileauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1592zAccess online version02030nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245008700155264004300242264006800285264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505015100530520060000681542004101281546001601322588004001338650002901378700002401407700002501431700002901456700003101485710003901516856007701555OTLid0001593MnU20260406020639.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2016    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548001  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.300aWorkplace WritingbA Handbook for Common Workplace Genres and Professional Writing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2016.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword: Course Introduction -- List of Figures -- Introduction -- Writing in the Workplace: Common Genres -- Public Genres -- Sample Assignments0 aThis handbook is designed for a generalized business writing course that seeks to meet the needs of a variety of student majors and career interests. In it you will find: descriptions and discussions of common genres, both routine and formal, print and electronic, and in-class activities and sample assignments. You will also find commentary on how to adapt the writing process to the rhetorical constraints of a workplace as well as how to think about, conduct, and use research outside an academic setting. Throughout you will note a persistent emphasis on audience awareness and direct style1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aGoins, Annaeauthor1 aRauh, Cheryleauthor1 aTarner, Danielleeauthor1 aVon Holten, Danieleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1593zAccess online version02089nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145245004300156250001800199264004300217264006800260264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505028900505520047400794542003001268546001601298588004101314650002601355650002401381700002901405700002401434700002501458700002501483700003101508710003901539856007701578OTLid0001594MnU20260330020554.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548377  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE140800a(Re)Writing Communities and Identities  aSixth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Understanding ENGL 100 -- Chapter One: Visual Analysis -- Chapter Two: Reading Reflection -- Chapter Three: Exploratory Essay -- Chapter Four: Community Informative Report -- Chapter Five: The Informative Report -- Chapter Six: Autoethnography -- Chapter Seven: Handbook0 a(Re)Writing Communities and Identities enables college-level students to develop their ability to compose various informative and expressive genres, including analyses, reflections, summaries, syntheses, and informative reports. While students raise their consciousness about their writing process and audience-based informative strategies, they also familiarize themselves with important social and cultural issues related to the theme of "identities and communities."1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aMarzluf, Phillipeauthor1 aGoins, Annaeauthor1 aDebes, Cindyeauthor1 aGray, Staciaeauthor1 aKnoblauch, A. Abbyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1594zAccess online version03057nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100002900167245005200196264004300248264006800291264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505022500536520166100761542003002422546001602452588004102468650002302509650002302532710003902555856007702594OTLid0001595MnU20260406020610.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548513  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aKirk, Matthew F.eauthor00aMicrobiology for Earth ScientistscMatthew Kirk 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Part 1: Microbes and Microbial Reactions -- Part 2: Environmental Controls on Microorganisms -- Part 3: Impacts of Microbial Activities -- Apendix A: Thermodynamic Data for Select Reactions -- Table of Figures0 aMicroorganisms are the most abundant form of life on Earth and in recent decades it has become increasingly clear that their collective activities are one of the dominant forces shaping the Earth. This book provides earth scientists with an introduction to microbiology and a look at the ways microorganisms are important to their area of expertise. The first part of this book summarizes some basic information about microorganisms, including a discussion of their diversity, physical properties, and metabolisms. From there, the second and third portions of the book are organized around the two-way interactions between microorganisms and their environments. The second portion of the book considers the ways that environmental conditions help determine distributions of microbial activity, including chapters focused on thermodynamic, kinetic, and biological factors. The third and final portion of the book examines the impacts of microbes on their environments. These impacts are placed within the context of earth system science, with chapters focused on impacts to the lithosphere, atmosphere, and hydrosphere. In these chapters, emphasis is placed on microbial impacts to greenhouse gas levels and the quality of water resources, underscoring the relevance of microbiology to environmental concerns of keen interest in the earth science community and beyond. This book is specifically designed for earth science students and can provide a helpful free resource for students in Geomicrobiology courses. However, portions of the book can also have value for students and professionals from any field who are interested in environmental microbiology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1595zAccess online version02864nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100002500155245003800180264004300218264006800261264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002800451490002700479505038600506520136500892542003002257546001602287588004102303650004202344710003902386856007702425OTLid0001596MnU20260406020610.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548384  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aGuler, Kutayeauthor00aInterior MaterialitycKutay Guler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Perception -- Chapter 3: Health & Safety -- Chapter 4: Sustainability -- Chapter 5: Paint & Wallcovering -- Chapter 6: Concrete & Masonry -- Chapter 7: Wood -- Chapter 8: Glass & Ceramic -- Chapter 9: Textile -- Chapter 10: Metal -- Chapter 11: Plastic -- Chapter 12: Specification -- Selected Bibliography -- Image Credits -- Index0 aThe knowledge of materials and finishes is the bridge that links conceptual design to real-world application. It is among the core content of virtually all interior architecture/design curricula, moreover, access to up-to-date information on emerging technologies and trends is a key exigency for the contemporary designer. Accordingly, this book is authored to form a comprehensive resource for the “hows” and “whys” surrounding the functional and aesthetic contributions of a wide selection of materials and finishes used in multiple spatial design contexts. The knowledge base presented here is not only useful in shaping spatial experience, ensuring occupant well-being, and employing sustainable thinking but also beneficial in managing budget and schedule while enabling the delivery of top-quality work. The book investigates fundamental material properties, performance criteria, as well as sector-specific standards, regulations, and guidelines, with a special focus on concerns surrounding occupant health and safety as well as environmental impact and sustainability concerns. Furthermore, fabrication, installation, and maintenance issues were explored in detail. Various information collection and organization conventions are also discussed with regard to detailing, specification, estimation, and documentation of materials and finishes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1596zAccess online version02027nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002900162245009000191250002300281264004300304264006800347264001200415300002200427336002600449337002600475338003600501341002800537490002700565505028100592520049500873542003001368546001601398588004101414650002501455650003301480710003901513856007701552OTLid0001597MnU20260406020610.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548360  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aMarzluf, Phillipeauthor00aDesigning Arguments for Academic, Public, and Professional AudiencescPhillip Marzluf  aFourteenth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter One: Evaluating Arguments -- Chapter Two: Responding to Arguments -- Chapter Three: Writing Persuasive Research Essays and Open Letters -- Chapter Four: Writing Proposals -- Chapter Five: Writing Practical Arguments -- Chapter Six: Revising and Editing0 aThis college-level textbook guides students through five different types of arguments: evaluations, responses, persuasive rhetorical arguments, proposals, and practical professional development arguments. Students are introduced to rhetorical concepts and strategies to enable them to more effectively appeal to different types of audiences. Students will gain practice in audience-based reasoning, basing their reasons and evidence on the assumptions, beliefs, and values of their readers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1597zAccess online version03032nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003000137245008000167264004300247264006800290264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341002800480490002700508505033700535520150300872542002702375546001602402588004102418650002302459700002902482700003102511710003902542856007702581OTLid0001598MnU20260406020610.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aKane, Ndjido Ardoeauthor00aCrop Adaptation and Improvement for Drought-Prone EnvironmentscNdjido Kane 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- Editorial Team and Contributors -- Part I: Socio-Economic Analysis of Dryland Crops Production -- Part II: Advanced Phenotyping and Crop Modelling for Adaptation to Drylands -- Part III: Genetic Diversity and Improvement of Dryland Crops -- Chapters' corresponding authors -- Book Abstract0 aThis book focuses on three important elements in the development of cereal and legume crops in semi-arid West Africa. The first section illustrates the socioeconomic factors that affect the food system for these crops and contains an overview of crop production and consumption in the region. Then, important inputs that affect system productivity are presented: preferences for new seed varieties, yield response to fertilizer, counterfeit herbicides, climate information, and the way farmers develop expectations about the weather events that shape cropping outcomes. The final chapter of section one is dedicated to understanding urban consumer preferences for processed food products derived from pearl millet. The second section addresses the state of the art of phenotyping and the modeling of crop adaptation to dryland farming systems. Chapters in section two focus on the regional network for phenotyping, high throughput phenotyping in field situations, root architectures, and crop ideotypes. In addition, empirical evidence is presented on root and soil interactions and the effectiveness of unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs to assess sorghum physiology. Finally, the third section investigates the genetic diversity and improvement of dryland crops. Chapters in this section focus on biodiversity and agricultural system sustainability, orphan crops such as fonio, and the utilization of a regional germplasm collection in the improvement of cowpea, groundnut, pearl millet, and sorghum.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aFoncéka, Danieleauthor1 aDalton, Timothy J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1598zAccess online version03038nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100003000162245003000192264004300222264006800265264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505051500510520125201025542003002277546001602307588004002323650002502363650003302388700002802421700002602449700002502475710003902500856007702539OTLid0001599MnU20260406020807.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548292  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aClark, J. Spencereauthor00aAction ResearchcJ. Clark 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Authors -- What is Action Research for Classroom Teachers? -- Action Research as a Process for Professional Learning and Leadership -- Planning Your Research: Reviewing the Literature and Developing Questions -- Preparing for Action Research in the Classroom: Practical Issues -- Collecting Data in Your Classroom -- Analyzing Data from Your Classroom -- Let it Be Known! Sharing your Results -- The Action Research Process from a High School ELA Teacher’s Perspective -- References0 aAction research is a common journey for graduate students in education and other human science fields. This book attempts to meet the needs of graduate students, in-service teachers, and any other educators interested in action research and/or self-study. The chapters of this book draw on our collective experiences as educators in a variety of educational contexts, and our roles guiding educator/researchers in various settings. All of our experiences have enabled us to question and refine our own understanding of action research as a process and means for pedagogical improvement. The primary purpose of this book is to offer clear steps and practical guidance to those who intend to carry out action research for the first time. As educators begin their action research journey, we feel it is vital to pose four questions: 1) What is action research, and how is it distinct from other educational research?; 2) When is it appropriate for an educator to conduct an action research project in their context?; 3) How does an educator conduct an action research project?; 4) What does an educator do with the data once the action research project has been conducted? We have attempted to address all four questions in the chapters of this book.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aPorath, Suzanneeauthor1 aThiele, Julieeauthor1 aJobe, Morganeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1599zAccess online version02121nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002900148245007700177264004300254264003900297264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505025400513520074600767542001601513546001601529588004001545650002301585650002301608710003901631856007701670OTLid0001600MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aAlrasheed, Salmaeauthor00aPrinciples of MechanicsbFundamental University PhysicscSalma Alrasheed 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc2024. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnits and vectors -- Kinematics -- Newton's Laws -- Work and Energy -- Impulse, Momentum, and Collisions -- System of Particles -- Rotation of Rigid Bodies -- Rolling and Static Equilibrium -- Central Force Motion -- Oscillatory Motion -- References0 aThis open access textbook takes the reader step-by-step through the concepts of mechanics in a clear and detailed manner. Mechanics is considered to be the core of physics, where a deep understanding of the concepts is essential in understanding all branches of physics. Many proofs and examples are included to help the reader grasp the fundamentals fully, paving the way to deal with more advanced topics. After solving all of the examples, the reader will have gained a solid foundation in mechanics and the skills to apply the concepts in a variety of situations. The book is useful for undergraduate students majoring in physics and other science and engineering disciplines. It can also be used as a reference for more advanced levels.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1600zAccess online version02448nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002800138245005000166264004300216264006100259264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505087500497520046201372542003001834546001601864588004001880650002401920650002601944710003901970856007702009OTLid0001601MnU20260406020639.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aCruthers, Arleyeauthor00aBusiness Writing For EveryonecArley Cruthers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish ColumbiabKwantlen Polytechnic Universityc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAdaptation Statement -- About This Book -- Thank Yous -- Mockup Of Moodle Training -- Chapter 1: Exploring Your Reading and Writing Beliefs -- Chapter 2: The Writing Process -- Chapter 3: Context, Audience, Purpose -- Chapter 4: Style and Tone -- Chapter 5: Organizing Your Ideas -- Chapter 6: Writing Emails, Memos, Letters and Instant Messages -- Chapter 7: Communicating Good, Neutral and Negative Messages -- Chapter 8: Persuading Your Reader -- Chapter 9: The Research Process -- Chapter 10a: Citing Sources -- Chapter 10b: Making An Argument Using Sources -- Chapter 11: Writing Reports -- Chapter 12: Visual Communication Strategies -- Chapter 13: Oral Presentations -- Chapter 14: Revision and Remixing -- Chapter 15: Social Media Communication -- Chapter 16: Peer Review -- Chapter 17: Communicating For Employment -- Chapter 18: Getting Along With Other People0 aBusiness Writing For Everyone is an inclusive guide to writing in the workplace. The book takes a process-oriented, storytelling approach to composition: focusing less on genre and more on the decisions that effective business communicators make. Business Writing For Everyone also contains interactive H5P activities for students to test their learning, and activities for further reflection that instructors can use in the classroom or assign as homework.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1601zAccess online version02524nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100003000149245005500179264004300234264005900277264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505040500513520099500918542001601913546001601929588004001945650002401985650002502009710003902034856007702073OTLid0001602MnU20260330020826.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aGrayson, Rochelleeauthor00aFoundations in Digital MarketingcRochelle Grayson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Statement -- For Students: How to Access and Use this Textbook -- About BCcampus Open Education -- Introduction -- Part I: Fundamentals of Digital Marketing -- Part II: Generating Customer Demand and Nurturing Leads & Proposals -- Part III: Analyzing and Optimizing Your Digital Marketing Performance -- Part IV: The Future of Digital Marketing -- About the Author -- Versioning History0 aFoundations in Digital Marketing is a textbook intended to introduce marketing students to the world of digital marketing. The book covers fundamental frameworks, practical applications, and online tools that can all be applied to build and execute a cohesive and engaging digital marketing strategy. The book covers the fundamental aspects of digital marketing, including areas such as: visual storytelling, design principles and frameworks, search engine optimization and marketing, website and landing page optimization, content marketing, content creation tools and technologies, paid advertising, social media marketing, mobile marketing, email marketing, attribution, conversion rate optimization, data and marketing analytics, and the future of digital marketing. The book also features chapter learning objectives, videos, summaries, interactive learning activities, and discussion points, as well as recommended industry certifications and online resources to augment the textbook.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1602zAccess online version02234nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003300150245009000183264004300273264005900316264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505056600552520046001118542003001578546001601608588004001624650004201664650003801706710003901744856007701783OTLid0001603MnU20260309021201.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aTabatabaian, Mehrzadeauthor00aEngineering Systems, Dynamics, Modelling, Simulation, and DesigncMehrzad Tabatabaian 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- About the Author -- Preface -- List of Figures -- List of Tables -- Introduction -- Lagrangian Mechanics -- Bond Graph Modelling Method -- Building Bond Graph Models: General Procedure and Application -- Introduction to 20-sim Software Tool -- Bond Graph Models for Complex Mechanical Systems -- Bond Graph Models for Electrical Systems -- Bond Graph Models for Hydraulic Systems -- Bond Graph Models for Multi-Domain Systems -- Frequency Analysis: Bode Plots and Transfer Function -- Miscellaneous Topics -- References -- Versioning History0 aThis open educational resource presents effective system modelling methods, including Lagrangian and bond graph, and the application of a relevant engineering software tool, 20-sim. The content is designed for engineering students and professionals in the field to support their understanding and application of these methods for modelling, simulation, and design of engineering systems. The text also includes videos showing selected worked-out examples.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1603zAccess online version01977nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002600144245004100170264004300211264005900254264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002800435490002700463505045000490520037800940542001601318546001601334588004001350650002601390650003101416700002801447710003901475856007701514OTLid0001604MnU20260406020838.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aRamoo, Dinesheauthor00aPsychology of LanguagecDinesh Ramoo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2024. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Statement -- For Students: How to Access and Use this Textbook -- About BCcampus Open Education -- Contributors -- Chapter 1: Speaking in Tongues -- Chapter 2: The Sounds of Language -- Chapter 3: The Parts of Speech -- Chapter 4: The Biological Basis of Language -- Chapter 5: Learning to Speak -- Chapter 6: Bilingualism -- Chapter 7: Visual Language -- Chapter 8: Reading -- Chapter 9: Speaking -- Glossary -- Versioning History0 aIn this textbook, students are introduced to the fundamental principles of linguistics and psycholinguistics. Students will explore theories and models of language development, comprehension and production as well as bilingualism and reading. All of these topics are approached from a Canadian perspective and include ideas from indigenous cultures and languages of Canada.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBartlett, Marieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1604zAccess online version02175nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100003000151245010200181264004300283264005900326264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505030300562520065100865542001601516546001601532588004001548650002401588650003401612700002701646710003901673856007701712OTLid0001605MnU20251222021520.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aKF385.A41 aSorensen, Annetteeauthor00aIndigenous Perspectives on Business Ethics and Business Law in British ColumbiacAnnette Sorensen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bBCcampusc2024. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Statement -- For Students: How to Access and Use this Textbook -- About BCcampus Open Education -- Introduction -- Part I: History -- Part II: Business Ethics -- Part III: Business Law -- Part IV: Conclusion -- References -- Acknowledgements -- About the Authors -- Versioning History0 aThis book explores business ethics and business law through the lens of Indigenous-settler relations in Canada (with a focus on British Columbia in particular). It aims to fill a gap in business curriculum and support instructors who want to bring Indigenous content into their classes. The book starts by exploring relevant history, focusing on treaties, legislation, and federal government policy. It then looks at business ethics and what it means for businesses to work ethically with Indigenous communities. And finally, the book discusses business law and the requirements and responsibilities for businesses doing work on Indigenous lands.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 avan Dyk, Scotteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1605zAccess online version02718nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100003000149245006600179264004300245264007600288264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002800486490002700514505061000541520093101151542004102082546001602123588004002139650002402179650002502203710003902228856007702267OTLid0001606MnU20260406020639.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aRichards, Jessicaeauthor00aSports MarketingbAn Australian PerspectivecJessica Richards 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWestern Sydney Universityc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgment of Country -- From inception to publication: A heartfelt thank you to the team -- Meet The Author -- The unique nature of sport marketing -- Understanding the sport consumer -- Selling an experience: marketing intangible objects -- The marketing plan -- Market segmentation and target marketing in sport -- Market research in the sport industry -- Sports marketing in an omnichannel world -- Managing a sports brand -- Promotion and customer service -- Corporate sponsorship and memberships -- Community and stakeholders -- Introducing the "Sports Marketing Mix" -- Appendix0 aSports marketing refers to promoting goods and services through sporting events and the endorsement of athletes and sports teams. For any sports organisation, it is imperative to have an effective sports marketing strategy in place to build brand awareness, enhance customer loyalty and generate revenue. Companies in sports use marketing strategies to fulfil their goals, such as attracting more junior players, involving parents, increasing the company's public profile, entertaining spectators, acquiring sponsorships, and securing broadcasting rights deals. This book has been written for sports management students at Western Sydney University for the subject Sports Marketing (BUSM2048) where they will learn general marketing knowledge and theories relevant to the sports industry, such as sponsorship, endorsements, customer experience, pricing and operations. This activity is aligned with SDG4 – Quality Education.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1606zAccess online version02747nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152050001000162100002800172245011700200264004300317264006800360264001200428300002200440336002600462337002600488338003600514341002800550490002700578505031000605520105700915542003001972546001602002588004002018650002502058650003302083650002402116700002602140700003102166710003902197856007702236OTLid0001607MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645755404  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC980 4aRA4401 aAyton, Darshinieauthor00aQualitative Researchba practical guide for health and social care researchers and practitionerscDarshini Ayton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMonash Universityc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Country -- About the authors -- Preface -- Accessibility statement -- Introduction to research -- Research design -- Data collection -- Data analysis -- Rigour -- Ethics -- Writing qualitative research -- Peer review statement -- Licensing and attribution information -- Version history0 aThis guide is designed to support health and social care researchers and practitioners to integrate qualitative research into the evidence base of health and social care research. Qualitative research designs are diverse and each design has a different focus that will inform the approach undertaken and the results that are generated. The aim is to move beyond the “what” of qualitative research to the “how”, by (1) outlining key qualitative research designs for health and social care research – descriptive, phenomenology, action research, case study, ethnography, and grounded theory; (2) a decision tool of how to select the appropriate design based on a guiding prompting question, the research question and available resources, time and expertise; (3) an overview of mixed methods research and qualitative research in evaluation studies; (4) a practical guide to data collection and analysis; (5) providing examples of qualitative research to illustrate the scope and opportunities; and (6) tips on communicating qualitative research.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aTsindos, Tesseauthor1 aBerkovic, Danielleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1607zAccess online version02250nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100003100149245006900180264004300249264008200292264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505019300551520088000744542003001624546001601654588004001670650002401710650002601734710003901760856007701799OTLid0001608MnU20260406020640.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF56251 aMasschelein, Stijneauthor00aPrinciples of Strategic Management AccountingcStijn Masschelein 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Western Australiac2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Accessibility Information -- Acknowledgement of Country -- About the Author -- Part I: The Principles -- Part II: Budgeting -- Part III: Cost Accounting -- Review statement0 aThis textbook explains the economic and sociological principles that underpin the use of strategic management accounting practices in organisations. Each chapter of the first part starts with a gentle, conversational introduction to the insights of one strand of academic literature and applies the insights to modern performance measurement and evaluation practices. The following parts apply the principles to specific accounting tools such as the budget, cost accounting, and the balanced scorecard. The textbook can be used in an advanced management accounting undergraduate unit or a post-graduate unit to give students a firm grounding to analyse measurement and evaluation practices in modern organisations. The textbook is meant to be a jumping off point for students and prepare them to analyse case studies and technical articles on strategic management accounting.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1608zAccess online version02822nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002600137245005200163264004300215264007000258264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002800450490002700478505022300505520139900728542003002127546001602157588004002173650002602213650002402239700002702263700003002290710003902320856007702359OTLid0001609MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aLloyd, Shereeeauthor00aLeading in Health and Social CarecSheree Lloyd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGriffith Universityc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement -- Introduction -- Part I: Leadership -- Part II: People in Health and Social Care -- Part III: Organisation and governance -- About the Authors -- Glossary -- Version History -- Accessibility Statement0 aThis comprehensive textbook captures best international practice and is focused on the practical needs of leaders in health and social care. The text includes chapters that address evolving and innovative practices in leadership, ethics, leading people and human resource management, cultural safety for First Nations peoples, innovation, digital health, finance and resource management, systems thinking, change, evaluation and safety and quality. As an open educational resource, leaders, managers, students, policymakers and all readers interested in improving healthcare systems can access the book. The choice to publish on an open platform demonstrates our commitment to building a strong, transparent, and connected community of practice for health service leaders across many disciplines and across the world. We hope this pragmatic and contemporary textbook will reach a broad audience with an interest in strengthening the discipline of health service leadership and building fit-for-purpose healthcare systems that meet the needs of the diverse communities we serve. To achieve this we want the text to be free and widely available. To achieve the United Nation’s Sustainable Development Goals, health and quality education are key and this open educational resource (OER) is available for all to use to guide their practice and the strengthening of health and social care systems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aOlley, Richardeauthor1 aMilligan, Eleanoreauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1609zAccess online version01814nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001600138050000800154100002200162245004300184264004300227264008100270264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505030700525520029500832542004101127546001601168588004101184650002401225650002401249650002701273710003901300856007701339OTLid0001610MnU20260406020640.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA11 aMay, Mikeeauthor00aBusiness Calculus with ExcelcMike May 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMike May, S.J. and Anneke Bartc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Preface -- Notes for instructors -- Notes for Students -- Functional Graphs and Excel -- Business Applications -- Rate of Change and Derivatives -- Symbolic Differentiation -- Differentiation Techniques and Applications -- Functions of Several Variables -- Integration -- Appendices0 aThis text is intended for a one semester calculus course for business students with the equivalent of a college algebra prerequisite. Rather than being a three-semester engineering calculus course that has been watered down to fit into one semester it is designed for the business students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1610zAccess online version02878nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158100002900168245006300197250001600260264004300276264006400319264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002800505490002700533505030400560520127500864542001602139546001602155588004002171650003302211650004202244700002502286700002902311710003902340856007702379OTLid0001611MnU20260406020640.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463668187  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aJanssen, Michaeleauthor00aFracture MechanicsbAn Engineering PrimercMichael Janssen  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface to the First Edition -- Preface to the Second Edition -- Part I: Introduction -- Part II: Linear Elastic Fracture Mechanics -- Part III: Elastic-Plastic Fracture Mechanics -- Part IV: Fracture Mechanics Concepts for Crack Growth -- Part V: Mechanisms of Fracture in Actual Materials -- Index0 aIn this second edition, which is the result of numerous revisions, updates and additions, the authors cover the basic concepts of fracture mechanics for both the linear elastic and elastic-plastic regimes. The fracture mechanics parameters K, G, J and CTOD are treated in a basic manner along with the test methods to determine critical values. The development of failure assessment based on elastic-plastic fracture mechanics is reflected in a comprehensive treatment. Three chapters are devoted to the fracture mechanics characterisation of crack growth. Fatigue crack growth is extensively treated and attention is paid to the important topic of the initiation and growth of short fatigue cracks. Furthermore, sustained load fracture and dynamic crack growth are discussed, including various test techniques, e.g. the determination of the crack arrest toughness. Finally, there are two chapters dealing with mechanisms of fracture and the ways in which actual material behaviour influences the fracture mechanics characterisation of crack growth. This textbook is intended primarily for engineering students. It will be useful to practising engineers as well, since it provides the background to several test and design methods and to criteria for material selection.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aZuidema, Janeauthor1 aWanhill, Russelleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1611zAccess online version02134nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245010800137264004300245264008800288264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002500498490002700523505033100550520052100881542004101402546001601443588004001459650002601499650002401525700002701549700003001576700002601606710003901632856007701671OTLid0001612MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA44000aBuilding BridgesbEstablishing a Foundation for Interprofessional Collaboration in Healthcare (Revised) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1 - Introduction to Interprofessional Collaboration in Healthcare -- Chapter 2 - Values and Ethics -- Chapter 3 - Roles and Responsibilities -- Chapter 4 - Communication -- Chapter 5 - Teams and Teamwork -- Appendix A: Image Credits -- Appendix B: Choose Your Own Adventure Activity0 aBuilding Bridges: Establishing a Foundation for Interprofessional Collaboration in Healthcare (Revised) is an Open Educational Resource (OER) that focuses on teaching interprofessional collaboration in healthcare to students entering their respective health profession's program. This book will help students achieve success not only in their educational program, but as they experience various healthcare settings through internships and employment. This resource is targeted for students in healthcare professions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aNelson, Andreaeauthor1 aGreene, Katherineeauthor1 aCavnar, Katieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1612zAccess online version02878nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245001100135264004300146264008800189264001200277300002200289336002600311337002600337338003600363341002800399490002700427505031800454520135100772542004102123546001602164588004102180650003802221650002602259700003302285700002702318700003102345710003902376856007702415OTLid0001613MnU20260406020611.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100a#OnYGo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bG. Blattner, A. Dalola, and S. Roulonc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Our Mission -- About the Authors -- For Instructors & Learners -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: #JeSuis -- Chapter 2: #MonEntourage -- Chapter 3: #ModeVacances -- Chapter 4: #LeLook -- Chapter 5: #Miam -- Chapter 6: #EnVille -- Chapter 7: #CLaFête -- Chapter 8: #MonChezMoi -- Chapter 9: #MonWeb0 a#OnYGo is an innovative first-year French language e-textbook, designed as Open Educational Resource (OER), for learning beginning French (equivalent to one year at an American university). It is inspired by a remix of task-based, multiliteracies and communicative approaches, which provides students with opportunities to engage with French language and culture in a variety of contexts and situations, across a range of modalities. Through a wide range of activities, students develop and practice their language skills, and reflect on their cross-cultural knowledge and positionality in their understanding of the vast francophone landscape. #OnYGo is a first-year textbook that takes a DEI-forward approach to the depiction of people, contexts, and concepts. It views language learners, instructors and a wide range of individuals interacting in French as belonging to a large multilingual and francophone community. It recognizes multilingualism and multiculturalism in all its forms, and showcases French speakers with a variety of backgrounds and relationships to the French language. The cultural and pedagogical materials in this collection have been selected for their authenticity and diverse representation of French speakers on the five continents, and are thus purposely inclusive of gender, sexual orientation, race, and ethnicity.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBlattner, Géraldineeauthor1 aDalola, Amandaeauthor1 aRoulon, Stéphanieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1613zAccess online version02589nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156245008700169264004300256264007000299264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002800491490002700519505019700546520073100743542004101474546002701515588004101542650002801583650003401611700004601645700004701691700004401738700004001782700004701822700004401869700004501913700004501958710003902003856007702042OTLid0001614MnU20260330020625.0m     o  d s      cr            240303s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651228  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A400aEntre la Criminología y la Política CriminalbCaminos para una Justicia Renovada 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos teóricos -- Capítulo II: Política Criminal para una Justicia Renovada Criminología -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl texto aborda la relación entre criminología y política criminal, destacando su importancia en la comprensión del fenómeno criminal y la gestión estatal contra la delincuencia. Se exploran elementos clave, incluyendo los objetivos valorativos de la política criminal, la relación entre violencia estatal y social, la flexibilidad en la elección de objetivos, y la operación en diversos contextos. Se destaca la crucial participación del poder legislativo y la necesidad de adaptarse a la temporalidad. El texto aboga por nuevas políticas criminales respaldadas por instrumentos legales sólidos y una administración pública eficaz para moldear un sistema de justicia más preciso en la sociedad contemporánea.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aSamaniego-Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aToscano-Broncano, Fabian Heribertoeauthor1 aBonilla-Morejón, Diego Marceloeauthor1 aAlfonso-Olvera, Luis Arturoeauthor1 aBonilla-Morejón, Jefferson Steveneauthor1 aManobanda-Chimbo, Henry Armandoeauthor1 aBucheli-Espinoza, Carlos Ivanoffeauthor1 aParedes-Fierro, Eduardo Joselitoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1614zAccess online version02847nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003200155245007700187264004300264264006800307264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505116900552520034301721542004102064546001602105588004002121650004202161700002602203700003102229700003002260700003102290710003902321856007702360OTLid0001615MnU20260406020640.0m     o  d s      cr            240313s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548308  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aNichols, Randall K.eauthor00aUnmanned Vehicle Systems & Operations on Air, Sea, LandcRandall Nichols 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Foreword -- Contributors -- Abbreviations, Acronyms, and References -- Table of Contents, Figures, Tables, Equations and Appendices -- Chapter 1 - Information Advances, Remote ID, & Extreme Persistence ISR -- Chapter 2 - Unmanned Aerial Vehicles & How They Can Augment Mesonet Weather Tower Data Collection -- Chapter 3 - Tour de Drones for the Discerning Palate -- Chapter 4 - Underwater Autonomous Navigation & other UUV Advances -- Chapter 5 - Asymmetric Autonomous Maritime Systems -- Chapter 6 - UUV Integrated Autonomous Missions & Drone Management -- Chapter 7 - Principles of Naval Architecture Applied to UUVs -- Chapter 8 - Unmanned Logistics Operating Safely & Efficiently Across Multiple Domains -- Chapter 9 - Chinese Advances in Stealth UAV Penetration Path Planning in Combat Environment -- Chapter 10 - UV, Social Networks & COVID-19 Defense -- Chapter 11 - UV & Disinformation Misinformation Channels -- Chapter 12 - Chinese UAS Proliferation along New Silk Road Sea Land Routes -- Chapter 13 - Automaton, AI, Law, Ethics, Crossing the Machine – Human Barrier -- Chapter 14 - Maritime Cybersecurity -- Appendices Chapters 10 & 120 aThis is our fourth textbook in a series previously covering the world of Unmanned Aircraft Systems (UAS) and Counter Unmanned Aircraft Systems (CUAS). The authors have expanded our purview beyond UAS / CUAS systems. Our title shows our concern for growth and unique operations for all unmanned vehicles in all theaters: Air, Sea and Land.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aMumm, Hans C.eauthor1 aLonstein, Wayne D.eauthor1 aRyan, Julie J.C.Heauthor1 aCarter, Candice M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1615zAccess online version03461nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003200137245007300169264004300242264006800285264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505085600530520130301386542004102689546001602730588004102746650004202787700002602829700003102855700003002886700003102916710003902947856007702986OTLid0001616MnU20260406020640.0m     o  d s      cr            240313s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aNichols, Randall K.eauthor00aSpace SystemsbEmerging Technologies and OperationscRandall Nichols 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Foreword -- Chapter 1 - Current State of Space Operations -- Chapter 2 - Satellite Killers and Hypersonic Drones -- Chapter 3 - Space Electronic Warfare, Signal Interception, ISR, Jamming, Spoofing, & ECD -- Chapter 4 - Manufacturing in Space -- Chapter 5 - Exploration of Key Infrastructure Vulnerabilities from Space-Based Platforms -- Chapter 6 - Trash Collection and Tracking in Space -- Chapter 7 - Leveraging Space for Disaster Risk Reduction & Management -- Chapter 8 - Bio-treats to Agriculture-Solutions from Space -- Chapter 9 - Modeling, Simulations, & Extended Reality -- Chapter 10 - Drones & Precision Agricultural Mapping -- Chapter 11 - Civilian use of Space for Environmental, Wildlife Tracking, & Fire Risk Zone ID -- Chapter 12 - Humanitarian Use of Space Technologies to Improve Global Food Supply &Catte Management0 aSPACE SYSTEMS: EMERGING TECHNOLOGIES AND OPERATIONS (SSETO) is our seventh textbook in a series covering the world of UASs / CUAS / UUVs. SSETO takes on a new purview of SPACE. UASs (Drones) have a maximum altitude of about 33,000 ft (10 km) because rotating rotors become physically limiting. (Nichols R. et al., 2019) Between 400 ft and 33,000 ft is in the purview of DREAMERS. In the DREAMERS region, Space has its most interesting technological emergence. We see emerging technologies and operations that may have profound effects on humanity. This is the mission our book addresses. We look at the Dreamer region from three perspectives: 1) a Military view where intelligence, jamming, spoofing, advanced materials, and hypersonics are in play; 2) the Operational Dreamer Region; which includes Space-based platform vulnerabilities, trash, disaster recovery management, A.I., manufacturing, and extended reality; and 3) the Humanitarian Use of Space technologies; which includes precision agriculture wildlife tracking, fire risk zone identification, and improving the global food supply and cattle management. State-of-the-Art research by a team of fifteen SMEs is incorporated into our book. We trust you will enjoy reading it as much as we have in its writing. There is hope for the future.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aMumm, Hans C.eauthor1 aLonstein, Wayne D.eauthor1 aRyan, Julie J.C.Heauthor1 aCarter, Candice M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1616zAccess online version02561nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003200155245007400187264004300261264006800304264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002800494490002700522505020300549520102500752542004101777546001601818588004101834650004201875700002601917700003101943700003001974700003102004710003902035856007702074OTLid0001617MnU20260406020640.0m     o  d s      cr            240313s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548544  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aNichols, Randall K.eauthor00aCyber-Human Systems, Space Technologies, and ThreatscRandall Nichols 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Foreword -- Part 1: Cyber-Human Systems (CHS) -- Part 2: Space Threats -- Part 3: Warfare, Hypersonics, and Materials -- Appendix A: dB Math and Plane / Spherical Trigonometry Primer0 aCYBER-HUMAN SYSTEMS, SPACE TECHNOLOGIES, AND THREATS is our eighth textbook in a series covering the world of UASs / CUAS / UUVs / SPACE. We address the technological future of the merging of cyber-human systems (robots, cyborgs, AI/ML, computers) with humans and apply these innovations to space operations and defense against threats that are concomitant with their development. We look at artificial brains, legality of CHS sensors, AI /ML and Ag and food industry; Neurostrike and CHATGPT, biological threats and growth in space, space EW, modeling, deep space warfare, logistics and dominance; hypersonic missiles, cyber threats in space, machine parts, materials technologies, and economies of scale, quantum technologies impact and finally, innovative wireless power transfer for space applications. State-of-the-Art research by a team of eighteen SMEs is incorporated into our book. We trust you will enjoy reading it as much as we have in its writing. There is hope for the future. There is also caution needed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aMumm, Hans C.eauthor1 aLonstein, Wayne D.eauthor1 aRyan, Julie J.C.Heauthor1 aCarter, Candice M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1617zAccess online version02990nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100003200155245008300187264004300270264006800313264001200381300002200393336002600415337002600441338003600467341002800503490002700531505090600558520074501464542004102209546001602250588004102266650004202307700002602349700003102375700003002406700002802436710003902464856007702503OTLid0001618MnU20260406020641.0m     o  d s      cr            240313s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781944548278  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aNichols, Randall K.eauthor00aCounter Unmanned Aircraft Systems Technologies and OperationscRandall Nichols 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNew Prairie Pressc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Foreword -- Chapter 1 - The Role of Information Technology -- Chapter 2 - Understanding C-UAS Purpose and Process -- Chapter 3 - Developing a C-UAS Strategy Goals, Options, Target Analyses, Process Selection, Operational Metrics Approaches to Countering UAS Activities (First Principles) -- Chapter 4 - Planning for Resiliency and Robustness -- Chapter 5 - Surveillance and Reconnaissance -- Chapter 6 - C-UAS Evolving Methods of Interdiction -- Chapter 7 - UAS Area / Airspace denial -- Chapter 8 - Emerging Interdiction Technologies -- Chapter 9 - Non-Kinetic: Military Avionics, EW, CW, DE, SCADA Defenses -- Chapter 10 - When the Other Side Fights Back - Cyberwarfare, Directed Energy Weapons, Acoustics, Integrating C-UAS into Planning -- Chapter 11 - Thinking Like the Enemy: Seams in the Zone -- Chapter 12 - C-UAS Regulation, Legislation, & Litigation from a Global Perspective0 aAs the quarter-century mark in the 21st Century nears, new aviation-related equipment has come to the forefront, both to help us and to haunt us. (Coutu, 2020). This is particularly the case with unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs). These vehicles have grown in popularity and accessible to everyone. Of different shapes and sizes, they are widely available for purchase at relatively low prices. They have moved from the backyard recreation status to important tools for the military, intelligence agencies, and corporate organizations. New practical applications such as military equipment and weaponry are announced on a regular basis – globally. (Coutu, 2020). Every country seems to be announcing steps forward in this bludgeoning field.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aMumm, Hans C.eauthor1 aLonstein, Wayne D.eauthor1 aRyan, Julie J.C.Heauthor1 aCarter, Candiceeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1618zAccess online version02257nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245007800143264004300221264002900264264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002800415490002700443505030700470520077200777542003001549546001601579588004001595650002801635650003101663700003101694700003001725710003901755856007701794OTLid0001619MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aGN25 4aH100aShared VoicesbAn Introduction to Cultural Anthropology [Revised Edition] 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 - What is Anthropology? -- Chapter 2 - What is Culture? -- Chapter 3 - Doing Fieldwork: Methods in Cultural Anthropology -- Chapter 4 - Language -- Chapter 5 - Foodways -- Chapter 6 - Economics -- Chapter 7 - Political Anthropology: A Cross-Cultural Comparison -- Grant Information0 aShared Voices is a student-centered cultural anthropology mini textbook built with an equity lens. We are excited to share this with you all. This book attempts to address the lack of current, reliable, and relevant resources for introductory anthropology courses that center equity and anti-racism. We set out to create a culturally responsive and inclusive textbook with an anti-racist and global citizenry perspective. We center marginalized voices, stories, and community. This text is a starting point for any introductory anthropology course recognizing that cultural change is constant and the familiar is cousin to the weird and unusual. A work in progress, this text aims to provide students an opportunity to build content as they explore the topics within.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnthropologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBrellas, Demetrioseauthor1 aMartinez, Vanessaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1619zAccess online version02096nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002800138245009900166264004300265264002900308264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002800459490002700487505022400514520074400738542003001482546001601512588004001528650002601568650002401594710003901618856007701657OTLid0001620MnU20260323020553.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aTracy, Kisha G.eauthor00aHeritages of ChangebCuratorial Activism and First-Year Writing [Revised Edition]cKisha Tracy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 - Introduction to Cultural Heritage -- Chapter 2 - Heritages of Change -- Chapter 3 - Disability Heritage -- Chapter 4 - Writing and Researching a Heritages of Change Exhibition -- Grant Information0 aIn first-year writing courses, it can often feel that we practice writing and research in a vacuum. Writing is about communication, and, if we do not feel that we have an audience, then it can seem like our writing has no purpose (even though practice of any kind will help us develop these skills). Heritages of Change: Curatorial Activism and First-Year Writing is a method for students to think about the social changes that were prevalent during the COVID years and remain important in their wake. Heritages of Change is a lens for thinking and writing about these ideas. Through curation and exhibition as an act of activism, students focus on a specific audience with whom they can communicate authentically about this dynamic world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1620zAccess online version02533nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140245005200147264004300199264002900242264001200271300002200283336002600305337002600331338003600357341002800393490002700421505045500448520091900903542004101822546001601863588004001879650002501919650003101944700002901975700002702004710003902031856007702070OTLid0001621MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL704aThe Whole ChildbDevelopment in the Early Years 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter One - Perspectives on Early Childhood -- Chapter Two - Theorists and Theories of Development -- Chapter Three - Domains in Development -- Chapter Four - Brain Development from Conception to Age 8 -- Chapter Five - Prenatal Development and Birth -- Chapter Six - Infancy -- Chapter Seven - Toddlers (15 Months to 3 Years) -- Chapter Eight - Early Childhood Development -- Chapter Nine - School Age (5 Years to 8 Years) -- Conclusion0 aThe Whole Child is a textbook that gives an overview of development, beginning in the mother’s womb through the age of eight. It starts with a look at perspectives of early childhood, including how children have been viewed historically as well as cross-culturally. There is a complete overview of the important theorists that have helped to deepen and bring clarity to how children develop. These theories include psychodynamic, behavioral, social cognitive theory, cognitive theory, humanistic, multiple intelligence, growth mindset, and Bloom’s taxonomy. Understanding the implications of each theory is important foundational knowledge for the study of development. Developmental domains at each stage is examined alongside important milestones. The biology of the brain is given important consideration. Some of the many factors that influence a young child’s development are also included in this text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aBudzyna, Deirdreeauthor1 aBuckley, Doriseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1621zAccess online version01892nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245007700177264004300254264002900297264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505034000503520041500843542004101258546001601299588004001315650002301355650002401378710003901402856007701441OTLid0001622MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aGilleman, Saraheauthor00a"Overweight" Bodies, Real and Imagined [Revised Edition]cSarah Gilleman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLand Acknowledgement -- Introduction -- The Obesity Crisis: Causes and Solutions -- Managing Obesity -- Dismantling Weight Bias Towards Overweight Patients in Healthcare -- Public Health Needs to Decouple Weight and Health -- Understanding and Managing Bias: Exercises -- Appendix -- Grant Information -- Works Cited -- Version History0 aThis compilation gathers OER sources on body weight, nutrition, and movement, and it also problematizes the cultural meaning of these readings. Roughly, this anthology is divided into two parts--informational and theoretical--in depicting how medical research and journalism influence and are influenced by social stereotypes, constructed ideas about bodies, food, and individual choices within social systems.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1622zAccess online version02830nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134100002800147245009900175264004300274264002900317264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505029300523520136600816542004102182546001602223588004002239650002502279650003602304710003902340856007702379OTLid0001623MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1062.61 aTracy, Kisha G.eauthor00aWhy Do I Have to Take This Course? A Guide to General Education [Revised Edition]cKisha Tracy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 - What Is General Education? -- Chapter 2 - Why General Education? -- Chapter 3 - What Will I Learn? -- Chapter 4 - Foundation -- Chapter 5 - Exploration -- Chapter 6 - Integration -- Chapter 7 - What About After Graduation? -- Chapter 8 - For Instructors -- Appendix0 aWhy Do I Have to Take This Course? A Guide to General Education developed out of many years of thinking about general education courses and curriculums. We, as university personnel, do not always succeed in explaining why we have certain requirements. Even though these courses make up a significant percentage of our college careers, there is not often time set aside to talk about general education and explore its purpose and goals. When we do not know the reason why we are doing something, it can sometimes lead to apathy and even resentment. Once we have an idea of the purpose, then we can start to appreciate and learn. It is worthwhile to spend some time thinking about these purposes, both “official” and personal ones, in order to maximize student learning. This textbook helps students systematically study how general education requirements are developed, their history, post-graduation value, etc. It emphasizes exploration of the significance of individual learning outcomes, especially through the lens of John Lewis’ philosophy of “good, necessary trouble.” For instructors adopting this book, it is designed to assign in its entirety or in parts as instructors can choose to emphasize relevant learning outcomes. It is also designed for use by advisors, especially with advisees who express concerns over taking certain requirements.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1623zAccess online version03476nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245009600134264004300230264002900273264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505114100479520119501620542004102815546001602856588004002872650003102912700002902943700002602972710003902998856007703037OTLid0001624MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aSocial Work Practice and Disability CommunitiesbAn Intersectional Anti-Oppressive Approach 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1 - Disability Social Work Concepts and Principles -- Chapter 2 - A Model for Social Work Practice with Disability Communities: Connecting Critical -- Chapter 3 - Major Disability Policies in the United States -- Chapter 4 - Health and Personal Care Services for the Disability Community -- Chapter 5 - Disability Justice in Education and Transition to Adulthood -- Chapter 6 - An Overview of Disabled Children and Parents in the Family Policing System -- Chapter 7 - Gender, Gender Identity, Gender Expression, and Disability -- Chapter 8 - Sexual Orientation, Sexuality, and the Disability Community -- Chapter 9 - Mental Health and Addictions in Disability Communities -- Chapter 10 - Employment, Housing, Poverty and the Disability Community -- Chapter 11 - Disability and the Criminal Legal System -- Chapter 12 - Aging, End-of-Life, and the Disability Community -- Chapter 13 - Violence Against People with Disabilities: Implications for Practice -- Chapter 14 - An Intersectional Analysis of Disability Resistance Movements: Looking Back to Look Forward -- Chapter Authour Biographies -- Grant Information0 aDesigned as a main textbook for social work courses at the bachelor’s and master’s level or for social work practitioners in the field, this work moves beyond a traditional medicalized and segregated approach (i.e., chapters organized around impairments) to the exploration of disability-specific populations, instead taking a more intersectional approach in discussing specific service areas and practice issues while weaving in stories about the lived experiences of disabled people with a range of social identities. These issues include parenting, mass incarceration, ableism, aging, and employment, among many others. A key goal of this book is to introduce an intersectionality-informed and critically culturally competent approach to anti-oppressive social work practice with disabled people, primarily in the United States. To do this, we present an innovative practice model for social workers to use in their work with disabled people and communities, which is incorporated throughout the book in a variety of practice considerations. The main themes woven throughout our practice model are intersectionality theory, critical cultural competence, and anti-oppressive practice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSlayter, Elspetheauthor1 aJohnson, Lisaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1624zAccess online version02350nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135100003100149245007200180264004300252264002900295264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505031900501520089000820542004101710546001601751588004001767650002701807650002601834710003901860856007701899OTLid0001625MnU20260330020625.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aAnthony, Yvonne E.eauthor00aStatistics Through an Equity Lens [Revised Edition]cYvonne Anthony 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1 - An Overview of Statistics -- Chapter 2 - Descriptive Statistics -- Chapter 3 - Probability -- Chapter 4 - Inferential Statistics: Sampling Methods -- Chapter 5 - Significance of Statistical Inference Methods -- Chapter 6 - Correlation and Regression Analysis -- Chapter 7 - Case Studies0 aThis Open Educational Resource (OER) carries a significant responsibility by presenting statistics through an equity lens. The metaphor of a lens is used intentionally–as the glasses one wears can have a profound effect on what one sees. The book encourages further inspection of the ways in which data is collected, interpreted, and analyzed on a variety of social justice issues, such as health disparities, hunger and food insecurity, homelessness, behavioral health (mental health and substance use), and incarceration of males of color. It also attempts to reveal how the misuse of data can reinforce inequities, for example, by stigmatizing people and labeling neighborhoods as high poverty, violent, and having poor educational opportunities. Whether an intended or unintended consequence, irresponsible data use can contribute to racist impressions of people and communities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1625zAccess online version02254nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050001000149050000700159245004400166264004300210264002900253264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505057000459520041401029542004101443546001601484588004001500650002301540650002301563650002601586650003101612700002901643700003201672710003901704856007701743OTLid0001626MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH301 4aBF121 4aH100aBiological Psychology [Revised Edition] 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Biological Psychology -- Chapter 2: The Brain and Nervous System -- Chapter 3: Neurons -- Chapter 4: Research Methods in Biological Psychology -- Chapter 5: Psychopharmacology -- Chapter 6: Hormones and Behavior -- Chapter 7: Development of the Brain and Nervous System -- Chapter 8: Genetics and Epigenetics in Psychology -- Chapter 9: Emotion and Affective Neuroscience -- Chapter 10: Brain Damage, Neurodegeneration, and Neurological Diseases -- Chapter 11: Biopsychology of Psychological Disorders -- Grant Information0 aBiological psychology is the study of the biological bases of behavior and mental processes. It explores how biological factors like genes, hormones, neurotransmitters, and brain structures influence psychological components like thoughts, emotions, memories, and actions. This free and open textbook provides a wide ranging and up-to-date introduction to the main topics and methods of biological psychology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aHove, Michael J.eauthor1 aMartinez, Steven A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1626zAccess online version02171nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127245009100139264004300230264008600273264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002800481490002700509505017800536520078400714542001601498546001601514588004001530650002601570650002101596700003301617700003101650710003901681856007701720OTLid0001627MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-500000aUnlocking the Digital AgebThe Musician's Guide to Research, Copyright, and Publishing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBaltimore, MarylandbThe Peabody Institute of The Johns Hopkins Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1 - Research Foundations -- Chapter 2 - Copyright Essentials -- Chapter 3 - Publishing Practices -- References -- Glossary0 aBased on coursework developed at the Peabody Conservatory, this book serves as a crucial resource for early career musicians navigating the complexities of the digital era. This guide bridges the gap between creative practice and scholarly research, empowering musicians to confidently share and protect their work as they expand their performing lives beyond the concert stage as citizen artists. It offers a plain language resource that helps early career musicians see where creative practice and creative research intersect and how to traverse information systems to share their work. As professional musicians and researchers, the authors’ experiences on stage and in academia makes this guide an indispensable tool for musicians aiming to thrive in the digital landscape.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aDeLaurenti, Kathleeneauthor1 aCopland, Andrea I.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1627zAccess online version02900nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153100002300161245006200184264004300246264006800289264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505012200534520158500656542001602241546001602257588004002273650002302313650002602336650002402362710003902386856007702425OTLid0001628MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781439921265  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD20 4aBL11 aRey, Terryeauthor00aZombie ApocalypsebHoly Land, Haiti, HollywoodcTerry Rey 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Broad Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- Chapter 1 - Holy Land -- Chapter 2 - Haiti -- Chapter 3 - Hollywood -- Conclusion0 aZombie Apocalypse: Holy Land, Haiti, Hollywood explores the intellectual and cultural histories of two highly influential and essentially religious ideas, that of the zombie and that of the apocalypse. The former is a modern idea rooted in Haitian Vodou and its popular African and European religious antecedents, while the latter is an ancient one rooted in Zoroastrianism and the Bible and widely expanded in Judaism, Christianity, and Islam, and is arguably one of the most influential ideas in world history. Today the merger of the zombie and the apocalypse has pervaded popular culture, with the zombie surpassing the vampire and Frankenstein as the most prolific monster in popular American consciousness. Drawing on biblical studies, African studies, Caribbean studies, and the sociology and history of religion, Parts I (Holy Land) and II (Haiti) explore the religious origins of these ideas. Part III (Hollywood) uses aspects of cultural studies, literary analysis, critical race theory, and cinema studies to document the (primarily) American obsession with the zombie and the zombie apocalypse. The apocalypse and the zombie have been momentous intellectual, historical, and cultural realities and social forces in both very ancient and very recent human history and culture. As such, Zombie Apocalypse provides a focused analysis of certain fundamental aspects of human existence. It challenges readers to cultivate their critical thinking skills while learning about two of the most compelling notions in human religious history and the impact they continue to have.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aReligionvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1628zAccess online version02250nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245008200159264004300241264007300284264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505027600534520080000810542004101610546001601651588004101667650003801708650002601746710003901772856007701811OTLid0001629MnU20260406020611.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aAttig, Remyeauthor00aCreative Translation for Real-World ContextsbEnglish ↔ SpanishcRemy Attig 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBowling Green, OhiobBowling Green State University Librariesc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Preface -- Introduction -- Chapter 1 - Descripción y narración -- Chapter 2 - Business & Professional -- Chapter 3 - Publicidad -- Chapter 4 - Translating for Specialized Contexts -- Chapter 5 - La traducción como actividad artística -- Apéndices0 aCreative Translation for Real-World Contexts is one of the first translation textbooks designed for Spanish/English speakers at an intermediate-high (B2) level. This book introduces students to the basic ideas of translation while addressing frequent pain points that recur when working bidirectionally. Additionally, a focus is placed on fostering metacognitive skills by encouraging creative translation from real-world environments such as narration, business, advertising, specialized contexts (including inclusive and queer language), and in situations when there are no clear translations available, such as sci-fi and fantasy works. Chapters alternate between Spanish and English as the languages of discussion, thus providing an equitable challenge for native speakers of both languages.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1629zAccess online version02209nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140100002900147245008400176264004300260264002900303264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002800454490002700482505045000509520060700959542004101566546001601607588004001623650002501663650003101688710003901719856007701758OTLid0001630MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240316s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aGiovannini, Joaneauthor00aChildren, Families, Schools, and Communities [Revised Edition]cJoan Giovannini 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1 - What Is A Family? -- Chapter 2 - Theories That Help Us Understand Families -- Chapter 3 - A Closer Look at Parenting -- Chapter 4 - What Is Gender and Why is it Important? -- Chapter 5 - Building Collaborative Relationships with Families of Children with Disabilities -- Chapter 6 - What is Culture and Why is it Important? -- Chapter 7 - Exploring the Core Competencies of Family Engagement -- Appendix -- References0 aChildren, Families, Schools, and Communities is an introductory text in the field of Child and Family Studies. It provides a lens for understanding the evolving definition of “family” through socially constructed and ecological theory frameworks. It promotes strategies for culturally sustaining and deeply collaborative relationships between families, schools, and communities through the use of home-grown advocacy strategies based on community-driven data. Children, Families, Schools, and Communities is an adapted OER text from Rebecca Laff’s and Wendy Ruiz’s Child, Family, and Community.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1630zAccess online version01770nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050000700147100002900154245007000183264004300253264007200296264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002800490490002700518505029200545520025300837542003001090546001601120588004001136650002301176650002601199650003101225710003901256856007701295OTLid0001632MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240318s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH301 4aBF121 4aH11 aRafferty, Juditheauthor00aNeuroscience, Psychology and Conflict ManagementcJudith Rafferty 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Cook Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Chapter 1: The Brain and Body in Conflict -- Chapter 2: The Mind – Cognition -- Chapter 3: The Mind - Emotions -- Chapter 4: Personality and Conflict -- Chapter 5: Social Perception and Social Influence -- References -- Review Statement -- Versioning History0 aThis peer reviewed eBook introduces readers to foundational concepts in neuroscience, cognitive psychology, personality psychology and social psychology to help explain why conflict occurs, how it develops and how it may be managed and/or resolved.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1632zAccess online version03584nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137050001500147245010400162264004300266264007500309264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505138000561520087501941542001602816546001602832588004002848650003302888650003302921650005002954700002603004700002803030710003903058856007703097OTLid0001633MnU20260406020612.0m     o  d s      cr            240319s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC980 4aZ665-718.800aMaking Open Educational Resources with and for PreK12bA Collaboration Toolkit for Higher Education 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement IntroductionAbout the AuthorsHow to Use This Toolkit -- Part I: Mastering the Context1. Challenges in Collaboration Between Higher Ed and PreK-122. Working With Minors3. Open Educational Resources and the Case for Prioritizing, Using, Finding, and Sharing OER Content 4. Copyright Part I: Five Principles of Copyright When Planning to Share5. Copyright Part II: Using Others' Original Works Legally (Creative Commons, Fair Use, and Permission)6. Find and Use Openly-Licensed Images: A Step-by-Step Guide7. Make Resources Accessible for Students With Disabilities8. Renegotiating the Traditional Reference/Instruction Librarian and Patron Relationship9. Successful Collaborative Partnerships and Empowering Teachers to Share Their Expertise -- Part II: Explore and Build a Collaboration—Resources to Share10. Before Approaching School Administrators, Teachers, or School Librarians11. Initiating a Conversation With a School District: Who to Contact and How12. Improve a Proposed Collaboration -- Part III: Develop and Evaluate Learning Resources13. Adapting Creative Commons-Licensed Resources14. Quality Control: Checklists to Self-Assess Resources Created15. Quality Control: Review by Teacher/School Librarian/Administrator -- Part IV: Share With a Broader Audience16. Share Resources Publicly -- Part V: Evaluate Your Learning17. Overall Self-Evaluation0 aHigher education and PreK12 are vastly different domains. As such, well-intended, collaborative efforts between higher education and PreK12 do not always result in creation of useful and reusable learning materials for PreK12 classrooms or effective, productive partnerships. Making Open Educational Resources with and for PreK12: A Collaboration Toolkit for Higher Education is a toolkit of instructional resources designed to support higher education personnel who wish to improve or build strong and generative collaborations between higher education and PreK12 educators. The toolkit aims to expand use and re-usability of PreK12-centric learning resources through informed practices regarding copyright, open-licensing, and accessibility and includes a variety of resources: videos, presentations, transcripts, activities, guides, assignments, and assessment tools.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks1 aWalz, Anita Reauthor1 aFarley, Julee Peauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1633zAccess online version02143nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002000162245005400182264004300236264005400279264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002800455490002700483505025700510520073000767542003001497546001601527588004001543650002501583650003301608710003901641856007701680OTLid0001634MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240403s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101394  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aRay, Edeeditor02aA Handbook of Higher Education LeadershipcEd Ray 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLeadership Challenges, Opportunities, Lessons Learned -- Setting the Stage -- Learning and Success -- Building Blocks and Positioning -- In Conclusion - Topics for Further Discussions -- Contributors -- Creative Commons License -- Recommended Citations0 aThirty-five experienced and accomplished higher education leaders have come together to provide twenty-five essays on twelve topics about which all leaders, aspiring leaders and students of higher education should be informed. This is a labor of love, provided for free electronically, and there are no star turns here. Each essay is focused on providing the reader with advice based on wisdom acquired from lessons learned. Some topics covered include: beginning and completing a leadership position, responding to authority, establishing accountability, budget policy, long-term planning, affordability and student success, creating a safe community, fundraising, research funding, college athletics, and crisis management.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1634zAccess online version02120nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100003300161245005300194250001600247264004300263264005400306264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002800482490002700510505024800537520040000785542001601185546001601201588004001217650003301257650003101290700003201321700002801353700003301381700002501414700003001439700002701469700002601496710003901522856007701561OTLid0001635MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240403s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781955101400  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH11 aSolberg, Rorie Spilleeditor00aGovernment Powers and LimitationscRorie Solberg  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Case List -- The Judiciary -- Justiciability -- The Executive -- Legislative Powers -- The Commerce Clause -- The Taxing and Spending Clause -- Federalism -- The Contracts Clause -- The Takings Clause -- Substantive Due Process0 aThis volume focuses on constitutional doctrine and law in the areas of government powers and limitations. It includes excerpts of landmark cases related to the judiciary and executive, contracts and takings clauses, and due process. The excerpts include the constitutional issues in these cases that are related to government powers and limitations with other questions of law and dicta omitted.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aClairmont, Kimberlyeauthor1 aDerstine, Ethaneauthor1 aMetzdorf, Alexandriaeauthor1 aKemp, Stellaeauthor1 aThomison, Gabrieleauthor1 aVidal, Eduardoeauthor1 aDePuy, Waltereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1635zAccess online version01722nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245003400153264004300187264008400230264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505033100491520015200822542003000974546001601004588004001020650003801060650002601098700002601124700002801150700003001178710003901208856007701247OTLid0001636MnU20260406020808.0m     o  d s      cr            240409s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645679663  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aCommunication Across Cultures 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout this booklet -- Using Hypothes.is -- Self-assessment: Intercultural Communication Competence -- Module 1: What is culture for you? -- Module 2: Culture shock -- Module 3: Intercultural challenges – recognising and dealing withdifference -- Comprehension Check and Self-assessment: Intercultural CommunicationCompetence0 aThese resources will prepare culturally and linguistically diverse students for academic study in situations involving intercultural communication.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aChang, Heejineauthor1 aWindeatt, Scotteauthor1 aStockwell, Esthereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1636zAccess online version02901nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245003900134264004300173264008200216264001200298300002200310336002600332337002600358338003600384341002800420490002700448505076300475520100801238542004102246546001602287588004102303650002502344700002402369700003002393710003902423856007702462OTLid0001637MnU20260406020122.0m     o  d s      cr            240409s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aContent Area Language and Literacy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Northern Coloradoc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface: Introduction and Overview of the Open Textbook -- Chapter 1: Word Recognition and the Simple View of Reading -- Chapter 2: Language Comprehension and the Simple View of Reading -- Chapter 3: Recounts and Narratives in the Middle School -- Chapter 4: Integrating a Language-Based Approach to Content Instruction into Civics Lessons -- Chapter 5: A Functional Approach to STEAM: Teaching to Argue about Sound -- Chapter 6: Developing Critical Thinking and Language Skills through Project-based Learning and the Knowledge Framework -- Chapter 7: Alternative Frameworks for Incorporation of Generative AI Usage as a Functional Approach to Language Development -- Chapter 8: Unleashing the Power of Multilingual Minds: Translanguaging for Deeper Learning0 aContent Area Literacy courses have long been a requirement in teacher education programs for pre-service teachers for the secondary level and, sometimes, for the elementary level. The 2020 World-class Instructional Design and Assessment (WIDA) Framework takes a genre approach that aligns well with the traditional Content Area Literacy courses in teacher preparation programs. WIDA argues for an educational approach that fosters (a) equity of opportunity and access, (b) integration of content and language, (c) collaboration among stakeholders, and (d) a functional approach to language development. This textbook examines the elements that make up the Simple View of Reading with adjustments made for the increasing Multilingual student population. Then, the text focuses on the Key Uses of Language (KLUs) developed by WIDA with examples of how these are employed in different Content Areas. The final chapters focus on the unique needs and benefits of Multilingual students within U.S. classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aAli, Saadiaeauthor1 aBerg, Margaret A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1637zAccess online version02447nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245005300154264004300207264006900250264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505048100496520063800977542003001615546001601645588004001661650003201701650002501733700003701758700002901795700002801824700002801852700002901880710003901909856007701948OTLid0001638MnU20260406020641.0m     o  d s      cr            240409s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780771431876  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aResearch Data Management in the Canadian Context 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWestern Universityc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUsing this Textbook -- About the Editors -- Acknowledgements -- Foreword: Reflections on a Career in Data Librarianship -- First Principles in Research Data Management -- A Canadian Context for Research Data Management -- Working with Data -- Considering Types of Data -- Perspectives on Research Data Management -- Glossary -- Appendix 1: Data Management Plan Template -- Appendix 2: Sample of a Completed Section of the MAMIC -- Appendix 3: Chapter 10 Exercises -- Solutions0 aResearch Data Management is a term for all the things that researchers do to structure, organize and maintain data before, during and after doing research. RDM is also an emerging discipline that is concerned with researching and developing ways to manage research data more effectively. But what is research data? Where is the push towards formal Research Data Management coming from? What are the requirements of good data management? Research Data Management in the Canadian Context: A Guide for Practitioners and Learners looks at these questions and more, all with a focus on Canadian guidelines, regulations and infrastructure.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks1 aCarlisle-Johnston, Emilyeauthor1 aDennie, Danielleeauthor1 aFortin, Émilieeauthor1 aHill, Elizabetheauthor1 aThompson, Kristieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1638zAccess online version03900nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245002500167264004300192264005900235264001200294300002200306336002600328337002600354338003600380341002800416490002700444505158500471520110302056542001603159546001603175588004003191650002303231650002403254700003703278700002803315700003103343710003903374856007703413OTLid0001639MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240409s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961584389  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aNutrition for Nurses 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Nutrition for Nurses -- Chapter 2: A Holistic View of Macronutrients -- Chapter 3: A Holistic View of Micronutrients -- Chapter 4: The Digestive Process -- Chapter 5: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Neurological Wellness -- Chapter 6: Special Nutritional Considerations for Neurological Health -- Chapter 7: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Endocrine Wellness -- Chapter 8: Special Nutritional Considerations for Endocrine Health -- Chapter 9: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Hematologic Wellness -- Chapter 10: Special Nutritional Considerations for Hematologic Health -- Chapter 11: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition forCardiovascular Wellness -- Chapter 12: Special Nutritional Considerations for Cardiovascular Health -- Chapter 13: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Pulmonary Wellness -- Chapter 14: Special Nutritional Considerations for Pulmonary Health -- Chapter 15: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Renal Wellness -- Chapter 16: Special Nutritional Considerations for Renal Health -- Chapter 17: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Gastrointestinal Wellness -- Chapter 18: Special Nutritional Considerations for Gastrointestinal Health -- Chapter 19: Applying Clinical Judgment to Promote Nutrition for Musculoskeletal and Integumentary Wellness -- Chapter 20: Special Nutritional Considerations for Musculoskeletal and Integumentary Health -- Appendix A: Apps Frequently Used to Support Nutrition Wellness0 aNutrition for Nurses is structured to support the flexible integration of nutrition content across both system-based and nursing competency-based curricula. It can be used whether nutrition is taught as a standalone course or part of another nursing course. The table of contents for Nutrition for Nurses presents content in 20 chapters, organized into 9 thematic units. The text emphasizes evidence-based practice and holistic assessment to facilitate the integration of nutritional awareness for pre-licensure nursing students in the provision of client-centered care. Nutrition for Nurses helps students develop sound clinical judgment as well as a deep understanding of the impact of nutrition on body systems across the lifespan. Written and reviewed by highly experienced faculty, Nutrition for Nurses includes a detailed narrative, extensive features and learning resources, and ample student support. The presentation utilizes concepts promoting the development of clinical judgment by building upon the systematic model developed by the National Council of State Boards of Nursing (NCSBN).1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aBilbrew, Emerald Charityeauthor1 aVogelzang, Jodyeauthor1 aWhittington, Kellieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1639zAccess online version02362nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002700137245004800164250001600212264004300228264006600271264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505079300511520047301304542002701777546001601804588004001820650002401860710003901884856007701923OTLid0001640MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240412s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aFalcone, Kellyeauthor00aIntroduction to Health (OER)cKelly Falcone  a2nd edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPalomar Collegec2024. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Open Textbook Attributions -- For Students -- For Teachers -- Accessibility Statement -- Textbook Updates -- Chapter 1: Intro to Health, Wellness, and Change -- Chapter 2: Exercise, Physical Activity, and Sleep -- Chapter 3: Nutrition Basics -- Chapter 4: Body Composition and Obesity -- Chapter 5: Stress -- Chapter 6: Emotional & Mental Health -- Chapter 7: Alcohol & Tobacco -- Chapter 8: Drugs & Addiction -- Chapter 9: Unintentional Injuries & Violence -- Chapter 10: Relationships, Sexuality, & Contraception -- Chapter 11: Immune System, Infectious Diseases, and STD’s/STI’s -- Chapter 12: Cardiovascular Disease -- Chapter 13: Cancer -- Chapter 14: Environmental Wellness- A Healthy Planet -- Chapter 15: Consumer Health & Aging -- Chapter Continuted Learnings0 aThe Introduction to Health OER Textbook provides a broad overview of information pertaining to human health and opportunities for improving health and wellness throughout life. The intended goal of the book is to equip the learners with important information needed to better understand their own health and how their daily choices may impact both their quantity and quality of life. Although this is a "health" textbook, it could actually be called a "life" textbook.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1640zAccess online version03187nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050000800153050001000161245003900171264004300210264007000253264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002800445490002700473505074000500520101801240542004102258546002702299588004102326650003002367650002702397650002302424700004602447700004502493700004002538700004702578710003902625856007702664OTLid0001641MnU20260406020122.0m     o  d s      cr            240421s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651235  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQA1 4aQH30100aFundamentos de Bioquímica Vegetal 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Introducción a la bioquímica vegetal -- Capítulo II: Composición y estructura de las células vegetales -- Capítulo III: Fotosíntesis: proceso y regulación -- Capítulo IV: Metabolismo de biomoléculas -- Capítulio V: Respiración celular en plantas -- Capítulo VI: Metabolismo secundario -- Capítulo VII: Hormonas vegetales y su papel en el crecimiento y desarrollo de las plantas -- Capítulo VIII: Enzimología vegetal -- Capítulo IX: Mecanismos de defensa de las plantas bajo estrés abiótico y biótico -- Capítulo X: Perspectivas futuras en la investigación de la bioquímica vegetal -- Glosario -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aSe establecen los principios bioquímicos fundamentales que rigen el desarrollo de las plantas, explorando la composición y estructura de sus células. Además, se aborda la fotosíntesis como un proceso metabólico esencial. El metabolismo de biomoléculas, que incluye el transporte de nutrientes y la síntesis de carbohidratos, lípidos, proteínas y otros compuestos, es analizado en profundidad. Asimismo, se abordan temáticas cruciales como la respiración celular en plantas, la biosíntesis de metabolitos secundarios y el papel de las hormonas vegetales en el crecimiento y desarrollo. La enzimología vegetal, con énfasis en la cinética enzimática, se presenta como un componente esencial del metabolismo vegetal. Además, se examinan los mecanismos de defensa de las plantas frente al estrés abiótico y biótico, abordando la morfogénesis y los desafíos que enfrentan las plantas en su entorno. El libro concluye con una visión hacia el futuro en la investigación de la bioquímica vegetal.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aCorrea-Salgado, María de Lourdeseauthor1 aHerrera-Feijoo, Robinson Jasmanyeauthor1 aRuiz-Sánchez, Clara Isabeleauthor1 aGuamán-Rivera, Santiago Alexandereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1641zAccess online version02866nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245007600164264004300240264007000283264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505045600530520095700986542004101943546002701984588004102011650002502052650003102077700004402108700004202152700003902194700003902233700004402272710003902316856007702355OTLid0001642MnU20260223020128.0m     o  d s      cr            240507s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651242  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aFronteras del FuturobInnovación y Desarrollo en Ciencia y Tecnología 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Capítulo I: El Paradigma Legal de las Drogas: Análisis Crítico de la Legislación Actual -- Capítulo II: Innovación Pedagógica para la Creación de Spin-offs: Integrando la Empresa Familiar en la Educación Universitaria -- Capítulo III: Costos ocultos del tecnoestrés: Análisis económico del impacto en la productividad académica en universidades -- Capítulo IV: La Evolución de las Penas: De la Retribución a la Reinserción0 aSe aborda desde una perspectiva multidisciplinaria los desafíos contemporáneos en los campos de la legislación sobre drogas, la innovación pedagógica para la creación de spin-offs universitarios, el impacto económico del tecnoestrés en la productividad académica, y las tendencias evolutivas en las penas y su enfoque hacia la reinserción. A través de un análisis crítico de la legislación sobre drogas, el documento resalta la importancia de considerar la salud y la rehabilitación en lugar de la criminalización. Examina cómo la integración de empresas familiares en la educación universitaria puede fomentar la innovación y el emprendimiento. Destaca los costos ocultos del tecnoestrés en la productividad académica, subrayando la necesidad de estrategias de manejo. Finalmente, discute la evolución de las penas con un enfoque en la reinserción social como medio para mejorar la seguridad pública y reducir la reincidencia.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aQuinatoa-Chasi, William Duberlieauthor1 aCepeda-Valente, Wilson Manueleauthor1 aChasi-Chela, Angel Vinicioeauthor1 aChasi-Chela, Nancy Fabiolaeauthor1 aCasanova-Villalba, César Iváneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1642zAccess online version02368nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157100004900164245013200213264004300345264007000388264001200458300002200470336002600492337002600518338003600544341002800580490002700608505021100635520085500846542004101701546002701742588004101769650002501810650003101835710003901866856007701905OTLid0001643MnU20260406020123.0m     o  d s      cr            240507s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651259  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aNavarrete-Zambrano, Cecilia Mercedeseauthor00aNormas Internacionales de Información Financiera, su Aplicación Financiera, Contable y TributariacCecilia Navarrete-Zambrano 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Figuras -- Íntroducción -- Capítulo I: Marco conceptual para la información financiera -- Capítulo II: Análisis de NIC y NIIF -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro se centra en las Normas Internacionales de Información Financiera (NIIF) y su relevancia en el ámbito financiero, contable y tributario. Estas normas buscan garantizar que la información financiera presentada en los estados financieros sea comparable, transparente y de alta calidad, ayudando a los inversores y otros usuarios a tomar decisiones económicas informadas. El libro aborda diversos temas relacionados con las NIIF y NIC, como el marco conceptual para la información financiera, la presentación de estados financieros, instrumentos financieros, arrendamientos, inventarios, estado de flujo de efectivo, impuestos diferidos, propiedad, planta y equipo, entre otros. Es una herramienta esencial para profesionales y estudiantes en el campo de la contabilidad y finanzas que buscan comprender y aplicarlas en su trabajo diario.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1643zAccess online version03112nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245007500152264004300227264007000270264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505038500517520137300902542004102275546002702316588004102343650003102384700004702415700004302462700004402505700004902549710003902598856007702637OTLid0001644MnU20260406020123.0m     o  d s      cr            240509s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651266  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH103aLa Revolución de la Inteligencia Artificial en la Educación Superior 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos de la Inteligencia Artificial en la Educación Superior -- Capítulo II: Innovaciones en la Enseñanza y Aprendizaje -- Capítulo III: Transformación Institucional y Políticas Educativas -- Capítulo IV: Casos de Estudio y Aplicaciones Prácticas -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aSe analiza el impacto transformador de la inteligencia artificial (IA) en la educación superior, destacando las innovaciones tecnológicas y sus aplicaciones prácticas. Se enfoca en cómo la IA está redefiniendo los métodos de enseñanza y aprendizaje, ofreciendo personalización y eficiencia en los procesos educativos. En los primeros capítulos, se expone la evolución y las definiciones fundamentales de la IA, subrayando su creciente integración en la educación y cómo esta tecnología promete personalizar la experiencia de aprendizaje, adaptando los contenidos a las necesidades individuales de los estudiantes. Además, se examinan los sistemas de gestión del aprendizaje impulsados por IA, que facilitan una instrucción adaptativa y personalizada, y las herramientas de evaluación y retroalimentación automatizada, que proporcionan análisis instantáneos y comentarios personalizados. Se discuten los desafíos éticos y legales asociados, especialmente en términos de privacidad y seguridad de los datos, junto con la necesidad de un marco ético para el uso responsable de la IA en entornos educativos. Los capítulos finales abordan casos de estudio y aplicaciones prácticas de la IA en la educación superior, resaltando implementaciones exitosas y lecciones aprendidas que podrían guiar futuras investigaciones y desarrollos en el campo.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSilva-Peñafiel, Geovanny Euclideseauthor1 aCastillo-Parra, Byron Fernandoeauthor1 aTixi-Gallegos, Katherine Gisseleauthor1 aUrgiles-Rodríguez, Bladimir Enriqueeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1644zAccess online version03120nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153050001000163245004900173264004300222264007000265264001200335300002200347336002600369337002600395338003600421341002800457490002700485505061500512520110701127542004102234546002702275588004102302650003002343650004202373650002302415700004602438700004202484700004402526710003902570856007702609OTLid0001645MnU20260309020125.0m     o  d s      cr            240509s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651273  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aTA145 4aQH30100aAlternativas de alimentación para rumiantes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Capítulo I: Fertilización y encalado para potenciar el rendimiento forrajero del maíz en Santo Domingo de los Tsáchilas -- Capítulo II: Fertilización orgánica del pasto Mombasa (Megathyrsus maximus) bajo sombra de naranja (Citrus sinensis) -- Capítulo III: Edad óptima de corte en Pasto Cuba OM - 22 (Pennisetum sp) en las producción de biomasa en el trópico húmedo -- Capítulo IV: Manejo de King Grass (Pennisetum purpureum), como alternativa para el sector ganadero -- Capítulo V: Forraje verde hidropónico de sorgo (Sorghum forrajero) y maíz (Zea mays) a dos densidades de siembra0 aSe examina estrategias para optimizar la alimentación de rumiantes mediante el cultivo y manejo de diferentes forrajes en Santo Domingo de los Tsáchilas, Ecuador. En el primer capítulo, se destaca cómo el encalado y la fertilización mejoran el rendimiento del maíz, enfatizando en dosis óptimas de nutrientes. El segundo capítulo aborda la fertilización orgánica del pasto Mombasa bajo sombra de naranja, resaltando la superioridad de la pollinaza en el incremento de rendimiento y calidad del forraje. Los capítulos siguientes se centran en la edad óptima de corte para maximizar la biomasa del pasto Cuba OM-22, el manejo del King Grass como alternativa forrajera para el sector ganadero, y el desarrollo del forraje verde hidropónico de sorgo y maíz a dos densidades de siembra, demostrando que técnicas específicas de manejo y cultivo pueden significativamente influir en la productividad y sostenibilidad de la alimentación rumiante. A través de estos estudios, el libro propone soluciones prácticas y sustentables para mejorar la nutrición de rumiantes en entornos tropicales.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aCargua-Chávez, Jessica Elizabetheauthor1 aCarrillo-Cruz, Adriana Isabeleauthor1 aCedeño-García, Galo Alexandereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1645zAccess online version01416nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142245002800149264004300177264006900220264001200289300002200301336002600323337002600349338003600375341002800411490002700439505006100466520013500527542001600662546001600678588004000694650005000734650003100784700003000815700003000845700002700875710003900902856007700941OTLid0001646MnU20260406020641.0m     o  d s      cr            240509s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH100aDublin Core Quick Start 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Metadata -- DublinCore -- Sample Records0 aThis book is designed as a quick introduction to authoring metadata using basic elements from the Dublin Core Metadata Initiative.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMathesis, Caitlineauthor1 aVandeKamp, Baileyeauthor1 aBateman, Micaheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1646zAccess online version02966nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001000166100002700176245004100203264004300244264003900287264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505067400503520112101177542001602298546001602314588004002330650002302370650002402393650002302417710003902440856007702479OTLid0001647MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240509s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783031188091  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aBaatout, Saraheeditor00aRadiobiology TextbookcSarah Baatout 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- History of Radiation Biology -- Basic Concepts of Radiation Biology -- Molecular Radiation Biology -- Mechanistic, Modeling, and Dosimetric Radiation Biology -- Clinical Radiobiology for Radiation Oncology -- Radiobiology of Combining Radiotherapy with Other Cancer Treatment Modalities -- Individual Radiation Sensitivity and Biomarkers: Molecular Radiation Biology -- Radiobiology of Accidental, Public, and Occupational Exposures -- Environmental Radiobiology -- Space Radiobiology -- Radioprotectors, Radiomitigators, and Radiosensitizers -- Ethical, Legal, Social, and Epistemological Considerations of Radiation Exposure0 aThis open access textbook focuses on the various aspects of radiobiology. The goal of radiobiological research is to better understand the effects of radiation exposure at the cellular and molecular levels in order to determine the impact on health. This book offers a unique perspective, by covering not only radiation biology but also radiation physics, radiation oncology, radiotherapy, radiochemistry, radiopharmacy, nuclear medicine, space radiation biology & physics, environmental and human radiation protection, nuclear emergency planning, molecular biology and bioinformatics, as well as the ethical, legal and social considerations related to radiobiology. This range of disciplines contributes to making radiobiology a broad and rather complex topic. This textbook is intended to provide a solid foundation to those interested in the basics and practice of radiobiological science. It is a learning resource, meeting the needs of students, scientists and medical staff with an interest in this rapidly evolving discipline, as well as a teaching tool, with accompanying teaching material to help educators.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1647zAccess online version02564nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145100007900155245015300234264004300387264006800430264001200498300002200510336002600532337002600558338003600584341002800620490002700648505081000675520048001485542002301965546001601988588004002004650004202044710003902086856007702125OTLid0001648MnU20260316020652.0m     o  d s      cr            240509s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9788321424384  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aFederal Aviation Administration, U.S. Department of Transportationeauthor00aPrivate Pilot for Airplane Category Airman Certification Standards (FAA-S-ACS-6C)cU.S. Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOklahoma City, OklahomabFederal Aviation Administrationc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Area of Operation I: Preflight Preparation -- Area of Operation II: Preflight Procedures -- Area of Operation III: Airport and Seaplane Base Operations -- Area of Operation IV: Takeoffs, Landings, and Go-Arounds -- Area of Operation V: Performance Maneuvers and Ground Reference Maneuvers -- Area of Operation VI: Navigation -- Area of Operation VII: Slow Flight and Stalls -- Area of Operation VIII: Basic Instrument Manuevers -- Area of Operation IX: Emergency Operations -- Area of Operation X: Multiengine Operations -- Area of Operation XI: Night Operations -- Area of Operation XII: Postflight Procedures -- Appendix 1: Practical Test Roles, Responsibilities, and Outcomes -- Appendix 2: Safety of Flight -- Appendix 3: Aircraft, Equipment, and Operational Requirements & Limitations0 aThe U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), Office of Safety Standards, Regulatory Support Division, Airman Testing Standards Branch, has published the Private Pilot for Airplane Category Airman Certification Standards (ACS) to communicate the aeronautical knowledge, risk management, and flight proficiency standards for private pilot certification in the airplane category, single-engine land and sea; and multiengine land and sea classes.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1648zAccess online version02471nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001100166050001000177100003000187245008400217264004300301264006400344264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505017500585520097600760542001601736546001601752588004001768650002501808650002301833650004201856650002301898710003901921856007701960OTLid0001649MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240509s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463668552  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aTA145 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aHaverkort, Willemeauthor00aElectrolysers, Fuel Cells and BatteriesbAnalytical ModellingcWillem Haverkort 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Electrochemistry -- Transport -- Porous electrodes -- Batteries -- Fuel cells -- Electrolysers -- Redox Flow Batteries -- Additional exercises -- Formula sheet0 aElectrochemical engineering deals with electrochemical devices like electrolysers, fuel cells, and batteries. While several excellent books exist in this long-standing and still growing field, their focus is usually on chemistry or phenomenology. In this textbook, we focus on mathematical modelling of the physical phenomena involved. Instead of resorting to numerical modelling, the aim is to derive simplified analytical models that maximise understanding. Porous electrodes, ion mass transport, and multiphase flow are central themes in this book. Examples include modelling the water saturation in a fuel cell diffusion layer, the gas fraction and current distribution in an alkaline water electrolyser, the potential distribution in a binary electrolyte inside porous battery electrode, and the concentration distribution in the flow channel of a redox flow battery. This makes for a diverse, challenging, and stimulating journey, for both students and researchers.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1649zAccess online version02429nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155245010000168264004300268264006400311264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002800497490002700525505017400552520090100726542001601627546001601643588004001659650004201699650003801741700003301779700002601812700002601838700002701864710003901891856007701930OTLid0001650MnU20260406020124.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463668507  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-157000aFrom theORy to applicationblearning to optimize with Operations Research in an interactive way 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Fundamentals -- Solution Methods -- Assignment Problems -- Networks -- Stochasticity -- Bibliography -- List of Acronyms -- Index -- Copyright of Figures0 aThis book serves as a comprehensive roadmap for navigating the realm of Operations Research (OR). From laying down fundamental mathematical principles to crafting precise modeling techniques and their solution methods, it culminates in a panoramic view of OR models mirroring real-world operations. Delving into diverse applications-from assignment problems to network problems like graph coloring and minimum spanning trees, and navigating through routing problems that are very common in logistics-the book equips readers with practical insights. Each model is accompanied by meticulously detailed examples, seamlessly integrated with hyperlinked codes accessible via an open repository. Moreover, it introduces an engaging dimension with hyperlinks to three serious games replicating some cornerstone OR models, offering a playful yet educational environment for solo or group experimentation.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks1 aBombelli, Alessandroeauthor1 aAtasoy, Bilgeeauthor1 aFazi, Stefanoeauthor1 aBoschma, Doriseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1650zAccess online version02448nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245006800143264004300211264007500254264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002800451490002700479505052900506520043701035542003001472546001601502588004101518650003301559650003101592700002601623700002601649700002701675700002501702700002601727700002801753700002501781700002601806700003001832710003901862856007701901OTLid0001651MnU20260406020123.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH100aComparative PoliticsbA Practical Guide for a Globalizing World 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bColorado Mesa Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- Chapter 1: Why Study Comparative Politics -- Chapter 2: How to Study Comparative Politics -- Chapter 3: The Promise and Pitfalls of the Comparative Method -- Chapter 4: States and Regimes -- Chapter 5: Theories of State Emergence -- Chapter 6: Democracy -- Chapter 7: Theories of Democratization and Democratic Consolidation -- Chapter 8: Authoritarianism -- Chapter 9: Theories of Authoritarian Persistence and Democratic Backsliding -- Chapter 10: Conclusion -- References -- Appendix 1: Weblinks and Databases0 aComparative Politics: A Practical Guide for a Globalizing World is perhaps the first to be written with an emphasis on case studies from the Global South and other alternative perspectives in comparative politics. This text focuses on themes and case studies that are often missing in more traditional comparative politics textbooks, and thus is best accompanied by other resources to give students a foundation in the fundamentals.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aOberle, Hollyeeditor1 aKelley, Sadieeauthor1 aRobson, Justoneauthor1 aCook, Trevoreauthor1 aPepin, Laureneauthor1 aBrimhall, Mollyeauthor1 aPatten, Kyleeauthor1 aWilliams, Joeeauthor1 aChambers, Addisoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1651zAccess online version03149nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003000135250001600165264004300181264007900224264001200303300002200315336002600337337002600363338003600389341002800425490002700453505108600480520067601566542004102242546001602283588004002299650003802339650002602377700003102403700002702434700002402461700002502485700002402510700002902534700002402563710003902587856007702626OTLid0001652MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aExploring Public Speaking  a4th Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity System of Georgiac2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Edition 4.2 (2023) of Exploring Public Speaking -- Chapter 1: The Basics of Public Speaking -- Chapter 2: Audience Analysis and Listening -- Chapter 3: Ethics in Public Speaking -- Chapter 4: Developing Topics for Your Speech -- Chapter 5: Researching Your Speeches -- Chapter 6: Organizing and Outlining Your Speech -- Chapter 7: Supporting Your Speech Ideas -- Chapter 8: Introductions and Conclusions -- Chapter 9: Presentation Aids in Speaking -- Chapter 10: Language -- Chapter 11: Delivery -- Chapter 12: Informative Speaking -- Chapter 13: Persuasive Speaking -- Chapter 14: Logical Reasoning -- Chapter 15: Special Occasion Speaking -- Appendix A: Cultural Diversity in Public Speaking -- Appendix B: Succeeding as a College Student -- Appendix C: Public Speaking Online -- Appendix D: Funny Talk: The Art and Craft of Using Humor in Public Address -- Appendix E: APA Citation -- Appendix F: Research with Dalton State Library Resources -- Appendix G: Glossary -- Appendix H: References -- Appendix I: Sample Outlines and Formats -- Appendix J: Case Studies0 aExploring Public Speaking is a usable, zero-cost textbook for basic public speaking courses or courses that include basic public speaking skills as one of their primary learning outcomes. The free, open nature of the text means that instructors are able to use all or part of it, and add their own materials. Standout features include coverage of PowerPoint, audience analysis and responsiveness, ethics in public speaking, persuasion, special occasion speeches, and structure of speeches. Because it was written by communication professors with decades of experience in the classroom, Exploring Public Speaking is made to fit the needs of basic public speaking students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aTucker, Barbara G.eeditor1 aLeHew, Mattheweeditor1 aBurger, Amyeauthor1 aDaniel, Chadeauthor1 aDrye, Jerryeauthor1 aHunsicker, Cathyeauthor1 aMendes, Amyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1652zAccess online version02176nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142245004400149264004300193264003700236264001200273300002200285336002600307337002600333338003600359341002800395490002700423505042400450520055400874542001601428546001601444588004101460650005001501650003101551700002601582700002801608700002601636710003901662856007701701OTLid0001653MnU20260406020129.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH100aHigh Impact Instructional Librarianship 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aProvo, UtahbEdTech Booksc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter One: Identity of Instructional Librarian -- Chapter Two: Information Literacy Learning -- Chapter Three: Accessibility and Inclusion -- Chapter Four: Instructional Design in Libraries -- Chapter Five: Learner-Centered Instruction in Libraries -- Chapter Six: Teaching in Libraries -- Chapter Seven: Lesson Planning, Implementation, and Assessment -- Chapter Eight: Self-Directed Professional Learning0 aThe purpose of this new OER textbook titled High Impact Instructional Librarianship is to address what to teach and how to teach information literacy skills to library patrons of all ages and with many kinds of information needs. This OER is intended to facilitate and guide pre- and in-service librarians to know and use theory and models from many academic disciplines to inform practices, develop excellent instructional design skills, and express high confidence as instructional librarians no matter what position they hold in any library type.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aDow, Mirah J.eauthor1 aHovious, Amandaeauthor1 aPtacek, Coreyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1653zAccess online version02031nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002600150245007000176264004300246264007300289264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002800484490002700512505072400539520011201263542003001375546001601405588004001421650004201461650003801503710003901541856007701580OTLid0001654MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aJensen, Davideauthor00aIntroduction to Mechanical Design and ManufacturingcDavid Jensen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Product Design from a Mechanical Engineering Perspective -- Design Primitives and Fundamentals -- Design Teams and Design Project Management -- Defining and Managing Design Requirements -- Conceptual Design Process and Tool -- Systematic and Iterative Process of Embodiment Design -- Specification of Standard Mechanical Components -- Assemblies for Motion and Power Delivery -- Product Design Prototyping -- Design for Manufacturing and Assembly Principles and Methods -- Manufacturing - Casting and Molding Process -- Manufacturing - Forming and Shaping Processes -- Manufacturing - Machining Processes -- Manufacturing - Joining Processes -- Manufacturing - Plastic Processes -- Taking the Next Steps0 aAn introductory text on the design and manufacturing of products from a mechanical engineering perspective.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1654zAccess online version02694nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001800127050001000145100002900155245010400184264004300288264009100331264001200422300002200434336002600456337002600482338003600508341002800544490002700572505062700599520083001226542003002056546001602086588004002102650002902142650003302171710003902204856007702243OTLid0001655MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.31 aDowning, Michaeleauthor00aIntro to Journalism HandbookbAn Open Educational Resource for Journalism StudentscMichael Downing 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout PA-ADOPT -- About OER -- About the Author -- Table of Contents -- Part One: Introduction -- Part Two: Key Concepts in Journalism -- Part Three: Format and Style -- Part Four: Obits, Hard News, Press Releases, Sports, Opinions -- Part Five: Checklists for Covering Various Stories -- Part Six: The Impact of Social Media on Journalism -- Part Seven: Artificial Intelligence and Journalism -- Part Eight: Journalistic Code of Ethics -- Part Nine: Careers -- Part Ten: BLS: New Analysts, Reporters, Journalists -- Part Eleven: Exercises, Self Tests, and Useful Tools -- Part Twelve: Resources -- Part Thirteen: Appendix0 aThis book is intended as an open educational resource for beginning journalism students. It contains information on such topics as the First Amendment, 5 Ws (and H), the inverted pyramid, headlines and subheads, AP and in-house style, writing and editing exercises, and guidance on strategies for covering various stories and/or events. This book essentially replicates the structure of the author’s journalism classes, which are writing-intensive classes. As such, it focuses upon helping student writers begin working on reasonably serious, campus-level journalism assignments as quickly and effectively as possible. The goal is to submit stories, photos, and occasionally video to a university newspaper for publication, all the while following professional standards related to accuracy, clarity, grammar, and AP style.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1655zAccess online version03316nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136100002800146245009200174264004300266264009100309264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002800522490002700550505068100577520140801258542003002666546001602696588004002712650003202752650004202784710003902826856007702865OTLid0001656MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aTA1451 aYang, Cheer-Suneauthor00aBuilding User Interfaces for Modern Web ApplicationsbReact ProgrammingcCheer-Sun Yang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTable of Contents -- Preface -- Chapter 1: Introduction and Setup -- Chapter 2: HyperText Markup Language -- Chapter 3: Cascading Style Sheets & Bootstrap -- Chapter 4: JavaScript & JSX -- Chapter 5: React Components -- Chapter 6: Properties (Props) -- Chapter 7: State -- Chapter 8: Events -- Chapter 9: Component Lifecycle and Reconciliation -- Chapter 10: Conditional Rendering -- Chapter 11: Lists -- Chapter 12: Forms -- Chapter 13: Lifting Up State -- Chapter 14: Think in React -- Chapter 15: React Routing -- Chapter 16: Redux State Management -- Epilogue: Where do we go from here? -- Acknowledgement -- Appendix: Selected Figure Descriptions -- Index -- Bibliography0 aSince Facebook released React as an open-source software library for front-end programming in 2013, React has gain popularity quickly. Although there are other frameworks or libraries, React is considered a programmer-friendly JavaScript library using the functional programming approach for the front-end web application development. Teaching and learning React can provide training in Functional Programming, Software Engineering Principles, and the Event-Driven Programming Paradigm. The ultimate goal of this eTextbook is to provide a timely support for teaching the state-of-the-art technology as the React ecosystem evolves. In this eTextbook, the prerequisite concepts about HTML/CSS, JavaScript, and Bootstrap/React-Bootstrap are introduced first, followed by the main React language features. Finally, the Software Engineering Principles are introduced from the design, development, to debugging and maintenance. The main objectives are threefold: (1) provide concepts about JavaScript Programming, (2) introduce the concepts of modularity, functional programming, and (3) teach the concept of reusable User Interface (UI) as the front-end of modern model-view-controller (MVC) web applications. Although learning other technologies in the React ecosystem is imminent, it is the hope that this book paves the groundwork for the future learning and growing in the field of modern UI development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1656zAccess online version01481nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002800144245008200172264004300254264006400297264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505021600538520009300754542003000847546001600877588004100893650002600934650003100960710003900991856007701030OTLid0001657MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aLassonde, Karlaeauthor04aThe LEARN MethodbAn Interactive Guide for Effective LearningcKarla Lassonde 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout this textbook -- How to use this textbook -- LEARN: Introduction -- Part I. Listen -- Part II. Elaborate -- Part III. Association -- Part IV. Retrieval -- Part V. Night -- Conclusion -- Facilitator's Guide0 aThe LEARN Method is a program designed to teach students strategies to improve learning.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1657zAccess online version02301nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001000149100002500159245005300184264004300237264008100280264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505049300538520058601031542004101617546001601658588004001674650002401714650002601738650002301764710003901787856007701826OTLid0001659MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHG1731 aPaff, Lolitaeauthor00aFinancial and Managerial AccountingcLolita Paff 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPennsylvania State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Welcome! -- Introduction -- Chapter 1 - The Accounting Cycle -- Chapter 2 - Accounting for Merchandisers -- Chapter 3 - Short-term and Long-term Assets -- Chapter 4 - Internal Controls -- Chapter 5 - Liabilities & Equity -- Chapter 6 - Introduction to Managerial Accounting -- Chapter 7 - Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis -- Chapter 8 - Job Order & Process Costing -- Chapter 9 - Accounting for Overhead -- Chapter 10 - Budgeting, Standard Costs and Variances -- Change Log0 aTextbook prices for introductory accounting courses are typically very high and new editions are frequently introduced, limiting the resale value and use of older editions. Simply put, a free, open-source textbook increases accessibility by eliminating the cost barrier. Free is my favorite price! Second... Accounting textbooks also commonly seen as… BORING! This book is uniquely constructed to integrate reading, video tutorials, links and practice to make learning… dare I write it… FUN! OK, maybe that’s overstating a bit, but this is not your typical accounting text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1659zAccess online version02721nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140050001100147100003100158245007500189264004300264264007900307264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002800508490002700536505105900563520039501622542004102017546001602058588004002074650002502114650003102139650003702170710003902207856007702246OTLid0001660MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240522s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL7 4aLB15551 aLombardi, Paula B.eauthor04aThe Roles and Responsibilities of the Special EducatorcPaula Lombardi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of New Hampshirec[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Defining and Understanding Special Education -- Roles and Responsibilities of the Special Educator/Case Manager -- The Special Education Process -- Categories of Disability Under IDEA -- Prior Written Notice -- Multi-Tier System of Supports (MTSS) / Response to Intervention (Rtl) -- Related Services: Supports for Students with Disabilities -- Special Education Paraeducators -- Collaboration and Communication -- IEP Service Delivery -- Instruction -- Standards-Based Curriculum and Instructional Planning -- Lesson Planning -- Assessment -- Progress Monitoring -- Direct Instruction Teaching Method -- Delivering Instruction -- Supporting Diverse Learners -- Bloom's Taxonomy -- Teacher Questioning -- Key Questioning Strategies -- Interventions for Children with Reading Difficulties -- Math Interventions and Strategies -- Active Learning Strategies -- Managing the Classroom -- Culturally Responsive Teaching -- Disproportionality of specific racial and ethnic groups in special education -- Appendix -- Gifted and Talented Students0 aThis book is evolving into a book by and for teacher candidates pursuing licensing in Elementary, General Special Education, and Early Childhood Special Education in New Hampshire and surrounding New England states. These teacher candidates share their knowledge about teaching PreK-12 learners with disabilities and the many roles and responsibilities of the case manager/special educator.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducation, ElementaryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1660zAccess online version02984nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245007100164264004300235264007000278264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505036300525520123100888542004102119546002702160588004102187650002502228650003102253700004002284700003902324700004002363700004302403710003902446856007702485OTLid0001661MnU20260223020130.0m     o  d s      cr            240527s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651280  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aUna ventana abierta hacia la calidad total en un mundo globalizado 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Para producir mejor buscando a través de la integración total del personal -- Capítulo II: Mejorando la calidad y la productividad -- Capítulo III: Origen de la Calidad -- Capítulo IV: El sistema de calidad -- Anexos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEn la actualidad, los países de todo el mundo, se encuentran en constante desarrollo de sus empresas, cada una de las cuales, se encuentra en pugna por lograr los más altos estándares de calidad, eficacia y eficiencia, con el fin de posicionarse en las preferencias del público. En un mundo globalizado diversos factores influyen en la competitividad empresarial, la calidad es un valor agregado que da realce a cada entidad, empresa u organización en la prestación de sus servicios. Es fundamental entender que la calidad no solo implica la entrega de un producto o servicio que cumpla con ciertas especificaciones técnicas, sino también brindar una experiencia positiva al cliente. Los cambios en el esquema empresarial mundial, requieren cada vez mayores exigencias para obtener productos de calidad. Alcanzar la máxima productividad y eficiencia en la empresa contribuye a generar éxito y mayores utilidades en la organización. La productividad puede ser vista como un indicador de excelencia y competitividad en el mercado. Todos los sectores de las cadenas productivas deben prestar servicios de calidad ya que impactan directamente en la sociedad e impulsan el crecimiento económico y comercial de un país.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aFlores-Murillo, Carlos Reneeauthor1 aHoffmann-Jaramillo, Karleseauthor1 aVallejo-López, Alida Bellaeauthor1 aSantamaría-Robles, Ana Maríaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1661zAccess online version03567nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245007700153264004300230264007000273264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505032400520520189400844542004102738546002702779588004102806650002702847700004602874700004502920700004802965700004003013710003903053856007703092OTLid0001662MnU20260406020125.0m     o  d s      cr            240527s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651297  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA100aGuía de Aprendizaje Matemático para Adultos con Escolaridad Inconclusa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Planteamiento del problema -- Capítulo II: Fundamentación teórica -- Capítulo III: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo IV: Presentación y análisis de datos -- Anexos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl aprendizaje matemático para adultos con escolaridad inconclusa es un tema crucial para mejorar la calidad de vida y las oportunidades laborales de muchas personas. Estas personas pueden enfrentar desafíos únicos debido a lagunas en su educación formal, pero aún así, es posible desarrollar habilidades matemáticas sólidas. Un enfoque efectivo para enseñar matemáticas a adultos con escolaridad inconclusa es utilizar métodos prácticos y contextualizados. Esto significa vincular los conceptos matemáticos con situaciones de la vida real que los adultos puedan encontrar en su trabajo, hogar o comunidad. Por ejemplo, enseñar habilidades financieras básicas como el presupuesto, el manejo de dinero y el cálculo de intereses puede ser extremadamente útil y motivador. Además, es importante crear un ambiente de aprendizaje seguro y de apoyo que fomente la confianza y la participación activa. Los adultos pueden sentir vergüenza o ansiedad debido a sus experiencias previas de aprendizaje, por lo que es crucial proporcionarles retroalimentación constructiva y celebrar sus logros, por pequeños que sean. La tecnología también puede desempeñar un papel importante en el aprendizaje matemático para adultos con escolaridad inconclusa. Las aplicaciones y programas educativos pueden ofrecer lecciones interactivas, ejercicios prácticos y seguimiento del progreso, todo lo cual puede ayudar a los adultos a mejorar sus habilidades matemáticas de manera autodidacta y a su propio ritmo. El aprendizaje matemático para adultos con escolaridad inconclusa es un proceso desafiante pero fundamental para mejorar su calidad de vida y oportunidades futuras. Al adoptar un enfoque práctico, contextualizado y de apoyo, es posible ayudar a estos adultos a adquirir las habilidades matemáticas necesarias para tener éxito en la vida cotidiana y en el lugar de trabajo.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aGrandes-Padilla, Jessica Gabrielaeauthor1 aDuque-Sánchez, Paola Jacquelineeauthor1 aBarrionuevo-Montalvo, Hugo Patricioeauthor1 aCasa-Chicaiza, Miguel Angeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1662zAccess online version02745nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002300149245003300172250001900205264004300224264007700267264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505093500518520056301453542003002016546001602046588004002062650002402102650002502126700003602151700003202187710003902219856007702258OTLid0001664MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240530s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aKhan, Ailaeauthor00aCustomer InsightscAila Khan  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bWestern Sydney Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to the Second Edition -- Acknowledgement of country -- Acknowledgments -- Difference between marketing research and customer insights -- Research ethics -- Secondary research -- Use of census data -- Primary research -- Qualitative vs quantitative research -- Types of research design -- Focus groups -- Observational research -- Measures or types of variables -- Questionnaire design -- Sampling methods -- Errors in research -- Research panels -- Survey distribution methods -- Descriptive statistics -- Association between variables -- Differences between respondent groups -- Sentiment analysis -- Artificial intelligence and information -- Social media analytics -- Researching Indigenous Communities -- Communicating insights -- Infographics -- The process: from generating to using customer insights -- Case Study: Using customer insights to reposition Western Sydney University -- Appendix: Hypothesis Testing0 aIncreasingly, the concept of marketing research is being replaced with the term ‘customer or consumer insights’. As decision-makers are bombarded with data, it is important to have an Insights Team or Department which can sift through it all and identify those nuggets of information that can meaningfully explain human behaviour. Such insights must translate into an informed business strategy for success. This book has been curated to ensure that the practice of data collection, analysis, and interpretation is presented from an industry perspective.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aHossain, Mohammad Munireauthor1 aAmin, Sabreena Zohaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1664zAccess online version02783nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245005700159264004300216264004900259264001200308300002200320336002600342337002600368338003600394341002800430490002700458505111700485520046601602542004102068546001602109588004002125650003802165650002602203700002602229700002602255710003902281856007702320OTLid0001665MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240607s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aLet's Chat! American Sign Language (ASL)cAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use the Activities in this Book -- How are Pathways Activities Formatted? -- About the Pathways Project -- Thematic Table of Contents -- Table of Contents- Idaho GEM Course Sequencing -- Frequently Asked Questions -- American Sign Language Level 1, Activities for Face-to-Face Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 1, Activities for Online Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 2, Activities for Face-to-Face Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 2, Activities for Online Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 3, Activities for Face-to-Face Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 3, Activities for Online Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 4, Activities for Face-to-Face Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 4, Activities for Online Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 5, Activities for Face-to-Face Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 5, Activities for Online Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 6, Activities for Face-to-Face Instruction -- American Sign Language Level 6, Activities for Online Instruction -- Appendix0 aLet’s Chat! ASL features a collection of over 160 interpersonal activities for novice and intermediate learners. Touching on a range of thematic topics such as free time activities, resolving conflicts, daily routines, health, the environment, holidays and so much more, ASL teachers are sure to find an activity to use in their courses. These activities may be used as is or can easily be revised and remixed to fit the unique needs of individual classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aArispe, Kellyeeditor1 aLacar, Thaïseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1665zAccess online version02289nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245003500159264004300194264004900237264001200286300002200298336002600320337002600346338003600372341002800408490002700436505067000463520047901133542004101612546001601653588004001669650003801709650002601747700002601773710003901799856007701838OTLid0001666MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240607s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aLet's Chat! FrenchcAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use the Activities in this Book -- How are Pathways Activities Formatted? -- About the Pathways Project -- Thematic Table of Contents -- Table of Contents- Idaho GEM Course Sequencing -- Frequently Asked Questions -- French Level 1, Face-to-Face Activities -- French Level 1, Activities for Online Instruction -- French Level 2, Face-to-Face Activities -- French Level 2, Activities for Online Instruction -- French Level 3, Face-to-Face Activities -- French Level 3, Activities for Online Instruction -- French Level 4, Face-to-Face Activities -- French Level 4, Activities for Online Instruction -- French Level K-5, Face-to-Face Activities0 aLet’s Chat! French features a collection of nearly 100 classroom-ready interpersonal speaking activities for novice and intermediate learners. Touching on a range of thematic topics such as free time activities, food, daily routines, health, the environment, art and so much more, French teachers are sure to find an activity to use in their courses. These activities may be used as is or can easily be revised and remixed to fit the unique needs of individual classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aArispe, Kellyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1666zAccess online version02280nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245003500159264004300194264004900237264001200286300002200298336002600320337002600346338003600372341002800408490002700436505066100463520047901124542004101603546001601644588004001660650003801700650002601738700002601764710003901790856007701829OTLid0001667MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240607s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aLet's Chat! GermancAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use the Activities in this Book -- How are Pathways Activities Formatted? -- About the Pathways Project -- Thematic Table of Contents -- Table of Contents- Idaho GEM Course Sequencing -- Frequently Asked Questions -- German Level 1, Face-to-Face Activities -- German Level 1, Activities Designed for Online Instruction -- German Level 2, Face-to-Face Activities -- German Level 2, Activities Designed for Online Instruction -- German Level 3, Face-to-Face Activities -- German Level 3, Activities Designed for Online Instruction -- German Level 4, Face-to-Face Activities -- German Level 4, Activities Designed for Online Instruction0 aLet’s Chat! German features a collection of over 100 classroom-ready interpersonal speaking activities for novice and intermediate learners. Touching on a range of thematic topics such as free time activities, travel, daily routines, health, the environment, art and so much more, German teachers are sure to find an activity to use in their courses. These activities may be used as is or can easily be revised and remixed to fit the unique needs of individual classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aArispe, Kellyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1667zAccess online version01899nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245003500159264004300194264004900237264001200286300002200298336002600320337002600346338003600372341002800408490002700436505031300463520044600776542004101222546001601263588004001279650003801319650002601357700002601383710003901409856007701448OTLid0001668MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240607s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aLet's Chat! KoreancAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use the Activities in this Book -- How are Pathways Activities Formatted? -- About the Pathways Project -- Thematic Table of Contents -- Table of Contents- Idaho GEM Course Sequencing -- Frequently Asked Questions -- Korean Level 1 -- Korean Level 2 -- Korean Level 3 -- Korean Level 40 aLet’s Chat! Korean features a collection of over 55 classroom-ready interpersonal speaking activities for novice and intermediate learners. Touching on a range of thematic topics such as greetings, travel, daily routines, health, and so much more, Korean teachers are sure to find an activity to use in their courses. These activities may be used as is or can easily be revised and remixed to fit the unique needs of individual classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aArispe, Kellyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1668zAccess online version02275nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245003600159264004300195264004900238264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002800409490002700437505066900464520046501133542004101598546001601639588004001655650003801695650002601733700002601759710003901785856007701824OTLid0001669MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240607s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aLet's Chat! SpanishcAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use the Activities in this Book -- How are Pathways Activities Formatted? -- About the Pathways Project -- Thematic Table of Contents -- Table of Contents- Idaho GEM Course Sequencing -- Frequently Asked Questions -- Spanish Level 1- Face-to-Face Activities -- Spanish Level 1- Activities Designed for Online Instruction -- Spanish Level 2- Face-to-Face Activities -- Spanish Level 2- Activities Designed for Online Instruction -- Spanish Level 3- Face-to-Face Activities -- Spanish Level 3- Activities Designed for Online Instruction -- Spanish Level 4- Face-to-Face Activities -- Spanish Level 4- Activities Designed for Online Instruction0 aLet’s Chat! Spanish features a collection of over 100 interpersonal speaking activities for novice and intermediate learners. Touching on a range of thematic topics such as free time activities, travel, daily routines, health, the environment, art and so much more, Spanish teachers are sure to find an activity to use in their courses. These activities may be used as is or can easily be revised and remixed to fit the unique needs of individual classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aArispe, Kellyeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1669zAccess online version01980nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245003500159264004300194264004900237264001200286300002200298336002600320337002600346338003600372341002800408490002700436505035700463520044300820542004101263546001601304588004001320650003801360650002601398700002601424700002801450710003901478856007701517OTLid0001670MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            240607s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aLet's Chat! ArabiccAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- How to Use the Activities in this Book -- How are Pathways Activities Formatted? -- About the Pathways Project -- Thematic Table of Contents -- Table of Contents- Idaho GEM Course Sequencing -- Frequently Asked Questions -- Arabic Level 1 Activities -- Arabic Level 2 Activities -- Arabic Level 3 Activities -- Arabic Level 4 Activities0 aLet’s Chat! Arabic features a collection of over 55 interpersonal speaking activities for novice and intermediate learners. Touching on a range of thematic topics such as greetings, daily routines, health, eating out, holidays and so much more, Arabic teachers are sure to find an activity to use in their courses. These activities may be used as is or can easily be revised and remixed to fit the unique needs of individual classrooms.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aArispe, Kellyeeditor1 aCambell, Sophieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1670zAccess online version02651nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002700149245009700176264004300273264002900316264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002800467490002700495505079500522520070101317542004102018546001602059588004002075650002302115650002302138710003902161856007702200OTLid0001671MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240612s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aSimons, Amandaeauthor00aChromosomes, Genes, and TraitsbAn Introduction to Genetics [Revised Edition]cAmanda Simons 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Land Acknowledgement Statement for the ROTEL Grant -- Part I: DNA Structure -- Part II: Genome Structure -- Part III: Mitosis and Meiosis -- Part IV: Overview of Central Dogma and Replication -- Part V: Transcription -- Part VI: Translation and genetic code -- Part VII: Genetic Code and Mutation -- Part VIII: Overview of Gene Regulation -- Part IX: Eukaryotic Gene Regulation in Action: Examples from Development -- Part X: Mendel and Basic Heredity -- Part XI: Allele Interactions -- Part XII: Multigenic Inheritance -- Part XIII: Genetics of Sex -- Part XIV: Family Trees and Pedigrees -- Part XV: Linkage and Mapping -- Part XVI: Epigenetics -- XVII. Evolution and Ancestry -- XVIII. DNA repair and cancer -- Summary -- Afterword -- Grant Information -- Version History0 aThis resource is intended for an introductory or intermediate-level college genetics course. It begins with an exploration of DNA and genome structure and continues with a study of the molecular mechanisms that drive gene expression. Concepts of classical transmission genetics are linked to the molecular mechanisms that underlie observable phenotypes. It concludes with specific topics that synthesize information from both molecular and transmission genetics, including consideration of topics like epigenetics, cancer biology, and evolution. Examples of both historical and current problems in genetics are presented, along with conversations of the relationship between genetics and society.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1671zAccess online version03185nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245022500158264004300383264007000426264001200496300002200508336002600530337002600556338003600582341002800618490002700646505032900673520112501002542004102127546002702168588004102195650003402236700004602270700004402316700004302360700004602403700004702449700004202496700004302538700004202581710003902623856007702662OTLid0001672MnU20260223020132.0m     o  d s      cr            240612s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651303  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A400aRevelando la VerdadbEl Papel del Whistleblowing en la Preservación de la Integridad Estatal. Un Análisis de su Impacto en los ámbitos Penal, Administrativo y Financiero, explorando los desafíos y soluciones legales. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El Whistleblowing y su contexto -- Capítulo II: Regulación del Whistleblowing: Un Análisis Comparativo en Diversos Países -- Capítulo III: El Whistleblowing: Avances y Desafíos en Ecuador -- Capítulo IV: Reflexiones finales -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl Whistleblowing, conocido como “aquel que alerta” es esencial en la lucha contra la corrupción, ya que los whistleblowers identifican y reportan conductas ilícitas, contribuyendo así a la integridad estatal y al bien público. En varios Estados la corrupción alcanzada su más alto nivel conllevando pérdidas económicas significativas, en esta obra destacamos que el Whistleblowing se convierte en una herramienta vital, descubriendo un gran porcentaje de fraudes. Por lo tanto, es crucial implementar canales de denuncia efectivos y proteger a los informantes para combatir la corrupción y promover una administración pública ética y transparente. Este sistema no solo busca prevenir delitos, sino también corregir el mal gobierno en la administración pública. El Estado debería buscar estrategias prácticas para tutelar aquellos que denuncian prácticas indebidas, porque su valentía contribuye al bienestar del interés público. Transformándose los “whistlwblowers” en una pieza fundamental en la lucha contra la corrupción y en la promoción de una administración ética y transparente.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aSamaniego-Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aBonilla-Morejón, Diego Marceloeauthor1 aPérez-Serrano, Xavier Oswaldoeauthor1 aSalazar-Guerrero, Rosario Jajairaeauthor1 aErazo-Domínguez, Hilda del Rocíoeauthor1 aYánez-Erazo, Thelmo Fernandoeauthor1 aCalles-Poveda, Leonardo Rafaeleauthor1 aQuiroz-Becerra, Ligia Vanessaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1672zAccess online version03220nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245013700158264004300295264007000338264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002800530490002700558505039700585520106700982542004102049546002702090588004102117650003402158700004602192700004802238700004502286700004002331700004702371700004102418700004102459700004502500700004202545700004702587710003902634856007702673OTLid0001673MnU20260323020126.0m     o  d s      cr            240612s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651310  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A403aEl derecho sucesorio y las legítimasb¿Un equilibrio entre la autonomía testamentaria y la protección de los herederos forzosos? 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Explorando el Proceso de Sucesión: Derechos, Obligaciones y Procedimientos -- Capítulo II: Explorando los Fundamentos y Alcances de la Legítima: Una Visión Integral -- Capítulo III: Explorando la legítima: Un enfoque comparativo entre jurisdicciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl derecho sucesorio, una rama del derecho privado, se ocupa de regular el traspaso de los bienes y derechos pertenecientes a un individuo fallecido hacia sus herederos. Este proceso, conocido como sucesión mortis causa, tiene como objetivo principal armonizar la libertad de disposición testamentaria del difunto con la salvaguardia de los herederos forzosos, aquellos que legalmente tienen derecho a recibir una porción de la herencia. Dentro del ámbito del derecho sucesorio, se establecen disposiciones normativas que rigen la distribución de los activos, así como los criterios de validez y formalidad de los testamentos. Además, se definen las legítimas, las cuales representan las porciones de la herencia destinadas a ser reservadas obligatoriamente para los herederos forzosos. Esta rama legal desempeña un papel fundamental en garantizar una distribución justa y equitativa de los bienes y derechos de una persona fallecida, al mismo tiempo que protege los derechos de los herederos forzosos y respeta la voluntad testamentaria del fallecido.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aSamaniego-Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aCampoverde-Jiménez, Rosa Elizabetheauthor1 aAstudillo-Bermeo, David Santiagoeauthor1 aUrbano-Urbano, Pablo Faustoeauthor1 aErazo-Domínguez, Hilda del Rocíoeauthor1 aPuente-Heredia, Xavier Edgareauthor1 aGuano-Fogacho, Jaime Enriqueeauthor1 aAroca-Rivadeneira, Ricardo Paúleauthor1 aYánez-Erazo, Thelmo Fernandoeauthor1 aAndachi-Trujillo, Wellington Amadoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1673zAccess online version03115nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245005600137264004300193264006600236264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002800424490002700452505046800479520132300947542003002270546001602300588004002316650004202356700003402398700003202432700003102464700003102495700002902526700003402555710003902589856007702628OTLid0001674MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240612s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aBuilding Cost PlanningbBest Practices and Insights 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Peoples and Country -- About the Authors -- Accessibility Statement -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Construction Industry -- Chapter 2: Cost Management of Building Construction Projects -- Chapter 3: Cost Planning Techniques -- Chapter 4: Building Cost Information (Data/indices) -- Chapter 5: Cost Analysis -- Chapter 6: Cost Planning Construction Projects -- Chapter 7: Cost Planning Stages -- Chapter 8: Definitions/Terminology -- Appendix0 aThis book focuses on the cost planning of building construction projects with special reference to the Australian and New Zealand context. Design development and cost planning with elemental analysis are emphasised in the pre-construction cost management process in the region. This book translates the well-established practice of pre-construction cost management process in the construction industry into a published academic and professional resource which can be used for teaching higher education students and for professional training programs. Building cost planning is considered from the client and the design team’s perspective and focuses on the functions of a cost manager. From the overview of the construction industry and the client’s team, to the detailed cost planning process and cost planning techniques at progressive stages in the pre-construction phase, this book is ideal as a guide to cost plan building construction projects. It follows an interactive style by featuring learning outcomes, self-review questions and learning activities for each chapter. It also extends theory into applications with case studies incorporated from the Australian and New Zealand construction industries. These approaches make this book useful for both students and practitioners in construction management.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aJayawickrama, Thilinieauthor1 aJayasinghe, Ruchinieauthor1 aKahandawa, Ravindueauthor1 aRameezdeen, Rameezeauthor1 aLeelarathne, Doneauthor1 aGamage, Inoka Withanaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1674zAccess online version05654nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245007500159264004300234264004900277264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505361500500520077004115542004104885546001604926588004004942650003804982650002605020700003705046700002905083700002805112710003905140856007705179OTLid0001675MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240617s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aFrançais inclusifbAn Interactive Textbook for French 101cAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- French at Boise State -- Useful Expressions -- How to Type French Accents on Your Computer -- Acknowledgements and Attribution -- Français inclusif Curricular Table of Contents -- Module 01: Bonjour! -- Première Partie: Les salutations, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: Les salutations / Explication de grammaire -- Première Partie: Les salutations / Les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: Les numéros / Le vocabulaire -- Deuxième Partie: Les Numéros / Explication de grammaire -- Deuxième Partie: Les numéros / les exercices -- Troisième Partie: La salle de classe, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: La salle de classe / Explication de grammaire -- Troisième Partie: La salle de classe / Les exercises -- Module 01: Cultural Reflection -- Module 01: L’évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 01: Allez plus loin -- Module 02: Me voici! -- Première Partie: L’identité / Les questions personnelles, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: L’Identité / Les questions personnelles; Explication de grammaire -- Première Partie: L’Identité / Les questions personnelles, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: La famille et les amis, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième Partie: La famille et les amis, Explication de grammaire -- Deuxième Partie: La famille et les amis, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: Les passe-temps, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: Les passe-temps, Explication de grammaire -- Troisième Partie: Les passe-temps, les exercices -- Quatrième Partie: L’heure, le vocabulaire -- Quatrième Partie: L’heure, Explication de grammaire -- Quatrième Partie: L’heure, les exercices -- Module 02: Cultural Reflection -- Module 02: L’évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 03: Les vacances -- Première Partie: Le temps / les saisons / les chiffres 70 à 100, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: Le temps/ les saisons/les chiffres 70 à 100, Explication de grammaire -- Première Partie: Le temps/ les saisons/les chiffres 70 à 100, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: La géographie / les points cardinaux, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième Partie: La géographie / les points cardinaux, Explication de grammaire -- Deuxième Partie: La géographie / les points cardinaux, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: Les activités, les transports et les verbes, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: Les activités, les transports et les verbes, Explication de grammaire -- Troisième Partie: Les activités, les transports et les verbes, les exercices -- Quatrième Partie: L'Hexagone et les destinations francophones, le vocabulaire -- Quatrième Partie: L'Hexagone et les destinations francophones, Explication de grammaire -- Quatrième Partie: L'Hexagone et les destinations francophones, les exercices -- Module 03: Cultural Reflection -- Module 03: L’évaluation de la production écrite -- Module 04: L’identité -- Première Partie: Le portrait physique, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: Le portrait physique, Explication de grammaire -- Première Partie: Le portrait physique, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: Les personnalités, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième Partie: Les personnalités, Explication de grammaire -- Deuxième Partie: Les personnalités, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: La routine quotidienne, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: La routine quotidienne, Explication de grammaire -- Troisième Partie: La routine quotidienne, les exercices -- Module 04: Cultural Reflection -- Module 04: L’évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 04: Allez plus loin0 aFrançais inclusif is an inclusive, four-semester French curriculum that celebrates the diversity of the francophone world and our students' unique perspectives and ways of living. The instructional materials emphasize developing 21st-century skills and preparing students for their future careers. Materials available for each level include a textbook, assessments, instructor slide decks, and cultural reflections. This interactive textbook for French 101 (Level 1) contains four modules, each focused on thematic vocabulary, grammar, and interactive exercises: Bonjour, Les vacances, Me voici, and L’identité. Within the textbook, students can study vocabulary using flashcards, review grammar concepts, and test their comprehension via interactive exercises.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aDevereux Herbeck, Mariaheeditor1 aCampbell, Sophieeeditor1 aDuvall, Patrickeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1675zAccess online version04658nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245007500159264004300234264004900277264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505266300500520076803163542004103931546001603972588004003988650003804028650002604066700003704092700002704129710003904156856007704195OTLid0001676MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240617s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aFrançais inclusifbAn Interactive Textbook for French 102cAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- French at Boise State -- L’alphabet phonétique -- Useful Expressions -- How to Type French Accents on Your Computer -- Acknowledgements and Attribution -- Français inclusif Curricular Table of Contents -- Première partie: Achetons de la nourriture! Vocabulaire -- Première partie: Achetons de la nourriture! explication de grammaire -- Première partie: Achetons de la nourriture! Les exercises -- Deuxième partie: Au café/ au restaurant, vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: Au café, au restaurant / explication de grammaire -- Deuxième partie: Au café, au restaurant, Les exercices -- Troisième partie: L'art de la table ! Vocabulaire -- Troisième partie: L'art de la table ! Explication de grammaire -- Troisième partie: L'art de la table ! Les exercices -- Module 5: Cultural Reflection -- Module 5: Allez plus loin -- Module 5 : L'évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Première partie: Montréal, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: Montréal, explication de grammaire -- Première partie: Montréal, Les exercices -- Deuxième partie : Dakar, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie : Dakar, explication de grammaire -- Deuxième partie : Dakar, les exercices -- Troisième Partie : Se déplacer à Pau, vocabulaire -- Troisième partie : Se déplacer à Pau, explication de grammaire -- Troisième partie : Se déplacer à Pau, exercices -- Module 6 : L'évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 6: Cultural reflection -- Module 07: Les fêtes -- Première Partie: le printemps et l'été, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: le printemps et l'été, la grammaire -- Première Partie: le printemps et l'été, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: l'automne, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: l'automne, la grammaire -- Deuxième Partie: l'automne, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: L'hiver, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: L'hiver, la grammaire -- Troisième Partie: L'hiver, les exercices -- Module 7 : L'évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 7: Cultural Reflection -- Module 08: Chez moi -- Première partie: à la maison, le vocabulaire -- Première partie: à la maison, la grammaire -- Première partie: à la maison, les exercices -- Deuxième partie: des tâches ménagères, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: des tâches ménagères, la grammaire -- Deuxième partie: des tâches ménagères, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: La fête, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: La fête, la grammaire -- Troisième Partie: La fête, les exercices -- Module 8: Cultural Reflection -- Module 8 : L'évaluation de la production écrite0 aFrançais inclusif is an inclusive, four-semester French curriculum that celebrates the diversity of the francophone world and our students' unique perspectives and ways of living. The instructional materials emphasize developing 21st-century skills and preparing students for their future careers. Materials available for each level include a textbook, assessments, instructor slide decks, and cultural reflections. This interactive textbook for French 102 (Level 2) contains four modules, each focused on thematic vocabulary, grammar, and interactive exercises: Bon appétit, La ville, Les fêtes, and Chez moi. Within the textbook, students can study vocabulary using flashcards, review grammar concepts, and test their comprehension via interactive exercises.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aDevereux Herbeck, Mariaheeditor1 aSpring, Elanoreeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1676zAccess online version04760nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002400135245007500159264004300234264004900277264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505276000500520081203260542004104072546001604113588004004129650003804169650002604207700003704233710003904270856007704309OTLid0001677MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240617s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHoye, Ambereeditor00aFrançais inclusifbAn Interactive Textbook for French 201cAmber Hoye 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- French at Boise State -- L’alphabet phonétique -- Useful Expressions -- How to Type French Accents on Your Computer -- Acknowledgements and Attribution -- Français inclusif Curricular Table of Contents -- Module 09 - Les Médias et communications -- Première Partie: La Presse, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: La Presse, la grammaire -- Première Partie: La Presse, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie, La Télévision et la radio, vocabulaire -- Deuxième Partie: La Télévision et la radio, la grammaire -- Deuxième Partie, La Télévision et la radio, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: Les réseaux sociaux, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: Les réseaux sociaux, la grammaire -- Troisième Partie: Les réseaux sociaux, les exercices -- Module 9: Cultural Reflection -- Module 9: L'evaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 9: Allez plus loin -- Module 10 - Mode, forme, et santé -- Première partie: Les vêtements, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: Les vêtements, la grammaire -- Première Partie: Les vêtements, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: La Santé et le bien-être, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: La Santé et le bien-être, la grammaire -- Deuxième partie: La Santé et le bien-être, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: Les passe-temps, le vocabulaire -- Troisième partie: Les passe-temps, la grammaire -- Troisième partie: Les passe-temps, les exercices -- Module 10: Cultural Reflection -- Module 10: L'évaluation de la production écrite et l'expression orale -- Module 10: Allez plus loin -- Module 11 - Les études -- Première partie : A Nantes, le vocabulaire -- Première partie : A Nantes, la grammaire -- Première partie : A Nantes, les exercices -- Deuxième partie: Au Québec, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: Au Québec, la grammaire -- Deuxième partie: Au Québec, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: En Guyane, le vocabulaire -- Troisième partie: En Guyane, la grammaire -- Troisème partie: En Guyane, les exercices -- Module 11: Cultural Reflection -- Module 11: Allez plus loin -- Module 12 - La vie professionnelle -- Première partie : le monde du travail, le vocabulaire -- Première partie : le monde du travail, la grammaire -- Première partie : le monde du travail, les exercices -- Deuxième partie : les métiers, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie : les métiers, la grammaire -- Deuxème partie : les métiers, les exercices -- Troisième partie : les compétences, le vocabulaire -- Troisième partie : les compétences, la grammaire -- Troisième partie : les compétences, les exercices -- Module 12: Cultural Reflection -- Module 12: L’evaluation de la production écrite et l’expression orale -- Module 12: Allez plus loin0 aFrançais inclusif is an inclusive, four-semester French curriculum that celebrates the diversity of the francophone world and our students' unique perspectives and ways of living. The instructional materials emphasize developing 21st-century skills and preparing students for their future careers. Materials available for each level include a textbook, assessments, instructor slide decks, and cultural reflections. This interactive textbook for French 201 (Level 3) contains four modules, each focused on thematic vocabulary, grammar, and interactive exercises: Les médias et communications, Mode/forme/et santé, Les études, and La vie professionnelle. Within the textbook, students can study vocabulary using flashcards, review grammar concepts, and test their comprehension via interactive exercises.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aDevereux Herbeck, Mariaheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1677zAccess online version02353nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002800166245008200194264004300276264006500319264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002800506490002700534505020600561520094600767542001601713546001601729588004001745650002401785650004201809710003901851856007701890OTLid0001678MnU20260406020127.0m     o  d s      cr            240701s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463667968  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aTA1451 aSimonse, Lianneeauthor00aDesign RoadmappingbGuidebook for Future Foresight TechniquescLianne Simonse 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Contents -- Design Roadmapping -- Creative Trend Research -- Future Visioning -- Technology Scouting & Modular Architecture -- Time Pacing Strategy -- Mapping Sessions -- Visualise Roadmaps0 aDESIGN ROADMAPPING is for anyone interested in design, strategy and innovation, and its wonderful combinations. For those who dare to create a future vision, frame the time pacing and map the pathways towards it. This guidebook teaches you how to create a roadmap. It outlines the origins, design theories and science results. Strategic designers, innovation managers and professors share their roadmapping experiences, views and achievements, including venture CPOs, Head of Design, product and program managers of international companies such as Canon, Peerby, Ferrari, Philips, Victoria State Library and many more. By design roadmapping you devise creative responses to future strategic challenges. Guided by future foresight techniques, you uncover new trends, scout for new technologies and map the values and ideas on the roadmap. Through strong visualization, a design roadmap supports an organizational mindset on value innovations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1678zAccess online version02249nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138050001200149100003000161245007500191264004300266264005700309264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002500488490002700513505033100540520071700871542001601588546001601604588004001620650002401660650002601684650002501710710003901735856007701774OTLid0001679MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            240701s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF5625 4aHB171.51 aBarreto, Humbertoeauthor00aGateway to Business Analytics with Microsoft Excel®cHumberto Barreto 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPALNIc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublisher's Note -- Acknowledgments -- Dedication -- Preface -- User Guide -- Defining Business Analytics -- Optimization with Solver -- Monte Carlo Simulation -- Growth -- Unemployment -- Constrained Optimization -- Yield Curve -- National Income Accounting -- Introduction to VBA -- Demographics -- Afterword -- Contributors0 aBusiness analytics is a new, expanding subfield with fuzzy edges that overlap into a variety of other established disciplines, including economics, econometrics, computer science, data science, finance, statistics, mathematics, and even psychology. Business analytics includes such traditional techniques as regression and data visualization, but also newer methods such as web scraping, big data, machine learning, and artificial intelligence. Its key distinguishing feature is using data to make and communicate business decisions. This textbook utilizes Microsoft Excel to present a mix of topics appropriate to an undergraduate level introduction to business analytics course with an engaging delivery style.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1679zAccess online version01817nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245001700135264004300152264006700195264001200262300002200274336002600296337002600322338003600348341002500384490002700409505021200436520041900648542003001067546001601097588004001113650003801153650002601191700003301217700002901250700003601279710003901315856007701354OTLid0001680MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240701s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aFrench OER 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPalomar Collegec[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Unité 1 - Bonjour ! -- Unité 2 - À l'université -- Unité 3 - La famille -- Unité 4 - Le temps et les loisirs -- Unité 5 - En ville -- Unité 6 - La maison et le quartier -- Back Matter0 aThis text is designed for the first semester of French. This elementary level course is a study of the French language and French-speaking cultures, with emphasis on the development of communicative skills and basic structures. The course combines in-class instruction and practice with self-paced study in the Language Laboratory. This beginning-level course is for students with no previous coursework in French.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aCarrasco, William J.eauthor1 aZahedi, Shahrzadeauthor1 aParrish, Caren Barnezeteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1680zAccess online version04841nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003700135245007900172264004300251264004900294264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002500465490002700490505279400517520081403311542004104125546001604166588004004182650003804222650002604260700002404286700002904310710003904339856007704378OTLid0001681MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240708s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHerbeck, Mariah Devereuxeauthor00aFrançais inclusifbAn Interactive Textbook for French 202cMariah Herbeck 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoise, IdahobBoise State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- French at Boise State -- L’alphabet phonétique -- Useful Expressions -- How to Type French Accents on Your Computer -- Acknowledgements and Attribution -- Français inclusif Curricular Table of Contents -- Module 13- L'amour et l'argent -- Première Partie: L'argent, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie: L'argent, la grammaire -- Première Partie: L'argent, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: Le nid, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième Partie: Le nid, la grammaire -- Deuxième Partie: Le nid, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: L'amour et l'amitié, le vocabulaire -- Troisième Partie: L'amour et l'amitié, la grammaire -- Troisième Partie: L'amour et l'amitié, les exercices -- Module 13: Cultural Reflection -- Module 13: L'évaluation de la production écrite et orale -- Module 13: Allez plus loin -- Module 14- Les voyages et les transports -- Première partie: Les transports, le vocabulaire -- Première partie: Les transports, la grammaire -- Première partie: Les transports, les exercices -- Deuxième partie: Se déplacer en ville, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: Se déplacer en ville, la grammaire -- Deuxième partie: Se déplacer en ville, les exercices -- Troisième partie: Découvrir le monde, le vocabulaire -- Troisième partie: Découvrir le monde, la grammaire -- Troisième partie: Découvrir le monde, les exercices -- Module 14: Cultural reflection -- Module 14: L'évaluation de production écrite et orale -- Module 14: Allez plus loin -- Module 15- La planète -- Première partie: La planète qui change, le vocabulaire -- Première partie: La planète qui change, la grammaire -- Première partie: La planète qui change, les exercices -- Deuxième partie: Notre empreinte, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie: Notre empreinte, la grammaire -- Deuxième partie: Notre empreinte, les exercices -- Troisième partie : Espoir pour l'avenir, le vocabulaire -- Troisième partie : Espoir pour l'avenir, la grammaire -- Troisième partie : Espoir pour l'avenir, les exercices -- Module 15: Cultural Reflection -- Module 15: L'évaluation de la production écrite et orale -- Module 15: Allez plus loin -- Module 16- L’art et l’expression -- Première, Partie: Les arts numériques, le vocabulaire -- Première Partie : Les arts numériques, la grammaire -- Première partie : Les arts numériques, les exercices -- Deuxième Partie: arts visuels, le vocabulaire -- Deuxième partie : arts visuels, la grammaire -- Deuxième partie : arts visuels, les exercices -- Troisième Partie: le spectacle, le vocabulaire -- Troisième partie : le spectacle, la grammaire -- Troisième partie : le spectacle, les exercices -- Module 16: Cultural Reflection -- Module 16 : L'évaluation de la production écrite et orale -- Module 16 : Allez plus loin0 aFrançais inclusif is an inclusive, four-semester French curriculum that celebrates the diversity of the francophone world and our students' unique perspectives and ways of living. The instructional materials emphasize developing 21st-century skills and preparing students for their future careers. Materials available for each level include a textbook, assessments, instructor slide decks, and cultural reflections. This interactive textbook for French 202 (Level 4) contains four modules, each focused on thematic vocabulary, grammar, and interactive exercises: L'amour et l'argent, Les voyages et les transports, La planète, and L’art et l’expression. Within the textbook, students can study vocabulary using flashcards, review grammar concepts, and test their comprehension via interactive exercises.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aHoye, Ambereauthor1 aGehrig, Brittneyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1681zAccess online version01770nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245001700135264004300152264006700195264001200262300002200274336002600296337002600322338003600348341002500384490002700409505025300436520033100689542003001020546001601050588004001066650003801106650002601144700003301170700002901203700003601232710003901268856007701307OTLid0001682MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aFrench OER 2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPalomar Collegec[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Unité 7 - À table ! -- Unité 8 - Qu'est-ce qui s'est passé? -- Unité 9 - L'enfance et la jeunesse -- Unité 10 - Notre planète -- Unité 11 - L'enseignement, les carrières et l'avenir -- Unité 12 - Les voyages -- Back Matter0 aThis course is the second semester of French. This elementary level course is a study of the French language and French-speaking cultures, with continued emphasis on the development of communicative skills and basic structures. The course combines in-class instruction with self-paced study in the Foreign Language Laboratory.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aCarrasco, William J.eauthor1 aZahedi, Shahrzadeauthor1 aParrish, Caren Barnezeteauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1682zAccess online version02486nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002900145245007600174264004300250264008900293264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505073000559520058201289542001601871546001601887588004001903650003001943650002301973710003901996856007702035OTLid0001683MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aHarris, Emily P.eauthor00aIntroduction to Environmental Sciences and SustainabilitycEmily Harris 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Environmental Science and Sustainability -- Chapter 2: Matter, Energy, and Life -- Chapter 3: Ecosystems and the Biosphere -- Chapter 4: Community and Population Ecology -- Chapter 5: Conservation and Biodiversity -- Chapter 6: Environmental Hazards and Human Health -- Chapter 7: Water Availability and Use -- Chapter 8: Food and Hunger -- Chapter 9: Conventional and Sustainable Agriculture -- Chapter 10: Air Pollution, Climate Change, and Ozone Depletion -- Chapter 11: Conventional and Sustainable Energy -- Chapter 12: Solid and Hazardous Waste -- Chapter 13: Environmental Economics and Policies -- Chapter 14: Sustainability and Urban Infrastructure -- Glossary -- Afterword0 aIntroduction to Environmental Sciences and Sustainability is a college-level Open Educational Resource (OER) that focuses on the most relevant environmental science issues and addresses ways to incorporate sustainable practices. The text is designed for an introductory-level college science course. Topics include the fundamentals of ecology, biodiversity, pollution, climate change, food production, human population growth, and incorporating sustainable approaches in our communities, economies, and environments. This resource is targeted at environmental science students.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1683zAccess online version02746nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135100002700149245006300176264004300239264009100282264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505046500550520110501015542002702120546001602147588004002163650002702203650002602230710003902256856007702295OTLid0001684MnU20260406020128.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aChoi, Jaeyoungeauthor00aBasic Statistics Using R for Crime AnalysiscJaeyoung Choi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1. Introduction to Crime Data Analysis, R and RStudio -- Chapter 2. Introduction to Data Formations and Graphics -- Chapter 3. Creating a New Variable and Producing Summary Statistics -- Chapter 4. Central Tendency and Variability -- Chapter 5. Reliability of a Scale -- Chapter 6. Chi-Squared Test -- Chapter 7. T-Test -- Chapter 8. Analysis of Variance -- Chapter 9. Correlation -- Chapter 10. Linear Regression -- Conclusion -- References0 aLimited access to subscription-based statistical software poses obstacles when students want to apply the skills they acquired in college. Although students may learn programs like SPSS or Stata while at the university, they often find themselves unable to continue using these programs after graduation, making their acquired skills obsolete. As an open-source software program, R offers a solution to this challenge. It is freely accessible to anyone, including students, after they graduate. Therefore, I decided to write a freely available book for those interested in becoming crime analysts, focusing on learning statistics without delving too deeply into mathematics. Moreover, this book emphasizes practical applications by utilizing R for data analysis, ensuring students can develop relevant skills beyond the university. I hope that students can easily follow the instructions in this book and replicate the same outcomes using the provided data. This practical experience will demonstrate the value of statistics and R, ideally inspiring students to further their learning in these areas.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1684zAccess online version03911nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000800155100003400163245005600197264004300253264006500296264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505030500538520242500843542001603268546001603284588004003300650004203340650002703382710003903409856007703448OTLid0001685MnU20260406020128.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463668842  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQA11 aTeunissen, Peter J.G.eauthor00aAdjustment theoryban introductioncPeter Teunissen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Linear estimation theory: an introduction -- The model with observation equations -- The model with condition equations -- yR-Variates -- Mixed model representation -- Partitioned model representations -- Nonlinear models, linearization, iteration -- Appendices -- Literature -- Index0 aAdjustment theory can be regarded as the part of mathematical geodesy that deals with the optimal combination of redundant measurements together with the estimation of unknown parameters. It is essential for a geodesist, its meaning comparable to what mechanics means to a civil engineer or a mechanical engineer. Historically, the first methods of combining redundant measurements originate from the study of three problems in geodesy and astronomy, namely to determine the size and shape of the Earth, to explain the long-term inequality in the motions of Jupiter and Saturn, and to find a mathematical representation of the motions of the Moon. Nowadays, the methods of adjustment are used for a much greater variety of geodetic applications, ranging from, for instance, surveying and navigation to remote sensing and global positioning. The two main reasons for performing redundant measurements are the wish to increase the accuracy of the results computed and the requirement to be able to check for errors. Due to the intrinsic uncertainty in measurements, measurement redundancy generally leads to an inconsistent system of equations. Without additional criteria, such a system of equations is not uniquely solvable. In this introductory course on adjustment theory, methods are developed and presented for solving inconsistent systems of equations. The leading principle is that of least-squares adjustment together with its statistical properties. The inconsistent systems of equations can come in many different guises. They could be given in parametric form, in implicit form, or as a combination of these two forms. In each case the same principle of least-squares applies. The algorithmic realizations of the solution will differ however. Depending on the application at hand, one could also wish to choose between obtaining the solution in one single step or in a step-wise manner. This leads to the need of formulating the system of equations in partitioned form. Different partitions exist, measurement partitioning, parameter partitioning, or a partitioning of both measurements and parameters. The choice of partitioning also affects the algorithmic realization of the solution. In this introductory text the methodology of adjustment is emphasized, although various samples are given to illustrate the theory. The methods discussed form the basis for solving different adjustment problems in geodesy.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1685zAccess online version02216nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145100002700153245005500180264004300235264007300278264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505032400528520072400852542003001576546001601606588004001622650003801662650002601700710003901726856007701765OTLid0001686MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645951622  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aTaylor, Cheryleauthor00aShakespeare's Major PlayscCheryl TaylornVolume 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Cook Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction: Beyond the Bard -- Part I. As You Like It: Shakespeare's 'Drama of Happiness' -- Part II. Romeo and Juliet: 'The Greatest Love Story Ever Told' -- Part III. Hamlet: 'A Murder Most Foul, Strange and Unnatural' -- Postscript -- Appendix: Hamlet Resources -- Works Cited -- Versioning History0 aThis book is designed to assist upper secondary school and first and second-year university students in their reading and understanding of Shakespeare's plays. The plays selected for discussion are those that students are most likely to encounter in their early adventures with Shakespeare. Each discussion provides guidance on issues raised by each play and suggests approaches from which students can build original ideas and insights. The book contains interactive exercises that are designed to assist students to understand and remember the characters, plots and structures of Shakespeare's plays. The book contains free full text copies of the plays. Volume 1 includes As You Like It, Romeo and Juliet and Hamlet.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1686zAccess online version03335nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155245003700165264004300202264007100245264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505093900493520103101432542004102463546002702504588004102531650002502572650002402597700004202621700004302663700004502706700004602751710003902797856007702836OTLid0001687MnU20260406020129.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651327  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA44000aAbordaje Integral de la Obesidad 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aÍndice -- Capítulo I: Obesidad a nivel mundial -- Capítulo II: Sobrepeso y obesidad en el Ecuador -- Capítulo III: Diagnóstico clínico y médico de la obesidad -- Capítulo IV: Análisis bioquímicos en el sobrepeso y obesidad -- Capítulo V: Metabolismo de alimentos obesogénicos en el sobrepeso y obesidad -- Capítulo VI: Evaluación nutricional en el sobrepeso y obesidad -- Capítulo VII: Intervención nutricional en el sobrepeso y obesidad -- Capítulo VIII: Actividad física estratégica: prescripción para abordar el sobrepeso y la obesidad -- Capítulo IX: Intervención psicológica en el sobrepeso y la obesidad -- Capítulo X: Influencia del social media y el marketing en el sobrepeso y obesidad -- Capítulo XI: Alteraciones musculoesqueléticas en personas con sobrepeso y obesidad -- Capítulo XII: Obesidad-genética-hormonal obesidad y su relación con la secreción hormonal -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro aborda la obesidad desde diversas perspectivas, comenzando con un análisis global en el Capítulo I sobre factores socioeconómicos y culturales, y la influencia de la globalización en los hábitos alimentarios. Se examina la situación específica en Ecuador en el Capítulo II, donde se destaca la alta prevalencia de obesidad en adultos y su relación con el consumo de alimentos procesados. Los siguientes capítulos se centran en aspectos médicos, bioquímicos y nutricionales de la obesidad, así como en intervenciones dietéticas y de actividad física. Se subraya la importancia de la intervención psicológica y se analiza la influencia de las redes sociales y el marketing en los hábitos alimentarios. Se discuten también las complicaciones musculoesqueléticas y se detalla el papel crucial de los desequilibrios hormonales en la obesidad y sus implicaciones metabólicas. El libro proporciona una visión integral de la obesidad y sugiere enfoques multidisciplinarios para su prevención y control.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aTayupanda-Cuvi, Noemí Juditheauthor1 aViteri-Robayo, Carmen Patriciaeauthor1 aGirón-Saltos, Katherine Yaritzaeauthor1 aMarizande-Lozada, María Fernandaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1687zAccess online version03221nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005300135264004300188264008500231264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505020100493520181100694542001602505546001602521588004002537650003802577650002602615700002502641700002702666700002602693710003902719856007702758OTLid0001688MnU20260406020842.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aGreen Tea Intermediate English Communication OER 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aOverview -- Resources -- Unit 1: Introverts and Extroverts -- Unit 2: Food and Nutrition -- Unit 3: Empathy -- Unit 4: Sports and Achievement -- Unit 5: Superstition -- Unit 6: Language and Memory0 aThis set of multimedia materials incorporates interesting topics and real-world language in an accessible way for adult English language learners at the low-to-mid intermediate level, using eclectic methods (communicative activities, content-based instruction lite, focus on form), all while maintaining a connection to our learners’ lives. Each unit has handouts, presentation slides, key vocabulary lists, informative speeches recorded by ESOL teachers at PCC, dialogs, extension activities, and additional videos or materials for assessment. The videos can be linked to directly, embedded in a class page or Learning Management System (LMS, such as Canvas), or downloaded. Closed captioned versions of the videos are also available. Teachers can incorporate everything here, or take an a la carte approach with their existing activities and curricula. To make it easier to navigate these materials, we are gathering them in a pressbooks site as well. That site may make it easier for teachers to navigate and share links with students. Like any set of classroom materials, this OER is not a “class in a box.” We anticipate that teachers will have their own approach to in-class (or synchronous online) activities, out-of-class work, assessments, and speeches, so we’re not offering a one-size-fits-all solution. These materials are openly shared (with the exception of youtube videos, where noted), which means you have all the permission you need to use, adapt, and re-share them. All we ask is to attribute the materials to “Green Tea Communication OER,” and, if you have a moment, let us know if you found the materials helpful. Please let us know if you have feedback, questions, or additional contributions to this project: eric.dodson@pcc.edu, luciana.diniz@pcc.edu and nleiton@pcc.edu1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aDodson, Ericeauthor1 aDiniz, Lucianaeauthor1 aLeiton, Nancieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1688zAccess online version02024nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002500136245005900161264004300220264009200263264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505034600532520056200878542003001440546001601470588004001486650003201526710003901558856007701597OTLid0001689MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aAgah, Afrandeauthor00aIntroduction to Data Science Using PythoncAfrand Agah 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Installing Python -- Introduction to Programming -- Decision Structures -- Repetitions -- Functions -- Recursion -- File Access -- Lists -- Arrays -- Plotting Graphs -- Object Oriented Programming -- Using Python Packages -- Python and Graph Theory -- Python and Machine Learning -- Python and Statistics -- References -- Appendix0 aThis book contains two parts, the first is designed to be used in an introductory programming course for students looking to learn Python, without having any prior experience with programming. Basic programming concepts are discussed, explained, and illustrated with a Python program. Ample programming questions are provided for practice. The second part of the book utilizes machine-learning concepts and statistics to accomplish data-driven resolutions. Python programs are provided to apply scientific computing to conclude statistically driven results.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1689zAccess online version03709nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245003400162264004300196264007200239264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505057800488520191501066542001602981546001602997588004003013650002303053650003103076700002603107700002403133700002603157710003903183856007703222OTLid0001690MnU20260330020758.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781800641723  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH301 4aH100aHuman Evolutionary Demography 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Section 1: The Rationale, Motivations and Questions in Human Evolutionary Demography -- Section 2: Evolutionary Ecology and Demography -- Section 3: Evolutionary Demography Through Tinbergen’s Eyes -- Section 4: Genetic Evolutionary Demography -- Section 5: The Measurement and Interpretation of Selection and Fitness -- Section 6: Evolution of the Human Life Cycle -- Section 7: Evolutionary Demography of Family Structures, Households and Cultural Transmission -- Section 8: Evolutionary Demography of Population Health and Human Well-Being -- Index0 aHuman evolutionary demography is an emerging field blending natural science with social science. This edited volume provides a much-needed, interdisciplinary introduction to the field and highlights cutting-edge research for interested readers and researchers in demography, the evolutionary behavioural sciences, biology, and related disciplines. By bridging the boundaries between social and biological sciences, the volume stresses the importance of a unified understanding of both in order to grasp past and current demographic patterns. Demographic traits, and traits related to demographic outcomes, including fertility and mortality rates, marriage, parental care, menopause, and cooperative behavior are subject to evolutionary processes. Bringing an understanding of evolution into demography therefore incorporates valuable insights into this field; just as knowledge of demography is key to understanding evolutionary processes. By asking questions about old patterns from a new perspective, the volume—composed of contributions from established and early-career academics—demonstrates that a combination of social science research and evolutionary theory offers holistic understandings and approaches that benefit both fields. Human Evolutionary Demography introduces an emerging field in an accessible style. It is suitable for graduate courses in demography, as well as upper-level undergraduates. Its range of research is sure to be of interest to academics working on demographic topics (anthropologists, sociologists, demographers), natural scientists working on evolutionary processes, and disciplines which cross-cut natural and social science, such as evolutionary psychology, human behavioral ecology, cultural evolution, and evolutionary medicine. As an accessible introduction, it should interest readers whether or not they are currently familiar with human evolutionary demography.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBurger, Oskareauthor1 aLee, Ronaldeauthor1 aSear, Rebeccaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1690zAccess online version01922nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002700140245006800167264004300235264007700278264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505029100532520052700823542001601350546001601366588004001382650003401422710003901456856007701495OTLid0001691MnU20260406020809.0m     o  d s      cr            240714s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aGibson, Andreweauthor00aIntroduction to business law in Papua New GuineacAndrew Gibson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSouthern Cross Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Part 1. Introduction to the Legal System in Papua New Guinea -- Part 2. Negligence -- Part 3. Contract Law -- Part 4. Consumer Law -- Part 5. Agency -- Glossary of terms -- Glossary of icons -- Reflection and revision answers -- Video transcripts and PDFs -- Back Matter0 a“Introduction to Business Law in Papua New Guinea” is an introductory text designed to support students enrolled in LEGL1007 Introduction to the Business Law of Papua New Guinea at Southern Cross University. The book is structured into five parts: Part 1 provides an introduction to studying business law, including writing legal essays and problem questions; Part 2 covers negligence; Part 3 discusses contract law; Part 4 addresses consumer law; and Part 5 focuses on agency within the Papua New Guinea legal system.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1691zAccess online version02490nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245013900144250001700283264004300300264006100343264001200404300002200416336002600438337002600464338003600490341002800526490002700554505064900581520053501230542004101765546001601806588004101822650002501863650003301888700002701921700002801948710003901976856007702015OTLid0001692MnU20260406020129.0m     o  d s      cr            240715s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC98000aAdvanced-Level Writing in the University Classroom and BeyondbMindful Practices for Technical, Business, and Scientific Communication  a2024 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aButte, MontanabMontana Technological Unviersityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Unit 1: Exploring Types of Writing -- Unit 2: Writing Documents -- Unit 3: Designing Documents -- Unit 4: Editing Documents -- Unit 5: Working Ethically -- Unit 6: Working with Others -- Unit 7: Conducting Research -- Unit 8: Producing Documents that Instruct, Describe, and Define -- Unit 9: Producing Documents that Summarize, Analyze, Evaluate, Respond, and Seek to Persuade -- Unit 10: Addressing Requests for Information -- Unit 11: Producing Common Workplace Documents -- Unit 12: Producing Long/Formal Reports -- Unit 13: Applying for Internships and Jobs -- Unit 14: Presenting Information -- Unit 15: Applying Your Knowledge0 aWelcome to Advanced-Level Writing in the University Classroom and Beyond: Mindful Practices for Technical, Business, and Scientific Communication. To encourage this open textbook’s use in various undergraduate classes, it has been developed as an all-in-one resource that concentrates on technical writing, business writing, scientific writing, and technical editing. It offers a no-cost alternative to commercial products, combining practical guidance with interactive exercises and thoughtfully designed writing opportunities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aAtkinson, Dawneauthor1 aCorbitt, Staceyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1692zAccess online version02330nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145245005600153264004300209264007000252264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505065400499520036101153542002701514546001601541588004101557650002301598650002601621700003101647700003001678700002901708700002801737700002701765710003901792856007701831OTLid0001693MnU20260406020129.0m     o  d s      cr            240715s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9798218323714  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2000aInstitutional Racism in the United States Revisited 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bChapman Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologue -- Foreword: Where This Publication Came From, and Where It Should Take You -- Positionality Statement -- Understanding “Incongruous” Data -- Using This Digital Resource -- Chapter Summaries for Quick Reference for Researchers -- Chapter 1: The Institutional and Ideological Roots of Racism -- Chapter 2: Racism in the Economy -- Chapter 3: The Unequal Education of Students in the United States -- Chapter 4: The Miseducation of Students in the United States -- Chapter 5: Disenfranchisement and Voter Suppression -- Chapter 6: Racism in the Administration of Justice -- Chapter 7: Institutional Racism in Healthcare -- Acknowledgments0 aThis book aims to examine the current state of systemic racism in the United States as compared to baseline data collected in 1969. Using recent findings in the fields of history, economics, education, political science and public health, the work reveals the ways in which systemic racism in the US has and has not been addressed in the past five decades.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aPeters, Carmichaeleauthor1 aKnowles, Louis L.eauthor1 aCramer, Rodè F.eauthor1 aKeldin, Glennaneauthor1 aNelson, Hayleyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1693zAccess online version02037nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100003800145245005700183264004300240264008800283264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505022500548520063200773542001601405546001601421588004001437650003201477650003801509710003901547856007701586OTLid0001694MnU20260406020642.0m     o  d s      cr            240715s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aHeath Van Horn, Mathew J.eauthor00aMastering Enterprise NetworkscMathew Heath Van Horn 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEmbry-Riddle Aeronautical Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part I. Setting Up the GNS3 Environment -- Part II. Building an Enterprise Network -- Part III. Defending an Enterprise Network -- Part IV. Attacking an Enterprise Network -- Part V. Supplemental Material0 aMastering Enterprise Networks, is a comprehensive guide to building, defending, and attacking enterprise networks. It covers a wide range of topics, from network fundamentals to advanced security concepts. The book is well-organized and easy to follow, making it a valuable resource for both beginners and experienced network professionals. One of the strengths of this book is its focus on hands-on learning. The book includes 50 chapters of labs that allow readers to practice the concepts they have learned. These labs are a great way to reinforce your understanding of enterprise networks while developing practical skills.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1694zAccess online version02194nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127100003000142245010600172264004300278264005700321264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002800500490002700528505020600555520075000761542001601511546001601527588004101543650005001584700003301634700003701667710003901704856007701743OTLid0001696MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240729s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.81 aWintermute, H. E.eauthor04aThe DEI Metadata HandbookbA Guide to Diverse, Equitable, and Inclusive DescriptioncH. E. Wintermute 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- Inclusive Description -- Name Authority Considerations -- Persons and Groups -- Classification -- Subject Headings -- Accessibility -- Afterword -- About the Authors0 aWritten primarily for professionals in library and information science but with applicability to archives and other information management industries, this handbook provides an overview of metadata work that focuses on diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI). DEI metadata work has several goals: enhancing diverse representation in descriptive metadata; improving discovery of diverse resources; and mitigating negative effects of inaccurate, outdated, or offensive terminology. Readers will gain a broad awareness of DEI-related issues in metadata creation and management; learn techniques for retroactively reviewing and updating existing metadata to address these issues; and develop strategies to create metadata that better meets DEI needs.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks1 aCampbell, Heather M.eauthor1 aDieckman, Christopher S.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1696zAccess online version03377nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000800136245007400144264004300218264011500261264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505044100553520161500994542001602609546001602625588004102641650003202682650002702714700002602741700002702767700002702794700003002821710003902851856007702890OTLid0001697MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA103aAn Introduction to Python Jupyter Notebooks for College Math Teachers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPaul Isihara, Claire Wagner, Peter Jantsch, and Thomas VanDrunenc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Pre-College - Wheaton College Team -- Python Programming Guide -- Exploratory Data Analysis -- Probability -- Statistical Inference -- Applied Calculus for Daily life -- Calculus -- Linear Algebra -- Line Algebra and Optimization for Data Analysis -- Differential Equations -- Differential Equations for the Benefit of Society -- Complex Variables in Groundwater Modeling -- Advanced Data Analysis -- Complex Systems -- Index0 aThis book is an introduction to the use of Python Jupyter Notebooks (JNBs) for college math teachers and their students. The book is an evolving work in progress, but we hope this 1st Edition may already be quite useful to a college math teacher who is interested to use Jupyter Notebooks in their courses. Each section of the book has been written in the form of a Jupyter Notebook and can be downloaded using the download button at the top menu bar. In some cases, additional data files or image files may need to be downloaded as well. All the files are available in the src folder of the github repository https://github.com/timothyprojectGiG/JB_Math_Textbook Each chapter contains a JNB lab with solutions. Experienced teachers can modify these labs and create new labs tailored to their courses. The chapters were written by different authors/authorship teams, and as such, vary in style. Each chapter essentially can be read independently of the others as long as one has the pre-requisite mathematical knowledge. Some effort has been made to standardize the chapter formats, and the index may help the reader find specific topics of interest. There is virtually no limit to what can be done with JNBs, and we hope this work serves as a useful starting point for teachers and students to enrich and enliven the study of mathematics using this tool. The JNBs used to create this book contain special markdown code which are needed to produce features such as indexing, referencing, and highlight boxes in the Jupyter Book. Some editing of a downloaded JNB may may make it more suitable for classroom use.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aIsihara, Pauleauthor1 aWagner, Claireeauthor1 aJantsch, Petereauthor1 aVanDrunen, Thomaseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1697zAccess online version03583nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000800155100003400163245005300197264004300250264006400293264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002800479490002700507505020000534520220600734542001602940546001602956588004002972650004203012650002703054710003903081856007703120OTLid0001698MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463668927  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQA11 aTeunissen, Peter J.G.eauthor00aTesting theoryban introductioncPeter Teunissen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Basic concepts of hypothesis testing -- Testing of simple hypotheses -- Testing of composite hypotheses -- Hypothesis testing in linear models -- Appendices -- Literature -- Index0 aThese lecture notes are a follow up on Adjustment theory. Adjustment theory deals with the optimal combination of redundant measurements together with the estimation of unknown parameters. There are two main reasons for performing redundant measurements. First, the wish to increase the accuracy of the results computed. Second, the requirement to be able to check for mistakes or errors. The present book addresses this second topic. Although one always will try one's best to avoid making mistakes, they can and will occasionally happen. It is therefore of importance to have ways of detecting and identifying such mistakes. Mistakes or errors can come in many different guises. They could be caused by mistakes made by the observer, or by the fact that defective instruments are used, or by wrong assumptions about the functional relations between the observables. When passed unnoticed, these errors will deteriorate the final results. The goal of this introductory course on testing theory is therefore to convey the necessary knowledge for testing the validity of both the measurements and the mathematical model. Typical questions that will be addressed are: 'How to check the validity of the mathematical model? How to search for certain mistakes or errors? How well can errors be traced? And how do undetected errors affect the final results?' The theory is worked out in detail for the important case of linear(ized) models. Both the parametric form (observation equations) and the implicit form (condition equations) of linear models are treated. As an additional aid in understanding the basic principles involved, a geometric interpretation is given throughout. Attention is also paid to the performance of the testing procedures. The closely related concept of reliability is introduced and diagnostic measures are given to determine the size of the minimal detectable biases. In this introductory text the methodology of testing is emphasized, although various examples are given to illustrate the theory. The methods discussed form the basis for geodetic quality control and they provide the ingredients for the formulation of guidelines for the reliable design of measurement set-ups.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1698zAccess online version02525nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245008100158264004300239264004200282264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505021700501520105600718542004101774546001601815588004001831650003401871700002601905700002701931700002601958700002701984710003902011856007702050OTLid0001699MnU20260406020817.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645838848  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A400aBecoming a Climate Conscious LawyerbClimate and the Australian Legal System 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Chapter 1: Legal Education in a Changing Climate -- Chapter 2: Climate Change and Administrative Law -- Chapter 3: Climate Change and Criminal Law -- Versioning History -- Review Statement -- Glossary0 aAs the world grapples with the escalating challenges of climate change, the legal profession finds itself at a crossroads. Becoming a Climate Conscious Lawyer: Climate and the Australian Legal System provides an original, innovative, and accessible analysis of the impact of climate change on legal doctrines and principles. It offers an overview of cutting-edge developments and how the transition to a low-carbon society is reshaping a wide range of laws, from corporate to criminal law, and beyond. This valuable new resource supports legal professionals, law students, and legal educators to understand current legal challenges – providing the know-how to strategically navigate, and positively influence, the development of law to respond to a climate changed world. The book delivers a transformative approach to legal education: equipping law students to become climate-conscious professionals with the confidence and competency to deliver legal solutions to a diverse range of clients, and promote climate justice across diverse communities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aHuggins, Annaeauthor1 aHawkins, Elleneauthor1 aTudor, Steveneauthor1 aRogers, Nicoleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1699zAccess online version03061nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245013200154264004300286264007000329264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505030000576520136300876542004102239546002702280588004102307650003902348650003202387700004402419700004002463700004402503710003902547856007702586OTLid0001700MnU20260406020131.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651389  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aInteligencia Artificial Aplicada con técnicas de Procesamiento de Lenguaje Natural y Machine Learning en el campo de la salud. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Planteamiento del problema -- Capítulo II: Marco teórico -- Capítulo III: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo IV: Conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa Inteligencia Artificial (IA), el Procesamiento del Lenguaje Natural (NLP) y el Aprendizaje Automático (ML) han jugado un papel crucial en la lucha contra la pandemia de Covid-19, proporcionando herramientas tecnológicas valiosas para el diagnóstico, seguimiento y control de la enfermedad, implementándose soluciones con IA para mitigar sus efectos. Se propone el diseño de un modelo de ML aplicando técnicas NLP en el preprocesamiento de texto para poder evaluar la eficacia del análisis de datos en conversaciones de personas contagiadas del coronavirus SARS-CoV-2. Se recopiló información de redes sociales como Twitter y Facebook, y encuestas a contagiados de Covid-19 en la Zona 8 de la provincia del Guayas. Con estos datos, se entrenó un sistema de clasificación textual utilizando los algoritmos de Soporte de Máquina Vectorial y Random Forest. El estudio resultó en una precisión del 96% en ambos modelos, demostrando su viabilidad para la creación e implementación de clasificadores de texto. Se logró mejorar el rendimiento del modelo, reduciendo las categorías con más de 200 ocurrencias, lo que resultó en una precisión más elevada sin diferencias significativas entre ambos modelos. Por último, se desarrolló un sitio web capaz de clasificar correctamente los síntomas y recomendaciones comentadas por los pacientes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aVarela-Tapia, Eleanor Alexandraeauthor1 aAcosta-Guzmán, Ivan Leoneleauthor1 aOviedo-Peñafiel, Jorge Albertoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1700zAccess online version03475nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245007400161264004300235264007000278264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505035300525520182600878542004102704546002702745588004102772650002502813650003102838700004902869700004302918710003902961856007703000OTLid0001701MnU20260406020131.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651372  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH100aCadena de Valor de los Residuos Sólidos UrbanosbUn Enfoque Integral 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Marco contextual y teórico de la investigación -- Capítulo II: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo III: Resultados -- Capítulo IV: Discusión, conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Capítulo V: Anexos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl incremento de los residuos sólidos plantea desafíos ambientales y económicos, la cadena de valor se enfoca en optimizar su gestión para promover la sostenibilidad desde la generación hasta la disposición final. Esta investigación se desarrolló en la parroquia Velasco Ibarra con el objetivo de evaluar la cadena de valor de los residuos sólidos urbanos en el cantón El Empalme. Para ello se realizaron encuestas con escala de Likert a 368 hogares, 334 empresas y 5 centros de reciclaje, utilizando muestreo probabilístico aleatorio simple. Además, se entrevistó al funcionario municipal responsable del manejo de residuos. En el programa SPSS se analizó la confiabilidad de las encuestas con el coeficiente alfa de Cronbach, obteniendo valores de (0,929) para los hogares, (0,949) empresas y (0,908) recicladoras. También se efectuó un análisis de normalidad utilizando la prueba de Kolmogorov-Smirnov y correlaciones con el coeficiente Rho de Spearman. Se elaboró una matriz FODA para los factores que afectan la gestión de residuos y se diseñó una cadena de valor para mejorar su manejo de manera eficaz. Los resultados revelaron correlaciones significativas entre la frecuencia de recolección de residuos y la satisfacción de la población (0,718), entre el cumplimiento legal de residuos peligrosos y el monitoreo regular en empresas (0,504). Existe una débil correlación (0,395) entre las preferencias de las recicladoras y la eficiencia de las operaciones. Se destacaron fortalezas, debilidades, oportunidades y amenazas en la gestión de residuos, que requieren atención inmediata. La cadena de valor diseñada proporciona actividades para mejorar la problemática. En conclusión, la gestión de residuos sólidos es ineficiente por la descoordinación entre los actores involucrados.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aVillanueva-Conforme, Genesis Manuelaeauthor1 aCervantes-Molina, Ximena Paolaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1701zAccess online version02872nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245012700161264004300288264007000331264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505037400578520115600952542004102108546002702149588004102176650002502217650003102242700004402273700004102317710003902358856007702397OTLid0001702MnU20260119020752.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651365  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH100aDosis de silicio como nueva estrategia para el control de la mancha marrón (Bipolaris oryzae) en arroz (Oryza sativa L.). 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Planteamiento del problema -- Capítulo II: Definición de términos utilizados en la investigación -- Capítulo III: Metodología de la investigación -- Capítulo IV: Resultados -- Capítulo V: Discusión y conclusiones -- Anexos -- Referencias bibliográficas0 aLa mancha marrón del arroz es causada por el hongo Bipolaris oryzae y afecta a todos los productores de arroz (Oryza sativa L.). El objetivo general del presente trabajo de investigación fue evaluar diferentes dosis de silicio para el control de la mancha marrón en el cultivo de arroz y sus efectos en diferentes variables agronómicas. La presente investigación se llevó a cabo en el campus “La María”, Universidad Técnica Estatal de Quevedo, ubicada en el Km 7.5 Vía Quevedo – El Empalme. Se utilizó un diseño de bloques completamente al azar con 7 tratamientos y 3 repeticiones. Todos los tratamientos recibieron la misma dosis de NPK (93 – 17 – 108 kg ha-1). El silicio utilizado en la investigación fue SIO-DEM+ (85% SiO2). Los tratamientos aplicados fueron un control (uso de fungicida), y 5 dosis de silicio (188, 282, 376, 470 y 564 kg ha-1). La dosis de 564 kg silicio ha-1 fue superior para altura y peso de 1,000 granos. La dosis de 282 kg silicio ha-1 es recomendada debido a su control de la enfermedad similar al resto de tratamientos y tener al tener una rentabilidad de 5% superior en comparación con el control.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aAvellaneda-Vázquez, Juan Pabloeauthor1 aHerrera-Eguez, Favio Eduardoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1702zAccess online version03574nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154245009900161264004300260264007000303264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505058400550520162401134542004102758546002702799588004102826650002502867650003102892700004702923700004002970700003803010710003903048856007703087OTLid0001703MnU20260406020132.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651358  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH100aContribución a la gestión integral de los residuos sólidos urbanos en cantones del Ecuador. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Marco teórico referencial de la investigación -- Capítulo II: Procedimiento para el mejoramiento de la gestión integral de los residuos sólidos urbanos con un enfoque de cadena de suministros -- Capítulo III: Aplicación del procedimiento para el mejoramiento de la gestión integral de los residuos sólidos urbanos con un enfoque de cadena de suministros en el Cantón Quevedo -- Capítulo IV: Conclusiones generales y Recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEn la presente investigación se elabora un procedimiento general y sus específicos cuyo objetivo es contribuir a mejorar el desempeño de la gestión integral de la cadena de suministro de los residuos sólidos urbanos en cantones del Ecuador. El procedimiento propuesto resuelve las insuficiencias de las herramientas precedentes analizadas en la construcción del marco teórico referencial, al incluir un modelo multicriterio y tener un enfoque sistémico de mejoramiento continuo basado en procesos. La investigación comienza con la caracterización de la cadena objeto de estudio y la identificación de los indicadores al incluir en el diagnóstico desde una perspectiva de sostenibilidad. Al mismo tiempo, se propone un indicador de desempeño integral para evaluar la cadena de suministro, junto con las escalas pertinentes para cada uno de estos indicadores y el desempeño de la cadena de suministro de los residuos sólidos urbanos. Los resultados obtenidos permitieron el diagnóstico del nivel de desempeño en que se encuentra la gestión de residuos sólidos urbanos, y en consecuencia proyectar, mediante un modelo matemático multicriterio, las políticas para el mejoramiento gradual de dicha gestión. En el caso de la cadena de suministro de los residuos sólidos urbanos del Cantón Quevedo de Ecuador permitió la identificación de oportunidades de mejoras basadas en los problemas detectados. Además, se comprobó la hipótesis general de investigación planteada al evidenciar una mejora en el índice de desempeño de la cadena objeto de estudio después de aplicar un conjunto de mejoras.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aAlcocer-Quinteros, Rubén Patricioeauthor1 aKnudsen-González, José A.eauthor1 aMarrero-Delgado, Fernandoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1703zAccess online version04144nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153245004800163264004300211264007000254264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505084500501520198201346542004103328546002703369588004103396650002703437650002303464700004003487700004503527700004603572710003903618856007703657OTLid0001704MnU20260406020132.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651334  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQH30100aFundamentos teóricos de química orgánica 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Introducción a la química del carbono -- Capítulo II: Enlaces covalentes -- Capítulo III: Grupos funcionales y reacciones -- Capítulo IV: Isomerismo -- Capítulo V: Alcanos -- Capítulo VI: Alquenos -- Capítulo VII: Alquinos -- Capítulo VIII: Hidrocarburos cíclicos -- Capítulo IX: Hidrocarburos aromáticos -- Capítulo X: Halogenuros de alquilo -- Capítulo XI: Alcoholes y fenoles -- Capítulo XII: Tioles -- Capítulo XIII: Éteres -- Capítulo XIV: Aldehídos -- Capítulo XV: Cetonas -- Capítulo XVI: Ácido carboxílico -- Capítulo XVII: Ésteres -- Capítulo XVIII: Aminas -- Capítulo XIX: Amidas -- Capítulo XX: Nitrilos -- Capítulo XXI: Polímeros -- Capítulo XXII: Biomoléculas -- Referencias Bibliograficas0 aFundamentos teóricos de química orgánica es una obra integral que proporciona una comprensión sólida de los principios fundamentales de la química orgánica, dirigida tanto a estudiantes como a profesionales. El libro abarca desde los conceptos básicos de la química del carbono hasta la complejidad de las biomoléculas, estructurando el contenido de manera lógica y progresiva. El Capítulo I explora las propiedades de los compuestos orgánicos, los elementos básicos y las formas de representación; seguido del Capítulo II que profundiza en los enlaces covalentes, la hibridación del carbono y las estructuras moleculares. El Capítulo III detalla los grupos funcionales y las reacciones comunes, como adición, eliminación, sustitución y oxidación, mientras que el Capítulo IV aborda la isomería estructural y estereoisomería. Posteriormente, los Capítulos V, VI y VII describen alcanos, alquenos y alquinos, respectivamente, cubriendo definición, formulación, nomenclatura, propiedades y métodos de obtención. El Capítulo VIII trata los hidrocarburos cíclicos y el Capítulo IX los hidrocarburos aromáticos, como el benceno. Además, el Capítulo X se enfoca en halogenuros de alquilo, mientras que los Capítulos XI a XV abordan alcoholes, fenoles, tioles, éteres, aldehídos y cetonas, detallando su definición, formulación, propiedades, obtención y nomenclatura. El Capítulo XVI y el Capítulo XVII discuten ácidos carboxílicos y ésteres, respectivamente, y los Capítulos XVIII a XX cubren aminas, amidas y nitrilos. Finalmente, el Capítulo XXI introduce polímeros naturales y sintéticos, y el Capítulo XXII aborda bioelementos y biomoléculas esenciales para la vida, como carbohidratos, lípidos, proteínas y ácidos nucleicos, proporcionando una base teórica robusta complementada con ejemplos prácticos y aplicaciones, convirtiéndose en una referencia esencial para cualquier persona interesada en la química orgánica.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aRuiz-Sánchez, Clara Isabeleauthor1 aHerrera-Feijoo, Robinson Jasmanyeauthor1 aCorrea-Salgado, María de Lourdeseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1704zAccess online version03315nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245009400164264004300258264007000301264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002800493490002700521505035500548520141100903542004102314546002702355588004102382650002502423650003102448700004002479700004402519700004802563700004402611700005102655700004702706710003902753856007702792OTLid0001705MnU20260406020132.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651341  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aIntegrando IA en los Nuevos Paradigmas de las Ciencias Económicas y Gestión Empresarial 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Inteligencia Artificial en la Administración -- Capítulo II: Inteligencia Artificial en la Contabilidad -- Capítulo III: Inteligencia Artificial en Finanzas -- Capítulo IV: Inteligencia Artificial en Economía -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro aborda la integración de la inteligencia artificial (IA) en diferentes áreas de las ciencias económicas y la gestión empresarial, explorando sus impactos y beneficios. En la introducción, se destaca cómo la transformación digital redefine las estrategias organizacionales y fomenta la innovación continua, mejorando la capacidad de respuesta a las demandas del mercado​​. Metodológicamente, se utilizan estudios de caso y análisis de datos para ilustrar la aplicación de la IA. Los resultados muestran que, en la contabilidad, la IA automatiza tareas repetitivas, reduce errores y mejora la precisión, permitiendo a los profesionales centrarse en actividades estratégicas​​. En el ámbito financiero, los algoritmos de trading inteligente aumentan la velocidad y precisión de las transacciones, mejorando la competitividad y la liquidez del mercado​​. La gestión de riesgos se beneficia de modelos predictivos que anticipan posibles amenazas, mientras que el cumplimiento normativo se fortalece mediante el monitoreo automatizado​​. En términos de desarrollo sostenible, la IA optimiza la distribución de recursos y mejora la eficiencia energética, contribuyendo a políticas más verdes y equitativas​​. La conclusión resalta la necesidad de un enfoque ético y transparente en la implementación de IA, para asegurar decisiones justas y responsables​​.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aDíaz-Avelino, José Rafaeleauthor1 aCasanova-Villalba, César Iváneauthor1 aCarrillo-Barragán, César Estuardoeauthor1 aCueva-Jiménez, María Gabrielaeauthor1 aHerrera-Sánchez, Maybelline Jaquelineeauthor1 aZambrano-Muñoz, Cinthya Katherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1705zAccess online version02628nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000800136100002800144245009800172264004300270264008000313264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505063200570520079301202542002701995546001602022588004102038650003202079650002702111710003902138856007702177OTLid0001706MnU20260406020131.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA11 aDavies, Stepheneauthor04aThe Crystal Ball Instruction ManualcStephen DaviesnVolume Two: Foundations For Data Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Mary Washingtonc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntermission and review -- Navigating the Spyder’s web -- EDA: review and extensions -- KDEs and distributions -- Random value generation -- Synthetic data sets -- JSON (1 of 2) -- JSON (2 of 2) -- LOWESS -- Data fusion -- Long, wide, and “tidy” data -- Dates and times -- Using logarithms -- Accessing databases -- Screen scraping (1 of 2) -- Screen scraping (2 of 2) -- Probabilistic reasoning -- Causality -- Naïve Bayes (1 of 3) -- Naïve Bayes (2 of 3) -- Naïve Bayes (3 of 3) -- APIs -- kNN (1 of 2) -- kNN (2 of 2) -- Two key ML principles -- Feature selection -- Association Analysis -- “Special” data types0 aWelcome to Volume Two of the Crystal Ball series: Foundations for Data Science! I titled the first volume “Introduction to Data Science” because it led you through a dip-your-toes-in-the-water experience. You took a brief tour through the various elements in this diverse field and got a feel for what it was all about. Since you’re still reading, this means you’re still interested, and ready to explore the next level. In Foundations, we’ll solidify your growing knowledge so that you have a firm base on which to build everything else. Future volumes in this series will cover applications, advanced techniques, and some special data types that require special treatment. But it all ultimately rests on the skill set you’ll have built in Volumes One and Two of this series.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1706zAccess online version02388nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002400137245004200161250001600203264004300219264003700262264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002800421490002700449505036700476520092800843542004101771546001601812588004001828650004201868710003901910856007701949OTLid0001707MnU20260406020132.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aDavis, Chadeauthor00aElectromechanical SystemscChad Davis  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNorman, OklahomabSHAREOKc2024. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- LabVIEW Overview -- Module 1 - Number Systems and Character Encoding -- Module 2 - Digital Logic -- Module 3 - Measurement and Instrumentation Overview -- Module 4 - Sensors -- Module 5 - Power Systems -- Module 6 - Electric Machines -- Module 7 - Computer Communications -- Appendix A - Step by Step Guide to Digital, Analog, and Counter IOs in a DAQ0 aThis eBook was written as the third installment in the series that coincide with three engineering courses taught at the University of Oklahoma (ENGR 2431, ENGR 2531, and ENGR 3431). These courses were designed to provide non-major students – those not majoring in electrical or computer engineering (ECE) – a foundation in various ECE topics. ENGR 2431 is a prerequisite for both ENGR 2531 and ENGR 3431 and it is recommended that the DC Circuits book be studied prior to beginning the eBooks created for the other two courses. The following topics are covered in this book: LabVIEW Overview Module 1 – Number Systems and Character Encoding Module 2 – Digital Logic Module 3 – Measurement and Instrumentation Overview Module 4 – Sensors Module 5 – Power Systems Module 6 – Electric Machines Module 7 – Computer Communications Appendix A – Step by Step Guide to Digital, Analog, and Counter IOs in a DAQ1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1707zAccess online version02487nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245007700137250001600214264004300230264003700273264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505017000487520115300657542004101810546001601851588004101867650004201908700002301950700002401973710003901997856007702036OTLid0001708MnU20260406020133.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aMeasurement and InstrumentationbAn Introduction to Concepts and Methods  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNorman, OklahomabSHAREOKc2024. 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aList Of Tables -- List Of Figures -- Chapter 1 -- Chapter 2 -- Chapter 3 -- Chapter 4 -- Chapter 5 -- Chapter 6 -- Chapter 7 -- Chapter 8 -- References -- Appendix A0 aMeasurement and instrumentation are fundamental elements of many engineering projects. From research, to development, to manufacturing, to user products, engineers are constantly needing to measure things: brightness of a light, dimensions of an object, separation between things, frequency content, stress, strain, pressure, voltage, etc. In the real world measuring systems are not perfect, so the results of a measurement are only an estimate of the true value. Instrumentation for making measurements relies on some fundamental assumptions to ensure the veracity of the measurements. Some key elements are: bandwidth, sampling rate, dynamic range, sensor type, etc. This text discusses the basic concepts of what a measurement is, how the instrumentation chosen (or developed) can affect the measurement, and how to deal with the measurement error that is in all instrumentation systems. Topics include data acquisition, signal conditioning, sensor types, and measurement noise and its various noise distributions. The text concludes with three user projects that bring together these topics into an informative work that reinforces the theory.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aDyer, Johneauthor1 aDavis, Chadeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1708zAccess online version02294nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100003000144245006100174264004300235264007600278264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505055500531520057401086542003001660546001601690588004001706650003301746650002501779710003901804856007701843OTLid0001709MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            240801s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aStansberry, Susaneauthor00aApplications of Educational TechnologycSusan Stansberry 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc2024. 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Cover Page -- OpenOKState Spotify Playlist -- Learning to Learn any Technology -- Differentiated Learning with Educational Technology -- Instructional Design -- Technology Integration -- Assessing Learning -- Online Intelligence -- Curating Open Educational Resources -- Using Technology Resources in Different Learning Environments -- Lesson Makeover -- Communication and Collaboration with Parents and Students -- Innovative Pedagogies -- Digital Media Production -- Project Based Learning -- Digital Citizenship -- About the Author0 aWelcome to the Applications of Educational Technology eBook. The resource comes alongside the Oklahoma State University Emerging Technologies and Creativity Research Lab, where students in this class will play and help in transforming education through creative habits! The purpose of this online resource is to serve as an interactive open textbook for EDTC 3123 Applications of Educational Technology at Oklahoma State University. We invite you to ask questions, contribute resources, and participate in making this a living, collaborative resource for all educators!1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1709zAccess online version02724nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134100002800147245003300175264004300208264005600251264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505102200484520056901506542004102075546001602116588004102132650002502173650003602198710003902234856007702273OTLid0001711MnU20260330020141.0m     o  d s      cr            240815s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1062.61 aKrause, Timothyeauthor00aAmalgamationcTimothy Krause 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPortland, OregonbPortland Community Collegec2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnit 1: Moving from paragraphs to essays -- The Writing Process -- What Is a Paragraph? -- Formatting Paragraphs -- Paragraph Practice -- Grammar: Parts of Speech -- Grammar: Sentence Types -- What Is an Essay? -- Writing Assignment: Essay 1 -- Unit 2: Telling a compelling story -- Pre-Writing -- Paragraph Preparation -- What Is Narrative Writing? -- Paragraph Practice -- Grammar: Sequence of Events -- Grammar: Adjectives and Adverbs -- Organizing a Narrative Essay -- Writing Assignment: Essay 2 -- Unit 3: It's a process -- Pre-Writing -- Choosing a Topic -- Paragraph Preparation -- What is Process Writing? -- Paragraph Practice -- Vocabulary, Grammar, and Mechanics -- Organizing a Process Essay -- Writing Assignment: Essay 3 -- Unit 4: Exactly the same or totally different? -- Pre-Writing -- What Is Comparison and Contrast Writing? -- Paragraph Practice -- Vocabulary, Grammar, and Mechanics -- Writing Assignment: Essay 4 -- Unit 5: Good writing is rewriting -- Focus on editing -- Focus on proofreading0 aThis intermediate writing course is designed for ESOL students as their first step toward academic writing in U.S. colleges. Each two-week unit integrates vocabulary, grammar, and composition in a "just in time" fashion so that students receive instruction on the key tools they need in order to accomplish new writing goals. The lessons cover a basic essay, narrative essay, process essay, and compare/contrast essay. There is also a final one-week unit devoted to editing and proofreading skills. This edition is an update and expansion of work by Delpha Thomas.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1711zAccess online version02463nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001200139050001000151050001000161100002400171245006400195264004300259264005700302264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002500481490002700506505085500533520037201388542001601760546001601776588004001792650002301832650002301855650002401878650002301902710003901925856007701964OTLid0001712MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240903s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQM1-695 4aRA440 4aQH3011 aManz, Carlyeauthor00aFundamentals of Human Anatomy Laboratory ManualcCarly Manz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Lab 1: Introduction to Human Anatomy & Anatomical Terminology -- Lab 2: Cells and Tissues I -- Lab 3: Tissues II and Integumentary system -- Lab 4: Skeletal System I - Bone Tissue and Axial Skeleton -- Lab 5: Skeletal System II - Appendicular Skeleton and Joints -- Lab 6: Muscular System I - Muscle Tissue and Hindlimb Muscles -- Lab 7: Muscular System II - Forelimb and Axial Muscles -- Lab 8: Nervous system I - Nervous Tissue, Brain, Spinal Cord, and Cranial Nerves -- Lab 9: Nervous system II - Special Senses -- Lab 10: Cardiovascular System I - Blood and the Heart -- Lab 11: Cardiovascular system II - Blood Vessels -- Lab 12: Lymphatic & Respiratory systems -- Lab 13: Endocrine system & Digestive system -- Lab 14: Urinary system & Reproductive system -- Terms that may be asked on the BIOL 255L practical -- Acknowledgments0 aThis laboratory manual is meant to be used in a lab course that accompanies a college-level introductory human anatomy course. It covers the language of anatomy, cells and tissues, and the organ systems that comprise the human body. Multiple open textbooks were adapted to create this lab manual. Attribution for these sources are provided at the end of each chapter.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1712zAccess online version01962nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245002700145264004300172264005800215264001200273300002200285336002600307337002600333338003600359341002800395490002700423505035400450520046400804542002701268546001601295588004001311650003001351650002301381700002801404700002801432710003901460856007701499OTLid0001713MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240903s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aPlant Breeding Methods 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Types of Cultivars and Modes of Plant Reproduction -- Sources of Parental Germplasm -- Population Formation by Hybridization -- Techniques for Artificial Hybridization -- Mutation Breeding -- Novel Traits from Molecular Genetics and Biotechnology -- Backcrossing -- Inbreeding -- Recurrent Selection -- Key Terms -- About the Authors0 aThis text has been compiled to provide an overview of how plant breeders develop cultivars of plant species. The methods that breeders use depend directly on the type of cultivar used to produce a commercial crop. The four most common types of cultivars are (a) clonal cultivars (b) synthetic cultivars (c) pure-line cultivars and (d) hybrid cultivars. These types of cultivars will be discussed throughout the book, alongside review questions for self-study.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aFehr, Walter R.eauthor1 aSuza, Walter P.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1713zAccess online version02017nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003300135245004800168264004300216264007700259264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002800458490002700486505036100513520057500874542001601449546001601465588004001481650003001521710003901551856007701590OTLid0001714MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            240905s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE11 aBurkett, PhD, Ashleyeauthor04aThe Story of DinosaurscAshley Burkett, PhD 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- OpenOKState Student Privacy Guidelines -- Week 1: Welcome -- Week 2: Warm or Cold-blooded? -- Week 3: All About the Stegosaurus -- Week 4: Dino Parents -- Week 5: How to Outrun a T-rex -- Week 6: Flight and Feathers -- Week 7: Dinosaur Extinction -- Bonus: Hollywood's Dinosaurs -- Finals Week -- For Instructors -- 10.1 -- Links by Chapter0 aThis resource will explore the validity of arguments and/or conclusions in dinosaur research through evaluating the scientific evidence. Students using this resource will read, experiment, and evaluate scientific literature surrounding dinosaurs. Students will have the opportunity to work with others to evaluate the plausibility of the dinosaur concepts and theories, and engage in hands-on experiments to add additional information to their interpretations. Students will learn to participate in evaluation mechanisms to assess critical thinking and science literacy.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1714zAccess online version05950nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155050001300166245004100179264004300220264007700263264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002800462490002700490505358800517520088104105542004104986546001605027588004005043650002405083650004305107650003605150700003605186700003105222700002805253700002805281700002505309700003005334710003905364856007705403OTLid0001715MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            240905s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957983059  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP94.7 4aHF5001 4aP95-95.600aIntroduction to Speech Communication 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Statement -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Why Public Speaking Matters Today -- Public Speaking in the Twenty-First Century -- Why is Public Speaking Important? -- The Process of Public Speaking -- Enrichment -- Chapter 2: Building Confidence -- What is Communication Apprehension? -- Classifying Communication Apprehension -- Learning Confidence -- Enrichment -- Chapter 3: Delivery -- The Importance of Delivery -- Methods of Speech Delivery -- Preparing for Your Delivery -- Practicing your Delivery -- What to do When Delivering Your Speech -- Public Speaking Online -- Enrichment -- Chapter 4: Ethics -- The Ethics Pyramid -- Ethics in Public Speaking -- Free Speech -- Enrichment -- Chapter 5: Audience Analysis -- What is Audience Analysis? -- Why Conduct an Audience Analysis? -- Three Types of Audience Analysis -- Conducting Audience Analysis -- Using Your Audience Analysis -- Enrichment -- Chapter 6: Culture and Communication -- Foundations of Culture and Identity -- Exploring Specific Cultural Identities -- Intercultural Communication -- Intercultural Communication Competence -- Enrichment -- Chapter 7: Organizing and Outlining -- Why is Organizing and Outlining Important? -- The Topic, General Purpose, Specific Purpose, and Thesis -- Organizational Patterns of Arrangement -- Outlining Your Speech -- Enrichment -- Chapter 8: Researching Your Speech -- Library Resources -- What is Research? -- Developing a Research Strategy -- Citing Sources -- Enrichment -- Chapter 9: Supporting Ideas and Building Arguments -- Crafting Supporting Ideas -- Using Research as Support -- Exploring Types of Support -- Using Support and Creating Arguments -- Enrichment -- Chapter 10: Introductions and Conclusions -- Introductions -- Conclusions -- Enrichment -- Chapter 11: The Importance of Listening -- Importance of Listening -- Listening vs. Hearing -- Listening Styles -- Why Listening is Difficult -- Stages of Listening -- Listening Critically -- Enrichment -- Chapter 12: Language -- What Language Is and Does -- Standards for Language in Public -- Using Effective Language in Public Speaking -- Enrichment -- Chapter 13: Presentation Aids -- What Are Presentation Aids -- Functions of Presentation Aids -- Types of Presentation Aids -- Using Presentation Slides -- Low-Tech Presentation Aids -- Enrichment -- Chapter 14: Informative Speaking -- What is an Informative Speech -- Types of Informative Speeches -- Guidelines for Selecting an Informative Speech Topic -- Guidelines for Preparing an Informative Speech -- Giving Informative Speeches in Groups -- Sample Informative Speech Outline -- Enrichment -- Chapter 15: Understanding Small Group Communication -- Communicating in Small Groups -- Understanding Small Groups -- Small Group Development -- Small Group Dynamics -- Enrichment -- Chapter 16: Small Groups & Decision Making -- Leadership, Roles, and Problem Solving in Groups -- Leadership and Small Group Communication -- Group Member Roles -- Problem Solving and Decision Making in Groups -- Enrichment -- Chapter 17: Persuasive Speaking -- Why Persuade? -- A Definition of Persuasion -- Why is Persuasion Hard? -- Traditional Views of Persuasion -- Theories of Persuasive Communication -- Constructing a Persuasive Speech -- Sample Persuasive Speech Outline -- Enrichment -- Chapter 18: Special Occasion Speaking -- Understanding Special Occasion Speaking -- Types of Special Occasion Speeches -- Special Occasion Language -- Special Occasion Delivery -- Sample Special Occasion Speech Script -- Enrichment -- Glossary -- Links by Chapter0 aIntroduction to Speech Communication is used to support teaching, learning and research for SPCH 2713 at Oklahoma State University (OSU). In addition to inclusion of original work authored by the editors to meet the needs of their course at OSU, the editors adapted portions of Exploring Public Speaking: 4th Edition, Stand Up, Speak Out, and Fundamentals of Public Speaking. Please see the Acknowledgements chapter for full citations. We at Oklahoma State University Libraries acknowledge our gratitude for the expertise and generosity of the scholars at Affordable Learning Georgia, College of the Canyons, the Open Education Network and elsewhere for creating and sharing customizable versions of their work. This book also includes an audio version funded by Women for OSU, as well as updated images enabled by a grant from the Oklahoma State Regents for Higher Education.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aIntercultural CommunicationvTextbooks 0aSpeech CommunicationvTextbooks1 aHollingsworth, Sarah E.eauthor1 aLinsenmeyer, Meganeauthor1 aElwood, Terrisaeauthor1 aHanrahan, Sashaeauthor1 aWalker, Maryeauthor1 aWeinland, Kathryneeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1715zAccess online version02022nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154100002600161245003800187264004300225264005800268264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002800448490002700476505020500503520065900708542004101367546001601408588004001424650002501464650003101489710003901520856007701559OTLid0001716MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            240912s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781941823200  aMnUbengcMnU 4aG128 4aH11 aScott, Dorriseauthor00aDigital CartographycDorris Scott 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Louis, MObWashington University Librariesc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Basemaps and Big Picture Design -- Lettering and Layouts -- From Data to Design -- Color and Choropleth Maps -- Multivariate and Uncertainty Visualization -- Conclusion -- Book Updates0 aDigital Cartography covers foundational cartographic principles that are needed to make effective maps. lt explores such concepts as data, lettering, along with multivariate and uncertainty visualization. By the end of this book, a reader will be able to: (1) Describe how cartographic concepts such generalization, scale and projection will affect mapping products; (2) Identify the medium, purpose, and spatial data requirements to create a map that is appropriate to a specific audience; (3) Evaluate maps produced by peers and various organizations; and (4) Construct maps that effectively use color, font, and other design elements using ArcGIS Pro.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeographyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1716zAccess online version04992nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001000143100002800153245006800181264004300249264003000292264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505313700499520070403636542004104340546001604381588004004397650003604437650002904473710003904502856007704541OTLid0001717MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241002s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPN4699-5650 4aP91.31 aSylvia IV, J.J.eauthor00aIntroduction to Communication and Media StudiescJ.J. Sylvia IV 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLand Acknowledgement Statement for the ROTEL Grant -- How to Use This Book -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Communication and Media Studies -- 1.1 Communication: History and Forms -- 1.2 The Communication Process -- 1.3 Media Studies -- 1.4 What Does Media Do for Us? -- Chapter 2: Media, Society, Culture, and You -- 2.1 The Role of Mass Media in Society -- 2.2 Mass Media Growth and Consolidation -- 2.3 Mass Media and Popular Culture -- Chapter 3: Media Literacy -- 3.1 Approaches to Literacy -- 3.2 Media Theories for Media Literacy -- Chapter 4: Critical Thinking -- 4.1 Types of Reasoning -- 4.2 Fallacies -- Chapter 5: Rhetorical Appeals and Devices -- 5.1 Rhetorical Analysis -- 5.2 Rhetorical Devices -- Chapter 6: Rhetorical Analysis of Visual Texts -- 6.1 Overview of Visual Rhetoric -- 6.2 How to Analyze Visual Texts -- Chapter 7: The Printing Press -- 7.1 History of Books -- 7.2 Books and the Development of U.S. Popular Culture -- 7.3 Major Book Formats -- 7.4 Current Publishing Trends -- 7.5 The Influence of New Technology -- Chapter 8: Electrifying Communication: The Telegraph and Telephone -- 8.1 Historical and Technological Developments -- 8.2 Impacts of the Telegraph -- 8.3 From Dots and Dashes to Dial Tones -- Chapter 9: Newspapers and Digital News -- 9.1 History of Newspapers -- 9.2 Different Styles and Models of Journalism -- 9.3 How Newspapers Control the Public’s Access to Information and Impact American Pop Culture -- 9.4 Current Popular Trends in the Newspaper Industry -- 9.5 Online Journalism Redefines News -- 9.6. Media System in Germany -- Chapter 10: Film and Bricolage -- 10.1 The Film Profession -- 10.2 The History of Movies -- 10.3 Movies and Culture -- 10.4 The Influence of New Technology -- Chapter 11: Television through Time -- 11.1 The Evolution of Television -- 11.2 The Relationship Between Television and Culture -- 11.3 Issues and Trends in the Television Industry -- 11.4 Influence of New Technologies -- Chapter 12: Music Recording, Sharing, and the Information Economy -- 12.1 The Evolution of Popular Culture -- 12.2 The Recording Industry as Harbinger of Digital Disruption -- Chapter 13: Radio Broadcasting, Podcasting, and Superbug Media -- 13.1 Evolution of Radio Broadcasting -- 13.2 Radio’s Impact on Culture -- 13.3 Radio’s New Future -- Chapter 14: Digital Gaming -- 14.1 The Evolution of Electronic Games -- 14.2 The Impact of Video Games on Culture -- 14.3 Controversial Issues -- 14.4 Blurring the Boundaries Between Video Games, Information, Entertainment, and Communication -- Chapter 15: Advertising, Public Relations, and Propaganda -- 15.1 Advertising -- 15.2 Public Relations -- Chapter 16: Digital Culture: Social Media, Virtual Reality, and Augmented Reality -- 16.1 The Evolution of the Internet -- 16.2 Social Media and Web 2.0 -- 16.3 Issues and Trends -- Chapter 17: Ethical Issues -- 17.1 Ethical Issues in Mass Media -- 17.2 Ethical Considerations of the Online World -- 17.3 TikTok’s Enshittification -- Chapter 18: Racial Capitalism in the Age of Big Data: A Global Perspective -- 18.1 Racial Capitalism in the Age of Big Data -- Appendix0 aIntroduction to Communication and Media Studies is an in-depth exploration of how communication shapes our world. This book traces the historical evolution of media, from the early days of the printing press to today’s digital age, examining key developments such as the telegraph, radio, television, and the internet. It also covers critical theories that explain media’s impact on society, including the effects of advertising, the role of public relations, and the emergence of social media as a powerful force in modern communication. Chapters on media literacy, critical thinking, and rhetorical analysis help students develop critical skills for understanding and analyzing media messages.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNew Media JournalismvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1717zAccess online version05157nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002800144245014400172264004300316264003000359264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002800511490002700539505317900566520076503745542004104510546001604551588004004567650002904607650003104636710003904667856007704706OTLid0001718MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241002s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.3 4aH11 aSylvia IV, J.J.eauthor04aThe Data RenaissancebAnalyzing the Disciplinary Effects of Big Data, Artificial Intelligence, and Beyond [Revised Edition]cJ.J. Sylvia IV 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLand Acknowledgement Statement for the ROTEL Grant -- How to Use This Book -- Project Rationale -- Introduction -- I. Why Care About Data & Society? -- Introduction -- A Constitutional Right to Privacy? -- Little Brother -- Becoming Data -- A/B and Multivariate Testing -- Big Data -- An Open Question -- Wrap Up -- References -- II. Generative AI in the Classroom and Workspace -- Generative AI Pre-Test -- How Generative AI Works -- Differences Between ChatGPT 3 and 4 -- Links to Tools -- Prompt-Writing Tips -- AI Career Research -- Hands-on Project -- Discussion or Reflection Questions -- Language, Diversity, Inclusivity, and ChaptGPT -- Post-Test and Survey -- Wrap Up -- Further Reading -- III. Case Study: "It's Perfect, Four Stars!" -- Introduction -- Human Commerce -- Living and Dying by the Algorithms -- The “Fault” in Our Stars -- Who Rates the Rater? -- The Shift to “Objective” Stars -- Who Are We Rating? -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- IV. Media & Data Literacy -- Introduction -- Media Literacy -- Challenges with Media Literacy -- Data Literacy -- Similarities -- Understanding Data Literacy Skills -- Media Literacy & Data Literacy Skills -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- V. The American Motion Picture Industry and Big Data -- Introduction -- Predicting Box-Office Success in the Film Industry -- Big Data in the Film Industry -- How Data Has Been Used in the Film Industry -- Into the Future -- The Advantages of Big Data in the Film Industry -- The Limitations of Big Data in the Film Industry -- Outlook -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- VI. Data in Sports Marketing -- Introduction -- Understanding Big Data -- Sources of Data in Sports Marketing -- Data and Target Audience -- Data Used for Revenue -- Data Used for Campaigns -- The Future of Sports Marketing -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- VII. Data in Public Relations, Social Media, and Advertising -- Key Essentials -- Big Data -- Wrap Up -- References -- VIII. Machine Learning in the Development of Video Games -- Introduction -- Types of Learning -- Modern Applications of AI in Games -- Cheat Detection -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- IX. The Use of Matchmaking Data for Competitive Online Multiplayer Gaming -- Introduction -- The Matchmaking Process -- Analyzing Other Approaches -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- X. Video Games, Microstransactions, and Data -- Introduction -- How Common are Microstransactions? -- A Brief History -- How Quickly Can it Add Up? -- Impact of Microstransactions -- Conclusion -- Wrap Up -- References -- XI. SOPHIA Discussion Guides -- Ethics of Search Engines -- COVID-19: Surveillance and Personal Privacy -- AI & Ethics: A Discussion -- The Ethics of Fake News -- The Ethics of Social Media Use By Children -- XII. Data Feminism: The Numbers Don’t Speak for Themselves -- Principle: Consider Context -- Wrap Up -- XIII. Algorithms in the Age of Capitalism -- What Is an Algorithm? -- Complications with Algorithmic Systems -- What is Algorithmic Accountability? -- Wrap Up -- References -- XIV. Recommended Reading (and Listening/Viewing) -- Original Contributors -- Grant Information0 aThe Data Renaissance delves into the complexities of data's role in various industries and its broader impact on society. It highlights the challenges in investigating data practices, citing examples like TikTok, where algorithms and data handling are closely guarded secrets. The content, contributed by students under the guidance of an expert, covers a wide range of topics, including the ethical aspects of generative AI in education and the workplace, and case studies reflecting real-world experiences. This evolving text, intended to be updated with each class, serves as a dynamic resource for educators and students alike, offering insights and discussion guides for an in-depth understanding of the ever-changing landscape of data in our digital age.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1718zAccess online version02460nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002700147245006300174264004300237264003000280264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505046600487520087100953542004101824546001601865588004001881650002501921650002401946710003901970856007702009OTLid0001719MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241002s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA4401 aAlsup, Jessicaeauthor04aThe Basics of Health, Wellness, and FitnesscJessica Alsup 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMeet the Author -- Preface -- Sex and Gender in This Text -- Land Acknowledgement Statement for the ROTEL Grant -- Health and Wellness -- Behavior Change -- Physical Activity, Exercise, and Fitness -- Nutrition -- Cardiovascular Endurance -- Muscular Strength And Endurance -- Flexibility -- Body Composition -- Stress, Self Care, and Sleep -- References -- Question Bank: Check Your Understanding -- Glossary - Key Terms -- Grant Information -- Version History0 aThis book is written for anyone who could benefit from learning more about health, wellness, and fitness. Throughout the text, readers will learn about health and wellness, setting goals, physical activity and exercise, cardiovascular fitness, muscular strength and endurance, body composition, flexibility, nutrition, stress management, as well as self-care and sleep. In addition to providing important information about the above topics, the text also includes self assessment assignments and self-reflection opportunities. It is the aim of the author that readers increase their understanding regarding the idea that we are all dealt different hands in life, and we all have our history and our own experiences, but one thing we all have in common is that we can start now from wherever we are and make small changes to improve our health, wellness, and fitness.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1719zAccess online version03238nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002900136245011500165264004300280264003000323264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002800475490002700503505163100530520048202161542004102643546001602684588004002700650003202740710003902772856007702811OTLid0001720MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241002s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aWalton, Devan J.eauthor00aCulturally Responsive ComputingbAn Introduction into Computer Science, Security, and TechnologycDevan Walton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Land Acknowledgement Statement for the ROTEL Grant -- Chapter 1 - Computing and Global Cultures -- Historical Perspectives -- Cultural Impacts of Computing -- Cultural Exchange and Technology -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Challenges and Considerations -- Chapter 2 - Language, Logic, and Culture -- Foundations of Computational Logic and Culture -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 3 - Cultural Considerations in Programming Languages -- The Culture of Programming -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 4 - Data Types and Representations -- Data Types and Cultural Interpretations in Computing -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 5 - Algorithms, AI, and Cultural Bias -- Algorithms in Focus: From Basics to Biases -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 6 - Information Technology and Society -- Information Technology: Connecting and Dividing Cultures -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 7 - Culture and Context in Information Security -- Global Perspectives on Digital Defense -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 8 - Human-Centered Design and Computational Thinking Techniques -- Designing for Humans, Enabled by Computation -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 9 - Accessible and Inclusive Interface Design -- Designing User Experiences For All -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Chapter 10 - Technology, Art, and Culture -- Digital Transformation in Music, Gaming, and Culture -- Global Case Studies -- Chapter Reflection -- Grant Information0 a"Culturally Responsive Computing" is an essential textbook that explores the intricate relationship between technology and global societies. It gives students and professionals a deep understanding of how cultural contexts shape and are shaped by computing practices, from algorithm design to user interface development. This book equips readers with the knowledge and skills to create inclusive, ethical, and culturally sensitive technological solutions for our diverse world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1720zAccess online version04100nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100004300138245014700181264004300328264003000371264001200401300002200413336002600435337002600461338003600487341002800523490002700551505198600578520091102564542004103475546001603516588004003532650002603572650002403598710003903622856007703661OTLid0001721MnU20260330020758.0m     o  d s      cr            241002s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aEspinoza Vazquez, Lisette H.A,eauthor00aLiterary Studies for a Sustainable FuturebAn Introductory Course with Social Justice and Ecocriticism IntersectionscLisette Espinoza Vazquez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWelcome, Students and Educators! -- Author's Biography -- Textbox Guide -- Guiding Principles & Outcomes -- How to Approach Literature for Success -- Ecocriticism -- Icebreaker Questions to Begin this Course -- Book’s General Highlights -- Part 1: Sustainability in Sumerian & Indigenous Oral Traditions -- A Preview of Part One -- A Review of Key Concepts and Terms in Introduction of Part One -- Chapter One: On How the Ancient Hymn Intersects with Gender & Inequality -- Chapter One: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Two: On Indigenous Storytelling Traditions & Sustainability -- Chapter Two: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Three: On the Epic with Sustainable Communities & Climate Action Intersections -- Chapter Three: Assignments and Readings -- The Epic of Gilgamesh -- The Popol Vuh -- Part 2: Ecocriticism in Folklore & Dramatic Satire -- A Preview of Part Two -- Chapter Four: Greek and Roman Folklore: How Do Fables Intersect with Sustainability Goals Life on Land and Quality Education? -- Chapter Four: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Five: On Mythology As Adaptation and Gender & Justice Intersections -- Chapter Five: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Six: On Arabian Nights & Gender Equality Intersections -- Chapter Six: Assignments and Readings -- The Arabian Nights Entertainments -- Part 3: UNSDG Intersections with Poetry & Shakespeare -- Chapter Seven: Sustainability Intersections & Early Modern English Theater -- Chapter Seven: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Eight: Lyrical Poetry & Poetic Fragments of Greek Poet Sappho & Intersections with Reducing Inequality, Gender Equality, Sustainable Communities, & Decent Work -- Chapter Eight: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Nine On Late Medieval European Revisionism & Gender Equality -- Chapter Nine: Assignments and Readings -- Chapter Ten The Conclusion of an Introduction to Literary Studies with Sustainability Intersections -- Chapter Ten: Assignments and Readings -- Bibliography0 aLiterary Studies for a Sustainable Future: An Introductory Course with Social Justice and Ecocriticism Intersections is a university literature textbook that offers a sampling of the vast array of storytelling and literary traditions from around the world. Led by course outcomes, the book’s readings, activities, and assignments aim to establish a 21st century framework. Novice literary scholars establish correlations between local and regional literature with those from distant lands on relevant concerns and topics, like those outlined by the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals. Through songs and folklore, film clips, poetry, myth, storytelling, and satirical theater, its chapters feature key literary texts and terms to present literature as vital community-sustaining cultural expressions. Learners witness the roles literature have on climate, ecology, and social justice challenges.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1721zAccess online version02339nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050000900144050001300153245008900166264004300255264005700298264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002800477490002700505505034100532520062700873542001601500546001601516588004001532650003301572650002501605650002701630650003601657700003001693700002701723700002701750710003901777856007701816OTLid0001722MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241003s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aP123 4aP95-95.600aTeaching Pronunciation with ConfidencebA Resource for ESL/EFL Teachers and Learners 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Introduction -- Basics of Teaching Pronunciation -- Pronunciation in Language Teaching -- II. Segmentals -- Vowels -- Consonants -- -ed and -s/-'s Endings -- III. Suprasegmentals -- Word Stress -- Rhythm -- Prominence -- Intonation: Tune -- Connected Speech -- IV. Assessment -- Diagnostic Tasks -- Image Sources -- About the Authors0 aTeaching Pronunciation with Confidence is an essential resource for both English teachers and learners, designed to effectively build strong pronunciation skills and knowledge of pronunciation. This guide covers key topics, including English sounds, word stress, intonation, rhythm, prominence, connected speech, and pronunciation diagnostics to guide improvement. The book includes a wide array of interactive H5P activities and sound recordings, which can be used for classroom teaching, or homework and individual practice. These exercises provide practical experience, reinforcing the concepts covered in each chapter.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLinguisticsvTextbooks 0aSpeech CommunicationvTextbooks1 aGuskaroska, Agataeauthor1 aZawadzki, Zoëeauthor1 aLevis, John M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1722zAccess online version02292nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002800145245010000173264004300273264005700316264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341002800495490002700523505025800550520082900808542002701637546001601664588004101680650003801721650004301759710003901802856007701841OTLid0001723MnU20260330020628.0m     o  d s      cr            241003s2024    mnu     o     0   0 chi d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aHM6211 aZhang, Shenglaneauthor00a通过表达动物的汉字学习中文书写系统： 起源、演变和文化cShenglan Zhang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a前言 -- 第一章: 古代人利用动物的特征创造象形文字 -- 第二章: 象征性动物 -- 第三章: 家养动物（家畜，家禽）与陪伴动物 -- 第四章: 野生动物 -- 第五章: 常用的跟动物有关的部首总结 -- 作者0 a在内容的取舍上，本书主要包括了重要的动物汉字的起源、它们的字形以及与现代楷体字的联系，从这些字衍生出的其他字、它们的常见用法及文化含义，并展示了历史对当今的持续影响，也阐释了汉字产生发展背后的思维理念。 English Description: This book discusses the origins of important Chinese characters for animals, the original characters used, and their connections to modern characters. In addition to showing the evolution of the character for "horse," for example, other characters that are derived from these characters are also discussed, along with their common uses. By exploring the development of characters for animals, this book serves as a jumping-off point to explore the continuous influence of history on the present day.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Chinese.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1723zAccess online version02751nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140245002400150264004300174264006500217264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505043200459520113600891542004102027546001602068588004102084650003302125650004202158700002402200700002502224710003902249856007702288OTLid0001724MnU20241010203926.0m     o  d s      cr            241010s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA14500aStructural Dynamics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEvanston, IllinoisbNorthwestern University Librariesc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Fundamentals of Dynamics -- Free Vibrations of Single Decree of Freedom Systems -- Forced Vibrations of Single Decree of Freedom Systems -- Numerical Solutions of the SDOF Equation of Motion -- Seismic Analysis of Single Degree of Freedom Systems -- Models for Linear Multi Degree of Freedom Systems -- Free Vibrations of Multi Degree of Freedom Systems -- Forced Vibrations of Linear Multi Degree of Freedom Systems0 aThis textbook represents our effort to make freely available to students and practitioners the theory and common applications of structural dynamics. The presentation is hoped to inspire interest and active learning. The book's content is expected to evolve and expand in time so we truly welcome suggestions from readers and colleagues. To make available in a timely manner, the first upload/edition has been limited topics that could be covered in a senior level undergraduate or an introductory level graduate course in a single semester. Given the vastness of the theory and practical details, such a compromise was inevitable. On the other hand we hope that by continuing to expand the contents at certain intervals the material will eventually cover a very significant portion of the relevant literature and current practices. This living nature of the electronic medium was what motivated us to undertake this project to begin with. We thank Northwestern University Libraries for their interest in this textbook, and we express our gratitude to Xinyan Yang for her help in solving many problems we encountered along the way.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aLuş, Hilmieauthor1 aKeten, Sinaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1724zAccess online version03277nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140245009000150264004300240264004600283264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002800451490002700479505068200506520132601188542004102514546001602555588004002571650003302611650004202644700002602686700002602712700002502738710003902763856007702802OTLid0001725MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241010s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA14500aFundamentals of Math, Physics, and Statistics for Future Transportation Professionals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- About the Authors -- Chapter 1: Trigonometry Functions and Geometric Measurements -- Chapter 2: Polynomial, Exponential, and Logarithmic Functions -- Chapter 3: Systems of Linear Equations -- Chapter 4: Calculus – Interpretation and Methods for Integration and Differentiation -- Chapter 5: Motion and Forces -- Chapter 6: Basic Dynamics and Static Equilibrium -- Chapter 7: Waves and Doppler Effect -- Chapter 8: Probability: Basic Principles and Distributions -- Chapter 9: Data Analysis - Hypothesis Testing, Estimating Sample Size, and Modeling -- Glossary -- Links by Chapter -- Image Credits -- References -- Derivative Notes -- Errata and Versioning History0 aThis textbook and OER material cover tools and basic knowledge required to master the prerequisite essentials of physics, mathematics, and statistics applied in transportation engineering. To our knowledge, no such textbook currently exists to build the KSTs (Knowledge, Skills, Tools) for college freshmen’ remedial courses required by most transportation engineering graduate programs that admit non-engineers (e.g., PHYS 141, MATH 142, STAT 321 at California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo). The textbook modules are intended for students with undergraduate degrees in planning and other less technical fields who are interested in pursuing transportation careers where background engineering knowledge is required. This textbook is a product of the grant OERTransport: Enabling Transportation Planning Professional Advancement awarded to the University of Texas-Arlington (UTA) in consortium with California Polytechnic State University (Cal Poly) and the University of South Florida (USF). It was developed under an Open Textbooks Pilot grant from the Fund for the Improvement of Postsecondary Education (FIPSE), U.S. Department of Education. However, its contents do not necessarily represent the policy of the Department of Education, and no endorsement by the Federal Government should be assumed1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aPande, Anurageauthor1 aRatto, Peytoneauthor1 aFarid, Ahmedeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1725zAccess online version03341nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100002600150245003900176264004300215264004600258264001200304300002200316336002600338337002600364338003600390341002800426490002700454505061000481520158801091542004102679546001602720588004002736650003302776650004202809710003902851856007702890OTLid0001726MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241010s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aTanvir, Shamseauthor00aSustainable MobilitycShams Tanvir 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction And Learning Objectives -- Chapter 1: The Basics of Sustainable Mobility -- Chapter 2: Transportation and Climate Change -- Chapter 3: Design of Bicycle Facilities -- Chapter 4: Design of Pedestrian Facilities -- Chapter 5: Energy Consumption and Emissions from Transportation -- Chapter 6: Introduction to Zero Emissions Vehicles -- Chapter 7: Design of Charging Infrastructure -- Chapter 8: Shared Mobility and Automation -- Chapter 9: Sustainable Freight -- Links by Chapter -- References -- Image Credits -- Derivative Notes -- Errata and Versioning History0 aThis textbook and OER material cover tools and basic knowledge required to prepare transportation engineers and planners to contribute towards a carbon-neutral mobility future. In addition, we will explore the potential for vehicle electrification, automation, connectivity, and ridesharing to reduce the carbon impacts of auto mobility. The textbook modules are intended to inform and teach students how to design streets for modes that have almost no carbon emissions. The goal of the textbook is to train engineering students on existing tools and policy levers that can be used to incorporate emerging transportation technologies in a sustainable, equitable, and efficient manner. The course is designed for graduate transportation engineering, and city and regional planning students. The undergraduate seniors will be able to absorb the materials given they have already taken fundamental courses on transportation engineering and planning, including traffic engineering and highway design. This textbook is a product of the grant OERTransport: Enabling Transportation Planning Professional Advancement awarded to the University of Texas-Arlington (UTA) in consortium with California Polytechnic State University (Cal Poly) and the University of South Florida (USF). It was developed under an Open Textbooks Pilot grant from the Fund for the Improvement of Postsecondary Education (FIPSE), U.S. Department of Education. However, its contents do not necessarily represent the policy of the Department of Education, and no endorsement by the Federal Government should be assumed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1726zAccess online version03737nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158100003400168245007000202264004300272264006400315264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002800501490002700529505026800556520226400824542001603088546001603104588004003120650003303160650004203193710003903235856007703274OTLid0001727MnU20260406020135.0m     o  d s      cr            241010s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463669177  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aTeunissen, Peter J.G.eauthor00aDynamic data processingbRecursive least-squarescPeter Teunissen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Least-squares: a review -- Recursive least-squares: the static case -- Recursive least-squares: the time-varying case -- State-space models for dynamic systems -- Random functions -- Recursive least-squares: the dynamic case -- Literature -- Index0 aThis book is a follow-up on Adjustment theory. It extends the theory to the case of time-varying parameters with an emphasis on their recursive determination. Least-squares estimation will be the leading principle used. A least-squares solution is said to be recursive when the method of computation enables sequential, rather than batch, processing of the measurement data. The recursive equations enable the updating of parameter estimates for new observations without the need to store all past observations. Methods of recursive least-squares estimation are therefore particularly useful for applications in which the time-varying parameters need to be instantly determined. Important examples of such applications can be found in the fields of real-time kinematic positioning, navigation and guidance, or multivariate time series analysis. The goal of this book is therefore to convey the necessary knowledge to be able to process sequentially collected measurements for the purpose of estimating time-varying parameters. When determining time-varying parameters from sequentially collected measurement data, one can discriminate between three types of estimation problems: filtering, prediction and smoothing. Filtering aims at the determination of current parameter values, while smoothing and prediction aim at the determination of respectively past and future parameter values. The emphasis in this book will be on recursive least-squares filtering. The theory is worked out for the important case of linear(ized) models. The measurement-update and time-update equations of recursive least-squares are discussed in detail. Models with sequentially collected data, but time-invariant parameters are treated first. In this case only the measurement-update equations apply. State-space models for dynamic systems are discussed so as to include time-varying parameters. This includes their linearization and the construction of the state transition matrix. Elements from the theory of random functions are used to describe the propagation laws for linear dynamic systems. The theory is illustrated by means of many worked out examples. They are drawn from applications such as kinematic positioning, satellite orbit determination and inertial navigation.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1727zAccess online version02406nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245004900145264004300194264008700237264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002800446490002700474505038700501520077700888542004101665546001601706588004101722650003801763650004201801700003401843700002701877710003901904856007701943OTLid0001728MnU20260406020644.0m     o  d s      cr            241010s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTK1 4aTA14500aDesign for Electrical and Computer Engineers 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bRalph Ford and Christopher Coulstonc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aContents -- The Engineering Design Process -- Project Selection and Needs Identification -- The Requirements Specification -- Concept Generation and Evaluation -- Systems Design I: Functional Decomposition -- Systems Design II: Behavior Models -- Testing -- System Reliability -- Teams and Teamwork -- Project Management -- Ethical and Legal Issues -- Oral Presentations -- Appendix0 aOriginally published by McGraw Hill in 2009, Design for Electrical and Computer Engineers is written for students and teachers engaged in electrical and computer engineering design projects, primarily in the senior year. It guides students and faculty through the steps necessary for the successful execution of design projects. The objective is to provide a treatment of the design process with a sound academic basis that is integrated with practical application. The foundation of the book is a strong vision — that a solid understanding of the Design Process, Design Tools, and the right mix of Professional Skills are critical for project and career success. This text is unique in providing a comprehensive design treatment for electrical and computer engineering.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aElectrical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aCoulston, Christophereauthor1 aFord, Ralph M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1728zAccess online version02831nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245009800177264004300275264003000318264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505122500525520044801750542004102198546001602239588004002255650002302295650002302318710003902341856007702380OTLid0001729MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241011s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aPopolizio, Theaeauthor00aUnderstanding OrganismsbAn Evolutionary, Ecological and Comparative ApproachcThea Popolizio 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Land Acknowledgement Statement for the ROTEL Grant -- I. Introduction to Organisms -- What Defines Biological Life? -- The Diversity and Organization of Life -- Comparing Prokaryotes and Eukaryotes -- The Origin of Eukaryotes -- II. How Organisms Get Energy -- Energy and Metabolism -- A Photosynthesis Primer -- Putting it Together: Metabolic Pathways -- III. Plant Form and Physiology -- The Plant Body -- Transport of Water in Plants -- Transport of Food in Plants -- IV. An Introduction to Animal Physiology -- Different Types of Respiratory Systems -- Types of Breathing -- Animal Circulatory Systems -- The Mammalian Heart -- Animal Digestive Systems -- Animal Bioenergetics -- V. Ecology -- Community Ecology -- Ecosystem Ecology -- The Carbon Cycle -- VI. Reproduction in Populations -- Modes of Reproduction -- Chromosomes and Sex Development -- Sex Development in Humans -- VII. Mechanisms of Evolution -- Variation in Populations -- Population Genetics -- Adaptive Evolution -- Non-Adaptive Evolution -- Evidence for Evolution -- VIII. Evolutionary Patterns -- Defining Species -- Formation of New Species -- Phylogenetic Trees -- Reconstructing Evolutionary Relationships -- Grant Information0 aUnderstanding organisms—their evolution, ecology and body systems— is at the heart of this free and open resource geared toward introductory-level college biology majors. This text has been adapted and curated with a lens toward representation and inclusivity. Student engagement is encouraged through ample graphics, embedded media and linked supplementary resources throughout, as well as interactive, responsive H5P practice activities.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1729zAccess online version02884nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100002700149245009600176264004300272264005900315264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002800496490002700524505096300551520071301514542003002227546001602257588004002273650005002313650003102363710003902394856007702433OTLid0001730MnU20260406020135.0m     o  d s      cr            241023s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aLovelace, Kacyeauthor00aIntroduction to the Pedagogy of New Literacies and Applied Critical ThinkingcKacy Lovelace 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHuntington, West VirginiabMarshall Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgments -- I. History and Theory of Information, New Literacies, and Pedagogy -- 1. Information and New Literacies Theory: Theories of Information Literacy, Digital Literacy, Transliteracy/Metaliteracy, and Visual Literacy -- 2. Introduction to Pedagogy and Andragogy, Learning Styles, Online Vs. Face-to-face Learning -- II. Choosing Learning Outcomes and Activities For Information Literacy Needs -- 3. Determining Information and Instructional Needs of Users -- 4. Introduction to Planning Information Literacy Sessions: Developing and Teaching -- III. Teaching and Designing Instruction of New Literacies -- 5. Practical Tools and Material for Enhancing your Information Literacy Session -- 6. Assessing Your Information Literacy Instruction -- IV. Applied Critical Thinking -- 7. Assessing Critical Thinking Dispositions in an Era of High-Stakes Standardized Testing -- 8. Imagination, Critical Thinking, and Teaching -- Glossary0 aThis textbook is an introduction to information and new literacies instruction in a variety of libraries and other information-related organizations and for a variety of patrons (including K-12, ESL, special needs learners, and adult learners). Topics include the history and theoretical bases of literacy instruction, instructional program development, and pedagogical and evaluation techniques. Featuring hands-on assessments for students pursing an Instructional Technology and Library Science emphasis, this text introduces new literacies, provides a comprehensive look at literacy instruction, literacy instruction improvement, and literacy instruction lesson planning with a focus on critical thinking.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1730zAccess online version03766nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245007500160264004300235264007000278264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002800470490002700498505206200525520050102587542004103088546001603129588004003145650003803185650002603223700002703249710003903276856007703315OTLid0001731MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241023s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aBlum, Cinziaeauthor00aD'accordo! Intermediate Italian at The University of IowacCinzia Blum 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgments -- I. Grammatica I: accordo del nome -- Articolo indeterminativo -- Articolo determinativo -- Nomi -- Aggettivi -- Suffissi -- II. Grammatica II: accordo del verbo -- Indicativo presente -- Indicativo imperfetto -- Indicativo passato prossimo -- Verbi particolari: piacere -- Verbi particolari: riflessivi e reciproci -- Indicativo passato remoto -- Indicativo trapassato -- Indicativo futuro -- Condizionale -- Verbi particolari: Dovere, Potere, Volere -- Imperativo -- Congiuntivo presente e passato -- Congiuntivo imperfetto e trapassato -- Infinito -- Gerundio -- Participio -- III. Grammatica III: accordo della frase -- Pronomi soggetto -- Pronomi oggetto tonici -- Pronomi oggetto diretto -- Pronomi oggetto indiretto -- Pronomi oggetto: CI e NE -- Pronomi oggetto combinati -- Pronomi relativi -- Preposizioni -- Interrogativi -- Possessivi -- Indefiniti -- Partitivi -- Dimostrativi -- Negativi -- Avverbi -- Comparativi e Superlativi -- IV. Grammatica IV: accordo del discorso -- Indicativo imperfetto vs passato prossimo -- Usi del congiuntivo -- Correlazione dei tempi e congiuntivo -- Periodo ipotetico -- Costruzioni con infinito -- Forma passiva -- SI impersonale -- V. Cultura -- Le vacanze -- L'infanzia -- Le spese e la spesa -- La famiglia -- A tavola -- Il lavoro -- Donne e carriera -- Dove abiti? -- Migrazione -- Sostenibilità -- Rinascimento e arte -- Letteratura: Le avventure di Pinocchio -- Avventure...a fumetti -- VI. Vocabolario -- Vocabolario: Le vacanze -- Vocabolario: L'infanzia -- Scheda: Numeri -- Scheda: Tempo atmosferico -- Vocabolario: Le spese e la spesa -- Scheda: Ora -- Scheda: Giorni, mesi, stagioni, anni -- Vocabolario: La famiglia -- Vocabolario: A tavola -- Vocabolario: Il lavoro -- Vocabolario: Donne e carriera -- Vocabolario: Dove abiti -- Vocabolario: Migrazione -- Vocabolario: Sostenibilità -- Scheda: Numeri ordinali -- Vocabolario: Arte 1 -- Vocabolario: Arte 2 -- Vocabolario: Le avventure di Pinocchio -- Vocabolario: Avventure -- Vocabolario: Fumetti -- Appendix0 aD’accordo! is an intermediate Italian open-access textbook authored by the Italian faculty of The University of Iowa. A no-cost, user-friendly e-textbook, which may be fully integrated with educational platforms, D’Accordo! will support students’ acquisition of the grammar and vocabulary necessary for meaningful communication, enhance students’ familiarity with Italian culture through a variety of cultural artifacts, and, for majors and minors, create a bridge to upper-level courses.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aGemmani, Luciaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1731zAccess online version02509nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002600137245007500163264004300238264007000281264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505091500528520047901443542004101922546001601963588004001979650002402019710003902043856007702082OTLid0001732MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241023s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aStiles, Jaredeauthor00aLocalization & Treatment Procedures in Radiation TherapycJared Stiles 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- I. Central Nervous System -- 1. Overview: Central Nervous System -- 2. Whole Brain & Primary Brain Tumors -- 3. Craniospinal Irradiation (CSI) -- 4. Stereotactic Radiosurgery (SRS) -- II. Head & Neck -- 5. Overview: Head & Neck -- 6. Nasopharynx -- 7. Oral Cavity -- 8. Oropharynx -- 9. Hypopharynx -- 10. Larynx -- 11. Salivary Glands -- 12. Sinuses -- III. Thorax -- 13. Overview: Thorax -- 14. Stereotactic Body Radiation Therapy (SBRT) -- 15. Superior Vena Cava Syndrome (SVCS) -- 16. Esophagus -- IV. Breast -- 17. Overview: Breast -- V. Abdomen -- 18. Overview: Abdomen -- 19. Pancreas -- 20. Stomach, Liver, & Colon -- 21. Kidney, Wilms, & Neuroblastoma -- 22. Whole Abdomen Irradiation (WAI) -- VI. Pelvis -- 23. Overview: Pelvis -- 24. Rectum & Anus -- 25. Bladder -- 26. Female Pelvis -- 27. Male Pelvis -- VII. References & Resources -- 28. References & Resources0 aLocalization and Treatment Procedures in Radiation Therapy provides an overview of patient simulation, treatment planning, and treatment delivery. The goal of the book is to educate learners on conventional and modern simulation procedures, treatment planning fundamentals and considerations, and treatment delivery techniques and technologies in an ever-evolving field. The content is designed for radiation therapy students, professionals, and all communities of interest.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1732zAccess online version07818nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127100002800140245006200168264004300230264007000273264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505596400520520073706484542004107221546001607262588004007278650003407318710003907352856007707391OTLid0001733MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241024s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aRantanen, Jasoneauthor00aIntroduction to Intellectual Property LawcJason Rantanen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. Legal rights in created intangibles -- International News Service v. The Associated Press (1918) -- 2. The Normative Objectives of Intellectual Property Laws -- John Locke, Two Treatises of Government Book II (1689) -- Jeremy Bentham, Manual of Political Economy (~1790–95) -- James Madison, Federalist Paper No. 43 (1788) -- Thomas Jefferson, Letter to Isaac McPherson (August 13, 1813) -- U.S. Constitution, Article 1, Section 8, Clause 8 -- William Fisher, Theories of Intellectual Property -- 3. The Elements of a Trade Secret -- Learning Curve Toys v. PlayWood Toys (7th Cir. 2003) -- 4. Misappropriation of Trade Secrets -- E. I. DuPont deNemours v. Christophers (5th Cir. 1970) -- Uncle B's Bakery, Inc. v. Kevin O'Rourke and Brooklyn Bagel Boys, Inc. (N.D. Iowa 1996) -- 5. Patents -- U.S. Patent No. RE 39,247 -- Bowman v. Monsanto Co. (2013) -- 6. Utility, Prior Art, and Novelty -- Manning and another v. Cape Ann Isinglass & Glue Co. and others (1883) -- In re Lister (Fed. Cir. 2009) -- 7. Nonobviousness -- Apple, Inc. v. Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. (Fed. Cir. 2016) -- 8. Patent Claims and Process -- Nautilus, Inc. v. Biosig Instruments, Inc. (2014) -- 9. Disclosure -- U.S. Patent No. 317, 676 -- The Incandescent Lamp Patent (1895) -- Amgen v. Sanofi (2023) -- 10. Claim Construction and Infringement -- U.S. Patent No. 4,677,798 -- Phillips v. AWH Corporation (Fed. Cir. 2005) -- 11. Design Patents -- Burstein, Rajec & Sawicki, One Day on Designs -- 12. Copyrightable Subject Matter and the Requirements of Originality and Fixation -- Feist Publications, Inc. v. Rural Telephone Service (1991) -- 13. The Idea/Expression Dichotomy -- Baker v. Selden (1879) -- 17 U.S.C. §102. Subject matter of copyright: In general -- 14. Terms & Formalities and Ownership of Copyrights -- Community for Creative Non-Violence v. Reid (1989) -- Aalmuhammed v. Lee (9th Cir. 2000) -- 15. Introduction to Copyright Infringement -- Nichols v. Universal Pictures (2nd Cir. 1930) -- 16. Additional Rights of the Copyright Owner -- Pickett v. Prince (7th Cir. 2000) -- 17. Statutory Limits on Copyright Enforcement, including Fair Use -- Campbell v. Acuff-Rose Music, Inc. 510 U.S. 569 (1994) -- 18. Copyright and Objects -- Star Athletica, L.L.C. v. Varsity Brands (2017) -- 19. What a Trademark Is and Distinctiveness -- Qualitex Co. v. Jacobson Prods. Co. (1995) -- Distinctiveness -- Zatarains, Inc. v. Oak Grove Smokehouse, Inc. (5th Cir. 1983) -- 20. Trade Dress and Distinctiveness -- Two Pesos v. Taco Cabana -- Wal-Mart Stores v. Samara Bros. -- 21. Trade Dress - Functionality -- TrafFix Devices v. Marketing Displays (2001) -- 22. Priority, Registration and Incontestability -- Matal v. Tam (2017) -- 23. Trademark Infringement -- Kemp v. Bumble Bee Seafoods, Inc. (8th Cir. 2005) -- 24. Permissible Uses -- Mattel Inc. v. MCA Records, Inc. -- Jack Daniel's v. VIP Products -- 25. Rights of Publicity -- Zacchini v. Scripps-Howard Broadcasting Co. (1977) -- 26. Federal Preemption -- Kewanee Oil Co. v. Bicron Corp. (1974) -- Bonito Boats v. Thunder Craft Boats (1989) -- Title 15 -- 15 U.S.C. § 1051. Application for registration; verification -- 15 U.S.C. § 1052. Trademarks registrable on principal register; concurrent registration -- 15 U.S.C. §§ 1053 - 1056 -- 15 U.S.C. § 1057. Certificates of registration -- 15 U.S.C. § 1058. Duration, affidavits and fees -- 15 U.S.C. § 1064. Cancellation of registration -- 15 U.S.C. § 1065. Incontestability of right to use mark under certain conditions -- 15 U.S.C. § 1114. Remedies; infringement; innocent infringement by printers and publishers -- 15 U.S.C. § 1115. Registration on principal register as evidence of exclusive right to use mark; defenses -- 15 U.S.C. § 1117. Recovery for violation of rights -- 15 U.S.C. § 1125. False designations of origin, false descriptions, and dilution forbidden -- 15 U.S.C. § 1127. Construction and definitions; intent of chapter -- Title 17 -- 17 U.S.C. § 101. Definitions -- 17 U.S.C. §102. Subject matter of copyright: In general -- 17 U.S.C. §§ 103, 104, 105. Subject matter of copyright: Compilations and derivative works -- 17 U.S.C. §106. Exclusive rights in copyrighted works -- 17 U.S.C. §106A. Rights of certain authors to attribution and integrity. -- 17 U.S.C. §107. Limitations on exclusive rights: Fair use -- 17 U.S.C. §109. Limitations on exclusive rights: Effect of transfer of particular copy or phonorecord -- 17 U.S.C. § 110. Limitations on exclusive rights: Exemption of certain performances and displays -- 17 U.S.C. § 113. Scope of exclusive rights in pictorial, graphic, and sculptural works -- 17 U.S.C. § 201. Ownership of copyright -- 17 U.S.C. § 202. Ownership of copyright as distinct from ownership of material object -- 17 U.S.C. § 203. Termination of transfers and licenses granted by the author -- 17 U.S.C. § 301. Preemption with respect to other laws -- 17 U.S.C. § 302. Duration of copyright: Works created on or after January 1, 1978. -- 17 U.S.C. § 305, 401, 402, 405, 407, 412 -- 17 U.S.C. § 504. Remedies for infringement: Damages and profits -- Title 18 -- 18 U.S.C. § 1831. Economic espionage -- 18 U.S.C. § 1832. Theft of trade secrets -- 18 U.S.C. § 1833. Exceptions to prohibitions -- 18 U.S.C. § 1836. Civil proceedings -- 18 U.S.C. § 1838. Construction with other laws -- 18 U.S.C. § 1839. Definitions -- Title 35 -- 35 U.S.C. § 100. Definitions -- 35 U.S.C. § 101. Inventions patentable -- 35 U.S.C. § 102. Conditions for patentability; novelty -- 35 U.S.C. § 103. Conditions for patentability; non-obvious subject matter -- 35 U.S.C. § 112. Specification -- 35 U.S.C. § 154. Contents and term of patent; provisional rights -- 35 U.S.C. § 171. Patents for designs -- 35 U.S.C. § 271. Infringement of patent -- 35 U.S.C. § 282. Presumption of validity; defenses -- 35 U.S.C. §§ 283, 284, 285, 286, & 289 -- 35 U.S.C. § 311. Inter partes review0 aUnlike traditionally published casebooks, which typically include short case excerpts providing key rules or doctrine, Introduction to Intellectual Property Law features one or two judicial opinions per chapter, in their entirety, along with descriptive notes to fill in the details. The resulting collection can be read on any device, free of charge. Because reading full opinions is not easy, especially at the beginning of a legal career, another important component of this casebook are sets of questions to focus on while reading the cases. Lawyers generally approach texts this way, reading with purpose rather than to glean abstract knowledge. As you read the opinions, do it with a mind toward answering the questions posed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1733zAccess online version03597nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155100002500162245003800187264004300225264006000268264001200328300002200340336002600362337002600388338003600414341002500450490002700475505135200502520103701854542001602891546001602907588004002923650002602963650003102989700002703020700002403047710003903071856007703110OTLid0001734MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241024s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961584532  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aRiser, Dianaeauthor00aLifespan DevelopmentcDiana Riser 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 Lifespan Psychology and Developmental Theories -- Chapter 2 Genetic, Prenatal, and Perinatal Health -- Chapter 3 Physical and Cognitive Development in Infants and Toddlers (Birth to Age 3) -- Chapter 4 Social and Emotional Development in Infants and Toddlers (Birth to Age 3) -- Chapter 5 Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Childhood (Ages 3 to 6) -- Chapter 6 Social and Emotional Development in Early Childhood (Ages 3 to 6) -- Chapter 7 Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Childhood (Ages 7 to 12) -- Chapter 8 Social and Emotional Development in Middle Childhood (Ages 7 to 12) -- Chapter 9 Physical and Cognitive Development in Adolescence (Ages 12 to 18) -- Chapter 10 Social and Emotional Development in Adolescence (Ages 12 to 18) -- Chapter 11 Physical and Cognitive Development in Early Adulthood (Ages 18 to 29) -- Chapter 12 Social and Emotional Development in Early Adulthood (Ages 18 to 29) -- Chapter 13 Physical and Cognitive Development in Middle Adulthood (Ages 30 to 59) -- Chapter 14 Social and Emotional Development in Middle Adulthood (Ages 30 to 59) -- Chapter 15 Physical and Cognitive Development in Late Adulthood (Age 60 and Beyond) -- Chapter 16 Social and Emotional Development in Late Adulthood (Age 60 and Beyond) -- Chapter 17 Death, Dying, and Grieving -- Answer Key -- Index0 aLifespan Development aligns to the topics and objectives of most introductory developmental psychology courses taught across departments. Grounded in foundational theories and scientific research, the text teaches students about core aspects of human development—physical, cognitive, social, emotional—across the lifespan. A primary goal of the book is to incorporate content, scholarship, and activities that explore a variety of perspectives that encourage all students to feel seen and included. Lifespan Development strives to openly address complex topics with scholarly responsibility and an effort to increase equity and inclusion in the research presented, as well as to foster student engagement in the classroom through relevant examples and applications. Focused on driving meaningful and memorable learning experiences, the narrative places concepts in contexts that give students the means to understand human development and how that knowledge can be applied to and improve their own lives and the lives of others.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSpielman, Roseeauthor1 aBiek, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1734zAccess online version01841nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135050000700145245002600152264004300178264008500221264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002800428490002700456505011500483520050600598542001601104546001601120588004001136650003001176650002301206650003101229700002601260700002901286710003901315856007701354OTLid0001735MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241025s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH301 4aH100aEnvironmental Justice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Final Project Information -- Who Gets Environmental Justice? -- Student Works -- Student Zines0 aThis book presents the original works of Environmental Justice students from Linn-Benton Community College. Students select and design projects based on their experiences and interests to contribute to this living anthology each term. The goal of this publication is to increase the impact of student scholarship, research, creativity, and activism to work for environmental and social justice in our communities. These openly-licensed works span multiple formats and genres based on student interest.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCarter, Deroneauthor1 aSanders, Colleeneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1735zAccess online version02463nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245003100144264004300175264004200218264001200260300002200272336002600294337002600320338003600346341002800382490002700410505069100437520060701128542004101735546001601776588004001792650004301832650003101875700002801906700002701934710003901961856007702000OTLid0001736MnU20260406020136.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH100aBurning Issues in Classics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the authors -- Chapter 1: Burning issues in Classics: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Fidelity in Hollywood: The importance of accuracy when adapting ancient sources into films -- Chapter 3: The ancient Greeks and Romans were a lot more diverse than we’ve come to expect -- Chapter 4: Transforming the past: The legacy of empiricism and fascism – Augustus to Mussolini to Meloni -- Chapter 5: The impact of video games as a medium for classical reception -- Chapter 6: Repatriation and the case for return -- Chapter 7: Ethnicity and race in the ancient world, and why it still matters today -- Chapter 8: How to undertake quality research -- Versioning History -- Review Statement0 aThis volume addresses various ways that we interact with, refashion and reuse aspects of ancient Greece and Rome. Its studies range from the political engagement of Italian fascists with ancient Rome, to the use of ancient Greece in video games. The chapters each take on a ‘burning issue’ of identity or ownership, that is, how we identify with ancient Greeks and Romans, as well as drawing (often troubling) elements of our identity from them. In addition, they address the question: which of us feel that we own the past? Does Classics belong to everyone, or has it been coopted by an elite few?1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aEvans, Rhiannoneauthor1 aGammie, Nicoleeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1736zAccess online version02742nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002600165245004100191264004300232264004200275264001200317300002200329336002600351337002600377338003600403341002800439490002700467505068100494520091501175542004102090546001602131588004002147650002902187650002402216710003902240856007702279OTLid0001737MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780645838862  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aKhalil, Hananeauthor00aValue-based HealthcarecHanan Khalil 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Country -- Publisher Information -- Accessibility Information -- Chapter 1: Authentic leadership for value-based healthcare -- Chapter 2: Healthcare delivery models and value-based healthcare -- Chapter 3: Funding models in healthcare services -- Chapter 4: Creating value with health and information technologies -- Chapter 5: Data analytics and its role in managing patients -- Chapter 6: Climate change and value-based healthcare -- Chapter 7: Low-value care -- Chapter 8: Evaluating the effects of healthcare programs and interventions -- Chapter 9: Evaluating the economics of health programs and interventions -- Versioning History -- Review Statement0 aThis open textbook presents a contemporary overview of Value-based Healthcare: a healthcare delivery and reimbursement model that focuses on achieving the best possible health outcomes for patients while controlling costs. It represents a shift of focus from quantity to quality, and aims to align incentives to bring together the interests of patients, healthcare providers, and payers. The resource covers core content in the following topics: an introduction to value based healthcare, funding models, leadership and governance, models of care, shared decision making models, case studies, global perspectives, resources management and cost control. This text is for Masters-level courses in health administration, public health, nursing, or health information. It will also be useful more broadly for anyone studying health or working in the health sector including clinicians, managers, and policy makers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1737zAccess online version03649nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100003100144245011100175264004300286264007000329264001200399300002200411336002600433337002600459338003600485341002800521490002700549505042100576520200300997542003003000546001603030588004003046650004203086650003103128710003903159856007703198OTLid0001738MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aH11 aSheridan, Lynnaireeauthor03aAn Australian and New Zealand Human Resource Management Guide to Work Health and SafetycLynnaire Sheridan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Otagoc2024. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Copyright and accessibility -- Preface -- Introduction -- History: Exploring the origins of labour rights and worker safety -- Theory: A systems approach to work health and safety management -- Practice: Establishing, implementing and closing the loop in a safety management system -- Conclusion -- Glossary -- Glossary References -- Part I References -- Part II References -- Part III References0 aAn Australian and New Zealand Human Resource Management Guide to Work Health and Safety (WHS) is comprised of three sections: an historical overview, an introduction to theory, and a guide to WHS implementation via the adoption and enactment of a safety management system. The socio-historical review of human ‘labour’ outlines foundational knowledge on the intertwined origins of worker labour and safety rights, while contextualising the formation and role of unions in securing labour rights that, today, are standard in Australian and New Zealand contexts. It enhances understanding of the historical origins of the contemporary disciplines of Employment Relations and WHS to explain their commonly shared assumptions and principles. The theoretical introduction defines key concepts for WHS management and outlines James Reasons’ Swiss Cheese Model of safety incident causation. A systems-based approach to WHS management is proposed as a mechanism to identify, and actively resolve, latent factors before introducing organisational safety culture as fundamental to effective WHS management. The guide to implementation outlines the leadership commitment, policies, procedures, planning, and compliance competency required before a safety management system can begin. It explores implementation of hazard identification, risk assessment, and hazard control procedures before emphasising that this should occur parallel to establishing effective emergency response procedures. It concludes by outlining how to use measurement and evaluation to ‘close the loop’ ready for the next iteration of the safety management system cycle. This book affords Human Resource managers a comprehensive overview of Safety I approaches to WHS while outlining how theory and practice is shifting towards a more human-centric, Safety II, approach. It puts workers, and their health, at the centre of WHS management while recognising the organisational constraints within which WHS practitioners operate.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1738zAccess online version01815nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245008700177264004300264264008900307264001200396300002200408336002600430337002600456338003600482341002800518490002700546505028200573520032600855542004101181546001601222588004001238650002301278650002401301710003901325856007701364OTLid0001739MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aAndresen, Kathyeauthor00aOptimizing Population HealthbStrategies for Advanced Level NursescKathy Andresen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of West Florida Pressbooksc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Population Health -- Chapter 2: Cultural Humility -- Chapter 3: Health Promotion -- Chapter 4: Contemporary Health Issues -- Appendix A: Image Credits -- Appendix B: Chapter Crosswalk Advanced-Level AACN Essentials0 aThis resource provides an overview of population health concepts along with health promotion strategies utilized by advanced practice nurses. Resources are intended to be exemplary, but not exhaustive and introduce the reader to strategies that can be practiced while in graduate school as well as in healthcare settings.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1739zAccess online version03134nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245011000154264004300264264007000307264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002800499490002700527505040700554520130900961542004102270546002702311588004102338650003902379650003202418700004102450700003302491700004002524700004402564710003902608856007702647OTLid0001740MnU20260406020137.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651433  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aInteligencia Artificial Aplicada a Procesamiento de Lenguaje Natural (NLP) con Python y Machine Learning. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Agradecimiento -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Conociendo la Inteligencia Artificial -- Capítulo II: Conociendo técnicas para un modelo -- Capítulo III: Machine Learning: Algoritmos de aprendizaje supervisado y métricas de evaluación -- Capítulo IV: IA aplicada con NLP y machine learning -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEste libro refleja el trabajo realizado bajo investigación entre docentes investigadores con el afán de que sea útil al lector, el uso de predicciones al momento de entrenar un algoritmo clasificado de texto en procesamiento de lenguaje natural (PLN) basado en machine learning. Conformado de 4 capítulos con la utilidad para el inicio al mundo de la IA de la rama de procesamiento de lenguaje natural con Python en machine learning. El Capítulo 1 menciona conceptos y la evolución de las diferentes ramas de conocimiento que abarca la inteligencia artificial (AI), el entendimiento del NLP, machine learning, tipos de aprendizaje para resolver problemas como el supervisado, no supervisado y refuerzo. Capítulo 2 se profundiza el NLP conociendo los contenidos básicos de clasificación como: Las técnicas y diseño de LSTM, tokeización, stopword, lematización, bag of Word (part of speech tagging). Capítulo 3 es la estructuración de este capítulo el conocer las definiciones de los modelos de aprendizaje supervisado que son útiles en NLP orientado a la clasificación de texto. Capítulo 4 un caso de predicción o grado de asertividad del modelamiento de un algoritmo, la intención es demostrar la utilización de un modelo y varias técnicas aplicando NLP basado en machine learning.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aSangacha-Tapia, Lady Mariuxieauthor1 aCeli, Ricardo Javiereauthor1 aAcosta-Guzmán, Ivan Leoneleauthor1 aVarela-Tapia, Eleanor Alexandraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1740zAccess online version03638nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001600145050000800161100004100169245008600210264004300296264007000339264001200409300002200421336002600443337002600469338003600495341002800531490002700559505040900586520198100995542004102976546002703017588004103044650002403085650002703109710003903136856007703175OTLid0001741MnU20260406020137.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651440  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA11 aCevallos-Muñoz, Omar Arturoeauthor00aIntroducción al Cálculo Vectorial para IngenieríacOmar Arturo Cevallos-Muñoz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Geometría del plano y en el espacio -- Capítulo II: Funciones vectoriales de un parámetro -- Capítulo III: Funciones de varias variables -- Capítulo IV: Integral múltiple de funciones multivariables -- Capítulo V: Integración vectorial -- Capítulo VI: Anexos -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl presente libro es una herramienta esencial para estudiantes de ingeniería que se inician en el estudio del Cálculo Vectorial, con el objetivo de proporcionar una comprensión sólida de los conceptos fundamentales del cálculo de varias variables y sus aplicaciones prácticas en ingeniería. Está estructurado en cinco unidades que comienzan con los fundamentos del cálculo vectorial, como la representación de puntos y vectores en el espacio, operaciones vectoriales, ecuaciones de rectas y planos, y geometría tridimensional. Estos fundamentos establecen una base para el estudio de temas más avanzados. La segunda unidad explora funciones vectoriales, abarcando el estudio de curvas en el espacio y campos vectoriales, con aplicaciones en física, lo que ayuda a los estudiantes a modelar y analizar fenómenos físicos con herramientas matemáticas. La tercera unidad se centra en el cálculo diferencial, cubriendo derivadas parciales, gradiente, divergencia y rotacional, además de la optimización de funciones de varias variables con multiplicadores de Lagrange. Esta parte es crucial para la resolución de problemas de optimización en ingeniería. La cuarta unidad aborda el cálculo integral, incluyendo integrales múltiples, cambio de variables y los teoremas de Green, Stokes y Gauss, esenciales para calcular volúmenes, áreas y flujos en problemas ingenieriles. La metodología del libro se basa en un aprendizaje simplificado, con explicaciones claras y concisas, y evita formalismos excesivos. Los numerosos ejemplos prácticos y ejercicios, tanto resueltos como propuestos, permiten a los estudiantes aplicar conceptos teóricos a problemas reales, reforzando su aprendizaje. Dirigido a estudiantes de ingeniería de la Universidad Técnica Estatal de Quevedo, especialmente a aquellos en el curso de Cálculo Vectorial, este libro es un recurso invaluable para profundizar en el campo del cálculo vectorial y sus aplicaciones en ingeniería.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1741zAccess online version02707nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137245002900144264004300173264007400216264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341002800412490002700440505054500467520092501012542004101937546001601978588004001994650004302034650003102077700002702108700002602135700003202161710003902193856007702232OTLid0001742MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH104aThe Mass Media Landscape 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This OER -- Meet the Authors and Editor -- Introduction -- Opening Concepts -- Media Technology and the Evolution of Language -- Traversing Our Mass Media Landscape -- The Media Business and Conglomerates -- Journalism: Occupation or Skillset? -- Media Law -- Media Ethics -- Books -- Newspapers -- Magazines -- Radio and Audio -- Popular Music and American Culture -- Television -- Movies -- Internet -- Public Relations -- Advertising -- Social Media Influencers -- Generational Patterns and Social Media -- Media Literacy and Gen Z0 aThe Mass Media Landscape is a compilation of lessons to help audiences understand the evolution of U.S. mass media and disruptive media technologies. It includes overviews of media law, media ethics and media literacy. Chapters contain interactive exercises, review quizzes, writing assignments, and multimedia content. Following are four points of emphasis: Media literacy extends beyond the ability to identify misinformation and disinformation or follow reliable news sources. A crucial part of media literacy is understanding mass media history. Media literacy skills help both consumers and professionals create and publish reliable content, including on social media, in an ethical manner and with an understanding of long-term effects and potential consequences. All students, not just those who seek careers in the industry, benefit from learning about media history, media law, media ethics, and media literacy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBostwick, Daveeauthor1 aRiley, Alyssaeauthor1 aValle, Dominique M.eeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1742zAccess online version01952nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003400134245003500168264004300203264007300246264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505020800496520067800704542002301382546001601405588004001421650002501461710003901486856007701525OTLid0001744MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aGreengaard, Alexandereauthor00aOpen ELAcAlexander Greengaard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPima Community Collegec2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Understanding Literature -- Communications -- Metacognitive Reading -- Film Studies -- Reading for Information (Science & Social Studies) -- Journalism -- GED Study Guides -- Attributions0 aOpen ELA is a complete course in Reading and Language Arts for instructors and self-directed learners in Adult Basic Education settings. These materials are designed to aid students in completing the GED exam and to support college and career pathways. This course includes resources for the Reading and Language Arts, Social Studies, and Science portions of the GED exam. It also includes GED Study Guides and lessons contextualized to college and career exploration and readiness. Open ELA covers six units of study: Understanding Literature, Intro to Communications, Metacognitive Reading, Film & Television Studies, Reading for Science & Social Studies, and Journalism.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1744zAccess online version02809nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245005600137250001400193264004300207264006400250264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002800436490002700464505036000491520113800851542004101989546002302030588004002053650004202093700003302135700002802168700002502196700003502221700002702256710003902283856007702322OTLid0001745MnU20260330020630.0m     o  d s      cr            241107s2024    mnu     o     0   0 dut d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aInzichtbAcademische Vaardigheden voor Bouwkundigen  a2e editie 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aVoorwoord -- Leeswijzer 2024 -- Routekaart 2024 -- Bij deze versie -- Deel A: Bouwkunde als wetenschappelijke discipline -- Deel B: Algemene academische vaardigheden voorbouwkundigen -- Deel C: Specifieke bouwkundige vaardigheden enonderzoeksmethoden -- Deel D: academische vaardigheden in de praktijk -- Index -- Over de auteurs -- Shoutouts -- Dankwoord0 aHet boek Academische Vaardigheden voor Bouwkundigen geeft een verdiepend beeld van bouwkunde als wetenschappelijke discipline, gaat expliciet in op de relatie tussen ontwerp en onderzoek en richt zich met name op praktische vaardigheden die bouwkundestudenten ontwikkelen gedurende hun bacheloropleiding in Delft. Het boek is opgebouwd uit vier delen. Deel A richt zich op de plaats van bouwkunde binnen de wetenschap. Deel B richt zich op basisvaardigheden: algemene academische vaardigheden voor bouwkundigen. Deel C diept specifieke bouwkundige methoden van onderzoek uit. Deel D, het laatste deel, is enerzijds gericht op de praktijk en anderzijds op reflectie. Door deze brede opzet kan het boek niet alleen direct gebruikt worden door studenten en docenten in de leerlijn Academische Vaardigheden, maar juist ook in de andere leerlijnen en modulen. Tevens is het boek een naslagwerk voor andere Bouwkunde- en Architectuuropleidingen in binnen- en buitenland dat inzicht geeft hoe wij binnen de faculteit Bouwkunde van de TU Delft aankijken tegen het vakgebied en welke academische vaardigheden daar op bachelorniveau bij horen.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Dutch; Flemish.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aHoekstra, MaartenJaneauthor1 aLousberg, Louiseauthor1 aRooij, Remoneauthor1 aFloet, Willemijn Wilmseauthor1 aZijlstra, Sakeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1745zAccess online version04584nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140100002900147245010600176264004300282264002900325264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505211400531520120002645542004103845546002703886588004003913650002503953650003103978700002704009700003404036710003904070856007704109OTLid0001746MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241114s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aBudzyna, Deirdreeauthor03aEl Niño EnterobDesarrollo en los Primeros Años — Translation of The Whole ChildcDeirdre Budzyna 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducción -- Reconocimiento de Tierras -- Capítulo Uno: Perspectivas sobre la Primera Infancia -- Infancia Definida -- Perspectivas Históricas -- Perspectivas Culturales -- Práctica Apropiada al Desarrollo -- ¿Cómo se Estudia el Desarrollo Infantil? -- Capítulo Dos: Teóricos y Teorías del Desarrollo -- Teorías del Desarrollo -- Teoría Psicosocial -- Teoría Conductista -- Teoría Cognitiva Social -- Teoría Cognitiva -- Teoría Sociocultural -- Teoría Humanística -- Teoría Ecológica -- Otras Teorías Contemporáneas para Considerar -- Capítulo Tres: Dominios en el Desarrollo -- Temas de Desarrollo -- Los Cuatro Dominios del Desarrollo -- Desarrollo Físico/Biológico -- Desarrollo Cognitivo -- Desarrollo Social -- Desarrollo Emocional -- Capítulo Cuarto: Desarrollo Cerebral de la Concepción hasta los 8 Años de Edad -- Biología del Cerebro -- Las Estructuras del Cerebro Principales -- Corteza Cerebral -- Desarrollo Cerebral Durante la Gestación -- Desarrollo del Cerebro en Bebés y Niños Pequeños -- Desarrollo del Cerebro en Niños Preescolares y Escolares -- Capítulo Cinco: Desarrollo Prenatal y Nacimiento -- El Papel de la Genética -- Preocupaciones en la Concepción -- El Periodo Germinal -- Preocupaciones por el Embarazo -- Nacimiento -- Deirdre Budzyna and Doris Buckley -- Después del Nacimiento -- Capítulo Six: Infancia -- Desarrollo Físico en la Infancia -- Desarrollo Cognitivo en la Infancia -- Desarrollo Social y Emocional en la Infancia -- Capítulo Siete: Niños (De 15 Meses a 3 Años) -- Desarrollo Físico para Niños Pequeños -- Desarrollo Cognitivo para Niños Pequeños -- Desarrollo Social y Emocional para Niños Pequeños -- Capítulo Ocho: Desarrollo de la Primera Infancia -- Desarrollo Físico en la Primera Infancia -- Desarrollo Cognitivo en la Primera Infancia -- Desarrollo Social y Emocional en la Edad Preescolar -- Capítulo Nueve: Edad Escolar (5 Años a 8 Años) -- Desarrollo Físico en la Edad Escolar -- Desarrollo Cognitivo en la Edad Escolar -- Conclusión -- Glosario -- Información de la Subvención -- Referencias0 aEl Niño Entero es un libro de texto de Psicología Infantil o Crecimiento y Desarrollo Infantil que es a la vez completo y conciso. Los estudiantes no necesitan un volumen extenso para digerir, pero sí necesitan una comprensión sólida de cómo se desarrolla un niño pequeño. Sólo con esta comprensión pueden surgir prácticas apropiadas para el desarrollo en el aula y en otros lugares que sean espacios de amor y cuidado para los niños pequeños. Con el costo creciente de los libros de texto, este libro de texto es un recurso para los instructores que buscan encontrar materiales accesibles y de calidad para nuestros estudiantes.The Whole Child is a textbook for Child Psychology or Child Growth and Development that is both comprehensive and concise. Students do not need a lengthy volume to digest, but they do need a strong understanding of how a young child develops. Only with this understanding can developmentally appropriate practice emerge in the classroom and in other places that are loving and caring spaces for young children. With the rising cost of textbooks, this textbook is a resource for instructors looking to find quality, accessible materials for our students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aBuckley, Doriseauthor1 aDel Rosario, Sharlineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1746zAccess online version03920nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002500138245007500163264004300238264002900281264001200310300002200322336002600344337002600370338003600396341002800432490002700460505182700487520090302314542004103217546001603258588004003274650002603314650002403340700002803364700002603392710003903418856007703457OTLid0001747MnU20260406020137.0m     o  d s      cr            241114s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aSnow, Jennieeauthor00aPolyphonybReader and Explorations for First-Year WritingcJennie Snow 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- How to Use This Book -- Polyphony: A Meditation -- List of Hashtags -- I. Reader -- "As a Child in Haiti, I Was Taught to Despise My Language and Myself,” Michel DeGraff -- “Asters and Goldenrod,” Robin Wall Kimmerer -- “Connecting the Dots,” Bassey Ikpi -- “The Contract Says: We’d Like the Conversation to be Bilingual,” Ada Limón -- “Grammar, Identity, and the Dark Side of the Subjunctive,” Phuc Tran -- “Gun Bubbles,” Margrét Ann Thors -- “How to Tame a Wild Tongue,” Gloria Anzaldúa -- “Place Name: Oracabessa,” Kei Miller -- “Puerto Rican Obituary,” Pedro Pietri -- “Saving a Language You’re Learning to Speak,” NPR Codeswitch -- “Skin Feeling,” Sofia Samatar -- “Three Ways to Speak English,” Jamila Lyiscott -- "To Speak is to Blunder," Yiyun Li -- “The Transformation of Silence into Language and Action,” Audre Lorde -- “Vão/Vòng A Conversation with Katrina Dodson,” Madhua Kaza -- II. Explorations -- Against the Grain: Listening for Controversy -- Aphoristic Translation -- Body as Metaphoric Space -- Building an Opinion -- Collage: Found, Donated, Repeated with Difference -- Critical Learning Reflection -- Dialogue Over Time: A New Boogaloo: “How Beautiful We Really Are” -- Emotion in Language -- Historical Contexts -- Indigenous Perspectives of Western Science -- Insufficient Definitions -- Juxtapositions of Silence -- Language Life Story -- Music Trails -- Parsing Themes -- Poetry and Science: Epistemology through Language -- The Point of Education? -- Reading the “Fine Print” -- Self Reflection, Collective Change -- Tracing Citations -- Transculturation, Language and South-South Migration -- Translations Across and Within Languages -- Work Culture Reexamined -- Contributors -- Works Used In This Book0 aPolyphony is a functional, creative, and radical resource for facilitating critical conversations about multilingualism, the politics of language, and linguistic justice in the first-year writing classroom. Texts and activities explore diverse perspectives on themes like silencing/voicing, language extinction and reclamation, (in)visibility, translation, agency, and validation, among others. Designed for use by both instructors and students, this book is meant to be used in a variety of combinations and highlights multiple modes of writing, including personal narrative, textual analysis, argumentation, reflection, and research. Embracing a “polyphonic” approach to first-year writing, this book presents connections between texts, authors, and ideas that actively engage students and instructors in critical conversations about language, education, and the institutionalization of both.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks1 aTakehana, Eliseeauthor1 aUbiera, Diegoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1747zAccess online version02700nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137245002200147250001700169264004300186264007200229264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002800423490002700451505080700478520063201285542003001917546001601947588004001963650002502003650002402028700002602052700002502078700003102103700002802134710003902162856007702201OTLid0001748MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241122s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA44000aCulinary Medicine  a2025 Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arizonac2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- Acknowledgements -- Preface -- Chapter 1: Understanding Social Influences, Planning Meals, and Shopping Smarter -- Chapter 2: In the Kitchen (Storing and Preparing Food; Preventing Food Waste) -- Chapter 3: Enjoying Food at Home and Beyond—Our Relationship with Food -- Chapter 4: Macronutrients -- Chapter 5: Micronutrients -- Chapter 6: Dietary Supplements -- Chapter 7: Bioactive Compounds -- Chapter 8: Popular Diets and Health -- Chapter 9: Anatomy of a Food Demonstration -- Chapter 10: Seed-to-Table Programs -- Chapter 11: Creating Partnerships in Your Community -- Chapter 12: Culturally Centered Approaches to Culinary Medicine -- Appendix A: Case Studies -- Appendix B: Recipes for Disease Prevention -- Glossary Terms -- Contributors -- Versioning History -- Contact Us0 aThis peer-reviewed Culinary Medicine textbook is aimed at individuals and communities seeking to implement food-based disease prevention programs. While the primary audience is students taking a 400/500-level nutrition class, this book can be used and adapted by anyone. It includes recipes and case studies, as well as information on kitchen skills, food safety, menu planning, shopping and budgeting, popular diets, dietary supplements, food demonstrations, seed-to-table programs, community partnerships, and culturally centered approaches. There are also chapters on macronutrients, micronutrients, and bioactive compounds.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aCasey, Cheryleeditor1 aGoing, Scotteeditor1 aMcCullough, Laureneeditor1 aHingle, Melanieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1748zAccess online version04181nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158100003400168245004500202264004300247264006400290264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505013800531520286200669542001603531546001603547588004103563650003303604650004203637710003903679856007703718OTLid0001749MnU20260406020137.0m     o  d s      cr            241123s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463669504  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aTeunissen, Peter J.G.eauthor00aNetwork quality controlcPeter Teunissen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAn overview -- Estimation and precision -- Testing and reliability -- Adjustment and validation of networks -- Appendix -- References0 aThe aim of computing a geodetic network is to determine the geometry of the configuration of a set of points from spatial observations (e.g. GPS baselines and/or terrestrial measurements). The configuration of points usually consists of newly established points, of which the coordinates still need to be determined, and already existing points, the so-called control points, of which the coordinates are known. Network quality control deals with the qualitative aspects of network design, network adjustment, network validation and network connection. By means of a network adjustment the relative geometry of the new points is determined and integrated into the geometry of the existing control points. Prior to the network adjustment, the geometry of the network is designed on the basis of precision and reliability criteria. The adjustment and validation of the overall geometry can be divided in two phases, the free network phase and the connected network phase. In the free network phase, the known coordinates of the control points do not take part in the adjustment and validation. The possible use of a free network phase is based on the idea that a good geodetic network should be sufficiently precise and reliable in itself, without the need of external control. Moreover, it allows one to validate the quality of the external control. In the connected network phase, the geometry of the free network is integrated into the geometry of the control points. Adjustment and validation in this second phase differs from the free network phase. The adjustment in the second phase is a constrained connection adjustment, since it is often not practical to see the coordinates of the control points change every time a free network is connected to them. For the validation of the connected network however, the unconstrained connected adjustment is used as input. This allows one to take the intrinsic uncertainty of the coordinates of the control points in the connection phase into account. The goal of this introductory text on network quality control is to convey the necessary knowledge for designing, adjusting and testing geodetic networks. For the purpose of network design, the precision and reliability theory is worked out in detail. This includes the minimal detectable biases and the bias-to-noise ratios. For the purpose of the network adjustment, the principles of unconstrained-, constrained-, and minimally constrained least-squares estimation, are treated. For the network testing, the principles of hypothesis testing are presented and worked out for the different network cases. For the free network phase this includes the overall model test, the w-test, and the data snooping procedure. For the connected network phase, it includes the T-test, with an emphasis on the detection and identification of errors in the control points.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1749zAccess online version01703nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100003200139245004500171264004300216264009500259264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505014800531520042700679542001601106546001601122588004001138650002601178650002101204710003901225856007701264OTLid0001750MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241123s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aRubin, Justin Henryeauthor00aMusic Composition & TheorycJustin Rubin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- Preface & Acknowledgements -- Common Practice Musical Forms -- 20th Century and Modern Techniques -- Music Theory Resources0 aA Step-by-Step Method for student composers to write in a variety of styles, genres, and forms. Driven by simple model examples and accompanied by audio samples, it is intended to develop individual creativity and confidence in writing and, in so doing, explore the student’s inherent expressive talents. Each chapter provides reference examples from the literature for the student to discover works by master composers.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1750zAccess online version02805nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002700134245005100161264004300212264004500255264001200300300002200312336002600334337002600360338003600386341002800422490002700450505036600477520128200843542004102125546001602166588004002182650003102222700003102253700003102284710003902315856007702354OTLid0001751MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241123s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aReyes, Ariadnaeauthor00aGreen Cities and TransportationcAriadna Reyes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- About the Authors -- About the Instituiton -- Acknowledgements -- Section 1: Sustainability, Transportation, and City Planning -- Section 2: Case Studies, Strategies, and Lessons from the North and South -- Section 3: Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Cities, and Mobility -- Image Credits -- Glossary -- Accessibility Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aThis textbook equips advanced undergraduate and graduate students with the knowledge, skills, and multidisciplinary perspectives needed to understand how sustainable mobility and infrastructure can support climate change mitigation and transportation equity for low-income commuters. The textbook is organized into three sections: Sustainability, Transportation Equity, and Planning. Case Studies and Lessons from the North and South. Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Cities, and Mobility. It includes eleven chapters, each featuring discussion questions, reading materials, and in-class exercises designed to help students develop a research paper on transportation. This textbook is part of a six-volume series produced under the grant OERTransport: Enabling Transportation Planning Professional Advancement awarded to the University of Texas-Arlington (UTA) in consortium with California Polytechnic State University (Cal Poly) and the University of South Florida (USF). It was developed under an Open Textbooks Pilot grant from the Fund for the Improvement of Postsecondary Education (FIPSE), U.S. Department of Education. However, its contents do not necessarily represent the policy of the Department of Education, and no endorsement by the Federal Government should be assumed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSharif-Asl, Soheileauthor1 aMozaffarian, Ladaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1751zAccess online version03363nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245005600134264004300190264004500233264001200278300002200290336002600312337002600338338003600364341002800400490002700428505029600455520194900751542004102700546001602741588004002757650003102797700002502828700003202853710003902885856007702924OTLid0001752MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aTransportation Land Use Modeling and Policy (TLUMP) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- About the Authors -- About the Institution -- Copyright -- Acknowledgements -- Part I: Introduction and History of Transportation Planning and Modeling -- Part II: Integrated Land Use-Transportation Modeling -- Part III: Travel Demand Modeling -- Image Credits -- Derivative Notes0 aTransportation Land Use Modeling and Policy is an open educational resource (OER) that offers a thorough exploration of various approaches and frameworks for modeling the complex relationship between land use and transportation, with a focus on scenario-based analysis for issues such as equity, environmental impact, and other critical transportation policies. The textbook begins by providing an overview of the current urban transportation landscape, highlighting ongoing challenges like transportation equity. It then introduces foundational theories related to land use and transportation, setting the stage for an in-depth examination of different modeling approaches. Using case studies and real-world examples, primarily from North America, the book demonstrates how these models explain and predict the relationship between land use (residential, economic, industrial activities) and transportation (accessibility). After reviewing existing integrated land use and transportation models and discussing the future direction of integrated land use and transportation planning, the latter part of the book delves deeper into travel demand modeling (TDM) practices. It highlights traditional methods like the four-step model and provides a brief overview of newer techniques such as activity- based and agent-based models. This textbook is part of a six-volume series produced under the grant OERTransport: Enabling Transportation Planning Professional Advancement awarded to the University of Texas-Arlington (UTA) in consortium with California Polytechnic State University (Cal Poly) and the University of South Florida (USF). It was developed under an Open Textbooks Pilot grant from the Fund for the Improvement of Postsecondary Education (FIPSE), U.S. Department of Education. However, its contents do not necessarily represent the policy of the Department of Education, and no endorsement by the Federal Government should be assumed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aPan, Qishengeauthor1 aSharifi-Asl, Soheileauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1752zAccess online version02977nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245003700162264004300199264006500242264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002800429490002700457505108900484520076501573542004102338546001602379588004002395650003802435650002602473710003902499856007702538OTLid0001753MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMikhaeel, Ragyeauthor00aFirst-Year ArabiccRagy Mikhaeel 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aEvanston, IllinoisbNorthwestern University Librariesc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout -- Introduction -- Lesson One الدرس األول -- Lesson Two الدرس الثاني -- Lesson Three الدرس الثالث -- Lesson Four الدرس الرابع -- Lesson Five الدرس الخامس -- Lesson Six الدرس السادس -- Lesson Seven الدرس السابع -- Lesson Eight الدرس الثامن -- Lesson Nine الدرس التاسع -- Lesson Ten الدرس العاشر -- Lesson Eleven الدرس الحادي عشر -- Lesson Twelve الدرس الثاني عشر -- Lesson Thirteen الدرس الثالث عشر -- Lesson Fourteen الدرس الرابع عشر -- Lesson Fifteen الدرس الخامس عشر -- Lesson Sixteen الدرس السادس عشر -- Lesson Seventeen الدرس السابع عشر -- Lesson Eighteen الدرس الثامن عشر -- Lesson Nineteen الدرس التاسع عشر -- Lesson Twenty الدرس العشرون -- Lesson Twenty-One الدرس الواحد والعشرون -- Lesson Twenty-Two الدرس الثاني والعشرون -- Lesson Twenty-Three الدرس الثالث والعشرون0 aFirst-Year Arabic focuses on Egyptian Colloquial Arabic, the most widespread spoken Arabic variety which is perceived as the lingua franca in the Arab world. The material of the book covers about 15-16 weeks of study for classes meeting twice a week (80 minutes/session). This material can be modified according to the teacher’s plan and speed. Students with only one introductory course of Arabic can use the book for self education. The learner can tell easily from the introductory chapter, the quality of the grammatical notes, verb conjugations and exercises spread all over the book that the book is written for both regular language class purpose at the university level and for self education. The book has recordings that are essential for learners.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1753zAccess online version02506nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245004100134264004300175264006400218264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505026200459520086700721542001601588546001601604588004101620650003101661700002701692700003101719700002501750700002601775700003101801700003501832700002801867700002401895700002501919710003901944856007701983OTLid0001754MnU20260406020138.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH104aThe Delft Method for System Dynamics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction to System Dynamics -- The first modelling cycle -- Model formulation 1 -- Model formulation 2 -- Model evaluation -- Problem Formulation and Conceptualisation -- Formulation -- Evaluation -- Model use and policy testing -- References0 aThe Delft Method for System Dynamics (SD) is a proven method for learning basic SD. The method focuses on learning by doing: first you try to work through an exercise, and if you do not understand something, then you can look up the theory. The book contains exercises on topics such as causal loop diagrams, delays, and when SD is an appropriate methodology. It also contains modelling exercises that show students how to build low to medium complexity models, and how to use these models for policy analysis. The theory chapters cover all phases of the modelling cycle: problem articulation, conceptualisation, formulation, evaluation (including validation and scenario analysis), and policy analysis. This book is intended for students and teachers in large or small System Dynamics courses, and for motivated students that want to learn SD at their own pace.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aAuping, Willemeauthor1 ad’Hont, Floortjeeauthor1 aKubli, Merlaeauthor1 aSlinger, Jilleauthor1 aSteinmann, Patrickeauthor1 avan der Heijde, Floriseauthor1 avan Daalen, Elseauthor1 aPruyt, Erikeauthor1 aThissen, Wileauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1754zAccess online version02425nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002800134245006100162264004300223264004500266264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002800433490002700461505033100488520101800819542004101837546001601878588004001894650002501934710003901959856007701998OTLid0001755MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aKahlow, Jessicaeauthor04aThe Alchemy of Assessment and EvaluationcJessica Kahlow 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- About This Project -- Acknowledgements -- Dedication -- Assessment vs. Evaluation -- Selecting Aligned Assessments -- Assignments -- Discussions -- Quizzes -- Choosing the right tool -- Subject Expertise and Evaluation -- Instructors' Use of AI in Teaching -- AI Rubrics -- Bibliography -- Image Credits0 aThis comprehensive guide illuminates the art and science of educational assessment, blending ancient alchemical wisdom with modern AI innovations. Part one lays the foundation, exploring essential principles of assessment and evaluation and its pivotal role in shaping learning outcomes. Part two delves into diverse assessment types, from formative assessments driving real-time adjustments to summative evaluations measuring overall achievement. Part three offers expert guidance on crafting effective assessment designs, ensuring authenticity and inclusivity. Part four examines the alchemy of feedback and grading, empowering educators with strategies for constructive engagement and growth. Part five focuses on evaluations, showcasing methods to assess program effectiveness and student progress over time. Whether you’re an educator refining assessment practices or an instructional designer harnessing AI’s potential, this book equips you to turn every educational challenge into a golden opportunity.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1755zAccess online version02646nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003100148245004500179250001200224264004300236264007100279264001200350300002200362336002600384337002600410338003600436341002500472490002700497505074400524520073201268542004102000546001602041588004002057650002402097650002302121710003902144856007702183OTLid0001756MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG1731 aSchneider, Bettinaeauthor00aFinancial EmpowermentcBettina Schneider  a2nd ed. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Reginac2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- Preface to the 2024 Edition -- Introduction -- Image Credits -- Personal Financial Planning -- Basic Ideas of Finance -- Financial Statements -- Evaluating Choices: Time, Risk, and Value -- Financial Plans: Budgets -- Taxes and Tax Planning -- Financial Management -- Consumer Strategies -- Buying a Home -- Personal Risk Management: Insurance -- Personal Risk Management: Retirement and Estate Planning -- Investing -- Owning Stocks -- Owning Bonds and Investing in Mutual Funds -- Career Planning -- Video Interviews with Elders -- Modifications made to Personal Finance -- Acknowledgements -- About the Author -- Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication -- Open Education Publishing -- Versioning History0 aFinancial Empowerment is designed for a single-semester introduction to financial planning and decision-making, in order to provide first and second-year students with the necessary financial literacy and skills needed to make sound financial decisions, assess financial risk, and achieve financial success. This textbook attempts to speak to the varied backgrounds, knowledge systems, and experiences of Indigenous and non-Indigenous Canadians by providing Indigenous and non-Indigenous perspectives on personal finance and financial planning using examples and information from Elders, the Canadian financial system, and the economy. Additional OER can be found at https://ctl.uregina.ca/open-education/publications-catalogue1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1756zAccess online version01992nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000800135245005800143264004300201264007500244264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002800441490002700469505021900496520057000715542001601285546001601301588004001317650002001357650002301377650002601400700002501426700002701451710003901478856007701517OTLid0001757MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN85 4aD2000aHuma 207bExploring the Arts and Culture of the World 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCollege of Western Idahoc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to HUMA 207 and Acknowledgements -- Instructor Resources -- What are the Humanities? -- Prehistoric - 300 CE -- 300 - 900 CE -- 900 - 1400 CE -- 1400 - 1800 CE -- 1800 - present -- Appendix -- Glossary0 aWelcome to Humanities 207. This course is designed to introduce you to a broad range of the Humanities (encompassing History and Geography, Art and Architecture, Religion, Literature and the Performing Arts. This course meets CWI’s requirements for General Education’s GEM 5 (Humanistic and Artistic Ways of Knowing) and it meets the Research and Writing requirement for the General Studies Program. Additionally it can transfer to Boise State University’s degree program in Humanities and Cultural Studies as part of the University Foundations prerequisites.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aBrown, Kareneauthor1 aYadlin, Michaleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1757zAccess online version03202nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050000700158245010700165264004300272264007000315264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002800507490002700535505040900562520129200971542004102263546002702304588004102331650003402372650003102406700004302437700004402480700004302524700004202567700004302609710003902652856007702691OTLid0001758MnU20260323020135.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651501  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aH100aInnovación Pedagógica en ciencias sociales y DerechobEstrategias y Técnicas de Educación Superior 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos de la Innovación Pedagógica en Derecho -- Capítulo II: Estrategias Didácticas Innovadoras en la Enseñanza del Derecho -- Capítulo III: Técnicas de Enseñanza Personalizadas y Contextualizadas -- Capítulo IV: Proyectos y Prácticas Innovadoras en la Educación Jurídica -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa innovación pedagógica en el ámbito del derecho aborda la necesidad de modernizar los métodos de enseñanza para adaptarse a las demandas contemporáneas de la educación superior y del mercado laboral. El objetivo principal es transformar las prácticas educativas tradicionales en estrategias más dinámicas e interactivas que promuevan el aprendizaje activo y la participación estudiantil. La metodología utilizada incluye la integración de tecnologías de la información y la comunicación (TIC), el aprendizaje basado en problemas (ABP), y las simulaciones de juicios, que permiten a los estudiantes desarrollar habilidades prácticas esenciales. Los resultados muestran una mejora significativa en la motivación, el rendimiento académico y la adquisición de competencias críticas como el pensamiento analítico y la resolución de problemas. La discusión señala la importancia de un enfoque holístico que combine diferentes teorías del aprendizaje para maximizar el impacto educativo. La conclusión destaca que, aunque los avances son prometedores, es fundamental abordar desafíos como la resistencia al cambio y la equidad en el acceso a recursos educativos innovadores para asegurar una implementación efectiva y sostenida de estas estrategias pedagógicas.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aRojas-Montero, Marcelo Eduardoeauthor1 aOcampo-Valle, Gabriela Fernandaeauthor1 aLlanos-García, Renata Valeriaeauthor1 aBonilla-Fierro, Luis Fernandoeauthor1 aBonilla-Alarcón, Luis Alfonsoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1758zAccess online version02742nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050000700135100002700142245004500169264004300214264006500257264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002800444490002700472505059500499520102801094542001602122546001602138588004002154650002702194650003102221710003902252856007702291OTLid0001759MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aH11 aFavero, Nathaneauthor00aStatistics Minus The MathcNathan Favero 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNathan Faveroc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Graphical Tools for Describing Variables -- Statistics for Describing One Variable at a Time -- Tools for Describing the Relationship Between Two Quantitative Variables -- Estimation -- Probability Distributions -- Sampling Distributions -- Hypothesis Testing -- Comparing Means (How a Qualitative Variable Relates to a Quantitative One) -- Comparing Groups (How Two Qualitative Variables Relate to One Another) -- Causality and Experimental Designs -- Models and Uncertainty -- Regression with Qualitative Independent Variables -- Regression with Qualitative Dependent Variables0 aThis book was largely adapted from the public domain resource Online Statistics Education: A Multimedia Course of Study (https://onlinestatbook.com Project Leader: David M. Lane, Rice University). A huge thanks to David Lane and his colleagues at Rice University for their creation of this wonderful resource. I use footnotes throughout to indicate precisely where the various sections of each chapter came from. Chapters 11-13 (as well as Section 3.5, Section 4.2.2, most of Section 4.2.3, and Section 9.3.1) were written by me (Nathan). This book is meant to be a free resource and is licensed under CC BY 4.0. You’re welcome to share or adapt it, as long as you provide attribution to any work of mine that you use. This book was made using Quarto and is hosted using GitHub Pages. There are still formatting inconsistencies, and this is ever a work in progress. If you find errors, feel free to reach out (find updated contact info here: https://nathanfavero.com) so I can correct them for the next version I publish.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1759zAccess online version02010nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007200163264004300235264007300278264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505028200528520060100810542001601411546001601427588004001443650002301483650002601506710003901532856007701571OTLid0001760MnU20260330020759.0m     o  d s      cr            241206s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aBrennan, Claireeauthor00aBeyond CookbExplorers of Australia and the PacificcClaire Brennan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Cook Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgment of Country -- Introduction -- Navigating Beyond Cook -- Initial European engagement with the Pacific -- Increased links between Europe and the Pacific -- Australia takes shape -- The other(ed) explorers -- The original explorers -- Conclusion -- Acknowledgements0 aWhen Europeans entered the Pacific they entered a place they thought they knew, and a place that was already peopled. European explorer accounts of Australia and the Pacific are fascinating in what they reveal about the people and places explorers encountered, and about European expectations of what they would find. This book is a guide to European exploration of Australia and the Pacific; to those accounts of contact and how to interpret them in the light of European preconceptions and misunderstanding; and to the actions taken by the people descended from the regions' original explorers.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1760zAccess online version01958nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245002400135264004300159264003700202264001200239300002200251336002600273337002600299338003600325341002800361490002700389505030900416520053200725542004101257546001601298588004101314650002001355650002601375700002901401700003801430710003901468856007701507OTLid0001761MnU20260406020139.0m     o  d s      cr            241206s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN8500aNavigating the Arts 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aNorman, OklahomabSHAREOKc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Visual Elements -- Line -- Texture -- Light -- Value -- Color -- Shape & Form -- Space -- Motion & Time -- Principle of Design -- Unity -- Variety -- Balance -- Emphasis -- Repetition -- Pattern -- Rhythm -- Proportion & Scale -- Application Assignment -- Context -- Image List -- Bibliography0 aNavigating the Arts delves into the visual elements and principles of design throughout art history and is tailored for classroom use. It aims to deepen students’ understanding of these concepts and their application across different artistic forms, fostering critical thinking and visual literacy. The accessible language, logical structure, clear objectives, and wealth of examples and images make this journal an ideal tool for everyone interested in developing class discussions on how to understand and interpret images.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aColombari, Luciaeauthor1 aJuliano-Lykins, Catherineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1761zAccess online version02543nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002800134245005400162264004300216264009200259264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505047300528520085201001542003001853546001601883588004001899650002501939650002601964700002501990700002602015710003902041856007702080OTLid0001762MnU20260406020644.0m     o  d s      cr            241217s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aSchugar, Jordaneauthor04aThe Digital Storytelling HandbookcJordan Schugar 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBefore the Beginning -- Setting the Stage -- Using What You Have -- Process of Digital Storytelling -- Why Use Digital Storytelling? -- Building Cultural Competence with Storytelling -- Strategies for Digital Stories -- Video Interviews -- Storytelling Using Emotion -- Storytelling Through Visual Aids (Photography and Videography) -- Short Films -- Six Words, Six Shots Video Story -- Documentary -- Color’s Impart on Digital Storytelling -- Conclusion -- Appendix0 aThe Digital Storytelling Handbook is designed to provide an introduction to digital storytelling and its multifaceted applications in the higher education classroom space. This eTextbook gives storytellers practical tools to help them think about different reasons for making digital stories and different ways to think about using and incorporating digital stories into teaching, learning, and living. In this eTextbook, readers will also learn how experiencing digital stories — as either the author or the audience — builds cultural competence and teaches us about humanity and the human experience. Co-authored with students, this eTextbook was written in the spirit of OER with the expectation that future readers and students have an opportunity to contribute a chapter, idea, approach, or methodology of the eTextbook’s basic content.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aPenny, Chriseauthor1 aGlatt, Hannaheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1762zAccess online version02985nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003700135245005400172264004300226264008600269264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341009100477490002700568505066100595520112801256542004102384546001502425588004102440650003802481710003902519856007702558OTLid0001763MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            241219s2025    mnu     o     0   0 fre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMiller, Jessica Sertlingeauthor00aComprendre et se faire comprendrecJessica Miller 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Wisconsin-Eau Clairec[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbclosedCaptionsbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Message de l'autrice -- Objectifs -- Sommaire -- Module 1 : l'identité -- La francophonie & les phonèmes -- Les variétés régionales & les syllabes -- Les identités linguistiques & l'intonation -- Module 2 : les loisirs -- Le slam & les consonnes -- La poésie & la liaison -- Les bandes dessinées & les voyelles nasales -- Module 3 : l'art de la scène -- L'humour & les voyelles -- La voix professionnelle & la lettre E -- La danse & les voyelles moyennes -- Module 4 : les droits humains -- La Louisiane & les semi-voyelles -- Le Canada & les paires minimales -- Documents à télécharger -- Les phonèmes et leurs correspondances0 aThis textbook supports a college-level pronunciation course for learners of French and focuses on the phonetic system of international French. The material is based on authentic resources that include a variety of topics from the French-speaking world, with the goal of improving the accuracy of comprehension and expression at the intermediate level. Each chapter integrates all modes of communication: interpretation, presentation, conversation, and culture. Phonetic themes include phonemes, enchaînement, liaison, nasal vowels, the letter E, mid vowels, semivowels, etc. The course explores different regions and a variety of cultural aspects of the French-speaking world. Ce cours universitaire de français seconde langue se concentre sur le système du français international. Le manuel se base sur des ressources authentiques qui abordent des thèmes divers issus du monde francophone, avec le but d'améliorer la précision de l'interprétation et de l'expression orale au niveau intermédiaire. Chaque chapitre intègre tous les modes de communication : interprétation, présentation, conversation, et culture.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn French.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1763zAccess online version02217nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050000700134100002800141245007600169264004300245264007800288264001200366300002200378336002600400337002600426338003600452341002800488490002700516505079100543520024001334542004101574546001601615588004001631650002501671650003101696710003901727856007701766OTLid0001764MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            241223s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aH11 aLombardi, Paulaeauthor00aUnderstanding and Supporting Learners with DisabilitiescPaula Lombardi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of New Hampshirec2024. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Resources and Copyright Notice -- IDEA Definitions -- Identification/Diagnosis -- Prevalence -- Etiology -- Characteristics and Impact on Learning -- Adaptive Behavior -- Interventions, Learning Strategies, Teaching Methods and Accommodations -- Assistive Technology -- Systems of Support -- Specific Learning Disability -- Dyslexia -- Dyscalculia -- Dysgraphia -- Intellectual Disability and Development Disability -- Autism Spectrum Disorders -- Emotional Disturbance -- ADHD -- Orthopedic Impairments -- Other Health Impairments -- Multiple Disabilities -- Visual Impairments/Blindness -- Deaf/Hard of Hearing -- Deaf Blindness -- Speech and Language Impairement -- Traumatic Brain Injury -- Assistive Technologies to Support Students with ADHD -- Appendix -- Updates0 aThis book is a cloned version of Understanding and Supporting Learners with Disabilities by Paula Lombardi, published using Pressbooks under a CC BY-NC-SA (Attribution NonCommercial ShareAlike) license. It may differ from the original.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1764zAccess online version02608nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245003500135264004300170264006900213264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002800404490002700432505021500459520117200674542001601846546001601862588004001878650003801918650002601956700003101982700002402013700002702037700003002064710003902094856007702133OTLid0001765MnU20260406020643.0m     o  d s      cr            241230s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aSemillasbElementary Spanish I 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgments -- Module 01 - Todo sobre mí -- Module 02 - Todo sobre mi vivienda -- Module 03 - Todo sobre mi familia -- Module 04 - Todo sobre mis gustos -- Appendix -- Copyright Information0 aSemillas: Elementary Spanish I is a comprehensive introductory Spanish open-access textbook with reading, listening, speaking, and writing practice. This Open Educational Resource (OER) aims to help students begin learning Spanish in a comprehensive manner. This textbook was created in Pressbooks, a versatile platform that allows us to integrate interactive activities (h5p) and present authentic material such as video interviews with Spanish speakers and other resources. Grammar is not presented just as a standalone topic, but rather is seamlessly integrated into all parts of this book. To ensure that our textbook is diverse and inclusive we have built a team of writers who cross gender, age, and nationality. We have consulted with people whose voices represent diverse demographic segments of the Spanish-speaking world to include a plurality of pronunciations and appearances. We have elected to use the feminine as the base form in our vocabulary lists and have introduced students to non-binary endings. This textbook underwent a rigorous review process that included professionals from more than ten higher education organizations in the United States.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aOlivares, Gabrielaeauthor1 ajones, edeneauthor1 aKlevar, Racheleauthor1 aZimotti, Giovannieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1765zAccess online version02367nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245005800145264004300203264006900246264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002500437490002700462505107900489520004101568542003001609546002701639588004001666650003801706650002601744650002401770700003001794700002901824710003901853856007701892OTLid0001766MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            241230s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP51 4aRA44000aMaletín MédicobIntermediate Spanish for Healthcare 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Acknowledgements -- Proyecto 1 - Una reflexión personal -- Lección 1A – Los soñadores -- Lección 1B – La inmigración en los Estados Unidos -- Lección 1C – Vivir más -- Discusión guiada 1 -- Vocabulario Módulo 1 -- Gramática Módulo 1 -- Proyecto 2: Una dieta ideal -- Lección 2A - La Dieta de América Latina -- Lección 2B - El Sistema Digestivo -- Lección 2C - ¿Como será la comida del futuro? -- Discusión guiada 2 -- Vocabulario Módulo 2 -- Gramática Módulo 2 -- Proyecto 3 - El historial médico -- Lección 3A – Formulario de admisión -- Lección 3B – El historial médico -- Lección 3C – El paciente latino -- Discusión guiada 3 -- Vocabulario Módulo 3 -- Gramática Módulo 3 -- Proyecto 4: Currículum Vitae -- Lección 4A – La salud física y mental en la escuela -- Lección 4B – El cerebro y la mente -- Lección 4C - La medicina tradicional vs. la innovación -- Discusión guiada 4 -- Vocabulario Módulo 4 -- Gramática Módulo 4 -- Appendix -- Copyright Information -- Material suplementario para instructores0 aIntermediate Spanish for Healthcare.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aZimotti, Giovannieauthor1 aJiménez, Alexiseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1766zAccess online version02588nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003100137245004300168264004300211264009200254264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002800468490002700496505056300523520087201086542004101958546001601999588004002015650002602055650002902081710003902110856007702149OTLid0001767MnU20260406020644.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aLeonard, Sandra M.eauthor02aA Guide to CompositioncSandra Leonard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAssignments and Activities -- Preface: Welcome to Composition -- Chapter 1: Using the Writing Center at KU -- Chapter 2: The Rhetorical Situation -- Chapter 3: The Shape of Rhetoric -- Chapter 4: Telling Stories with Narrative Writing Conventions -- Chapter 5: Generating Ideas and Writing Topic Proposals -- Chapter 6: Strategies of Organization -- Chapter 7: Grammar and Mechanics -- Chapter 8: Practicing Better Peer Feedback -- Chapter 9: Using the Rohrbach Library -- Chapter 10: Ethical and Effective Attribution -- Afterword: Writing For and Beyond KU0 aA Guide to Composition (2025) is an introduction to college writing and research. The text begins by defining basic principles of rhetoric and composition using popular texts such as advertisements, speeches, and news media. This textbook then moves to the specific genres of narrative and argument. Elements of the writing process are emphasized throughout the text in addressing writing center use, idea generation, library use, peer review, and ethical attribution including some discussion of A.I. Each chapter is written by current or former Kutztown University faculty and students, making it particularly well-suited to Kutztown University students; however, chapters two through eight are particularly inviting to wider audiences. Each chapter contains a number of writing process activities that may be useful as classroom activities or homework assignments.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1767zAccess online version02101nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245004000143264004300183264004200226264001200268300002200280336002600302337002600328338003600354341002500390490002700415505024100442520041800683542003001101546001601131588004001147650003301187650003101220700002901251700002901280700003201309700003001341700002401371700003501395700002501430700003101455700002901486710003901515856007701554OTLid0001768MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH102aA Casebook for Comparative Politics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSt. Paul, MinnesotabOpendorac[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction for Students -- About the Authors -- About Version 1.1 -- Acknowledgements -- United Kingdom: England, Scotland, and Wales -- France -- Germany -- India -- Kenya -- Greece -- Republic of Ireland -- Nigeria -- Cuba -- Canada0 aThis book is intended to serve as a companion text for courses in Comparative Politics, Introduction to Political Science, and similar subjects. The target audience is lower-division undergraduates. Each chapter constitutes a single country (case), with material on seven (7) major topics: History, Identity, Culture and Civil Society, Participation, Formal Institutions, Political Economy, and Foreign Relations.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aJohnson, Mark L.eauthor1 aPashayan, Angelaeauthor1 aPedreira, Daniel I.eauthor1 aSchuster, Mattheweauthor1 aTures, Johneauthor1 aHandel, Cheryl Van Deneauthor1 aChang, Heleneauthor1 aHendrickson, Petraeauthor1 aGritter, Mattheweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1768zAccess online version01764nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001000155100002600165245007800191264004300269264006400312264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002800498490002700526505024800553520031000801542001601111546001601127588004101143650003601184650004201220710003901262856007701301OTLid0001770MnU20260406020140.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789463669894  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTP155 4aTA1451 aRohde, Martineauthor00aGraphs, Formulas and Tables relevant to Transport PhenomenacMartin Rohde 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDefinitions -- Microscopic balances -- Macroscopic balances -- Important correlations -- Drag and friction -- Non-stationary transport in objects -- Radiation -- Mathematics -- Properties of materials -- Mollier Diagrams -- Other -- References0 aThis book provides relevant information required during BSc-level courses on Transport Phenomena, encompassing micro- and macroscopic balances, correlations for friction, heat transfer and species transport and material properties. The information comes in handy during exercise classes and written exams.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1770zAccess online version02463nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245009700177264004300274264007600317264001200393300002200405336002600427337002600453338003600479341002800515490002700543505036900570520089100939542004101830546001601871588004001887650002301927650002301950710003901973856007702012OTLid0001771MnU20260323020557.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aBarnes, Rebeccaeeditor00aCat burglars, yeast races, and other hypothesis-driven bioscience practicalscRebecca Barnes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSheffield, South Yorkshire, EnglandbThe University of Sheffieldc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part I. Yeast races -- Part II. Plasmid identification -- Part III. Testing the five-second rule -- Part IV. Visualising defence gene expression in plants -- Part V. Testing antimicrobial compounds from natural products -- Part VI. mtDNA RFLP to catch a cat burglar -- Part VIII. Principles of gene editing -- Safety information -- Acknowledgements0 aThis book is aimed at fellow academics teaching biosciences students (probably in the first or second year of an undergraduate degree). It contains materials from eight different sets of practicals that colleagues have developed here at the University of Sheffield, concerning different areas of molecular and cellular biology. The experiments all span a few lab sessions, and are a step away from “cookbook” style labs with defined instructions and a certain outcome; each one contains significant elements of experimental planning. The standard lab session in our School is three hours long, with students working in pairs. Each section contains the following: some background information and scientific context; student-facing documents; technical information, including materials needed and any extra protocols; and additional resources that might be helpful such as references.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1771zAccess online version03182nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050000800143100002700151245004500178250001900223264004300242264004000285264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505044100502520160100943542003002544546001602574588004002590650002302630650002702653710003902680856007702719OTLid0001772MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA11 aAxler, Sheldoneauthor00aLinear Algebra Done RightcSheldon Axler  aFourth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Vector Spaces -- Chapter 2: Finite-Dimensional Vector Spaces -- Chapter 3: Linear Maps -- Chapter 4: Polynomials -- Chapter 5: Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors -- Chapter 6: Inner Product Spaces -- Chapter 7: Operators on Inner Product Spaces -- Chapter 8: Operators on Complex Vector Spaces -- Chapter 9: Multilinear Algebra and Determinants -- Photo Credits -- Symbol Index -- Index -- Colophon: Notes on Typesetting0 aNow available in Open Access, this best-selling textbook for a second course in linear algebra is aimed at undergraduate math majors and graduate students. The fourth edition gives an expanded treatment of the singular value decomposition and its consequences. It includes a new chapter on multilinear algebra, treating bilinear forms, quadratic forms, tensor products, and an approach to determinants via alternating multilinear forms. This new edition also increases the use of the minimal polynomial to provide cleaner proofs of multiple results. Also, over 250 new exercises have been added. The novel approach taken here banishes determinants to the end of the book. The text focuses on the central goal of linear algebra: understanding the structure of linear operators on finite-dimensional vector spaces. The author has taken unusual care to motivate concepts and simplify proofs. A variety of interesting exercises in each chapter helps students understand and manipulate the objects of linear algebra. Beautiful formatting creates pages with an unusually student-friendly appearance in both print and electronic versions. No prerequisites are assumed other than the usual demand for suitable mathematical maturity. The text starts by discussing vector spaces, linear independence, span, basis, and dimension. The book then deals with linear maps, eigenvalues, and eigenvectors. Inner-product spaces are introduced, leading to the finite-dimensional spectral theorem and its consequences. Generalized eigenvectors are then used to provide insight into the structure of a linear operator.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1772zAccess online version02183nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050000700148100002600155245004800181264004300229264005900272264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002800453490002700481505035800508520062800866542004101494546001601535588004001551650002401591650002301615650003101638710003901669856007701708OTLid0001773MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aQH301 4aH11 aRenfro, Jaymeeauthor00aGrant WritingbThe EssentialscJayme Renfro 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCedar Falls, IowabUniversity of Northern Iowac[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Understanding Grants and Funding Sources -- Chapter 2: Preparation -- Chapter 3: Developing Project Ideas -- Chapter 4: Letters of Inquiry -- Chapter 5: Components -- Chapter 6: Writing the Proposal -- Chapter 7: Budgets -- Chapter 8: Evaluation -- Chapter 9: Ethical Considerations in Grant Writing -- Accessibility Statement0 aWelcome to the exciting and impactful world of grant writing! Whether you are a student embarking on a career in nonprofit management, a budding researcher eager to secure funding for your projects, or a professional looking to hone your grant writing skills, this textbook is designed to guide you through every step of the grant writing process. Grant writing is not just about securing funds; it's about crafting a story, building relationships, and making a tangible impact on communities and fields of study. This book aims to equip you with the knowledge, skills, and insights needed to excel in this rewarding field.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1773zAccess online version02876nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245004400149264004300193264006000236264001200296300002200308336002600330337002600356338003600382341002800418490002700446505073800473520086701211542004102078546001602119588004102135650002302176650002302199700003202222700003002254700003102284700003502315710003902350856007702389OTLid0001774MnU20260406020644.0m     o  d s      cr            250116s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aIntroduction to Behavioral Neuroscience 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Structure and Function of the Nervous System: Cells and Anatomy -- Chapter 2: Neurophysiology -- Chapter 3: Basic Neurochemistry -- Chapter 4: Comparative Neuroscience -- Chapter 5: Neurodevelopment -- Chapter 6: Vision -- Chapter 7: Hearing and Balance -- Chapter 8: The Chemical Senses -- Chapter 9: Touch and Pain -- Chapter 10: Motor Control -- Chapter 11: Sexual Behavior and Development -- Chapter 12: Stress -- Chapter 13: Emotion and Mood -- Chapter 14: Psychopharmacology -- Chapter 15: Biological Rhythms and Sleep -- Chapter 16: Homeostasis -- Chapter 17: Neuroimmunology -- Chapter 18: Learning and Memory -- Chapter 19: Attention and Executive Function -- Appendix A: Methods -- Answer Key -- Index0 aIntroduction to Behavioral Neuroscience aligns to the topics and objectives of introductory behavioral neuroscience courses taught in psychology, biology, neuroscience, and similar departments. This offering is intended for undergraduates with no presumed college-level science coursework, and presents the foundational principles of brain-behavior-environment interactions. In Introduction to Behavioral Neuroscience, students will begin to understand how the physiology of the nervous system and the environment dictate our movements, thoughts and feelings. Students will be challenged to think about real neuroscience experiments, appreciate how neuroscience knowledge evolves over time, and consider open questions in the field. They will also be invited to learn about the people behind the science, such as through interview videos and researcher profiles.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKirby, Elizabeth D.eauthor1 aGlenn, Melissa J.eauthor1 aSandstrom, Noah J.eauthor1 aWilliams, Christina L.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1774zAccess online version03068nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002700147245005100174250001800225264004300243264007500286264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505082200538520090501360542003002265546001602295588004002311650003302351650003602384700003202420700004402452700003402496710003902530856007702569OTLid0001775MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250203s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLC9801 aNewcomb, L. H.eauthor00aMethods of Teaching AgriculturecL. H. Newcomb  aThird edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Tech Librariesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Foundations for Methods in Agricultural Education1. Factors Influencing Decisions About Teaching2. Principles of Teaching and Learning3. Planning the Course of Study4. Learning as Problem Solving -- II. Methods for Teaching and Learning5. Planning for Instruction6. Group Teaching Techniques7. Individualized Teaching Techniques8. Managing Student Behavior -- III. Application of Learning9. Application of Learning: The Laboratory10. Application of Learning: Supervised Agricultural Experience11. Application of Learning: FFA -- IV. Teaching Special Populations12. Teaching Learners with Special Needs13. Teaching Adults -- V. Evaluation of Learning14. Evaluation of Learning -- Appendix A: Sample Unit of InstructionAppendix B: Vocabulary Useful in Developing Objectives and Test Items at Various Cognitive Levels0 aProviding a clear and concise framework for teaching and problem solving in agricultural education, Methods of Teaching Agriculture, third edition is a necessary text for any teaching methods course. It includes a comprehensive examination of theory and research in guiding principles for how students learn best. Numerous illustrations and graphs clarify all concepts discussed within the text. Methods of Teaching Agriculture, third edition is a republished work. This text was originally published by Pearson Prentice Hall in 2004 (ISBN 0131134183). Rights to the book have been reverted to the authors. The book was reformatted and republished in its entirety in 2025. A desire to update this 2004 book resulted in the 2024 publication of the open textbook, The Art and Science of Teaching Agriculture: Four Keys to Dynamic Learning, freely available at https://doi.org/10.21061/teachagriculture.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducation, SecondaryvTextbooks1 aMcCracken, J. Davideauthor1 aWarmbrod (1929-2022), J. Roberteauthor1 aWhittington, M. Susieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1775zAccess online version04461nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135100003300149245004100182264004300223264005300266264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341002500441490002700466505230400493520103802797542002703835546001603862588004003878650002603918650002703944710003903971856007704010OTLid0001777MnU20260406020818.0m     o  d s      cr            250203s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-2801 aRussell, John Morganeauthor00aSignificant StatisticscJohn Russell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- About the Author -- Instructor Resources -- Chapter 1: Sampling and Data -- 1.1 Introduction to Statistics -- 1.2 Data Basics -- 1.3 Data Collection and Observational Studies -- 1.4 Designed Experiments -- 1.5 Sampling -- Chapter 1 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 2: Univariate Descriptive Statistics -- 2.1 Descriptive Statistics and Frequency Distributions -- 2.2 Displaying and Describing Categorical Distributions -- 2.3 Displaying Quantitative Distributions -- 2.4 Describing Quantitative Distributions -- 2.5 Measures of Location and Outliers -- 2.6 Measures of Center -- 2.7 Measures of Spread -- Chapter 2 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 3: Bivariate Descriptive Statistics -- 3.1 Introduction to Bivariate Data -- 3.2 Visualizing Bivariate Quantitative Data -- 3.3 Measures of Association -- 3.4 Modeling Linear Relationships -- 3.5 Cautions about Regression -- Chapter 3 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 4: Probability Distributions -- 4.1 Introduction to Probability and Random Variables -- 4.2 Discrete Random Variables -- 4.3 The Binomial Distribution -- 4.4 Continuous Random Variables -- 4.5 The Normal Distribution -- 4.6 The Normal Approximation to the Binomial -- Chapter 4 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 5: Foundations of Inference -- 5.1 Point Estimation and Sampling Distributions -- 5.2 The Sampling Distribution of the Sample Mean (Central Limit Theorem) -- 5.3 Introduction to Confidence Intervals -- 5.4 The Behavior of Confidence Intervals -- 5.5 Introduction to Hypothesis Tests -- 5.6 Hypothesis Tests in Depth -- Chapter 5 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 6: Inference for One Sample -- 6.1 The Sampling Distribution of the Sample Mean (t) -- 6.2 Inference for the Mean in Practice -- 6.3 The Sampling Distribution of the Sample Proportion -- 6.4 Inference for a Proportion -- 6.5 Behavior of Confidence Intervals for a Proportion -- Chapter 6 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 7: Inference for Two Samples -- 7.1 Inference for Two Dependent Samples (Matched Pairs) -- 7.2 Inference for Two Independent Sample Means -- 7.3 Inference for Two-Sample Proportions -- Chapter 7 Wrap-Up -- Chapter 1 Extra Practice -- Chapter 2 Extra Practice -- Chapter 3 Extra Practice -- Chapter 4 Extra Practice -- Chapter 5 Extra Practice -- Chapter 6 Extra Practice -- Chapter 7 Extra Practice -- Glossary -- Tables -- Version Notes0 aSignificant Statistics: An Introduction to Statistics is intended for students enrolled in a one-semester introduction to statistics course who are not mathematics or engineering majors. It focuses on the interpretation of statistical results, especially in real world settings, and assumes that students have an understanding of intermediate algebra. In addition to end of section practice and homework sets, examples of each topic are explained step-by-step throughout the text and followed by a 'Your Turn' problem that is designed as extra practice for students. Significant Statistics: An Introduction to Statistics was adapted from content published by OpenStax including Introductory Statistics, OpenIntro Statistics, and Introductory Statistics for the Life and Biomedical Sciences. John Morgan Russell reorganized the existing content and added new content where necessary. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting this textbook: please help us understand your use by filling out this form: https://bit.ly/stat-interest.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1777zAccess online version03215nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003500149245009300184264004300277264005300320264001200373300002200385336002600407337002600433338003600459341010300495490002700598505064300625520124901268542001602517546001602533588004002549650002802589650002402617700002902641700003102670710003902701856007702740OTLid0001778MnU20260406020817.0m     o  d s      cr            250203s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRS1-441 4aRA4401 aCleveland, Jennifer L.eauthor00aMicrobiology, Pharmacology, and Immunology for Pre-Clinical StudentscJennifer Cleveland 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbclosedCaptionsblargePrintbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Authors -- Acknowledgments -- Instructor Resources -- 1. Host Defenses, Immunodeficiencies, and Autoimmune Disorders -- 2. Basic Microbiology -- 3. Systemic Infections of the Skin -- 4. Systemic Infections of the Oral Cavity and GI -- 5. Systemic Infections of the Respiratory Tract -- 6. Systemic Infections of the Circulatory and Lymphatic Systems -- 7. Systemic Infections of the Urinary System -- 8. Systemic Infections of the Nervous System -- 9. Foundations of Disease Management -- Appendix A: Bacteriology Resource -- Appendix B: Quick References: Medically Important Bacteria -- Accessibility (for HTML)0 aMicrobiology, Pharmacology, and Immunology for Pre-Clinical Students is a peer-reviewed open textbook designed to fill a gap in undergraduate medical education (UME) and support medical school pre-clerkship education. It covers the areas of immunology, microbiology, systems-based infections, and global mechanisms of treatment. It is aligned to USMLE(r) (United States Medical Licensing Examination) and modified from OpenStax Microbiology. The organization of this resource is driven by curricular structure to enhance integrated, multidisciplinary content delivery. This specific resource is intended to be used in various ways, mainly as a student quick-reference guide. The sections are not intended to be all-inclusive, but are primers for applied content delivery. The resource is organized into small chapters that can be used to support student preparation in any arrangement. Similarly, clinical context is only briefly discussed (or purposefully omitted) in order to allow the user to apply the basic content presented here in the clinical context used by their specific curricular structure. As cases and clinical correlates change regularly, it is beneficial to have flexible, short resources that can be applied to many scenarios.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPharmacologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aBinks, Andrew P.eauthor1 aLeClair, Renée J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1778zAccess online version05360nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002700138245008200165264004300247264005300290264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341011300465490002700578505131900605520276601924542004104690546001604731588004004747650002604787700002604813700003104839710003904870856007704909OTLid0001779MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            250203s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHD30.41 aAnderson, Lorieauthor00aStrategic Management and Case AnalysisbAn Integrated ApproachcLori Anderson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbhighContrastDisplayblongDescriptionbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Introduction to Strategic Management and Case Analysis -- Introduction to Strategic Management -- Introduction to Case Analysis -- Part II: Analyze Organizational Performance and a Firm’s External and Internal Environments -- Analyze Organizational Performance -- Analyze the External Environment -- Analyze the Internal Environment -- Part III: Synthesize Analysis and Determine a Firm’s Strategic Issue -- Synthesize Analysis and Determine a Firm’s Strategic Issue -- Part IV: Formulate Corporate and Business Level Strategy -- Formulate Corporate Level Strategy -- Formulate Business Level Strategy -- Part V: Formulate Strategy at the Business Level: Innovation, Sustainability and Ethics, Technology, and Multinational Strategy -- Formulate Innovation Strategy -- Formulate Sustainability and Ethics Strategy -- Formulate Technology Strategy -- Formulate Multinational Strategy -- Part VI: Implement Strategy -- Implement Strategy -- Appendix 1: Organizational Performance Analysis Instrument -- Appendix 2: PESTEL Analysis Instrument -- Appendix 3: Porter's Five Forces Analysis Instrument -- Appendix 4: Strategic Group Mapping Analysis Instrument -- Appendix 5: VRIO Analysis Instrument -- Appendix 6: Value Chain Analysis Instrument -- Appendix 7: CAGE Distance Framework Analysis Instrument0 aStrategic Management and Case Analysis: An Integrated Approach is intended for students in undergraduate business programs taking a course in strategic management. Because strategic management synthesizes many business topics and takes a holistic view of business, strategic management courses are often senior-level capstone courses. Most undergraduate business school students begin their business education with a broad introductory business course and then concentrate on courses in their major. Then they return to a broader lens of business to cap off their business education at a higher-level of learning. This textbook supports this level of comprehensive learning. If used with a senior-level capstone course, this textbook supports seniors to synthesize their business education through the lens of strategic management and helps them understand how businesses become successful by leveraging their competitive advantage. This textbook integrates strategic management and case analysis, with cases linked from an open access collection of business strategy cases, RMIT Strategic Management Case Studies. Students will get the most out of this textbook if it is used with cases that students analyze. Strategic Management and Case Analysis: An Integrated Approach, integrates strategic management as a research-led field of study and practice-informed area of business practice with an experiential learning approach to conducting a case analysis. The book explains how strategic leaders and managers analyze their firm’s organizational performance, and external and internal environments; formulate corporate level and business level strategy, and innovation, sustainability and ethics, technology, and multinational strategy, which are embedded in business level strategies; and implement strategy across an organization. Students are in an active and engaged role with the subject and practice of strategic management as they apply the theories, concepts, and analytical frameworks and tools of the field. The text teaches students how to conduct a case analysis and introduces Analysis Instruments that facilitate robust case analyses that are based on analysis, interpretation, and evaluation of data in a case. Instructors are supported with a platform of supplemental materials. The book illustrates how strategic management is relevant to multiple majors, at multiple stages in their careers, and in multiple work environments. This ensures that undergraduate students clearly understand how strategic management is relevant to them. Instructors reviewing, adopting, or adapting this textbook are asked to please help us understand your use of the material by filling out this form https://bit.ly/interest_strategicmanagementandcaseanalysis.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aBuengel, Dirkeauthor1 aSimpson, Joseph J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1779zAccess online version02437nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137245004600147264004300193264005800236264001200294300002200306336002600328337002600354338003600380341002500416490002700441505087300468520031901341542004101660546001601701588004101717650002501758650002301783700002701806700002601833700006401859710003901923856007701962OTLid0001781MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aQH30100aFood Preparation Lab Manual for FSHN 1150 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Laboratory Equipment and Procedures -- Chapter 2: Varietal Differences -- Chapter 3: Vegetables -- Chapter 4: Starch Characteristics, Cookery, and Cereal Grains -- Chapter 5: Cereals vs. Legumes -- Chapter 6: Fats and Oils -- Protein Chart -- Chapter 7: Dairy Foods -- Chapter 8: Eggs -- Chapter 9: Egg White Foams in Angel Food Cake and Souffles -- Chapter 10: Dry Heat Methods to Cook Tender Cuts of Meat -- Chapter 11: Moist Heat Methods for Less Tender Cuts of Meat -- Chapter 12: Muffins Method and Conventional Yellow Cake Method -- Baked Product Review -- Chapter 13: Pies and Pastry Method -- Chapter 14: Yeast Bread -- Chapter 15: Final Exam and Botanical Beverage Sensory Activity -- Appendix A: Terms Used in Evaluating Food Products -- Appendix B: Meat Charts -- Appendix C: Glossary of Cooking Terms -- Appendix D: Image Sources0 aThis lab book is intended for use in both the lab and kitchen. Each section of the book contains learning objectives, lab problems to be solved, recipes, questions, and observation charts for the input of data. This book is aligned with the introductory Food Preparation Laboratory course at Iowa State University.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBeirman, Ericaeeditor1 aGilbert, Kateeeditor1 aFood Science and Human Nutrition, ISU Department ofeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1781zAccess online version02124nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001900109040001800128050000800146100002600154245004500180264004300225264002900268264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002800419490002700447505039700474520061400871542004101485546001601526588004001542650002601582650002601608710003901634856007701673OTLid0001782MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            250206s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a97819642760502  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB721 aPeron, Sondraeauthor00aIntroduction to PhilosophycSondra Peron 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologue -- Land Acknowledgement -- Introduction to Philosophy -- What Is Philosophy? -- The Mind: Substance Dualism of Descartes -- Religion: The Intertwining of Philosophy and Religion in Western Tradition -- Aesthetics: Engaging with Indigenous Art -- Ethics: How Can I Be a Better Person? -- Plato’s “On the Allegory of the Cave -- References -- Grant Information -- Glossary of Terms0 aThis Introduction to Philosophy: An Anthology is a collection of essential readings from a wide variety of contemporary writers and philosophers designed to help students unfamiliar with philosophy understand that they know more than they think. This OER asks students to think about how they think and how they know what they know. Students will start by challenging assumptions and flexing those critical thinking skills we all have—not just in an abstract way but in a practical, everyday way. Students will explore the branches of philosophy, including metaphysics, epistemology, ethics, and aesthetics.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1782zAccess online version02179nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002600149245011400175264004300289264002900332264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002800483490002700511505069400538520031301232542004101545546001601586588004001602650002301642650002401665710003901689856007701728OTLid0001783MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            250206s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQM1-695 4aRA4401 aCarles, Mariaeauthor00aHuman Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory ManualbUnderstanding How Structure Determines FunctioncMaria Carles 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLand Acknowledgement -- The Human Body, Anatomical Terminology, Planes and Sections, Body Organization and Organ Systems -- The Microscope -- The Cell -- The Study of Tissues: Histology -- The Integumentary System Anatomy -- The Bone Tissue -- The Skeletal System Anatomy -- The Joints -- The Muscular Tissue -- The Muscular System Anatomy -- The Nervous Tissue -- The Nervous System Anatomy -- The General and Special Senses -- The Endocrine System Anatomy -- The Cardiovascular System Anatomy -- The Lymphatic and Immune System Anatomy -- The Respiratory System Anatomy -- The Digestive System Anatomy -- The Urinary System Anatomy -- The Reproductive System Anatomy -- Grant Information0 aThis lab manual introduces students to Human Anatomy and Physiology concepts. The laboratory exercises contain applied activities and experiments to help students visualize anatomical structures and relate them to specific functions and the complex physiological events that allow us to maintain homeostasis.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1783zAccess online version01811nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002800139245007700167264004300244264002900287264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002800438490002700466505030800493520034900801542004101150546001601191588004001207650002601247650002101273700002701294710003901321856007701360OTLid0001784MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            250206s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aMcGlothlin, Amyeauthor04aThe Art of MusicbMusic Appreciation with an Equity LenscAmy McGlothlin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBoston, MAbROTELc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Land Acknowledgment -- Unit I: Fundamentals -- Unit II: Music of the Middle Ages -- Unit III: Music of the Renaissance -- Unit IV: Music of the Baroque -- Unit V: Music of the Classical Era -- Unit VI: Music of the 19th Century -- Unit VII: Music of the 20th Century -- Grant Information0 aThe Art of Music: Music Appreciation with an Equity Lens is a music appreciation textbook that features musical examples and photographs that represent the demographics of our students today. Special attention has been paid in choosing to represent women and minorities. World Music photographs and videos represent the music's areas of origin.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks1 aBill, Jennifereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1784zAccess online version02819nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135245008600149264004300235264007100278264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002800471490002700499505053500526520106201061542002702123546001602150588004002166650002702206650002602233700003002259700002802289710003902317856007702356OTLid0001785MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-28000aLearning Statistics with jamovibA Tutorial for Beginners in Statistical Analysis 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Why do we learn statistics -- A brief introduction to research design -- Getting started with jamovi -- Descriptive statistics -- Drawing graphs -- Pragmatic matters -- Introduction to probability -- Estimating unknown quantities from a sample -- Hypothesis testing -- Categorical data analysis -- Comparing two means -- Correlation and linear regression -- Comparing several means (one-way ANOVA) -- Factorial ANOVA -- Factor Analysis -- Bayesian statistics -- Epilogue -- References -- Chapter notes -- About the team0 aBased on Danielle Navarro’s widely acclaimed and prize-winning book Learning Statistics with R, this elegantly designed textbook offers undergraduate students a thorough and accessible introduction to jamovi, as well as how to get to grips with statistics and data manipulation. Lucid and easy to understand, Learning Statistics with jamovi covers the analysis of contingency tables, t-tests, correlation, regression, ANOVA and factor analysis, while also giving students a firm grounding in descriptive statistics and graphing. It includes learning aids for applying statistical principles using the jamovi interface, as well as embedded data files to accompany the book, and comprehensive chapters on probability theory, sampling and estimation, and null hypothesis testing. Freely available in open access, Learning Statistics with jamovi is an ideal introduction for undergraduate and postgraduate students of psychology, as well as behavioural and health science students and anyone who needs to understand and use statistical analysis in their work.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks1 aNavarro, Danielleeauthor1 aFoxcroft, Davideauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1785zAccess online version02752nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138245007000146264004300216264009500259264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002800476490002700504505021000531520132700741542001602068546001602084588004102100650002702141700002602168700002702194700002902221710003902250856007702289OTLid0001786MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA37.3 4aQA100aDiscrete Math with SageMathbLearn math with open-source software 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bZunaid Ahmed, Hellen Colman, Samuel Lublinerc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Getting Started -- Set Theory -- Combinatorics -- Logic -- Relations -- Functions -- Graph Theory -- Trees Lattices -- Boolean Algebra -- Logic Gates -- Finite State Machines -- Back Matter0 aOur book is intended to provide concise and complete instructions on how to use Sage to solve problems in Discrete Math. It is appropriate for a first or second year undergraduate course for math and computer science majors. Our goal is to streamline the learning process with SageMath. This approach helps students focus more on mathematics and reduces the friction of learning how to code. Our resources are designed for all math students, regardless of programming experience. The novelty of our project is that the textbook is authored by students under faculty supervision. With Open Pedagogy as a guiding praxis, we present this student-created textbook as a more effective alternative in promoting student learning and engagement. Students present the contents in new and inventive ways, from the overall voice of the textbook to the actual examples drawn from their and their peers' lives. The text began as a support textbook for our undergraduate Discrete Math course developed at Wright College, one of the City Colleges of Chicago. Despite the fabulous capabilities of SageMath, students in Discrete Math were often frustrated by the lack of specific documentation geared towards beginning undergrad students in Discrete Math. We developed an OER for our students to use this mathematical software effectively.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aAhmed, Zunaideauthor1 aColman, Helleneauthor1 aLubliner, Samueleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1786zAccess online version02669nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002700148245014300175264004300318264005700361264001200418300002200430336002600452337002600478338003600504341002800540490002700568505029400595520117100889542001602060546001602076588004102092650002302133650002302156710003902179856007702218OTLid0001787MnU20260406020142.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aTougaard, Sveneauthor00aSemiconductor PhysicsbTheory and Experiments. With applications to Diode, Light Emitting Diode, Transistor, and Solar CellcSven Tougaard 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bZenodoc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Statistical distribution of particles in a system of quantum states -- Exchange of particles between two systems of quantum states (pn junction) -- Exchange of particles between three systems of quantum states (transistor) -- The Solar Cell -- Experimental setup0 aIn 2005, I was asked to give a course in semiconductor physics for physics and engineering students that includes both theory and experiments. I could not find a textbook that met the constraints for the course which was a 4th semester course in semiconductor physics for physics and engineering students some of them with no knowledge of statistical mechanics. Existing textbooks are either too simplistic and do not include a comprehensive physical model description of semiconductors which must include a basic amount of both statistical mechanics, quantum mechanics, and solid-state physics. Alternative textbooks are way too lengthy to fit in a 4th semester course of maximum 5 ECTS length and don’t include experiments. I therefore started to develop a course where only the essential elements of the underlying theory is included. But still keeping the basic physical description of the phenomena at a sober level. So, this is a comprehensive short introductory course and includes both theory and experiments, but it does not substitute for an advanced semiconductor physics course. It is also noted that this course does not include the MOSFET transistor.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1787zAccess online version01301nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245005300163264004300216264006100259264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002800442490002700470505013500497520007800632542004100710546001600751588004100767650002700808710003900835856007700874OTLid0001788MnU20260330020631.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aGodwin, Allisoneauthor00aMGF 1131bMathematics in ContextcAllison Godwin 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Organizing Data -- Analyzing Data -- Probability -- Financial Math -- Voting and Graph Theory -- Index -- Glossary0 aTextbook used by students in MGF 1131 at Northwest Florida State College.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1788zAccess online version02289nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100005900144245010500203264004300308264007800351264001200429300002200441336002600463337002600489338003600515341002800551490002700579505019900606520082200805542004101627546001601668588004101684650004301725650003101768710003901799856007701838OTLid0001789MnU20260406020142.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s2015    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH11 aDepartment of Public Instruction, North Dakotaeauthor00aNorth Dakota Native American Essential UnderstandingscNorth Dakota Department of Public Instruction 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Dakotac[2015] 4c©2015.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- The Mandan -- The Hidatsa -- The Sahnish (Arikara) -- The Three Tribes -- Contact -- Laws & Treaties -- Early Reservation Life -- 1900s -- Economic & Social Change -- Present Day0 aHistory & Culture of the Mandan Hidatsa & Sahnish (Arikara) is a guide to the Three Affiliated Tribes nation, past and present. The book is divided into three sections: one for each tribe. Elders, scholars, and other experts from the nation contributed the content of this book, which was reviewed by Nueta Hidatsa Sahnish College and published by the North Dakota Department of Public Instruction (NDDPI) for use in middle and high school North Dakota Studies classes, as well as in higher education. The MHA nation is known as the following in its languages: Mandan: Miiti Naamni, Hidatsa: Awadi Aguraawi, Arikara: ačitaanu' táWIt. The Fort Berthold Indian Reservation shares geography with western North Dakota, with land on either side of the Missouri River basin. New Town is this sovereign nation’s capital.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1789zAccess online version02485nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100005900144245011900203264004300322264007700365264001200442300002200454336002600476337002600502338003600528341002800564490002700592505020700619520099700826542004101823546001601864588004101880650004301921650003101964710003901995856007702034OTLid0001790MnU20260406020142.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s1997    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH11 aDepartment of Public Instruction, North Dakotaeauthor04aThe History and Culture of the Mni Wakan Oyate (Spirit Lake Nation)cNorth Dakota Department of Public Instruction 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Dakotac2025. 4c©1997.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Tribal Historical Overview -- Dakota Migration -- Contact -- Treaties -- The Dakota Conflict -- Creation of the Devils Lake Sioux Reservation -- Impact of Federal Policy -- Self-Determination0 aHistory & Culture of the Mni Wakan Oyate Spirit Lake Nation is a guide to the Spirit Lake nation, past and present. Elders, scholars, and other experts from the nation contributed the content of this book, which was reviewed by Cankdeska Cikana Community College (English: Little Hoop Community College) and published by the North Dakota Department of Public Instruction (NDDPI) for use in middle and high school North Dakota Studies classes, as well as in higher education. The Spirit Lake Nation’s name in the Santee Dakota language is “Mni Wakan Oyate” (also transcribed “Mniwakaƞ Oyate”). The nation was formerly called the Devils Lake Sioux Tribe in various English-language materials. It is comprised of the Pabaksa (Iháŋkthuŋwaŋna), Sisseton (Sisíthuŋwaŋ) and Wahpeton (Waȟpéthuŋwaŋ) bands of the Dakota people. The Spirit Lake Dakota Reservation shares geography with eastern North Dakota, beside Devils Lake. Fort Totten is the capital of this sovereign nation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1790zAccess online version02291nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100005900144245011500203264004300318264007700361264001200438300002200450336002600472337002600498338003600524341002800560490002700588505019600615520081800811542004101629546001601670588004101686650004301727650003101770710003901801856007701840OTLid0001791MnU20260406020142.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s1997    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH11 aDepartment of Public Instruction, North Dakotaeauthor04aThe History and Culture of the Turtle Mountain Band of ChippewacNorth Dakota Department of Public Instruction 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Dakotac2025. 4c©1997.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTribal Historical Overview -- Migration -- Contact -- Move to the Plains 1790 - 1820 -- Treaties -- Early Reservation Life -- Early 1900's -- Self-Determination -- Trenton Indian Service Area0 aHistory & Culture of the Turtle Mountain Band of Chippewa is a guide to the Turtle Mountain nation, past and present. Elders, scholars, and other experts from the nation contributed the content of this book, which was reviewed by Turtle Mountain Community College and published by the North Dakota Department of Public Instruction (NDDPI) for use in middle and high school North Dakota Studies classes, as well as in higher education. The Turtle Mountain nation is called Mikinaakwajiw-ininiwag in the Ojibwe language. This sovereign nation’s capital is Belcourt. The Turtle Mountain Indian Reservation shares geography with northern North Dakota, along the border with Canada. The rest of its land base exists as parcels of trust land across Montana, North Dakota, and South Dakota, defying easy summarization.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1791zAccess online version02315nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100005900144245010200203264004300305264007800348264001200426300002200438336002600460337002600486338003600512341002800548490002700576505044600603520060401049542004101653546001601694588004101710650004301751650003101794710003901825856007701864OTLid0001792MnU20260406020142.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s1995    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH11 aDepartment of Public Instruction, North Dakotaeauthor04aThe History and Culture of the Standing Rock OyatecNorth Dakota Department of Public Instruction 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of North Dakotac[1995] 4c©1995.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTribal Historical Overview -- Lakota Migration Treaties -- 1851 Ft. Laramine Treaty -- Whitestone Hill -- 1868 Ft. Laramine Treaty -- Establishment of the Great Sioux Reservation -- Standing Rock Agency -- Battle of the Little Big Horn -- Taking of the Black Hills -- Breaking Up of the Great Sioux Reservation -- The Ghost Dance -- The Sioux Claim -- Impact of Federal Policy -- Allotment -- Citizenship -- Indian Reorganization -- Oahe Dam0 aHistory & Culture of the Standing Rock Oyate is a guide to the Standing Rock nation, past and present. Elders, scholars, and other experts from the nation contributed the content of this book, which was reviewed by Standing Rock Community College and published by the North Dakota Department of Public Instruction (NDDPI) for use in middle and high school North Dakota Studies classes, as well as in higher education. The Standing Rock Reservation (Lakota: Íŋyaŋ Woslál Háŋ) shares geography with southern North Dakota and with South Dakota. The capital of this sovereign nation is Fort Yates.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1792zAccess online version03357nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245005800149264004300207264009600250264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002500468490002700493505057700520520134301097542001602440546001602456588004002472650002302512650002402535700002502559700002702584700002502611700002602636700003002662700003002692700003802722700002302760710003902783856007702822OTLid0001793MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250213s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aCommunity and Public Health NursingbA Call to Action 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- An Introduction to Community and Public Health Nursing -- Chapter One: Community and Public Health Policy -- Chapter Two: Health Disparities and Health Equity -- Chapter Three: Social Determinants of Health and Vulnerable Populations -- Chapter Four: Epidemiology -- Chapter Five: Population Health -- Chapter Six: Community Health Assessment and Evaluation -- Chapter Seven: Community Violence and Violence Prevention -- Chapter Eight: Emergency Preparedness -- Chapter Nine: Trauma-Informed Care -- Chapter Ten: Mental Health -- Chapter Eleven: Current Topics0 aCommunity and Public Health Nursing: A Call to Action is a primer exploring the diverse roles of community and public health nurses through a social justice lens. Students will gain the fundamental knowledge and skills to work with community members and other stakeholders to promote health and well-being and to prevent disease. This textbook examines key issues such as health disparities, access to care, cultural competence, and the impact of social determinants on public health outcomes. Students will gain knowledge, practical skills, and insight into how nurses can improve community health, advocate for health-related policies, and promote health equity at the individual through systemic levels. The textbook also maps the content to the AACN New Essentials for Baccalaureate Nursing Education. The book is accompanied by a comprehensive Instructor’s Guide designed to support educators in meeting educational goals and developing competencies. The guide offers practical teaching strategies, such as role-playing communication exercises and simulation activities; suggests clinical activities to facilitate deeper understanding and classroom engagement; and includes NCLEX-style practice questions to reinforce key concepts, test critical thinking skills, and provide students valuable practice preparing for the NCLEX exam.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aReed, Andreaeauthor1 aTremblay, Betheauthor1 aGross, Chloeeauthor1 aSmith, Felisaeauthor1 aWiersma, Gretcheneauthor1 aMartin, Jamela M.eauthor1 aFruiterman, Judith Rogerseauthor1 aBrown, Royeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1793zAccess online version01841nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145100002800152245006600180264004300246264004500289264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002800456490002700484505044400511520015900955542004101114546001601155588004001171650003101211700002501242700002801267700003201295710003901327856007701366OTLid0001794MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            250217s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160165  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aAudirac, Ivonneeauthor00aTransportation Policies, Programs and HistorycIvonne Audirac 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Preface -- About the Authors -- About the Institution -- Acknowledgments -- Part I Fundamentals of U.S. Surface Transportation -- Part II Transportation Modes, Accessibility, and Technologies -- Part III Sustainable Transportation and Transportation in the Global South -- Image Credits -- Glossary -- Acronyms -- Accessibility Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aThis open text features ten chapters addressing leading topics in transportation planning, programs, policies, history and emerging transportation trends.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aRaley, Ambereauthor1 aReiner, Jenifereauthor1 aSharifi-Asl, Soheileauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1794zAccess online version02573nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145100003000152245005700182264004300239264004500282264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002800449490002700477505056700504520081901071542004101890546001601931588004001947650003101987700002202018700003102040710003902071856007702110OTLid0001795MnU20260406020810.0m     o  d s      cr            250217s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160103  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aChen, Ph.D., Pengeauthor00aMultimodal Transportation PlanningcPeng Chen, Ph.D. 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2024. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About this Project -- Preface -- About the Authors -- About the Institution -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction to Multimodal Transportation Planning -- Contemporary Issues in Transportation -- Transportation Demand Management -- Travel and the Built Environment -- Planning Roadway Networks -- Walking and Cycling -- Public Transportation -- Evaluating System Performance -- Glossary -- Links by Chapter -- References -- Image Credits -- Derivative Notes -- Accessibility Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aMultimodal Transportation Planning introduces readers to the principles and practice of integrated land use and transportation planning. The primary focus of the textbook is on planning for the mobility needs of all transportation system users, with an emphasis on pedestrian, bicycle, automobile, and transit modes. A related focus is on reducing society’s dependence on the automobile for personal travel. Readers of the text will be able to gain knowledge that supports a variety of learning objectives. Key themes and objectives relate to conveying an understanding of the relationship between land use and transportation, the difference between traditional methods and multimodal planning best practices, and the importance of evaluating performance from an accessibility and quality of service perspective.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBoyd, Tiaeauthor1 aWilliams, Kristineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1795zAccess online version02057nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002800145245005200173264004300225264005800268264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505029300500520059500793542003001388546001601418588004001434650003001474650002301504700002801527710003901555856007701594OTLid0001797MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250220s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aFehr, Walter R.eauthor00aPrinciples of Cultivar DevelopmentcWalter Fehr 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Maximizing genetic gain I -- Maximizing genetic gain II -- Maximizing genetic gain III -- Clonal cultivars -- Pure-Line Cultivars -- Heterosis -- Hybrid Cultivars -- Synthetic Cultivars -- Multilines and Seed Blends -- Release and Distribution of Cultivars -- About the Authors0 aPrinciples of Cultivar Development is intended to help you learn how to be a successful manager of a cultivar development program. In this text, you will apply the principles learned in Plant Breeding Methods to design a breeding program that makes effective use of available resources and alternative breeding strategies. By the end of this volume, readers will be able to describe the process for developing clonal, pure-line, hybrid, and synthetic cultivars. Each chapter includes additional readings and examples of how breeders have implemented the concepts in their breeding programs.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aSuza, Walter P.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1797zAccess online version01863nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100003000158245006500188264004300253264008600296264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002800504490002700532505021800559520043700777542004101214546001601255588004001271650002601311650003601337710003901373856007701412OTLid0001798MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250304s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781621787402  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.61 aCampbell, Rebeccaeauthor00aNoteworthybReading Strategies in PracticecRebecca Campbell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arizona Global Campusc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1 - Introduction to Strategic Reading -- Chapter 2 - Reading Informational Texts -- Chapter 3 - Reading Narrative Texts -- Chapter 4 - Reading Academic Texts -- Chapter 5 - The Reading−Writing Connection0 aNoteworthy: Reading Strategies in Practice introduces students to skills and strategies for college reading. This reader-style textbook contains excerpts from several texts that serve as both explorations of reading strategies and opportunities for students to practice using those strategies. Original chapter features, including introductions and Tip! boxes, present new topics and guide students as they engage with each reading.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1798zAccess online version01869nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002400144245004600168264004300214264006100257264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002800440490002700468505041100495520029300906542001601199546001601215588004001231650003301271650002501304700003801329710003901367856007701406OTLid0001799MnU20260330020759.0m     o  d s      cr            250305s2018    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aEgbert, Joyeauthor00aCALL Principles and PracticescJoy Egbert 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPullman, WashingtonbWashington State Universityc[2018] 4c©2018.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- I. Principles of CALL -- II. Developing and Practicing Reading and Writing Skills -- III. Developing and Practicing Listening and Speaking Skills -- IV. Communication and Collaboration -- V. Creativity and Production -- VI. Inquiry and Problem-Solving -- VII. Content-Based Instruction -- VIII. Assessment -- IX. Limitations, Caveats, and Challenges -- X. Teacher Development -- Back Matter0 aThis book takes as its organizing principles both the system of conditions that are known to support effective language learning and the goals that a variety of standards in the field have set out for us and our students, and what constitutes effective computer-enhanced pedagogy and why.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aAbdollah Shahrokni, Seyedeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1799zAccess online version02881nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100002400166245016200190264004300352264004000395264001200435300002200447336002600469337002600495338003600521341002800557490002700585505069800612520095001310542001602260546001602276588004102292650002302333650002302356710003902379856007702418OTLid0001800MnU20260406020143.0m     o  d s      cr            250312s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783031695070  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH3011 aRaven, Willeauthor00aAtomic Physics for EveryonebAn Introduction to Atomic Physics, Quantum Mechanics, and Precision Spectroscopy with No College-Level PrerequisitescWill Raven 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart I: Atom-Light Interactions -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Atoms and Lights -- Chapter 2: "Natural Light" -- Chapter 3: Atoms at Rest -- Chapter 4: Atoms in Motion -- Chapter 5: Saturated Absorption Spectrosopy -- Part II: Digging Deeper: Quantum Mechanics and Beyond -- Chapter 6: Quantum Mechanics vs. Classical Physics -- Chapter 7: Angular Momentum -- Chapter 8: Electronic Signature and Atomic Notation -- Chapter 9: Hyperfine Structure -- Chapter 10: Isotope Shifts, Radioactive Decay, and the Nuclear Forces -- Chapter 11: The Standard Model of Particle Physics -- Appendix A: The Periodic Table -- Appendix B: A Table of Elements -- Appendix C: Transition Rules -- Glossary -- Index0 aThis open access textbook introduces beginning undergraduate students and high school students to the world of quantum mechanics and atomic spectroscopy. Requiring no previous knowledge of physics and no math beyond basic algebra and sines and cosines, this book focuses on concepts to make the excitement of atomic physics more accessible for learners than ever before. It comes replete with learning goals, exercises and solutions, and an optional experimental component, making this text readily adoptable for both the classroom and the undergraduate lab. The book takes the reader on a lively and engaging tour through topics at the forefront of current science, including photons, quantum numbers, atomic energy levels, some different spectroscopy techniques, electronic structure, atomic notation, angular momentum, hyperfine structure, isotope shifts, the strong force, an introduction to the Standard Model of Particle Physics, and more.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1800zAccess online version02991nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137050001100144050001300155100003100168245006100199250000700260264004300267264006000310264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002500492490002700517505096300544520064301507542004102150546001602191588004002207650003302247650002502280650002402305650002602329650003602355700002602391710003902417856007702456OTLid0001801MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250312s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL7 4aPE1408 4aLB1062.61 aMauer, Barry Jasoneauthor00aStrategies for Conducting Literary ResearchcBarry Mauer  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOrlando, FloridabUniversity of Central Floridac[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Strategies for Conducting Literary Research -- Table of Contents -- Chapter 1: Preliminary Research -- Chapter 2: Identifying a Problem and Considering Audience -- Chapter 3: Research as Inquiry and Scholarship as Conversation -- Chapter 4: Research Goals, Theory, Methodologies, Methods, and Evidence -- Chapter 5: Reading Literary Works -- Chapter 6: Library Services & Resources -- Chapter 7: Using Google Scholar -- Chapter 8: Evaluating Scholarly Resources -- Chapter 9: Developing Your Research Question -- Chapter 10: Research as an Inferential and Critical Process -- Chapter 11: Key Elements of the Research Project -- Chapter 12: The Writing Process -- Chapter 13: Avoiding Plagiarism/Additional Resources/Foundational Materials Assignment -- Final Project and Exam -- Glossary -- Rubrics -- Presenting Your Research Visually: Academic Posters and Slides -- Contributors -- "Sonny's Blues" Refresher and Exercises -- Sample Syllabus0 aThis book, built in PressBooks with financial support from the UCF Digital Learning Course Redesign Initiative, contains 14 chapters, each of which contains two to six pages about the process of literary research. Pages contain learning objectives, infographics, videos, examples, key takeaways, and exercises. The course contains numerous discussion areas and quizzes. It also contains a “Foundational Materials” assignment that provides a platform for student success with whatever research project their instructor assigns. The book is highly flexible and instructors may use all or any part of the book within their own webcourse.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aVenecek, Johneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1801zAccess online version02449nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245006900134264004300203264008400246264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002800452490002700480505016700507520113500674542003001809546001601839588004001855650002501895700002401920700002701944710003901971856007702010OTLid0001803MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250327s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aHyFlex Learning and TeachingbA Guide for Educational Innovation 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- What is Hyflex? -- Approaches to Learning -- Digital Technologies -- Digital-first Design -- Assessment -- Planning and Implementing -- Conclusion0 aThis comprehensive guide explores HyFlex learning - an innovative approach that combines hybrid flexibility to transform teaching and learning experiences. Authors Lisa Jacka and Julie Lindsay expertly demonstrate how HyFlex empowers students through choice, flat learning, and accessibility, creating truly equivalent learning experiences regardless of mode.Perfect for educators, course coordinators, and learning designers, this resource provides practical strategies for implementing digital-first design, overcoming common barriers, and reimagining assessment practices. Through case studies, interactive reflections, and implementation roadmaps, readers will discover how to effectively integrate educational technologies to support transformative pedagogies.Whether you're beginning your HyFlex journey or enhancing existing practices, this book offers a flexible approach to engagement. Read it linearly or explore specific sections based on your needs. Embrace the future of education where learner autonomy, accessibility, and equivalent experiences converge to create meaningful connections in any learning environment.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aJacka, Lisaeauthor1 aLindsay, Julieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1803zAccess online version02015nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245004300162264004300205264009500248264001200343300002200355336002600377337002600403338003600429341002800465490002700493505067400520520025401194542001601448546001601464588004001480650002901520710003901549856007701588OTLid0001804MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250327s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aRose, Jeremyeauthor00aCommunication in PracticecJeremy Rose 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: What is Communication? -- Chapter 2: How Communication is Studied -- Chapter 3: Ethics -- Chapter 4: Listening -- Chapter 5: Audiences -- Chapter 6: Persuasion -- Chapter 7: Logic & Reasoning -- Chapter 8: Emotions -- Chapter 9: Credibility -- Chapter 10: Language -- Chapter 11: Storytelling -- Chapter 12: Nonverbal Communication -- Chapter 13: Public Speaking I -- Chapter 14: Public Speaking II -- Chapter 15: Intercultural Communication -- Chapter 16: Group Communication & Decision-Making -- Chapter 17: Conflict -- Chapter 18: Media Part I - How to Think About Communication Technology -- Chapter 19: Media II - How to Use Media -- Appendix0 aThis approachable and conversational textbook is intended for undergraduate communication courses. Dr. Jeremy Rose draws from an accomplished lecturing career to explore the fundamentals of communication with media examples and real world scenarios.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1804zAccess online version02295nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001000136245002600146250001900172264004300191264009100234264001200325300002200337336002600359337002600385338003600411341002800447490002700475505015800502520090000660542003001560546001601590588004001606650003201646650004201678700003301720700002801753710003901781856007701820OTLid0001805MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250327s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aTA14500aProgramming with Java  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Control Statements and Loops -- String -- Methods in Java -- Arrays -- Introduction to Classes and Objects -- File Handling -- References0 aProgramming with Java is a beginner-friendly eTextbook that introduces readers to the fundamentals of Java, one of the most widely used programming languages. It covers key concepts like syntax, data types, control structures, and object-oriented programming, offering clear explanations and practical examples. The chapters build progressively, making the material accessible even to those with little or no programming background. The book also explores important topics such as exception handling, file I/O, and basic data structures, providing a strong foundation for further computer science studies. With interactive exercises and end-of-chapter projects, readers can apply their knowledge through real-world applications. This eTextbook equips students with the skills they need to confidently take on advanced programming challenges and pursue successful careers in software development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aBhuiyan, Ashik Ahmedeauthor1 aAmiruzzaman, Mdeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1805zAccess online version02017nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002700149245004800176264004300224264008400267264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002800473490002700501505044000528520042700968542003001395546001601425588004001441650002301481650002301504710003901527856007701566OTLid0001806MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250327s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aCobb, Carolineeauthor00aBiological Basis of BehaviorcCaroline Cobb 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Commonwealth Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Course -- Neural Conduction & Neurotransmitters -- Neuroanatomy & Neuroscience Methods -- Substance Use and Misuse Overview -- Opioids and Psychedelics -- Biological Rhythms: Sleep and Eating Behavior -- Stimulants and Cannabis -- Emotions, Aggression, and Stress -- Learning and Memory -- Psychopathology: Anxiety, Trauma, and the Schizophrenia Spectrum -- Psychopathology: Depressive and Bipolar Disorders -- Glossary0 aAn overview of the study of human behavior through a biological lens, this text focuses on the role of the central nervous system and its role in the regulation and control of human behavior. Topics include both structure and function of neurons, neurophysiology of the nervous system, basic neuroanatomy, drugs and behavior, internal regulatory processes, learning and memory, emotions, and some forms of psychopathology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1806zAccess online version02742nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100004100149245004000190264004300230264007100273264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002800466490002700494505021500521520138400736542003002120546001602150588004002166650002302206650002302229710003902252856007702291OTLid0001807MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250327s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aSeshasayee, Aswin Sai Naraineauthor00aBacterial GenomescAswin Seshasayee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbunknown2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- All creatures great and small -- The molecules of bacteria and of life -- The genome: how much DNA? -- The ebb and flow of bacterial genomes -- Reading the organising the genome -- Afterword -- Index0 aMicrobes form the “unseen majority” of life on Earth, with bacteria at the forefront as both the architects of life’s chemical foundations and agents of disease. But their story is far more complex. Bacteria thrive in diverse and extreme environments, driven by the dynamic evolution of their genomes. These tiny organisms wield an extraordinary ability to adapt, balancing genetic changes across generations with rapid physiological responses to environmental shifts. In Bacterial Genomes, the evolutionary and regulatory processes that shape bacterial life are brought to life. This textbook offers a conceptual exploration of how bacterial genomes are organized, how they evolve, and how their genetic information is interpreted through intricate molecular networks. Drawing on both cutting-edge research and the historical milestones that shaped microbiology, it illuminates how bacteria navigate the intersection of genetic adaptation and ecological resilience. Designed for college students, interdisciplinary researchers, and even the determined amateur, Aswin Seshasayee moves beyond technical jargon to provide a thought-provoking synthesis of bacterial evolution and adaptation. Unlike traditional genomics texts, this book blends historical insights with contemporary discoveries, offering a fresh perspective on the role of bacteria in shaping the living world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1807zAccess online version02251nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245006500137250001800202264004300220264007000263264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002500455490002700480505052600507520057801033542001601611546001601627588004001643650002901683700002501712700002401737710003901761856007701800OTLid0001808MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250410s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.300aMessages that MatterbPublic Speaking in the Information Age  aThird Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Idaho Collegec2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: What is Communication? -- Chapter 2: The Dread of the Podium -- Chapter 3: Topic Selection and Purpose -- Chapter 4: Analyzing the Audience -- Chapter 5: Gathering Information -- Chapter 6: Organizing the Idea -- Chapter 7: Using Language to Frame the Message -- Chapter 8: Practice, Preparation, and Delivery Techniques -- Chapter 9: Listening Skills and Critical Evaluation -- Chapter 10: Designing and Using Effective Visual Aids -- Chapter 11: Persuasion Theories -- Chapter 12: Motivating Others to Action0 aMessages that Matter: Public Speaking in the Information Age is a student-focused textbook that provides practical and real-world instruction in the art of public speaking, with a focus on how speakers can learn to communicate with diverse audiences to achieve their primary goal of being understood as intended. Using an audience-centered approach, Messages that Matter provides instruction on: audience analysis, overcoming speaker anxiety, research techniques for speakers, how to practice and refine delivery, persuasion techniques, and group presentation fundamentals.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aMisner, Josheauthor1 aCarr, Geoffeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1808zAccess online version02512nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245004800162264004300210264007000253264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002500445490002700470505020400497520119000701542004101891546001601932588004001948650002001988650002602008710003902034856007702073OTLid0001809MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250410s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aDemattos, Ericeauthor00aLearning Digital PhotographycEric Demattos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Idaho Collegec2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Understanding Your Camera -- Shutter Speed -- Aperture -- ISO -- Color in your images -- Composition -- Abstract images -- Portraiture -- Marketing and selling your images -- Appendix0 aThis textbook is designed to guide you through the essential skills and techniques needed to become a proficient photographer. Over the course of this book, you will learn how to: Understand Your Camera: Get to know the functions and features of your camera, from basic DSLR models to advanced DSLRs and mirrorless systems. Control Exposure: Learn how to use aperture, shutter speed, and ISO to achieve the perfect exposure in any lighting condition. Harness Light: Explore the different qualities of natural and artificial light, and how to manipulate them to enhance your photographs. Master Composition: Discover the rules and guidelines that can help you create visually compelling images, including the rule of thirds, leading lines, and symmetry. Color Theory: Understand some of the basic color relationships and how to use them effectively in your images. Thinking Creatively: Exercise the creative side of your brain to see the world in a new way and develop creative ways to make your vision into pictures. Develop Your Style: Find your unique photographic voice by experimenting with different genres, from landscape and portrait photography to macro and street photography.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1809zAccess online version04688nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245005900163264004300222264007100265264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002500458490002700483505206500510520149902575542001604074546001604090588004004106650003804146650002604184710003904210856007704249OTLid0001810MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250410s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aPeek, Philip S.eauthor00aAncient Greek IIbA 21st-Century ApproachcPhilip Peek 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Module 31 - The Perfect and Pluperfect of ω-verbs and ἵστημι · Mixed Declension Adjectives · Dative of Agent -- Module 32 - The Imperative · Consonant Stems · Enclitics -- Module 33 - The Present, Future, and Aorist Active Participle · The Attributive Participle · The Future Participle of Purpose · The Genitive Absolute -- Module 34 - The Present, Future, Aorist Middle and Passive Participle · The Perfect Active, Middle, and Passive Participle · The Substantive Participle -- Module 35 - The Participle Cont.: Τhe Supplementary Participle -- Module 36 - The Participle Cont.: The Circumstantial Participle -- Module 37 - The Subjunctive: The Present and Aorist Subjunctive -- Module 38 - The Subjunctive Cont.: Hortatory · Prohibitive · Deliberative · Emphatic Denial · Tentative Assertion -- Module 39 - The Optative -- Module 40 - The Subjunctive and the Optative in Purpose and Fear Clauses -- Module 41 - The Optative and the Subjunctive in Habitual, Potential, and Prospective Conditions -- Module 42 - Counterfactual and Neutral Conditions -- Unrealizable Wishes -- Module 43 - Subordinate Clauses of Cause and Time -- Module 44 - Verbs of Judgment, Necessity, Obligation, and Seeming -- Module 45 - Indirect Statement: That-Clauses and Interrogative Clauses -- Module 46 - Subordinate Clauses in Indirect Question and Statement -- Module 47 - Word Order: Clitics and Full Words -- Module 48 - Word Order: Scheppers' Colon Hypothesis -- Module 49 - Word Order and Continuity -- Module 50 - Word Order and Discontinuity -- Module 51 - Chiastic Word Order and Ring Composition -- Module 52 - Word Order and Tension -- Module 53 - Narratology I: Authors, Narrators, Narratees, Materials, Texts, Stories -- Module 54 - Narratology II: Focalization or Point of View and Text 1 -- Module 55 - Narratology III: Focalization or Point of View and Text 2 -- Module 56 - Narratology IV: Time 1 -- Module 57 - Narratology V: Time 2 -- Module 58 - Narratology VI: Time 3 -- Module 59 - Narratology VII: Space -- Module 60 - Memory0 aIn this elementary textbook, Philip S. Peek draws on his twenty-five years of teaching experience to present the ancient Greek language in an imaginative and accessible way that promotes creativity, deep learning, and diversity. The course is built on three pillars: memory, analysis, and logic. Readers memorize the top 550 most frequently occurring ancient Greek words, the essential word endings, the eight parts of speech, and the grammatical concepts they will most frequently encounter when reading authentic ancient texts. Analysis and logic exercises enable the identification of clitics and full words as well as the translation and parsing of genuine ancient Greek sentences, with compelling reading selections in English and in Greek offering starting points for contemplation, debate, and reflection. A series of thirty entries by James F. Patterson, using a simplified morphophonemic approach to understanding language improve readers’ understanding of word formation, their vocabulary, and their ability to read and understand Ancient Greek. This combination of memory-based learning and concept- and skill-based learning gradually builds the confidence of the reader, teaching them how to learn by guiding them from a familiarity with the basics to proficiency in reading this beautiful language. Ancient Greek II: A 21st-Century Approach is written for high-school and university students, but is an instructive and rewarding text for anyone who wishes to learn ancient Greek.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1810zAccess online version02082nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245006400144264004300208264005100251264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002500424490002700449505007700476520079400553542003001347546001601377588004001393650002501433650002901458700003001487700002401517700002701541710003901568856007701607OTLid0001811MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250410s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aP91.300aCommunication and Teamwork Skills to Support Neurodiversity 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Getting Started -- Teamwork -- Communication -- Glossary0 aA significant challenge for neurodivergent students is the transition to studying in a new environment. This book focuses on assisting students with this transition by guiding them through different learning activities and information to support the team-based learning they will engage in during their degree. The resources in this book are designed to be accessible for all students and staff, with the aim of developing an understanding of disability and neurodiversity, teamwork and communication skills and the ability to work collaboratively with peers to achieve common goals. The resources shared here can be utilised within individual units to support student skill development in inclusivity, engagement with others and the capacity to contribute towards highly functional teams.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aMenhenett, Teaganeauthor1 aMilne, Nickeauthor1 aKrishnan, Sivaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1811zAccess online version03186nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002800147245004900175264004300224264007700267264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505049200518520152101010542003002531546001602561588004102577650003602618650004202654710003902696856007702735OTLid0001812MnU20260406020144.0m     o  d s      cr            250410s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTP155 4aTA1451 aZeidouni, Mehdieauthor00aPetroleum Reservoir DynamicscMehdi Zeidouni 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLouisiana State Universityc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Chapter I: Introduction -- Chapter II: Darcy Equation and ITS Limitations -- Chapter III: Flow Geometry -- Chapter IV: Steady-State Compressible Flow -- Chapter V: Accounting for the Effect of Gravity in Steady Flows -- Chapter VI: The Governing Equation -- Chapter VII: Pseudo-Steady State (PSS) Flow -- Chapter VIII: Transient Radial Flow and Drawdown Test Analysis -- Chapter IX: Superposition Principle and Pressure Buildup Test Analysis -- Appendices and Back Matter0 aThe book is structured into nine chapters, each designed to build a comprehensive understanding of reservoir engineering principles. Chapter 1 introduces the discipline and its connections with other areas of petroleum engineering. Chapters 2 through 5 address steady-state flow and its various complexities: Darcy’s equation and its limitations (Chapter 2); flow geometries and skin factor concepts (Chapter 3); compressible oil and gas flow (Chapter 4); and non-horizontal flow using the flow potential concept (Chapter 5). In Chapter 6, the pressure diffusivity equation is explored alongside key concepts of radius of investigation and average reservoir pressure. Chapter 7 delves into the pseudo-steady-state (PSS) flow regime, its applications in multi-well drainage, and its relationship with well productivity index, inflow performance relationship, vertical flow performance, and nodal analysis. The final chapters focus on transient radial flow and its applications in well testing. Chapter 8 introduces transient drawdown analysis. Chapter 9 discusses the superposition principle in time and space, with application to the modeling of sealing faults and buildup test analysis. To enhance engagement and learning, each chapter includes quiz questions - primarily in a True/False format - with answers provided at the end of the book. Additionally, numerous examples are integrated throughout to demonstrate the practical significance of the concepts and their relevance to reservoir engineering practice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemical EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1812zAccess online version01996nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002500144245004000169264004300209264005000252264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002500424490002700449505021400476520067600690542003001366546001601396588004001412650002501452650002901477710003901506856007701545OTLid0001813MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250410s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aP91.31 aHawley, Erineauthor00aCommunication ConceptscErin Hawley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Communication -- Chapter 2: Collaboration -- Chapter 3: Audiences -- Chapter 4: Stories -- Chapter 5: Meaning -- Chapter 6: Identity -- Chapter 7: Effects -- Chapter 8: Participation0 aCommunication challenges abound in the 21st century. Communicators everywhere are struggling to connect with diverse, distracted audiences, in both urgent and everyday contexts. In other words, communication has never been more vital, but it’s becoming harder and harder to be heard. In this book, we make sense of communication. From multiple perspectives, we unpack the practices, politics, pleasures, and problems that are activated when meaning is shared across real and virtual spaces. This book will help you use the thinking tools of communication theory to understand why communication matters and how it impacts (and is impacted by) our rapidly changing world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1813zAccess online version02154nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135050001000149050000700159245006200166264004300228264007400271264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002500467490002700492505021100519520060700730542004101337546001601378588004001394650002701434650002601461650002601487650003101513700002901544700003101573710003901604856007701643OTLid0001814MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250411s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-280 4aBF121 4aH100aStatistics with JASPbFirst Steps for Psychology Students 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Sheffieldc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter I: Getting Started with JASP -- Chapter II: Data Handling in JASP -- Chapter III: Descriptive Statistics, Graphs, and Plots -- Chapter IV: Inferential Statistics -- About the Authors0 aNew to statistics software? This guide is designed just for you. Whether you are studying psychology or any subject that involves analysing data, this easy-to-follow introduction to JASP will help you get to grips with the basics—no previous experience needed. Originally written for first-year psychology students at the University of Sheffield, it walks you through everything from entering data and adjusting settings to running t-tests, correlations, and chi-square analyses. With clear explanations, practical tips, and helpful screenshots, this guide makes learning JASP simple and stress-free.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aDenniss, Rebeccaeauthor1 aNaneva, Stanislavaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1814zAccess online version02235nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001200148050001100160100002800171245004400199264004300243264005100286264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341010500459490002700564505047300591520044901064542003001513546001601543588004001559650002401599650002301623650002501646650002601671710003901697856007701736OTLid0001815MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250411s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG173 4aHB171.5 4aHD30.41 aNguyen, Annetteeauthor00aFundamentals of FinancecAnnette Nguyen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbpageNavigationbreadingOrderbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Accessibility Information -- Acknowledgement of Country -- Acknowledgements -- About the Author -- Chapter 1 - Introduction to Finance -- Chapter 2 - Present and Future Values -- Chapter 3 - Present and Future Values with Applications -- Chapter 4 - Financial markets and financial institutions -- Chapter 5 - Bond market and bond valuation -- Chapter 6 - Stock market and stock valuation -- Chapter 7 - Risk and Return: -- Chapter 8 - Foreign Exchange0 aThis textbook is designed to serve as an additional resource for the course "Fundamentals of Finance." It provides an introduction to the field of finance, encompassing a broad range of key topics. These include the time value of money, bond and equity valuations, risk and returns, and various sources of capital. This book aims to enhance the learning experience by offering a thorough understanding of these fundamental financial principles.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1815zAccess online version01897nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138050001200148050001100160100002900171245003800200264004300238264005100281264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002500454490002700479505044700506520018600953542003001139546001601169588004001185650002401225650002301249650002601272650002501298700002401323710003901347856007701386OTLid0001816MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250411s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG173 4aHB171.5 4aHD30.41 aMishra, Sagarikaeauthor00aBusiness FinancecSagarika Mishra 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- Company Annual Reports -- Topic 1: Financial Management, Agency Problems and Governance -- Topic 2: The Risk and Return Trade Off in Financial Decision Making -- Topic 3: Capital Budgeting Fundamentals -- Topic 4: Capital Budgeting Applications -- Topic 5: Capital Structure and Cost of Capital -- Topic 6: Equity Financing -- Topic 7: Fundamentals of Valuation -- Topic 8: Payout Policy -- Version History0 aDeveloped for an international cohort, this text is designed to explain business finance concepts in an easily understood manner without overwhelming students with too much content.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks 0aEconomicsvTextbooks1 aNguyen, Hoaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1816zAccess online version02532nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003800135245008900173264004300262264005100305264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002500478490002700503505088200530520040501412542003001817546001601847588004001863650003801903650002601941700002601967700003701993710003902030856007702069OTLid0001817MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250411s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aLópez Castellano, Ramóneauthor00aEspañol down underbSpanish for Australia and New ZealandcRamón López Castellano 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgements -- About the Authors -- I. ¡HOLA!: Welcome to the Hispanic World, its language and cultures -- Semana 1 - Greetings, The Alphabet and Numbers -- Semana 2 - Nationalities and Grammar -- Semana 3 - Verbs -- Semana 4 - Jobs and workplaces -- Semana 5 - Pastimes, colours and more about verbs -- Semana 6 - Weather, dates and ESTAR -- Semana 7 - Housework -- Semana 8 - More verbs - Periphrases and irregular verbs -- Semana 9 - Stem changing verbs -- Semana 10 - Verb conjugation -- II. Spanish and You: Spanish for Everyday Life -- Semana 1 - ¿Nos presentamos? -- Semana 2 - La familia -- Semana 3 - La familia II y las mascotas -- Semana 4 - Mi rutina -- Semana 5 - El hogar -- Semana 6 - La comida y el pasado -- Semana 7 - En el restaurante -- Semana 8 - La ropa -- Semana 9- El cuerpo humano -- Semana 10 - Hace tiempo -- Versioning History0 aThis book focuses on a hands-on, student-centric approach to learning Spanish. Designed for the Australian and New Zealand environment for use at Deakin University, currently available is foundation level content, suitable for a first introduction to Spanish speaking. The resource is still in development with additional content progressing to more advanced skill levels currently under development.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aHolas, Israeleauthor1 aRios Rodriguez, Fanny L.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1817zAccess online version02143nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002800147245006700175264004300242264005100285264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002500458490002700483505065300510520022101163542003001384546001601414588004001430650002901470650002401499700002901523700003501552700003001587710003901617856007701656OTLid0001818MnU20260406020645.0m     o  d s      cr            250411s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aHitch, Danielleeeditor00aEnabling and Optimising Recovery from COVID-19cDanielle Hitch 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle Page -- Version Information -- Dedication -- About the Editors -- Foreword -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- About This Book -- Introduction -- I. Body Systems and Structures -- 1. What is Long COVID? -- II. Activities and Participation -- III. Environmental Factors -- 2. Co-Produced Best Practice Principles for Working with People Experiencing Long COVID -- 3. Improving the Participation Gap: Physiotherapy for People Experiencing Long COVID -- IV. Personal Factors -- V. Personas -- 4. An introduction to personas -- 5. Gayle Smith -- 6. Jarrod Micallef -- 7. Jennifer Knowles -- 8. Joshua Leggart -- 9. Sophia Sparks -- 10. Jesse Haslop0 aThis textbook provides readers with up to date knowledge about the assessment, management and support of people experiencing Long COVID. Learning activities draw upon personas co-authored with people with Long COVID.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPepin, Genevieveeeditor1 aNicola-Richmond, Kellieeditor1 aWatchorn, Valerieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1818zAccess online version03784nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245005800160264004300218264005100261264001200312300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341011800434490002700552505202800579520051602607542003003123546001603153588004003169650002703209700002603236700003203262710003903294856007703333OTLid0001819MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250416s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA11 aJames, Simoneauthor00aMathematical Reasoning and InvestigationcSimon James 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbMathMLbalternativeTextbclosedCaptionsblatexbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContentsbtranscript2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Acknowledgement of country -- Accessibility Information -- Introduction -- What can you learn from the book? -- What if I get stuck? -- I. The Hero's Journey -- 1. The Hero's Journey -- 2. Entry -- 3. Attack -- 4. Problems! -- 5. Review: the hero's return -- II. Fundamental concepts in mathematical reasoning -- 6. Algebra -- 7. Properties of addition and multiplication -- 8. Order of operations -- 9. Describing relationships with variables -- 10. Using expressions to solve problems -- 11. Working with fractions -- III. Algorithms -- 12. What is an algorithm? -- 13. Scratch -- 14. Conditional instructions (if-then rules) -- 15. Loops -- 16. Assigning values to variables and solving problems with Scratch -- IV. Interpreting visual information -- 17. Interpreting graphs from points -- 18. Are graphs just pictures? -- 19. Sketching graphs from words -- 20. Sketching graphs from pictures -- 21. Looking at gradients -- V. Sequences and progressions -- 22. Patterns and sequences -- 23. Arithmetic progressions -- 24. Sums of progressions -- 25. Geometric progressions -- 26. Summing geometric progressions -- VI. Geometry -- 27. Introduction to Geometry -- 28. Triangles -- 29. Circles -- 30. Volume -- VII. Measurement -- 31. Measurement -- 32. The algebra of ratio -- 33. The metric system -- 34. Scientific notation -- 35. Base conversion -- VIII. Graphs and networks -- 36. Graphs and networks -- 37. Graph theory -- 38. Euler paths and Euler cycles -- 39. Minimum spanning trees -- 40. Graph colouring and chromatic numbers -- IX. Simulation -- 41. Simulation -- 42. Computer simulation -- 43. Probability intuition -- 44. The normal distribution -- 45. Where does the Normal Distribution Model come from? -- 46. Mean of a distribution -- 47. Other distributions -- X. Probability -- 48. Estimating probability -- 49. Success fractions and sample space -- 50. Tree diagrams and independent events -- 51. Conditional probabilities -- 52. Venn diagrams -- Conclusion -- Reuse and attributions0 aMathematical Reasoning and Investigation is designed to help you develop the ability to use mathematics to solve the kinds of problems that don't come with answers in the back of the book. We like to think of it as a mathematics book for people who think they're not good at mathematics. The work will be useful for anyone wanting to develop their own skills in reasoning and problem solving using mathematics, and for teachers and preservice teachers hoping to help their students to develop these same skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks1 aRawson, Chriseauthor1 aCheffers, Erineillustrator2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1819zAccess online version02287nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002800144245006800172264004300240264005700283264001200340300002200352336002600374337002600400338003600426341002500462490002700487505047900514520067500993542001601668546001501684588004101699650002601740650003101766710003901797856007701836OTLid0001820MnU20260330020157.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 ger d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aRöseler, Lukaseauthor00aOpen SciencebWie sich die Wissenschaft öffnetcLukas Röseler 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bZenodoc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aWillkommen -- Über das Buch -- Einleitung: Nachvollziehbare Wissenschaft -- Was ist Open Science? -- Wie ist mit Open Science umzugehen? -- Die Geschichte der Open Science-Bewegung -- Anfänge einer Revolution -- Bestandsaufnahme -- Wandel im System -- Struktur der Vertrauenskrise -- Probleme -- Das System -- Karriere in der Wissenschaft -- Methoden -- Theorien -- Epistemische Probleme -- Lösungen -- Das System -- Methoden -- Theorien -- Die Welt -- Fazit und Ausblick0 aDuring the last years, many scientific disciplines have changed. There have been new journals, methods, initiatives, societies, structures, and many more. Researchers are calling these changes a crisis, revolution, a renaissance, or a reform. Together, these changes have led to a greater degree of openness and transparency and have changed the academic system. In this German textbook, I discuss the concept of openness, the origins of change, and the many facets of openness with an emphasis on the academic system, scientific methods, theories, and epistemological arguments. Examples and developments are primarily from the social sciences, particularly psychology.1 fAttribution  aIn German.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1820zAccess online version03104nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002700149245004100176250001600217264004300233264003900276264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002500437490002700462505059500489520137101084542004102455546001602496588004002512650002402552650002602576710003902602856007702641OTLid0001821MnU20260406020811.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aShields, Kerrieauthor00aBusiness FundamentalscKerri Shields  a1st Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBook Information -- Chapter 1: Habits for Business Success -- Chapter 2: Business Concepts and Teamwork -- Chapter 3: Management and Leadership -- Chapter 4: Entrepreneurship and Business Structure -- Chapter 5: Economics and Banking -- Chapter 6: Ethics, Law, and Social Responsibility -- Chapter 7: Global Business -- Chapter 8: Marketing Management -- Chapter 9: Operations Management -- Chapter 10: Financial Management and Accounting -- Chapter 11: Human Resources Management -- Chapter 12: Information and Risk Management -- Chapter 13: Managing Personal Finances -- Glossary of Terms0 aBusiness Fundamentals is an all-encompassing introductory textbook designed to introduce readers to the business world. Geared toward college and university students, especially those with little to no prior experience in business, this resource lays a strong foundation for individuals embarking on their academic journey with ambitions of pursuing a business career. The book delves into key functional areas of business, illustrating how departments within organizations work together to generate sales, boost revenue, manage finances, develop innovative products and services, attract and retain customers, manage resources, and make sound decisions. It also addresses essential topics such as corporate social responsibility, business ethics, teamwork, risk management, personal finance, and strategies for academic and professional achievement. Furthermore, it provides an introduction to entrepreneurship and highlights the pivotal roles of managers and leaders in business operations. Tailored for first-year students, the text includes Canadian-specific insights on economics and banking while maintaining a global outlook with examples from Canada, the United States, and other countries. By blending content from various open educational resources (OERs) with original material, this textbook offers a thorough and engaging overview of the business field.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1821zAccess online version03260nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245003700144264004300181264005000224264001200274300002200286336002600308337002600334338003600360341002500396490002700421505034600448520165100794542003002445546001602475588004002491650002502531650003302556700002402589700002602613700002502639700002902664700002902693710003902722856007702761OTLid0001822MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC98000aLeading Assessment for Inclusion 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Definitions of assessment for inclusion -- Concepts to guide assessment for inclusion -- Assessment Design Principles -- Assessment Design Cycles -- Assessment in Practice -- Opportunities and Challenges for Changing Assessment -- Promoting assessment for inclusion: everybody has a role -- Assessment for Inclusion Resources0 aAssessment should benefit all students’ learning and retention. However, current systems do not take into account the diverse characteristics, backgrounds, and situations of students. Instead, universities rely on accommodations – which are only available to specific groups – to make case-by-case adjustments, rather than proactively improving assessment designs in ways that are socio- culturally, and research informed, for the purposes of inclusion. This resource is an outcome of a project which explored assessment policy and practice across the university sector. It introduces assessment for inclusion concepts, drawing on curated resources and case study examples, to offer introductory considerations for anyone in higher education interested in being a leader in assessment for inclusion, at all levels from the classroom through to institutional decision makers. This focus on the distributed leadership of assessment for inclusion aligns with the idea that more than what individuals can achieve alone, it is also how people can lead, promote, inspire, and support others to do the same. This resource has been created with the intention to raise questions for sharing with colleagues, to facilitate the discussion of problems with inclusion in assessment, and to support the development of context-appropriate strategies around assessment design and implementation. This resource was designed to support students in the Graduate Certificate of Higher Education Learning and Teaching at Deakin University, specifically in the assessment unit, EEE741 “Designing and Implementing Assessment for Learning in Higher Education”.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aTai, Joannaeauthor1 aFunk, Johannaeauthor1 aHarris, Loiseauthor1 aDargusch, Joanneeauthor1 aBourke, Roseannaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1822zAccess online version04081nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138245004300148250001800191264004300209264010300252264001200355300002200367336002600389337002600415338003600441341002500477490002700502505034800529520244900877542004103326546001603367588004103383650002303424650002303447700002903470700002803499700002803527710003903555856007703594OTLid0001823MnU20260406020146.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQC21.3 4aQH30100aInvestigations in Experimental Physics  aTenth Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPeter J. Polito, James E. Walsh, and Jeff L. Gagnonc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Measurement -- Vectors -- Kinematics -- Dynamics and Equilibrium -- Work, Energy, Momentum, and Conservation Laws -- Circular and Rotational Motion -- Simple Harmonic Oscillations -- Fluid Statics and Dynamics -- Thermodynamics -- Wave Motion and Sound -- Basic Electrostatics and Circuit Analysis -- Geometric Optics -- Appendices0 aAs stated in previous editions, the purpose of the physics laboratory is not only to reinforce the physical principles studied in the classroom but also to stimulate the development of skills and techniques required to carry out well-designed experimental investigations. It is the hope of the authors that the experimental skills and techniques acquired in this laboratory will be carried over by the student to their respective areas of interest. It is, in fact, strongly suggested that the student make an effort early in their undergraduate career to become familiar with the current research problems in their area of interest. The student should always be aware of the applicability of skillsand techniques developed in this laboratory to their field of study. This manual can be used in a one semester or two semester course. At our institution, we use it in a two semester General Physics course designed primarily for health science majors (Physical Therapy, Biology, Physician Assistant, etc.). It it also used in a one semester Physics for Movement Science course designed for movement science majors (Exercise Science, Athletic Training, Physical Education, etc.). The tenth edition of the manual is a major revision of the ninth edition. Nearly all of the diagrams were updated, pictures of the lab equipment were included for every lab, and more tables were added to record data for each lab. Six new labs on Vector Addition and Subtraction with Applications, Graphical Interpretation, Motion Analysis, Applications of Rotational Equilibrium, Impulse-Momentum Vertical Jump Application, and Basic Exploration of Electric Fields Due to Point Charges were added. In addition, three older labs that we no longer have equipment to perform were removed (Hygrometry, Measurement of the Speed of Sound in Air by Kundt’s Method, and Spectrometry). Many of the other labs were also updated and supplemented by adding a simulation component using the Phet online simulations. The student is required to read and understand the entire laboratory experiment before their assigned laboratory period. Although the theoretical treatment included in the following experiments is in most cases sufficient for the student to develop a complete understanding of the physical principles involved in the experiment, it is strongly recommended that the student refer to their textbook for a more thorough discussion of these principles, if necessary.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhysicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aPolito, Peter J.eauthor1 aWalsh, James E.eauthor1 aGagnon, Jeff L.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1823zAccess online version03747nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245006700164264004300231264007000274264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505116600518520123701684542004102921546002702962588004102989650002503030650003103055700004403086700004403130700004703174710003903221856007703260OTLid0001824MnU20260406020147.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651617  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aGestión Inteligente Sinergias en la Contabilidad y Auditoría 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologo -- Índice -- Capítulo I: Indicadores clave para el desarrollo y formalización de emprendimientos informales en zonas vulnerables -- Capítulo II: Impacto de las plataformas digitales en el desarrollo y sostenibilidad de las pequeñas empresas del cantón La Concordia: Una revisión crítica -- Capítulo III: Capacitación y formación continua para emprendedores -- Capítulo IV: Efectos del microcrédito en Bancos vs Cooperativas durante y después de la pandemia -- Capítulo V: Innovación en la capacitación para el mejoramiento del cultivo de cacao: Estrategias educativas para el desarrollo de competencias en agricultores -- Capítulo VI: El papel de la Universidad pública en la construcción de indicadores para estudios socioeconómicos -- Capítulo VIl: La importancia de la auditoría interna en la toma de decisiones empresariales: Un estudio de caso en Prosegur -- Capítulo VIll: Innovación en gestión de calidad para MIPYMES en La Concordia: Impacto comercial, social y tecnológico -- Capítulo IX: Fortalecimiento de competencias empresariales en comerciantes informales de La Concordia: Propuesta curricular de capacitación0 aEl libro explora, en nueve capítulos, la formalización y sostenibilidad de emprendimientos informales en zonas rurales, con un enfoque en Ecuador. El primer capítulo destaca indicadores clave como financiamiento y educación empresarial para formalizar negocios. El segundo analiza las plataformas digitales y su impacto en pequeñas empresas de La Concordia, Ecuador, donde la digitalización mejora la competitividad, aunque enfrenta limitaciones de infraestructura. La capacitación continua para emprendedores, central en el tercer capítulo, es vital para el éxito en entornos rurales. Los capítulos posteriores abordan el papel del microcrédito (IV), la innovación en el cultivo de cacao (V), y la importancia de la auditoría en la toma de decisiones empresariales (VII). La obra también examina cómo la universidad contribuye con indicadores socioeconómicos (VI), la gestión de calidad en MIPYMES (VIII), y concluye con una propuesta curricular para capacitar a comerciantes informales (IX). Este compendio ofrece un análisis exhaustivo de cómo la educación, el financiamiento, la tecnología y la innovación son fundamentales para el desarrollo económico sostenible y la formalización en zonas vulnerables.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSalgado-Ortiz, Patricia Janellaeauthor1 aPreciado-Ramírez, Joffre Dannyeauthor1 aProaño-González, Esther Angelicaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1824zAccess online version03527nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245005700164264004300221264007000264264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505127300508520092901781542004102710546002702751588004102778650002502819650003102844700004102875700004202916700004302958710003903001856007703040OTLid0001825MnU20260316020149.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651600  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aGestión Inteligente Sinergias en la Administración 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologo -- Índice -- Capítulo I: Interacción funcional entre burocracia y asociaciones en las estructuras organizacionales -- Capítulo II: Nuevas tendencias de la razón instrumental -- Capítulo III: Evolución de los marcos regulatorios para el desarrollo sostenible: justicia, igualdad y equidad en la Agenda Global -- Capítulo IV: Asociaciones culturales y cultura organizacional. Análisis multidimensional de indicadores asociados a prácticas, valores y estructuras -- Capítulo V: Exploración de la responsabilidad social corporativa en empresas ecuatorianas: Un estudio de fuentes escritas -- Capítulo VI: Análisis de capacidades técnicas de servidores públicos para mejorar la gestión administrativa del GADPR La Unión -- Capítulo VIl: Análisis de la formalización del comercio de mariscos en el centro del cantón Quinindé 2023-2024 -- Capítulo VIll: Relación entre la motivación y la satisfacción académica en estudiantes de la unidad educativa Andrés F. Córdova -- Capítulo IX: Deserción estudiantil en la UTELVT Sede Santo Domingo II s-2023 -- Capítulo X: Plan de acción para la mejor de atención al cliente -- Capítulo XI: Spin-offs y su Impacto Económico en el Desarrollo de un Ecosistema Innovador y Sostenible en Ecuador0 aEl libro abarca once capítulos que exploran diversos aspectos de la administración y la organización empresarial en contextos tanto públicos como privados. Inicia con el análisis de la burocracia y las asociaciones dentro de estructuras organizacionales, seguido por una discusión sobre la razón instrumental en la toma de decisiones. Posteriormente, se aborda el desarrollo sostenible y la justicia social, así como la cultura organizacional en asociaciones culturales. Otros capítulos profundizan en la responsabilidad social corporativa en Ecuador, las capacidades administrativas en el sector público, y la formalización del comercio de mariscos. También se analizan factores de motivación y deserción estudiantil, así como estrategias para mejorar la atención al cliente en instituciones públicas. Finaliza con un estudio sobre los "spin-offs" y su rol en la innovación y sostenibilidad en Ecuador​.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMacias-Loor, Jazmina Marielaeauthor1 aPrado-Chinga, Alberto Efraíneauthor1 aAlcívar-Soria, Evelyn Eugeniaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1825zAccess online version03989nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145245009000154264004300244264007000287264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505145200531520123501983542004103218546002703259588004103286650003203327700004303359700004103402700004403443710003903487856007703526OTLid0001826MnU20260316020149.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651624  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA7600aGestión Inteligente Sinergias en las Tecnologías de la Información y Comunicación 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrologo -- Índice -- Capítulo I: Impacto de la transformación digital en la inclusión tecnológica rural en América Latina -- Capítulo II: Analfabetismo digital y su impacto en la inclusión social: Estrategias y políticas de alfabetización digital -- Capítulo III: Importancia de la alfabetización digital en zonas rurales del Ecuador -- Capítulo IV: Inclusión tecnológica y alfabetización digital: Estrategias de vinculación desde la carrera de tecnologías de la información -- Capítulo V: La evolución de la alfabetización digital: evaluando nuevas competencias en un mundo en transformación -- Capítulo VI: Impacto de una Plataforma Digital en la Experiencia del Cliente y Eficiencia Operativa: Caso de la Confitería Ronald en Santo Domingo -- Capítulo Vll: Guía de Seguridad Informática para LATAM PC en Santo Domingo de los Tsáchilas: Estrategias de Mitigación de Vulnerabilidades y Capacitación en Ciberseguridad -- Capítulo VIII: Diseño de Plataforma Web para Optimizar la Gestión de Reclamos en EMAPASOSQ, Cantón Quinindé -- Capítulo IX: Diseño de Sitio Web para Optimizar el Servicio al Cliente en Pollos Pavía, Quinindé, Ecuador -- Capítulo X: Innovación curricular en Administración de Empresas: Un paso hacia la gestión basada en Big Data e Inteligencia de Negocios -- Capítulo XI: Impacto de entornos virtuales en la inclusión y retención de estudiantes vulnerables en educación superior0 aEl libro aborda los desafíos y oportunidades de la inclusión digital, especialmente en el contexto rural de América Latina. Los capítulos iniciales analizan la transformación digital y sus efectos en áreas rurales, destacando la importancia de las TIC para mejorar la calidad de vida y reducir la brecha digital. Posteriormente, se examina el analfabetismo digital como barrera para la inclusión social, con propuestas para políticas de alfabetización que respondan a las necesidades de comunidades vulnerables. Los capítulos centrales exploran la alfabetización digital en Ecuador, enfatizando la infraestructura y las competencias digitales como ejes esenciales. La obra también cubre el rol de la educación superior en la inclusión digital, mostrando ejemplos de vinculación comunitaria por parte de universidades. Los capítulos finales presentan casos de uso de tecnologías en pequeñas empresas para optimizar procesos y mejorar la competitividad, y se discute la relevancia de la ciberseguridad en la era digital. En conjunto, el libro ofrece una perspectiva práctica y teórica, orientada a fomentar la participación equitativa en el ámbito digital, proponiendo soluciones adaptadas a contextos locales.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aBoné-Andrade, Miguel Fabricioeauthor1 aNúñez-Freire, Luis Alfonsoeauthor1 aGuamán-Chávez, Ramiro Enriqueeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1826zAccess online version02728nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245010700155264004300262264007000305264001200375300002200387336002600409337002600435338003600461341002500497490002700522505024400549520122500793542004102018546002702059588004102086650002402127700004602151700004102197710003902238856007702277OTLid0001827MnU20260406020147.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651679  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA44000aMovilización neurodinámicabGuía para neuropatías periféricas en miembros superiores e inferiores 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Sistema nervioso -- Capítulo II: Dolor -- Capítulo III: Movilización neurodinámica de la extremidad superior e inferior -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa neurodinamia representa una herramienta importante en el campo de la fisioterapia. Esta técnica innovadora fusiona los principios de la mecánica y la fisiología del sistema nervioso para abordar una amplia variedad de trastornos musculoesqueléticos. Al adentrarse en el estudio de la anatomía y función de los nervios, los terapeutas pueden identificar con mayor precisión las causas subyacentes del dolor y diseñar tratamientos altamente personalizados. Este libro se erige como una guía completa para aquellos profesionales interesados en dominar la neurodinamia. A través de un análisis exhaustivo de los fundamentos neurofisiológicos, el texto explora cómo el conocimiento del sistema nervioso puede revolucionar la práctica clínica. Además, presenta un conjunto de técnicas específicas y basadas en evidencia para el manejo de neuropatías en las extremidades. En definitiva, esta obra proporciona a los fisioterapeutas las herramientas necesarias para optimizar los resultados terapéuticos en sus pacientes. Al integrar la neurodinamia en sus tratamientos, los profesionales de la salud pueden ofrecer una atención más efectiva y holística, mejorando así la calidad de vida sus pacientes.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aGuevara-Hernández, David Marceloeauthor1 aOrtiz-Pérez, Shirley Mireyaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1827zAccess online version03304nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245008800162264004300250264007000293264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002500485490002700510505050900537520144201046542004102488546002702529588004102556650002402597650003102621700004102652700004302693700004202736710003902778856007702817OTLid0001828MnU20251020021111.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651686  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA440 4aH100aProtección de las tortugas charapa en el Parque Nacional Yasuní y sus alrededores 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Biología y ecología de las tortugas charapa (Podocnemis unifilis) en el Parque Nacional Yasuní -- Capítulo II: Amenazas a las tortugas charapa en el Parque Nacional Yasuní -- Capítulo III: Estrategias de conservación y manejo de las tortugas charapa -- Capítulo IV: Participación comunitaria y educación ambiental en la conservación de las tortugas charapa -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aLa tortuga charapa (Podocnemis unifilis), especie emblemática de la Amazonía, enfrenta amenazas significativas en el Parque Nacional Yasuní, un enclave de biodiversidad crucial para su conservación. Este estudio se enfoca en identificar las amenazas que afectan a la especie, analizar estrategias de manejo y explorar el rol comunitario en su protección. Se empleó una metodología basada en la revisión de literatura científica, entrevistas a actores locales y análisis de datos sobre la población de tortugas y su hábitat. Los resultados destacan que las amenazas principales incluyen la recolección intensiva de huevos, la caza y la degradación del hábitat debido a actividades humanas como la deforestación y la explotación petrolera. Además, el cambio climático agrava la situación, alterando los ciclos reproductivos y la proporción de sexos en las crías. Las estrategias de conservación implementadas, como la reubicación de nidos y la sensibilización comunitaria, han mostrado ser eficaces, aunque enfrentan limitaciones de recursos y coordinación. Se concluye que la participación activa de las comunidades indígenas y la integración del conocimiento tradicional con enfoques científicos son esenciales para la sostenibilidad de los esfuerzos de conservación. Estas acciones son fundamentales no solo para proteger a P. unifilis, sino también para preservar los ecosistemas acuáticos del Yasuní.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aGuerrero-Calero, Juan Manueleauthor1 aMerchán-Nieto, Laura Cristinaeauthor1 aZambrano-Molina, José Danieleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1828zAccess online version02613nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000800145050001000153245003900163264004300202264007000245264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002500437490002700462505030800489520093500797542004101732546002701773588004101800650003001841650002301871700004001894700004301934700004901977700004902026710003902075856007702114OTLid0001829MnU20260406020147.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651693  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH30100aFundamento a la química ambiental 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Fundamentos de Química Ambiental -- Capítulo II: Principios Básicos de Química -- Capítulo III: Contaminación Ambiental y Métodos de Análisis -- Capítulo IV: Estrategias de Control y Remediación -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aIntroducción a la Química Ambiental nos invita a entender cómo los principios químicos influyen en nuestro entorno y qué podemos hacer para cuidarlo. Este libro explora el impacto de nuestras actividades en el aire, el agua y el suelo, explicando las reacciones químicas detrás de estos problemas. Pero no se queda ahí: también nos muestra cómo la química puede ser una aliada en el desarrollo de tecnologías limpias y soluciones sostenibles que ayuden a contrarrestar los efectos negativos de la industrialización y el crecimiento poblacional. Además, propone reflexionar sobre nuestro papel en la protección del planeta. Con apartados clave como "Componentes del Sistema Ambiental", es una herramienta esencial para ingenieros y personas interesadas en comprender cómo interactúan los sistemas naturales y humanos, inspirando a buscar soluciones prácticas y sostenibles para los desafíos ambientales actuales.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aFlores-Murillo, Carlos Reneeauthor1 aOchoa-Celi, Joaquín Alejandroeauthor1 aSantamaría-Robles, Lissette Beatrizeauthor1 aPeñafiel Pazmiño, Magaly Elizabetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1829zAccess online version03068nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157245008300164264004300247264007000290264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002500482490002700507505040700534520124600941542004102187546002702228588004102255650002502296650003102321700004902352700004002401700004702441700004202488710003902530856007702569OTLid0001830MnU20260406020148.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651709  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aGestión estratégica del talento humano alineado al desarrollo organizacional 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: La Gestión de Talento humano (GTH) desde una Perspectiva Estratégica -- Capítulo II: Tecnología para diagnosticar, proyectar y controlar la gestión del talento humano -- Capítulo III: Planificación estratégica de talento humano y optimización de plantillas -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl presente libro tiene como propósito brindar a estudiantes y profesionales una base conceptual y metodológica para comprender la gestión estratégica del talento humano en las organizaciones actuales. Analiza las características modernas de la gestión de personal y su impacto en las relaciones laborales, utilizando modelos y métodos funcionales para diagnosticar, planificar y controlar el talento humano. Se explora la gestión de recursos humanos desde una perspectiva estratégica, resaltando la importancia del liderazgo y el trabajo en equipo. Se presentan herramientas tecnológicas, como el Mapa de Beer, para mejorar la planificación y control del talento humano, además, se detallan estrategias para la optimización de plantillas y la toma de decisiones con análisis avanzados como el modelo de Markov. En un mundo globalizado, las ventajas competitivas no residen solo en los recursos materiales, financieros o técnicos, sino en la formación y gestión del talento humano. Por ello, este libro busca desarrollar un enfoque sistemático y estratégico que permita diagnosticar, predecir y gestionar eficazmente el talento humano, potenciando el crecimiento organizacional a través del desarrollo del capital humano.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aGuerrero-Velástegui, César Andréseauthor1 aJácome-Lara, Ibett Marielaeauthor1 aTerán-Guerrero, Fernando Neptalíeauthor1 aFrias-Pérez, Edisson Andréseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1830zAccess online version02666nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157245002100167264004300188264006800231264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002500421490002700446505025400473520124300727542001601970546001601986588004002002650002302042650002402065700003302089700003002122710003902152856007702191OTLid0001831MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781439921241  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQM1-695 4aRA44000aHands-on Anatomy 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bNorth Broad Pressc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Background Terminology and Information -- The Shoulder and Arm -- The Elbow and Forearm -- The Wrist and Hand -- The Spine, Thorax, and Abdomen -- The Hip and Thigh -- The Knee and Lower Leg -- The Ankle and Foot -- The Head and Neck0 aAlthough palpation is a foundational skill for many healthcare disciplines, few resources provide comprehensive anatomical information and relate it to real-world clinical situations. With its detailed descriptions of musculoskeletal anatomy, instructions for palpating anatomical structures, depictions of basic injuries, and correlations with clinical practice, Hands-on Anatomy successfully bridges this gap. Hands-on Anatomy targets undergraduate or graduate students who have completed an introductory anatomy course and are beginning to apply their anatomical knowledge to the human body, as well as healthcare professionals engaged in patient assessment and treatment. Organized by region of the body, chapters discuss skeletal landmarks, muscles, ligaments, and neurovascular structures, with a focus on how to palpate these structures. Additionally, guides on assessing the range of motion of joints are provided, along with descriptions of common clinical scenarios relating to each body area. The text is supplemented with images of skeletal landmarks and muscular anatomy, photos of surface landmarks and range of motion actives, and end-of-chapter review questions to ensure understanding and retention of what was described.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aPhillips, Jacquelineeauthor1 aO’Hara, Michaeleauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1831zAccess online version02924nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000700136245007800143264004300221264008500264264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002500471490002700496505108000523520060001603542004102203546001602244588004102260650003302301650003102334700002902365700002802394710003902422856007702461OTLid0001832MnU20260108125945.0m     o  d s      cr            250424s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH100aInjustice at the IntersectionsbRace, Gender, Class, and Criminal Justice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIndigo Koslicki and Andrew C. Grayc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Race, Gender, Class, and the Criminal Justice System -- Chapter 2: A History of Colonialism at the Roots of the Criminal Justice System -- Chapter 3: A History of Anti-Blackness at the Roots of the Criminal Justice System -- Chapter 4: A History of Economic Class and Justice in the United States -- Chapter 5: A History of Gender at the Roots of the U.S. Criminal Justice System -- Chapter 6: The Social Construction of Crime -- Chapter 7: Race, Gender, Class, Crime and Victimization -- Chapter 8: Gender-Based Violence -- Chapter 9: How the Past Influences the Present in Policing -- Chapter 10: Possible Reforms for Policing -- Chapter 11: Race, Gender, Class, and the Courts -- Chapter 12: Sentencing and The Death Penalty -- Chapter 13: Race, Gender, Mass Incarceration, and Reentry -- Chapter 14: Juvenile Justice and Intersectionality -- Chapter 15: Hate Crimes, Hate Groups, and Domestic Terrorism -- Chapter 16: Conclusion – Where Do We Go from Here? -- Appendix: Recommendations for Race, Gender, Class, and CJC Terminology0 aInjustice at the Intersections is the first U.S.-based Open Textbook about race, gender, class, and criminal justice. While traditional textbooks are often expensive and require continuous publication of new editions to keep up with changing legislation and events, we wrote this Open Textbook under a CC BY-NC-SA license, meaning that instructors may revise, update, and change content as needed for changing events and different learning outcomes. We also plan to regularly update this Open Textbook and will always keep it free, as we believe that knowledge is the first step towards justice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aKoslicki, Indigoeauthor1 aGray, Andrew C.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1832zAccess online version04756nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157050001000167100002600177245004700203264004300250264006000293264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341002500475490002700500505222400527520124702751542001603998546001604014588004004030650002304070650002904093650002404122700002904146700003104175710003904206856007704245OTLid0001833MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250501s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781961584393  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aOchs, Jessicaeauthor00aPopulation Health for NursescJessica Ochs 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpenStaxc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1 What Is Population Health? -- Chapter 2 Foundations of Public/Community Health -- Chapter 3 Public/Community Health in Practice -- Chapter 4 The Health of the Population -- Chapter 5 Demographic Trends and Societal Changes -- Chapter 6 Structural Racism and Systemic Inequities -- Chapter 7 Policies and Regulatory Conditions Impacting Health Outcomes -- Chapter 8 Social Determinants Affecting Health Outcomes -- Chapter 9 Health Disparities -- Chapter 10 Socio-Ecological Perspectives and Health -- Chapter 11 Evidence-Based Decision-Making -- Chapter 12 Epidemiology for Informing Population/Community Health Decisions -- Chapter 13 Pandemics and Infectious Disease Outbreaks -- Chapter 14 Environmental Health -- Chapter 15 Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Strategies -- Chapter 16 Creating a Healthy Community -- Chapter 17 Assessment, Analysis, and Diagnosis -- Chapter 18 Planning Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Interventions -- Chapter 19 Planning Community Health Education -- Chapter 20 Implementation and Evaluation Considerations -- Chapter 21 Cultural Influences on Health Beliefs and Practices -- Chapter 22 Transcultural Nursing -- Chapter 23 Culturally and Linguistically Responsive Nursing Care -- Chapter 24 Designing Culturally and Linguistically Appropriate Programs -- Chapter 25 Managing the Dynamics of Difference -- Chapter 26 Health Promotion and Maintenance Across the Lifespan -- Chapter 27 Caring for Vulnerable Populations and Communities -- Chapter 28 Caring for Families -- Chapter 29 Caring Across Practice Settings -- Chapter 30 Care Transition and Coordination Across the Community -- Chapter 31 Caring for Populations and Communities in Crisis -- Chapter 32 Principles of Disaster Management -- Chapter 33 Advocating for Population Health -- Chapter 34 Engagement in the Policy Development Process -- Chapter 35 Leading the Way to Improving Population Health -- Appendix A Assessment Tools -- Appendix B Community/Public Health Nursing [C/PHN] Competencies -- Appendix C Theories and Models Applicable to Practice -- Appendix D Frequently Used and Misused Substances -- Appendix E Nurse-Designed Models of Care -- Answer Key -- References -- Index0 aPopulation Health for Nurses prepares nurses to develop interventions, policies, and practices that promote health equity and improved health outcomes across the health care delivery continuum. The text emphasizes the social determinants of health and how nurses can plan and implement health promotion and disease prevention interventions. It takes a holistic perspective, connecting human health behavior to the dynamic, ongoing interactions of the person, social factors, and the physical environment in which people are born, live, learn, play, work, and age. OpenStax Population Health for Nurses uses a logical, thematic organization that breaks down content into manageable chunks. It presents the material in 35 chapters, organized into 7 thematic units. The text defines and distinguishes among the interrelated nursing areas of population health, public health, and community health nursing, providing both historical context and up-to-date research to help students make connections across content that can inform practice. The result is a holistic approach that applies theoretical concepts to the practical assessment, diagnosis, planning, implementation, and evaluation steps of client care and community-tailored interventions.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aRoper, Sherry L.eauthor1 aSchwartz, Susan M.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1833zAccess online version01793nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001500136050000700151100002400158245004100182264004300223264006100266264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002500449490002700474505019400501520037400695542004101069546001601110588004001126650003201166650005001198650003101248710003901279856007701318OTLid0001835MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aBurns, Seaneauthor00aSemantic Web DevelopmentcSean Burns 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSean Burnsc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Semantic Web Development -- HTML5 and The Web -- CSS3 and Web Design -- Document Metadata: JSON-LD and Schema.org -- Conclusion -- Appendix: Sample Final Project Description0 aThis book serves as an introduction to semantic web development. A more advanced semantic web development course would introduce students to RDFS, SKOS, OWL, SPARQL or more. But this book expects undergraduate students who are new to web development. Therefore this work focuses on entry level topics: HTML5 and its semantic elements, CSS3, and JSON-LD with schema.org.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1835zAccess online version02335nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050000700157100002900164245011600193264004300309264003900352264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002500513490002700538505053500565520060501100542001601705546001501721588004101736650002501777650003101802710003901833856007701872OTLid0001836MnU20260309020156.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2023    mnu     o     0   0 ger d  a9783658357696  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aKehl, Konstantineauthor00aPolitische und ökonomische Rahmenbedingungen des Sozial- und Gesundheitswesens in der SchweizcKonstantin Kehl 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCham, SwitzerlandbSpringerc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aEinleitung -- Grundlagen der Politik und Demokratie -- Das Konzept der Konsensdemokratie -- Das politische System und Gesetzgebungsprozesse in der (halb-)direkten, föderalen Demokratie -- Das Sozial- und Gesundheitswesen aus ökonomischer Perspektive -- Sozialversicherungen und Sozialhilfe als institutionelle Grundpfeiler im Gesundheits- und Sozialwesen -- Gesundheits- und Sozialwesen im Spannungsfeld der Sektoren -- Zwischen Wandel und sozialer Gerechtigkeit: Herausforderungen des Gesundheits- und Sozialwesens -- Literatur0 aDas Buch bietet eine kompakte Einführung in die zentralen politischen und ökonomischen Begriffe, Konzepte und Diskurse des schweizerischen Sozial- und Gesundheitswesens. Es spannt den Bogen von den demokratischen Grundsätzen und Eigenheiten des politischen Systems, über die Sozialhilfe, Sozialversicherungen sowie ökonomischen Strukturmerkmale des Gesundheits- und Sozialwesens, bis hin zu Fragen sozialer Ungleichheit und sozialer Gerechtigkeit. Es legt besonderes Augenmerk auf aktuelle Beispiele und Trends, welche professionelles Handeln sowie ein zukunftsweisendes Management beeinflussen.1 fAttribution  aIn German.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1836zAccess online version02453nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145100002800154245007300182264004300255264007000298264001200368300002200380336002600402337002600428338003600454341002500490490002700515505029600542520097000838542004101808546001601849588004101865650003201906650002501938710003901963856007702002OTLid0001837MnU20260406020148.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9783728141682  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aSpillner, Josefeauthor00aOperating Systems and Infrastructure in Data SciencecJosef Spillner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bvdf Hochschulverlagc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Concepts: Programming, Data Representation and Data Ops -- Concepts: Operating Systems -- Concepts: Infrastructure -- Applications and Tools -- Middleware -- Collaboration and Governance Platforms -- Execution and Orchestration Platforms -- Global Infrastructure -- Solutions0 aModern data scientists work with a number of tools and operating system facilities in addition to online platforms. Mastering these in combination to manage their data and to deploy software, models and data as ready-to-use online services as well as to perform data science and analysis tasks is in the focus of Operating Systems and Infrastructure in Data Science. Readers will come to understand the fundamental concepts of operating systems and to explore plenty of tools in hands-on tasks and thus gradually develop the skills necessary to compose them for programming in the large, an essential capability in their later career. The book guides students through semester studies, acts as reference knowledge base and aids in acquiring the necessary knowledge, skills and competences especially in self-study settings. A unique feature of the book is the associated access to Edushell, a live environment to practice operating systems and infrastructure tasks.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aDatabasesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1837zAccess online version02033nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245007200134264004300206264007700249264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505053100500520023401031542003001265546001601295588004001311650003101351700002801382700003101410700002801441700002501469700002501494710003901519856007701558OTLid0001838MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aUnderstanding and Doing Research in Education & the Social Sciences 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bFort Hays State Universityc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Foundations -- Values & Ethics of Social Research -- The Use of Literature in Conducting Social Research -- The Role of Theory in Social Research -- The Research Process -- Preliminary Considerations for QUANTitative Social Research -- Types of Quantitative Research -- Quantitative Data Analysis -- Preliminary Considerations for QUALitative Social Research -- Types of Qualitative Research -- Qualitative Data Analysis -- Multiple and Mixed Methods Research -- Action Research for Practitioners -- References0 aThe purpose of this book is the provide an open-access, free textbook for initial learning about research for students in the social sciences and related professional fields (such as education, social work, business, or nursing).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aOlt, Phillip A.eauthor1 aWard, Yaprak Dalateauthor1 aSplichal, Kevineauthor1 aIsom, Ellioteauthor1 aDowda, Readeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1838zAccess online version02494nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245006800134264004300202264003700245264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002500404490002700429505058600456520078101042542001601823546001601839588004001855650002501895700002601920700002101946700003701967710003902004856007702043OTLid0001839MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aReStorying EducationbCritical Perspectives in Public Education 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aOneonta, NYbSUNY Oneontac2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReStorying Education in the United States -- The Cultural Narratives of Teachers -- Towards a Philosophy of Education -- Curriculum and the Purpose of Education -- ReStorying the History, Policies, and Places of Public Education -- What Do We Know: Assessment of Teaching and Learning -- Linguistic Diversity in U.S. Education -- From Slavery to the School to Prison Pipeline: A Call for Restorative Justice -- Making Good Trouble: Advocacy and Activism -- A Guiding Compass: Ethics for Educators -- What Can U.S. Educators and Schools Learn from Finland? -- About the Contributors0 aReStorying Education: Critical Perspectives in Public Education offers a foundational exploration of public education in the United States using different perspectives and critical analysis of education and educational policy. From showcasing how popular media creates narratives about teachers and school to a case study of the education system outside the United States, this text offers multiple viewpoints and purposes of education to give readers studying education a multi-faceted story of the social, political, and personal purposes of public education. Each chapter details a restorying of key aspects of education critical to developing a more nuanced understanding of public education: popular media narratives, historical, curricular, philosophical, and political.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aGibbins, Thoreeditor1 aBeck, Edeeditor1 aVanSlyke-Briggs, Kjerstieeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1839zAccess online version02984nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245002100137264004300158264006100201264001200262300002200274336002600296337002600322338003600348341002500384490002700409505076400436520080701200542004102007546001602048588004002064650002302104700002802127700002802155700003002183700003002213700002602243700003202269700002402301700003102325700002702356700002702383710003902410856007702449OTLid0001840MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH30100aEcology for All! 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction to Ecology -- The Physical Environment -- Introduction to Evolution -- Adaptations to the Physical Environment -- Terrestrial and Aquatic Biomes -- The Evolution of Populations and Species -- Phylogenies and the History of Life -- Life Histories -- The Ecology of Populations -- Population Modeling -- Behavioral Ecology -- Sex Strategies -- The Ecology of Intraspecific Variation -- Introduction to Species Interactions -- Competition -- Antagonistic Interactions -- Mutualism and Commensalism -- Ecological Succession -- Food Webs -- Biogeochemical Cycles -- Landscape Ecology and Island Biogeography -- Biodiversity -- Conservation Biology -- Human Impact on Global Climate -- Light and Photosynthesis -- TEAM - PA Ecology -- Index -- Glossary0 aEcology For All! Is an ecology text designed in modules so that instructors can choose the pieces that make sense to assign in their context. This book has been in development for several years and is a collaborative effort of authors at Gettysburg College, Franklin & Marshall College, and University of Pittsburgh. The textbook covers a wide range of topics including Introduction to Ecology, Evolution, Adaptations to the Physical Environment, various ecological communities, Population Ecology, Behavioral Ecology, Species Interactions, Ecological Succession, Biogeochemical Cycles, Landscape Ecology, Biodiversity, Conservation Biology, and Human Impact on Global Climate among others. The authors have presented on it at the Ecological Society of America meeting and the book continues to evolve.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBrouwer, Nathaneauthor1 aConnuck, Hannaheauthor1 aDubniczki, Haydeneauthor1 aGownaris, Natashaeauthor1 aHoward, Aaroneauthor1 aOlmsted, Castillejaeauthor1 aWetzel, Daneauthor1 aWhittinghill, Kyleeauthor1 aWilson, Andreweauthor1 aZallek, Tayloreauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1840zAccess online version02680nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002700149245004300176250001600219264004300235264008300278264001200361300002200373336002600395337002600421338003600447341002500483490002700508505077300535520072301308542004102031546001602072588004002088650002402128650002602152710003902178856007702217OTLid0001841MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250522s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aJackson, Hollyeauthor00aFoundations of BusinesscHolly Jackson  a2nd Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Commonwealth Universityc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFundamentals of Business -- Economics and Business -- Ethics and Social Responsibility -- Business in a Global Environment -- Forms of Business Ownership -- The Challenges of Starting a Business -- Leadership and Management -- Structuring Organizations -- Intrinsic and Extrinsic Motivation -- Managing Human Resources -- Recognizing and Respecting the Rights of All -- Union/Management Issues -- Teamwork and Communications -- Marketing: Providing Value to Customers -- Product Design and Development -- Operations Management in Manufacturing and Service Industries -- Using Financial Information and Accounting -- Personal Finances -- Managing Information and Technology -- The Legal and Regulatory Environment of Business -- Professionalism -- Mentoring -- Glossary0 aBusiness Foundations was created for use in Virginia Commonwealth University’s BUSN 201, Foundations of Business. In this course, students study basic foundational concepts of business environments, as well as business functions and practices. The content of this text, and the course, strives to also build awareness of corporate social responsibility and ethical business behavior. The practical application of the concepts gained in this course, and through this text, also assists students in gaining an integrated awareness of business, while practicing analytical skills needed for their advanced business courses and careers. The second edition contains updates for relevancy, plus a new section on Mentoring.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1841zAccess online version02553nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145100002900156245002700185264004300212264007700255264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002500454490002700479505056400506520087101070542001601941546001601957588004001973650002602013650002402039710003902063856007702102OTLid0001842MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250603s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957983035  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aDonovan, Sarah Jeeditor00aJust YAcSarah Donovan 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPraise for JUST YA -- Introduction -- Sarah J. Donovan -- JUST BEING -- JUST BEING: Poems -- JUST BEING: Essays -- JUST BEING: Fiction -- JUST LOVE -- JUST LOVE: Poems -- JUST LOVE: Essays -- JUST LOVE: Fiction -- JUST LAND -- JUST LAND: Poems -- JUST LAND: Essays -- JUST LAND: Fiction -- JUST WORLD -- JUST WORLD: Poems -- JUST WORLD: Essays -- JUST WORLD: Fiction -- JUST FUTURES -- JUST FUTURES: Poems -- JUST FUTURES: Essays -- JUST FUTURES: Fiction -- TEACHER GUIDE -- Appendix -- About the Editor -- About the Advisory Board -- Contributors & Reviewers0 aThis open-access anthology features short texts that can be read in a single class period and are designed to spark deep conversations. Organized around themes of being, love, land, world, and futures, these poems, essays, and flash fiction offer inclusive and affirming perspectives to align with junior high and high school English language arts (ELA) curriculum. With contributions from acclaimed young adult authors, flash fiction writers, and teacher-poets, Just YA provides educators with contemporary texts that resonate with and inspire today’s students to write their own stories. The overall work, JustYA, is licensed CC BY. Each of the chapters, however, are licensed CC-BY-NC-ND. This means you may re-use and share portions of the book, but the authors request that individual pieces be left intact as originally written when used in subsequent works.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aRhetoricvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1842zAccess online version02003nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109245003600127264004300163264008400206264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341002500412490002700437505052700464520036300991542003001354546001601384588004001400650002601440700003501466700003601501710003901537856007701576OTLid0001843MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU00aFoundations of Exercise Science 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Public Health and Exercise Science -- Chapter 2: History of Exercise Science (aka Kinesiology) -- Chapter 3: Research in Exercise Science -- Chapter 4: Bias in Exercise Science -- Chapter 5: Professionalism in Exercise Science -- Chapter 6: Sociology of Physical Activity -- Chapter 7: Physiology of Exercise -- Chapter 8: Motor Behavior -- Chapter 9: Biomechanics -- Chapter 10: Psychology of Physical Activity -- Chapter 11: Adapted Physical Activity -- Chapter 12: Physical Activity and Aging0 aFoundations of Exercise Science is designed to provide a foundation for students and future professionals interested in the study of human movement, health, and performance. Through its interdisciplinary approach, this book explores the principles, practices, and societal impacts of exercise science, including an overview of its evolution and applications.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aEllingson-Sayen, Lauraeauthor1 aTaylor-Winney, Jennifereauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1843zAccess online version02085nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245005800149264004300207264006600250264001200316300002200328336002600350337002600376338003600402341002500438490002700463505024100490520065700731542004101388546001601429588004001445650002301485650002401508700002501532700002601557710003901583856007701622OTLid0001844MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA44000aDigital Health for Nursing and Midwifery in Australia 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Introduction to digital health -- Digital health workforce and systems transformation -- Interpreting and understanding data quality in digital health -- Digital health care contexts -- Digital health and future technologies0 aThis peer reviewed open text covers the foundations of evidence-based digital health for undergraduate nursing and midwifery students. It grounds digital health nursing concepts in concrete practices and enables students to explore these through practical online learning activities, designed around the five domains of the National Nursing and Midwifery Digital Health Capability Framework (2020). The resource provides core content for the undergraduate nursing and midwifery curriculum at Australian universities, reflecting contemporary best practice in digital health. It will also be beneficial to postgraduate courses focusing on digital health.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aDavis, Jennyeeditor1 aMcKenna, Lisaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1844zAccess online version01775nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245006500144264004300209264006600252264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002500440490002700465505029400492520024100786542004101027546001601068588004001084650002501124650002401149700002401173700003501197700002901232710003901261856007701300OTLid0001845MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aRA44000aPractical introduction to writing reviews in health research 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Writing reviews in health research -- Why review health research? -- Different types of reviews -- Getting started -- Planning a review -- What should reviews look like? -- Methods -- Data extraction -- Interpreting the findings -- What can go wrong? -- Reviews at a glance0 aThis book is a practical guide to writing about health research, which includes elementary reviews of the research literature and simple research reports. The goal is to teach you how to write about research clearly and with confidence.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aHorey, Delleauthor1 aBuenfil, Fernanda Navaeauthor1 aMarcucci, Joanneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1845zAccess online version02439nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134245003700147264004300184264006600227264001200293300002200305336002600327337002600353338003600379341002500415490002700440505033100467520092500798542004101723546001601764588004001780650002501820650003401845700002601879700003201905710003901937856007701976OTLid0001846MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aKF385.A402aA Guide to Writing in Law School 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: What you need to know before you start writing -- Chapter 2: Planning your document -- Chapter 3: Writing your document -- Chapter 4: Acknowledging your sources -- Chapter 5: Case briefs -- Chapter 6: Legal problem-solving -- Chapter 7: Essays -- Chapter 8: Law reform submissions -- Further reading0 aA Guide to Writing in Law School is intended to help law students to develop their writing skills. Writing clearly and effectively is a vital legal skill. Lawyers use this skill daily. Law graduates need, therefore, to have a solid competency in clear and effective writing. This book aims to help students improve their writing by presenting various pieces of advice, tips, warnings and encouragement. It contains general chapters on planning, clear writing, and acknowledging your sources, as well as dedicated chapters on some of the specific writing tasks that law students undertake: case briefs, legal problem-solving, essays, and law reform submissions. With effort and practice, virtually everyone can improve their writing. A Guide to Writing in Law School is not only for students having particular difficulties. Those who already write well will find ideas here that will help them become even better writers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aTudor, Steveneauthor1 aFalconer, Stephanieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1846zAccess online version02539nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245007000135264004300205264006600248264001200314300002200326336002600348337002600374338003600400341002500436490002700461505025200488520106500740542004101805546001601846588004001862650002301902650002601925700003001951700002801981700002802009710003902037856007702076OTLid0001847MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD2000aMaking Public HistoriesbAustralian History Beyond the University 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Making Public Histories -- Chapter 2: Illustrated essay -- Chapter 3: Podcasts -- Chapter 4: Wikipedia entry -- Chapter 5: Exhibition display -- Chapter 6: Plan your research for publishing public history0 aThis book is created for, and ultimately with, students in Making History HIS3MHI. It is used heavily in this capstone history subject to harness the principles and power of open education. This is a book and subject that asks broadly what it means to ‘make history’ – in particular, what history means beyond schools and universities. We ask, what are the different forms and functions of historical knowledge in the modern and contemporary world? What does history mean in the public sphere, in parks, on webpages, in museums, and in people’s homes? What happens when historians operate in the public sphere? How is the past utilised by politicians? How does it bind us (or not) as a nation? How is it used to inform debates about the future both inside and outside universities, in schools, and in the mainstream community? How is history presented in commemorations, films, heritage sites, historical fiction, memorials, museums, re-enactments, and tours? What are the ethical and moral obligations historians have as ‘gatekeepers’ of the past?1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aVanderbyl, Nikitaeauthor1 aEllinghaus, Kateauthor1 aO'Hanlon, Clareeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1847zAccess online version02299nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050000800134100003300142245008700175264004300262264004200305264001200347300002200359336002600381337002600407338003600433341002500469490002700494505013600521520100200657542004101659546001601700588004101716650002501757650002701782710003901809856007701848OTLid0001848MnU20260406020153.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aQA11 aSeaton, Katherine A.eauthor00aDon’t Cheat YourselfbScenarios to clarify collusion confusioncKatherine Seaton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Mathematics and Academic Integrity -- The scenarios -- Issues raised by the scenarios -- Glossary -- Reference List0 aEnsuring academic integrity in mathematical tasks presents a unique challenge, for university students and for their assessors, and one that hitherto has been under-examined. Drawing on her twenty years of experience in mathematics education, the recent academic integrity research literature, and on what students say about why misconduct occurs, the author examines this issue head-on. Don’t Cheat Yourself: Scenarios to clarify collusion confusion facilitates intentional consideration of the nature and purpose of assessment in mathematics, and of how some types of interactions between students undermine that purpose. Pertinent and realistic scenarios are provided as prompts for discussion, through which students in mathematical disciplines can come to a better understanding of what constitutes copying and collusion, identify strategies for finding support, be warned of the short- and long-term consequences of misconduct, and be set up to learn collaboratively and work legitimately.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1848zAccess online version02120nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245006300137264004300200264004200243264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002500407490002700432505037000459520063800829542004101467546001601508588004101524650002301565700002601588700002801614710003901642856007701681OTLid0001849MnU20260406020152.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH30100aHow to do scienceba guide to researching human physiology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabLa Trobe Universityc2025. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Researching science using the scientific method -- Designing for discovery -- Performing statistical analyses -- Visualising data -- Accessing scientific literature and referencing -- Communicating scientific discoveries to peers -- Writing a literature review -- Sharing science with the community -- Your life and career as a scientist -- Glossary0 aHow to do science: a guide to researching human physiology has been written for students of the life sciences who are actively engaged in the scientific process. A lot of support is available for students learning scientific facts, but we found that it was harder to find resources to support students to become scientists. This book introduces you to what it means to be a scientist. You will learn about the scientific method and how to do many tasks of a scientist, your roles and responsibilities as a scientist as well as possible career paths, and how to use your skills as a science graduate to get a leg up in the job market.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aLexis, Louiseeauthor1 aJulien, Briannaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1849zAccess online version02430nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001500127050000700142100002500149245003100174264004300205264007600248264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002500446490002700471505054800498520074101046542001601787546001601803588004001819650005001859650003101909710003901940856007701979OTLid0001850MnU20260330020633.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aZ665-718.8 4aH11 aBjornen, Kayeauthor00aTools for RDScKay Bjornen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOklahoma State Universityc2025. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- What is RDS? -- Use Instruction as a Starting Point -- Existing Library-Campus partnerships -- Learn who you are working with -- Conferences and Training -- BMU: Starting Out on the Wrong Foot -- Conducting a Needs Assessment -- Professional Development Opportunities -- Equity-Centered Design -- Participatory Methods Overview -- Engaging Stakeholders -- Customer Journey Mapping -- BMU: Proper Planning -- Project Management Overview -- Creating A Memorandum Of Understanding -- Project Logistics: Goals, Roles, And Resources0 aThis book was created for people who are new to Research Data Services programs and, as such, covers some basic principles as well as more advanced techniques that can help get an RDS program started at a university library. One of the goals of the “Research as Data-Data as Research” project was creation of a toolkit to provide a step by step guide for libraries, especially those with limited resources, to prioritize needs and create offerings with the assistance of their user communities. This toolkit is a collection of those resources, separated by the phase of the project. It is intended to be an evergreen, open resource. Please feel free to contribute ideas and examples that you think other libraries will benefit from.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLibrary Science and Museum StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1850zAccess online version03469nam a2200541 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135245002800145264004300173264007100216264001200287300002200299336002600321337002600347338003600373341002500409490002700434505023400461520155200695542003002247546001602277588004102293650002602334650002602360650002402386700002402410700002702434700003102461700003502492700002902527700002702556700003402583700003002617700002402647700002802671700002702699700002302726700003702749700002502786710003902811856007702850OTLid0001851MnU20260406020149.0m     o  d s      cr            250604s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB72 4aRA44000aBioethicsbA Coursebook 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aBioethics: A Global Approach -- Moral Theories -- Environmental Ethics -- Health Care Ethics -- Animal Ethics and Animal Experimentation -- Epigenetics -- Synthetic Biology -- Literary Bioethics -- Bioethics and (Bio)Art -- Index0 aThis coursebook offers an expansive exploration of bioethics, an interdisciplinary field examining ethical, social, and legal dilemmas in medicine, life sciences, and beyond. It challenges conventional boundaries, embracing Van Rensselaer Potter’s vision of bioethics as a global, holistic ethics of life—integrating human health, environmental considerations, and transdisciplinary insights. Through engaging discussions, thought experiments, and case studies, the book empowers students to critically reflect on ethical questions without dictating rigid answers. Topics range from the historical roots of ethical thought to cutting-edge debates in molecular biology, such as epigenetics and exposomics, demonstrating how interconnected human, animal, and environmental health truly are. Central themes include the limits of scientific knowledge, the biases shaping research, and the evolving interplay between moral philosophy and empirical science. Students will encounter key philosophical frameworks—ontology, epistemology, and ethics—woven into practical bioethical applications. Feminist philosophy, experimental bioethics, and embedded ethics enrich this perspective, urging readers to question assumptions, embrace diverse viewpoints, and connect ethical principles with real-world science. Targeted at students in philosophy, biology, biomedical sciences, and bioengineering, this book is a toolkit for future thinkers, fostering a nuanced understanding of how ethical science advances humanity in a complex, ever-changing world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aKenis, Daaneauthor1 aMertens, Maylieauthor1 aVulliermet, Franlueauthor1 aPaleri, Varsha Aravindeauthor1 aRatajczyk, Yannieauthor1 aMoormann, Emmaeauthor1 aStadlbauer, Christinaeauthor1 aVandeput, Bartakueauthor1 aBuyst, Neleeauthor1 aMeinen, Lisanneeauthor1 aHens, Kristieneauthor1 aDevos, Inaeauthor1 aVillafuerte, Ilya Gordoneauthor1 aStruyf, Jokeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1851zAccess online version02658nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002700149245008400176264004300260264006400303264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002500489490002700514505106200541520041701603542004102020546001602061588004102077650002402118650002602142710003902168856007702207OTLid0001852MnU20260406020649.0m     o  d s      cr            250616s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF56251 aLacher, Marcuseauthor04aThe Most EXCELlent OER Spreadsheets Textbook Published (in 2025)cMarcus Lacher 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Disclaimer -- I. Chapter 1 - Fundamental Skills -- An Overview of Microsoft® Excel® -- Entering, Editing, and Managing Data -- Formatting and Data Analysis -- Printing -- II. Chapter 2 - Mathematical Computations -- Formulas -- Statistical Functions -- Functions for Personal Finance -- Chap 2 Sample Exercise -- III. Chapter 3 - Logical and Lookup Functions -- Logical Functions & Conditional Formatting -- Statistical IF Functions -- Data Validation -- Lookup Functions -- IV. Chapter 4 - Presenting Data with Charts -- Choosing a Chart Type -- Formatting Charts -- Scatter Charts -- Using Charts with Microsoft® Word® and PowerPoint® -- V. Chapter 5 - Tables and PivotTables -- Creating an Excel Table -- Sorting and Filtering Data -- Filtering Data -- Subtotals -- PivotTables and PivotCharts -- Importing Data into Excel -- VI. Chapter X - What’s New and Overlooked in Excel? -- Artificial Intelligence in Excel -- Solver -- Power, Power, Power – Oh, so much power!!! -- 3-D References -- Chap X Quiz (H5P Activity) -- Appendix0 a"The Most Excellent OER Spreadsheets Textbook Ever Published (in 2025)" by Marcus Lacher is a comprehensive and accessible guide designed to empower students and professionals with the skills needed to master Microsoft Excel. This textbook is meticulously crafted to be concise, effective, and cost-efficient, aligning with typical college-level business spreadsheets course outcomes without unnecessary content.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aAccountingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1852zAccess online version03831nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245004400162264004300206264005300249264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341007800424490002700502505089600529520134701425532040002772542004103172546001603213588004003229650004203269700003003311710003903341856007703380OTLid0001853MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            250616s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aRaj, Pradeepeeditor00aConfiguration AerodynamicscPradeep Raj 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBlacksburg, VAbVirginia Tech Publishingc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbARIAbMathMLbalternativeTextbtableOfContentsbtaggedPDF2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Introduction to Configuration Aerodynamics -- 2. Fluid Mechanics Foundations: Governing Equations -- 3. Fundamentals of Aerodynamic Drag -- 4. Overview of Configuration Aerodynamic Design and the Use of Computational Aerodynamics -- 5. Subsonic Aerodynamics of Airfoils and Wings -- 6. Transonic Aerodynamics of Airfoils and Wings -- 7. High-Lift Aerodynamics -- 8. High Angle of Attack (Hi-α) Aerodynamics -- 9. Supersonic Aerodynamics -- 10. Hypersonic Aerodynamics -- 11. End note -- Appendix A. Geometry for Aerodynamicists -- Appendix B. Fifteen Minutes of Stealth in Aircraft Design -- Appendix C. FAR and Mil Requirements Affecting Configuration Aerodynamics -- Appendix D. Examples of Aerodynamic Design -- Appendix E. Software for Aerodynamics and Aircraft Design -- Appendix F. Configuration Aerodynamics Reading List -- Appendix G. The Configuration Aerodynamicist's Bookshelf0 aPractical applications of aerodynamic theory are critically important for aerodynamic design of aircraft configurations, but are often omitted from aerospace engineering curricula. Lecture Notes on Configuration Aerodynamics is an incredible resource for educating the next generation of aerospace engineering students who aspire to engage in the aerodynamic design of aircraft configurations. It shows how aerodynamic theory is applied in practice, giving students insight into what a career in aerodynamics entails. This open textbook offers a design-oriented perspective of the development and analysis of aircraft aerodynamics. Based on his academic experience as a professor and his industrial experience at Grumman, Mason presents decades of relevant knowledge and wisdom of a large number of exceptional researchers and practicing engineers. Extensive references throughout the book encourage further study of configuration aerodynamics. This book encompasses the aerodynamic design of flight vehicles with emphasis on flow fields and configuration concepts. Mason covers methodologies for aerodynamic analysis and design for flows ranging from low speed to high speed and includes case studies of classic configurations. Are you reviewing or adopting this book for a course?Please help us understand your use by filling out this form.1 aVirginia Tech is committed to making its publications accessible in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. The text, images, and links in the PDF versions of this text are tagged structurally and include alternative text, which allows for machine readability. Virginia Tech Publishing is continuously working to improve accessibility and welcomes any feedback from readers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aMason, William H.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1853zAccess online version02411nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140100002900147245009100176264004300267264006700310264001200377300002200389336002600411337002600437338003600463341002500499490002700524505091500551520029201466542004101758546001601799588004101815650003401856650003101890710003901921856007701960OTLid0001855MnU20260406020149.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aH11 aKoslicki, Indigoeauthor00aIntroduction to Criminal JusticebOperations, Obstacles, and OutcomescIndigo Koslicki 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bIndigo Koslickic[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Open Textbook -- Chapter 1: History and Fundamentals of the American Legal System -- Chapter 2: Elements of Law, Crime, and the Criminal Justice System -- Chapter 3: Explaining Crime and Criminality -- Chapter 4: Measuring Crime and Victimization -- Chapter 5: Structure and History of U.S. Law Enforcement -- Chapter 6: Police Training, Search, and Seizure -- Chapter 7: Police Culture and Ethical Issues in Law Enforcement -- Chapter 8: Structure and History of U.S. Courts -- Chapter 9: The Courtroom Workgroup and Ethical Issues in the Courts -- Chapter 10: Sentencing and the Death Penalty -- Chapter 11: Structure and History of U.S. Corrections -- Chapter 12: Mass Incarceration and Ethical Issues -- Chapter 13: Community Supervision -- Chapter 14: Reentry, Recidivism, and the Revolving Door -- Chapter 15: Juvenile Justice -- Chapter 16: New Avenues in Preventing Crime and CJS Involvement0 aIntroduction to Criminal Justice: Operations, Obstacles, and Outcomes is an Open Textbook that brings the foundations of the criminal justice system and current events and issues to an accessible format, where readers may interact with multimedia content in addition to traditional text.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1855zAccess online version02577nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156050001100166100003100177245007100208264004300279264007300322264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002500517490002700542505074200569520055101311542004101862546001601903588004001919650002401959650004201983650002602025710003902051856007702090OTLid0001856MnU20260406020150.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956812077  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aTA145 4aHD30.41 aOkrent, Michael D.eauthor00aApplying Lean Six Sigma for Operational ExcellencecMichael Okrent 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMSL Academic Endeavorsc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction: Preface and Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Lean Six Sigma -- Chapter 2: The Toyota Production System (TPS) -- Chapter 3: Lean Principles and Tools -- Chapter 4: 5S for Workplace Organization -- Chapter 5: Kaizen Philosophy and Tools for Continuous Improvement -- Chapter 6: The DMAIC Methodology -- Chapter 7: Six Sigma Principles and Tools -- Chapter 8: Integrating Lean and Six Sigma -- Chapter 9: Implementing Lean Six Sigma -- Chapter 10: Lean Six Sigma in Manufacturing -- Chapter 11: Lean Six Sigma in Service Industries -- Chapter 12: Lean Six Sigma in Healthcare -- Chapter 13: Lean Six Sigma in Government and Non-Profit -- Chapter 14: Case Studies and Success Stories of Lean Six Sigma -- Appendix0 aThis comprehensive textbook covers Lean Six Sigma methodology for achieving operational excellence across various industries. The book provides an in-depth exploration of Lean and Six Sigma principles, tools, and techniques, from foundational concepts to practical applications in manufacturing, healthcare, service industries, and government sectors. It offers a structured learning approach with clear objectives, detailed chapters, and practical insights into process improvement, waste reduction, and continuous organizational transformation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1856zAccess online version02987nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245005100144250000700195264004300202264008400245264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505087200503520072101375532016902096542001602265546001602281588004002297650003102337650002502368700003302393700003502426710003902461856007702500OTLid0001857MnU20260406020812.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58600aIntroduction to Human ServicesbAn Equity Lens  a2e 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: An Overview: Human Services -- Chapter 2: Historical Context and Contemporary Focus -- Chapter 3: Trauma and Support Practices -- Chapter 4: Ethical Standards -- Chapter 5: Social Safety Net Programs, Community Organizations, and Social Issues -- Chapter 6: Models of Care: Medical, Public Health and Human Services -- Chapter 7: Mental Health -- Chapter 8: Families, Children, and Schools -- Chapter 9: Serving Older Adults -- Chapter 10: Becoming A Professional -- Glossary -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aIntroduction to Human Services: An Equity Lens exemplifies equity, diversity, and inclusion while providing a foundational understanding of the human services field, including core principles and theories and the characteristics and skills needed for the field. Features include ethical codes of conduct, the whitewashing of the history of helping professions, and a transitory chapter into internship settings. An emphasis is placed on the relationship between the complexity of social problems, services, systems and programs that comprise human services. The text prepares students who are considering or are committed to the Human Services field to participate in more advanced courses and practicum experiences.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aPearce, Elizabeth B.eauthor1 aOchoa-Leyva, Martha A.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1857zAccess online version02702nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127245004500140264004300185264008500228264001200313300002200325336002600347337002600373338003600399341002500435490002700460505087300487520042601360532016901786542001601955546001601971588004001987650003602027700002902063700002502092700003802117700003302155710003902188856007702227OTLid0001858MnU20260406020646.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1062.600aHuman Services PracticumbAn Equity Lens 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Preparing For Your Internship -- Chapter 2: Understanding Your Role as an Intern -- Chapter 3: Getting to Know the Agency -- Chapter 4: Working Across Difference -- Chapter 5: Reviewing Your Experience and Planning Ahead -- Chapter 6: Getting the Most Out of Supervision -- Chapter 7: Considering Equity and Ethical Issues -- Chapter 8: Developing Competence and Confidence -- Chapter 9: Preparing for Termination and Evaluation -- Chapter 10: Taking the Next Step -- Glossary -- Image Descriptions -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aThis text is designed to be used in fieldwork seminar courses that generally accompany students’ internship experience. Topics include issues that students will most likely face during their fieldwork. The text begins with early internship issues of getting to know the agency and becoming part of a team. Later chapters address topics including effective supervision, ethical dilemmas, and working with an equity lens.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aSmith, Yvonne M.eauthor1 aGuyer, Sallyeauthor1 aMancinelli-Franconi, Ivaneauthor1 aPearce, Elizabeth B.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1858zAccess online version03426nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100003000144245008900174264004300263264008400306264001200390300002200402336002600424337002600450338003600476341002500512490002700537505133800564520048601902532016902388542001602557546001602573588004002589650003102629650002502660700002902685700003202714700002502746700003002771700002502801700002602826710003902852856007702891OTLid0001859MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM5861 aPuttman, Kimberlyeauthor00aInequality and InterdependencebSocial Problems and Social JusticecKimberly Puttman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Dedication -- Chapter 1: What is a Social Problem? -- Chapter 2: Who Are We?: Social Problems in a Diverse World -- Chapter 3: What is Sociology? Theory in Social Science -- Chapter 4: How Do We Find Out?: Research Methods for Social Problems -- Chapter 5: Who Learns? Pods, Mask, and "You're on Mute" -- Chapter 6: Who Has a Home? Houselessness and Housing Security -- Chapter 7: Who Belongs?: The Social Problem of Familiy -- Chapter 8: Who Gets Environmental Justice? The Social Problem of Climate Change -- Chapter 9: Whose Lives Matter? Social Movements and Social Justice -- Chapter 10: Who Gets Well? Health as a Social Problem -- Chapter 11: Who Gets High? Social Problems Associated with Drug Use -- Chapter 12: Who Feels OK?: The Social Problem of Mental Health -- Chapter 13: Who Dies Well?: Death and Dying as a Social Problem -- Chapter 14: Who Recovers? A Case Study In Weaving Community -- Glossary -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Appendix: Class Expansion Materials -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aInequality and Interdependence: Social Problems and Social Justice examines the persistent social problems of our world, asking both who suffers and who benefits. We explore inequality in issues that challenge communities today, such as education, mental health, death and dying, and disaster recovery, among others. We invite students to celebrate the work of those who remind us of our interdependence, to imagine powerful equitable solutions, and to co-create a more just world.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aBurrows, Kathryneauthor1 aHowe, Bethany Graceeauthor1 aKarena, Noraeauthor1 aAntoine, Patriciaeauthor1 aSzott, Kellyeauthor1 aTemple, Averyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1859zAccess online version02096nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138050001000145100002800155245005600183264004300239264001200282300002200294336002600316337002600342338003600368341002500404490002700429505058600456520012101042532016901163542001601332546001601348588004001364650004401404650003101448650002501479700002901504700002501533710003901558856007701597OTLid0001860MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH1 4aHM5861 aEsbensen, Heidieauthor00aSociology of GenderbAn Equity LenscHeidi Esbensen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Gender as a Sociological Concept -- Chapter 2: Gender as a Social Construct -- Chapter 3: Gender, Sex and Sexuality -- Chapter 4: Gender in Theory -- Chapter 5: Gender and Power -- Glossary -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aSociology of Gender is an introductory textbook suitable for students of sociology and women, gender, and sexuality.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aPertermann, Danaeauthor1 aKarena, Noraeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1860zAccess online version02908nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140050001000147245004800157264004300205264008400248264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341002500454490002700479505086200506520060601368532016901974542001602143546001602159588004002175650003402215650003102249650002502280700003602305700002902341710003902370856007702409OTLid0001861MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aH1 4aHM58600aIntroduction to CriminologybAn Equity Lens 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Criminology -- Chapter 2: Measuring Crime -- Chapter 3: Origins of Criminology -- Chapter 4: Biological and Psychological Understandings of Criminal Behavior -- Chapter 5: Social Structural and Strain Theories -- Chapter 6: Social Learning, Interactionist, and Subcultural Theories -- Chapter 7: Social Control and Life Course Theories -- Chapter 8: Critical and Feminist Approaches to Criminology -- Chapter 9: The Future of Criminology -- Glossary -- Image Descriptions -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aIntroduction to Criminology provides a foundation for understanding the origins, evolution, and current status of criminological theories. This textbook explains the field of criminology and influential theories in context, with real-life examples and activities. All content is delivered through a lens of equity, diversity, and inclusion. Each chapter includes bold-faced key terms with definitions and cross-references that link backward and forward to important concepts. Students can also engage with the content through discussion questions and supplemental resources at the end of each chapter.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aPeterson, Jessica Renéeauthor1 aVanderPyl, Taryneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1861zAccess online version02695nam a2200445 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140050000700150050001000157100002500167245006600192264004300258264008400301264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002500507490002700532505116500559520014801724542003001872546001601902588004001918650003401958650002601992650003102018650002502049700002802074700003102102710003902133856007702172OTLid0001862MnU20260406020840.0m     o  d s      cr            250619s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aBF121 4aH1 4aHM5861 aNichol, Anneeauthor00aMental Disorders and the Criminal Justice SystemcAnne Nichol 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Introduction: The History of Mental Disorders -- Chapter 2: Mental Disorders in the Criminal Justice System -- Chapter 3: Disability Activism and the Rights of People with Mental Disorders -- Chapter 4: Reducing Criminalization of Mental Disorders -- Chapter 5: Crisis Response and Law Enforcement: Safer Communities for People with Mental Disorders -- Chapter 6: Mental Disorders in the Criminal Courts: Competence and Insanity -- Chapter 7: Rethinking Incarceration for People with Mental Disorders -- Chapter 8: Successful Community Reentry for People with Mental Disorders -- Chapter 9: When Courts Order Treatment: Civil and Criminal Commitments -- Chapter 10: Opportunities, Rewards and Challenges in the Behavioral Health and Criminal Justice Fields -- Glossary -- Image Descriptions -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aThis is an introductory textbook exploring the management and treatment of people with mental disorders throughout the criminal justice system.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aHarding, Kendraeauthor1 aMcKirdy, Monica J.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1862zAccess online version04296nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156245004700167264004300214264003800257264001200295300002200307336002600329337002600355338003600381341002500417490002700442505157600469520154202045542003003587546001603617588004003633650002403673650002603697700002903723700003003752710003903782856007703821OTLid0001863MnU20260406020151.0m     o  d s      cr            250702s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781911712398  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aNavigating the 21st Century Business World 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLondon, EnglandbLSE Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Introduction -- Business cases: what are they, why do we use them and how should you go about doing a case analysis? -- Part 2: Strategy and General Management -- Corporate strategy in the UK vehicle components industry: a comparison of Lucas Industries and GKN -- The collapse of Carillion plc -- On what matters: Unilever plc – purpose or performance? -- Part 3: Governance, Accounting and Control -- Asset allocation and governance at the Imperial Tobacco pension fund in the mid-20th century -- The fall of the Maxwell empire -- Activist investors: Alliance Trust and Elliott International -- The failure of the Royal Bank of Scotland -- Part 4: Economics, Politics and the Business Environment -- China National Petroleum Corporation in Sudan -- TRQ and Rio Tinto: the Oyu Tolgoi copper mine and the obsolescing bargain in Mongolia -- Activist investors versus Big Oil: how should ExxonMobil and British Petroleum respond? -- Environmental impact: why fast fashion is bad for the environment -- Part 5: Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour -- The UK’s National Health Service: teams, conflict and performance -- Redesigning a performance management system -- Transformation in the automotive sector: the management challenges of AI and the digital revolution -- auticon: promoting a neurodiverse workforce -- Part 6: Public Management -- Planning and programming for a government-hosted mass-gathering event in India: the 2019 Prayagraj Kumbh Mela -- Socio-economic background and career progression within the UK Civil Service -- Index0 aCase studies have long been an integral part of business and management education. As artificial intelligence transforms teaching and learning, they are assuming even greater importance. Cases provide the opportunity to learn from real-life scenarios, equipping students with the analytical skills required to critically examine data, apply theory, and interpret complex situations in what is an increasingly noisy and uncertain world. Navigating the 21st Century Business World: Case Studies in Management is a fully open access collection of management cases, featuring examples from the health sector, media, oil and gas industries, fast fashion, financial services, and the public sector. Written by LSE academics and tested in the classroom, the case studies in this book challenge students to evaluate classic issues of management, such as corporate governance and leadership, and to address contemporary dilemmas, from considering a company’s responsibilities in the face of man-made climate change to how to create inclusive workforces. Each case details the core dilemmas raised and includes questions for students to consider when preparing the case. Academics and industry trainers can use the collection to make their lessons more hands-on and to enhance their curriculum. The case studies provide practical examples of management decision-making to spark thought-provoking discussions for university students, experienced executives looking to improve their leadership skills, and entrepreneurs seeking a competitive edge.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aSallai, Dorottyaeeditor1 aPepper, Alexandereeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1863zAccess online version02121nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100002900168245004800197264004300245264006600288264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505038200528520054600910542002701456546001601483588004001499650004201539650003801581710003901619856007701658OTLid0001864MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250702s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781446710067  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-15701 aCleynen, Oliviereauthor00aEngineering ThermodynamicscOlivier Cleynen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOlivier Cleynenc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Fundamental Concepts -- Chapter 2: Closed Systems -- Chapter 3: Open Systems -- Chapter 4: The Ideal Gas -- Chapter 5: Liquids and Vapors -- Chapter 6: Thermodynamic Cycles -- Chapter 7: The Second Law -- Chapter 8: Entropy -- Chapter 9: Steam Power Cycles -- Chapter 10: Air-Based Power Cycles -- Appendix -- Bibliography -- List of Symbols -- Index0 aThis textbook offers a clear, progressive introduction to thermodynamics, tailored for university students and future engineers eager to understand the physical principles behind engines and refrigeration systems. With 59 fully-commented, step-by-step calculation examples and 96 problems with solutions, this book equips readers to tackle engineering challenges with confidence. Alongside rigorous analysis, it weaves in historical insights and scientific context — connecting core ideas to their origins and their technological impact.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1864zAccess online version04226nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245005800144264004300202264006600245264001200311300002200323336002600345337002600371338003600397341002500433490002700458505200900485520088602494542001603380546001603396588004003412650002503452650003303477700002403510700002603534700002703560700003003587700002903617700003003646710003903676856007703715OTLid0001865MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250702s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC98000aOpen Education Down UndOERbAustralasian Case Studies 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- Advocacy -- Textbook Cost-To-Students Minimisation Pilot -- Aligning Open Education Programs with Academic Reward and Recognition -- UOW Library: In-Step with Our Academic Community -- Adoption -- Supporting OER adoption through a grant program -- Adaptation -- An Exhilarating Evolution -- Transforming OER: Repurposing MOOCs to Microlearning Using Pressbooks -- Creation -- Adaptable Resources for Teaching With Technology -- From Blank Pages to Completion: Navigating the Process and Resolving the Challenges of Creating a New OER for University Students -- Envirocare: A Collaborative Approach to Integrating Indigenous Ways of Knowing, Being and Doing into Curricula with a Digital Learning Space -- Solving Insolvency Law’s Pedagogical Problems -- Catalysing Climate Conscious Legal Education Through Open Education Resources -- OER Down Under: OEP in Remote Australian Indigenous Fisheries -- Authentic Assessment -- Wikis Provide a Rich Environment for Collaborative Open Educational Practices: Motivation and Emotion Case Study -- Exploring “What if . . .?” with Renewable Assignments -- Creating Burning Issues in Classics -- Guiding the Guidance Counsellors: A Case Study of New Directions in Guidance and Counselling -- Linking up Student and Academic Voices: Reuniting Higher Education and the Public Sphere Through OER -- Collaboration -- Library-led Initiatives: Collaborations to Integrate OER in new Veterinary Science Courses -- Pioneering Disruptive Change to Create a Zero Textbook Cost (ZTC) Course -- Developing OER as Impactful Educational Interventions -- Student-Staff Partnership Projects -- Values Based Approaches to Evidence for OER Advocacy -- Collaborative Pathways in Sports Management: A Journey Through Partnership Pedagogy in an Open Access Textbook -- Reimagining Open Textbooks Through a Decolonising Lens: Non-Linear Practices for Holistically Integrating First Nations Knowledges into Curriculum -- Building a Community of Open Practitioners0 aOpen Education Down UndOER: Australasian Case Studies is a curated, peer-reviewed, openly-licensed anthology comprising scholarly contributions from esteemed professionals including librarians, researchers, learning and teaching teams, and engaged open education practitioners across Australia. Future editions will seek to extend this coverage to Aotearoa New Zealand, and the broader Asia-Pacific region. The primary aim of this initiative is to illuminate the pivotal role of open educational practices (OEP) in the advancement of learning and teaching methodologies in the region. By showcasing diverse case studies, our goal is to foster greater awareness and appreciation for open practices, champion inclusivity and equity within educational spheres, and provide practical examples of open educational practices which can be adapted by readers for use in their own contexts.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aBarber, Asheeditor1 aFatayer, Maiseeditor1 aMcLennan, Ranieeditor1 aLuetchford, Aliceeeditor1 aMcQuillen, Saraheeditor1 aWilliamson, Angieeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1865zAccess online version03074nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002300144245007100167264004300238264008100281264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002500484490002700509505055600536520134501092542002302437546001602460588004102476650002502517650004202542710003902584856007702623OTLid0001867MnU20260406020151.0m     o  d s      cr            250702s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aTA1451 aEly, Susaneauthor00aExperimental Design and Technical Writing for EngineerscSusan Ely 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Indianac2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter One: Basic Mechanics of Technical Writing -- Chapter Two: Digital Media and Technical Communications -- Chapter Three: About Experimental Design for Engineers -- Chapter Four: Data Analysis and Presentation of Data -- Chapter Five: Common Document Types in Engineering -- Chapter Six: Additional Brief Technical Documents -- Chapter Seven: Technical Reports and Other Large-Scale Documents -- Chapter Eight: Technical Presentations -- Chapter Nine: Ethical Engineering in Experimental Design and Technical Writing -- References0 aThis text is intended for undergraduate engineering students completing a technical writing course. As engineers complete technical writing in conjunction with research activities, this work also includes a basic overview of experimental design and the implications of robust quantitative methodologies. Hallmarks of quantitative research, best practices in presentation of data and a brief description of the use of descriptive statistics in data analysis are also provided. Technical communications for engineers often include industry related documents like memos, executive summaries, case studies, quality and process documents, standard operating procedures and requests for proposals. These documents are discussed, in addition to formal technical reports. The text also includes best practices in engineering oral presentations and the impact of Artificial Intelligence on technical communications. Ethical implications of engineering communications are also discussed from a framework of professional integrity as defined by the National Society of Professional Engineers Code of Ethics. Students using this text should be capable of communicating, in both verbal and written formats, in a way that clearly, concisely and correctly conveys engineering principles, projects and concepts to both technical and nontechnical audiences.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1867zAccess online version01760nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002600144245007300170264004300243264008400286264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002500492490002700517505019400544520038800738542003001126546001601156588004001172650002501212650003301237710003901270856007701309OTLid0001868MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250702s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aKossen, Chriseauthor00aMicrolearningbEngaging learning experiences made easycChris Kossen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Southern Queenslandc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introducing Microlearning -- Reducing and reviewing content -- Producing microlearning delivery -- Learning designs and delivery -- Learning Supports -- Glossary -- Appendix0 aThis book is a practical ‘how to’ guidebook on how microlearning design and delivery principles and techniques can be applied to your learning materials and teaching based on my application and development of microlearning. In keeping with the practical focus of this book, theory and research literature are kept to a minimum and included where they aid practical understanding.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1868zAccess online version01770nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001400127050001000141100002700151245006600178264004300244264007300287264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341002500482490002700507505046400534520012500998542004101123546001601164588004101180650003501221650002401256710003901280856007701319OTLid0001869MnU20260406020151.0m     o  d s      cr            250714s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQP1-(981) 4aRA4401 aCripps, Andreaeauthor00aClinical Application Of Therapeutic ModalitiescAndrea Cripps 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBowling Green, OhiobBowling Green State University Librariesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction to Therapeutic Modalities -- Chapter 2: Patient Positioning and Draping -- Chapter 3: Cryotherapy -- Chapter 4: Thermotherapy -- Chapter 5: Ultrasound & Phonophoresis -- Chapter 6: Extracorporeal Shock Wave Therapy -- Chapter 7: Electrical Stimulation -- Chapter 8: Biofeedback -- Chapter 9: Diathermy -- Chapter 10: Laser -- Chapter 11: Manual Therapies -- Chapter 12: Traction -- Chapter 13: Intermittent Compression -- Photo Credits0 aA physical therapy lab manual focusing on various therapeutic modalities, and including lab activities in every chapter.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aClinical PhysiologyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1869zAccess online version05673nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155245012700168264004300295264006400338264001200402300002200414336002600436337002600462338003600488341002500524490002700549505079300576520354501369542001604914546001604930588004004946650004204986650003805028700003005066700002605096700002505122710003905147856007705186OTLid0001870MnU20260406020152.0m     o  d s      cr            250714s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789465180502  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aTJ1-157000aTransitioning towards a circular (healthcare) economybCircular Economy principles, leadership, policy and decision-making 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: The essentials of sustainable healthcare and the circular economy paradox -- Chapter 2: The impact of leadership on policy and best practices -- Chapter 3: Swimming against the current:legislation -- Chapter 4: Political Vision as the Cornerstone of a Circular Economy -- Chapter 5: Visualizing the Circular Economy -- Chapter 6: Design strategies for policies, products and processes in a zero-waste society -- Chapter 7: Recycled materials; using waste as input for new products -- Chapter 8: How to assess “green” products with LCA: LCA methodology and Reliability Risk Factors -- Chapter 9: Survey on stakeholder perspectives of LCA practices in the surgical field -- Chapter 10: The role of technical universities in driving sustainability in hospitals0 aThis book offers a comprehensive roadmap toward a circular and sustainable healthcare system, structured into three distinct parts. Part I describes circular principles and policy tactics. Chapter 1 outlines the essentials of sustainable healthcare and designates the paradox in daily practice of sustainability and the circular economy. In Chapter 2 the impact of leadership on policy together with best practices is discussed. The legislation and infrastructural web, in which many stakeholders and circular economy initiatives are strangled, is described. Despite the fact that politicians and policymakers are motivated to encourage sustainability, the infrastructure is designed to discourage circular economy projects. This chapter shows examples of setting-up intrinsic motivated teams of hospital staff, green teams, industry leaders and scientific motivated research teams. Swimming against the current is about the legislation paradox. In chapter 3 described as how legislation should be redesigned to accomplish the goals as set out in the green deal and the climate law. Part II serves as a practical guide to implementing circular strategies. In chapter 4 the reader is guided through the fundamentals of circular strategies by visualizing the circular economy. Chapter 5 reveals successful design strategies for products and processes which contribute to a zero-waste society. Using recycled materials by using waste as input for new products is described in chapter 6. In chapter 6 we will explore (surgical) waste as input for new products. Recycled should and could be used more. This is a fundamental concept within circular design principles but hardly used until this moment. Part III explores circular economy design principles on basis of successful examples. This part dives into real-world applications and measurable outcomes. It showcases successful circular design concepts and business models that have reshaped the market. Chapter 7: Is about leading by design. Success stories of circular concepts which have effectively changed the market with circular products and services are designated. Also entrepreneurial success stories of circular economy business models are presented. Chapter 8 investigates how to measuring effectiveness and impact of circular economy products and processes. In particular how reliable some facts are which are used by many to sell products or introduce new policies or legislation. How trustworthy is data from life cycle assessments (LCA’s)? What are the pitfalls? Is it possible to manipulate these data? Why should we characterize one-sided data from an LCA as greenwashing? Circular Economy principles, sustainability and, in broader sense, the climate discussion seem to trigger emotions. Using fundamental and reliable data is essential in order to be able to judge whether a product or process indeed reduces CO2 emissions is essential in decision-making. Chapter 9 focusses on how universities can contribute to sustainable solutions by presenting different cases which resulted in actual results which were implemented or are ready for upscaling. The role of universities as innovation hubs is highlighted through case studies with proven impact. The final chapter offers a reflective and forward-looking analysis on how circular strategies in healthcare can shape future societal developments. The authors reflect on the content in chapter 10. A final part in which a critical analysis is presented and the impact it could have on future developments and the society.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aMechanical EngineeringvTextbooks1 avan Straten, Barteauthor1 aBruins, Brunoeauthor1 aHoreman, Timeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1870zAccess online version02722nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002900144245003900173264004300212264008100255264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002500458490002700483505063700510520091401147542004102061546001602102588004102118650004202159650003102201710003902232856007702271OTLid0001871MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250714s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aH11 aWeber, Edward V.eauthor00aEthics in TechnologycEdward Weber 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSt. Charles Community Collegec[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction, Ethical Frameworks and Personal Lenses -- Defining Ethics and Related Terminology -- Ethics for Tech Developers and Tech Consumers -- Cybersecurity, Hacking, and Digital Identity -- Technology, Justice, and Social Equity -- Technology in Personal and Social Life -- Privacy, Surveillance, and Data Ethics -- Digital Communication, Social Media, Misinformation and Democracy -- Intellectual Property, Digital Art, and Emerging Economies -- Artificial Intelligence (AI), Automation and Robotics, and Algorithmic Ethics -- Bioethics and Human Enhancement -- Technological Disruption and the Paradox of Progress0 aThe purpose of this text is to serve as an Open Education Resource (OER) designed initially to be used in a secondary or post-secondary education setting. It is intended to be a guide to facilitate focused discussions about contemporary issues of the ethical considerations related to technology evolution, development, deployment, and consumption, as well as issues (both known and unknown) of potential misuse and abuse of technology. This is not a traditional Ethics textbook in that it is not intended to provide a survey of all of the history of Ethics through the ages nor is it intended to dive deeply into any particular ethical movements or frameworks as may be the focus of other ethics studies. Rather, it is intended to focus predominantly on the concepts of applying critical and ethical thinking to issues and subsequent decisions related to our interactions with technology in the 21st century.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1871zAccess online version02112nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003300148245006900181250001800250264004300268264009100311264001200402300002200414336002600436337002600462338003600488341002500524490002700549505046800576520042101044542004101465546001601506588004001522650002501562650002301587710003901610856007701649OTLid0001872MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250714s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aAdeyiga, Adedoyin M.eauthor00aLaboratory ManualbGeneral Chemistry II HonorscAdedoyin Adeyiga  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface: Calculations in the Chemistry Laboratory -- Experiment One: Chemical Spectroscopy Lab -- Experiment Two: Total Organic Carbon (TOC) Analysis of Different Bottled-Water -- Experiment Three: Total Organic Carbon (TOC) Analysis of Sugar in Carbonated and Non-Carbonated Drinks -- Experiment Four: Saponification Reaction – Making Solid and Liquid Soap -- Experiment Five: Synthesis and Analysis of Potassium Aluminum Sulfate Dodecahydrate, KAl(SO4)2.12H2O0 aGeneral Chemistry II Honors Laboratory Manual (2025) is designed to expose students to labs with applications. Chemical instrumentation for analyses of different substances is showcased; analysis of common household and environmental samples was delved into. The belief is that honors level students should get early introduction to chemical instrumentation and their use in carrying out sample testing and analysis.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1872zAccess online version02927nam a2200433 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245010400135264004300239264007200282264001200354300002200366336002600388337002600414338003600440341002500476490002700501505018900528520132200717542003002039546001602069588004002085650003802125650002602163700003002189700002602219700002802245700002602273700002602299700002802325700002402353710003902377856007702416OTLid0001873MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250714s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aIntroduction to Speech Pathology PracticebFoundational Concepts for Australian First-year Students 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Cook Universityc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: The Speech Pathology Role and Professional Foundations -- Chapter 2: Foundations of Linguistics -- Chapter 3: Areas of Speech Pathology Practice -- Reference List0 aThis eBook is designed for emerging speech pathology professionals. This peer reviewed resource lays a strong foundation for first-year speech pathology students by covering the core principles and concepts for speech pathology practice. The eBook begins with an exploration of the anatomy involved in communication and swallowing, offering insights into how the structures of the human body support these crucial functions. It then delves into the core aspects of communication development, covering the typical progression of speech, language and literacy skills from infancy through adulthood. It offers students a framework for understanding both typical and diversity in development, essential for effective assessment and intervention. Linguistics is another key area covered, offering insights into the structure and function of language, including syntax, pragmatics, semantics, morphology, phonology, and phonetics. This understanding is crucial for diagnosing and treating communication disorders. The eBook advocates for culturally responsive practice, outlining strategies for delivering effective and sensitive care to clients from diverse backgrounds. Additionally, the text addresses the practical application of foundational principles in assessing and treating communication and swallowing disorders.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aCochrane, Franceseauthor1 aBrown, Louiseeauthor1 aDenman, Deboraheauthor1 aNewman, Rogereauthor1 aVigor, Sophieeauthor1 aScalia, Chelseaeauthor1 aWalker, Beneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1873zAccess online version02121nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134100002400147245015300171264004300324264007200367264001200439300002200451336002600473337002600499338003600525341002500561490002700586505040200613520046901015542003001484546001601514588004001530650002501570650003601595710003901631856007701670OTLid0001874MnU20260330020634.0m     o  d s      cr            250714s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1062.61 aArcher, Beneauthor04aThe STEM AdvantagebCareer Planning and Internship Strategies for Science, Technology, Engineering and Mathematics Postgraduate StudentscBen Archer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bJames Cook Universityc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Getting the Internship -- Starting the Internship -- Workplace Rights on Internship -- Setting Goals and Making Plans -- Reflective Writing for Your Professional Development -- Using Artificial Intelligence in the Workplace -- Developing Positive Working Relationships -- Developing a Portfolio -- Completing Your Internship and Planning Next Steps -- Conclusion -- Version History0 aThis comprehensive guide bridges the gap between academic learning and professional application, offering a structured framework developed through experiences of students successfully completing their internship programs. Educators and students alike will benefit from practical methodologies that transform theoretical knowledge into workplace readiness, with strategic guidance for creating personalised career trajectories and maximising internship experiences.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1874zAccess online version02296nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001300136100002700149245006100176264004300237264006600280264001200346300002200358336002600380337002600406338003600432341002500468490002700493505078000520520035401300542003001654546001601684588004001700650003201740650003401772710003901806856007701845OTLid0001875MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250731s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aKF385.A41 aTuffley, Davideauthor00aInfoTech Governance, Policy, Ethics & LawcDavid Tuffley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Module 1: IT Governance Frameworks -- Module 2: Cybersecurity & Data Protection -- Module 3: Data Breach Preparation & Response -- Module 4: Cybersec Incident Management Maturity Model -- Module 5: Meta-Cognition, Ethical Decision Making, Ethical Theories -- Module 6: Intellectual Property & Copyright -- Module 7: Legal Governance, Cyber Forensics, Cyber Intelligence -- Module 8: Impact of IT on Society -- Module 9: Cyber Loss Process & Cyber Insurance -- Module 10: E-Gov & Digital Transformation -- Appendix A: List of Acronyms -- Appendix B: Applying the Ethical Decision Model -- Appendix C: Common scenarios -- Appendix D: Software licensing -- Appendix E: Propaganda techniques -- Appendix F: Military technology -- Appendix G: Select Bibliographies0 aA comprehensive guide to IT governance, policy, ethics and law for students, practitioners and researchers. Covers the latest developments and best practices in the field, with a focus on the ethical, legal and social implications of IT. The textbook is divided into nine chapters, each covering a key topic in IT governance, policy, ethics and law.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1875zAccess online version01875nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050001400143050000800157100002900165245007100194250001900265264004300284264007100327264001200398300002200410336002600432337002600458338003600484341002500520490002700545505042000572520016800992542004101160546001601201588004001217650002401257650004101281650002701322710003901349856007701388OTLid0001876MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250731s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA440-699 4aQA11 aCoffelt, Vanessaeauthor00aFunctions, Trigonometry, and Systems of EquationscVanessa Coffelt  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTexas A&M Universityc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 0: Review of Algebra -- Chapter 1: Properties of General Functions -- Chapter 2: Polynomial Functions -- Chapter 3: Rational Functions -- Chapter 4: Root and Power Functions -- Chapter 5: Exponential and Logarithmic Functions -- Chapter 6: Systems of Linear/Nonlinear Equations -- Chapter 7: Trigonometric Functions -- Chapter 8: Trigonometric Properties and Identities -- Chapter 9: Vectors0 aThis is the second edition of a Precalculus textbook designed specifically for Math 150: Functions, Trigonometry, and Systems of Equations at Texas A&M University.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aGeometry and TrigonometryvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1876zAccess online version01606nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003300148245007800181264004300259264008400302264001200386300002200398336002600420337002600446338003600472341002500508490002700533505026300560520014300823542004100966546001601007588004001023650002401063650002901087710003901116856007701155OTLid0001877MnU20260406020647.0m     o  d s      cr            250731s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aP91.31 aPurzycki, Kristophereauthor00aProfessional Writing and Communications for BusinesscKristopher Purzycki 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Wisconsin-Green Bayc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Insights: Fundamental Concepts -- Information: Research and Professional Writing -- Implementation: Construction and Style -- Interface: Your Professional Voice -- Extra: Group Communication, Teamwork, and Leadership -- Glossary -- References0 aThis textbook, written by Dr. Kris Purzycki, is used in UW-Green Bay's Professional Writing for Business Majors (Writing Foundations 200).1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1877zAccess online version02442nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002200149245004300171264004300214264008000257264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505069300511520062901204542001601833546001601849588004101865650002301906650002301929710003901952856007701991OTLid0001878MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250731s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aLiu, Yingeauthor00aIntroduction to MicrobiologycYing Liu 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCity College of San Franciscoc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Introduction to Microbiology -- Microscopes -- Macromolecules -- Prokaryotic Cell -- Eukaryotic Cell -- Prokaryotic Pathogens -- Acellular Pathogens -- Microbial Metabolism I -- Microbial Metabolism II -- Microbial Growth -- DNA and RNA -- Central Dogma -- Horizontal Gene Transfer and Operons -- Antibiotics -- Antibiotic Resistance and Other Antimicrobials -- Microbial Mechanisms of Pathogenicity -- Pathogenicity and Virulence Factors -- Disease and Epidemiology -- Microbiomes -- Innate Immunity I -- Innate Immunity II -- Adaptive Immunity I -- Adaptive Immunity II -- Hypersensitivities -- Diseases of the Immune System -- Diagnosing Infections -- Index -- Glossary0 aIntroduction to Microbiology is a textbook designed for non-majors and allied health microbiology courses. The book features chunked content, embedded assessments, and clearly stated learning objectives to support active and inclusive learning. It incorporates equity-focused case studies, interactive elements, and diverse global perspectives to enhance engagement and representation - reflecting our belief that students are not only learners but also co-creators of knowledge. Created by Ying Liu of City College of San Francisco (CCSF) in collaboration with undergraduate students from CCSF and the University of Dundee.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1878zAccess online version02303nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000900154100002500163245006600188264004300254264007700297264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002500496490002700521505042400548520066300972542004101635546001601676588004001692650003201732650003701764710003901801856007701840OTLid0001879MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250731s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781998944088  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aWang, Harriseauthor00aIntroduction to Computer Programming with PythoncHarris Wang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bAthabasca University Pressc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Essential Building Blocks of Computer Programs -- Chapter 3: Flow Control of Statements -- Chapter 4: Handle Errors and Exceptions in Programs -- Chapter 5: Use Sequences, Sets, Dictionaries, and Text Files -- Chapter 6: Define and Use Functions -- Chapter 7: Object- Oriented Programming with Python -- Chapter 8: Modules and Packages -- Chapter 9: Develop GUI- Based Applications0 aThis introduction to computer programming with Python begins with some of the basics of computing and programming before diving into the fundamental elements and building blocks of computer programs in Python language. From the installation of Python, Python interactive programming, and integrated development environments to raising and handling exceptions, using compound data types to solve problems, and implement divide-and-conquer processes using functions, classes and modules, this textbook will set students up for success in programming and computing study and practice. The included exercises and projects are designed to hone students’ skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aProgramming LanguagesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1879zAccess online version03331nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050000700154050001000161245004800171264004300219264004500262264001200307300002200319336002600341337002600367338003600393341002500429490002700454505088100481520105401362542001602416546001602432588004002448650003302488650003102521650002502552700002902577700003002606700002602636700002502662700002902687700002902716710003902745856007702784OTLid0001880MnU20260409115413.0m     o  d s      cr            250804s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956862157  aMnUbengcMnU 4aJA71 4aH1 4aHM58600aSocial Justice & Advocacy in Human Services 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Overview, Framing, and Definitions -- Chapter 1: Historical Concepts of Social Justice -- Chapter 2: Theories of Social Justice -- Chapter 3: Human Rights and the Equitable Distribution of Resources -- Chapter 4: Power, Privilege, Oppression, and Bias -- Chapter 4: Legislation and Policy -- Chapter 6: Race, Racism, and Being Black in the United States -- Chapter 7: Being Asian, Indigenous, and Latinx in the United States -- Chapter 8: Being a Woman in the United States -- Chapter 9: Gender and Sexuality in the United States -- Chapter 10: Poverty in the United States -- Chapter 11: Religion in the United States -- Chapter 12: Ability in the United States -- Chapter 13: Community Action and Activism -- Chapter 14: Social Justice Practice in Human Services: An Individual Approach -- Chapter 15: Social Justice Practice in Human Services: A Systems Approach0 aSocial Justice & Advocacy in Human Services delves into the complex realm of social justice, offering a deep dive into historical roots and theories to practical applications in the field. This text covers fundamental concepts, including power, privilege, and oppression, and explores critical issues like racism, gender, sexuality, poverty, religion, and disability in the context of the United States. The last section of the book hones in on the field of human services, discussing power, privilege, and bias in this context, and lastly exploring equitable distribution, human rights, and the systems and entry points within human services practice. The text provides many resources, videos, definitions, and reflection questions, ensuring readers have a solid foundation in social justice concepts. The authors also present real-world stories and examples, enriching the learning experience. The text also offers educators and students opportunities to explore, learn more on their own, and take actionable steps toward advancing social justice.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPolitical SciencevTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aGreen, Cailyn F.eauthor1 aDeJonge, Bernadeteauthor1 aGolden, Nikkieauthor1 aBrayton, Kimeauthor1 aSteinman, Carrieeauthor1 aRaybold, Shannoneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1880zAccess online version02352nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002700137245005200164264004300216264003700259264001200296300002200308336002600330337002600356338003600382341002500418490002700443505041600470520086100886542001601747546001601763588004001779650002901819700002601848710003901874856007701913OTLid0001881MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250811s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aFarmer, Darreleauthor00aOral/Interpersonal CommunicationcDarrel Farmer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aOverview -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Communication Situations -- Chapter 2: Nonverbal Communication -- Chapter 3: Listening -- Chapter 4: Leadership and Teamwork Skills -- Chapter 5: Interpersonal Conflict Management -- Chapter 6: Perception -- Chapter 7: Self-Concept -- Chapter 8: Cultural Communication -- Chapter 9: Speech Preparation -- Appendix -- Glossary0 aOral/Interpersonal Communication provides a comprehensive overview of foundational and advanced communication concepts, emphasizing practical skills for individual and group interactions. This textbook explores the communication process, including verbal and nonverbal strategies, the role of culture, and techniques for effective listening. It also covers essential topics such as public speaking, interpersonal relationships, teamwork, and conflict resolution. With a focus on real-world applications, the book delves into communication theories, ethics, and the impact of communication on relationships, organizational settings, and personal identity. Designed to prepare students for professional, social, and civic contexts, this resource encourages reflection and skill-building to foster meaningful and effective communication in diverse situations.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aBell, Bridgeteeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1881zAccess online version02236nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245004100149264004300190264007300233264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002500428490002700453505065300480520041601133542001601549546001601565588004001581650002401621650002601645700002701671700003601698710003901734856007701773OTLid0001882MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250825s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aIntroduction to MarketingbMKTG 3433 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2025. 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aDedication -- Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: What Is Marketing? -- Chapter 2: Marketing Function -- Chapter 3: Segmentation and Targeting -- Chapter 4: Marketing Strategy -- Chapter 5: Ethics and Social Responsibility -- Chapter 6: Marketing Information and Research -- Chapter 7: Consumer Behavior -- Chapter 8: Positioning -- Chapter 9: Branding -- Chapter 10: Product Marketing -- Chapter 11: Pricing Strategies -- Chapter 12: Place: Distribution Channels -- Chapter 13: Promotion: Integrated Marketing Communication (IMC) -- Chapter 14: Marketing Globally -- Chapter 15: Marketing Plan -- Faculty Resources -- Credits & References -- References0 aThis University of Arkansas open textbook is adapted from the Lumen Learning openly licenced course Principles of Marketing. The textbook uses current case studies and engaging, real-world scenarios to help students recognize and analyze marketing in business as well as in everyday life. Curated OER readings, videos, simulations and other learning activities introduce students to the principles of marketing.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aMiles, Rebeccaeeditor1 aFaculty, WCOB Marketingeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1882zAccess online version01918nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003500135245007800170264004300248264007300291264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341002500486490002700511505046900538520030101007542003001308546001601338588004001354650002001394650002601414710003901440856007701479OTLid0001883MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250825s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN851 aWillette, Lauren Adamseauthor00aDocumenting Community StoriesbArkansas Legends and LorecLauren Willette 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Engaging Students through Folklore Documentation -- Documenting Community Stories -- Unit Standards -- Introduction to Folklore -- Introduction to Arkansas Legends -- Arkansas Folk Legends in the Digital Age -- Folk Culture vs. Popular Culture -- Exploring Primary Sources -- Using Primary Sources -- Creating a Timeline with Primary Sources -- Storytelling as Performance -- Folklore Interview -- Arkansas Legends and Lore Appendix -- Bibliography0 aLesson Plans developed as part of Arkansas Folk and Traditional Arts’ Engaging Students with Folklore Documentation: Professional Development for K-12 Educators conference hosted at University of Arkansas, Mullins Library July 17-19, 2024. Supported by funding from Arkansas Humanities Council.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1883zAccess online version02535nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002200137245006400159264004300223264007300266264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002500461490002700486505089900513520054201412542003001954546001601984588004002000650002902040710003902069856007702108OTLid0001884MnU20260330020802.0m     o  d s      cr            250825s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aGray, Kateauthor00aRhetorical Strategies for Workplace CommunicationcKat Gray 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction: Professional and Technical Writing (ENGL 30503) at UArk -- Chapter 1: Introducing Technical Writing -- Chapter 2: Ethics in Technical Writing -- Chapter 3: Setting Your Course Goals -- Chapter 4: Tracking Your Course Goals -- Project 2: Career Documents -- Chapter 5: Applying to Jobs -- Chapter 6: Tailoring Job Materials -- UARK Cares Foundation Community Improvement Grant -- Project 3: Problem Primer -- Chapter 7: Explore Potential Problems -- Chapter 8: Research a Technical Writing Problem -- Chapter 9: Design and Run a Pilot Study -- Chapter 10: Synthesize and Report Research -- Project 4: Collaborative Grant Proposal -- Chapter 11: Create a Grant Proposal -- Chapter 12: Remix Research for a Public Audience -- Chapter 13: Write a Transmittal Letter -- Project 5: Course Reflection Memo -- Chapter 14: Reflective Writing for Technical Communication0 aWelcome to Professional and Technical Writing (ENGL 30503) at the University of Arkansas! Professional and Technical Writing is an undergraduate-level course intended to prepare students for the writing they are likely to do in the future, especially writing they are likely to do in the workplace. In English 30503, students extend their prior knowledge of rhetorical situations, genre conventions, research, document design, and writing processes to practice common workplace writing genres like correspondence, proposals, and reports.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1884zAccess online version02234nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002400147245004300171264004300214264007300257264001200330300002200342336002600364337002600390338003600416341002500452490002700477505104000504520006101544542003001605546001601635588004001651650002901691650002401720710003901744856007701783OTLid0001885MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250825s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA421 4aRA4401 aJones, Cheseauthor00aPersonal Health and SafetycChes Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAdopting This Book -- Lesson One: Your Personal Health Journey -- Lesson Two: How Important is Psychological Health? -- Lesson Three: The Importance of Managing Stress in Today's Environment -- Lesson Four: Enhancing Your Sleep -- Lesson Five: Injury and Violence Prevention -- Lesson Six: Social Health: The Importance of Having Networks and Relationships -- Lesson Seven: Personal Reproductive Choices: Health Impact -- Lesson Eight: Reducing the Risks of Addiction and Substance Abuse -- Lesson Nine: Responsible Alcohol Use and Decreasing Tobacco Dependency -- Lesson Ten: Nutrition and Your Health -- Lesson Eleven: Finding and Maintaining Your Best Healthy Weight -- Lesson Twelve: Including Physical Activity in Your Daily Life -- Lesson Thirteen: Considering Risk Factors for Chronic Diseases: Why Is It Important For You? -- Lesson Fourteen: Protecting Yourself From Infectious Disease and STI's -- Lesson Fifteen: Becoming A Wise Health Care Consumer -- Lesson Sixteen: The Importance of Environmental Health in Today's World0 aWritten by Dr. Ches Jones at the University of Arkansas.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPublic HealthvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1885zAccess online version01641nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127245002500137264004300162264007300205264001200278300002200290336002600312337002600338338003600364341002500400490002700425505013600452520035200588542004100940546001600981588004000997650002601037650002901063700002801092700003101120710003901151856007701190OTLid0001886MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250825s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.300aAdvanced Composition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Unit 1 -- Unit 2 -- Unit 3 -- Unit 4 -- Self-Reflection -- "Writing About Yourself" -- Appendix -- Instructor Notes0 aWelcome to Advanced Composition! In this course, we embark on a journey through the art and craft of writing, exploring various forms, styles, and purposes of composition. Over the semester, we will delve into four distinct units, each designed to equip students with the necessary information to complete the four major assignments in the course.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aBliss, Colletteeauthor1 aSeverson, Ashleigheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1886zAccess online version02636nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000800138245006400146264004300210264007300253264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505067300500520069501173542002701868546002701895588004001922650002401962650003801986650002602024700003802050700003402088710003902122856007702161OTLid0001887MnU20260330020207.0m     o  d s      cr            250825s2024    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aP5100aNegocios y Desarrollo ProfesionalbPerspectivas en Español 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Arkansasc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Capítulo # 1: La Economía global y el mundo hispano -- Contextos, metas y requisitos. -- Capítulo # 2: La empresa -- Capítulo # 3: Comunicación intercultural e internacional en los negocios -- Capítulo # 4: La asignación internacional -- Capítulo # 5: Trabajo en equipo en los negocios -- Capítulo # 6: Liderazgo de grupo -- Capítulo # 7: Conceptos y marcos básicos de negocios sostenibles -- Capítulo # 8: Esenciales de Currículum y Carta de presentación -- Capítulo # 9: Desencadena tu carrera en el camino correcto -- Capítulo # 10: Uso de la tecnología para administrar la información -- Capítulo # 11: Tu carrera en los negocios0 a¡Bienvenidos al libro de texto “Negocios y Desarrollo Profesional: Perspectivas en Español”! Este curso está cuidadosamente diseñado para proporcionarte las herramientas necesarias para triunfar en el emocionante y diverso mundo de los negocios en los países de habla hispana. En este viaje educativo, exploraremos una amplia gama de temas cruciales que te permitirán comprender y navegar de manera efectiva el entorno empresarial global. Desde las fluctuaciones económicas hasta las tendencias culturales, cada elemento ejerce una influencia significativa en el panorama empresarial global. Este libro de texto se erige como una brújula indispensable en este complejo universo.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aRecuero, Antonio Parrillaeauthor1 aBenton, Hilda Moraymaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1887zAccess online version02162nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100003500148245006300183264004300246264006700289264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002500478490002700503505046000530520046100990542004101451546001601492588004001508650002501548650002301573700002701596700002501623710003901648856007701687OTLid0001888MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250827s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aBlackstock, Lindsay K.eauthor00aChemical Bonding and Organic ChemistrycLindsay Blackstock 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKamloops, British ColumbiabThompson Rivers Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Background Material -- Quantum Theory and Electronic Structure of Atoms -- Periodic Relationships Among the Elements -- Chemical Bonding I - Basic Concepts -- Chemical Bonding II - Molecular Geometry and Hybridization of Atomic Orbitals -- Intermolecular Forces and Liquids and Solids -- Organic Chemistry I - Bonding and Structure -- Organic Chemistry II - Stereochemistry -- Organic Chemistry III - Conformational Analysis -- Back Matter0 aThis textbook develops an understanding and historical context of atomic and molecular structure. Topics include electron configurations, periodic trends, chemical bonding, Lewis structures, molecular shapes, valence bond and molecular orbital theory. The organic chemistry portion of the course focuses on the bonding and structure of organic compounds, functional groups, conformational and stereochemical features including applications to biochemistry.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBrewer, Sharoneauthor1 aCinel, Brunoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1888zAccess online version01632nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002700148245006000175264004300235264006700278264001200345300002200357336002600379337002600405338003600431341002500467490002700492505023200519520015600751542004100907546001600948588004000964650002501004650002301029700003501052700003101087710003901118856007701157OTLid0001889MnU20260406020649.0m     o  d s      cr            250827s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aBrewer, Sharoneauthor00aFundamentals and Principles of ChemistrycSharon Brewer 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKamloops, British ColumbiabThompson Rivers Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter -- Background -- Gases -- Thermochemistry -- Kinetics -- Chemical Equilibrium -- Acid-base Equilibrium -- Buffers, Titrations and Solubility Equilibrium -- Entropy and Free Energy -- Electrochemistry -- Back Matter0 aThe topics include stoichiometry, gas laws, thermochemistry, equilibrium, electrochemistry, redox reactions, electrochemistry, entropy and free energy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aBlackstock, Lindsay K.eauthor1 aAllingham, Jessicaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1889zAccess online version03763nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002600149245005600175264004300231264005700274264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341012600453490002700579505055500606520088101161532057402042532044902616542004103065546001603106588004003122650002403162650002503186700002603211710003903237856007703276OTLid0001890MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aNiosi, Andreaeauthor00aFashion and Apparel Consumer BehaviorcAndrea Niosi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbdisplayTransformabilityblargePrintbreadingOrderbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aHow to Access and Use this Textbook -- Introduction -- Topic 1. Introduction to Consumer Behavior -- Topic 2. Consumer Decision Making at a Glance -- Topic 3. Sociology of Fashion and Diffusion of Innovations -- Topic 4. Perception -- Topic 5. Learning and Consumption -- Topic 6. Consumer Motivation and Involvement -- Topic 7. Personality, Self, Lifestyle, and Psychographics -- Topic 8. Attitudes and Attitude Change -- Topic 9. Social Influences -- Topic 10. Culture and Subcultures -- Glossary -- Accessibility Statement -- Peer Review Statement0 aThis open textbook was designed for students studying apparel and fashion studies at an undergraduate level. It draws on the fields of marketing, business, communications, media studies, psychology, sociology, and anthropology. The book invites readers to examine the internal forces that shape consumer decision making, such as perceptions, motivations, personality, and attitudes as well as the external ones, such as social and situational influences, culture, and subcultures, especially those related to our appearances and clothing. This text centers the lived experiences of today’s consumers, specifically, undergraduate students. Following the original author, Andrea Niosi, the adapting author has also made efforts to decenter whiteness and dominant culture perspectives wherever possible to ensure a broader and more accurate representation of diverse consumers.1 aThe web version of this resource has been designed to meet Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0, level AA. It includes:
Easy navigation. This text has a linked table of contents and uses headings in each chapter to make navigation easy.
Accessible images. All images in this text that convey information have alternative text and/or link to a longer text description. Images that are decorative have empty alternative text.
Accessible links. All links use descriptive link text.
Accessible tables. All tables include captions and have row and/or column headers.2 aThe “Chapter Reflections” at the end of each chapter occasionally link to YouTube videos created by other people. Many of these videos only have automatic captions and do not have audio descriptions. These are additional resources and not a part of the core content of the text. Some links to PDFs do not have “PDF” included in the link text. This is mostly confined to the attributions and reference section at the end of the chapters.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aChung, Doreeneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1890zAccess online version02389nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002400149245010900173264004300282264005700325264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002500504490002700529505077200556520039801328542003001726546001601756588004101772650002301813650002301836700002801859710003901887856007701926OTLid0001891MnU20260406020648.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aManz, Carlyeauthor00aBiology Laboratory ManualbIntroduction to Molecular, Cellular, and Physiological PrinciplescCarly Manz 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Academic Dishonesty -- Nature of Science -- Citations -- Quantitative Techniques and Organic Molecules -- Properties and Function of an Enzyme -- Using Excel for Data Analysis and Graphing -- Fermentation -- Investigating Photosynthesis -- Bacterial Transformation with Recombinant Plasmid DNA -- Background Section Worksheet for Week 7 Presentations -- DNA Transformation Results and Student Presentations -- Microscope and Sample Preparation -- Plant Cells and Tissues -- Vascular Tissues & Plant Functional Anatomy -- Dissection Techniques and Terminology -- Digestive, Renal, and Reproductive Systems -- Circulatory System -- Gas Exchange and Respiratory System -- Nervous and Sensory Systems -- Muscular and Skeletal Systems -- Image Attributions0 aThis lab manual is designed for students enrolled in the second lab course in the introductory biology sequence at Iowa State University. It is a semester-long lab course, required by most life-science-related majors at ISU, and includes activities on the scientific method, molecular and cellular biology, energetics, genetics, plant anatomy and physiology, and animal anatomy and physiology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aSkelton, Chandaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1891zAccess online version02847nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100003400150245009700184264004300281264009100324264001200415300002200427336002600449337002600475338003600501341002500537490002700562505039600589520122400985542002702209546001602236588004002252650002902292650003602321710003902357856007702396OTLid0001892MnU20260406020649.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.3 4aLB1062.61 aSancak-Marusa, Ilknureauthor00aMaking Meaning With & Through WritingbAn Approach to Research WritingcIlknur Sancak-Marusa 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- General Education Requirements -- Chapter One: Theory of Writing -- Chapter Two: Rhetorical Situation -- Chapter Three:Writing Process Matters -- Chapter Four: Genre and Genre Conversations -- Chapter Five: Synthesis and Analysis in Research Writing -- Chapter Six: Academic Research Writing -- Chapter Seven: Understanding Scholarly Articles -- Closing: Just Keep Writing...0 aAcademic writing is an act of intellectual translation which converts raw ideas into academic discourse to bridge the gap between writer and reader. However, writing is often viewed as a mechanical skill rather than an intellectual craft. This brief text reframes academic writing as a translation process that transforms complex thoughts, research findings, and abstract concepts into purposeful, persuasive writing. Using the writing process as the foundation, each chapter aims to provide a practice to navigate the recursive nature of writing. To that end, fundamental translation principles are utilized to analyze audience needs, understand scholarly articles, synthesize and craft arguments that resonate across disciplinary boundaries. Writing isn’t separate from thinking as it allows us to refine our ideas and share them with others in meaningful ways. Embracing this connection between writing and its impact, positions an individual as an active participant rather than a passive observer in conversations that shape disciplines and the world-at-large. This writing guide seeks to equip students with the essential tools needed to engage meaningfully in the communities they serve and soon will discover.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1892zAccess online version03083nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100003200135245008300167264004300250264009100293264001200384300002200396336002600418337002600444338003600470341002500506490002700531505036100558520152800919542002702447546002702474588004002501650003802541650002602579710003902605856007702644OTLid0001893MnU20260406020649.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aMoctezuma, Carolinaeauthor00aMi Voz. Mi Historia. Español Para Estudiantes de HerenciacCarolina Moctezuma 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aUnidad I: El español que me representa -- Unidad II: De aquí y de allá: navegando la lengua, la familia y la identidad -- Unidad III: Identidades entre lenguas y culturas: exploraciones desde lo personal hasta lo colectivo -- Unidad IV:Palabras con historia: entre raíces, regiones y refranes -- Apéndice: Transcripciones de videos y Audio -- Recursos0 aThis book consists of both original material and a compilation of other OER activities designed to provide tools and opportunities for heritage students to explore and learn about their roots and spoken language. Together, these materials and activities target the specific language learning needs of students who grew up in a Spanish-speaking household with either their parents, grandparents, or other family. In addition to targeting oral and written language learning objectives that reflect their dialectal backgrounds, this book emphasizes cultural aspects not featured in most English or Spanish courses. Knowledge and skills in language and culture foster a positive ethnic identity for heritage students, which studies have shown lead to academic success. The text features four units. Unit I starts by asking questions to help students develop self-awareness and comfort with their personal Spanish speaking abilities, experience in formal classroom settings, and their goals with the language. Unit II focuses on the benefits of being bilingual and appreciating one’s bilingual identity. Unit III explores the use of Spanglish, language and personal identity, and code switching. Unit IV explores the evolution of the Spanish language and the cultural and linguistic influences that have shaped this diverse and rich language. Each unit also includes grammar topics that heritage speakers commonly struggle with in their writing, as well as sections emphasizing culture as it relates to history and identities.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1893zAccess online version02580nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139100002900146245005200175264004300227264006100270264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002500453490002700478505048800505520095700993542002701950546001601977588004101993650002502034650003102059710003902090856007702129OTLid0001894MnU20260406020649.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aKrafft, Carolineeauthor00aEconomics for the Greater GoodcCaroline Krafft 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota Libraries Publishing Projectc2025. 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Production: Can we end hunger? -- Supply and Demand: Who gets food, housing, and work? -- Trade: An Increasingly Connected World -- The Economics of Crime -- The Economics of Poverty -- The Economics of Discrimination -- Who Learns What and Why: The Economics of Education -- Why is there pollution and what can we do about it? -- Why is Health Care So Expensive? Market Power and Competition -- The Economics of Social Safety Nets: Here to Catch Us When We Fall?0 aEconomics for the Greater Good: An Introduction to Economic Thinking for Public Policy teaches the central concepts of economics through applications to global challenges and domestic public policy issues. Chapters tackle issues of hunger, homelessness, rent control, minimum wages, globalization and trade, crime, discrimination, poverty and anti-poverty programs, education, pollution, health care, social safety nets, and government spending. Both microeconomic and macroeconomic concepts are introduced, including production, markets, supply and demand, price controls, models of trade and trade restrictions, cost-benefit analysis, budget constraints, public goods, externalities, taxes and subsidies, and government budgets and debt. Each chapter presents evidence on a pressing social problem, introduces an economic model to help understand that problem, and discusses evidence on what programs and policies work to alleviate global challenges.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1894zAccess online version02072nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001800127050001000145100002200155245007100177264004300248264009100291264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002500504490002700529505024900556520062900805542003001434546001601464588004001480650002901520650003301549710003901582856007701621OTLid0001895MnU20260330020208.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.31 aFolk, Moeeauthor00aIntroduction to Technical WritingbA Rhetorical ApproachcMoe Folk 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One -- What is technical writing, and why is it important? -- Chapter Two -- Summarizing: Patent Summary Assignment -- Chapter Three -- Visualizing: Warning Sign Assignment -- Chapter Four -- Persuading: Recommendation Report Assignment0 aIntroduction to Technical Writing: A Rhetorical Approach is an eTextbook designed to help students learn important basic skills in technical writing and technical communication. The textbook focuses on developing practical knowledge by showing students how to apply rhetorical concepts to the process of technical writing. Each chapter provides students an in-depth look at a required skill for technical writing and examines it through a writing assignment, student sample, and rubric.This eTextbook provides images and videos to help make the concepts come alive for both students and new instructors of technical writing.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1895zAccess online version02385nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001400135050001000149050000700159100002800166245008500194264004300279264006600322264001200388300002200400336002600422337002600448338003600474341002500510490002700535505058600562520050301148542003001651546001601681588004001697650002701737650002601764650002601790650003101816710003901847856007701886OTLid0001896MnU20260406020813.0m     o  d s      cr            250828s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA1 4aQA273-280 4aBF121 4aH11 aSomoray, Klaireeauthor02aA Contemporary Approach to Research and Statistics in PsychologycKlaire Somoray 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- About the Author -- Why do we Need Another Book About Research and Statistics? -- My Experience with Statistics -- The Philosophy Behind this Little Book -- Chapter 1: Research and Statistical Thinking in Everyday Life -- Chapter 2: Working with jamovi -- Chapter 3: Brief Review of Research Methods -- Chapter 4: The Replication Crisis -- Chapter 5: Aggregation -- Chapter 6: Modelling Variations -- Chapter 7: The General Linear Model -- Chapter 8: Putting it all Together -- Chapter 9: Beyond Research and Statistics -- Versioning History -- Review Statement0 aThis book is designed as a short and introductory resource specifically aimed to help students grasp key concepts typically found in undergraduate psychology statistics subjects. It was initially developed for online and intensive programs, which are becoming increasingly popular in psychology education. The book utilises jamovi, a free and open-source statistical software. This peer reviewed book is completely free to download, use, and adapt and it is released using the CC BY-NC 4.0 licence.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aStatisticsvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1896zAccess online version02179nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140245007600147264004300223264005400266264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341002500442490002700467505088500494520007201379542001601451546001601467588004101483650002501524650003101549700002801580700003201608700002501640710003901665856007701704OTLid0001897MnU20260406020649.0m     o  d s      cr            250912s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL700aUnderstanding the Whole ChildbPrenatal Development through Adolescence 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface and Acknowledgements -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Child Development -- Chapter 2: Conception, Heredity, & Prenatal Development -- Chapter 3: Birth and the Newborn -- Chapter 4: Physical Development in Infancy & Toddlerhood -- Chapter 5: Cognitive Development in Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 6: Social and Emotional Development in Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 7: Physical Development in Early Childhood -- Chapter 8: Cognitive Development in Early Childhood -- Chapter 9: Social Emotional Development in Early Childhood -- Chapter 10: Middle Childhood - Physical Development -- Chapter 11: Middle Childhood – Cognitive Development -- Chapter 12: Middle Childhood - Social Emotional Development -- Chapter 13: Adolescence – Physical Development -- Chapter 14: Adolescence – Cognitive Development -- Chapter 15: Adolescence – Social Emotional Development0 aAn Open Educational Resources Publication by College of the Canyons1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aParis, Jennifereauthor1 aRicardo, Antoinetteeauthor1 aRymond, Dawneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1897zAccess online version05034nam a2200505 i 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.0m     o  d s      cr            250912s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781923373037  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aHeggart, Keitheauthor00aDesigning Learning Experiences for Inclusivity and DiversitybAdvice for Learning DesignerscKeith Heggart 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUltimo, AustraliabUTS ePRESSc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbindexblongDescriptionbpageNavigationbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContentsbtranscript2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Introduction -- Making socially just pedagogy a reality -- Designing inclusive learning experience -- Negotiating the assumptions and identity tensions surrounding third space academics/professionals -- Indigenous-led learning design: Reimagining the teaching team -- Designing for equity in learning -- Designing for cultural responsiveness -- Working with students with lived experience -- Baking a cake: Engaging staff in inclusive -- Conclusion0 aDesigning Learning Experiences for Inclusivity and Diversity stands out as a crucial guide for educators and learning designers committed to creating equitable learning environments. Grounded in the Australasian higher education experience, this book delves into the principles of universal design for learning (UDL), offering practical strategies to ensure that every student, regardless of their background or abilities, has the opportunity to succeed. This unique edited text offers a blend of theoretical insights and real-world examples. You can select from a wide range of topics including socially just pedagogy, open educational practices, the role of third-space academics and professionals, Indigenous-led learning design, designing for equity and cultural responsiveness, lived experience of disability, and working with students and staff in inclusive learning design. The book also explores the potential of digital tools and platforms to transform the learning experience. Readers will learn how to leverage technology to create interactive and engaging content that enhances learning outcomes for all students. The authors provide practical advice on integrating these technologies into the curriculum, making learning more accessible and enjoyable. Designing Learning Experiences for Inclusivity and Diversity addresses the critical role of assessment in the learning process. The book offers a comprehensive overview of various assessment methods, from formative assessments that provide ongoing feedback to summative assessments that measure overall achievement. By aligning assessment strategies with learning objectives, educators can create a more coherent and effective learning experience. Readers will find a wealth of resources, including case studies, practical tips, and reflective exercises. Whether you are a seasoned learning designer or a newcomer to the field, Designing Learning Experiences for Inclusivity and Diversity provides the knowledge and inspiration needed to create impactful and meaningful learning experiences.1 aThe web version of this resource has been designed to meet Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0, level AA. In addition, it follows all guidelines in Appendix A: Checklist for Accessibility of the Accessibility Toolkit – 2nd Edition. It includes: Easy navigation. This resource has a linked table of contents and uses headings in each chapter to make navigation easy. Accessible videos. All videos in this resource have captions. Accessible images. All images in this resource that convey information have alternative text. Images that are decorative have empty alternative text. Accessible links. All links use descriptive link text. Interactive H5P. All H5P interactive content has been modified to be accessible for screen readers. Podcast. Transcripts are available for all podcasts in this resource.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aFatayer, Maiseauthor1 aDickson-Deane, Camilleeauthor1 aArumugam, Puvaneswari  Peauthor1 aThorpe, Katrinaeauthor1 aPage, Susaneauthor1 aBell, Shauneauthor1 aVulic, Johneauthor1 aNguyen, Nhungeauthor1 aDuncan, Katieeauthor1 aHall, Rhiannoneauthor1 aPretero, Bruna Controeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1898zAccess online version03946nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050001100136050001000147100003000157245006500187264004300252264004600295264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341009700463490002700560505085900587520153801446532025802984542004103242546001603283588004103299650002503340650003203365650002303397710003903420856007703459OTLid0001899MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            250917s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aWeiss, Charles J.eauthor00aScientific Computing for Chemists with PythoncCharles Weiss 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSioux Falls, SDbCharles J. Weissc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbindexblatexblatex-chemistrybpageNavigationbreadingOrderbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 0: Python & Jupyter Notebooks -- Chapter 1: Basic Python -- Chapter 2: Intermediate Python -- Chapter 3: Plotting with Matplotlib -- Chapter 4: NumPy -- Chapter 5: Pandas -- Chapter 6: Signal & Noise -- Chapter 7: Image Processing & Analysis -- Chapter 8: Mathematics -- Chapter 9: Simulations -- Chapter 10: Plotting with Seaborn -- Chapter 11: Plotting with Altair -- Chapter 12: Nuclear Magnetic Resonance with nmrglue & nmrsim -- Chapter 13: Machine Learning using Scikit-Learn -- Chapter 14: Optimization & Root Finding -- Chapter 15: Cheminformatics with RDKit -- Chapter 16: Bioinformatics with Biopython & Nglview -- Chapter 17: Command Line & Spyder -- Appendix 0: Ipython Widgets -- Appendix 1: Remote Requests -- Appendix 2: Visualizing Atomic Orbitals -- Appendix 3: Uncertainty Propagation -- Appendix 4: Regular Expressions -- Index0 aThis book serves as an introduction to coding for chemists. The tools employed in this book are the powerful and popular combination of Jupyter notebooks and the Python programming language. No background beyond first-year college chemistry and occasionally some very basic spectroscopy (for advanced chapters) is assumed for most of this book. This book starts with a brief primer on Jupyter notebooks in chapter 0 and computer programming with Python in chapters 1 and 2. If you already have a background in these tools, feel free to skip ahead. The rest of the book dives into applications of Python to solving chemical problems. Python and Jupyter were chosen for a variety of reasons, including that they are: Relatively easy to use and learn Powerful and well-suited for solving chemical problems Free, open-source software Cross-platform (e.g., runs on Windows, macOS, and Linux) Supplemented with numerous, specialized libraries for handling specific types of data or problems (e.g., machine learning) Supported by a helpful and welcoming community Learning to use a number of popular Python scientific libraries to solve chemical problems is one of the themes of this book. A Python library can be thought of as a tool pack with premade functions for performing common tasks in scientific data processing, analysis, and visualization. For example, the matplotlib library provides a variety of functions for creating a wide range of plots, while the scikit-learn library contains functions and resources for machine learning.1 aThe book includes an index with links, cross-linking, links to external resources, a chapter navigation bar on the left (html verion), and an section navigation bar on the right (html version). The html version includes one-click copying of Python code.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1899zAccess online version02258nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145245006000158264004300218264006600261264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341003600449490002700485505017100512520061100683532016501294542003001459546001601489588004001505650003401545700002801579700003101607700002801638700002701666700002701693710003901720856007701759OTLid0001900MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            250928s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780473756383  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A400aEssential Legal Research Skills in Aotearoa New Zealand 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeText2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout This Book -- About the Authors -- The New Zealand Legal System -- Research Skills -- Case Law -- Legislation -- Secondary Sources -- New Zealand Law Style Guide0 aThis guide to legal research and citation of New Zealand law provides direction to students undertaking legal research. It may also be useful for members of the public and self-represented litigants. It covers the core skills and knowledge for effective legal research, such as creating a search strategy, identifying where to locate legal information and legal citation using the New Zealand Law Style Guide. This text explores searching for sources of legal information including case law, legislation and commentary and explains the different approaches required to locate and cite these sources of law.1 aThe web version of this resource has been designed with accessibility in mind and is designed to consider the needs of people who use screen-reading technology.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aBuller, Theresaeauthor1 aDoughty, Catherineeauthor1 aLovich, Melanieeauthor1 aThomas, Traceyeauthor1 aThompson, Kateeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1900zAccess online version03079nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050000800143050001000151100002900161245007400190264004300264264007600307264001200383300002200395336002600417337002600443338003600469341002500505490002700530505023400557520160200791542004102393546001602434588004102450650002402491650002702515650002302542710003902565856007702604OTLid0001901MnU20260406020157.0m     o  d s      cr            250928s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA1 4aQH3011 aTsopméné, Pauleauthor00aIntegral Calculus with Applications to Life SciencescPaul Tsopméné 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBritish Columbia, CanadabUniversity of British Columbia Libraryc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Integration -- Future Integration Techniques -- Differential Equations -- Linear Algebra -- Infinite Series -- Probability and Linear Regression -- Answers to Exercises -- Table of the Normal Distribution -- References0 aIntegral Calculus with Applications to Life Sciences is an open educational resource (OER) that covers an unusually broad range of topics—including integration, infinite series, differential equations, linear algebra, probability, and statistics—rarely found in a single textbook. Each section begins with clear learning outcomes and a motivational paragraph, often tied to applications in the life sciences, helping students see the immediate relevance of what they learn. Examples are worked out in full detail. Every time a calculus or algebraic rule is applied, it is explicitly stated at the point of use. Rather than isolating algebra review in a preliminary chapter, this text integrates algebra throughout, allowing students to reinforce foundational skills while learning new material. This approach is especially supportive for students who may struggle with algebra. Practice problems with complete solutions follow each example, and most sections end with an application to biology, medicine, or related fields. The exercise sections include not only standard questions but also critical thinking problems such as finding errors in worked solutions, constructing counterexamples, and solving real-world problems. The text includes final answers for all exercises at the back. Hyperlinks allow students to jump seamlessly between exercises and final answers. By combining clarity, rigor, accessibility, and real-world relevance, one of the main goals of this OER is to help students not only to succeed in calculus but also to appreciate its power in understanding the living world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCalculusvTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1901zAccess online version02063nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100003300151245004100184264004300225264005400268264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505018500496520040400681542001601085546001601101588004001117650002801157650003401185700002801219700003101247700003201278700002301310700002701333700002501360700002601385700002801411700002601439710003901465856007701504OTLid0001902MnU20260406020814.0m     o  d s      cr            250928s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aSolberg, Rorie Spilleeditor00aRights of the AccusedcRorie Solberg 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Case List -- Incorporation -- Fourth Amendment -- Exceptions to the Warrants Rule -- Fifth Amendment -- Investigatory Methods -- Sixth Amendment -- Eighth Amendment0 aThis volume focuses on the constitutional doctrine and law in the areas of criminal rights. It contains excerpts of landmark cases covering the fourth, fifth, sixth, and eighth amendments, exceptions to the Warrants Rule, and investigatory methods. The excerpts include the constitutional issues in these cases that are related to rights of the accused with other questions of law and dicta omitted.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aHoekman, Andreweauthor1 aMcKenna, Katherineeauthor1 aPietrzak, Charlotteeauthor1 aPerez, Foxeauthor1 aPerry, Makennaeauthor1 aStaab, Jacobeauthor1 aHarmel, Sloaneauthor1 aNobiletti, Alexeauthor1 aSidani, Sobhieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1902zAccess online version02755nam a2200337 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109100003100127245010800158264004300266264009100309264001200400300002200412336002600434337002600460338003600486341002500522490002700547505052100574520109701095542002702192546001602219588004002235650002602275710003902301856007702340OTLid0001903MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            250928s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU1 aFennelly, Kristinaeauthor00aAlternatives to AgonismbEthical Approaches to Argument in the Composition ClassroomcKristina Fennelly 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: The Current State of Argument -- Chapter Two: The Model of a Town Hall Meeting: Meeting Divisive Rhetoric with a Community of Minds -- Chapter Three: The Listening-Oriented Writer: How the Expressive Voice, Feminist Rhetoric, & Rogerian Rhetoric Can Teach Us to Listen and Respond -- Chapter Four: Social Media Writing as Public Sites of Deliberation -- Chapter Five: Embracing Leadership: Student Writers as Moderators -- Chapter Six: What Does It Mean to Be a Worthy Arguer? -- Works Cited -- Appendix0 aThis textbook urges students to reconsider traditional notions of argument by inviting them to explore non-adversarial approaches to the arguments that structure their academic and every day lives. After briefly exploring familiar aspects of the “argument culture”—a pervasive, warlike approach to polarizing issues—the textbook turns its attention to unearth more constructive approaches based in listening rhetoric, feminist rhetoric, Rogerian rhetoric, empathy, respect, civility, and an overall ethical treatment of argument. Using the context of a town hall meeting, students are guided in practicing deliberation, investigation, and content analysis of arguments that play out in public social media forums. Chapters feature class discussion exercises, sample essay assignments, and links to relevant Ted Talks, podcasts, and other multi-media sources. The textbook concludes with reflection pieces written by Kutztown University students, alumni, faculty, and staff who all seek to answer the prevailing question of this textbook: “What does it mean to be a worthy arguer?”1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1903zAccess online version01975nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005100135264004300186264006100229264001200290300002200302336002600324337002600350338003600376341008200412490002700494505017100521520057200692542003001264546001501294588004001309650003801349650002601387700003601413700003601449710003901485856007701524OTLid0001904MnU20260330020210.0m     o  d s      cr            250929s2025    mnu     o     0   0 fre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aAvant-PremièrebAdvanced French Through Films 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbannotationsbclosedCaptionsbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Authors -- About the Book -- Unité 5 - L'arnacœur -- Unité 6 - Première année -- Unité 7 - La Fine fleur -- Unité 8 - Visages Villages -- Back Matter0 aAvant-Première is an open educational resource designed for fourth-semester college French. Organized around recent French and Francophone films, each unit integrates vocabulary, grammar, and cultural analysis, enabling students to engage critically with cinematic texts. Supplemented by curated readings, multimedia activities, and interactive grammar exercises, the textbook supports the development of linguistic proficiency, communicative competence, and intercultural awareness, while fostering deeper insight into contemporary French and Francophone societies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn French.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aParrish, Caren Barnezeteauthor1 aChevant-Aksoy, Aurélieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1904zAccess online version01977nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005500135264004300190264006100233264001200294300002200306336002600328337002600354338003600380341008600416490002700502505016600529520057100695542003001266546001501296588004001311650003801351650002601389700003601415700003601451710003901487856007701526OTLid0001905MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            250929s2025    mnu     o     0   0 fre d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP5100aAvant-PremièrebIntermediate French Through Films 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbaudioDescriptionbclosedCaptionsbpageNavigation2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Authors -- About the Book -- Unité 1 - Le Petit Prince -- Unité 2 - La Cage dorée -- Unité 3 - La Brigade -- Unité 4 - Elle l'adore -- Back Matter0 aAvant-Première is an open educational resource designed for third-semester college French. Organized around recent French and Francophone films, each unit integrates vocabulary, grammar, and cultural analysis, enabling students to engage critically with cinematic texts. Supplemented by curated readings, multimedia activities, and interactive grammar exercises, the textbook supports the development of linguistic proficiency, communicative competence, and intercultural awareness, while fostering deeper insight into contemporary French and Francophone societies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn French.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aParrish, Caren Barnezeteauthor1 aChevant-Aksoy, Aurélieeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1905zAccess online version02927nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140100003000147245008400177250000900261264004300270264005400313264001200367300002200379336002600401337002600427338003600453341002500489490002700514505102900541520061001570542001602180546001602196588004002212650002502252650003102277700002402308700002802332700002902360710003902389856007702428OTLid0001906MnU20260406020814.0m     o  d s      cr            251001s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aEsquivel, Krischaeauthor04aThe Role of Equity and Diversity in Early Childhood EducationcKrischa Esquivel  aV. 1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSanta Clarita, CAbCollege of the Canyonsc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLicensing -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Looking at Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion -- The Importance of Culture -- The Development of Identity in Children -- Teachers' Professional Identity and Becoming Equity Minded -- Developmentally, Culturally, and Linguistically Appropriate Classroom Environments, Materials, and Approaches -- Multiculturalism and Social Justice in the Classroom: Using Anti-Bias Curriculum -- Effectively Negotiating and Resolving Conflict Related to Issues of Diversity -- Race, Ethnicity, and Language -- Diverse Family Structures -- Socioeconomic Status of Families -- Families of Children with Special Needs or Special Health Care Needs -- Gender in Young Children -- Religion in Families -- The Relationship Between One’s Experience and the Development of Personal Bias -- The Influences of Stereotypes, Prejudice, and Discrimination -- The History and Influence of Systemic, Internalized Privilege and Oppression -- Sandboxes -- Index -- Glossary -- Detailed Licensing -- References0 aGuided by cultural beliefs and principles, families select experiences, convey attitudes, and impart knowledge to their children to prepare them for adulthood. Accordingly, it is important for program staff to learn to collaborate effectively with families. To develop a partnership and to tap into the family as a primary resource, early childhood educators must reach out to, learn about, and develop strong partnerships with families. This process requires openness to learning and an effort to understand the individuality of each family and the diversity of the families from which the children come.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aElam, Emilyeauthor1 aParis, Jennifereauthor1 aTafoya, Maricelaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1906zAccess online version03776nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001000154100003900164245010200203264004300305264007100348264001200419300002200431336002600453337002600479338003600505341002500541490002700566505058600593520175801179542004102937546002702978588004103005650003903046650003203085650004203117700004003159700003903199710003903238856007703277OTLid0001907MnU20260309020209.0m     o  d s      cr            251006s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651747  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aTA1451 aHoffmann-Jaramillo, Karleseauthor00aDel ágora a la nubebEl destino de las humanidades en la era de la IAcKarles Hoffmann-Jaramillo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: El ágora como cuna del pensamiento crítico: filosofía, diálogo y democracia -- Capítulo II: La transición al aula digital: el impacto de la inteligencia artificial en la enseñanza -- Capítulo III: Filosofía en la era de la información: ¿cómo enseñar el pensamiento crítico en un mundo saturado de datos? -- Capítulo IV: El futuro de las humanidades: ¿relevantes en la era de la inteligencia artificial o una reliquia del pasado? -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aExplora la evolución del pensamiento crítico desde la Antigua Grecia hasta la era digital, analizando el impacto de la inteligencia artificial (IA) en la educación y la sociedad. Se inicia con una comparación entre el Ágora ateniense, donde se gestó el debate filosófico y la democracia, y los entornos digitales actuales, donde el acceso a la información ha cambiado la forma en que aprendemos. Se resalta cómo la enseñanza de Sócrates, Platón y Aristóteles, basada en el diálogo y la argumentación, sigue siendo relevante para desarrollar el pensamiento crítico en un mundo saturado de datos. En la era digital, la IA ha transformado la educación mediante herramientas que personalizan el aprendizaje y facilitan el acceso a información. Sin embargo, también plantea riesgos como la dependencia tecnológica, los sesgos algorítmicos y la pérdida de autonomía intelectual. El libro enfatiza la necesidad de equilibrar el uso de la tecnología con metodologías pedagógicas que fomenten la reflexión y el análisis crítico. Otro desafío clave es la desinformación, impulsada por la sobreabundancia de datos y la rapidez con la que circula la información en redes sociales. Ante esto, se propone fortalecer la capacidad de los estudiantes para evaluar fuentes, cuestionar datos y construir conocimientos con base en el análisis riguroso. Finalmente, la obra concluye que el futuro de la educación no debe estar centrado solo en la tecnología, sino en la formación de ciudadanos críticos y reflexivos. La IA puede ser una aliada en este proceso, pero es fundamental preservar la esencia humanista del aprendizaje, asegurando que la educación siga siendo un espacio de cuestionamiento, creatividad y pensamiento autónomo.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aFlores-Murillo, Carlos Reneeauthor1 aBaidal-Bustamante, Eduardoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1907zAccess online version01550nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100004400135245008400179264004300263264007000306264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002500498490002700523505007800550520013500628542004100763546002700804588004000831650003800871650002600909700003800935700003600973700002701009710003901036856007701075OTLid0001908MnU20260406020814.0m     o  d s      cr            251006s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aEscobar Rodríguez, Gabriela C.eauthor00aCarrerasbEspañol intermedio para las profesionescGabriela Escobar Rodríguez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGettysburg Collegec[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducción -- La salud -- Los negocios -- La política y las politicas0 aLibro de texto del español intermedio (B1-B2) con temas relacionados con tres profesiones: la salud, los negocios y la política.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aFernández Pérez, Maríaeauthor1 aOechler, Christopher C.eauthor1 aTrigo, Beatrizeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1908zAccess online version03310nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001300155100004300168245010700211264004300318264007100361264001200432300002200444336002600466337002600492338003600518341002500554490002700579505077000606520114501376542004102521546002702562588004102589650003402630650003402664700004302698700004302741710003902784856007702823OTLid0001909MnU20260406020159.0m     o  d s      cr            251006s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651778  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3154 4aKF385.A41 aBonilla Alarcón, Luis Alfonsoeauthor03aLa justicia constitucional como garante del derecho a una educación de calidadcLuis Bonilla Alarcón 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: La justicia constitucional como garante del derecho a una educación de calidad -- Capítulo II: El Derecho a la Educación de Calidad en la Jurisprudencia Constitucional -- Capítulo III: La Función de los Tribunales Constitucionales en la Supervisión de Políticas Educativas -- Capítulo IV: Desafíos y Oportunidades en la Garantía Judicial del Derecho a la Educación de Calidad -- Capítulo V: Tendencias Internacionales y Comparativas en la Justicia Constitucional y la Educación -- Capítulo VI: La Evolución de la Justicia Constitucional en la Protección del Derecho a la Educación: Retos y Perspectivas Globales -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl presente libro examina el papel crucial que desempeña la justicia constitucional en la protección y garantía del derecho a una educación de calidad. A través de un enfoque comparado y multidisciplinario, se analizan los fundamentos doctrinales de la justicia constitucional, su evolución histórica y su impacto en el desarrollo de políticas públicas inclusivas y equitativas. La obra recoge jurisprudencia clave, estudios de caso y experiencias internacionales que demuestran cómo los tribunales constitucionales han intervenido activamente para corregir desigualdades educativas, proteger a grupos vulnerables y garantizar el cumplimiento de los principios constitucionales e internacionales. Asimismo, se abordan los desafíos estructurales, legales y sociales que limitan la efectividad de las decisiones judiciales, y se proponen estrategias para fortalecer la tutela judicial del derecho a la educación. Con una visión crítica y propositiva, el libro ofrece una guía integral para académicos, operadores jurídicos y responsables de políticas públicas comprometidos con la justicia educativa y los derechos humanos.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aRojas Montero, Marcelo Eduardoeauthor1 aLlanos García, Renata Valeriaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1909zAccess online version03396nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145100004400158245009800202264004300300264007100343264001200414300002200426336002600448337002600474338003600500341002500536490002700561505058100588520149401169542004102663546002702704588004102731650003402772700003902806700004902845710003902894856007702933OTLid0001910MnU20260330020211.0m     o  d s      cr            251006s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651792  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A41 aBonilla-Morejón, Diego Marceloeauthor00aMás allá del textobDerechos Humanos y Constitucionales en Ecuador.cDiego Bonilla-Morejón 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Entre normas y realidades: La protección efectiva de los derechos humanos en Ecuador -- Capítulo II: Acceso eficaz a la justicia: retos de un sistema con deuda histórica -- Capítulo III: Justicia con enfoque de inclusión: atención a grupos vulnerables en Ecuador -- Capítulo IV: Programas sociales para mejorar el bienestar de la población en Ecuador -- Capítulo V: Garantías de seguridad jurídica y desarrollo sostenible en el Estado constitucional -- Referencias. Bibliográficas0 aMás allá del texto es una obra que propone una reflexión crítica sobre la distancia entre el reconocimiento formal de los derechos humanos en la Constitución ecuatoriana del 2008 y su aplicación efectiva en la vida cotidiana. El objetivo principal del libro es analizar cómo, a pesar de contar con uno de los marcos jurídicos más avanzados de América Latina que incluye el "buen vivir" (Sumak Kawsay) y los derechos de la naturaleza, persisten profundas brechas estructurales que impiden su realización práctica, especialmente para los sectores más vulnerables. La metodología utilizada es interdisciplinaria, con un enfoque analítico y comparativo que combina herramientas del derecho constitucional, la sociología jurídica y el análisis de políticas públicas. A través de la revisión crítica de indicadores institucionales, el libro examina cinco ejes clave: la protección de los derechos humanos, el acceso a la justicia, la situación de grupos vulnerables, el impacto de los programas sociales y la seguridad jurídica como pilar del desarrollo. Cada capítulo busca no solo identificar los desafíos actuales, sino también proponer líneas de acción para una transformación estructural. El texto se dirige a profesionales del derecho, estudiantes, tomadores de decisiones y ciudadanos comprometidos, y se presenta como una invitación abierta al diálogo. Su mensaje central es claro: los derechos deben sentirse y ejercerse, no solo proclamarse en la ley.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aCalles Soto, David Marceloeauthor1 aNúñez Ribadeneyra, Ronny Alejandroeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1910zAccess online version03345nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001200145050001000157100005200167245013800219264004300357264007100400264001200471300002200483336002600505337002600531338003600557341002500593490002700618505045400645520147701099542004102576546002702617588004102644650002302685650002402708700004102732700004602773710003902819856007702858OTLid0001911MnU20260406020159.0m     o  d s      cr            251006s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651808  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQM1-695 4aRA4401 aHernández-Amaguaya, Johannes Alejandroeauthor00aAnatomía y patología nerviosa de los miembros superior e inferiorbGuía para la movilización neuralcJohannes Hernández-Amaguaya 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Figuras -- Capítulo I: Anatomía descriptiva de los nervios de miembro superior -- Capítulo II: Anatomía descriptiva de los nervios de miembro inferior -- Capítulo III: Patologías de los nervios de miembero superior e inferior -- Capítulo IV: Técnicas de movilización neural del miembro superior -- Capítulo V: Técnicas de movilización neural del miembro inferior -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl libro constituye una guía especializada que integra de manera sistemática la anatomía y la patología del sistema nervioso periférico de los miembros superior e inferior, con un énfasis particular en la movilización neural como estrategia terapéutica dentro del ámbito de la fisioterapia. Basado en una revisión rigurosa de la literatura científica, el texto describe con precisión las trayectorias anatómicas de los principales nervios periféricos, sus zonas de mayor vulnerabilidad, los mecanismos fisiopatológicos de lesión y las manifestaciones clínicas asociadas. Asimismo, se desarrolla de forma detallada la aplicación clínica de las técnicas de movilización neural, presentadas mediante una metodología paso a paso que facilita su incorporación en la práctica profesional. Esta obra está dirigida tanto a estudiantes de ciencias de la salud como a fisioterapeutas en ejercicio, con el objetivo de fortalecer la capacidad diagnóstica y terapéutica en el abordaje de disfunciones neurodinámicas. El contenido se complementa con ilustraciones anatómicas precisas, esquemas funcionales y ejemplos de evaluación y tratamiento, lo que contribuye a consolidar el aprendizaje y a estimular el razonamiento clínico. En conjunto, esta obra representa una herramienta de consulta académica y profesional que promueve una intervención segura, basada en la evidencia y orientada a la optimización del funcionamiento neuromusculoesquelético.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aOrtiz-Pérez, Shirley Mireyaeauthor1 aGuevara-Hernández, David Marceloeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1911zAccess online version04285nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245007500149264004300224264003800267264001200305300002200317336002600339337002600365338003600391341002500427490002700452505156700479520154202046542003003588546001603618588004003634650002403674650002603698700002903724700003003753710003903783856007703822OTLid0001912MnU20260406020158.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aNavigating the 21st Century Business WorldbCase Studies in Management 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLondon, EnglandbLSE Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPart 1: Introduction -- Business cases: what are they, why do we use them and how should you go about doing a case analysis? -- Part 2: Strategy and General Management -- Corporate strategy in the UK vehicle components industry: a comparison of Lucas Industries and GKN -- The collapse of Carillion plc -- On what matters: Unilever plc – purpose or performance? -- Part 3: Governance, Accounting and Control -- Asset allocation and governance at the Imperial Tobacco pension fund in the mid-20th century -- The fall of the Maxwell empire -- Activist investors: Alliance Trust and Elliott International -- The failure of the Royal Bank of Scotland -- Part 4: Economics, Politics and the Business Environment -- China National Petroleum Corporation in Sudan -- TRQ and Rio Tinto: the Oyu Tolgoi copper mine and the obsolescing bargain in Mongolia -- Activist investors versus Big Oil: how should ExxonMobil and British Petroleum respond? -- Environmental impact: why fast fashion is bad for the environment -- Part 5: Human Resource Management and Organisational Behaviour -- The UK’s National Health Service: teams, conflict and performance -- Redesigning a performance management system -- Transformation in the automotive sector: the management challenges of AI and the digital revolution -- auticon: promoting a neurodiverse workforce -- Part 6: Public Management -- Planning and programming for a government-hosted mass-gathering event in India: the 2019 Prayagraj Kumbh Mela -- Socio-economic background and career progression within the UK Civil Service0 aCase studies have long been an integral part of business and management education. As artificial intelligence transforms teaching and learning, they are assuming even greater importance. Cases provide the opportunity to learn from real-life scenarios, equipping students with the analytical skills required to critically examine data, apply theory, and interpret complex situations in what is an increasingly noisy and uncertain world. Navigating the 21st Century Business World: Case Studies in Management is a fully open access collection of management cases, featuring examples from the health sector, media, oil and gas industries, fast fashion, financial services, and the public sector. Written by LSE academics and tested in the classroom, the case studies in this book challenge students to evaluate classic issues of management, such as corporate governance and leadership, and to address contemporary dilemmas, from considering a company’s responsibilities in the face of man-made climate change to how to create inclusive workforces. Each case details the core dilemmas raised and includes questions for students to consider when preparing the case. Academics and industry trainers can use the collection to make their lessons more hands-on and to enhance their curriculum. The case studies provide practical examples of management decision-making to spark thought-provoking discussions for university students, experienced executives looking to improve their leadership skills, and entrepreneurs seeking a competitive edge.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aSallai, Dorottyaeeditor1 aPepper, Alexandereeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1912zAccess online version02232nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100002600162245005000188264004300238264004500281264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505034800500520039100848532033701239542003001576546001601606588004001622650003101662650002501693710003901718856007701757OTLid0001913MnU20260330020636.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160189  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM5861 aArditi, Davideauthor00aKeepin' Up with Popular CulturecDavid Arditi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction: The Real World -- The Slap: Functionalism and Popular Culture -- Encoding Modern Family: Decoding Traditional Family -- Creators and Influencers: Symbolic Interactionism -- America Votes or the Culture Industry -- Bibliography -- Glossary0 aIn Keepin’ Up with Popular Culture, Dr. David Arditi introduces students to popular culture as a way to view and understand society, politics, and culture. This book demonstrates to students the overall importance of popular culture in their lives. It explores the ways that language is used (and the way that we use language) to construct the world around us through popular culture.1 aMavs Open Press uses Pressbooks to create and distribute
OER. In May 2018, Pressbooks announced their accessibility
policy, which outlines efforts and demonstrates commitment
to making the software accessible. The web version of this
resource has been designed with accessibility in mind by incorporating the following features.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1913zAccess online version01941nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138245003600149264004300185264006900228264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002500419490002700444505025500471520052200726542003001248546001601278588004001294650002401334650002601358700002701384700002801411710003901439856007701478OTLid0001914MnU20260406020814.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.400aProject Management Fundamentals 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSeneca Polytechnicc2025. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Overview and Preface -- Introduction -- Project Selection -- Project Structures and Organizational Culture -- Project Initiation -- Project Planning -- Project Execution -- Monitoring and Controlling -- Project Closure -- Appendix0 aThe primary purpose of this text is to provide an open source textbook that can be used in introductory project management courses. The objective is to develop a concise, widely applicable open source textbook that can be used in the for-profit and non-profit sectors. This text covers all aspects of the project management lifecycle. The author has intentionally left out examples from fields of practice like business, engineering and information technology in order to ensure this text has universal applicability.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aMorris, Shellyeauthor1 aMurtescu, Karlaeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1914zAccess online version02497nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001600127050000800143100002700151245004100178264004300219264007100262264001200333300002200345336002600367337002600393338003600419341002500455490002700480505010300507520126100610542003001871546001601901588004001917650002301957650002701980710003902007856007702046OTLid0001916MnU20260406020159.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA150-272.5 4aQA11 aGrabowski, Janeauthor00aRepresentation TheorycJan Grabowski 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Algebra -- Categories -- Representations -- Modules -- Examples -- Advanced topics0 aThis volume offers a fresh and modern introduction to one of abstract algebra’s key topics. Guiding readers through the transition between structure theory and representation theory, this textbook explores how algebraic objects like groups and rings act as symmetries of other structures. Using the accessible yet powerful language of category theory, the book reimagines standard approaches to topics such as modules and algebras in a way that unlocks modern treatments of more advanced topics such as quiver representations and even representations of Hopf algebras and categories. Aimed at undergraduate students with prior exposure to linear algebra and basic group theory, the book introduces categories early and uses them throughout, providing a cohesive framework that mirrors current mathematical research. Though technically sophisticated, it also includes examples and exercises designed to develop intuition and understanding. Grabowski’s inclusion of computational tools such as SageMath offers a valuable and traditionally underdeveloped bridge between abstract theory and hands-on exploration. This is a uniquely valuable guide for students ready to stretch their understanding of the subject’s conceptual depth and evolving frontiers.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAlgebravTextbooks 0aMathematicsvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1916zAccess online version03233nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003000134245008200164264004300246264008100289264001200370300002200382336002600404337002600430338003600456341002500492490002700517505097500544520112601519542004102645546001602686588004002702650002502742710003902767856007702806OTLid0001917MnU20260406141730.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aNerantzi, Chrissieeditor00aMerakibTowards transformative learning in higher educationcChrissi Nerantzi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Leeds Open Booksc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the author and contributors -- Acknowledgements -- Prologue -- AI Meraki Part 1 podcast -- Living in the uncomfort zone or towards a creativity manifesto -- Towards free-range learning -- We all make mistakes! -- Say goodbye to grades and hello to conversations -- “I don’t like it, what is it?" -- Leadership in the Age of AI and potential implications for education -- Rethinking volume, variety and value of assessment in the era of GenAI -- Digital portfolios as flying containers with open windows -- Can machines respond to students’ feedback needs? -- Educator appears perplexed with student’s statement in assignment that GenAI was used to support their learning -- Unhealthy GenAI narratives in higher education: Shortcuts, cheating and policing -- Collective action and collaboration: What is in it for us? -- Overcoming the fear of sharing -- Epilogue relating to Part 1 -- Testimonials for Part 1 of the book -- Future Contributions -- Appendix0 aMeraki is a vibrant addition to the world of open educational resources. Created with creativity, openness, and collaboration at its core, this living book reveals the impact education can have when it’s approached with heart, curiosity, and innovation.Across 13 engaging articles, it offers a personal yet widely relatable exploration of critical and creative teaching. It encourages readers to think differently about learning—both inside and outside the classroom—and how these experiences can be meaningfully connected.What makes Meraki stand out is its blend of reflective writing, practical ideas, and interdisciplinary thinking. Contributions from a wide range of voices—students, educators, and scholars—transform the book into an ongoing conversation about learning, growth, and change.Because it’s openly licensed, anyone can contribute. That means the book continues to grow and evolve as a collaborative project shaped by its readers.Meraki isn’t just a collection of articles—it’s an invitation to reimagine what education can be when we embrace creativity, inclusion, and shared ownership.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1917zAccess online version01909nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245007600163264004300239264006900282264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505030200525520045400827542003001281546001601311588004001327650003801367650002601405710003901431856007701470OTLid0001918MnU20260406020814.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aZheng, Huiqiangeauthor00aMastering Mandarin SoundsbAn interactive H5P PressbookcHuiqiang Zheng 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- The book to help beginners learn Mandarin sounds -- Why learning pronunciation is important -- How can this book help -- Getting started with Chinese pronunciation system -- Mastering Chinese pronunciation-vowels and consonants -- Pronunciation tutorial videos -- Learning Tones0 aMastering Mandarin Sounds: An Interactive H5P Pressbook is an open educational resource (OER) designed to help learners develop accurate pronunciation in Mandarin Chinese. The pressbook incorporates multimedia features such as interactive exercises, audio recordings, and instant feedback to guide students through the foundational elements of Mandarin phonetics—including initials, finals, tones, tone sandhi, and common pronunciation challenges.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1918zAccess online version03349nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155245009400162264004300256264007000299264001200369300002200381336002600403337002600429338003600455341002500491490002700516505061600543520140601159542004102565546002702606588004102633650004202674650003102716700004202747700004602789710003902835856007702874OTLid0001919MnU20260330020212.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651815  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aH100aMás allá de la digitalizaciónbLa necesidad de la transformación digital estratégica 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: La imperativa de la transformación digital en la era actual -- Capítulo II: Principios fundamentales de la estrategia digital -- Capítulo III: Cultura digital y liderazgo transformador -- Capítulo IV: Cloud computing: Agilidad y la escalabilidad -- Capítulo V: Inteligencia artificial (IA) y automatización inteligente -- Capítulo VI: Datos y analítica avanzada -- Capítulo VII: Otras tecnologías disruptivas clave -- Capítulo VIII: Conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEn la era actual de disrupción digital, impulsada por avances en IA, Big Data y cambios en las expectativas del cliente, la Transformación Digital Estratégica (TDE) es un imperativo que va más allá de la simple digitalización. Este texto ofrece una guía estratégica integral, basada en investigación académica y análisis de la industria, para navegar esta compleja transición. Se presenta la TDE como un fenómeno holístico y multifacético que requiere la integración coherente de estrategia, cultura organizacional y liderazgo transformador. Es crucial desarrollar agilidad y capacidades dinámicas para la adaptación e innovación continuas. Los pilares clave incluyen el alineamiento estratégico, la creación de valor digital centrado en el cliente, modelos de negocio adaptables, gestión de datos como activo, culturas ágiles y liderazgo digital. Se examina el rol de tecnologías habilitadoras como Cloud (agilidad), IA (eficiencia/personalización) y Analítica Avanzada (decisiones), enfocadas en generar valor empresarial, junto a IoT y Blockchain. El texto también aborda desafíos inherentes como resistencia cultural, ciberseguridad, privacidad y ética de la IA, extrayendo perspectivas de ejemplos y mejores prácticas. Dirigido a estudiantes y profesionales, proporciona un marco integrado, accionable y basado en evidencia para liderar una TDE exitosa y sostenible.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aEspinoza-Mina, Marcos Antonioeauthor1 aColina-Vargas, Alejandra Mercedeseauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1919zAccess online version04043nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050000700158245020800165264004300373264007000416264001200486300002200498336002600520337002600546338003600572341002500608490002700633505038500660520182601045542004102871546002702912588004102939650003402980650003103014700004603045700004303091700004403134700004703178700004803225700004103273700004903314700004003363700004203403710003903445856007703484OTLid0001920MnU20260406020200.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651822  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKF385.A4 4aH103aEl Derecho Notarial y la protección de los derechos fundamentales en la familia, el patrimonio y la autonomía personalbAnálisis doctrinal y modelos notariales en el ordenamiento jurídico ecuatoriano 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Capítulo I: La familia y su protección en el derecho notarial -- Capítulo II: Protección patrimonial de la familia -- Capítulo III: La figura del notario: Un pilar en la protección de derechos personales y patrimoniales -- Capítulo IV: Teoría y modelos para la familia, el patrimonio y la autonomía personal -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEsta obra analiza el papel del derecho notarial en la protección de derechos fundamentales en tres ámbitos clave: la familia, el patrimonio y la autonomía personal, en el contexto jurídico ecuatoriano. A través de un enfoque doctrinal y práctico, se exploran las funciones del notario como garante de la legalidad, la fe pública y la seguridad jurídica en actos extrajudiciales. En materia familiar, se estudian actos notariales como el matrimonio, la unión de hecho, el divorcio, las capitulaciones matrimoniales y la emancipación voluntaria, todos instrumentos que fortalecen la protección de los vínculos familiares. Respecto al patrimonio, se aborda la constitución del patrimonio familiar y su marco legal, facilitando la transmisión y preservación de bienes. En cuanto a la autonomía personal, el notario permite proyectar la voluntad del individuo mediante poderes notariales y decisiones anticipadas, protegiendo especialmente a personas vulnerables. El texto también incluye modelos notariales y documentos frecuentes como contratos, poderes, actas y escrituras, promoviendo una práctica notarial accesible y eficiente. La obra destaca la importancia de la desjudicialización de ciertos trámites, lo cual contribuye a un sistema legal más ágil y centrado en los derechos humanos. Invitamos cordialmente a los lectores a explorar esta valiosa obra que revela el rol esencial del derecho notarial en la protección de los derechos fundamentales, esta publicación es una guía indispensable para profesionales del derecho, académicos, estudiantes y toda persona interesada en los vínculos entre el derecho y la vida cotidiana. En un mundo donde la seguridad jurídica es clave para la estabilidad familiar, patrimonial y personal, esta obra constituye una lectura necesaria y enriquecedora.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSamaniego-Quiguiri, Delia Paulinaeauthor1 aRivera Arregui, Graciela Editheauthor1 aGarcía-Fierro, Mateo Napoleóneauthor1 aToscano-Broncano, Fabian Heribertoeauthor1 aLara-Palomino, María Ana de Jesúseauthor1 aPástor-Guevara, Juan Carloseauthor1 aVallejo-Chiliquinga, Jenny Angélicaeauthor1 aLara-Saltos, Carlos Alfredoeauthor1 aThelmo-Fernando, Yánez Erazoeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1920zAccess online version04132nam a2200469 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145245011100152264004300263264007000306264001200376300002200388336002600410337002600436338003600462341002500498490002700523505034900550520207300899542004102972546002703013588004103040650003103081700004603112700004703158700004503205700004603250700004703296700004303343700004003386700003903426700003903465700004203504710003903546856007703585OTLid0001921MnU20260223020210.0m     o  d s      cr            251009s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  a9789942651839  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH100aEstrategia didáctica basada en TIC para el desarrollo de habilidades sociales en estudiantes preescolares 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bEditorial Grupo AEAc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aReseña de Autores -- Índice -- Índice de Tablas -- Índice de Figuras -- Introducción -- Capítulo I: Marco contextual de la investigación -- Capítulo II: Marco teórico -- Capítulo III: Metodología de investigación -- Capítulo IV: Resultados y discusiones -- Capítulo V: Conclusiones y recomendaciones -- Referencias Bibliográficas0 aEl desarrollo de habilidades sociales en la infancia es crucial para el bienestar psicológico y el rendimiento académico de los niños. Las habilidades sociales, como la empatía y la comunicación, se aprenden y perfeccionan durante la vida, siendo la etapa preescolar crucial para su adquisición. Sin embargo, diversos factores pueden obstaculizar este desarrollo, afectando la comunicación y la autoestima de los niños. En este contexto, el uso de Tecnologías de la Información y la Comunicación (TIC) emerge como una estrategia didáctica que podría favorecer el desarrollo de habilidades sociales en niños preescolares. El estudio propone analizar cómo contribuye una estrategia didáctica basada en TIC al desarrollo de habilidades sociales en estudiantes preescolares, Ecuador. El problema general plantea la necesidad de comprender esta contribución, y los problemas derivados buscan explorar conceptos, actividades educativas actuales, elementos didácticos de las TIC, y diseñar e implementar estrategias específicas. La hipótesis sugiere que el uso de una estrategia didáctica basada en TIC facilita el desarrollo de habilidades sociales en estos estudiantes. Los objetivos generales proponen la implementación de dicha estrategia, mientras que los objetivos específicos incluyen una revisión documental, un diagnóstico de actividades actuales, la caracterización de factores didácticos de las TIC y la sistematización de la estrategia didáctica. La metodología adopta un enfoque mixto, combinando aspectos cualitativos y cuantitativos, con un diseño no experimental y técnicas de recolección de datos como escalas, fichas sociodemográficas, registros de observación y análisis académicos. La muestra consta de 30 estudiantes. Como conclusión final, se establece que las habilidades sociales son fundamentales para el desarrollo personal y profesional, las habilidades sociales como la comunicación, empatía y autoestima mejoran cuando se promueven actividades que integran el uso de los recursos digitales como Educaplay.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aMeléndez-Coloma, Ivonne Giocondaeauthor1 aFlores-Robles, Alexandra Elizabetheauthor1 aSilva-Carrillo, Adriana Genovevaeauthor1 aCárdenas-Velasco, Klever Gonzaloeauthor1 aQuinahuano-Cepeda, Mireya Fernandaeauthor1 aJaime-Contreras, Martha Esthereauthor1 aGómez-Romero, Amelia Sulayeauthor1 aCuji-Yepez, German Rolandoeauthor1 aPlaza-Ponte, Jenny Azucenaeauthor1 aMuñoz-Plaza, Jeniffer Norelyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1921zAccess online version02881nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001300156100002700169245008800196264004300284264008500327264001200412300002200424336002600446337002600472338003600498341002500534490002700559505070200586520049501288532038501783542004102168546001602209588004002225650002802265650003402293700002802327710003902355856007702394OTLid0001922MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251022s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636351070  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aSupplee, Roxieeauthor00aIntroduction to the American Criminal Justice SystembAn Equity LenscRoxie Supplee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Crime, Criminal Justice, and Criminology -- Chapter 2: Criminal Justice Policy -- Chapter 3: Defining and Measuring Crime and Criminal Justice -- Chapter 4: Criminal Law -- Chapter 5: Criminological Theory -- Chapter 6: Policing -- Chapter 7: Courts -- Chapter 8: Corrections -- Chapter 9: Community Corrections -- Chapter 10: Juvenile Justice -- Glossary -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aThis introductory criminal justice textbook serves as a comprehensive resource for students to explore the key areas of the American criminal justice system. Students will examine the roles of the police, courts, corrections, and juvenile law. Additionally, the book introduces criminal theory, data, and legal principles. Beyond just studying these topics, students will have the opportunity to investigate potential careers and reflect on their roles and opinions within our legal system.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do. It is our hope that by being transparent in this way, we can begin the process of making sure accessibility is top of mind for all authors, adopters, students and contributors of all kinds on open textbook projects.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aGonzalez, Meganeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1922zAccess online version02804nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155050001000162100003500172245003700207264004300244264008500287264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505090500546520034701451532016901798542002701967546001601994588004002010650004302050650003102093650002502124700002502149700003002174700002602204710003902230856007702269OTLid0001923MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251022s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636350998  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHM621 4aH1 4aHM5861 aKrouskop, Aimee Samaraeauthor00aChanging SocietycAimee Krouskop 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: How Does Social Change Matter to You? -- Chapter 2: The Study of Social Change -- Chapter 3: Social Location and Social Theories -- Chapter 4: Globalization and Inequality -- Chapter 5: Roots of Global Inequality, Decolonization, and Resistance -- Chapter 6: Economy and Social Change -- Chapter 7: Health, Safety, and the State -- Chapter 8: Education: Inequality and Justice -- Chapter 9: Religion, Spiritual Belief Systems, and Social Change -- Chapter 10: Social Movements and the Environment -- Glossary -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aChanging Society offers a foundational exploration of the causes, impacts, and dynamics of social change. Informed by the tenets of universal design, equity and belonging, and a commitment to a decolonizing approach, it is written for undergraduate students majoring in social sciences, social work, ethnic studies, or social justice studies.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do. 1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCultural and Ethnic StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aCushing, Beneauthor1 aPuttman, Kimberlyeauthor1 aTemple, Averyeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1923zAccess online version02882nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000700145050001000152100003000162245006500192264004300257264008500300264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002500507490002700532505090600559520056301465532016902028542001602197546001602213588004002229650003102269650002502300700003102325710003902356856007702395OTLid0001924MnU20260406020839.0m     o  d s      cr            251022s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781636354002  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM5861 aPuentes, Jennifereauthor00aSociology in Everyday LifebAn Equity LenscJennifer Puentes 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About This Book -- Chapter 1: Introduction to Sociology -- Chapter 2: The History of Sociology and Social Theory -- Chapter 3: Sociological Research Methods: Studying Social Life -- Chapter 4: Socialization and Interaction -- Chapter 5: Groups, Networks, and Organizations -- Chapter 6: Sociology of Culture -- Chapter 7: Deviance, Crime, and Social Control -- Chapter 8: Social Stratification and Class -- Chapter 9: Gender: Identities, Interactions, and Institutions -- Chapter 10: Sexuality -- Chapter 11: Race and Ethnicity -- Glossary -- Attributions and References for Glossary Terms -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aThis openly licensed text uses a multi-level, intersectional feminist approach to frame our understanding of contemporary sociology in the United States. The text introduces a variety of concepts and theories that are helpful in understanding the social world in which we live. It asks and answers the questions “What is sociology?” “How do groups, networks, and social interactions shape our reality?” and “How do identities and social structures shape our opportunities?” Original content is licensed under CC BY 4.0, except as otherwise noted.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do. 1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aGougherty, Mattheweauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1924zAccess online version03348nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002600144245008000170264004300250264008500293264001200378300002200390336002600412337002600438338003600464341002500500490002700525505123600552520045401788532038502242542001602627546001602643588004002659650002602699650003102725700002902756700003702785710003902822856007702861OTLid0001925MnU20260406020839.0m     o  d s      cr            251022s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aJones, Tereseeauthor00aUnderstanding Human DevelopmentbPrenatal Through AdolescencecTerese Jones 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Understanding Human Development -- Chapter 2: Theory and Research in Child Development -- Chapter 3: Conception, Pregnancy, and Prenatal Development -- Chapter 4: Birth, Newborn, and Postnatal Experiences -- Chapter 5: Cognitive, Language, and Physical Development in Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 6: Social, Emotional, Adaptive, and Identity Development in Infancy and Toddlerhood -- Chapter 7: Preschool Cognitive and Language Development -- Chapter 8: Social, Emotional, Adaptive, and Identity Development in Preschoolers -- Chapter 9: Middle Childhood Physical Development -- Chapter 10: Middle Childhood Cognitive and Language Development -- Chapter 11: Social and Emotional Development in Middle Childhood -- Chapter 12: Adolescent Physical and Sexual Development -- Chapter 13: Adolescent Cognitive Development -- Chapter 14: Adolescent Social-Emotional Development -- Glossary -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- Acknowledgments -- About the Authors -- Publisher’s Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aUnderstanding Human Development is an introductory textbook for individuals entering early childhood education and related fields. The textbook provides an overview of the developmental lifespan from conception to adolescence using social justice and ecological perspectives. The textbook aims to represent equitable approaches to understanding human development and discusses the diverse factors and interactions that support or hinder development.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do. It is our hope that by being transparent in this way, we can begin the process of making sure accessibility is top of mind for all authors, adopters, students and contributors of all kinds on open textbook projects.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBelli, Christinaeauthor1 aJulyan, Esmeralda Janetheauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1925zAccess online version02392nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003100137245004700168264004300215264005700258264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341011200437490002700549505045500576520078501031542003001816546001601846588004001862650002401902710003901926856007701965OTLid0001926MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            251023s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA4401 aLanphere, Rosie K.eauthor04aThe Physiology of ExercisecRosie Lanphere 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSAALCKc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbhighContrastDisplaybpageNavigationbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the textbook -- Introduction to Exercise Physiology -- Control of the Internal Environment -- Bioenergetics and Metabolism -- The Basic Energy Systems -- Metabolic Adaptations to Exercise Training -- Measuring Human Energy Expenditure, Work and Power -- The Nervous System -- Structure and Function of Exercising Muscle -- The Circulatory Response to Exercise -- The Respiratory System -- The Endocrine Response to Exercise -- Glossary of Terms0 aThe Physiology of Exercise (3rd Edition) is an essential resource for upper-level undergraduates studying exercise science. Written by Rosie Lanphere, PhD, CSCS, this text provides a clear and comprehensive exploration of how the human body responds and adapts to physical activity. Covering metabolism, energy expenditure, and the integrated roles of the nervous, cardiovascular, endocrine, muscular, and respiratory systems, this edition reflects the latest research and practical applications in the field. Designed with students in mind, each chapter includes learning objectives, key terms, and scholarly questions to reinforce understanding. Whether preparing for a career in exercise science or professional certification, this book offers the foundation needed to succeed.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1926zAccess online version02738nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000900138100002800147245006000175264004300235264008400278264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341002500484490002700509505027100536520128700807542004102094546001602135588004102151650002402192650003202216710003902248856007702287OTLid0001928MnU20260406020200.0m     o  d s      cr            251023s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aQA761 aMcGlynn, Kaareneauthor00aLearning How to Use Microsoft Excel 365cKaaren McGlynn 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Fundamental Skills -- Chapter 2: Mathematical Computations -- Chapter 3: Logical and Lookup Functions -- Chapter 4: Presenting Data with Charts -- Chapter 5: Tables and PivotTables -- Chapter 6: Dynamic Array Functions -- Legacy Excel Functions0 aThis core Microsoft® Excel® text provides students with the skills needed to execute many personal and professional activities. It also prepares them to go on to more advanced skills using the Excel software. The text takes the approach of creating Excel worksheets that are accurate, tell a story, and can be helpful in making decisions. Personal decisions introduced include important purchases, such as homes and automobiles, savings for retirement, and personal budgets. Professional decisions include budgets for managing expenses, merchandise items to mark down or discontinue, and inventory management. Students are given clear, easy-to-follow instructions for each skill presented and are also provided with opportunities to learn additional skills related to the personal or professional objectives presented. For example, students learn the key terms with respect to home mortgages and understand the impact interest rates have on monthly mortgage payments. This text also places an emphasis on “what-if” scenarios, so students gain an appreciation for the computational power of the Excel application. In addition, students learn how Excel is used with Microsoft® Word® and Microsoft® PowerPoint® to accomplish a variety of personal and professional objectives.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1928zAccess online version03811nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139245006700146264004300213264003800256264001200294300002200306336002600328337002600354338003600380341002500416490002700441505109700468520151001565542003003075546001603105588004003121650002503161650003103186700002403217700002703241700002903268710003903297856007703336OTLid0001929MnU20260406020200.0m     o  d s      cr            251023s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH104aThe London ConsensusbEconomic Principles for the 21st Century 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aLondon, EnglandbLSE Pressc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Towards a London Economic Consensus: an introduction -- Part I: Innovation and Productivity -- Fostering green and inclusive productivity growth -- On productivism -- Part II: Trade -- International trade since the Washington Consensus: the gains and the pains -- Export-led growth -- Part III: Macroeconomic Policy -- Fiscal policy and public debt -- Monetary and financial policies -- Part IV: Labour Market -- Labour markets and the future of work -- Labour markets and gender inequality -- Part V: Cohesion, Equity and Social Policy -- Is there a ‘new consensus’ on inequality? -- Welfare state -- Addressing the learning crisis: an emergent consensus -- Towards resilient and sustainable universal healthcare coverage -- Part VI: Environment and Climate Change -- Climate and environment: what we know and what we need to know -- Tackling climate change in low- and middle-income countries -- Part VII: Political Economy and State Capacity -- From liberal economic policies to liberal political institutions? Democracy, development clusters and wellbeing -- State capacity0 aA generation ago, the so-called Washington Consensus laid out a series of dos and don’ts for policymakers around the world. Today, that vision is recognised as having fallen short in a number of ways – particularly in its neglect of the social and institutional factors that are indispensable for achieving sustained growth and for building fairer and more cohesive societies. The immense challenges humanity faces are easy to list: climate change, pandemics, social inequalities, the far-reaching effects of the tech revolution and AI, a fragmenting world economy, and a wave of populism and political polarisation that has undermined support for liberal democracy in many countries. It is much harder to identify a set of new ideas – and policies – that will solve these seemingly intractable global problems. In this new world, political leaders and policymakers need guidance and principles that can assist when choosing among policy alternatives. To this end, the editors of this volume convened over 50 of the world’s leading economists and policy experts at the London School of Economics and Political Science (LSE). The London Consensus: Economic Principles for the 21st Century is the result of these exchanges. It is not intended as a one-size-fits-all set of economic remedies, but an exercise in assembling the best available evidence and ideas to foster dialogue, and ultimately to develop a set of principles that can address the urgent political, social and economic tasks ahead.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBesley, Timeeditor1 aBucelli, Ireneeeditor1 aVelasco, Andréseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1929zAccess online version04885nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003600138245008600174264004300260264005700303264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341009000482490002700572505026900599520331000868532010804178542003004286546002704316588004004343650002404383710003904407856007704446OTLid0001930MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            251023s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF50011 aCantero, Juan Fernandezeauthor00aVentanas EmpresarialesbEspañol para Profesionales de los NegocioscJuan Cantero 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSAALCKc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbhighContrastDisplaybpageNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroducción -- Unidad 1: Economía, empresa y cultura en el mundo hispano -- Unidad 2: Creación y establecimiento de una empresa -- Unidad 3: La oficina y prevención de riesgos laborales -- Unidad 4: Una mirada a los entornos empresariales hispanos -- Glosario0 a¡Bienvenida/o a Ventanas empresariales: Español para profesionales de los negocios! Este libro de texto ha sido específicamente creado para los estudiantes de SPA 302: Español para profesionales de los negocios de la Universidad de Kentucky. La idea del libro surgió debido a la necesidad de materiales actualizados y accesibles para este campo de estudio del español de las profesiones junto con la escasa disponibilidad de recursos educativos abiertos en el área de español de las profesiones. El presente material ha sido financiado por el programa de subvenciones para Recursos Educativos Abiertos del servicio de bibliotecas de la Universidad de Kentucky. Debido a su naturaleza en línea, este libro continuará en constante evolución, no se trata, por tanto de un material estático, terminado y archivado, sino que podría evolucionar a medida que se va refinando el material tras distintas iteraciones del curso para el que fue desarrollado. Respecto a su aplicabilidad, este libro puede utilizarse como recurso principal para una clase inicial de español de los negocios o aprovecharse alguno de sus módulos o partes por separado. Las cuatro grandes partes en las que se divide el libro ofrecen a los estudiantes un acercamiento inicial al panorama empresarial en Latinoamérica y España, la creación de empresas, el trabajo en la oficina y la seguridad laboral y los entornos empresariales. Este libro consta de las siguientes unidades: Economía, empresa y cultura en el mundo hispano. Aquí se presentan algunos aspectos económicos y culturales que afectan a las empresas hispanas. Creación y establecimiento de una empresa. En esta unidad se trata, de manera general, el proceso de creación de una empresa, los tipos de empresas que se pueden dar en el mundo hispano y nociones básicas sobre la organización empresarial. La oficina y prevención de riesgos laborales. Expandiendo lo aprendido en la unidad anterior sobre organización empresarial en esta unidad se exploran distintos tipos de organización del trabajo en oficinas, la comunicación en entornos profesionales y la importancia de la salud en el trabajo. Una mirada a entornos profesionales hispanos. En esta unidad se trata, por un lado, la importancia de los aspectos éticos y sociales de las empresas en el mundo hispano y por otro lado, los entornos empresariales en los que se mueven los hispanos en Kentucky y, concretamente, en Lexington. Las unidades están estructuradas de manera que se presenta primero información y vocabulario especifico a través de lecturas. Cada lectura incluye preguntas previas para activar los conocimientos que los estudiantes ya poseen sobre el tema y preguntas de expansion al post-lectura para reforzar, practicar y expandir lo aprendido. Además, en cada unidad se incluye la sección “Una ventana a…” en el que se abordan casos empresariales más extensos que los presentados en las actividades de refuerzo. Además, al final de cada unidad se ofrece un proyecto de recapitulación en el que los estudiantes amplían los temas tratados de una manera creativa y personalizada. Es importante señalar que el nivel de lengua objetivo es el avanzado bajo según la escala de ACTFL, que se aproxima a un nivel B2.1 del Marco Europeo de Referencia para las Lenguas.1 aThe book meets web accessibility guidelines by using alt text, heading structures, and page navigation.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1930zAccess online version02501nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138245007700148264004300225264006600268264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341007000456490002700526505037000553520084500923542003001768546001601798588004101814650002401855650002401879700002601903700002601929700003201955710003901987856007702026OTLid0001931MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251023s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aRA44000aHealth Information ManagementbUnlocking the Power of Data in Healthcare 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAustraliabCouncil of Australian University Librariansc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextblongDescriptionbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Part 1: Healthcare and the Global Context of Health Information Management -- Part 2: Leadership in Health Information Management -- Part 3: Data and Information Management in Health -- Part 4: Health Informatics and Digital Health -- Part 5: Health Information Privacy and Security -- Part 6: The Future of Health Information Management -- Glossary0 aThis comprehensive textbook captures best international practice for health information management (HIM) and is focused on the practical needs of current and aspiring health information managers. The text includes evolving and innovative approaches for health information and data management from across the world. The text provides a comprehensive overview of HIM principles, including data governance, electronic health and medical records (EHRs/EMRs), privacy and security regulations, and health informatics. It explores the role of HIM professionals in improving healthcare delivery, enhancing patient outcomes, and supporting clinical decision-making. Through case studies and practical examples, readers will gain insights into the challenges and advancements in HIM, preparing them for a dynamic and evolving healthcare environment.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aLloyd, Shereeeeditor1 aScanlan, Joeleeditor1 aWissmann, Sallyanneeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1931zAccess online version03027nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002600145245004800171250001800219264004300237264004000280264001200320300002200332336002600354337002600380338003600406341003600442490002700478505079400505520085701299532006502156532012902221542004102350546001602391588004102407650003002448650002302478710003902501856007702540OTLid0001932MnU20260406020201.0m     o  d s      cr            251110s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aSampson, Gleneauthor00aExploring Weather and ClimatecGlen Sampson  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPima, ArizonabGlen Sampsonc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeText2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Introduction and Atmospheric Structure -- Chapter 2: Energy and Earth's Energy Balance -- Chapter 3: Pressure and Wind -- Chapter 4: Atmospheric Moisture I -- Chapter 5: Atmospheric Moisture II -- Chapter 6: Global Circulations -- Chapter 7: Midlatitude Cyclones and Wind Systems -- Chapter 8: Lightning and Thunderstorms -- Chapter 9: Tornadoes and Hurricanes -- Chapter 10: Optical Phenomena and Weather Forecasting -- Chapter 11: Earth's Climates -- Chapter 12: Human Influences on the Atmosphere -- Chapter 13: Paleoclimates and Climate Variability -- Chapter 14: Anthropogenic Climate Change and Earth's Future Climate -- Chapter 15: Climate Change and Extreme Weather -- Chapter 16: America's Climate Choices -- References, OER, and Public Domain Materials Used0 aThis textbook is oriented toward a first or second year college science class, or an advanced high school course. Sixteen chapters are present which fits a 16-week college semester. These chapters may be divided into three sections: 1. Atmospheric processes including structure, composition, energy balance, pressure forces, moisture, stability, and precipitation processes in Chapters 1 through 5. 2. Weather systems including global circulation, tropical and extratropical cyclones, thunderstorms, tornadoes, atmospheric optics, and weather forecasting in Chapters 6 through 10. 3. Climate topics including classification, human influences on the atmosphere, natural climate variability, paleoclimate, climate change due to anthropogenic influences, climate projections, and a changing climate’s affect on extreme weather in Chapters 11 through 16.1 aAll non-decorative images have alternate tags and captions. 2 aDue to the nature of the topics presented, a couple of chapters contain images needing color specific interpretation skills.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1932zAccess online version02111nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003000134245004900164264004300213264008100256264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341002500459490002700484505018400511520082800695542004101523546001601564588004001580650002501620710003901645856007701684OTLid0001933MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251110s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aNerantzi, Chrissieauthor00aEDUC5272M Module CompanioncChrissi Nerantzi 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Leeds Open Booksc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the author and student consultants -- About this companion -- Part 1: The module -- Part 2: Scenarios -- Part 3: Imagining educational futures -- Part 4: Learning activities0 aThis module invites people to engage critically with the intersection of digital technologies, learning theories and societal change. Through four thematic units - covering the digital learner and educator, learning frameworks in a digital age, inclusion and accessibility in digital environments, and datafication & generative AI in education - the course fosters reflection, dialogue and creative experimentation in one’s own context. Participants will explore how digital tools shape and are shaped by education, society and development; situate their practice within key debates and theories; and apply these insights to enhance inclusive, thoughtful digital pedagogy. Ultimately, this module supports learners in interrogating, innovating and adapting their digital-educational practices in a rapidly evolving world.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1933zAccess online version03617nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127245007700134264004300211264007000254264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002500446490002700471505125200498520112701750542003002877546002702907588004102934650002502975700004503000700004303045700003903088710003903127856007703166OTLid0001934MnU20260223020214.0m     o  d s      cr            251111s2025    mnu     o     0   0 spa d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL700aMovilizando horizontes para el futuro de la educación y ciencia abierta 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOctaedro Editorialc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPrólogo. Ecos Digitales de la Declaración de Dubái: trazando el legado de la Cátedra UNESCO -- Incentivar la alfabetización digital para la inclusión de mujeres en mercados laborales emergentes -- Fortalecer competencias docentes para movilizar recursos educativos abiertos en América Latina -- Visibilizar el ecosistema de políticas abiertas para democratizar el conocimiento -- Impulsar la apropiación de políticas del Movimiento Educativo Abierto para fortalecer las instituciones de educación superior en Latinoamérica -- Transformar la educación a través del acceso y la creación de recursos abiertos, hacia la equidad e innovación -- Construir un ecosistema de formación docente basado en REA para la inclusión en entornos multiculturales -- Desarrollar competencias emprendedoras mediante educación abierta y digital para una solución sostenible -- Edificar un ecosistema de recursos educativos abiertos (REA) de base tecnológica con inteligencia artificial generativa (IAGen) para democratizar el acceso equitativo al conocimiento -- Respaldar la colaboración internacional para impulsar una educación abierta, equitativa y sostenible -- Promover la cooperación internacional para la educación y la ciencia abierta0 aEste libro abre nuevas vías de acción y nos invita a ser parte de la solución. A través de un manifiesto inspirador, expertos en educación y ciencia abierta se unen para trazar un camino hacia un nuevo contrato social que sea más justo, inclusivo y accesible para todos. La obra surge del décimo aniversario de la Cátedra UNESCO Movimiento Educativo Abierto para América Latina, donde se reunieron voluntades y conocimientos para reimaginar la educación. Mediante un enfoque transdisciplinar, los autores nos guían a través de tres preguntas clave: ¿qué queremos?, ¿quiénes somos? y ¿cómo llegaremos allí? Más que un texto académico, este libro es un llamado a la acción. Con un lenguaje sencillo y directo, es una herramienta indispensable para académicos, desarrolladores, líderes empresariales y tomadores de decisiones. Constituye una guía práctica y visionaria para implementar y mejorar las prácticas de educación y ciencia abierta. Únete a esta movilización de horizontes para construir un futuro donde el conocimiento sea un bien común y una fuerza poderosa para el bienestar global.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn Spanish; Castilian.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aRamírez-Montoya, María Soledadeauthor1 aLongoria, Inés Álvarez-Icazaeauthor1 aLópez-Caudana, Edgar Omareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1934zAccess online version03046nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139100002400146245010000170264004300270264008100313264001200394300002200406336002600428337002600454338003600480341002500516490002700541505043400568520140101002542004102403546001602444588004002460650002502500650003102525710003902556856007702595OTLid0001935MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            251120s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH11 aAcar, Fazileauthor00aBetter TogetherbHow We Build Economic, Political, And Environmental SustainabilitycFazil Acar 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Leeds Open Booksc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- From Magna Carta to Modern Growth: The Journey of Democratic and Economic Progress -- Understanding the Bigger Picture: Macroeconomic Performance and the Well-Being of Society -- Labor Force, Employment, Unemployment -- Money, Capital Market, Exchange Rate, Financialization, Central Banking, Inflation, Monetary Policies -- Bridging Borders: The Interplay of International Trade and Global Relations -- Sustainability0 aThis book explores how economic, political and environmental sustainability can be strengthened when individuals, institutions and societies work together. Part I traces the story of human progress, showing how freedom, innovation and shared prosperity have evolved side by side. Parts II and III examine how national economies and labour markets shape well-being, emphasising the importance of quality work, high-value production and fair opportunities. Part IV turns to money, finance and macro-economic policy, explaining how monetary systems, central banking and exchange-rate dynamics affect stability and equality. Part V extends this to global trade and investment, illustrating how economic interdependence requires political cooperation. Finally, Part VI focuses on sustainability itself, demonstrating why markets alone cannot safeguard the environment or social cohesion. Drawing on behavioural economics, institutional design and active citizenship, the book shows how integrated approaches can meet today’s most pressing challenges. Blending historical insight, economic theory and real-world examples, Better Together argues that we are strongest when we align our economic choices, political systems and environmental responsibilities. It offers an accessible and practical guide for students, policymakers and citizens seeking to build resilient, fair and sustainable societies.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1935zAccess online version01931nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050000700134245010300141264004300244264008400287264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341002500493490002700518505013600545520055400681542003001235546001601265588004001281650002501321650003101346700002401377700002801401710003901429856007701468OTLid0001936MnU20260330020637.0m     o  d s      cr            251120s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aH100aTeaching Through Rather than AboutbAnalyzing Black Histories and Geographies with Primary Sources 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Introduction -- Section Two: Middle School Lessons -- Section Three: High School Lessons -- Concluding Thoughts0 aThis book aims to transform how Black histories are taught in the K-12 curriculum by emphasizing instruction through Black voices rather than about them. Using LaGarrett King’s Black Historical Consciousness framework, each chapter provides a structured, inquiry-based lesson plan incorporating primary sources, and some examples of engaging student activities. The book gives educators the tools to challenge biased narratives and create inclusive lessons that help students think critically, build empathy, and better understand Black histories.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aCarano, Keneeditor1 aKobrowski, Amiteeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1936zAccess online version03038nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050000700139245009100146264004300237264007100280264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505085400525520096201379542003002341546001602371588004102387650002502428650003102453700002702484700002502511710003902536856007702575OTLid0001937MnU20260406020201.0m     o  d s      cr            251120s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHB171.5 4aH100aAllocation, Distribution, and PolicybNotes, Problems, and Solutions in Microeconomics 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction: Doing Post-Walrasian Microeconomics -- Strategic Interactions -- Preferences, Beliefs, and Behavior -- Public Goods, Mechanism Design, and the Social Multiplier -- Coordination Failures: A Taxonomy -- Environmental Coordination Failures and Institutional Responses -- Bargaining: Mutual Gains and Conflicts over their Distribution -- Principals and Agents: Contracts, Norms, and Power -- Economic Classes and Incomplete Contracts -- Work and Wages -- Credit Markets and Wealth Constraints -- Risk and Inequality: Redistribution as Insurance -- Inequality: Institutions, Market Structure, and Policy -- Endogenous Preferences: The Evolution of Cooperation -- The Evolution of Conflict over the Distribution of Gains from Cooperation -- Projects: From Learning Economics to Doing Economics -- Bibliography -- Glossary -- Index0 aMicroeconomics has been transformed in recent decades by the increasing use of game theory, behavioral economics, evolutionary modeling, network economics, mechanism design and attention to limited competition and asymmetric information. Bowles and Chen provide problem sets and exam questions (with carefully explained solutions) based on the new microeconomics, engaging learners with applications to income distribution, limited competition in goods and labor markets, climate change, and other public policy topics. Background notes explain the underlying concepts, their origin in the thinking of the great economists of the past, applications to macroeconomics, and relevant empirical evidence. This work provides a problem-based and policy oriented approach to teaching microeconomics, development, labor, environment, public economics and topics in business, management and public policy to upper level undergraduates, masters and doctoral students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEconomicsvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aBowles, Samueleauthor1 aChen, Weikaieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1937zAccess online version03192nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245003900144264004300183264009600226264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505043100496520146900927542004102396546001602437588004002453650003102493650002502524700002902549700003502578700002702613700002602640710003902666856007702705OTLid0001938MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251120s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58604aThe Craft of Sociological Research 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia's Academic Library Consortium (VIVA)c2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- Using Sociology in Everyday Life -- The Role of Theory in Research -- Research Questions -- Research Design -- Sampling -- Measuring the Social World -- Ethics -- Ethnography -- In-Depth Interviews -- Qualitative Data Analysis -- Experiments -- Surveys -- Quantitative Data Analysis -- Materials-Based Methods -- Appendix A: Presenting, Writing, and Publishing -- Glossary -- Credits -- Contributors0 aThe Craft of Sociological Research: Principles and Methods of Collecting, Analyzing, and Presenting Social Science Data was developed with the goal of developing an open educational resource (OER) that makes well-written and engaging methods-training materials available for free to students. The manuscript was written by a team of authors at Virginia Commonwealth University who are all researchers as well as teachers of undergraduate methods courses. Some portions of the text were adapted from existing OER social scientific methods textbooks, and others are original. Our aim is to provide broad but sound coverage of widely used methodologies, giving students the background they need to both evaluate and conduct research. While targeted at undergraduates, the textbook includes optional sections that provide more advanced methodological training. It also features Q&As with prominent sociologists and sidebars on topical issues that social scientific research has helped illuminate. We hope the text is accessible to students with a variety of backgrounds and interests, and to that end we have tried to make the writing lively and clear throughout and provide supplemental online and multimedia resources when possible. This project was funded with the generous support of the Virtual Library of Virginia (VIVA), a program of the State Council of Higher Education for Virginia (SCHEV), and VCU Libraries’ Open and Affordable Course Content Initiative.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aChen, Victor Taneauthor1 aLeón-Pérez, Gabrielaeauthor1 aHonnold, Julieeauthor1 aAytar, Volkaneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1938zAccess online version04124nam a2200493 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050000700140245010200147264004300249264006800292264001200360300002200372336002600394337002600420338003600446341005300482490002700535505083900562520157001401532013402971542003003105546001603135588004003151650002503191650003103216700002703247700002903274700003103303700002603334700002203360700002703382700002903409700002503438700002503463700002603488710003903514856007703553OTLid0001939MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL700aWhy play worksbConceptual PlayWorlds inspiring learning, imagination and creativity in education 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMonash Universityc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Overview of a Conceptual PlayWorld -- Chapter 2: Conceptual PlayWorlds in support of equity and access -- Chapter 3: Play Role, drama and learning concepts in a Conceptual PlayWorld -- Chapter 4: Conceptual PlayWorlds in dialogue across international contexts -- Chapter 5: Capturing learning: Assessment in a Conceptual PlayWorld -- Chapter 6: Mathematics in a Conceptual PlayWorld -- Chapter 7: Conceptual PlayWorld: fostering language and literacy learning -- Chapter 8: Using Conceptual PlayWorlds to build Wellbeing -- Chapter 9: Conceptual PlayWorld for families: Why play works for teaching STEM in the home setting -- Chapter 10 : Conceptual PlayWorlds to study the structuring of time into days, weeks and months -- Appendix A: Fleer's Conceptual PlayWorld thinking book -- Appendix B: Planning proforma0 aThe focus of this textbook is on play and learning through a Conceptual PlayWorld. This evidence informed model helps teachers to plan innovative practices relevant for a range of discipline concepts. The teachers and children after reading/hearing a children’s book or nursery rhyme or fairytale jump into the story as characters from the book/story, go on adventures, meet challenges that they solve and return to the real world enriched, and excited to go back in for another adventure (potentially bringing with them things they have learned to enrich their play). The 5 characteristics of planning for a Conceptual PlayWorld are: 1) Selecting a story, 2) Designing an imaginary play space; 3) Planning an exciting entry and entry into that space; 4) Planning a problem that the characters of the story (children in role) will meet and need to solve using concepts; 5) Planning the role of the adults in the imaginary play. This evidence-informed model forms the foundation of each chapter in the book. Students will learn: ● what is a Conceptual PlayWorld ● the research that underpins a Conceptual PlayWorld ● how to plan and implement a Conceptual PlayWorld ● how to contextualise a Conceptual PlayWorld for specific ages, contexts and discipline content ● how to assess and make learning visible in a Conceptual PlayWorld ● to be leaders and innovators by designing creative and imaginative programs using a Conceptual PlayWorld model of pedagogical practice ● the utility of Conceptual PlayWorlds for creativity, imagination, and wellbeing.1 aThis resource was created in accordance with WCAG guidelines and aims to meet the criteria listed in our Accessibility Checklist.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks1 aFleer, Marilyneauthor1 aAllen, Kelly-Anneauthor1 aClerc-Georgy, Anneeauthor1 aDisney, Leigheauthor1 aLi, Liangeauthor1 aMcKinley, Laraeauthor1 aQuinones, Gloriaeauthor1 aRai, Prabhateauthor1 aScull, Janeteauthor1 aSuryani, Anneeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1939zAccess online version02742nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001000156100003300166245007400199264004300273264007300316264001200389300002200401336002600423337002600449338003600475341002500511490002700536505102200563520050901585542004102094546001602135588004102151650002502192650002302217710003902240856007702279OTLid0001940MnU20260406020202.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956812091  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aBoyd, W. Christophereauthor00aExploring Inorganic and Organometallic ChemistrycW. Christopher Boyd 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMSL Academic Endeavorsc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Atomic Structure and Periodic Trends -- Chapter 1: Atomic Structure and Periodic Trends -- Chapter 3: Molecular Orbital Theory -- Chapter 4: Applications of Symmetry Principles to Vibrational Spectroscopy -- Chapter 5: Acid-Base and Oxidation-Reduction Chemistry -- Chapter 6: A Survey of Main-Group Chemistry -- Chapter 7: Introduction to Coordination Chemistry -- Chapter 8: Ligand Field Theory -- Chapter 9: Further Topics in the Electronic Structure of Transition Metal Complexes -- Chapter 10: Fundamentals of Chemical Kinetics -- Chapter 11: Ligand Substitution Reactions -- Chapter 12: Fundamentals of Organometallic Chemistry -- Chapter 13: Fundamental Organometallic Reactions -- Chapter 14: Catalysis of Organic Reactions by Transition Metal Complexes -- Chapter 15: Electron-Transfer Reactions -- Chapter 16: Bonding Between Transition Metals -- Chapter 17: The Isolobal Analogy, Boranes, and Metal Clusters -- Chapter 18: Bioinorganic Chemistry and Medicinal Inorganic Chemistry0 aThis textbook, Exploring Inorganic and Organometallic Chemistry, covers the fundamentals of inorganic and organometallic chemistry for undergraduate and graduate students. Both theories of structure and bonding and reaction chemistry are covered, with applications to the catalysis of organic reactions, biochemistry, and drug design. A modular approach allows for basic materials of each chapter to be covered in an undergraduate course, with more advanced material suitable for M.S. and Ph.D. students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1940zAccess online version02585nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002500135245004100160264004300201264006800244264001200312300002200324336002600346337002600372338003600398341006400434490002700498505059200525520069401117532013401811542003001945546001601975588004001991650003802031650002602069710003902095856007702134OTLid0001941MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aHamada, Iorieauthor00aJapanese Introductory 1cIori Hamada 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMonash Universityc2025. 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbtableOfContentsbtaggedPDF2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Author -- Chapter 1: Head Start with Japanese -- Chapter 2: Welcome to Japanese Learning Communities (1) -- Chapter 3: Welcome to Japanese Learning Communities (2) -- Chapter 4: Bringing Japan Home (1) -- Chapter 5: Bringing Japan Home (2) -- Chapter 6: Expanding Your Japanese Toolkit (1) -- Chapter 7: Expanding Your Japanese Toolkit (2) -- Chapter 8: Getting Ready to Take on Japan (1) -- Chapter 9: Getting Ready to Take on Japan (2) -- Chapter 10: Getting Around Japan (1) -- Chapter 11: Getting Around Japan (2) -- Chapter 12: Looking Back, Moving Forward0 aJapanese Introductory 1 is a comprehensive and engaging textbook for beginners eager to learn Japanese. Tailored to fit the needs of self-learners and students in academic settings alike, this book aligns with the semester timelines of universities in Australia and New Zealand. The book offers interactive exercises, cultural insights and a diverse perspective, including Indigenous voices from both Australia and Japan. It begins with familiar contexts, gradually exploring broader aspects of Japanese culture and language. Structured to resonate with learners from various backgrounds, it is a practical and engaging resource for those starting their journey into the Japanese language.1 aThis resource was created in accordance with WCAG guidelines and aims to meet the criteria listed on our Accessibility Checklist.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1941zAccess online version02233nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127050001000135100002500145245003900170264004300209264006600252264001200318300002200330336002600352337002600378338003600404341002500440490002700465505064700492520045401139542004101593546001601634588004001650650003001690650002301720710003901743856007701782OTLid0001942MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQE1 4aQH3011 aEarle, Steveeauthor00aEnvironmental GeologycSteve Earle 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aKamloops, British ColumbiabThompson Rivers Universityc2025. 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Chapter 1: Earth System Science and Environmental Geology -- Chapter 2: Review of Physical Geology -- Chapter 3: Climate Changes in Earth’s Past -- Chapter 4: Glaciation -- Chapter 5: Mass Wasting -- Chapter 6: Earthquakes -- Chapter 7: Volcanism -- Chapter 8: Geological Resources -- Chapter 9: Energy Resources -- Chapter 10: Weathering, Soil, and Clay Minerals -- Chapter 11: Water Resour ces -- Chapter 12: Karst and Caves -- Chapter 13: Flooding -- Chapter 14: Waste Disposal -- Chapter 15: Geological Implications of Climate Change -- Appendix 1: Answers to Chapter Review Questions -- Appendix 2: Answers to Exercises0 aEnvironmental Geology is a comprehensive, up-to-date textbook for college-level courses on the environmental aspects of Earth Science. It covers Earth systems, climate change, glaciation, natural hazards like earthquakes and floods, and essential resources such as water, energy, and metals. Richly illustrated with embedded exercises—some interactive—it engages students as they explore key geological processes and their environmental impacts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarth SciencesvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1942zAccess online version03373nam a2200457 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050000700138245003000145264004300175264005400218264001200272300002200284336002600306337002600332338003600358341002500394490002700419505086500446520041401311532070001725542003002425546001602455588004002471650004402511650003102555700002702586700002902613700003202642700002902674700003802703700003002741700002802771710003902799856007702838OTLid0001943MnU20260406020650.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHQ1101 4aH100aResisting Gender Violence 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc2025. 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface and Acknowledgement -- Resisting Gender Violence -- Gender Violence Against Female, Nonbinary, and LGBTQIA+ Bodies -- Gender Violence Related to Climate Change -- Postcolonial Approaches to Gender Violence Against LGBTQIA+ Refugees -- Political Violence and Institutional State Violence Against Women -- Rural Gender Violence -- Combating Human Trafficking Through Legal Frameworks, Enforcement, and Prevention Strategies -- Technology-Driven Gender Violence -- Health Inequities During COVID-19 -- Exploring Gender-Based Violence and Reproductive Health Access in Crisis -- Gender Violence and Sports -- Campus Gender Violence Prevention Through Friendship -- Social Dynamics of Interpersonal Violence and Resistance Strategies -- Gender Violence and Religion -- Transnational Feminist Activism Against Gender Violence -- About the Authors and Editors0 aGender violence occurs within every country and cultural context, affecting women, girls, and LGBTQIA+ people of all racial, ethnic, religious, socioeconomic, ability, and age groups. Gender violence is one of the most pervasive human rights violations in the world. With contributing authors from across Europe, Africa, Asia, and the Americas, Resisting Gender Violence represents a truly global perspective.1 aOSU Open Educational Resources Unit is committed to creating and sustaining a diverse environment that is both equitable and inclusive by developing accessible materials. The accessibility of the online version of the publication was evaluated using third-party quality control tools (WAVE web accessibility evaluation tool and axe DevTools browser extension). OSU Open Educational Resources Unit works to comply with Subpart (H) to the Title II ADA regulation, 28 CFR part 35.200, aligning with WCAG 2.1 Level AA success criteria. Any known content that does not currently conform is documented in a back-matter page, along with an estimated timeline for remediation or an alternative solution.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGender and Sexuality StudiesvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aShaw, Susan M.eeditor1 aSantos, Xosé M.eeditor1 aMayilsamy, Jayamalaeeditor1 aVeni, Kamalavenieeditor1 aAmeneiro, Laura Pallaréseeditor1 aRosaline, Zenettaeeditor1 aLockhart, Janeteeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1943zAccess online version02587nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003500149245005400184264004300238264009100281264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505072400546520068401270542004101954546001601995588004002011650002302051650002302074710003902097856007702136OTLid0001944MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aRamos-Sepulveda, Lauraeauthor00aMycology Laboratory ManualcLaura Ramos-Sepulveda 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Laboratory Manual -- Mycology Preface -- Chapter One: Laboratory Safety and Equipment -- Chapter Two: Fungal Growth -- Chapter Three: Identification of Macro Fruiting Bodies (Mushrooms) -- Chapter Four: Identification of Filamentous Fungi -- Chapter Five: Fungal Sexual vs. Asexual Reproduction -- Chapter Six: Growing Basidiomycota Mushrooms -- Chapter Seven: PEG Mediated Transformation of Fungi -- Chapter Eight: Plant Fungal Pathogens -- Appendix I Preparing Media -- Appendix II: Obtaining Single Fungal Culture and Measuring Fungal Growth -- Appendix III: Using the Compound Microscope -- Appendix IV: Using the Micropipette -- Appendix V: Transcript of “tutorial 03: entering records” -- References0 aMycology Laboratory Manual (2025) by Laura Ramos-Sepulveda is an eTextbook designed for undergraduate students to introduce them to mycology. The laboratory manual provides students with foundational knowledge in mycology and hands-on experience with key concepts such as fungal hyphal and yeast growth, asexual and sexual reproduction, fungal identification using morphological and molecular tools, appreciation of mushrooms as food, and molecular transformation of fungi. The final chapter focuses on plant pathology, where students are required to apply scientific thinking to design experiments, troubleshoot, and integrate the skills they developed in the previous chapters.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1944zAccess online version02463nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139245009100149264004300240264009100283264001200374300002200386336002600408337002600434338003600460341002500496490002700521505028700548520091700835542004101752546001601793588004001809650002301849650002301872700003601895700003001931710003901961856007702000OTLid0001945MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH30100aDevelopmental Biology LaboratorybExperiments in Classical and Experimental Embryology 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1: Sea Urchin Development -- Chapter 2: Chicken Development -- Chapter 3: Zebrafish Development -- Appendix A: Instructor’s Notes for Sea Urchin Protocols -- Appendix B: Instructor’s Notes for Chicken Protocols -- Appendix C: Instructor’s Notes for Zebrafish Protocols0 aThis work is designed primarily for use as a laboratory manual in college-level Embryology and Developmental Biology courses and as a companion to developmental biology textbooks. It explores several model animal systems and a variety of the scientific approaches that have been used to study them. It includes both classical embryological observations and manipulations, and more modern techniques, including organ culture and the disruption of developmental processes through pharmacology. The experiments described in the lab manual are designed for 2- to 3-hour laboratory periods. The introductory protocols in each chapter can be adapted to Introductory Biology or Cell Biology courses, while the later protocols are more suited to an advanced course in Developmental Biology. The manual also includes extensive illustrations, preparation guides and appendices to aid the instructor in setting up each lab.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aCebra-Thomas, Judith A.eauthor1 aSmith, Matthew E.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1945zAccess online version02977nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003100149245005800180264004300238264009100281264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505065500546520116101201542002302362546001602385588004002401650002302441650002302464710003902487856007702526OTLid0001946MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aFarrell, Martiliaseauthor00aGeneral Biology Laboratory BookletcMartilias Farrell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNote to the Reader -- Microscopic Life, Laboratory Notebooks and the Scientific Method -- Ecosystem Observation and Sample Collection -- Soil Core Analysis -- Microscopic Analysis -- Biochemical Analysis of Environmental Samples -- Enzyme Lab I -- Enzyme Lab II – Modifiers of enzyme rate -- Enzyme Lab III – Concentration Effect curve -- Planaria Locomotor Lab -- Planaria Regeneration Screen -- Concentration-Dependent Effects of Screen Hits on Planaria Regeneration -- Appendix A: Note for the Instructor -- Appendix B: Lab Notebook Format Entry Guide -- Appendix C: DIY Imager -- Appendix D: Using ImageJ To Quantify Images -- Image Citations0 aThis laboratory manual provides a diverse collection of experiments designed to immerse students in techniques mirroring those used in professional biomedical research. Students will explore fundamental enzyme kinetics, investigating how varying amylase concentrations and the introduction of chemical modifiers influence starch digestion rates. These labs emphasize quantitative analysis through colorimetric assays and densitometry using ImageJ software. The booklet also features studies with planaria, where students will assess how common substances affect locomotor activity and screen compounds for their impact on the remarkable regenerative abilities of these organisms, including generating concentration-effect curves. Additional activities guide students in using microscopy to observe microscopic life. Throughout these hands-on investigations, students will develop and refine crucial laboratory skills such as preparing serial dilutions, mastering precise pipetting techniques, and maintaining detailed, reproducible laboratory notebooks, thereby building a robust foundation in experimental design, data analysis, and the scientific method.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1946zAccess online version02525nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003100149245007100180264004300251264009100294264001200385300002200397336002600419337002600445338003600471341002500507490002700532505038800559520096200947542002301909546001601932588004001948650002301988650002402011710003902035856007702074OTLid0001947MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQM1-695 4aRA4401 aFarrell, Martiliaseauthor00aHuman Anatomy and Physiology Laboratory BookletcMartilias Farrell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aNote to the Reader -- Axial Code Lab -- Dance Move Lab -- Bone Measurement Lab -- Binaural Beats Perception Lab -- Lab Activity: Exploring Synaptic Summation -- Laboratory Exercise: Visualizing Surfactant Action and Lung Function -- Respiratory Rate Dynamics -- Appendix A: Notes for the Instructor -- Appendix B: How to Install Neuronify -- Appendix C: Binaural Beats Web Pages Code0 aThis laboratory manual presents a diverse collection of hands-on and interactive activities designed to enhance understanding of human anatomy and physiology. Students will engage with skeletal anatomy by creating and decoding messages using bone terminology with anatomical models and by performing bone measurements to analyze relationships with physical attributes. The manual delves into neuroscience by investigating the perception of binaural beats through auditory experiments and by utilizing the Neuronify simulation tool to construct and analyze neural circuits demonstrating synaptic summation. Physiological concepts are explored through experiments on respiratory rate dynamics in response to exercise and the principles of lung surfactant action. Additionally, students will apply anatomical terminology to describe dance movements. These activities collectively foster skills in data collection, critical analysis, and collaborative learning.1 fNo Rights Reserved  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aAnatomyvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1947zAccess online version02757nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145245003700155264004300192264006400235264001200299300002200311336002600333337002600359338003600385341002500421490002700446505058400473520099301057542001602050546001602066588004002082650004202122700003402164700002702198700003002225710003902255856007702294OTLid0001948MnU20260406020203.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9789465181646  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA14500aElements of Airplane Performance 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Basic concepts -- The atmosphere -- Equations of Motion -- Aerodynamic Basis -- Air Data Instruments -- Propulsion -- Propeller Performance -- The airplane in Symmetric Flight -- Performance in stead symmetric flight -- Effect of Altitude -- Flight and airplane condition effects -- Turning Performance -- Gliding Flight -- Symmetric Climb and Descent -- Cruise Performance -- Airfield Performance -- Newtonian Mechanics -- Switching Between Axis Systems -- One-dimensional steady flow equations -- International Standard Atmosphere -- Conversion Factors -- References0 aElements of Airplane Performance provides a comprehensive introduction to the principles governing the flight performance of fixed-wing aircraft. After covering fundamental concepts related to atmospheric properties, equations of motion, aerodynamics, propeller and jet propulsion, electric powertrains, and flight instrumentation, the book guides its readers through the analysis of performance in steady and accelerated flight. Detailed chapters are dedicated to the most important flight phases: climb and descent (including gliding), cruise, take-off and landing, turning and maneuvering flight. Both point and path performance are covered, and the effect of aircraft design parameters, as well as operational parameters like weight, altitude, and local atmospheric conditions, are discussed. Appendices offer essential background in mechanics, coordinate systems and transformations, fluid dynamics, and a standard atmosphere model. Exercises are provided at the end of each chapter.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aRuijgrok, Gerrit J.J.eauthor1 aVoskuijl, Markeauthor1 aVarriale, Carmineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1948zAccess online version02938nam a2200481 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005400135264004300189264006900232264001200301300002200313336002600335337002600361338003600387341002500423490002700448505058100475520082601056542004101882546001601923588004001939650002001979650002601999700002702025700002802052700003102080700003402111700002902145700002802174700002702202700002402229700002802253700002702281700003202308710003902340856007702379OTLid0001949MnU20260406020203.0m     o  d s      cr            251205s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aN8500aWestoniabSelected Works of Elizabeth Jane Weston 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPixelia Publishingc2025. 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introduction -- The Purpose of This Edition -- The Life of Elizabeth Jane Weston -- Weston’s Works & This Edition -- Weston’s World: Prague c. 1600 CE -- Weston’s Neo-Latinity -- Weston’s Meters -- A Note on the Vocabulary & Commentary -- Bibliography & Further Reading -- Selections from the Works of Elizabeth Jane Weston, with Running Vocabulary & Commentary -- Appendix 1: List of Works Included in this Edition -- Appendix 2: Important People in the Westonia -- Appendix 3: Glossary of Frequently Repeated Words in the Westonia &Words in DCC Latin Core0 aElizabeth Jane Weston (1581-1612) was born in England, but spent most of her life in the intellectual hub of early-modern Europe: the imperial court of Rudolph II in Prague. She is remarkable for her determination to work professionally as a poet and to publish her writings, a path not generally open to women of the time. Her numerous Latin poems and letters were widely read and admired, both within the court and across the informal “republic of letters” that stretched across Europe. Although she became one of the most successful women poets in the history of Latin, her works have long been inaccessible to students in the absence of editions meant for the classroom. This volume presents, for the first time, a collection of Weston’s works in the original Latin alongside aids to her vocabulary and grammar.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtsvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aMulligan, Breteauthor1 aBall, Mary Annaeauthor1 aBieneman, Felix K.eauthor1 aCohen, Hannah Rebeccaeauthor1 aCollin, Erica S.eauthor1 aCottrell, Harryeauthor1 aKillina, Rowaneauthor1 aLevy, Celiaeauthor1 aNwakanma, Priyaeauthor1 aPettit, Claireeauthor1 avan Vloten, Claudiaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1949zAccess online version03195nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134245003000144264004300174264008500217264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002500424490002700449505086100476520097201337532016902309542001602478546001602494588004002510650003102550650002502581700003402606700004102640710003902681856007702720OTLid0001950MnU20260406020840.0m     o  d s      cr            251208s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH1 4aHM58600aRace, Crime and Injustice 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Oregon Educational Resourcesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aMessage to Students -- How to Navigate This Book Online -- How to Read This Book Offline -- About this Book -- Chapter 1: Thinking Sociologically: Race and Ethnicity in U.S. Society -- Chapter 2: Prejudice, Racism, and Discrimination -- Chapter 3: Racialized Socialization and Racialized Social Control -- Chapter 4: Theories of Race and Crime -- Chapter 5: Policing in America -- Chapter 6: Racial Justice in Rural Communities -- Chapter 7: Punishment and Racialized Responsed to Crime -- Chapter 8: The Racialization of Juveniles for "Justice" -- Chapter 9: Racism, Drug Policy, and the Criminal Justice System -- Glossary -- References for Glossary Terms -- Image Descriptions -- Transcripts -- About the Authors -- Publisher's Message to Instructors -- Instructor Resources -- Manuscript Development Process -- License Statement -- Additional Resources0 aWelcome to the Race, Crime, and Justice Open Educational Resource! This book was developed with a diversity, equity, and inclusion framework. This course is about race, so our primary focus will be on the experiences of people of color (POC) in the criminal justice system. An important aspect of this book is the various spotlight examples we weave throughout the chapters to demonstrate the application of materials. We hope to increase awareness of the experiences of people of color, both historically and in modern day, and the criminal justice system. Throughout history, people of color have had routinely negative experiences with the criminal justice system at every level. A person’s race and ethnicity can determine how one interacts with and experiences the criminal justice system. People of color have faced various barriers and challenges when attempting to make meaningful changes to a system that has operated in a repressive manner since it began.1 aThis book was created in good faith to ensure that it will meet accessibility standards wherever possible, and to highlight areas where we know there is work to do.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aSanchez, PhD, Shanelleauthor1 aPeterson, PhD, Jessica Renéeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1950zAccess online version02949nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127050000900136100002700145245003300172264004300205264007100248264001200319300002200331336002600353337002600379338003600405341005300441490002700494505049700521520089801018532037501916542003002291546001602321588004002337650003202377650003802409710003902447856007702486OTLid0001952MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            251211s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aQA761 aTuffley, Davideauthor00aBeyond CodingcDavid Tuffley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGriffith Universityc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- CHAPTER 1. COMMUNICATION SKILLS FOR IT PROFESSIONALS -- CHAPTER 2. TEAMWORK & COLLABORATION -- CHAPTER 3: PROBLEM-SOLVING & CRITICAL THINKING -- CHAPTER 4. TIME MANAGEMENT & ORGANIZATION -- CHAPTER 5: PROJECT MANAGEMENT FUNDAMENTALS -- CHAPTER 6: PROFESSIONAL ETHICS & RESPONSIBILITY -- CHAPTER 7: CUSTOMER SERVICE & CLIENT RELATIONS -- CHAPTER 8: CULTURAL AWARENESS AND INCLUSIVITY -- CHAPTER 9: LEADERSHIP AND INFLUENCE -- CHAPTER 10: PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT -- Version History0 aIn today’s competitive IT industry, technical skills alone are no longer enough to succeed. This book teaches essential soft skills that transform technical professionals into complete IT leaders. You will master clear communication for diverse audiences, build strong teams through collaboration and conflict resolution, and solve complex problems with structured thinking. The guide covers time management techniques, project management fundamentals, and stakeholder delivery methods. Additional modules address professional ethics, customer relations, cultural awareness, leadership influence, and personal growth. These practical skills complement your technical knowledge, creating competitive advantages in today’s IT industry. The book provides frameworks, tools, and strategies that help you advance your career, lead projects successfully, and adapt to changing workplace demands.1 aThe web version of this resource has been designed with accessibility in mind by incorporating the following features: It has been optimised for people who use screen-reader technology; All content can be navigated using a keyboard; Links, headings, and tables are formatted to work with screen readers; images have alt tags; Information is not conveyed by colour alone.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aInformation technologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1952zAccess online version02907nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001300134100002900147245006500176264004300241264006900284264001200353300002200365336002600387337002600413338003600439341008100475490002700556505075300583520058101336532026501917542003002182546001602212588004102228650002502269650003602294700002402330700002702354710003902381856007702420OTLid0001953MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            251216s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLB1062.61 aGunton, Lyndelleeeditor00aAdvanced Information Research Skills (AIRS)cLyndelle Gunton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBrisbane, AustraliabQueensland University of Technologyc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbARIAbalternativeTextbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPublication information -- Acknowledgement of traditional owners -- Acknowledgements -- The history of AIRS -- Introduction -- How to use this Pressbooks platform -- List of acronyms -- Module 1: Getting started with AIRS -- Module 2: Preparing to search for information -- Module 3: Finding information for research -- Module 4: Maintaining current awareness -- Module 5: Managing information for research -- Module 6: Evaluating information for research -- Module 7: Using information responsibly and ethically -- Module 8: Managing research data -- Module 9: Planning to publish -- Module 10: Finding and using indicators of research impact -- Module 11: Before you leave AIRS -- Module 12: AIRS for supervisors -- Glossary -- About contributors0 aAIRS is an open educational resource (OER) created to empower learners and researchers with the confidence and capability to navigate today’s complex information landscape. It is designed for anyone who wants to strengthen their skills in finding, evaluating, managing, and using information effectively for research. Whether you are a research student, supervisor, librarian, or research support professional, AIRS offers practical strategies and tools to help you, and those you support, develop advanced information skills that make a real difference in research success.1 aQUT Open Press is committed to digital accessibility and inclusive user experiences. We continually improve our content in line with the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (WCAG) 2.2 and QUT policies. We have used Pressbooks integrated Accessibility checker.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aKleine, Saleeditor1 aMcLennan, Ranieeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1953zAccess online version01907nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100003800144245005300182264004300235264006300278264001200341300002200353336002600375337002600401338003600427341002500463490002700488505045400515520029900969542004101268546001601309588004101325650002501366650002601391710003901417856007701456OTLid0001954MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            260112s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aBF1211 aArduini-Van Hoose, Nicoleeauthor00aEducational PsychologycNicole Arduini-Van Hoose 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bSUNY Createc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle Page -- Copyright -- Recommended Citation -- Other Books by Author -- How to Read this Textbook -- The Study of Educational Psychology -- Using Science to Inform Educational Practices -- The Developing Learner -- The Learning Process -- Facilitating Complex Thinking -- Motivation -- Student Diversity -- Instruction -- Classroom Management -- Assessment and Evaluation -- About the Author -- Report an Issue -- OER Adoption Form--FACULTY ONLY0 aSpecific topics include cognitive, social, and emotional development, individual and cultural differences in learning and interaction styles, learning theories and instruction, effective motivation in education, issues of testing and assessment, and creating environments conducive to learning.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aPsychologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1954zAccess online version03149nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002400148245003500172250002000207264004300227264008100270264001200351300002200363336002600385337002600411338003600437341002500473490002700498505102300525520095301548542004102501546001602542588004102558650002502599650002302624710003902647856007702686OTLid0001955MnU20260406020204.0m     o  d s      cr            260115s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aGe, Yingbineauthor00aPhysical ChemistrycYingbin Ge  a2.3 (2026-2027) 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCentral Washington Universityc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter 1. Fundamentals of Thermodynamics -- Chapter 2. Internal Energy, Work, Heat, and Enthalpy -- Chapter 3. Internal Energy and Enthalpy -- Chapter 4. Entropy -- Chapter 5. Helmholtz Energy and Gibbs Energy -- Chapter 6. Chemical Equilibrium -- Chapter 7. Physical Equilibrium -- Chapter 8. Nonelectrolyte Solutions -- Chapter 9. Electrolyte Solutions -- Chapter 10. Electrochemistry -- Chapter 11. Kinetic Theory of Gases -- Chapter 12. Elementary Chemical Kinetics -- Chapter 13. Complex Reaction Mechanisms -- Chapter 14. Quantum Mechanical Postulates -- Chapter 15. Quantum Translation -- Chapter 16. Quantum Rotation -- Chapter 17. Quantum Vibration -- Chapter 18. Rotational and Vibrational Transitions -- Chapter 19. The Hydrogen Atom and Hydrogenic Ions -- Chapter 20. Many-Electron Atoms -- Chapter 21. Molecular Orbital Theory -- Chapter 22. Electronic and NMR Spectra of Molecules -- Chapter 23. Computational Chemistry -- Chapter 24. Probability and Statistics -- Chapter 25. Statistical Thermodynamics0 aThis Physical Chemistry textbook by Yingbin Ge is an open-access resource meticulously crafted for undergraduate students in chemistry, biochemistry, and related STEM fields. The text strikes a precise balance between conceptual clarity and mathematical rigor, ensuring students build a deep understanding of thermodynamics, kinetics, quantum chemistry, and statistical mechanics. What sets this text apart is its student-centered pedagogy. Rather than focusing on formalism alone, Ge guides learners through step-by-step derivations that prioritize physical meaning. By explicitly addressing common misconceptions and integrating worked examples, the book transforms complex theory into manageable insights. Its modular structure offers instructors the flexibility to adapt the material to various course sequences, while the accompanying suite of lecture and tutorial videos makes it a comprehensive, accessible solution for the modern classroom.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1955zAccess online version01819nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002700150245005800177264004300235264008600278264001200364300002200376336002600398337002600424338003600450341003600486490002700522505028400549520031500833542001601148546001601164588004101180650003301221650003601254700002701290710003901317856007701356OTLid0001956MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aLB1062.61 aWheeles, Libbyeauthor00aResearch and the Information LandscapecLibby Wheeles 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Missouri - St. Louisc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeText2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1: Welcome! -- 2: Foundations of Academic Research -- 3: Exploring the Information Landscape -- 4: Source Evaluation -- 5: History of Libraries & Information -- 6: The Information Economy -- Generative AI -- Citation Management -- Fall 2025 Student Bibliographies0 aThis open textbook accompanies the University of Missouri-St. Louis class INTDSC 1010: Research and the Information Landscape. Intended for undergraduates new to academic research, the course covers practical search and evaluation skills as well as a basic introduction to the world of scholarly communication.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks 0aAcademic achievementvTextbooks1 aMarvin, Helenaeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1956zAccess online version02156nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002600147245005900173264004300232264005100275264001200326300002200338336002600360337002600386338003600412341002500448490002700473505067200500520034801172542004101520546001601561588004001577650002501617650002401642710003901666856007701705OTLid0001957MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA4401 aStephen, A.J.eauthor04aThe Art and Science of Personal WellnesscA.J. Stephen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aON, CanadabFanshawe College Pressboksc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Accessibility Statement -- Book Navigation -- Preface -- Chapter 1: What on Earth is Wellness? -- Chapter 2: Meaning and Purpose -- Chapter 3: Freedom, Responsibility, and Goal Setting -- Chapter 4: Sacrifice, Behaviour Change, and Habits -- Chapter 5: Stress -- Chapter 6: Emotions -- Chapter 7: Personality and Behaviour -- Chapter 8: Communication and Managing Difficult Conversations -- Chapter 9: Spirit, Space, and the Self -- Chapter 10: Longevity, Healthspan and Physical Activity -- Chapter 11: Nutrition, Sleep, and Self-Care -- Chapter 12: Navigating Finances -- Reference List -- Version History -- Instructor Slide Decks -- Test Banks0 aThis educational resource is the official course textbook for Personal Wellness – INDS 1081 at Fanshawe College. Designed for today’s learners, it explores the eight core dimensions of wellness—physical, emotional, social, financial, spiritual, occupational, intellectual, and environmental—through a practical, evidence-informed lens.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1957zAccess online version02045nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139050001000149100003100159245005400190264004300244264004000287264001200327300002200339336002600361337002600387338003600413341002500449490002700474505045800501520041900959542001601378546001601394588004001410650002301450650003501473650002301508710003901531856007701570OTLid0001958MnU20260406020819.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aSF811 4aQH3011 aHinic-Frlog, Sanjaeauthor00aIntroductory Animal PhysiologycSanja Hinic-Frlog 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aToronto, ONbeCampusOntarioc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Thank You -- Acknowledgements: eCampusOntario -- Copyright – Introductory Animal Physiology -- Icons Legend -- Chapter 1. Introduction to Physiology -- Chapter 2. Gaseous Exchange -- Chapter 3 – Transport of Gases -- Chapter 4 – Ion and Water Balance -- Chapter 5 – Digestion and Energy -- Chapter 6 – Locomotion -- Chapter 7 – Electrical Signals -- Chapter 8 – Sensory Systems -- Chapter 9 – Maintaining internal balance0 aThis book is an introduction to the diversity of structure and function in animals at the tissue and organ system level. The focus of this book is on principles and mechanisms that sustain life and maintain homeostasis, including water balance, gas exchange, acquisition and transport of oxygen and nutrients, temperature regulation, electrical and chemical signal transmission, sensory processing, and locomotion.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1958zAccess online version02314nam a2200409 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050000900145050001000154100002900164245007600193264004300269264004600312264001200358300002200370336002600392337002600418338003600444341003600480490002700516505048100543520054201024542004101566546001601607588004001623650003901663650003201702650002501734700002901759710003901788856007701827OTLid0001959MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781956862201  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA76 4aHM5861 aWrench, Jason S.eauthor04aThe Future is NowbEmpowering Society Through AI LiteracycJason Wrench 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeText2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aI. Part One: AI Foundations -- 1. Understanding Artificial Intelligence -- Critical Thinking in the Age of AI -- Technical Insights into AI -- Foundations of AI Literacy -- II. Part Two: Navigating the AI Landscape -- Safeguarding Humanity in the Age of AI -- AI Ethics -- Social Implications of AI -- III. Part Three: AI Integration -- AI in Personal Life -- AI in Public Life -- AI in the Future -- Appendix A – List of Acronyms -- Appendix B: Mastering Prompt Engineering0 a"The Future is Now: Empowering Society Through AI Literacy" aims to educate and empower a broad audience on the nuances of artificial intelligence, ensuring that readers are not only informed about what AI is and can do but are also prepared to engage with the technology ethically and responsibly. The book adopts a multidisciplinary approach, weaving together technical explanations, ethical considerations, and socio-economic insights to provide a comprehensive overview of AI's role in society today and its potential for the future.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aArtificial IntelligencevTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks 0aSociologyvTextbooks1 aElmoudden, Sanaeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1959zAccess online version02608nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050001000158100002600168245004200194264004300236264006500279264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505038900518520104500907542001601952546002301968588004001991650003302031650004202064710003902106856007702145OTLid0001960MnU20260406020204.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2025    mnu     o     0   0 dut d  a9789465181516  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aZitman, Tjerkeauthor00aGrasduinen in waterbouwcTjerk Zitman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Inleiding -- 2. Stationaire stroming -- 3. Toepassingen van stationaire stroming -- 4. Golven -- 5. Planetaire effecten op waterbeweging -- 6. Sedimenttransport en morfologie -- 7. Djiken, golfbrekers, strandhoofden en bodembescherming -- 8. Stabiliteit van constucties meteen waterkerende functie -- 9. Veiligheid tegen overstromen -- 10. Water en energie -- Appendices -- Toegift0 aDit boek is bedoeld als een eerste kennismaking met het vakgebied waterbouwkunde, zonder de pretentie volledig te zijn. Het is gemotiveerd vanuit de ervaring van de auteur dat het heerlijk is om in het vakgebied te grasduinen. Er is gegrasduind in enkele fundamentele aspecten van het vakgebied met verwijzingen naar de huidige praktijk en hier en daar de historie. De nadruk ligt op fysische processen en de mathematische beschrijving daarvan. Daarnaast is er aandacht voor het schetsmatig ontwerpen van enkele waterbouwkundige constructies. This book is intended as an introduction to the field of hydraulic engineering, without claiming to be exhaustive. It is motivated by the author's experience that it is wonderful to delve into this field. It delves into some fundamental aspects of the field with references to current practice and, here and there, history. The emphasis is on physical processes and their mathematical description. In addition, attention is paid to the schematic design of several hydraulic engineering structures.1 fAttribution  aIn Dutch; Flemish.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1960zAccess online version01761nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001100155100002600166245003800192264004300230264006500273264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505032200512520023800834542001601072546002301088588004001111650004201151650002301193700003101216710003901247856007701286OTLid0001961MnU20260406020205.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2025    mnu     o     0   0 dut d  a9789465181950  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aQC21.31 aBraat, Josepheauthor00aGeometrische OpticacJoseph Braat 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. Inleiding -- 2. Grondslagen van de geometrische optica -- 3. Karakteristieke functies van een stelsel -- 4. Straaldoorrenkening -- 5. Seidel aberraties -- 6. Aberraties van een optisch stelsel -- 7. Kwaliteitscriteria optische systemen -- 8. Paraxiale Optica -- Opgaven Geometrische Optica -- Literatuur -- Nawoord0 aThe book provides the scientific basis of geometrical optics, ray tracing, and aberration theory. It applies this knowledge to optical systems and their imaging performance and establishes the link between ray optics and wave optics.1 fAttribution  aIn Dutch; Flemish.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aPhysicsvTextbooks1 aAdam, Aurèle J.L.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1961zAccess online version02371nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100002300147245007300170250001800243264004300261264005500304264001200359300002200371336002600393337002600419338003600445341002500481490002700506505029200533520054000825532033601365542004101701546001601742588004001758650003501798650002401833710003901857856007701896OTLid0001962MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            260122s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aSF811 4aRA4401 aRuby, Carleauthor00aIntroduction to the Principles of Veterinary PharmacologycCarl Ruby  aFirst Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCorvallis, OregonbOregon State Universityc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- 1. Drug–Receptor Interactions -- 2. Pharmacodynamics -- 3. Absorption and Routes of Administration -- 4. Distribution -- 5. Metabolism -- 6. Excretion -- 7. Therapeutic Dosing -- 8. Drug Toxicity and Drug–Drug Interactions -- Key Terms -- Accessibility and Versioning0 aAdvances in drug development over the past 50 years for human diseases have facilitated an increase in prescribed drugs in veterinary medicine. This textbook reorients the general principles of pharmacology from humans to animals to better engage veterinary students and practitioners. It explores the general principles of pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics before applying them to clinical pharmacology, dose calculations, and toxicity. Terminology is presented simply, and drug examples are omitted to maintain clarity and focus.1 aOSU Open Educational Resources Unit works to comply with Subpart (H) to the Title II ADA regulation, 28 CFR part 35.200, aligning with WCAG 2.1 Level AA success criteria. Any known content that does not currently conform is documented in the table below, along with an estimated timeline for remediation or an alternative solution.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1962zAccess online version03227nam a2200421 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050001800155100003300173245011700206264004300323264004600366264001200412300002200424336002600446337002600472338003600498341012300534490002700657505091800684520042101602532043602023542004102459546001602500588004002516650004202556650003302598700002502631700003302656710003902689856007702728OTLid0001963MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            260123s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781648160202  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA145 4aHF5717-5734.71 aChatterjee, Karishmaeauthor00aCommunicating Strategically in the WorkplacebA Resource for Engineering and Science MajorscKarishma Chatterjee 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aArlington, TexasbMavs Open Pressc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbARIAbalternativeTextbclosedCaptionsbhighContrastDisplaybpageNavigationbtableOfContentsbtaggedPDF2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Publisher -- Accessibility Statement -- About This Project -- Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1 Introduction to Technical and Professional Communication -- Chapter 2 Interpersonal and Mediated Aspects of Technical and Professional Communication -- Chapter 3 Working Effectively in Teams -- Chapter 4 Influence of Culture on Workplace Communication -- Chapter 5 Using Idea mapping and Free Writing in Technical and Professional Communication -- Chapter 6 Using Language Strategically -- Chapter 7 Writing Routine Messages -- Chapter 8 Designing and Delivering Bad News -- Chapter 9 Strategies for Organizing Presentations -- Chapter 10 Types of Presentations -- Chapter 11 Creating Reports and Proposals -- Chapter 12 Employment Documents and Interviewing -- Chapter 13 Citing Sources Appropriately -- Image Credits -- Derivative Notes -- AI Disclosure -- Accessibility Rubric -- Errata and Versioning History0 aWe created this book to provide a targeted understanding of the process of communication to STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, Mathematics) students. We have included specific and concise information in this book catering to technical and professional fields. Students will be able to develop their skills in writing, presenting, and interviewing, and improve their interpersonal relationships in the workplace.1 ahe web version of this resource has been designed with accessibility in mind by incorporating the following features: It has been optimized for people who use screen-reader technology, ll content can be navigated using a keyboard, links, headings, tables are formatted to work with screen readers and images have alt tags, Information is not conveyed by color alone, Font may be resized from the tab on the top right of the screen.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks1 aRicks, Damlaeauthor1 aWaryas Hughey, Dianeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1963zAccess online version02530nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002900138245011300167250001900280264004300299264005300342264001200395300002200407336002600429337002600455338003600481341002500517490002700542505060200569520078301171542001601954546001601970588004101986650002502027710003902052856007702091OTLid0001964MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            260202s2020    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.31 aLatimer, Devin Reauthor00aChemistry and the EnvironmentbA Chemistry Perspective for discussion of Environmental IssuescDevin Latimer  aSecond Edition 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aManitoba, CanadabUniversity of Winnipegc[2020] 4c©2020.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Introductory Focus -- Part I: Essential Ideas -- Part II: Atoms, Molecules, And Ions -- Part III: Composition Of Substances And Solutions -- Part IV: Stoichiometry Of Chemical Reactions -- Part V: Thermochemistry -- Part VI: Electronic Structure And Periodic Properties Of Elements -- Part VII: Chemical Bonding And Molecular Geometry -- Part VIII: Liquids And Solids -- Part IX: Solutions And Colloids -- Part X: Fundamental Equilibrium Concepts -- Part XI: Acid–Base Equilibria -- Part XII: Electrochemistry -- Part XIII: Organic Chemistry -- Part XIV: Nuclear Chemistry -- Appendix0 aChemistry and the Environment is designed to accompany a one-semester course in chemistry-based discussions of important environmental issues such as air pollution, the ozone layer, climate change and water quality. Chemical principles are introduced, followed by environmental ‘focus’ sections to base discussions on the scientific principles and societal intricacies of the individual topics. Instructors can also use the focus sections as a resource for presentation slides. Chemistry 2e is designed to meet the scope and sequence requirements of the two-semester general chemistry course. The textbook provides an important opportunity for students to learn the core concepts of chemistry and understand how those concepts apply to their lives and the world around them.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1964zAccess online version02087nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002700149245005500176264004300231264007500274264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002500471490002700496505041800523520051300941542004101454546001601495588004001511650002301551650002301574710003901597856007701636OTLid0001965MnU20260330020218.0m     o  d s      cr            260202s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aRobson, Louiseeauthor00aEvaluating Renal Function in HumanscLouise Robson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Sheffieldc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a• About the book• About the author• I. Renal Physiology & Clearance• 1. Basic Renal Physiology – Key Points To Revisit• 2. Clearance & GFR• 3. Calculating Rates Of Filtration, Excretion & Reabsorption• 4. Calculating Fractional Excretion & Reabsorption• 5. An Example Of Using The Calculations• 6. Have A Go At Some Calculations• 7. Explaining What The Data Mean• 8. Feedback• 9. Summary0 aThis is an intermediate level book aimed at undergraduate and graduate students following human biology programmes who have a basic understanding of renal physiology. It covers the clearance technique, and how it can be used to evaluate renal function in humans. It goes through the different calculations, before giving you an opportunity to have a go at some calculations using real data. It finishes by evaluating the values from a clearance experiment, where the effect of the drug ACTZ was investigated.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1965zAccess online version02397nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000900127100002700136245005000163264004300213264006500256264001200321300002200333336002600355337002600381338003600407341006500443490002700508505054000535520032601075532031001401542004101711546001601752588004101768650002801809650003201837700002601869710003901895856007701934OTLid0001966MnU20260406020205.0m     o  d s      cr            260202s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQA761 aNear, Joseph Peauthor00aProgramming Differential PrivacycJoseph Near 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aBurlington, VermontbJoseph P. Near and Chiké Abuahc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualblatexbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a• Cover -- • Front Matter -- • Introduction -- • De-Identification -- • K-Anonymity -- • Differential Privacy -- • Properties Of Differential Privacy -- • Sensitivity -- • Approximate Differential Privacy -- • Local Sensitivity -- • Variants Of Differential Privacy -- • The Exponential Mechanism -- • The Sparse Vector Technique -- • Design & Deployment -- • Machine Learning -- • Local Differential Privacy -- • Synthetic Data -- • Efficiency & Limitations -- • Further Reading -- • License --0 aThis book offers a hands-on introduction to differential privacy, combining formal foundations with executable code and practical design patterns. The material has evolved through lecture notes, workshops, and collaborations with academics and practitioners, gradually expanding to cover both classical and modern topics.1 aThe PDF contains selectable text (not just scanned images), which means screen readers and text-to-speech tools can read the content. This is a fundamental accessibility baseline for PDFs. Chapters, sections, and a table of contents are present, which can help users orient themselves within the document.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCryptographyvTextbooks 0aComputer SciencevTextbooks1 aAbuah, Chikéeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1966zAccess online version02112nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002500137245006100162264004300223264005800266264001200324300002200336336002600358337002600384338003600410341002500446490002700471505027200498520059300770542003001363546001601393588004001409650002301449700002601472700003101498700003301529700003601562710003901598856007701637OTLid0001967MnU20260406020651.0m     o  d s      cr            260203s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH3011 aSuza, Waltereeditor00aPlant Molecular Genetics and BioengineeringcWalter Suza 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a1. The Molecular Nature of a Gene -- 2. Gene Expression and Regulation -- 3. Mutations and Trait Variation -- 4. Genetic Pathways -- 5. DNA Markers -- 6. Recombinant DNA Technology -- 7. Plant Transformation -- 8. Gene Function and Bioengineering -- About the Authors0 aThis edited book presents an overview of the fundamental principles and applied methodologies used in the genetic improvement of crop plants. It covers the structure and function of genes controlling traits of agronomic importance, the regulation of gene expression and genetic pathways, and the role of mutations as a primary source of genetic variation underlying trait improvement. Additional topics include an introduction to molecular markers, recombinant DNA technology, plant transformation, and gene editing technologies. Learning activities are included to facilitate self-study.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSciencevTextbooks1 aKasule, Faizoeauthor1 aBecraft, Philip W.eauthor1 aLübberstedt, Thomaseauthor1 aBhattacharyya, Madan K.eauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1967zAccess online version04574nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100003000147245013100177264004300308264005700351264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002500530490002700555505264000582520062703222542004103849546001603890588004003906650003503946650002403981700002504005700003004030710003904060856007704099OTLid0001968MnU20260406020815.0m     o  d s      cr            260203s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aSF811 4aRA4401 aSteneroden, Katieeauthor00aOrganic and Alternative Livestock HealthbA Guide for Veterinarians, Animal Health Workers and Animal OwnerscKatie Steneroden 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc2026. 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aHow to Use this Web Book -- Introduction -- 1.0 Introduction to Organic and Alternative Animal Health -- 1.1 Background -- 1.2 Organic and Alternative Farmers and Ranchers -- 1.3 Benefits and Opportunities of Organic/Alternative Agricultural Practices and Products -- 1.4 Historic Roles and Perspectives -- Resources and References -- 2.0 Rules and Regulations for Organic and Alternative Livestock -- 2.1 Organic Agriculture -- 2.2 Organic Stakeholders -- 2.3 Steps in the Certification Process -- 2.4 Navigating NOP Regulations -- 2.5 Enforcement of Organic Rules and Regulations -- 2.6 State Organic Programs and International Agreements -- 2.7 Alternative Livestock Certification Programs -- Resources and References -- 3.0 Prevention: Proactive, Practical Measures that Prioritize Animal Health -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Foundations of Animal Health -- 3.3 Environmental Enrichment for Livestock -- 3.4 Vaccination -- 3.5 Minimize Exposure to Parasites -- 3.6 Fly Prevention -- 3.7 Minimize Exposure to Disease -- 3.8 Disease Prevention as Practiced by Organic and Alternative Farmers and Ranchers -- 3.9 Organic and Alternative Farms and Reportable and Foreign Animal Diseases -- 3.10 Emergency Preparedness for Organic and Alternative Farmers and Ranchers -- 3.11 Three Steps for Disease Prevention -- 3.12 Cleaning and Disinfection -- Resources and References -- 4.0 Treatments and Modalities Used in Alternative Animal Health -- 4.1 Considerations When Treating Livestock on Organic and Alternative Farms and Ranches -- 4.2 General Considerations When Using Alternatives to Antibiotics -- 4.3 Treatment Modalities -- 4.4 Scenario: Pneumonia on a Small Midwest Organic Dairy Farm -- 4.5 Getting Started -- Resources and References -- 5.0 Communication Considerations for Working with Organic and Alternative Livestock Clients -- 5.1 Good Communication is Linked to Positive Outcomes -- 5.2 Communication Styles – Paternalistic -- 5.3 Communication Style—Relationship Centered -- 5.4 Risk Communication -- 5.5 Types of Communication -- 5.6 Conflict Resolution -- Resources and References -- 6.0 Veterinary Practice Management to Include Organic and Alternative Clients -- 6.1 Introduction -- 6.2 Perspectives on the Veterinarian's Role—From Veterinarians and Producers -- 6.3 Using a Holistic Veterinary Approach -- 6.4 Avenues for Veterinary Influence on Organic and Alternative Farms -- 6.5 Economic Considerations -- 6.6 Finding and Marketing to Clients -- 6.7 Leadership and Managing Relationships -- 6.8 Leadership Skills for Working with Staff and Clients -- Resources and References -- Glossary -- Acknowledgements0 aThis open-access book will introduce veterinarians, veterinary technicians and their students, extension professionals, and animal owners to organic and alternative livestock concerns practices. Specific topics include background of organic agriculture, disease prevention, basic treatments, communication, veterinary practice management, and regulations. The basics of alternatively raised livestock are not traditionally taught in veterinary schools. This book provides a starting point for those interested in non-conventional livestock care to learn more about this growing, evolving area of livestock health practice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aVeterinary MedicinevTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks1 aBjork, Jennaeauthor1 aQuaresma, Delaineeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1968zAccess online version02135nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002300135245006200158264004300220264007500263264001200338300002200350336002600372337002600398338003600424341002500460490002700485505025700512520068800769542004101457546001601498588004101514650003801555650002601593700002601619710003901645856007701684OTLid0001973MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260204s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKim, Kyuineauthor00aKorean in One BitebLanguage and Food TogethercKyuin Kim 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Sheffieldc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a들어가며 -- 저자 소개 -- 이 책의 구성 -- 목차 -- Chapter 1. Korean Food 101 -- Chapter 2. Popular Korean Dishes -- Chapter 3. Korean Street Food -- Chapter 4. Special Occasion Korean Food -- 부록1 정답 Answers -- 부록2 색인 Index0 aKorean in One Bite: Language and Food Together invites learners to explore the Korean language through one of the most engaging aspects of culture—food. Using Korean cuisine as its central theme, the book introduces practical vocabulary, essential expressions, and key sentence patterns in meaningful cultural contexts. From everyday meals and popular dishes to street food and foods for special occasions, each unit combines concise grammar explanations, contextualized dialogues, and culturally rich examples. Designed for both beginners and continuing learners, this book offers an enjoyable and practical way to develop linguistic skills while deepening cultural understanding.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aLee, Hyunjungeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1973zAccess online version02738nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100002200138245002600160250000800186264004300194264006500237264001200302300002200314336002600336337002600362338003600388341002500424490002700449505065800476520100001134542004102134546001602175588004102191650002802232710003902260856007702299OTLid0001975MnU20260406020206.0m     o  d s      cr            260208s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB37901 aBry, Jeffeauthor00aCriminologycJeff Bry  a1st 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aCh. 1: What Is Crime? -- Ch. 2: Criminological Research -- Ch. 3: Crime And Punishment – Law And Classical And Neoclassical Schools -- Ch. 4: Biological Foundations Of Crime -- Ch. 5: Psychological Theories Of Crime -- Ch. 6: Social Structure Theories -- Ch. 7: Social Process Theories -- Ch. 8: Conflict And Feminist Theory -- Ch. 9: Control And Developmental Theories -- Ch. 10: The Nature And Extent Of Crime -- Ch. 11: Crimes Against Persons -- Ch. 12: Crimes Against Property And Vice Crimes -- Ch. 13: Cybercrime, White-Collar Crime, And Organized Crime -- Ch. 14: Terrorism And Massive Impact Crimes -- Ch. 15: Treatment And Prevention Of Crime0 aThis textbook is designed as a free, open-source textbook to be used, shared, and changed as the user sees fit. Many outside OER sources and authors have been cited in this textbook, these resources are also open-source resources. Based on the different sources used, some chapters may be formatted somewhat differently from others. The “voice” of each chapter may be somewhat different also because of different authors being used. Personally, I think this adds to the textbook and provides a more open perspective on the material. To add insight and substance to this text I have included “In a Student’s Own Words” which will provide student perspectives to the content. My hope and intent are to add detail and examples to other students, using my students from prior semesters as a resource. No attributions have been given to the students, course or semester to avoid identifying individual students. The two prompts below will let the reader know the content is student created.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1975zAccess online version01897nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127100003100138245006400169264004300233264006800276264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505064100518520011201159542004101271546001601312588004101328650002401369650002601393710003901419856007701458OTLid0001976MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260208s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aPE14081 aWalonen, Michael Keauthor03aAn Introduction to the Analysis of FictioncMichael Walonen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aJersey City, New JerseybSaint Peter's University Pressc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront Matter And Preface To The Instructor -- Main Body -- Chapter 1: What Is Fiction As A Genre Of Writing And Where Did It Come From? What Is Analysis? -- Chapter 2: Some General Considerations Regarding Textual Analysis -- Chapter 3: Analyzing Plot Structure -- Chapter 4: Analyzing Point Of View -- Chapter 5: Analyzing Characterization -- Chapter 6: Analyzing Setting -- Chapter 7: What Is Theme And How Do We Analyze Its Development? -- Chapter 8: Analyzing Symbolism -- Chapter 9: Analyzing Allusion And Intertextuality -- Chapter 10: Writing Analyses Of Works Of Fiction -- Chapter 11: Sample Student Analytic Essays -- Appendix0 aAn introductory primer introducing undergraduate students to the methodology of analyzing works of fiction.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aRhetoricvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1976zAccess online version02616nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003100137245007000168264004300238264008100281264001200362300002200374336002600396337002600422338003600448341011400484490002700598505084400625520031001469532019501779542004101974546001602015588004102031650002902072700002502101710003902126856007702165OTLid0001977MnU20260406020206.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aPetricini, Tiffanyeeditor00aBeyond the PodiumbAI, Speech, and Civic VoicecTiffany Petricini 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bPennsylvania State Universityc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextblongDescriptionbopenCaptionsbpageNavigationbreadingOrderbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPeer Review Statement -- Accessibility Statement -- Chapter 1: Why Public Speaking Matters Today -- Chapter 2: Ethics Matters — Understanding The Ethics Of Public Speaking -- Chapter 3: Speaking Confidently -- Chapter 4: The Importance Of Listening -- Chapter 5: Audience Analysis -- Chapter 6: What Is Research? -- Chapter 7: Using Supporting Material To Make Your Case -- Chapter 8: Introductions Matter — How To Begin A Speech Effectively -- Chapter 9: Creating The Body Of A Speech -- Chapter 10: Concluding With Power -- Chapter 11: Outlining -- Chapter 12: The Importance Of Language -- Chapter 13: You Deliver! Commanding The Audience For Ultimate Understanding -- Chapter 14: The Role Of Presentation Aids -- Chapter 15: Informative Speaking -- Chapter 16: Persuasive Speaking -- Chapter 17: Understanding Speeches To Entertain0 aThis book begins not only with public speaking as a skill, but with communication as a human practice. From interpersonal conversations to civic speeches, from face-to-face dialogue to AI-mediated interaction, our ability to communicate with care and clarity has never been more important or more complex.1 aThis textbook is optimized for screen readers. There is alt text, captions, and long descriptions for all images, all tables are fully accessible, and the reading order uses proper headings.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aRice, Sherryeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1977zAccess online version01964nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100003200134245010400166264004300270264005800313264001200371300002200383336002600405337002600431338003600457341003600493490002700529505022900556520052700785532007601312542001601388546001601404588004101420650002501461710003901486856007701525OTLid0001978MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL71 aMachajewski, Szymoneauthor04aThe Learn-It-All Educator - A Guidebook for Training Brains, Not Replacing ThemcSzymon Machajewski 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bZenodoc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeText2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aThe Learn-It-All Educator -- Chapter 1: Cognitive Triage -- Chapter 2: The Intelligent Gearbox -- Chapter 3: The Cognitive Gym -- Chapter 4: The Intelligent Simpleton -- References -- About The Author -- Publication Metadata0 aA practical guidebook helping higher education faculty integrate AI thoughtfully into teaching while protecting student cognitive development. Introduces four frameworks: FLUFF/SPARK for cognitive triage, the Intelligent Gearbox for advanced prompting, the Cognitive Gym for AI-resistant assessment design (including the AI Audit verification protocol), and the VINE Framework for developing evaluative judgment. Based on neuroscience research and designed for immediate classroom application. First edition, January 2026.1 aAccessibility confirmed with MS Word checker and YuJa Panorama at 100%.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1978zAccess online version03102nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100003200137245008600169264004300255264006500298264001200363300002200375336002600397337002600423338003600449341002500485490002700510505134900537520059901886542001602485546001602501588004102517650004202558700002402600710003902624856007702663OTLid0001979MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1451 aTiberius, Christianeauthor00aEngineering Signal AnalysisbFrom Fourier to filtering TheorycChristian Tiberius 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bTU Delft Openc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Part I: Introduction -- Chapter 1: Introduction -- Chapter 2: Signal Preliminaries -- Part II: Continuous Time -- Chapter 3: Real Fourier Series -- Chapter 4: Complex Exponential Fourier Series -- Chapter 5: Fourier Transform -- Chapter 6: Fourier Transform Theorems -- Chapter 7: Convolution -- Chapter 8: Finite Signal Duration, Leakage And Windowing -- Part III: Discrete Time -- Chapter 9: Sampling -- Chapter 10: Signal Reconstruction -- Chapter 11: Discrete-Time Fourier Transform -- Chapter 12: Discrete Fourier Transform -- Part IV: Spectral Estimation -- Chapter 13: Energy And Power Spectral Density -- Chapter 14: Spectral Estimation -- Chapter 15: Spectrogram -- Part V: Linear Systems -- Chapter 16: Linear Time-Invariant Systems -- Chapter 17: Measuring Signals -- Chapter 18: Filters -- Appendices -- Appendix A: Common Mathematical Formulas -- Appendix B: Elementary Functions -- Appendix C: Complex Algebra -- Appendix D: Quantization -- Appendix E: Fourier Transform Pairs -- Appendix F: Discrete Convolution -- Appendix G: DTFT Addendum -- Appendix H: DFT Addendum -- Appendix I: Spectral Analysis In Practice: Full Procedure -- Appendix J: Confidence Interval Of Periodogram -- Appendix K: Correlation -- Appendix L: White Noise -- Appendix M: Solving First-Order Differential Equation – Example -- Bibliography0 aEngineering Signal Analysis - Theory, is an introductory textbook on the analysis of signals in time and frequency. It takes an engineer’s perspective and discusses how to characterize, analyze and operate on signals. The basic theoretical concepts, Fourier series and transform, are explained in continuous time. It then introduces discrete-time signals, addressing how sampling and finite signal duration affect spectral analysis. It discusses the discrete Fourier transform and its use in spectral estimation. The book concludes with an introduction to linear systems and signal filtering.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aMulder, Maxeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1979zAccess online version01777nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127100002700137245003500164264004300199264004300242264001200285300002200297336002600319337002600345338003600371341002500407490002700432505017700459520046900636542002701105546001601132588004001148650002901188700003401217700003601251710003901287856007701326OTLid0001980MnU20260406020207.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP91.31 aFabos, Bettinaeauthor00aMedia and PowercBettina Fabos 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aCedar Falls, IowabRod Libraryc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aModule 00: Front Matter And Introduction -- Module 01: Construction Of Meaning -- Module 02: Construction Of Gender, Race, And Ethnicity -- Module 03: Construction Of Truth0 aThis handbook guides students through concepts, content, and exercises that help them develop media literacy by understanding media and power. The authors want students to not only gain the ability to critically analyze the languages and discourses – textual, visual, audio, and code – that people use to create and interpret media content, but also to understand the overarching context: media possess immense power in contemporary societies around the world.1 fAttribution-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aMartin, Christopher Reauthor1 aPalczewski, Catherine Heauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1980zAccess online version01811nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002700135245005400162264004300216264007000259264001200329300002200341336002600363337002600389338003600415341002500451490002700476505025300503520039400756542001601150546001601166588004001182650003801222700003101260700003001291710003901321856007701360OTLid0001981MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aKlevar, Racheleauthor00aSemillasbElementary Spanish IIcRachel Klevarn2 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Iowac[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Part I: Module 05 — Todo Sobre Mis Gustos Y Costumbres -- Part II: Module 06 — Todo Sobre Mis Rutinas -- Part III: Module 07 — Todo Sobre Mi Pasado -- Part IV: Module 08 — Todo Sobre Mis Aventuras -- Image Attributions --0 aSemillas: Elementary Spanish II is an intermediate Spanish open-access textbook with reading, listening, speaking, and writing practice. It is a follow-up to Semillas: Elementary Spanish I, with beginning chapters modeling the last two lessons from the previous textbook. The textbook provides instructors and students with lessons, vocabulary lists, videos, PDFs, projects, and exercises.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks1 aOlivares, Gabrielaeauthor1 aZimotti, Giovannieauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1981zAccess online version02486nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100002900150245012300179264004300302264006300345264001200408300002200420336002600442337002600468338003600494341002500530490002700555505035400582520085800936542003001794546001601824588004101840650003301881650002801914650004201942710003901984856007702023OTLid0001982MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aHinders, Kevin Jeauthor04aThe Design of the Built EnvironmentbThe University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign Campus and Its ContextcKevin Hinders 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aUrbana, IllinoisbIllinois Open Publishing Networkc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgments -- Dedication -- List Of Illustrations -- Introduction -- Part 1: Approaches To Architecture -- Part 2: The Making Of Place And The University Plan -- Part 3: The University Context -- Part 4: Technical Aspects Of Architecture -- Part 5: Individual Buildings And Their Design -- Epilogue -- Glossary -- Appendix -- Bibliography -- --0 aKevin J. Hinders’s The Design of the Built Environment offers an exploration of the architectural, cultural, and historical development of the University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign campus and its surrounding context. Structured around thematic walking tours, the manuscript examines architectural principles and then uses the campus and its surroundings to illustrate the concepts. It delves into the evolution of public spaces, technical design considerations, and the influence of local, regional, and national planning. Through case studies, historical analysis, and design theory, Hinders illustrates how built environments reflect collective values, cultural shifts, and functional needs. The work emphasizes experiential learning and encourages readers to engage with the built world through observation, reflection, and spatial understanding.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aArea StudiesvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1982zAccess online version01814nam a2200349 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127245005400135264004300189264006500232264001200297300002200309336002600331337002600357338003600383341002500419490002700444505029400471520043000765542004101195546001601236588004101252650002601293700002901319710003901348856007701387OTLid0001983MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260220s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aB7200aPhilosophy and the ArtsbA Textbook with Readings 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMinnesotabMinnesota State Colleges and Universitiesc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction To Philosophy And The Arts -- Part I: Main Body -- Chapter 1: Art And Representation -- Chapter 2: Art, Creativity, And Genius -- Chapter 3: Art And Emotion -- Chapter 4: The Aesthetic Dimension -- Chapter 5: The Cognitive Dimension -- Appendix: Sources And Further Reading --0 aThis book is an introduction to some influential theories in philosophy of art. It combines excerpts of historically important texts from European and American culture with explanations of the key ideas in those texts. The most recent of these texts dates from 1929.The overall organization is topical. Five topics have been selected. The chapters are relatively independent of one another and can be approached in any order.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aPhilosophyvTextbooks1 aGracyk, Theodoreeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1983zAccess online version02293nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050000700158100002600165245005100191264004300242264003800285264001200323300002200335336002600357337002600383338003600409341002500445490002700470505107200497520009401569542001601663546001601679588004001695650003101735650002501766710003901791856007701830OTLid0001984MnU20260406020840.0m     o  d s      cr            260306s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957068435  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aDohms, Amandaeeditor00aFamily & Community RelationshipscAmanda Dohms 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aOverview -- Preface -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction to family & community relationships -- Chapter 1: Exploring family: structures, trends, and influences on child development -- Chapter 2: Understanding family diversity: cultural influences and inclusive practices in early childhood -- Chapter 3: Building resilient families: protective factors, strengths-based approaches, and trauma-informed support -- Chapter 4: Communicating with care: effective, culturally sensitive, and conflict-resolving strategies for family engagement -- Chapter 5: Building strong connections: strategies for respectful, reciprocal relationships with families -- Chapter 6: Enhancing family engagement: strategies for meaningful involvement in early childhood programs -- Chapter 7: Connecting with families: effective meeting formats and strategies for home and community contexts -- Chapter 8: Championing children and families: understanding public policy and advocacy strategies -- Chapter 9: Supporting families: navigating community resources and services for diverse families0 aBuild skills for engaging families and communities in early childhood education settings.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1984zAccess online version02193nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001300145050000700158100002600165245005900191264004300250264003800293264001200331300002200343336002600365337002600391338003600417341002500453490002700478505095200505520010601457542001601563546001601579588004001595650003101635650002501666710003901691856007701730OTLid0001985MnU20260406020820.0m     o  d s      cr            260306s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781957068411  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLB1139.2 4aL71 aDohms, Amandaeeditor00aFoundations of Early Childhood EducationcAmanda Dohms 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aMadison, WIbWisTech Openc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aOverview -- Acknowledgments -- Preface -- Introduction to foundations of early childhood education -- Chapter 1: Embracing diversity, equity, inclusion, and belonging in early childhood education: building foundations for belonging -- Chapter 2: Tracing the roots and shaping the future: the history and trends of early childhood education -- Chapter 3: Exploring early childhood education settings: a guide to diverse learning environments -- Chapter 4: Exploring regulatory requirements: early childhood education programs in Wisconsin -- Chapter 5: Identifying quality indicators: ensuring excellence in early childhood education programs -- Chapter 6: Summarizing the responsibilities: early childhood education professionals in action -- Chapter 7: Exploring early childhood curriculum models: approaches to supporting young learners -- Chapter 8: The power of play: enhancing developmentally appropriate practice in early childhood education0 aDiscover the principles, practices, and strategies for teaching young children from birth to 8 years.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aEarly ChildhoodvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1985zAccess online version02724nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001300137100002500150245006300175264004300238264007600281264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505062500531520091301156542004102069546001602110588004002126650003402166650003402200710003902234856007702273OTLid0001986MnU20260406020820.0m     o  d s      cr            260318s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aK3154 4aKF385.A41 aKlein, Alisaeauthor00aConstitutional Law with a TwistbLess Is MorecAlisa Klein 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bCALI's eLangdell® Pressc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Author -- Notices -- About CALI eLangdell Press -- Preface: Why is this casebook so short? -- Overview of the casebook -- Part One: The Powers of Government -- Chapter 1: Powers of the Judicial Branch -- Chapter 2: Federalism -- Chapter 3: Separation of Powers -- Chapter 4: Foreign Affairs -- Part Two: Individual Rights -- Chapter 5: The Incorporation Doctrine and the State Action Requirement -- Chapter 6: Procedural Due Process and Equal Protection -- Chapter 7: Fundamental Rights and the Right to Travel -- Chapter 8: Gun Rights -- Chapter 9: Congress's Power to Protect Individual Constitutional Rights0 aConstitutional Law with a Twist: Less is More is designed for a one-semester survey course on federal constitutional law. The casebook covers the content of a typical four-credit survey course: the structure of the U.S. government and individual rights (other than First Amendment rights and rights unique to criminal law). What differentiates this casebook from most other constitutional law casebooks is that this book is deliberately short. It reflects the author’s philosophy that students often experience more joy, more depth, and more growth in an introductory course on constitutional law when there is less reading, more emphasis on contemporary cases, and more feedback on interim work. The book’s preface and the introduction to the accompanying teacher’s manual describe the book’s approach in detail to help faculty decide whether this casebook is a good fit for them and their students.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aConstitutional LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1986zAccess online version02036nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002800148245006600176264004300242264007100285264001200356300002200368336002600390337002600416338003600442341002500478490002700503505059800530520026501128542004101393546001601434588004001450650002401490650003201514710003901546856007701585OTLid0001987MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            260319s2021    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHB6151 aPauley, Mattheweauthor00aBusiness Startup and EntrepreneurshipbCanadacMatthew Pauley 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPrince Edward Island, CanadabRobertson Library Pressbooksc[2021] 4c©2021.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle Page -- Publisher Information -- About the Author -- Acknowledgements -- Dedication -- Preface -- Introduction -- I. Main Body -- 1. 1/ The Fundamentals of Business -- 2. 2/ The Nature of Entrepreneurship -- 3. 3/ Industry and Markets -- 4. 4/ Markets and Strategic Planning -- 5. 5/ Value Propositions -- 6. 6/ Strategic Marketing -- 7. 7/ Launching Business -- 8. 8/ Business Operations -- 9. 9/ Risks -- 10. 10/ Teams -- 11. 11/ Human Resources -- 12. 12/ Social Resources -- 13. 13/ Finance -- 14. 14/ Accounting -- 15. 15/ Ethics and Social Responsibility -- References -- Footnotes0 aThis OER textbook focuses on the foundations of entrepreneurship and starting a business. The text is divided from the theoretical underpinnings of the discipline; entrepreneurship traits and characteristics and the activities that precede starting a business.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aEntrepreneurshipvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1987zAccess online version04550nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127100002400139245006100163264004300224264007000267264001200337300002200349336002600371337002600397338003600423341003600459490002700495505008600522520304700608532026003655542004103915546001603956588004103972650002604013650002104039710003904060856007704099OTLid0001988MnU20260408094707.0m     o  d s      cr            260323s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aM1-50001 aConner, Tedeauthor00aMusicsbDiversity, Difference, and SynergiescTed Conner 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bMuhlenberg Collegec[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbtableOfContents2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Jazz -- Makamlar -- Ragas -- Solfege -- Appendix I -- Acknowledgements0 aMusics: Diversity, Difference, and Synergies is a radical re-imagining of how music can be studied. Non-Western, vernacular, and Western art music are valued equally and studied at the same level of depth. Of equal importance is the emphasis placed on hands-on doing. Scales common to Jazz and Western art music are learned by playing them on the piano. Rhythmic skills are embodied on the darbuka, a Middle Eastern goblet drum, through the study of Turkish rhythmic cycles called usuller. Pitch recognition is developed by singing paltas (pitch patterns) for Indian ragas and melodic studies for Turkish makamlar using fixed-do solmization systems. Training in moveable-do solfege for Western art music begins with conducting as a foundation. This is followed by the addition of takadimi syllables for rhythm, solfege syllables aligned with scale degrees, and, finally, pitch. Exploring improvisational practices from diverse cultures and genres is also prioritized. The study of Turkish usuller begins with basic forms that are then embellished through a series of ornamented variations that serve as models for developing improvisational skills. The preparatory exercises for ragas and tetrachord and pentachord studies for makamlar provide the foundation for improvisational techniques explored in these genres. Improvising over harmonic progressions common in Jazz is the first practical application of playing major scales on the piano. This first step is followed by the development of more focused improvisational approaches that parallel the growth of knowledge and skill sets. Another important principle in Musics is applying the pedagogical approaches used by practitioners of the musics in the cultures in which they are situated. Pedagogies are often intertwined with the epistemological and methodological frames that define the role and function of music within a culture. Developing an understanding of why and how music is practiced speaks toward an integrative model of engaging with the musics of diverse cultures. This approach differs from the Western construct of music theory, musicology/ethnomusicology, and performance as separate disciplines and, instead, places the interconnectedness and interplay of various facets of music as a foundational precept. The materials and methodologies in Musics are designed to function synergistically. For example, a pedagogical focus on pitch recognition is shared by many cultures and genres. Viewed from this perspective, pitch recognition is not culture-specific and the skills developed in one genre can be applied to others. However, the term pitch recognition is not inherently stable as the ways in which it is conceptualized and applied are grounded in and complicated by the diversity of cultural mores and practices. In this sense, the study of pitch recognition becomes reflexive, generating a multifaceted aggregate of knowledge and skills through which the understanding of each tradition differentiates, informs, and enriches the understanding of other traditions.1 aThe table of contents provides detailed information about the structure and contents of the book. The book can be used digitally but is most effective when used in a printed form as most of the concepts and activities in the book involve hands-on practice1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks 0aMusicvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1988zAccess online version03952nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127100002400134245005200158250000600210264004300216264007500259264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341010000456490002700556505096400583520161701547532014303164532001503307542004103322546001603363588004003379650003103419710003903450856007703489OTLid0001989MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            260323s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aH11 aKhan, Mahameeditor00aIntroduction to Adulthood and AgingcMaham Khan  a1 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aHuman Development and Family Science, bVirginia Tech Librariesc2026. 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbreadingOrderbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContentsbtaggedPDF2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aLetter to Students -- For Instructors -- Acknowledgements and Attributions -- About the Editor -- Unit 1: Introductions to Lifespan Development, Gerontology Theories, and Research Methods -- 1: Introduction to Lifespan Development and Adulthood -- 2: Lifespan Development Theories -- 3: Research in Lifespan Development -- Unit 2: Early Adulthood -- 4: Emerging Adulthood and Early Adulthood -- 5: Cognitive Development in Early Adulthood -- 6: Psychosocial Development in Emerging and Early Adulthood -- 7: Relationships and Intimacy in Early Adulthood -- Unit 3: Middle Adulthood -- 8: Middle Adulthood -- 9: Cognition, Social & Emotional Development Among Middle Adulthood -- 10: Relationships in Middle Adulthood -- Unit 4: Older Adulthood -- 11: Older Adulthood -- 12: Physical and Sensory Changes in Older Adulthood -- 13: Brain Functioning and Sleep in Older Adulthood -- 14: End-of-Life Decision Making and Care -- 15: Death, Mourning, and Bereavement0 aIntroduction to Adulthood and Aging (2026) is a research-based, 358-page Open Educational Resource (OER) adapted with original material added for use in Virginia Tech’s Human Development course, HD 2004: Adulthood and Aging. This text aims to spark reader ideas to address the significant global challenges and opportunities related to aging worldwide, exploring development, loss, resilience, and change and challenging common assumptions about aging. More than just a textbook, this resource is intended to spark reflection, empathy, and connection. The text is a foundation of knowledge and compassion that can be applied in both academic and personal settings, assisting readers to engage with the topic in practical and meaningful ways. Developed in response to the increasing cost of textbooks, with the goal of reducing the financial burden on students and families, Introduction to Adulthood and Aging adapts and expands the openly-licensed works of other authors. It was adapted with original content added from existing openly-licensed texts, developed as a course reader in Canvas, and has been converted into MSWord and PDF. It is shared broadly in an effort to increase access to the content. While it is freely available under a Creative Commons Attribution NonCommercial ShareAlike (CC BY NC-SA) 4.0 license, the value of the content remains high, grounded in research, empathy, and a commitment to accessible education. Instructors reviewing or adopting this book for a course, please help us understand your use by filling out this form: https://bit.ly/interest_introductiontoadulthoodandaging1 aThis text is available in MSWord and PDF. It utilizes structured headings, figure alternative text, defined headers or columns for tables.2 anone known1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1989zAccess online version02517nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001800127050001000145100002600155245007500181264004300256264005800299264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341017100479490002700650505061400677520050601291542003001797546001601827588004001843650003301883650002901916700002901945700002901974710003902003856007702042OTLid0001990MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            260324s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5717-5734.7 4aP91.31 aCompton, Lilyeeditor00aSurviving Research PublicationbA Guide for New ScholarscLily Compton 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aAmes, IAbIowa State University Digital Pressc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbARIAbalternativeTextbhighContrastDisplaybpageBreakMarkersbpageNavigationbreadingOrderbstructuralNavigationbtableOfContentsbtaggedPDFbunlocked2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aForeword -- Introduction -- Part I. Basics -- 1. Literature Reviews -- 2. Citations -- 3. Literature Searches (and Using the Library) -- 4. Demystifying the Publishing Process -- 5. Research Impact -- Part II. Ethics -- 6. Research Ethics, Regulations, and Protocols -- 7. Copyright Basics for Article Publication -- 8. Authorship: Rights, Responsibilities, and Embargoes -- 9. Plagiarism -- Part III. Technology -- 10. Applications for Writing -- 11. Applications for Formatting -- 12. Formatting Text -- 13. Formatting Figures -- 14. Formatting Tables -- 15. Final Formatting -- Glossary -- Acknowledgements0 aThis handbook provides the hidden information needed to successfully navigate your first research publications. From the basics of a literature review, through ethics and the use of technology, this book is an essential guide for graduate students and early career researchers. Topics covered include: literature reviews, citations, literature searches, scholarly publishing, research impact measures, research ethics, copyright, authorship, plagiarism, document formatting, and digital accessibility.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aTechnical WritingvTextbooks 0aCommunicationvTextbooks1 aO'Donnell, Meganeeditor1 aTerrill, Kristineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1990zAccess online version02161nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001000145050000700155100003100162245004800193264004300241264006400284264001200348300002200360336002600382337002600408338003600434341002500470490002700495505078700522520015901309542004101468546001601509588004001525650002601565650003101591700002501622710003901647856007701686OTLid0001991MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260324s2019    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9780888806376  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aCummings, Jorden Aeauthor00aIntroduction to PsychologycJorden Cummings 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aSaskatoon, SaskatchewanbUniversity of Saskatchewanc[2019] 4c©2019.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the Book -- Source Chapter Attributions -- Acknowledgments -- Chapter 1: Introducing Psychology -- Chapter 2: Introduction to Major Perspectives -- Chapter 3: Psychological Science & Research -- Chapter 4: Genetics and Evolution -- Chapter 5: Brains, Bodies, and Behaviour -- Chapter 6: Sensing and Perceiving -- Chapter 7: States of Consciousness -- Chapter 8: Remembering and Judging -- Chapter 9: Intelligence and Language -- Chapter 10: Learning -- Chapter 11: Emotions and Motivations -- Chapter 12: Stress, Health, and Coping -- Chapter 13: Psychology in Our Social Lives -- Chapter 14: Growing and Developing -- Chapter 15: Culture -- Chapter 16: Personality -- Chapter 17: Defining Psychological Disorders -- Chapter 18: Treating Psychological Disorders -- Glossary --0 aThis introductory text has been created from a combination of original content and materials compiled and adapted from a number of open text publications.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks1 aSanders, Leeeauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1991zAccess online version02658nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100003000167245006100197264004300258264007600301300002200377336002600399337002600425338003600451341002500487490002700512505055200539520090301091542003001994546001602024588004002040650002402080650002502104700002702129710003902156856007702195OTLid0001994MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            260324suuuu    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781965417065  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF54151 aFerguson, Jodie Leauthor00aMarketing Principles From The River CitycJodie Ferguson 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bVirginia Commonwealth University  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAccessibility Statement -- Version History -- Chapter 1 – Marketing Defined -- Chapter 2 – Consumer Behavior -- Chapter 3 – B2B Behavior -- Chapter 4 – International Marketing -- Chapter 5 – Strategic Planning -- Chapter 6 – Marketing Research -- Chapter 7 – Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning -- Chapter 8 – Product -- Chapter 9 – Distribution -- Chapter 10 – Pricing -- Chapter 11 – Promotion -- Chapter 12 – Personal Selling and Sales Management -- Chapter 13 – Digital Marketing -- About the Authors -- Glossary0 aMarketing Principles From the River City provides a contemporary exploration into the rudimentary concepts of marketing intended to be a free and open-access handbook for undergraduate introduction to marketing course students, a refresher resource for marketing majors entering upper level marketing courses, and a reference for marketing practitioners. Throughout the book, the reader will notice references to the hometown of Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, Virginia, also known as the “River City.” The book is divided into three overarching topic areas: Marketing and Markets, the Marketing Toolkit, and the Marketing Mix. Topics covered in the handbook include consumer and business-to-business behaviors, international marketing, strategic planning, marketing research, segmentation, targeting and positioning, product concepts, distribution, pricing, and promotion concepts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aMarketingvTextbooks1 aZamudio, Cesareauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1994zAccess online version02542nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001300127050001000140100002800150245012100178264004300299264007200342264001200414300002200426336002600448337002600474338003600500341002500536490002700561505046800588520079001056542003001846546001601876588004101892650003301933650004201966700003202008710003902040856007702079OTLid0001998MnU20260406020208.0m     o  d s      cr            260327s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aTA1-2040 4aTA1451 aCimadomo, Guidoeeditor00aSpaces for ActionbA Repository of Tools and Methods for a Socially Situated Architectural EducationcGuido Cimadomo 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bOpen Book Publishersc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aHow to use the repository -- Alphabetic index of tools and methods -- Index by stage and type: understanding stage -- Categories and subcategories -- The need for a repository of tools and methods for socially situated architecture pedagogie -- Introduction -- The construction of the repository of socially situated tools and methods: about its methodology -- Understanding stage -- Ideation stage -- Implementation stage -- Epilogue: situating tools and methods0 aSpaces for Action' provides a hands-on guide for teachers and students looking to make architectural learning more engaging, collaborative, and socially meaningful. The book brings together over 80 creative tools that can be adapted to different classrooms, communities, and design challenges. The tools are grouped by teaching approaches—like cooperative teamwork, experiential learning, and transformative practices—and by the stages of the design process: identifying challenges, generating ideas, and putting them into action. Each entry gives a clear overview of what the tool is for, how it works, and what you need to make it happen. You’ll also find tips on group sizes, resources, and possible collaborators, making it easy to bring these methods straight into practice.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aCivil EngineeringvTextbooks 0aEngineering and TechnologyvTextbooks1 aDiaz, Ingrid Vargaseeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1998zAccess online version02571nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245006000177264004300237264009200280264001200372300002200384336002600406337002600432338003600458341002500494490002700519505019100546520122500737542001601962546001601978588004101994650002302035650002302058710003902081856007702120OTLid0001999MnU20260406020208.0m     o  d s      cr            260331s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aRyndock, Eric Jeauthor00aVirology Lab Exercises for UndergraduatescEric Ryndock 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aPreface -- Chapter 1: Bacteriophage Investigation -- Chapter 2: Deformed Wing Virus Investigation -- Chapter 3: Zucchini Yellow Mosaic Virus Investigation -- Glossary -- Instructor Notes0 aThis laboratory manual presents a novel series of undergraduate-friendly experiments designed to provide students with a safe, accessible, and comprehensive introduction to virology. The manual is intended for students who already possess foundational knowledge in cell biology, genetics, and molecular biology, and it emphasizes hands-on learning through diverse experimental approaches. Unlike many existing virology laboratory manuals that depend on costly infrastructure such as mammalian cell culture facilities or focus narrowly on a single viral system, this manual was developed specifically for primary undergraduate teaching institutions. The experiments utilize readily available equipment while exposing students to representative viruses that infect bacteria, plants, and animals. Through these investigations, students gain practical experience with modern virological techniques and develop transferable, employable skills relevant to biotechnology, research, and related industries. Collectively, the laboratory exercises aim to strengthen conceptual understanding of viral biology, promote technical competency, and inspire student curiosity about viruses as dynamic and influential biological entities.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/1999zAccess online version01552nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002400148245004500172264004300217264006200260264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505018600496520023400682542004100916546001600957588004100973650002501014650002301039710003901062856007701101OTLid0002000MnU20260406020213.0m     o  d s      cr            260331s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQD31.3 4aQH3011 aAvram, Erineauthor00aCHM 151bChemistry Around UscErin Avram 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bLibreTextsc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aFront matter -- Properties and measurement of matter -- Naming and structure of compounds -- Gases and climate change -- Chemistry of water -- Nuclear chemistry -- Back matter -- --0 aChemistry Around Us is a chemistry course designed for non-majors to explore the basics of chemistry and how it relates to the world around us, particularly in the context of climate change, water chemistry and nuclear chemistry.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aChemistryvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2000zAccess online version01923nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050001000137100003000147245004500177264004300222264009200265264001200357300002200369336002600391337002600417338003600443341002500479490002700504505036400531520039200895542004101287546001601328588004001344650002501384650002401409710003901433856007701472OTLid0002001MnU20260406020652.0m     o  d s      cr            260331s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRA773 4aRA4401 aLehman, Heather Leauthor04aThe Science of NutritioncHeather Lehman 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aPennsylvaniabThe Pennsylvania Alliance for Design of Open Textbooks (PA-ADOPT)c[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aChapter One: The Science of Nutrition -- Chapter 2: Nutritional Assessment -- Chapter 3: Digestive System -- Chapter 4: Carbohydrates -- Chapter 5: Proteins -- Chapter 6: Lipids -- Chapter 7: Water -- Chapter 8: Vitamins -- Chapter 9: Minerals -- Chapter 10: Making Healthy Choices -- Chapter 11: Physical Activity -- Appendix: Image Transcripts -- References0 aThe Science of Nutrition offers a clear and engaging introduction to the fundamental principles of nutrition. This textbook bridges evidence-based research with practical application, making it ideal for both nutrition or science majors and non-majors. Students will explore how nutrition is studied, how dietary recommendations are developed, and why these guidelines matter for health.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNutritionvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2001zAccess online version02616nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068020001800109040001800127050001100145050001100156100003600167245004900203264004300252264009600295264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002500513490002700538505063800565520074901203542001601952546001601968588004001984650002402024650002602048700002802074710003902102856007702141OTLid0002002MnU20260406020816.0m     o  d s      cr            260331s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  a9781959870227  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHD30.41 aRodriguez, Ana Carolinaeauthor00aBecoming a Change FacilitatorcAna Rodriguez 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Minnesota Libraries Publishingc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAbout the authors -- How to use this book -- Chapter one: what are organizations, and how do they change? -- Chapter two: what is organization development? -- Chapter three: OD skills and teamwork -- Chapter four: getting started -- Chapter five: data gathering -- Chapter six: analyzing data and providing feedback -- Chapter seven: conducting OD interventions -- Chapter eight: overview of selected individual level OD interventions -- Chapter nine: overview of selected team level OD interventions -- Chapter ten: overview of selected organizational level OD interventions -- Chapter eleven: evaluating and sustaining change stage0 aThis book is intended to be a practical guide to explore how to facilitate change within organizations adopting an Organization Development approach. It was developed for teaching undergraduate students who are still learning about organizations and their dynamics. It provides an introduction to Organization Development, focusing in the process to facilitate organizational change and in the values and skills connected with the Organization Development approach. Besides learning what is Organization Development and how it facilitates organizational change, content and activities in this book also aim to help students develop problem-solving skills, system-thinking, teamwork and the ability to communicate effectively and support change.1 fAttribution  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aManagementvTextbooks1 aCavallo, Tayloreauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2002zAccess online version01974nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000700127050001000134100002700144245006700171264004300238264005800281264001200339300002200351336002600373337002600399338003600425341002500461490002700486505022900513520051400742542003001256546001601286588004101302650002501343650003301368700002901401700003001430710003901460856007701499OTLid0002003MnU20260406020210.0m     o  d s      cr            260331s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aL7 4aLC9801 aMagro, Julianoeauthor00aCritical Appraisal PracticebSystematic ReviewscJuliano Magro 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bZenodoc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a-- Introduction -- Brief overview of review types -- Systematic review steps -- Advantages and limitations -- Common biases in systematic reviews -- Interpreting a forest plot -- Critical appraisal -- Practice -- Conclusions0 aThis concise workbook, aimed for librarians and other educators who teach Evidence-Based Practice, introduces key principles for critically appraising systematic reviews and meta-analyses. It guides readers through evaluating the quality, reliability, and relevance of these studies. The book covers different types of reviews, the steps involved in conducting a systematic review, common biases encountered, and how to interpret forest plots. It also includes practical exercises and resources for educators.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aEducationvTextbooks 0aEducation, HighervTextbooks1 aThompson, Andreaeauthor1 aPlovnick, Caitlineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2003zAccess online version02872nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002600135245007200161264004300233264005600276264001200332300002200344336002600366337002600392338003600418341009400454490002700548505049100575520086301066532025501929542003002184546001602214588004002230650003802270650002602308700003602334710003902370856007702409OTLid0002004MnU20260407115615.0m     o  d s      cr            260407s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aP511 aTézil, Davideauthor00aKreyòl PalebA Haitian Creole Textbook for BeginnerscDavid Tézil 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGainesville, FloridabUniversity of Floridac[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbalternativeTextbpageNavigationbreadingOrderbtableOfContentsbtaggedPDF2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a-- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Chapter 1 -- Chapter 2 -- Chapter 3 -- Chapter 4 -- Chapter 5 -- Chapter 6 -- Chapter 7 -- Chapter 8 -- Chapter 9 -- Chapter 10 -- Chapter 11 -- Chapter 12 -- Chapter 13 -- Chapter 14 -- Chapter 15 -- Chapter 16 -- Chapter 17 -- Chapter 18 -- Chapter 19 -- Chapter 20 -- Chapter 21 -- Chapter 22 -- Chapter 23 -- Chapter 24 -- Chapter 25 -- Chapter 26 -- Chapter 27 -- Chapter 28 -- Chapter 29 -- Chapter 30 -- Glossary -- Answer key -- Back cover0 aKreyòl pale (Creole is Spoken) is a 29-chapter textbook designed for beginner learners of the Haitian Creole language. The textbook employs a communicative pedagogical methodology emphasizing the learner’s acquisition of speaking, reading, writing, and listening skills through meaningful content. The textbook focuses on communication scenarios that are the most important for navigating daily life in Haiti and its Diaspora. Kreyòl pale is built on contemporary teaching methodologies that place Haitian Creole communicativeness at the center of the learner’s experience. Kreyòl pale is an essential beginners’ Haitian Creole textbook due to the meaningfulness, practicality, and relatability of its Haitian Creole materials. As an introduction to Haitian Creole language and culture, this textbook opens the way to the many paths to mastery. (en)1 aThis textbook is publicly available through the University of Florida Smathers Libraries Digital Collections as downloadable PDFs and EPUBs, with accessible metadata, including alt text and tagged text, OCR, and other screen-reader-friendly features.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aLanguage and languagesvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aHebblethwaite, Benjamineauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2004zAccess online version02324nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002900149245007200178264004300250264005100293264001200344300002200356336002600378337002600404338003600430341002500466490002700491505038700518520079600905542003001701546001601731588004001747650002301787650002401810710003901834856007701873OTLid0002006MnU20260409191517.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2025    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aRT1-120 4aRA4401 aMcgregor, Jacquieauthor00aNeonatal Care Essentials for Nursing and MidwiferycJacqui Mcgregor 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2025] 4c©2025.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 a-- Acknowledgement of country -- About the author -- Accessibility information -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction to neonatal care essentials for nursing and midwifery -- Transition to extra-uterine life -- Thermoregulation (are they warm?) -- Nutrition and feeding (are they sweet?) -- Oxygenation and perfusion (are they pink?) -- Versioning history -- Glossary and abbreviations0 aThis resource is aimed at providing student midwives and nurses an entry level understanding of the role of the nurse/midwife in the neonatal environment. The book is divided into chapters following the notions of warm, sweet, pink and calm with an overview of transition to the extrauterine environment. It is paramount that we ask ourselves when caring for premature or haemodynamically unstable term infants, are they warm, are they sweet, are they pink, and finally are they calm. This resource will provide you with an entry level understanding of the pathophysiology behind some of the more commonly seen presentations in the neonatal special care nursery, and more importantly the resource will provide you with management strategies following the warm, sweet, pink and calm concepts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aNursingvTextbooks 0aMedicinevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2006zAccess online version01769nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001100138100002500149245004700174264004300221264005100264264001200315300002200327336002600349337002600375338003600401341002500437490002700462505027600489520036800765542003001133546001601163588004001179650002401219650003601243710003901279856007701318OTLid0002007MnU20260409192352.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHF55491 aSteen, Saraheauthor00aWorkplace Role Play ScenarioscSarah Steen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle page -- Meet the author -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- Role-play preamble -- Acknowledgement of country -- Accessibility information -- Section 1 - difficult conversations -- Section 2 - negotiation -- Section 3 - mediation -- Last page -- Versioning history0 aThis book has been designed to provide a range of workplace scenarios that can be utilised for experiential learning covering difficult conversations, negotiation and mediation. The scenarios provide learners with the opportunity to engage in different role-plays and provide learners with the opportunity to reflect on their experience with reflective questions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aPersonnel managementvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2007zAccess online version01805nam a2200361 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245012200163264004300285264005100328264001200379300002200391336002600413337002600439338003600465341002500501490002700526505027600553520036300829542003001192546001601222588004001238650002301278650002601301710003901327856007701366OTLid0002008MnU20260409193021.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2023    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aCairns, Rebeccaeeditor00aDiverse Historical Narratives and PerspectivesbA Collection of Learning and Teaching Activities 2023cRebecca Cairns 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2023] 4c©2023.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aTitle page -- Meet the author -- Acknowledgments -- Introduction -- Role-play preamble -- Acknowledgement of country -- Accessibility information -- Section 1 - difficult conversations -- Section 2 - negotiation -- Section 3 - mediation -- Last page -- Versioning history0 aThe teaching and learning activities in this book were developed by pre-service History teachers at Deakin University, Australia. The activities are designed for senior secondary students and cover a wide range of topics from ancient history through to early twenty-first century history, but may be modified to suit different topics and curriculum contexts.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2008zAccess online version01898nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050000800127100002800135245012500163264004300288264005100331264001200382300002200394336002600416337002600442338003600468341002500504490002700529505038500556520030300941542003001244546001601274588004001290650002301330650002601353700002901379710003901408856007701447OTLid0002009MnU20260409193827.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2022    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aD201 aCairns, Rebeccaeeditor00aHistorical thinking for senior secondary studentsbA collection of teaching and learning activities 2022cRebecca Cairns 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2022] 4c©2022.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAttributions for cover images -- Contributor bios -- Acknowledgements -- Foreword -- Introduction -- Section 1 -- A guide to finding, creating and evaluating for OER -- Ancient history activities -- Empires activities -- Modern history: change and conflict activities -- Modern history: cold war activities -- Modern history: the changing world order activities -- Version history0 aThe teaching and learning activities in this book were designed by pre-service History teachers at Deakin University, Australia. The activities cover a wide range of topics from ancient history through to early twenty-first century history and are designed to develop students' historical thinking.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aHistoryvTextbooks 0aHumanitiesvTextbooks1 aO'Brien, Phillipeeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2009zAccess online version02472nam a2200397 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001300138100002800151245009800179264004300277264007100320264001200391300002200403336002600425337002600451338003600477341002500513490002700538505100900565520018201574542003001756546001601786588004001802650002801842650003401870700002801904700002601932710003901958856007701997OTLid0002010MnU20260409195020.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aKB3790 4aKF385.A41 aConnell, Nadineeeditor00aIntroduction to Criminology and Criminal JusticebAn Australasian PerspectivecNadine Connell 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bGriffith Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgements -- Acknowledgement of country -- About the cover -- About the artist -- About the authors -- Accessibility information -- Introduction -- Section 1 - main body -- What is criminology? -- What is crime? defining and measuring criminal behaviour -- Victims and offenders -- Classical theories of criminology: deterrence -- Sociological theories of crime: strain theories -- Cultural theories of crime: the chicago school and social disorganisation -- The where, when and how of crime: principles of environmental criminology -- How do our relationships help us? social control theory -- Are we wired to take risks? a general theory of crime -- The importance of friendships: social learning theory -- Nature versus nurture: biosocial theories of crime -- Crime and delinquency over the life course: developmental theories of crime -- You made me do it: social reaction theory -- Who has the power? critical criminology -- What happens next? criminal justice responses -- Versioning history0 aThis textbook introduces students to the disciplines of criminology and criminal justice, using contemporary Australasian examples to combine theory with practical applications.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aCriminal LawvTextbooks 0aLawvTextbookszUnited States1 aForrester, Lucyeeditor1 aFriend, Stepheeditor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2010zAccess online version01454nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001100127050001000138100002400148245004000172264004300212264005100255264001200306300002200318336002600340337002600366338003600392341002500428490002700453505026300480520008800743542003000831546001600861588004000877650002400917650002300941710003900964856007701003OTLid0002011MnU20260409195625.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2024    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aHF5001 4aHG1731 aNguyen, Hoaeauthor00aCase Studies in FinancecHoa Nguyen 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2024] 4c©2024.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- Acknowledgement of Country -- About the Author -- Brambles Ltd (ASX: BXB) – Capital Structure -- Domino’s Pizza Enterprises Ltd (ASX: DMP) – Cost of Capital -- Pure Botanica Skincare - Sustainable Capital Budgeting -- Versioning History0 aThis book contains three cases on Capital Structure Management and Cost of Capital.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBusinessvTextbooks 0aFinancevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2011zAccess online version01993nam a2200385 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002900144245006700173264004300240264005100283264001200334300002200346336002600368337002600394338003600420341002500456490002700481505047900508520033500987542003001322546001601352588004001368650003301408650002501441700002501466710003901491856007701530OTLid0002013MnU20260409202702.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aLC980 4aL71 aMcKenzie, Sophieeauthor04aThe HOST Guide for STEM Placement SupervisioncSophie McKenzie 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aAcknowledgement of Country -- About the Authors -- Accessibility Information -- Acknowledgements -- Introduction -- Hosting tips -- Work integrated learning: Co-created learning -- Placement learning phases: L1, L2, L3 explained -- The Performance Review Framework -- The Performance Review Criteria and Star Rating System -- L1: Start of placement -- L2/L3: Monitoring and reviewing performance during placement -- Conclusion -- Feedback on this resource -- Version History0 aThe STEM Host Guide is a practical, flexible resource designed to support quality Work Integrated Learning (WIL) placement supervision in STEM disciplines. It equips hosts with clear expectations, performance evaluation tools and related resources to adapt and foster student learning and professional growth during the placement.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aGeneral educationvTextbooks 0aEducationvTextbooks1 aYoung, Kareneauthor2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2013zAccess online version02134nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100003000149245004900179264004300228264005100271264001200322300002200334336002600356337002600382338003600408341002500444490002700469505065400496520036201150542003001512546001601542588004001558650002301598650002301621710003901644856007701683OTLid0002014MnU20260409203459.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aCorbett, Patriciaeauthor00aSustainable Marine FuturescPatricia Corbett 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aVictoria, AustraliabDeakin Universityc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Authors -- Acknowledgements -- Acknowledgement of Country -- Accessibility Information -- Licencing and Recommended Citation -- Feedback -- Chapter 1 - Introduction to Marine Futures -- Chapter 2 - Building a Sustainable Blue Economy -- Chapter 3 - Maintaining Maritime Sovereignty, Safety and Security -- Chapter 4 - Food Security -- Chapter 5 - Biodiversity and Ecosystem Conservation -- Chapter 6 - Cleaner Oceans -- Chapter 7 - Climate Change Adaption/Ocean Solutions to Climate Change -- Chapter 8 - Sustainable Urban and Coastal Development/Building Community Resilience -- Week 9 - Ocean Equity -- Versioning History0 aThis interactive, open-access textbook explores how ocean science, sustainability, policy and community intersect to address key marine challenges, from climate change to food security. It integrates global, national and local Australian perspectives, using multimedia and interactive learning to build ocean literacy and support a sustainable Blue Economy.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2014zAccess online version02628nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001200127050001000139100002800149245008300177264004300260264004600303264001200349300002200361336002600383337002600409338003600435341002500471490002700496505072000523520076201243542003002005546001602035588004102051650002302092650002302115710003902138856007702177OTLid0002015MnU20260409204147.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aQH308.2 4aQH3011 aChang, Ming-Meieauthor00aMolecular TechniquesbA Project-Based Undergraduate LaboratorycMing-Mei Chang 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1aGeneseo, NYbMilne Open Textbooksc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- To the Students -- To the Instructors -- Laboratory Safety -- Pipetting -- Making Solutions and Dilutions -- Weekly Laboratory Notes -- Laboratory Report -- Module 1: Degenerate PCR and Topoisomerase (TOPO)-based DNA Cloning -- Module 2: Analyzing Cloned NBS Sequences -- Module 3: Gene Editing by Recombineering With or Without CRISPR-Cas9 -- Module 4: Studying Gene Expressions by Reverse Transcription Quantitative Polymerase Chain Reaction (RT-qPCR) -- Module 5: Exploring the Sensitivity and Specificity of Western Blot -- Appendix A: Working Solutions for Immunodetection of Southern blot -- Appendix B: General Remarks on Handling RNA -- Appendix C: Instructor Key for Solutions and Dilutions0 aMolecular biology, examining the structures and functions of nucleic acids and proteins, is crucial to advancing biological science and improving human life, particularly in agriculture and medicine. Advances in the field can transform a crop to resist disease or uncover clues to fight illness by manipulating DNA. Techniques for molecular biology research and applications have advanced rapidly over the past decades, and undergraduates need hands-on experiences in this vital field of science. This text provides a structured approach to learning and practicing those techniques, covering DNA, RNA, and protein across five modules and is tailored for a one-semester undergraduate lab course. Each module extends 2–5 weeks of lab exercises and features.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial  aIn English.0 aDescription based on online resource 0aBiologyvTextbooks 0aSciencevTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2015zAccess online version01936nam a2200373 i 4500001001300000003000400013005001700017006001900034007001500053008004100068040001800109050001000127050000700137100002800144245003900172264004300211264008200254264001200336300002200348336002600370337002600396338003600422341002500458490002700483505024200510520054000752542004101292546001601333588004001349650002601389650003101415710003901446856007701485OTLid0002017MnU20260409210120.0m     o  d s      cr            260409s2026    mnu     o     0   0 eng d  aMnUbengcMnU 4aBF121 4aH11 aMehta, Priyankaeauthor00aMemory & CognitioncPriyanka Mehta 2aMinneapolis, MNbOpen Textbook Library 1a[Place of publication not identified]bUniversity of Wisconsin Systemc[2026] 4c©2026.  a1 online resource  atextbtxt2rdacontent  acomputerbc2rdamedia  aonline resourcebcr2rdacarrier0 atextualbnone2sapdv0 aOpen textbook library.0 aIntroduction -- About the Book -- What is a Mind? -- The Prefrontal Cortex -- Mental Imagery -- Concepts -- Implicit Memory -- Explicit Memory -- Accessing Memory -- Cognitive Shortcuts -- Reasoning & Problem Solving -- Value -- Glossary0 aMemory & Cognition offers a fresh, engaging tour of how the mind works—spanning the brain, mental imagery, the different functions of memory, and decision‑making. Blending psychology with neuroscience, computer science, sociology, and philosophy, the book grounds concepts in real‑life examples and uses experimental evidence, diagrams, and hypothetical scenarios to introduce complex topics to readers. Memory & Cognition is a concise, interdisciplinary guide for anyone curious about how we think, remember, and make decisions.1 fAttribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike  aIn English.0 aDescription based on print resource 0aPsychologyvTextbooks 0aSocial sciencesvTextbooks2 aOpen Textbook Libraryedistributor40uhttps://open.umn.edu/opentextbooks/textbooks/2017zAccess online version